s
SINAMICS G130/G150
List Manual · 11/2009
SINAMICS
11/2009
SINAMICS
SINAMICS G130/G150
List Manual
Valid for
Drive Software version
SINAMICS 4.3 SP1
A5E03263479A
s
Preface
Parameter 1
Function diagrams 2
Faults and alarms 3
Appendix A
List of abbreviations B
Bibliography C
Index D
Copyright Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
The reproduction, transmission, or use of this document or its con-
tents is not permitted without express written permission. Violation of
this rule will cause indemnities. All rights reserved, especially those
relating to granting patents or GM registration.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 4848
90327 NUREMBERG
GERMANY
Liability Disclaimer
We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to
the hardware and software described. Nevertheless, we cannot as-
sume responsibility for any deviations that may arise. The data in this
document is regularly checked and any necessary corrections includ-
ed in subsequent editions.
© Siemens AG 2009
Subject to change without prior notice
Safety notices
This manual contains information which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety and pre-
vent material damage. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a
warning triangle; notices that relate to material damage only have no warning triangle. The notices shown
below are graded according to the level of danger (from most to least dangerous):
If more than one level of danger exists, the warning for the highest level of danger is always used. A warn-
ing notice with a warning triangle indicating possible personal injury may also include a warning relating
to material damage.
Qualified personnel
The associated device/system may only be installed and operated in conjunction with this documentation.
The device/system may only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel. For the purpose of
the safety notices in this documentation, "qualified personnel" are those authorized to commission,
ground, and label equipment, systems, and circuits in accordance with established safety procedures.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
Trademarks
All names identified with ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Any other names used in this pub-
lication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of
the owner.
Danger
Indicates that death or serious injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
Indicates that death or serious injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
With a warning triangle, indicates that minor injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
Without a warning triangle, indicates that material damage may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
Indicates that an undesirable result or state may occur if the relevant instructions are not observed.
Warning
Siemens products are only permitted to be used for the applications envisaged in the catalog and in the
associated technical documentation. If third-party products and components are used, they must be rec-
ommended or approved by Siemens. To ensure proper and safe operation of these products, they must
be correctly transported, stored, set up, mounted, installed, commissioned, operated, and maintained. The
permissible ambient conditions must be met. Information in the associated documentation must be
observed.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2)
Preface-5© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Preface
SINAMICS documentation
The SINAMICS documentation is organized in 2 parts:
General documentation/catalogs
Manufacturer/service documentation
At http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu information is available on the
following topics:
Ordering documentation
Here you can find an up-to-date overview of publications.
Downloading documentation
Further links for downloading files from Service & Support
Researching documentation online
Information on DOConCD and direct access to the publications in DOCon-
Web.
For customizing documentation based on Siemens content using My Docu-
mentation Manager (MDM), see
http://www.siemens.com/mdm
My Documentation Manager provides you with a range of features for creating
your own machine documentation
Training and FAQs
Information on the range of training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked
Questions) are available via the page navigation.
Preface
Preface-6 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Usage phases and their tools/documents (as an example)
Target group
This documentation is aimed at machine manufacturers, commissioning engi-
neers, and service personnel who use SINAMICS.
Use
This documentation contains the comprehensive information about parameters,
function diagrams, and faults and alarms required to commission and service the
system.
This manual should be used in addition to the other manuals and tools provided
for the product.
Table Preface-1Usage phases and the available tools/documents
Usage phase Tools/documents
Orientation SINAMICS G Sales Documentation
Planning/Configuration SIZER configuration tool
Configuration Manuals, Motors
Decision making/ordering SINAMICS G Catalogs
Installation/Assembly SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions
SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions
Commissioning SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions
SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions
Usage/Operation SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions
SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions
Maintenance/Servicing SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions
SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions
Preface
Preface-7
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Standard version
The scope of the functionality described in this document can differ from the
scope of the functionality of the drive system that is actually supplied.
It may be possible for other functions that are not described in this documen-
tation to be executed in the drive system. This does not, however, represent
an obligation to supply functions of this kind when new equipment is delivered
or during servicing.
The documentation may contain descriptions of functions that are not avail-
able in a particular product version of the drive system. The functionality of the
supplied drive system should only be taken from the ordering documentation.
Extensions or changes made by the machine manufacturer must be docu-
mented by the machine manufacturer.
For reasons of clarity, this documentation does not contain all of the detailed infor-
mation on all of the product types. This documentation cannot take into consider-
ation every conceivable type of installation, operation, and service/maintenance.
Search tools
The following guides are provided to help you locate information in this manual:
1. Table of contents
Table of contents for the entire manual (after the preface).
Table of contents for function diagrams (Chapter 2.1).
2. List of abbreviations
3. Bibliography
4. Index
Preface
Preface-8 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Technical support
If you have any questions, please contact our hotline:
Internet address for SINAMICS
http://www.siemens.com/sinamics
Europe/Africa
Phone +49 (0) 180 5050 - 222
Fax +49 (0) 180 5050 - 223
0.14 €/min from German landlines, max. 0.42 €/min from cell phones
Internet http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request
America
Phone +1 423 262 2522
Fax +1 423 262 2200
E-mail techsupport.sea@siemens.com
Asia/Pacific
Phone +86 1064 757 575
Fax +86 1064 747 474
E-mail support.asia.automation@siemens.com
Note:
Telephone numbers for technical support in specific countries are listed at the fol-
lowing Internet address:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner
Content-9© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Table of contents
1 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.1 Overview of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.1.1 Explanation of list of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.1.2 Number ranges of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1.2 List of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1.3 Parameters for data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-853
1.3.1 Parameters for command data sets (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-853
1.3.2 Parameters for drive data sets (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-855
1.3.3 Parameters for encoder data sets (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-862
1.3.4 Parameters for motor data sets (MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-864
1.3.5 Parameters for power unit data sets (PDS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-867
2 Function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-869
2.1 Table of contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-870
2.2 Explanations for the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-876
2.3 Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-881
2.4 CU320-2 input/output terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-893
2.5 PROFIdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-900
2.6 Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-932
2.7 Sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-945
2.8 Brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-948
2.9 Safety Integrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-953
2.10 Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-959
2.11 Encoder evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-968
2.12 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-971
2.13 Technology functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-994
2.14 Technology controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1000
2.15 Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1006
2.16 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1014
2.17 Data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1020
2.18 Terminal Board 30 (TB30). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1026
2.19 Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1031
2.20 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1038
2.21 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1049
2.22 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1053
Table of contents
Content-10 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
3 Faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1055
3.1 Overview of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1056
3.1.1 General information about faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1056
3.1.2 Explanation of the list of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1061
3.1.3 Number ranges of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1064
3.2 List of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1066
A Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1445
A.1 ASCII table (excerpt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1446
A.2 List for motor code/encoder code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1447
A.2.1 Motor code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1447
A.2.2 Encoder code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1480
B List of abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1483
C Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1491
DIndex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1497
1-11© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter 1
Contents
1.1 Overview of parameters 1-12
1.2 List of parameters 1-29
1.3 Parameters for data sets 1-853
Parameter
Overview of parameters
1-12 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1.1 Overview of parameters
1.1.1 Explanation of list of parameters
Basic structure of parameter descriptions
The data in the following example has been chosen at random. The table below
contains all the information that can be included in a parameter description. Some
of the information is optional.
The parameter list (See Section 1.2) is structured as follows:
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Start of example- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Description: Text
Values: 0: Name and meaning of value 0
1: Name and meaning of value 1
2: Name and meaning of value 2
etc.
Recommenda-
tion:
Text
Index: [0] = Name and meaning of index 0
[1] = Name and meaning of index 1
[2] = Name and meaning of index 2
etc.
Dependency: Text
See also: pxxxx, rxxxx
See also: Fxxxxx, Axxxxx
Note: Information which might be useful
pxxxx[0 to n] BICO: Full parameter name/Abbreviated name
Drive object (func-
tion module)
Changeable in: C1(x), C2(x), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32/Integer16 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Function diagram: 2080
P group: Closed loop control Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: FEM Normalizing: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 10.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Arms]
Bit array: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Name and meaning of bit 0 Yes No 8010
01 Name and meaning of bit 1 Yes No -
02 Name and meaning of bit 2 Yes No 8012
etc.
Danger: Warning: Caution: Safety notices with a warning triangle
Caution: Notice: Safety notices without a warning triangle
Overview of parameters
Parameter
1-13
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
pxxxx[0 to n] Parameter number
The parameter number consists of a "p" or "r", followed by the parameter number
and the index (optional).
Examples of number representation in the parameter list:
Other examples of notation in the documentation:
The following applies to adjustable parameters:
The "shipped" parameter value is specified under "Factory setting" with the rele-
vant unit in square parenthesis. The value can be adjusted within the range
defined by "Min" and "Max".
The term "linked parameterization" is used in cases where changes to adjustable
parameters affect the settings of other parameters.
Linked parameterization can occur, for example, as a result of the following
actions or parameters:
Execute macros
p0015, p0700, p1000, p1500
Set PROFIBUS telegram (BICO interconnection)
p0922
Set component lists
p0230, p0300, p0301, p0400
Calculate and pre-assign automatically
p0112, p0340, p0578, p3900
Restore factory settings
p0970
p... Adjustable parameter (read and write parameter)
r... Display parameter (read-only)
p0918 Adjustable parameter 918
p0099[0 to 3] Adjustable parameter 99, indices 0 to 3
p1001[0 to n] Adjustable parameter 1001, indices 0 to n (n = configurable)
r0944 Display parameter 944
p1070[1] Adjustable parameter 1070, index 1
p2098[1].3 Adjustable parameter 2098, index 1 bit 3
r0945[2](3) Display parameter 945, index 2 of drive object 3
p0795.4 Adjustable parameter 795, bit 4
r2129.0 to 15 Display parameter 2129 with bit array (maximum 16 bits)
Parameter
Overview of parameters
1-14 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
The following applies to display parameters:
The fields "Min", "Max" and "Factory setting" are specified with a dash "-" and the
relevant unit in square parenthesis.
BICO: Full parameter name/Abbreviated name
The following abbreviations can appear in front of the parameter name:
Note:
The parameter list can contain parameters that are not visible in the expert lists
of the particular commissioning software (e.g. parameters for trace functions).
BI: Binector Input
This parameter is used for selecting the source of a digital signal.
BO: Binector Output
This parameter is available as a digital signal for interconnection
with other parameters.
CI: Connector Input
This parameter is used for selecting the source of an "analog" sig-
nal.
CO: Connector Output
This parameter is available as an "analog" signal for interconnec-
tion with other parameters.
CO/BO: Connector/Binector Output
This parameter is available as an "analog" and digital signal for
interconnection with other parameters.
Note:
A connector input (CI) cannot be just interconnected with any connector output
(CO, signal source).
When interconnecting a connector input using the commissioning software, only
the corresponding possible signal sources are listed.
Overview of parameters
Parameter
1-15
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Drive object (function module)
A drive object (DO) is an independent, "self-contained" functional unit that has its
own parameters and, in some cases, faults and alarms.
When carrying out commissioning using the commissioning software, you can
select/deselect additional functions and their parameters by activating/deactivat-
ing function modules accordingly.
The parameter list specifies the associated drive object and function module for
each individual parameter.
Examples:
p1070 CI: Main setpoint
VECTOR
The parameter is only available with the VECTOR drive object, regardless of
which function modules have been activated.
p1055 BI: Jog bit 0
VECTOR
The parameter is available with the VECTOR drive object, regardless of which
function modules have been activated (i.e. it is available with every activated
function module belonging to the drive object).
A parameter can belong to one, several, or all drive objects.
The following information relating to "Drive object" and "Function module" can be
displayed under the parameter number:
Table 1-1 Data in "Drive object (function module)" field
Drive object (func-
tion module)
Type Meaning
All objects - This parameter belongs to all drive objects.
CU - Control Unit, all versions
CU_G_G130 1 Control Unit SINAMICS G130
CU_G_G150 - Control Unit SINAMICS G150
CU_G_G130 (CAN)
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
- Control Unit with "CAN" function module (p0108.29)
CU_G_G130 (COMM
BOARD)
CU_G_G150 (COMM
BOARD)
Control Unit with "COMM BOARD" function module (p0108.30)
CU_G_G130 (PROFI-
NET)
CU_G_G150 (PROFI-
NET)
Control Unit with "PROFINET" function module (p0108.31)
ENCODER 300 Object for a DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
HUB 150 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module
TB30 100 Terminal Board 30
TM31 200 Terminal Module 31
Parameter
Overview of parameters
1-16 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
VECTOR_G130/G150 12 Vector drive
VECTOR_G130/G150
(n/M)
- Vector drive with "Closed-loop speed/torque control" function module
(r0108.2)
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Ext. brake)
- Vector drive with "Extended brake control" function module
(r0108.14).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Parallel)
- Vector drive with "Parallel connection" function module (r0108.15).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Tech_ctrl)
- Vector drive with "Technology controller" function module (r0108.16).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Ext. msg)
- Vector drive with "Extended messages/monitoring functions" function
module (r0108.17).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Cooling unit)
- Vector drive with "Cooling unit" function module (r0108.28).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(CAN)
- Vector drive with "CAN" function module (r0108.29)
VECTOR_G130/G150
(PROFINET)
- Vector drive with "PROFINET" function module (r0108.31)
Table 1-1 Data in "Drive object (function module)" field, continued
Drive object (func-
tion module)
Type Meaning
Note:
The drive object type is used to identify the drive objects in the drive system (e.g.
r0107, r0975[1]).
Overview of parameters
Parameter
1-17
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Changeable in
The "-" sign indicates that the parameter can be changed in any object state and
that the change will be effective immediately.
The letters "C1(x), C2(x), T, U" ((x): optional) mean that the parameter can be
changed in the specified drive unit state only and that the change will not take
effect until the object switches to another state. This can be one or more states.
The following states may be specified:
C1(x) Device commissioning C1: Commissioning 1
Device commissioning is in progress (p0009 > 0).
Pulses cannot be enabled.
The parameter can only be changed in the following device commis-
sioning settings (p0009 > 0):
C1: Changeable for all settings p0009 > 0
C1(x): Only changeable when p0009 = x
A modified parameter value does not take effect until device commis-
sioning mode is exited with p0009 = 0.
C2(x) Drive object commissioning C2: Commissioning 2
Drive commissioning is in progress (p0009 = 0 and p0010 > 0).
Pulses cannot be enabled.
The parameter can only be changed in the following drive commission-
ing settings (p0010 > 0):
C2: Changeable for all settings p0010 > 0
C2(x): Only changeable when p0010 = x
A modified parameter value does not take effect until drive commis-
sioning mode is exited with p0010 = 0.
U Operation U: Run
Pulses are enabled.
T Ready T: Ready to run
The pulses are not enabled and status "C1(x)" or "C2(x)" is not active.
Note:
Parameter p0009 is CU-specific (belongs to Control Unit).
Parameter p0010 is drive-specific (belongs to each drive object).
The operating state of individual drive objects is displayed in r0002.
Parameter
Overview of parameters
1-18 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Calculated
Specifies whether the parameter is influenced by automatic calculations.
The calculation attribute defines which activities influence the parameter.
The following attributes apply:
CALC_MOD_ALL
p0340 = 1
Project download with commissioning software and send from p0340 = 3
CALC_MOD_CON
p0340 = 1, 3, 4
CALC_MOD_EQU
p0340 = 1, 2
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
p0340 = 1, 3, 5
p0578 = 1
CALC_MOD_REG
p0340 = 1, 3
Access level
Specifies the access level required to be able to display and change the relevant
parameter. The required access level can be set via p0003.
The system uses the following access levels:
1. Standard
2. Advanced
3. Expert
4. Service
Parameters with this access level have password protection.
5. Macro (the parameter can only be changed via macro)
Note:
For p3900 > 0, p0340 = 1 is also called automatically.
After p1910 = 1, p0340 = 3 is automatically called.
Note:
Parameter p0003 is CU-specific (belongs to Control Unit).
Overview of parameters
Parameter
1-19
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Data type
The information on the data type can consist of the following two items (separated
by a slash):
First item
Data type of the parameter
Second item (for binector or connector input only)
Data type of the signal source to be interconnected (binector/connector out-
put)
Parameters can have the following data types:
Depending on the data type of the BICO input parameter (signal sink) and BICO
output parameter (signal source), the following combinations are possible when
BICO interconnections are established:
I8 Integer8 8-bit integer
I16 Integer16 16-bit integer
I32 Integer32 32-bit integer
U8 Unsigned8 8 bits without sign
U16 Unsigned16 16 bits without sign
U32 Unsigned32 32 bits without sign
Float FloatingPoint32 32-bit Floating Point number
Table 1-2 Possible combinations of BICO interconnections
BICO input parameter
CI parameter BI parameter
BICO output parameter Unsigned32/Inte
ger16
Unsigned32/Inte
ger32
Unsigned32/Floa
tingPoint32
Unsigned32/Bina
ry
CO: Unsigned8 x x – –
CO: Unsigned16 x x – –
CO: Integer16 x x – –
CO: Unsigned32 x x – –
CO: Integer32 x x – –
CO: FloatingPoint32 x x x1–
BO: Unsigned8 – – – x
BO: Unsigned16 – – – x
Legend: x: BICO interconnection permitted
–: BICO interconnection not permitted
1 Exception:
BICO input parameters with data type "Unsigned32/FloatingPoint32" can also be interconnected with the following
BICO output parameters, although these are not of the "FloatingPoint32" data type:
CO: r8850, CO: r8860, CO: r2050, CO: r2060
Parameter
Overview of parameters
1-20 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dynamic index
For parameters with a dynamic index [0 to n], the following information is specified
here:
Data set (if this is available).
Parameter for the number of indices (n = number - 1).
The following information can be contained in this field:
"CDS, p0170" (command data set, CDS count)
Example:
p1070[0] main setpoint [command data set 0]
p1070[1] main setpoint [command data set 1], etc.
"DDS, p0180" (drive data set, DDS count)
"EDS, p0140" (encoder data set, EDS count)
"MDS, p0130" (motor data set, MDS count)
"PDS, p0120" (power unit data set, PDS count)
"p2615" (traversing blocks count)
BO: Integer16 – – – x
BO: Unsigned32 – – – x
BO: Integer32 – – – x
BO: FloatingPoint32 – – – –
Table 1-2 Possible combinations of BICO interconnections, continued
BICO input parameter
CI parameter BI parameter
BICO output parameter Unsigned32/Inte
ger16
Unsigned32/Inte
ger32
Unsigned32/Floa
tingPoint32
Unsigned32/Bina
ry
Legend: x: BICO interconnection permitted
–: BICO interconnection not permitted
1 Exception:
BICO input parameters with data type "Unsigned32/FloatingPoint32" can also be interconnected with the following
BICO output parameters, although these are not of the "FloatingPoint32" data type:
CO: r8850, CO: r8860, CO: r2050, CO: r2060
Overview of parameters
Parameter
1-21
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Function diagram
The parameter is included in this function diagram. The structure of the parameter
function and its relationship with other parameters is shown in the specified func-
tion diagram.
Example:
P group (refers only to access via BOP (Basic Operator Panel))
Specifies the functional group to which the parameter belongs. The required
parameter group can be set via p0004.
"Unit", "Unit group", and "Unit selection"
The standard unit of a parameter is specified in square brackets after the values
for "Min", "Max", and "Factory setting".
For parameters where the unit can be switched, the specifications for "Unit group"
and "Unit selection" determine the group to which this parameter belongs and with
which parameter the unit can be changed over.
Example:
Unit group: 7_1, unit selection: p0505
The parameter belongs to unit group 7_1 and the unit can be changed over using
p0505.
All the potential unit groups and possible unit selections are listed below.
Function diagram: 3060.3 3060: Function diagram number
3: Signal path (optional)
Note:
Parameter p0004 is CU-specific (belongs to Control Unit).
Table 1-3 Unit groups (p0100)
Unit group Unit selection for p0100 = Reference quantity
for %
01
7_4 Nm lbf ft -
8_4 N lbf -
14_2 W HP -
14_6 kW HP -
25_1 kgm2lb ft2-
27_1 kg lb -
28_1 Nm/A lbf ft/A -
29_1 N/Arms lbf/Arms -
30_1 m ft -
Parameter
Overview of parameters
1-22 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Table 1-4 Unit groups (p0349)
Unit group Unit selection for p0349 = Reference quantity
for %
12
15_1 mH %
16_1 Ohm %
Table 1-5 Unit groups (p0505)
Unit group Unit selection for p0505 = Reference quantity
for %
1234
2_1 Hz % Hz % p2000
2_2 kHz % kHz % p2000
3_1 rpm % rpm % p2000
4_1 m/min % ft/min % p2000
4_2 m/min m/min ft/min ft/min -
5_1 Vrms % Vrms % p2001
5_2 V % V % p2001
5_3 V % V % p2001
6_1 mArms % mArms % p2002
6_2 Arms % Arms % p2002
6_3 mA % mA % p2002
6_4 A % A % p2002
6_5 A % A % p2002
7_1 Nm % lbf ft % p2003
7_2 Nm Nm lbf ft lbf ft -
7_3 Nm % lbf ft % 1.0
1000 p0304
23 p0305 p0310
-----------------------------------------------------------------
p0304
3 p0305
----------------------------
Overview of parameters
Parameter
1-23
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
8_1 N % lbf % p2003
8_2 N N lbf lbf -
8_3 N % lbf % 1.0
14_1 W % HP % r2004
14_3 W % HP % r2004
14_4 W % HP % r2004
14_5 kW % HP % r2004
14_7 kW % HP % r2004
14_8 kW % HP % r2004
14_9 W W HP HP -
14_10 kW kW HP HP -
14_11 var % var % r2004
14_12 kvar % kvar % r2004
17_1 Nms/rad % lbf ft
s/rad
% p2000/p2003
18_1 V/A % V/A % p2002/p2001
19_1 A/V % A/V % p2001/p2002
21_1 °C °C °F °F -
21_2 K K °F °F -
22_1 m/s2m/s2ft/s2ft/s2-
22_2 m/s2% ft/s2% p2007
23_1 Vrms
s/m
Vrms
s/m
Vrms s/ft Vrms s/ft -
24_1 Ns/m Ns/m lbf s/ft lbf s/ft -
24_2 Ns/m % lbf s/ft % p2000/p2003
26_1 m/s3m/s3ft/s3ft/s3-
39_1 1/s2%1/s
2% p2007
Table 1-6 Unit group (p0595)
Unit group Unit selection for p0595 = Reference quantity
for %
Value Unit
9_1 The values that can be set and the technological units are shown in
p0595 (See Section 1.2).
Table 1-5 Unit groups (p0505), continued
Unit group Unit selection for p0505 = Reference quantity
for %
1234
Parameter
Overview of parameters
1-24 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter values
Not for motor type
Specifies for which motor type this parameter has no significance
ASM: Induction motor
FEM: Separately excited synchronous motor
PEM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
REL: Reluctance motor/SIEMOSYN motor
Normalizing
Specifies the reference quantity that is used to convert a signal value automati-
cally with a BICO interconnection.
The following reference quantities may be specified:
p2000 to p2007: Reference speed, reference voltage, etc.
TEMP: 100 = 100%
PERCENT: 1.0 = 100%
4000H: 4000 hex = 100%
Expert list
Specifies whether this parameter is available in the expert list of the specified
drive objects in the commissioning software
1: Parameter does exist in the expert list.
0: Parameter does not exist in the expert list.
Min Minimum value of the parameter [unit]
Max Maximum value of the parameter [unit]
Factory setting Shipped value (default) [unit]
A different value may be displayed for certain parameters
(e.g. p1800) during first commissioning.
Reason:
The setting of these parameters is determined by the
operating environment of the Control Unit (e.g. depend-
ing on device type, macro, power unit).
Note:
For SINAMICS G130/G150, the macros and their settings are provided in the fol-
lowing documentation:
SINAMICS G130/G150 Operating Instructions
Overview of parameters
Parameter
1-25
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description
Explanation of the function of a parameter
Values
Lists the possible values of a parameter
Recommendation
Information about recommended settings
Index
The name and meaning of each individual index is specified for indexed parame-
ters.
The following applies to the values (Min, Max, Factory setting) of indexed adjust-
able parameters:
Min, Max:
The adjustment range and unit apply to all indices.
Factory setting:
When all indices have the same factory setting, index 0 is specified with the
unit to represent all indices.
When the indices have different factory settings, they are all listed individually
with the unit.
Bit array
For parameters with bit arrays, the following information is provided about each
bit:
Bit number and signal name
Meaning with signal states 0 and 1
Function diagram (optional)
The signal is shown on this function diagram.
Notice:
The user shall assume full responsibility for using parameters marked "Expert list:
0" (parameter does not exist in the expert list).
These parameters and their functionalities have not been tested and no further
user documentation is available for them (e.g. description of functions). Moreover,
no support is provided for these parameters by "Technical Support" (hotline).
Parameter
Overview of parameters
1-26 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency
Conditions that must be fulfilled for this parameter. Also includes special effects
that can occur between this parameter and others.
See also: List of other relevant parameters.
Safety notices
Important information that must be observed to avoid the risk of physical injury or
material damage.
Information that must be observed to avoid any problems.
Information that the user or operator may find useful.
Danger The description of this safety notice can be found at the
beginning of this manual (see Safety notices).
Warning The description of this safety notice can be found at the
beginning of this manual (see Safety notices).
Caution The description of this safety notice can be found at the
beginning of this manual (see Safety notices).
Caution The description of this safety notice can be found at the
beginning of this manual (see Safety notices).
Notice The description of this safety notice can be found at the
beginning of this manual (see Safety notices).
Note Information that the user or operator may find useful.
Overview of parameters
Parameter
1-27
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1.1.2 Number ranges of parameters
Parameters are grouped into the following number ranges:
Note:
The following number ranges represent an overview for all parameters in
SINAMICS.
The parameters for the product described in this List Manual are described in
detail in Section 1.2.
Table 1-7 Number ranges of parameters
Range Description
From To
0000 0099 Operation and visualization
0100 0199 Commissioning
0200 0299 Power unit
0300 0399 Motor
0400 0499 Encoder
0500 0599 Technology and units
0600 0699 Thermal motor monitoring and motor model, maximum current
0700 0799 Command sources and terminals on Control Unit, measuring
sockets
0800 0839 CDS, DDS data sets (e.g. switch over, copy)
0840 0879 Sequence control (e.g. source for ON/OFF1)
0880 0899 Control and status words
0900 0999 PROFIBUS/PROFIdrive
1000 1199 Setpoint channel
1200 1299 Functions (e.g. motor holding brake)
1300 1399 V/f control
1400 1799 Closed loop control
1800 1899 Gating unit
1900 1999 Power unit and motor identification
2000 2099 Communication (PROFIBUS)
2100 2199 Faults and alarms, monitoring functions
2200 2399 Technology controller
2900 2930 Fixed values (e.g. per cent, torque)
3400 3699 Infeed control (Active Line Module)
3800 3899 Friction characteristic
Parameter
Overview of parameters
1-28 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
3900 3999 Management parameters
4000 4199 Terminal Board, Terminal Module (e.g. TB30, TM31)
4200 4399 Terminal Module (e.g. TM15, TM17)
6000 6999 SINAMICS GM/SM/GL
7000 7499 Parallel connection of power units
7800 7899 EEPROM read/write parameters
8500 8599 Data and macro management
8600 8799 CAN bus
8800 8899 Communication Board
9300 9399 Safety Integrated
9400 9499 Parameter consistency and storage
9500 9899 Safety Integrated
9900 9949 Topology
9950 9999 Diagnostics (internal)
10000 10099 Safety Integrated
11000 11299 Free technology controller 1, 2, 3
20000 20999 Free function blocks (FBLOCKS)
21000 25999 Drive Control Chart (DCC)
50000 53999 SINAMICS DC MASTER (DC closed loop control)
61000 61001 PROFINET
Table 1-7 Number ranges of parameters, continued
Range Description
From To
List of parameters
Parameter
1-29
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1.2 List of parameters
Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng
Objects: CU_G_G130, CU_G_G150, ENCODER, HUB, TB30, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Description: Operating display for the Control Unit (CU).
Value: 0: Operation
10: Ready
20: Wait for run-up
25: Wait for automatic FW update of DRIVE-CLiQ components
31: Commissioning software download active
33: Remove/acknowledge topology error
34: Exit commissioning mode
35: Carry out first commissioning
70: Initialization
80: Reset active
99: Internal software error
101: Specify topology
111: Insert drive object
112: Delete drive object
113: Change drive object number
114: Change component number
115: Run parameter download
117: Delete component
Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
Description: Operating display for encoder drive object
Value: 0: Encoder in cyclic operation
35: Carry out first commissioning (p0010)
45: Remove fault cause, acknowledge fault
46: Exit commissioning mode (p0009, p0010)
60: Encoder deactivated
200: Wait for booting/partial booting
250: Device signals a topology error
Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
r0002 Control Unit operating display / CU op_display
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 117 -
r0002 Encoder DO operating display / Enc DO op_display
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 250 -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-30 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Operating display for the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Value: 0: Module in cyclic operation
40: Module not in cyclic operation
50: Alarm
60: Fault
70: Initialization
120: Module deactivated
200: Wait for booting/partial booting
250: Device signals a topology error
Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
Description: Operating display for Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Value: 0: Module in cyclic operation
40: Module not in cyclic operation
60: Fault
70: Initialization
80: Reset active
120: Module deactivated
200: Wait for run-up
250: Device signals a topology error
Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
Description: Operating display for Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Value: 0: Module in cyclic operation
40: Module not in cyclic operation
50: Alarm
60: Fault
70: Initialization
120: Module deactivated
200: Wait for booting/partial booting
250: Device signals a topology error
Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
r0002 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module operating display / Hub op_display
HUB Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 250 -
r0002 TB30 operating display / TB30 op_display
TB30 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 250 -
r0002 TM31 operating display / TM31 op_display
TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 250 -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-31
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Operating display for Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Value: 0: Module in cyclic operation
40: Module not in cyclic operation
50: Alarm
60: Fault
70: Initialization
120: Module deactivated
200: Wait for booting/partial booting
250: Device signals a topology error
Description: Operating display for the drive.
Value: 0: Operation - everything enabled
10: Operation - set "enable setpoint" = "1" (p1142, p1152)
11: Operation - set "enable speed controller" = "1" (p0856)
12: Operation - RFG frozen, set "RFG start" = "1" (p1141)
13: Operation - set "enable RFG" = "1" (p1140)
14: Oper. - MotID, excit. running and/or brake opens, SS2, SOS
15: Operation - open brake (p1215)
16: Operation - withdraw braking with OFF1 using "ON/OFF1" = "1"
17: Operation - braking with OFF3 can only be interrupted with OFF2
18: Operation - brake on fault, remove fault, acknowledge
19: Operation - armature short-circ./DC brake act. (p1230, p1231)
21: Ready for operation - set "Operation enable" = "1" (p0852)
22: Ready for operation - demagnetizing running (p0347)
23: Ready for operation - set "Infeed operation" = "1" (p0864)
31: Ready for switching on - set "ON/OFF1" = "0/1" (p0840)
35: Switching on inhibited - carry out first commissioning (p0010)
41: Switching on inhibited - set "ON/OFF1" = "0" (p0840)
42: Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF2" = "1" (p0844, p0845)
43: Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF3" = "1" (p0848, p0849)
44: Switching on inhibited - connect 24 V to terminal EP (hardware)
45: Switching on inhibited - rectify fault, acknowledge fault, STO
46: Switching on inhibited - exit comm mode (p0009, p0010)
60: Drive object deactivated/not operational
200: Wait for booting/partial booting
250: Device signals a topology error
Dependency: Refer to: r0046
Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
r0002 TM54F operating display / TM54F op_display
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 250 -
r0002 Drive operating display / Drv op_display
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 250 -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-32 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: OC: Operating condition
EP: Enable Pulses (pulse enable)
RFG: Ramp-function generator
COMM: Commissioning
MotID: Motor data identification
SS2: Safe Stop 2
SOS: Safe Operating Stop
STO: Safe Torque Off
Description: Sets the access level for reading and writing parameters via the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Value: 0: User-defined
1: Standard
2: Extended
3: Expert
4: Service
Note: Access level 0 (user-defined):
Parameters from the user-defined list (p0013). Not used as of firmware version 2.6 (p0016).
Access level 1 (standard):
Parameters for the simplest operator control possibility (e.g. p1120 = ramp-function generator, ramp-up time).
Access level 2 (extended):
Parameters to operate the basic functions of the drive unit.
Access level 3 (experts):
Expert know-how is required for these parameters (e.g. BICO parameterization).
Access level 4 (service):
For these parameters, it is necessary that authorized service personnel enter the appropriate password (p3950).
Description: Sets the display filter for parameters with the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
p0003 BOP access level / BOP acc_level
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1, U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 1
p0004 BOP display filter / BOP disp_filter
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C2(1), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-33
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Value: 0: All parameters
1: Displays, signals
2: Power unit
3: Motor
4: Encoder/pos enc
5: Technology/units
7: Digital inputs/outputs commands sequence control
8: Analog inputs/outputs
10: Setpoint channel/ramp-fct generator
12: Functions
13: V/f control
14: Control
15: Data sets
17: Basic positioner
18: Gating unit
19: Motor identification
20: Communication
21: Faults, alarms, monitoring functions
25: Closed loop position control
28: Free function blocks
47: Trace and function generator
50: OA parameters
90: Topology
95: Safety Integrated
98: Command Data Sets (CDS)
99: Drive Data Sets (DDS)
Dependency: Refer to: p0003
Notice: The display filter via p0004 provides precise filtering and displays the corresponding parameters only when p0009
and p0010 = 0.
Note: The set access level via p0003 is also relevant for the display filter via p0004.
Examples (assumption: p0009 = p0010 = 0):
p0003 = 1, p0004 = 3
--> Only the parameters for the motor are displayed with access level 1.
p0003 = 2, p0004 = 3
--> Only the parameters for the motor are displayed with access levels 1 and 2.
Description: Sets the parameter number and parameter index for display for p0006 = 2, 4 for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Examples for the SERVO drive object:
p0005[0] = 21, p0005[1] = 0: Actual speed smoothed (r0021)
p0005[0] = 25, p0005[1] = 0: Output voltage smoothed (r0025)
p0005[0] = 27, p0005[1] = 0: Absolute current actual value, smoothed (r0027)
Index: [0] = Parameter number
[1] = Parameter index
Dependency: Refer to: p0006
p0005[0...1] BOP operating display selection / BOP op_disp sel
All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 [0] 2
[1] 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-34 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Procedure:
1.
The parameter number to be displayed should be set in index 0. Only the monitoring parameters (read-only param-
eters) can be set that actually exist for the actual drive object.
If the set parameter number is not indexed, or if there is an index in index 1 that lies outside the valid range of the
set parameter, then index 1 is automatically set to 0.
2.
The index that belongs to the parameter set in index 0 should be set in index 1. The permissible changes in index 1
always depend on the parameter number set in index 0.
Description: Sets the mode of the operating display for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) in the operating states "ready for opera-
tion" and "operation".
Value: 4: p0005
Dependency: Refer to: p0005
Note: Mode 0 ... 3 can only be selected if also r0020, r0021 are available on the drive object.
Mode 4 is available for all drive objects.
Description: Sets the mode of the operating display for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) in the operating states "ready for opera-
tion" and "operation".
Value: 0: Operation --> r0021, otherwise r0020 <--> r0021
1: Operation --> r0021, otherwise r0020
2: Operation --> p0005, otherwise p0005 <--> r0020
3: Operation --> r0002, otherwise r0002 <--> r0020
4: p0005
Dependency: Refer to: p0005
Note: Mode 0 ... 3 can only be selected if also r0020, r0021 are available on the drive object.
Mode 4 is available for all drive objects.
Description: Sets the delay time until the background lighting of the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) is switched off.
If no keys are actuated, then the background lighting automatically switches itself off after this time has expired.
Note: p0007 = 0: Background lighting is always switched on (factory setting).
p0006 BOP operating display mode / BOP op_ disp mode
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
4 4 4
p0006 BOP operating display mode / BOP op_ disp mode
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 4
p0007 BOP background lighting / BOP lighting
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [s] 2000 [s] 0 [s]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-35
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the required drive object that is active at the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) after booting.
Note: The value from p0008 initializes the display on the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) at the top left after booting.
The drive object Control Unit is selected using the value 1.
Description: Sets the device and basic drive commissioning.
By appropriately setting this parameter, those parameters are filtered that can be written into in the various commis-
sioning steps.
Value: 0: Ready
1: Device configuration
2: Defining the drive type/function module
3: Drive base configuration
4: Data set base configuration
29: Device download
30: Parameter reset
50: OA application configuration
55: OA application installation
101: Topology input
111: Insert drive object
112: Delete drive object
113: Change drive object number
114: Change component number
115: Parameter download
117: Delete component
10000: Ready (asynchronous)
Notice: For p0009 = 10000 the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: The drives can only be powered up outside the device commissioning (the inverter enabled). In this case, p0009
must be 0 (Ready) and the individual drive objects must have already gone into operation (p0010).
p0009 = 1: Device configuration
At the first commissioning of the device, after booting, the device is in the "device configuration" state. To start the
internal automatic first commissioning of the drive unit, p0009 should be set to 0 (Ready) after the ID for the actual
topology (r0098) was transferred into the ID for the target topology (p0099). To do this, it is sufficient to set a single
index value of p0099[x] the same as r0098[x]. Before the device has been completely commissioned, no other
parameter can be changed. After the first commissioning was carried out, in this state, when required, other basic
device configuration parameters can be adapted (e.g. the basic sampling time in p0110).
p0009 = 2: Defines the drive type / function module
In this state, the drive object types and/or the function modules can be changed or selected for the individual drive
objects. To do this, the drive object type can be set using p0107[0...15] and the function can be set using
p0108[0...15] (refer to p0101[0...15]).
p0008 BOP drive object after booting / BOP DO after boot
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 65535 1
p0009 Device commissioning parameter filter / Dev comm par_filt
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 10000 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-36 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
p0009 = 3: Drive basis configuration
In this state, after the device has been commissioned for the first time, basic changes can be made for the individ-
ual drive objects (e.g. sampling times in p0111, p0112, p0115 and the number of data sets in p0120, p0130, p0140,
p0170, p0180).
p0009 = 4: Data set basis configuration
In this state, after the device has been commissioned for the first time, for the individual drive objects changes can
be made regarding the assignment of the components (p0121, p0131, p0141, p0151, p0161) to the individual data
sets and the assignment of the power unit, motor and encoder to the drive data sets (p0185, ...).
p0009 = 29: Device download
If a download is made using the commissioning software, the device is automatically brought into this state. After
the download has been completed, p0009 is automatically set to 0 (ready). It is not possible to manually set p0009
to this value.
p0009 = 30: Parameter reset
In order to bring the complete unit into the "first commissioning" state or to load the parameters saved using p0977,
to start, p0009 must be set to this value. p0976 can then be changed to the required value.
p0009 = 50: OA application configuration
In this state, after the device has been commissioned for the first time, changes can be made for the individual drive
objects regarding the activity (p4956) of the OA applications.
p0009 = 55: OA application installation
OA applications can be installed and/or uninstalled in this state.
p0009 = 101: Topology input
In this state, the DRIVE-CLiQ target topology can be entered using p9902 and p9903.
p0009 = 111: Insert drive object
This state allows a new drive object to be inserted using p9911.
p0009 = 112: Delete drive object
This state allows existing drive objects to be deleted using p9912 after the device has been commissioned for the
first time.
p0009 = 113: Change drive object number
This state allows the drive object number of existing drive objects to be changed using p9913 after the device has
been commissioned for the first time.
p0009 = 114: Change component number
This state allows the component number of existing components to be changed using p9914 after the device has
been commissioned for the first time.
p0009 = 115: Parameter download
This state allows the complete device and drive commissioning using the parameter services.
p0009 = 117: Delete component
This state allows components to be deleted using p9917 after the device has been commissioned for the first time.
Description: Sets the parameter filter to commission an encoder drive object.
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered.
Value: 0: Ready
4: Encoder commissioning
5: Technological application/units
29: Only Siemens int
30: Parameter reset
Note: Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
p0010 Encoder DO commissioning parameter filter / EncDO com par_filt
ENCODER Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 30 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-37
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered.
Value: 0: Ready
29: Only Siemens int
30: Parameter reset
Dependency: Refer to: p0970
Note: Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
Description: Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered.
Value: 0: Ready
29: Only Siemens int
30: Parameter reset
Dependency: Refer to: p0970
Note: Only the following values are possible: p0010 = 0, 30
Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
Description: Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered.
Value: 0: Ready
29: Only Siemens int
30: Parameter reset
95: Safety Integrated commissioning
Dependency: Refer to: p0970
Note: Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
p0010 TB30 commissioning parameter filter / TB30 comm.par_filt
TB30 Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 30 0
p0010 TM31 commissioning parameter filter / TM31 comm par_filt
TM31 Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 30 0
p0010 TM54F commissioning parameter filter / TM54F com par_filt
TM54F_MA Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2847
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 95 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-38 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the parameter filter to commission a drive.
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
Value: 0: Ready
1: Quick commissioning
2: Power unit commissioning
3: Motor commissioning
4: Encoder commissioning
5: Technological application/units
15: Data sets
17: Basic positioner commissioning
25: Position control commissioning
29: Only Siemens int
30: Parameter reset
95: Safety Integrated commissioning
10000: Ready with immediate feedback signal
Notice: For p0010 = 10000 the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: The drive can only be powered up outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter
must be set to 0.
For p3900 not equal to 0, at the end of the quick commissioning, this parameter is automatically reset to 0.
Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
p0010 = 10000 corresponds to p0010 = 0. Unlike with p0010 = 0, the parameter modification is applied immediately
and the calculations are made in the background. Further parameter modifications cannot be made while the calcu-
lations are being performed.
Description: Sets the password for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Dependency: Refer to: p0012, p0013
Description: Acknowledges the password for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Dependency: Refer to: p0011, p0013
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2800, 2846
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 10000 1
p0011 BOP password entry (p0013) / BOP passw ent p13
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
p0012 BOP password acknowledgement (p0013) / BOP passw ackn p13
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-39
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the required parameters to read and write via the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Activation:
1. p0003 = 3 (expert).
2. p0013[0...49] = requested parameter number
3. If required, enter p0011 = password in order to prevent non-authorized deactivation.
4. p0016 = 1 --> activates the selected user-defined list.
Deactivation/change:
1. p0003 = 3 (expert).
2. If required, p0012 = p0011, in order to be authorized to change or deactivate the list.
3. If required p0013[0...49] = required parameter number.
4. p0016 = 1 --> activates the modified user-defined list.
5. p0003 = 0 --> deactivates the user-defined list.
Dependency: Refer to: p0009, p0011, p0012, p0976
Note: The following parameters can be read and written on the Control Unit drive object:
- p0003 (access stage)
- p0009 (device commissioning, parameter filter)
- p0012 (BOP password acknowledgement (p0013))
The following applies for the user-defined list:
- password protection is only available on the drive object Control Unit and is valid for all of the drive objects.
- p0013 cannot be included in the user-defined list for all drive objects.
- p0003, p0009, p0011, p0012, p0976 cannot, for the drive object Control Unit, be included in the user-defined list.
- the user-defined list can be cleared and deactivated "restore factory setting".
A value of 0 means: Entry is empty.
Description: Runs the corresponding macro files.
The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory.
Example:
p0015 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency: Refer to: p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8570. r8570 is not in the expert list of the commissioning
software.
Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p0013[0...49] BOP user-defined list / BOP list
All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
p0015 Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1 Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 999999 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-40 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Runs the corresponding macro files.
The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory.
Example:
p0015 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency: Refer to: p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
No errors were issued during quick commissioning (p3900 = 1) when writing to parameters of the QUICK_IBN
group!
Note: The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8570. r8570 is not in the expert list of the commissioning
software.
Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Setting for activating/deactivating the user-defined list for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
If p0016 = 1, then it is only possible to access parameters in the parameter list (p0013).
Value: 0: BOP user-defined list deactivated
1: BOP user-defined list activated
Dependency: Refer to: p0011, p0012, p0013
Note: The user-defined list can only be deactivated with p0011 = p0012
Description: Displays the firmware version of the Control Unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0128, r0148, r0158, r0197, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
p0015 Macro drive object / Macro DO
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 999999 0
p0016 Activate BOP user-defined list / BOP user list act
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1, U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
r0018 Control Unit Firmware-Version / CU FW version
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-41
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the control word for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Description: Displays the currently smoothed speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or V/f characteristic (after the
interpolator).
Dependency: Refer to: r0060
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed.
Dependency: Refer to: r0063
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The value displayed in r0021 is the smoothed value of r0063.
r0019.0...14 CO/BO: Control word BOP / STW BOP
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON / OFF (OFF1) ON OFF (OFF1) -
01 No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) No coast down Coast down (OFF2) -
02 No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) No Quick Stop Quick Stop (OFF3) -
07 Acknowledge fault (0 -> 1) Yes No -
13 Motorized potentiometer raise Yes No -
14 Motorized potentiometer lower Yes No -
r0020 Speed setpoint smoothed / n_set smth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5020, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r0021 CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1580, 1680,
4710, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-42 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed.
r0022 is identical to r0021, however, it always has units of rpm and contrary to r0021 cannot be changed over.
Dependency: Refer to: r0063
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The value displayed in r0022 is the smoothed value of r0063.
Description: Displays the smoothed converter frequency.
Dependency: Refer to: r0066
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).
Description: Displays the smoothed output voltage of the power unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0072
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).
r0022 Speed actual value rpm smoothed / n_ist rpm smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1580, 1680,
4710, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r0024 Output frequency smoothed / f_outp smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1690, 5300,
5730, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
r0025 CO: Output voltage smoothed / V_outp smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1690, 5730,
6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-43
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link voltage.
Dependency: Refer to: r0070
Notice: For SINAMICS S120 AC Drive (AC/AC) the following applies:
When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module (e.g. PM340) a valid measured value is not sup-
plied. In this case, when an external 24V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed in the dis-
play parameter.
Note: SERVO, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).
Description: Displays the smoothed absolute actual current value.
Dependency: Refer to: r0068
Notice: This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the
unsmoothed value should be used.
Note: A_INF, S_INF, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
SERVO: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The absolute current actual value is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed (r0068).
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the modulation depth.
Dependency: Refer to: r0074
Note: A_INF: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
SERVO, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).
r0026 CO: DC link voltage smoothed / Vdc smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6799, 8750,
8850, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
r0027 CO: Absolute actual current smoothed / I_act abs val smth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5730, 6799,
8850, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r0028 Modulation depth smoothed / Mod_depth smth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5730, 6799,
8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-44 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the smoothed field-generating actual current.
Dependency: Refer to: r0076
Note: SERVO: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).
Description: Displays the smoothed torque-generating actual current.
Dependency: Refer to: r0078
Note: SERVO: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The following applies for SERVO:
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 100 ms, r0078[1] with p0045) and
unsmoothed (r0078[0]).
The following applies for VECTOR:
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0078).
Description: Displays the smoothed torque actual value.
Dependency: Refer to: r0080
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The active current actual value is available smoothed (r0031) and unsmoothed (r0080).
r0029 Current actual value field-generating smoothed / Id_act smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5730, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r0030 Current actual value torque-generating smoothed / Iq_act smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5730, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r0031 Actual torque smoothed / M_act smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5730, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-45
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the active power.
Dependency: Refer to: r0082
Notice: This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the
unsmoothed value should be used.
Note: Significance for the drive: Power output at the motor shaft
Significance for the infeed: Line power drawn
For A_INF, B_INF and S_INF the following applies:
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082).
The following applies for SERVO:
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0082[0]).
For VECTOR and VECTORMV, the following applies:
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082).
Description: Displays the smoothed torque utilization as a percentage.
The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque in reference to the torque limit, scaled using
p2196.
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081).
For M_set total (r0079) > 0, the following applies:
- Required torque = M_set total
- Actual torque limit = M_max upper effective (r1538)
For M_set total (r0079) <= 0, the following applies:
- Required torque = - M_set total
- Actual torque limit = - M_max lower effective (r1539)
For the actual torque limit = 0, the following applies: r0033 = 100 %
For the actual torque limit < 0, the following applies: r0033 = 0 %
r0032 CO: Active power actual value smoothed / P_actv_act smth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5730, 6799,
8750, 8850, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 14_10 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: r2004 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
r0033 Torque utilization smoothed / M_util smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-46 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the motor utilization from the thermal I2t motor model.
Dependency: The motor utilization is only determined for permanent-magnet synchronous motors and if the I2t motor model is
activated.
The motor utilization is formed from the ratio between the I2t motor model temperature (minus 40 Kelvin) and the
reference value p0605 (motor overtemperature, fault threshold) - 40 Kelvin. If p0605 is reduced, r0034 increases
and the motor temperature remains the same.
Refer to: p0611, p0612, p0615
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
A value of r0034 = -200.0 % indicates an invalid display, for example, because the thermal I2t motor model was not
activated or was incorrectly parameterized.
Description: Displays the actual temperature in the motor.
Note: For r0035 not equal to -200.0 °C, the following applies:
- this temperature display is valid.
- a KTY sensor is connected.
- the thermal model for the induction motor is activated (p0612 bit 1 = 1 and temperature sensor deactivated: p0600
= 0 or p0601 = 0).
For r0035 equal to -200.0 °C, the following applies:
- this temperature display is not valid (temperature sensor error).
- A PTC sensor or bimetallic NC contact is connected.
- the temperature sensor of the synchronous motor is deactivated (p0600 = 0 or p0601 = 0).
Description: Displays the power unit overload determined using the I2t calculation.
A current reference value is defined for the I2t monitoring of the power unit. It represents the current that can be
conducted by the power unit without any influence of the switching losses (e.g. the continuously permissible current
of the capacitors, inductances, busbars, etc.).
If the I2t reference current of the power unit is not exceeded, then an overload (0 %) is not displayed.
In the other case, the degree of thermal overload is calculated, whereby 100% results in a trip.
r0034 Motor utilization / Motor utilization
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8017
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r0035 CO: Motor temperature / Mot_temp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7008, 8016,
8017
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r0036 CO: Power unit overload I2t / PU overload I2t
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8014
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-47
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p0290, p0294
Refer to: F30005
Description: Displays the Control Unit temperature.
An appropriate message is output when 87 °C is exceeded.
Index: [0] = Control Unit temperature actual
[1] = Control Unit temperature maximum
Dependency: Refer to: A01009
Note: The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal.
Description: Displays the temperatures in the power unit.
Index: [0] = Inverter, maximum value
[1] = Depletion layer maximum value
[2] = Rectifier maximum value
[3] = Air intake
[4] = Interior of power unit
[5] = Inverter 1
[6] = Inverter 2
[7] = Inverter 3
[8] = Inverter 4
[9] = Inverter 5
[10] = Inverter 6
[11] = Rectifier 1
[12] = Rectifier 2
[13] = Depletion layer 1
[14] = Depletion layer 2
[15] = Depletion layer 3
[16] = Depletion layer 4
[17] = Depletion layer 5
[18] = Depletion layer 6
[19] = Cooling system liquid intake
Note: The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal.
r0037[0]: Maximum value of the inverter temperatures (r0037[5...10]).
r0037[1]: Maximum value of the depletion layer temperatures (r0037[13...18]).
r0037[2]: Maximum value of the rectifier temperatures (r0037[11...12]).
The maximum value is the temperature of the hottest inverter, depletion layer, or rectifier.
r0037[0...1] Control Unit temperature / CU temperature
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r0037[0...19] CO: Power unit temperatures / PU temperatures
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8014
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-48 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the smoothed actual power factor.
Note: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
Significance for the motor: Motor power factor
Significance for the infeed: Power factor at the connection point (p3470, p3471)
Description: Displays the electrical energy used since the last reset.
Dependency: Refer to: p0040
Description: Setting to reset the energy consumption display (r0039).
Procedure: Set p0040 = 0 --> 1.
The display is reset and the parameter is automatically set to zero.
Dependency: Refer to: r0039
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant for the following display values:
SERVO: r0078[1], r0079[1], r0081 (calculated from the quantities smoothed with p0045), r0082[1].
VECTOR: r0063[1], r0068[1], r0080[1], r0082[1].
r0038 Power factor smoothed / Cos phi smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6799, 8850,
8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0039 Energy consumption / Energy consumption
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [kWh] - [kWh] - [kWh]
p0040 Reset energy consumption display / Energy usage reset
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p0045 Smoothing time constant, display values / T_smth display
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4715, 5610,
5730, 6714, 8012
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 1.00 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-49
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays missing enable signals that are preventing the closed-loop drive control from being commissioned.
Dependency: Refer to: r0002
Note: The value r0046 = 0 indicates that all enable signals for this drive are present.
Bit 00 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0840 is a 0 signal.
- there is a "switching on inhibited".
Bit 01 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0844 or p0845 is a 0 signal.
Bit 02 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0848 or p0849 is a 0 signal.
Bit 03 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0852 is a 0 signal.
Bit 04 =1 (armature short-circuit active), if:
- the signal source in p1230 has a 1 signal
Bit 05, Bit 06: Being prepared
Bit 08 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the pulse enable via terminal EP is missing (booksize: X21, chassis: X41).
Bit 09 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0864 is a 0 signal.
r0046.0...31 CO/BO: Missing enable sig / Missing enable sig
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2634
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 OFF1 enable missing Yes No -
01 OFF2 enable missing Yes No -
02 OFF3 enable missing Yes No -
03 Operation enable missing Yes No -
04 Armature short-circuit / DC current brake,
enable missing
Yes No 7014,
7016
05 STOP2 enable missing Yes No -
06 STOP1 enable missing Yes No -
08 EP terminals enable missing Yes No -
09 Infeed enable missing Yes No -
10 Ramp-function generator enable missing Yes No -
11 Ramp-function generator start missing Yes No -
12 Setpoint enable missing Yes No -
16 OFF1 enable internal missing Yes No -
17 OFF2 enable internal missing Yes No -
18 OFF3 enable internal missing Yes No -
19 Pulse enable internal missing Yes No -
20 Armature short-circuit/DC current brake
internal enable missing
Yes No 7014,
7016
21 STOP2 enable internal missing Yes No -
22 STOP1 enable internal missing Yes No -
25 Function bypass active Yes No -
26 Drive inactive or not operational Yes No -
27 Demagnetizing not completed Yes No -
28 Brake open missing Yes No -
29 Cooling system ready signal missing Yes No -
30 Speed controller inhibited Yes No -
31 Jog setpoint active Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-50 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Bit 10 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p1140 is a 0 signal.
Bit 11 = 1 (enable signal missing) if the speed setpoint is frozen, because:
- the signal source in p1141 is a 0 signal.
- the speed setpoint is entered from jogging and the two signal sources for jogging, bit 0 (p1055) and bit 1 (p1056)
have a 1 signal.
Bit 12 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p1142 is a 0 signal.
- When activating the function module "basic positioner" (r0108.4 = 1), the signal source in p1142 is set to a 0 sig-
nal.
Bit 16 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- there is an OFF1 fault response. The system is only enabled if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and
the "switching on inhibited" withdrawn with OFF1 = 0.
Bit 17 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- commissioning mode is selected (p0009 > 0 or p0010 > 0).
- there is an OFF2 fault response.
- the drive is inactive (p0105 = 0) or is not operational (r7850[DO-Index]=0).
Bit 18 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- OFF3 has still not been completed or an OFF3 fault response is present.
Bit 19 = 1 (internal pulse enable missing), if:
- synchronization is running between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle and application clock cycle.
Bit 20 =1 (internal armature short-circuit active), if:
- the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or "S5x" (refer to function diagram 2610).
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
Bit 21 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
The pulses have been enabled and the speed setpoint has still not been enabled, because:
- the holding brake opening time (p1216) has still not expired.
- the motor has still not been magnetized (induction motor).
- the encoder has not been calibrated (V/f vector and synchronous motor)
Bit 22: Being prepared
Bit 26 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the drive is inactive (p0105 = 0) or is not operational (r7850[DO-Index]=0).
Bit 27 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- demagnetizing has still not been completed (only for vector).
Bit 28 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the holding brake is closed or has still not been opened.
Bit 29 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the cooling system ready signal via BI: p0266[1] missing.
Bit 30 = 1 (speed controller inhibited), if one of the following reasons is present:
- A 0 signal is available via BI: p0856.
- the function generator with current input is active.
- the measuring function "current controller reference frequency characteristic" is active.
- the pole position identification is active.
- motor data identification is active (only certain steps).
Bit 31 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the speed setpoint from jog 1 or 2 is entered.
List of parameters
Parameter
1-51
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual status for the motor data identification (standstill measurement) and the speed/velocity control-
ler optimization (rotating measurement).
Value: 0: No measurement
115: Measurement q leakage inductance (part 2)
120: Speed controller optimization (vibration test)
140: Calculate speed controller setting
150: Measurement, moment of inertia
170: Measurement, magnetizing current and saturation characteristic
190: Speed encoder test
195: Measurement q leakage inductance (part 1)
200: Rotating measurement selected
210: Pole position identification selected
220: identification, leakage inductance
230: Identification, rotor time constant
240: Identification, stator inductance
250: Identification, stator inductance LQLD
270: Identification, stator resistance
290: Identification, valve lockout time
300: Standstill measurement selected
Note: r0047 = 300 is also displayed if encoder calibration p1990 is selected.
Description: Displays the effective Motor Data Set (MDS) and the effective Encoder Data Sets (EDS).
Index: [0] = Motor Data Set MDS effective
[1] = Encoder 1 Encoder Data Set EDS effective
[2] = Encoder 2 Encoder Data Set EDS effective
[3] = Encoder 3 Encoder Data Set EDS effective
Dependency: Refer to: p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189, r0838
Note: Value 99 means the following: No encoder assigned (not configured).
r0047 Motor data ident. routine and speed controller optimization / MotID and n_opt
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 300 -
r0049[0...3] Motor data set/encoder data set effective / MDS/EDS effective
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-52 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the effective Command Data Set (CDS).
Dependency: Refer to: p0810, p0811, r0836
Note: The Command Data Set selected using a binector input (e.g. p0810) is displayed using r0836.
Description: Displays the effective Drive Data Set (DDS).
Dependency: Refer to: p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824, r0837
Note: The drive data set changeover is suppressed when selecting the motor identification, during the rotating measure-
ment, the encoder calibration and the friction characteristic record.
Description: Displays the status word of the closed-loop control.
r0050.0...3 CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS effective / CDS effective
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8560
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 CDS eff., bit 0 On Off -
01 CDS eff., bit 1 On Off -
02 CDS eff., bit 2 On Off -
03 CDS eff., bit 3 On Off -
r0051.0...4 CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS effective / DDS effective
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DDS eff., bit 0 On Off -
01 DDS eff., bit 1 On Off -
02 DDS eff., bit 2 On Off -
03 DDS eff., bit 3 On Off -
04 DDS eff., bit 4 On Off -
r0056.0...15 CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control / ZSW cl-loop ctrl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1530, 2526
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Initialization completed Yes No -
01 Demagnetizing completed Yes No -
02 Pulse enable present Yes No -
03 Soft starting present Yes No -
04 Magnetizing completed Yes No -
05 Voltage boost when starting Active Inactive 6300
06 Acceleration voltage Active Inactive 6300
07 Frequency negative Yes No 6719
08 Field weakening active Yes No -
09 Voltage limit active Yes No 6714
List of parameters
Parameter
1-53
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or V/f characteristic (after the interpolator).
Dependency: Refer to: r0020
Note: The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).
Description: Displays the actual speed values sensed by the encoders (unsmoothed).
Description: Displays the actual velocities sensed by the encoders (unsmoothed).
10 Slip limit active Yes No 6310
11 Frequency limit active Yes No 6719
12 Current limiting controller voltage output
active
Yes No -
13 Current/torque limiting Active Inactive 6060
14 Vdc_max controller active Yes No 6220,
6320
15 Vdc_min controller active Yes No 6220,
6320
r0060 CO: Speed setpoint before the setpoint filter / n_set before filt.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2701, 2704,
5020, 6030, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r0061 CO: Actual speed unsmoothed / n_act unsmoothed
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1580, 4710,
4715
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r0061 CO: Actual velocity unsmoothed / v_act unsmoothed
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1580, 4710,
4715
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 4_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [m/min] - [m/min] - [m/min]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-54 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual speed values sensed by the encoders (unsmoothed).
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Note: For V/f operating modes, the speeds from encoder 2 and encoder 3 are not displayed.
Description: Displays the actual speed setpoint after the setpoint filters.
Description: Displays the actual speed of the closed-loop speed control and the V/f control.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
[2] = Calculated from f_set - f_slip
Dependency: Refer to: r0021
Note: The speed actual value is calculated in encoderless operation and for V/f control.
For operation with encoder, r0063[0] is smoothed with p1441.
The speed actual value (r0063[0]) is additionally displayed - smoothed with p0045 - in r0063[1].
The speed (r0063[2]) calculated from the output frequency and slip can only be compared with the speed actual
value (r0063[0]) in the steady-state.
The actual speed (r0063[0]) is available as a display quantity with additional smoothing in r0021.
r0061[0...2] CO: Actual speed unsmoothed / n_act unsmoothed
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1580, 4710,
4715
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r0062 CO: Speed setpoint after the filter / n_set after filter
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1590, 1750,
5020, 5030, 5210, 6030
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r0063[0...2] CO: Actual speed value / n_act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1680, 4715
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-55
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual system deviation of the speed controller.
Note: In servo control mode with active reference model, the system deviation to the P component of the speed controller
is displayed.
Description: Displays the slip frequency for induction motors (ASM).
Description: Displays the Motor Module output frequency.
Dependency: Refer to: r0024
Note: The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).
Description: Displays the maximum output current of the Motor Module.
Dependency: The maximum output current is determined by the parameterized current limit and the motor and converter thermal
protection.
Refer to: p0290, p0640
r0064 CO: Speed controller system deviation / n_ctrl system dev
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5040, 6040
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r0065 Slip frequency / f_Slip
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1710, 6310,
6727, 6730, 6732
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 2_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
r0066 CO: Output frequency / f_outp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1690, 5300,
5730, 6310, 6730, 6731, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 2_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
r0067 CO: Output current, maximum / I_outp max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5722, 6300,
6640, 6724
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-56 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays actual absolute current.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
Dependency: Refer to: r0027
Notice: The value is updated with the current controller sampling time.
Note: Absolute current value = sqrt(Iq^2 + Id^2)
The absolute value of the current actual value is available smoothed (r0027 with 300 ms, r0068[1] with p0045) and
unsmoothed (r0068[0]).
Description: Displays the measured actual phase currents as peak value.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
[3] = Phase U offset
[4] = Phase V offset
[5] = Phase W offset
[6] = Total U, V, W
Note: In indices 3 ... 5, the offset currents of the 3 phases, which are added to correct the phase currents, are displayed.
The sum of the 3 corrected phase currents is displayed in index 6.
Description: Displays the measured actual value of the DC link voltage.
Dependency: Refer to: r0026
Notice: For SINAMICS S120 AC Drive (AC/AC) the following applies:
When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module (e.g. PM340) a valid measured value is not sup-
plied. In this case, when an external 24V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed.
Note: The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).
r0068[0...1] CO: Absolute current actual value / I_act abs val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1690, 6714,
6799, 7017, 8014, 8017, 8018
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r0069[0...6] CO: Phase current actual value / I_phase act value
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1630, 5730,
6714, 6730, 6731, 8850, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r0070 CO: Actual DC link voltage / Vdc act val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6723, 6724,
6730, 6731, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-57
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the maximum output voltage.
Dependency: The maximum output voltage depends on the actual DC link voltage (r0070) and the maximum modulation depth
(p1803).
Note: As the (driven) motor load increases, the maximum output voltage drops as a result of the reduction in DC link volt-
age.
Description: Displays the actual power unit output voltage (Motor Module).
Dependency: Refer to: r0025
Note: The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).
Description: Displays the maximum modulation depth.
Dependency: Refer to: p1803
Description: Displays the actual modulation depth.
Dependency: Refer to: r0028
Note: For space vector modulation, 100% corresponds to the maximum output voltage without overcontrol.
Values above 100 % indicate an overcontrol condition - values below 100% have no overcontrol.
The phase voltage (phase-to-phase, rms) is calculated as follows:(r0074 * r0070) / (sqrt(2) * 100 %).
The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).
r0071 Maximum output voltage / V_output max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1710, 6300,
6640, 6722, 6723, 6724, 6725,
6727
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
r0072 CO: Output voltage / V_output
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1630, 5730,
6730, 6731, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
r0073 Maximum modulation depth / Modulat_depth max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6724
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r0074 CO: Modulat_depth / Modulat_depth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5730, 6730,
6731, 6799, 8940, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-58 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the field-generating current setpoint (Id_set).
Note: This value is irrelevant for the V/f control mode.
Description: Displays the field-generating current actual value (Id_act).
Dependency: Refer to: r0029
Note: This value is irrelevant for the V/f control mode.
The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).
Description: Displays the torque/force generating current setpoint.
Note: This value is irrelevant for the V/f control mode.
Description: Displays the torque-generating current actual value (Iq_act).
Dependency: Refer to: r0030
Note: This value is irrelevant for the V/f control mode.
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0078).
r0075 CO: Current setpoint field-generating / Id_set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1630, 5714,
5722, 6714
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r0076 CO: Current actual value field-generating / Id_act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1630, 1710,
5714, 5730, 6714, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r0077 CO: Current setpoint torque-generating / Iq_set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1630, 1774,
5714, 6710, 6714, 6719
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r0078 CO: Current actual value torque-generating / Iq_act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1710, 6310,
6714, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-59
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the speed controller (before clock cycle interpolation).
Description: Displays the actual torque value.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
Dependency: Refer to: r0031
Note: The torque actual value is available smoothed (r0031 with 100 ms, r0080[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed
(r0080[0]).
Description: Displays the torque utilization as a percentage.
The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque referred to the torque limit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0033
Note: The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081).
The torque utilization is obtained from the required torque referred to the torque limit as follows:
- Positive torque: r0081 = (r0079 / r1538) * 100 %
- Negative torque: r0081 = (-r0079 / -r1539) * 100 %
For SERVO, the following applies:
The calculation of the torque utilization depends on the selected smoothing time constant (p0045).
r0079 CO: Torque setpoint total / M_set total
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1700, 1710,
6030, 6060, 6710, 8012
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
r0080[0...1] CO: Torque actual value / M_act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6714, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
r0081 CO: Torque utilization / M_Utilization
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-60 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the instantaneous active power.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
[2] = Electric power
Dependency: Refer to: r0032
Note: The mechanical active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed
(r0082[0]).
Description: Displays the flux setpoint.
Description: Displays the flux actual value.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed
Note: The flux actual value (index 1) smoothed with p1585 is only displayed for separately-excited synchronous motors.
In the following cases, the unsmoothed flux actual value is also displayed:
- in the range of the current model.
- during the pole position identification.
- for I/f control.
- for a stalled drive.
r0082[0...2] CO: Active power actual value / P_act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6714, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 14_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: r2004 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
r0083 CO: Flux setpoint / Flux setpoint
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5722
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r0084[0...1] CO: Flux actual value / Flux act val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6726, 6730,
6731
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-61
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual active power factor.
Description: Displays the setpoint for the DC link voltage.
Description: Displays the actual phase voltage.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Note: The values are determined from the transistor power-on duration.
Description: Setting to pre-assign/check the sampling times for the internal controller clock cycles for clock-synchronous PROFI-
BUS operation.
p0092 = 1:
The controller clock cycles are set so that clock synchronous PROFIBUS operation is possible. If it is not possible
to change the controller clock cycles of the clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation, then an appropriate
message is output.
The presetting of the controller clock cycles can result in a derating of the Motor Module (e.g. p0115[0] = 400 µs -->
375 µs).
When the drive unit utilization (r9976) is calculated, its maximum computing time load has already been calculated
during ramp-up for clock-cycle synchronous operation and taken into account in r9976 (V4.3 and higher), if fixed
DCC runtime groups "Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD" and "Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD" are used.
r0087 CO: Actual power factor / Cos phi act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6714, 6730,
6732, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0088 CO: DC link voltage setpoint / Vdc setpoint
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
r0089[0...2] Actual phase voltage / U_phase act val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6719
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_3 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
p0092 Clock synchronous operation pre-assignment/check / Clock sync op
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-62 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
p0092 = 0:
The controller clock cycles are set without any restrictions by the clock-cycle PROFIBUS operation (as for up to ver-
sion V2.3).
When the drive unit utilization (r9976) is calculated, its maximum computing time load has already been calculated
during ramp-up for non-clock-cycle-synchronous operation and taken into account in r9976 (V4.3 and higher), if
fixed DCC runtime groups "Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD" and "Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD" are
used.
Value: 0: No isochronous PROFIBUS
1: Isochronous PROFIBUS
Dependency: Refer to: r0110, p0115
Refer to: A01223, A01224
Caution: Only current controller clock cycles (p0115 index 0) which are integers of 125 µs are permitted for isochronous
mode.
Notice: p0092 only affects the automatic default for the clock cycles (p0115) in the drive. If the clock cycles are modified
subsequently in expert mode (p0112 = 0), p0092 = 0 should be set so that the new values are not overwritten again
by the automatic default when the parameters are downloaded. Current controller clock cycle values must continue
to be integers of 125 µs for synchronous mode.
Description: Displays the transformation angle.
Dependency: Refer to: p0431, r1778
Note: The transformation angle corresponds to the electrical commutation angle.
If no pole position identification is carried out (p1982), and the encoder is adjusted, the following applies:
The encoder supplies the value and indicates the electrical angle of the flux position (d axis).
Description: Executes an automatic device configuration.
In so doing, p0099, p0107 and p0108 are appropriately set.
Value: 0: No selection
1: Drive object type SERVO
2: Drive object type VECTOR
3: SINAMICS GM (DFEMV & VECTORMV)
4: SINAMICS SM (AFEMV & VECTORMV)
5: SINAMICS GL (VECTORGL)
6: SINAMICS SL (VECTORSL)
12: Drive object type VECTOR parallel circuit
r0094 CO: Transformation angle / Transformat_angle
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1580, 1680,
1690, 4710, 6714, 6730, 6731,
6732
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2005 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]
p0097 Select drive object type / Select DO type
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 17 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-63
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
13: Drive object type VECTORMV - GM parallel circuit
14: Drive object type VECTORMV - SM parallel circuit
15: Drive object type DC_CTRL
16: Drive object type SERVO HMI
17: Drive object type VECTOR HMI
Dependency: Refer to: r0098, p0099
Refer to: A01330
Note: For p0097 = 0, p0099 is automatically set to the factor setting.
The possible settings are dependent upon the device type.
Description: Displays the automatically detected actual device topology in coded form.
Index: [0] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100
[1] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101
[2] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102
[3] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103
[4] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104
[5] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105
Dependency: Refer to: p0097, p0099
Note: Topology coding: abcd efgh hex
a = number of Active Line Modules
b = number of Motor Modules
c = number of motors
d = number of encoders (or the line supply voltage sensing for Active Line Modules)
e = number of additional encoders (or the line supply voltage sensing for Active Line Modules)
f = number of Terminal Modules
g = number of Terminal Boards
h = reserved
if the value 0 is displayed in all indices, then components are not detected via DRIVE-CLiQ.
If a value F hex occurs at a position of the coding (abcd efgh hex), then an overflow has occurred.
Description: Sets the device target topology in coded form (refer to r0098). The setting is made during commissioning.
Deactivated or non-available components are also counted
Index: [0] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100
[1] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101
[2] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102
[3] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103
[4] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104
[5] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105
r0098[0...5] Actual device topology / Device_act topo
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0099[0...5] Device target topology / Device_target topo
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Parameter
List of parameters
1-64 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: The parameter can only be written into for p0097 = 0.
To perform an automatic device configuration run, an index of the device target topology must be set to the value of
the device actual topology in r0098 for acknowledgement. An index of the device actual topology with a value other
than 0 must be selected.
Refer to: p0097, r0098
Refer to: A01330
Note: The parameter can only be set to the values 0, the value of the actual device topology, the value of the actual
device target topology and FFFFFFFF hex.
If the value 0 is displayed in all of the indices, then the system has still not been commissioned.
The value FFFFFFFF hex indicates that the topology was not generated by the automatic device configuration but
was commissioned using the commissioning software (e.g. using parameter download).
Description: Defines whether the motor and drive converter power settings (e.g. rated motor power - p0307) are expressed in
[kW] or [hp].
Depending on the selection, the rated motor frequency (p0310) is either set to 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
The following applies for IEC drives: The power factor (p0308) should be parameterized.
The following applies for NEMA drives: The efficiency (p0309) should be parameterized.
Value: 0: IEC-Motor (50 Hz, SI units)
1: NEMA motor (60 Hz, US units)
Dependency: If p0100 is changed, all of the rated motor parameters are reset. Only then are possible unit changeovers made.
The units of all motor parameters are changed that are involved in the selection of IEC or NEMA (e.g. r0206, p0307,
p0316, r0333, r0334, p0341, p0344, r1493, r1969).
Refer to: r0206, p0210, p0300, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0308, p0309, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0320, p0322, p0323,
p0335, r0336, r0337, p1800
Note: The parameter can only be changed for vector control (p0107).
The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (p0010 = 30, p0970).
Description: The parameter contains the object number via which every drive object can be addressed.
The number of an existing drive object is entered into each index.
The numbers are automatically assigned once and can no longer be changed as long as the object has not been
deleted.
In the commissioning software, this object number cannot be entered using the expert list, but is automatically
assigned when inserting an object.
p0100 IEC/NEMA mot stds / IEC/NEMA mot stds
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p0101[0...23] Drive object numbers / DO numbers
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 62 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-65
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = Drive object number Control Unit
[1] = Drive object number object 1
[2] = Drive object number object 2
[3] = Drive object number object 3
[4] = Drive object number object 4
[5] = Drive object number object 5
[6] = Drive object number object 6
[7] = Drive object number object 7
[8] = Drive object number object 8
[9] = Drive object number object 9
[10] = Drive object number object 10
[11] = Drive object number object 11
[12] = Drive object number object 12
[13] = Drive object number object 13
[14] = Drive object number object 14
[15] = Drive object number object 15
[16] = Drive object number object 16
[17] = Drive object number object 17
[18] = Drive object number object 18
[19] = Drive object number object 19
[20] = Drive object number object 20
[21] = Drive object number object 21
[22] = Drive object number object 22
[23] = Drive object number object 23
Note: Value = 0: No drive object is defined.
Description: Displays the number of existing or existing and prepared drive objects.
Index: [0] = Existing drive objects
[1] = Existing and prepared drive objects
Dependency: Refer to: p0101
Note: The numbers of the drive objects are in p0101.
Index 0:
Displays the number of drive objects that have already been set up.
Index 1:
Displays the number of drive objects that have already been set up and, in addition, the drive objects that still have
to be set up.
Description: The application-specific view of an existing drive object is entered into each index.
The parameter cannot be changed.
Dependency: Refer to: r0107, p0107
r0102[0...1] Number of drive objects / DO count
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0103[0...23] Application-specific view / Appl_spec view
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(2) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 999 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-66 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: In the non-volatile memory, the application-specific views are defined in files with the following structure:
PDxxxyyy.ACX
xxx: Application-specific view (p0103)
yyy: Type of drive object (p0107)
Example:
PD052011.ACX
--> "011" stands for the drive object, type SERVO
--> "052" is the number of the view for this drive object
Description: Displays the application-specific view of the individual drive object.
Dependency: Refer to: r0107, p0107
Description: Setting to activate/deactivate a drive object.
Value: 0: Deactivate drive object
1: Activate drive object
Dependency: Refer to: r0106
Notice: The following applies when activating:
If components are inserted for the first time and the appropriate drive object is activated, then the drive system is
automatically booted. To do this, the pulses of all of the drive objects must be suppressed.
Description: Setting to activate/deactivate a drive object.
Value: 0: Deactivate drive object
1: Activate drive object
2: Drive object, deactivate and not present
Recommend.: After inserting all of the components of a drive object, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01316.
Dependency: Refer to: r0106
Refer to: A01316
Caution: It is not permissible to deactivate drive objects with safety functions enabled.
Notice: The following applies when activating:
If components are inserted for the first time and the appropriate drive object is activated, then the drive system is
automatically booted. To do this, the pulses of all of the drive objects must be suppressed.
r0103 Application-specific view / Appl_spec view
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 -
p0105 Activate/deactivate drive object / DO act/deact
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1
p0105 Activate/deactivate drive object / DO act/deact
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-67
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Setting a drive object to deactivate principally corresponds to the "parking axis" function. however, here, all of the
DRIVE-CLiQ components, assigned to the drive object, are in involved.
Description: Setting to activate/deactivate a drive object.
Value: 0: Deactivate drive object
1: Activate drive object
2: Drive object, deactivate and not present
Recommend.: After inserting all of the components of a drive object, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01316.
Dependency: Refer to: r0106
Refer to: A01316
Warning: A drive that is moved by simulating the inputs of a Terminal Module is brought to a standstill while this parameter is
being changed over.
Caution: It is not permissible to deactivate drive objects with safety functions enabled.
Notice: The following applies when activating:
If components are inserted for the first time and the appropriate drive object is activated, then the drive system is
automatically booted. To do this, the pulses of all of the drive objects must be suppressed.
Note: Setting a drive object to deactivate principally corresponds to the "parking axis" function. however, here, all of the
DRIVE-CLiQ components, assigned to the drive object, are in involved.
Description: Setting to activate/deactivate a drive object.
Value: 0: Deactivate drive object
1: Activate drive object
2: Drive object, deactivate and not present
Recommend.: After inserting all of the components of a drive object, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01316.
Dependency: Refer to: r0106
Refer to: A01316
Caution: It is not permissible to deactivate drive objects with safety functions enabled:
TM54F can only be deactivated if all of the axes connected to it via P10010 have been deactivated or are not
enabled on the connected safety axes.
Notice: The following applies when activating:
If components are inserted for the first time and the appropriate drive object is activated, then the drive system is
automatically booted. To do this, the pulses of all of the drive objects must be suppressed.
Note: Setting a drive object to deactivate principally corresponds to the "parking axis" function. however, here, all of the
DRIVE-CLiQ components, assigned to the drive object, are in involved.
p0105 Activate/deactivate drive object / DO act/deact
TM31 Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 1
p0105 Activate/deactivate drive object / DO act/deact
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-68 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the "active/inactive" state of a drive object.
Value: 0: Drive object inactive
1: Drive object active
Dependency: Refer to: p0105
Description: The type of an existing drive object is entered into each index.
Value: 0: -
1: SINAMICS S
2: SINAMICS G
3: SINAMICS I
4: SINAMICS CX32
5: SINAMICS GM
6: SINAMICS DC
7: SINAMICS GL
9: SINAMICS S110
10: ACTIVE INFEED CONTROL
11: SERVO
12: VECTOR
13: VECTORMV
14: VECTORGL
16: VECTORSL
17: DC_CTRL
18: VECTORM2C
19: VECTORDM
20: SMART INFEED CONTROL
30: BASIC INFEED CONTROL
40: ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLMV
41: BASIC INFEED CONTROLMV
42: ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLM2C
51: SINAMICS G120 230 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector)
52: SINAMICSG120 240_2 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector)
100: TB30 (Terminal Board)
101: SINAMICS SL
102: SINAMICS SM2
104: SINAMICS SM2I
150: DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module
200: TM31 (Terminal Module)
201: TM41 (Terminal Module)
202: TM17 High Feature (Terminal Module)
203: TM15 (Terminal Module)
204: TM15 (Terminal Module for SINAMICS)
205: TM54F - Master (Terminal Module)
r0106 Drive object active/inactive / DO act/inact
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 -
p0107[0...23] Drive object type / DO type
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(2) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 300 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-69
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
206: TM54F - Slave (Terminal Module)
207: TM120 (Terminal Module)
254: CU-LINK
300: ENCODER
Index: [0] = Drive object type, Control Unit
[1] = Drive object type, object 1
[2] = Drive object type, object 2
[3] = Drive object type, object 3
[4] = Drive object type, object 4
[5] = Drive object type, object 5
[6] = Drive object type, object 6
[7] = Drive object type, object 7
[8] = Drive object type, object 8
[9] = Drive object type, object 9
[10] = Drive object type, object 10
[11] = Drive object type, object 11
[12] = Drive object type, object 12
[13] = Drive object type, object 13
[14] = Drive object type, object 14
[15] = Drive object type, object 15
[16] = Drive object type, object 16
[17] = Drive object type, object 17
[18] = Drive object type, object 18
[19] = Drive object type, object 19
[20] = Drive object type, object 20
[21] = Drive object type, object 21
[22] = Drive object type, object 22
[23] = Drive object type, object 23
Dependency: Refer to: p0103, r0103
Caution: If you change this parameter and exit the device commissioning mode, then the complete software will be set up
again and all of the previous drive parameter settings are deleted.
Note: The number (p0101) and the associated drive object type are in the same index.
For SINAMICS S a drive object type can only be changed between SERVO and VECTOR. If you change the
parameter and exit drive start-up (p0009 from 2 to 0) the drive parameters are set up again.
Description: Displays the type of each drive object.
Value: 0: -
1: SINAMICS S
2: SINAMICS G
3: SINAMICS I
4: SINAMICS CX32
5: SINAMICS GM
6: SINAMICS DC
7: SINAMICS GL
9: SINAMICS S110
10: ACTIVE INFEED CONTROL
11: SERVO
12: VECTOR
13: VECTORMV
14: VECTORGL
r0107 Drive object type / DO type
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 300 -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-70 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
16: VECTORSL
17: DC_CTRL
18: VECTORM2C
19: VECTORDM
20: SMART INFEED CONTROL
30: BASIC INFEED CONTROL
40: ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLMV
41: BASIC INFEED CONTROLMV
42: ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLM2C
51: SINAMICS G120 230 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector)
52: SINAMICSG120 240_2 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector)
100: TB30 (Terminal Board)
101: SINAMICS SL
102: SINAMICS SM2
104: SINAMICS SM2I
150: DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module
200: TM31 (Terminal Module)
201: TM41 (Terminal Module)
202: TM17 High Feature (Terminal Module)
203: TM15 (Terminal Module)
204: TM15 (Terminal Module for SINAMICS)
205: TM54F - Master (Terminal Module)
206: TM54F - Slave (Terminal Module)
207: TM120 (Terminal Module)
254: CU-LINK
300: ENCODER
Dependency: Refer to: p0103, r0103
Description: The function module of an existing drive object is entered into each index (also refer to p0101, p0107).
The following bits are available for the Control Unit (Index 0):
Bit 18: Free function blocks
Bit 29: CAN
Bit 30: COMM BOARD
Bit 31: PROFINET
For all other drive objects (Index > 0), the significance of the bits should be taken from the display parameters r0108
of the drive object.
Index: [0] = Function module Control Unit
[1] = Function module object 1
[2] = Function module object 2
[3] = Function module object 3
[4] = Function module object 4
[5] = Function module object 5
[6] = Function module object 6
[7] = Function module object 7
[8] = Function module object 8
[9] = Function module object 9
[10] = Function module object 10
[11] = Function module object 11
[12] = Function module object 12
[13] = Function module object 13
[14] = Function module object 14
[15] = Function module object 15
[16] = Function module object 16
p0108[0...23] Drive object, function module / DO function module
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(2) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
List of parameters
Parameter
1-71
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
[17] = Function module object 17
[18] = Function module object 18
[19] = Function module object 19
[20] = Function module object 20
[21] = Function module object 21
[22] = Function module object 22
[23] = Function module object 23
Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning.
Description: Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object.
Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
16 Bit 16 On Off -
17 Bit 17 On Off -
18 Bit 18 On Off -
19 Bit 19 On Off -
20 Bit 20 On Off -
21 Bit 21 On Off -
22 Bit 22 On Off -
23 Bit 23 On Off -
24 Bit 24 On Off -
25 Bit 25 On Off -
26 Bit 26 On Off -
27 Bit 27 On Off -
28 Bit 28 On Off -
29 Bit 29 On Off -
30 Bit 30 On Off -
31 Bit 31 On Off -
r0108 Drive object, function module / DO function module
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
12 Linear encoder Activated Not activated -
18 Free function blocks Activated Not activated -
31 PROFINET Activated Not activated -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-72 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object.
Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning.
Description: Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object.
Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning.
Description: Displays the basic sampling times.
The sampling times are set using p0112 and p0115. The values for the basic sampling times are determined as a
result of these settings.
Index: [0] = Basic sampling time 0
[1] = Basic sampling time 1
[2] = Basic sampling time 2
r0108 Drive object, function module / DO function module
TB30, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
18 Free function blocks Activated Not activated -
31 PROFINET Activated Not activated -
r0108 Drive object, function module / DO function module
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
02 Closed-loop speed/torque control Activated Not activated -
08 Extended setpoint channel Activated Not activated -
13 Safety rotary axis Activated Not activated -
14 Extended brake control Activated Not activated -
15 Parallel cct. config. Activated Not activated -
16 Technology controller Activated Not activated -
17 Extended signals/monitoring Activated Not activated -
18 Free function blocks Activated Not activated -
20 Software gating unit Not activated Activated -
28 Cooling system Activated Not activated -
29 CAN Activated Not activated -
31 PROFINET Activated Not activated -
r0110[0...2] Basic sampling times / t_basis
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 10000.00 [µs] - [µs]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-73
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the selected basic sampling time for this drive object.
Dependency: Refer to: r0110
Description: Displays the selected basic sampling time for this drive object.
Dependency: Refer to: r0110
Note: For TB30 and the Terminal Module, this parameter has no significance.
For TB30 and certain Terminal Modules, the sampling times can be set using p4099 (see description of p4099 for
the Module in question).
Description: Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115.
The clock cycles for the current controller / speed controller / flux controller / setpoint channel / position controller /
positioning / technology controller are pre-assigned as follows:
SINAMICS S, servo drive:
p0112 = 1: 250 / 250 / 250 / 4000 / 2000 / 8000 / 4000 µs (for chassis units)
p0112 = 2: 125 / 250 / 250 / 4000 / 2000 / 8000 / 4000 µs
p0112 = 3: 125 / 125 / 125 / 4000 / 1000 / 4000 / 4000 µs
p0112 = 4: 62.5 / 62.5 / 62.5 / 1000 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 µs
p0112 = 5: Not possible
SINAMICS S, Active Infeed (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1):
p0112 = 1: 400 / - / - / 1600 µs (presetting for the rated pulse frequency = 2.5 kHz)
p0112 = 2: 250 / - / - / 2000 µs (presetting for the rated pulse frequency = 4.0 kHz)
p0112 = 3: 125 / - / - / 2000 µs
p0112 = 4: 125 / - / - / 1000 µs
p0112 = 5: 125 / - / - / 500 µs
SINAMICS S, Smart Infeed (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1):
p0112 = 1: 400 / - / - / 1600 µs (presetting for the rated pulse frequency = 2.5 kHz)
p0112 = 2: 250 / - / - / 2000 µs (presetting for the rated pulse frequency = 4.0 kHz)
p0112 = 3: 250 / - / - / 2000 µs
p0112 = 4: 250 / - / - / 1000 µs
p0112 = 5: Not possible
r0111 Basic sampling time selection / t_basis sel
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150, HUB,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 -
r0111 Basic sampling time selection / t_basis sel
TB30, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 -
p0112 Sampling times presetting p0115 / t_sample for p0115
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 3
Parameter
List of parameters
1-74 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
SINAMICS S, Basic Infeed, booksize:
p0112 = 4: 250 / - / - / 2000 µs
SINAMICS S, Basic Infeed, chassis:
p0112 = 1: 2000 / - / - / 2000 µs
p0112 = 2: 2000 / - / - / 2000 µs (presetting)
p0112 = 3: 2000 / - / - / 2000 µs
p0112 = 4: Not possible
p0112 = 5: Not possible
SINAMICS S/G, vector drive (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1 and not for PM340):
p0112 = 1: 400 / 1600 / 1600 / 1600 / 3200 / 3200 / 3200 µs (for rated pulse frequency = 1.25, 2.5 kHz)
p0112 = 2: 250 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 / 2000 / 4000 / 4000 µs
p0112 = 3: 250 / 1000 / 1000 / 1000 / 2000 / 4000 / 4000 µs (for rated pulse frequency = 2.0, 4.0 kHz)
SINAMICS S, vector drive:
p0112 = 4: 250 / 500 / 1000 / 500 / 1000 / 2000 / 2000 µs
p0112 = 5: 250 / 250 / 1000 / 250 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 µs
Value: 0: Expert
1: xLow
2: Low
3: Standard
Recommend.: When changing the sampling times of the current and speed controllers (also refer to p0115), then we recommend
that after exiting commissioning (p0009 = 0) the controller settings are recalculated using p0340 = 4.
Dependency: It is prohibited to select a parameter value from p0112 if the associated current controller clock cycle cannot set
(e.g. p0112 = 1 is not possible for a vector drive and PM340 power unit).
Refer to: p0092
Note: For p0112 = 0 (expert) the individual sampling times in p0115 can be adjusted.
p0112 = 1 cannot be set for a power unit type PM340 (refer to r0203) for vector drives.
Description: The current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) is pre-assigned by selecting the minimum pulse frequency.
Dependency: The parameter can only be changed with p0112 = 0 (expert). For isochronous operation (p0092 = 1) the parameter
can only be set so that a current controller clock cycle of 125 µs is obtained as an integer number.
The required pulse frequency can be set in p1800 after commissioning (p0009 = p0010 = 0).
Refer to: p0112, r0114, p0115, p1800
Note: The current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) is set to the inverse value of twice the minimum pulse frequency.
For p0113 = 1.0 kHz, p0115[0] = 500 µs is set, for p0113 = 2.0 kHz, p0115[0] = 250 µs is set. The current controller
sampling time (p0115[0]), calculated from the pulse frequency, is set in a grid of 1.25 µs.
For a power unit type PM340 (refer to r0203), only the values 1.0 and 2.0 kHz can be set. 1.0 kHz can be set in
order to achieve a current controller clock cycle of 500µs. However, in this case, the minimum pulse frequency
p1800 is limited to 2 kHz.
p0113 Minimum pulse frequency, selection / f_puls min sel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1.000 [kHz] 2.000 [kHz] 2.000 [kHz]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-75
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the recommended values (indices 0 and 1) for the minimum pulse frequency (p0113).
If the system rejects a change to p0113 because the value to be used lies outside the permitted value range, then
instead the recommended value from r0114 can be used.
Index: [0] = If only the actual drive is changed
[1] = If all drives connected to the DRIVE-CLiQ line are changed
[2] = 2. possible pulse frequency
[3] = 3. possible pulse frequency
[4] = 4. possible pulse frequency
[5] = 5. possible pulse frequency
[6] = 6. possible pulse frequency
[7] = 7. possible pulse frequency
[8] = 8. possible pulse frequency
[9] = 9. possible pulse frequency
Dependency: Refer to: p0113
Note: After exiting commissioning (p0009 = p0010 = 0), the pulse frequencies calculated from the sampling time p115[0]
are displayed in indices 1 to 9. If additional restrictions do not apply (e.g. due to having selected an output filter),
these can be entered into p1800. The maximum pulse frequency of the power units was already taken into account
in r0114.
A value of 0 kHz does not define a recommended pulse frequency.
Description: Sets the basic sampling time for supplementary functions (DCC, free function blocks) on this object.
Only setting values that are an integer multiple of 125 µs are permissible.
Index: [0] = Basic sampl. time
Description: Sets the sampling times for speed detection.
Index: [0] = Basic sampl. time
r0114[0...9] Minimum pulse frequency, recommended / f_puls min recom
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [kHz] - [kHz] - [kHz]
p0115[0] Sampling time for supplementary functions / t_samp suppl_fct
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 16000.00 [µs] 4000.00 [µs]
p0115[0] Sampling time for speed detection / t_sample n_det
ENCODER Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
125.00 [µs] 500.00 [µs] 125.00 [µs]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-76 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the sampling times for supplementary functions (DCC, free function blocks) on this object.
Only setting values that are an integer multiple of 125 µs are permissible.
Index: [0] = Basic sampl. time
Note: This parameter only applies to set the sampling times of possible supplementary functions.
The sampling times for inputs/outputs must be set in p4099.
Description: Sets the sampling times for the control loops.
The default setting is made using p0112 and can only be individually changed for p0112 = 0 (expert).
Recommend.: When changing the sampling times of the current and speed controllers (also refer to p0115), then we recommend
that after exiting commissioning (p0009 = 0) the controller settings are recalculated using p0340 = 4.
Index: [0] = Current controller
[1] = Speed controller
[2] = Flux controller
[3] = Setpoint channel
[4] = Position controller
[5] = Positioning
[6] = Technology controller
Dependency: The sampling times can only be separately set if p0112 is 0 (expert). If a sampling time is modified in the expert
mode, then all of the sampling times with higher indices are automatically changed in the same ratio as the sam-
pling time itself was changed. Slower time slices are only taken if the calculated sampling time is also permitted.
Upper limit is 8 ms.
Higher-level controls must be calculated in integral ratios to lower-level controls (e.g. p0115[1] = N * p0115[0];
where N is an integer number). The sampling time of the speed controller (p0115[1]) can have as a maximum a
value of 800% of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]).
The sampling times for setpoint channel (p0115[3]), position controller (p0115[4]), positioning (p0115[5]) and tech-
nology controller (p0115[6]) must have at least 2x the value of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]).
If p0092 = 1 the sampling times p0115 and the pulse frequency p1800 are checked every time the parameters are
downloaded, and reset to the initial values if necessary. This check can be deactivated by setting p0092 = 0 (mak-
ing this setting does not affect isochronous PROFIBUS operation).
Refer to: r0110, r0111, p0112
Note: For function modules that can be activated (e.g. technology controller), the parameters values are pre-assigned.
The minimum current controller clock cycle is 250 µs, the maximum current controller clock cycle is 500 µs. For
power unit type PM340 (r0203), only these current controller sampling times of 250 µs and 500 µs can be set.
p0115[0] Sampling time for supplementary functions / t_samp suppl_fct
TB30, TM31 Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 16000.00 [µs] 4000.00 [µs]
p0115[0...6] Sampling times for internal control loops / t_sample int ctrl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 16000.00 [µs] [0] 125.00 [µs]
[1] 125.00 [µs]
[2] 125.00 [µs]
[3] 4000.00 [µs]
[4] 1000.00 [µs]
[5] 4000.00 [µs]
[6] 4000.00 [µs]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-77
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the recommended sampling time for the drive objects.
r00116[0] = recommended sampling time:
Recommended value which would then make the complete system operational.
r00116[1] = recommended sampling time:
Recommended value, which after changing other clock cycles on the DRIVE-CLiQ line, would result in an opera-
tional system.
Index: [0] = Change only for the actual drive object
[1] = Changing all objects on the DRIVE-CLiQ line
Dependency: Refer to: p0115
Description: Sets the mode for the computing dead time of the current controller.
0: Offset (shifted) clocking, minimum computing dead time of each drive, automatic setting
1: Clocking at the same time, the dead time aligns itself to the dead time of the latest drive, automatic setting
2: Manual setting of the computing dead time, early transfer
3: Manual setting of the computing dead time, late transfer
4-6: As for 0-2, however, no early transfers are set for vectors
Dependency: Refer to: p0118
Refer to: A02100
Note: Re p0117 = 0:
The times when the setpoints become effective for the individual controls is automatically and individually deter-
mined. Another computing dead time is set for each control (closed-loop) (p0118). Current is impressed for the indi-
vidual controls without any offset with respect to time (improved EMC compatibility).
Re p0117 = 1:
The latest closed-loop control determines when the setpoints for each of the individual controls become active. The
same computing dead time is set for each control (p0118). Current is impressed (flows) for the individual controls
without any offset with respect to time.
Re p0117 = 2:
The computing dead time is manually set. The user must optimize the value in p0118.
Re p0117 = 3:
Only for internal Siemens use.
Re p0117 = 4 ... 6:
Behavior as for p0117 = 0 ... 2, however for vectors, the earliest times are not determined.
The modified computing dead time mode is not effective until the drive unit is powered up again.
r0116[0...1] Drive object clock cycle recommended / DO_clock recom
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
p0117 Current controller computing dead time mode / I_ctrl t_dead mode
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 6
Parameter
List of parameters
1-78 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: This parameter is preset as a function of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) and normally does not have
to be changed.
Dependency: Refer to: p0117
Refer to: A02100
Note: For p0118 <= 0.005 µs, the current controller output is delayed by a complete current controller clock cycle
(p0115[0]).
After p0118 has been changed, we recommend that the current controller is adapted (p1715).
Description: Sets the number of Power unit Data Sets (PDS).
The value corresponds to the number of power units connected together for a parallel circuit configuration.
Dependency: Refer to: r0107, p0107
Note: This parameter is only significant for drive objects A_INFEED and VECTOR with a parallel circuit configuration.
Description: The power unit data set is assigned to a power unit using this parameter.
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a power unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0107, p0107
Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
Description: Detects the main components of the drive object selected via the index.
p0118 Current controller computing dead time / I_ctrl t_dead
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 2000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
p0120 Number of Power unit Data Sets (PDS) / PDS count
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 8 1
p0121[0...n] Power unit component number / PU comp_no
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0
p0124[0...23] Detection of main components using LED / Detection LED
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-79
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Detects the power unit assigned to this drive and data set.
Note: While p0124 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate power unit.
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
Description: Setting to activate/deactivate a power unit component.
Value: 0: Deactivate component
1: Activate component
2: Component, deactivate and not present
Recommend.: After inserting a component, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01317.
Dependency: Refer to: r0126
Refer to: A01317
Caution: It is not permissible to deactivate drive objects with safety functions enabled.
Note: The activation of a component can be rejected if the component was inserted for the first time.
In this case, it is only possible to activate the component when the pulses for all of the drive objects are inhibited.
For units connected in parallel, when one of the power units is deactivated, then the enable in p7001 is withdrawn.
Description: Displays the "active/inactive" state of a power unit component.
Value: 0: Component inactive
1: Component active
Dependency: Refer to: p0105, p0125, p0897
p0124[0...n] Power unit detection via LED / PU detection LED
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p0125[0...n] Activate/deactivate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(4), T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 1
r0126[0...n] Power unit components active/inactive / PU comp act/inact
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-80 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the version of the EPROM data of the power unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0147, r0157
Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
Description: Displays the firmware version of the power unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0148, r0158, r0197, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
Description: Sets the number of Motor Data Sets (MDS).
Description: The motor data set is assigned to a motor using this parameter.
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a motor.
r0127[0...n] Power unit version EPROM data / PU EPROM version
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0128[0...n] Power unit, firmware version / PU FW version
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0130 Number of Motor Data Sets (MDS) / MDS count
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 16 1
p0131[0...n] Motor component number / Mot comp_no
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-81
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Copying a Motor Data Set (MDS) into another.
Index: [0] = Source motor data set
[1] = Target motor data set
[2] = Start copying procedure
Note: Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which motor data set should be copied.
2. In Index 1, enter the motor data set data that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0139[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.
When copying, p0131 is not taken into account.
Description: Sets the number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS).
Note: When parameterizing the drive with "no encoder" there must be at least one encoder data set (p0140 >= 1).
Description: Sets the number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS).
Note: When parameterizing the drive with "no encoder" there must be at least one encoder data set (p0140 >= 1).
Description: This parameter is used to assign the encoder data set to an encoder evaluation (e.g. SMC).
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an encoder evaluation.
Note: If the encoder evaluation and encoder are integrated (motor with DRIVE-CLiQ), then their component numbers are
identical.
For an SMC, different component numbers are assigned for the SMC (p0141) and the (actual) encoder (p0142).
p0139[0...2] Copy Motor Data Set MDS / Copy MDS
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(15) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 31 0
p0140 Number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS) / EDS count
ENCODER Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 1 1
p0140 Number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS) / EDS count
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 16 1
p0141[0...n] Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number / Enc_interf comp_no
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704, 8570
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-82 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: This parameter is used to assign the encoder data set to an encoder.
This assignment is made using the unique component number that was assigned when parameterizing the topol-
ogy.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an encoder.
Note: If the encoder evaluation and encoder are integrated (motor with DRIVE-CLiQ), then their component numbers are
identical.
For an SMC, different component numbers are assigned for the SMC (p0141) and the (actual) encoder (p0142).
Description: Detects the Sensor Module assigned to this drive and data set.
Note: While p0144 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate Sensor Module.
Description: Setting to activate/deactivate an encoder interface (Sensor Module).
Value: 0: Deactivate component
1: Activate component
2: Component, deactivate and not present
Recommend.: After inserting a component, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01317.
Dependency: Refer to: r0146
Refer to: A01317
Note: The deactivation of an encoder interface corresponds to the"parking encoder" function and has the same effect.
The activation of a component can be rejected if the component was inserted for the first time.
In this case, it is only possible to activate the component when the pulses for all of the drive objects are inhibited.
With the encoder interface for encoder 1 (motor encoder), the relevant drive object for writing the parameter must
be in the "Ready for operation" state.
With the encoder interface for encoders 2 and 3, the parameter can also be written during operation.
p0142[0...n] Encoder component number / Encoder comp_no
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0
p0144[0...n] Sensor Module detection via LED / SM detection LED
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p0145[0...n] Activate/deactivate encoder interface / Enc_intf act/deact
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(4), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-83
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the "active" or "inactive" state of an encoder interface (Sensor Module).
Value: 0: Component inactive
1: Component active
Dependency: Refer to: p0105, p0145, p0480, p0897
Description: Displays the version of the EPROM data of the Sensor Module.
Dependency: Refer to: r0127, r0157
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
Description: Displays the firmware version of the Sensor Module.
Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0158, r0197, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
Description: Sets the number of VSM data sets.
r0146[0...n] Encoder interface active/inactive / Enc_intf act/inact
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 -
r0147[0...n] Sensor Module EPROM data version / SM EEPROM version
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0148[0...n] Sensor Module firmware version / SM FW version
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0150 Number of VSM data sets / VSM dat_sets qty.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-84 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: This parameter is used to assign the data set to a DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only the numbers of components operated as hubs can be entered in these parameters.
[0] = DRIVE-CLiQ node 1
[1] = DRIVE-CLiQ node 2
Description: Sets the component number for the Terminal Module.
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a Terminal Module.
Description: The VSM data set is assigned to a VSM evaluation using this parameter.
Description: Detects any DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module that has been assigned.
p0151[0...1] DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module component number / Hub comp_no
HUB Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0
p0151 Terminal Module component number / TM comp_no
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0
p0151[0...n] Voltage Sensing Module component number / VSM comp_no
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0
p0154 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module detection via LED / Hub detection LED
HUB Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-85
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Detects the Terminal Module assigned to this drive and data set.
Note: While p0154 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate Terminal Mod-
ule.
Description: Setting to activate/deactivate a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Value: 0: Deactivate component
1: Activate component
2: Component, deactivate and not present
Recommend.: After inserting a component, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01317.
Dependency: Refer to: r0156
Refer to: A01317
Description: Displays the "active" or "inactive" state of a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Value: 0: Component inactive
1: Component active
Dependency: Refer to: p0155
Description: Displays the version of the EPROM data for the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
p0154 Terminal Module detection via LED / TM detection LED
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p0155[0...n] Voltage Sensing Module, activate/deactivate / VSM act/deact
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(4), T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 1
r0156[0...n] Voltage Sensing Module, active/inactive / VSM act/inact
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 -
r0157 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module EPROM data version / Hub EPROM version
HUB Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-86 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the version of the EPROM data of the Terminal Module.
Dependency: Refer to: r0127, r0147
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
Description: Displays the version of the EPROM data of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
Description: Displays the firmware version of the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Description: Displays the firmware version of the Terminal Module.
Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0197, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
r0157 Terminal Module EPROM data version / TM EPROM version
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0157[0...n] Voltage Sensing Module, EPROM data version / VSM EPROM version
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0158 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module firmware version / Hub FW version
HUB Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0158 Terminal Module Firmware Version / TM FW version
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-87
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the firmware version of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0197, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
Description: Sets the component number for the option board (e.g. Terminal Board 30).
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an option board.
Description: Sets the number of Command Data Sets (CDS).
Note: It is possible to toggle between command parameters (BICO parameters) using this data set changeover.
Description: Sets the number of Drive Data Sets (DDS).
r0158[0...n] Voltage Sensing Module firmware version / VSM FW version
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0161 Option board, component number / Opt board comp_num
TB30 Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9100
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0
p0170 Number of Command Data Sets (CDS) / CDS count
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
2 4 2
p0180 Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS) / DDS count
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 32 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-88 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Using the parameter, each Drive Data Set (= index) is assigned the associated Motor Data Set (MDS).
The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned motor data set.
Description: Using the parameter, each Drive Data Set (= index) is assigned the associated Encoder Data Set (EDS) for
encoder 1.
The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned encoder data set.
Example:
Encoder data set 0 should be assigned to encoder 1 in drive data set 2.
--> p0187[2] = 0
Note: A value of 99 means that no encoder has been assigned to this drive data set (not configured).
Description: Using the parameter, each Drive Data Set (= index) is assigned the associated Encoder Data Set (EDS) for
encoder 2.
The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned encoder data set.
Note: A value of 99 means that no encoder has been assigned to this drive data set (not configured).
Description: Using the parameter, each Drive Data Set (= index) is assigned the associated Encoder Data Set (EDS) for
encoder 3.
The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned encoder data set.
Note: A value of 99 means that no encoder has been assigned to this drive data set (not configured).
p0186[0...n] Motor Data Sets (MDS) number / MDS number
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 15 0
p0187[0...n] Encoder 1 encoder data set number / Enc 1 EDS number
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1580, 8570
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 99
p0188[0...n] Encoder 2 encoder data set number / Enc 2 EDS number
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1580, 8570
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 99
p0189[0...n] Encoder 3 encoder data set number / Enc 3 EDS number
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1580, 8570
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 99
List of parameters
Parameter
1-89
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the properties supported by the power unit firmware.
Notice: This information represents the characteristics/features of the power unit firmware. It does not provide informa-
tion/data about the characteristics/features of the hardware (e.g. bit 06 = 1 means that although the firmware sup-
ports "liquid cooling", a power unit with liquid cooling does not have to be used).
Note: Re bit 09:
The Motor Module supports the internal armature short-circuit. The function is internally required for voltage protec-
tion (p1231 = 3).
Re bit 10:
The Motor Module supports the autonomous internal voltage protection. If the voltage protection function is inter-
nally activated (p1231 = 3) the Motor Module decides autonomously - using the DC link voltage - as to whether the
short-circuit is activated.
Re bit 23:
The component supports the detection of current actual values (and the detection of valve close durations) with
double clocking and phase shift.
r0192 Power unit firmware properties / PU FW property
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Edge modulation possible Yes No -
01 Free telegram can be selected Yes No -
02 Smart mode possible for Active Line Module Yes No -
03 Safety Integrated possible for VECTOR Yes No -
06 Liquid cooling Yes No -
07 SERVO pulse frequency changeover, DDS-
dependent
Yes No -
08 Simulation mode possible Yes No -
09 Internal armature short-circuit possible Yes No -
10 Autonomous internal armature short-circuit
possible
Yes No -
11 Infeed temperature inputs X21.1/2 Yes No -
12 Integral normalized to half the gating unit
clock cycle freq.
Yes No -
13 Filtering thermal power unit current limit
possible
Yes No -
14 DC link compensation possible in power unit Yes No -
15 PT100 temperature evaluation possible Yes No -
16 Gating unit with pulse frequency wobbula-
tion possible
Yes No -
17 Compound brake possible Yes No -
18 Extended voltage range possible Yes No -
19 Gating unit available with current limitation
control
Yes No -
20 Component status possible Yes No -
21 Temperature evaluation via Motor Module /
CU terminals possible
Yes No -
22 Reduced device supply voltage possible Yes no -
23 Current measurement oversampling avail-
able
Yes No -
25 Internal fan operating hours counter avail-
able
Yes No -
26 Software gating unit in the CU is supported Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-90 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the properties supported by the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Description: Displays the status of DRIVE-CLiQ components.
r0196[0...1]: Not used
r0196[2]: Status of DRIVE-CLiQ component with component number 2
...
r0196[255]: Status of DRIVE-CLiQ component with component number 255
Note: Structure of status value: Bits 31 ... 08, 07, 06 ... 04, 03 ... 00
Re Bit 31 ... 08: Reserved
Re Bit 07: 1: Part of target topology, 0: Only in actual topology
Re Bit 06 ... 04: 1: Active, 0: Inactive or parked
Re bit 03 ... 00:
0: Component data not available.
1: Power-up, acyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication (LED = orange).
2: Ready for operation, cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication (LED = green).
3: Alarm (LED = green).
4: Fault (LED = red).
5: Detection via LED and ready for operation (LED = green/orange).
6: Detection via LED and alarm (LED = green/orange).
7: Detection via LED and fault (LED = red/orange).
8: Downloading firmware (LED = green/red at 0.5 Hz).
9: Firmware downloading completed, Waiting for POWER ON (LED = green/red at 2.0 Hz).
Description: Displays the bootloader version.
Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0158, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
r0194[0...n] VSM properties / VSM properties
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Reserved Yes No -
r0196[0...255] DRIVE-CLiQ component status / DLQ comp status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0197 Bootloader version / Bootloader vers
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-91
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the BIOS and EEPROM data version.
Re r0198[0]
Displays the BIOS version.
Re r0198[1]
Displays the EEPROM data version.
Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0158, r0197
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
Description: Freely assignable name for a drive object.
In the commissioning software, this name cannot be entered using the expert list, but is specified in the configura-
tion assistant. The object name can be subsequently modified in the Project Navigator using standard Windows
resources.
Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Displays the unique code number of the power unit.
Note: No power unit found: r0200 = p0201.
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
Description: Sets the actual code number from r0200 to acknowledge the power unit being used.
When commissioned for the first time, the code number is automatically transferred from r0200 into p0201.
Dependency: Refer to: F07815
r0198[0...1] BIOS and EEPROM data version / BIOS/EEPROM vers
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0199[0...24] Drive object name / DO name
All objects Can be changed: C1 Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
r0200[0...n] Power unit code number actual / PU code no. act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0201[0...n] Power unit code number / PU code no
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(2) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-92 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: When p0201 = 10000, the rated power unit data is reloaded and dependent parameters are set (e.g. p0205, p0210,
p0230, p0857, p1800). p0201 is then automatically assigned the value of r0200 if the code number of the power
unit could be read. A warm start must be performed after this procedure (automatically if necessary).
Note: The parameter is used to identify when the drive is being commissioned for the first time.
The power unit commissioning can only be exited (p0201 = r0200), if the actual and acknowledged code numbers
are identical (p0010 = 2). However, if the comparator in p9906 or p9908 is at 2 (low) or 3 (minimum), the power unit
commissioning is automatically set to p0201 = r0200 upon exiting.
When the code number is changed, the connection voltage (p0210) is checked and, if necessary, adjusted.
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
Description: Displays the name of the memory card in ASCII code.
r0203[0]: Name character 1
...
r0203[15]: Name character 16
For the commissioning software, the ASCII characters are displayed uncoded.
Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual:
Description: Displays the type of power unit found.
Value: 2: MICROMASTER 440
3: MICROMASTER 411
4: MICROMASTER 410
5: MICROMASTER 436
6: MICROMASTER 440 PX
7: MICROMASTER 430
100: SINAMICS S
101: SINAMICS S (value)
102: SINAMICS S (combi)
112: PM220 (SINAMICS G120)
113: PM230 (SINAMICS G120)
114: PM240 (SINAMICS G120)
115: PM250 (SINAMICS G120)
116: PM260 (SINAMICS G120)
118: SINAMICS G120 Px
120: PM340 (SINAMICS S120)
150: SINAMICS G
200: SINAMICS GM
250: SINAMICS SM
260: SINAMICS SM120
300: SINAMICS GL
350: SINAMICS SL
400: SINAMICS DCM
Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
r0203[0...15] Memory card name / Sp_card name
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0203[0...n] Actual power unit type / PU actual type
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
2 400 -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-93
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the properties supported by the power unit hardware.
Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
Description: Overloading the load duty cycles applies under the prerequisite that before and after the overload, the drive con-
verter is operated with its base load current - in this case, a load duty cycle of 300 s is used as basis.
For booksize drive units, the following applies:
Only the setting p0205 = 0 can be selected. In this particular case, the base load current has a load duty cycle of
150 % for 60 s and 176 % for 30 s.
For chassis units, the following applies:
The base load current for a slight overload condition is based on a load duty cycle 110 % for 60 s and 150 % for 10
s.
The base load current for a high overload condition is based on a load duty cycle 150 % for 60 s and 160 % for 10 s.
Value: 0: Load duty cycle with high overload for vector drives
1: Load duty cycle with low overload for vector drives
6: S1 duty cycle for servo drives (feed drive)
7: S6 duty cycle for servo drives (spindle drive)
Note: When the parameter is changed, all of the motor parameters and the control mode are pre-assigned according to
the selected application.
The parameter has not influence when calculating the thermal overload.
p0205 can only be changed to the settings that are saved in the power unit EEPROM.
The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (see p0010 = 30, p0970).
r0204[0...n] Power unit hardware properties / PU HW property
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Device type DC/AC device AC/AC device -
01 RFI filter available Yes No -
02 Active Line Module available Yes No -
03 Smart Line Module available Yes No -
04 Basic Line Module available with thyristor
bridge
Yes No -
05 Basic Line Module available with diode
bridge
Yes No -
06 Liquid cooling with cooling system (chassis
PU)
Yes No -
07 F3E regenerative feedback into the line sup-
ply
Yes No -
08 Internal Braking Module Yes No -
09 Different cooling type supported Yes No -
12 Safe Brake Control (SBC) supported No Yes -
13 Safety Integrated supported Yes No -
14 Internal LC output filter Yes No -
p0205 Power unit application / PU application
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 2) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 7 6
Parameter
List of parameters
1-94 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles.
Index: [0] = Rating plate
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 cont duty cyc
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp
Refer to: p0100, p0205
Description: Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles.
Index: [0] = Rating plate
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 cont duty cyc
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: Refer to: p0205
Description: Displays the rated line supply voltage of the power unit.
r0208 = 400 : 380 - 480 V +/-10 %
r0208 = 500 : 500 - 600 V +/-10 %
r0208 = 690 : 660 - 690 V +/-10 %
For the Basic Line Module (BLM) the following applies:
r0208 = 690 : 500 - 690 V +/-10 %
r0206[0...4] Rated power unit power / PU P_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: 14_6 Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
r0207[0...4] Rated power unit current / PU PI_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8014
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r0208 Rated power unit line supply voltage / PU V_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-95
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the maximum output current of the power unit.
Index: [0] = Catalog
[1] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[3] = S1 load duty cycle
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: Refer to: p0205
Description: Sets the drive unit supply voltage.
AC/AC unit: The rms value of the phase-to-phase line supply voltage should be entered.
DC/AC unit: The rated DC voltage of the connection busbar should be entered.
Dependency: Set p1254, p1294 (automatic detection of the Vdc switch-on levels) = 0.
The switch-in thresholds of the Vdc_max controller are then directly determined using p0210.
The parameter can be reduced to p0210 = 100 V if p0212 bit 0 has been set.
Refer to: p0212
Caution: If the line supply voltage is higher than the entered value, the Vdc controller may be automatically deactivated in
some cases to prevent the motor from accelerating. In this case, an appropriate alarm is output.
Note: Setting ranges for p0210 as a function of the rated power unit voltage:
V_rated = 400 V:
- p0210 = 380 ... 480 V (AC/AC), 510 ... 720 V (DC/AC)
V_rated = 500 V:
- p0210 = 500 ... 600 V (AC/AC), 675 ... 900 V (DC/AC)
V_rated = 660 V ... 690 V:
- p0210 = 660 ... 690 V (AC/AC), 890 ... 1035 V (DC/AC)
V_rated = 500 V ... 690 V:
- p0210 = 500 ... 690 V (AC/AC), 675 ... 1035 V (DC/AC)
The pre-charging switch-in threshold for the DC link voltage (Vdc) is calculated from p0210:
Vdc_pre = p0210 * 0.82 * 1.35 (AC/AC)
Vdc_pre = p0210 * 0.82 (DC/AC)
r0209[0...4] Power unit, maximum current / PU I_max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8750, 8850,
8950
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
p0210 Drive unit line supply voltage / Supply voltage
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(2), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 [V] 63000 [V] 600 [V]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-96 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
The undervoltage thresholds for the DC link voltage (Vdc) are calculated from p0210 as a function of the rated
power unit voltage:
V_rated = 400 V:
- V_min = p0210 * 0.78 (AC/AC) > 330 V, p0210 * 0.60 (DC/AC) > 380 V
V_rated = 500 V:
- V_min = p0210 * 0.76 (AC/AC) > 410 V
V_rated = 660 V ... 690 V:
- V_min = p0210 * 0.82 (AC/AC) > 565 V, p0210 * 0.63 (DC/AC) > 650 V
V_rated = 500 V ... 690 V:
- V_min = p0210 * 0.82 (AC/AC) > 420 V, p0210 * 0.63 (DC/AC) > 480 V
Description: Configuration of the power unit.
Dependency: Reduced supply voltages (bit 0 = 1) are only possible on booksize power units.
Bit 0 = 1 can only be set if r0192 bit 22 = 1.
Refer to: r0192, p0210
Caution: Re bit 00:
Working with reduced input voltages deactivates undervoltage detection.
Note: Re bit 00 = 0:
It is not possible to reduce the supply voltage in p0210.
Re bit 00 = 1:
With this setting the supply voltage in p0210 can be reduced to 100 V.
Only operating mode p1300 = 19 is possible.
Description: Sets the type of the filter at the motor side.
Value: 0: No filter
1: Motor reactor
2: dv/dt filter
3: Sine-wave filter, Siemens
4: Sine-wave filter, third-party
p0212 Power unit configuration / PU configuration
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(2) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Reduced device supply voltage Yes No -
p0230 Drive filter type, motor side / Drv filt type mot
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 2) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-97
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: The following parameters are influenced using p0230:
p0230 = 1:
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
p0230 = 3:
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
--> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance
--> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction
--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number
--> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter
--> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol
--> p1811 (modulator configuration) = wobbulation amplitude
--> p1909 (motor data identification, control word) = only Rs measurement
p0230 = 4:
--> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction
--> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol
--> p1811 (modulator configuration) = wobbulation amplitude
--> p1909 (motor data identification, control word) = only Rs measurement
The user must set the following parameters according to the data sheet of the sine-wave filter and also the user
must check whether they are permitted.
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
--> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance
--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number
--> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter
Refer to: p0233, p0234, p0290, p1082, p1800, p1802
Note: if a filter type cannot be selected, then this filter type is not permitted for the Motor Module.
p0230 = 1:
The output frequency of booksize/blocksize power units with output reactors is restricted to 120 Hz.
p0230 = 2:
Chassis-type power units with dv/dt filter, depending on the rated pulse frequency, may only be operated with a
maximum pulse frequency of p1800 = 2.5 kHz or 4 kHz. The output frequency is limited to 150 Hz.
p0230 = 3:
Sine-wave filters with a rated pulse frequency of 1.25 or 2.5 kHz should only be operated with a current controller
sampling rate p0115[0] = 400 µs, sine-wave filters with a rated pulse frequency of 2 or 4 kHz with p0115[0] = 250
µs.
The sine-wave filter cannot be selected if the current controller sampling rate has not been appropriately set.
Chassis power units with sine-wave filter are limited to output frequencies of 115 Hz or 150 Hz.
Description: Enter the inductance of a filter connected at the power unit output.
Dependency: This parameter is automatically preset when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power
unit.
Refer to: p0230
Note: When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIE-
MENS filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside the
commissioning phase (p0010 = 0) and then the controller calculation (p0340 = 3) is carried out.
p0233 Power unit motor reactor / PU mot reactor
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(2), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [mH] 1000.000 [mH] 0.000 [mH]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-98 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Enters the capacitance of a sine-wave filter connected at the power unit output.
Dependency: This parameter is automatically preset when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power
unit.
Refer to: p0230
Note: The parameter value includes the sum of all of the capacitances of a phase connected in series (phase - ground).
When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIE-
MENS filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside the
commissioning phase (p0010 = 0).
Description: Number of reactors connected at the power unit output.
Dependency: Refer to: p0230
Caution: If the number of motor reactors connected in series does not correspond to the parameter value, then this can
result in an unfavorable control behavior.
Note: The parameter cannot be changed for chassis units and for p0230 = 1.
Description: Displays the internal resistance of the power unit (IGBT and line resistance).
Note: For a parallel circuit, the value corresponds to the resistance of a power unit.
Index 0 refers to the first line filter from p0220[0].
Index 1 refers to the optional second line filter from p0220[1].
Description: Sets the cooling type for booksize compact power units.
This therefore defines whether for these power units, the internal air cooling is shut down and instead, the "Cold-
Plate" cooling type is used.
p0234 Power unit sine-wave filter capacitance / PU sine filter C
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(2), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [µF] 1000.000 [µF] 0.000 [µF]
p0235 Number of reactors connected in series / Qty L in series
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 2) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 3 1
r0238 Power unit internal resistance / PU R_int
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
p0249 Power unit cooling type / PU cool type
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 2) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-99
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Value: 0: Air cooling int
1: Cold-Plate
Note: For booksize compact power units, there is a 4 at the 5th position in the Order No.
The parameter is irrelevant for all other power unit types.
Description: Displays the power unit fan operating hours.
The number of hours operated can only be reset to 0 in this parameter (e.g. after a fan has been replaced).
Dependency: Refer to: p0252
Description: Sets the maximum operating time of the power unit fan.
The pre-alarm (warning) is output 500 hours before this set value.
The monitoring is deactivated with p0252 = 0.
Dependency: Refer to: p0251
Note: For chassis units, the maximum operating time in the power unit parameter is set to 50000 via the factory setting.
Description: Sets the monitoring time for internal monitoring of the contactor feedback contacts.
Index: [0] = Pre-charge contactor
[1] = Bridging contactor
Dependency: Refer to: F30060, F30061
Note: This parameter is only effective for chassis power units with 3 AC line connection and line contactors.
A value of 0 deactivates the associated line contactor monitoring.
p0251[0...n] Operating hours counter power unit fan / PU fan t_oper
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [h] 4294967295 [h] 0 [h]
p0252 Maximum operating time power unit fan / PU fan t_oper max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [h] 100000 [h] 40000 [h]
p0255[0...1] Power unit contactor monitoring time / PU contactor t_mon
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 6500 [ms] 0 [ms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-100 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets starting time 1 to monitor the cooling system after power-on command.
After powering up, the following signals must be present within starting time 1:
- "RKA powered up"
- "RKA liquid flow OK"
When a fault occurs, an appropriate message is output.
Dependency: Refer to: F49152, F49153
Note: RKA: Cooling system
Description: Sets starting time 2 to monitor the cooling system after power-on command.
After powering up, the following signals must be present within starting time 2:
- "RKA conductivity, no fault"
- "RKA conductivity, no alarm"
When a fault occurs, an appropriate message is output.
Dependency: Refer to: p0266
Refer to: F49151, A49171
Description: Sets the delay time for the fault "RKA: Conductive limit value exceeded" during operation.
The fault is only output if, during operation, the conductivity exceeds the permissible fault value and the value
remains for a longer time than is set in this parameter.
Dependency: Refer to: F49151
p0260 Cooling system, starting time 1 / RKA start time 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Cooling system)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 60.0 [s] 5.0 [s]
p0261 Cooling system, starting time 2 / RKA start time 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Cooling system)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 1200.0 [s] 180.0 [s]
p0262 Cooling system, fault conductivity delay time / RKA cond t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Cooling system)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 30.0 [s] 0.0 [s]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-101
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the delay time for the fault "RKA: Liquid flow too low".
The fault is only output if the cause is present for a time longer than is set in this parameter.
Dependency: Refer to: F49153
Description: Sets the run-up time of the cooling system after a power-off command.
Description: Displays the control word for the cooling system.
Description: Sets the signal sources for the feedback signals from the cooling system.
Index: [0] = Cooling system powered up
[1] = Cooling system ready to be powered up
[2] = Cooling system, no alarm present
[3] = Cooling system, no fault present
[4] = Cooling system, no leaked liquid
[5] = Cooling system, liquid flow OK
[6] = Cooling system, conductivity < fault threshold
[7] = Cooling system, conductivity < alarm threshold
p0263 Cooling system fault liquid flow, delay time / RKA flow t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Cooling system)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 20.0 [s] 3.0 [s]
p0264 Cooling system, run-on time / RKA run-on time
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Cooling system)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 180.0 [s] 30.0 [s]
r0265.0...3 BO: Cooling system, control word / RKA CTW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Cooling system)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Power up cooling system Activating Deactivating -
01 Message converter off Off On -
02 Acknowledge faults Acknowledgement No acknowledgement -
03 Leakage sensing OK No leaked liquid Leaked liquid -
p0266[0...7] BI: Cooling system, feedback signals, signal source / RKA fdbk S_src
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Cooling system)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-102 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status word of the cooling system.
Dependency: Refer to: p0266
Description: Sets the absolute value by which the threshold to initiate the undervoltage fault (F30003) is reduced.
Dependency: Refer to: p0210, r0296
Refer to: F30003
Notice: When using a Control Supply Module (CSM) for 24 V supply from the DC link, the minimum continuous DC link volt-
age may not lie below 430 V. DC link voltages in the range 300 ... 430 V are permissible up to a duration of 1 min.
Note: The resulting shutdown threshold can be read in r0296 and is dependent on the selected rated voltage (p0210) and
the power unit being used.
Description: Sets the shutdown thresholds for the ground fault monitoring.
The setting is made as a percentage of the maximum power unit current (r0209).
Index: [0] = Threshold for pulse inhibit
[1] = Threshold for pulse enable
Dependency: Refer to: F30021
r0267.0...7 BO: Cooling system status word / RKA ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Cooling system)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 RKA powered up Yes No -
01 RKA ready to be powered up Yes No -
02 RKA no alarm present Yes No -
03 RKA no fault present Yes No -
04 RKA no leaked fluid Yes No -
05 RKA liquid flow OK Yes No -
06 RKA conductivity, no fault Yes No 9974
07 RKA conductivity, no alarm Yes No 9974
p0278 DC link voltage undervoltage threshold reduction / Vdc V_under red
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-80 [V] 0 [V] 0 [V]
p0287[0...1] Ground fault monitoring thresholds / Gnd flt threshold
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 100.0 [%] [0] 6.0 [%]
[1] 16.0 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-103
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The parameter only applies to booksize and chassis power units.
Deactivating the ground fault monitoring:
- Sequence: --> p0287[1] = 0 --> p0287[0] = 0
- irrespective of the firmware version of the power unit.
Sets the thresholds:
- the prerequisite is at least firmware version 2.2 of the power unit.
Description: Displays the actual maximum output current of the power unit taking into account derating factors.
Description: Sets the response to a thermal overload condition of the power unit.
The following quantities can result in a response to thermal overload:
- heat sink temperature (r0037.0)
- chip temperature (r0037.1)
- power unit overload I2T (r0036)
Possible measures to avoid thermal overload:
- reduce the output current limit r0289 and r0067 (for closed-loop speed/velocity or torque/force control) or the out-
put frequency (for V/f control) indirectly via the output current limit and the intervention of the current limiting control-
ler).
- reduce the pulse frequency (only for vector control).
A reduction, if parameterized, is always realized after an appropriate alarm is output.
Value: 0: Reduce output current or output frequency
1: No reduction, shutdown when overload threshold is reached
2: Reduce I_output or f_output and f_pulse (not using I2t)
3: Reduce the pulse frequency (not using I2t)
Dependency: If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only responses can be selected without
pulse frequency reduction (p0290 = 0, 1).
If a fault or alarm is present, then r2135.13 or r2135.15 is set.
Refer to: r0036, r0037, r0108, p0108, p0230, r2135
Refer to: A05000, A05001, A07805
Caution: If the thermal overload of the power unit is not sufficiently reduced by the actions taken, the drive is always shut
down. This means that the power unit is always protected irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
Note: The setting p0290 = 0, 2 is only practical if the load decreases with decreasing speed (e.g. for applications with vari-
able torque such as for pumps and fans).
Under overload conditions, the current and torque limit are reduced, and therefore the motor is braked and forbid-
den speed ranges (e.g. minimum speed p1080 and suppression [skip] speeds p1091 ... p1094) can be passed
through.
For p0290 = 2, 3, the I2t overload detection of the power unit does not influence the responses.
When the motor data identification routine is selected, p290 cannot be changed.
r0289 CO: Maximum power unit output current / PU I_outp max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
p0290 Power unit overload response / PU overld response
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8014
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-104 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Temperature alarm threshold for the difference from the chip and heat sink temperature in the thermal model.
Dependency: Refer to: r0037
Refer to: F30024
Note: The parameter is only relevant for chassis power units.
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the I2t power unit overload.
Drive:
If this threshold is exceeded, an overload alarm is generated and the system responds as parameterized in p0290.
Infeed:
When the threshold value is exceeded, only an overload alarm is output.
Dependency: Refer to: r0036, p0290
Refer to: A07805
Note: The I2t fault threshold is 100 %. If this value is exceeded, fault F30005 is output.
Description: Sets the fan run-on time after the pulses for the power unit have been canceled.
Note: Under certain circumstances, the fan can continue to run for longer than was set (e.g. as a result of the excessively
high heat sink temperature).
For values less than 1 s, a 1 s run on time for the fan is effective.
r0293 CO: Power unit alarm threshold model temperature / PU Tmodel_A_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
p0294 Power unit alarm with I2t overload / PU I2t alrm thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8014
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 95.0 [%]
p0295 Fan run-on time / Fan run-on time
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [s] 600 [s] 0 [s]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-105
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: If the DC link voltage falls below this threshold, the Motor Module is shut down due to a DC link undervoltage condi-
tion (F30003).
Dependency: Refer to: p0278
Refer to: F30003
Note: For booksize units, the following applies:
The undervoltage threshold can be reduced with p0278.
Description: If the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold specified here, the drive unit is tripped due to DC link overvoltage.
Dependency: Refer to: F30002
Description: Selects the motor type or starts to read in the motor parameters for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ (p0300 = 10000 or
10001, if there is a second data set).
The following applies for p0300 < 10000: The first digit of the parameter value always defines the general motor
type and corresponds to the third-party motor belonging to a motor list:
1 = Rotating induction motor
2 = Rotating synchronous motor
3 = Linear induction motor (reserved)
4 = Linear synchronous motor
5 = Synchronous motor separately-excited
7 = SIEMOSYN motor
8 = Reluctance motor
The type information must be entered to filter motor-specific parameters and to optimize the operating characteris-
tics and behavior. For example, for synchronous motors, power factor (p0308) is neither used nor displayed (in the
BOP/AOP).
r0296 DC link voltage undervoltage threshold / Vdc V_lower_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
r0297 DC link voltage overvoltage threshold / Vdc V_upper_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8750, 8760,
8850, 8864, 8950, 8964
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 6310
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 10001 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-106 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Value: 0: No motor
1: Induction motor (rotating)
2: Synchronous motor (rotating, permanent-magnet)
5: Synchronous motor (separately excited)
7: SIEMOSYN motor
8: Reluctance motor
11: 1LA1 standard induction motor
12: 1LE2 standard induction motor (NEMA)
15: 1LA5 standard induction motor
16: 1LA6 standard induction motor
17: 1LA7 standard induction motor
18: 1LA8 / 1PQ8 standard induction motor
102: 1PH2 induction motor
104: 1PH4 induction motor
107: 1PH7 induction motor
108: 1PH8 induction motor
134: 1PM4 induction motor
136: 1PM6 induction motor
166: 1PL6 induction motor
283: 1FW3 synchronous motor
10000: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ
10001: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ 2nd data set
Dependency: Motors, selection 206, 236, 237 cannot be operated (also not as motor with DRIVE-CLiQ).
p0300 = 5 cannot be selected with SINAMICS G.
When the motor type is changed, the code number in p0301 may be reset to 0.
p0300 = 12 can only be selected for p0100 = 1 (NEMA).
When selecting a motor type from the 1LA5 and 1LA7 series, parameters p0335, p0626, p0627 and p0628 of the
thermal motor model are pre-assigned as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Refer to: p0301
Caution: A permanent-magnet synchronous motor cannot be operated with an SSI encoder without HTL/TTL track.
A separately-excited synchronous motor can only be operated with an SSI encoder if this is used as the second
encoder and an HTL/TTL encoder is used as the first encoder.
Caution: If a catalog motor is selected (p0300 >= 100) and an associated motor code number (p0301), then the parame-
ters,that are associated with this list cannot be changed (write protection). The write protection is canceled if the
motor type p0300 is set to a non-Siemens motor that matches p0301 (e.g. p0300 = 2 for p0301 = 2xxxx). Write pro-
tection is automatically canceled when the results of motor data identification are copied to the motor parameters.
Notice: If required, the list of motor codes/encoder codes can be found in the Appendix of the List Manual.
For 1PQ8 motors (p0300 = 18) the fan type p0335 should be set to 5.
Note: With p0300 = 10000, for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, the motor parameters are automatically downloaded, with
p0300 = 10001, the motor parameters of a second data set (if available).
If a motor type has not been selected (p0300 = 0), then the drive commissioning routine cannot be exited.
A motor type with a value above p0300 >= 100 describes motors for which a motor parameter list exists.
Motor types with a value below p0300 < 100 correspond to the selection of a third-party motor. When appropriately
selected, this means that the motor parameters are pre-assigned the settings for a third-party motor.
This also applies for parameters for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ. In this case p0300 can only be set to p0300 = 10000
or 10001 (read motor parameters) or to the corresponding non-Siemens motor (first digit of the motor code number)
in order to be able to cancel the write protection.
List of parameters
Parameter
1-107
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The parameter is used to select a motor from a motor parameter list.
When changing the code number (with the exception to the value 0), all of the motor parameters are pre-assigned
from the internally available parameter lists.
Dependency: Code numbers can only be selected for motor types that correspond to the motor type selected in p0300. For 1PH2,
1PH4, 1PH7, 1PM4, 1PM6, 1FT6 motors, code numbers are also possible, whose fourth decimal position is greater
by a value of 1 or 2 than the matching motor type in p0300. For 1FE1 motors, the third decimal position can be
higher by a value of 1.
Refer to: p0300
Notice: If required, the list of motor codes/encoder codes can be found in the Appendix of the List Manual.
Note: The motor code number can only be changed if the matching catalog motor was first selected in p0300.
For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, p0301 cannot be changed. In this case, p0301 is automatically written to the code
number of the motor parameter read in (r0302) if p0300 is set to 10000.
When selecting a catalog motor (p0300 >= 100), drive commissioning can only be exited if a code number is
selected.
Description: Displays the motor code number from the saved motor data from a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
Note: Drive commissioning can only be exited if the code number that was downloaded (r0302) matches the stored code
number (p0301). If the numbers differ, then the motor data set should be re-loaded using p0300 = 10000.
The motor data are always expected from the first encoder that is assigned to the drive data sets (refer to p0187 =
encoder 1) data set number.
The value is not updated cyclically but only on specific events (e.g. update DRIVE-CLiQ device).
r0302 = 0: No motor with DRIVE-CLiQ found
Description: Displays the status word of the automatic motor parameter sensing of a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
Motor parameter sensing takes place during warm restarts, following downloading, and when powering up, if the
SMI is connected to the Motor Module and the encoder is activated (see p0145).
If the motor data is reloaded (p0300 = 10000, 10001), r0303 is also updated.
p0301[0...n] Motor code number selection / Mot code No. sel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
r0302[0...n] Motor code number of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ / Motor code Mot DLQ
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0303[0...n] Motor status word of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ / Mot ZSW Mot DLQ
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-108 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p0145, p0300
Note: Re bit 0: Value 0 indicates that the first SMI data set is selected, value 1 indicates that the second is selected
[MDS].
Re bit 1: Displays the connection type for the winding [MDS].
Re bit 2: Displays whether the windings can be changed over.
Re bit 3: Value 0 indicates that no windings that can be changed over are present, value 1 indicates that two are
present.
Description: Sets the rated motor voltage (rating plate).
Dependency: Refer to: p0349
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account.
Description: Sets the rated motor current (rating plate).
Dependency: Refer to: p0349
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Notice: If p0305 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned
accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3).
If the rated motor current exceeds twice the maximum drive converter current (r0209), then the maximum current is
reduced due to the current harmonics that increase overproportionally (r0067).
Note: When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Motor data sets selection Two One -
01 Motor connection type Delta Star -
02 Windings are switchable can be chng over cannot be chg over -
03 Number of switchable windings bit 0 2 0 -
p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot V_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 6300, 6724
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [Vrms] 20000 [Vrms] 0 [Vrms]
p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-109
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Number of motors that can be operated in parallel using one motor data set.
Depending on the motor number entered, internally an equivalent motor is calculated.
The following should be carefully observed for motors connected in series:
The following rating plate data should only be entered for one motor:
- resistances and inductances: p0350 ... p0361
- currents: p0305, p0320, p0323, p0325, p0329, p0389, p0390, p0391, p0392
- power ratings: p0307
- masses/moments of inertia: p0341, p0344
All other parameters take into account the replacement/equivalent motor (e.g. r0331, r0333).
Dependency: Refer to: r0331
Caution: The motors to be connected in parallel must be of the same type and size (same order no. (MLFB)).
The mounting regulations when connecting motors in parallel must be carefully maintained! Especially for synchro-
nous motors, the pole position of motors that are rigidly coupled with one another (mechanically) must be identical.
The number of motors set must correspond to the number of motors that are actually connected in parallel.
After changing p0306, it is imperative that the control parameters are adapted (e.g. using automatic calculation with
p0340 = 1).
Notice: If p0306 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is appropriately pre-
assigned. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3).
Note: Only operation with V/f characteristic makes sense if more than 10 identical motors are connected in parallel.
Separately-excited synchronous motors must not be connected in parallel. Synchronous and reluctance motors that
are not coupled with one another align themselves when the pulses are switched in. If the motors have different
load levels, then equalization currents flow between the motors.
Description: Sets the rated motor power (rating plate).
Dependency: IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp
Refer to: p0100
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
For generators, a negative rated power should be entered.
p0306[0...n] Number of motors connected in parallel / Motor qty
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 50 1
p0307[0...n] Rated motor power / Mot P_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 14_6 Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00 [kW] 100000.00 [kW] 0.00 [kW]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-110 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the rated motor power factor (cos phi, rating plate).
For a parameter value of 0.000, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332.
Dependency: This parameter is only available for IEC motors (p0100 = 0).
Refer to: p0100, p0309, r0332
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Description: Sets the rated motor efficiency (rating plate).
For a parameter value of 0.0, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332.
Dependency: This parameter is only available for NEMA motors (p0100 = 1).
Refer to: p0100, p0308, r0332
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Description: Sets the rated motor frequency (rating plate).
Dependency: The number of pole pairs (r0313) is automatically recalculated when the parameter is changed (together with
p0311), if p0314 = 0.
The rated frequency is restricted to values between 1.00 Hz and 650.00 Hz.
Refer to: p0311, r0313, p0314
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Notice: If p0310 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also asso-
ciated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
p0308[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 1.000 0.000
p0309[0...n] Rated motor efficiency / Mot eta_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 99.9 [%] 0.0 [%]
p0310[0...n] Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-111
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the rated motor speed (rating plate).
For VECTOR the following applies (p0107):
For p0311 = 0, the rated motor slip of induction motors is internally calculated and displayed in r0330.
It is especially important to correctly enter the rated motor speed for vector control and slip compensation for V/f
control.
Dependency: If p0311 is changed and for p0314 = 0, the pole pair (r0313) is recalculated automatically.
Refer to: p0310, r0313, p0314
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Notice: If p0311 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also asso-
ciated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
Description: Displays the number of motor pole pairs. The value is used for internal calculations.
Values:
r0313 = 1: 2-pole motor
r0313 = 2: 4-pole motor
etc.
Dependency: For p0314 > 0, the entered value is displayed in r0313.
For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number (r0313) is automatically calculated from the rated power (p0307), rated fre-
quency (p0310) and rated speed (p0311).
Refer to: p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314
Note: For the automatic calculation, the pole pair number is set to the value of 2 if the rated speed or the rated frequency
is zero.
Description: Sets the motor pole pair number.
Values:
p0314 = 1: 2-pole motor
p0314 = 2: 4-pole motor
etc.
p0311[0...n] Rated motor speed / Mot n_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [rpm] 210000.0 [rpm] 0.0 [rpm]
r0313[0...n] Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) / Mot PolePairNo act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 5300
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0314[0...n] Motor pole pair number / Mot pole pair No.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-112 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number is automatically calculated from the rated frequency (p0310) and the rated
speed (p0311) and displayed in r0313.
Notice: If p0314 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also asso-
ciated with quick commissioning, is appropriately pre-assigned. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
For induction motors, the value need only be input if the rated data of a generator is entered therefore resulting in a
negative rated slip. In this case, the number of pole pairs in r0313 is too low by 1 and must be manually corrected.
Description: Sets the torque constant of the synchronous motor.
p0316 = 0: The torque constant is calculated from the motor data.
p0316 > 0: The selected value is used as torque constant.
Dependency: Refer to: r0334
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
Description: Sets the stall current for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: The parameter is used for the I2t monitoring of the motor (refer to p0611).
This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
Description: Induction motors:
Sets the rated motor magnetizing current.
For p0320 = 0.000 the magnetizing current is internally calculated and displayed in r0331.
Synchronous motors:
Sets the rated motor short-circuit current.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
p0316[0...n] Motor torque constant / Mot kT
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 28_1 Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm/A] 400.00 [Nm/A] 0.00 [Nm/A]
p0318[0...n] Motor stall current / Mot I_standstill
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8017
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
p0320[0...n] Motor rated magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 5722
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [Arms] 5000.000 [Arms] 0.000 [Arms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-113
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The magnetization current p0320 for induction motors (not for catalog motors) is reset when quick commissioning is
exited with p3900 > 0.
VECTOR: If, for induction motors, the magnetizing current p0320 is changed outside the commissioning phase
(p0010 > 0), then the magnetizing inductance p0360 is changed so that the EMF r0337 remains constant.
Description: Sets the maximum motor speed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Notice: If p0322 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also asso-
ciated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
Description: Sets the maximum permissible motor current (e.g. demagnetizing current for synchronous motors).
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Notice: If p0323 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned
accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3).
Note: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
The parameter has no effect for induction motors.
The parameter has not effect for synchronous motors if a value of 0.0 is entered. The user-selectable current limit is
entered into p0640.
Description: Sets the electrical maximum speed of the winding.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Notice: If p0324 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also asso-
ciated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
p0322[0...n] Maximum motor speed / Mot n_max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [rpm] 210000.0 [rpm] 0.0 [rpm]
p0323[0...n] Maximum motor current / Mot I_max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 5722
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 20000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
p0324[0...n] Winding maximum speed / Winding n_max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [rpm] 210000.0 [rpm] 0.0 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-114 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the current for the 1st phase of the two-stage technique for pole position identification routine.
The current of the 2nd phase is set in p0329.
The two-stage technique is selected with p1980 = 4.
Dependency: Refer to: p0329, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990
Notice: When the motor code (p0301) is changed, it is possible that p0325 is not pre-assigned.
p0325 can be pre-assigned using p0340 = 3.
Note: The value is automatically pre-assigned for the following events:
- For p0325 = 0 and automatic calculation of the closed-loop control parameters (p0340 = 1, 2, 3).
- for quick commissioning (p3900 = 1, 2, 3).
Description: Sets the optimum load angle for synchronous motors with reluctance torque (e.g. 1FE ... motors).
This parameter has no significance for induction motors.
SERVO: The load angle is measured at 1.5 x rated motor current.
VECTOR: The load angle is measured at the rated motor current.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, a angle of 90 degrees must be set.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Description: Sets the reluctance torque constant for synchronous motors with reluctance torque (e.g. 1FE ... motors).
This parameter has no significance for induction motors.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, the value 0 must be set.
p0325[0...n] Motor pole position identification current, 1st phase / Mot PolID I 1st ph
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [Arms] 10000.000 [Arms] 0.000 [Arms]
p0327[0...n] Optimum motor load angle / Mot phi_load opt
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 5722
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [°] 135.0 [°] 90.0 [°]
p0328[0...n] Motor reluctance torque constant / Mot kT_reluctance
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [mH] 1000.00 [mH] 0.00 [mH]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-115
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the current for the pole position identification routine.
For a two-stage technique, the current is set for the second phase.
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Description: Displays the rated motor slip.
Dependency: The rated slip is calculated from the rated frequency, rated speed and number of pole pairs.
Refer to: p0310, p0311, r0313
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Description: Induction motor:
Displays the rated magnetizing current from p0320.
For p0320 = 0, the internally calculated magnetizing current is displayed.
Synchronous motor:
Displays the rated short-circuit current from p0320.
Dependency: If p0320 was not entered, then the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.
Note: In the case of multi-motor operation r0331 is increased by the factor p0306 compared to p0320.
p0329[0...n] Motor pole position identification current / Mot PolID current
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
r0330[0...n] Rated motor slip / Mot slip_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
r0331[0...n] Actual motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rtd act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 5722, 6722,
6724
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-116 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the rated power factor for induction motors.
For IEC motors, the following applies (p0100 = 0):
For p0308 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed.
For p0308 > 0, this value is displayed.
For NEMA motors, the following applies (p0100 = 1):
For p0309 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed.
For p0309 > 0, this value is converted into the power factor and displayed.
Dependency: If p0308 is not entered, the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Description: Displays the rated motor torque.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft
Note: For induction and reluctance motors, r0333 is calculated from p0307 and p0311.
For synchronous motors, r0333 is calculated from p0305, p0316, p0327 and p0328. The result can deviate from the
input in p0312. If p0316 = 0, then r0333 = p0312 is displayed.
In the case of multi-motor operation r0333 is increased by the factor p0306 compared to the rated torque of an indi-
vidual motor.
Description: Displays the torque constant of the synchronous motor used.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm / A
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft / A
Refer to: p0316
Note: This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
For synchronous motors, parameter r0334 = p0316 is displayed. When p0316 = 0, r0334 is calculated from p0305
and p0312 or p0305, p0307, and p0311.
r0332[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0333[0...n] Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 7_4 Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
r0334[0...n] Actual motor-torque constant / Mot kT act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 28_1 Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm/A] - [Nm/A] - [Nm/A]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-117
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the motor cooling system used.
Value: 0: Non-ventilated
1: Forced cooling
2: Liquid cooling
4: Non-ventilated and internal fan
5: Forced cooling and internal fan
6: Liquid cooling and internal fan
128: No fan
Dependency: For 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is preset as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: The parameter influences the thermal 3-mass motor model.
1LA1 and 1LA8 motors are characterized by the fact that they have an internal rotor fan. This "internal cooling" lies
within the motor frame and is not visible. Air is not directly exchanged with the motor ambient air. For 1PQ8 motors,
p0335 should be set to 5 as these motors are force-ventilated motors.
1LA7 motors, frame size 56 are operated without fan.
Description: Displays the rated frequency of the motor.
For p0310 > 0, this value is displayed.
Dependency: Refer to: p0311, p0314
Note: For p0310 = 0 or for synchronous motors, the rated motor frequency r0336 is calculated from the rated speed and
the pole pair number.
For p0310 > 0, this value is displayed (not for synchronous motors).
Description: Displays the rated EMF of the motor.
Note: EMF: Electromagnetic force
p0335[0...n] Motor cooling type / Motor cooling type
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 128 0
r0336[0...n] Actual rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
r0337[0...n] Rated motor EMF / Mot EMF_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-118 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the rated motor voltage
Note: For induction motors (p0300 = 1xx) the parameter is set to p0304.
For synchronous motors, parameter r0339 = p0304 is displayed. If p0304 = 0, then r0339 is calculated from p0305
and p0316.
Description: Setting to automatically calculate motor parameters and V/f open-loop and closed-loop control parameters from the
rating plate data.
Value: 0: No calculation
1: Complete calculation
2: Calculation of equivalent circuit diagram parameters
3: Calculation of closed-loop control parameters
4: Calculation of controller parameters
5: Calculation of technological limits and threshold values
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
The following parameters are influenced using p0340:
The parameters designated with (*) are not overwritten for catalog motors (p0300 > 100).
SERVO:
p0340 = 1:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5
--> p0341 (*)
--> p0342, p0344, p0600, p0640, p1082, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, p2005, p2007
p0340 = 2:
--> p0350 (*), p0354 (*), p0356 (*), p0358 (*), p0360 (*)
--> p0625 (matching p0350)
p0340 = 3:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 4, 5
--> p0325 (is only calculated for p0325 = 0)
--> p0348 (*) (is only calculated for p0348 = 0)
--> p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445 (only for 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FK7 motors)
--> p0492, p1082, p1980, p1319, p1326, p1327, p1612, p1752, p1755
p0340 = 4:
--> p1441, p1460, p1462, p1463, p1464, p1465, p1470, p1472, p1590, p1592, p1596, p1656, p1657, p1658,
p1659, p1715, p1717
--> p1461 (for p0348 > p0322, p1461 is set to 100 %)
--> p1463 (for p0348 > p0322, p1463 is set to 400 %)
p0340 = 5:
--> p1037, p1038, p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531, p2140 ... p2142, p2148, p2150, p2155, p2161, p2162, p2163,
p2164, p2175, p2177, p2194, p3820 ... p3829
r0339[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot V_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
p0340[0...n] Automatic calculation, motor/control parameters / Calc auto par
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 5 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-119
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
VECTOR:
p0340 = 1:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5
--> p0341 (*)
--> p0342, p0344, p0600, p0640, p1082, p1231, p1232, p1333, p1349, p1441, p1442, p1576, p1577, p1609,
p1619, p1620, p1621, p1654, p1726, p1825, p1828 ... p1832, p1909, p1959, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, p2005,
p2007, p3927, p3928
p0340 = 2:
--> p0350 (*), p0354 ... p0361 (*), p0652 ... p0660
--> p0625 (matching p0350)
p0340 = 3:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 4, 5
--> p0346, p0347, p0492, p0622, p1262, p1320 ... p1327, p1582, p1584, p1612, p1616, p1744, p1748, p1749,
p1755, p1756, p2178
p0340 = 4:
--> p1290, p1292, p1293, p1299, p1338, p1339, p1340, p1341, p1345, p1346, p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463,
p1464, p1465, p1470, p1472, p1590, p1592, p1600, p1628, p1629, p1630, p1643, p1703, p1715, p1717, p1740,
p1756, p1757, p1760, p1761, p1764, p1767, p1781, p1783, p1785, p1786, p1795, p7036, p7037, p7038
p0340 = 5:
--> p260 ... p264, p1037, p1038, p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531, p1574, p1750, p1802, p1803, p2140, p2142, p2148,
p2150, p2161, p2162, p2163, p2164, p2175, p2177, p2194, p3207, p3208, p3815, p3820 ... p3829
Note: p0340 = 1 contains the calculations of p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5 without overwriting the motor parameters from the Sie-
mens motor lists (p0301 > 0).
p0340 = 2 calculates the motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360), but only if it does involve a Siemens catalog motor
(p0301 = 0).
p0340 = 3 contains the calculations of p0340 = 4, 5.
p0340 = 4 only calculates the controller parameters.
p0340 = 5 only calculates the controller limits.
When quick commissioning is exited using p3900 > 0, p0340 is automatically set to 1.
At the end of the calculations, p0340 is automatically set to 0.
If the STARTER commissioning software writes a 3 into p0340 when "downloading to target device", then this cor-
responds to a "complete calculation of the motor/control parameters without equivalent circuit diagram data". The
same calculations are carried out as for p0340 = 1, however, without the equivalent circuit diagram parameters of
the motor (p0340 = 2), the motor moment of inertia (p0341) and the motor weight (p0344).
For third-party linear synchronous motors (p0300 = 4) equivalent circuit diagram data are not calculated (p0340 =
2).
Description: Sets the motor moment of inertia (without load).
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2
The parameter value is included, together with p0342, in the rated starting time of the motor.
Refer to: p0342, r0345
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
p0341[0...n] Motor moment of inertia / Mot M_mom of inert
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 1700, 5042,
5210, 6030, 6031
P-Group: Motor Units group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000000 [kgm²] 100000.000000 [kgm²] 0.000000 [kgm²]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-120 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: SERVO:
p0341 * p0342 + p1498 influence the speed/torque pre-control in encoderless operation.
VECTOR:
The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically.
Description: Sets the ratio between the total moment of inertia/mass (load + motor) and the intrinsic motor moment of iner-
tia/mass (no load).
Dependency: This means that together with p0341, the rated starting (accelerating time) of the motor is calculated for a vector
drive.
Refer to: p0341, r0345
Note: SERVO:
p0341 * p0342 + p1498 influence the speed/torque pre-control in encoderless operation.
VECTOR:
The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically.
Description: Identified motor rated current
Description: Sets the motor weight.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: The parameter influences the thermal 3 mass model of the induction motor.
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
p0342[0...n] Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia / Mot MomInert Ratio
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 1700, 5042,
5210, 6030, 6031
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1.000 10000.000 1.000
r0343[0...n] Identified motor rated current / Mot I_rated ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] - [Arms]
p0344[0...n] Motor weight (for the thermal motor model) / Mot weight th mod
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 27_1 Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [kg] 50000.0 [kg] 0.0 [kg]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-121
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the rated motor starting time. This time corresponds to the time from standstill up to reaching the motor
rated speed and the acceleration with motor rated torque (r0333).
Dependency: Refer to: r0313, r0333, r0336, p0341, p0342
Description: Sets the excitation build-up time of the motor.
This involves the delay time between enabling the pulses and enabling the ramp-function generator. The induction
motor is magnetized during this time.
Caution: If there is insufficient magnetization under load or if the acceleration rate is too high, then an induction motor can
stall (refer to the note). This is especially true for encoderless vector control or V/f control.
Notice: If the parameter is set to 0 s for separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5), then an excitation current set-
point is generated even if the drive is powered down. In the base speed range, this is the no-load excitation current
(p0389). In the field-weakening range, the value is reduced with the inverse value of the actual speed. An excitation
current setpoint is not generated during demagnetizing (p0347) and if an encoder fault is detected.
Note: The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3.
For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384). If this time is excessively reduced, this
can result in an inadequate magnetizing of the induction motor. This is the case if the current limit is reached while
building up magnetizing. For induction motors, the parameter cannot be set to 0 s (internal limit: 0.1 * r0384).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors and vector control, the value depends on the stator time constant
(r0386). Here, it defines the time to establish the current for encoderless operation immediately after the pulses
have been enabled.
Description: Sets the demagnetizing time (for induction motors) after the inverter pulses have been canceled.
The inverter pulses cannot be switched in (enabled) within this delay time.
Note: The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3.
For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384).
if this time is shortened too much, then this can result in an inadequate demagnetizing of the induction motor and in
an overcurrent condition when the pulses are subsequently enabled (only when the flying restart function is acti-
vated and the motor is rotating).
r0345[0...n] Nominal motor starting time / Mot t_start_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [s] - [s] - [s]
p0346[0...n] Motor excitation build-up time / Mot t_excitation
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
p0347[0...n] Motor de-excitation time / Mot t_de-excitat.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-122 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the actual system of units for motor equivalent circuit diagram data.
Value: 1: System of units, physical
2: System of units, referred
Dependency: Refer to: p0304, p0305, p0310
Note: The reference parameter for resistances of the rated motor impedance Z = p0304 / (1.732 * p0305) is in the % units
system.
Inductances are converted into a resistance using the factor 2 * Pi * p0310.
If a reference parameter (p0304, p305, p0310) is zero, then it is not possible to make a changeover to "referred"
values (per unit values).
Description: Sets the stator resistance of the motor at ambient temperature p0625.
Dependency: Refer to: p0625, r1912
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: The motor identification routine determines the stator resistance from the total stator resistance minus the cable
resistance (p0352).
Description: Resistance of the power cable between the Motor Module and motor.
Dependency: Refer to: p7003
Caution: The cable resistance should be entered prior to motor data identification. If it is used subsequently, the difference
by which p0352 was changed must be subtracted from the stator resistance p0350 or motor data identification must
be repeated.
Notice: Parallel circuits with one winding system (p7003 = 0):
p0352 includes the feeder cable resistance of an individual Motor Module. The total feeder cable resistance is
obtained from p0352 divided by the number of activated Motor Modules (refer to r0395).
Parallel circuits with multi-winding system (p7003 = 1):
p0352 includes the complete feeder cable resistance and is directly added to the stator resistance (refer to r0395).
p0349 System of units, motor equivalent circuit diagram data / Unit_sys mot ESB
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1
p0350[0...n] Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm] 2000.00000 [Ohm] 0.00000 [Ohm]
p0352[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable cold
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm] 120.00000 [Ohm] 0.00000 [Ohm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-123
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The parameter influences the temperature adaptation of the stator resistance.
The motor identification sets the cable resistance to 20% of the measured total resistance if p0352 is zero at the
time that the measurement is made. If p0352 is not zero, then the value is subtracted from the measured total stator
resistance to calculate stator resistance p0350. In this case, p0350 is a minimum of 10% of the measured value.
Exception:
For parallel circuit configurations with one winding system (p07003 = 0), the cable resistance is directly measured.
It is important to note that only the component of an individual Motor Module is entered into p0352.
The cable resistance is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0.
Description: Sets the series inductance.
Note: For the automatic calculation with p0340 = 1, 3 or 4, the calculation of p1715 is influenced by p0353.
The series inductance is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0.
Description: Sets the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor at the ambient temperature p0625.
For separately-excited synchronous motors: Sets the damping resistance in the rotor direction (d-axis).
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identifica-
tion routine (p1910) (not for separately-excited synchronous motors).
Dependency: Refer to: p0625
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Description: Sets the damping resistance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis).
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2).
p0353[0...n] Motor series inductance / Mot L_series
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [mH] 1000000.000 [mH] 0.000 [mH]
p0354[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / damping resistance d axis / Mot R_r cold / RDd
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm] 300.00000 [Ohm] 0.00000 [Ohm]
p0355[0...n] Motor damping resistance, q axis / Mot R_damp q
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm] 300.00000 [Ohm] 0.00000 [Ohm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-124 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Induction motor, separately-excited synchronous motor: Sets the rotor leakage inductance of the motor.
Synchronous motor: Sets the stator quadrature axis inductance of the motor.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identifica-
tion routine (p1910).
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
If the stator leakage inductance (p0356) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 >
0), the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then advised to
repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is, therefore, ideal for
a low current.
Description: Sets the stator direct-axis inductance of the synchronous motor.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identifica-
tion routine (p1910).
Note: The parameter is not used for separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is ideal for a low cur-
rent.
Description: Sets the rotor/secondary section leakage inductance of the motor.
For separately-excited synchronous motors: Sets the damping inductance in the rotor direction (d-axis).
This value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine
(p1910) (not for separately-excited synchronous motors).
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
p0356[0...n] Motor stator leakage inductance / Mot L_stator leak.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
p0357[0...n] Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator d
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
p0358[0...n] Motor rotor leakage inductance / damping inductance, d axis / Mot L_r leak / LDd
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-125
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
VECTOR:
If the rotor leakage inductance (p0358) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 >
0), then the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then
advised to repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960).
Description: Sets the damping inductance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis).
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2).
Description: Sets the magnetizing inductance of the motor.
For separately-excited synchronous motors: Sets the saturated magnetizing inductance in the rotor direction (d-
axis).
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identifica-
tion routine (p1910) (not for separately-excited synchronous motors).
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Description: Sets the saturated magnetizing inductance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor
direction (q axis).
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2).
p0359[0...n] Motor damping inductance, q axis / Mot L_damp q
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
p0360[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance/magn. inductance, d axis saturated / Mot Lh/Lh d sat
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [mH] 10000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
p0361[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance q axis, saturated / Mot L_magn q sat
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [mH] 10000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-126 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the first motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the first stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated quadra-
ture inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current.
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis flux values (PESM):
20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0366
Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note: For induction motors, p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
For separately-excited synchronous motors p0362 = 100% corresponds to an induced terminal voltage with the
magnitude of the rated motor voltage (under no-load conditions at the synchronous speed).
With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100% corresponds to the product of the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305).
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Description: The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the second motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the second stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current.
p0362[0...n] Saturation characteristic flux 1 / Mot saturat.flux 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 60.0 [%]
p0363[0...n] Saturation characteristic flux 2 / Mot saturat.flux 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 85.0 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-127
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis flux values (PESM):
20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0367
Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note: For induction motors, p0363 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
For separately-excited synchronous motors p0363 = 100% corresponds to an induced terminal voltage with the
magnitude of the rated motor voltage (under no-load conditions at the synchronous speed).
With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100% corresponds to the product of the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305).
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Description: The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the third motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the third stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated quadra-
ture inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current.
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis flux values (PESM):
20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0368
Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note: For induction motors, p0364 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
For separately-excited synchronous motors p0364 = 100% corresponds to an induced terminal voltage with the
magnitude of the rated motor voltage (under no-load conditions at the synchronous speed).
With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100% corresponds to the product of the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305).
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0364[0...n] Saturation characteristic flux 3 / Mot saturat.flux 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 115.0 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-128 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the fourth motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the fourth stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated quadra-
ture inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current.
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis flux values (PESM):
20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0369
Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note: For induction motors, p0365 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
For separately-excited synchronous motors p0365 = 100% corresponds to an induced terminal voltage with the
magnitude of the rated motor voltage (under no-load conditions at the synchronous speed).
With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100% corresponds to the product of the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305).
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Description: The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the first magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331 (ASM),
which in turn is referred to the no-load excitation current (SESM).
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the first stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
p0365[0...n] Saturation characteristic flux 4 / Mot saturat.flux 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 125.0 [%]
p0366[0...n] Saturation characteristic I_mag 1 / Mot sat. I_mag 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-129
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis current values (PESM):
20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0362
Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Description: The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the second magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331
(ASM), which in turn is referred to the no-load excitation current (SESM).
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the second stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis current values (PESM):
20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0363
Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0367[0...n] Saturation characteristic I_mag 2 / Mot sat. I_mag 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 75.0 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-130 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the third magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331 (ASM),
which in turn is referred to the no-load excitation current (SESM).
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the third stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis current values (PESM):
20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0364
Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Description: The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the fourth magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331 (ASM),
which in turn is referred to the no-load excitation current (SESM).
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the fourth stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis current values (PESM):
20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0365
p0368[0...n] Saturation characteristic I_mag 3 / Mot sat. I_mag 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 150.0 [%]
p0369[0...n] Saturation characteristic I_mag 4 / Mot sat. I_mag 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 210.0 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-131
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Description: Displays the motor stator resistance at an ambient temperature p0625. The value does not include the cable resis-
tance.
Dependency: Refer to: p0625
Description: Displays the total cable resistance between Motor Module and motor, as well as the internal converter resistance.
Dependency: Refer to: r0238, p0352
Description: Displays the rated motor stator resistance at rated temperature (total of p0625 and p0627).
Dependency: Refer to: p0627
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Description: Displays the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor for the ambient temperature p0625.
For separately-excited synchronous motors: Displays the damping resistance in the rotor direction (d-axis).
Dependency: Refer to: p0625
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
r0370[0...n] Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
r0372[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
r0373[0...n] Motor rated stator resistance / Mot R_stator rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
r0374[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / damping resistance d axis / Mot R_r cold / RDd
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-132 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the damping resistance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q
axis).
Description: Displays the rated (nominal) rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor at the rated temperature (total of
p0625 and p0628).
Dependency: Refer to: p0628
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Description: Induction motor, separately-excited synchronous motor:
Displays the stator leakage inductance of the motor, including the series inductance (p0353) and the motor reactor
(p0233).
Synchronous motor:
Displays the stator quadrature inductance, including the series inductance (p0353) and the motor reactor (p0233).
Description: Displays the stator longitudinal inductance of the synchronous motor including the series inductance (p0353) and
the motor reactor (p0233).
Note: The parameter is not used for separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5).
r0375[0...n] Motor damping resistance, q axis / Mot R_damp q
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
r0376[0...n] Rated motor rotor resistance / Mot R_rotor rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
r0377[0...n] Motor leakage inductance, total / Mot L_leak total
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 6640
P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
r0378[0...n] Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator_d
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-133
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the damping inductance of the separately-excited synchronous motor in the rotor direction (d-axis).
Description: Displays the damping inductance of a separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q
axis).
Description: Displays the magnetizing inductance of the motor.
For separately-excited synchronous motors: Displays the saturated magnetizing inductance in the rotor direction (d-
axis).
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Description: Displays the saturated magnetizing inductance of a separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor
direction (q axis).
Description: Displays the rotor time constant.
For separately-excited synchronous motors: Displays the damping time constant in the rotor direction (d-axis).
r0380[0...n] Motor damping inductance, d axis / Mot L_damping_d
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
r0381[0...n] Motor damping inductance, q axis / Mot L_damping_q
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
r0382[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance transformed / Lh d axis saturated / Mot L_m tr/Lhd sat
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
r0383[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance q axis, saturated / Mot L_magn q sat
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
r0384[0...n] Motor rotor time constant / damping time constant d axis / Mot T_rotor/T_Dd
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 6722
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-134 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors.
The value is calculated from the total of the inductances on the rotor side (p0358, p0360) divided by the rotor/damp-
ing resistance (p0354). The temperature adaptation of the rotor resistance for induction motors is not taken into
account.
Description: Displays the damping time constant of a separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q
axis).
Note: The value is calculated from the total of the inductances on the damping side (p0359, p0361) divided by the damp-
ing resistance (p0355).
Description: Displays the stator leakage time constant.
Note: The value is calculated from the total of all leakage inductances (p0233*, p0353, p0356, p0358) divided by the total
of all motor resistances (p0350, p0352, p0354). The temperature adaptation of the resistances is not taken into
account.
* only applies for VECTOR (r0107).
Description: Displays the stator leakage time constant quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis).
Note: The value is calculated from the total of all leakage inductances (p0233, p0356, p0359) divided by the total of all
motor resistances (p0350, p0352, p0355).
The temperature adaptation of the resistances is not taken into account.
Description: Sets the rated no-load current (I_F0) for the excitation.
r0385[0...n] Motor damping time constant, q axis / Mot T_Dq
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
r0386[0...n] Motor stator leakage time constant / Mot T_stator leak
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
r0387[0...n] Motor stator leakage time constant, q axis / Mot T_Sleak /T_Sq
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
p0389[0...n] Excitation rated no-load current / Exc I_noload_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [A] 10000.00 [A] 0.00 [A]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-135
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Setting the rated current (I_F) of the controlled excitation rectifier (DC master).
Description: Sets the starting point of the current-dependent current controller adaptation where the current controller gain
p1715 is effective.
Dependency: Refer to: p0392, p0393, p1402, p1715
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Description: Sets the starting point of the current-dependent current controller adaptation where the adapted current controller
gain p1715 * p0393 is effective.
Dependency: Refer to: p0391, p0393, p1402, p1715
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Description: Sets the factor for the current controller P gain in the adaptation range (e.g. r0078 > p0392, if p0392 > p0391).
The value is referred to p1715.
Dependency: Refer to: p0391, p0392, p1402, p1715
p0390[0...n] Rated excitation current / Exc I_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [A] 10000.00 [A] 0.00 [A]
p0391[0...n] Current controller adaptation, starting point KP / I_adapt pt KP
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 6000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
p0392[0...n] Current controller adaptation, starting point KP adapted / I_adapt pt KP adap
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 6000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
p0393[0...n] Current controller adaptation P gain scaling / I_adapt Kp scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-136 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: For p0393 = 100 % or p1402 bit 2 = 0, the current controller adaptation is disabled and p1715 is effective over the
entire range.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Description: Displays the actual stator resistance (phase value).
The parameter value also contains the temperature-independent cable resistance.
Dependency: In the case of induction motors the parameter is also affected by the motor temperature model.
Refer to: p0350, p0352, p0620
Note: In each case, only the stator resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the stator temperature of the
thermal motor model.
Description: Displays the actual rotor/secondary section resistance (phase value).
The parameter is affected by the motor temperature model.
Dependency: Refer to: p0354, p0620
Note: In each case, only the rotor resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the rotor temperature of the
thermal motor model.
This parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Description: The magnetic cross coupling of the motor's d and q axes caused by saturation (current-dependent) leads to an
angle offset affecting the axis system d'q'; this decouples the magnetic quantities.
The angle offset can be described as a third-order polynomial function of the load current consumed:
phiOffset = f(C1*iq + C3*iq^3)
This parameter is the coefficient C1; it describes the linear load impact effect.
r0395[0...n] Actual stator resistance / R_stator act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 6300, 6730,
6731, 6732
P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
r0396[0...n] Actual rotor resistance / R_rotor act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 6730
P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
p0398[0...n] Angle magnet. decoupling (cross saturation) coeff 1 / Magn decoupl C1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-10.000000 10.000000 0.000000
List of parameters
Parameter
1-137
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The magnetic cross coupling of the motor's d and q axes caused by saturation (current-dependent) leads to an
angle offset affecting the axis system d'q'; this decouples the magnetic quantities.
The angle offset can be described as a third-order polynomial function of the load current consumed:
phiOffset = f(C1*iq + C3*iq^3)
This parameter is the coefficient C3; it describes the cubic load impact effect.
Description: Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types supported.
Value: 0: No encoder
202: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AS20, singleturn
204: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AM20, multiturn 4096
242: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AS24, singleturn
244: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AM24, multiturn 4096
1001: Resolver 1 speed
1002: Resolver 2 speed
1003: Resolver 3 speed
1004: Resolver 4 speed
2001: 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B C/D R
2002: 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B R
2003: 256, 1 Vpp, A/B R
2004: 400, 1 Vpp, A/B R
2005: 512, 1 Vpp, A/B R
2006: 192, 1 Vpp, A/B R
2007: 480, 1 Vpp, A/B R
2008: 800, 1 Vpp, A/B R
2010: 18000, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded
2051: 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096
2052: 32, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096
2053: 512, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096
2054: 16, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096
2055: 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Singleturn
2081: 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, Singleturn
2082: 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, Multiturn 4096
2083: 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, singleturn, error bit
2084: 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, multiturn 4096, error bit
2110: 4000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded
2111: 20000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded
2112: 40000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded
2151: 16000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, resolution 100 nm
3001: 1024 HTL A/B R
3002: 1024 TTL A/B R
3003: 2048 HTL A/B R
3005: 1024 HTL A/B
3006: 1024 TTL A/B
p0399[0...n] Angle magnet. decoupling (cross saturation) coeff 3 / Magn decoupl C3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-10.000000 10.000000 0.000000
p0400[0...n] Encoder type selection / Enc_typ sel
ENCODER Can be changed: C2(1, 4) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 1580, 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 10100 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-138 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
3007: 2048 HTL A/B
3008: 2048 TTL A/B
3009: 1024 HTL A/B unipolar
3011: 2048 HTL A/B unipolar
3020: 2048 TTL A/B R, with sense
3081: SSI, Singleturn, 24 V
3082: SSI, Multiturn 4096, 24 V
3090: 4096, HTL, A/B, SSI, Singleturn
3109: 2000 nm, TTL, A/B R distance-coded
9999: User-defined
10000: Identify encoder
10050: Encoder with EnDat interface identified
10051: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder identified
10058: Digital encoder (absolute) identified
10059: Digital encoder (incremental) identified
10100: Identify encoder (waiting)
Caution: An encoder type with p0400 < 9999 defines an encoder for which there is an encoder parameter list. When select-
ing a catalog encoder (p0400 < 9999) the parameters from the encoder parameter list cannot be changed (write
protection). To remove write protection, the encoder type should be set to a third-party encoder (p0400 = 9999).
Notice: If required, the list of motor codes/encoder codes can be found in the Appendix of the List Manual.
Note: The connected encoder can be identified by setting p0400 to 10000 or 10100. This assumes that the encoder sup-
ports this method, which is possible in the following cases: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, encoder with EnDat interface,
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
The encoder data (e.g. pulse number p0408) can only be changed when p0400 = 9999.
When using an encoder with track A/B and zero pulse, as standard, fine synchronization is not set using a zero
mark. If, for a synchronous motor, fine synchronization is to be realized using a zero mark, then the following must
be executed:
- set p0400 to 9999
- set p0404.15 to 1
Prerequisite:
Coarse synchronization must be selected (e.g. pole position identification) and the zero pulse of the encoder must
be either mechanically or electronically (p0431) adjusted to the pole position.
For p0400 = 10000 the following applies:
If an identification is not possible, then p0400 is set to 0.
For p0400 = 10100 the following applies:
If an identification is not possible, p0400 remains set to 10100 until it becomes possible.
Description: Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types supported.
Value: 0: No encoder
3001: 1024 HTL A/B R
3002: 1024 TTL A/B R
3003: 2048 HTL A/B R
3005: 1024 HTL A/B
3006: 1024 TTL A/B
3007: 2048 HTL A/B
3008: 2048 TTL A/B
3009: 1024 HTL A/B unipolar
3011: 2048 HTL A/B unipolar
3020: 2048 TTL A/B R, with sense
9999: User-defined
10000: Identify encoder
p0400[0...n] Encoder type selection / Enc_typ sel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 4) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 1580, 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 10000 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-139
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Caution: An encoder type with p0400 < 9999 defines an encoder for which there is an encoder parameter list. When select-
ing a catalog encoder (p0400 < 9999) the parameters from the encoder parameter list cannot be changed (write
protection). To remove write protection, the encoder type should be set to a third-party encoder (p0400 = 9999).
Notice: If required, the list of motor codes/encoder codes can be found in the Appendix of the List Manual.
Note: The connected encoder can be identified by setting p0400 to 10000 or 10100. This assumes that the encoder sup-
ports this method, which is possible in the following cases: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, encoder with EnDat interface,
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
The encoder data (e.g. pulse number p0408) can only be changed when p0400 = 9999.
When using an encoder with track A/B and zero pulse, as standard, fine synchronization is not set using a zero
mark. If, for a synchronous motor, fine synchronization is to be realized using a zero mark, then the following must
be executed:
- set p0400 to 9999
- set p0404.15 to 1
Prerequisite:
Coarse synchronization must be selected (e.g. pole position identification) and the zero pulse of the encoder must
be either mechanically or electronically (p0431) adjusted to the pole position.
For p0400 = 10000 the following applies:
If an identification is not possible, then p0400 is set to 0.
For p0400 = 10100 the following applies:
If an identification is not possible, p0400 remains set to 10100 until it becomes possible.
Description: Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types that the OEM supports.
Note: The connected encoder can be identified by p0400 = 10000. This means that the encoder must support this and is
possible in the following cases: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, encoder with EnDat interface.
If an identification is not possible, then p0400 is set to 0.
The encoder data (e.g. pulse number p0408) can only be changed when p0400 = 9999.
Using p0400 = 20000, the encoder type can be selected from the list of OEM encoders using p0401.
Description: Selects the gearbox type to preset the inversion and the gearbox factor.
Measuring gear factor = motor or load revolutions / encoder revolutions.
Value: 1: Gearbox 1:1 not inverted
2: Gearbox 2:7 inverted
3: Gearbox 4:17 inverted
4: Gearbox 2:10 inverted
9999: Gearbox, user-defined
10000: Identify gearbox
10100: Identify gearbox
Dependency: Refer to: p0410, p0432, p0433
p0401[0...n] Encoder type, OEM selection / Enc type OEM sel
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 4) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 1580, 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 32767 0
p0402[0...n] Gearbox type selection / Gearbox type sel
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 4) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 10100 9999
Parameter
List of parameters
1-140 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Re p0402 = 1:
Automatic setting of p0410 = 0000 bin, p0432 = 1, p0433 = 1.
Re p0402 = 2:
Automatic setting of p0410 = 0011 bin, p0432 = 7, p0433 = 2.
Re p0402 = 3:
Automatic setting of p0410 = 0011 bin, p0432 = 17, p0433 = 4.
Re p0402 = 4:
Automatic setting of p0410 = 0011 bin, p0432 = 10, p0433 = 2.
Re p0402 = 9999:
No automatic setting of p0410, p0432, p0433. The parameters should be manually set.
Re p0402 = 10000:
It is only possible to identify the gearbox type for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ. Parameters p0410, p0432 and p0433
are set corresponding to the identified gearbox. If an identification is not possible, then p0402 is set to 9999.
Description: Settings for the basic encoder properties.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400).
When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400
should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Notice: If an SSI encoder (bit 9 = 1) is used as motor encoder for permanent-magnet synchronous motors, then this is only
permissible in conjunction with an additional A/B track (bit 4 = 1 or bit 5 = 1).
p0404[0...n] Encoder configuration effective / Enc_config eff
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Linear encoder Yes No -
01 Abs value encoder Yes No -
02 Multiturn encoder Yes No -
03 Track A/B sq-wave Yes No -
04 Track A/B sinus Yes No -
05 Track C/D Yes No -
06 Hall sensor Yes No -
08 EnDat encoder Yes No -
09 SSI encoder Yes No -
10 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder Yes No -
11 Digital encoder Yes no -
12 Equidistant zero mark Yes No -
13 Irregular zero mark Yes No -
14 Distance-coded zero mark Yes No -
15 Commutation with zero mark (not ASM) Yes No -
16 Acceleration Yes No -
17 Track A/B analog Yes No -
20 Voltage level 5 V Yes No -
21 Voltage level 24 V Yes No -
22 Remote sense (only SMC30) Yes No -
23 Resolver excit. Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-141
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: ZM: Zero mark
SMC: Sensor Module Cabinet
If a technique to determine the commutation information/data has not been selected (e.g. track C/D, Hall sensor),
and the encoder pulse number is an integer multiple of the pole number, then the following applies:
The track A/B is adjusted to match the magnetic position of the motor.
Re bit 01, 02 (absolute encoder, multiturn encoder):
These bits can only be selected for EnDat encoders, SSI encoders or DRIVE-CLiQ encoders.
Re bit 10 (DRIVE-CLiQ encoder):
This bit is only used for the large-scale integrated DRIVE-CLiQ encoders that provide their encoder data directly in
DRIVE-CLiQ format without converting this data. This bit is not, therefore, set for first-generation DRIVE-CLiQ
encoders.
Re bit 12 (equidistant zero mark):
The zero marks occur at regular intervals (e.g. rotary encoder with 1 zero mark per revolution or linear encoder with
constant zero mark distance).
The bit activates monitoring of the zero mark distance (p0424/p0425, linear/rotary) or in the case of the linear
encoder with 1 zero mark and p0424 = 0 zero mark monitoring is activated.
Re bit 13 (irregular zero mark):
The zero marks occur at irregular intervals (e.g. a linear scale with only 1 zero mark in the traversing range). The
zero mark distance is not monitored.
Re bit 14 (distance-coded zero mark):
The distance (clearance) between two or several consecutive zero marks allows the absolute position to be calcu-
lated.
Re bit 15 (commutation with zero mark):
Only applicable for synchronous motors. For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies:
The phase sequence of the C/D track (if available) must be the same as the phase sequence of the encoder (A/B
track).
The phase sequence of the Hall signal (if available) must be the same as the phase sequence of the motor. Further,
the position of the Hall sensor must be mechanically adjusted to the motor EMF.
The fine synchronization is only started after two zero marks have been passed.
Description: Settings for the track A/B of a square-wave encoder. For square-wave encoders, p0404.3 must also be 1.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note: Re bit 02:
When the function is activated, track monitoring can be deactivated by setting p437.26.
p0405[0...n] Square-wave encoder track A/B / Sq-wave enc A/B
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1111 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Signal Bipolar Unipolar -
01 Level TTL HTL -
02 Track monitoring A/B <> -A/B None -
03 Zero pulse Same as A/B track 24 V unipolar -
04 Switching thresh High Low -
05 Pulse/direction Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-142 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the grid division for a linear encoder.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note: The lowest permissible value is 250 nm.
Description: Sets the number of pulses for a rotary encoder.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note: The number of pole pairs for a resolver is entered here.
The smallest permissible value is 1 pulse.
Description: Setting to invert actual values.
Note: The inversion influences the following parameters:
Bit 00: r0061, r0063 (exception: encoderless control), r0094
Bit 01: r0482, r0483
p0407[0...n] Linear encoder grid division / Enc grid div
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [nm] 250000000 [nm] 16000 [nm]
p0408[0...n] Rotary encoder pulse No. / Rot enc pulse No.
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 16777215 2048
p0410[0...n] Encoder inversion actual value / Enc inv act value
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Invert speed actual value Yes No 4710,
4715
01 Invert position actual value Yes No 4704
List of parameters
Parameter
1-143
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Setting to invert actual values.
Note: The inversion influences the following parameters:
Bit 00: r0061, r0063 (exception: encoderless control), r0094
Bit 01: r0482, r0483
Description: Sets the configuration for position tracking of a measuring gear.
Notice: For p0411.3 = 1 the following applies:
If position tracking is activated for incremental encoders, only the position actual value is stored. Axis or encoder
motion is not detected when deactivated! Any tolerance window entered in p0413 has no effect.
Note: For the following events, the non-volatile, saved position values are automatically reset:
- when an encoder replacement has been identified.
- when changing the configuration of the Encoder Data Set (EDS).
Description: Sets the number of rotations that can be resolved for a rotary encoder with activated position tracking of the mea-
suring gear.
Dependency: This parameter is only of significance for an absolute encoder (p0404.1 = 1) with activated position tracking
(p0411.0 = 1) and for an incremental encoder with activated position tracking (p0411.3 = 1).
p0410[0...n] Encoder inversion actual value / Enc inv act value
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Invert velocity actual value Yes No 4710,
4715
01 Invert position actual value Yes No 4704
p0411[0...n] Measuring gear, configuration / Meas gear config
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Measuring gear, activate position tracking Yes No -
01 Axis type Linear axis Rotary axis -
02 Measuring gear, reset position Yes No -
03 Meas. gearbox, activate pos. tracking for
incremental encoders
Yes No -
p0412[0...n] Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual / Abs rot rev
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 4194303 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-144 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The resolution that is set must be able to be represented using r0483.
For rotary axes/modulo axes, the following applies:
p0411.0 = 1:
This parameter is preset with p0421 and can be changed.
p0411.3 = 1:
The parameter value is preset to the highest possible value. The highest possible value depends on the pulse num-
ber (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419).
For linear axes, the following applies:
p0411.0 = 1:
This parameter is pre-assigned with p0421, expanded by 6 bits for multiturn information (maximum number of over-
flows) and cannot be changed.
p0411.3 = 1:
The parameter value is preset to the highest possible value. The highest possible value depends on the pulse num-
ber (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419).
Description: Sets a tolerance window for position tracking.
After the system is powered up, the difference between the saved position and the actual position is determined,
and depending on this, the following is initiated:
Difference within the tolerance window --> The position is reproduced as a result of the encoder actual value.
Difference outside the tolerance window --> An appropriate message is output.
Dependency: Refer to: F31501, F32501, F33501
Caution: Rotation, e.g. through a complete encoder range is not detected.
Note: The value is entered in integer (complete) encoder pulses.
For p0411.0 = 1, the value is automatically pre-assigned quarter of the encoder range.
Example:
Quarter of the encoder range = (p0408 * p0421) / 4
It is possible that the tolerance window may not be able to be precisely set due to the data type (floating point num-
ber with 23 bit mantissa).
Description: Sets the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value.
p0413[0...n] Measuring gear, position tracking tolerance window / Pos track window
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 4294967300.00 0.00
p0414[0...n] Redundant coarse position value relevant bits (identified) / Relevant bits
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 16 16
List of parameters
Parameter
1-145
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position.
Note: MSB: Most Significant Bit
Description: Sets the fine resolution in bits of the incremental position actual values.
Note: The parameter applies for the following process data:
- Gx_XIST1
- Gx_XIST2 for reference mark or flying measurement
The fine resolution specifies the fraction between two encoder pulses. Depending on the physical measurement
principle, an encoder pulse can be broken down into a different number of fractions (e.g. squarewave encoder: 2 bit
= resolution 4, sin/cos encoder: Typical 11 bit = resolution 2048).
For a squarewave encoder, with the factory setting, the least significant bits have the value zero, i.e. they do not
supply any useful information.
For especially high quality measuring systems, the fine resolution must be increased corresponding to the available
accuracy.
Description: Sets the fine resolution in bits of the absolute position actual values.
Dependency: Refer to: p0418
Note: This parameter applies to process data Gx_XIST2 when reading the absolute value.
Description: Selecting the encoder connection.
p0415[0...n] Gx_XIST1 Coarse position safe most significant bit (identified) / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 31 14
p0418[0...n] Fine resolution Gx_XIST1 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST1
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
2 18 11
p0419[0...n] Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST2
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704, 4710
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
2 18 9
p0420[0...n] Encoder connection / Enc_connection
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 SUB-D Yes No -
01 Terminal Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-146 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the number of rotations that can be resolved for a rotary absolute encoder.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Description: Sets the resolution of the absolute position for a linear absolute encoder.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note: The serial protocol of an absolute encoder provides the position with a certain resolution , e.g. 100 nm. This value
must be entered here.
Description: Sets the number of measuring steps per revolution for a rotary absolute encoder. The resolution refers to the abso-
lute position.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Description: Sets the distance between two zero marks for a linear encoder. This information is used for zero mark monitoring.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note: For distance-coded zero marks, this means the basic distance.
p0421[0...n] Absolute encoder rotary multiturn resolution / Enc abs multiturn
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 4096
p0422[0...n] Absolute encoder linear measuring step resolution / Enc abs meas step
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [nm] 4294967295 [nm] 100 [nm]
p0423[0...n] Absolute encoder rotary singleturn resolution / Enc abs singleturn
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1073741823 8192
p0424[0...n] Encoder, linear zero mark distance / Enc lin ZM_dist
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [mm] 65535 [mm] 20 [mm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-147
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the distance in pulses between two zero marks for a rotary encoder. This information is used for zero mark
monitoring.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note: For distance-coded zero marks, this means the basic distance.
Description: Differential distance with distance-coded zero marks [signal periods]. Corresponds to jump displacement of "zero
mark with interference".
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Description: Sets the baud rate for an SSI encoder.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note: SSI: Synchronous Serial Interface
Description: Sets the minimum delay time between two data transfers of the absolute value for an SSI encoder.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
p0425[0...n] Encoder, rotary zero mark distance / Enc rot dist ZM
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704, 8570
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 16777215 2048
p0426[0...n] Encoder zero mark differential distance / Enc diff distance
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 65535 1
p0427[0...n] Encoder SSI baud rate / Enc SSI baud rate
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [kHz] 65535 [kHz] 100 [kHz]
p0428[0...n] Encoder SSI monoflop time / Enc SSI t_monoflop
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [µs] 65535 [µs] 30 [µs]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-148 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the configuration for an SSI encoder.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note: Re bit 06:
The quiescent signal level of the data line corresponds to the inverted, set level.
Description: Sets the configuration of the Sensor Module.
Note: Re bit 17 (burst oversampling):
Displays whether burst oversampling has been activated.
Re bit 18 (continuous oversampling):
Displays whether continuous oversampling has been activated.
Re bit 19 (safety position actual value sensing):
Displays whether the safety encoder position is sent in the cyclic telegram.
Re bit 20 (speed calculation mode):
If bit = 0 the speed is calculated via edge time measurement with extrapolation between edges. In this mode the
speed actual value 0 measuring time can be set in p0453.
If bit = 1 the speed is calculated via incremental difference without extrapolation. In this mode p0453 is irrelevant.
p0429[0...n] Encoder SSI configuration / Enc SSI config
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Transfer code Binary code Gray code -
02 Transfer absolute value twice Yes No -
06 Data line during the monoflop time High level Low level -
p0430[0...n] Sensor Module configuration / SM config
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1110 0000 0000 1000 0000
0000 0000 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
17 Burst oversampling Yes No -
18 Continuous oversampling (reserved) Yes No -
19 Safety position actual value sensing Yes No -
20 Speed calculation mode (only SMC30) Incremental diff Flank time meas -
21 Zero mark tolerance Yes No -
22 Rot pos adapt Yes No -
23 Deselection commutation with zero mark Yes No -
24 Commutation with selected zero mark Yes No -
25 Disconnection of encoder power supply on
parking
Yes No -
27 SSI position value extrapolation Yes No -
28 Cubic correction Yes No -
29 Phase correction Yes No -
30 Amplitude correction Yes No -
31 Offset correction Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-149
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Re bit 21 (zero mark tolerance):
If bit = 1 there is no fault response (F3x100) if the number of track pulses between two zero pulses does not match
the configured number on one occasion. If the next zero mark is correct, no fault occurs.
Re bit 22 (rotor position adaptation):
If bit = 1 correction might take several steps (+/- 1 quadrant per revolution) if the zero mark arrived in a tolerance
bandwidth (+/- 1/12 of the electrical revolution).
Re bit 23 (deselection commutation with zero mark):
Only possible with the Sensor Module property "Commutation with zero mark can be deselected" (p0458.23 = yes).
This should only be set for encoders that have not been adjusted.
Re bit 24 (commutation with selected zero mark):
Sets commutation to selected zero mark.
Re bit 25 (disconnection of encoder power supply on parking):
If activated, the encoder power supply is disconnected completely on parking (0 V), regardless of whether the oper-
ating voltage is 5 V or 24 V. If not activated, the encoder power supply is not disconnected on parking (although the
24 V operating voltage is reduced to 5 V).
Re bit 27 (extrapolation SSI position value):
Sets the interpolation of the position values from the SSI encoder.
Re bit 28 (cubic correction);
Sets whether cubic correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 29 (phase correction):
Sets whether phase correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 30 (amplitude correction):
Sets whether amplitude correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 31 (offset correction):
Sets whether offset correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Description: Sets the configuration of the Sensor Module.
p0430[0...n] Sensor Module configuration / SM config
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1110 0000 0000 1000 0000
0000 0000 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
17 Burst oversampling Yes No -
18 Continuous oversampling (reserved) Yes No -
19 Safety position actual value sensing Yes No -
20 Velocity calculation mode (only SMC30) Incremental diff Flank time meas -
21 Zero mark tolerance Yes No -
22 Rot pos adapt Yes No -
23 Deselection commutation with zero mark Yes No -
24 Commutation with selected zero mark Yes No -
25 Disconnection of encoder power supply on
parking
Yes No -
27 SSI position value extrapolation Yes No -
28 Cubic correction Yes No -
29 Phase correction Yes No -
30 Amplitude correction Yes No -
31 Offset correction Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-150 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Re bit 17 (burst oversampling):
Displays whether burst oversampling has been activated.
Re bit 18 (continuous oversampling):
Displays whether continuous oversampling has been activated.
Re bit 19 (safety position actual value sensing):
Displays whether the safety encoder position is sent in the cyclic telegram.
Re bit 20 (speed calculation mode):
If bit = 0 the speed is calculated via edge time measurement with extrapolation between edges. In this mode the
speed actual value 0 measuring time can be set in p0453.
If bit = 1 the speed is calculated via incremental difference without extrapolation. In this mode p0453 is irrelevant.
Re bit 21 (zero mark tolerance):
If bit = 1 there is no fault response (F3x100) if the number of track pulses between two zero pulses does not match
the configured number on one occasion. If the next zero mark is correct, no fault occurs.
Re bit 22 (rotor position adaptation):
If bit = 1 correction might take several steps (+/- 1 quadrant per revolution) if the zero mark arrived in a tolerance
bandwidth (+/- 1/12 of the electrical revolution).
Re bit 23 (deselection commutation with zero mark):
Only possible with the Sensor Module property "Commutation with zero mark can be deselected" (p0458.23 = yes).
This should only be set for encoders that have not been adjusted.
Re bit 24 (commutation with selected zero mark):
Sets commutation to selected zero mark.
Re bit 25 (disconnection of encoder power supply on parking):
If activated, the encoder power supply is disconnected completely on parking (0 V), regardless of whether the oper-
ating voltage is 5 V or 24 V. If not activated, the encoder power supply is not disconnected on parking (although the
24 V operating voltage is reduced to 5 V).
Re bit 27 (extrapolation SSI position value):
Sets the interpolation of the position values from the SSI encoder.
Re bit 28 (cubic correction);
Sets whether cubic correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 29 (phase correction):
Sets whether phase correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 30 (amplitude correction):
Sets whether amplitude correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 31 (offset correction):
Sets whether offset correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Description: Sets the angular commutation offset.
Dependency: The value is taken into account in r0094.
Refer to: r0094, r1778
Caution: When the firmware is upgraded from V2.3 to V2.4 or higher, the value must be reduced by 60° if all the following
conditions are fulfilled:
- The motor is a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2, 2xx, 4, 4xx).
- The encoder is a resolver (p0404.23 = 1).
- The actual speed value is inverted (p0410.0 = 1).
Notice: The angular commutation offset cannot be generally taken from other drive systems. As a minimum - the sign of the
offset determined for SIMODRIVE 611 digital and SIMODRIVE 611 universal must be reversed for SINAMICS
(p0431 (SINAMICS) = -p1016 (SIMODRIVE)).
p0431[0...n] Angular commutation offset / Ang_com offset
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-180.00 [°] 180.00 [°] 0.00 [°]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-151
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Angular commutation offset, angular difference between electrical position of encoder and flux position.
For p0404.5 = 1 (track C/D) the following applies:
The angular offset in p0431 acts on track A/B, the zero mark on track C/D.
For p0404.6 = 1 (Hall sensor) the following applies:
The angular offset in p0431 acts on track A/B and the zero mark.
Description: Sets the encoder revolutions for the gearbox factor of the encoder evaluation.
The gearbox factor specifies the ratio between the encoder shaft and motor shaft (for motor encoders) or between
the encoder shaft and the load.
Dependency: This parameter can only be set for p0402 = 9999.
Refer to: p0402, p0410, p0433
Note: Negative gearbox factors should be implemented with p0410.
Description: Sets the motor and load revolutions for the gearbox factor of the encoder evaluation.
The gearbox factor specifies the ratio between the encoder shaft and motor shaft (for motor encoders) or between
the encoder shaft and the load.
Dependency: This parameter can only be set for p0402 = 9999.
Refer to: p0402, p0410, p0432
Note: Negative gearbox factors should be implemented with p0410.
Description: Sets the position and level of the error bit in the SSI protocol.
Notice: The bit may only be positioned before (p0446) or after (p0448) the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
p0432[0...n] Gearbox factor, encoder revolutions / Grbx_fact enc_rev
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 10000 1
p0433[0...n] Gearbox factor, motor/load revolutions / Grbx_fact mot_rev
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 10000 1
p0434[0...n] Encoder SSI error bit / Enc SSI error bit
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-152 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Value = dcba
ba: Position of the error bit in the protocol (0 ... 63).
c: Level (0: Low level, 1: High level).
d: Status of the evaluation (0: Off, 1: On with 1 error bit, 2: On with 2 error bits ... 9: On with 9 error bits).
For several error error bits, the following applies:
- the position specified under ba and the additional bits are assigned increasing consecutively.
- the level set under c applies to all error bits.
Example:
p0434 = 1013
--> The evaluation is switched in and the error bit is at position 13 with a low level.
p0434 = 1113
--> The evaluation is switched in and the error bit is at position 13 with a high level.
Description: Sets the position and level of the alarm bit in the SSI protocol.
Notice: The bit may only be positioned before (p0446) or after (p0448) the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
Note: Value = dcba
ba: Position of the alarm bit in protocol (0 ... 63).
c: Level (0: Low level, 1: High level).
d: State of the evaluation (0: Off, 1: On).
Example:
p0435 = 1014
--> The evaluation is switched in and the alarm bit is at position 14 with a low level.
p0435 = 1114
--> The evaluation is switched in and the alarm bit is at position 14 with a high level.
Description: Sets the position and parity of the parity bit in the SSI protocol.
Notice: The bit may only be positioned before (p0446) or after (p0448) the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
Note: Value = dcba
ba: Position of the parity bit in the protocol (0 ... 63).
c: Parity (0: even, 1: uneven).
d: State of the evaluation (0: Off, 1: On).
Example:
p0436 = 1015
--> The evaluation is switched in and the parity bit is at position 15 with even parity.
p0436 = 1115
--> The evaluation is switched in and the parity bit is at position 15 with uneven parity.
p0435[0...n] Encoder SSI alarm bit / Enc SSI alarm bit
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
p0436[0...n] Encoder SSI parity bit / Enc SSI parity bit
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-153
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the extended configuration of the Sensor Module.
Dependency: Refer to: p0430, r0459
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 00:
When the data logger (trace) is activated, in the case of a fault, data before and after the event are recorded
(traced) and saved in files on the non-volatile memory medium. Experts can then evaluate this data.
Re bit 01:
If bit = 0, the zero mark is evaluated by ANDing tracks A and B and the zero mark.
For bit = 1, the zero mark is evaluated depending on the direction of rotation detected. For a positive direction of
rotation, the positive edge of the zero mark is considered and for a negative direction of rotation, the negative edge
of the zero mark.
Re bit 02:
If the bit is set, in the event of a deviation less than the tolerance window for the zero mark (p4681, p4682), the
pulses per revolution are corrected. If the bit is not set, encoder fault F3x131 is triggered.
Re Bit 04 and Bit 05:
The current hardware only supports 1x or 4x signal evaluation.
Bit 5/4 = 0/0: Signal evaluation per period, 4x.
Bit 5/4 = 1/0: Signal evaluation per period, 4x.
Bit 5/4 = 0/1: Signal evaluation per period, 1x.
Bit 5/4 = 1/1: Illegal setting.
Re bit 06:
If the function is active, when dn/dt monitoring responds, the speed actual value is internally frozen for a time equiv-
alent to two current controller clock cycles. The rotor position continues to be integrated. The actual value is then
re-enabled after this time has expired.
Re bit 07:
If the bit is set, the encoder pulses which have not been corrected are added to r4688 at the zero mark.
Re bit 11:
If the bit is set, within a certain time grid the Sensor Module checks whether the fault cause is still present. This
enables the Module to switch from the fault state to the operating state and provide valid actual values automati-
cally. The faults are displayed until the user acknowledges them.
p0437[0...n] Sensor Module configuration extended / SM config ext
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0011 0000 0000 0000 0000
1000 0000 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Activating the data logger Yes No -
01 Zero mark edge detection Yes No -
02 Correction position actual value XIST1 Yes No -
04 Edge evaluation Yes No -
05 Edge evaluation Yes No -
06 Freeze the speed actual value for dn/dt
errors
Yes No -
07 Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses Yes No -
11 Automatic alarm acknowledgment Yes No -
26 Track monitoring deselection Yes No -
28 EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremen-
tal/absolute
Yes No -
29 EnDat encoder initialization with high accu-
racy
Yes No -
31 Analog unipolar track monitoring Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-154 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Re bit 20:
If the bit is set, the bandwidth of the analog filter for SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos encoder) can be set via
parameter p4660.
Re bit 26:
Track monitoring is deactivated for the square-wave encoders when the bit is set, even if the monitoring function is
selected in p405.2.
Re bit 28:
Monitoring of the difference between incremental and absolute position in the case of linear encoders.
Re bit 29:
When the bit is set, the EnDat encoder is initialized under a certain speed and, therefore, with high accuracy. If ini-
tialization at a higher speed is requested, fault F31151, F32151, or F33151 is output.
Re bit 31:
When monitoring is active, the levels of the individual track signals and the corresponding inverted track signals are
monitored separately.
Description: Sets the extended configuration of the Sensor Module.
Dependency: Refer to: p0430, r0459
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 00:
When the data logger (trace) is activated, in the case of a fault, data before and after the event are recorded
(traced) and saved in files on the non-volatile memory medium. Experts can then evaluate this data.
Re bit 01:
If bit = 0, the zero mark is evaluated by ANDing tracks A and B and the zero mark.
For bit = 1, the zero mark is evaluated depending on the direction detected. For a positive direction, the positive
edge of the zero mark is considered and for a negative direction, the negative edge of the zero mark.
Re bit 02:
If the bit is set, in the event of a deviation less than the tolerance window for the zero mark (p4681, p4682), the
pulses per revolution are corrected. If the bit is not set, encoder fault F3x131 is triggered.
p0437[0...n] Sensor Module configuration extended / SM config ext
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0011 0000 0000 0000 0000
1000 0000 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Activating the data logger Yes No -
01 Zero mark edge detection Yes No -
02 Correction position actual value XIST1 Yes No -
04 Edge evaluation Yes No -
05 Edge evaluation Yes No -
06 Freeze the speed actual value for dn/dt
errors
Yes No -
07 Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses Yes No -
11 Automatic alarm acknowledgment Yes No -
26 Track monitoring deselection Yes No -
28 EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremen-
tal/absolute
Yes No -
29 EnDat encoder initialization with high accu-
racy
Yes No -
31 Analog unipolar track monitoring Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-155
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Re Bit 04 and Bit 05:
Bit 5/4 = 0/0: Signal evaluation per period, 4x.
Bit 5/4 = 1/0: Signal evaluation per period, 4x.
Bit 5/4 = 0/1: Signal evaluation per period, 1x.
Bit 5/4 = 1/1: Illegal setting.
Re bit 06:
If the function is active, when dn/dt monitoring responds, the velocity actual value is internally frozen for a time
equivalent to two current controller clock cycles. The rotor position continues to be integrated. The actual value is
then re-enabled after this time has expired.
Re bit 07:
If the bit is set, the encoder pulses detected as faulty between two zero marks are accumulated (r4688).
Re bit 29:
When the bit is set, the EnDat encoder is initialized under a certain velocity and, therefore, with high accuracy. If ini-
tialization at a higher velocity is requested, fault F31151, F32151, or F33151 is output.
Re bit 31:
When monitoring is active, the levels of the individual track signals and the corresponding inverted track signals are
monitored separately.
Description: Sets the filter time for a squarewave encoder.
The hardware of the squarewave encoder only supports the following values:
No filtering
0.04 µs
0.64 µs
2.56 µs
10.24 µs
20.48 µs
Dependency: Refer to: r0452
Notice: If the filter time is too long, the track signals A/B/R may be suppressed and the appropriate messages output.
Note: The most suitable filter time depends on the number of pulses and maximum speed of the square-wave encoder.
The filter time is automatically corrected to the next value when entering a non-specified value. In this case, no
message is output.
The effective filter time is displayed in r0452.
Description: Ramp-up time of encoder. The encoder supplies stable track signals once this time has elapsed.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
p0438[0...n] Squarewave encoder filter time / Enc t_filt
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 100.00 [µs] 0.64 [µs]
p0439[0...n] Encoder ramp-up time / Enc ramp-up time
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 65535 [ms] 0 [ms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-156 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Copies the actual serial number of the encoder belonging to this Encoder Data Set (EDS) to p0441 ... p0445.
Example:
For p0440[0] = 1, the serial number of the encoder belonging EDS0 is copied to p0441[0] ... p0445[0].
Value: 0: No action
1: Transfer serial number
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464, p1990
Note: For encoders with serial number, encoder replacement is monitored in order to request angular commutation cali-
bration (adjustment) for motor encoders and absolute calibration for direct measuring systems with absolute value
data. The serial number, which from then onwards is used for monitoring purposes, can be transferred using p0440.
In the following cases, copying is automatically started in the following cases:
1.) When commissioning 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FK7 motors.
2.) When writing into p0431.
3.) For p1990 = 1.
p0440 is automatically set to 0 when the copying has been completed.
In order to permanently accept the copied values, it is necessary to save in a non-volatile fashion (p0977).
Description: Serial number part 1 of the encoder for the commissioning.
Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Description: Serial number part 2 of the encoder for the commissioning.
Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
p0440[0...n] Copy encoder serial number / Copy enc ser_no
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p0441[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 1 / Enc comm ser_no 1
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p0442[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 2 / Enc comm ser_no 2
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-157
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Serial number part 3 of the encoder for the commissioning.
Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0442, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Description: Serial number part 4 of the encoder for the commissioning.
Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Description: Serial number part 5 of the encoder for the commissioning.
Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Description: Sets the number of bits before the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note: For example, error bit, alarm bit or parity bit can be positioned at these bits.
p0443[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 3 / Enc comm ser_no 3
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p0444[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 4 / Enc comm ser_no 4
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p0445[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 5 / Enc comm ser_no 5
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p0446[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits before the absolute value / Enc SSI bit before
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-158 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the number of bits for the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Description: Sets the number of bits after the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note: For example, error bit, alarm bit or parity bit can be positioned at these bits.
Description: Sets the number of filler bits for double absolute value transfer in the SSI protocol.
Dependency: Refer to: p0429
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note: This parameter is only of significance for p0429.2 = 1.
Description: Displays the relationship between the electrical and mechanical pole positions.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
p0447[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits absolute value / Enc SSI bit val
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 25
p0448[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits after the absolute value / Enc SSI bit after
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
p0449[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits, filler bits / Enc SSI fill bits
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 1
r0451[0...2] Commutation angle factor / Enc commut_factor
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4710
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-159
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the effective filter time for a squarewave encoder.
The filter time is set using p0438.
Dependency: Refer to: p0438
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Description: Displays the effective filter time for a squarewave encoder.
The filter time is set using p0438.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0438
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Description: Sets the measuring time for evaluating zero speed.
If no further encoder pulses are detected during this time, a speed actual value of zero is output internally.
Dependency: Refer to: r0452
Note: This function is required for slow-running motors so that actual speeds close to zero can be output correctly.
Description: Displays the detected encoder configuration.
In this case, the encoder must automatically support the function (e.g. encoder with EnDat interface).
r0452 Squarewave encoder filter time display / Enc t_filt displ
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
r0452[0...2] Squarewave encoder filter time display / Enc t_filt displ
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
p0453[0...n] Measuring time pulse encoder evaluation zero speed / t_meas enc_eva n_0
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.10 [ms] 10000.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms]
r0455 Encoder configuration recognized / Enc config act
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-160 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p0404
Note: ZM: Zero mark
This parameter is only used for diagnostics.
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 20, 21 (voltage level 5 V, voltage level 24 V):
The voltage level cannot be detected. Therefore, these bits are always set to 0.
Description: Displays the detected encoder configuration.
In this case, the encoder must automatically support the function (e.g. encoder with EnDat interface).
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Linear encoder Yes No -
01 Abs value encoder Yes No -
02 Multiturn encoder Yes No -
03 Track A/B sq-wave Yes No -
04 Track A/B sinus Yes No -
05 Track C/D Yes No -
06 Hall sensor Yes No -
08 EnDat encoder Yes No -
09 SSI encoder Yes No -
10 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder Yes No -
11 Digital encoder Yes no -
12 Equidistant zero mark Yes No -
13 Irregular zero mark Yes No -
14 Distance-coded zero mark Yes No -
15 Commutation with zero mark (not ASM) Yes No -
16 Acceleration Yes No -
17 Track A/B analog Yes No -
20 Voltage level 5 V Yes No -
21 Voltage level 24 V Yes No -
22 Remote sense (only SMC30) Yes No -
23 Resolver excit. Yes No -
r0455[0...2] Encoder configuration recognized / Enc config act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Linear encoder Yes No -
01 Abs value encoder Yes No -
02 Multiturn encoder Yes No -
03 Track A/B sq-wave Yes No -
04 Track A/B sinus Yes No -
05 Track C/D Yes No -
06 Hall sensor Yes No -
08 EnDat encoder Yes No -
09 SSI encoder Yes No -
10 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder Yes No -
11 Digital encoder Yes no -
12 Equidistant zero mark Yes No -
13 Irregular zero mark Yes No -
14 Distance-coded zero mark Yes No -
15 Commutation with zero mark (not ASM) Yes No -
16 Acceleration Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-161
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p0404
Note: ZM: Zero mark
This parameter is only used for diagnostics.
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 20, 21 (voltage level 5 V, voltage level 24 V):
The voltage level cannot be detected. Therefore, these bits are always set to 0.
Description: Contains the encoder configuration supported by the Sensor Module.
Dependency: Refer to: p0404
Note: ZM: Zero mark
This parameter is only used for diagnostics.
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
17 Track A/B analog Yes No -
20 Voltage level 5 V Yes No -
21 Voltage level 24 V Yes No -
22 Remote sense (only SMC30) Yes No -
23 Resolver excit. Yes No -
r0456 Encoder configuration supported / Enc config supp
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Linear encoder Yes No -
01 Abs value encoder Yes No -
02 Multiturn encoder Yes No -
03 Track A/B sq-wave Yes No -
04 Track A/B sinus Yes No -
05 Track C/D Yes No -
06 Hall sensor Yes No -
08 EnDat encoder Yes No -
09 SSI encoder Yes No -
10 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder Yes No -
11 Digital encoder Yes no -
12 Equidistant zero mark Yes No -
13 Irregular zero mark Yes No -
14 Distance-coded zero mark Yes No -
15 Commutation with zero mark (not ASM) Yes No -
16 Acceleration Yes No -
17 Track A/B analog Yes No -
20 Voltage level 5 V Yes No -
21 Voltage level 24 V Yes No -
22 Remote sense (only SMC30) Yes No -
23 Resolver excit. Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-162 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Contains the encoder configuration supported by the Sensor Module.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0404
Note: ZM: Zero mark
This parameter is only used for diagnostics.
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Description: Sets the Sensor Module configuration.
r0456[0...2] Encoder configuration supported / Enc config supp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Linear encoder Yes No -
01 Abs value encoder Yes No -
02 Multiturn encoder Yes No -
03 Track A/B sq-wave Yes No -
04 Track A/B sinus Yes No -
05 Track C/D Yes No -
06 Hall sensor Yes No -
08 EnDat encoder Yes No -
09 SSI encoder Yes No -
10 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder Yes No -
11 Digital encoder Yes no -
12 Equidistant zero mark Yes No -
13 Irregular zero mark Yes No -
14 Distance-coded zero mark Yes No -
15 Commutation with zero mark (not ASM) Yes No -
16 Acceleration Yes No -
17 Track A/B analog Yes No -
20 Voltage level 5 V Yes No -
21 Voltage level 24 V Yes No -
22 Remote sense (only SMC30) Yes No -
23 Resolver excit. Yes No -
r0458 Sensor Module properties / SM properties
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Encoder data available Yes No -
01 Motor data available Yes No -
02 Temperature sensor connection available Yes No -
03 Connection for PTC for motor with DRIVE-
CLiQ also available
Yes No -
04 Module temperature available Yes No -
05 Absolute encoder p0408/p0421, no power
of 2
Yes No -
06 Sensor Module permits parking/unparking Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-163
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p0600, p0601
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 11:
When the property is set, the following parameters can be changed without the actual value in the encoder interface
becoming invalid (state r0481.14 = 1 "parking encoder active"):
p0314, p0315, p0430, p0431, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445
Re bit 12:
The extended functions can be configured using p0437.
Re bit 13:
Encoder faults can be acknowledged via Gn_STW.15.
Re bit 14:
Only for internal Siemens use.
Re bit 23:
When the property is set, commutation with zero mark can be deselected using p0430.23.
Re bit 24:
If the property is set, commutation to the selected zero mark can be carried out.
07 Hall sensor can be combined with actual
value inversion
Yes No -
08 Evaluation through several temperature
channels possible
Yes No -
09 Encoder fault and its associated information
available
Yes No -
10 Speed diagnostics in the Sensor Module Yes No -
11 Configuring without park state possible Yes No -
12 Extended functions available Yes No -
13 Extended encoder fault handling Yes No -
14 Extended singleturn/multiturn information
available
Yes No -
15 Valuation figures available Yes No -
16 Pole position identification Yes No -
17 Burst oversampling Yes No -
19 Safety position actual value sensing Yes No -
20 Extended speed calculation being used
(only SMC30)
Yes No -
21 Zero mark tolerance Yes No -
22 Rot pos adapt Yes No -
23 Commutation with zero mark can be dese-
lected
Yes No -
24 Commutation with selected zero mark Yes No -
25 Disconnection of encoder power supply on
parking supported
Yes No -
27 SSI position value extrapolation Yes No -
28 Cubic correction Yes No -
29 Phase correction Yes No -
30 Amplitude correction Yes No -
31 Offset correction Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-164 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the Sensor Module configuration.
Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p0600, p0601
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 11:
When the property is set, the following parameters can be changed without the actual value in the encoder interface
becoming invalid (state r0481.14 = 1 "parking encoder active"):
p0314, p0315, p0430, p0431, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445
Re bit 12:
The extended functions can be configured using p0437.
Re bit 13:
Encoder faults can be acknowledged via Gn_STW.15.
r0458 Sensor Module properties / SM properties
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Encoder data available Yes No -
01 Motor data available Yes No -
02 Temperature sensor connection available Yes No -
03 Connection for PTC for motor with DRIVE-
CLiQ also available
Yes No -
04 Module temperature available Yes No -
05 Absolute encoder p0408/p0421, no power
of 2
Yes No -
06 Sensor Module permits parking/unparking Yes No -
07 Hall sensor can be combined with actual
value inversion
Yes No -
08 Evaluation through several temperature
channels possible
Yes No -
09 Encoder fault and its associated information
available
Yes No -
10 Velocity diagnostics in the Sensor Module Yes No -
11 Configuring without park state possible Yes No -
12 Extended functions available Yes No -
13 Extended encoder fault handling Yes No -
14 Extended singleturn/multiturn information
available
Yes No -
15 Valuation figures available Yes No -
16 Pole position identification Yes No -
17 Burst oversampling Yes No -
19 Safety position actual value sensing Yes No -
20 Extended velocity calculation available (only
SMC30)
Yes No -
21 Zero mark tolerance Yes No -
22 Rot pos adapt Yes No -
23 Commutation with zero mark can be dese-
lected
Yes No -
24 Commutation with selected zero mark Yes No -
25 Disconnection of encoder power supply on
parking supported
Yes No -
27 SSI position value extrapolation Yes No -
28 Cubic correction Yes No -
29 Phase correction Yes No -
30 Amplitude correction Yes No -
31 Offset correction Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-165
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Re bit 14:
Only for internal Siemens use.
Re bit 23:
When the property is set, commutation with zero mark can be deselected using p0430.23.
Re bit 24:
If the property is set, commutation to the selected zero mark can be carried out.
Description: Sets the Sensor Module configuration.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p0600, p0601
r0458[0...2] Sensor Module properties / SM properties
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Encoder data available Yes No -
01 Motor data available Yes No -
02 Temperature sensor connection available Yes No -
03 Connection for PTC for motor with DRIVE-
CLiQ also available
Yes No -
04 Module temperature available Yes No -
05 Absolute encoder p0408/p0421, no power
of 2
Yes No -
06 Sensor Module permits parking/unparking Yes No -
07 Hall sensor can be combined with actual
value inversion
Yes No -
08 Evaluation through several temperature
channels possible
Yes No -
09 Encoder fault and its associated information
available
Yes No -
10 Speed diagnostics in the Sensor Module Yes No -
11 Configuring without park state possible Yes No -
12 Extended functions available Yes No -
13 Extended encoder fault handling Yes No -
14 Extended singleturn/multiturn information
available
Yes No -
15 Valuation figures available Yes No -
16 Pole position identification Yes No -
17 Burst oversampling Yes No -
19 Safety position actual value sensing Yes No -
20 Extended speed calculation being used
(only SMC30)
Yes No -
21 Zero mark tolerance Yes No -
22 Rot pos adapt Yes No -
23 Commutation with zero mark can be dese-
lected
Yes No -
24 Commutation with selected zero mark Yes No -
25 Disconnection of encoder power supply on
parking supported
Yes No -
27 SSI position value extrapolation Yes No -
28 Cubic correction Yes No -
29 Phase correction Yes No -
30 Amplitude correction Yes No -
31 Offset correction Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-166 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 11:
When the property is set, the following parameters can be changed without the actual value in the encoder interface
becoming invalid (state r0481.14 = 1 "parking encoder active"):
p0314, p0315, p0430, p0431, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445
Re bit 12:
The extended functions can be configured using p0437.
Re bit 13:
Encoder faults can be acknowledged via Gn_STW.15.
Re bit 14:
Only for internal Siemens use.
Re bit 23:
When the property is set, commutation with zero mark can be deselected using p0430.23.
Re bit 24:
If the property is set, commutation to the selected zero mark can be carried out.
Description: Displays the extended properties supported by the Sensor Module.
Dependency: Refer to: p0437
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 09:
Parameter p0426 or p0439 has been modified. These functions are not supported by the connected Sensor Mod-
ule.
r0459 Sensor Module properties extended / SM prop ext
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Activating the data logger Yes No -
01 Zero mark edge detection Yes No -
02 Correction position actual value XIST1 Yes No -
04 Edge evaluation Yes No -
05 Edge evaluation Yes No -
06 Freeze the speed actual value for dn/dt
errors
Yes No -
07 Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses Yes No -
09 Support function p0426, p0439 Yes No -
10 Pulse/direction interface Yes No -
11 Automatic alarm acknowledgment Yes No -
26 Track monitoring deselection Yes No -
28 EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremen-
tal/absolute
Yes No -
29 EnDat encoder initialization with high accu-
racy
Yes No -
31 Analog unipolar track monitoring Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-167
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the extended properties supported by the Sensor Module.
Dependency: Refer to: p0437
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 09:
Parameter p0426 or p0439 has been modified. These functions are not supported by the connected Sensor Mod-
ule.
Description: Displays the extended properties supported by the Sensor Module.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
r0459 Sensor Module properties extended / SM prop ext
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Activating the data logger Yes No -
01 Zero mark edge detection Yes No -
02 Correction position actual value XIST1 Yes No -
04 Edge evaluation Yes No -
05 Edge evaluation Yes No -
06 Freeze actual velocity for dn/dt errors Yes No -
07 Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses Yes No -
09 Support function p0426, p0439 Yes No -
10 Pulse/direction interface Yes No -
11 Automatic alarm acknowledgment Yes No -
26 Track monitoring deselection Yes No -
28 EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremen-
tal/absolute
Yes No -
29 EnDat encoder initialization with high accu-
racy
Yes No -
31 Analog unipolar track monitoring Yes No -
r0459[0...2] Sensor Module properties extended / SM prop ext
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Activating the data logger Yes No -
01 Zero mark edge detection Yes No -
02 Correction position actual value XIST1 Yes No -
04 Edge evaluation Yes No -
05 Edge evaluation Yes No -
06 Freeze the speed actual value for dn/dt
errors
Yes No -
07 Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses Yes No -
09 Support function p0426, p0439 Yes No -
10 Pulse/direction interface Yes No -
11 Automatic alarm acknowledgment Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-168 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p0437
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 09:
Parameter p0426 or p0439 has been modified. These functions are not supported by the connected Sensor Mod-
ule.
Description: Displays the actual serial number part 1 of the appropriate encoder.
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Description: Displays the actual serial number part 1 of the appropriate encoder.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Description: Displays the actual serial number part 2 of the appropriate encoder.
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0462, r0463, r0464
26 Track monitoring deselection Yes No -
28 EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremen-
tal/absolute
Yes No -
29 EnDat encoder initialization with high accu-
racy
Yes No -
31 Analog unipolar track monitoring Yes No -
r0460 Encoder serial number part 1 / Enc ser_no 1
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0460[0...2] Encoder serial number part 1 / Enc ser_no 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0461 Encoder serial number part 2 / Enc ser_no 2
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-169
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual serial number part 2 of the appropriate encoder.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0462, r0463, r0464
Description: Displays the actual serial number part 3 of the appropriate encoder.
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0463, r0464
Description: Displays the actual serial number part 3 of the appropriate encoder.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0463, r0464
Description: Displays the actual serial number part 4 of the appropriate encoder.
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0464
r0461[0...2] Encoder serial number part 2 / Enc ser_no 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0462 Encoder serial number part 3 / Enc ser_no 3
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0462[0...2] Encoder serial number part 3 / Enc ser_no 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0463 Encoder serial number part 4 / Enc ser_no 4
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-170 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual serial number part 4 of the appropriate encoder.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0464
Description: Displays the actual serial number part 5 of the appropriate encoder.
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463
Description: Displays the actual serial number part 5 of the appropriate encoder.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463
r0463[0...2] Encoder serial number part 4 / Enc ser_no 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0464 Encoder serial number part 5 / Enc ser_no 5
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0464[0...2] Encoder serial number part 5 / Enc ser_no 5
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-171
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the serial number of encoder 1.
Index 0 = first character of the identification number
...
Index x = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 1 = 2F hex (slash) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 2 = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 3 = first character of the serial number
...
Index y with contents = last character of the serial number
Dependency: Refer to: r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual:
Note: The individual characters of the identification number/serial number are available coded as ASCII characters.
Description: Displays the serial number of encoder 2.
Index 0 = first character of the identification number
...
Index x = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 1 = 2F hex (slash) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 2 = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 3 = first character of the serial number
...
Index y with contents = last character of the serial number
Dependency: Refer to: r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual:
Note: The individual characters of the identification number/serial number are available coded as ASCII characters.
r0465[0...27] Encoder 1 identification number/serial number / Enc1 ID_no/Ser_no
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0466[0...27] Encoder 2 identification number/serial number / Enc2 ID_no/Ser_no
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-172 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the serial number of encoder 3.
Index 0 = first character of the identification number
...
Index x = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 1 = 2F hex (slash) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 2 = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 3 = first character of the serial number
...
Index y with contents = last character of the serial number
Dependency: Refer to: r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual:
Note: The individual characters of the identification number/serial number are available coded as ASCII characters.
Description: Displays the valid bits of the redundant coarse position value.
Dependency: Refer to: p9323, p9523
Description: Displays the valid bits of the redundant coarse position value.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p9323, p9523
r0467[0...27] Encoder 3 identification number/serial number / Enc3 ID_no/Ser_no
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0470 Redundant coarse value valid bits / Valid bits
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0470[0...2] Redundant coarse value valid bits / Valid bits
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-173
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value.
Dependency: Refer to: p9324, p9524
Description: Displays the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p9324, p9524
Description: Displays the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value.
Description: Displays the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
r0471 Redundant coarse value fine resolution bits / Fine bit
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0471[0...2] Redundant coarse value fine resolution bits / Fine bit
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0472 Redundant coarse position value relevant bits / Relevant bits
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0472[0...2] Redundant coarse position value relevant bits / Relevant bits
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-174 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the encoder configuration for the redundant coarse position value.
Dependency: Refer to: p9315, p9515
Description: Displays the encoder configuration for the redundant coarse position value.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p9315, p9515
Description: Displays the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position.
Note: MSB: Most Significant Bit
r0474 Redundant coarse position value configuration / Red pos config
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Incrementer Yes No -
01 Encoder CRC least significant byte first Yes No -
02 Redundant coarse position val. most signifi-
cant bit left-aligned
Yes No -
r0474[0...2] Redundant coarse position value configuration / Red pos config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Incrementer Yes No -
01 Encoder CRC least significant byte first Yes No -
02 Redundant coarse position val. most signifi-
cant bit left-aligned
Yes No -
r0475 Gx_XIST1 coarse position safe most significant bit / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-175
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Note: MSB: Most Significant Bit
Description: Displays the position difference before the measuring gear between powering down and powering up.
Dependency: Refer to: F31501, F32501, F33501
Note: The increments are displayed in the format the same as r0483. The position difference should be read in encoder
increments.
Description: Displays the position difference before the measuring gear between powering down and powering up.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: F31501, F32501, F33501
Note: The increments are displayed in the format the same as r0483. The position difference should be read in encoder
increments.
Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics.
In contrast to p0482, the value is updated in each DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle and displayed with sign.
r0475[0...2] Gx_XIST1 coarse position safe most significant bit / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0477 CO: Measuring gear, position difference / Meas gear pos diff
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0477[0...2] CO: Measuring gear, position difference / Meas gear pos diff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0479 CO: Diagnostics encoder position actual value Gn_XIST1 / Diag Gn_XIST1
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-176 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Caution: Following ramping-up or after a data set changeover, the new value is present at connector inputs which are inter-
connected to connector output r0479 and under certain circumstances take 100 ms to become available. Reason:
These interconnections are updated in the background, unlike interconnections involving other connector outputs
(e.g. CO: r0482).
The value is immediately available when non-cyclically reading r0479 (e.g. via the expert list).
Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics.
In contrast to p0482, the value is updated in each DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle and displayed with sign.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Caution: Following ramping-up or after a data set changeover, the new value is present at connector inputs which are inter-
connected to connector output r0479 and under certain circumstances take 100 ms to become available. Reason:
These interconnections are updated in the background, unlike interconnections involving other connector outputs
(e.g. CO: r0482).
The value is immediately available when non-cyclically reading r0479 (e.g. via the expert list).
Description: Sets the signal source for the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive.
Note: When the function module "basic positioner" (r0108.4 = 1) is activated, the following BICO interconnection is estab-
lished:
CI: p0480[0] = r2520[0], CI: p0480[1] = r2520[1] and CI: p0480[2] = r2520[2]
Description: Sets the signal source for the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Note: When the function module "basic positioner" (r0108.4 = 1) is activated, the following BICO interconnection is estab-
lished:
CI: p0480[0] = r2520[0], CI: p0480[1] = r2520[1] and CI: p0480[2] = r2520[2]
r0479[0...2] CO: Diagnostics encoder position actual value Gn_XIST1 / Diag Gn_XIST1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0480 CI: Signal source for encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc S_src Gn_STW
ENCODER Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1580, 4720
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p0480[0...2] CI: Signal source for encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc S_src Gn_STW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1580, 4720
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-177
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the encoder status word Gn_ZSW according to PROFIdrive.
Notice: Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW can, e.g. be found in the following literature:
SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions
Note: Re bit 14:
Displays the acknowledgement for "activate parking encoder" (Gn_STW.14 = 1) or encoder position actual value
(Gn_XIST1) invalid.
Re bit 14, 15:
r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 0 can have one of the following causes:
- the encoder is parked.
- the encoder is deactivated.
- the encoder is being commissioned.
- no parameterized encoder available.
- encoder data set is being changed over.
r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 1 has the following significance:
An encoder error has occurred and the encoder position actual value (Gn_XIST1) is invalid.
Description: Displays the encoder status word Gn_ZSW according to PROFIdrive.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
r0481 CO: Encoder status word Gn_ZSW / Enc Gn_ZSW
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4010, 4704,
4730
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Function 1 active Yes No -
01 Function 2 active Yes No -
02 Function 3 active Yes No -
03 Function 4 active Yes No -
04 Value 1 Displayed in r0483 Not present -
05 Value 2 Displayed in r0483 Not present -
06 Value 3 Displayed in r0483 Not present -
07 Value 4 Displayed in r0483 Not present -
08 Measuring probe 1 deflected Yes No -
09 Measuring probe 2 deflected Yes No -
11 Encoder fault acknowledge active Yes No 9676
13 Absolute value cyclically Displayed in r0483 No -
14 Parking encoder active Yes No -
15 Encoder fault Displayed in r0483 None -
r0481[0...2] CO: Encoder status word Gn_ZSW / Enc Gn_ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4010, 4704,
4730
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-178 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW can, e.g. be found in the following literature:
SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions
Note: Re bit 14:
Displays the acknowledgement for "activate parking encoder" (Gn_STW.14 = 1) or encoder position actual value
(Gn_XIST1) invalid.
Re bit 14, 15:
r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 0 can have one of the following causes:
- the encoder is parked.
- the encoder is deactivated.
- the encoder is being commissioned.
- no parameterized encoder available.
- encoder data set is being changed over.
r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 1 has the following significance:
An encoder error has occurred and the encoder position actual value (Gn_XIST1) is invalid.
Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive.
Note: - this value is reset if necessary when the "parking axis" function is deselected.
- in this value, the measuring gear (p0432, p0433) is only taken into account when the position tracking is activated
(p0411.0 = 1).
Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Function 1 active Yes No -
01 Function 2 active Yes No -
02 Function 3 active Yes No -
03 Function 4 active Yes No -
04 Value 1 Displayed in r0483 Not present -
05 Value 2 Displayed in r0483 Not present -
06 Value 3 Displayed in r0483 Not present -
07 Value 4 Displayed in r0483 Not present -
08 Measuring probe 1 deflected Yes No -
09 Measuring probe 2 deflected Yes No -
11 Encoder fault acknowledge active Yes No 9676
13 Absolute value cyclically Displayed in r0483 No -
14 Parking encoder active Yes No -
15 Encoder fault Displayed in r0483 None -
r0482 CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 / Enc Gn_XIST1
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1580, 2450,
4010, 4704, 4735, 4740
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0482[0...2] CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 / Enc Gn_XIST1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1580, 2450,
4010, 4704, 4735, 4740
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-179
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: - this value is reset if necessary when the "parking axis" function is deselected.
- in this value, the measuring gear (p0432, p0433) is only taken into account when the position tracking is activated
(p0411.0 = 1).
Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST2 according to PROFIdrive.
Recommend.: Possible causes of the error codes:
Error code 4097 and 4098: Defective Control Unit hardware.
Error codes 4099 and 4100: Too many measuring pulses have occurred.
Notice: The encoder position actual value must be requested using the encoder control word Gn_STW.13.
Note: - in this value, the measuring gear (p0432, p0433) is only taken into account when the position tracking is activated
(p0411.0 = 1).
- if GxZSW.15 = 1 (r0481), then an error code with the following significance is located in Gx_XIST2 (r0483):
1: Encoder fault.
2: Possible position shift in Gx_XIST1.
3: Reserved.
4: Abort, reference mark search.
5: Abort, retrieve reference value.
6: Abort, flying measurement.
7: Abort, retrieve measured value.
8: Abort, absolute value transfer.
3841: Function not supported.
4097: Abort, reference mark search due to an initialization error.
4098: Abort, flying measurement due to an initialization error.
4099: Abort, reference mark search due to a measuring error.
4100: Abort, flying measurement due to a measuring error.
Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST2 according to PROFIdrive.
Recommend.: Possible causes of the error codes:
Error code 4097 and 4098: Defective Control Unit hardware.
Error codes 4099 and 4100: Too many measuring pulses have occurred.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Notice: The encoder position actual value must be requested using the encoder control word Gn_STW.13.
r0483 CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XIST2 / Enc Gn_XIST2
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1580, 2450,
4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0483[0...2] CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XIST2 / Enc Gn_XIST2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1580, 2450,
4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-180 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: - in this value, the measuring gear (p0432, p0433) is only taken into account when the position tracking is activated
(p0411.0 = 1).
- if GxZSW.15 = 1 (r0481), then an error code with the following significance is located in Gx_XIST2 (r0483):
1: Encoder fault.
2: Possible position shift in Gx_XIST1.
3: Reserved.
4: Abort, reference mark search.
5: Abort, retrieve reference value.
6: Abort, flying measurement.
7: Abort, retrieve measured value.
8: Abort, absolute value transfer.
3841: Function not supported.
4097: Abort, reference mark search due to an initialization error.
4098: Abort, flying measurement due to an initialization error.
4099: Abort, reference mark search due to a measuring error.
4100: Abort, flying measurement due to a measuring error.
Description: Displays the redundant coarse encoder position including CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check).
Upper 16 bits:
CRC over the redundant coarse encoder position.
Lower 16 bits:
Redundant coarse encoder position.
On SMx encoder modules, the encoder coarse position count direction is opposite to r0482 (encoder actual value
Gn_XIST1). The value contains 2 bit fine resolution.
On DRIVE-CLiQ encoders, the encoder coarse position count direction corresponds to r0482 and the encoder
coarse position contains 9 valid bits and no fine resolution bits.
Dependency: The values are valid when the safety position actual value sensing is activated (p0430.19 = 1).
Refer to: p0430
Note: This absolute value does not change, contrary to r0482, when deselecting the function "parking axis".
Description: Displays the redundant coarse encoder position including CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check).
Upper 16 bits:
CRC over the redundant coarse encoder position.
Lower 16 bits:
Redundant coarse encoder position.
On SMx encoder modules, the encoder coarse position count direction is opposite to r0482 (encoder actual value
Gn_XIST1). The value contains 2 bit fine resolution.
On DRIVE-CLiQ encoders, the encoder coarse position count direction corresponds to r0482 and the encoder
coarse position contains 9 valid bits and no fine resolution bits.
r0484 CO: Redundant coarse encoder position + CRC Gn_XIST1 / Enc red pos+CRC
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0484[0...2] CO: Redundant coarse encoder position + CRC Gn_XIST1 / Enc red pos+CRC
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-181
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: The values are valid when the safety position actual value sensing is activated (p0430.19 = 1).
Refer to: p0430
Note: This absolute value does not change, contrary to r0482, when deselecting the function "parking axis".
Description: Displays the raw value of the incremental encoder actual value before the measuring gear.
Description: Displays the raw value of the incremental encoder actual value before the measuring gear.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Description: Displays the raw value of the absolute encoder actual value before the measuring gear.
Description: Displays the raw value of the absolute encoder actual value before the measuring gear.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
r0485 CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value incremental / Enc raw val incr
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0485[0...2] CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value incremental / Enc raw val incr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0486 CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value absolute / Enc raw val abs
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0486[0...2] CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value absolute / Enc raw val abs
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-182 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics.
Notice: Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW should be taken from the corresponding product documentation.
Note: The signal source for the encoder control word is set with p0480.
Description: Displays the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Notice: Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW should be taken from the corresponding product documentation.
Note: The signal source for the encoder control word is set with p0480.
r0487 Diagnostic encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc Gn_STW
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1580, 4704,
4720, 4740
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Request function 1 Yes No -
01 Request function 2 Yes No -
02 Request function 3 Yes No -
03 Request function 4 Yes No -
04 Request command bit 0 Yes No -
05 Request command bit 1 Yes No -
06 Request command bit 2 Yes No -
07 Flying measurement mode/search for refer-
ence mark
Flying measurement Reference marks -
13 Request absolute value cyclic Yes No -
14 Request parking encoder Yes No -
15 Request acknowledge encoder fault Yes No -
r0487[0...2] Diagnostic encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc Gn_STW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1580, 4704,
4720, 4740
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Request function 1 Yes No -
01 Request function 2 Yes No -
02 Request function 3 Yes No -
03 Request function 4 Yes No -
04 Request command bit 0 Yes No -
05 Request command bit 1 Yes No -
06 Request command bit 2 Yes No -
07 Flying measurement mode/search for refer-
ence mark
Flying measurement Reference marks -
13 Request absolute value cyclic Yes No -
14 Request parking encoder Yes No -
15 Request acknowledge encoder fault Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-183
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the input terminal to connect probe 1.
Value: 0: No measuring probe
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
3: DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
4: DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
5: DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
6: DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
7: DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
8: DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Dependency: Refer to: p0489, p0728
Notice: To select the values:
For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual).
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
If parameterization is rejected, check whether the terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517 or p2518.
Description: Sets the input terminal to connect probe 1.
Value: 0: No measuring probe
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
3: DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
4: DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
5: DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
6: DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
7: DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
8: DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0489, p0728
Notice: To select the values:
For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual).
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
If parameterization is rejected, check whether the terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517 or p2518.
p0488 Measuring probe 1 input terminal / Meas probe 1 inp
ENCODER Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 0
p0488[0...2] Measuring probe 1 input terminal / Meas probe 1 inp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-184 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the input terminal to connect probe 2.
Value: 0: No measuring probe
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
3: DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
4: DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
5: DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
6: DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
7: DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
8: DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Dependency: Refer to: p0488, p0728
Notice: To select the values:
For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual).
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
If parameterization is rejected, check whether the terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517 or p2518.
Description: Sets the input terminal to connect probe 2.
Value: 0: No measuring probe
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
3: DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
4: DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
5: DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
6: DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
7: DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
8: DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0488, p0728
Notice: To select the values:
For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual).
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
If parameterization is rejected, check whether the terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517 or p2518.
p0489 Measuring probe 2 input terminal / Meas probe 2 inp
ENCODER Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 0
p0489[0...2] Measuring probe 2 input terminal / Meas probe 2 inp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-185
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the behavior for the ENCODER fault response (motor encoder).
This means, for example, if an encoder fault occurs, encoderless operation can be automatically selected with a
shutdown behavior that can be selected.
Value: 0: Encoder fault results in OFF2
1: Enc fault results in encoderless oper. and oper. continues
2: Encoder fault results in encoderless operation and OFF1
3: Encoder fault results in encoderless operation and OFF3
4: Encoder fault results in an armature short-cct internal/DC brake
Dependency: The following parameters are relevant for encoderless operation.
Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1470, p1472, p1517, p1612, p1755
Refer to: F07575
Caution: For a value = 1, 2, 3, the following applies:
- encoderless operation must have been started.
For a value = 1, the following applies:
- in spite of the motor encoder fault that has occurred, the motor continues to operate.
Note: For a value = 1, 2, 3, the following applies:
- Refer to the status signal "encoderless operation due to a fault" (BO: r1407.13).
- Not possible for separately excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5).
Description: Sets the maximum permissible speed difference within the current controller sampling time for squarewave encod-
ers.
Dependency: Refer to: F31118, A31418
Note: For a value of 0.0, the speed change monitoring is disabled.
if the set maximum speed difference is only exceeded for one sampling time of the current controller, then an
appropriate alarm is output. However, if the maximum speed difference is exceeded over several sampling times,
then a corresponding fault is output.
p0491 Motor encoder fault response ENCODER / Fault resp ENCODER
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 0
p0492 Square-wave encoder, maximum speed difference per sampling cycle /
n_dif max/samp_cyc
ENCODER Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-186 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the maximum permissible velocity difference within the current controller sampling time for square-wave
encoders.
Dependency: Refer to: F31118, A31418
Note: For a value of 0.0, velocity change monitoring is disabled.
if the set maximum velocity difference is only exceeded for one sampling time of the current controller, then an
appropriate alarm is output. However, if the maximum speed difference is exceeded over several sampling times,
then a corresponding fault is output.
Description: Sets the maximum permissible speed difference within the current controller sampling time for squarewave encod-
ers.
When the value is exceeded, depending on p0491, either encoderless closed-loop speed/torque control is selected
or the drive is powered down.
Dependency: Refer to: F31118, A31418, F32118, A32418, F33118, A33418
Note: For a value of 0.0, the speed change monitoring is disabled.
if the set maximum speed difference is only exceeded for one sampling time of the current controller, then an
appropriate alarm is output. However, if the maximum speed difference is exceeded over several sampling times,
then a corresponding fault is output.
The following applies for VECTOR:
The parameter is only pre-assigned when selecting p0340 = 1, 3.
The following applies for SERVO, VECTORMV:
The speed actual value used for the monitoring is a floating average between p0115[0] and p0115[1].
Description: Sets the input terminal for selecting the reference mark via BERO/switching signal when performing referencing
with several zero marks.
The encoder interface supplies the position of the reference mark, which was detected immediately after the posi-
tive edge of the BERO signal.
p0492 Square-wave encoder, max. velocity difference per sampling cycle /
v_dif max/samp_cyc
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [m/min] 1000.00 [m/min] 0.00 [m/min]
p0492 Square-wave encoder, maximum speed difference per sampling cycle /
n_dif max/samp_cyc
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
p0493 Zero mark selection, input terminal / ZM_sel inp_term
ENCODER Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-187
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Value: 0: No selection via BERO
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
3: DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
4: DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
5: DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
6: DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
7: DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
8: DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Notice: For CU310, CX32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment
Manual).
Note: Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
For p0493 = 0 (factory setting) the following applies:
- there is no logic operation between the reference mark search and an input signal.
For p0493 > 0, the following applies:
- the positive edge of the input signal is evaluated. If the negative edge is to be evaluated, signal inversion must be
parameterized via p0490.
- if a parameter change is rejected, a check should be performed as to whether the input terminal is already being
used in p0580, p0680, p2517, or p2518.
Description: Sets the input terminal for selecting the reference mark via BERO/switching signal when performing referencing
with several zero marks.
The encoder interface supplies the position of the reference mark, which was detected immediately after the posi-
tive edge of the BERO signal.
Value: 0: No selection via BERO
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
3: DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
4: DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
5: DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
6: DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
7: DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
8: DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Notice: For CU310, CX32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment
Manual).
Note: Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
For p0493 = 0 (factory setting) the following applies:
- there is no logic operation between the reference mark search and an input signal.
For p0493 > 0, the following applies:
- the positive edge of the input signal is evaluated. If the negative edge is to be evaluated, signal inversion must be
parameterized via p0490.
- if a parameter change is rejected, a check should be performed as to whether the input terminal is already being
used in p0580, p0680, p2517, or p2518.
p0493[0...n] Zero mark selection, input terminal / ZM_sel inp_term
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-188 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the input terminal for connecting an equivalent zero mark (external encoder zero mark).
Value: 0: No equivalent zero mark (evaluation of the encoder zero mark)
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
3: DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
4: DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
5: DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
6: DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
7: DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
8: DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Notice: For CU310, CX32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment
Manual).
Note: Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
The terminal must be set as input.
For p0495 = 0 (factory setting), the encoder zero mark is evaluated as zero mark.
For p0495 > 0, the following applies:
Depending on the direction of motion, the positive or negative edge at the appropriate input is evaluated.
- increasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 0/1 edge is evaluated.
- decreasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 1/0 edge is evaluated.
Only one zero mark is supported. If function 2, 3 or 4 is selected, this results in a fault message in Gn_ZSW.
The inversion of the inputs via p0490 affects the function "referencing with equivalent zero mark". This is the reason
that the edge evaluation is interchanged as a function of the direction of motion.
An input can only be assigned to one encoder as measuring probe 1, 2 or equivalent zero mark. Exception: The
same encoder can be simultaneously used as measuring probe and equivalent zero mark as both functions cannot
be simultaneously requested.
Description: Selects the input terminal for connecting an equivalent zero mark (external encoder zero mark).
Value: 0: No equivalent zero mark (evaluation of the encoder zero mark)
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
3: DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
4: DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
5: DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
6: DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
7: DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
8: DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Notice: For CU310, CX32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment
Manual).
p0495 Equivalent zero mark, input terminal / Zero mark inp
ENCODER Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4735
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 0
p0495[0...2] Equivalent zero mark, input terminal / Zero mark inp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4735
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-189
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
The terminal must be set as input.
For p0495 = 0 (factory setting), the encoder zero mark is evaluated as zero mark.
For p0495 > 0, the following applies:
Depending on the direction of motion, the positive or negative edge at the appropriate input is evaluated.
- increasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 0/1 edge is evaluated.
- decreasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 1/0 edge is evaluated.
Only one zero mark is supported. If function 2, 3 or 4 is selected, this results in a fault message in Gn_ZSW.
The inversion of the inputs via p0490 affects the function "referencing with equivalent zero mark". This is the reason
that the edge evaluation is interchanged as a function of the direction of motion.
An input can only be assigned to one encoder as measuring probe 1, 2 or equivalent zero mark. Exception: The
same encoder can be simultaneously used as measuring probe and equivalent zero mark as both functions cannot
be simultaneously requested.
Description: Selects the trace signal to be output in r0497, r0498 and r0499 for encoder diagnostics.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: r0497: Mechanical revolution
10: r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track B
11: r0498: Fine position X (-A/2), r0499: Fine position Y (-B/2)
12: r0498: Fine position Phi, r0499: -
13: r0498: Offset correction X, r0499: Offset correction Y
14: r0498: Phase correction X, r0499: Amplitude correction Y
15: r0498: Cubic correction X, r0499: Fine position X
16: r0498: oversampling channel A, r0499: oversampling channel B
17: r0498: fan-out, amount, r0499: fan-out, number
18: r0498: Oversampling angle, r0499: Oversampling amount
20: r0498: Raw value, track C, r0499: Raw value, track D
21: r0498: CD position X (-D/2), r0499: CD position Y (C/2)
22: r0498: CD position Phi, r0499: CD pos. Phi - mech. revolution
23: r0497: Zero mark status
24: r0498: Raw value, track R, r0499: Zero mark status
25: r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track R
30: r0497: Absolute position serial
31: r0497: Absolute position, incremental
32: r0497: Zero mark position
33: r0497: Correction absolute position difference
40: r0498: Raw temperature, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 °C
41: r0498: Resistance in 0.1 Ohm, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 °C
42: r0497: Resistance 2500 Ohm
51: r0497: Absolute speed difference (dn/dt)
52: r0497: Xact1 corrected quadrants
60: Analog sensor: r0498: raw val chann. A, r0499: raw val chann. B
61: Analog sensor: r0498: fine pos chann. A,r0499: fine pos chann. B
70: Resolver: r0498: Transformation ratio, r0499: phase
Dependency: Refer to: r0497, r0498, r0499
p0496 Encoder diagnostic signal selection / Enc diag select
ENCODER Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 70 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-190 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Re p0496 = 1: 360 ° <--> 2^32
Re p0496 = 10 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec
Re p0496 = 10, 20 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 11 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, internal processor offset is corrected
Re p0496 = 11, 21 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, internal processor offset is corrected
Re p0496 = 12: 180 ° fine position <--> 32768 dec
Re p0496 = 13 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec
Re p0496 = 13 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec
Re p0496 = 14: 100 % <--> 16384 dec
Re p0496 = 15: 100 % <--> 16384 dec
Re p0496 = 16: (resolver): channel A: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec, channel B: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec
Re p0496 = 16: (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat) channel A: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec, channel B: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 17 (resolver): absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, number: 1 ... 8
Re p0496 = 17 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): absolute value 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, number: 1 ... 8
Re p0496 = 18 (resolver): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec
Re p0496 = 18 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 500 mV <--> 10650 dec
Re p0496 = 22: 180 ° <--> 32768 dec
Re p0496 = 23, 24: r0497.31 (r0499.15) set for at least 1 current controller cycle when encoder zero mark detected
Re p0496 = 24, 25: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 30: Rotary: 1 singleturn measuring step <--> 1 dec, linear: 1 measuring step <--> 1 dec
Re p0496 = 31: Absolute position, incremental in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 32: Zero mark position in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 33: counter offset absolute value in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 40: r0498 <--> (R_KTY/1 kOhm - 0.9) * 32768
Re p0496 = 42: 2500 Ohm <--> 2^32
Re p0496 = 51: 1 rpm <--> 1000 dec
Re p0496 = 52: In 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 70: r: 100% <--> 32768 dec, phase: 180 ° <--> 18000 dec
Description: Selects the trace signal to be output in r0497, r0498 and r0499 for encoder diagnostics.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: r0497: Mechanical revolution
10: r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track B
11: r0498: Fine position X (-A/2), r0499: Fine position Y (-B/2)
12: r0498: Fine position Phi, r0499: -
13: r0498: Offset correction X, r0499: Offset correction Y
14: r0498: Phase correction X, r0499: Amplitude correction Y
15: r0498: Cubic correction X, r0499: Fine position X
16: r0498: oversampling channel A, r0499: oversampling channel B
17: r0498: fan-out, amount, r0499: fan-out, number
18: r0498: Oversampling angle, r0499: Oversampling amount
20: r0498: Raw value, track C, r0499: Raw value, track D
21: r0498: CD position X (-D/2), r0499: CD position Y (C/2)
22: r0498: CD position Phi, r0499: CD pos. Phi - mech. revolution
23: r0497: Zero mark status
24: r0498: Raw value, track R, r0499: Zero mark status
25: r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track R
30: r0497: Absolute position serial
31: r0497: Absolute position, incremental
p0496[0...2] Encoder diagnostic signal selection / Enc diag select
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 70 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-191
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
32: r0497: Zero mark position
33: r0497: Correction absolute position difference
40: r0498: Raw temperature, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 °C
41: r0498: Resistance in 0.1 Ohm, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 °C
42: r0497: Resistance 2500 Ohm
51: r0497: Absolute speed difference (dn/dt)
52: r0497: Xact1 corrected quadrants
60: Analog sensor: r0498: raw val chann. A, r0499: raw val chann. B
61: Analog sensor: r0498: fine pos chann. A,r0499: fine pos chann. B
70: Resolver: r0498: Transformation ratio, r0499: phase
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: r0497, r0498, r0499
Note: Re p0496 = 1: 360 ° <--> 2^32
Re p0496 = 10 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec
Re p0496 = 10, 20 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 11 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, internal processor offset is corrected
Re p0496 = 11, 21 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, internal processor offset is corrected
Re p0496 = 12: 180 ° fine position <--> 32768 dec
Re p0496 = 13 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec
Re p0496 = 13 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec
Re p0496 = 14: 100 % <--> 16384 dec
Re p0496 = 15: 100 % <--> 16384 dec
Re p0496 = 16: (resolver): channel A: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec, channel B: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec
Re p0496 = 16: (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat) channel A: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec, channel B: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 17 (resolver): absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, number: 1 ... 8
Re p0496 = 17 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): absolute value 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, number: 1 ... 8
Re p0496 = 18 (resolver): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec
Re p0496 = 18 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 500 mV <--> 10650 dec
Re p0496 = 22: 180 ° <--> 32768 dec
Re p0496 = 23, 24: r0497.31 (r0499.15) set for at least 1 current controller cycle when encoder zero mark detected
Re p0496 = 24, 25: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 30: Rotary: 1 singleturn measuring step <--> 1 dec, linear: 1 measuring step <--> 1 dec
Re p0496 = 31: Absolute position, incremental in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 32: Zero mark position in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 33: counter offset absolute value in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 40: r0498 <--> (R_KTY/1 kOhm - 0.9) * 32768
Re p0496 = 42: 2500 Ohm <--> 2^32
Re p0496 = 51: 1 rpm <--> 1000 dec
Re p0496 = 52: In 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 70: r: 100% <--> 32768 dec, phase: 180 ° <--> 18000 dec
Description: Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (double word).
The signal to be output is selected in p0496.
Dependency: Refer to: p0496, r0498, r0499
r0497 Encoder diagnostic signal double word / Enc diag DW
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-192 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (double word).
The signal to be output is selected in p0496.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0496, r0498, r0499
Description: Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (low component).
The signal to be output is selected in p0496.
Dependency: Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0499
Description: Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (low component).
The signal to be output is selected in p0496.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0499
Description: Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (high component).
The signal to be output is selected in p0496.
Dependency: Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0498
r0497[0...2] CO: Encoder diagnostic signal double word / Enc diag DW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0498 Encoder diagnostic signal low word / Enc diag low word
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0498[0...2] CO: Encoder diagnostic signal low word / Enc diag low word
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0499 Encoder diagnostic signal high word / Enc diag high word
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-193
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (high component).
The signal to be output is selected in p0496.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0498
Description: Sets the technology application.
The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0578.
Value: 0: Standard drive (VECTOR)
1: Pumps and fans
2: Sensorless closed-loop control down to f = 0 (passive loads)
Dependency: Refer to: p2175, p2177
Note: The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5
- when writing p0578 = 1
For p0500 = 0 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
p1574 = 10 V (for separately-excited synchronous motors: 20 V)
p1750 bit 2 = 0
p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol)
p1803 = 106 %
For p0500 = 1 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
p1574 = 2 V (for separately-excited synchronous motors: 4 V)
p1750 bit 2 = 0
p1802 = 9 (edge modulation), if r0192 bit 0 = 1
p1802 = 4, if r0192 bit 0 = 0 or parallel circuit configuration with single-winding system (p7003)
p1803 = 106 %
r0499[0...2] CO: Encoder diagnostic signal high word / Enc diag high word
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0500 Technology application / Tec application
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 5), T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-194 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
For p0500 = 2 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
p1574 = 2 V (for separately-excited synchronous motors: 4 V)
p1750 bit 2 = 1: Sensorless closed-loop control of induction motors effective up to a frequency of zero.
This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load does not generate
regenerative torque when breaking away and the motor comes to a standstill (zero speed) itself when the pulses
are inhibited.
p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol)
p1803 = 106 %
The setting of p1750 is only relevant for induction motors.
p1802 and p1803 are only changed, in all cases, if a sine-wave output filter (p0230 = 3, 4) has not been selected.
Description: Adjustable parameter of the actual system of units.
Value: 1: System of units SI
2: System of units, referred/SI
3: US system of units
4: System of units, referred/US
Dependency: The parameter cannot be changed if the master control was fetched.
Caution: If a per unit representation is selected and if reference parameters (e.g. p2000) are subsequently changed, then the
physical significance of some closed-loop control parameters will also be adapted where as a result, the closed-
loop control behavior can change (refer to p1576, p1621, p1744, p1752, p1755 and p1609, p1612, p1619, p1620).
Note: Reference parameter for the unit system % are, for example, p2000 ... p2004. Depending on what has been
selected, these are displayed using either SI or US units.
Description: Sets the system of units for the controller gains.
Value: 0: Representation, physical/% (p0505)
1: Representation, no dimensions (referred)
Note: For p0528 = 0 (physical/%), the following applies:
Using p0505, the dependent parameters can be changed over between physical and % representation.
For SERVO (r0107) the following applies:
The parameter is pre-assigned a value of 0 and cannot be changed.
p0505 Selecting the system of units / Select unit sys
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(5) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 4 1
p0528 Controller gain, system of units / Ctrl_gain unit_sys
ENCODER Can be changed: C2(5) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-195
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the system of units for the controller gains.
Value: 0: Representation, physical/% (p0505)
1: Representation, no dimensions (referred)
Note: For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
The parameter is pre-assigned a value of 1 and cannot be changed.
Description: The parameter is used to select a bearing type.
0 = No selection
1 = Manual entry
101 = STANDARD
102 = PERFORMANCE
103 = HIGH PERFORMANCE
104 = ADVANCED LIFETIME
If the bearing type changes the bearing code number (p0531) is pre-assigned accordingly.
Dependency: Refer to: p0301, p0531
Caution: If a valid bearing type (p0530) is entered, the parameters in the bearing list cannot be changed (write protection).
Write protection is canceled if bearing type 1 is entered.
Note: p0530 cannot be changed on a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
Description: The parameter is used to display and enter the bearing code number. It is pre-assigned automatically (from the
parameter lists which are available internally) when p0301 and p0530 are entered and cannot be changed (write
protection). The information in p0530 should be observed when removing write protection.
When changing the bearing code number (except in the case of changing the value to 0), all of the bearing param-
eters are pre-assigned from the parameter lists which are available internally.
Dependency: Refer to: p0301, p0530
Note: p0531 cannot be changed on a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
p0528 Controller gain, system of units / Ctrl_gain unit_sys
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(5) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1
p0530[0...n] Bearing type selection / Bearing type sel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 104 0
p0531[0...n] Bearing code number selection / Bear. code num sel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-196 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the maximum motor bearing speed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082
Caution: This parameter is pre-assigned in the case of motors from the motor list (p0301) if a bearing type (p0530) or a bear-
ing code (p0531) is selected. When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection).
The information in p0530 should be observed when removing write protection.
Notice: If p0532 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also asso-
ciated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
Description: Sets the number of parameters in the inhibit list p0571 that should be withdrawn from the automatic motor and
closed-loop control parameter calculation (refer to p0340, p0578), starting from index 0.
Note: Defines the number of entries in p0571 that should be taken into account. This means that a value of 0 deactivates
the complete list.
Description: The inhibit list contains parameters that should be withdrawn from the automatic motor and closed-loop control
parameter calculation (p0340, p0578).
Value: 0: No parameter
600: Motor temperature sensor
640: Current limit
1082: Maximum speed
1460: Speed controller P gain
1462: Speed controller integral time
1470: Speed controller P gain, encoderless
1472: Speed controller integral time, encoderless
1520: Torque limit upper/motoring
1521: Torque limit lower/regenerative
1530: Power limit motoring
1531: Power limit regenerative
1590: Flux controller P gain
1592: Flux controller integral time
2141: Speed threshold 1
2142: Hysteresis speed 1
p0532[0...n] Bearing maximum speed / Bearing n_max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [rpm] 210000.0 [rpm] 0.0 [rpm]
p0570 Inhibit list values effective number / Inhib list no
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 50 0
p0571[0...49] Inhibit list, motor/closed-loop control parameter calculation / Inhib list calc
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2142 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-197
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: p0570 defines the number of entries (starting at index 0) for which the inhibit should apply. p0572 can be used to
define for which drive data sets the inhibit list should apply.
If a motor data set is entered into a parameter number, then this is not overwritten as soon as only one drive data
set refers to the motor data set (p0186).
Description: Enable ID as to whether the parameters of the inhibit list p0571 should be overwritten when calculating the motor
and closed-loop control parameters for the particular drive data set (index = DDS).
Value: 0: No
1: Yes
Note: 0: The automatic calculation (p0340, p0578) also overwrites the parameters of list p0571.
1: The automatic calculation (p0340, p0578) does not overwrite the parameters of list p0571.
Description: Inhibits the calculation of reference parameters (e.g. p2000) when automatically calculating the motor and closed-
loop control parameters (p0340, p3900).
Value: 0: No
1: Yes
Notice: The inhibit for the reference value calculation is canceled when new motor parameters (e.f. p0305) are entered and
only one drive data set exists (p0180 = 1). This is the case during initial commissioning. Once the motor and control
parameters have been calculated (see p3900, p0340), the inhibit for the reference value calculation is automatically
reactivated.
Note: 0: The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) overwrites the reference parameters.
1: The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) does not overwrite the reference parameters.
Description: This parameter is used to calculate all parameters that depend on the technology of the application (p0500).
All of the parameters are calculated that can also be determined using p0340 = 5.
Value: 0: No calculation
1: Complete parameterization
Note: At the end of the calculations, p0578 is automatically set to 0.
p0572[0...n] Activate inhibit list / Act inhib list
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p0573 Inhibit automatic reference value calculation / Inhibit calc
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p0578[0...n] Calculate parameters that are dependent on the technology/units / Calc tec par
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(5), T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-198 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the units for the parameters of the technology controller.
Value: 1: %
2: 1 referred, no dimensions
3: Bar
4: °C
5: Pa
6: ltr/s
7: m³/s
8: ltr/min
9: m³/min
10: ltr/h
11: m³/h
12: kg/s
13: kg/min
14: kg/h
15: t/min
16: t/h
17: N
18: kN
19: Nm
20: psi
21: °F
22: gallon/s
23: inch³/s
24: gallon/min
25: inch³/min
26: gallon/h
27: inch³/h
28: lb/s
29: lb/min
30: lb/h
31: lbf
32: lbf ft
Dependency: Only units of parameters with unit group 9_1 can be changed over using this parameter.
Refer to: p0596
Description: Sets the reference quantity for the technological units. When changing over using changeover parameter 595 to
absolute units, all of the parameters involved refer to the reference quantity.
Dependency: Refer to: p0595
p0595 Selecting technological units / Select tech units
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: C2(5) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 32 1
p0596 Reference quantity, technological units / Ref tech units
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.01 340.28235E36 1.00
List of parameters
Parameter
1-199
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the sensor to monitor the motor temperature.
Value: 0: No sensor
1: Temperature sensor via encoder 1
2: Temperature sensor via encoder 2
3: Temperature sensor via encoder 3
10: Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection
11: Temperature sensor via Motor Module / CU terminals
20: Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection p608
21: Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection p609
Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0601, p0603
Caution: If, for a selected temperature sensor (p0600 > 0), the motor temperature sensor is not connected but another
encoder, then the temperature adaptation of the motor resistances must be switched out. Otherwise, in controlled-
loop operation, torque errors will occur that will mean that the drive will not be able to be stopped.
Notice: The parameter is calculated in the drive using p0340 and is inhibited for p0340 > 0.
Note: Re p0600 = 0:
With induction motors, the motor temperature is calculated using the motor temperature model (see also p0612, bit
1).
Re p0600 = 1, 2, 3:
Bimetallic switch (p0601 = 4) and PT100 temperature sensor (p0601 = 5) are not supported.
Re p0600 = 10:
The BICO interconnection should be executed via connector input CI: p0603.
Re p0600 = 11:
For SINAMICS S120 AC Drive (AC/AC) and using the Control Unit Adapter CUA31, the temperature sensor is con-
nected at the adapter (X210).
Re p0600 = 20, 21:
The BICO interconnection should be executed via connector input CI: p0608 or p0609.
Associated parameters: p0601, p4600..4603, p4610..p4613
Description: Sets the sensor type for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value: 0: No sensor
1: PTC alarm & timer
2: KTY84
3: KTY84 and PTC (only for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ):
4: Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer (only for temp_eval via MM)
5: PT100
10: Evaluation via several temperature channels SME12x
11: Evaluation via several temperature channels BICO
Dependency: The thermal motor model is only calculated for p0612.1 = 1.
Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0612
p0600[0...n] Motor temperature sensor for monitoring / Mot temp_sensor
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 21 0
p0601[0...n] Motor temperature sensor type / Mot_temp_sens type
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 11 2
Parameter
List of parameters
1-200 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The temperature sensor for the temperature evaluation is set in p0600.
For p0600 = 10 (temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection), the setting in p0601 has no significance.
Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature:
- hardware description of the appropriate components
- SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
Re p0601 = 1 (PTC alarm & timer):
Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm.
After the tripping resistance has been exceeded, an appropriate alarm is output and after the delay time set in
p0606 has expired, an appropriate fault is output.
Re p0601 = 3 (KTY84 and PTC (only for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ)):
For motors with DRIVE-CLiQ and 2 temperature sensors, the value is automatically set.
Re p0601 = 4 (bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer (only for temperature evaluation via the Motor Module)):
Tripping resistance = 100 Ohm.
After tripping, an appropriate alarm is output and after the delay time set in p0606 has expired, an appropriate fault
is output.
Re p0601 = 5 (PT100):
It is only possible to evaluate a PT100 for p0600 = 11 and r0192 bit 15 = 1.
Re p0601 = 10 (evaluation through several temperature channels (SME12x)):
Not permitted for p0600 = 0, 10, 11.
Associated parameters: p4600 ... p4603 (can be switched via EDS)
For r0458.8 = 1, a temperature evaluation is supported through several temperature channels.
Examples:
When evaluating using SME120 or SME125, 4 temperature channels are available ( parameterized using p4600,
p4601, p4602, p4603).
When evaluating using CU310 and CUA32, 2 temperature channels are available (encoder interface, parameteriza-
tion via p4600 / terminal block, parameterization via p4601).
Re p0601 = 11 (evaluation via several temperature channels (BICO)):
Not permitted for p0600 = 0, 10, 11.
Associated parameters: p4610 ... p4613 (can be switched via MDS)
Description: Sets the power unit number to which the temperature sensor is connected. The value corresponds to the Power unit
Data Set number (PDS) of the power unit. The number of power unit data sets is defined in p0120.
Description: Sets the signal source to evaluate the motor temperature via a BICO interconnection.
Dependency: Refer to: p0600
p0602 Par_circuit power unit number, temperature sensor / PU_No temp_sensor
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 10 0
p0603 CI: Motor temperature signal source / Mot temp S_src
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-201
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Temperature sensor KTY: Valid temperature range -48 °C ... 248 °C.
PTC temperature sensor:
For a value = -50 °C, the following applies: Motor temperature < nominal response temperature of the PTC.
For a value = 250 °C, the following applies: Motor temperature >= nominal response temperature of the PTC.
Note:
When using a Terminal Module 31 (TM31), the following applies:
- the sensor type used is set using p4100.
- the temperature signal is interconnected using CO: r4105.
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for monitoring the motor temperature.
Dependency: Refer to: p0606
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: The hysteresis for canceling the alarm is 2 Kelvin.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Description: Sets the fault threshold to monitor the motor temperature.
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note: The hysteresis for canceling the fault is 2 Kelvin.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0604[0...n] Motor temperature alarm threshold / Mot_temp al thr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [°C] 200.0 [°C] 130.0 [°C]
p0605[0...n] Motor temperature fault threshold / Mot_temp flt thr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016, 8017
P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [°C] 200.0 [°C] 145.0 [°C]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-202 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the timer for the alarm threshold for the motor temperature monitoring function.
This timer is started when the temperature alarm threshold (p0604) is exceeded.
If the timer expires before the temperature in the meantime falls below the alarm threshold, the fault F07011 is out-
put.
If the temperature fault threshold (p0605) is prematurely exceeded before the timer has expired, then fault F07011
is immediately output.
As long as the motor temperature has still not exceeded the fault threshold and the alarm thresholds have again
been undershot, the fault can be acknowledged.
Dependency: Refer to: p0604, p0605
Refer to: F07011, A07910
Note: With p0606 = 0 s, the timer is deactivated and only the fault threshold is effective.
KTY sensor: When setting the minimum value, the timer is disabled and a fault is not output until p0605 is
exceeded.
PTC sensor, bimetallic NC contact: The timer minimum value has no special significance.
Description: Sets the timer between the output of alarm and fault for a temperature sensor fault.
If there is a sensor fault, this timer is started. If the sensor fault is still present after the timer has expired, a corre-
sponding fault message is output.
Note: If the motor is an induction motor, the timer is switched off when setting the minimum value and no alarm is output.
Temperature monitoring is then based on the thermal model.
Description: Sets signal source 2 to evaluate the motor temperature via a BICO interconnection.
Index: [0] = Motor temperature channel 1
[1] = Motor temperature channel 2
[2] = Motor temperature channel 3
[3] = Motor temperature channel 4
Dependency: Refer to: p0600
p0606[0...n] Motor temperature timer / Mot_temp timer
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 600.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
p0607[0...n] Temperature sensor fault timer / Sensor fault time
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 600.000 [s] 0.100 [s]
p0608[0...3] CI: Motor temperature signal source 2 / MotTempSignal2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-203
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Temperature sensor KTY: Valid temperature range -48 °C ... 248 °C.
PTC/bimetal temperature sensor:
For a value of -50 °C, the following applies: Motor temperature < nominal response temperature of the PTC (bimetal
contact closed).
For a value of 250 °C, the following applies: Motor temperature >= nominal response temperature of the PTC
(bimetal contact open).
Note:
When using a Terminal Module 120 (TM120), the following applies:
- the sensor type used is set using p4100.
- the temperature signal is interconnected using CO: r4105.
Description: Sets signal source 3 to evaluate the motor temperature via a BICO interconnection.
Index: [0] = Motor temperature channel 1
[1] = Motor temperature channel 2
[2] = Motor temperature channel 3
[3] = Motor temperature channel 4
Dependency: Refer to: p0600
Note: Temperature sensor KTY: Valid temperature range -48 °C ... 248 °C.
PTC/bimetal temperature sensor:
For a value of -50 °C, the following applies: Motor temperature < nominal response temperature of the PTC (bimetal
contact closed).
For a value of 250 °C, the following applies: Motor temperature >= nominal response temperature of the PTC
(bimetal contact open).
Note:
When using a Terminal Module 120 (TM120), the following applies:
- the sensor type used is set using p4100.
- the temperature signal is interconnected using CO: r4105.
Description: Sets the system response when the motor temperature reaches the alarm threshold.
Value: 0: No response only alarm no reduction of I_max
1: Alarm with reduction of I_max and fault
2: Alarm and fault no reduction of I_max
Dependency: Refer to: p0601, p0604, p0605
Refer to: F07011, A07910
Note: The I_max reduction is not executed for PTC (p0601 = 1) or bimetallic NC contact (p0601 = 4).
The I_max reduction results in a lower output frequency.
p0609[0...3] CI: Motor temperature signal source 3 / MotTempSignal3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p0610[0...n] Motor overtemperature response / Mot temp response
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-204 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the winding time constant.
The time constant specifies the warm-up time of the cold stator winding when loaded with the motor standstill cur-
rent up until a temperature rise of 63 % of the continuously permissible winding temperature has been reached.
Dependency: This parameter is only used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Refer to: r0034, p0612, p0615
Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07910
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset from the motor database for motors from the motor list (p0301).
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: When parameter p0611 is reset to 0, then this switches out the thermal I2t motor model (also refer to p0612).
If no temperature sensor is parameterized, then the ambient temperature for the thermal motor model is referred to
p0625.
Description: Sets the configuration for the thermal motor model.
Dependency: Refer to: r0034, p0611, p0615
Note: Re bit 00:
This bit is only used for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). It is only possible to switch in ther-
mal I2t monitoring with a time constant greater than zero (p0611 > 0).
Re bit 01:
This bit is used to activate/deactivate the thermal motor model for induction motors.
Description: Sets the fault threshold for monitoring using the thermal I2t motor model.
Dependency: The parameter is only used for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Refer to: r0034, p0611, p0612
Refer to: F07011, A07012
p0611[0...n] I2t motor model thermal time constant / I2t mot_mod T
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8017
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [s] 20000 [s] 0 [s]
p0612[0...n] Thermal motor model configuration / Therm Mot_mod conf
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8017
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0010 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Activate I2t motor model Yes No -
01 Activate motor temperature model Yes No -
p0615[0...n] I2t motor model fault threshold / I2t mot_mod thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8017
P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [°C] 220.0 [°C] 180.0 [°C]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-205
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Caution: This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Description: Sets the alarm threshold 1 for monitoring the motor temperature.
Note: The alarm threshold is not, as for p0604, coupled to the timer p0606. The hysteresis for canceling the fault is 2 Kel-
vin.
Description: Sets the thermal adaptation of the stator/primary section resistance and rotor/secondary section resistance accord-
ing to r0395 and r0396.
Value: 0: No thermal adaptation of stator and rotor resistances
1: Resistances adapted to the temperatures of the thermal model
2: Resistances adapted to the measured stator winding temperature
Note: For p0620 = 1, the following applies:
The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035 and the rotor resistance together with the model
temperature in r0633.
For p0620 = 2, the following applies:
The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035. If applicable, the rotor temperature for adapting
the rotor resistance is calculated from the stator temperature (r0035) as follows:
theta_R = (r0628 + r0625) / (r0627 + r0625) * r0035
Description: Selects the identification of the stator resistance after booting the Control Unit (only for vector control).
The identification is used to measure the actual stator resistance and from the ratio of the result of motor data iden-
tification (p0350) to the matching ambient temperature (p0625) the actual mean temperature of the stator winding is
calculated. The result is used to initialize the thermal motor model.
p0621 = 1:
Identification of the stator resistance only when the drive is powered up for the first time (pulse enable) after booting
the Control Unit.
p0621 = 2:
Identification of the stator resistance every time the drive is powered up (pulse enable).
Value: 0: No temperature identification
1: Temperature identification after restart
2: Temperature identification after each power-up
p0616[0...n] Motor overtemperature alarm threshold 1 / Mot temp alarm 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [°C] 200.0 [°C] 130.0 [°C]
p0620[0...n] Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance / Mot therm_adapt R
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 1
p0621[0...n] Identification stator resistance after restart / Rst_ident Restart
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-206 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: - perform motor data identification (see p1910) with cold motor.
- enter ambient temperature at time of motor data identification in p0625.
Refer to: p0622, r0623
Notice: The calculated stator temperature can only be compared with the measured value of a temperature sensor (KTY) to
a certain extent, as the sensor is usually the warmest point of the stator winding, whereas the measured value of
identification reflects the mean value of the stator winding.
Furthermore this is a short-time measurement with limited accuracy that is performed during the magnetizing phase
of the induction motor.
Note: The measurement is carried out:
- For induction motors
- When vector control is active (see p1300)
- If a temperature sensor (KTY) has not been connected
- When the motor is at a standstill when switched on
When a flying restart is performed on a rotating motor, the temperatures of the thermal motor model are set to a
third of the overtemperatures. This occurs only once, however, when the CU is booted (e.g. after a power failure).
If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is determined via p0622 and not via p0346. Quick magnetizing
(p1401.6) is de-energized internally and alarm A07416 is displayed. The speed is enabled after completion of the
measurement.
Description: Sets the excitation time of the motor for the stator resistance identification after powering up again (restart).
Dependency: Refer to: p0621, r0623
Note: For p0622 < p0346 the following applies:
If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is influenced by p0622. The speed is enabled after measurement
is complete, but not before the time in p0346 has elapsed (see r0056 bit 4). The time taken for measurement also
depends on the settling time of the measured current.
For p0622 >= p0346 the following applies:
Parameter p0622 is internally limited to the magnetizing time p0346, so that p0346 represents the maximum possi-
ble magnetizing time during identification. The entire measurement period (magnetizing plus measurement settling
time plus measuring time) will always be greater than p0346.
Description: Displays the identified stator resistance after the Rs identification after powering up again.
Dependency: Refer to: p0621, p0622
p0622[0...n] Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after powering up again / t_excit Rs_id
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
r0623 Stator resistance of Rs identification after powering up again / R_Stator Reset_Id
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-207
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the temperature offset for the PT100 measured value.
If there is a difference between the motor temperature displayed in r0035 and the actual motor temperature, this off-
set can be entered in this parameter, thereby compensating for the difference.
Dependency: Refer to: p0600, p0601, p0602
Note: The parameter only takes effect with the following settings:
- Temperature sensor of the power unit detected (p0600 = 11).
- Sensor type PT100 selected (p0601 = 5).
If the resistance in series with the PT100 (e.g. the cable resistance of the feeder cable) is known, the following con-
version formula must be used:
Offset in p0624 = Measured resistance in ohms x 2.5 K/Ohm
Example:
Measured cable resistance = 2 Ohm
--> 2 Ohm x 2.5 K / Ohm = 5.0 K
Description: Defines the ambient temperature of the motor for calculating the motor temperature model.
Note: The parameters for stator and rotor resistance (p0350, p0354) refer to this temperature.
If the thermal I2t motor model is activated for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (refer to p0611), p0625 is
included in the model calculation if a temperature sensor is not being used (see p0601).
Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator core referred to the ambient temperature.
Dependency: For 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is preset as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Refer to: p0625
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0624[0...n] Motor Temperature Offset PT100 / Mot T_offset PT100
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-100.0 [K] 100.0 [K] 0.0 [K]
p0625[0...n] Motor ambient temperature / Mot T_ambient
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-40 [°C] 80 [°C] 20 [°C]
p0626[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator core / Mot T_over core
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
20 [K] 200 [K] 50 [K]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-208 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator winding referred to the ambient temperature.
Dependency: For 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is preset as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Refer to: p0625
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the squirrel cage rotor referred to ambient temperature.
Dependency: For 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is preset as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Refer to: p0625
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Description: Displays the ambient temperature of the motor temperature model.
Description: Displays the stator core temperature of the motor temperature model.
p0627[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator winding / Mot T_over stator
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
20 [K] 200 [K] 80 [K]
p0628[0...n] Motor overtemperature rotor winding / Mot T_over rotor
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
20 [K] 200 [K] 100 [K]
r0630[0...n] Motor temperature model ambient temperature / MotTMod T_amb.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r0631[0...n] Motor temperature model, stator core temperature / MotTMod T_core
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-209
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the stator winding temperature of the motor temperature model.
Description: Displays the rotor temperature of the motor temperature model.
Description: The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients.
The parameter weights the unsaturated component of the quadrature axis flux function.
Description: The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients.
This parameter describes the interdependency of the unsaturated component of the quadrature axis current.
Dependency: Refer to: p0634
Description: The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients.
This parameter describes the interdependency of the unsaturated component of the direct axis current.
Dependency: Refer to: p0634
r0632[0...n] Motor temperature model, stator winding temperature / MotTMod T_copper
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r0633[0...n] Motor temperature model, rotor temperature / MotTMod T_rotor
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
p0634[0...n] Q flux flux constant unsaturated / PSIQ KPSI UNSAT
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [Vsrms] 100.000 [Vsrms] 0.000 [Vsrms]
p0635[0...n] Q flux quadrature axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KIQ UNSAT
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
p0636[0...n] Q flux direct axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KID UNSAT
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-210 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients.
This parameter describes the gradients of the saturated component over the quadrature axis current.
Dependency: Refer to: p0634, p0635, p0636
Description: Sets the current limit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0209, p0323
Note: The parameter is part of the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that it is appropriately pre-assigned when
changing p0305, p0323 and p0338.
The current limit p0640 is limited to r0209 and p0323. The limit to p0323 is not realized if a value of zero is entered
there.
The resulting current limit is displayed in r0067 and if required, r0067 is reduced by the thermal model of the Motor
Module.
The torque and power limits (p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531) matching the current limit are automatically calculated
when exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 > 0 or using the automatic parameterization with p0340 = 3, 5.
For VECTOR the following applies (p0107):
p0640 is limited to 4.0 * p0305.
p0640 is pre-assigned for the automatic self commissioning routine (e.g.to 1.5 * p0305, with p0305 = r0207[1]).
p0640 must be entered when commissioning the system. This is the reason that p0640 is not calculated by the
automatic parameterization when exiting the quick commissioning (p3900 > 0).
For SERVO the following applies (p0107):
p0640 is pre-assigned as follows using the automatic parameterization (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) taking into account
the limits r0209 and r0323:
- for induction motors: p0640 = 1.5 * p0305
- for synchronous motors: p0640 = p0338
Description: Sets the signal source for the variable current limit.
The value is referred to p0640.
p0637[0...n] Q flux flux gradient saturated / PSIQ Grad SAT
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mH] 10000.00 [mH] 0.00 [mH]
p0640[0...n] Current limit / Current limit
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5722, 6640
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
p0641[0...n] CI: Current limit, variable / Curr lim var
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6640
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-211
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the overvoltage protection for synchronous motors in the field-weakening range.
Value: 0: No measure
1: Voltage Protection Module (VPM)
Dependency: Refer to: p0316, p1082, p1231, p9601, p9801
Refer to: F07906, F07907
Notice: When the speed limiting is removed, the user is responsible for implementing a suitable overvoltage protection.
Note: In the field-weakening range, synchronous motors can, when a fault condition exists, generate high DC link volt-
ages. The following possibilities exist to protect the drive system from being destroyed due to overvoltage:
- limit the maximum speed (p1082) without any additional protection.
The maximum speed without protection is calculated as follows:
Rotary motors: p1082 [rpm] <= 11.695 * p0297/p0316 [Nm/A]
Linear motors: p1082 [m/min] <= 73.484 *p0297/0316 [N/A]
- use a Voltage Protection Module (VPM) in conjunction with the function "Safe Torque Off" (p9601, p9801).
When a fault condition exists, the VPM short-circuits the motors. During the short-circuit, the pulses must be sup-
pressed - this means that the terminals for the function "Safe Torque Off" must be connected to the VPM.
- activating the internal voltage protection (IVP) with p1231 = 3.
Description: Displays the operating hours for the corresponding motor.
The motor operating time counter continues to run when the pulses are enabled. When the pulse enable is with-
drawn, the counter is held and the value saved.
Dependency: The following prerequisites must be fulfilled in order to be able to save the operating hours counter in a non-volatile
fashion:
- firmware with V2.2 or higher.
- Control Unit 320 (CU320) with hardware version C or higher (module with NVRAM).
Refer to: p0651
Refer to: A01590
Note: The operating hours counter in p0650 can only be reset to 0. In this case, p0651 is automatically set to 0.
For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled.
The operating hours counter only runs for MDS0 and MDS1 (Motor Data Set).
p0643[0...n] Overvoltage protection for synchronous motors / Overvolt_protect
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p0650[0...n] Actual motor operating hours / Mot t_oper act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [h] 4294967295 [h] 0 [h]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-212 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the service/maintenance intervals in hours for the appropriate motor.
An appropriate fault is output when the operating hours set here are reached.
Dependency: Refer to: p0650
Refer to: A01590
Note: For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled.
The operating hours counter only runs for MDS0 and MDS1 (Motor Data Set).
Description: Factor to evaluate the stator resistance.
Dependency: Refer to: p0350, r0370
Description: Factor to evaluate the stator leakage inductance.
Dependency: Refer to: p0356, r0377
Description: Factor to evaluate the magnetizing inductance in the direction of the rotor axis (d axis).
Dependency: Refer to: p0360, r0382
p0651[0...n] Motor operating hours maintenance interval / Mot t_op maint
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [h] 150000 [h] 0 [h]
p0652[0...n] Motor stator resistance, scaling / Mot R_stator scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p0653[0...n] Motor stator leakage inductance, scaling / Mot L_S_leak scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p0655[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance, d axis saturated scaling / Mot L_m d sat scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-213
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Factor to evaluate the magnetizing inductance quadrature to the rotor axis (q axis).
Dependency: Refer to: p0361, r0383
Description: Factor to evaluate the damping inductance in the direction of the rotor axis (d axis).
Dependency: Refer to: p0358, r0380
Description: Factor to evaluate the damping inductance quadrature to the rotor axis (q axis).
Dependency: Refer to: p0359, r0381
Description: Factor to evaluate the damping resistance in the direction of the rotor axis (d axis).
Dependency: Refer to: p0354, r0374
Description: Factor to evaluate the damping resistance quadrature to the rotor axis (q axis).
Dependency: Refer to: p0355, r0375
p0656[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance, q axis, saturated scaling / Mot L_m q sat scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p0657[0...n] Motor damping inductance, d axis scaling / Mot L_damp d scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p0658[0...n] Motor damping inductance, q axis scaling / Mot L_damp q scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p0659[0...n] Motor damping resistance, d axis scaling / Mot R_damp d scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p0660[0...n] Motor damping resistance, q axis scaling / Mot R_damp q scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-214 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the digital input used for the function "central measuring probe evaluation".
p0680[0]: Digital input, measuring probe 1
p0680[1]: Digital input, measuring probe 2
p0680[2]: Digital input, measuring probe 3
p0680[3]: Digital input, measuring probe 4
p0680[4]: Digital input, measuring probe 5
p0680[5]: Digital input, measuring probe 6
Value: 0: No measuring probe
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
3: DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
4: DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
5: DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
6: DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
7: DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
8: DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Dependency: Refer to: p0728
Notice: To select the values:
For CU310, Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment
Manual).
Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as input (p0728.x = 0).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
If a parameter change is rejected, a check should be performed as to whether the input terminal is already being
used in p0488, p0489, p0493, p0495, p0580, p2517, or p2518.
Description: Sets the signal source for the synchronizing signal (SYN) of the function "central measuring probe evaluation".
The signal is used to synchronize the common system time between the master and slave.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Sets the signal source for the control word of the function "central measuring probe evaluation".
p0680[0...5] Central measuring probe, input terminal / Cen meas inp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 0
p0681 BI: Central measuring probe, synchronizing signal signal source /
Cen meas sync_sig
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p0682 CI: Central measuring probe, control word signal source / Cen meas STW S_src
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-215
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the evaluation technique for the "central measuring probe evaluation" function.
Value: 0: Measurement with handshake
1: Measurement without handshake
Note: During measurement without a handshake, the probe may have a higher evaluation frequency.
The setting "Measurement without handshake" must be supported by the higher-level control.
Description: Displays the control word for the function "central measuring probe evaluation".
Description: Displays the measuring time for a rising edge at the digital input for the "central measuring probe evaluation" func-
tion.
The measuring time is specified as 16-bit value with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
r0686[0]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 1
r0686[1]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 2
r0686[2]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 3
r0686[3]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 4
r0686[4]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 5
r0686[5]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 6
p0684 Central measuring probe evaluation technique / Cen meas eval_tech
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
r0685 Central measuring probe, control word display / Cen meas STW disp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Falling edge, measuring probe 1 Yes No -
01 Falling edge, measuring probe 2 Yes No -
02 Falling edge, measuring probe 3 Yes No -
03 Falling edge, measuring probe 4 Yes No -
04 Falling edge, measuring probe 5 Yes No -
05 Falling edge, measuring probe 6 Yes No -
08 Rising edge, measuring probe 1 Yes No -
09 Rising edge, measuring probe 2 Yes No -
10 Rising edge, measuring probe 3 Yes No -
11 Rising edge, measuring probe 4 Yes No -
12 Rising edge, measuring probe 5 Yes No -
13 Rising edge, measuring probe 6 Yes No -
r0686[0...5] CO: Central measuring probe, measuring time rising edge / CenMeas t_meas 0/1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-216 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the measuring time for a falling edge at the digital input for the "central measuring probe evaluation" func-
tion.
The measuring time is specified as 16-bit value with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
r0687[0]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 1
r0687[1]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 2
r0687[2]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 3
r0687[3]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 4
r0687[4]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 5
r0687[5]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 6
Description: Displays the status word for the function "central measuring probe evaluation".
Description: Runs the corresponding macro files.
The binector inputs (BI) of the appropriate Command Data Set (CDS) are appropriately interconnected.
The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory.
Example:
p0700 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p1000, p1500, r8571
r0687[0...5] CO: Central measuring probe, measuring time falling edge / CenMeas t_meas 1/0
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0688 CO: Central measuring probe, status word display / Cen meas ZSW disp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Digital input, measuring probe 1 High Low -
01 Digital input, measuring probe 2 High Low -
02 Digital input, measuring probe 3 High Low -
03 Digital input, measuring probe 4 High Low -
04 Digital input, measuring probe 5 High Low -
05 Digital input, measuring probe 6 High Low -
08 Sub-sampling, measuring probe 1 High Low -
09 Sub-sampling, measuring probe 2 High Low -
10 Sub-sampling, measuring probe 3 High Low -
11 Sub-sampling, measuring probe 4 High Low -
12 Sub-sampling, measuring probe 5 High Low -
13 Sub-sampling, measuring probe 6 High Low -
p0700[0...n] Macro Binector Input (BI) / Macro BI
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 999999 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-217
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: No errors were issued during quick commissioning (p3900 = 1) when writing to parameters of the QUICK_IBN
group!
Note: The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8571. r8571 is not in the expert list of the commissioning
software.
Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.
BI: Binector input
Description: Displays the actual value at the digital inputs.
This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the simu-
lation mode (p0795.x = 1) to terminal mode (p0795.x = 0). The input signal at terminal DI x is displayed in bit x of
r0721.
Notice: To the terminal designation:
The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310.
Note: If a DI/DO is parameterized as output (p0728.x = 1), then r0721.x = 0 is displayed.
DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
r0721 CU digital inputs, terminal actual value / CU DI actual value
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1510, 2020,
2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X122.1) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X122.2) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X122.3) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X122.4) High Low -
04 DI 4 (X132.1) High Low -
05 DI 5 (X132.2) High Low -
06 DI 6 (X132.3) High Low -
07 DI 7 (X132.4) High Low -
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.9) High Low -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.10) High Low -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.12) High Low -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.13) High Low -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.9) High Low -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.10) High Low -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.12) High Low -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.13) High Low -
16 DI 16 (X122.5) High Low -
17 DI 17 (X122.6) High Low -
20 DI 20 (X132.5) High Low -
21 DI 21 (X132.6) High Low -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-218 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs.
Dependency: Refer to: r0723
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs.
r0722.0...21 CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status / CU DI status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1510, 2020,
2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X122.1) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X122.2) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X122.3) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X122.4) High Low -
04 DI 4 (X132.1) High Low -
05 DI 5 (X132.2) High Low -
06 DI 6 (X132.3) High Low -
07 DI 7 (X132.4) High Low -
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.9) High Low -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.10) High Low -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.12) High Low -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.13) High Low -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.9) High Low -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.10) High Low -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.12) High Low -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.13) High Low -
16 DI 16 (X122.5) High Low -
17 DI 17 (X122.6) High Low -
20 DI 20 (X132.5) High Low -
21 DI 21 (X132.6) High Low -
r0723.0...21 CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status inverted / CU DI status inv
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1510, 2020,
2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X122.1) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X122.2) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X122.3) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X122.4) High Low -
04 DI 4 (X132.1) High Low -
05 DI 5 (X132.2) High Low -
06 DI 6 (X132.3) High Low -
07 DI 7 (X132.4) High Low -
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.9) High Low -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.10) High Low -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-219
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: r0722
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Sets the bidirectional digital inputs/outputs as an input or output.
Notice: To the terminal designation:
The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310.
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Displays the access authority at the digital outputs.
Bit = 1:
The control has access authority to the digital output via PROFIBUS or direct access.
Bit = 0:
The drive has access authority to the digital output or the digital input/output is not set as digital output or is not
available.
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.12) High Low -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.13) High Low -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.9) High Low -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.10) High Low -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.12) High Low -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.13) High Low -
16 DI 16 (X122.5) High Low -
17 DI 17 (X122.6) High Low -
20 DI 20 (X132.5) High Low -
21 DI 21 (X132.6) High Low -
p0728 CU, set input or output / CU DI or DO
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1510, 2030,
2031, 2130, 2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.9) Output Input -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.10) Output Input -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.12) Output Input -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.13) Output Input -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.9) Output Input -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.10) Output Input -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.12) Output Input -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.13) Output Input -
r0729 CU digital outputs access authority / CU DO access
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2030, 2031,
2130, 2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-220 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p0728, p0738, p0739, p0740, p0741, p0742, p0743, p0744, p0745, r0747, p0748
Note: The DI/DO must be connected as output (p0728).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 (X122.7).
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.8 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 9 (X122.8).
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.9 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 (X122.10).
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.10 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.9) High Low -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.10) High Low -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.12) High Low -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.13) High Low -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.9) High Low -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.10) High Low -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.12) High Low -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.13) High Low -
p0738 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 / CU S_src DI/DO 8
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1510, 2030,
2130
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p0739 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 9 / CU S_src DI/DO 9
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2030, 2130
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p0740 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 / CU S_src DI/DO 10
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2031, 2131
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-221
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 (X122.11).
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.11 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 12 (X132.7).
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.12 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 13 (X132.8).
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.13 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 14 (X132.10).
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.14 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
p0741 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 / CU S_src DI/DO 11
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1510, 2031,
2131
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p0742 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 12 / CU S_src DI/DO 12
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1510, 2132
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p0743 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 13 / CU S_src DI/DO 13
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2132
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p0744 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 14 / CU S_src DI/DO 14
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-222 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 15 (X132.11).
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.15 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Displays the status of digital outputs.
Note: Inversion using p0748 has been taken into account.
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs.
Notice: If telegram 39x is set via p0922 in SINAMICS Integrated, the inversion of the output has no effect.
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
p0745 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 15 / CU S_src DI/DO 15
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1510, 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r0747 CU, digital outputs status / CU DO status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2130, 2131,
2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.9) High Low -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.10) High Low -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.12) High Low -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.13) High Low -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.9) High Low -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.10) High Low -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.12) High Low -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.13) High Low -
p0748 CU, invert digital outputs / CU DO invert
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2030, 2031,
2130, 2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.9) Inverted Not inverted -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.10) Inverted Not inverted -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.12) Inverted Not inverted -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.13) Inverted Not inverted -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.9) Inverted Not inverted -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.10) Inverted Not inverted -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.12) Inverted Not inverted -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.13) Inverted Not inverted -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-223
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the signal to be output at the test sockets.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: r0772, r0774, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786
Description: Displays the actual value of the signal to be output.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Refer to: p0771, r0774, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786
Description: Displays the actual output voltage for the test sockets.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Refer to: p0771, r0772, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786
Description: Sets the mode for the test sockets.
Value: 96: Physical address (32-bit integer signal unsigned)
97: Physical address (32-bit integer signal)
98: Physical address (32-bit floating-point signal)
99: BICO signal
p0771[0...2] CI: Test sockets signal source / TestSktsSigSrce
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r0772[0...2] Test sockets output signal / TestSktsSignalVal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r0774[0...2] Test sockets output voltage / TestSkts V_output
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
p0776[0...2] Test socket mode / Test skt mode
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
96 99 99
Parameter
List of parameters
1-224 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Refer to: p0771, r0772, r0774, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786, p0788, p0789, r0790
Description: The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate
(percentage) of the first point on the characteristic.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: p0778, p0779, p0780, r0786
Note: The value 0.00 % corresponds to 2.49 V.
Description: The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate
(output voltage) of the first point on the characteristic.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: p0777, p0779, p0780, r0786
Description: The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate
(percentage) of the second point on the characteristic.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: p0777, p0778, p0780, r0786
Note: The value 100.00 % corresponds to 4.98 V.
p0777[0...2] Test socket characteristic value x1 / Test skt char x1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00 [%] 100000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
p0778[0...2] Test socket characteristic value y1 / Test skt char y1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [V] 4.98 [V] 2.49 [V]
p0779[0...2] Test socket characteristic value x2 / Test skt char x2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00 [%] 427.9E9 [%] 100.00 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-225
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate
(output voltage) of the second point on the characteristic.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: p0777, p0778, p0779, r0786
Description: Sets an additional offset for the test sockets.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Description: Sets the limit for a signal to be output via test sockets.
Value: 0: Limiting off
1: Limiting on
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Note: Limiting on:
If signals are output outside the permissible measuring range, the signal is limited to 4.98 V or to 0 V.
Limiting off:
If signals are output outside the permissible measuring range, this causes signal overflow. In the case of signal
overflow, the signal jumps from 0 V to 4.98 V or from 4.98 V to 0 V.
p0780[0...2] Test socket characteristic value y2 / Test skt char y2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [V] 4.98 [V] 4.98 [V]
p0783[0...2] Test sockets offset / Test skt offset
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-4.98 [V] 4.98 [V] 0.00 [V]
p0784[0...2] Test socket limit on/off / TestSktLim on/off
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-226 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the scaling of the signal to be output. A change in the output voltage by 1 volt corresponds to the value in
this parameter. The units are determined by the interconnected test signal.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Refer to: p0771, r0772, r0774, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784
Note: Example:
r0786[0] = 1500.0 and the measuring signal is r0063 (CO: Actual speed smoothed [rpm]).
A change of 1 V at the output of test socket T0 corresponds to 1500.0 [rpm].
Description: Sets the physical address to output signals via the test sockets.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Changes only become effective if p0776 does not equal 99.
Refer to: p0789, r0790
Description: Sets the gain of a signal output of a physical address via test sockets.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Changes only become effective if p0776 does not equal 99.
Refer to: p0788
r0786[0...2] Test socket scaling per volt / TestSktScale/Volt
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0788[0...2] Test sockets physical address / Test skt PhyAddr
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
0000 bin
p0789[0...2] Test sockets physical address gain / TestSktPhyAddrGain
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 1.00000
List of parameters
Parameter
1-227
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual value of a signal determined via a physical address.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Only effective when p0776 = 97 or p0776 = 96.
Refer to: p0788
Description: Sets the simulation mode for digital inputs.
Dependency: The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p0796.
Refer to: p0796, p9620
Notice: If a digital input is used as signal source for the function "STO" (BI: p9620) then it is not permissible to select the
simulation mode and this is rejected.
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).
DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
r0790[0...2] Test sockets physical address signal value / TestSktsPhyAddrVal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0795 CU digital inputs simulation mode / CU DI simulation
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1510, 2020,
2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X122.1) Simulation Terminal eval. -
01 DI 1 (X122.2) Simulation Terminal eval. -
02 DI 2 (X122.3) Simulation Terminal eval. -
03 DI 3 (X122.4) Simulation Terminal eval. -
04 DI 4 (X132.1) Simulation Terminal eval. -
05 DI 5 (X132.2) Simulation Terminal eval. -
06 DI 6 (X132.3) Simulation Terminal eval. -
07 DI 7 (X132.4) Simulation Terminal eval. -
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.9) Simulation Terminal eval. -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.10) Simulation Terminal eval. -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.12) Simulation Terminal eval. -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.13) Simulation Terminal eval. -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.9) Simulation Terminal eval. -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.10) Simulation Terminal eval. -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.12) Simulation Terminal eval. -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.13) Simulation Terminal eval. -
16 DI 16 (X122.5) Simulation Terminal eval. -
17 DI 16 (X122.6) Simulation Terminal eval. -
20 DI 16 (X132.5) Simulation Terminal eval. -
21 DI 16 (X132.6) Simulation Terminal eval. -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-228 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode.
Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p0795.
Refer to: p0795
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).
Description: Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs.
Index: [0] = Digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO)
[1] = Not available - analog inputs (AI)
[2] = Not available - analog outputs (AO)
Dependency: The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29.
Refer to: p0009
Note: The modified sampling time is not effective until the drive unit is powered up again.
p0796 CU digital inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU DI simul setp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1510, 2020,
2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X122.1) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X122.2) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X122.3) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X122.4) High Low -
04 DI 4 (X132.1) High Low -
05 DI 5 (X132.2) High Low -
06 DI 6 (X132.3) High Low -
07 DI 7 (X132.4) High Low -
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.9) High Low -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.10) High Low -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.12) High Low -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.13) High Low -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.9) High Low -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.10) High Low -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.12) High Low -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.13) High Low -
16 DI 16 (X122.5) High Low -
17 DI 17 (X122.6) High Low -
20 DI 20 (X132.5) High Low -
21 DI 21 (X132.6) High Low -
p0799[0...2] CU inputs/outputs, sampling time / CU I/O t_sampl
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2020, 2030,
2031
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 5000.00 [µs] 4000.00 [µs]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-229
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source to block the master control.
Dependency: Refer to: r0807
Note: The master control is used from the commissioning software (drive control panel) and from the Advanced Operator
Panel (AOP, LOCAL mode).
Description: Displays what has the master control.
The drive can be controlled via the BICO interconnection or from external (e.g. the commissioning software).
Dependency: Refer to: p0806
Notice: The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control words/setpoints can be trans-
ferred from another automation device.
Note: Bit 0 = 0: BICO interconnection active
Bit 0 = 1: Master control for PC/AOP
The master control is used from the commissioning software (drive control panel) and from the Advanced Operator
Panel (AOP, LOCAL mode).
Description: Copies one Command Data Set (CDS) into another.
Index: [0] = Source Command Data Set
[1] = Target Command Data Set
[2] = Start copying procedure
Note: Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which command data set should be copied.
2. In Index 1, enter the command data set that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0809[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.
p0806 BI: Inhibit master control / PcCtrl inhibit
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r0807.0 BO: Master control active / PcCtrl active
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Master control active Yes No 5030,
6031
p0809[0...2] Copy Command Data Set CDS / Copy CDS
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8560
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 15 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-230 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 0 (CDS bit 0).
Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0811, r0836
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 1 (CDS bit 1).
Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0810, r0836
Note: The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.
Description: Copies one Drive Data Set (DDS) into another.
Index: [0] = Source Drive Data Set
[1] = Target Drive Data Set
[2] = Start copying procedure
Note: Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which drive data set is to be copied.
2. In Index 1, enter the drive data set data that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0819[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.
p0810 BI: Command Data Set selection CDS bit 0 / CDS select., bit 0
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8560
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p0811 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1 / CDS select., bit 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8560
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p0819[0...2] Copy Drive Data Set DDS / Copy DDS
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(15) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 31 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-231
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 0 (DDS, bit 0).
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 1 (DDS, bit 1).
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 2 (DDS, bit 2).
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 3 (DDS, bit 3).
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p0820[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 0 / DDS select., bit 0
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(15), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 8565, 8575
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p0821[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 1 / DDS select., bit 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(15), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p0822[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 2 / DDS select., bit 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(15), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p0823[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 3 / DDS select., bit 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(15), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-232 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 4 (DDS, bit 4).
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Sets the freely-assignable motor number for the motor changeover.
Dependency: Refer to: p0827
Caution: When changing over motor data sets with the same motor number (e.g. star-delta changeover) and for a motor with
brake, the motor brake remains open during the changeover.
Note: When the motor data sets are changed over, the following applies:
The same motor number signifies the same thermal model.
For the same motor number, the correction values of the Rs, Lh or kT adaptation are applied for the data set
changeover (refer to r1782, r1787, r1797).
Description: Sets the bit number for every motor data set.
Example:
p0827[0] = 0: For MDS0, r0830.0 is switched.
p0827[1] = 5: For MDS1, r0830.5 is switched.
Dependency: Refer to: p0826, r0830
Note: A motor is only changed over (a new motor selected) after the pulses have been suppressed.
When the motor data sets are changed over, the following applies:
Bit numbers that are not identical, signify that the motor must be changed over.
p0824[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 4 / DDS select., bit 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(15), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 8565, 8575
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p0826[0...n] Motor changeover, motor number / Mot_chng mot No.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 15 0
p0827[0...n] Motor changeover status word bit number / Mot_chg ZSW bitNo.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 15 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-233
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal when changing over the motor.
For p0833.0 = 1 the following applies:
This feedback signal (0/1 edge) is required after a motor changeover to enable the pulses.
Dependency: Refer to: p0833
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Displays the status word of the motor changeover.
These signals can be connected to digital outputs to change over the motor.
Dependency: Refer to: p0827
p0828[0...n] BI: Motor changeover, feedback signal / Mot_chng fdbk sig
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r0830.0...15 CO/BO: Motor changeover, status word / Mot_chngov ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Motor selection, bit 0 High Low -
01 Motor selection, bit 1 High Low -
02 Motor selection, bit 2 High Low -
03 Motor selection, bit 3 High Low -
04 Motor selection, bit 4 High Low -
05 Motor selection, bit 5 High Low -
06 Motor selection, bit 6 High Low -
07 Motor selection, bit 7 High Low -
08 Motor selection, bit 8 High Low -
09 Motor selection, bit 9 High Low -
10 Motor selection, bit 10 High Low -
11 Motor selection, bit 11 High Low -
12 Motor selection, bit 12 High Low -
13 Motor selection, bit 13 High Low -
14 Motor selection, bit 14 High Low -
15 Motor selection, bit 15 High Low -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-234 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal of the contactors when changing over motors.
There is a fixed inter-relationship between energizing the contactor and the feedback signal.
Example:
A changeover is to be made between MDS0 (motor 0) and MDS1 (motor 1). The contactors should be switched
using bit 4 (contactor 0) and 5 (contactor 1). The changeover should be made with an interconnection of the feed-
back signal.
Implementation:
MDS0: p0827[0] = 4, interconnect output to switch contactor 0 to r0830.4, p0831[4] = "input, feedback signal, con-
tactor 0"
MDS1: p0827[1] = 5, interconnect output to switch contactor 1 to r0830.5, p0831[5] = "input, feedback signal, con-
tactor 1"
The following sequence applies when changing over from MDS0 to MDS1:
1. The status bit r0830.4 is deleted. When the feedback signal (p0831[4]) is connected, the system waits until the
feedback signal "contactor open" is displayed. If the feedback signal is not connected, then the system waits for the
switch-off interlocking time of 320 ms.
2. The status bit r0830.5 is set. If the feedback signal (p0831[5]) is connected, the system waits until the feedback
signal "contactor closed" is displayed. If the feedback signal is not connected, then the system waits for the switch-
on interlocking time of 160 ms.
Index: [0] = Feedback signal contactor 0
[1] = Feedback signal contactor 1
[2] = Feedback signal contactor 2
[3] = Feedback signal contactor 3
[4] = Feedback signal contactor 4
[5] = Feedback signal contactor 5
[6] = Feedback signal contactor 6
[7] = Feedback signal contactor 7
[8] = Feedback signal contactor 8
[9] = Feedback signal contactor 9
[10] = Feedback signal contactor 10
[11] = Feedback signal contactor 11
[12] = Feedback signal contactor 12
[13] = Feedback signal contactor 13
[14] = Feedback signal contactor 14
[15] = Feedback signal contactor 15
p0831[0...15] BI: Motor changeover, contactor feedback / Mot_chg cont fdbk
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-235
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status word of the contactor feedback signals when changing over a motor.
Dependency: Refer to: p0831
Description: Sets the configuration for the motor and encoder changeover.
Note: Re bit 00:
When the bit is set and the motor has to be changed over, then p0827 must be set differently in the appropriate
motor data sets.
Re bit 02:
The bit defines whether, for an EDS changeover, the status signal Gn_ZSW.14 is suppressed (parking encoder
active).
Re motor changeover to running motor:
The "flying restart" function should also be activated (p1200) when changing over to a motor that is already running.
r0832.0...15 CO/BO: Mot. changeover, contactor feedback sig. status word / Mot_chng fdbk ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Feedback signal contactor 0 Closed Opened -
01 Feedback signal contactor 1 Closed Opened -
02 Feedback signal contactor 2 Closed Opened -
03 Feedback signal contactor 3 Closed Opened -
04 Feedback signal contactor 4 Closed Opened -
05 Feedback signal contactor 5 Closed Opened -
06 Feedback signal contactor 6 Closed Opened -
07 Feedback signal contactor 7 Closed Opened -
08 Feedback signal contactor 8 Closed Opened -
09 Feedback signal contactor 9 Closed Opened -
10 Feedback signal contactor 10 Closed Opened -
11 Feedback signal contactor 11 Closed Opened -
12 Feedback signal contactor 12 Closed Opened -
13 Feedback signal contactor 13 Closed Opened -
14 Feedback signal contactor 14 Closed Opened -
15 Feedback signal contactor 15 Closed Opened -
p0833 Data set changeover configuration / DS_chng config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(15) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Data sets Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0010 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Contactor changeover from the applica-
tion/drive
application Drive -
01 Pulse suppression by application/drive application Drive -
02 Suppress drive parking for EDS changeover Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-236 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status word for the drive data set changeover.
Note: Re bit 02:
A data set changeover is delayed by the time required for the internal parameter calculation.
Description: Displays the status word for the drive data set changeover.
Note: This parameter is only supplied with up-to-date values if data set changeover has been selected or is running.
Re bit 00:
The signal is only influenced when a motor changeover is set via p0827 (unequal bit numbers).
Re bit 01:
The signal is only influenced when an encoder changeover is set via p0187, p0188, or p0189.
Re bit 02:
A data set changeover is delayed by the time required for the internal parameter calculation.
Re bit 04:
A data set changeover is only carried out when the armature short circuit is not activated.
Re bit 05:
The following applies for SERVO:
A data set changeover is only carried out when pole position identification, encoder adjustment, motor data identifi-
cation, and rotating measurement are not running.
The following applies for VECTOR:
A data set changeover is only carried out when pole position identification is not running.
Re bit 06:
A data set changeover is only carried out when the friction characteristic record is not running.
Re bit 07 (VECTOR only):
A data set changeover is only carried out when rotating measurement is not running.
Re bit 08 (VECTOR only):
A data set changeover is only carried out when motor data identification is not running.
r0835.2 CO/BO: Data set changeover status word / DDS_ZSW
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
02 Internal parameter calculation active Yes No -
r0835.0...11 CO/BO: Data set changeover status word / DDS_ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Motor changeover active Yes No 8575
01 Encoder changeover active Yes No -
02 Internal parameter calculation active Yes No -
04 Armature short circuit active Yes No -
05 Identification running Yes No -
06 Friction characteristic record running Yes No -
07 Rotating measurement running Yes No -
08 Motor data identification running Yes No -
10 Wait for pulse suppression Yes No -
11 Wait for motor changeover feedback signal Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-237
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Re bit 10:
A motor changeover is set with p0833.1 = 1. It can only be carried out when the application performs pulse suppres-
sion.
Re bit 11:
A motor changeover is set with p0833.0 = 1. The pulses are only enabled when the "Motor changeover feedback"
signal is detected.
Description: Displays the command data set (CDS) selected via the binector input.
Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0810, p0811
Note: Command data sets are selected via binector input p0810 and following.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
Description: Displays the drive data set (DDS) selected via the binector input.
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824
Note: Drive data sets are selected via binector input p0820 and following.
The currently effective drive data set is displayed in r0051.
If there is only one data set, then a value of 0 is displayed in this parameter and not the selection via binector inputs.
r0836.0...3 CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS selected / CDS selected
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1530, 8560
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 CDS select. bit 0 On Off -
01 CDS select. bit 1 On Off -
02 CDS select. bit 2 On Off -
03 CDS select. bit 3 On Off -
r0837.0...4 CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS selected / DDS selected
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DDS select. bit 0 On Off -
01 DDS select. bit 1 On Off -
02 DDS select. bit 2 On Off -
03 DDS select. bit 3 On Off -
04 DDS select. bit 4 On Off -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-238 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the selected Motor Data Set (MDS) and the selected Encoder Data Sets (EDS).
Index: [0] = Motor Data Set MDS selected
[1] = Encoder 1 Encoder Data Set EDS selected
[2] = Encoder 2 Encoder Data Set EDS selected
[3] = Encoder 3 Encoder Data Set EDS selected
Dependency: Refer to: r0049, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189
Note: Value 99 means the following: No encoder assigned (not configured).
Description: Sets the delay time for the contactor control for the motor changeover.
The delay time is taken into account in the following cases:
- for feedback signal, previous contactor "Open". The new motor contactor is controlled (energized) after the delay
time has expired.
- for the feedback signal, new motor contactor "Closed". The pulses are enabled after the delay time has expired.
Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 0 (ON/OFF1).
Recommend.: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency: Refer to: p1055, p1056
Notice: For BI: p0840 = 0 signal, the motor can be moved, jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that originally powered up can also power down again.
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: For drives with closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21), the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: OFF1 (braking with the ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
For drives with closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 22, 23), the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: Immediate pulse suppression
For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: No dedicated braking response, but pulse suppression when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227)
For drives with closed-loop speed/torque control, the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0/1: ON (pulses can be enabled)
r0838[0...3] Motor/Encoder Data Set selected / MDS/EDS selected
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0839 Motor changeover contactor control delay time / Mot_chg ctrl t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 500 [ms] 0 [ms]
p0840[0...n] BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501, 2610,
8720, 8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-239
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
For active infeeds (Active Line Module and Smart Line Module) the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: OFF1 (reduce Vdc along the ramp, then pulse suppression and pre-charging contactor/line contactor
open)
Bit 0 = 0/1: ON (pre-charging contactor/line contactor closed, pulses can be enabled)
For passive infeeds (Basic Line Module) the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: OFF1 (pre-charging contactor/line contactor open)
Bit 0 = 0/1: ON (pre-charging contactor/line contactor closed)
r0863.1 of a drive can also be selected as signal source.
Description: Sets the signal source for the 1st OC/OFF2.
The AND logic operation of the 1st OC/OFF2 and 2nd OC/OFF2 results in control word 1, bit 1 (OC/OFF2).
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: For drives, the following applies:
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
Bit 1 = 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
For infeed units, the following applies:
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression for Active Infeed Modules and Smart Line Modules, pre-charging
contactor/line contactor open and switching on inhibited)
Bit 1 = 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
OC: Operating condition
Description: Sets the signal source for the 2nd OC/OFF2.
The AND logic operation of the 1st OC/OFF2 and 2nd OC/OFF2 results in control word 1, bit 1 (OC/OFF2).
Note: For drives, the following applies:
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
Bit 1 = 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
For infeed units, the following applies:
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression for Active Infeed Modules and Smart Line Modules, pre-charging
contactor/line contactor open and switching on inhibited)
Bit 1 = 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
OC: Operating condition
p0844[0...n] BI: 1. OFF2 / 1. OFF2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501, 8720,
8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p0845[0...n] BI: 2. OFF2 / 2. OFF2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501, 8720,
8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-240 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the 1st OC/OFF3.
The AND logic operation of the 1st OC/OFF3 and 2nd OC/OFF3 results in control word 1, bit 2 (OC/OFF3).
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: Bit 2 = 0: OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
Bit 2 = 1: No OFF3 (enable is possible)
OC: Operating condition
Description: Sets the signal source for the 2nd OC/OFF3.
The AND logic operation of the 1st OC/OFF3 and 2nd OC/OFF3 results in control word 1, bit 2 (OC/OFF3).
Note: Bit 2 = 0: OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
Bit 2 = 1: No OFF3 (enable is possible)
OC: Operating condition
Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 3 (enable operation)
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: Bit 3 = 0: Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)
Bit 3 = 1: Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)
p0848[0...n] BI: 1. OFF3 / 1. OFF3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p0849[0...n] BI: 2. OFF3 / 2. OFF3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p0852[0...n] BI: Operation enable / Operation enable
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501, 8820,
8920
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-241
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 10 (master control by PLC).
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: Bit 10 = 0: No master control by PLC
Bit 10 = 1: Master control by PLC
This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available,
then BI: p0854 should be set to a 1 signal.
If a control is available, control word 1 bit 10 = 1 (STW1.10, PZD1) must be set so that the received data is updated.
This applies regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999).
Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 10 (master control by PLC).
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: Bit 10 = 0: No master control by PLC
Bit 10 = 1: Master control by PLC
This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available,
then BI: p0854 should be set to a 1 signal.
If a control is available, control word 1 bit 10 = 1 (STW1.10, PZD1) must be set so that the received data is updated.
This applies regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999).
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally open holding brake".
Dependency: Refer to: p0858
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: The signal via BI: p0858 (unconditionally close holding brake) has a higher priority than via BI: p0855 (uncondition-
ally open holding brake).
p0854 BI: Master ctrl by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC
ENCODER Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2501, 8720,
8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p0854[0...n] BI: Master ctrl by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501, 8720,
8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p0855[0...n] BI: Unconditionally release holding brake / Uncond open brake
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501, 2701,
2707
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-242 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable speed controller" (r0898.12).
0 signal: Set the I component and speed controller output to zero.
1 signal: Enable speed controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r0898
Note: If "enable speed controller" is withdrawn, then an existing brake will be closed.
If "speed controller enable" is withdrawn, the pulses are not suppressed.
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the power unit.
The following applies for infeeds and drives:
The monitoring time is started after an 0/1 edge of the ON/OFF1 command. If the power unit does not return a
READY signal within the monitoring time, then fault F06000 (infeeds) or F07802 (drives) is output.
For drives, the following also applies:
After the pulse enable (operation enabled, p0852), the monitoring time is re-started. If the infeed does not signal
ready to the drive within the monitoring time (using BI: p0864 of the drive), fault F07840 is initiated.
Dependency: Refer to: F07802, F07840, F30027
Notice: The maximum time to pre-charge the DC link is monitored in the power unit and cannot be changed. The maximum
duration of the pre-charging depends on the power class and the power unit design.
The monitoring time for the pre-charging is started after the ON command (BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal). Fault F30027 is
output when the maximum pre-charging duration is exceeded.
Note: The factory setting for p0857 depends on the power class and the design of the power unit.
The monitoring time for the ready signal of the power unit includes the time to pre-charge the DC link and, if rele-
vant, the de-bounce time of the contactors.
If an excessively low value is entered into p0857, then after enable, this results in the corresponding fault.
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally close holding brake".
Dependency: Refer to: p0855
p0856[0...n] BI: Speed controller enable / n_ctrl enable
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501, 2701,
2707
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p0857 Power unit monitoring time / PU t_monit
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8760, 8864,
8964
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
100.0 [ms] 60000.0 [ms] 6000.0 [ms]
p0858[0...n] BI: Unconditionally close holding brake / Uncond close brake
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501, 2701,
2707
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-243
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The signal via BI: p0858 (unconditionally close holding brake) has a higher priority than via BI: p0855 (uncondition-
ally open holding brake).
For a 1 signal via BI: p0858, the command "unconditionally close the holding brake" is executed and internally a
zero setpoint is entered.
Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal from the line contactor.
Recommend.: When the monitoring is activated (BI: p0860 not equal to r0863.1), then to control the line contactor, signal BO:
r0863.1 of its own drive object should be used.
Dependency: Refer to: p0861, r0863
Refer to: F07300
Notice: The line contactor monitoring is deactivated if the control signal of the particular drive object is set as the signal
source for the feedback signal of the line contactor (BI: p0860 = r0863.1).
Note: The state of the line contactor is monitored depending on signal BO: r0863.1.
When the monitoring is activated (BI: p0860 not equal to r0863.1), fault F07300 is then also output if the contactor
is closed before it is controlled using r0863.1.
Description: Sets the monitoring time of the line contactor.
This time starts each time that the line contactor switches (r0863.1). If a feedback signal is not received from the
line contactor within the time, a message is output.
Dependency: Refer to: p0860, r0863
Refer to: F07300
Note: The monitoring function is disabled for the factory setting of p0860.
Description: Sets the delay time for the control command of the power unit and a line contactor, if used.
Note: This means that it is possible to realize a shifted (delayed) pre-charging or power-on using a single ON command.
When the infeed units are active, before the line contactor is closed, an offset adjustment of the current measure-
ment is carried out for a duration of 120 ms (p3491).
p0860 BI: Line cont. fdbk sig / Line contact feedb
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2634, 8734,
8834, 8934
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 863.1
p0861 Line contactor monitoring time / LineContact t_mon
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2634, 8734,
8834, 8934
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 5000 [ms] 100 [ms]
p0862 Power unit ON delay / PU t_on
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2610, 8732,
8832, 8932
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 65000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-244 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status and control words of the drive coupling.
Dependency: Refer to: p0864
Note: Re bit 00:
Bit 0 signals that the infeed is ready.
When the operating signal is transferred via BO: r0863.0 this allows several drives to start (run-up) staggered over
time when they are simultaneously powered up.
To realize this, the following connections/interconnections are required:
Drive 1: Internconnect BI: p0864 with BO: r0863.0 of the infeed
Drive 2: Internconnect BI: p0864 with BO: r0863.0 of drive 1
Drive 3: Internconnect BI: p0864 with BO: r0863.0 of drive 2, etc.
The first drive only transfers the operating signal to the next drive after it has reached its ready condition.
Re bit 01:
Bit 1 is used to control an external line contactor.
Re bit 02:
This bit only signals line supply failure for Active Infeed (A_INF) and Smart Infeed (S_INF).
Description: Sets the signal source for the operating signal of the infeed (e.g. BO: r0863.0).
Dependency: Refer to: r0863
Note: The sequence control of a servo/vector drive requires this signal.
The following applies for an infeed without DRIVE-CLiQ:
For these infeeds, the "ready" message is available via an output terminal. This signal must be connected to a digi-
tal input. The drives supplied from this infeed must use this signal as ready signal (BI: p0864 = digital input).
r0863.0...2 CO/BO: Drive coupling status word/control word / CoupleZSW/STW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Closed-loop control operation Yes No 2610,
6495,
8732,
8832,
8932,
9794
01 Energize contactor Yes No 2610,
2634,
8732,
8734,
8832,
8834,
8932,
8934
02 Infeed line supply failure Yes No -
p0864 BI: Infeed operation / INF operation
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1773, 1774,
2610
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-245
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the debounce time for the DC circuit breaker for Motor Modules in "chassis" format.
Note: The following applies if p0868 = 65000 ms:
The debounce time defined internally in the power unit's EEPROM is implemented.
Description: Sets the signal source to activate/deactivate a power unit component.
Dependency: BI: p0895 = 0 signal
Deactivating power unit components
BI: p0895 = 1 signal
Activating power unit components
Refer to: p0125, r0126
Refer to: A05054
Caution: It is not permissible to deactivate drive objects with safety functions enabled.
Note: The power unit is only deactivated when the pulses are suppressed.
For units connected in parallel, when one of the power units is deactivated, then the enable in p7001 is withdrawn.
Description: Displays the status word for the "parking axis" function.
Dependency: Refer to: p0897
p0868 Power unit DC switch debounce time / PU DC sw t_deboun
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 65000 [ms] 65000 [ms]
p0895[0...n] BI: Activate/deactivate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
r0896.0 BO: Parking axis, status word / Parking axis, ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Parking axis active Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-246 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source to select the "parking axis" function.
Dependency: BI: p0897 = 0 signal
The function "parking axis" is not selected.
BI: p0897 = 1 signal
The function "parking axis" is selected.
Refer to: r0896
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: After it has been selected the "parking axis" function only becomes active when the pulses are suppressed.
Description: Displays the control word of drive object 1 (Control Unit).
Description: Displays the control word for sequence control on the encoder drive object.
p0897 BI: Parking axis selection / Parking axis sel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r0898.0...15 CO/BO: Control word drive object 1 / STW DO1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Synchronization signal SYN Yes No -
01 Real time synchronization PING Yes No -
07 Acknowledge fault Yes No -
12 Master sign-of-life bit 0 Yes No -
13 Master sign-of-life bit 1 Yes No -
14 Master sign-of-life bit 2 Yes No -
15 Master sign-of-life bit 3 Yes No -
r0898.10 CO/BO: Control word sequence control encoder DO / STW seq_ctrl encDO
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
10 Master ctrl by PLC Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-247
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the control word of the sequence control.
Note: OC: Operating condition
Description: Displays the status word from drive object 1 (Control Unit).
Description: Displays the status word for sequence control on the encoder drive object.
Note: For PROFIdrive, this signal is used for status word ZSW2_ENC.
r0898.0...14 CO/BO: Control word sequence control / STW seq_ctrl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1530, 2501
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OC / OFF2 Yes No -
02 OC / OFF3 Yes No -
03 Operation enable Yes No -
04 Ramp-function generator enable Yes No -
05 Continue ramp-function generator Yes No -
06 Speed setpoint enable Yes No -
07 Command open brake Yes No -
08 Jog 1 Yes No -
09 Jog 2 Yes No -
10 Master ctrl by PLC Yes No -
12 Speed controller enable Yes No -
14 Command close brake Yes No -
r0899.0...15 CO/BO: Status word drive object 1 / ZSW DO1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 reserved Yes No -
03 Fault present Yes No -
07 Alarm present Yes No -
08 System time synchronized Yes No -
12 Slave sign-of-life bit 0 Yes No -
13 Slave sign-of-life bit 1 Yes No -
14 Slave sign-of-life bit 2 Yes No -
15 Slave sign-of-life bit 3 Yes No -
r0899.9 CO/BO: Status word sequence control encoder DO / ZSW seq_ctrl encDO
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
09 Control request Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-248 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status word of the sequence control.
Note: Re bits 00, 01, 02, 04, 05, 06, 09:
For PROFIdrive, these signals are used for status word 1.
Re bit 13:
When the "Safe Brake Control" (SBC) is activated and selected, the brake is no longer controlled using this signal.
Re bit 14, 15:
These signals are only of significance when the "extended brake control" function module is activated (r0108.14 =
1).
Description: Displays or sets the PROFIBUS address for PROFIBUS interface on the Control Unit.
The address can be set as follows:
1) Using the address switch on the Control Unit.
--> p0918 can then only be read and displays the selected address.
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
2) Using p0918
--> Only if the address 00 hex, 7F hex, 80 hex, or FF hex has been set using the address switch.
--> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM".
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Note: Permissible PROFIBUS addresses: 1 ... 126 (01 hex ... 7E hex)
Address 126 is used for commissioning.
Every PROFIBUS address change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
r0899.0...15 CO/BO: Status word sequence control / ZSW seq_ctrl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1530, 2503
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Ready for sw on Yes No -
01 Ready Yes No -
02 Operation enabled Yes No -
03 Jog active Yes No -
04 No coasting active OFF2 inactive OFF2 active -
05 No Quick Stop active OFF3 inactive OFF3 active -
06 Switching on inhibited active Yes No -
07 Drive ready Yes No -
08 Controller enable Yes No -
09 Control request Yes No -
11 Pulses enabled Yes No -
12 Holding brake open Yes No -
13 Command close holding brake Yes No -
14 Pulse enable from the brake control Yes No -
15 Setpoint enable from the brake control Yes No -
p0918 PROFIBUS address / PB address
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1520, 2410
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 126 126
List of parameters
Parameter
1-249
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.
Value: 390: SIEMENS telegram 390, PZD-2/2
391: SIEMENS telegram 391, PZD-3/7
392: SIEMENS telegram 392, PZD-3/15
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.
Value: 81: SIEMENS telegram 81, PZD-2/6
82: SIEMENS telegram 82, PZD-2/7
83: SIEMENS telegram 83, PZD-2/8
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: Refer to: p2038
Refer to: F01505, F01506
Note: If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhib-
ited.
The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999.
Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.
Value: 1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
2: Standard telegram 2, PZD-4/4
20: Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
220: SIEMENS telegram 220, PZD-10/10
352: SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: Refer to: F01505, F01506
Caution: Telegrams 2, 3 and 4 are not suitable for sensorless vector control (p1300 = 20). For sensorless vector control, it is
necessary that the setpoint speed is entered at the ramp-function generator input (e.g. p1070) and not after the
ramp-function generator (p1155).
p0922 PROFIdrive telegram selection / PD Telegr_sel
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1520, 2420,
2423, 2481, 2483
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
390 999 999
p0922 PROFIdrive telegram selection / PD Telegr_sel
ENCODER Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1520, 2420,
2422, 2423, 2468, 2470
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
81 999 999
p0922 PROFIdrive telegram selection / PD Telegr_sel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1520, 2420,
2422, 2423, 2468, 2470
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 999 999
Parameter
List of parameters
1-250 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhib-
ited.
The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999.
Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.
Value: 1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
2: Standard telegram 2, PZD-4/4
3: Standard telegram 3, PZD-5/9
4: Standard telegram 4, PZD-6/14
20: Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
220: SIEMENS telegram 220, PZD-10/10
352: SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: Refer to: F01505, F01506
Caution: Telegrams 2, 3 and 4 are not suitable for sensorless vector control (p1300 = 20). For sensorless vector control, it is
necessary that the setpoint speed is entered at the ramp-function generator input (e.g. p1070) and not after the
ramp-function generator (p1155).
Note: If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhib-
ited.
The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999.
Description: Display of the position of the "Pulses enabled" status word bit in the PROFIdrive telegram
Index: [0] = Signal number
[1] = Bit position
Description: Sets the number of tolerated consecutive sign-of-life errors of the clock-cycle synchronous master.
The sign-of-life signal is normally received in PZD4 (control word 2) from the master.
Dependency: Refer to: p2045, r2065
Refer to: F01912
Note: The sign-of-life monitoring is disabled for p0925 = 65535.
p0922 PROFIdrive telegram selection / PD Telegr_sel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1520, 2420,
2422, 2423, 2468, 2470
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 999 999
r0924[0...1] ZSW bit pulses enabled / ZSW pulses enab
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2454, 2456
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0925 PROFIdrive clock synchronous sign-of-life tolerance / PD SoL_tol
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-251
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the operating mode.
1: Closed-loop speed controlled operation with ramp-function generator
2: Closed-loop position controlled operation
3: Closed-loop speed controlled operation without ramp-function generator
Description: Displays fault buffer changes. This counter is incremented every time the fault buffer changes.
Recommend.: Used to check whether the fault buffer has been read out consistently.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109
Description: Displays the numbers of faults that have occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3120, r3122
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
Fault buffer structure (general principle):
r0945[0], r0949[0], r0948[0], r2109[0], r3115[0] --> actual fault case, fault 1
. . .
r0945[7], r0949[7], r0948[7], r2109[7], r3115[7] --> actual fault case, fault 8
r0945[8], r0949[8], r0948[8], r2109[8], r3115[8] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 1
. . .
r0945[15], r0949[15], r0948[15], r2109[15], r3115[15] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 8
. . .
r0945[56], r0949[56], r0948[56], r2109[56], r3115[56] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 1
. . .
r0945[63], r0949[63], r0948[63], r2109[63], r3115[63] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 8
r0930 PROFIdrive operating mode / PD operating mode
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0944 CO: Counter for fault buffer changes / Fault buff change
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0945[0...63] Fault code / Fault code
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-252 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Lists the fault codes stored in the drive unit.
The indices can only be accessed with a valid fault code.
Dependency: The parameter assigned to the fault code is entered in r0951 under the same index.
Description: This parameter is identical to r0945.
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0949, r2109, r2114, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3115, r3120, r3122
Notice: The time comprises r2130 (days) and r0948 (milliseconds).
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies.
Description: Displays additional information about the fault that occurred (as integer number).
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3115, r3120, r3122
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
r0946[0...65534] Fault code list / Fault code list
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0947[0...63] Fault number / Fault number
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0948[0...63] Fault time received in milliseconds / t_fault recv ms
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
r0949[0...63] Fault value / Fault value
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-253
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Number of fault situations that have occurred since the last reset.
Dependency: The fault buffer is deleted (cleared) by setting p0952 to 0.
Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136
Description: Displays the corresponding value for the PROFIBUS baud rate.
Value: 0: 9.6 kbit/s
1: 19.2 kbit/s
2: 93.75 kbit/s
3: 187.5 kbit/s
4: 500 kbit/s
6: 1.5 Mbit/s
7: 3 Mbit/s
8: 6 Mbit/s
9: 12 Mbit/s
10: 31.25 kbit/s
11: 45.45 kbit/s
255: Baud rate unknown
Description: Displays the device identification.
Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[1] = Device type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = Number of drive objects
[6] = Firmware patch/hot fix
p0952 Fault cases, counter / Fault cases qty
All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1710, 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
r0963 PROFIBUS baud rate / PB baud rate
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 -
r0964[0...6] Device identification / Device ident.
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-254 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Example:
r0964[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0964[1] = 5000 --> SINAMICS S CU320
r0964[1] = 5200 --> SINAMICS G CU320
r0964[2] = 102 --> first part of the firmware version V01.02 (second part, refer to index 6)
r0964[3] = 2003 --> year 2003
r0964[4] = 1401 --> 14th of January
r0964[5] = 4 --> 4 drive objects
r0964[6] = 600 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V01.02.06.00)
Description: Displays the PROFIdrive profile number and profile version.
Constant value = 0329 hex.
Byte 1: Profile number = 03 hex = PROFIdrive profile
Byte 2: Profile version = 29 hex = Version 4.1
Note: When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the Octet String 2 data type applies.
Description: Displays the system runtime in ms since the last POWER ON.
Note: The value in p0969 can only be reset to 0.
The value overflows after approx. 49 days.
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies.
Description: The parameter is used to initiate the reset of the parameters on the ENCODER drive object.
Parameter p0141 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976).
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Start a parameter reset
100: Start a BICO interconnection reset
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and
p0010 have been set to 0.
r0965 PROFIdrive profile number / PD profile number
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0969 System runtime relative / t_System relative
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8060
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 4294967295 [ms] 0 [ms]
p0970 ENCODER reset parameters / ENC par reset
ENCODER Can be changed: C2(30) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-255
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The parameter is used to initiate a reset of the parameters on Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The sampling time p4099 is not reset if in so doing a conflict occurs with the basic clock cycle.
Parameter p0161 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976).
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Start a parameter reset
100: Start a BICO interconnection reset
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and
p0010 have been set to 0.
Description: The parameter is used to initiate a reset of the parameters on Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
The sampling time p4099 is not reset if in so doing a conflict occurs with the basic clock cycle.
Parameter p0151 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976).
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Start a parameter reset
100: Start a BICO interconnection reset
Dependency: Refer to: p0010
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0.
Description: The parameter is used to initiate a reset of the parameters on Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Parameter p0151 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976).
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Start a parameter reset
100: Start a BICO interconnection reset
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
p0970 TB30 reset parameters / TB30 par reset
TB30 Can be changed: C2(30) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0
p0970 TM31 reset parameters / TM31 par reset
TM31 Can be changed: C2(30) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0
p0970 TM54F reset parameters / TM54F par reset
TM54F_MA Can be changed: C2(30) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-256 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and
p0010 have been set to 0.
Description: The parameter is used to initiate the reset of the parameters of an individual drive unit.
Parameters p0100, p0205 (only for VECTOR) and the parameters of the basic drive commissioning (p0009) are not
reset (p0107, p0108, p0111, p0112, p0115, p0121, p0130, p0131, p0140, p0141, p0142, p0170, p0186 ... p0189).
These can only be reset using the factory setting of the complete drive unit (p0976).
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Start a parameter reset
5: Starts a safety parameter reset
100: Start a BICO interconnection reset
Dependency: Refer to: F01659
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and
p0010 have been set to 0.
If a Safety Integrated function is parameterized (p9601), the safety parameters will not be reset if p0970 = 1. In this
case, an error message (F1659) is output with fault value 2.
Description: Setting to save the parameter of the particular drive object in the non-volatile memory.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Save drive object
Dependency: Refer to: p0977, p1960, p3845, r3996
Caution: The Control Unit power supply may only be powered down after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been
started, wait until the parameter again has the value 0).
Notice: Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving.
The progress while saving is displayed in r3996.
Note: Starting from the particular drive object, the following parameters are saved:
CU3xx: Device-specific parameters and PROFIBUS device parameters.
Other objects: Parameters of the actual object and PROFIBUS device parameters.
Prerequisite:
In order that the parameter of a drive object, saved with p0971 = 1, is read the next time that the Control Unit is
booted, then all parameters must, as a minimum, have first been saved once with p0977 = 1.
p0970 Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(30) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0
p0971 Save drive object parameters / Drv_obj par save
All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-257
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the required procedure to execute a hardware reset for the drive unit.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Hardware-Reset immediate
2: Hardware reset preparation
3: Hardware reset after cyclic communication has failed
Danger: It must be absolutely ensured that the system is in a safe condition.
The memory card of the Control Unit must not be accessed.
Notice: For SIMOTION or SINUMERIK with integrated SINAMICS, the hardware reset acts on the complete system and
depends on the state of the control.
Note: Re value = 1:
Reset is immediately executed and communications interrupted.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
Re value = 2:
Help to check the reset operation.
Firstly, set p0972 = 2 and then read back. Secondly, set p0972 = 1 (it is possible that this request is possibly no lon-
ger acknowledged). The communication is then interrupted.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
Re value = 3:
The reset is executed after interrupting cyclic communication. This setting is used to implement a synchronized
reset by a control for several drive units.
If the cyclic communication is active for both PROFIdrive interfaces, then the reset is executed after completing
both cycle communications.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
To check the reset operation:
After the drive unit has been restarted and communications have been established, read p0972 and check the fol-
lowing:
p0972 = 0? --> The reset was successfully executed.
p0972 > 0? --> The reset was not executed.
p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-258 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the identification of the drive object.
Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[1] = Drive object type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = PROFIdrive drive object, type class
[6] = PROFIdrive drive object, sub-type Class 1
[7] = Drive object number
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Firmware patch/hot fix
Note: Example:
r0975[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0975[1] = 11 --> SERVO drive object type
r0975[2] = 102 --> first part, firmware version V01.02 (second part, refer to index 10)
r0975[3] = 2003 --> year 2003
r0975[4] = 1401 --> 14th of January
r0975[5] = 1 --> PROFIdrive drive object, type class
r0975[6] = 9 --> PROFIdrive drive object sub-type class 1
r0975[7] = 2 --> drive object number = 2
r0975[8] = 0 (reserved)
r0975[9] = 0 (reserved)
r0975[10] = 600 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V01.02.06.00)
Description: Resets or downloads all parameters of the drive system.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Start reset of all parameters to factory setting
2: Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=1
3: Start dnload of volatile parameters from RAM
10: Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=10
11: Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=11
12: Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=12
20: Start download of Siemens internal setting 20
21: Start download of Siemens internal setting 21
22: Start download of Siemens internal setting 22
23: Start download Siemens internal setting 23
24: Start download Siemens internal setting 24
25: Start download Siemens internal setting 25
26: Start download Siemens internal setting 26
100: Start resetting of all BICO interconnections
r0975[0...10] Drive object identification / DO identification
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p0976 Reset and load all parameters / Reset load all par
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(30) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1013 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-259
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1011: Start dnload of param. saved in volatile mem w/ p0977=1011
1012: Start dnload of param. saved in volatile mem w/ p0977=1012
1013: Start dnload of param. saved in volatile mem w/ p0977=1013
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: After all of the parameters have been reset to their factory setting, the system must be commissioned for the first
time again.
Resetting or loading is realized in the non-volatile memory.
Procedure:
1. Set p0009 = 30 (parameter reset).
2. Set p0976 to "required value". The system is rebooted.
p0976 is automatically set to 0 and p0009 is automatically set to 1 after this has been carried out.
Description: Saves all parameters of the drive system to the non-volatile memory.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Save in non-volatile memory - downloaded at POWER ON
10: Save as opt. in non-vol. memory - downloaded w/ p0976=10
11: Save as opt. in non-vol. memory - downloaded w/ p0976=11
12: Save as opt. in non-vol. memory - downloaded w/ p0976=12
20: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 20 (reserved)
21: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 21 (reserved)
22: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 22 (reserved)
23: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 23 (reserved)
24: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 24 (reserved)
25: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 25 (reserved)
26: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 26 (reserved)
1011: Save in volatile memory, downloaded with p0976=1011
1012: Save in volatile memory, downloaded with p0976=1012
1013: Save in volatile memory, downloaded with p0976=1013
Dependency: Refer to: p0976, p1960, p3845, r3996
Caution: The Control Unit power supply may only be powered down after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been
started, wait until the parameter again has the value 0).
Notice: Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving.
The progress while saving is displayed in r3996.
Note: Parameters saved with p0977 = 10, 11 or 12 can be downloaded again with p0976 = 10, 11 or 12.
p0977 Save all parameters / Save all par
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1013 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-260 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: This parameter is an image of p0101 in conformance with PROFIdrive.
Parameters p0101 and p0978 contain the following information:
1) The same number of drive objects
2) The same drive objects
In this sense, they are consistent.
Difference between p0101 and p0978:
p0978 can be re-sorted and a zero inserted in order to identify those drive objects that participate in the process
data exchange and to define their sequence in the process data exchange. Drive objects that are listed after the
first zero, are excluded from the process data exchange.
For p0978, in addition, the value 255 can be inserted a multiple number of times.
p0978[n] = 255 means: The drive object is visible for the PROFIBUS master and is empty (without any actual pro-
cess data exchange). This allows cyclic communications of a PROFIBUS master with unchanged configuring to the
drive units with a lower number of drive objects.
Dependency: Refer to: p0101, p0971, p0977
Note: p0978 cannot be changed when the drive system is first commissioned. The reason for this is that at this time the
actual topology has still not been acknowledged (p0099 is still not equal to r0098 and p0009 is set to 0).
p0978[0...24] List of drive objects / List of the DO
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 [0] 1
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
[20] 0
[21] 0
[22] 0
[23] 0
[24] 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-261
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual position encoder used according to PROFIdrive.
Index: [0] = Header
[1] = Type, encoder 1
[2] = Resolution enc 1
[3] = Shift factor G1_XIST1
[4] = Shift factor G1_XIST2
[5] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 1
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Reserved
Note: Information about the individual indices can be taken from the following literature:
PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology
Description: Displays the actual position encoder used according to PROFIdrive.
Index: [0] = Header
[1] = Type, encoder 1
[2] = Resolution enc 1
[3] = Shift factor G1_XIST1
[4] = Shift factor G1_XIST2
[5] = Distinguishable distance encoder 1
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Reserved
Note: Information about the individual indices can be taken from the following literature:
PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology
r0979[0...10] PROFIdrive encoder format / PD encoder format
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0979[0...10] PROFIdrive encoder format / PD encoder format
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-262 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual position encoder used according to PROFIdrive.
Index: [0] = Header
[1] = Type, encoder 1
[2] = Resolution enc 1
[3] = Shift factor G1_XIST1
[4] = Shift factor G1_XIST2
[5] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 1
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Reserved
[11] = Type, encoder 2
[12] = Resolution enc 2
[13] = Shift factor G2_XIST1
[14] = Shift factor G2_XIST2
[15] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 2
[16] = Reserved
[17] = Reserved
[18] = Reserved
[19] = Reserved
[20] = Reserved
[21] = Type, encoder 3
[22] = Resolution enc 3
[23] = Shift factor G3_XIST1
[24] = Shift factor G3_XIST2
[25] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 3
[26] = Reserved
[27] = Reserved
[28] = Reserved
[29] = Reserved
[30] = Reserved
Note: Information about the individual indices can be taken from the following literature:
PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology
Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0981, r0989
r0979[0...30] PROFIdrive encoder format / PD encoder format
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0980[0...299] List of existing parameters 1 / List avail par 1
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-263
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
In a long list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0980, r0989
Note: The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
In a long list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0980, r0981
Note: The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0991, r0999
Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a
long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
r0981[0...299] List of existing parameters 2 / List avail par 2
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0989[0...299] List of existing parameters 10 / List avail par 10
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0990[0...99] List of modified parameters 1 / List chang. par 1
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-264 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0990, r0999
Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a
long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0990, r0991
Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
Description: Runs the corresponding macro files.
The Connector Inputs (CI) for the speed setpoints of the appropriate Command Data Set (CDS) are appropriately
interconnected.
The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory.
Example:
p1000 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1500, r8572
Notice: No errors were issued during quick commissioning (p3900 = 1) when writing to parameters of the QUICK_IBN
group!
Note: The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8572. r8572 is not in the expert list of the commissioning
software.
Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.
CI: Connector Input
r0991[0...99] List of modified parameters 2 / List chang. par 2
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r0999[0...99] List of modified parameters 10 / List chang. par 10
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p1000[0...n] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints / Macro CI n_set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 999999 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-265
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 1.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 2.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 3.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 4.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1001[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 / n_set_fixed 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1021, 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1002[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 / n_set_fixed 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1003[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 / n_set_fixed 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1004[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 / n_set_fixed 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-266 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 5.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 6.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 7.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 8.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1005[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 / n_set_fixed 5
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1006[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 / n_set_fixed 6
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1007[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 / n_set_fixed 7
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1008[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 / n_set_fixed 8
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-267
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 9.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 10.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 11.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 12.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1009[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 / n_set_fixed 9
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1010[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 / n_set_fixed 10
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1011[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 / n_set_fixed 11
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1012[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 / n_set_fixed 12
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-268 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 13.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 14.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 15.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1021, p1022, p1023, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
p1013[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 / n_set_fixed 13
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1014[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 / n_set_fixed 14
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1015[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 / n_set_fixed 15
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1021, 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1020[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0 / n_set_fixed Bit 0
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-269
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1020, p1022, p1023, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1023, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
p1021[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1 / n_set_fixed Bit 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1022[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2 / n_set_fixed Bit 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1023[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3 / n_set_fixed Bit 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-270 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the selected and effective fixed speed setpoint.
This setpoint is the output value for the fixed speed setpoints and must be appropriately interconnected (e.g. with
the main setpoint).
Recommend.: Interconnect the signal with main setpoint (p1070).
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1070, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
Description: Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer.
Notice: The following prerequisites must be fulfilled in order to be able to save the setpoint (Bit 03 = 1) in a non-volatile
fashion:
- Firmware with V2.3 or higher.
- Control Unit 320 (CU320) with hardware version C or higher (module with NVRAM).
Note: Re bit 00:
0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p1040.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved after OFF and after ON set to the saved value. In order to
save in a non-volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1.
Re bit 01:
0: Without ramp-function generator in the automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0).
1: With ramp-function generator in the automatic mode.
For manual operation (0 signal via BI: p1041), the ramp-function generator is always active.
Re bit 02:
0: Without initial rounding-off
1: With initial rounding-off. The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is
a sensitive way of specifying small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed).
The jerk for the initial rounding-off is independent of the ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum
speed (p1082). It is calculated as follows:
r = 0.01 % * p1082 [1/s] / 0.13^2 [s^2]
The jerk acts up until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p1082 [1/s] / p1047 [s]), and then the drive
continues to run linearly with a constant rate of acceleration. The higher the maximum acceleration (the lower that
p1047 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to the set ramp-up time.
r1024 CO: Fixed speed setpoint effective / n_set_fixed eff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1550, 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1030[0...n] Motorized potentiometer configuration / Mop configuration
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0110 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Data save active Yes No -
01 Automatic mode, ramp-function generator
active
Yes No -
02 Initial rounding-off active Yes No -
03 Save in NVRAM active Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-271
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Re bit 03:
0: Non-volatile data save deactivated.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for bit 00 = 1).
Description: Sets the signal source to increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer
Dependency: Refer to: p1036
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Sets the signal source to reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency: Refer to: p1035
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Sets the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Note: This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase.
The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value.
Description: Sets the minimum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Note: This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase.
The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value.
p1035[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2442, 2505,
3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1036[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2442, 2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1037[0...n] Motorized potentiometer maximum speed / Mop n_max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1038[0...n] Motorized potentiometer minimum speed / Mop n_min
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-272 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the minimum speed/velocity or the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized
potentiometer.
Dependency: Refer to: p1037, p1038
Note: The inversion is only active during "motorized potentiometer raise" or "motorized potentiometer lower".
Description: Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer. This starting value becomes effective after the drive has
been powered up.
Dependency: Only effective if p1030.0 = 0.
Refer to: p1030
Description: Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic when using a motorized potentiometer.
In the manual mode, the setpoint is changed using two signals - raise and lower. In the automatic mode, the set-
point must be interconnected via a connector input.
Dependency: Refer to: p1030, p1035, p1036, p1042
Note: The effectiveness of the internal ramp-function generator can be set in automatic mode.
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer in the automatic mode.
Dependency: Refer to: p1041
p1039[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer inversion / Mop inversion
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1040[0...n] Motorized potentiometer starting value / Mop start value
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1041[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1042[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-273
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency: Refer to: p1044
Note: The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043).
Description: Sets the signal source for the setting value for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency: Refer to: p1043
Note: The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043).
Description: Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint is changed from zero up to the speed/velocity limit (p1082) within this time (if no initial rounding-off has
been activated).
Dependency: Refer to: p1030, p1048, p1082
Note: When the initial rounding-off is activated (p1030.2) the ramp-up time is correspondingly extended.
p1043[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer accept setpoint / Mop accept set val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1044[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer setting value / Mop set val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r1045 CO: Mot. potentiometer speed setp. in front of ramp-fct. gen. / Mop n_set bef RFG
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1047[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 1000.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-274 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint is changed from the speed/velocity limit (p1082) to zero within this time (if no initial rounding-off has
been activated).
Dependency: Refer to: p1030, p1047, p1082
Note: The deceleration time is extended corresponding to the activated initial rounding-off (p1030.2).
Description: Sets the effective setpoint after the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.
This setpoint is the output value of the motorized potentiometer and must be appropriately interconnected onwards
(e.g. with the main setpoint).
Recommend.: Interconnect the signal with main setpoint (p1070).
Dependency: Refer to: p1070
Note: For "With ramp-function generator", after an OFF1, OFF2, OFF3 or for a 0 signal via BI: p0852 (inhibit operation,
cancel pulses) the ramp-function generator output (r1050) is set to the starting value (configuration via p1030.0).
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction on the ramp-function generator input.
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the negative direction on the ramp-function generator input.
p1048[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 1000.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
r1050 CO: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator /
Mop setp after RFG
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1550, 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1051[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1083[0]
p1052[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1086[0]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-275
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for jog 1.
Recommend.: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency: Refer to: p0840, p1058
Notice: The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to power up can also be used to power down again.
Description: Sets the signal source for jog 2.
Recommend.: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency: Refer to: p0840, p1059
Notice: The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to power up can also be used to power down again.
Description: Sets the speed/velocity for jog 1. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally moved.
Dependency: Refer to: p1055, p1056
Description: Sets the speed/velocity for jog 2. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally moved.
Dependency: Refer to: p1055, p1056
p1055[0...n] BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1056[0...n] BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1058[0...n] Jog 1 speed setpoint / Jog 1 n_set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1550, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1059[0...n] Jog 2 speed setpoint / Jog 2 n_set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1550, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-276 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the speed limit/velocity limit effective in the setpoint channel.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1083, p1085, p1086, p1088
Description: Sets the signal source for the main setpoint.
Examples:
r1024: Fixed speed setpoint effective
r1050: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator
Dependency: Refer to: p1071, r1073, r1078
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the main setpoint.
Description: Displays the effective main setpoint. The value shown is the main setpoint after scaling.
p1063[0...n] Speed limit setpoint channel / n_limit setp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3040
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 40000.000 [rpm]
p1070[0...n] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 1550, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1024[0]
p1071[0...n] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 1550, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
r1073 CO: Main setpoint effective / Main setpoint eff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-277
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint.
Dependency: Refer to: p1076, r1077, r1078
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary setpoint.
Description: Displays the effective supplementary setpoint. The value shown is the additional setpoint after scaling.
Description: Displays the total effective setpoint. The value indicates the sum of the effective main setpoint and supplementary
setpoint.
Description: Sets the lowest possible speed/velocity. This value is not undershot in operation.
Note: The parameter value applies for both motor directions of rotation.
In exceptional cases, the motor can operate below this value (e.g. when reversing).
p1075[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint / Suppl setpoint
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 1550, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1076[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setp scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 1550, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
r1077 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective / Suppl setpoint eff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r1078 CO: Total setpoint effective / Total setpoint eff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1080[0...n] Minimum speed / Minimum speed
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 19500.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-278 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the highest possible speed.
Dependency: Refer to: p0115, p0230, r0313, p0322, r0336
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: The parameter applies for both motor directions. The parameter has a limiting effect and is the reference quantity
for all ramp-up and ramp-down times (e.g. down ramps, ramp-function generator, motor potentiometer).
Since the parameter is part of quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), it is defined appropriately when p0310, p0311, and
p0322 are changed.
The following limits are always effective for p1082:
p1082 <= p0322, if p0322 > 0
p1082 <= 60 * Minimum (15 * r0336, 650 Hz) / r0313
p1082 <= 60 * Maximum power unit pulse frequency / (k * r0313)
k = 12 for vector control (r0108.2 = 1), k = 6.5 for V/f control (r0108.2 = 0)
If a sine-wave filter (p0230 = 3) is parameterized as output filter, then the maximum speed is limited corresponding
to the maximum permissible filter output frequency (refer to the filter data sheet). For reactors and dv/dt filters, it is
limited to 150 Hz / r0313 (for chassis power units) or 120 Hz / r0313 (for booksize power units).
For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1) the value of the parameter is pre-assigned the maximum motor speed
(p0322). If p0322 = 0, the rated motor speed (p0311) is used as default (pre-assignment) value. For induction
motors that are not catalog motors (p0301 = 0), the synchronous no-load speed is used as default (pre-assignment)
value (p0310 * 60 / r0313).
For synchronous motors, the following additionally applies:
The maximum speed p1082 is restricted to speeds (r1084) where the EMF does not exceed the DC link voltage.
The effective assignment of the motor data set parameter (e.g. p0311) to the drive data set parameter p1082 when
pre-assigning should be taken from p0186.
p1082 is also available in the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that when exiting via p3900 > 0, the
value is not changed.
For vector control (p1300 = 20 ... 23) the maximum speed is limited to 60.0 / (8.333 * p0115[0] * r0313). This can be
identified by a reduction in r1084. p1082 is not changed in this process due to the fact that the operating mode
p1300 can be changed over.
When using sine-wave filters (p0230 = 3, 4), the maximum speed r1084 is limited to 70% of the resonant frequency
of the filter capacitance and the motor leakage inductance.
Description: Sets the maximum speed for the positive direction.
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1082[0...n] Maximum speed / n_Max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3020, 3050,
3060, 3070, 3095, 5300
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 1500.000 [rpm]
p1083[0...n] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3050, 6732
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 40000.000 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-279
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the effective positive speed limit.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1083, p1085
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction.
Description: Sets the speed limit for the negative direction.
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Displays the effective negative speed limit.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1086, p1088
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed/velocity limit of the negative direction.
r1084 CO: Speed limit positive effective / n_limit pos eff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 3050, 3095
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1085[0...n] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1083[0]
p1086[0...n] CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm] -40000.000 [rpm]
r1087 CO: Speed limit negative effective / n_limit neg eff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 3050, 3095
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1088[0...n] CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1086[0]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-280 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets skip speed 1.
Dependency: Refer to: p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101
Note: The skip (suppression) speeds can be used to prevent the effects of mechanical resonance.
Description: Sets skip speed 2.
Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1093, p1094, p1101
Description: Sets skip speed 3.
Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1094, p1101
Description: Sets skip speed 4.
Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1101
p1091[0...n] Skip speed 1 / n_skip 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1092[0...n] Skip speed 2 / n_skip 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1093[0...n] Skip speed 3 / n_skip 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1094[0...n] Skip speed 4 / n_skip 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-281
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the bandwidth for the skip speeds/velocities 1 to 4.
Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094
Note: The setpoint (reference) speeds are skipped (suppressed) in the range of the skip speed +/-p1101.
Steady-state operation is not possible in the skipped (suppressed) speed range. The skip (suppression) range is
skipped.
Example:
p1091 = 600 and p1101 = 20
--> setpoint speeds between 580 and 620 [rpm] are skipped.
For the skip bandwidths, the following hysteresis behavior applies:
For a setpoint speed coming from below, the following applies:
r1170 < 580 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 580 [rpm]
For a setpoint speed coming from above, the following applies:
r1170 > 620 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 620 [rpm]
Description: Sets the signal source to disable the negative direction.
Dependency: Refer to: p1111
Description: Sets the signal source to disable the positive direction.
Dependency: Refer to: p1110
Description: Displays the speed setpoint after the minimum limiting.
Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101
p1101[0...n] Skip speed bandwidth / n_skip bandwidth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1110[0...n] BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhib neg dir
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2505, 3040
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1111[0...n] BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhib pos dir
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2505, 3040
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r1112 CO: Speed setpoint after minimum limiting / n_set n. min_lim
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-282 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: r1198
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Displays the speed/velocity setpoint after the changeover and limiting the direction.
Description: Sets the ramp-function generator type.
Value: 0: Basic ramp-function generator
1: Extended ramp-function generator
Note: Another ramp-function generator type can only be selected when the motor is at a standstill.
Description: Displays the setpoint at the input of the ramp-function generator.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: The setpoint is influenced by other functions, e.g. skip (suppressed) speeds, minimum and maximum limits.
p1113[0...n] BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2441, 2442,
2505, 3040
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r1114 CO: Setpoint after the direction limiting / Setp after limit
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1550, 3040,
3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1115 Ramp-function generator selection / RFG selection
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1550, 3080
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
r1119 CO: Ramp-function generator setpoint at the input / RFG setp at inp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1550, 1690,
3050, 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-283
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The ramp-function generator ramps-up the speed setpoint from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed
(p1082) in this time.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082
Note: The parameter is adapted during the rotating measurement (p1960 > 0). This is the reason that during the rotating
measurement, the motor can accelerate faster than was originally parameterized.
For V/f control and encoderless vector control (see p1300), ramp-up times of 0 s are not expedient. The setting
should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
Description: The ramp-function generator ramps-down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed (p1082) down to standstill
(setpoint = 0) in this time. Further, the ramp-down time is always effective for OFF1.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082
Note: For V/f control and encoderless vector control (see p1300), ramp-down times of 0 s are not recommended. The set-
ting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
Description: Sets the signal source for bypassing the ramp generator (ramp-up and ramp-down times = 0).
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: For VECTOR in encoderless operation, it is not permissible that the ramp-function generator is bypassed.
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note: Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.
p1120[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
p1121[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
p1122[0...n] BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1130[0...n] Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-284 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note: Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.
Description: Sets the smoothed response to the OFF1 command or the reduced setpoint for the extended ramp-function gener-
ator.
Value: 0: Cont. smoothing
1: Discont smoothing
Dependency: No effect up to initial rounding-off time (p1130) > 0 s.
Note: p1134 = 0 (continuous smoothing)
If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, initially a final rounding-off is carried out and then the ramp-up com-
pleted. During the final rounding-off, the output of the ramp-function generator continues to go in the direction of the
previous setpoint (overshoot). After the final rounding-off has been completed, the output goes toward the new set-
point.
p1134 = 1 (discontinuous smoothing)
If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, then the output goes immediately in the direction of the new setpoint.
For the setpoint change there is no rounding-off.
Description: Sets the ramp-down time from the maximum speed down to zero speed for the OFF3 command.
Note: This time can be exceeded if the DC link voltage reaches its maximum value.
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.
p1131[0...n] Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
p1134[0...n] Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p1135[0...n] OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 600.000 [s] 3.000 [s]
p1136[0...n] OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-285
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.
Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 4 (operating condition/disable ramp-function generator).
Dependency: Refer to: p1141, p1142
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: Bit 4 = 0: Inhibit ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is set to zero)
Bit 4 = 1: Operating condition (the ramp-function generator can be enabled)
Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 5 (continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator).
Dependency: Refer to: p1140, p1142
Notice: The ramp-function generator is, independent of the state of the signal source, active in the following cases:
- OFF1/OFF3.
- ramp-function generator output within the suppression bandwidth.
- ramp-function generator output below the minimum speed.
Note: Bit 5 = 0: Freeze ramp-function generator
Bit 5 = 1: Continue ramp-function generator
Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 6 (enable setpoint/disable setpoint).
Dependency: Refer to: p1140, p1141
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: Bit 6 = 0: Inhibit setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero)
Bit 6 = 1: Enable setpoint
p1137[0...n] OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
p1140[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator enable / RFG enable
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p1141[0...n] BI: Continue ramp-function generator / Continue RFG
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p1142[0...n] BI: Speed setpoint enable / n_set enable
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-286 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for accepting the setting value of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency: The signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value is set using parameters.
Refer to: p1144
Note: 0/1 signal:
The ramp-function generator output is immediately (without delay) set to the setting value of the ramp-function gen-
erator.
1 signal:
The setting value of the ramp-function generator is effective.
1/0 signal:
The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective. The ramp-function generator output is adapted to the
input value using the ramp-up time or the ramp-down time.
0 signal:
The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective.
Description: Sets the signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value.
Dependency: The signal source for accepting the setting value is set using parameters.
Refer to: p1143
Description: Sets the ramp-function generator tracking.
The output value of the ramp-function generator is tracked (corrected) corresponding to the maximum possible
drive acceleration. The reference value is the deviation at the speed/velocity controller input that is necessary to
ensure that the motor accelerates at the torque/force limit.
Recommend.: p1145 = 0.0:
This value deactivates the ramp-function generator tracking.
p1145 = 0.0 ... 1.0:
Generally, these values are not practical. They cause the motor to accelerate below its torque limit. The lower the
selected value, the greater the margin between the controller and torque limit when accelerating.
p1145 > 1.0:
The greater the value, the higher the permissible deviation between the speed setpoint and speed actual value.
p1143[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / Accept RFG set val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1144[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1145[0...n] Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3080
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 50.0 1.3
List of parameters
Parameter
1-287
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: If ramp-function generator tracking is activated and the ramp time is set too short, this can cause unsteady acceler-
ation.
Remedy:
- switch off ramp-function generator tracking (p1145 = 0).
- increase the ramp-up/ramp-down time (p1120, p1121).
Note: In the V/f mode, ramp-function generator tracking is not active.
For SERVO with V/f operation, the following applies:
The complete ramp-function generator is not active, i.e. ramp-up and ramp-down time = 0.
Description: Sets the tolerance value for the status of the ramp-function generator (ramp-up active, ramp-down active).
If the input of the ramp-function generator does not change in comparison to the output by more than the entered
tolerance time, then the status bits "ramp-up active" and "ramp-down active" are not influenced.
Dependency: Refer to: r1199
Description: Displays the acceleration of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency: Refer to: p1145
Description: Displays the setpoint at the output of the ramp-function generator.
Description: Sets the configuration for the extended ramp-function generator.
p1148[0...n] Ramp-function gen., tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active / RFG tol HL/RL act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [rpm] 1000.000 [rpm] 19.800 [rpm]
r1149 CO: Ramp-function generator, acceleration / RFG acceleration
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 39_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2007 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rev/s²] - [rev/s²] - [rev/s²]
r1150 CO: Ramp-function generator speed setpoint at the output / RFG n_set at outp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1550, 3080
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1151[0...n] Ramp-function generator configuration / RFG config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Disable rounding-off at the zero cross-over Yes No 3070
Parameter
List of parameters
1-288 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Caution: Re bit 00 = 1:
If the ramp-up time is longer than the ramp-down time (p1120 > p1121), then there is an acceleration step at the
zero crossover. This can have a negative impact on the mechanical system.
Note: Re bit 00 = 1:
When the direction change is changed there is no rounding-off before and after the zero crossover.
Description: Sets the signal source for "setpoint 2 enable".
Description: Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 1 of the speed controller.
Dependency: The effectiveness of this setpoint depends on, e.g. STW1.4 and STW1.6.
Refer to: r0002, p0840, p0844, p0848, p0852, p0854, r0898, p1140, p1142, p1160, r1170, p1189
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 2 of the speed controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1155, r1170
Note: For OFF1/OFF3, the ramp-function generator ramp is effective.
The ramp-function generator is set (SERVO: to the actual value, VECTOR: To the setpoint (r1170)) and stops the
drive corresponding to the ramp-downtime (p1121 or p1135). While stopping via the ramp-function generator,
STW1.4 is effective (enable ramp-function generator).
When the function module "position control" (r0108.3 = 1) is activated, this connector input is interconnected as fol-
lows as standard:
CI: p1160 = r2562
p1152 BI: Setpoint 2 enable / Setp 2 enab
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended brk)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2711, 4015
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 899.15
p1155[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 1 / n_ctrl n_set 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 1550, 3080,
5030, 6031
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1160[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 2 / n_ctrl n_set 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 1550, 3080
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-289
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the speed setpoint after the addition of the speed setpoint 1 (p1155) and speed setpoint 2 (p1160).
Dependency: Refer to: p1155, p1160
Note: The value is only correctly displayed at r0899.2 = 1 (operation enabled).
Description: Displays the speed setpoint after selecting the ramp-function generator and adding the speed setpoint 1 (p1155)
and speed setpoint 2 (p1160).
Dependency: Refer to: r1150, p1155, p1160
Description: Sets the configuration for the speed setpoint.
Note: Re bit 01:
The interpolator is only effective for clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation and when the master receives a
sign-of-life (STW 2.12 ... STW 2.15).
Description: Displays the number of the selected fixed speed/velocity setpoint.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
r1169 CO: Speed controller, speed setpoints 1 and 2 / n_ctrl n_set 1/2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 3080
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r1170 CO: Speed controller, setpoint sum / n_ctrl setp sum
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1550, 1590,
1690, 1700, 1750, 3080, 5020,
6030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1189[0...n] Speed setpoint configuration / n_ctrl config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 3080
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0011 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Interpolation ramp-fct gen/speed controller
active
Yes No 3080
01 Interpol. op-loop ctrl /speed controller active Yes No 3080
r1197 Fixed speed setpoint number actual / n_set_fixed No act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-290 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the control word for the setpoint channel.
Description: Displays the status word for the ramp-function generator (RFG).
Note: Re bit 02:
The bit is an OR logic operation - bit 00 and bit 01.
Description: Sets the operating mode for flying restart.
The flying restart allows the drive converter to be powered up while the motor is still rotating. In so doing, the drive
converter output frequency is changed until the actual motor speed/velocity is found. The motor then accelerates up
to the setpoint at the ramp-function generator setting.
r1198.0...15 CO/BO: Control word setpoint channel / STW setpoint chan
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1530, 2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed setpoint bit 0 Yes No 3010
01 Fixed setpoint bit 1 Yes No 3010
02 Fixed setpoint bit 2 Yes No 3010
03 Fixed setpoint bit 3 Yes No 3010
05 Inhibit negative direction Yes No 3040
06 Inhibit positive direction Yes No 3040
11 Setpoint inversion Yes No 3040
13 Motorized potentiometer raise Yes No 3020
14 Motorized potentiometer lower Yes No 3020
15 Bypass ramp-function generator Yes No 3060,
3070
r1199.0...6 CO/BO: Ramp-function generator status word / RFG ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1550, 3080,
8010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Ramp-up active Yes No -
01 Ramp-down active Yes No -
02 Ramp-function generator active Yes No -
03 Ramp-function generator set Yes No -
04 Ramp-function generator held Yes No -
05 Ramp-function generator tracking active Yes No -
06 Maximum limit active Yes No -
p1200[0...n] FlyRest oper mode / FlyRest op_mode
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1690
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-291
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Value: 0: Flying restart inactive
1: Flying restart always active (start in setpoint direction)
2: FlyRestart active after on, fault, OFF2 (start in setp. dir.)
3: FlyRestart active after fault, OFF2 (start in setp. direction)
4: Flying restart always active (start only in setpoint direction)
5: FlyRestart active after on, fault, OFF2 (start only in setp_dir)
6: FlyRestart active after fault, OFF2 (start only in setp. dir.)
Dependency: For induction motors, the following applies:
A differentiation is made between flying restart for V/f control and for vector control (p1300).
Flying restart, V/f control: p1202, p1203, r1204
Flying restart, vector control: p1202, p1203, r1205
For synchronous motors, the following applies:
Flying restart is not possible with V/f control or if, in the case of sensorless vector control, a Voltage Sensing Module
has not been connected and parameterized.
Refer to: p1201
Refer to: F07330, F07331
Notice: The "flying restart" function must be used in cases where the motor may still be running (e.g. after a brief line supply
interruption) or is being driven by the load. The system might otherwise shut down as a result of overcurrent.
It does not make sense to use "flying restart" together with the "motor holding brake function" (p1215 > 0) because
then the flying restart will always be realized with the motor stationary.
Note: For p1200 = 1, 4, the following applies:
Flying restart is active after faults, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3.
For p1200 = 2, 5, the following applies:
The "power-on" is the first power-on operation after the drive system has been booted. This is practical for motors
with a high-inertia load.
For p1200 = 1, 2, 3, the following applies: The search is made in both directions.
For p1200 = 4, 5, 6, the following applies: The search is only made in the setpoint direction.
For operation with encoder, the following applies:
p1200 = 1, 4 as well as p1200 = 2, 5 and p1200 = 3, 6 have the same meaning.
For V/f control (p1300 < 20), the following applies:
The speed can only be sensed for values above approx. 5 % of the rated motor speed. For lower speeds, it is
assumed that the motor is at a standstill.
If p1200 is changed while commissioning (p0009, p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be
able to be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1200 have been changed by a parameter that was
set when the drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300).
Description: Sets the signal source to enable the "flying restart" function.
Dependency: Refer to: p1200
Note: Withdrawing the enable signal has the same effect as setting p1200 = 0.
p1201[0...n] BI: Flying restart enable signal source / Fly_res enab S_src
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-292 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the search current for the "flying restart" function.
The value is referred to the motor magnetizing current.
Dependency: Refer to: r0331
Caution: An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.
Note: In V/f control mode, the parameter serves as a threshold value for establishing the current at the beginning of the
flying restart function. When the threshold value is reached, the prevailing search current is set dependent upon the
frequency on the basis of voltage inputs.
Reducing the search current can also improve flying restart performance (if the system moment of inertia is not very
high, for example).
Description: The value influences the rate at which the output frequency is changed during a flying restart . A higher value
results in a longer search time.
Caution: An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.
For vector control, a value that is too low or too high can cause flying restart to become unstable.
Note: The parameter factory setting is selected so that standard induction motors that are rotating can be found and
restarted as quickly as possible (fast flying restart).
With this presetting, if the motor is not found (e.g. for motors that are accelerated as a result of active loads) we rec-
ommend that the search rate is reduced (by increasing p1203).
Description: Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the V/f control mode.
p1202[0...n] FlyRest srch curr / FlyRest I_srch
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 400 [%] 100 [%]
p1203[0...n] Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 4000 [%] 100 [%]
r1204.0...13 CO/BO: Flying restart, V/f control status / FlyRest Vf st
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Current impressed Yes No -
01 No current flow Yes No -
02 Voltage input Yes No -
03 Voltage reduced Yes No -
04 Start ramp-function generator Yes No -
05 Wait for execution Yes No -
06 Slope filter act Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-293
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the vector control mode.
Note: Bits 0..9: Used by the control in internal sequences during the flying restart.
Depending on the motor type (p0300), the number of active bits differs.
Bits 10..15: Are used to monitor the flying restart sequence.
For PEM, only bits 10, 11 and 15 are supported.
Description: Selects the faults for which automatic restart should not be effective.
Dependency: The setting is only effective for p1210 = 6, 16.
Refer to: p1210
07 Positive gradient Yes No -
08 Current < thresh Yes No -
09 Current minimum Yes No -
10 Search in the positive direction Yes No -
11 Stop after positive direction Yes No -
12 Stop after negative direction Yes No -
13 No result Yes No -
r1205.0...15 CO/BO: Flying restart, vector control status / FlyRest vector st
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Speed adaptation circuit record angle Yes No -
01 Speed adaptation circuit set gain to 0 Yes No -
02 Isd channel enable Yes No -
03 Speed control switched out Yes No -
04 Quadrature arm switched in Yes No -
05 Special transformation active Yes No -
06 Speed adaptation circuit set I comp to 0 Yes No -
07 Current control on Yes No -
08 Isd_set = 0 A Yes No -
09 Frequency held Yes No -
10 Search in the positive direction Yes No -
11 Search Started Yes No -
12 Current impressed Yes No -
13 Search interrupted Yes No -
14 Speed adaptation circuit deviation = 0 Yes No -
15 Speed control activated Yes No -
p1206[0...9] Set the fault number without automatic restart / Fault_No w/o AR
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-294 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source to modify the automatic restart (AR).
Interconnections between the automatic restart and infeed:
With the following interconnection in the mode p1210 = 6, the automatic restart can respond to infeed faults:
BI: p1208[0] = r2139.3
With the following interconnection, in the mode p1210 = 4, the automatic restart can respond to line supply failure of
the infeed:
BI: p1208[1] = r0863.2
Index: [0] = Infeed fault
[1] = Infeed line supply failure
Dependency: Refer to: r0863, r2139
Description: Sets the automatic restart mode (AR).
Value: 0: Inhibit automatic restart
1: Acknowledge all faults without restarting
4: Restart after line supply failure w/o additional start attempts
6: Restart after fault with additional start attempts
14: Restart after line supply failure following man. acknowledgment
16: Restart after fault following manual acknowledgment
Recommend.: For brief line supply failures, the motor shaft may still be rotating when restarting. The "flying restart" function
(p1200) might need to be activated to restart while the motor shaft is still rotating.
Dependency: The automatic restart requires an active ON command, e.g. that is available at a digital input.
If, for p1210 > 1, there is no active ON command, then the automatic restart is interrupted.
When using an Operator Panel in the LOCAL mode, then there is no automatic start.
For p1210 = 14, 16, a manual acknowledgement is required for an automatic restart.
Refer to: p0840, p0857, p1267
Refer to: F30003
Danger: If the automatic restart is activated (p1210 > 1) if there is an ON command (refer to p0840), the drive is powered up
as soon as any fault messages that are present can be acknowledged. This also occurs after the line supply returns
or the Control Unit boots if the DC link voltage is again present or the feedback of the line supply infeed (refer to
p0864) is again available. This automatic power-up sequence can only be interrupted by withdrawing the ON com-
mand.
Caution: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). When faults
are present, therefore, the parameter cannot be changed.
For p1210 > 1, the motor is automatically started.
p1208[0...1] BI: AR modification infeed / AR modification
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1210 Automatic restart, mode / AR mode
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 16 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-295
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: When automatic restart mode is activated, the supply voltage must remain connected (e.g. backed up by UPS).
Re p1210 = 1:
Faults that are present are automatically acknowledged. If new faults occur after a successful fault acknowledg-
ment, then these are also automatically acknowledged again. For p1210 = 1, fault F07320 is not generated if the
acknowledgment attempt was unsuccessful, for example, because the monitoring time p1213 index 0 was
exceeded.
Re p1210 = 4:
An automatic restart is only carried out if fault F30003 occurred at the Motor Module or a high signal is present at
binector input p1208[1]. If additional faults are present, then these faults are also acknowledged and when success-
ful, starting continues. If the 24 V Control Unit power supply fails, then this is interpreted as a line supply failure.
Re p1210 = 6:
An automatic restart is carried out if any fault has occurred or there is a high signal at binector input p1208[0].
Re p1210 = 14:
As for p1210 = 4. However, faults that are present must be manually acknowledged.
Re p1210 = 16:
As for p1210 = 6. However, faults that are present must be manually acknowledged.
Description: Sets the start attempts of the automatic restart function for p1210 = 4, 6.
Dependency: Refer to: p1210, r1214
Refer to: F07320
Caution: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
Notice: After fault F07320 occurs, the power-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the
automatic restart function is reactivated.
After a complete blackout the start counter always starts with the counter value that applied before the blackout,
and decrements this startup attempt by 1. If a further attempt to acknolwedge is started by the automatic restart
function prior to blackout, e.g. when the CU remains active on blackout longer than the time p1212 / 2, the fault
counter will already have been decremented by 1. In this case, the fault counter is thus decreased by the value 2.
Note: A start attempt starts immediately when a fault occurs. The start attempt is considered to been completed if the
motor was magnetized (r0056.4 = 1) and an additional delay time of 1 s has expired.
As long as a fault is present, an acknowledge command is generated in the time intervals of p1212 / 2. When suc-
cessfully acknowledged, the start counter is decremented. If, after this, a fault re-occurs before a restart has been
completed, then acknowledgement starts again from the beginning.
Fault F07320 is output if, after several faults occur, the number of parameterized start attempts has been reached.
After a successful start attempt, i.e. a fault/error has no longer occurred up to the end of the magnetizing phase, the
start counter is again reset to the parameter value after 1 s. If a fault re-occurs - the parameterized number of start
attempts is again available.
At least one start attempt is always carried out.
After a line supply failure, acknowledgement is immediate and when the line supply returns, the system is powered
up. If, between successfully acknowledging the line fault and the line supply returning, another fault occurs, then its
acknowledgement also causes the start counter to be decremented.
p1211 Automatic restart, start attempts / AR start attempts
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 10 3
Parameter
List of parameters
1-296 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the delay time up to restart.
Dependency: This parameter setting is active for p1210 = 4, 6.
For p1210 = 1, the following applies: Faults are only automatically acknowledged in half of the waiting time, no
restart.
Refer to: p1210, r1214
Caution: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
Note: The faults are automatically acknowledged after half of the waiting time has expired and the full waiting time.
If the cause of a fault is not removed in the first half of the delay time, then it is no longer possible to acknowledge in
the waiting time.
Description: Sets the monitoring time of the automatic restart (AR).
Index: [0] = For restart
[1] = To reset the fault counter
Dependency: Refer to: p1210, r1214
Caution: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
Notice: After fault F07320 occurs, the power-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the
automatic restart function is reactivated.
Note: Index 0:
The monitoring time starts when the faults are detected. If the automatic acknowledgements are not successful, the
monitoring time runs again. If, after the monitoring time has expired, the drive has still not successfully started again
(flying restart and magnetizing of the motor must have been completed: r0056.4 = 1), then fault F07320 is output.
The monitoring is deactivated with p1213 = 0. If p1213 is set lower than the sum of p1212, the magnetizing time
p0346 and the additional delay time due to the flying restart, then fault F07320 is generated at each restart. If, for
p1210 = 1, the time in p1213 is set lower than in p1212, then fault F07320 is also generated at each restart.
The monitoring time must be extended if the faults that occur cannot be immediately and successfully acknowl-
edged (e.g. for faults that are permanently present).
Index 1:
The fault counter (refer to r1214) is only set back to the starting value p1211 if, after successful restart, the time in
p1213 index 1 has expired. The delay time is not effective for fault acknowledgement without automatic restart
(p1210 = 1). After a power failure (blackout) the delay time only starts after the line supply returns and the Control
Unit boots. The fault counter is set to p1211, if F07320 occurred, the power-on command is withdrawn and the fault
is acknowledged.
The fault counter is immediately updated if the starting value p1211 or the mode p1210 is changed.
p1212 Automatic restart, delay time start attempts / AR t_wait start
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.1 [s] 1000.0 [s] 1.0 [s]
p1213[0...1] Automatic restart, monitoring time / AR t_monitoring
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 10000.0 [s] 0.0 [s]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-297
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status of the automatic restart (AR).
Note: Re bit 00:
State to display the single initialization after POWER ON.
Re bit 01:
State in which the automatic restart function waits for faults (initial state).
Re bit 02:
General display that a fault has been identified and that the restart or acknowledgement has been initiated.
Re bit 03:
Displays the acknowledge command within the "acknowledge alarms" state (bit 4 = 1). For bit 5 = 1 or bit 6 = 1, the
acknowledge command is continually displayed.
Re bit 04:
State in which the faults that are present are acknowledged. The state is exited again after successful acknowl-
edgement. A change is only made into the next state if it is signaled that a fault is no longer present after an
acknowledgement command (bit 3 = 1).
Re bit 05:
State in which the drive is automatically powered up (only for p1210 = 4, 6).
Re bit 06:
State in which the system waits after having been powered up, to the end of the start attempt (to the end of the
magnetizing process).
For p1210 = 1, this signal is directly set after the faults have been successfully acknowledged.
Re bit 07:
State which is assumed after a fault occurs within the automatic restart function. This is only reset after acknowl-
edging the fault and withdrawing the power-on command.
Re bit 10:
When the automatic restart function is active, r1214 bit 7 is displayed, otherwise the effective fault r2139 bit 3.
Re bits 12 ... 15:
Actual state of the start counter (binary coded).
r1214.0...15 CO/BO: Automatic restart, status / AR status
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Initialization Yes No -
01 Wait for alarm Yes No -
02 Auto restart act Yes No -
03 Setting the acknowledgement command Yes No -
04 Acknowledge alarms Yes No -
05 Restart Yes No -
06 Delay time running after automatic power-
up
Yes No -
07 Fault Yes No -
10 Effective fault Yes No -
12 Start count. bit 0 On Off -
13 Start count. bit 1 On Off -
14 Start count. bit 2 On Off -
15 Start count. bit 3 On Off -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-298 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the holding brake configuration.
Value: 0: No motor holding brake being used
1: Motor holding brake acc. to sequence control
2: Motor holding brake always open
3: Motor holding brake like sequence control, connection via BICO
Dependency: Refer to: p1216, p1217, p1226, p1227, p1228, p1278
Caution: For the setting p1215 = 0, if a brake is used, it remains closed. If the motor moves, this will destroy the brake.
Notice: If p1215 was set to 1 or if p1215 was set to 3, then when the pulses are suppressed, the brake is closed even if the
motor is still rotating. Pulse suppression can either be caused by a 0 signal at p0844, p0845 or p0852 or as a result
of a fault with OFF2 response. If this is not desirable (e.g. for a flying restart), then the brake can be kept open using
a 1 signal at p0855.
Note: If the configuration is set to "no holding brake present" when booting, then the motor holding brake will be automat-
ically identified. If a motor holding brake is detected, the configuration is set to "motor holding brake as for sequence
control".
If a holding brake integrated in the motor is used, then it is not permissible that p1215 is set to 3.
if an external motor holding brake is being used, then p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be intercon-
nected as control signal.
When the function module "extended brake control" is activated (r0108.14 = 1), r1229.1 should be interconnected
as control signal.
The parameter can only be set to zero when the pulses are inhibited.
The parameterization "no motor holding brake available" and "Safe Brake Control" enabled (p1215 = 0, p9602 = 1,
p9802 = 1) is not practical if there is no motor holding brake.
The parameterization "motor holding brake the same as sequence control, connection via BICO" and "Safe Brake
Control" enabled (p1215 = 3, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1) is not practical.
Description: Sets the time to open the motor holding brake.
After controlling the holding brake (opens), the speed/velocity setpoint remains at zero for this time. After this, the
speed/velocity setpoint is enabled.
Recommend.: This time should be set longer than the actual opening time of the brake. This ensures that the drive cannot accel-
erate when the brake is applied.
Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1217
p1215 Motor holding brake configuration / Brake config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2701, 2707,
2711
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
p1216 Motor holding brake, opening time / Brake t_open
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2701, 2711
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-299
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the time to apply the motor holding brake.
After OFF1 or OFF3 and the holding brake is controlled (the brake closes), then the drive remains closed-loop con-
trolled for this time stationary with a speed setpoint/velocity setpoint of zero. The pulses are suppressed when the
time expires.
Recommend.: This time should be set longer than the actual closing time of the brake. This ensures that the pulses are only sup-
pressed after the brake has closed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1216
Notice: If the selected closing time is too short with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, then the load can sag.
If the closing time is selected to be too long with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, the control works
against the brake and therefore reduces its lifetime.
Description: Sets the signal source for a conditional opening of the motor holding brake.
Dependency: Refer to: p1215
Note: [0]: Signal, open brake, AND logic operation, input 1
[1]: Signal, open brake, AND logic operation, input 2
Description: Sets the signal source for an unconditional (immediate) closing of the motor holding brake.
Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1275
Note: [0]: Signal, immediately close brake, inversion via p1275.0
[1]: Signal, immediately close brake, inversion via p1275.1
[2]: Signal, immediately close brake
[3]: Signal, immediately close brake - refer to the factory setting
These four signals form an OR logic operation.
p1217 Motor holding brake closing time / Brake t_close
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2701, 2711
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
p1218[0...1] BI: Open motor holding brake / Open brake
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended brk)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p1219[0...3] BI: Immediately close motor holding brake / Close brake
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended brk)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - [0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 1229.9
Parameter
List of parameters
1-300 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "open brake".
Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1221, r1229, p1277
Description: Sets the threshold value for the command "open brake".
Dependency: Refer to: p1220, r1229, p1277
Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal "brake closed".
For motor holding brakes with feedback signal, the signal "brake closed" can be activated using p1275.5 = 1.
Dependency: Refer to: p1223, p1275
Note: 1 signal: Brake closed.
When braking with 1 feedback signal, the inverted feedback signal is connected to the BICO input for the second
feedback signal (p1223).
For r1229.5 = 1, OFF/OFF3 are suppressed to prevent the drive accelerating by a load that drives the motor -
whereby OFF2 remains effective.
Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal "brake open".
For motor holding brakes with feedback signal, the signal "brake open" can be activated using p1275.5 = 1.
Dependency: Refer to: p1222, p1275
Note: 1 signal: Brake open.
When braking with 1 feedback signal, the inverted feedback signal is connected to the BICO input for the second
feedback signal (p1222).
p1220 CI: Open motor holding brake, signal source, threshold / Open brake thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended brk)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p1221 Open motor holding brake, threshold / Open brake thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended brk)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
p1222 BI: Motor holding brake feedback signal brake closed / Brake feedb closed
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended brk)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2711
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1223 BI: Motor holding brake feedback signal brake open / Brake feedb open
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended brk)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2711
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-301
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for close brake at standstill.
Dependency: Refer to: p1275
Note: [0]: Signal, close brake at standstill, inversion via p1275.2
[1]: Signal, close brake at standstill, inversion via p1275.3
[2]: Signal, close brake at standstill
[3]: Signal, close brake at standstill
These four signals form an OR logic operation.
Description: Sets the signal source "threshold value" for the standstill identification.
Dependency: Refer to: p1226, p1228, r1229
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the standstill identification.
Acts on the actual value and setpoint monitoring.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, when the threshold is undershot, standstill is identified.
The following applies when the brake control is activated:
When the threshold is undershot, the brake control is started and the system waits for the brake closing time in
p1217. The pulses are then suppressed.
if the brake control is not activated, the following applies:
When the threshold is undershot, the pulses are suppressed and the drive coasts down.
Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1216, p1217, p1227
Notice: For reasons relating to the compatibility to earlier software versions, a parameter value of 0 in indices 1 to 31 is
overwritten with the parameter value in index 0 when the Control Unit boots.
Note: Standstill is detected if the actual speed drops below the speed threshold in p1226 or if the monitoring time (p1227)
- started when speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226) - has expired.
The actual value sensing is subject to measuring noise. For this reason, standstill cannot be detected if the speed
threshold is too low.
p1224[0...3] BI: Close motor holding brake at standstill / Brk close standst
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended brk)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2704
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1225 CI: Standstill detection, threshold value / Standstill thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended brk)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2704
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 63[0]
p1226[0...n] Threshold for zero speed detection / n_standst n_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 2701, 2704
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 20.00 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-302 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, standstill is identified after this time has expired, after the setpoint speed has
fallen below p1226 (also refer to p1145).
After this, the brake control is started, the system waits for the closing time in p1217 and then the pulses are sup-
pressed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1216, p1217, p1226
Notice: For p1145 > 0.0 (RFG tracking) the setpoint is not equal to zero dependent on the selected value. This can there-
fore cause the monitoring time in p1227 to be exceeded. In this case, for a driven motor, the pulses are not sup-
pressed.
Note: Standstill (zero speed) is detected if, during the complete monitoring time (p1227), the speed setpoint falls below
the speed threshold (p1226).
For p1227 = 300.000 s, the following applies:
The monitoring is deactivated.
For p1227 = 0.000 s, the following applies:
With OFF1 or OFF3 and a ramp-down time = 0, the pulses are immediately suppressed and the motor "coasts"
down.
Description: Sets the delay time for pulse suppression.
After OFF1 or OFF3 and zero speed detection, the system waits for this time to expire and the pulses are then sup-
pressed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1226, p1227
Note: Standstill (zero speed) is detected if, during the complete delay time (p1228), the speed actual value falls below the
speed threshold (p1226).
Description: Displays the status word for the motor holding brake.
p1227 Zero speed detection monitoring time / n_standst t_monit
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2701, 2704
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 4.000 [s]
p1228 Pulse suppression delay time / Pulse suppr t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2701, 2704
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 10.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
r1229.1...11 CO/BO: Motor holding brake status word / Brake ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended brk)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Command open brake (continuous signal) Yes No 2711
03 Pulse enable, extended brake control Yes No 2711
04 Brake does not open Yes No 2711
05 Brake does not close Yes No 2711
06 Brake threshold exceeded Yes No 2707
List of parameters
Parameter
1-303
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source to activate the armature short-circuit or DC brake.
Dependency: Refer to: p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234, p1235, p1236, p1237, r1238, r1239, p1345, p1346
Note: 1 signal: Armature short-circuit/DC brake is deactivated.
0 signal: Armature short-circuit/DC brake is deactivated.
Description: Setting to activate the various types for armature short-circuit / DC brake.
Value: 0: No function
1: External armature short-circuit with contactor feedback signal
2: Ext. armature short circuit without contactor feedback signal
3: Internal voltage protection
4: Internal armature short-circuit / DC brake
14: DC brake under starting speed
Dependency: Refer to: p0300, p1230, p1232, p1233, p1234, p1235, p1236, p1237, r1238, r1239, p1345, p1346
Danger: Re p1231 = 1, 2:
- only short-circuit-proof motors may be used, or suitable resistors must be used to short-circuit the motor
Re p1231 = 3:
- when the internal voltage protection is active, after pulse suppression, all of the motor terminals are at half of the
DC link voltage (without an internal voltage protection, the motor terminals are at zero potential)!
- it is only permissible to use motors that are short-circuit proof (p0320 < p0323).
- The Motor Module must be able to conduct 180% short-circuit current (r0320) of the motor (r0209).
- the internal voltage protection cannot be interrupted due to a fault response. If an overcurrent condition occurs
during the active, internal voltage protection, then this can destroy the Motor Module and/or the motor.
- if the Motor Module does not support the autonomous, internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0), in order to
ensure safe, reliable functioning when the line supply fails, an external 24 V power supply (UPS) must be used for
the components.
- if the Motor Module does support the autonomous, internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1), in order to ensure
safe, reliable functioning when the line supply fails, the 24 V power supply for the components must be provided
through a Control Supply Module.
- if the internal voltage protection is active, it is not permissible that the motor is driven by the load for a longer
period of time (e.g. as a result of loads that move the motor or another coupled motor).
07 Brake threshold undershot Yes No 2704
08 Brake monitoring time expired Yes No 2704
09 Pulse enable request missing/n_ctrl inhib-
ited
Yes No 2707
10 Brake OR logic operation result Yes No 2707
11 Brake AND logic operation result Yes No 2707
p1230[0...n] BI: Armature short-circuit / DC brake activation / ASC act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7014, 7016,
7017
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1231[0...n] Armature short-circuit / DC brake configuration / ASC config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 7014, 7016,
7017
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 14 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-304 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Re p1231 = 4 and synchronous motor:
- when armature short-circuit is active, all of the motor terminals are at half of the DC link potential.
- it is only permissible to use motors that are short-circuit proof (p0320 < p0323).
- The Motor Module must be able to conduct 180% short-circuit current (r0320) of the motor (r0209).
Note: Re p1231 = 1, 2:
The external armature short circuit can only be selected for synchronous motors (p0300). In this case, control bit
BO: r1239.0 must be interconnected (e.g. to a digital input) to control the external contactor.
The external armature short circuit cannot be set as a fault response. It can be triggered via binector input p1230. It
is also always activated in the case of pulse suppression.
Re p1231 = 3:
Internal voltage protection (using an internal armature short circuit) can only be selected for synchronous motors
(p0300) and Motor Modules in booksize or chassis format. Further, it is not permissible for Safety to be active on
blocksize Motor Modules (i.e. p9501 = 0 and p9601 = 0). The internal voltage protection prevents the DC link
capacitance from being charged if there is no possibility of regenerating the EMF of a motor operated in the field-
weakening mode. The Motor Module must support this function (r0192.9 = 1).
a) If the Motor Module does not support the autonomous, internal armature short-circuit (r0192.10 = 0), the arma-
ture short-circuit is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled (refer below):
b) If the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1), then the Motor Module
itself decides - using the DC link voltage - as to whether the short-circuit should be activated. In this case, protection
is also provided even if the DRIVE-CLiQ connection between the Control Unit and Motor Module was interrupted.
The short circuit is activated if the DC link voltage exceeds 800 V. If the DC link voltage falls below 450 V, then the
short-circuit is withdrawn. This therefore ensures that the required input voltage for the Control Supply Module is
maintained.
Re p1231 = 4:
The function is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled.
- the function can be initiated by OFF2
a) For synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx, 4xx), the internal armature short-circuit is initiated.
- the Motor Module must support this function (r0192.9 = 1).
b) For induction motors (p0300 = 1xx), the DC brake is initiated.
Activation criterion (one of the following criteria is fulfilled):
- 1 signal via binector input p1230 (DC brake activation)
- the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or in S5x (refer to function diagram 2610).
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
Re p1231 = 14:
This DC brake can only be set on induction motors.
The DC brake is triggered if a 1 signal is pending at binector input p1230 during operation and the current speed is
below the starting speed p1234. Then, following upstream demagnetization (see p0347), the braking current p1232
is injected for the duration of time set in p1233. This is followed by automatic switch-off. During operation the com-
mand for DC braking can be withdrawn at any time.
DC braking by means of fault response continues to be possible.
Re p1231 = 3, 4, 14:
The value can only be changed to values not equal to 3 or 4 or 14 if p0491 is not equal to 4 and p2101 is not equal
to 6 (armature short-circuit/DC brake not set).
In the case of SERVO, the DC brake does not function in V/f operation (p1317).
Note:
ASC: Armature short circuit
IVP: Internal Voltage Protection
UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply
CSM: Control Supply Module
DC brake
List of parameters
Parameter
1-305
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the braking current for DC braking.
Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1233, p1234, r1239, p1345, p1346
Note: A change to the braking current becomes effective the next time that the DC brake is powered up.
The value for p1232 is specified as an rms value in the 3-phase system. The magnitude of the braking current is the
same as that of an identical output current at frequency zero (see r0067, r0068, p0640).
For the current controller, the settings of parameters p1345 and p1346 (I_max limiting controller) are used.
Description: Sets the DC braking time (as fault response).
Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1234, r1239
Note: If a speed encoder is being used, DC braking is ended as soon as the drive falls below the standstill threshold
p1226.
Description: Sets the starting speed for DC braking.
If the actual speed falls below this threshold, then DC braking is activated.
Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1233, r1239
Caution: If an encoder fault occurs during closed-loop operation with encoder, controlled decceleration of the drive down to
the start speed p1234 of the DC current brake. In this case, the DC brake is activated immediately and injects the
braking current p1232 for the braking current time p1233 after demagnetization.
The braking current and braking duration must, therefore, be dimensioned accordingly for this situation so that the
drive can be decelerated to standstill.
Description: Sets the signal source for the contactor feedback signal for external armature short-circuit.
Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1236, p1237, r1239
p1232[0...n] DC braking, braking current / DCBRK I_brake
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 7017
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
p1233[0...n] DC braking time / DCBRK time
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 7017
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 3600.0 [s] 1.0 [s]
p1234[0...n] Speed at the start of DC braking / DCBRK n_start
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 7017
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 40000.00 [rpm]
p1235[0...n] BI: External armature short-circuit, contactor feedback signal / ASC ext feedback
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-306 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: In order that the pulses are not enabled when the contactor is closed, the contactor feedback signal must lag by a
sufficiently long time when opening the contactor.
Note: 1 signal: The contactor is closed.
0 signal: The contactor is open.
Description: Sets the monitoring time of the contactor feedback signal for the external armature short-circuit configuration.
If the contactor feedback signal (p1235) is parameterized, then the appropriate feedback signal (r1239.1) is
expected within this monitoring time after either opening or closing the contactor.
Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1235, p1237, r1239
Refer to: A07904, F07905
Description: Sets the delay time when opening the contactor of the external armature short-circuit.
If no contactor feedback signal has been selected (p1235), then the system waits for this time before the pulses are
switched in.
Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1235, p1236, r1239
Notice: This delay time must be at least long enough so that the contactor contacts reliably open before the pulses are
switched in. The delay time must be greater than the contactor response time. The Motor Module can be damaged
if the delay time is too short.
Description: Displays the state for the external armature short-circuit.
Value: 0: Powered down
1: Ready
2: Active
3: Active - feedback signal "Closed" OK
4: Active - feedback signal "Closed" missing
5: Prompt to remove the armature short-circuit
6: Active - feedback signal "Open" missing
Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1235, p1236, p1237, r1239
Refer to: A07904, F07905
p1236[0...n] Ext. armature short-cct., contactor feedback signal monit. time / ASC ext t_monit
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 200 [ms]
p1237[0...n] External armature short-circuit, waiting time when opening / ASC ext t_wait
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 200 [ms]
r1238 CO: Armature short-circuit, external state / EASC state
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2610
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-307
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Activation criterion (one of the following criteria is fulfilled):
- the signal at BI: p1230 (armature short-circuit activation) is 0.
- the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or in S5x (refer to function diagram 2610).
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
Re state "switched out" (r1238 = 0):
- the external armature short-circuit can be selected with p1231 = 1.
Re state "ready" (r1238 = 1):
- as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled, then a transition is made into the state "active" (r1238 = 2).
Regarding the state "active" (r1238 = 2), "active - feedback signal "Closed" OK" (r1238 = 3)", "active - feedback sig-
nal "Closed" missing" (r1238 = 4)":
- the control signal to close contactor r1239.0 is set to "1" (closed) and the pulses are suppressed.
- if a contactor feedback signal is not connected (BI: p1235 = 0 signal), then a transition is immediately made into
state 3.
- if a contactor feedback signal is connected, then a transition is made into state 3 if the feedback signal at BI:
p1235 goes to "1" (closed) within the monitoring time (p1236).
- otherwise, a transition is made into state 4.
Re state "prompt to remove the armature short-circuit" (r1238 = 5):
- the activation criterion is no longer fulfilled. An attempt is made to again remove the armature short circuit.
- the control signal to close the contactor r1239.0 is set to "0" (open) and the pulses remain suppressed.
- if a contactor feedback signal is not connected (BI: p1235 = 0 signal), the system waits for the delay time (p1237)
to expire until a transition is made into state 1.
- if a contactor feedback signal is connected, the system waits until the feedback signal at BI:p1235 goes to "0"
(open) until a transition is made into state 1. If this does not occur within the monitoring time (p1236), then a transi-
tion is made into state 6.
Re state "active - feedback signal "Open" missing" (r1238 = 6):
- this error state can be exited by deselecting the external armature short-circuit (p1231 = 0).
Description: Displays the status word for armature short-circuit.
Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234, p1235, p1236, p1237
r1239.0...11 CO/BO: Armature short-circuit / DC brake status word / ASC/DCBRK ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 External armature short-circuit Active Inactive -
01 External armature short-circuit, contactor
feedback signal
Closed Open -
02 External armature short-circuit ready Yes No -
03 External armature short-circuit with contac-
tor feedback signal
Yes No -
04 Internal armature short-circuit Active Inactive -
05 Internal armature short circuit, feedback sig-
nal from power unit
Active Inactive -
06 Internal armature short-circuit ready Yes No -
08 DC brake active Yes No 7017
10 DC brake ready Yes No 7017
11 Armature short circuit/DC brake selected Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-308 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: External armature short-circuit (bits 0 ... 3):
Re bit 00:
Using this signal, the motor is short-circuited through an external contactor circuit. This means that this BO:
p1239.0 must be interconnected e.g. to a digital output.
Re bit 01:
This signal indicates the state of the contactor to establish the armature short-circuit. To do this, BI: p1235 must be
interconnected to a digital input.
Re bit 02:
The external armature short-circuit configuration is ready and is activated as soon as the activation criterion is ful-
filled.
Re bit 03:
1: A feedback signal from an external contactor was parameterized in BI: p1235.
Internal voltage protection / internal armature short-circuit (bits 4 ... 6):
Re bit 04:
a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module does not support the autonomous
internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0).
The Control Unit issues the command to the Motor Module to short-circuit the motor through the power semicon-
ductors.
a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal
voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1).
The Motor Module decides autonomously whether the armature short-circuit is activated. In this case, the following
applies: r1239.4 = r1239.5.
c) Internal armature short-circuit (p1231 = 4) was selected.
The Control Unit issues the command to the Motor Module to short-circuit the motor through the power semicon-
ductors.
Re bit 05:
The Motor Module signals that the motor is short-circuited in the Motor Module through the power semiconductors.
Re bit 06:
a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module does not support the autonomous
internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0).
The internal voltage protection is ready and is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled.
a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal
voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1).
The internal voltage protection is ready and the Motor Module decides autonomously - using the DC link voltage -
whether the short-circuit is activated. In this case, protection is also provided even if the DRIVE-CLiQ connection
between the Control Unit and Motor Module was interrupted. The short-circuit is activated if the DC link voltage
exceeds 800 V. If the DC link voltage falls below 450 V, then the short-circuit is withdrawn.
c) Internal armature short-circuit (p1231 = 4) was selected.
The internal armature short-circuit is ready and is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled.
Activation criterion (one of the following criteria is fulfilled):
- the signal at BI: p1230 (armature short-circuit activation) is 1.
- the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or in S5x (refer to function diagram 2610).
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
List of parameters
Parameter
1-309
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the controller configuration of the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the closed-loop control mode.
Value: 0: Inhib Vdc ctrl
1: Vdc_max controller enable
2: Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) enable
3: Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller enable
4: Activates Vdc_max monitoring
5: Activates Vdc_min monitoring
6: Activates Vdc_min monitoring and Vdc_max monitoring
Dependency: Refer to: p1245
Refer to: A07400, A07401, A07402, F07403, F07404, F07405, F07406
Notice: An excessively high value in p1245 can possibly negatively influence the normal operation of the drive.
Note: p1240 = 1, 3:
When the DC link voltage limit specified for the Motor Module is reached the following applies:
- the Vdc_max controller limits the regenerative energy in order that the DC link voltage is kept below the maximum
DC link voltage when braking.
- the ramp-down times are automatically increased.
p1240 = 2, 3:
When the switch-in threshold of the Vdc_min controller is reached (p1245), the following applies:
- the Vdc_min controller limits the energy taken from the DC link in order to keep the DC link voltage above the min-
imum DC link voltage when accelerating.
- the motor is braked in order to use its kinetic energy to buffer the DC link.
p1240 = 4, 5, 6:
When the threshold in r1242 or r1246 is reached, the DC link voltage monitoring initiates a fault (F07403 or F07404)
with a response and therefore reduces additional negative effects on the DC link voltage.
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
If p1254 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies:
AC/AC device: r1242 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * V_mains = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage)
DC/AC device: r1242 = 1.15 * Udc = 1.15 * p0210 (supply voltage)
If p1254 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies:
r1242 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit)
Note: The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * p1242 and
the controller output is zero.
p1240[0...n] Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration / Vdc_ctrl config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 1
r1242 Vdc_max controller switch-in level / Vdc_max on_level
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-310 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller).
100% means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their
basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251,
p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1243.
If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the
ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved.
Note: The presetting of the dynamic factor is based on the power units connected to DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that the
power units connected via DRIVE-CLiQ are also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case, then
the dynamic factor must be optimized manually.
Description: Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
The value is obtained as follows:
AC/AC device: r1246[V] = p1245[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
DC/AC device: r1246[V] = p1245[%] * p0210
Dependency: Refer to: p0210
Warning: An excessively high value may adversely affect normal drive operation. The values up to 150 % are intended for
operating modes p1240 = 5, 6.
Note: For SINAMICS GM/SM, the following applies:
Minimum value = 0.75, Maximum value = 0.90
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Note: The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * p1246 and
the controller output is zero.
p1243[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
p1245[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
65 [%] 150 [%] 76 [%]
r1246 Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-311
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
100% means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their
basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251,
p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1247.
If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the
ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved.
Description: Sets the lower speed threshold for the Vdc_max controller. When this speed threshold is undershot, the Vdc_max
control is switched out and the speed is controlled using the ramp-function generator.
Note: For fast braking where the ramp-function generator tracking was active, it is possible to prevent the drive rotating in
the opposite direction by increasing the speed threshold and setting a final rounding-off time in the ramp-function
generator (p1131). This is supported using a dynamic setting of the speed controller.
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency: The effective proportional gain is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
Note: The gain factor is proportional to the capacitance of the DC link. The parameter is preset to a value that is optimally
adapted to the capacitance of the individual Motor Module. The capacitances of the other power units, which are
connected to the DC link, can be taken into account using the dynamic factor (p1247 or p1243).
Description: Sets the integral time for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency: The effective integral time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
p1247[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
p1249[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold / Vdc_max n_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 10.00 [rpm]
p1250[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 1.00
p1251[0...n] Vdc controller integral time / Vdc_ctrl Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-312 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: An integral time is normally not required for single axis drives. For multi-axis drives on the other hand, it may be
possible to compensate for interference from other axes using the integral time (integral component) . An integral
time of 0 (default) deactivates the integral component of the controller.
Description: Sets the rate time constant for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency: The effective rate time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
Description: Activates/deactivates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
Value: 0: Automatic detection inhibited
1: Automatic detection enabled
Description: Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the
required response can be parameterized.
Prerequisite: p1256 = 1.
Dependency: Refer to: F07406
Notice: If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1240 = 3) so that the
drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the
event of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135.
Description: Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Value: 0: Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1257 -> F07405
1: Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1257 -> F07405, t>p1255 -> F07406
Dependency: Refer to: F07405, F07406
p1252[0...n] Vdc controller rate time / Vdc_ctrl t_rate
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 0 [ms]
p1254 Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection / Vdc_max SenseOnLev
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1
p1255[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 10000.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
p1256[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-313
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the
required response can be parameterized .
Description: Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)
Note: The regenerative power limit p1531 is used for vector control to pre-control the Vdc_max controller. The lower the
power limit is set, the lower the correction signals of the controller when the voltage limit is reached.
Value: 0: Bypass deactivated
1: Bypass with synchronization and overlap
2: Bypass with synchronization without overlap
3: Bypass without synchronization
Note: If the bypass function is selected ((p1260 > 0), then when the power unit restarts after POWER OFF, the state of
the bypass switch is evaluated. This means that after the ramp-up, it is possible to directly change into the standby
mode. This is only possible for p1267 = 0 (bypass using the control signal) and if the control command after the sys-
tem has been booted is still available (p1266). This function has a higher priority than the automatic restart function
(p1210).
The "bypass" function can only be switched out again (p1260 = 0) if the bypass is not active or the bypass function
has a fault.
Description: Control and feedback signals of the bypass switch.
p1257[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 50.00 [rpm]
r1258 CO: Vdc controller output / Vdc_ctrl output
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
p1260 Bypass configuration / Bypass config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
r1261.0...9 CO/BO: Bypass control/status word / Bypass STW / ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Command switch motor - drive Close Open -
01 Command switch motor - line supply Close Open -
02 Synchronization requested Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-314 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p2369
Note: Control bits 0 and 1 should be interconnected to the signal outputs via which the switches in the motor feeder
cables should be controlled. These should be selected/dimensioned for switching under load.
Description: Sets the dead time for non-synchronized bypass.
Note: This parameter is used to define the changeover time of the contactors. It should not be shorter than the demagne-
tizing time of the motor (p0347). The total changeover time for the bypass is based on the total of p1262 plus the
OFF time for the relevant switch (p1274[x]).
Description: Sets the delay time to switch back to converter operation for a non-synchronized bypass.
Description: Sets the delay time for switching to line operation for a non-synchronized bypass.
Description: Sets the speed threshold to activate the bypass.
Note: When selecting p1260 = 3 and p1267.1 = 1, the bypass is automatically activated when this speed is reached.
03 Staging status Active Not active -
05 Feedback signal switch motor - drive Closed Opened -
06 Feedback signal switch motor - line supply Closed Opened -
07 Bypass command (from p1266) Yes No -
08 Feedback signal synchronization completed
(from p1268)
Yes No -
09 Staging requested (from p2369) Yes No -
p1262[0...n] Bypass dead time / Bypass t_dead
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 1.000 [s]
p1263 Debypass delay time / Debypass t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 1.000 [s]
p1264 Bypass delay time / Bypass t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 1.000 [s]
p1265 Bypass speed threshold / Bypass n_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 1480.00 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-315
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the command to bypass.
Description: Sets the cause that should initiate the bypass.
Note: The parameter only has an effect for a non-synchronized bypass.
p1267 bit 0 = 1:
The bypass is initiated by setting a binary signal. When the command is reset, after the debypass delay time
(p1263) has expired, operation at the Motor Module is re-selected.
p1267 bit 1 = 1:
When the speed threshold entered in p1265 is reached, the bypass is switched in. The system only switches back
when the speed setpoint again falls below the threshold value.
Description: Input for the feedback signal that synchronization was successfully completed.
Dependency: Refer to: r3819
Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal of the bypass switch.
Index: [0] = Switch motor - drive
[1] = Switch motor - line supply
Note: In the case of switches without a feedback signal, connect the corresponding control bit as the signal source:
p1269 index 0 = r1261 bit 0
p1269 index 1 = r1261 bit 1
p1266 BI: Bypass, control command / Bypass command
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1267 Bypass changeover source configuration / Chngov_src config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bypass via signal (BI: p1266) Yes No -
01 Bypass via reaching the speed threshold Yes No -
p1268 BI: Bypass, feedback synchronization completed / FdbkSig sync compl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 3819.2
p1269[0...1] BI: Bypass switch feedback signal / Bypass FS
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-316 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: In the simulation mode, the closed-loop control or V/f control can be operated without motor.
The simulation mode is used to test the power unit. Even though the DC link voltage is missing, the pulses are
enabled when powering up. The DC link pre-charging is bypassed and the undervoltage detection is disabled.
Closed-loop speed control with an encoder is possible if the torque setpoint (r0079) is used in order to operate a
second drive in the closed-loop torque controlled mode.
Value: 0: Off
1: On
Dependency: The following functions are deactivated in the simulation mode:
- motor data identification routine
- motor data identification routine, rotating without encoder
- pole position identification routine
For V/f control and encoderless vector control, flying restart is not carried out (refer to p1200).
Refer to: r0192, p1900, p1910, p1960, p1990
Refer to: A07825, F07826
Notice: In simulation mode, binector output r0863.1 = 1 is set. This is why you need to check whether other devices are
powered up via this signal before activating simulation mode. You might need to disconnect the corresponding
BICO interconnection temporarily.
Note: Simulation mode is only possible for DC link voltages below 40 V. In order that the closed-loop control can be calcu-
lated, the displayed DC link voltage (r0026, r0070) is set to the rated DC link voltage (refer to p0210). Closed-loop
current control and motor model are switched out (disabled) - the same is true for the speed controller for encoder-
less closed-loop speed control.
When fault messages occur, the parameter is not automatically reset. This function is not implemented for
SINAMICS GM.
Description: Sets the bypass switch monitoring time.
Index: [0] = Switch motor - drive
[1] = Switch motor - line supply
Note: The monitoring is deactivated with p1274 = 0 ms. The changeover time for the bypass (p1262) is extended by the
time set in this parameter.
p1272 Simulation mode / Simulation mode
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p1274[0...1] Bypass switch monitoring time / Switch t_monit
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 5000 [ms] 1000 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-317
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the control word for the motor holding brake.
Description: Sets the delay time for closing the brake at standstill.
After this time has expired, if the "close brake at standstill" or OFF1/OFF3 is present, the brake is closed and the
pulses are suppressed.
For p1276 = 300.000 s, the timer is deactivated - this means that the timer output is always zero.
Description: Sets the delay time for the signal "braking threshold exceeded" (BO: r1229.6).
Dependency: Refer to: p1220, p1221, r1229
Description: Sets the brake control type (with or without diagnostics evaluation).
Example for brake control with diagnostics evaluation.
- brake control in the Motor Modules in booksize format
- Safe Brake Relay for AC Drive
Example for brake control without diagnostics evaluation.
- Brake Relay for AC Drive
p1275 Motor holding brake control word / Brake STW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended brk)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Inverting BI: 1219[0] Yes No 2707
01 Inverting BI: 1219[1] Yes No 2707
02 Inverting BI: 1224[0] Yes No 2704
03 Inverting BI: 1224[1] Yes No 2704
05 Brake with feedback Yes No 2711
p1276 Motor holding brake, standstill detection, bypass / Brk standst bypass
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended brk)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2704
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 300.000 [s]
p1277 Motor holding brake, braking threshold delay exceeded / Del thresh exceed.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended brk)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
p1278 Brake control, diagnostics evaluation / Brake diagnostics
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-318 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Value: 0: Brake control with diagnostics evaluation
1: Brake control without diagnostics evaluation
Note: If the configuration of the motor holding brake (p1215) is set to "no holding brake present" when booting, then an
automatic identification of the motor holding brake will be carried out. If a brake control is detected without diagnos-
tics evaluation (e.g. Brake Relay for AC Drive), then the parameter is set to "brake control without diagnostics eval-
uation".
It is not permissible to parameterize "brake control without diagnostics evaluation" and also enable "safe brake con-
trol" (p1278 = 1, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1).
Description: Sets the signal source for the OR/AND logic operation.
Dependency: Refer to: r1229
Note: [0]: OR logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r1229.10.
[1]: OR logic operation, input 2 --> the result is displayed in r1229.10.
[2]: AND logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r1229.11.
[3]: AND logic operation, input 2 --> the result is displayed in r1229.11.
Description: Sets the configuration of the controller for the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the V/f operating mode.
Value: 0: Inhib Vdc ctrl
1: Vdc_max controller enable
2: Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) enable
3: Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller enable
4: Activates Vdc_max monitoring
5: Activates Vdc_min monitoring
6: Activates Vdc_min monitoring and Vdc_max monitoring
Note: p1240 = 4, 5, 6:
When the threshold in r1282 or r1286 is reached, the DC link voltage monitoring initiates a fault (F07403 or F07404)
with a response and therefore reduces additional negative effects on the DC link voltage.
p1279[0...3] BI: Motor holding brake, OR/AND logic operation / Brake OR AND
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended brk)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1280[0...n] Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration (V/f) / Vdc_ctr config V/f
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1690, 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-319
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
If p1294 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies:
AC/AC device: r1282 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * V_mains = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage)
DC/AC device: r1282 = 1.15 * Vdc = 1.15 * p0210 (supply voltage)
If p1294 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies:
r1282 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit)
Note: The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * p1282 and
the controller output is zero.
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller).
100% means that p1290, p1291, and p1292 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used in accordance with their
basic settings and on the basis of a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291,
and p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1283.
If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the
ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved.
Note: The presetting of the dynamic factor is based on the power units connected to DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that the
power units connected via DRIVE-CLiQ are also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case, then
the dynamic factor must be optimized manually.
Description: Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
The value is obtained as follows:
AC/AC unit: p1286[V] = p1285[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
DC/AC unit: p1286[V] = p1285[%] * p0210
Warning: An excessively high value may adversely affect normal drive operation. The values up to 150 % are intended for
operating modes p1240 = 5, 6.
r1282 Vdc_max controller switch-in level (V/f) / Vdc_max on_level
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
p1283[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (V/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
p1285[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min on_level
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
65 [%] 150 [%] 76 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-320 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Note: The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * p1286 and
the controller output is zero.
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
100% means that p1290, p1291, and p1292 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their
basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291,
and p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1287.
If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the
ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved.
Note: The presetting of the dynamic factor is based on the power units connected to DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that the
power units connected via DRIVE-CLiQ are also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case, then
the dynamic factor must be optimized manually.
Description: Sets the feedback factor for the ramp-function generator. Its ramp times are decelerated relative to the output signal
of the Vdc_max controller.
Note: For values p1288 = 0.0 to 0.5, the controller dynamics are automatically adapted internally.
Description: Sets the lower speed threshold for the Vdc_max controller. When this speed threshold is undershot, the Vdc_max
control is switched out and the speed is controlled using the ramp-function generator.
r1286 Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min on_level
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
p1287[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
p1288[0...n] Vdc_max controller feedback coupling factor ramp-fct. gen. (V/f) /
Vdc_max factor RFG
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 100.000 0.500
p1289[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold (V/f) / Vdc_max n_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 10.00 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-321
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Note: The gain factor is proportional to the capacitance of the DC link. The parameter is preset to a value that is optimally
adapted to the capacitance of the individual Motor Module. The capacitances of the other power units which are
connected to the DC link can be taken into account using the dynamic factor (p1287 or p1283).
Description: Sets the integral time for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Description: Sets the rate time constant for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Description: Sets the output limit for the Vdc min controller (DC link undervoltage controller).
Description: Activates/deactivates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. When the sensing
function is deactivated, the activation threshold r1282 for the Vdc_max controller is determined from the parameter-
ized connection voltage p0210.
p1290[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 1.00
p1291[0...n] Vdc controller integral time (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 40 [ms]
p1292[0...n] Vdc controller rate time (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_rate
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 10 [ms]
p1293[0...n] Vdc min controller output limit (V/f) / Vdc_min outp_lim
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 600.00 [Hz] 10.00 [Hz]
p1294 Vdc_max controller automatic detection ON signal level (V/f) / Vdc_max SenseOnLev
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-322 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Value: 0: Automatic detection inhibited
1: Automatic detection enabled
Description: Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the
required response can be parameterized.
Prerequisite: p1296 = 1.
Notice: If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1280 = 3) so that the
drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the
event of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135.
Description: Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Value: 0: Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1297 -> F07405
1: Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1297 -> F07405, t>p1295 -> F07406
Note: Re p1296 = 1:
The quick stop ramp entered in p1135 must not be equal to zero, to prevent overcurrent shutdown if F07406 is trig-
gered.
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized .
Description: Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)
p1295[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold (V/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 10000.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
p1296[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (V/f / Vdc_min response
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p1297[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold (V/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 50.00 [rpm]
r1298 CO: Vdc controller output (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl output
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-323
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the V/f control mode of the drive.
Value: 0: V/f control with linear characteristic
1: V/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
2: V/f control with parabolic characteristic
3: V/f control with parameterizable characteristic
4: V/f control with linear characteristic and ECO
5: V/f control for drives requiring a precise freq. (e.g. textiles)
6: V/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC
7: V/f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO
19: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
Recommend.: The use of the vector control operating modes is recommended for synchronous motors.
Dependency: If you are working with reduced supply voltages (p0212, bit 0 = 1), only V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
(p1300 = 19) can be set as the operating mode.
Notice: Active slip compensation is required in the V/f control types with Eco mode (p1300 = 4, 7). The scaling of the slip
compensation (p1335) should be set so that the slip is completely compensated (generally 100%).
The Eco mode is only effective in steady-state operation and when the ramp-function generator is not bypassed. In
the case of analog setpoints, if required the tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down should be actively increased for
the ramp-function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady-state condition.
Note: For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6, the slip compensation p1335 and the resonance damping p1338
are internally switched out (disabled) in order to be able to precisely set the output frequency.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 4 and 7 (Eco mode), the efficiency can be optimized by varying the volt-
age (when the operating point is constant).
During operation (the pulses enabled) the open-loop control mode cannot be changed by changing over drive data
sets.
Description: Sets the open and closed loop control mode of a drive.
Value: 0: V/f control with linear characteristic
1: V/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
2: V/f control with parabolic characteristic
3: V/f control with parameterizable characteristic
4: V/f control with linear characteristic and ECO
5: V/f control for drives requiring a precise freq. (e.g. textiles)
6: V/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC
7: V/f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO
18: I/f control with fixed current
19: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
20: Speed control (encoderless)
21: Speed control (with encoder)
22: Torque control (encoderless)
23: Torque control (with encoder)
p1300[0...n] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1690, 6300,
6310, 6320
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 19 0
p1300[0...n] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1690, 1700,
6300, 8012
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 23 20
Parameter
List of parameters
1-324 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Recommend.: The use of the vector control operating modes is recommended for synchronous motors.
Dependency: Closed-loop speed or torque control (with encoder) cannot be selected if the encoder type is not entered (p0400).
Closed-loop speed or torque control can be selected if the closed-loop speed/torque control was selected as oper-
ating mode (p0108.2).
Only operation with V/f characteristic is possible if the rated motor speed is not entered (p0311).
A reluctance motor can only be operated in a V/f control mode (p1300 < 20).
Sensorless control on separately excited synchronous motors is only possible with a VSM module (see p0150,
p0151).
Refer to: r0108, p0108, p0300, p0311, p0400, p1501
Notice: Active slip compensation is required in the V/f control types with Eco mode (p1300 = 4, 7). The scaling of the slip
compensation (p1335) should be set so that the slip is completely compensated (generally 100%).
The Eco mode is only effective in steady-state operation and when the ramp-function generator is not bypassed. In
the case of analog setpoints, if required the tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down should be actively increased for
the ramp-function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady-state condition.
Note: The closed-loop torque control can only be changed over in operation (p1300 = 20, 21) by selecting the closed-loop
speed control (p1501). At the changeover, the setting of p1300 does not change. In this case, the actual state is dis-
played in r1407, bit 2 and bit 3.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), slip compensation p1335, resonance damping
p1338, and the Imax frequency controller are switched off internally so that the output frequency can be set pre-
cisely. The Imax voltage controller remains active.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 4 and 7 (Eco mode), the efficiency can be optimized by varying the volt-
age (when the operating point is constant).
Separately-excited synchronous motors can only be operated in modes p1300 = 20, 21 and 23 - or for diagnostic
purposes in modes p1300 = 0, 3 and 18. For I/f control (p1300 = 18), the current amplitude can be set using p1609.
Both for V/f as well as for I/f control only a small load may be applied to the separately-excited synchronous motor
because the excitation current is not calculated as a function of the load.
During operation (the pulses enabled) the open-loop/closed-loop control mode cannot be changed by changing
over drive data sets.
p1300 is pre-assigned depending on r0108.2 and p0187.
Description: Sets the configuration for V/f control.
Note: Re bit 00:
If the bit is set the device will always start up with setpoint angle zero on pulse enable. This also affects the setpoint
angle for DC braking (p1231).
Re bit 01:
If the bit is set, in the case of V/f control with independent voltage setpoint (p1300 = 19) and negative setpoint volt-
ages at the input of p1330, the setpoint angle is rotated through 180 degrees, thereby achieving a negative output
voltage. This renders the voltage boost p1310, p1311 ineffective.
p1302[0...n] V/f control configuration / V/f configuration
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 U_output starting angle zero Yes No -
01 Take the sign of the setpoint voltage into
account
Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-325
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Defines the voltage boost as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
The magnitude of the permanent voltage boost is reduced with increasing frequency so that at the rated motor fre-
quency, the rated motor voltage is present.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x
p1310 (permanent voltage boost [%]) / 100 %
At low output frequencies, there is only a low output voltage in order to maintain the motor flux. However, the output
voltage can be too low in order to achieve the following:
- magnetize the induction motor.
- hold the load.
- compensate for losses in the system.
This is the reason that the output voltage can be increased using p1310.
The voltage boost can be used for both linear as well as square-law V/f characteristics and is calculated as follows:
Voltage boost = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance) x p1310 (permanent
voltage boost)
Dependency: The current limit p0640 limits the boost.
For vector control, the permanent voltage boost (p1310) has no effect as the drive converter automatically sets the
optimum operating conditions.
Refer to: p1300, p1311, p1312, r1315
Notice: The voltage boost increases the motor temperature (particularly at zero speed).
Note: The voltage boost is only effective for V/f control (p1300).
The boost values are combined with one another if the permanent voltage boost (p1310) is used in conjunction with
other boost parameters (acceleration boost (p1311), voltage boost for starting (p1312)).
However, these parameters are assigned the following priorities: p1310 > p1311, p1312
Description: p1311 only results in a voltage boost when accelerating and generates a supplementary torque to accelerate the
load.
The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has
been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x
p1311 (voltage boost when accelerating [%]) / 100 %
Dependency: The current limit p0640 limits the boost.
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1312, r1315
Notice: The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase.
Note: The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes.
Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310
p1310[0...n] Voltage boost permanent / V_boost perm
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1690, 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
p1311[0...n] Voltage boost at acceleration / V_boost accelerate
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1690, 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-326 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: p1312 causes an additional voltage boost when starting, however, only for the first acceleration phase.
The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has
been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed.
Dependency: The current limit p0640 limits the boost.
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, r1315
Notice: The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase.
Note: The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes.
Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310
Description: Displays the total resulting voltage boost in volt (p1310 + p1311 + p1312).
Dependency: Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1312
Description: The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard charac-
teristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
Note: Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable V/f characteristic.
p1312[0...n] Voltage boost when starting / V_boost starting
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1690, 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
r1315 Voltage boost total / V_boost total
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
p1320[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 1 / Uf char f1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-327
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
Note: Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable V/f characteristic.
Description: The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic.
Dependency: The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard charac-
teristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
Description: The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
Description: The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic.
Dependency: The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard charac-
teristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1325, p1326, p1327
p1321[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 1 / Vf char U1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms] 10000.0 [Vrms] 0.0 [Vrms]
p1322[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 2 / Vf char f2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
p1323[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 2 / Vf char U2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms] 10000.0 [Vrms] 0.0 [Vrms]
p1324[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 3 / Vf char f3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-328 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1326, p1327
Description: In the servo control mode the following applies:
The linear characteristic for the V/f control is defined by 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
For vector control, the following applies:
The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the frequency of the fourth point along the characteristic.
Dependency: In the servo control mode the following applies:
Activates the V/f control using p1317.
For vector control, the following applies:
Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard charac-
teristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1327
Note: In the servo control mode the following applies:
Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
For vector control, the following applies:
Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. For output fre-
quencies above p1326, the characteristic is extrapolated with the gradient between the characteristic points
p1324/p1325 and p1326/p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable V/f characteristic.
Description: In the servo control mode the following applies:
The linear characteristic for the V/f control is defined by 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
For vector control, the following applies:
The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the fourth point along the characteristic.
p1325[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 3 / Vf char U3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms] 10000.0 [Vrms] 0.0 [Vrms]
p1326[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 4 / Vf char f4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5300, 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 10000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
p1327[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 4 / Vf char U4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5300, 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms] 10000.0 [Vrms] 0.0 [Vrms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-329
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: In the servo control mode the following applies:
Activates the V/f control using p1317.
For vector control, the following applies:
Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326
Note: In the servo control mode the following applies:
Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
For vector control, the following applies:
Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable V/f characteristic.
Description: Sets the signal source for the voltage setpoint for V/f control with an independent voltage setpoint (p1300 = 19).
Dependency: Selects the V/f control with independent voltage setpoint via p1300 = 19.
Refer to: p1300
Description: Sets the starting frequency at which FCC (Flux Current Control) is activated.
Dependency: The correct operating mode must be set (p1300 = 1, 6).
Warning: An excessively low value can result in instability.
Note: For p1333 = 0 Hz, the FCC starting frequency is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor frequency.
Description: Sets the starting frequency of the slip compensation.
Note: For p1334 = 0, the starting frequency of the slip compensation is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor fre-
quency.
p1330[0...n] CI: V/f control independent voltage setpoint / Vf V_set independ.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1333[0...n] V/f control FCC starting frequency / V/f FCC f_start
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6310
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
p1334[0...n] V/f control slip compensation starting frequency / Slip comp start
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6310
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-330 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the setpoint for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip).
p1335 = 0.0 %: Slip compensation deactivated.
p1335 = 100.0 %: The slip is completely compensated.
Dependency: Prerequisite for a precise slip compensation for p1335 = 100 % are the precise motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360).
If the parameters are not precisely known, a precise compensation can be achieved by varying p1335.
For V/f control types with Eco optimization (4 and 7), the slip compensation must be activated in order to guarantee
correct operation.
Note: The purpose of slip compensation is to maintain a constant motor speed regardless of the applied load. The fact
that the motor speed decreases with increasing load is a typical characteristic of induction motors.
For synchronous motors, this effect does not occur and the parameter has no effect in this case.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), the slip compensation is internally disabled in
order to be able to precisely set the output frequency.
If p1335 is changed during commissioning (p0009, p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be
able to be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1335 have been changed by a parameter that was
set when the drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300).
Description: Sets the limit value for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip).
Description: Displays the actual compensated slip [%] referred to r0330 (rated motor slip).
Dependency: p1335 > 0 %: Slip compensation active.
Refer to: p1335
p1335[0...n] Slip compensation, scaling / Slip comp scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1690, 6310
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 600.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
p1336[0...n] Slip compensation limit value / Slip comp lim val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6310
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 600.00 [%] 250.00 [%]
r1337 CO: Actual slip compensation / Slip comp act val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6310
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-331
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the gain for resonance damping for V/f control.
Dependency: Refer to: p1300, p1339, p1349
Note: The resonance damping function dampens active current oscillations that frequency occur under no-load condi-
tions.
The resonance damping is active in a range of approximately 5 ... 90 % of the rated motor frequency (p0310), but
up to a maximum of 45 Hz.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sectors), the resonance damping is internally disabled in
order that the output frequency can be precisely set.
Description: Sets the filter time constant for resonance damping for V/f control.
Dependency: Refer to: p1300, p1338, p1349
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the I_max voltage controller.
The I_max controller reduces the drive converter output current if the maximum current (r0067) is exceeded.
In the V/f operating modes (p1300) for the I_max control, one controller is used that acts on the output frequency
and one controller that acts on the output voltage. The frequency controller reduces the current by decreasing the
converter output frequency. The frequency is reduced down to a minimum value (equaling twice rated slip). If the
overcurrent condition cannot be successfully resolved using this measure, then the drive converter output voltage is
reduced using the I_max voltage controller. Once the overcurrent condition has been resolved, the drive is acceler-
ated along the ramp set in p1120 (ramp-up time).
Dependency: In the V/f modes (p1300) for textile applications and for external voltage setpoints, only the I_max voltage controller
is used.
Notice: When deactivating the I_max controller, the following must be carefully observed:
When the maximum current (r0067) is exceeded, the output current is no longer reduced, however, overcurrent
alarm messages are generated. The drive is shut down if the overcurrent limit (r0209) is exceeded.
Note: The I_max limiting controller becomes ineffective if the ramp-function generator is deactivated with p1122 = 1.
p1341 = 0: I_max frequency controller deactivated and I_max voltage controller activated over the complete speed
range.
p1338[0...n] V/f mode resonance damping gain / Vf Res_damp gain
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1690, 6310
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 0.00
p1339[0...n] V/f mode resonance damping filter time constant / Vf Res_damp T
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6310
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 20.00 [ms]
p1340[0...n] I_max frequency controller proportional gain / I_max_ctrl Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1690
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 0.500 0.000
Parameter
List of parameters
1-332 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the integral time for the I_max frequency controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1340
Note: When p1341 = 0, the current limiting controller influencing the frequency is deactivated and only the current limiting
controller influencing the output voltage remains active (p1345, p1346).
Description: Displays the effective frequency limit.
Dependency: Refer to: p1340
Description: Displays the amount by which the converter output voltage is reduced.
Dependency: Refer to: p1340
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the I_max voltage controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1340
Note: The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC brake (refer to p1232).
p1341[0...n] I_max frequency controller integral time / I_max_ctrl Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1690
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 50.000 [s] 0.300 [s]
r1343 CO: I_max controller frequency output / I_max_ctrl f_outp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1690
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r1344 I_max controller voltage output / I_max_ctrl V_outp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1690
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
p1345[0...n] I_max voltage controller proportional gain / I_max_V_ctrl Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1690
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 100000.000 0.000
List of parameters
Parameter
1-333
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the integral time for the I_max voltage controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1340
Note: p1346 = 0: Integral time of the I_max voltage controller deactivated.
The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC brake (refer to p1232).
Description: Sets the maximum output frequency for resonance damping for V/f control.
Resonance damping is inactive above this output frequency.
Dependency: Refer to: p1338, p1339
Note: For p1349 = 0, the changeover limit is automatically set to 95 % of the rated motor frequency - however, to a max.
of 45 Hz.
Description: Sets whether the voltage is continuously increased during the magnetizing phase (p1350 = 1, On) or whether it
jumps directly to the voltage boost (p1350 = 0, Off).
Value: 0: Off
1: On
Note: The settings for this parameter have the following advantages and disadvantages:
0 = off (jump directly to voltage boost)
Advantage: Flux is established quickly -> torque is quickly available
Disadvantage: The motor can move while it is being magnetized
1 = on (voltage is continually established)
Advantage: The motor is unlikely to rotate
Disadvantage: The flux is established slower -> torque is available later
p1346[0...n] I_max voltage controller integral time / I_max_V_ctrl Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1690
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 50.000 [s] 0.030 [s]
p1349[0...n] V/f mode resonance damping maximum frequency / Vf res_damp F_max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6310
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
p1350[0...n] Soft starting / Soft starting
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1690
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-334 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the frequency setting value at the slip compensation output for starting up with motor holding brake.
Dependency: Setting parameter p1351 > 0 activates slip compensation automatically (p1335 = 100%) if it has been deactivated
up to this point.
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: Connected with p1352 a value of 100% corresponds to the motor rated slip r0330.
Description: Sets the signal source for the differential angular generation for V/f control.
Description: Sets the dead time for the symmetrizing of the actual angle value for the differential angular generation.
The selected multiplier refers to the current controller clock cycle (dead time= p1358 * p0115[0]).
Description: Displays the output of the differential angular generation.
Note: The difference between the setpoint angle, read-in in p1356 and the actual value of the V/f control delayed with
p1358 is displayed.
p1351[0...n] CO: Motor holding brake starting frequency / Brake f_start
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6310
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-300.00 [%] 300.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
p1356[0...n] CI: V/f control, angular setpoint / Vf ang setpoint
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2005 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1358[0...n] Angular difference, symmetrizing, actual angle / Sym act angle
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
r1359 CO: Angular difference / Angular difference
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: V/f open-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2005 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-335
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the configuration for the closed-loop speed control.
Note: Re bit 01:
When the bit is set, the I component of the speed controller is kept when changing into the open-loop controlled
mode.
Description: Sets the configuration for flux setpoint control
Note: Re bit 00 (not for permanent-magnet synchronous motors):
Initially, the flux is only established with a low rate of rise when magnetizing the induction motor. The flux setpoint
p1570 is reached again at the end of the magnetizing time p0346.
Re bit 01 (not for permanent-magnet synchronous motors):
Initially, the flux is only established with a low rate of rise when magnetizing the induction motor. The flux setpoint
p1570 is reached again at the end of the magnetizing time p0346. When quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 1) is
selected, soft starting is internally deactivated and alarm A07416 is displayed.
The flux differentiation can be switched out if a significant ripple occurs in the field-generating current setpoint
(r0075) when entering the field weakening range. However, this is not suitable for fast acceleration operations
because then, the flux decays more slowly and the voltage limiting responds.
p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6490
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1000 0000 0010 0001 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active Yes No 6040
01 Encoderless vector control freeze I comp Yes No 6040
02 Acceleration pre-control source External (p1495) Internal (n_set) 6031
03 Reference model speed setpoint, I compo-
nent
On Off 6031
05 Kp/Tn adaptation active Yes No -
06 Free Tn adaptation active Yes No -
14 Torque pre-control Always active For n_ctrl enab -
15 Encoderless vector control, speed pre-con-
trol
Yes No 6030
p1401[0...n] Flux control configuration / Flux ctrl config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6491
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1110 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Flux setpoint soft starting active Yes No 6722,
6725
01 Flux setpoint differentiation active Yes No 6723,
6726
02 Flux build-up control active Yes No 6722,
6723,
6725,
6726
03 Flux characteristic, load-dependent Yes No 6725
04 Flux controller (ASM with encoder) Yes No -
05 Flux impression (ASM with encoder) with model chngov From 30 % n_rated -
06 Quick magnetizing Yes No 6722
07 Pre-control speed limitation Yes No 6640
08 Speed limiting controller With M_limits With I_limits 6640
Parameter
List of parameters
1-336 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Re bit 02 (not for permanent-magnet synchronous motors):
The flux build-up control operates during the magnetizing phase p0346 of the induction motor. If it is switched out, a
constant current setpoint is injected and the flux is built up corresponding to the rotor time constant. When quick
magnetizing (p1401.6 = 1) is selected and when flux build-up control is de-energized alarm A07416 is displayed.
Re bit 03:
The load-dependent calculation of the flux characteristic is only available for separately-excited synchronous
motors.
Re bit 04 (only for vector control with sensor):
The flux controller does not operate in the range of the current model and not in the range of the flux impression
(refer to p1750.4).
Re bit 05 (only for vector control with sensor):
Extremely rugged control operation is possible by directly toggling between the current model and flux impression.
We therefore recommend that, in addition, the time-controlled model change is switched in (p1750.4 = 1) or the
model changeover limits are significantly increased (p1752 > 0.35 * p0311; p1753 = 5 %).
Re bit 06 (not for induction motors):
Magnetizing is performed with maximum current (0.9 * r0067). With active identification of the stator resistance (see
p0621) quick magnetizing is internally deactivated and alarm A07416 is displayed. During a flying restart of a rotat-
ing motor (see p1200) no quick magnetizing takes place.
Re bit 07:
if the speed of the drive exceeds the effective speed limit of the speed limiting controller, the torque limit is reduced
linearly to zero as the deviation becomes greater. This reduces the integral component of the speed controller and,
in turn, the overshoot during load shedding (see also F07901 and p2162).
Re bit 08:
The speed limiting controller sets the speed to maximum by opening the torque limits as far as the current limits (bit
08 = 0) or taking the torque limits into account (bit 08 = 1).
Description: Sets the configuration for the closed-loop control and the motor model.
Note: Re bit 00:
When the bit is set, the speed following error is compensated that is obtained as a result of the smoothing time con-
stant in p1441.
Re bit 02:
The current controller adaptation (p0391 ... p0393) is only calculated when the bit is set.
Re bit 08:
Only with encoderless control of separately excited synchronous motors.
p1402[0...n] Closed-loop current control and motor model configuration / I_ctrl config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0001 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Speed-following error correction active Yes No -
02 Current controller adaptation active Yes No -
08 Changeover current model/voltage model
with speed setpoint
Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-337
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the control word of the speed controller.
Description: Displays the status word of the speed controller.
r1406.4...15 CO/BO: Control word speed controller / STW n_ctrl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
04 Hold speed controller I component Yes No 6040
05 Set speed controller I component Yes No 6040
08 Travel to fixed stop Yes No 8012
11 Droop enable Yes No 6030
12 Torque control active Yes No 6060
15 Set speed adaptation controller I compo-
nent
Yes No -
r1407.0...15 CO/BO: Status word speed controller / ZSW n_ctrl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1530, 2522
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 V/f control active Yes No -
01 Encoderless operation active Yes No -
02 Torque control active Yes No 6030,
6060,
8010
03 Speed control active Yes No 6040
05 Speed controller I component frozen Yes No 6040
06 Speed controller I component set Yes No 6040
07 Torque limit reached Yes No 6060
08 Upper torque limit active Yes No 6060
09 Lower torque limit active Yes No 6060
10 Droop enabled Yes No 6030
11 Speed setpoint limited Yes No 6030
12 Ramp-function generator set Yes No -
13 Encoderless operation due to a fault Yes No -
14 I/f control active Yes No -
15 Torque limit reached (without pre-control) Yes No 6060
Parameter
List of parameters
1-338 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the current controller status word.
Description: Sets the time constant for the speed setpoint filter 1 (PT1).
Note: For SERVO (p0107) the following applies:
This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a PT1 low pass.
Description: Sets the dead time to symmetrize the speed setpoint for active torque pre-control.
The selected multiplier refers to the speed controller clock cycle (dead time= p1428 * p0115[1]).
Dependency: In conjunction with p1429, this parameter can emulate the characteristics of how the torque is established (dynamic
response of closed current control loop).
The parameter is only effective if the acceleration model is supplied using external acceleration signals (p1400.2 =
1). For p1400.2 = 0, a fixed dead time is used.
Refer to: p1429, p1511
r1408.0...15 CO/BO: Status word current controller / ZSW I_ctrl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2530
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Current ctrl act Active Not active -
01 Id control, I component limiting Active Not active 6714
03 Voltage limiting Active Not active 6714
10 Speed adaptation, limiting Active Not active -
11 Speed adaptation, speed deviation Out tolerance In tolerance 6719
12 Motor stalled Yes No 6719,
8018
15 Excitation current differential exceeded Yes No -
p1416[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant / n_set_filt 1 T
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6030
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 5000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
p1428[0...n] Speed pre-control balancing dead time / n_prectrBal t_dead
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6031
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 3.0 0.0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-339
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the time constant (PT1) for symmetrizing the speed setpoint for active torque pre-control.
Dependency: In conjunction with p1428, this parameter can emulate the characteristics of how torque is established (dynamic
response of the closed current control loop).
For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
The parameter is only effective if the acceleration model is supplied using external acceleration signals (p1400.2 =
1). For p1400.2 = 0, time constant p1442 (or p1452 for encoderless vector control) is used.
Refer to: p1428, p1511
Description: Displays the speed setpoint for pre-controlling the motor model with sensorless vector control.
Note: With p1400 bit 15 = 0 or encoderless torque control, the pre-control signal is kept continuously in the range of the
voltage model.
Description: Sets the natural frequency of a PT2 element for the reference model of the speed controller.
Recommend.: The reference model is correctly set when the characteristics of p1439 (reference model output) and p1445 (actual
speed value) are virtually identical when the I component of the speed controller is disabled.
Dependency: Together with p1434 and p1435, the characteristics (in the time domain) of the closed-loop speed control (P) can be
emulated.
For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1. For encoderless vector control (p1300 = 20) the reference
model is disabled in open-loop speed controlled operation (refer to p1755).
Refer to: p1434, p1435
p1429[0...n] Speed pre-control balancing time constant / n_prectr bal T
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5030, 5042,
5210, 6031
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 10000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
r1431 CO: Speed pre-control to motor model / n_pctrl mot_mod
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6030
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1433[0...n] Speed controller reference model natural frequency / n_ctrl RefMod fn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5030, 6031
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Hz] 8000.0 [Hz] 0.0 [Hz]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-340 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the damping of a PT2 element for the reference model of the speed controller.
Recommend.: The reference model is correctly set when the characteristics of p1439 (reference model output) and p1445 (actual
speed value) are virtually identical when the I component of the speed controller is disabled.
Dependency: In conjunction with p1433 and p1435, the characteristics (in time) of the P-controlled speed control loop can be
emulated.
For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1.
Refer to: p1433, p1435
Description: Sets the "fractional" dead time for the reference model of the speed controller.
This parameter emulates the computing dead time of the proportionally controlled speed control loop.
The selected multiplier refers to the speed controller clock cycle (dead time= p1435 * p0115[1]).
Recommend.: The reference model is correctly set when the characteristics of p1439 (reference model output) and p1445 (actual
speed value) are virtually identical when the I component of the speed controller is disabled.
Dependency: In conjunction with p1433 and p1434, the characteristics (in time) of the P-controlled speed control loop can be
emulated.
For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1.
Refer to: p0115, p1433, p1434
Description: Displays the speed setpoint at the output of the reference model.
Dependency: For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1.
p1434[0...n] Speed controller reference model damping / n_ctrl RefMod D
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5030, 6031
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 5.000 1.000
p1435[0...n] Speed controller reference model dead time / n_ctrRefMod t_dead
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5030, 6031
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 3.00 0.00
r1436 CO: Speed controller reference model speed setpoint output / RefMod n_set outp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5030, 6031
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-341
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for speed setpoint for the integral component of the speed controller.
Dependency: The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1.
Refer to: p1400
Caution: In should be ensured that a speed setpoint is selected as signal source that corresponds to the setpoint for the P
component of the speed controller.
Description: Displays the speed setpoint after setpoint limiting for the P component of the speed controller.
For V/f operation, the value that is displayed is of no relevance.
Dependency: Refer to: r1439
Note: In the standard state (the reference model is deactivated), r1438 = r1439.
Description: Displays the speed setpoint for the I component of the speed controller (output of the reference model after the set-
point limiting).
Dependency: Refer to: r1438
Note: In the standard state (the reference model is deactivated), r1438 = r1439.
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed actual value of the speed controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r1443
p1437[0...n] CI: Speed controller, reference model I component input / n_ctrRefMod I_comp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6031
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1436[0]
r1438 CO: Speed controller, speed setpoint / n_ctrl n_set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1550, 1590,
1700, 5030, 5040, 5042, 5210,
5300, 5620, 6031, 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r1439 Speed setpoint, I component / n_set I_comp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5030, 5040,
6031
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1440[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed actual value / n_ctrl n_act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 63[0]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-342 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Caution: Speed control with encoder (p1300 = 21):
For the speed or position signal of the motor model there must always be a motor encoder available (evaluation via
SMC/SMI; see also p0400). The actual speed of the motor r0061 and the position data for synchronous motors con-
tinue to come from this motor encoder and are not affected by the setting of parameter p1440.
Notice: Speed control without encoder (p1300 = 20):
Dependent upon the transmission path of the external speed signal there will be dead times which have to be taken
into account when setting the speed controller parameters (p1470, p1472) and can lead to dynamic losses accord-
ingly. It is for this reason that signal transmission times have to be kept as low as possible.
So that the speed controller can also work at standstill, set p1750 bit 2 = 1 (controlled operation as of zero speed for
passive loads). If you do not make this setting, operation will switch to open-loop speed control in the low speed
range, switching the closed-loop speed controller off and rendering the measured actual speed ineffective.
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant (PT1) for the speed actual value.
Dependency: Refer to: r0063
Notice: Smoothing times above 20 ms are only possible if the drive is accelerated or braked with the appropriately long
ramp-up/ramp-down times. Otherwise, significant torque errors can occur and there is the danger that the drive is
powered down (tripped) with F07902 (motor stalled).
Note: The speed actual value should be smoothed for encoders with a low pulse number or for resolvers.
After this parameter has been changed, we recommend that the speed controller is adapted and/or the speed con-
troller settings checked Kp (p1460) and Tn (p1462).
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the actual speed value of the speed controller for closed-loop control with encoder.
Note: The smoothing must be increased if there is gear backlash. For longer smoothing times, the integral time of the
speed controller must also be increased (e.g. using p0340 = 4).
Description: Displays the speed actual value at the speed controller's free-wiring actual value input p1440.
Dependency: Refer to: p1440
Note: This speed signal is only used by the speed controller and not by the motor model.
p1441[0...n] Actual speed smoothing time / n_ist T_smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 4710, 4715
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
p1442[0...n] Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time / n_ctr n_act T_smth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1700, 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 32000.00 [ms] 4.00 [ms]
r1443 CO: Speed actual value at actual value input speed controller / n_act n_ctrl inp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-343
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the sum of all speed setpoints that are present.
The following sources are available for the displayed setpoint:
- setpoint at the ramp-function generator input (r1119).
- speed setpoint 1 (p1155).
- speed setpoint 2 (p1160).
- speed setpoint for the speed pre-control (p1430).
- setpoint from DSC (for DSC active).
- setpoint via PC (for master control active).
Dependency: Refer to: r1119, p1155, p1160
Description: Displays the actual smoothed actual speed for speed control.
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the speed actual value calculated by the motor model in sensorless operation.
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the actual speed of the speed controller for encoderless closed-loop speed control.
Note: The smoothing must be increased if there is gear backlash. For longer smoothing times, the integral time of the
speed controller must also be increased (e.g. using p0340 = 4).
r1444 Speed controller, speed setpoint steady-state (static) / n_ctrl n_set stat
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5030
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r1445 CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1451[0...n] Motor model speed actual value smoothing time SLVC / Mot_mod n_act t_sm
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 100 [ms] 4 [ms]
p1452[0...n] Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time (SLVC) / n_C n_act T_s SLVC
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1700, 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 32000.00 [ms] 10.00 [ms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-344 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the system deviation of the I component of the speed controller.
When the reference model is inactive (p1433 = 0 Hz), this parameter corresponds to the system deviation of the
complete PI controller (r1454 = r0064).
Description: Sets the source for the adaptation signal to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1456, p1457, p1458, p1459
Description: Sets the lower starting point of the adaptation range for the additional adaptation of the P gain of the speed control-
ler.
The values are in % and refer to the set source of the adaptation signal.
Dependency: Refer to: p1455, p1457, p1458, p1459
Note: If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458.
Description: Sets the upper starting point of the adaptation range for the additional adaptation of the P gain of the speed control-
ler.
The values are in % and refer to the set source of the adaptation signal.
Dependency: Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1458, p1459
Note: If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458.
r1454 CO: Speed controller system deviation I component / n_ctrl sys dev Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1455[0...n] CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal / n_ctrl Adpt_sig Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6050
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1456[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKpLow
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6050
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 400.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
p1457[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation upper starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKp up
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6050
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 400.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-345
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the adaptation factor before the adaptation range (0 % ... p1456) to additionally adapt the P gain of the
speed/velocity controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1457, p1459
Note: If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458.
Description: Sets the adaptation factor after the adaptation range (> p1457) to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed/velocity
controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1457, p1458
Note: If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458.
Description: Sets the P gain of the speed controller before the adaptation speed range (0 ... p1464). This value corresponds to
the basic setting of the P gain of the speed controller without adaptation (p1461 = 100 %).
Dependency: For p0528 = 1, the speed controller gain is represented without any dimensions.
Refer to: p1461, p1464, p1465
Description: Sets the P gain of the speed controller for the upper adaptation speed range (> p1465). The entry is made referred
to the P gain for the lower adaptation speed range of the speed controller (% referred to p1460).
Dependency: Refer to: p1460, p1464, p1465
Note: If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
p1464, then the controller gain below p1465 is adapted with p1461. This means that an adaptation can be imple-
mented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.
p1458[0...n] Adaptation factor, lower / Adapt_factor lower
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6050
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p1459[0...n] Adaptation factor, upper / Adapt_factor upper
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6050
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p1460[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl Kp n lower
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1700, 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 999999.000 0.300
p1461[0...n] Speed controller Kp adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctrl Kp n upper
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6050
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-346 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the integration time of the speed controller before the adaptation speed range (0 ... p1464). This value corre-
sponds to the basic setting of the integral time of the speed controller without adaptation (p1461 = 100 %).
Dependency: Refer to: p1463, p1464, p1465
Description: Sets the integral time of the speed controller after the adaptation speed range (> p1465). The entry is made referred
to the integral time for the lower adaptation speed range of the speed controller (% referred to p1462).
Dependency: Refer to: p1462, p1464, p1465
Note: If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
point p1464, then the controller integral time below p1465 is adapted with p1463. This means that an adaptation
can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.
Description: Sets the lower adaptation speed of the speed controller. No adaptation is effective below this speed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463, p1465
Note: If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
point p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can
be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.
Description: Sets the upper adaptation speed of the speed controller. No adaptation is effective above this speed.
For P gain, p1460 * p1461 is effective. For the integral time, p1462 * p1463 is effective.
Dependency: Refer to: p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463, p1464
Note: If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
point p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can
be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.
p1462[0...n] Speed controller integral time adaptation speed lower / n_ctrl Tn n lower
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1700, 5040,
5042, 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 100000.00 [ms] 20.00 [ms]
p1463[0...n] Speed controller Tn adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctrl Tn n upper
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6050
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p1464[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl n lower
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6050
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
p1465[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl n upper
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6050
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-347
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the P gain of the speed controller. This also makes the effective P gain
(including adaptations) scalable.
Description: Displays the effective P gain of the speed controller.
Dependency: For p0528 = 1, the speed controller gain is represented without any dimensions. In this case, connector output sig-
nal r1468 is increased by a factor of 100 in order to improve the resolution.
Description: Displays the effective integral time of the speed controller.
Description: Sets the P gain for encoderless operation for the speed controller.
Dependency: For p0528 = 1, the speed controller gain is represented without any dimensions.
Note: The product p0341 * p0342 is taken into account when automatically calculating the speed controller (p0340 = 1, 3,
4).
p1466[0...n] CI: Speed controller P-gain scaling / n_ctrl Kp scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6050
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
r1468 CO: Speed controller P-gain effective / n_ctrl Kp eff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r1469 Speed controller integral time effective / n_ctrl Tn eff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5040, 5042,
6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
p1470[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation P-gain / n_ctrl SLVC Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6040, 6050
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 999999.000 0.300
Parameter
List of parameters
1-348 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Set the integral time for encoderless operation for the speed controller.
Description: Sets the signal source for the torque setting value when starting up with motor holding brake.
Dependency: The switching in of the torque setting value for the motor holding brake has a higher priority than the setting of the
integrator value using p1477 and p1478.
Note: The setting of the integral output of the speed controller begins after magnetizing (see p0346, r0056 bit 4) and ends
at the end of the brake control opening time p1216. A setting value of zero means that no setting procedure will take
place.
Description: Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the speed controller.
Description: Sets the signal source to set the integrator setting value (p1478).
Dependency: Refer to: p1478, p1479
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: For the interface mode "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" (p2038 = 1), p1477 and p1478 are used for the signal STW2.6
(integrator inhibit, speed controller).
p1472[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation integral time / n_ctrl SLVC Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6040, 6050
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 100000.0 [ms] 20.0 [ms]
p1475[0...n] CI: Speed controller torque setting value for motor holding brake / n_ctrl M_sv MHB
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1476[0...n] BI: Speed controller hold integrator / n_ctrl integ stop
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2520, 5040,
5042, 5210, 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1477[0...n] BI: Speed controller set integrator value / n_ctrl integ set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2520, 5040,
5042, 5210, 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-349
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the integrator setting value for the velocity controller.
The signal to set this integrator setting value is interconnected via p1477.
Dependency: The setting value of the speed controller integrator is weighted with the scaling factor of the signal source in p1479.
If p1478 is interconnected to the integral output of the speed controller (r1482), then after the magnetizing time
(r0346) and if the speed controller is enabled, the integral component of the controller is set to the last value before
the pulse inhibit. This value is set if no setting command (p1477) is interconnected or, at the instant that the pulses
were inhibited, a setting command is available, which is not deactivated up to the next time that the pulses are
inhibited. For encoderless vector control, in addition p1400.1 should be set to 1 so that when the drive is stopped,
the integral component of the speed controller is not controlled down to zero.
In order that when setting the integrator output, only the static torque is detected, we recommend that the accelerat-
ing torque is completely pre-controlled (e.g. p1496).
If p1478 is interconnected to another output other than r1482, then after magnetizing and speed controller enable,
the integral output is set once if the setting command is not interconnected (p1477 = 0).
Refer to: p1477, p1479
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the integrator setting value (p1478) of the speed controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1477, p1478
Description: Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the PI speed controller.
Description: Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the P speed controller.
p1478[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value / n_ctr integ_setVal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1479[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value scaling / n_ctrl I_val scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
r1480 CO: Speed controller PI torque output / n_ctrl PI-M_output
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1590, 5040,
5042, 5060, 5210, 6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
r1481 CO: Speed controller P torque output / n_ctrl P-M_output
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5040, 5042,
5210, 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-350 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the I speed controller.
Description: Sets the signal source for the compensation torque to be output within the droop calculation.
Description: Sets the scaling for the compensation torque within the droop calculation.
Description: Sets the source for droop feedback.
Value: 0: Droop feedback not connected
1: Droop from torque setpoint
2: Droop from speed controller output
3: Droop from integral output, speed controller
Dependency: Refer to: p1489, r1490, p1492
r1482 CO: Speed controller I torque output / n_ctrl I-M_output
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5040, 5042,
5210, 6030, 6040
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
p1486[0...n] CI: Droop compensation torque / Droop M_comp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6030
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1487[0...n] Droop compensation torque scaling / Droop M_comp scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6030
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p1488[0...n] Droop input source / Droop input source
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6030
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-351
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the scaling for the droop feedback
Dependency: Refer to: p1488, r1490, p1492
Note: Example:
A value of 0.05 means that for a torque equal to the rated motor torque, the rated motor speed is reduced by 5 %.
Description: Displays the output signal of the droop calculation. The droop feedback result is subtracted from the speed setpoint
when activated (p1492).
Dependency: Refer to: p1488, p1489, p1492
Description: Enables the droop to be applied to the speed/velocity setpoint.
Dependency: Refer to: p1488, p1489, r1490
Note: Even when not enabled, the droop speed is calculated but not subtracted from the setpoint speed. This makes it
possible to subtract the result of this calculation from the speed of another drive.
Description: Displays the parameterized total moment of inertia ((p0341 * p0342) + p1496) without evaluation by the scaling via
p1497.
p1489[0...n] Droop feedback scaling / Droop scaling
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6030
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 0.500 0.050
r1490 CO: Droop feedback speed reduction / Droop n_reduction
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6030
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1492[0...n] BI: Droop feedback enable / Droop enable
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2520, 6030
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r1493 CO: Moment of inertia, total / M_inertia total
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6031
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [kgm²] - [kgm²] - [kgm²]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-352 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the acceleration pre-control.
Dependency: The signal source for the acceleration is activated with p1400.2 = 1.
For p1400.2 = 0, the acceleration pre-control is calculated from the speed setpoint change from r0062.
For p1400.2 = 0 and activate reference model (p1400.3 = 1) the acceleration pre-control is switched out.
Refer to: p1400, p1496
Note: If the acceleration is entered as external signal, then the accelerating torque is calculated as follows (r1518):
r1518 = acceleration (% of p2007) / 100 % * (p2007 * 60 s) / p0311 * r0345 / 1 s * r0333
Description: Sets the scaling for the acceleration pre-control of the speed/velocity controller.
Dependency: When the reference model is activated (p1400.3 = 1) and for an internal acceleration pre-control (p1400.2 = 0), the
acceleration pre-control is switched out (disabled). The reference model (p1400.3 = 1) and external acceleration
pre-control (p1400.2 = 1) can be operated together.
Refer to: p0341, p0342
Note: The parameter is set to 100% by the rotating measurement (refer to p1960).
The acceleration pre-control may not be used if the speed setpoint manifests significant ripple (e.g. analog setpoint)
and the rounding-off in the speed ramp-function generator is disabled.
We also recommend that the pre-control mode is not used if there is gearbox backlash.
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the moment of inertia.
Description: Sets the scaling for the acceleration integrator at low speeds (only for encoderless torque control).
Dependency: Refer to: p0341, p0342
p1495[0...n] CI: Acceleration pre-control / a_prectrl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6031
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2007 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1496[0...n] Acceleration pre-control scaling / a_before scaling
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1700, 6031
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 10000.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
p1497[0...n] CI: Moment of inertia, scaling / M_mom inert scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 5042, 5210,
6030, 6031
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p1499[0...n] Accelerating for torque control, scaling / a for M_ctrl scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6030
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 400.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-353
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Runs the corresponding macro files.
The Connector Inputs (CI) for the torque setpoints of the appropriate Command Data Set (CDS) are appropriately
interconnected.
The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory.
Example:
p1500 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1000, r8573
Notice: No errors were issued during quick commissioning (p3900 = 1) when writing to parameters of the QUICK_IBN
group!
Note: The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8573. r8573 is not in the expert list of the commissioning
software.
Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.
CI: Connector Input
Description: Sets the signal source for toggling between speed and torque control.
Dependency: The input connectors to enter the torque are provided using p1511, p1512 and p1513.
Refer to: p1300
Caution: If the closed-loop torque control is not activated (p1300) and a change is made to closed-loop torque control
(p1501), OFF1 (p0840) does not have its own braking response but pulse suppression when standstill is detected
(p1226, p1227).
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: 0 signal: Closed-loop speed control
1 signal: Closed-loop torque control
Description: Sets the signal source for the torque setpoint for torque control.
Note: A change is made to closed-loop torque control if, in p1300, closed-loop torque control was selected or if the selec-
tion was made using the changeover source in p1501.
it is also possible to change over in operation using p1501.
p1500[0...n] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints / Macro CI M_set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 999999 0
p1501[0...n] BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control / Changeov n/M_ctrl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 1700, 2520,
5060, 6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1503[0...n] CI: Torque setpoint / M_set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 1700, 6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-354 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the torque setpoint before entering the supplementary torque.
For closed-loop speed control, r1508 corresponds to the speed controller output; for closed-loop torque control,
r1508 corresponds to the torque setpoint of the signal source assigned in p1503.
Description: Sets the signal source for supplementary torque 1.
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary torque 1.
Description: Sets the signal source for supplementary torque 2.
Description: Sets the scaling for supplementary torque 2.
r1508 CO: Torque setpoint before supplementary torque / M_set bef. M_suppl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6030, 6060,
6722
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
p1511[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 / M_suppl 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 5060, 6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1512[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling / M_suppl 1 scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 5060, 6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1513[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 2 / M_suppl 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 5060, 6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p1514[0...n] Supplementary torque 2 scaling / M_suppl 2 scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1700, 6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-355
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the total supplementary torque.
The displayed value is the total of supplementary torque values 1 and 2 (p1511, p1512, p1513, p1514).
Description: Displays the total supplementary torque and the accelerating torque.
The displayed value is the total of the smoothed supplementary torque and the accelerating torque (p1516 =
p1518[1] + r1515).
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the accelerating torque.
Note: For servo drives, the parameter is only effective in encoderless operation.
For vector drives, the acceleration pre-control is inhibited if the smoothing is set to the maximum value.
Description: Displays the accelerating torque for pre-control of the speed controller.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed
Dependency: Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1496
r1515 Supplementary torque total / M_suppl total
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5040, 5060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
r1516 CO: Supplementary torque and acceleration torque / M_suppl + M_accel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
p1517[0...n] Accelerating torque smoothing time constant / M_accel T_smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5042, 5210,
6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 4.00 [ms]
r1518[0...1] CO: Accelerating torque / M_accel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-356 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the fixed, upper torque limit.
Dependency: Refer to: p1521, p1522, p1523, r1538, r1539
Danger: Negative values when setting the upper torque limit (p1520 < 0) can result in the motor accelerating in an uncontrol-
lable fashion.
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque. When automatically calculating the motor/closed-loop
control parameters (p0340), the torque limit is set to match the current limit (p0640).
Description: Sets the fixed, lower torque limit.
Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1522, p1523
Danger: Positive values when setting the lower torque limit (p1521 > 0) can result in the motor accelerating in an uncontrol-
lable fashion.
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque. When automatically calculating the motor/closed-loop
control parameters (p0340), the torque limit is set to match the current limit (p0640).
Description: Sets the signal source for the upper torque limit.
Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1523
Danger: Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6630
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
p1521[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower / M_max lower
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5620, 5630,
6630
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-20000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
p1522[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6630
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1520[0]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-357
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the lower torque limit.
Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522
Danger: Positive values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
Description: Sets the scaling for the upper torque limit.
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: This parameter can be freely interconnected.
The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528.
Description: Sets the scaling for the lower torque limit.
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: This parameter can be freely interconnected.
The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528.
Description: Displays the upper torque limit of all torque limits without offset.
Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529
p1523[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower / M_max lower
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6630
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1521[0]
p1524[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5620, 5630,
6630
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p1525[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6630
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
r1526 CO: Torque limit upper without offset / M_max up w/o offs
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5620, 5630,
6630, 6640
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-358 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the lower torque limit of all torque limits without offset.
Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limit in p1522.
Danger: For p1400.4 = 0 (torque limiting, upper/lower) the following applies:
Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limit in p1523.
Danger: For p1400.4 = 0 (torque limiting, upper/lower) the following applies:
Positive values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Sets the power limit when motoring.
Dependency: Refer to: p0500, p1531
Note: For VECTOR the following applies (p0107):
The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power.
r1527 CO: Torque limit lower without offset / M_max low w/o offs
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5620, 5630,
6630, 6640
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
p1528[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6630
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1524[0]
p1529[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6630
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1525[0]
p1530[0...n] Power limit motoring / P_max mot
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5640, 6640
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 14_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [kW] 100000.00 [kW] 0.00 [kW]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-359
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the regenerative power limit.
Dependency: Refer to: p0500, p1530
Note: The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power.
For power units without regenerative feedback into the line supply, the regenerative power limit is preset to 30% of
the motoring power limit p1530 and in the ratio rated drive converter power to rated motor power.
Description: Displays the maximum torque/force generating current as a result if all current limits.
Description: Displays the maximum limit for the torque-generating current component.
Description: Displays the minimum limit for the torque-generating current component.
p1531[0...n] Power limit regenerative / P_max gen
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6640
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 14_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00 [kW] -0.01 [kW] -0.01 [kW]
r1533 Current limit torque-generating total / Iq_max total
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5640, 5722,
6640
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r1536 Current limit maximum torque-generating current / Isq_max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6640, 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r1537 Current limit minimum torque-generating current / Isq_min
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6640, 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-360 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the currently effective upper torque limit.
Note: The effective upper torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected upper torque limit p1520, if the current limit
p0640 is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased.
The following applies in the case of VECTOR: This may be the case for rotating measurements (see p1960).
The following applies in the case of VECTOR: Further variable torque limiting is possible (e.g. binector input
p1540).
The torque limit p1520 can be recalculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5.
Description: Displays the currently effective lower torque limit.
Note: The effective lower torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected lower torque limit p1521, if the current limit
p0640 is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased.
The following applies in the case of VECTOR: This may be the case for rotating measurements (see p1960).
The following applies in the case of VECTOR: Further variable torque limiting is possible (e.g. binector input
p1541).
The torque limit p1520 can be recalculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5.
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limiting to limit the speed controller output.
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limiting to limit the speed controller output.
r1538 CO: Upper effective torque limit / M_max upper eff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1610, 1700,
5610, 5650, 6060, 6640
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
r1539 CO: Lower effective torque limit / M_max lower eff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1610, 1700,
5610, 5650, 6060, 6640
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
p1540[0...n] CI: Torque limit speed controller upper scaling / M_max n-ctr upScal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 1700, 6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p1541[0...n] CI: Torque limit. speed controller lower scaling / M_max nctr lowScal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 1700, 6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-361
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source to activate/deactivate the "travel to fixed stop" function
1: Travel to fixed stop is active
0: Travel to fixed stop is inactive
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: EPOS uses the parameter (refer to p2686).
When traveling to fixed stop, the fault F07900 "motor locked" is suppressed.
Description: Displays the torque limit to limit the speed controller output.
Index: [0] = Upper limit
[1] = Lower limit
Description: Displays the limit for the torque-generating current component using the stall calculation, the current limit of the
Motor Module as well as the parameterization in p0640.
Index: [0] = Upper limit
[1] = Lower limit
p1545[0...n] BI: Activates travel to a fixed stop / TfS activation
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2520, 3617,
8012
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r1547[0...1] CO: Torque limit for speed controller output / M_max outp n_ctrl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
r1548[0...1] CO: Stall current limit torque-generating maximum / Isq_max stall
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-362 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source to change over the torque limits between variable and fixed torque limit.
1 signal from BI: p1551:
The variable torque limit applies (fixed torque limit + scaling).
0 signal from BI: p1551:
The fixed torque limit applies.
Example:
In order that for a Quick Stop (OFF3) the fixed torque limit is effective, BI: p1551 must be interconnected to r0899.5.
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limiting to limit the speed controller output without taking
into account the current and power limits.
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limiting to limit the speed controller output without taking
into account the current and power limits.
Description: Sets the signal source for the motoring and negative regenerative power limit.
Dependency: Refer to: p1530, p1531
Note: The resulting power limit when motoring is the minimum from p1530 and the signal that is read in, the resulting
regenerative power limit is the maximum from p1531 and the negative signal that is read in.
p1551[0...n] BI: Torque limit variable/fixed signal source / M_lim var/fixS_src
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 5620, 5630,
6060, 6630
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p1552[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling without offset / M_max up w/o offs
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 5060, 6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p1554[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling without offset / M_max low w/o offs
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 5060, 6060
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p1555[0...n] CI: Power limit / P_max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6640
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: r2004 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-363
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the scaling of the signal source for the motoring and negative regenerative power limit.
0 signifies no power limiting.
Description: Sets the signal source for supplementary torque 3.
Dependency: Refer to: p3842
Notice: The signal input is after the torque limit (r1538, r1539). For vector drives, the signals that are entered are only lim-
ited by the current and power limits.
Note: The signal input is preferably used to enter the friction characteristic. The friction compensation is also effective if
the speed controller output reaches its torque limits, but the current limits have still not been reached (this only
applies to vector drives).
Description: Sets the flux setpoint referred to rated motor flux.
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: For p1570 > 100%, the flux setpoint increases as a function of the load from 100% (no-load operation) to the setting
in p1570 (above rated motor torque), if p1580 > 0% has been set.
Description: Sets the signal source for the supplementary flux setpoint.
Notice: Low flux setpoints can cause the drive to stall at higher loads. This is the reason that the flux setpoint should only be
adapted for slow load changes.
Note: The supplementary flux setpoint is limited to +/- 50 %.
p1556[0...n] Power limit scaling / P_max_scale
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6640
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 340.28235E36 0.00
p1569[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 3 / M_suppl 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 3841[0]
p1570[0...n] CO: Flux setpoint / Flux setpoint
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6722
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
50.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p1571[0...n] CI: Supplementary flux setpoint / Suppl flux setp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6725
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-364 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the supplementary flux setpoint for the flux controller. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
Notice: The parameter should be set back to 0% again for normal closed-loop control operation.
Note: The parameter is used to optimize the flux controller. The current model is not influenced by the setting.
Description: Sets the flux threshold value for enabling the speed setpoint and the end of magnetizing (r0056.4).
Note: The parameter only has an influence if the flux actual value reaches the threshold value p1573 more quickly during
magnetizing than the time set in p0346.
The parameter has no influence for flying restart (see p1200) and after DC braking (see p1231).
Description: Sets a dynamic voltage reserve.
Note: In the field weakening range, it must be expected that the control dynamic performance is somewhat restricted due
to the limited possibilities of controlling/adjusting the voltage. This can be improved by increasing the voltage mar-
gin (reserve). Increasing the reserve reduces the steady-state maximum output voltage (r0071).
Description: Sets the lower adaptation speed of the flux boost.
Below this speed, p1570 is set as reference (setpoint) flux.
p1572[0...n] Supplementary flux setpoint / Suppl flux setp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
p1573[0...n] Flux threshold value magnetizing / Flux thresh magnet
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6722
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p1574[0...n] Voltage reserve dynamic / V_reserve dyn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6723, 6724
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms] 150.0 [Vrms] 10.0 [Vrms]
p1576[0...n] Flux boost, adaptation speed, lower / Flux boost n lower
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6725
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-365
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the upper adaptation speed of the flux boost.
Above this speed, the rated motor flux (100 %) is set as reference (setpoint) flux.
Dependency: The parameter value refers to the lower adaptation speed of the flux boost.
Refer to: p1576
Description: Sets the efficiency optimization. When optimizing the efficiency, the flux setpoint of the closed-loop control is
adapted as a function of the load.
For p1580 = 100 %, under no-load operating conditions, the flux setpoint is reduced to 50 % of the rated motor flux.
Note: It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low.
In order to avoid oscillations, if required, the speed controller parameters should be adapted (increase Tn, reduce
Kp).
Further, the smoothing time of the flux setpoint filter (p1582) should be increased.
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint.
Description: Displays the smoothed flux setpoint. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
p1577[0...n] Flux boost adaptation speed, upper / Flux boost n upper
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6725
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1.0 [%] 10000.0 [%] 200.0 [%]
p1580[0...n] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6722
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [%] 100 [%] 0 [%]
p1582[0...n] Flux setpoint smoothing time / Flux setp T_smth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6722
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
4 [ms] 5000 [ms] 15 [ms]
r1583 Flux setpoint smoothed / Flux setp smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6722, 6723
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-366 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint in the field-weakening range
Recommend.: Smoothing should be especially used if there is no regenerative feedback into the line supply. This means that the
DC link voltage can quickly increase in regenerative operation
Note: Only the flux setpoint rise is smoothed
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux actual value.
Description: Sets the scaling of the pre-control characteristic for the start of field weakening.
For values above 100% and for partial load situations, the field weakening starts at higher speeds.
Note: If the start of field weakening is shifted to lower speeds, then the voltage reserve is increased for partial load situa-
tions.
If the start of field weakening is shifted to higher speeds, the voltage reserve is appropriately reduced so that for fast
load changes, it can be expected that this will have a negative impact on the dynamic performance.
Description: Displays the pre-control value for the field weakening current.
p1584[0...n] Field weakening operation, flux setpoint smoothing time / Field weak T_smth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6722
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 20000 [ms] 0 [ms]
p1585[0...n] Flux actual value, smoothing time / Flux actVal T_smth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 0 [ms]
p1586[0...n] Field weakening characteristic, scaling / Field weak scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
80.0 [%] 120.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
r1589 Field-weakening current, pre-control value / FieldWkCurrPrectrl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6724
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-367
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the flux controller.
Note: The value is automatically pre-assigned dependent on the motor when the drive system is first commissioned.
When calculating controller parameters (p0340 = 4), this value is recalculated.
Description: Sets the integral time of the flux controller.
Note: The value is automatically pre-assigned dependent on the motor when the drive system is first commissioned.
When calculating controller parameters (p0340 = 4), this value is recalculated.
Description: Displays the output of the field weakening controller (synchronous motor) or the output of the flux controller (sepa-
rately-excited synchronous motor, induction motor).
Index: [0] = PI output
[1] = I output
Description: Sets the P gain of the field-weakening controller.
p1590[0...n] Flux controller P gain / Flux controller Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6723
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 999999.0 10.0
p1592[0...n] Flux controller integral time / Flux controller Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6723
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 30 [ms]
r1593[0...1] CO: Field weakening controller / flux controller output / Field/Fl_ctrl outp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6723, 6724,
6726
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
p1594[0...n] Field-weakening controller, P gain / Field_ctrl Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6724
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 1000.00 0.00
Parameter
List of parameters
1-368 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the integral-action time of the field-weakening controller.
Description: Displays the output of the field weakening controller. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
Description: Displays the effective flux setpoint.
The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
Description: Sets the permissible difference between the actual excitation current and the excitation current setpoint. The excita-
tion current flux controller is active within this difference.
If the difference lies outside the specified limit value, then the I component of the excitation current flux controller is
kept. Instead of this, for the flux controller of the field-generating current, an additional I controller is switched in
(integral time according to p1592).
If the difference again lies within the bandwidth, the I component of the excitation current flux controller is reacti-
vated and the I component of the flux controller of the field-generating current is reduced as an exponential function
with respect to time. The reduction of the I component over time depends on the rotor time constant (r0384).
p1596[0...n] Field weakening controller integral-action time / Field_ctrl Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6723, 6724
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 50 [ms]
r1597 CO: Field weakening controller output / Field_ctrl output
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6723
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r1598 CO: Total flux setpoint / Flux setp total
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6714, 6723,
6724, 6725, 6726, 8018
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
p1599[0...n] Flux controller, excitation current difference / Flux ctr I_exc_dif
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 3.0 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-369
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the P flux controller for separately-excited synchronous motors.
Note: The value is automatically pre-assigned dependent on the motor when the drive system is first commissioned.
When calculating controller parameters (p0340 = 4), this value is recalculated.
Description: Displays the output of the P flux controller for separately-excited synchronous motors (FEM).
Description: Sets the applied pulse patterns for estimating the continuous rotor position.
Remark: See p1750 for the activation of the pulse-pattern technique.
Value: 1: pm
2: ppmm
Dependency: Refer to: p1750
Note: When commissioning a catalog motor, the technique is automatically selected depending on the motor type being
used.
Description: Displays the currently applied pulse patterns for estimating the continuous rotor position.
Value: 0: None
1: pm
2: ppmm
Dependency: Refer to: p1605, p1750
p1600[0...n] P flux controller, P gain / P flux ctrl Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 999999.0 10.0
r1602 CO: Flux controller P output / Flux ctrl P outp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
p1605[0...n] Pulse technique pattern configuration / Pulse config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 2
r1606 CO: Pulse technique pattern current / Pulse config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-370 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the excitation amplitude (voltage-time pulse) for the pulse technique for estimating the continuous rotor posi-
tion.
Dependency: Refer to: p1605, p1750
Description: Displays the signal responses to the excitation of the pulse technique.
Index: [0] = Phase R
[1] = Phase S
[2] = D estimated
[3] = Q estimated
[4] = D estimated AC
[5] = Q estimated AC
[6] = Pointer length AC
Dependency: Refer to: p1605, p1607, p1750
Description: Sets the stator current setpoint for operation of separately-excited synchronous motors (FEM) in the operating
mode I/f (p1300 = 18).
Description: Sets the static torque setpoint for encoderless vector control (SLVC). This parameter is entered as a percentage
referred to the rated motor torque (r0333).
For encoderless vector control, when the motor model is shut down, an absolute current is impressed. p1610 repre-
sents the maximum load that occurs at a constant setpoint speed.
Notice: p1610 should always be set to at least 10 % higher than the maximum steady-state load that can occur.
p1607[0...n] Pulse technique stimulus / Pulse stimu
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [mVs] 20000.000 [mVs] 32.000 [mVs]
r1608[0...6] CO: Pulse technique response / Pulse config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
p1609[0...n] Current setpoint for I/f operation / I_set I/f oper
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
p1610[0...n] Torque setpoint static (SLVC) / M_set static
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1710, 6721,
6722, 6726
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-371
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: For p1610 = 0%, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the no-load case (ASM: rated magnetizing cur-
rent).
For p1610 = 100 %, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the rated motor torque.
Negative values are converted into positive setpoints in the case of induction and permanent-magnet synchronous
motors.
Description: Enters the dynamic torque setpoint for the low-speed range for encoderless vector control (SLVC). This parameter
is entered as a percentage referred to the rated motor torque (r0333).
Note: When accelerating and braking p1611 is added to p1610 and the resulting total torque is converted into an appro-
priate current setpoint and controlled.
For pure accelerating torques, it is always favorable to use the torque pre-control of the speed controller (p1496).
Description: Sets the magnetizing current setpoint in the open-loop controlled encoderless operation.
The value is only valid during the current model orientation.
Dependency: Refer to: p1610, p1611
Note: The value is effective at speeds less than p1755 and represents a reserve for a possibly existing load torque or
torque error in the moment of inertia.
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the current/torque setpoint in the open-loop-controlled operating range in the case of
sensorless vector control.
Note: This parameter is only effective in the range where current is injected for encoderless vector control.
In the case of induction motors the current setpoint is calculated from parameter value p1610 and in the case of
separately excited synchronous motors the torque setpoint is calculated from parameter value p1611.
p1611[0...n] Supplementary accelerating torque (SLVC) / M_suppl_accel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1710, 6721,
6722, 6726
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
p1612[0...n] Current setpoint magnetizing open-loop controlled / Id_set ctrl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
p1616[0...n] Current setpoint smoothing time / I_set T_smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6721, 6722,
6726
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
4 [ms] 10000 [ms] 40 [ms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-372 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Torque setpoint for sensorless control of the separately excited synchronous motor in the open-loop-controlled
operating range (under p1755 * p1756).
Description: Displays the pre-control value of the current model controller. It involves a magnetizing current in the d-direction.
Description: Threshold for setpoint/actual value tracking of the stator current in the q direction of the current model.
Description: Sets the minimum stator current for separately-excited synchronous motors (FEM).
A negative value means that the field-generating stator current (d-axis) has a negative sign. The valid value is inter-
nally limited to 50% of the rated motor current (p0305).
Description: Sets the speed where a change is made from the inner to the outer cos phi = 1.
If the value that is entered exceeds the rated speed, then a change is made to the inner cos phi = 1 over the com-
plete speed range.
r1617 CO: Torque setpoint (controlled) / M_setp sv SLVC
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
r1618 Current model controller, pre-control / I_mod_ctrl prectrl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
p1619[0...n] Setpoint/actual value tracking threshold / SetAct track thrsh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
p1620[0...n] Stator current, minimum / I_stator min
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-10000.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
p1621[0...n] Changeover speed, inner cos phi = 1 / n_chngov cos phi=1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-373
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant for the setpoint of the field-generating current components.
The current filtered in this way is included in the calculation of the cos phi.
Description: Displays the steady-state field generating current setpoint (Id_set).
Note: Index 1 shows the stationary field-generating current on the stator side in the case of separately excited synchro-
nous motors without the excitation current monitoring component (r1644).
Description: Displays the limited field-generating current setpoint (Id_set).
This value comprises the steady-state field-generating current setpoint r1623 and a dynamic component that is only
set when changes are made to the flux setpoint.
Description: Gain factor to weight the excitation current setpoint.
p1622[0...n] Field-generating current setpoint smoothing time constant / Id_setp T_smth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.1 [ms] 200.0 [ms] 20.0 [ms]
r1623[0...1] Field-generating current setpoint (steady-state) / Id_set stationary
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6723, 6726,
6727
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r1624 Field-generating current setpoint, total / Id_setp total
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6640, 6721,
6723, 6727
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
p1625[0...n] Excitation current setpoint calibration / I_exc_setp cal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-374 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the calculated excitation current setpoint.
Dependency: Refer to: p0390
Description: Displays the load angle of the current model.
Description: Dynamic factor of the model controller in the current model
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the current model controller. This value is automatically preset using p3900 or p0340
when commissioning has been completed.
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the current model controller. This value is automatically preset using p3900 or p0340
when commissioning has been completed.
r1626 CO: Excitation current setpoint / I_exc_setp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r1627 CO: Current model load angle / I_mod load angle
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2005 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]
p1628[0...n] Current model controller, dynamic factor / I_mod_ctr dyn_fact
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 400 [%] 50 [%]
p1629[0...n] Current model controller P gain / I_mod_ctrl Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 100000.000 0.000
p1630[0...n] Current model controller integral time / I_ctrl Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 10000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-375
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the effective P gain of the current model controller.
Description: Displays the effective integral time of the current model controller.
Description: Displays the effective flux setpoint of the current model. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
Description: Displays the effective flux actual value of the current model. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
Description: Displays the I component of the current model controller.
r1631 Current model controller, P gain effective / I_mod ctrl Kp eff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r1632 Current model controller integral time effective / I_mod_ctrl Tn eff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
r1633 Current model, flux setpoint / I_mod flux setp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r1634 Current model, flux actual value / I_mod flux act val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r1635 Current model controller, I component / I_mod_ctrl I_comp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-376 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the output of the current model controller.
Description: Displays the magnetizing current of the current model in the d-axis.
Description: Displays the magnetizing current of the current model in the q-axis.
Description: Displays the stator current in the q axis after current actual value tracking.
Description: Sets the signal source for the excitation current actual value
r1636 Current model controller output / I_mod_ctrl outp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r1637 Current model, magnetizing current, d axis / I_mod I_mag d-ax
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r1638 Current model, magnetizing current, q axis / I_mod I_mag q-ax
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r1639 CO: Current model Isq after actual value tracking / I_mod Isq track
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
p1640[0...n] CI: Excitation current actual value / I_exc_act val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-377
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the excitation current actual value that is read in.
Dependency: Refer to: p0390
Description: Sets the minimum excitation current. This means that negative excitation currents can be avoided.
Description: Sets the gain factor for the minimum excitation current, closed-loop control. This is active if the excitation current is
below 75% of p1642.
Dependency: Refer to: p1642
Description: Displays the output of the excitation current monitoring for separately excited synchronous motors.
Description: Sets the signal source for the individual feedback signals from the excitation.
r1641 Excitation current actual value / I_exc_act val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6727, 6497
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
p1642[0...n] Minimum excitation current / Min I_exc
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.1 [%] 50.0 [%] 5.0 [%]
p1643[0...n] Gain factor, minimum excitation current closed-loop control / Min I_exc Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 5.00 0.40
r1644 Excitation current monitoring output / I_exc_monit outp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
p1645[0...6] BI: Excitation feedback signals signal source / Exc FS S_src
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6495
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-378 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = Excitation ready to be powered up
[1] = Excitation ready
[2] = Excitation operational
[3] = Excitation group signal fault
[4] = Excitation group signal alarm
[5] = Not used
[6] = Not used
Dependency: Refer to: r1649
Description: Sets the monitoring time of the excitation.
After an ON command, the feedback signal must be received within this monitoring time.
Note: After the on command for the excitation (r1648.0 = 1), its feedback signal must be available at r1649.1 within this
monitoring time (BI: p1645[1]).
The same monitoring time is effective after the excitation is enabled for operation (r1648.3 = 1) up to the feedback
signal "excitation operational" (r1649.2 = 1, BI: p1645[2]).
Description: Sets the switch-off delay time to shut down the excitation equipment.
Note: The delay time starts if, when powering down, r0863.0 = 0.
r1648.0 and r1648.3 are reset at the end of the delay time.
Description: Displays the control word for the excitation equipment.
p1646 Excitation monitoring time / Excit t_monit
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6495
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
2.0 [s] 1300.0 [s] 20.0 [s]
p1647 Excitation switch-off delay time / Exc t_off
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6495
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [s] 5.0 [s] 0.8 [s]
r1648.0...11 CO/BO: Excitation, control word / Excitation STW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6495
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Power up excitation Yes No -
01 Excitation no OFF2 Yes No -
02 Excitation no OFF3 Yes No -
03 Excitation operation enable Yes No -
07 Excitation acknowledge fault Yes No -
10 Master control by excitation equipment Yes No -
11 ccw rotating field excitation invert excitation
current setpoint
Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-379
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status word of the excitation equipment.
Dependency: Refer to: p1645
Description: Displays the torque generating current setpoint Iqset after the torque limits and the clock cycle interpolation is
ahead of the current setpoint filters.
Description: Displays the torque setpoint of the function generator.
Description: Sets the minimum smoothing time constant for the setpoint of the torque-generating current components.
r1649.0...7 CO/BO: Excitation status word / Excitation ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6495
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Excitation ready to be powered up feedback
signal
Yes No -
01 Excitation ready feedback signal Yes No -
02 Excitation operational feedback signal Yes No -
03 Excitation group signal fault Yes No -
07 Excitation group signal alarm Yes No -
r1650 Current setpoint torque-generating before filter / Iq_set before filt
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 5710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r1651 CO: Torque setpoint, function generator / M_set FG
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
p1653[0...n] Current setpoint torque-generating smoothing time minimum / Isq_s T_smth min
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.1 [ms] 20.0 [ms] 0.1 [ms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-380 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant for the setpoint of the torque-generating current components.
Note: The smoothing time does not become effective until the field-weakening range is reached.
Description: Sets the signal source for tuning the natural frequency of the current setpoint filter.
Index: [0] = Filter 1
[1] = Filter 2
Description: Setting for activating/deactivating the current setpoint filter.
Dependency: The individual current setpoint filters are parameterized as of p1657.
Note: If not all of the filters are required, then the filters should be used consecutively starting from filter 1.
Description: Sets the current setpoint filter 1 as low pass (PT2) or as extended general 2nd-order filter.
Value: 1: Low pass: PT2
2: General 2nd-order filter
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1657 ... p1661.
Note: For an extended general 2nd-order filter, by inserting the same natural frequency in both the numerator and in the
denominator, i.e. bandstop frequency, a bandstop filter is implemented. If the numerator damping of zero is
selected, the bandstop frequency is completely suppressed.
The denominator damping can be determined from the equation for the 3 dB bandwidth:
f_3dB bandwidth = 2 * D_denominator * f_bandstop frequency
p1654[0...n] Curr. setpoint torque-gen. smoothing time field weakening range / Isq_s T_smth FW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.1 [ms] 50.0 [ms] 4.8 [ms]
p1655[0...1] CI: Current setpoint filter natural frequency tuning / I_set_filt f_n
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1710, 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p1656[0...n] Activates current setpoint filter / I_setp_filt act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0001 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Filter 1 Active Inactive -
01 Filter 2 Active Inactive -
p1657[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 type / I_set_filt 1 Typ
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5710, 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-381
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1657 ... p1661.
Description: Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 1.
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1657 ... p1661.
Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 (general filter).
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1657 ... p1661.
Description: Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 1.
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1657 ... p1661.
Description: Sets the current setpoint filter 2 as low pass (PT2) or as extended general 2nd-order filter.
Value: 1: Low pass: PT2
2: General 2nd-order filter
p1658[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 1 fn_n
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5710, 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]
p1659[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 denominator damping / I_set_filt 1 D_n
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5710, 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.001 10.000 0.700
p1660[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 1 fn_z
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5710, 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]
p1661[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 numerator damping / I_set_filt 1 D_z
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5710, 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 10.000 0.700
p1662[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 type / I_set_filt 2 Typ
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5710, 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-382 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1662 ... p1666.
Note: For an extended general 2nd-order filter, by inserting the same natural frequency in both the numerator and in the
denominator, i.e. bandstop frequency, a bandstop filter is implemented. If the numerator damping of zero is
selected, the bandstop frequency is completely suppressed.
The denominator damping can be determined from the equation for the 3 dB bandwidth:
f_3dB bandwidth = 2 * D_denominator * f_bandstop frequency
Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 2 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1662 ... p1666.
Description: Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 2.
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1662 ... p1666.
Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 2 (general filter).
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1662 ... p1666.
Description: Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 2.
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1662 ... p1666.
p1663[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 2 fn_n
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5710, 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]
p1664[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 denominator damping / I_set_filt 2 D_n
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5710, 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.001 10.000 0.700
p1665[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 2 fn_z
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5710, 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]
p1666[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 numerator damping / I_set_filt 2 D_z
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 5710, 6710
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 10.000 0.700
List of parameters
Parameter
1-383
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Activates data acceptance for parameter changes for the filter.
p1699 = 0:
The new filter data are immediately accepted.
p1699 = 1:
The new filter data are only accepted when this parameter is reset.
Dependency: Refer to: p1416, p1656, p1657, p1658, p1659, p1660, p1661, p1662, p1663, p1664, p1665, p1666
Description: Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller pre-control for the flux-generating current component Isd.
Note: The parameter is effective for permanent and separately-excited synchronous motors.
Description: Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller pre-control for the torque/force-generating current component Isq.
Description: Sets the scaling of the EMF pre-control for the Isq current controller.
Description: Threshold for the setpoint - actual value tracking of the EMF pre-control of the Isq current controller.
p1699 Filter data acceptance / Filt data accept
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p1702[0...n] Isd current controller pre-control scaling / Isd_ctr_prectrScal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 70.0 [%]
p1703[0...n] Isq current controller pre-control scaling / Isq_ctr_prectrScal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 70.0 [%]
p1704[0...n] Isq current controller pre-control EMF scaling / Isq_ctrl EMF scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6714, 6726
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p1705[0...n] Flux setpoint/actual value tracking threshold / Flux track thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6714, 6726
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-384 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the current controller for the lower adaptation current range.
This value is automatically preset using p3900 or p0340 when commissioning has been completed.
Dependency: Refer to: p0391, p0392, p0393
Note: For p0393 = 100 %, the current controller adaptation is disabled and p1715 is effective over the entire range.
Description: Sets the integral-action time of the current controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1715
Description: Displays the actual output of the Isq current controller (torque/force generating current, PI controller).
The value contains the proportional and integral components of the PI controller.
Description: Displays the integral component of the Isq current controller (torque/force-generating current, PI controller).
p1715[0...n] Current controller P gain / I_ctrl Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1710, 6714,
7017
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 100000.000 0.000
p1717[0...n] Current controller integral-action time / I_ctrl Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1710, 5714,
6714, 7017
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 2.00 [ms]
r1718 CO: Isq controller output / Isq_ctrl outp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
r1719 Isq controller integral component / Isq_ctrl I_comp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-385
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual output of the Isd current controller (flux-generating current, PI controller).
The value contains the proportional and integral components of the PI controller.
Description: Displays the integral component of the Isd current controller (flux-generating current, PI controller).
Description: Displays the limit value for the integral component of the Isd current controller.
Description: Sets the scaling of the quadrature arm decoupling
Note: This parameter is ineffective for encoderless vector control. In this case, p1727 is always used. If p1726 is set to 0,
then the quadrature de-coupling is deactivated. The integral component of the Isd current controller remains effec-
tive in the complete speed control range.
For the closed-loop control of synchronous motors, this parameter is used to scale the current controller de-cou-
pling.
Description: Sets the scaling of quadrature arm decoupling when the voltage limit is reached.
r1723 CO: Isd controller output / Isd_ctrl outp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
r1724 Isd controller integral component / Isd_ctrl I_comp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
r1725 Isd controller integral component limit / Isd_ctrl I_limit
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
p1726[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling, scaling / Transv_decpl scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 75.0 [%]
p1727[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling at voltage limit scaling / TrnsvDecplVmaxScal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-386 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual output of the quadrature channel de-coupling for the d axis.
Description: Displays the actual output of the quadrature channel de-coupling for the q axis.
Description: Displays the direct-axis voltage setpoint Ud.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
Description: Displays the quadrature-axis component of voltage setpoint Uq.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
Description: Defines the gain of the controller for resonance damping for operation with encoderless vector control in the range
that current is impressed.
r1728 De-coupling voltage, in-line axis / V_dir-axis_decoupl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
r1729 De-coupling voltage, quadrature axis / V_quad_decoupl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
r1732[0...1] CO: Direct-axis voltage setpoint / Direct V set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1630, 5714,
6714, 5718
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
r1733[0...1] CO: Quadrature-axis voltage setpoint / Quad V set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1630, 5714,
5718, 6714, 6719
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
p1740[0...n] Gain resonance damping for encoderless closed loop control / Gain res_damp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 10.000 0.025
List of parameters
Parameter
1-387
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the speed threshold value to detect a stalled motor.
If the adaptation controller output exceeds the parameterized speed difference, then bit 11 in status word p1408 is
set.
Dependency: If a stalled drive is detected (p1408.11 set), fault 7902 is output after the delay time in p2178.
Refer to: p2178
Note: Speed monitoring is only effective in operation with a speed encoder (refer to p1300).
Description: Sets the fault threshold in order to detect a motor that has stalled.
If the error signal (r1746) exceeds the parameterized error threshold, then bit 12 in status word p1408 is set.
Dependency: If a stalled drive is detected (p1408.12 set), fault F07902 is output after the delay time set in p2178.
Refer to: p2178
Note: Monitoring is only effective in the low-speed range (below p1755 * (100% - p1756)).
Description: Signal to initiate stall detection
Note: The signal is not calculated while magnetizing and only in the low speed range (below p1755 * (100 % - p1756)).
Description: Sets the lower speed for the transition "n_set -> n_act" in encoderless operation.
This value is entered as a percentage referred to p1749.
Dependency: Refer to: p1749, p1752
p1744[0...n] Motor model speed threshold stall detection / MotMod n_thr stall
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 100.00 [rpm]
p1745[0...n] Motor model error threshold stall detection / MotMod ThreshStall
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 1000.0 [%] 5.0 [%]
r1746 Motor model error signal stall detection / MotMod sig stall
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
p1748[0...n] Motor model lower changeover speed n_set -> n_act / Lower n_chngov
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 90.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-388 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the upper speed for the transition "n_set -> n_act" in sensorless operation.
This value is entered as a percentage of p1755.
Dependency: Refer to: p1748, p1752
Description: Sets the configuration for the motor model.
Bit 0 = 1: Forces open-loop speed-controlled starting (ASM).
Bit 1 = 1: Forces the system to pass through frequency zero, open-loop-controlled (ASM).
Bit 2 = 1: Drive remains in full closed-loop control mode, even at zero frequency (ASM).
Bit 3 = 1: Motor model evaluates the saturation characteristic (ASM).
Bit 4 = 1: Time-controlled change between current and observer models (ASM).
Bit 5 = 1: HF signal injection to estimate the continuous rotor position (PESM).
Bit 6 = 1: If the motor is blocked, encoderless vector control remains speed-controlled (ASM).
Caution: Do not use bit 6 = 1 if the motor can be reversed by the load. Long wait times due to blocking (p2177) can cause the
motor to stall. In this case you should deactivate the function or use closed-loop control throughout the speed range
(note the information re bit 2 = 1).
Note: Bit 0 ... Bit 2 only have influence for sensorless vector control, bit 4 only for vector control with sensor. Bit 2 is pre-
assigned depending on p0500.
Re bit 02 = 1:
The sensorless vector control is effective down to zero frequency. A change is not made into the open-loop speed
controlled mode.
This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load itself does not gener-
ate any active torque and therefore only acts reactively to the drive torque of the induction motor.
If bit 2 is set to 1, then bit 3 is also automatically activated. Manual deselection is possible and can make sense if,
for third-party motors, the saturation characteristic (p1960) was not carried out. Generally, for standard SIEMENS
motors, the already pre-assigned (default value) saturation characteristic is adequate.
For bit 2 = 1, the selection of bits 0 and 1 is ignored.
Re bit 02 = 0:
Bit 3 is deactivated automatically.
p1749[0...n] Motor model upper changeover speed n_set -> n_act / Upper n_chgov
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 99.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
p1750[0...n] Motor model configuration / MotMod config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Controlled start Yes No -
01 Controlled through 0 Hz Yes No -
02 Closed-loop ctrl oper. down to zero freq. for
passive loads
Yes No -
03 Motor model Lh_pre = f(PsiEst) Yes No -
04 Model changeover Time controlled Freq. controlled -
05 Cl.-loop control mode PESM up to f=0 with
HF signal injection
Yes No -
06 Closed-loop control when motor is blocked Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-389
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Re bit 05 = 1:
The selection of HF signal injection is only relevant for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM). Bits 0..4
are not relevant for PESM.
For the purpose of component configuration, an automatic system run-up is triggered on first-time activation. Acti-
vation is, therefore, only possible outside of motor commissioning (p0010 = 0).
Re bit 06 = 1:
The following applies for encoderless vector control of induction motors only: If the motor is blocked (see p2175,
p2177), the time condition p1758 is bypassed and there is no changeover to open-loop control.
Description: Displays the status of the motor model.
Description: Sets the speed to change over the motor model for operation with encoder.
Dependency: In V/f characteristic mode the parameter is of no significance.
Refer to: p1756
r1751 Motor model status / MotMod status
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Controlled operation Active Inactive 6721
01 Set ramp-function generator Active Inactive -
02 Stop RsLh adaptation Yes No -
03 Feedback Active Inactive -
04 Encoder operation Active Inactive -
05 Holding angle Yes No -
06 Acceleration criterion Active Inactive -
07 Set angular integrator PEM No Yes -
08 Stop Kt adaptation PEM No Yes -
09 PolID active PEM SLVC No Yes -
10 I injection PEM No Yes -
11 Speed controller output cannot be set to
zero
Yes No -
12 Rs adapt waits Yes No -
13 Motor operation Yes No -
14 Stator frequency sign Positive Negative -
15 Torque sign Motor mode Regenerative mode -
16 Pulse injection active PEM Yes No -
p1752[0...n] Motor model changeover speed operation with encoder / MotMod n_chgov enc
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-390 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the hysteresis for the changeover speed of the motor model for operation with speed encoder.
Dependency: Refer to: p1752
Note: The value refers to p1752. In the case of separately excited synchronous motors, the lower hysteresis value is cal-
culated with p1752 * p1753; in the case of all other types of motor, p1752 * (1 - p1753) is used.
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant to filter the main flux angle difference from the voltage and current models.
The filtered value is included in the calculation of the total flux angle.
PESM: Sets the smoothing time constant for the angular difference display between motor model and encoder.
Note: In the case of a separately excited synchronous motor and sensorless vector control, the parameter must be set to
the minimum value to improve motor model changeover.
Description: Sets the speed to change over the motor model to encoderless operation.
Dependency: In V/f characteristic mode the parameter is of no significance.
Refer to: p1756
Notice: The changeover speed represents the steady-state minimum speed up to which the motor model can be used in
sensorless steady-state operation. If the stability is not adequate close to the changeover speed, it may make
sense to increase the parameter value.
Note: The changeover speed applies for the changeover between open-loop and closed-loop control mode.
p1753[0...n] Motor model changeover speed hysteresis operation with encoder /
MotMod n_chgovHysE
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 90.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
p1754[0...n] Flux angle difference smoothing time / Angle diff T_smth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.1 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 5.0 [ms]
p1755[0...n] Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgSnsorl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-391
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the hysteresis for the changeover speed of the motor model for encoderless operation.
Dependency: In V/f characteristic mode the parameter is of no significance.
Refer to: p1755
Note: The parameter value refers to p1755. In the case of separately excited synchronous motors, the lower hysteresis
value is calculated with p1755 * p1756; in the case of all other types of motor, p1755 * (1 - p1756) is used.
Description: Sets the gain of the transient response controller when the motor model changes over from open-loop controlled
operation to closed-loop controlled operation.
Note: Only for ASM and PSM in encoderless operation:
The settling range starts at 0.5 * p1755 * p1756.
For ASM it ends at p1755 * p1756 or at p1755, if p1759 is at the maximum value.
For PSM it always ends at p1755 * p1756.
Description: Sets the minimum time for falling below the changeover speed when changing from closed-loop controlled opera-
tion to open-loop controlled operation.
Dependency: Refer to: p1755, p1756
Description: Sets the minimum time for exceeding the changeover speed when changing from open-loop controlled operation to
closed-loop controlled operation.
Dependency: Refer to: p1755, p1756
Note: When p1759 = 2000 ms, the delay time becomes ineffective and the model changeover is determined by the output
frequency only.
p1756 Motor model changeover speed hysteresis encoderless operation /
MotMod n_chgov hys
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 95.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
p1757[0...n] Motor model w/o enc. op./cl.-loop controlled stab. controller Kp / MotMod w/o enc Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.01 10.00 0.70
p1758[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time closed/open-loop control / MotMod t cl_op
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
100 [ms] 10000 [ms] 1000 [ms]
p1759[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time open/closed loop control / MotMod t op_cl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 2000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-392 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the controller for speed adaptation with encoder
Description: Sets the integral-action time of the controller for speed adaptation with encoder
Description: Induction motor (ASM):
Displays the referred imaginary system deviation for the adaptation circuit of the motor model.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PESM):
Displays the system deviation for speed adaptation.
r1762.0: Angular deviation [rad-el] of the estimated EMF.
r1762.1: Angular deviation [electr. deg.] of the low-level signal response for pulse technique.
Index: [0] = Deviation Model1
[1] = Deviation Model2
Description: Induction motor (ASM):
Displays the referred real system deviation for the adaptation circuit of the motor model.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PESM):
Not used.
p1760[0...n] Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod wE n_ada Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 100000.000 1000.000
p1761[0...n] Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod wE n_ada Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 4 [ms]
r1762[0...1] Motor model deviation component 1 / MotMod dev comp 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6721, 6730,
6731
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r1763 Motor model deviation component 2 / MotMod dev comp 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-393
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder.
Description: Displays the effective proportional gain of the controller for the speed adaptation.
Description: Sets the speed to enable the voltage model to calculate the speed actual value.
This value is entered as a percentage referred to p1748.
Dependency: Refer to: p1748, p1752
Description: Sets the integral time of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder
Description: Displays the effective gain of the integral component of the controller for speed adaptation.
p1764[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod woE n_adaKp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6730
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 100000.000 1000.000
r1765 Motor model, speed adaptation Kp effective / MotM n_ada Kp act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p1766[0...n] Motor model voltage model calculation enable / V_mod calc enab
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 90.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
p1767[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod woE n_adaTn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6730
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 [ms] 200 [ms] 4 [ms]
r1768 Motor model, speed adaptation Vi effective / MotM n_ada Vi act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-394 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the P component of the controller for speed adaptation.
Description: Displays the I component of the controller for speed adaptation.
Description: Displays estimated (speed) signals of the motor model:
r1773.0: Displays the estimated (mechanical) slip of the motor model.
r1773.1: Displays the estimated input speed of the motor model.
Index: [0] = Estimated slip speed
[1] = Estimated speed
Description: Sets the offset voltage in the alpha direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at
low speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the Motor Module.
Note: The value is preset during the rotating measurement.
r1770 CO: Motor model speed adaptation proportional component / MotMod n_adapt Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6730
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r1771 CO: Motor model speed adaptation I comp. / MotMod n_adapt Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 6730
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r1773[0...1] Motor model slip speed / MotMod slip
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p1774[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation alpha / MotMod offs comp A
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-5.000 [V] 5.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-395
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the offset voltage in the beta direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at
low speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the Motor Module.
Note: The value is preset during the rotating measurement.
Description: Displays the internal status signals of the motor model:
Index 0: Changeover ramp between current and voltage models
Index 1: Changeover ramp for model tracking (encoderless induction motors only)
Index 2: Changeover ramp for zero frequency range (encoderless induction motors only)
Index 3: Transition ramp actual speed from speed setpoint to model value (encoderless FEM)
Index 4: Speed controller enable (encoderless FEM)
Index 5: Transition ramp between current and voltage models (encoderless FEM)
Index 6: Transition ramp for EMF deviation at PLL input (encoderless PESM)
Index: [0] = Changeover ramp motor model
[1] = Changeover ramp model tracking
[2] = Changeover ramp zero frequency encoderless ASM
[3] = Changeover ramp actual speed encoderless FEM
[4] = Enable speed controller encoderless FEM
[5] = Changeover ramp motor model encoderless FEM
[6] = Changeover ramp motor model encoderless PESM
Note: Indices 3 through 5 are only relevant in the case of encoderless control of separately excited synchronous motors.
Description: Induction motor (ASM):
Displays the difference between the motor model flux angle and the transformation angle.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PESM):
Displays the angular difference between motor model and encoder.
Dependency: A setting for smoothing the display can be made using p1754.
p1775[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation beta / MotMod offs comp B
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-5.000 [V] 5.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
r1776[0...6] Motor model status signals / MotMod status sig
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r1778 Motor model flux angle difference / MotMod ang. diff.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2005 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-396 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the absolute value of the flux of the motor model.
Description: Sets the configuration for the adaptation circuit of the motor model.
Induction motor (ASM): Rs, Rr (only for operation with encoder), Lh and offset compensation.
Permanent magnet synchronous motor (PEM): kT
Dependency: In V/f characteristic operating mode only bit 7 is relevant.
Note: ASM: Induction motor
PEM: Permanent magnet synchronous motor
When selecting the compensation of the valve interlocking via Rs (bit 7), the compensation in the gating unit is
deactivated and is instead taken into account in the motor model.
In order that the correction values of the Rs, Lh and kT adaptation (selected using Bit 0 ... Bit 2) are correctly
accepted when changing over the drive data set, a dedicated motor number must be entered into p0826 for each
different motor.
Description: Sets the integral time for the Rs adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
r1779 Motor model absolute flux / MotMod abs flux
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
p1780[0...n] Motor model adaptation configuration / MotMod adapt conf
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0111 1100 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Select motor model ASM Rs adaptation Yes No -
02 Select motor model ASM Lh adaptation Yes No -
03 Select motor model PEM kT adaptation Yes No -
04 Select motor model offset adaptation Yes No -
05 Select ASM Rr adaptation (only with
encoder)
Yes No -
06 Select pole position identification PEM
encoderless
Yes No -
07 Select T(valve) with Rs adaptation Yes No -
p1781[0...n] Motor model Rs adaptation integral time / MotMod Rs Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-397
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the corrective value for the Rs adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
Dependency: Refer to: p0826, p1780
Note: The display of the inactive data sets is only updated when changing over the data set.
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Rs adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
Description: Sets the integral time for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
Description: Displays the corrective value for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
Dependency: Refer to: p0826, p1780
Note: The adaptation result is reset if the magnetizing inductance of the induction motor is changed (p0360, r0382). This
also happens when changing over the data set if a different motor is not being used (p0826).
The display of the inactive data sets is only updated when changing over the data set.
r1782[0...n] Motor model Rs adaptation corrective value / MotMod Rs corr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
p1783[0...n] Motor model Rs adaptation Kp / MotMod Rs Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 1.000 0.100
p1785[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation Kp / MotMod Lh Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 1.000 0.100
p1786[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation integral time / MotMod Lh Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
r1787[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation corrective value / MotMod Lh corr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-398 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the power-on stator frequency for the Rs adaptation for the induction motor (ASM).
Description: Displays the power-on slip frequency for the Rs adaptation for the induction motor (ASM).
Description: Displays the power-on stator frequency/ primary section frequency for the Lh adaptation for the induction motor
(ASM).
Description: Displays the power-on slip frequency for the Lh adaptation for the induction motor (ASM).
Description: Sets the integral time of the kT adaptation of the motor model for a permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PEM).
r1789 Motor model Rs adaptation switch-in frequency / MotMod Rs f_on
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
r1790 Motor model Rs adaptation power-on slip / MotMod Rs fslip
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
r1791 Motor model Lh adaptation power-on frequency / MotMod Lh f_on
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
r1792 Motor model Lh adaptation power-on slip / MotMod Lh fslip
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
p1795[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation integral time / MotMod kT Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6731
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-399
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the corrective value of the kT adaptation of the motor model for a permanent-magnet synchronous motor
(PEM).
Dependency: Refer to: p0826, p1780
Note: The display of the inactive data sets is only updated when changing over the data set.
Description: Sets the proportional gain Kp for speed adaptation with active pulse technique for the estimation of the continuous
rotor position.
Description: Sets the drive converter switching frequency.
This parameter is preset to the rated converter value when the drive is first commissioned.
Dependency: The pulse frequency can, depending on the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) assume the following val-
ues:
p1800 = 1 / (p0115[0] * 2)
or
p1800 = n / p0115[0] where n = 1, 2, 3, ...
Example:
p0115[0] = 250 µs --> p1800 = 2, 4, 8, 12, 16 kHz
Possible setting values can be taken from r0114 (if p0009 = p0010 = 0).
If p0092 = 1 the sampling times p0115 and the pulse frequency p1800 are checked every time the parameters are
downloaded, and reset to the initial values if necessary. This check can be deactivated by setting p0092 = 0 (mak-
ing this setting does not affect isochronous PROFIBUS operation).
If wobbulation is selected (p1810.2), the pulse frequency can only be changed as part of pulse enabling to values
with the following ratio:
a) p1800 <= 1000 / p0115[0] for p1811 > 0 %
b) p1800 <= 1000 * 2 / p0115[0] for p 1811 = 0 %
Under pulse inhibit
p1800 > 1000 / p0115[0] -> p1811 = 0
p1800 > 1000 * 2 / p0115[0] -> 1810.2 = 0 and p1811 = 0
(applicable for all indices)
Refer to: r0110, r0111, p0112, p0113, r0114, p0115, p0230, p1817
r1797[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation corrective value / MotMod kT corr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6731
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm/A] - [Nm/A] - [Nm/A]
p1798[0...n] Motor model pulse technique speed adaptation Kp / MotMod pulses Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 1000.000 1.000
p1800[0...n] Pulse frequency setpoint / Pulse freq setp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1.000 [kHz] 16.000 [kHz] 4.000 [kHz]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-400 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The maximum possible pulse frequency is also determined by the power unit being used.
When the pulse frequency is increased, depending on the particular power unit, the maximum output current can be
reduced (derating, refer to r0067).
If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3), then the pulse frequency cannot be changed below
the minimum value required for the filter.
If p1800 is changed while commissioning (p0009, p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be
able to be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1800 have been changed by a parameter that was
set when the drive was commissioned (e.g. p1082).
Description: Displays the actual converter switching frequency.
Index: [0] = Actual
[1] = Minimum value of the modulator
Note: The selected pulse frequency (p1800) may be reduced if the drive converter has an overload condition (p0290).
The following applies for vector drives (p0107):
The pulse frequency can also be reduced when changing over the modulator to an optimized pulse pattern. This is
used to avoid overcontrol.
In the case of chassis power units, two-thirds of the setpoint pulse frequency is displayed in the FLB modulation
range.
Description: Sets the modulator mode.
Value: 0: Automatic changeover SVM/FLB
1: Flat top modulation (FLB)
2: Space vector modulation (SVM)
3: SVM without overcontrol
4: SVM/FLB without overcontrol
5: SVM with pulse frequency reduction
6: SVM/FLB with pulse frequency reduction
7: No edge modulation up to 100 Hz
8: No edge modulation up to 60 Hz
9: Edge modulation
Dependency: If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), or if the power unit firmware is not able to calcu-
late edge modulation (r0192 bit0 = 0), then only space vector modulation without overcontrol can be set as modula-
tion type (p1802 = 3).
p1802 > 6: Wobbulation is deactivated, p1810.2 = 0 and p1811 = 0 (valid for all indices)
Refer to: r0192, p0230, p7003
Notice: If the edge modulation is enabled (p1802 > 6), then the current actual value correction should be activated (p1840.0
= 0), if the Motor Module is connected to a controlled (regulated) DC link (Active Infeed).
r1801[0...1] CO: Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [kHz] - [kHz] - [kHz]
p1802[0...n] Modulator mode / Modulator mode
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 9 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-401
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 1, 2, 5, 6), the modulation
depth must be limited using p1803 (pre-assignment, p1803 = 98%). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the
current ripple and torque ripple.
When changing p1802[x], the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed.
p1802 = 7, 8 should be used if the drive is operated below 100 Hz or 60 Hz, and it is necessary to avoid changing
over to edge modulation. Above these output frequencies, the modulation depth remains limited so that there the
full output voltage of the edge modulation is not reached.
Description: Defines the maximum modulation depth.
Note: p1803 = 100% is the overcontrol limit for space vector modulation (for an ideal drive converter without any switching
delay).
If an optimized pulse pattern is enabled (edge modulation), then the modulation depth is limited to below the output
frequency of 28 Hz as there is no optimized pulse pattern in this range.
Description: Filter time constant for the smoothed modulation index to change over the modulator mode.
Description: Sets the filter time constant of the DC link voltage used to calculate the modulation depth.
Description: DC link voltage that is used to convert the setpoint voltage into an equivalent modulation depth.
p1803[0...n] Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6723
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
20.0 [%] 150.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p1804[0...n] Filter time constant smoothed modulation index / T_filt mod_idxSmth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 10.0 [ms]
p1806[0...n] Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
r1807 Actual DC link voltage to calculate the modulation depth / VdcActValMod_depth
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-402 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: DC link voltage used to determine the maximum possible output voltage.
Description: Displays the effective modulator mode.
Value: 1: Flat top modulation (FLB)
2: Space vector modulation (SVM)
3: Edge modulation from 28 Hz; 23:3
4: Edge modulation from 28 Hz; 19:1
5: Edge modulation from 60 Hz; 17:3
6: Edge modulation from 60 Hz; 17:1
7: Edge modulation from 100 Hz; 9:2
8: Edge modulation from 100 Hz; 9:1
Description: Sets the configuration for the modulator.
Dependency: If bit 2 is set from 1 to 0, p1811 = 0 is set.
Notice: Bit 1 = 0 can only be set under a pulse inhibit and for r0192.14 = 1.
Bit 2 can only be set to 1 subject to the following prerequisites:
- Pulse inhibit
- r0192.16 = 1
- p1800 < 2 * 1000/p0115[0]
r1808 DC link voltage actual value for V_max calculation / Vdc act val V_max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
r1809 CO: Modulator mode actual / Modulator mode act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 8 -
p1810 Modulator configuration / Modulator config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0010 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Avg value filter for V_lim (only for
Vdc_comp. in modulator)
Yes No -
01 DC link voltage compensation in the current
control
Yes No -
02 Wobbulation activated Yes No -
03 Current measurem. oversampling activated
(for PESM pulse techn.)
Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-403
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Re bit 00 = 0:
Voltage limitation from the minimum of the DC link voltage (lower ripple in the output current, reduced output volt-
age).
Re bit 00 = 1:
Voltage limitation from averaged DC link voltage (higher output voltage with increased ripple in the output current).
The selection is only valid if the DC link compensation is not performed in the Control Unit (bit 1 = 0).
Re bit 01 = 0:
DC link voltage compensation in the modulator.
Re bit 01 = 1:
DC link voltage compensation in the current control.
Re bit 02 = 0:
A gating unit that does not permit wobbulation is used.
Edge modulation is not possible with a parallel connection.
Re bit 02 = 1:
A gating unit that permits wobbulation is used.
For a wobbulation amplitude equal to zero (p1811 = 0), the maximum possible pulse frequency in p1800 = 2 * 1/cur-
rent controller clock cycle (p0115[0]).
For a wobbulation amplitude greater than zero (p1811 > 0), the maximum possible pulse frequency in p1800 =
1/current controller clock cycle (p0115[0]).
Re bit 03 = 1:
The component supports current actual value sensing (and the detection of valve close durations) with double
clocking and phase shift.
Activation must be supported by the component (r0192.23) and the system has to be restarted in order for it to take
effect.
Description: Sets the amplitude of the statistical wobbulation signal.
This signal is used to vary the pulse frequency to create a more pleasant sound.
Note: p1811 > 0 is possible, if the following applies:
- p1810.2 (modulator configuration) = 1 (wobbulation activated)
- p1800 (pulse frequency) <= 1/p115[0]
- p0230 (output filter) < 3 (no sine-wave filter)
Description: Sets the signal source to activate/deactivate offset calibration for output current measurement.
Caution: The absence of offset calibration can have a negative effect on control properties. Offset calibration must be per-
formed before switching on the power unit for the first time after POWER ON.
Note: Offset calibration is only performed with pulses suppressed and can take up to one second.
p1811[0...n] Pulse frequency wobbulation amplitude / Puls wobb ampl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [%] 20 [%] 0 [%]
p1812 BI: Offset calibration output current measurement / Off_calibr I_outp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-404 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets bit 0 for recording the power unit in the subgroup for the "offset clocking".
Dependency: Refer to: p1818, p1819
Note: A change only becomes effective after booting.
If any of the following secondary conditions are not fulfilled, then "offset clocking" is deactivated for all power units
in the subgroup. This means that all power units of the subgroup are not clocked with offset.
Secondary conditions for clocking with an offset:
- the PWM frequency (p1800[D]) of all power units in the subgroup must be the same.
- the PWM frequency (p1800[D]) must be the same in all drive data sets in the subgroup.
- the following must apply for the ratio between the PWM cycle (1/p1800[D]) and the current controller cycle
(p0115[0]):
The ratio (1/p1800[D]) / (p0115[0]) must be an even integer number (2, 4, 6, ...) for all power units in the subgroup.
or
The ratio (p0115[0]) / (1/p1800[D]) must be an integer number (1, 2, 3, ...) for all power units in the subgroup.
Description: Sets manual setting and overwriting of automatically determined phase shift for "offset clocking".
For p1816 = 1, the following applies:
Automatic mode. The phase shift value is automatically determined.
For p1816 = 0 ... 16, the following applies:
Manual mode. The user should define the phase shift value as follows:
1. PWM cycle (1/p1800) > current controller clock cycle (p0115[0])
The power unit executes a phase shift from Tshift = current controller cycle (p0115[0]) * p1816.
2. PWM cycle (1/p1800) <= current controller clock cycle (p0115[0])
For p1816 >= 1, the power unit executes a phase shift from Tshift = PWM cycle/2.
Dependency: Refer to: r0116, p1800, p1819
Description: Sets the minimum ratio between the pulse frequency and the output frequency.
Notice: If the ratio between the pulse frequency and the output frequency is reduced, then oscillations can occur in the out-
put current that can result in significant levels of current ripple with the appropriate negative effects.
p1815 Phase for PWM generation subgroup / Ph for PWM subgr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0001 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Recording in subgroup for offset clocking Yes No -
p1816 Set phase for PWM generation manually / Set Ph for PWM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1 16 -1
p1817 Minimum ratio, pulse frequency to the output frequency / Min f_puls / f_max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(2) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
8.3 15.0 12.0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-405
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: When the maximum speed is changed, the pulse frequency p1800 is automatically limited to this minimum ratio. It
is not permissible to reduce the pulse frequency if this would result in this ratio being undershot.
Description: Sets the phase shift for offset clocking.
For the first active power unit, it is specified whether clocking is to start at 0° (value = 0) or 180° (value = 1). All other
active power units are clocked alternately according to the setting made here.
Dependency: Refer to: p1819
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Display for "offset clocking". Depending on the particular case, the value is interpreted differently:
1. Case:
The PWM clock cycle (1/p1800[D]) is greater than the current controller clock cycle (p115[0]) and is an integer and
even multiple of it (e.g. p0115[0] = 125 µs, p1800[D] = 4 kHz, 2 kHz, 1 kHz).
The value displayed refers to the phase shift in the current-controlled cycles to be applied by the power unit.
2. Case:
The current controller clock cycle (p0115[0]) is greater than or equal to the PWM clock cycle (1/p1800[D]) and is an
integer multiple (e.g. p0115[0] = 125 µs, p1800[D] = 8 kHz, 16 kHz).
The displayed value 1 means that the power unit is to apply a phase shift of 180 ° (from the PWM cycle).
3. Case:
If neither case 1 nor case 2 applies to at least one power unit, then only 0 can be entered for all of the power units.
Dependency: Refer to: r0108, p0108, p0115, p1800, p1818
Note: For reasons of compatibility, the parameter is an adjustable parameter. However, it functions solely as a read
parameter. This means that factory setting -1 no longer has any significance and is only available for reasons of
compatibility.
Description: Sets the phase sequence reversal for the motor.
If the motor does not rotate in the required direction, then the output phase sequence can be reversed using this
parameter. This means that with the same setpoint, the motor direction is reversed without reversing the encoder
actual value.
When a speed encoder is being used, it may be necessary to also invert the encoder actual value (p0410).
p1818 Phase for PWM generation configuration / Ph for PWM config
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1
p1819 Phase for PWM generation / Ph for PWM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1 16 -1
p1820[0...n] Reverse the output phase sequence / Outp_ph_seq rev
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 6732
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-406 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Value: 0: Off
1: On
Dependency: Refer to: p1821
Note: This setting can only be changed when the pulses are inhibited.
p1821 can be used to reverse the phase sequence and encoder actual value.
Description: Setting to change the direction of rotation.
If the parameter is changed, it reverses the direction of rotation of the motor and the encoder actual value without
changing the setpoint.
Value: 0: Clockwise
1: Counter-clockwise
Dependency: Refer to: F07434
Notice: An appropriate fault is output for a drive data set changeover where the direction of rotation changes and the pulses
are enabled.
Note: For operation with the phase sequence U/V/W, the direction of rotation is defined when viewing the face side of the
motor output shaft.
When changing the direction of rotation, the rotating field direction of the current controller is reversed. The speed
actual value (e.g. r0063) is also reversed so that the control sense is kept and internally causing the direction of
rotation to be reversed with the same setpoint. Further, the position actual values of the actual encoder are
reversed (e.g. r0482[0...2]).
For VECTOR, the following applies:
p1820 can be used to reverse the direction of the motor without reversing the encoder actual value.
Description: Sets the threshold voltage drop of the valves (power semiconductor devices) to be compensated.
Note: The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase U.
Note: The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.
For type PM340 power units, the parameter is limited to 3.98 µs.
p1821[0...n] Dir of rot / Dir of rot
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 4704, 4710,
4711, 4715, 5730, 6730, 6731,
6732
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p1825 Converter valve threshold voltage / Threshold voltage
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms] 100.0 [Vrms] 0.6 [Vrms]
p1828 Compensation valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_lock ph U
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-407
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase V.
Note: For type PM340 power units, the parameter is limited to 3.98 µs.
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase W.
Note: For type PM340 power units, the parameter is limited to 3.98 µs.
Description: Above the current level, the dead time - resulting from the converter switching delays - is compensated by a previ-
ously calculated constant value. If the relevant phase current setpoint falls below the absolute value defined by
p1832, the corrective value for this phase is continuously reduced.
Dependency: The factor setting of p1832 is automatically set to 0.02 * rated drive converter current (r0207).
Description: Display for the configuration of the gating unit driver.
p1829 Compensation valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_lock ph V
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
p1830 Compensation valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_lock ph W
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
p1832 Dead time compensation current level / t_dead_comp I_lev
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Arms] 10000.0 [Arms] 0.0 [Arms]
r1837 Gating unit configuration / Gating unit config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Modulation depth for a flying restart Limited Not limited -
01 Modulation depth for Vdc closed-loop con-
trol
Limited Not limited -
02 Vdc_min controller Active Not active -
03 Motor data identification routine Active Not active -
04 Current offset calculation Active Not active -
05 Simulation mode Active Not active -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-408 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Configuration of the actual value correction
Dependency: Refer to: p1802
Note: During operation (the pulses enabled) the configuration cannot be changed by changing over drive data sets.
Description: Status of the actual value correction
Description: Sets the weighting factor for the leakage inductance of the L-R element of the actual value correction.
Dependency: Refer to: p0391, p0392, p0393
06 Reverse the output phase sequence Active Not active -
07 Counter-clockwise direction of rotation Active Not active -
08 Synchronization (bypass) Active Not active -
09 F7801 monitor by application active not active -
10 Chassis Drive active Yes no -
11 Short-circuit test active no Yes -
12 FL modulation prohibited Yes No -
13 F3E present Yes No -
14 PS-Asic3 present Yes No -
15 CU230 or CU240 Yes No -
p1840[0...n] Actual value correction configuration / AVC config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Actual value correction deactivated Yes No -
01 Compares the integrals from modulator and
setpoint
Yes No -
r1841 Actual value correction status word / AVC status
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Hardware for the actual value correction
detected
Yes No -
01 Automatic shutdown (too many switching
instants)
Yes No -
02 Integral normalized to half the gating unit
clock cycle freq.
Yes No -
03 Actual value correction temporarily sup-
pressed
Yes No -
15 Actual value correction active Yes No -
p1845[0...n] Actual value correction evaluation factor Lsig / ActV_corr FactLsig
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 10.00 1.00
List of parameters
Parameter
1-409
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The load-dependent adaptation of the leakage inductance of the current actual value correction is defined using
p0391 ... p0393.
Description: Sets the damping factor for the actual value correction.
The factor multiplies the T0/Tsig ratio in the feedback branch of the LR element
Description: Displays phase correction currents as well as the drive converter phase currents
Index: [0] = Harmonics, phase U
[1] = Harmonics, phase V
[2] = Harmonics, phase W
[3] = Measured value phase U
[4] = Measured value phase V
[5] = Measured value phase W
Description: Displays the phase correction voltages and and the drive converter phase voltages
Index: [0] = Harmonics, phase U
[1] = Harmonics, phase V
[2] = Harmonics, phase W
[3] = Measured value phase U
[4] = Measured value phase V
[5] = Measured value phase W
p1846[0...n] Actual value correction damping factor / ActV_corr D_factor
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 10.00 1.00
r1848[0...5] Actual value correction phase currents / ActVal_corr I_corr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r1849[0...5] Actual value correction phase voltages / ActVal_corr V_corr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-410 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the motor data identification and speed controller optimization.
p1900 = 0:
Function inhibited.
p1900 = 2:
Induction motors --> set p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0
Permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors --> set p1910 = 1, p1990 = 1 and p1960 = 0
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the
next power-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of
a revolution.
For permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors, the encoder is adjusted with the next power-on
command. The motor must be free to rotate and rotates through 1.5 revolutions of the motor encoder.
Value: 0: Inhibited
2: Identify motor data at standstill
Dependency: In the simulation mode, the parameter cannot be written into. When selecting the motor data identification routine,
the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
Refer to: p1272, p1300, p1910
Refer to: F07990, A07991
Notice: If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2).
To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971, p0977).
Note: The motor and control parameters are only optimally set when both measurements are carried out (initially at stand-
still, and then with the motor rotating).
An appropriate alarm is output when the parameter is set.
The power-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed,
the drive automatically resets it.
The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This time is, for example, influenced
by the motor size and the mechanical conditions.
p1900 is automatically set to 0 after the motor data identification routine has been completed.
p1900 Motor data identification and rotating measurement / MotID and rot meas
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 2
List of parameters
Parameter
1-411
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the motor data identification and speed controller optimization.
p1900 = 0:
Function inhibited.
p1900 = 1:
Induction motors --> set p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0, 1, 2 depending on p1300
Permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors --> set p1910 = 1, p1990 = 1 and p1960 = 0, 1, 2
depending on p1300
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the
next power-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of
a revolution.
For permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors, the encoder is adjusted with the next power-on
command. The motor must be free to rotate and rotates through 1.5 revolutions of the motor encoder.
With the following power-on command, a rotating motor data identification routine is carried out - and in addition, a
speed controller optimization by making measurements at different motor speeds.
p1900 = 2:
Induction motors --> set p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0
Permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors --> set p1910 = 1, p1990 = 1 and p1960 = 0
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the
next power-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of
a revolution.
For permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors, the encoder is adjusted with the next power-on
command. The motor must be free to rotate and rotates through 1.5 revolutions of the motor encoder.
p1900 = 3:
Sets p1960 = 0, 1, 2 depending on p1300
This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill.
When the drive enable signals are present, with the next power-on command, a rotating motor data identification
routine is carried out - and in addition, a speed controller optimization by making measurements at different motor
speeds.
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Identify motor data at standstill and with motor rotating
2: Identify motor data at standstill
3: Identify motor data with motor rotating
Dependency: In the simulation mode, the parameter cannot be written into. When selecting the motor data identification routine,
the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
Refer to: p1272, p1300, p1910, p1960, p1990
Refer to: A07980, A07981, F07982, F07983, F07984, F07985, F07986, A07987, F07988, F07990, A07991
Notice: If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2).
To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971, p0977).
Note: The motor and control parameters are only optimally set when both measurements are carried out (initially at stand-
still, and then with the motor rotating).
An appropriate alarm is output when the parameter is set.
The power-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed,
the drive automatically resets it.
The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This time is, for example, influenced
by the motor size and the mechanical conditions.
p1900 is automatically set to 0 after the motor data identification routine has been completed.
p1900 Motor data identification and rotating measurement / MotID and rot meas
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 2
Parameter
List of parameters
1-412 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the configuration for the test pulse evaluation.
Settable options:
Bit 0: Short-circuit test
Check for conductor-to-conductor short circuit when pulse is enabled.
Note: For short-circuit test:
If the test was successful once after POWER ON (see r1902.0), it is not repeated.
If a conductor-to-conductor short-circuit is detected during the test, this is displayed in r1902.1.
Description: Status display of test pulse evaluation.
Short-circuit test:
Bit0: No faults detected during short-circuit test.
Bit1: Phase short-circuit detected.
Description: Sets the configuration of the motor data identification.
p1901 Test pulse evaluation configuration / Test puls config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Test pulse for phase short-circuit active Yes No -
r1902 Test pulse evaluation status / Status test puls
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Short-circuit test Executed Not executed -
01 Phase short-circuit detected Yes no -
p1909[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Stator inductance estimate no measure-
ment
Yes No -
01 Cl.-loop current control w/ dead-beat con-
troller
Yes No -
02 Rotor time constant estimate no measure-
ment
Yes No -
03 Leakage inductance estimate no measure-
ment
Yes No -
04 Activates the identification dynamic leak-
age inductance
Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-413
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The following applies to permanent-magnet synchronous motors:
Without deselection in bit 11, in the closed-loop control mode, the direct inductance LD and the quadrature induc-
tance Lq are measured at a low current. When deselecting with bit 11 or in the V/f mode, the stator inductance is
measured at half the rated motor current.
If the stator is inductance is not measured but is to be estimated, then bit 0 should be set and bit 11 should be dese-
lected.
Description: Sets the motor data identification routine.
The motor data identification routine is carried out after the next power-on command.
p1910 = 1:
All motor data and the drive converter characteristics are identified and then transferred to the following parame-
ters:
p0350, p0354, p0356, p0357, p0358, p0360, p1825, p1828, p1829, p1830
After this, the control parameter p0340 = 3 is automatically calculated.
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Complete identification (ID) and acceptance of motor data
2: Complete identification (ID) of motor data without acceptance
3: ID of the saturation characteristic and acceptance
4: ID of the saturation characteristic without acceptance
5: ID of dynamic leakage inductance Lsig (r1920) without acceptance
6: ID of lockout time (r1926) without acceptance
7: ID of stator resistance Rs (r1912) without acceptance
8: ID of stator inductance Ls (r1915) Rr (r1927) without acceptance
9: ID of rotor time constant Tr (r1913) without acceptance
10: ID of static leakage inductance Lsig (r1914) without acceptance
20: Voltage vector input
21: Voltage vector input without filter
22: Rectangular voltage vector input without filter
23: Triangular voltage vector input without filter
24: Rectangular voltage vector input with filter
25: Triangular voltage vector input with filter
Dependency: "Quick commissioning" must be carried out (p0010 = 1) before executing the motor data identification routine!
In the simulation mode, the parameter cannot be written into. When selecting the motor data identification routine,
the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
Refer to: p1272, p1900
Caution: After the motor data identification (p1910 > 0) has been selected, alarm A07991 is output and a motor data identifi-
cation routine is carried out as follows at the next power-on command:
- current flows through the motor and a voltage is present at the drive converter output terminals.
- during the identification routine, the motor shaft can rotate through a maximum of half a revolution.
- however, no torque torque is generated.
05 Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time
range
Yes No -
06 Activate vibration damping Yes No -
07 Deactivate vibration detection Yes No -
11 Deactivate pulse measurement Lq Ld Yes No -
12 Deactivate rotor resistance Rr measure-
ment
Yes No -
14 Deactivate valve interlocking time measure-
ment
Yes No -
15 Determine only stator resistance, valve volt-
age fault, dead time
Yes No -
p1910 Motor data identification selection / MotID selection
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 25 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-414 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2).
To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971, p0977).
Note: When setting p1910, the following should be observed:
1. "With acceptance" means:
The parameters specified in the description are overwritten with the identified values and therefore have an influ-
ence on the controller setting.
2. "Without acceptance" means:
The identified parameters are only displayed in the range r1912 ... r1926. The controller settings remain
unchanged.
3. p1910 = 3, 4, 5 can only be selected for induction motors.
Description: Sets the number of phases to be identified.
Value: 1: 1 phase U
2: 2 phases U, V
3: 3 phases U, V, W
Note: When identifying with several phases, the accuracy increases and also the time it takes to make the measurement.
Description: Displays the identified stator resistance.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Description: Displays the identified rotor time constant.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
p1911 Number of phases to be identified / Qty ph to ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 3 1
r1912[0...2] Identified stator resistance / R_stator ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
r1913[0...2] Identified rotor time constant / T_rotor ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-415
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the identified total leakage inductance.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 1st point of the saturation characteristic.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 2nd point of the saturation characteristic.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1914[0...2] Identified total leakage inductance / L_total_leak ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
r1915[0...2] Identified nominal stator inductance / L_stator ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
r1916[0...2] Identified stator inductance 1 / L_stator 1 ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
r1917[0...2] Identified stator inductance 2 / L_stator 2 ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-416 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 3rd point of the saturation characteristic.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 4th point of the saturation characteristic.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Description: Displays the identified dynamic total leakage inductance.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1918[0...2] Identified stator inductance 3 / L_stator 3 ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
r1919[0...2] Identified stator inductance 4 / L_stator 4 ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
r1920[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance / L_leak dyn ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
r1921[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance 1 / L_leak 1 dyn id
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-417
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Description: Displays the identified IGBT threshold voltage.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1922[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance 2 / L_leak 2 dyn id
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
r1923[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance 3 / L_leak 3 dyn id
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
r1924[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance 4 / L_leak 4 dyn id
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
r1925[0...2] Identified threshold voltage / V_threshold ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-418 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the identified effective valve lockout time.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Description: Displays the identified rotor resistance
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Description: Displays the identified cable resistance.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Description: Displays the identified (differential) q-inductance.
Dependency: Refer to: r1935, p1959, p1960
Note: The Lq characteristic consists of the value pairs from p1934 and p1935 with the same index.
This value corresponds to the value of the total leakage inductance (r0377).
r1926[0...2] Identified effective valve lockout time / t_lock_valve id
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
r1927[0...2] Identified rotor resistance / R_rotor ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
r1929[0...2] Identified cable resistance / R_cable ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
r1934[0...9] q inductance identified / Lq ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-419
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the identification current to identify the q inductance ([0...9]).
Dependency: Refer to: r1934, p1959, p1960
Note: The Lq characteristic consists of the value pairs from r1934 and r1935 with the same index.
Description: Sets the configuration of the rotating measurement.
Dependency: Refer to: F07988
Note: The encoder is only tested if the rotating measurement with encoder is selected (p1960 = 2).
The following parameters are influenced for the individual optimization steps:
Bit 00: None
Bit 01: p0320, p0360, p0362 ... p0369
Bit 02: p0341, p0342
Bit 03: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1460, p1462, p1463, p1470, p1472, p1496
Bit 04: Dependent on p1960
Bit 05: p0391, p0392, p0393, p1402.2 only for induction motors
p1960 = 1, 3: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1470, p1472, p1496
p1960 = 2, 4: p1458, p1459, p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463, p1496
The identification of the q leakage inductance can only be carried out for unloaded motors or motors with a low load
(load approx. 30% below the rated motor torque). Only then is a current controller adaptation (p0391 ... p0393)
parameterized if the q-leakage inductance under no-load conditions is at least 30 % higher than the total leakage
inductance (p0356, p0358).
r1935[0...9] q inductance identification current / Lq I_ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
p1959[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0001 1111 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enc test active Yes No -
01 Saturation characteristic identification Yes No -
02 Moment of inertia identification Yes No -
03 Recalculates the speed controller parame-
ters
Yes No -
04 Speed controller optimization (vibration test) Yes No -
05 q leakage inductance ident. (for current con-
troller adaptation)
Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-420 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the rotating measurement.
The rotating measurement is carried out after the next power-on command.
The setting possibilities of the parameter depend on the open-loop/closed-loop control mode (p1300).
p1300 < 20 (V/f open-loop control):
It is not possible to select rotating measurement or speed controller optimization.
p1300 = 20, 22 (encoderless operation):
Only rotating measurement or speed controller optimization can be selected in the encoderless mode.
p1300 = 21, 23 (operation with encoder):
Both versions (encoderless and with encoder) of the rotating measurement and speed controller optimization can
be selected.
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Rotating measurement in encoderless operation
2: Rotating measurement with encoder
3: Speed controller optimization in encoderless operation
4: Speed controller optimization with encoder
Dependency: Before the rotating measurement is carried out, the motor data identification routine (p1900, p1910, r3925) should
have already been done.
In the simulation mode, a value of 1 cannot be written into the parameter.
When selecting the rotating measurement, the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
Refer to: p1272, p1300, p1900, p1959
Refer to: A07987
Danger: For drives with a mechanical system that limits the distance moved, it must be ensured that this is not reached dur-
ing the rotating measurement. If this is not the case, then it is not permissible that the measurement is carried out.
Notice: If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2).
To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971, p0977).
Note: When the rotating measurement is activated, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971, p0977).
Parameter changes are automatically made for the rotating measurement (e.g. p1120); this is the reason that up to
the end of the measurement, and if no faults are present, no manual changes should be made.
The ramp-up and ramp-down times (p1120, p1121) are limited, for the rotating measurement, to 900 s.
For speed controller optimization with encoder (p1960 = 2, 4), the speed controller for encoderless operation is also
pre-assigned (p1470, p1472).
Depending on whether the speed controller optimization is carried out with or without encoder, different Kp/Tn
adaptations of the speed controller are set (p1464, p1465). If the drive should be controlled with as well as without
speed encoder, then we recommend the use of two drive data sets (p0180). These can then be executed with dif-
ferent speed controller adaptations.
Description: Sets the speed to determine the saturation characteristic and the encoder test.
The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency).
p1960 Rotating measurement selection / Rot meas sel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 0
p1961 Saturation characteristic speed to determine / Sat_char n determ
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
26 [%] 75 [%] 40 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-421
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p0310, p1959
Refer to: F07983
Note: The saturation characteristics should be determined at an operating point with the lowest possible load.
Description: Displays the magnetizing currents of the identified saturation characteristic.
The values are referred to r0331.
After they have been determined, the values are transferred to p0366 ... p0369.
Index: [0] = Value 1
[1] = Value 2
[2] = Value 3
[3] = Value 4
[4] = Value 5
Dependency: Refer to: r0331
Description: Displays the magnetizing inductances of the identified saturation characteristic.
The values are referred to r0382.
Index: [0] = Value 1
[1] = Value 2
[2] = Value 3
[3] = Value 4
[4] = Value 5
Dependency: Refer to: r0382
Description: Displays the rotor flux values of the identified saturation characteristic.
After they have been determined, the values are transferred to p0362 ... p0365.
Index: [0] = Value 1
[1] = Value 2
[2] = Value 3
[3] = Value 4
[4] = Value 5
r1962[0...4] Saturation characteristic magnetizing current / Sat_char I_mag
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r1963[0...4] Saturation characteristic magnetizing inductance / Sat_char L_main
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r1964[0...4] Saturation characteristic rotor flux / Sat_char rot flux
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-422 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the speed for the identification of the moment of inertia and the vibration test.
Induction motor:
The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency).
Synchronous motor:
The percentage value is referred to the minimum from p0310 (rated motor frequency) and p1082 (maximum
speed).
Dependency: Refer to: p0310, p1959
Refer to: F07984, F07985
Note: In order to calculate the inertia, sudden speed changes are carried out - the specified value corresponds to the
lower speed setpoint. This value is increased by 20 % for the upper speed value. The q leakage inductance (refer to
p1959 bit 5) is determined at zero speed and at 50% of p1965 - however, with a maximum output frequency of 15
Hz and at a minimum of 10% of the rated motor speed.
Description: Sets the dynamic response factor for speed controller optimization.
Dependency: Refer to: p1959
Refer to: F07985
Note: For a rotating measurement, this parameter can be used to optimize the speed controller.
p1967 = 100 % --> speed controller optimization according to a symmetric optimum.
p1967 > 100 % --> optimization with a higher dynamic response (Kp higher, Tn lower).
Description: Displays the dynamic factor which is actually achieved for the vibration test
Dependency: Refer to: p1959, p1967
Refer to: F07985
Note: This dynamic factor only refers to the control mode of the speed controller set in p1960.
p1965 Speed_ctrl_opt speed / n_opt speed
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 75 [%] 40 [%]
p1967 Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor / n_opt dyn_factor
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 400 [%] 100 [%]
r1968 Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor actual / n_opt dyn_fact act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-423
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the determined moment of inertia of the drive.
After it has been determined, the value is transferred to p0341, p0342.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2
Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1959
Refer to: F07984
Description: Displays the vibration frequencies determined by the vibration test.
Index: [0] = Frequency low
[1] = Frequency high
Dependency: Refer to: p1959
Refer to: F07985
Description: Displays the standard deviations of the vibration frequencies determined by the vibration test
Index: [0] = Standard deviation of low frequency
[1] = Standard deviation of high frequency
Dependency: Refer to: p1959
Refer to: F07985
Description: Displays the number of periods determined by the vibration test.
Index: [0] = No. of periods of the low frequency
[1] = No. of periods of the high frequency
r1969 Speed_ctrl_opt moment of inertia determined / n_opt M_inert det
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [kgm²] - [kgm²] - [kgm²]
r1970[0...1] Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test vibration frequency determined / n_opt f_vibration
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
r1971[0...1] Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test standard deviation determined / n_opt std. deviat.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
r1972[0...1] Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test number of periods determined / n_opt period qty
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-424 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p1959
Refer to: F07985
Description: Displays the number of pulses determined during the vibration test.
Note: A negative signal indicates an incorrect polarity of the encoder signal.
Description: Displays the status to check and monitor the states of speed controller optimization.
Description: Sets the pole position identification technique.
Value: 1: Voltage pulsing, first harmonic
4: Voltage pulsing, 2-stage
6: Voltage pulsing, 2-stage invert
10: DC current injection
Dependency: In the simulation mode, the parameter cannot be written into.
Refer to: p1272, p1780
Note: Voltage pulse technique (p1980 = 1, 4) cannot be applied to separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5)
and for for operation with sine-wave output filters (p0230).
r1973 Rotating measurement, encoder test pulse number determined / n_opt pulse No.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r1979.0...11 BO: Speed_ctrl_opt status / n_opt status
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Speed controller optimization activated Yes No -
01 Speed controller optimization completed Yes No -
02 Speed controller optimization interrupted Yes No -
04 Enc test active Yes No -
05 Saturation char. identification active Yes No -
06 Moment of inertia identification active Yes No -
07 Recalc. speed controller parameters active Yes No -
08 Speed controller vibration test active Yes No -
09 Magnetizing inductance adapt. active Yes No -
10 Operation with encoder after encoderless
operation
Yes No -
11 q-leakage inductance identification Yes No -
p1980[0...n] Pole position identification technique / PolID technique
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 10 4
List of parameters
Parameter
1-425
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Activates the pole position identification routine to determine the commutation angle and to carry out a plausibility
check.
Value: 0: Pole position identification off
1: Pole position identification for commutation
2: Pole position identification for plausibility check
Recommend.: Re p1982 = 1:
This is used for synchronous motors with motor encoder without absolute data.
The information/data regarding the absolute commutation angle is supplied via a track C/D, Hall sensors, an abso-
lute encoder or from the pole position identification routine.
Re p1982 = 2:
This is used for synchronous motor with motor encoder with absolute data to check this data.
For VECTOR, the following applies:
With p1982 = 2, each time the pulses are enabled it is checked whether the absolute position supplied from the
encoder does not exceed a deviation of 45 degrees to the identified pole wheel position.
With separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5), pole position identification cannot be selected if an
encoder with position data is used (e.g. SSI encoder).
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990
Note: For encoderless operation, the pole position identification routine is selected with p1780.6
Description: Displays the angular difference between the actual electrical commutation angle and the angle determined by the
pole position identification.
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1982, r1985, r1987, p1990
Note: When the pole position identification routine is executed several times using p1983, the spread of the measured
values can be determined using this value. At the same position, the spread should be less than 2 degrees electri-
cal.
Description: Displays the saturation characteristic of the pole position identification routine.
The values for the characteristic of the last saturation-based pole position identification routine are output every 1
ms in order to record signals (e.g. trace).
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1987, p1990
p1982[0...n] Pole position identification selection / PolID selection
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
r1984 Pole position identification, angular difference / PolID ang diff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]
r1985 Pole position identification, saturation characteristic / PolID sat_char
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-426 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the trigger characteristic of the pole position identification routine.
The values for the characteristic of the last pole position identification routine are output every 1 ms in order to
record signals (e.g. trace).
The values for trigger characteristic and saturation characteristic are always output in synchronism from a time per-
spective.
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1985
Note: The following information and data can be taken from the trigger characteristic.
- the value -100% marks the angle at the start of the measurement.
- the value +100 % marks the commutation angle determined from the pole position identification routine.
Description: This function is only required for synchronous motors and can be started when commissioning for the first time or
after replacing an encoder. The function acts on the active motor data set.
Alarm A07971 is output while the angular commutation offset is being determined. p1990 is automatically set to 0
after the angular commutation offset has been determined.
For p1990 = 1 (encoder adjustment with transfer), the following applies:
The angular commutation offset is determined and transferred into p0431.
For p1990 = 2 (encoder adjustment for checking), the following applies:
The angular commutation offset is determined and is not transferred into p0431. For a deviation of more than 6 °
electrical, fault F07413 is output.
Value: 0: Deactivated
1: Activated with transfer
2: Activated for checking
Dependency: In the simulation mode, the parameter cannot be written into.
When selecting the encoder adjustment, the changeover of the drive data sets is suppressed.
Encoder adjustment is only carried out if the function module for speed/torque control is available (r0108 bit2 = 1).
Refer to: p0325, p0329, p0431, p1272, p1900
Caution: When the encoder is being adjusted, the motor must be operated without a load - and if a motor holding brake is
being used, this must be opened.
r1987 Pole position identification trigger characteristic / PolID trig_char
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
p1990 Encoder adjustment, determine angular commutation offset / Enc_adj det ang
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-427
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the angle that is added to the commutating angle.
Caution: If the angular correction is not correctly set, when changing over and with closed-loop torque control, the motor can
accelerate to high speeds in spite of the fact that a setpoint of zero has been entered.
Description: Sets the scaling for the runtime of the automatic encoder calibration and
the current-impressing technique for the pole position identification routine.
Dependency: Refer to: p0341, p0342
Caution: For P1999 > 100% (setting, large moments of inertia):
There is no locked rotor monitoring (A7970.2).
The plausibility check of the encoder signal (A7970.4) only checks the sign.
Note: For high moments of inertia, it is practical to scale the runtime of the calibration higher.
Description: Sets the reference quantity for speed and frequency.
All speeds or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed (in (rpm) / 60)
Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quanti-
ties are used as internal conversion factor.
p1991[0...n] Motor changeover, angular commutation correction / Ang_com corr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-180 [°] 180 [°] 0 [°]
p1999[0...n] Ang. commutation offset calibr. and pole position ID - scaling / ComOffsCalib scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 5000 [%] 100 [%]
p2000 Reference speed reference frequency / Ref_n Ref_f
ENCODER Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
6.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 3000.00 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-428 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the reference quantity for velocity and frequency.
All velocities or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference velocity (in (m/min) / 60)
Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quanti-
ties are used as internal conversion factor.
Description: Sets the reference quantity for speed and frequency.
All speeds or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed (in (rpm) / 60)
Dependency: Refer to: p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004
Note: For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) an appropriate pre-assignment is only made if the parameter
is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1.
If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quanti-
ties are used as internal conversion factor.
Example 1:
The signal of an analog input (e.g. r4055[0]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual percent-
age input value is cyclically converted into the absolute speed setpoint using the reference speed (p2000).
Example 2:
The setpoint from PROFIBUS (r2050[1]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual input value is
cyclically converted into a percentage value via the pre-specified scaling 4000 hex. This percentage value is con-
verted to the absolute speed setpoint via reference speed (p2000).
Description: Sets the reference quantity for voltages.
All voltages specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. This also applies for direct voltage val-
ues (= rms value) like the DC-link voltage.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
p2000 Reference velocity, reference frequency / Ref_v Ref_f
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.60 [m/min] 600.00 [m/min] 120.00 [m/min]
p2000 Reference speed reference frequency / Ref_n Ref_f
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
6.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 3000.00 [rpm]
p2001 Reference voltage / Reference voltage
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10 [Vrms] 100000 [Vrms] 1000 [Vrms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-429
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) an appropriate pre-assignment is only made if the parameter
is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1.
If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quanti-
ties are used as internal conversion factor.
For infeed units, the parameterized device supply voltage (p0210) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity.
Example:
The actual value of the DC link voltage (r0070) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual voltage
value is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference voltage (p2001) and output according to the param-
eterized scaling.
Description: Sets the reference quantity for currents.
All currents specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
Notice: If various DDS are used with different motor data, then the reference quantities remain the same as these are not
changed over with the DDS. The resulting conversion factor should be taken into account (e.g. for trace records).
Example:
p2002 = 100 A
Reference quantity 100 A corresponds to 100 %
p305[0] = 100 A
Rated motor current 100 A for MDS0 in DDS0 --> 100 % corresponds to 100 % of the rated motor current
p305[1] = 50 A
Rated motor current 50 A for MDS1 in DDS1 --> 100 % corresponds to 200 % of the rated motor current
Note: For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) an appropriate pre-assignment is only made if the parameter
is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1.
If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quanti-
ties are used as internal conversion factor.
For infeed units, the rated line current, which is obtained from the rated power and parameterized rated line supply
voltage (p2002 = r0206 / p0210 / 1.73) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity.
Example:
The actual value of a phase current (r0069[0]) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual current
value is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference current (p2002) and output according to the param-
eterized scaling.
Description: Sets the reference quantity for torques.
All torques specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
p2002 Reference current / Reference current
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.10 [Arms] 100000.00 [Arms] 100.00 [Arms]
p2003 Reference torque / Reference torque
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: 7_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.01 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 1.00 [Nm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-430 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) an appropriate pre-assignment is only made if the parameter
is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1.
If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quanti-
ties are used as internal conversion factor.
Example:
The actual value of the total torque (r0079]) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual torque is cycli-
cally converted into a percentage of the reference torque (p2003) and output according to the parameterized scal-
ing.
Description: Displays the reference quantity for power ratings.
All power ratings specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
Dependency: This value is calculated as follows:
Infeed: Calculated from voltage times current.
Closed-loop control: Calculated from torque times speed.
Refer to: p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003
Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quanti-
ties are used as internal conversion factor.
The reference power is calculated as follows:
- 2 * Pi * reference speed / 60 * reference torque (motor)
- reference voltage * reference current * root(3) (infeed)
Description: Sets the reference quantity for angle.
All angles specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
Note: For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) an appropriate pre-assignment is only made if the parameter
is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1. If a BICO interconnection is established between different
physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor.
Description: Sets the reference quantity for acceleration rates.
All acceleration rates specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
r2004 Reference power / Reference power
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: 14_10 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
p2005 Reference angle / Reference angle
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
90.00 [°] 180.00 [°] 90.00 [°]
p2007 Reference acceleration / Ref accel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.01 [rev/s²] 500000.00 [rev/s²] 0.01 [rev/s²]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-431
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) an appropriate pre-assignment is only made if the parameter
is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1. If a BICO interconnection is established between different
physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor.
The reference acceleration is calculated as follows:
Reference speed (p2000) converted from 1/min to 1/s divided by 1 s
--> p2007 = p2000 [rpm] / (60 [s/min] * 1 [s])
Description: Displays the receive errors at the commissioning interface (RS232).
Index: [0] = Number of error-free telegrams
[1] = Number of rejected telegrams
[2] = Number of framing errors
[3] = Number of overrun errors
[4] = Number of parity errors
[5] = Number of starting character errors
[6] = Number of checksum errors
[7] = Number of length errors
Description: Sets the baud rate for the fieldbus interface USS.
Value: 4: 2400 Baud
5: 4800 Baud
6: 9600 Baud
7: 19200 Baud
8: 38400 Baud
9: 57600 Baud
10: 76800 Baud
11: 93750 Baud
12: 115200 Baud
13: 187500 Baud
Note: Field bus interface.
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
r2019[0...7] Comm int error statistics / Comm err
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p2020 Field bus interface baud rate / Field bus baud
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
4 13 8
Parameter
List of parameters
1-432 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays or sets the address for the fieldbus interface.
The address can be set as follows:
1) Using the address switch on the Control Unit.
--> p2021 displays the address setting.
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
2) Using p2021
--> Only if an address of 0 or an address which is invalid for the fieldbus selected in p2030 has been set using the
address switch.
--> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM".
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Dependency: Refer to: p2030
Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PZD part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface.
Dependency: Refer to: p2030
Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PKW part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface.
Value: 0: PKW 0 words
3: PKW 3 words
4: PKW 4 words
127: PKW variable
Dependency: Refer to: p2030
Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p2021 Field bus interface address / Field bus address
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 30 0
p2022 Field bus int USS PZD no. / Field bus USS PZD
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 16 2
p2023 Field bus int USS PKW no. / Field bus USS PKW
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 127 127
List of parameters
Parameter
1-433
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the receive errors on the field bus interface (USS).
Index: [0] = Number of error-free telegrams
[1] = Number of rejected telegrams
[2] = Number of framing errors
[3] = Number of overrun errors
[4] = Number of parity errors
[5] = Number of starting character errors
[6] = Number of checksum errors
[7] = Number of length errors
Description: Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface.
Value: 3: PROFIBUS
6: USS(RS232) at X140
Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Displays the effective control word 1 (STW1) of the drive for the master control.
Notice: The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control words/setpoints can be trans-
ferred from another automation device.
Note: OC: Operating condition
r2029[0...7] Field bus int error statistics / Field bus error
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p2030 Field bus int protocol selection / Field bus protocol
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
3 6 3
r2032 Master control, control word effective / PcCtrl STW eff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OC / OFF2 Yes No -
02 OC / OFF3 Yes No -
03 Operation enable Yes No -
04 Ramp-function generator enable Yes No -
05 Start ramp-function generator Yes No -
06 Speed setpoint enable Yes No -
07 Acknowledge fault Yes No -
08 Jog bit 0 Yes No 3030
09 Jog bit 1 Yes No 3030
10 Master ctrl by PLC Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-434 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the drive object number for communication via the field bus interface (USS).
Dependency: Refer to: p0978
Note: p2035 defines the destination for USS parameter requests (PIV).
p0978[0] defines the destination for USS process data (PZD).
The parameter is available globally on all drive objects.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Sets the processing mode for PROFIdrive STW1.10 "master control by PLC".
Generally, control world 1 is received with the first receive word (PZD1) (this is in conformance to the PROFIdrive
profile). The behavior of STW1.10 = 0 corresponds to that of the PROFIdrive profile. For other applications that
deviate from this, the behavior can be adapted using this particular parameter.
Value: 0: Freeze setpoints and continue to process sign-of-life
1: Freeze setpoints and sign-of-life
2: Setpoints are not frozen
Recommend.: Do not change the setting p2037 = 0.
Note: If the STW1 is not transferred according to the PROFIdrive with PZD1 (with bit 10 "master control by PLC"), then
p2037 should be set to 2.
Description: Sets the interface mode of the PROFIdrive control words and status words.
When selecting a telegram via p0922 (p2079), this parameter influences the device-specific assignment of the bits
in the control and status words.
Value: 0: SINAMICS
1: SIMODRIVE 611 universal
2: VIK-NAMUR
Dependency: Refer to: p0922, p2079
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: For p0922 (p2079) = 100 ... 199, p2038 is automatically set to 1 and p2038 can no longer be changed. This means
that for these telegrams, the "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" interface mode is set and cannot be changed.
p2035 Fieldbus interface USS PIV drive object number / Fieldbus USS DO_no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 62 2
p2037 PROFIdrive STW1.10 = 0 mode / PD STW1.10=0 mode
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
p2038 PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode / PD STW/ZSW IF mode
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-435
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The serial interface for the debug monitor is COM1 (X140) or COM2 (internal).
Value = 0: COM2 (internal)
Value = 1: COM1 (X140), commissioning protocol is deactivated
Value = 2: COM2 (internal)
Value = 3: Reserved
Description: Sets the monitoring time to monitor the process data received via the fieldbus interface.
If no process data is received within this time, an appropriate message is output.
Dependency: Refer to: F01910
Note: 0: The monitoring is deactivated.
Description: Sets the PROFIBUS Ident Number (PNO-ID).
SINAMICS can be operated with various identities on PROFIBUS. This allows the use of a PROFIBUS GSD that is
independent of the device (e.g. PROFIdrive VIK-NAMUR with Ident Number 3AA0 hex).
Value: 0: SINAMICS S/G
1: VIK-NAMUR
Note: Every change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Description: Displays the PROFIdrive PZD state.
p2039 Select debug monitor interface / Sel. debug monitor
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time / Fieldbus t_monit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 65535000 [ms] 100 [ms]
p2042 PROFIBUS Ident Number / PB Ident No.
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
r2043.0...2 BO: PROFIdrive PZD state / PD PZD state
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Setpoint failure Yes No -
01 Clock cycle synchronous operation active Yes No -
02 Fieldbus running Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-436 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p2044
Note: When using the "setpoint failure" signal, the bus can be monitored and an application-specific response triggered
when the setpoint fails.
Description: Sets the delay time to initiate fault F01910 after a setpoint failure.
The time until the fault is initiated can be used by the application. This means that is is possible to respond to the
failure while the drive is still operational (e.g. emergency retraction).
Dependency: Refer to: r2043
Refer to: F01910
Description: Connector input for the sign-of-life of the clock synchronous PROFIBUS/PROFINET master.
The sign-of-life is expected at bits 12 to 15. Bits 0 to 11 are not evaluated.
The sign-of-life signal is normally received in PZD4 (control word 2) from the PROFIBUS/PROFINET master.
Dependency: Refer to: p0925, r2065
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Sets the additional monitoring time to monitor the process data received via PROFIBUS.
The additional monitoring time enables short bus faults to be compensated.
If no process data is received within this time, an appropriate message is output.
Recommend.: Do not set the additional monitoring time for clock-synchronous operation.
Dependency: Refer to: F01910
p2044 PROFIdrive fault delay / PD fault delay
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [s] 100 [s] 0 [s]
p2045 CI: PROFIdrive clock-cyc. synchr. master sign-of-life, signal source /
PD mast-SoL S_src
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2047 PROFIBUS additional monitoring time / PB suppl t_monit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 20000 [ms] 0 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-437
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the sampling time for the cyclic interface 1 (IF1).
Note: For clock cycle synchronous operation, the specified bus cycle time applies (Tdp).
Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
Dependency: Refer to: r2060
Note: IF1: Interface 1
p2048 IF1 PROFIdrive PZD sampling time / IF1 PZD t_sample
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1.00 [ms] 16.00 [ms] 4.00 [ms]
r2050[0...4] CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive word / IF1 PZD recv word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150, TB30,
TM31
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2050[0...3] CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive word / IF1 PZD recv word
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2440, 2468
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-438 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30
[30] = PZD 31
[31] = PZD 32
Dependency: Refer to: r2060
Note: IF1: Interface 1
r2050[0...31] CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive word / IF1 PZD recv word
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2440, 2468
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-439
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Dependency: Refer to: p2061
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: IF1: Interface 1
p2051[0...14] CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send word / IF1 PZD send word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2051[0...11] CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send word / IF1 PZD send word
ENCODER Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2470
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-440 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30
[30] = PZD 31
[31] = PZD 32
Dependency: Refer to: p2061
p2051[0...4] CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send word / IF1 PZD send word
TB30, TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2051[0...31] CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send word / IF1 PZD send word
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2470
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-441
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
Note: IF1: Interface 1
r2053[0...14] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send word / IF1 diag send word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-442 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Dependency: Refer to: p2051, p2061
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
r2053[0...11] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send word / IF1 diag send word
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2450, 2470
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
r2053[0...4] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send word / IF1 diag send word
TB30, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-443
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30
[30] = PZD 31
[31] = PZD 32
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
r2053[0...31] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send word / IF1 diag send word
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2450, 2470
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-444 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p2051, p2061
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Status display for the PROFIBUS interface.
Value: 0: Off
1: No connection (search for baud rate)
2: Connection OK (baud rate found)
3: Cyclic connection with master (data exchange)
4: Cyclic data OK
Note: Re r2054 = 3:
In state 3 (the LED flashes green), a cyclic connection has been established to the PROFIBUS master; however,
one of the following prerequisites is missing for cyclic operation:
- No setpoints are being received as the PROFIBUS master is in the STOP condition.
Only for clock-cycle synchronous operation, the following applies:
- The drive is not in synchronism as the global control (GC) has an error.
Re r2054 = 4:
In the status 4 (LED green), the cyclic connection to the PROFIBUS master has been established and setpoints are
being received. The clock cycle synchronization is OK, the global control (GC) is error-free.
This state does not provide any statement regarding the quality of the clock cycle synchronous sign-of-life charac-
ters on the drive objects.
Description: Diagnostics display for the PROFIBUS interface.
Index: [0] = Master bus address
[1] = Master input total length bytes
[2] = Master output total length bytes
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
r2054 PROFIBUS status / PB status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 -
r2055[0...2] PROFIBUS diagnostics standard / PB diag standard
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-445
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the setting of the PROFIBUS address switch "DP ADDRESS" on the Control Unit.
Dependency: Refer to: p0918
Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with double word format received from the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
Dependency: Refer to: r2050
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with double word format received from the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
[15] = PZD 16 + 17
[16] = PZD 17 + 18
[17] = PZD 18 + 19
[18] = PZD 19 + 20
[19] = PZD 20 + 21
[20] = PZD 21 + 22
[21] = PZD 22 + 23
[22] = PZD 23 + 24
r2057 PROFIBUS address switch diagnostics / PB addr diagn
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2060[0...2] CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive double word / IF1 PZD recv DW
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2440, 2468
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2060[0...30] CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive double word / IF1 PZD recv DW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2440, 2468
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-446 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
[23] = PZD 24 + 25
[24] = PZD 25 + 26
[25] = PZD 26 + 27
[26] = PZD 27 + 28
[27] = PZD 28 + 29
[28] = PZD 29 + 30
[29] = PZD 30 + 31
[30] = PZD 31 + 32
Dependency: Refer to: r2050
Notice: A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used.
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with double word format to be sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
Dependency: Refer to: p2051
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with double word format to be sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
p2061[0...10] CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send double word / IF1 PZD send DW
ENCODER Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2470
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2061[0...30] CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send double word / IF1 PZD send DW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2470
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-447
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
[15] = PZD 16 + 17
[16] = PZD 17 + 18
[17] = PZD 18 + 19
[18] = PZD 19 + 20
[19] = PZD 20 + 21
[20] = PZD 21 + 22
[21] = PZD 22 + 23
[22] = PZD 23 + 24
[23] = PZD 24 + 25
[24] = PZD 25 + 26
[25] = PZD 26 + 27
[26] = PZD 27 + 28
[27] = PZD 28 + 29
[28] = PZD 29 + 30
[29] = PZD 30 + 31
[30] = PZD 31 + 32
Dependency: Refer to: p2051
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with double word format sent to the PROFIBUS/PROFINET master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
r2063[0...10] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send double word / IF1 diag send DW
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2450, 2470
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
16 Bit 16 On Off -
17 Bit 17 On Off -
18 Bit 18 On Off -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-448 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used.
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with double word format sent to the PROFIBUS/PROFINET master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
[15] = PZD 16 + 17
[16] = PZD 17 + 18
[17] = PZD 18 + 19
[18] = PZD 19 + 20
[19] = PZD 20 + 21
[20] = PZD 21 + 22
[21] = PZD 22 + 23
[22] = PZD 23 + 24
[23] = PZD 24 + 25
[24] = PZD 25 + 26
[25] = PZD 26 + 27
[26] = PZD 27 + 28
[27] = PZD 28 + 29
[28] = PZD 29 + 30
[29] = PZD 30 + 31
[30] = PZD 31 + 32
19 Bit 19 On Off -
20 Bit 20 On Off -
21 Bit 21 On Off -
22 Bit 22 On Off -
23 Bit 23 On Off -
24 Bit 24 On Off -
25 Bit 25 On Off -
26 Bit 26 On Off -
27 Bit 27 On Off -
28 Bit 28 On Off -
29 Bit 29 On Off -
30 Bit 30 On Off -
31 Bit 31 On Off -
r2063[0...30] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send double word / IF1 diag send DW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2450, 2470
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-449
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used.
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Displays the last parameter received from the fieldbus master for clock synchronism.
The parameters for clock synchronism are created when configuring the bus and are transferred at the start of
cyclic operation from the master to the slave.
Index: [0] = Clock synchronous mode activated
[1] = Bus cycle time (Tdp) [µs]
[2] = Master cycle time (Tmapc) [µs]
[3] = Instant of actual value acquisition (Ti) [µs]
[4] = Instant of setpoint acquisition (To) [µs]
[5] = Data exchange interval (Tdx) [µs]
[6] = PLL window (Tpll-w) [1/12 µs]
[7] = PLL delay time (Tpll-d) [1/12 µs]
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
16 Bit 16 On Off -
17 Bit 17 On Off -
18 Bit 18 On Off -
19 Bit 19 On Off -
20 Bit 20 On Off -
21 Bit 21 On Off -
22 Bit 22 On Off -
23 Bit 23 On Off -
24 Bit 24 On Off -
25 Bit 25 On Off -
26 Bit 26 On Off -
27 Bit 27 On Off -
28 Bit 28 On Off -
29 Bit 29 On Off -
30 Bit 30 On Off -
31 Bit 31 On Off -
r2064[0...7] PROFIdrive diagnostics clock synchronous mode / PD diag clock sync
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-450 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays how often the sign-of-life from the clock synchronous fieldbus master failed.
An appropriate fault is output when the tolerance, specified in p0925, is exceeded.
Dependency: Refer to: F01912
Description: Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data (PZD) is received.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
0 - 125: Bus address of the sender
65535: Not assigned
Description: Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data (PZD) is received.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
0 - 125: Bus address of the sender
65535: Not assigned
r2065 PROFIdrive master sign-of-life, diagnostics / PD mast-SoL diag
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2074[0...4] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF1diag addr recv
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150, TB30,
TM31
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2074[0...3] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF1diag addr recv
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-451
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data (PZD) is received.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30
[30] = PZD 31
[31] = PZD 32
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
0 - 125: Bus address of the sender
65535: Not assigned
r2074[0...31] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF1diag addr recv
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-452 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive receive telegram (master output).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
65535: Not assigned
Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive receive telegram (master output).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
65535: Not assigned
Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive receive telegram (master output).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
r2075[0...4] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF1 diag offs recv
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150, TB30,
TM31
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2075[0...3] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF1 diag offs recv
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2075[0...31] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF1 diag offs recv
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-453
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30
[30] = PZD 31
[31] = PZD 32
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
65535: Not assigned
Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (master output).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
65535: Not assigned
r2076[0...14] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF1 diag offs send
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-454 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (master output).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
65535: Not assigned
Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (master output).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
65535: Not assigned
r2076[0...11] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF1 diag offs send
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2076[0...4] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF1 diag offs send
TB30, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-455
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (master output).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30
[30] = PZD 31
[31] = PZD 32
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
65535: Not assigned
Description: Displays the addresses of the slaves (peers) where peer-to-peer data transfer has been configured via PROFIBUS.
r2076[0...31] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF1 diag offs send
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2077[0...15] PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses / PB diag peer addr
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-456 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.
Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded.
For p0922 < 999 the following applies:
p2079 has the same value and is inhibited. All of the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are
inhibited.
For p0922 = 999 the following applies:
p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to 999, then all of the interconnections can be set.
For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999 the following applies:
The interconnections contained in the telegram are inhibited. However, the telegram can be extended.
Value: 390: SIEMENS telegram 390, PZD-2/2
391: SIEMENS telegram 391, PZD-3/7
392: SIEMENS telegram 392, PZD-3/15
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.
Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded.
For p0922 < 999 the following applies:
p2079 has the same value and is inhibited. All of the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are
inhibited.
For p0922 = 999 the following applies:
p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to 999, then all of the interconnections can be set.
For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999 the following applies:
The interconnections contained in the telegram are inhibited. However, the telegram can be extended.
Value: 81: SIEMENS telegram 81, PZD-2/6
82: SIEMENS telegram 82, PZD-2/7
83: SIEMENS telegram 83, PZD-2/8
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: Refer to: p0922
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / PD PZD telegr ext
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
390 999 999
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / PD PZD telegr ext
ENCODER Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
81 999 999
List of parameters
Parameter
1-457
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.
Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded.
For p0922 < 999 the following applies:
p2079 has the same value and is inhibited. All of the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are
inhibited.
For p0922 = 999 the following applies:
p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to 999, then all of the interconnections can be set.
For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999 the following applies:
The interconnections contained in the telegram are inhibited. However, the telegram can be extended.
Value: 1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
2: Standard telegram 2, PZD-4/4
20: Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
220: SIEMENS telegram 220, PZD-10/10
352: SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: Refer to: p0922
Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.
Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded.
For p0922 < 999 the following applies:
p2079 has the same value and is inhibited. All of the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are
inhibited.
For p0922 = 999 the following applies:
p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to 999, then all of the interconnections can be set.
For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999 the following applies:
The interconnections contained in the telegram are inhibited. However, the telegram can be extended.
Value: 1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
2: Standard telegram 2, PZD-4/4
3: Standard telegram 3, PZD-5/9
4: Standard telegram 4, PZD-6/14
20: Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
220: SIEMENS telegram 220, PZD-10/10
352: SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: Refer to: p0922
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / PD PZD telegr ext
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 999 999
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / PD PZD telegr ext
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 999 999
Parameter
List of parameters
1-458 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the fieldbus master.
The individual bits are combined to form status word 1.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the fieldbus master.
The individual bits are combined to form status word 2.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
p2080[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 1 / Bin/con ZSW1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2472
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2081[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 2 / Bin/con ZSW2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2472
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-459
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: For clock synchronous operation, bit 12 to 15 to transfer the sign-of-life are reserved in status word 2 - and may not
be freely interconnected.
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the fieldbus master.
The individual bits are combined to form free status word 3.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the fieldbus master.
The individual bits are combined to form free status word 4.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
p2082[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 3 / Bin/con ZSW3
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2472
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2083[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 4 / Bin/con ZSW4
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2472
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-460 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the fieldbus master.
The individual bits are combined to form free status word 5.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector connector converter.
Index: [0] = Status word 1
[1] = Status word 2
[2] = Free status word 3
[3] = Free status word 4
[4] = Free status word 5
p2084[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 5 / Bin/con ZSW5
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2472
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2088[0...4] Invert binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW inv
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2472
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Inverted Not inverted -
01 Bit 1 Inverted Not inverted -
02 Bit 2 Inverted Not inverted -
03 Bit 3 Inverted Not inverted -
04 Bit 4 Inverted Not inverted -
05 Bit 5 Inverted Not inverted -
06 Bit 6 Inverted Not inverted -
07 Bit 7 Inverted Not inverted -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-461
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083, r2089
Description: Connector output to interconnect the status words to a PZD send word.
Index: [0] = Status word 1
[1] = Status word 2
[2] = Free status word 3
[3] = Free status word 4
[4] = Free status word 5
Dependency: Refer to: p2051, p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083
Note: r2089 together with p2080 to p2084 forms five binector-connector converters.
08 Bit 8 Inverted Not inverted -
09 Bit 9 Inverted Not inverted -
10 Bit 10 Inverted Not inverted -
11 Bit 11 Inverted Not inverted -
12 Bit 12 Inverted Not inverted -
13 Bit 13 Inverted Not inverted -
14 Bit 14 Inverted Not inverted -
15 Bit 15 Inverted Not inverted -
r2089[0...4] CO: Send binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW send
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2472
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-462 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD1 (normally control word 1) received from the PROFIBUS mas-
ter.
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD2 received from the PROFIBUS master.
Note: IF1: Interface 1
r2090.0...15 BO: IF1 PROFIBUS PZD1 receive bit-serial / IF1 PZD1 recv bitw
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2468
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
r2091.0...15 BO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD2 receive bit-serial / IF1PZD2recvbitw
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2468
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-463
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD3 received from the PROFIBUS master.
Note: IF1: Interface 1
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD4 (normally control word 2) received from the PROFIBUS mas-
ter.
Note: IF1: Interface 1
r2092.0...15 BO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD3 receive bit-serial / IF1PZD3recvbitw
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2468
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
r2093.0...15 BO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD4 receive bit-serial / IF1PZD4recvbitw
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2468
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-464 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Binector output for bit-serial onward interconnection of a PZD word received from the fieldbus master.
The PZD is selected via p2099[0].
Dependency: Refer to: p2099
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD word received from the fieldbus master.
The PZD is selected via p2099[1].
r2094.0...15 BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2468
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
r2095.0...15 BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2468
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-465
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p2099
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector outputs of the connector-binector converter.
Using p2098[0], the signals of CI: p2099[0] are influenced.
Using p2098[1], the signals of CI: p2099[1] are influenced.
Dependency: Refer to: r2094, r2095, p2099
Description: Sets the signal source for the connector-binector converter.
A PZD receive word can be selected as signal source. The signals are available to be serially passed-on (intercon-
nection).
Dependency: Refer to: r2094, r2095
Note: From the signal source set via the connector input, the corresponding lower 16 bits are converted.
p2099[0...1] together with r2094.0...15 and r2095.0...15 forms two connector-binector converters:
Connector input p2099[0] to binector output in r2094.0...15
Connector input p2099[1] to binector output in r2095.0...15
p2098[0...1] Inverter connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp inv
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2468
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Inverted Not inverted -
01 Bit 1 Inverted Not inverted -
02 Bit 2 Inverted Not inverted -
03 Bit 3 Inverted Not inverted -
04 Bit 4 Inverted Not inverted -
05 Bit 5 Inverted Not inverted -
06 Bit 6 Inverted Not inverted -
07 Bit 7 Inverted Not inverted -
08 Bit 8 Inverted Not inverted -
09 Bit 9 Inverted Not inverted -
10 Bit 10 Inverted Not inverted -
11 Bit 11 Inverted Not inverted -
12 Bit 12 Inverted Not inverted -
13 Bit 13 Inverted Not inverted -
14 Bit 14 Inverted Not inverted -
15 Bit 15 Inverted Not inverted -
p2099[0...1] CI: Connector-binector converter signal source / Con/bin S_src
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2468
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-466 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the faults for which the fault response should be changed
Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index.
Refer to: p2101
Notice: For the following cases, it is not possible to re-parameterize the fault response to a fault:
- if there is no existing fault number.
- the message type is not "fault" (F).
- when a fault is present.
p2100[0...19] Setting the fault number for fault response / F_no F response
All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8075
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 [0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-467
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the fault response for the selected fault.
Value: 0: NONE
Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index.
p2101[0...19] Setting the fault response / Fault response
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8075
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 0 [0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-468 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the fault response for the selected fault.
Value: 0: NONE
1: OFF1
2: OFF2
3: OFF3
4: STOP1 (being developed)
5: STOP2
6: IASC/DCBRAKE
7: ENCODER (p0491)
Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index.
Refer to: p2100
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the response to a specific fault for faults that are already present (queued).
Note: The fault response can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification (see the List Manual, chapter
"Faults and alarms").
Example:
F12345 and fault response = OFF3 (OFF1, OFF2, NONE)
--> The default fault response OFF3 can be changed to OFF1, OFF2 or NONE.
Re value = 1 (OFF1):
Braking along the ramp-function generator down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit.
Re value = 2 (OFF2):
Internal/external pulse inhibit.
Re value = 3 (OFF3):
Braking along the OFF3 down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit.
Re value = 5 (STOP2):
n_set = 0
p2101[0...19] Setting the fault response / Fault response
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8075
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 7 [0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-469
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Re value = 6 (armature short-circuit, internal/DC brake):
The value can only be set for all motor data sets when p1231 = 3, 4.
a) For synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx, 4xx), an internal armature short-circuit is executed.
b) For induction motors (p0300 = 1xx), a DC brake is initiated.
Re value = 7 (ENCODER (p0491)):
The fault response set in p0491 is executed if applicable.
Note:
IASC: Internal armature short circuit
DCBRAKE: Direct current brake
Description: Sets the signal source to acknowledge all faults at all drive objects of the drive system.
Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal.
Description: Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal.
Description: Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal.
p2102 BI: Acknowledge all faults / Ackn all faults
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2546, 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2103 BI: 1. Acknowledge faults / 1. Acknowledge
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2103[0...n] BI: 1. Acknowledge faults / 1. Acknowledge
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2441, 2442,
2443, 2447, 2475, 2546, 9220,
9677, 9678
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-470 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal.
Description: Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal.
Description: Sets the third signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal.
Description: Sets the third signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal.
p2104 BI: 2. Acknowledge faults / 2. Acknowledge
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2104[0...n] BI: 2. Acknowledge faults / 2. Acknowledge
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2546, 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2105 BI: 3. Acknowledge faults / 3. Acknowledge
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2105[0...n] BI: 3. Acknowledge faults / 3. Acknowledge
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2546, 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-471
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 1.
Dependency: Refer to: F07860
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects.
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 1.
Dependency: Refer to: F07860
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects.
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 2.
Dependency: Refer to: F07861
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects.
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 2.
Dependency: Refer to: F07861
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects.
p2106 BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p2106[0...n] BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p2107 BI: External fault 2 / External fault 2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p2107[0...n] BI: External fault 2 / External fault 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-472 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 3.
External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency: Refer to: p3110, p3111, p3112
Refer to: F07862
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects.
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 3.
External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency: Refer to: p3110, p3111, p3112
Refer to: F07862
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects.
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault was removed.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2114, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3115, r3120, r3122
Notice: The time comprises r2136 (days) and r2109 (milliseconds).
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
p2108 BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p2108[0...n] BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
r2109[0...63] Fault time removed in milliseconds / t_flt resolved ms
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-473
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: This parameter is identical to r2122.
Description: Number of alarms that have occurred after the last reset.
Dependency: When p2111 is set to 0, the following is initiated:
- all of the alarms of the alarm buffer that have gone [0...7] are transferred into the alarm history [8...63].
- the alarm buffer [0...7] is deleted.
Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125
Note: The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 1.
Dependency: Refer to: A07850
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 1.
Dependency: Refer to: A07850
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
r2110[0...63] Alarm number / Alarm number
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter
All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
p2112 BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p2112[0...n] BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-474 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the total system runtime for the drive unit.
The time comprises r2114[0] (milliseconds) and r2114[1] (days).
After r2114[0] has reached a value of 86.400.000 ms (24 hours) this value is reset and r2114[1] is incremented.
Index: [0] = Milliseconds
[1] = Days
Dependency: Refer to: r0948, r2109, r2123, r2125, r2130, r2136, r2145, r2146
Note: The time in r2114 is used to display the fault and alarm times.
When the electronic power supply is switched out, the counter value is saved.
After the drive unit is powered up, the counter continues to run with the value that was saved the last time that the
drive unit was powered down.
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 2.
Dependency: Refer to: A07851
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 2.
Dependency: Refer to: A07851
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
r2114[0...1] System runtime / System runtime
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p2116 BI: External alarm 2 / External alarm 2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p2116[0...n] BI: External alarm 2 / External alarm 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-475
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 3.
Dependency: Refer to: A07852
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 3.
Dependency: Refer to: A07852
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
Description: Selects faults or alarms for which the message type should be changed.
Dependency: Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index.
Refer to: p2119
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the message type in the following cases:
- if there is no existing message number.
- if a message is present.
Description: Sets the message type for the selected fault or alarm.
Value: 1: Fault (F)
2: Alarm (A)
3: No message (N)
Dependency: Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index.
Refer to: p2118
p2117 BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p2117[0...n] BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p2118[0...19] Sets the message number for message type. / Msg_no Msg_type
All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8075
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
p2119[0...19] Setting the message type / Message type
All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8075
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 3 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-476 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the message type for the existing faults or alarms.
Note: The message type can only be changed for messages with the appropriate identification.
Example:
F12345(A) --> Fault F12345 can be changed to alarm A12345.
In this case, the message number that may be possibly entered in p2100[0...19] and p2126[0...19] is automatically
removed.
Description: Displays the sum of all of the fault and alarm buffer changes in the drive unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0944, r2121
Description: This counter is incremented every time the alarm buffer changes.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125
Description: Displays the number of alarms that have occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
Alarm buffer structure (general principle):
r2122[0], r2124[0], r2123[0], r2125[0] --> alarm 1 (the oldest)
. . .
r2122[7], r2124[7], r2123[7], r2125[7] --> Alarm 8 (the latest)
When the alarm buffer is full, the alarms that have gone are entered into the alarm history:
r2122[8], r2124[8], r2123[8], r2125[8] --> Alarm 1 (the latest)
. . .
r2122[63], r2124[63], r2123[63], r2125[63] --> alarm 56 (the oldest)
r2120 CO: Sum of fault and alarm buffer changes / Sum buffer changed
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2121 CO: Counter, alarm buffer changes / Alrm buff changed
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2122[0...63] Alarm code / Alarm code
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-477
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2114, r2122, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123
Notice: The time comprises r2145 (days) and r2123 (milliseconds).
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
Description: Displays additional information about the active alarm (as integer number).
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm was cleared.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2114, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123
Notice: The time comprises r2146 (days) and r2125 (milliseconds).
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
Description: Selects the faults for which the acknowledge mode is to be changed
Dependency: Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index
Refer to: p2127
r2123[0...63] Alarm time received in milliseconds / t_alarm recv ms
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
r2124[0...63] Alarm value / Alarm value
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2125[0...63] Alarm time removed in milliseconds / t_alarm res ms
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
p2126[0...19] Setting fault number for acknowledge mode / Fault_no ackn_mode
All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8075
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-478 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the acknowledge mode of a fault in the following cases:
- if there is no existing fault number.
- the message type is not "fault" (F).
- when a fault is present.
Description: Sets the acknowledge mode for selected fault.
Value: 1: Acknowledgment only using POWER ON
2: Ack IMMEDIATELY after the fault cause has been removed
3: Acknowledgement only for PULSE INHIBIT
Dependency: Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index
Refer to: p2126
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the acknowledge mode of a fault in the following cases:
- if there is no existing fault number.
- the message type is not "fault" (F).
- when a fault is present.
Note: The acknowledge mode can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification.
Example:
F12345 and acknowledge mode = POWER ON (IMMEDIATELY) --> The acknowledge mode can be changed from
POWER ON to IMMEDIATELY.
Description: Selects faults or alarms which can be used as trigger.
Dependency: Refer to: r2129
Description: Trigger signal for the selected faults and alarms
p2127[0...19] Sets acknowledgement mode / Acknowledge mode
All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8075
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 3 1
p2128[0...15] Selecting fault/alarm code for trigger / Message trigger
All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8070
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
r2129.0...15 CO/BO: Trigger word for faults and alarms / Trigger word
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1530, 8070
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-479
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: If one of the faults or alarms selected in p2128[n] occurs, then the particular bit of this binector output is set.
Refer to: p2128
Note: CO: r2129 = 0 --> None of the selected messages has occurred.
CO: r2129 > 0 --> At least one of the selected messages has occurred.
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the fault occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2114, r2133, r2136, r3115, r3120, r3122
Notice: The time comprises r2130 (days) and r0948 (milliseconds).
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
Description: Displays the code of the oldest active fault.
Note: 0: No fault present.
Description: Displays the code of the last alarm that occurred.
Note: 0: No alarm present.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Trigger signal p2128[0] On Off -
01 Trigger signal p2128[1] On Off -
02 Trigger signal p2128[2] On Off -
03 Trigger signal p2128[3] On Off -
04 Trigger signal p2128[4] On Off -
05 Trigger signal p2128[5] On Off -
06 Trigger signal p2128[6] On Off -
07 Trigger signal p2128[7] On Off -
08 Trigger signal p2128[8] On Off -
09 Trigger signal p2128[9] On Off -
10 Trigger signal p2128[10] On Off -
11 Trigger signal p2128[11] On Off -
12 Trigger signal p2128[12] On Off -
13 Trigger signal p2128[13] On Off -
14 Trigger signal p2128[14] On Off -
15 Trigger signal p2128[15] On Off -
r2130[0...63] Fault time received in days / t_fault recv days
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2131 CO: Actual fault code / Actual fault code
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2132 CO: Actual alarm code / Actual alarm code
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-480 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays additional information about the fault that occurred for float values.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2136, r3115
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
Description: Displays additional information about the active alarm for float values.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
Description: Displays the second status word of faults and alarms.
r2133[0...63] Fault value for float values / Fault val float
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2134[0...63] Alarm value for float values / Alarm value float
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2135.0...15 CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 2 / ZSW fault/alarm 2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1530, 2548
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fault encoder 1 Yes No -
01 Fault encoder 2 Yes No -
02 Fault encoder 3 Yes No -
10 Fault transformer overtemperature Yes No -
11 Alarm transformer overtemperature Yes No -
12 Fault motor overtemperature Yes No -
13 Fault power unit thermal overload Yes No -
14 Alarm motor overtemperature Yes No -
15 Alarm power unit thermal overload Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-481
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the second status word of faults and alarms.
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the fault was removed.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2114, r2130, r2133, r3115, r3120, r3122
Notice: The time comprises r2136 (days) and r2109 (milliseconds).
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
Description: Displays the control word of the faults and alarms.
Dependency: Refer to: p2103, p2104, p2105, p2106, p2107, p2108, p2112, p2116, p2117, p3110, p3111, p3112
r2135.0...15 CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 2 / ZSW fault/alarm 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1530, 2548
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fault encoder 1 Yes No -
01 Fault encoder 2 Yes No -
02 Fault encoder 3 Yes No -
12 Fault motor overtemperature Yes No -
13 Fault power unit thermal overload Yes No -
14 Alarm motor overtemperature Yes No -
15 Alarm power unit thermal overload Yes No -
r2136[0...63] Fault time removed in days / t_flt resolv. days
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2138.7...15 CO/BO: Control word faults/alarms / STW fault/alarm
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1530, 2546
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
07 Acknowledge fault Yes No -
10 External alarm 1 (A07850) effective Yes No -
11 External alarm 2 (A07851) effective Yes No -
12 External alarm 3 (A07852) effective Yes No -
13 External fault 1 (F07860) effective Yes No -
14 External fault 2 (F07861) effective Yes No -
15 External fault 3 (F07862) effective Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-482 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the first status word of faults and alarms.
Note: Re bit 03, 05, 07:
These bits are set if at least one fault/alarm occurs. Data is entered into the fault/alarm buffer with delay. This is the
reason that the fault/alarm buffer should only be read if, after "fault present"/"alarm present" has occurred, a change
in the buffer was also detected (r0944, r9744, r2121).
Re bit 06, 08:
These status bits are used for internal diagnostic purposes only.
Re bit 11, 12:
These status bits are used for the classification of internal alarm classes and are intended for diagnostic purposes
only on certain automation systems with SINAMICS functionality.
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals:
"|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1)
"|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2)
Dependency: Refer to: p2155, r2197
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "f or n comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO: r2199.1).
Dependency: Refer to: p2142, r2199
r2139.0...12 CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 1 / ZSW fault/alarm 1
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1530, 2548
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Being acknowledged Yes No -
01 Acknowledgment required Yes No -
03 Fault present Yes No -
05 Safety message present Yes No -
06 Internal message 1 present Yes No -
07 Alarm present Yes No -
08 Internal message 2 present Yes No -
11 Alarm class bit 0 High Low -
12 Alarm class bit 1 High Low -
p2140[0...n] Hysteresis speed 2 / n_hysteresis 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm] 90.00 [rpm]
p2141[0...n] Speed threshold 1 / n_thresh val 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 5.00 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-483
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "f or n / v comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO:
r2199.1).
Dependency: Refer to: p2141, r2199
Description: Sets the signal source for the negated enable (0 = enable) of the motor stall monitoring.
Dependency: Refer to: p2163, p2164, p2166, r2197, r2198
Refer to: F07900
Note: If the enable signal is connected to r2197.7 then the stall signal is suppressed if there is no speed setpoint - actual
value deviation.
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2114, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2146, r3121, r3123
Notice: The time comprises r2145 (days) and r2123 (milliseconds).
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm was cleared.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2114, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r3121, r3123
Notice: The time comprises r2146 (days) and r2125 (milliseconds).
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
p2142[0...n] Hysteresis speed 1 / n_hysteresis 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm] 2.00 [rpm]
p2144[0...n] BI: Motor stall monitoring enable (negated) / Mot stall enab neg
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r2145[0...63] Alarm time received in days / t_alarm recv days
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2146[0...63] Alarm time removed in days / t_alarm res days
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-484 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Setting to delete the fault buffer of all existing drive objects.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Start to delete the fault buffer of all drive objects
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136
Note: p2147 is automatically set to 0 after execution.
Description: Sets the signal source for the signal "ramp-function generator active" for the following signals/messages:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on" (BO: r2199.4)
"Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5)
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: The binector input is automatically pre-assigned to r1199.2.
The following applies for SERVO:
The pre-assignment is only made when the function module "setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1).
Description: Configuration word for signals and monitoring functions.
Dependency: Refer to: r2197
Refer to: A07903
p2147 Delete fault buffer of all drive objects / Del fault buffer
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p2148[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator active / HLG active
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2149[0...n] Monitoring configuration / Monit config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8010, 8013
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0001 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable alarm A07903 Yes No 8010
01 Load monitoring only in the 1st quadrant Yes No 8013
03 n_act > p2155 own hysteresis Yes No 8010
15 Automatic parameterization carried out
(p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0)
Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-485
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Re bit 00:
Alarm A07903 is output when the bit is set with r2197.7 = 0 (n_set <> n_act).
Re bit 01:
When the bit is set, load monitoring is only carried out in the 1st quadrant as a result of the positive characteristic
parameters (p2182 ... p2190).
Re bit 03:
When the bit is set, r2197 bit 1 and bit 2 are determined via separate hystereses.
Re bit 15:
The bit indicates whether the automatic parameterization (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) for the parameters of the extended
monitoring functions was carried out. If the bit is not set (e.g. when the configuration is activated (p0108.15)), the
parameterization is automatically carried out during booting even if r3925.0 is already 1.
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals:
"|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0)
"n_set >= 0" (BO: r2198.5)
"n_act >= 0" (BO: r2197.3)
Dependency: Refer to: p2161, r2197, r2199
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed setpoint for the following messages:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off" (BO: r2197.7)
"Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5)
"|n_set| < p2161" (BO: r2198.4)
"n_set > 0" (BO: r2198.5)
Dependency: Refer to: r2197, r2198, r2199
Description: Sets the time constant of the PT1 element to smooth the speed / velocity actual value.
The smoothed actual speed/velocity is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and sig-
nals.
Dependency: Refer to: r2169
p2150[0...n] Hysteresis speed 3 / n_hysteresis 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm] 2.00 [rpm]
p2151[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals / n_set for msg
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1170[0]
p2153[0...n] Speed actual value filter time constant / n_act_filt T
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-486 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 2.
The sum of CI: p2151 and CI: p2154 is used for the following messages/signals:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off" (BO: r2197.7)
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on" (BO: r2199.4)
"Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5)
Dependency: Refer to: p2151, r2197, r2199
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the following messages:
"|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1)
"|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2)
Dependency: Refer to: p2140, r2197
Description: Sets the switch-in delay time for the signal "comparison value reached" (BO: r2199.1).
Dependency: Refer to: p2141, p2142, r2199
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0).
Dependency: Refer to: p2150, r2199
p2154[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint 2 / n_set 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2155[0...n] Speed threshold 2 / n_thresh val 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 900.00 [rpm]
p2156[0...n] On delay, comparison value reached / t_on cmpr val rchd
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
p2161[0...n] Speed threshold 3 / n_thresh val 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 5.00 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-487
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "n_act > n_max" (BO: r2197.6).
Dependency: Refer to: r1084, r1087, r2197
Notice: For p0322 = 0, the following applies: p2162 <= 0.1 * p0311
For p0322 > 0, the following applies: p2162 <= 1.02 * p0322 - p1082
If one of the conditions is violated, p2162 is appropriately and automatically reduced when exiting the commission-
ing mode.
Note: For a negative speed limit (r1087) the hysteresis is effective below the limit value and for a positive speed limit
(r1084) above the limit value.
If significant overshoot occurs in the maximum speed range (e.g. due to load shedding), you are advised to
increase the dynamic response of the speed controller (if possible). If this is insufficient, the hysteresis p2162 can
only be increased by more than 10% of the rated speed when the maximum speed (p0322) of the motor is suffi-
ciently greater than the speed limit p1082.
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message
(BO: r2197.7).
Dependency: Refer to: p2164, p2166, r2197
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/mes-
sage (BO: r2197.7).
Dependency: Refer to: p2163, p2166, r2197
p2162[0...n] Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max / Hyst n_act>n_max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 60000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
p2163[0...n] Speed threshold 4 / n_thresh val 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 90.00 [rpm]
p2164[0...n] Hysteresis speed 4 / n_hysteresis 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 200.00 [rpm] 2.00 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-488 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the switch-off delay time for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message
(BO: r2197.7).
Dependency: Refer to: p2163, p2164, r2197
Description: Sets the switch-on delay for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_on" signal/message (BO:
r2199.4).
Description: Displays the smoothed actual speed for messages/signals.
Dependency: Refer to: p2153
Description: Sets the torque threshold value for the messages:
"Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1 and n_set reached" (BO: r2198.9)
"Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1" (BO: r2198.10)
"Torque setpoint > torque threshold value 1" (BO: r2198.13)
Dependency: Refer to: p2195, r2198
p2166[0...n] Off delay n_act = n_set / t_del_off n_i=n_so
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 200.0 [ms]
p2167[0...n] Switch-on delay n_act = n_set / t_on n_act=n_set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 200.0 [ms]
r2169 CO: Actual speed smoothed signals / n_act smth message
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8010,
8012, 8013
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
p2174[0...n] Torque threshold value 1 / M_thresh val 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 5.13 [Nm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-489
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the message "Motor locked" (BO: r2198.6).
Dependency: Refer to: p0500, p2177, r2198
Note: The following applies for encoderless vector control:
At low speeds in open-loop speed controlled operation (see p1755, p1756), a locked motor cannot be detected.
Description: Sets the delay time for the message "Motor locked" (BO: r2198.6).
If "Motor locked" is identified within this time, then ZSW2.6 is set and an appropriate fault is output.
Dependency: Refer to: p0500, p2175, r2198
Description: Sets the delay time for the message "Motor stalled" (BO: r2198.7).
If "Motor stalled" is identified within this time, then ZSW2.7 is set and an appropriate fault is output.
Dependency: Refer to: r2198
Description: Sets the response when evaluating the load monitoring.
Value: 0: Load monitoring disabled
1: A07920 for torque/speed too low
2: A07921 for torque/speed too high
3: A07922 for torque/speed out of tolerance
4: F07923 for torque/speed too low
5: F07924 for torque/speed too high
6: F07925 for torque/speed out of tolerance
p2175[0...n] Motor locked speed threshold / Mot lock n_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 120.00 [rpm]
p2177[0...n] Motor locked delay time / Mot lock t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 65.000 [s] 1.000 [s]
p2178[0...n] Motor stalled delay time / Mot stall t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 10.000 [s] 0.010 [s]
p2181[0...n] Load monitoring response / Load monit resp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended sig)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-490 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186, p2187, p2188, p2189, p2190, p2192, r2198
Refer to: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925
Note: The response to the faults F07923 ... F07925 can be set. F07926 is evaluated only if p2181 is not zero.
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds:
p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower)
p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower)
p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower)
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184
Refer to: p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186
Refer to: A07926
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds:
p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower)
p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower)
p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower)
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184
Refer to: p2182, p2184, p2187, p2188
Refer to: A07926
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds:
p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower)
p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower)
p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower)
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184
Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2189, p2190
Refer to: A07926
p2182[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 1 / n_thresh 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended sig)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 150.00 [rpm]
p2183[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 2 / n_thresh 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended sig)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 900.00 [rpm]
p2184[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 3 / n_thresh 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended sig)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 1500.00 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-491
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2185 > p2186
Refer to: p2182, p2186
Refer to: A07926
Note: The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189.
Description: Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2186 < p2185
Refer to: p2182, p2185
Refer to: A07926
Note: The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190.
Description: Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2187 > p2188
Refer to: p2183, p2188
Refer to: A07926
Note: The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189.
p2185[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, upper / M_thresh 1 upper
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended sig)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 10000000.00 [Nm]
p2186[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower / M_thresh 1 lower
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended sig)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
p2187[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, upper / M_thresh 2 upper
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended sig)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 10000000.00 [Nm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-492 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2188 < p2187
Refer to: p2183, p2187
Refer to: A07926
Note: The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190.
Description: Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2189 > p2190
Refer to: p2184, p2190
Refer to: A07926
Note: The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189.
Description: Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2190 < p2189
Refer to: p2184, p2189
Refer to: A07926
Note: The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190.
Description: Sets the delay time to evaluate the load monitoring.
p2188[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, lower / M_thresh 2 lower
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended sig)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
p2189[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, upper / M_thresh 3 upper
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended sig)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 10000000.00 [Nm]
p2190[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, lower / M_thresh 3 lower
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended sig)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
p2192[0...n] Load monitoring delay time / Load monit t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended sig)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 65.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-493
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the torque/force threshold value for the signal "Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2" (BO: r2199.11).
The message "torque setpoint < p2174" (BO: r2198.10) and "torque utilization < p2194" (BO: r2199.11) are only
evaluated after the run-up and the delay time has expired.
Dependency: Refer to: r0033, p2195, r2199
Description: Sets the switch-off delay time for the negated signal "run-up completed".
The message "torque setpoint < p2174" (BO: r2198.10) and "torque utilization < p2194" (BO: r2199.11) are only
evaluated after the run-up and the delay time has expired.
Dependency: Refer to: p2174, p2194
Description: Sets the scaling factor for torque utilization (r0033).
Description: Displays the first status word for monitoring functions.
p2194[0...n] Torque threshold value 2 / M_thresh val 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 90.00 [%]
p2195[0...n] Torque utilization switch-off delay / M_util t_off
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 800.0 [ms]
p2196[0...n] Torque utilization scaling / M_util scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
r2197.1...7 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 1 / ZSW monitor 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1530, 2534
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 |n_act| <= speed threshold value 2 Yes No 8010
02 |n_act| > speed threshold value 2 Yes No 8010
03 n_act >= 0 Yes No 8010
06 |n_act| > n_max Yes No 8010
07 Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance
t_off
Yes No 8010
Parameter
List of parameters
1-494 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Re bit 01, 02:
The threshold value is set in p2155 and the hysteresis in p2140.
Re bit 03:
The hysteresis is set in p2150.
Re bit 06:
The hysteresis is set in p2162.
Re bit 07:
The threshold value is set in p2163 and the hysteresis is set in p2164.
Description: Displays the second status word for monitoring functions.
Note: Re bit 07:
For servo drives, bit 07 is not used and is always inactive.
Re bit 10:
The torque threshold value 1 is set in p2174.
Re bit 12:
If the fault condition is removed, bit 12 is reset to 0. This is also the case even if the alarm message is still present.
Description: Displays the third status word for monitoring functions.
r2198.4...12 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 2 / ZSW monitor 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1530, 2536
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
04 |n_set| < p2161 Yes No 8010
05 n_set > 0 Yes No 8010
06 Motor locked Yes No 8012
07 Motor stalled Yes No 8012
10 |M_set| < torque threshold value 1 Yes No 8012
11 Load monitoring signals an alarm Yes No 8013
12 Load monitoring signals a fault condition Yes No 8013
r2199.0...11 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 3 / ZSW monitor 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1530, 2537,
8018
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 |n_act| < speed threshold value 3 Yes No 8010
01 f or n comparison value reached or
exceeded
Yes No 8010
04 Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance
t_on
Yes No 8010
05 Ramp-up/ramp-down completed Yes No 8010
06 Current below the zero current threshold Yes No -
07 Speed deviation model/external in tolerance Yes No 8012
11 Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2 Yes No 8012
List of parameters
Parameter
1-495
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Re bit 00:
The speed threshold value 3 is set in p2161.
Re bit 01:
The comparison value is set in p2141. We recommend setting the hysteresis (p2142) for canceling the bit to a value
lower than that in p2141. Otherwise, the bit will never be reset.
Re bit 11:
The torque threshold value 2 is set in p2194.
Description: Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out the technology controller.
The technology controller is switched in with a 1 signal.
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 2 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 3 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2200[0...n] BI: Technology controller enable / Tec_ctrl enable
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2201[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 1 / Tec_ctrl fix val 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
p2202[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 2 / Tec_ctrl fix val 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 20.00 [%]
p2203[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 3 / Tec_ctrl fix val 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 30.00 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-496 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 4 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 5 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 6 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 7 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2204[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 4 / Tec_ctrl fix val 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 40.00 [%]
p2205[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 5 / Tec_ctrl fix val 5
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 50.00 [%]
p2206[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 6 / Tec_ctrl fix val 6
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 60.00 [%]
p2207[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 7 / Tec_ctrl fix val 7
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 70.00 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-497
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 8 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 9 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 10 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 11 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2208[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 8 / Tec_ctrl fix val 8
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 80.00 [%]
p2209[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 9 / Tec_ctrl fix val 9
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 90.00 [%]
p2210[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 10 / Tec_ctrl fix val10
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
p2211[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 11 / Tec_ctrl fix val11
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 110.00 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-498 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 12 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 13 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 14 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 15 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2212[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 12 / Tec_ctrl fix val12
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 120.00 [%]
p2213[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 13 / Tec_ctrl fix val13
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 130.00 [%]
p2214[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 14 / Tec_ctrl fix val14
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 140.00 [%]
p2215[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 15 / Tec_ctrl fix val15
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 150.00 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-499
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the method that can be used to select the fixed setpoints.
Value: 1: Fixed value selection direct
2: Fixed value selection binary
Description: Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2221, p2222, p2223
Description: Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2222, p2223
Description: Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2223
Description: Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222
p2216[0...n] Technology controller fixed value selection method / Tec_ctr FixVal sel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 2
p2220[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 0
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2221[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2222[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2223[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-500 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the selected and effective fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r2229
Description: Status word of the fixed value selection of the technology controller.
Description: Displays the number of the selected fixed setpoint of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r2224
Description: Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r2231, p2240
Notice: The following prerequisites must be fulfilled in order to be able to save the setpoint in a non-volatile fashion:
- Firmware with V2.3 or higher.
- Control Unit 320 (CU320) with hardware version C or higher (module with NVRAM).
r2224 CO: Technology controller, fixed value effective / Tec_ctr FixVal eff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r2225.0 CO/BO: Technology controller fixed value selection status word / Tec_ctrl FW status
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Technology controller fixed value selected Yes No -
r2229 Technology controller number actual / Tec_ctrl No. act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p2230[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration / Tec_ctr mop config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0100 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Data save active Yes No -
02 Initial rounding-off active Yes No -
03 Non-volatile data save active for p2230.0 =
1
Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-501
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Re bit 00:
0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p2240.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved and after ON is entered using r2231. In order to save in a
non-volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1.
Re bit 02:
0: Without initial rounding-off
1: With initial rounding-off.
The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is a sensitive way of specify-
ing small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed). The jerk for initial rounding is independent of the
ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum value (p2237).
It is calculated as follows:
r = 0.0001 * MAX( p2237, |p2238| ) [%] / 0.13^2 [s^2]
The jerk is effective until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p2237 [%] / p2247 [s] or a_max = p2238
[%] / p2248 [s]), after which the drive continues to run linearly with constant acceleration. The higher the maximum
acceleration (the lower that p2247 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to the set ramp-up time.
Re bit 03:
0: Non-volatile data save deactivated.
1. The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for p2230.0 = 1).
Description: Displays the setpoint memory for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
For p2230.0 = 1, the last setpoint that was saved is entered after ON.
Dependency: Refer to: p2230
Description: Sets the signal source to increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2236
Description: Sets the signal source to reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2235
r2231 Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint memory /
Tec_ctrl mop mem
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
p2235[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer raise setpoint /
Tec_ctrl mop raise
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2236[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer lower setpoint /
Tec_ctrl mop lower
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-502 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the maximum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2238
Description: Sets the minimum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2237
Description: Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
For p2230.0 = 0, this setpoint is entered after ON.
Dependency: Refer to: p2230
Description: Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator of the technology
controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r2250
p2237[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value / Tec_ctrl mop max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
p2238[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value / Tec_ctrl mop min
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] -100.00 [%]
p2240[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value / Tec_ctrl mop start
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
r2245 CO: Technology controller mot. potentiometer setpoint before RFG /
Tec_ctr mop befRFG
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-503
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology
controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2248
Note: The time is referred to 100 %.
When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-up is correspondingly extended.
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology
controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2247
Note: The time is referred to 100 %.
When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-down is correspondingly extended.
Description: Displays the effective setpoint after the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the
technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r2245
Description: Sets the configuration of the technology controller.
p2247[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Tec_ctr mop t_r-up
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 1000.0 [s] 10.0 [s]
p2248[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down time /
Tec_ctrMop t_rdown
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 1000.0 [s] 10.0 [s]
r2250 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint after RFG /
Tec_ctr mop aftRFG
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
p2252 Technology controller configuration / Tec_ctrl config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0111 bin
Parameter
List of parameters
1-504 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p2257, p2258, p2280, p2285
Note: Re bit 00 = 0:
The ramp-down time (p2258) switches to the ramp-up time (p2257) when the sign for the output signal r2260
changes. When the sign changes, the output signal is kept at zero for one arithmetic cycle.
Re bit 00 = 1:
When r2260 exhibits a positive gradient, the ramp-up time (p2257) is active; when it exhibits a negative gradient,
the ramp-down time (p2258) is active. The sign for r2260 does not have any effect on the ramp time.
Re bit 01 = 0:
The integration time of the PID controller is evaluated with the gain factor Kp (p2280) (p2285 = integral time).
Re bit 01 = 1:
The integration time of the PID controller is independent of the gain factor (p2285 = integration time) if p2280 > 0.
Re bit 02 = 0:
When the PID controller is deactivated via p2200, the output signal r2294 is reduced to zero via the ramp-down
time p2293.
Re bit 02 = 1:
When the PID controller is deactivated via p2200, the output signal r2294 is set directly to zero.
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2254, p2255
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2253, p2256
Description: Sets the scaling for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2253
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Ramp-up/down time independent of set-
point sign
Yes No -
01 Integrator independent of Kp Yes No -
02 Output signal without ramp active Yes No -
p2253[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 / Tec_ctrl setp 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2254[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 2 / Tec_ctrl setp 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2255 Technology controller setpoint 1 scaling / Tec_ctrl set1 scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-505
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the scaling for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2254
Description: Sets the ramp-up time of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2252, p2258
Note: The ramp-up time is referred to 100 %.
Description: Sets the ramp-down time of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2252, p2257
Note: The ramp-down time is referred to 100 %.
Description: Sets the setpoint after the ramp-function generator of the technology controller.
Description: Sets the time constant for the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller.
p2256 Technology controller setpoint 2 scaling / Tec_ctrl set2 scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
p2257 Technology controller, ramp-up time / Tec_ctrl t_ramp-up
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
p2258 Technology controller ramp-down time / Tec_ctrl t_ramp-dn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
r2260 CO: Technology controller setpoint after ramp-function generator /
Tec_ctr set aftRFG
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
p2261 Technology controller setpoint filter time constant / Tec_ctrl set T
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-506 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the smoothed setpoint after the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller.
Description: Sets the technology controller type.
Value: 0: D component in the actual value signal
1: D component in the fault signal
Description: Sets the signal source for the actual value of the technology controller.
Description: Sets the time constant for the actual value filter (PT1) of the technology controller.
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value after the filter (PT1) of the technology controller
r2262 CO: Technology controller setpoint after filter / Tec_ctr set aftFlt
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
p2263 Technology controller type / Tec_ctrl type
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p2264[0...n] CI: Technology controller actual value / Tec_ctrl act val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2265 Technology controller actual value filter time constant / Tec_ctrl act T
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
r2266 CO: Technology controller actual value after filter / Tec_ctr act aftFlt
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-507
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Upper limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2271
Refer to: F07426
Notice: If the actual value exceeds the parameter value, this results in fault F7426.
Description: Lower limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2271
Refer to: F07426
Notice: If the actual value falls below the parameter value, this results in fault F7426.
Description: Scaling factor for the actual value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2267, p2268, p2271
Note: For 100%, the actual value is not changed.
Description: Selects an arithmetic function that should be applied to the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Value: 0: No function
1: Root function (root from x)
2: Square function (x * x)
3: Cube function (x * x * x)
Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2267, p2268, p2269, p2271
p2267 Technology controller upper limit actual value / Tec_ctrl u_lim act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
p2268 Technology controller lower limit actual value / Tec_ctrl l_lim act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] -100.00 [%]
p2269 Technology controller gain actual value / Tech_ctrl gain act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 500.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
p2270 Technology controller actual value function selection / Tech_ctrl act_fct
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-508 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the inversion of the actual value signal of the technology controller. This depends on the type of the actual
value sensor.
Value: 0: No inversion
1: Inversion of technology controller actual value signal
Caution: If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can
become unstable and can oscillate.
The correct setting can be determined as follows:
- inhibit the technology controller (P2200 = 0).
- increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal (of the technology controller).
- if the actual value increases with increasing motor speed, then the inversion should be switched out.
- if the actual value decreases with increasing motor frequency, then the inversion should be set.
Description: Displays the scaled actual value signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, r2266, p2267, p2268, p2269, p2270, p2271
Description: Displays the error (system deviation) between the setpoint and actual value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2263
Description: Sets the time constant for the differentiation (D component) of the technology controller.
Note: p2274 = 0: Differentiation is disabled.
p2271 Technology controller actual value inversion (sensor type) / Tech_ctrl act inv
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
r2272 CO: Technology controller actual value scaled / Tech_ctrl act scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r2273 CO: Technology controller error / Tec_ctrl error
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
p2274 Technology controller differentiation, time constant / Tec_ctrl D comp T
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-509
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the proportional gain (P component) of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2252
Note: p2280 = 0: The proportional gain is disabled.
Description: Sets the integral time (I component, integrating time constant) of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2252
Note: p2285 = 0: The integral time is disabled.
Description: Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the technology controller.
Description: Sets the signal source for the pre-control signal of the technology controller.
p2280 Technology controller proportional gain / Tec_ctrl Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 1000.000 1.000
p2285 Technology controller integral time / Tec_ctrl Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
p2286[0...n] BI: Hold technology controller integrator / Tec_ctr integ stop
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2289[0...n] CI: Technology controller pre-control signal / Tec_ctrl prectrl
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-510 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the maximum limit of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2292
Caution: The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292).
Description: Sets the minimum limit of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2291
Caution: The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292).
Description: Sets the ramping time for the output signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2291, p2292
Note: The time refers to the set maximum and minimum limits (p2291, p2292).
Description: Displays the output signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2295
p2291 CO: Technology controller maximum limiting / Tec_ctrl max_limit
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
p2292 CO: Technology controller minimum limiting / Tec_ctrl min_lim
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
p2293 Technology controller ramp-up/ramp-down time / Tec_ctr ramp up/dn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 100.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
r2294 CO: Technology controller output signal / Tec_ctrl outp_sig
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-511
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the scaling for the output signal of the technology controller.
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2295
Description: Sets the signal source for the maximum limiting of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2291
Description: Sets the signal source for the minimum limiting of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2292
Description: Sets the signal source for the offset of the output limiting of the technology controller.
p2295 CO: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-100.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
p2296[0...n] CI: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 2295[0]
p2297[0...n] CI: Technology controller maximum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl m_lm s_sc
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 2291[0]
p2298[0...n] CI: Technology controller minimum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl min_l s_s
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 2292[0]
p2299[0...n] CI: Technology controller limit offset / Tech_ctrl lim offs
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-512 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status word of the technology controller.
Description: Sets the signal source to select the "staging" function.
When the function is selected, monitoring of the switches is deactivated with the "bypass" function. This means that
the Motor Module can be connected to other motors via an external control without switch monitoring responding.
Description: Sets the operating mode for the hibernation function.
Value: 0: Hibernation inhibited
1: Hibernation active
Dependency: Refer to: p2200
Caution: When this function is active, the motor can start again automatically.
r2349.0...11 CO/BO: Technology controller status word / Tec_ctrl stat word
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Technology controller deactivated Yes No -
01 Technology controller limited Yes No -
02 Technology controller, motorized potentiom-
eter limited max.
Yes No -
03 Technology controller, motorized potentiom-
eter limited min.
Yes No -
08 Technology controller actual value at the
minimum
Yes No -
09 Technology controller actual value at the
maximum
Yes No -
10 Technology controller output at the mini-
mum
Yes No -
11 Technology controller output at the maxi-
mum
Yes No -
p2369 BI: Staging control word / Staging STW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p2398 Hibernation operating mode / Hib op_mode
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Technology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-513
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: When the hibernation function (p2398 = 1) is activated, its behavior is defined as to whether the technology control-
ler is additionally switched in (closed loop) or switched out (open loop).
p2200 is used to define the technology controller enable and p2251 its operating mode.
p2200 = 0, p2251 = 0, 1:
Hibernation operates without technology controller (open loop)
p2200 = 1, p2251 = 0:
Hibernation operates with technology controller (closed loop)
p2200 = 1, p2251 = 1:
Hibernation operates without technology controller (open loop) as its output is only used as supplementary setpoint
and not as main speed setpoint.
Description: Display and connector output for the reference quantity for speed and frequency (p2000).
All speeds or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed (in rpm) / 60
This parameter has the unit rpm.
Dependency: Refer to: p2000
Note: This parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2000 as a connector output for interconnec-
tion with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in
DCC.
Description: Display and connector output for the current reference quantity for velocity and frequency.
All velocities or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference velocity (in m/min) / 60
Dependency: Refer to: p2000
Note: This parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2000 as a connector output for interconnec-
tion with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in
DCC.
r2700 CO: Reference speed/reference frequency / n_ref/f_ref
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2700 CO: Reference velocity/reference frequency current / v_ref/f_ref act
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-514 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Connector output of the reference quantity for voltages p2001.
All voltages specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity in this param-
eter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
This parameter has the unit Vrms.
Dependency: Refer to: p2001
Note: This parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2001 as a connector output for interconnec-
tion with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in
DCC.
Description: Connector output of the reference quantity for currents p2002.
All currents specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity in this parame-
ter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
This parameter has the unit Arms.
Dependency: Refer to: p2002
Note: This parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2002 as a connector output for interconnec-
tion with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in
DCC.
Description: Connector output of the reference quantity p2003 for torque (r0108.12 = 0) or force (r0108.12 = 1).
All torques specified as relative values (r0108.12 = 0) or forces (r0108.12 = 1) are referred to this reference quan-
tity. The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
The unit of this parameter is the same as the unit selected for p2003.
Dependency: p0505, r0108.12
Refer to: p2003
Note: This parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2003 in the currently selected unit as a con-
nector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged
from this connector output in DCC.
r2701 CO: Reference voltage / Reference voltage
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2702 CO: Reference current / Reference current
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2703 CO: Reference torque / Reference torque
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-515
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Connector output of the reference quantity for powers p2004.
All power ratings specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity in this
parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
The unit of this parameter is the same as the unit selected for p2004.
Dependency: This value is calculated as voltage x current for the infeed and as torque x speed for closed-loop controls.
Refer to: r2004
Note: This parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2004 in the currently selected unit as a con-
nector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged
from this connector output in DCC.
The reference power is calculated as follows:
- 2 * Pi * reference speed / 60 * reference torque (motor)
- reference voltage * reference current * root(3) (infeed)
Description: Connector output of the reference quantity for angles p2005.
All angles specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity in this parameter
corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
This parameter has the unit degree.
Dependency: Refer to: p2005
Note: This parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2005 as a connector output for interconnec-
tion with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in
DCC.
Description: Connector output of the reference quantity for temperatures.
All temperatures specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity in this
parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
This parameter has the unit degree Celsius.
Note: This parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity for the temperature as a connector output for
interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connec-
tor output in DCC.
r2704 CO: Reference power / Reference power
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2705 CO: Reference angle / Reference angle
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2706 CO: Reference temperature / Reference temp
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-516 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Connector output of the reference quantity for accelerations p2007.
All acceleration rates specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity in
this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
The unit of this parameter is the same as the unit selected for p2007.
Dependency: r0108.12, p0505
Refer to: p2007
Note: This parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2007 as a connector output for interconnec-
tion with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value in the currently selected unit can be adopted unchanged
from this connector output in DCC.
Description: Sets the configuration for position tracking of a load gear.
Note: For the following events, the non-volatile, saved position values are automatically reset:
- when an encoder replacement has been identified.
- when changing the configuration of the Encoder Data Set (EDS).
- when adjusting the absolute encoder again
Description: Sets the number of rotations that can be resolved for a rotary absolute encoder with activated position tracking of
the load gear.
Dependency: This parameter is only of significance for an absolute encoder (p0404.1 = 1) with activated position tracking of the
load gear (p2720.0 = 1).
Note: The resolution that is set must be able to be represented using r2723.
For rotary axes/modulo axes, the following applies:
This parameter is preset with p0421 and can be changed.
For linear axes, the following applies:
This parameter is pre-assigned with p0421, expanded by 6 bits for multiturn information (maximum number of over-
flows) and cannot be changed.
r2707 CO: Reference acceleration / Ref accel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p2720[0...n] Load gear configuration / Load gear config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 4) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Load gear, activate position tracking Yes No -
01 Axis type Linear axis Rotary axis -
02 Load gear, reset position Yes No -
p2721[0...n] Load gear, rotary absolute gearbox, revolutions, virtual / Abs rot rev
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 4) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 4194303 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-517
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets a tolerance window for position tracking.
After the system is powered up, the difference between the saved position and the actual position is determined,
and depending on this, the following is initiated:
Difference within the tolerance window --> The position is reproduced as a result of the encoder actual value.
Difference outside the tolerance window --> An appropriate message is output.
Dependency: Refer to: F07449
Caution: Rotation, e.g. through a complete encoder range is not detected.
Note: The value is entered in integer (complete) encoder pulses.
For p2720.0 = 1, the value is automatically pre-assigned quarter of the encoder range.
Example:
Quarter of the encoder range = (p0408 * p0421) / 4
It is possible that the tolerance window may not be able to be precisely set due to the data type (floating point num-
ber with 23 bit mantissa).
Description: Displays the absolute value after the load gear.
Notice: The encoder position actual value must be requested using the encoder control word Gn_STW.13.
Note: The increments are displayed in the format the same as r0483.
Description: Displays the position difference before the load gear between powering down and powering up.
Note: The increments are displayed in the same format as for r0483/r2723.
If the measuring gear of the motor encoder is not activated, the position difference should be read in encoder incre-
ments.
If the measuring gear of the motor encoder is activated, the position difference is converted using the measuring
gear factor.
p2722[0...n] Load gear, position tracking tolerance window / Pos track tol
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1, 4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 4294967300.00 0.00
r2723[0...n] CO: Load gear absolute value / Load gear abs_val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r2724[0...n] CO: Load gear position difference / Load gear pos diff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-518 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal sources for the inputs of the AND logic operation.
Dependency: Refer to: r2811
Note: [0]: AND logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r2811.0.
[1]: AND logic operation, input 2 --> the result is displayed in r2811.0.
Description: Displays the result of the AND logic operation
Dependency: Refer to: p2810
Description: Sets the signal sources for the inputs of the OR logic operation.
Dependency: Refer to: r2817
Note: [0]: OR logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r2817.0.
[1]: OR logic operation, input 2 --> the result is displayed in r2817.0.
Description: Displays the result of the OR logic operation.
Dependency: Refer to: p2816
p2810[0...1] BI: AND logic operation inputs / AND inputs
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2634
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r2811.0 CO/BO: AND logic operation result / AND result
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2634
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 AND logic operation result Yes No -
p2816[0...1] BI: OR logic operation inputs / OR inputs
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2634
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r2817.0 CO/BO: OR logic operation result / OR result
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2634
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 OR logic operation result Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-519
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets a fixed percentage.
Dependency: Refer to: p2901, p2930
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the main setpoint)
Description: Sets a fixed percentage.
Dependency: Refer to: p2900, p2930
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the supplementary setpoint)
Description: Signal sources for frequently used percentage values.
Index: [0] = Fixed value +0 %
[1] = Fixed value +5 %
[2] = Fixed value +10 %
[3] = Fixed value +20 %
[4] = Fixed value +50 %
[5] = Fixed value +100 %
[6] = Fixed value +150 %
[7] = Fixed value +200 %
[8] = Fixed value -5 %
[9] = Fixed value -10 %
[10] = Fixed value -20 %
[11] = Fixed value -50 %
[12] = Fixed value -100 %
[13] = Fixed value -150 %
[14] = Fixed value -200 %
Dependency: Refer to: p2900, p2901, p2930
Note: The signal sources can, for example, be used to interconnect scalings.
p2900[0...n] CO: Fixed value 1 [%] / Fixed value 1 [%]
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1021
P-Group: Free function blocks Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-10000.00 [%] 10000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
p2901[0...n] CO: Fixed value 2 [%] / Fixed value 2 [%]
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1021
P-Group: Free function blocks Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-10000.00 [%] 10000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
r2902[0...14] CO: Fixed values [%] / Fixed values [%]
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1021
P-Group: Free function blocks Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-520 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets a fixed value for torque.
Dependency: Refer to: p2900, p2901
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note: The value can, for example, be used to interconnect a supplementary torque.
Description: Sets the mode for the time stamp
p3100 = 0: Time stamp, operating hours
p3100 = 1: Time stamp, UTC format
Note: RTC: Real Time Clock
UTC: Universal Time Coordinates
The UTC time started, according to the definition on 01.01.1970 at 00:00:00 and is output in days and milliseconds.
Description: Setting the UTC time.
This means that the drive system is synchronized to the time specified by the time master. To start p3101[1] must
be written to followed by p3101[0]. After writing to p3101[0], the UTC time is accepted.
p3101[0]: Milliseconds
p3101[1]: Days
Description: Displays the current UTC time in the drive system.
p3102[0]: Milliseconds
p3102[1]: Days
p2930[0...n] CO: Fixed value M [Nm] / Fixed value M [Nm]
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 1021
P-Group: Free function blocks Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00 [Nm] 100000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
p3100 RTC time stamp mode / RTC t_stamp mode
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p3101[0...1] RTC set UTC time / RTC set UTC
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
r3102[0...1] RTC read UTC time / RTC read UTC
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-521
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the synchronization source/technique.
Value: 0: PROFIBUS
1: PROFINET
2: PPI
3: PROFINET PTP
Description: Sets the signal source for the PING event to set the UTC time.
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Description: Displays the last synchronization deviation that was determined.
r3108[0]: Milliseconds
r3108[1]: Days
Description: Sets the tolerance window for time synchronization.
When this tolerance window is exceeded, an appropriate alarm is output.
Dependency: Refer to: A01099
p3103 RTC synchronization source / RTC sync_source
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
p3104 BI: RTC real time synchronization PING / RTC PING
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r3108[0...1] RTC last synchronization deviation / RTC sync_dev
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p3109 RTC real time synchronization, tolerance window / RTC sync tol
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-522 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the delay time for external fault 3.
Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3111, p3112
Refer to: F07862
Description: Sets the signal source for the enable signal of external fault 3.
External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3112
Refer to: F07862
Description: Sets the signal source for the enable signal of external fault 3.
External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3112
Refer to: F07862
p3110 External fault 3, power-up delay / Ext fault 3 t_on
All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 0 [ms]
p3111 BI: External fault 3, enable / Ext fault 3 enab
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p3111[0...n] BI: External fault 3, enable / Ext fault 3 enab
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-523
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the negated enable signal of external fault 3.
External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3111
Refer to: F07862
Description: Sets the signal source for the negated enable signal of external fault 3.
External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3111
Refer to: F07862
Description: Displays the status of NAMUR signal bit bar.
The faults or alarms are assigned to the appropriate signaling/message classes and influence a specific message
bit.
p3112 BI: External fault 3 enable negated / Ext flt 3 enab neg
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p3112[0...n] BI: External fault 3 enable negated / Ext flt 3 enab neg
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r3113.0...15 CO/BO: NAMUR message bit bar / NAMUR bit bar
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fault drive converter data electronics / soft-
ware error
Yes No -
01 Line supply fault Yes No -
02 DC link overvoltage Yes No -
03 Fault drive converter power electronics Yes No -
04 Drive converter overtemperature Yes No -
05 Ground fault Yes No -
06 Motor overload Yes No -
07 Bus error Yes No -
08 External safety-relevant shutdown Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-524 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the global status word for messages.
The appropriate bit is set if at least one message is present at the drive objects.
Note: The status bits are displayed with delay.
Description: Displays the drive object number of the initiating drive object for this fault as integer number.
Value = 63:
The fault was initiated by the drive object itself.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3120, r3122
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
Description: Sets the signal source for the automatic acknowledgement on the device drive object.
BI: p3116 = 1 signal
Faults present are not automatically acknowledged on the device drive object. Local device faults are not for-
warded.
BI: p3116 = 0 signal
Faults present are automatically acknowledged on the device drive object. Local device faults are forwarded to the
first active drive object.
Dependency: Refer to: p2102, p2103, p2104, p2105, p3981
Note: When selecting a standard telegram, the BICO interconnection for control signal STW1.10 (master control by PLC)
is automatically established.
09 Mot encoder fault Yes No -
10 Error internal communications Yes No -
11 Infeed fault Yes No -
15 Other faults Yes No -
r3114.9...11 CO/BO: Messages status word global / Msg ZSW global
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
09 Alarm present Yes No 8065
10 Fault present Yes No 8060
11 Safety message present Yes No -
r3115[0...63] Fault drive object initiating / F DO initiating
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1750, 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p3116 BI: Acknowledgement automatically suppressed / Ackn suppress
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-525
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the re-parameterization of all safety messages for faults and alarms.
The relevant message type during changeover is selected by the firmware.
0: Safety messages are not re-parameterized
1: Safety messages are re-parameterized
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Description: Displays the component number of the fault which has occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3122
Note: Value = 0: Assignment to a component not possible.
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
Description: Displays the component number of the alarm which has occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3123
Note: Value = 0: Assignment to a component not possible.
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
Description: Displays the diagnostic attribute of the fault which has occurred.
p3117 Change safety message type / Ch. SI mess type
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
r3120[0...63] Component number fault / Comp_num flt
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r3121[0...63] Component number alarm / Comp_num alarm
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r3122[0...63] Diagnostic attribute fault / Diag_attr fault
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Hardware replacement recommended Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-526 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3120
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
Description: Displays the diagnostic attribute of the alarm which has occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
Description: Displays the fault value of the oldest active fault.
Description: Sets the suppression of r2139.3 "Fault present" for certain fault responses.
Dependency: Refer to: p0491, r2139
Note: Depending on the suppression of a fault reaction in this parameter, r2139.1 "Acknowledgement required" is set
when at least one fault occurs.
Re bit 08:
The suppression is only effective if p0491 = 1.
r3123[0...63] Diagnostic attribute alarm / Diag_attr alarm
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Hardware replacement recommended Yes No -
r3131 CO: Current fault value / Current flt value
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p3135 Suppress active fault / Supp act flt
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
08 Suppression of fault response ENCODER On Off -
10 Suppression of fault response NONE On Off -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-527
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the threshold value for the "excitation current outside tolerance" message for the excitation current monitoring.
If the absolute value of the difference between the excitation current setpoint and actual value (r1641 - r1626)
exceeds the threshold value and the hysteresis is longer than the selected delay time, then fault F07913 is output.
This fault is withdrawn when the threshold voltage is undershot.
Dependency: Refer to: r1626, r1641, p3202, p3203
Refer to: F07913
Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5).
Description: Sets the hysteresis for the "excitation current outside tolerance" message for the excitation current monitoring.
Dependency: Refer to: p3201, p3203
Refer to: F07913
Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5).
Description: Sets the delay time for the "excitation current outside tolerance" message for the excitation current monitoring.
Dependency: Refer to: p3201, p3202
Refer to: F07913
Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5).
Description: Sets the threshold value for the "flux outside the tolerance" message for the flux monitoring.
If the absolute value of the difference between the flux setpoint and actual value (r0083 - r0084) falls below the
threshold value with hysteresis longer than the selected delay time, then fault F07914 is output.
This fault is withdrawn when the threshold voltage is undershot.
p3201[0...n] Excitation current outside the tolerance threshold value / I_exc n Tol thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.1 [%] 100.0 [%] 10.0 [%]
p3202[0...n] Excitation current outside the tolerance hysteresis / I_exc n Tol hyst
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.1 [%] 100.0 [%] 10.0 [%]
p3203[0...n] Excitation current outside the tolerance delay time / I_exc n Tol t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 10.0 [s] 1.0 [s]
p3204[0...n] Flux outside the tolerance threshold value / Flux n tol thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.1 [%] 100.0 [%] 10.0 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-528 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: r0083, r0084, p3205, p3206
Refer to: F07914
Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5).
The flux monitoring is only active after magnetizing (r0056.4 = 1).
Description: Sets the hysteresis for the "flux outside tolerance" message for the flux monitoring.
Dependency: Refer to: p3204, p3206
Refer to: F07914
Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5).
The flux monitoring is only active after magnetizing (r0056.4 = 1).
Description: Sets the delay time for the "flux outside tolerance" message for the flux monitoring.
Dependency: Refer to: p3204, p3205
Refer to: F07914
Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5).
The flux monitoring is only active after magnetizing (r0056.4 = 1).
Description: Sets the threshold value for the zero current signal for the zero current monitoring.
If the absolute current falls below the threshold value then r2199.6 is set to 1 after the delay time has expired. The
bit is reset if the threshold value and the hysteresis are exceeded again.
Dependency: Refer to: r2199, p3208, p3209
Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5).
The monitoring is only carried out for speeds less than the speed threshold value in p2161 (r2199.0 = 1).
p3205[0...n] Flux outside the tolerance hysteresis / Flux n tol hyst
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.1 [%] 50.0 [%] 10.0 [%]
p3206[0...n] Flux outside tolerance delay time / Flux n tol t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 10.0 [s] 5.0 [s]
p3207[0...n] Zero current signal threshold value / I_0_sig thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.01 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 1.00 [Arms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-529
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the hysteresis for the zero current signal for the zero current monitoring.
Dependency: Refer to: p3207, p3209
Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5).
The monitoring is only carried out for speeds less than the speed threshold value in p2161 (r2199.0 = 1).
Description: Sets the delay time for the zero current signal for the zero current monitoring.
Dependency: Refer to: p3207, p3208
Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5).
The monitoring is only carried out for speeds less than the speed threshold in p2161 (r2199.0 = 1).
Description: Sets the time constant of the PT1 element to smooth the torque actual value.
The smoothed actual torque is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and signals.
Description: Sets the monitoring time for phase failure detection of the motor.
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: Monitoring is only effective for blocksize and booksize power units. The function can be switched out with p3235 =
0.
For vector drives:
The monitoring is automatically deactivated during the flying restart operation for a motor that is still rotating.
p3208[0...n] Zero current signal hysteresis / I_0_sig hyst
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.01 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 1.00 [Arms]
p3209[0...n] Zero current signal delay time / I_0_sig t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 10.00 [s] 0.02 [s]
p3233[0...n] Torque actual value filter, time constant / M_act_filt T
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Extended sig)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000000 [ms] 0 [ms]
p3235 Phase failure signal motor monitoring time / Ph_fail t_monit
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 2000 [ms] 320 [ms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-530 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "speed deviation model/external" (BO: r2199.7).
Dependency: Refer to: r1443, r2169, r2199, p3237
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed for the signal "speed deviation model/external" (BO: r2199.7).
Dependency: Refer to: r2199, p3236
Description: Sets the OFF delay for the signal "speed deviation model/external in tolerance" (BO: r2199.7). The smoothed actual
speed of the motor model r2169 is compared with the speed measured externally r1443 (threshold value p3236).
Dependency: Refer to: p3236, p3237
Description: Displays the status word for DC-link voltage control.
Note: Re bit 01:
DC-link voltage control is disabled and enabled with p3513.
p3236[0...n] Speed threshold 7 / n_thresh val 7
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 3000.00 [rpm] 100.00 [rpm]
p3237[0...n] Hysteresis speed 7 / n_hysteresis 7
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 200.00 [rpm] 2.00 [rpm]
p3238[0...n] OFF delay n_act_motor model = n_act external / t_del n_a = n_ext
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 100.0 [s] 3.0 [s]
r3405.1 CO/BO: Status word DC-link control / UDC ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Vdc-ctrl active Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-531
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the total DC link capacitance for closed-loop voltage control.
The capacitance of one power unit is pre-assigned to this value. The value should be adapted according to the
number of power units.
Note: The controller setting for the DC-link voltage controller is derived from this value.
Description: Sets the setpoint for the DC-link voltage on the motor side.
Description: Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint for the DC-link voltage on the motor side.
Dependency: Refer to: p3510
Description: Sets the signal source for disabling DC-link voltage control on the motor side.
Description: Displays the unlimited setpoint of the active current controller for DC-link voltage control on the motor side.
p3422 DC-link capacitance, total / C_DC tot
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.20 [mF] 2000.00 [mF] 2.00 [mF]
p3510 DC link voltage setpoint / Vdc setp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
100.00 [V] 1600.00 [V] 600.00 [V]
p3511 CI: DC-link voltage supplementary setpoint / Vdc Z_set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p3513 BI: Inhibit voltage-controlled operation / Inhib V_ctrl mode
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
r3517 CO: DC-link controller active current setpoint / UDC I_act ctrl stp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-532 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for power pre-control.
Dependency: Refer to: p3521
Note: Closed-loop control of the DC link voltage is improved by pre-controlling the power required for the other modules.
A non-normalized quantity is expected so that the various power reference values (r2004) of the drive objects do
not have to be taken into account. The scaling factors are used to adapt the scaling (p3521).
Description: Sets the scaling factor for the power pre-control.
Dependency: Refer to: p3520
Description: Sets the filter time for power pre-control.
Dependency: Refer to: p3520
Description: Displays the integral action component of the DC link voltage controller (Vdc controller).
p3520[0...3] CI: DC link pre-control power / Vdc pre-ctrl P
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p3521[0...3] DC link pre-control power scaling / Vdc prectrl P scal
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00000 [%] 100000.00000 [%] 100.00000 [%]
p3523[0...3] DC link pre-control power smoothing / Vdc pre-ctrl P sm
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 0 [ms]
r3554 Vdc controller integral component / Vdc_ctrl I_comp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-533
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the normalized proportional gain for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc controller).
Note: A value of 100% corresponds to the basic setting derived from the loop control parameter (p3422).
Description: Sets the normalized integral time for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc).
Note: A value of 100% corresponds to the basic setting derived from the loop control parameter (p3422).
Description: Sets the voltage scaler for the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Note: When the 690 V input is used (X522) without voltage scaler, 0 % should be entered.
When the 100 V input (X521) is used with voltage scaler to measure medium voltages, the dividing (scaling) factor
multiplied by 100% should be entered.
Example:
1000 V line supply voltage, voltage scaling, 10:1
--> voltage at the VSM input is 100 V
--> p3660 = 10 * 100 % = 1000 %
Description: Displays the voltage between phases L1 and L2.
Dependency: Refer to: p3660
Note: X521.1 or X522.1: Connection of L1
X521.2 or X522.2: Connection of L2
X521.3 or X522.3: Connection of L3
p3560 Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.01 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
p3562 Vdc controller integral time / Vdc_ctrl Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.10 [%] 100000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
p3660[0...n] VSM input line supply voltage, voltage scaler / VSM inp V_scaler
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9880
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
r3661[0...n] CO: VSM input line supply voltage u1 - u2 / VSM inp u1-u2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_3 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-534 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the voltage between phases L2 and L3.
Dependency: Refer to: p3660
Note: X521.2 or X522.2: Connection of L2
X521.3 or X522.3: Connection of L3
Description: Displays the status of the temperature evaluation of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
This displays whether the temperature actual value has exceeded the fault/alarm threshold.
Dependency: Refer to: p3665, r3666, p3667, p3668
Description: Setting of the temperature sensor for the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
The temperature sensor is connected to terminals X520.5 and X520.6 of the VSM.
Value: 0: No sensor
1: PTC
2: KTY84
Description: Displays the temperature actual value of a KTY84 temperature sensor connected to the Voltage Sensing Module
(VSM).
Prerequisite:
A KTY84 sensor is connected and p3665 is set to 2.
Dependency: Refer to: p3665
r3662[0...n] CO: VSM input line supply voltage u2 - u3 / VSM inp u2-u3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_3 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
r3664[0...n] CO: VSM temperature evaluation, status / VSM temp status
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9886
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Temperature alarm threshold exceeded Yes No -
01 Temperature fault threshold exceeded Yes No -
p3665[0...n] VSM temperature evaluation, sensor type / VSM TempSensorType
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9886
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
r3666[0...n] CO: VSM temperature KTY / VSM temp KTY
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9886
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-535
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: For sensor type PTC (p3665 = 1), the following applies:
- below the nominal response temperature, r3666 = -50°C.
- above the nominal response temperature, r3666 = 199.9 °C.
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the KTY temperature sensor of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) to monitor the line
filter temperature.
Prerequisite:
A KTY84 sensor is connected and p3665 is set to 2.
Dependency: Refer to: p3665
Refer to: A34211
Description: Sets the shutdown threshold for the KTY temperature sensor of the VSM to monitor the line filter temperature.
Dependency: Refer to: p3667
Refer to: F34207
Description: Sets the hysteresis for the alarm threshold of the VSM to monitor the line filter temperature.
Dependency: Refer to: p3667
Description: Sets CT gain of the CT connected at the 10 V input of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
The parameter specifies the current magnitude in [A] referred to the input voltage at the VSM in [V].
Example:
CT with 1 V per 200 A.
--> p3670 = 200
p3667[0...n] VSM line filter overtemperature alarm threshold / VSMfilt_T A_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9886
P-Group: -Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [°C] 301.00 [°C] 150.00 [°C]
p3668[0...n] VSM line filter overtemperature shutdown threshold / VSM filt_T F_thres
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9886
P-Group: -Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [°C] 301.00 [°C] 180.00 [°C]
p3669[0...n] VSM line filter overtemperature hysteresis / VSM filt_T hyst
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9886
P-Group: -Units group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1.00 [K] 50.00 [K] 3.00 [K]
p3670[0...n] VSM 10 V input CT gain / VSM CT_gain
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9880
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [A] 1000.000 [A] 1.000 [A]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-536 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: r3671, r3672
Note: The CT for phase 1 is connected at terminals X520.1 and X520.2 of the VSM.
The CT for phase 2 is connected at terminals X520.3 and X520.4 of the VSM.
Description: Displays the current actual value from current transducer (CT) 1 at the 10 V input of the Voltage Sensing Module
(VSM).
Dependency: Refer to: p3670
Note: The CT for phase 1 is connected at terminals X520.1 and X520.2 of the VSM.
Description: Displays the current actual value from current transducer (CT) 2 at the 10 V input of the Voltage Sensing Module
(VSM).
Dependency: Refer to: p3670
Note: The CT for phase 2 is connected at terminals X520.3 and X520.4 of the VSM.
Description: Displays the actual value of the voltage measured at the 10 V input 1 of the Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM).
Dependency: Refer to: p3670
Note: 10 V input 1: Terminals X520.1 and X520.2
Description: Displays the actual value of the voltage measured at the 10 V input 2 of the Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM).
Dependency: Refer to: p3670
Note: 10 V input 2: Terminals X520.3 and X520.4
r3671[0...n] CO: VSM 10 V input CT 1 actual value / VSM CT 1 I_act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9880
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r3672[0...n] CO: VSM 10 V input CT 2 actual value / VSM CT 2 I_act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9880
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r3673[0...n] CO: VSM 10 V input 1 actual value / VSM inp 1 V_act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9880
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
r3674[0...n] CO: VSM 10 V input 2 actual value / VSM inp 2 V_act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9880
P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-537
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source to increase the voltage for external line-drive synchronization.
BI: p3784 = 1 signal:
The voltage is increased.
Note: Only SINAMICS GM150.
Description: Sets the signal source to decrease the voltage for external line-drive synchronization.
BI: p3785 = 1 signal:
The voltage is lowered.
Note: Only SINAMICS GM150.
Description: Sets the activation for the line-drive synchronization.
Value: 0: Sync-line-drive deactivated
1: Sync-line-drive activated VSM-INT
Dependency: Refer to: p3801, p3802
Note: When the ground fault monitoring initiates a fault for overlapping synchronizing the threshold value p0287[1] for the
Motor Module and the associated infeed must be appropriately increased (e.g. p0287[1] = 100 %).
For p3800 = 1, the following applies:
The INTERNAL voltage actual values are used for synchronization. The effects that a (sine-wave) filter - that is con-
nected between the Motor Module and motor - has on the voltage actual values are taken into account (theoreti-
cally) by appropriately selecting p0230.
VSM: Voltage Sensing Module
p3784[0...n] BI: Sync-line-drive external increase voltage / Sync ext V incr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p3785[0...n] BI: Sync-line-drive external decrease voltage / Sync ext V decr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p3800[0...n] Sync-line-drive activation / Sync act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-538 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the drive object number of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) used for the line-drive synchronization.
Dependency: Refer to: p3800, p3802
Notice: The current controller sampling time p0115[0] of the drive object with the VSM used for synchronization must be
identical to the current controller sampling time of the drive of the drive used to perform line synchronization.
Note: VSM: Voltage Sensing Module
The setting p3801 = 1 is always possible (no VSM selected).
Description: Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out for the line-drive synchronization.
BI: p3802 = 1 signal:
The line-drive synchronization is switched in.
Dependency: Refer to: p3800, p3801
Description: Displays the control word for the line-drive synchronization.
Note: Re bit 00:
For a 1 signal, p3800 > 0 is set.
Description: Displays the target frequency for the line-drive synchronization.
Dependency: Refer to: A07941
p3801[0...n] Sync-line-drive, drive object number / Sync DO_No
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 62 1
p3802[0...n] BI: Sync-line-drive enable / Sync enable
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r3803.0 CO/BO: Sync-line-drive control word / Sync STW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Sync-line-drive selected Yes No -
r3804 CO: Sync-line-drive target frequency / Sync f_target
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 3030, 7020
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-539
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the frequency difference between the measured target frequency and output frequency of the gating unit
of the closed-loop control for line-drive synchronization.
Description: Sets the threshold value of the frequency difference to activate the closed-loop phase control for line-drive synchro-
nization.
The closed-loop phase control is activated (r3819.6 = 1), if the frequency difference is less that the threshold value.
Description: Displays the phase difference between the measured target phase and phase of the gating unit of the closed-loop
control for line-drive synchronization.
Description: Sets the phase setpoint for the line-drive synchronization.
Description: Sets the frequency limiting of the phase controller output for the line-drive synchronization.
r3805 CO: Sync-line-drive frequency difference / Sync f_diff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
p3806[0...n] Sync-line-drive frequency difference threshold value / Sync f_diff thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 1.00 [Hz] 0.10 [Hz]
r3808 CO: Sync-line-drive phase difference / Sync phase diff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2005 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]
p3809[0...n] Sync-line-drive phase setpoint / Sync phase setp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-180.00 [°] 179.90 [°] 0.00 [°]
p3811[0...n] Sync-line-drive frequency limiting / Sync f_lim
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 1.00 [Hz] 0.20 [Hz]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-540 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the correction frequency for the line-drive synchronization.
Description: Sets the threshold value of the phase synchronism for the line-drive synchronization.
A prerequisite for synchronism is achieved if the phase difference is lower than the threshold value.
Note: Synchronism is reached (r3819.2 = 1), if the AND logic operation of the results from the phase measurement
(p3813) and voltage measurement (p3815) is fulfilled.
Description: Displays the voltage difference between the measured target voltage and output voltage of the gating unit of the
closed-loop control for line-drive synchronization.
Description: Sets the threshold value of the voltage difference for the line-drive synchronization.
A prerequisite for synchronism is reached if the voltage difference is less than the threshold value.
Note: Synchronism is reached (r3819.2 = 1), if the AND logic operation of the results from the phase measurement
(p3813) and voltage measurement (p3815) is fulfilled.
For voltage manipulated quantity margin (reserve) of the drive converter, the amplitude difference (r3814) between
the setpoint and actual value is controlled (corrected) to zero.
r3812 CO: Sync-line-drive correction frequency / Sync f_corr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 3080, 7020
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
p3813[0...n] Sync-line-drive phase synchronism threshold value / Sync Ph_sync thrsh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1.00 [°] 20.00 [°] 2.00 [°]
r3814 CO: Sync-line-drive voltage difference / Sync V_diff
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
p3815[0...n] Sync-line-drive voltage difference threshold value / Sync V_diff thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 20.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-541
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status word for the line-drive synchronization.
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 1st value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3830, p3845
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 2nd value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3831, p3845
r3819.0...7 CO/BO: Sync-line-drive status word / Sync ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Sync-line-drive enabled Yes No -
02 Sync-line-drive synchronism reached Yes No -
03 Sync-line-drive synchronizing error Yes No -
05 Sync-line-drive frequency measurement
active
Yes No -
06 Sync-line-drive phase control active Yes No -
07 Sync-line-drive without drive Yes No -
p3820[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n0 / Friction n0
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 15.00 [rpm]
p3821[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n1 / Friction n1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 30.00 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-542 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 3rd value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3832, p3845
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 4th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3833, p3845
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 5th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3834, p3845
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 6th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3835, p3845
p3822[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n2 / Friction n2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 60.00 [rpm]
p3823[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n3 / Friction n3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 120.00 [rpm]
p3824[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n4 / Friction n4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 150.00 [rpm]
p3825[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n5 / Friction n5
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-543
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 7th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3836, p3845
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 8th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3837, p3845
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 9th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3838, p3845
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 10th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3839, p3845
p3826[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n6 / Friction n6
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 600.00 [rpm]
p3827[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n7 / Friction n7
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 1200.00 [rpm]
p3828[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n8 / Friction n8
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 1500.00 [rpm]
p3829[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n9 / Friction n9
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 3000.00 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-544 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 1st value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3820, p3845
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 2nd value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3821, p3845
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 3rd value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3822, p3845
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 4th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3823, p3845
p3830[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M0 / Friction M0
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
p3831[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M1 / Friction M1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
p3832[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M2 / Friction M2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
p3833[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M3 / Friction M3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-545
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 5th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3824, p3845
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 6th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3825, p3845
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 7th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3826, p3845
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 8th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3827, p3845
p3834[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M4 / Friction M4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
p3835[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M5 / Friction M5
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
p3836[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M6 / Friction M6
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
p3837[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M7 / Friction M7
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-546 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 9th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3828, p3845
Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 10th value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p3829, p3845
Description: Displays the state of the friction characteristic.
Description: Displays the torque of the friction characteristic dependent on the speed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1569, p3842
p3838[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M8 / Friction M8
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
p3839[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M9 / Friction M9
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
r3840.0...8 CO/BO: Friction characteristic, status word / Friction ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Friction characteristic OK Yes No -
01 Friction characteristic record activated Yes No -
02 Friction characteristic record completed Yes No -
03 Friction characteristic record aborted Yes No -
08 Friction characteristic positive direction Yes No -
r3841 CO: Friction characteristic output / Frict outp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-547
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Setting to activate and deactivate the friction characteristic.
Value: 0: Friction characteristic deactivated
1: Friction characteristic activated
Dependency: Refer to: p1569, r3841, p3845
Description: Setting for the friction characteristic record.
After the next power-on command, the friction characteristic is automatically recorded.
Value: 0: Friction characteristic record deactivated
1: Friction char record activated for all directions
2: Friction char record activated for positive direction
3: Friction char record activated for negative direction
Dependency: When selecting the friction characteristic measurement, the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
For linear drives (refer to r0108 bit 12) it is not permissible to carry out the friction characteristic measurement for
mechanical systems that limit travel.
Danger: For drives with a mechanical system that limit the distance moved, it must be ensured that during recording, the fric-
tion characteristic is not reached. If this is not the case, then it is not permissible that the measurement is carried
out.
Notice: To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971, p0977).
Note: When the friction characteristic record is active, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971, p0977).
When the friction characteristic record is active (p3845 > 0), it is not possible to change p3820 ... p3829, p3830 ...
p3839 and p3842.
When recording the friction characteristic, in addition to the friction, the motor losses are also determined (e.g. iron
losses, eddy current losses and remagnetizing losses). A differentiation is not made between these individual loss
components. We recommend that a motor temperature sensor is used because torque deviations can also be emu-
lated/mapped on the characteristic due to the thermal influence.
Description: Sets the ramp-up/ramp-down time of the ramp-up/ramp-down function generator to automatically record the friction
characteristic. The drive is accelerated from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed/velocity (p1082) in
this time.
Dependency: Refer to: p3845
p3842 Friction characteristic activation / Frict act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p3845 Friction characteristic record activation / Frict rec act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
p3846[0...n] Friction characteristic record ramp-up/ramp-down time / Frict rec t_RFG
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-548 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the warm-up time.
For an automatic trace (record) to start, the highest selected speed (p3829) is approached and this time is held.
After this, the measurement is started with the highest speed.
Dependency: Refer to: p3829, p3845
Description: Exits quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) with automatic calculation of all parameters of all existing drive data sets
that depend on the entries made during quick commissioning.
p3900 = 1 initially includes a parameter reset (factory setting, the same as p0970 = 1) for all parameters of the drive
object; however, without overwriting the entries made during the quick commissioning.
The interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the interconnections via p0700, p1000
and p1500 are re-established and all of the dependent motor, open-loop and control-loop control parameters are
calculated (corresponding to p0340 = 1).
p3900 = 2 includes the restoration of the interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the
interconnections via p0700, p1000 and p1500 and the calculations corresponding to p0340 = 1.
p3900 = 3 only includes the calculations associated with the motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters
corresponding to p0340 = 1.
Value: 0: No quick parameterization
1: Quick parameterization after parameter reset
2: Quick parameterization (only) for BICO and motor parameters
3: Quick parameterization for motor parameters (only)
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: When the calculations have been completed, p3900 and p0010 are automatically reset to a value of 0.
When calculating motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters (such as for p0340 = 1) parameters associ-
ated with a selected Siemens catalog motor are not overwritten.
If a catalog motor has not been selected (see p0300), then the following parameters are reset with p3900 > 0 in
order to restore the situation that applied when commissioning the drive for the first time:
for induction motors p0320, p0352, p0353, p0362 ... p0369, p0391 ... p0393, p0604, p0605, p0626 ... p0628.
for synchronous motors p0326, p0327, p0352, p0353, p0391 ... p0393, p0604, p0605.
Description: Differential voltage for calibrating the offset for DC-link voltage measurement.
Dependency: Refer to: r0192, p0212
p3847[0...n] Friction characteristic record warm-up time / Frict rec t_warm
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 3600.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
p3900 Completion of quick commissioning / Compl quick_comm
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(1) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
p3901[0...n] Power unit EEPROM Vdc offset calibration / PU EEPROM Vdc_offs
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1, C2(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-40.0 [V] 40.0 [V] 0.0 [V]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-549
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Caution: Incorrect use of the calibration can have a negative impact on the closed-loop control. The parameter influences the
upper and lower voltage detection.
Note: Parameter entries are directly saved in the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved.
The parameter is only effective in the case of booksize power units if r0192 bit 22 and p0212 bit 0 are set.
Description: Displays the commissioning steps that have been carried out.
Note: The individual bits are only set if the appropriate action has been initiated and successfully completed.
When motor rating plate parameters are changed, the final display is reset.
When setting the individual bits, all of the most significant bits are reset.
Description: Successfully completed component of the last motor data identification carried out.
r3925[0...n] Identification final display / Ident final_disp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Motor/control parameters calculated (p0340
= 1, p3900 > 0)
Yes No -
02 Motor data identification carried out at
standstill (p1910 = 1)
Yes No -
03 Rotating measurement carried out (p1960 =
1, 2)
Yes No -
04 Motor encoder adjustment carried out
(p1960 = 1, p1990 = 1)
Yes No -
10 Automatic parameterization only for V/f con-
trol (r0108.2 = 0)
Yes No -
15 Motor equivalent circuit diagram parameters
changed
Changed Not changed -
r3927[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Stator inductance estimate no measure-
ment
Yes No -
01 Cl.-loop current control w/ dead-beat con-
troller
Yes No -
02 Rotor time constant estimate no measure-
ment
Yes No -
03 Leakage inductance estimate no measure-
ment
Yes No -
04 Activates the identification dynamic leak-
age inductance
Yes No -
05 Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time
range
Yes No -
06 Activate vibration damping Yes No -
07 Deactivate vibration detection Yes No -
11 Deactivate pulse measurement Lq Ld Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-550 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: r3925
Note: The parameter is a copy of p1909.
Description: Successfully completed component of the last rotating measurement carried out.
Dependency: Refer to: r3925
Note: The parameter is a copy of p1959.
Description: For service personnel only.
Description: Displays the device status.
Bit 0: SW reset active
Bit 1: The writing of parameters is disabled, as parameters are being saved.
Bit 2: The writing of parameters is disabled, as a macro is running.
12 Deactivate rotor resistance Rr measure-
ment
Yes No -
14 Deactivate valve interlocking time measure-
ment
Yes No -
15 Determine only stator resistance, valve volt-
age fault, dead time
Yes No -
r3928[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (n/M)
Can be changed: - Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enc test active Yes No -
01 Saturation characteristic identification Yes No -
02 Moment of inertia identification Yes No -
03 Recalculates the speed controller parame-
ters
Yes No -
04 Speed controller optimization (vibration test) Yes No -
05 q leakage inductance ident. (for current con-
troller adaptation)
Yes No -
p3950 Service parameter / Serv. par.
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1, U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r3974 Device status word / Device status word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-551
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the BICO interconnections that have been parameterized in the complete (overall) topology.
The counter is incremented by one for each modified BICO interconnection.
Dependency: Refer to: r3978, r3979
Description: Displays the counter reading for modified BICO interconnections on this device.
The counter is incremented by one for each modified BICO interconnection.
Description: Displays the counter reading for modified BICO interconnections on this drive object.
The counter is incremented by one for each modified BICO interconnection.
Description: Setting to acknowledge all active faults of a drive object.
Note: Parameter should be set from 0 to 1 to acknowledge.
After acknowledgement, the parameter is automatically reset to 0.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 SW reset active active inactive -
01 Writing of parameters disabled as parame-
ter save in progress
active inactive -
02 Writing of parameters disabled as macro in
progress
active inactive -
r3977 BICO counter, topology / BICO counter topo
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r3978 BICO CounterDevice / BICO CounterDevice
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r3979 BICO counter, drive object / BICO counter DO
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p3981 Faults, acknowledge drive object / Faults ackn DO
All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-552 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the mode to change over the master control / LOCAL mode.
Value: 0: Change master control for STW1.0 = 0
1: Change master control in operation
Danger: When changing the master control in operation, the drive can manifest undesirable behavior - e.g. it can accelerate
up to another setpoint.
Description: Displays the number of parameters for this drive unit.
The number comprises the device-specific and the drive-specific parameters.
Dependency: Refer to: r0980, r0981, r0989
Description: Index 0:
Displays the boot state.
Index 1:
Displays the partial boot state
Value: 0: Not active
1: Fatal fault
10: Fault
20: Reset all parameters
30: Drive object modified
40: Download using commissioning software
50: Parameter download using commissioning software
90: Reset Control Unit and delete drive objects
100: Start initialization
101: Wait for topology input
110: Instantiate Control Unit basis
111: Insert drive object
112: Remove drive object
113: Change drive object number
114: Change component number
115: Parameter download using commissioning software
117: Remove component
p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
r3986 Parameter count / Parameter count
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r3988[0...1] Boot state / Boot_state
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 10800 -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-553
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
150: Wait until actual topology determined
160: Evaluate topology
170: Instantiate Control Unit reset
180: Initialization YDB configuration information
200: First commissioning
210: Create drive packages
250: Wait for topology acknowledge
325: Wait for input of drive type
350: Determine drive type
360: Write into topology-dependent parameters
370: Wait until p0009 = 0 is set
380: Check topology
550: Call conversion functions for parameter
625: Wait non-cyclic starting DRIVE-CLiQ
650: Start cyclic operation
660: Evaluate drive commissioning status
670: Autom. FW update DRIVE-CLiQ components
680: Wait for CU LINK slaves
690: Wait non-cyclic starting DRIVE-CLiQ
700: Save parameters
725: Wait until DRIVE-CLiQ cyclic
740: Check the ability to operate
745: Start of the time slices
750: Interrupt enable
800: Initialization finished
10050: Wait for synchronization
10100: Wait for CU LINK slaves
10150: Wait until actual topology determined
10200: Evaluation component status
10250: Call conversion functions for parameter
10300: Preparation cyclic operation
10350: Autom. FW update DRIVE-CLiQ components
10400: Wait for slave properties
10450: Check CX/NX status
10500: Wait until DRIVE-CLiQ cyclic
10550: Carry out warm start
10600: Evaluate, encoder status
10800: Partial boot completed
Index: [0] = System
[1] = Partial boot
Description: Displays whether writing to parameters is inhibited.
r3996 = 0: Write to parameter is not inhibited.
0 < r3996 < 100: Write to parameter is inhibited. The value shows how the calculations are progressing.
r3996 Parameter write inhibit status / Par_write inhib st
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-554 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays whether the drive still has to be commissioned for the first time.
0 = Yes
2 = No
Description: Displays the actual value at the digital inputs.
This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x prior to switching from the simulation mode
(p4095.x = 1) to the terminal mode (p4095.x = 0). The input signal of terminal DI x is displayed in bit x of r4021.
Note: DI: Digital input
Description: Displays the actual value at the digital inputs.
This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the simu-
lation mode (p4095.x = 1) to terminal mode (p4095.x = 0). The input signal at terminal DI x or DI/DO x is displayed
in bit x of r4021.
r3998[0...n] First drive commissioning / First drv_comm
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 -
r4021 TB30 digital inputs terminal actual value / TB30 DI act value
TB30 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9100
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X481.1) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X481.2) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X481.3) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X481.4) High Low -
r4021 TM31 digital inputs terminal actual value / TM31 DI act value
TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9550,
9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X520.1) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X520.2) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X520.3) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X520.4) High Low -
04 DI 4 (X530.1) High Low -
05 DI 5 (X530.2) High Low -
06 DI 6 (X530.3) High Low -
07 DI 7 (X530.4) High Low -
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) High Low -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) High Low -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) High Low -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) High Low -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-555
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: If a DI/DO is parameterized as output (p4028.x = 1), then r4021.x = 0 is displayed.
DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Dependency: Refer to: r4023
Note: DI: Digital input
Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Dependency: Refer to: r4023
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
r4022.0...3 CO/BO: TB30 digital inputs, status / TB30 DI status
TB30 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1790, 9100
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X481.1) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X481.2) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X481.3) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X481.4) High Low -
r4022.0...11 CO/BO: TM31 digital inputs, status / TM31 DI status
TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9550,
9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X520.1) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X520.2) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X520.3) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X520.4) High Low -
04 DI 4 (X530.1) High Low -
05 DI 5 (X530.2) High Low -
06 DI 6 (X530.3) High Low -
07 DI 7 (X530.4) High Low -
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) High Low -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) High Low -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) High Low -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) High Low -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-556 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Dependency: Refer to: r4022
Note: DI: Digital input
Description: Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Dependency: Refer to: r4022
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
r4023.0...3 BO: TB30 digital inputs, status inverted / TB30 DI status inv
TB30 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1790, 9100
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X481.1) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X481.2) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X481.3) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X481.4) High Low -
r4023.0...11 CO/BO: TM31 digital inputs, status inverted / TM31 DI status inv
TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9550,
9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X520.1) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X520.2) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X520.3) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X520.4) High Low -
04 DI 4 (X530.1) High Low -
05 DI 5 (X530.2) High Low -
06 DI 6 (X530.3) High Low -
07 DI 7 (X530.4) High Low -
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) High Low -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) High Low -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) High Low -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) High Low -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-557
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the bidirectional digital inputs/outputs as input or output on the Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Description: Sets the signal source for digital output DO 0 (X481.5) of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Note: DO: Digital output
Description: Sets the signal source for the digital output DO 0 (X542.1, X542.2, X542.3) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Digital output 0 of TM31 is a relay output.
If the signal at the binector input p4030 is low, then terminal COM 0 (X542.2) is connected to NC 0 (X542.1). This
connection also matches the mechanical quiescent setting of the relay.
If the signal at the binector input p4030 is high, then terminal COM 0 (X542.2) is connected to NO 0 (X542.3).
Note: DO: Digital output
NC: Normally Closed contact
NO: Normally Open contact
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 1 (X481.6) of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Note: DO: Digital output
p4028 TM31 set input or output / TM31 DI or DO
TM31 Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9560,
9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) Output Input -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) Output Input -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) Output Input -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) Output Input -
p4030 BI: TB30 signal source for terminal DO 0 / TB30 S_src DO 0
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1790, 9102
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4030 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DO 0 / TM31 S_src DO 0
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9556
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4031 BI: TB30 signal source for terminal DO 1 / TB30 S_src DO 1
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9102
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-558 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the digital output DO 1 (X542.4, X542.5, X542.6) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Digital output 1 of TM31 is a relay output.
If the signal at the binector input p4031 is low, then terminal COM 1 (X542.5) is connected to NC 1 (X542.4). This
connection also matches the mechanical quiescent setting of the relay.
If the signal at the binector input p4031 is high, then terminal COM 1 (X542.5) is connected to NO 1 (X542.6).
Note: DO: Digital output
NC: Normally Closed contact
NO: Normally Open contact
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 2 (X481.7) of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Note: DO: Digital output
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 3 (X481.8) of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Note: DO: Digital output
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 (X541.2) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p4028.8 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
p4031 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DO 1 / TM31 S_src DO 1
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9556
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4032 BI: TB30 signal source for terminal DO 2 / TB30 S_src DO 2
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9102
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4033 BI: TB30 signal source for terminal DO 3 / TB30 S_src DO 3
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1790, 9102
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4038 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 / TM31 S_src DI/DO8
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9560
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-559
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 9 (X541.3) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p4028.9 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 (X541.4) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p4028.10 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 (X541.5) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p4028.11 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Sets the limit for the total output voltage of terminals X541.1, X541.2, X541.3 and X541.4 (DI/DO 8 ... 11) of Termi-
nal Module 31 (TM31).
Value: 0: 0.1 A total current limit DI/DO 8 ... 11
1: 1.0 A total current limit DI/DO 8 ... 11
Dependency: Refer to: p4028
Warning: Since the sum of the output currents at terminals X541.1, X541.2, X541.3 and X541.4 is limited, an overcurrent or
short circuit at one output terminal can cause a dip in the signal at the other terminals.
p4039 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DI/DO 9 / TM31 S_src DI/DO9
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9560
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4040 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 / TM31 S_srcDI/DO10
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4041 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 / TM31 S_src DI/DO11
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4046 TM31 digital outputs, limit current / TM31 DO limit curr
TM31 Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9560
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-560 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status of the digital outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Note: Inversion using p4048 has been taken into account.
DO: Digital output
Description: Displays the status of the digital outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Note: Inversion using p4048 has been taken into account.
The setting of the DI/DO as either input or output is of no significance (p4028).
DO: Digital output
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Note: DO: Digital output
r4047 TB30 digital outputs status / TB30 DO status
TB30 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9102
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DO 0 (X481.5) High Low -
01 DO 1 (X481.6) High Low -
02 DO 2 (X481.7) High Low -
03 DO 3 (X481.8) High Low -
r4047 TM31 digital outputs status / TM31 DO status
TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9556, 9560,
9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DO 0 (X542.1 - 3) High Low -
01 DO 1 (X542.4 - 6) High Low -
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) High Low -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) High Low -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) High Low -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) High Low -
p4048 TB30 invert digital outputs / TB30 DO invert
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9102
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DO 0 (X481.5) Inverted Not inverted -
01 DO 1 (X481.6) Inverted Not inverted -
02 DO 2 (X481.7) Inverted Not inverted -
03 DO 3 (X481.8) Inverted Not inverted -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-561
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Note: DO: Digital output
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Displays the actual input voltage at the analog inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note: AI: Analog Input
Description: Displays the actual input voltage in V when set as voltage input.
Displays the actual input current in mA when set as current input and with the load resistor switched in.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency: The type of analog input AI x (voltage or current input) is set using p4056.
Refer to: r4056, p4056
Note: AI: Analog Input
p4048 TM31 invert digital outputs / TM31 DO invert
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9556, 9560,
9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DO 0 (X542.1 - 3) Inverted Not inverted -
01 DO 1 (X542.4 - 6) Inverted Not inverted -
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) Inverted Not inverted -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) Inverted Not inverted -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) Inverted Not inverted -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) Inverted Not inverted -
r4052[0...1] CO: TB30 analog inputs, current input voltage / TB30 AI inp_V
TB30 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
r4052[0...1] CO: TM31 analog inputs, current input voltage/current / TM31 AI inp_V/I
TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-562 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog inputs of the Terminal Board 30
(TB30).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note: AI: Analog Input
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31
(TM31).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Note: AI: Analog Input
Description: Displays the currently referred input value of the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
When interconnected, the signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x and p205x.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note: AI: Analog Input
Description: Displays the currently referred input value of the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
When interconnected, the signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x and p205x.
p4053[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, smoothing time constant / TB30 AI T_smooth
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
p4053[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, smoothing time constant / TM31 AI T_smooth
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
r4055[0...1] CO: TB30 analog inputs, actual value in percent / TB30 AI value in %
TB30 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1790, 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r4055[0...1] CO: TM31 analog inputs, actual value in percent / TM31 AI value in %
TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-563
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Note: AI: Analog Input
Description: Displays the type of analog inputs.
Value: 4: Bipolar voltage input (-10 V ... +10 V)
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Description: Sets the type of analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
p4056[x] = 0, 4 correspond to a voltage input (r4052, p4057, p4059 are displayed in V).
p4056[x] = 2, 3, 5 correspond to a current input (r4052, p4057, p4059 are displayed in mA).
In addition, the associated switch S5 must be switched.
For a voltage input, S5.1 or S5.2 must be switched to setting "V".
For a current input, S5.1 or S5.2 must be switched to setting "I" (load resistor = 250 ohm is switched in).
Value: 0: Unipolar voltage input (0 V ... +10 V)
2: Unipolar current input (0 mA ... +20 mA)
3: Unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA ... +20 mA)
4: Bipolar voltage input (-10 V ... +10 V)
5: Bipolar current input (-20 mA ... +20 mA)
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Warning: The maximum voltage difference between the analog input terminals AI+, AI- and the ground of the TM31 (X520.6,
X530.3) may not exceed 35 V.
For operation with the load resistor switched in, the voltage between the differential inputs AI+ and AI- may not
exceed 15 V or the impressed current of 60 mA; if this is not carefully observed, the input will be damaged.
Notice: For use as voltage input, switch S500 must be set to 0 for the input involved.
Switch S500 is located on the front panel of the TM31 above terminal block X521.
Note: When changing p4056, the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p4057, p4058, p4059, p4060) are overwritten
with the following default values:
For p4056 = 0, 4, p4057 is set to 0.0 V, p4058 to 0.0 %, p4059 to 10.0 V and p4060 to 100.0 %.
For p4056 = 2, 5, p4057 is set to 0.0 mA, p4058 to 0.0 %, p4059 to 20.0 mA and p4060 to 100.0 %.
For p4056 = 3, p4057 is set to 4.0 mA, p4058 to 0.0 %, p4059 to 20.0 mA and p4060 to 100.0 %.
r4056[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, type / TB30 AI type
TB30 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
4 4 -
p4056[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, type / TM31 AI type
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 5 4
Parameter
List of parameters
1-564 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V or input current in mA) of the 1st value pair of the char-
acteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog input type.
Refer to: r4056, p4056
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog input type (p4056) is modified.
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
p4057[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value x1 / TB30 AI char x1
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-11.000 [V] 11.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
p4057[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value x1 / TM31 AI char x1
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 20.000 0.000
p4058[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value y1 / TB30 AI char y1
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-565
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog input type (p4056) is modified.
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V or input current in mA) of the 2nd value pair of the
characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog input type.
Refer to: r4056, p4056
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog input type (p4056) is modified.
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
p4058[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value y1 / TM31 AI char y1
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
p4059[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value x2 / TB30 AI char x2
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-11.000 [V] 11.000 [V] 10.000 [V]
p4059[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value x2 / TM31 AI char x2
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 20.000 10.000
Parameter
List of parameters
1-566 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog input type (p4056) is modified.
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
Description: Sets the response threshold for wire-breakage monitoring of the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency: For the following analog input type, the wire breakage monitoring is active:
p4056[x] = 3 (unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA ... +20 mA))
Refer to: r4056, p4056
p4060[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value y2 / TB30 AI char y2
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
p4060[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value y2 / TM31 AI char y2
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
p4061[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, wire breakage monitoring response threshold /
TM31 WireBrkThresh
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mA] 20.00 [mA] 2.00 [mA]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-567
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the delay time for wire-breakage monitoring of the analog inputs on Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Description: Sets the offset for the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The offset is added to the input signal before the scaling characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Description: Sets the offset for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
The offset is added to the input signal before the scaling characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog input signals of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Value: 0: No absolute value generation
1: Absolute value generation switched in
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
p4062[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, wire breakage monitoring delay time / TM31 wirebrk t_del
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 100 [ms]
p4063[0...1] TB30 analog inputs offset / TB30 AI offset
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 [V] 20.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
p4063[0...1] TM31 analog inputs offset / TM31 AI offset
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 20.000 0.000
p4066[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, activate absolute value generation / TB30 AI absVal act
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-568 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog input signals of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Value: 0: No absolute value generation
1: Absolute value generation switched in
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the analog input signals of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the analog inputs signals of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Description: Sets the noise suppression window for the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Changes less than the window are suppressed.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
p4066[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, activate absolute value generation / TM31 AI absVal act
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p4067[0...1] BI: TB30 analog inputs invert signal source / TB30 AI inv S_src
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4067[0...1] BI: TM31 analog inputs invert signal source / TM31 AI inv S_src
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4068[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, window to suppress noise / TB30 AI window
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 20.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-569
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the window for noise suppression for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Changes less than the window are suppressed.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Description: Sets the signal source for enabling the analog inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Description: Sets the signal source for the enable signal of the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Description: Sets the signal source for the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Note: AO: Analog Output
p4068[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, window to suppress noise / TM31 AI window
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 20.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
p4069[0...1] BI: TB30 analog inputs, signal source for enable / TB30 AI enable
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p4069[0...1] BI: TM31 analog inputs, signal source for enable / TM31 AI enable
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p4071[0...1] CI: TB30 analog outputs, signal source / TB30 AO sig_source
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1790, 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-570 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Note: AO: Analog Output
Description: Displays the actual referred output value of the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Description: Displays the actual referred output value of the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st order low pass filter for the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30
(TB30).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
p4071[0...1] CI: TM31 analog outputs, signal source / TM31 AO sig_source
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r4072[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, output value currently referred / TB30 AO outp_val
TB30 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r4072[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, output value currently referred / TM31 AO outp_val
TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
p4073[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, smoothing time constant / TB30 AO T_smooth
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-571
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31
(TM31).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Description: Displays the actual output voltage at the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Description: Displays the actual output voltage in V when set as voltage output.
Displays the actual output voltage in mA when set as current output.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency: The type of the analog output AO x (voltage or current output) is set using p4076.
Refer to: r4076, p4076
Note: AO: Analog Output
Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Value: 0: No absolute value generation
1: Absolute value generation switched in
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
p4073[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, smoothing time constant / TM31 AO T_smooth
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
r4074[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, current output voltage / TB30 AO V_outp
TB30 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
r4074[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, current output voltage/current / TM31 AO V/I_outp
TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p4075[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, activate absolute value generation / TB30 AO absVal act
TB30 Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-572 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Value: 0: No absolute value generation
1: Absolute value generation switched in
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Description: Displays the type of analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Value: 4: Voltage output (-10 V ... +10 V)
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Description: Sets the type of analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
p4076[x] = 1, 4 correspond to a voltage output (p4074, p4078, p4080, p4083 are displayed in V).
p4076[x] = 0, 2, 3 correspond to a current output (p4074, p4078, p4080, p4083 are displayed in mA).
Value: 0: Current output (0 mA ... +20 mA)
1: Voltage output (0 V ... +10 V)
2: Current output (+4 mA ... +20 mA)
3: Current output (-20 mA ... +20 mA)
4: Voltage output (-10 V ... +10 V)
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency: Refer to: p4077, p4078, p4079, p4080
Note: When changing p4076, the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p4077, p4078, p4079, p4080) are overwritten
with the following default values:
For p4076 = 0, 3, p4077 is set to 0.0 %, p4078 to 0.0 mA, p4079 to 100.0 % and p4080 to 20.0 mA.
For p4076 = 1, 4, p4077 is set to 0.0 %, p4078 to 0.0 V, p4079 to 100.0 % and p4080 to 10.0 V.
For p4076 = 2, p4077 is set to 0.0 %, p4078 to 4.0 mA, p4079 to 100.0 % and p4080 to 20.0 mA.
p4075[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, activate absolute value generation / TM31 AO absVal act
TM31 Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
r4076[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, type / TB30 AO type
TB30 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
4 4 -
p4076[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, type / TM31 AO type
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 4
List of parameters
Parameter
1-573
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog input type.
Refer to: r4076, p4076
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog output type is changed (p4076).
Note: This parameter is automatically overwritten if p4076 (type of analog output) is changed.
The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
p4077[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value x1 / TB30 AO char x1
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
p4077[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value x1 / TM31 AO char x1
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
p4078[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value y1 / TB30 AO char y1
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-11.000 [V] 11.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-574 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 1st value pair of the
characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog input type.
Refer to: r4076, p4076
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog output type is changed (p4076).
Note: This parameter is automatically overwritten if p4076 (type of analog output) is changed.
The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency: Refer to: r4076, p4076
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog output type is changed (p4076).
Note: This parameter is overwritten if p4076 (type of analog output) is changed.
The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
p4078[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value y1 / TM31 AO char y1
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 [V] 20.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
p4079[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value x2 / TB30 AO char x2
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
p4079[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value x2 / TM31 AO char x2
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-575
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 2nd value pair of the
characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog input type.
Refer to: r4076, p4076
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog output type is changed (p4076).
Note: This parameter is overwritten if p4076 (type of analog output) is changed.
The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
Description: Sets the signal source for inverting the analog output signals of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
p4080[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value y2 / TB30 AO char y2
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-11.000 [V] 11.000 [V] 10.000 [V]
p4080[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value y2 / TM31 AO char y2
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 [V] 20.000 [V] 10.000 [V]
p4082[0...1] BI: TB30 analog outputs invert signal source / TB30 AO inv S_src
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-576 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the analog output signals of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Description: Sets the offset for the analog outputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The offset is added to the output signal after the scaling characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Description: Sets the offset for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
The offset is added to the output signal after the scaling characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog input type.
Refer to: r4076, p4076
Note: This means, for example, the offset of a downstream isolating amplifier can be compensated.
Description: Sets the simulation mode for the digital inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
p4082[0...1] BI: TM31 analog outputs invert signal source / TM31 AO inv S_src
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4083[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, offset / TB30 AO offset
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-10.000 10.000 0.000
p4083[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, offset / TM31 AO offset
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 20.000 0.000
p4095 TB30 digital inputs, simulation mode / TB30 DI sim_mode
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1790, 9100
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X481.1) Simulation Terminal eval. -
01 DI 1 (X481.2) Simulation Terminal eval. -
02 DI 2 (X481.3) Simulation Terminal eval. -
03 DI 3 (X481.4) Simulation Terminal eval. -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-577
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p4096.
Refer to: p4096
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).
DI: Digital input
Description: Sets the simulation mode for the digital inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Dependency: The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p4096.
Refer to: p4096
Warning: A drive that is moved by simulating the inputs of a Terminal Module is brought to a standstill while the Terminal
Module is being activated or deactivated.
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).
DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the simulation mode of the digital inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p4095.
Refer to: p4095
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).
DI: Digital input
p4095 TM31 digital inputs, simulation mode / TM31 DI sim_mode
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9550,
9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X520.1) Simulation Terminal eval. -
01 DI 1 (X520.2) Simulation Terminal eval. -
02 DI 2 (X520.3) Simulation Terminal eval. -
03 DI 3 (X520.4) Simulation Terminal eval. -
04 DI 4 (X530.1) Simulation Terminal eval. -
05 DI 5 (X530.2) Simulation Terminal eval. -
06 DI 6 (X530.3) Simulation Terminal eval. -
07 DI 7 (X530.4) Simulation Terminal eval. -
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) Simulation Terminal eval. -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) Simulation Terminal eval. -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) Simulation Terminal eval. -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) Simulation Terminal eval. -
p4096 TB30 digital inputs, simulation mode setpoint / TB30 DI sim setpt
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1790, 9100
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X481.1) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X481.2) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X481.3) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X481.4) High Low -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-578 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the simulation mode of the digital inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p4095.
Refer to: p4095
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).
DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Description: Sets the simulation mode for the analog inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Value: 0: No simulation mode for analog input x
1: Simulation mode for analog input x
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Dependency: The setpoint for the input voltage is specified via p4098.
Refer to: p4098
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).
AI: Analog Input
p4096 TM31 digital inputs, simulation mode setpoint / TM31 DI sim setp
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9550,
9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X520.1) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X520.2) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X520.3) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X520.4) High Low -
04 DI 4 (X530.1) High Low -
05 DI 5 (X530.2) High Low -
06 DI 6 (X530.3) High Low -
07 DI 7 (X530.4) High Low -
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) High Low -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) High Low -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) High Low -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) High Low -
p4097[0...1] TB30 analog inputs simulation mode / TB30 AI sim_mode
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-579
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the simulation mode for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Value: 0: No simulation mode for analog input x
1: Simulation mode for analog input x
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency: The setpoint for the input voltage is specified via p4098.
Refer to: p4098
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).
AI: Analog Input
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input voltage in the simulation mode of the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Dependency: The simulation of an analog input is selected using p4097.
Refer to: p4097
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).
AI: Analog Input
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input value in simulation mode of the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency: The simulation of an analog input is selected using p4097.
If AI x is parameterized as voltage input (p4056), then the setpoint is a voltage in V.
If AI x is parameterized as current input (p4056), then the setpoint is a current in mA.
Refer to: r4056, p4056, p4097
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).
AI: Analog Input
p4097[0...1] TM31 analog inputs simulation mode / TM31 AI sim_mode
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p4098[0...1] TB30 analog inputs simulation mode setpoint / TB30 AI sim setp
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-11.000 [V] 11.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
p4098[0...1] TM31 analog inputs simulation mode setpoint / TM31 AI sim setp
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 20.000 0.000
Parameter
List of parameters
1-580 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = Digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO)
[1] = Analog inputs (AI)
[2] = Analog outputs (AO)
Dependency: The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29.
The sampling times can only be set as an integer multiple of the basic sampling time (r0110, r0111).
Refer to: p0009, r0110, r0111
Note: The modified sampling time is not effective until the drive unit is powered up again.
For clock cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation, the TB30 hardware (e.g. A/D converter ) is operated with the
PROFIBUS clock cycle (r2064[1]). This clock cycle is also kept after the PROFIBUS connection has been exited up
to the next time that the Control Unit is powered down. In this case, a faster sampling time than the PROFIBUS
clock cycle is not practical in p4099[0...2].
Description: Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = Digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO)
[1] = Analog inputs (AI)
[2] = Analog outputs (AO)
Dependency: The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29.
The sampling times can only be set as an integer multiple of the basic sampling time (r0110, r0111).
Refer to: p0009, r0110, r0111
Notice: The sampling times entered in index 0 (digital inputs/outputs) and index 2 (analog outputs) must always be greater
than or equal to the sampling time in index 1 (analog inputs).
Note: - the modified sampling time is not effective until the drive unit is powered up again.
- parameter p4099[0] must never equal zero.
Description: Sets the temperature evaluation of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
This means that the temperature sensor type is selected and the evaluation is switched in.
p4099[0...2] TB30 inputs/outputs, sampling time / TB30 I/O t_sample
TB30 Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1790, 9100
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 5000.00 [µs] [0] 4000.00 [µs]
[1] 4000.00 [µs]
[2] 4000.00 [µs]
p4099[0...2] TM31 inputs/outputs, sampling time / TM31 I/O t_sample
TM31 Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9550
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 5000.00 [µs] 4000.00 [µs]
p4100 TM31 temperature evaluation, sensor type / TM31 temp sens_typ
TM31 Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9576, 9577
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-581
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Value: 0: Evaluation disabled
1: PTC thermistor
2: KTY84
Note: The temperature sensor is connected at terminals X522.7(+) and X522.8(-).
Description: Displays the actual resistance value of the temperature sensor connected at Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Note: The maximum measurable resistance value is approx. 1700 Ohm.
The temperature sensor is connected at terminals X522.7(+) and X522.8(-).
Description: Sets the fault/alarm threshold for the temperature evaluation of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Temperature actual value > p4102[0] --> alarm A35211 is output.
Alarm A35211 remains present until the temperature actual value (r4105) falls below the corresponding value
(p4102[0] hysteresis).
Temperature actual value > p4102[1] --> fault F35207 is output.
Fault F35207 remains present until the temperature actual value (r4105) falls below the corresponding value
(p4102[1] hysteresis) and the fault has been acknowledged.
The hysteresis value is 5 °C and cannot be changed by the user.
Index: [0] = Alarm threshold
[1] = Fault threshold
Dependency: Refer to: r4104
Warning: Fault F35207 only causes the drive to be shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive
and TM31.
Note: A value > 250 °C deactivates the alarm or fault.
The temperature sensor is connected at terminals X522.7(+) and X522.8(-).
r4101 TM31 temperature evaluation, sensor resistance / TM31 temp R_sensor
TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9576, 9577
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
p4102[0...1] TM31 temperature evaluation fault/alarm threshold / TM31 temp thresh
TM31 Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9576
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-48 [°C] 251 [°C] [0] 100 [°C]
[1] 120 [°C]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-582 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Timer for the fault output of the temperature evaluation of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
This timer is started when the temperature alarm threshold (p4102[0]) is exceeded.
If the timer expires before the temperature in the meantime falls below the alarm threshold, the fault F35207 is out-
put.
If the temperature fault threshold (p4102[1]) is prematurely exceeded before the timer has expired, then fault
F35207 is immediately output.
As long as the temperature of the TM31 has still not exceeded the fault threshold and the alarm threshold has again
been undershot, the fault can be acknowledged.
Dependency: Refer to: r4104
Warning: Fault F35207 only causes the drive to be shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive
and TM31.
Note: With p4103 = 0 ms, the timer is deactivated and only the fault threshold is effective.
Description: Displays the status for the temperature evaluation of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
This displays whether the temperature actual value has exceeded the fault/alarm threshold.
Dependency: Refer to: p4102
Description: Displays the actual temperature value of the temperature evaluation of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Dependency: For sensor type PTC (p4100 = 1), the following applies:
- below the nominal response temperature, r4105 = -50°C.
- above the nominal response temperature, r4105 = 250 °C.
For sensor type KTY84-130 (p4100 = 2), the following applies:
- the displayed value corresponds to the temperature actual value.
Refer to: p4100
Note: For an invalid temperature actual value, (e.g. a short-circuit at the sensor input), r4105 = -300 °C is displayed.
The temperature sensor is connected at terminals X522.7(+) and X522.8(-).
p4103 TM31 temperature evaluation timer / TM31 temp t_timer
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9576
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [ms] 600.000 [ms] 0.000 [ms]
r4104.0...1 BO: TM31 temperature evaluation, status / TM31 temp status
TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9576
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Temperature alarm threshold exceeded Yes No -
01 Temperature fault threshold exceeded Yes No -
r4105 CO: TM31 temperature evaluation, actual value / TM31 temp actValue
TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 1840, 9576
P-Group: Terminals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-583
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the sensor type of the first temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value: 0: No sensor
10: PTC fault
11: PTC alarm
12: PTC alarm & timer
20: KTY84
30: Bimetallic NC contact fault
31: Bimetallic NC contact alarm
32: Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer
Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 10.
PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm
Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature:
- hardware description of the appropriate components
- SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
Description: Sets the sensor type of the second temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value: 0: No sensor
10: PTC fault
11: PTC alarm
12: PTC alarm & timer
20: KTY84
30: Bimetallic NC contact fault
31: Bimetallic NC contact alarm
32: Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer
Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 10.
Terminals for KTY84: X200.1, X200.2
PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm
Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature:
- hardware description of the appropriate components
- SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
p4600[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 1 sensor type / Temp_sens 1 type
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 32 0
p4601[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 2 sensor type / Temp_sens 2 type
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 32 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-584 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the sensor type of the third temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value: 0: No sensor
10: PTC fault
11: PTC alarm
12: PTC alarm & timer
20: KTY84
30: Bimetallic NC contact fault
31: Bimetallic NC contact alarm
32: Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer
Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 10.
Terminals for PTC triplet and bimetallic: X200.3, X200.4
PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm
Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature:
- hardware description of the appropriate components
- SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
Description: Sets the sensor type of the fourth temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value: 0: No sensor
10: PTC fault
11: PTC alarm
12: PTC alarm & timer
20: KTY84
30: Bimetallic NC contact fault
31: Bimetallic NC contact alarm
32: Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer
Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 10.
Terminals for PTC triplet: X200.5, X200.6
PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm
Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature:
- hardware description of the appropriate components
- SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
p4602[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 3 sensor type / Temp_sens 3 type
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 32 0
p4603[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 4 sensor type / Temp_sens 4 type
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 32 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-585
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the sensor type of the first temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value: 0: No sensor
10: PTC fault
11: PTC alarm
12: PTC alarm & timer
20: KTY84
30: Bimetallic NC contact fault
31: Bimetallic NC contact alarm
32: Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer
Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 11.
PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm
Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature:
- hardware description of the appropriate components
- SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
Description: Sets the sensor type of the second temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value: 0: No sensor
10: PTC fault
11: PTC alarm
12: PTC alarm & timer
20: KTY84
30: Bimetallic NC contact fault
31: Bimetallic NC contact alarm
32: Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer
Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 11.
PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm
Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature:
- hardware description of the appropriate components
- SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
p4610[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 1 sensor type MDS / Temp sens1 typ MDS
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 32 10
p4611[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 2 sensor type MDS / Temp sens2 typ MDS
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 32 10
Parameter
List of parameters
1-586 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the sensor type of the third temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value: 0: No sensor
10: PTC fault
11: PTC alarm
12: PTC alarm & timer
20: KTY84
30: Bimetallic NC contact fault
31: Bimetallic NC contact alarm
32: Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer
Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 11.
PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm
Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature:
- hardware description of the appropriate components
- SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
Description: Sets the sensor type of the fourth temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value: 0: No sensor
10: PTC fault
11: PTC alarm
12: PTC alarm & timer
20: KTY84
30: Bimetallic NC contact fault
31: Bimetallic NC contact alarm
32: Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer
Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 11.
PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm
Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature:
- hardware description of the appropriate components
- SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
p4612[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 3 sensor type MDS / Temp sens3 typ MDS
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 32 10
p4613[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 4 sensor type MDS / Temp sens4 typ MDS
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 32 10
List of parameters
Parameter
1-587
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual temperature in the motor measured through temperature channels 1 ... 4.
Index: [0] = Temperature channel 1
[1] = Temperature channel 2
[2] = Temperature channel 3
[3] = Temperature channel 4
Note: An invalid temperature is displayed using the value -200°C.
Description: Encoder diagnostics for the Profidrive interface.
Description: Sets the component number (p0141) of the encoder whose functional reserve is to be displayed (r4651).
Dependency: Refer to: r4651
Description: Displays the functional reserve of the encoder selected via p4650.
0 ... 25 %:
The function limit has been reached. A service is recommended.
26 ... 100 %:
The encoder is working in the specified range.
Index: [0] = Incremental
[1] = Reserved
[2] = Abs track
[3] = Code conn
Dependency: Refer to: p4650
r4620[0...3] Motor temperature measured / Mot_temp meas
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r4640[0...95] Encoder diagnostics state machine / Enc diag SM
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p4650 Encoder functional reserve component number / Enc fct_res num
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 399 0
r4651[0...3] Encoder functional reserve / Enc fct_reserve
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-588 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Value = 999 means:
- the component specified in p4650 is not connected
- the encoder does not support the display of the functional reserve
Description: Sets the filter bandwidth for Sensor Modules SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos encoder).
The value set on the Sensor Module is displayed in r4661.
The Sensor Module hardware only supports the following values:
- 0: The Sensor Module's default is used.
- 50 kHz
- 170 kHz
- 500 kHz
- Unlimited - only the bandwidth of the Op Amp is effective.
Dependency: Refer to: r4661
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Description: Sets the filter bandwidth for Sensor Modules SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos encoder).
The value set on the Sensor Module is displayed in r4661.
The Sensor Module hardware only supports the following values:
- 0: The Sensor Module's default is used.
- 50 kHz
- 170 kHz
- 500 kHz
- Unlimited - only the bandwidth of the Op Amp is effective.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: r4661
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
p4660 Sensor module filter bandwidth / SMx f_BW
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [kHz] 20000.00 [kHz] 0.00 [kHz]
p4660[0...2] Sensor module filter bandwidth / SMx f_BW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [kHz] 20000.00 [kHz] 0.00 [kHz]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-589
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the effective filter bandwidth for Sensor Modules SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos encoder).
The bandwidth of the filter is set using p4660.
Dependency: Refer to: p4660
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Description: Displays the effective filter bandwidth for Sensor Modules SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos encoder).
The bandwidth of the filter is set using p4660.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p4660
Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Description: Sets the configuration for evaluation on the analog sensor.
Notice: Re bit 06:
Setting the bit sets the velocity actual value (r0061) permanently to 0.
Re bit 13:
Setting the bit sets the commutation angle permanently to the commutation angle offset (p0431).
Note: Re bit 09:
A setting of bit = 0 will trigger a fault for the relevant channel if the actual value is invalid.
A setting of bit = 1 will trigger an alarm for the relevant channel if the actual value is invalid.
Re bit 10, 11:
If both channels are activated, the actual value is generated from the mean value of both channels. If a channel fails
(actual value invalid), it is not included when the mean value is generated.
r4661 Sensor Module filter bandwidth display / SMx f_BW disp
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [kHz] - [kHz] - [kHz]
r4661[0...2] Sensor Module filter bandwidth display / SMx f_BW disp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [kHz] - [kHz] - [kHz]
p4670[0...n] Analog sensor configuration / Ana_sens config
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
06 Set velocity to 0 Yes No -
09 Fault/Alarm messages Alarm Fault -
10 Chann B act Yes No -
11 Chann A act Yes No -
13 Commutation angle constant Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-590 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the input circuit for the analog sensor.
Value: 0: Differential
1: Single-ended A, B
2: Single-ended A*, B*
3: Single-ended A, B sensitive
Note: p4671 = 0:
The two signals on a track are evaluated differentially.
p4671 = 1:
Only the non-inverted signal on a track is evaluated.
p4671 = 2:
Only the inverted signal on a track is evaluated.
p4671 = 3:
Only the non-inverted signal on a track (high resolution) is evaluated.
Description: Sets the voltage when the connected sensor is at actual value zero.
At this voltage channel A supplies an actual value of zero.
Description: Sets the output voltage range to be mapped for the connected analog sensor.
The voltage range is determined by the following parameters:
- p4672 (voltage at actual value 0)
- p4673 (voltage per encoder period)
Note: The minimum actual value which can be mapped is equal to p4672 - p4673/2.
The maximum actual value which can be mapped is equal to p4672 + p4673/2.
p4671[0...n] Analog sensor input / Ana_sens inp
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
p4672[0...n] Analog sensor channel A voltage at actual value zero / Ana_sens A U at 0
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-10.0000 [V] 10.0000 [V] 0.0000 [V]
p4673[0...n] Analog sensor channel A voltage per encoder period / Ana_sens A U/per
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-10.0000 [V] 10.0000 [V] 6.0000 [V]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-591
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the voltage when the connected sensor is at actual value zero.
At this voltage channel B supplies an actual value of zero.
Description: Sets the output voltage range to be mapped for the connected analog sensor.
The voltage range is determined by the following parameters:
- p4674 (voltage at actual value 0)
- p4675 (voltage per encoder period)
Note: The minimum actual value which can be mapped is equal to p4674 - p4675/2.
The maximum actual value which can be mapped is equal to p4674 + p4675/2.
Description: Sets the threshold for limit monitoring of the absolute actual value on the analog sensor.
If this threshold is overshot by the actual value of a channel, a corresponding fault/alarm (p4670.9) is output.
Dependency: Refer to: p4673, p4675
Description: Sets the configuration for LVDT mode on the analog sensor.
p4674[0...n] Analog sensor channel B voltage at actual value zero / Ana_sens B U at 0
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-10.0000 [V] 10.0000 [V] 0.0000 [V]
p4675[0...n] Analog sensor channel B voltage per encoder period / Ana_sens B U/per
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-10.0000 [V] 10.0000 [V] 6.0000 [V]
p4676[0...n] Analog sensor range limit threshold / Ana_sens lim thr
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
p4677[0...n] Analog sensor LVDT configuration / Ana_sens LVDT conf
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 LVDT ON Yes No -
01 Track B excitation Yes No -
02 Fixed value amplitude Yes No -
03 Fixed value amplitude and phase Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-592 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the permissible tolerance in encoder pulses for the zero mark distance in the context of zero mark monitoring.
Causes fault F3x100 to appear less frequently.
Dependency: Refer to: p0430
Refer to: F31100
Note: The parameter is activated using p0430.21 = 1 (zero mark tolerance).
Description: Sets the positive tolerance window in encoder pulses for limit 1 for the zero mark monitoring.
If the deviation is less than this limit, the PPR is not corrected. If it is higher than this limit, fault F3x131 is triggered.
If fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the encoder pulses which have not been cor-
rected are added to the accumulator (r4688). The accumulator can be deactivated using p0437.7.
Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p4688
Refer to: F31131
Note: This monitoring is activated by setting p0437.2 = 1 (position actual value correction).
The positive limit describes additional pulses due to EMC.
Description: Sets the negative tolerance window in encoder pulses for limit 1 for the zero mark monitoring.
If the deviation is less than this limit, the PPR is not corrected. If it is higher than this limit, fault F3x131 is triggered.
If fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the encoder pulses which have not been cor-
rected are added to the accumulator (r4688). The accumulator can be deactivated using p0437.7.
Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p4681, p4688
Refer to: F31131
Note: This monitoring is activated by setting p0437.2 = 1 (position actual value correction).
For a set value = -1001, the negated value of p4681 is effective.
The negative limit describes the pulses lost due to a covered glass panel in the incremental encoder.
p4680[0...n] Zero mark monitoring tolerance permissible / ZM_monit tol perm
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1000 4
p4681[0...n] Zero mark monitoring, tolerance window limit 1 positive / ZM tol lim 1 pos
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1000 2
p4682[0...n] Zero mark monitoring, tolerance window limit 1 negative / ZM tol lim 1 neg
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1001 0 -1001
List of parameters
Parameter
1-593
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the positive tolerance window in encoder pulses for limit 2 for the zero mark monitoring.
If the zero mark deviation is higher than the tolerance set in p4681 and p4682 and fault F3x131 is re-parameterized
to alarm (A) or no message (N), the accumulator p4688 is compared with this parameter and, if applicable, alarm
A3x422 is output for 5 seconds.
Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p4681, p4682, p4688
Refer to: F31131, A31422
Note: Zero mark monitoring is activated by setting p0437.2 = 1 (position actual value correction).
Description: Sets the negative tolerance window in encoder pulses for limit 2 for the zero mark monitoring.
If the zero mark deviation is higher than the tolerance set in p4681 and p4682 and fault F3x131 is re-parameterized
to alarm (A) or no message (N), the accumulator p4688 is compared with this parameter and, if applicable, alarm
A3x422 is output for 5 seconds.
Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p4683, p4688
Refer to: F31131, A31422
Note: Zero mark monitoring is activated by setting p0437.2 = 1 (position actual value correction).
For a set value = -100001, the negated value of p4683 is effective.
Description: Sets the number of current controller clock cycles for mean value generation of the speed actual value.
Note: Value = 0, 1: No mean value generation.
Higher values also mean higher dead times for the speed actual value.
Description: Sets the minimum length for the zero mark.
Dependency: Refer to: p0425, p0437
p4683[0...n] Zero mark monitoring tolerance window alarm threshold positive / ZM tol A_thr pos
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 100000 0
p4684[0...n] Zero mark monitoring tolerance window alarm threshold negative / ZM tol A_thr neg
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-100001 0 -100001
p4685[0...n] Speed actual value mean value generation / n_act mean val
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 20 0
p4686[0...n] Zero mark minimum length / ZM min length
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 10 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-594 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The value for the minimum length of the zero mark must be set less than p0425.
The parameter is activated using p0437.1 = 1 (zero mark edge detection).
Description: Displays the number of differential pulses for the zero mark monitoring that have accumulated.
If fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the encoder pulses which have not been cor-
rected are added to the accumulator (p4688).
Dependency: Refer to: p4681, p4682, p4683, p4684
Note: The display can only be reset to zero.
Description: Displays the number of differential pulses for the zero mark monitoring that have accumulated.
If fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the encoder pulses which have not been cor-
rected are added to the accumulator (p4688).
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p4681, p4682, p4683, p4684
Note: The display can only be reset to zero.
Description: Displays the encoder status according to PROFIdrive for a squarewave encoder.
Dependency: Refer to: A31422
Note: In the case of alarm A3x422 being output, this parameter is set for 100 ms.
p4688 CO: Zero mark monitoring, differential pulse count / ZM diff_pulse qty
ENCODER Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-2147483648 2147483647 0
p4688[0...2] CO: Zero mark monitoring, differential pulse count / ZM diff_pulse qty
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-2147483648 2147483647 0
r4689 CO: Squarewave encoder, diagnostics / Sq-wave enc diag
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-595
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the encoder status according to PROFIdrive for a squarewave encoder.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: A31422
Note: In the case of alarm A3x422 being output, this parameter is set for 100 ms.
Description: Sets the component number for the SMI/DQI for which motor and/or encoder data should be saved, deleted or
downloaded.
Dependency: Refer to: p4691, p4692, p4693
Note: DQI: DRIVE-CLiQ Sensor Integrated
SMI: SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated
Description: Setting for the saving/downloading/deletion of motor and/or encoder data for the component specified in p4690
(SMI/DQI).
A backup of this data can be saved to non-volatile memory. The backup procedure is performed automatically as
part of the function for saving to non-volatile memory (p0977 = 1 or "Copy RAM to ROM"). If a part is replaced, the
backup can be reloaded.
Procedure:
p4690 = set component number
p4691 = 1, 2, 30: Set the required procedure (save/download/delete).
p4691 = 9, 10, 36: Feedback signal on successful completion of the procedure.
p4691 = 11... 21, 37, 38: Error vales if the procedure could not be executed successfully.
r4689[0...2] CO: Squarewave encoder, diagnostics / Sq-wave enc diag
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p4690 SMI spare part component number / SMI comp_no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 399 0
p4691 Save/download SMI spare part data / Save/DL SMI data
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 38 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-596 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Save SMI data
2: Download SMI data
9: SMI data downloaded and POWER ON required for component
10: SMI data backup complete
11: SMI data backup for selected component not found
12: Selected component not available or not connected
13: Insufficient memory space for backup
14: Format of saved data is incompatible
15: Transfer fault during data download
16: Transfer fault during data backup
17: Data backup does not match parameterized encoder/motor
18: Data backup directory not permissible
19: Component already contains data
20: Component does not contain any data
21: Component is not an SMI or a DQI
30: Delete SMI data
35: Confirmation of SMI data delete required
36: SMI data deleted and POWER ON required for component
37: Access level not sufficient for delete
38: Delete SMI data not permitted for component
Dependency: Refer to: p4690, p4692, p4693
Notice: Once SMI data has been deleted or downloaded successfully, the component has to be powered off.
Note: SMI: SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated
DLQ encoder: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
Help for error value = 11:
- Save the data for the original SMI on the memory card.
- Use an SMI with a suitable hardware version.
Help for error value = 12:
- Set the correct component number or connect the component.
Help for error value = 13:
- Use a memory card with more memory space.
Help for error value = 14:
- Create a data backup on the memory card corresponding to the SMI type.
Help for error value = 15:
- Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring for the component.
Help for error value = 16:
- Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring for the component.
Help for error value = 17:
- Save the data for the original SMI on the memory card.
Help for error value = 18:
- Set parameter p4693 to an appropriate value.
Help for error value = 19:
- Perform an SMI delete or use a blank SMI.
Help for error value = 20:
- Use an SMI card that is not blank.
Help for error value = 21:
- Set the correct component number (p4690).
Help for error value = 35:
- Reset parameter p4691 to 30.
Help for error value = 37:
- Set the access level to Expert or higher.
Help for error value = 38:
- Set the correct component number (p4690 >= 200).
List of parameters
Parameter
1-597
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Setting to back up the data of all SMIs and DQIs featured in the target topology.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Save data of all SMIs and DQIs
10: Save all data successful
13: Insufficient memory space for backup
16: Transfer fault during data backup
20: Component does not contain any data
29: Not all components from target topology saved
Note: SMI: SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated
p4692 = 10: Automatic on successful completion of backup procedure.
p4692 = 13, 16, 20, 29: Error vales if the procedure could not be executed successfully.
The procedure must be repeated if the data save operation was interrupted (e.g. if the power supply voltage failed).
Help for error value = 13:
- Use a memory card with more memory space.
Help for error value = 16:
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
Help for error value = 20:
- Use an SMI card that is not blank.
Help for error value = 29:
- Check and correct the target and actual topologies for the SMIs.
- Repeat the save procedure.
Description: Sets the directory for downloading and saving data.
Example:
The SMI has the component number 5 and the SMI data (motor/encoder data) is to be stored in subdirectory C205.
--> p4690 = 5, p4693[0] = 205, p4691 = 1
Index: [0] = Subdirectory selection
[1] = Reserved
Dependency: Refer to: p4691, r4694
Notice: If p4693[0] is not equal to 0 and p4693[0] is not equal to p4690, the following applies:
- Only a number > 200 may be selected for the subdirectory when saving.
- In the case of downloads, a selection for the subdirectory may only be made for an SMI with a component number
> 200 (preliminary component number) (p4690 > 200).
Note: SMI: SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated
Re index 0:
This index is used to select the subdirectory for saving and downloading data. The motor order number (MLFB) of
the corresponding data backup is displayed in r4694.
For p4693[0] = 0, the following applies:
The directory is determined by the setting of p4690.
p4692 Save SMI spare part data of all SMIs / Save SMI data
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 29 0
p4693[0...1] SMI spare part data backup directory / SMI dat_bkup dir
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 399 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-598 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the motor order number (MLFB) of the data backup selected with p4693.
Dependency: Refer to: p4691, p4692
Caution: If the selected subdirectory contains a number of data sets, "More Datasets" is displayed in r4694[0...19].
If there is no SMI data (motor/encoder data) in the selected subdirectory or if the selected subdirectory does not
exist, the following applies:
- The number of the next subdirectory located is displayed.
- This subdirectory is not checked for valid SMI data.
- If another subdirectory cannot be located, 0 is displayed in r4694[0...19].
Note: SMI: SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated
Value: 0: Stop trace
1: Start trace
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Value: 0: Stop measuring function
1: Start measuring function
2: Measuring function, check parameterization
r4694[0...19] SMI spare part data backup motor order number / SMI dat_bkup MLFB
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p4700[0...1] Trace control / Trace control
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p4701 Measuring function, control / Meas fct ctrl
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-599
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual status of the trace.
Value: 0: Trace inactive
1: Trace is recording presamples
2: Trace is waiting for trigger event
3: Trace is recording
4: Recording (trace) ended
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Description: Displays the actual status of the measuring function.
Value: 0: Measurement function inactive
1: Measuring function, parameterization checked
2: Measuring function waits for stabilizing time
3: Measuring function recording (tracing)
4: Measuring function, trace ended with error
5: Measuring function, trace successfully completed
Description: Displays the required memory in bytes for the actual parameterization.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency: Refer to: r4799
Description: Displays the memory space required for the current parameter setting in bytes, if the trace is used for the measur-
ing functions.
r4705[0...1] Trace status / Trace status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 -
r4706 Measuring function, status / Meas fct status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 5 -
r4708[0...1] Trace memory space required / Trace mem required
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4709[0...1] Trace memory space required for measuring functions / Trace mem required
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-600 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency: Refer to: r4799
Description: Sets the trigger condition for the trace.
Value: 1: Immediate start
2: Positive edge
3: Negative edge
4: Entry to hysteresis band
5: Leaving hysteresis band
6: Trigger at bit mask
7: Start with function generator
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Description: Selects the trigger signal for the trace.
Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format
[1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format
[2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id
[3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id
[4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id
[5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id
Dependency: Only effective when p4710 does not equal 1.
Note: It only makes sense to trace the PINs using the commissioning software.
For index 2(4) and 3(5) equal to zero, index 0(1) can only be written and vice versa.
Re index 0 ... 1:
Here, the trigger signal for trace 0 or 1 is entered as parameter in the BICO format.
For trace with a physical address (p4789), the data type of the trigger signal is set here.
Re index 2 ...3:
The triggering PIN for trace 0 is entered here.
Index 2 bit 31 ... 16: Number of the Drive Object (DO), bit 15 ... 0: Number of the chart
Index 3 bit 31 ... 16: Number of the block, bit 15 ... 0: Number of the PIN
Re index 4 ... 5:
The triggering PIN for trace 1 is entered here.
Index 4 bit 31 ... 16: Number of the Drive Object (DO), bit 15 ... 0: Number of the chart
Index 5 bit 31 ... 16: Number of the block, bit 15 ... 0: Number of the PIN
p4710[0...1] Trace trigger condition / Trace Trig_cond
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
1 7 2
p4711[0...5] Trace trigger signal / Trace trig_signal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-601
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the trigger threshold for the trace.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency: Only effective when p4710 = 2, 3.
Description: Sets the first trigger threshold for trigger via tolerance band.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency: Only effective when p4710 = 4, 5.
Description: Sets the second trigger threshold for trigger via tolerance band
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency: Only effective when p4710 = 4, 5.
Description: Sets the bit mask for the bit mask trigger.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency: Only effective when p4710 = 6.
p4712[0...1] Trace trigger threshold / Trace trig_thresh
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.00
p4713[0...1] Trace tolerance band trigger threshold / Trace trig thresh
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.00
p4714[0...1] Trace tolerance band trigger threshold / Trace trig thresh
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.00
p4715[0...1] Trace bit mask trigger, bit mask / Trace trig mask
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-602 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the trigger condition for bit mask trigger.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency: Only effective when p4710 = 6.
Description: Displays the trigger index in the trace buffer. The trigger event occurred at this point.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency: Only valid when p4705 = 4.
Description: Sets the recording cycle for the trace.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4716[0...1] Trace, bit mask trigger, trigger condition / Trace Trig_cond
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
p4717 Measuring function, number of averaging operations / Meas fct avg qty
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
p4718 Measuring function, number of stabilizing periods / MeasFct StabPerQty
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
r4719[0...1] Trace trigger index / Trace Trig_index
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p4720[0...1] Trace recording cycle / Trace record_cyc
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [ms] 60000.000 [ms] 1.000 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-603
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the recording time for the trace.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Description: Sets the trigger delay for the trace.
Trigger delay < 0:
Pretrigger: Tracing (recording) starts the selected time before the trigger event actually occurs.
Trigger delay > 0:
Post trigger: Tracing does not start until the set time after the trigger event.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Description: Sets the time slice cycle in which the trace is called.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4721[0...1] Trace recording time / Trace record_time
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [ms] 3600000.000 [ms] 1000.000 [ms]
p4722[0...1] Trace trigger delay / Trace trig_delay
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
-3600000.000 [ms] 3600000.000 [ms] 0.000 [ms]
p4723[0...1] Time slice cycle for trace / Trace cycle
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0.03125 [ms] 4.00000 [ms] 0.12500 [ms]
p4724[0...1] Trace average in the time range / Trace average
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0001 bin 0000 bin
Parameter
List of parameters
1-604 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Description: Displays the number of traced values for each signal.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency: Only valid when p4705 = 4.
r4725[0...1] Trace, data type 1 traced / Trace rec type 1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4726[0...1] Trace, data type 2 traced / Trace rec type 2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4727[0...1] Trace, data type 3 traced / Trace rec type 3
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4728[0...1] Trace, data type 4 traced / Trace rec type 4
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4729[0...1] Trace number of recorded values / Trace rec values
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-605
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the first signal to be traced.
Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format
[1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format
[2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id
[3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id
[4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id
[5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id
Description: Selects the second signal to be traced.
Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format
[1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format
[2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id
[3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id
[4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id
[5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id
Description: Selects the third signal to be traced.
Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format
[1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format
[2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id
[3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id
[4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id
[5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id
p4730[0...5] Trace record signal 0 / Trace record sig 0
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4731[0...5] Trace record signal 1 / Trace record sig 1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4732[0...5] Trace record signal 2 / Trace record sig 2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-606 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the fourth signal to be traced.
Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format
[1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format
[2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id
[3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id
[4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id
[5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id
Description: Selects the fifth signal to be traced.
Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format
[1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format
[2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id
[3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id
[4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id
[5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id
Description: Selects the sixth signal to be traced.
Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format
[1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format
[2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id
[3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id
[4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id
[5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id
p4733[0...5] Trace record signal 3 / Trace record sig 3
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4734[0...5] Trace record signal 4 / Trace record sig 4
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4735[0...5] Trace record signal 5 / Trace record sig 5
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-607
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the seventh signal to be traced.
Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format
[1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format
[2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id
[3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id
[4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id
[5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id
Description: Selects the eighth signal to be traced.
Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format
[1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format
[2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id
[3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id
[4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id
[5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 0.
The trace (record) buffer is sub-divided into memory banks, each containing 16384 values. Parameter p4795 can
be used to toggle between the individual banks.
Example A:
The first 16384 values of signal 0, trace 0 are to be read out.
In this case, memory bank 0 is set with p4795 = 0. The first 16384 values can now be read out using r4740[0] to
r4740[16383].
Example B:
The values 16385 to 32768 from signal 0, trace 0 are to be read out.
In this case, memory bank 1 is set with p4795 = 1. The values can now be read out in r4740[0] to r4740[16383].
Dependency: Refer to: p4795
p4736[0...5] Trace record signal 6 / Trace record sig 6
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p4737[0...5] Trace record signal 7 / Trace record sig 7
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r4740[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 0 floating point / Trace 0 trace sig0
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-608 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 1.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 2.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 3.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 4.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 5.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
r4741[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 1 floating point / Trace 0 trace sig1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4742[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 2 floating point / Trace 0 trace sig2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4743[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 3 floating point / Trace 0 trace sig3
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4744[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 4 floating point / Trace 0 trace sig4
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4745[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 5 floating point / Trace 0 trace sig5
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-609
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 6.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 7.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 0.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 1.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 2.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
r4746[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 6 floating point / Trace 0 trace sig6
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4747[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 7 floating point / Trace 0 trace sig7
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4750[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 0 floating point / Trace 1 trace sig0
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4751[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 1 floating point / Trace 1 trace sig1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4752[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 2 floating point / Trace 1 trace sig2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-610 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 3.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 4.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 5.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 6.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 7.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795
r4753[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 3 floating point / Trace 1 trace sig3
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4754[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 4 floating point / Trace 1 trace sig4
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4755[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 5 floating point / Trace 1 trace sig5
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4756[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 6 floating point / Trace 1 trace sig6
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4757[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 7 floating point / Trace 1 trace sig7
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-611
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 0 as integer number.
Note: For signals, data type I32 or U32, the trace buffer is assigned as follows:
r4760[0] = value 0
r4760[1] = value 1
...
r4760[8191] = value 8191
For signals, data type I16 or U16, the trace buffer is assigned as follows:
r4760[0] = value 0 (bit 31 ... 16) and value 1 (bit 15 ... 0)
r4760[1] = value 2 (bit 31 ... 16) and value 3 (bit 15 ... 0)
...
r4760[8191] = value 16382 (bit 31 ... 16) and value 16383 (bit 15 ... 0)
For signals, data type I8 or U8, the trace buffer is assigned as follows:
r4760[0] = value 0 (bit 31 ... 24) value 1 (bit 23 ... 16) value 2 (bit 15 ... 8) value 3 (bit 7 ... 0)
r4760[1] = value 4 (bit 31 ... 24) value 5 (bit 23 ... 16) value 6 (bit 15 ... 8) value 7 (bit 7 ... 0)
...
r4760[8191] = value 32764 (bit 31 ... 24) value 32765 (bit 23 ... 16) value 32766 (bit 15 ... 8) value 32767 (bit 7 ... 0)
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 1.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 2.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
r4760[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 0 / Trace 0 trace sig0
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4761[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 1 / Trace 0 trace sig1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4762[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 2 / Trace 0 trace sig2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-612 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 3.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 4.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 5.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 6.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 7.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
r4763[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 3 / Trace 0 trace sig3
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4764[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 4 / Trace 0 trace sig4
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4765[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 5 / Trace 0 trace sig5
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4766[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 6 / Trace 0 trace sig6
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4767[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 7 / Trace 0 trace sig7
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-613
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 0.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 1.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 2.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 3.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 4.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
r4770[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 0 / Trace 1 trace sig0
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4771[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 1 / Trace 1 trace sig1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4772[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 2 / Trace 1 trace sig2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4773[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 3 / Trace 1 trace sig3
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4774[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 4 / Trace 1 trace sig4
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-614 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 5.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 6.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 7.
Dependency: Refer to: r4760
Description: Sets the physical address for the first signal to be traced.
The data type is defined using p4730.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
r4775[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 5 / Trace 1 trace sig5
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4776[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 6 / Trace 1 trace sig6
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4777[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 7 / Trace 1 trace sig7
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p4780[0...1] Trace physical address signal 0 / Trace PhyAddr Sig0
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
0000 bin
List of parameters
Parameter
1-615
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the physical address for the second signal to be traced.
The data type is defined using p4731.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Description: Sets the physical address for the third signal to be traced.
The data type is defined using p4732.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Description: Sets the physical address for the fourth signal to be traced.
The data type is defined using p4733.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Description: Sets the physical address for the fifth signal to be traced.
The data type is defined using p4734.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4781[0...1] Trace physical address signal 1 / Trace PhyAddr Sig1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
0000 bin
p4782[0...1] Trace physical address signal 2 / Trace PhyAddr Sig2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
0000 bin
p4783[0...1] Trace physical address signal 3 / Trace PhyAddr Sig3
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
0000 bin
p4784[0...1] Trace physical address signal 4 / Trace PhyAddr Sig4
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
0000 bin
Parameter
List of parameters
1-616 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the physical address for the sixth signal to be traced.
The data type is defined using p4735.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Description: Sets the physical address for the seventh signal to be traced.
The data type is defined using p4736.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Description: Sets the physical address for the eighth signal to be traced.
The data type is defined using p4737.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Description: Sets the physical address for the trigger signal.
The data type is defined by making the appropriate selection in p4711.
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4785[0...1] Trace physical address signal 5 / Trace PhyAddr Sig5
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
0000 bin
p4786[0...1] Trace physical address signal 6 / Trace PhyAddr Sig6
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
0000 bin
p4787[0...1] Trace physical address signal 7 / Trace PhyAddr Sig7
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
0000 bin
p4789[0...1] Trace physical address trigger signal / Trace PhyAddr Trig
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-617
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Index: [0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Description: Changes over the memory bank to read out the contents of the trace buffer.
Dependency: Refer to: r4740, r4741, r4742, r4743, r4750, r4751, r4752, r4753
r4790[0...1] Trace, data type 5 traced / Trace rec type 5
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4791[0...1] Trace, data type 6 traced / Trace rec type 6
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4792[0...1] Trace, data type 7 traced / Trace rec type 7
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4793[0...1] Trace, data type 8 traced / Trace rec type 8
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p4795 Trace memory bank changeover / Trace mem changeov
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 500 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-618 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the free memory for the trace in bytes.
Dependency: Refer to: r4708
Description: The function generator is started with p4800 = 1.
The signal is only generated for a 1 signal of binector input p4819.
Value: 0: Stop function generator
1: Start function generator
2: Check function generator parameterization
3: Start function generator without enable signals
Dependency: Refer to: p4819
Description: Displays the actual status of the function generator.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Generate accelerating ramp to offset
2: Generate parameterized signal shape
3: Generate braking ramp
4: Function generator stopped due to missing enable signals
5: Function generator waits for BI: p4819
6: Function generator parameterization has been checked
Dependency: Refer to: p4800, p4819
r4799 Trace memory location free / Trace mem free
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p4800 Function generator control / FG control
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
r4805 Function generator status / FG status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-619
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status of the function generator.
0 signal: Function generator inactive
1 signal: Function generator running
Description: Sets the operating mode of the function generator.
Value: 0: Connection at connector output r4818
1: Connection at current setpoint after filter and r4818
2: Connection as disturbing torque and r4818
3: Connection at speed setpoint after filter and r4818
4: Connection at current setpoint before filter and r4818
5: Connection at speed setpoint before filter and r4818
99: Connection at physical address and r4818
Description: Sets the physical address where the function generator is to be connected.
Dependency: Only effective when p4810 = 99.
Description: Sets the reference value for 100 % for referred inputs.
Dependency: Only effective when p4810 = 99.
r4806.0 BO: Function generator status signal / FG status signal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
p4810 Function generator mode / FG operating mode
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 0
p4812 Function generator physical address / FG phys address
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
p4813 Function generator physical address reference value / FG phys addr ref
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1.00 1000000.00 1.00
Parameter
List of parameters
1-620 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the required drive where the function generator is to be connected.
Index: [0] = First drive for connection
[1] = Second drive for connection
[2] = Third drive for connection
Dependency: Only effective when p4810 = 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
Note: For the function generator, only type SERVO or VECTOR drives can be used.
Description: Displays the output signal for the function generator.
Dependency: Refer to: p4810
Note: The value is displayed independently of the function generator mode.
The signal is available as connector output for an ongoing interconnection.
Description: Sets the signal source to control the function generator.
When the function generator is running, signal generation is stopped with a 0 signal from BI: p4819 and p4800 is
set to 0.
Dependency: Refer to: p4800
Description: Sets the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Value: 1: Square-wave
2: Staircase
3: Delta
4: Binary noise - PRBS (Pseudo Random Binary Signal)
5: Sine-wave
p4815[0...2] Function generator drive number / FG drive number
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
r4818 CO: Function generator output signal / FG output signal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
p4819 BI: Function generator control / FG control
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
p4820 Function generator signal shape / FG signal shape
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 5 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-621
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the period of the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency: Ineffective when p4820 = 4 (PRBS).
Description: Sets the pulse width for the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency: Only effective when p4820 = 1 (square-wave).
Description: Sets the bandwidth for the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency: Only effective when p4820 = 4 (PRBS).
Refer to: p4830
Refer to: A02041
Description: Sets the amplitude for the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency: Units are dependent on p4810.
If p4810 = 1, 2, 4: The amplitude is referred to p2002 (reference current).
If p4810 = 3, 5: The amplitude is referred to p2000 (reference speed).
p4821 Function generator period / FG period duration
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 60000.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms]
p4822 Function generator pulse width / FG pulse width
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 60000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
p4823 Function generator bandwidth / FG bandwith
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0025 [Hz] 16000.0000 [Hz] 4000.0000 [Hz]
p4824 Function generator amplitude / FG amplitude
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1600.00 [%] 1600.00 [%] 5.00 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-622 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the second amplitude for the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency: Only effective for p4820 = 2 (staircase).
Units are dependent on p4810.
If p4810 = 1, 2, 4: The amplitude is referred to p2002 (reference current).
If p4810 = 3, 5: The amplitude is referred to p2000 (reference speed).
Description: Sets the offset (DC component) of the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency: Units are dependent on p4810.
If p4810 = 1, 2, 4: The offset is referred to p2002 (reference current).
If p4810 = 3, 5: The offset is referred to p2000 (reference speed).
If p4810 = 2: In order to avoid the undesirable effects of play (backlash), the offset does not act on the current set-
point, but instead on the speed setpoint.
Description: Sets the ramp-up time to the offset for the function generator.
Description: Sets the lower limit for the function generator.
Dependency: For p4810 = 2 the limit only applies to the current setpoint, but not the speed setpoint (offset).
p4825 Function generator 2nd amplitude / FG 2nd amplitude
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1600.00 [%] 1600.00 [%] 7.00 [%]
p4826 Function generator offset / FG offset
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1600.00 [%] 1600.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
p4827 Function generator ramp-up time to offset / FG ramp-up offset
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 100000.00 [ms] 32.00 [ms]
p4828 Function generator lower limit / FG lower limit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-10000.00 [%] 0.00 [%] -100.00 [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-623
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the upper limit for the function generator.
Dependency: For p4810 = 2 the limit only applies to the current setpoint, but not the speed setpoint (offset).
Description: Sets the time slice cycle in which the function generator is called.
Description: Sets the scaling for the amplitude of the signal waveforms for all output channels.
The value can be changed while the function generator is running.
Description: Sets the scaling for the amplitude of the signal waveforms separately for each output channel.
The value cannot be changed while the function generator is running.
Index: [0] = First drive for connection
[1] = Second drive for connection
[2] = Third drive for connection
p4829 Function generator upper limit / FG upper limit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 10000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
p4830 Function generator time slice cycle / FG time slice
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.03125 [ms] 2.00000 [ms] 0.12500 [ms]
p4831 Function generator amplitude scaling / FG amplitude scal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [%] 200.00000 [%] 100.00000 [%]
p4832[0...2] Function generator amplitude scaling / FG amplitude scal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 [%] 340.28235E36 [%] 100.00000 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-624 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the scaling for the offset of the signal waveforms separately for each output channel.
The value cannot be changed while the function generator is running.
Index: [0] = First drive for connection
[1] = Second drive for connection
[2] = Third drive for connection
Description: Displays the number of OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
Dependency: Refer to: r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960
Note: OA: Open Architecture
Description: Displays the total length of the IDs of all the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960
Note: The identifier of an OA application comprises a maximum of 8 characters plus separator.
Description: Displays the total length of the GUIDs of all the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960
Note: The GUID of an OA application comprises 16 characters plus 1 character major information plus 1 character, minor
information.
GUID: Globally Unique IDentifier
p4833[0...2] Function generator offset scaling / FG offset scal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-340.28235E36 [%] 340.28235E36 [%] 100.00000 [%]
r4950 OA application count / OA no
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 10 -
r4951 OA application identifier, total length / OA ID length
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 90 -
r4952 OA application GUID, total length / OA GUID length
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 180 -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-625
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the IDs of all the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4955[0...8]: Identifier of OA application 1
r4955[9...17]: Identifier of OA applications 2, ...
Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960
Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index.
Description: Setting to activate the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4956[0]: Activates OA application 1
r4956[1]: Activates OA application 2, ...
Value: 0: OA application inactive
1: OA application active
Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960
Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index.
Description: Displays the versions of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4957[0]: Version of OA application 1
r4957[1]: Version of OA application 2, ...
Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4958, r4959, r4960
Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index.
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
r4955[0...n] OA application identifier / OA ID
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: r4951 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p4956[0...n] OA application activation / OA act
All objects Can be changed: C1, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: r4950 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
r4957[0...n] OA application version / OA version
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: r4950 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-626 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the interface versions of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4958[0]: Interface version of OA application 1
r4958[1]: Interface version of OA applications 2, ...
Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4959, r4960
Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index.
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
Description: Displays the GUIDs of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4959[0...15]: GUID of OA application 1
r4960[16]: Major information of OA application 1
r4960[17]: Minor information of OA application 1
r4959[18...33]: GUID of OA application 2
r4960[34]: Major information of OA application 2
r4960[35]: Minor information of OA application 2, ...
Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4960
Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index.
Description: Displays the GUIDs of the drive object of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4960[0...15]: GUID of this drive object of OA application 1
r4960[16]: Major information of this drive object of OA application 1
r4960[17]: Minor information of this drive object of OA application 1
r4960[18...33]: GUID of this drive object of OA application 2
r4960[34]: Major information of this drive object of OA application 2
r4960[35]: Minor information of this drive object of OA application 2, ...
Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959
Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index.
r4958[0...n] OA application interface version / OA int_version
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: r4950 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4959[0...n] OA application GUID / OA GUID
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: r4952 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4960[0...n] OA application GUID drive object / OA GUID DO
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: r4952 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-627
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Only for service purposes.
Description: Displays the number of invalid OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
Dependency: Refer to: r4976, r4978, r4979
Note: OA: Open Architecture
Description: Displays the total length of the IDs of all the invalid OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
Dependency: Refer to: r4975, r4978, r4979
Note: The identifier of an invalid OA application comprises a maximum of 8 characters plus separator.
Description: Displays the IDs of all the invalid OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4978[0...8]: Identifier of invalid OA application 1
r4978[9...17]: Identifier of invalid OA application 2, ...
Dependency: Refer to: r4975, r4976, r4979
Notice: If there is no invalid OA application, then it is not possible to access an index.
p4961[0...n] OA application logbook module selection / OA logbook module
All objects Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: r4950 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
r4975 OA application invalid number / OA inv no.
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4976 OA application invalid identifier, total length / OA inv ID length
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r4978[0...n] OA application invalid identifier / OA inv ID
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: r4976 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-628 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the error code of the invalid OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4979[0]: Fault value of OA application 1
r4979[1]: Fault value of OA application 2, ...
Dependency: Refer to: r4975, r4976, r4978
Notice: If there is no invalid OA application, then it is not possible to access an index.
Note: The value in the error code must be interpreted in binary form. The bits have the following meaning:
Bit 0: Incompatible OA interface version.
Bit 1: OA application could not be loaded.
Bit 2: Incorrect description files.
Bit 3: OA application does not define a CPU type.
Bit 4: OA application for this device not supported (incorrect CPU type).
Bit 5: OA application for this device not supported (incorrect type ID).
Bit 6: Incorrect description files (Const/Startup incompatible).
Description: Displays the active power units for a parallel circuit configuration.
Dependency: Refer to: p7001
Description: Enables the power units in the parallel circuit configuration.
Value: 0: Deactivated
1: Activated
Dependency: Refer to: r7000
Note: For motors with separate winding systems (p7003 = 1) it is not possible to inhibit an individual power unit.
p7001 is automatically reset if a power unit is deactivated via p0125 or p0895.
r4979[0...n] OA application invalid error code / OA inv error code
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: r4975 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r7000 Par_circuit No. of active power units / Qty active PU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p7001[0...n] Par_circuit power units enable / PU enable
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-629
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status of the power units in the parallel circuit configuration.
Value: 0: Pulses inhibited
1: Pulses enabled
Dependency: Refer to: r7000, p7001
Description: Specifies the winding system for a parallel circuit configuration.
The following limitations/restrictions are obtained depending on the setting:
One winding system (p7003 = 0):
- the motor data identification routine (p1910) determines the stator resistance and the cable resistance. The cable
resistance of an individual Motor Module is entered into p0352.
- the current symmetrizing is activated as standard after the motor data identification routine (p7035 = 1).
- individual Motor Modules can be activated and deactivated (p7001).
- the edge modulation is not possible (p1802).
Several separate winding systems or motors (p7003 = 1):
- the motor data identification routine (p1910) determines the total (overall) resistance. The cable resistance is not
measured, but instead, entered as a component of the total resistance (refer to p0352).
- all Motor Modules are activated. It is not possible to deactivate a motor model.
- the edge modulation can be activated (p1802).
Value: 0: One winding system
1: Several separate winding systems or motors
Dependency: Refer to: p1802
Description: Sets the alarm threshold to detect current dissymmetry in the parallel circuit configuration.
The deviation between the measured values and average value is evaluated. The specified value is referred to the
rated power unit current (p7251[0]).
Dependency: Refer to: r7251
Refer to: A05052
r7002[0...n] Par_circuit status power units / Status PU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 -
p7003 Par_circuit winding system / Winding system
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: C2(2) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p7010 Par_circuit current dissymmetry alarm threshold / i_dissym A thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
2 [%] 100 [%] 20 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-630 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the alarm threshold to detect dissymmetry of the DC link voltages in the parallel circuit configuration.
The deviation between the measured values and average value is evaluated. The specified value is referred to the
rated link voltage.
Dependency: Refer to: A05053
Description: Displays the deviation between the measured current actual value of phase U and the average value as peak value.
The maximum deviation from the average value is displayed in r7025.
Dependency: Refer to: r7021, r7022, r7025
Description: Displays the deviation between the measured current actual value of phase V and the average value as peak value.
The maximum deviation from the average value is displayed in r7026.
Dependency: Refer to: r7020, r7022, r7026
Description: Displays the deviation between the measured current actual value of phase W and the average value as peak
value.
The maximum deviation from the average value is displayed in r7027.
Dependency: Refer to: r7020, r7021, r7027
p7011 Par_circuit DC link voltage dissymmetry alarm threshold / Vdc_dissym A thrsh
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
2 [%] 100 [%] 10 [%]
r7020[0...n] CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase U / Phase U curr dev
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r7021[0...n] CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase V / Phase V curr dev
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r7022[0...n] CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase W / Phase W curr dev
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-631
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured current actual values of phase U from the average value
as peak value.
The deviation of the individual currents from the average value is displayed in r7020.
Dependency: Refer to: r7020, r7026, r7027
Refer to: A05052
Description: Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured current actual values of phase V from the average value
as peak value.
The deviation of the individual currents from the average value is displayed in r7021.
Dependency: Refer to: r7021, r7025, r7027
Refer to: A05052
Description: Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured current actual values of phase W from the average
value as peak value.
The deviation of the individual currents from the average value is displayed in r7022.
Dependency: Refer to: r7022, r7025, r7026
Refer to: A05052
Description: Displays the deviation of the measured DC link voltage from the average value.
The maximum deviation from the average value is displayed in r7031.
Dependency: Refer to: r7031
r7025 CO: Par_circuit max. deviation currents phase U / Phase U Max i_dev
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r7026 CO: Par_circuit max. deviation currents phase V / Phase V Max i_dev
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r7027 CO: Par_circuit max. deviation currents phase W / Phase W Max i_dev
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r7030[0...n] CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage deviation / Vdc deviation
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-632 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured DC link voltage from the average value.
The deviation of the individual voltages from the average value is displayed in r7030.
Dependency: Refer to: r7030
Refer to: A05053
Description: Sets the operating mode of the circulating current control.
The circulating current control ensures symmetrical distribution of the total currents to the individual converters.
Value: 0: Circulating current control deactivated
1: Circulating control control activated
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the circulating current controller.
The parameter is preset to the cable resistance.
Description: Sets the integral time of the circulating current controller.
The parameter is referred to the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]).
Dependency: Refer to: p0115
r7031 CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage maximum deviation / Vdc deviation max.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
p7035[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control operating mode / Circ_I mode
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1
p7036[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control proportional gain / Circ_I Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm] 20.00000 [Ohm] 0.00000 [Ohm]
p7037[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control integral time / I_circ Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
2.0 1000.0 4.0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-633
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the limit of the circulating current controller output values.
The parameter is, depending on the phase, referred to the valve lockout times (p1828, p1829, p1830).
Description: For the particular Motor Module, the correction time must be added to the valve lockout time to be compensated for
phase U (p1828).
The corrective value is used to compensate variations/spread in the valve lockout times of Motor Modules for a par-
allel circuit configuration.
Dependency: Refer to: p1828
Description: For the particular Motor Module, the correction time must be added to the valve lockout time to be compensated for
phase V (p1829).
The corrective value is used to compensate variations/spread in the valve lockout times of Motor Modules for a par-
allel circuit configuration.
Dependency: Refer to: p1829
Description: For the particular Motor Module, the correction time must be added to the valve lockout time to be compensated for
phase W (p1830).
The corrective value is used to compensate variations/spread in the valve lockout times of Motor Modules for a par-
allel circuit configuration.
Dependency: Refer to: p1830
p7038[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control limit / I_circ limit
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 100 [%] 50 [%]
p7040[0...n] Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_lockout U
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
p7042[0...n] Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_lockout V
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
p7044[0...n] Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_lockout W
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1000000.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-634 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the circulating current of phase U as peak value.
Description: Displays the circulating current of phase V as peak value.
Description: Displays the circulating current of phase W as peak value.
Description: Ring buffer for faults and alarms that have occurred from power units connected in parallel (Motor Module, Active
Line Infeed, Voltage Sensing Module).
Displays the fault/alarm code.
Dependency: Refer to: r7101, r7102, r7103
Note: The last fault case that occurred is documented in index 0.
The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.
r7050[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current phase U / Circ_I_phase U
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r7051[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current phase V / Circ_I_phase V
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r7052[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current phase W / Circ_I_phase W
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r7100[0...99] Par_circuit ring buffer fault/alarm code / Fault/alarm code
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-635
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Ring buffer for faults and alarms that have occurred from power units connected in parallel (Motor Module, Active
Line Infeed, Voltage Sensing Module).
p7101 < 100:
Displays the Power unit Data Set number (PDS).
p7101 >= 100:
Displays the Voltage Sensing Module Data Set number (VSMDS)
Dependency: Refer to: r7100, r7102, r7103
Note: The last fault case that occurred is documented in index 0.
The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.
Description: Ring buffer for faults and alarms that have occurred from power units connected in parallel (Motor Module, Active
Line Infeed, Voltage Sensing Module).
Displays the relative system runtime when the fault or alarm occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r7100, r7101, r7103
Note: The last fault case that occurred is documented in index 0.
The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.
Description: Ring buffer for faults and alarms that have occurred from power units connected in parallel (Motor Module, Active
Line Infeed, Voltage Sensing Module).
Displays the relative system runtime when the fault or alarm was withdrawn.
Dependency: Refer to: r7100, r7101, r7102
Note: The last fault case that occurred is documented in index 0.
The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.
r7101[0...99] Par_circuit ring buffer data set number / Ring buffer Ds_No
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r7102[0...99] Par_circuit ring buffer fault/alarm received / F/A received
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r7103[0...99] Par_circuit ring buffer fault/alarm gone / F/A gone
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-636 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the overload of the particular power unit in a parallel circuit configuration calculated using the I2t function.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0036.
Description: Displays the maximum inverter temperature in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[0].
Description: Displays the maximum depletion layer temperature in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[1].
Description: Displays the maximum rectifier temperature in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[2].
Description: Displays the air intake temperature in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[3].
r7200[0...n] Par_circuit power unit overload I2T / PU overload I2T
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r7201[0...n] CO: Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. inverter / PU temp max inv
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7202[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. depletion layer / PU TempMaxDepLayer
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7203[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. rectifier / PU temp max rect
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7204[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures air intake / PU temp air intake
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-637
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the temperature of the electronics module in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[4].
Description: Displays the inverter temperature 1 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[5].
Description: Displays the inverter temperature 2 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[6].
Description: Displays the inverter temperature 3 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[7].
Description: Displays the inverter temperature 4 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[8].
r7205[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures electronics / PU temp electr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7206[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 1 / PU temp inv 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7207[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 2 / PU temp inv 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7208[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 3 / PU temp inv 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7209[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 4 / PU temp inv 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-638 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the inverter temperature 5 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[9].
Description: Displays the inverter temperature 6 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[10].
Description: Displays rectifier temperature 1 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[11].
Description: Displays rectifier temperature 2 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[12].
Description: Displays depletion layer temperature 1 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[13].
r7210[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 5 / PU temp inv 5
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7211[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 6 / PU temp inv 6
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7212[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 1 / PU temp rect 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7213[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 2 / PU temp rect 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7214[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 1 / PU temp DepLayer 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-639
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays depletion layer temperature 2 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[14].
Description: Displays depletion layer temperature 3 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[15].
Description: Displays depletion layer temperature 4 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[16].
Description: Displays depletion layer temperature 5 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[17].
Description: Displays depletion layer temperature 6 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[18].
r7215[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 2 / PU temp DepLayer 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7216[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 3 / PU temp DepLayer 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7217[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 4 / PU temp DepLayer 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7218[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 5 / PU temp DepLayer 5
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
r7219[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 6 / PU temp DepLayer 6
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: TEMP Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-640 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the maximum output current of the power unit.
The minimum value of all power units multiplied by the number of Motor Modules is displayed in r0067.
Description: Displays actual absolute current.
The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0068.
Description: Displays the measured actual value of phase U as peak value.
The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[0].
Description: Displays the measured actual value of phase V as peak value.
The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[1].
Description: Displays the measured actual value of phase W as peak value.
The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[2].
r7220[0...n] CO: Par_circuit drive output current maximum / Drv I_outp max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r7222[0...n] CO: Par_circuit absolute current actual value / I_act abs val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r7223[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase U / I_phase U act val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r7224[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase V / I_phase V act val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r7225[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase W / I_phase W act val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-641
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the measured offset of phase U as peak value.
The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[3].
Description: Displays the measured offset of phase V as peak value.
The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[4].
Description: Displays the measured offset of phase W as peak value.
The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[5].
Description: Displays the measured sum of the currents in phases U, V and W as peak value.
The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[6].
Description: Displays the measured actual value of the DC link voltage.
The average value of all power units is displayed in r0070.
r7226[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase U offset / I_phase U offset
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r7227[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase V offset / I_phase V offset
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r7228[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase W offset / I_phase W offset
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r7229[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value sum U, V, W / I_phase sum UVW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
r7230[0...n] CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage actual value / Vdc_act
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-642 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual voltage, phase U.
The average value of all power units is displayed in r0089[0].
Description: Displays the actual voltage, phase V.
The average value of all power units is displayed in r0089[1].
Description: Displays the actual voltage, phase W.
The average value of all power units is displayed in r0089[2].
Description: Displays status word 1 of the power unit.
r7231[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase U / V_phase U act val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_3 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
r7232[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase V / V_phase V act val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_3 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
r7233[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase W / V_phase W act val
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_3 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
r7240[0...n] Par_circuit gating unit status word 1 / Gating unit ZSW1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: PDS Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fault time-critical On Off -
01 Gating unit mode bit 0 On Off -
02 Pulse enable On Off -
03 5 V upper circuit breaker On Off -
04 5 V lower circuit breaker On Off -
05 Gating unit mode bit 1 On Off -
06 Gating unit mode bit 2 On Off -
07 Brake state On Off -
08 Brake diagnostics On Off -
09 Armature short-circuit braking Active Not active -
10 Gating unit state bit 0 On Off -
11 Gating unit state bit 1 On Off -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-643
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the rated power of the individual power units connected in parallel for various load duty cycles.
The sum of the rated powers of all power units connected in parallel is displayed in r0206.
Index: [0] = Rating plate
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 cont duty cyc
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: The value is displayed in [kW] or [hp].
Refer to: p0100, p0205
Description: Displays the rated current of the individual power units connected in parallel for various load duty cycles.
The sum of the rated currents of all power units connected in parallel is displayed in r0207.
Index: [0] = Rating plate
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 cont duty cyc
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: Refer to: p0205
Description: Displays the maximum output current of the individual power units connected in parallel.
The sum of the maximum currents of all power units connected in parallel is displayed in r0209.
Index: [0] = Rating plate
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 cont duty cyc
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: Refer to: p0205
12 Gating unit state bit 2 On Off -
13 Alarm status bit 0 On Off -
14 Alarm status bit 1 On Off -
15 Diagnostics 24 V On Off -
r7250[0...4] Par_circuit power unit rated power / PU P_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: 14_6 Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
r7251[0...4] Par_circuit power unit rated current / PU PI_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
r7252[0...4] Par_circuit maximum power unit current / PU I_max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Parallel)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-644 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the action to be executed for NVRAM data.
At the end of the action the value is automatically set to 0.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Load NVRAM data to parameters
2: Load parameters to NVRAM
3: Reset
Notice: After action p7770 = 1 no more pulses may be enabled.
After action p7770 = 2, it is essential that parameters are backed up (p0977 = 1) and that a warm restart is then per-
formed (p0009 = 30, p0976 = 2, 3). This will apply the values written.
Note: Re value = 1:
This action loads the NVRAM data to the parameters.
Re value = 2:
This action loads the parameters to the NVRAM.
Re value = 3:
This action sets parameters p7771 ... p7774 to the factory setting.
It is recommended to avoid placing unnecessary load on the subsequent upload/download operation.
Description: The size of the window for monitoring sign-of-life errors on the power unit.
Dependency: Refer to: A30853
Note: An active window is generated by means of DRIVE-CLiQ telegrams. If more than one sign-of-life error appears in
the window, A30853 is issued. The lower the value in p7788, the greater the tolerance of the monitoring procedure.
Description: Number of consecutive sign-of-life errors on the power unit that are tolerated.
Dependency: Refer to: F30008
Note: If more sign-of-life errors than the number set in p7789 occur one after the other, F30008 is issued. The higher the
value in p7789, the greater the tolerance of the monitoring procedure.
p7770 NVRAM action / NVRAM action
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
p7788 Sign-of-life monitoring tolerance window /
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 1000 10
p7789 Sign-of-life monitoring fault threshold /
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1000 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-645
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component whose parameters are to be accessed.
Dependency: Refer to: p7821, p7822, r7823
Description: Sets the parameter number to access a parameter of a DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Dependency: Refer to: p7820, p7822, r7823
Description: Sets the parameter index to access a parameter of a DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Dependency: Refer to: p7820, p7821, r7823
Description: Displays the parameter value read from the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Dependency: Refer to: p7820, p7821, p7822
p7820 DRIVE-CLiQ component component number / DLQ comp_no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
p7821 DRIVE-CLiQ component parameter number / DLQ para_no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
p7822 DRIVE-CLiQ component parameter index / DLQ para_index
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
r7823 DRIVE-CLiQ component read parameter value / Read DLQ value
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-646 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the firmware and EPROM versions of the DRIVE-CLiQ component selected using p7828[1].
Index: [0] = Reference firmware version
[1] = Actual firmware version
[2] = EPROM0 version
[3] = EPROM1 version
[4] = EPROM2 version
[5] = EPROM3 version
[6] = EPROM4 version
Dependency: Refer to: p7828
Note: Reference firmware version: Version on the memory card/device memory.
Current firmware version: Actual version of the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
EPROM version: Current EPROM version of the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Description: Sets the behavior for the automatic firmware update of the DRIVE-CLiQ components.
Value: 0: Deactivated
1: Upgrade and downgrade
2: Upgrade
Notice: If this parameter is changed, it only becomes effective the next time that the drive system boots.
Note: The firmware is automatically updated when the system boots. The boot can take several minutes.
After the update has been completed, it is necessary to carry out a new POWER ON (power-down/power-up) for
the components involved.
The firmware update procedure is displayed as follows:
Control Unit (LED RDY):
Flashes yellow with 0.5 Hz --> firmware is being updated.
Flashing yellow with 2 Hz --> POWER ON is required for the components involved.
Components involved:
Flashing red/green with 0.5 Hz --> firmware is being updated.
Flashing red/green with 2 Hz --> POWER ON of the components is required.
Only components from firmware version 2.5 support the red/green flashing at 2 Hz.
Description: Displays the progress when updating the firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ components.
r7825[0...6] DRIVE-CLiQ component versions / DLQ version
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p7826 Firmware update automatic / FW update auto
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 1
r7827 Firmware update progress display / FW update progress
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-647
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the component number for the required DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Index 0:
Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component for which a firmware download is to be made.
Index 1:
Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component for which the reference firmware version, saved in r7825 on the
memory card/device memory, is to be displayed.
Index: [0] = Firmware download
[1] = Reference firmware version
Dependency: Refer to: p0121, p0141, p0151, p7829
Note: For p7828[0] = 399, the firmware for all of the existing components is downloaded.
The firmware download is started with p7829 = 1.
Description: Activating the firmware download for the DRIVE-CLiQ components specified in p7828.
1: Activate download.
0: Download successfully completed.
> 1: Fault code
011: DRIVE-CLiQ component has detected a checksum error.
015: The selected DRIVE-CLiQ components did not accept the contents of the firmware file.
018: Firmware version is too old and is not accepted by the component.
019: Firmware version is not suitable for the hardware release of the component.
101: After several communication attempts, no response from the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
140: Firmware file for the DRIVE-CLiQ component not available on the memory card/device memory.
143: Component has not changed to the mode for firmware download. It was not possible to delete the existing
firmware.
144: When checking the firmware that was downloaded (checksum), the component detected a fault. It is possible
that the file on the memory card/device memory is defective.
145: Checking the loaded firmware (checksum) was not completed by the component in the appropriate time.
156: Component with the specified component number is not available.
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Dependency: Refer to: p7828
Note: p7829 is automatically set to 0 after the firmware has been successfully downloaded.
The new firmware only becomes active at the next system run-up.
p7828[0...1] Firmware download component number / FW download number
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 399 0
p7829 Activate firmware download / FW download act
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 999 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-648 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects a telegram whose contents should be shown in p7831 ... p7836.
Value: 0: Reserved
1: First cyclic receive telegram sensor 1
2: First cyclic receive telegram sensor 2
3: First cyclic receive telegram sensor 3
Dependency: Refer to: r7831, r7832, r7833, r7834, r7835, r7836
Description: Displays the signals contained in the selected telegram (p7830).
Value: 0: UNUSED
1: UNKNOWN
102: SAPAR_ID_DSA_ALARM
110: SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_0
111: SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_1
112: SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_2
113: SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_3
114: SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_4
115: SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_5
10500: ENC_ID_TIME_PRETRIGGER
10501: ENC_ID_TIME_SEND_TELEG_1
10502: ENC_ID_TIME_CYCLE_FINISHED
10503: ENC_ID_TIME_DELTA_FUNMAN
10504: ENC_ID_SUBTRACE_CALCTIMES
10505: ENC_ID_SYNO_PERIOD
10516: ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_A
10517: ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_B
10518: ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_C
10519: ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_D
10520: ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_A_SAFETY
10521: ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_B_SAFETY
10523: ENC_ID_ADC_TEMP_1
10526: ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_R
10532: ENC_ID_TRACK_AB_X
10533: ENC_ID_TRACK_AB_Y
10534: ENC_ID_OFFSET_CORR_AB_X
10535: ENC_ID_OFFSET_CORR_AB_Y
10536: ENC_ID_AB_ABS_VALUE
10537: ENC_ID_TRACK_CD_X
10538: ENC_ID_TRACK_CD_Y
10539: ENC_ID_TRACK_CD_ABS
10542: ENC_ID_AB_RAND_X
10543: ENC_ID_AB_RAND_Y
10544: ENC_ID_AB_RAND_ABS_VALUE
10545: ENC_ID_SUBTRACE_ABS_ARRAY
p7830 Diagnostics telegram selection / Diag telegram
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
r7831[0...15] Telegram diagnostics signals / Tel diag signals
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 11826 -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-649
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
10546: ENC_ID_PROC_OFFSET_0
10547: ENC_ID_PROC_OFFSET_4
10564: ENC_SELFTEMP_ACT
10565: ENC_ID_MOTOR_TEMP_TOP
10566: ENC_ID_MOTOR_TEMP_1
10580: ENC_ID_RESISTANCE_1
10590: ENC_ID_ANA_CHAN_A
10591: ENC_ID_ANA_CHAN_B
10592: ENC_ID_ANA_CHAN_X
10593: ENC_ID_ANA_CHAN_Y
10596: ENC_ID_AB_ANGLE
10597: ENC_ID_CD_ANGLE
10598: ENC_ID_MECH_ANGLE_HI
10599: ENC_ID_RM_POS_PHI_COMMU
10600: ENC_ID_PHI_COMMU
10612: ENC_ID_DIFF_CD_INC
10613: ENC_ID_RM_POS_PHI_COMMU_RFG
10628: ENC_ID_MECH_ANGLE
10629: ENC_ID_MECH_RM_POS
10644: ENC_ID_INIT_VECTOR
10645: FEAT_INIT_VEKTOR
10660: ENC_ID_SENSOR_STATE
10661: ENC_ID_BASIC_SYSTEM
10662: ENC_ID_REFMARK_STATUS
10663: ENC_ID_DSA_STATUS1_SENSOR
10664: ENC_ID_DSA_RMSTAT_HANDSHAKE
10665: ENC_ID_DSA_CONTROL1_SENSOR
10667: ENC_ID_SAFETY
10676: ENC_ID_COUNTCORR_SAW_VALUE
10677: ENC_ID_COUNTCORR_ABS_VALUE
10678: ENC_ID_SAWTOOTH_CORR
10692: ENC_ID_RESISTANCE_CALIB_INSTANT
10693: ENC_ID_SERPROT_POS
10724: ENC_ID_ACT_FUNMAN_FUNCTION
10725: ENC_ID_SAFETY_COUNTER_CRC
10740: ENC_ID_POS_ABSOLUTE
10741: ENC_ID_POS_REFMARK
10742: ENC_ID_SAWTOOTH
10743: ENC_ID_SAFETY_PULSE_COUNTER
10756: ENC_ID_DSA_ACTUAL_SPEED
10757: ENC_ID_SPEED_DEV_ABS
10772: ENC_ID_DSA_POS_XIST1
10788: ENC_ID_AB_CROSS_CORR
10789: ENC_ID_AB_GAIN_Y_CORR
10790: ENC_ID_AB_PEAK_CORR
11825: ENC_ID_RES_TRANSITION_RATIO
11826: ENC_ID_RES_PHASE_SHIFT
Index: [0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =
Parameter
List of parameters
1-650 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Indicates the original numerical format of the signals contained in the telegram.
The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831.
Value: -1: Unknown
0: Boolean
1: Signed 1 byte
2: Signed 2 byte
3: Signed 4 byte
4: Signed 8 byte
5: Unsigned 1 byte
6: Unsigned 2 byte
7: Unsigned 4 byte
8: Unsigned 8 byte
9: Float 4 byte
10: Double 8 byte
11: mm dd yy HH MM SS MS DOW
12: ASCII string
13: SIMUMERIK frame type
14: SIMUMERIK axis type
Index: [0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =
r7832[0...15] Telegram diagnostics numerical format / tel diag format
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1 14 -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-651
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Parameter to display a DSA signal in the unsigned-integer format.
The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831.
Index: [0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =
Description: Parameter to display a DSA signal in the signed-integer format.
The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831.
Index: [0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =
r7833[0...15] Telegram diagnostics unsigned / Tel diag unsigned
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r7834[0...15] Telegram diagnostics signed / Tel diag signed
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-652 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Parameter to display a DSA signal in the float format.
The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831.
Index: [0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =
Description: Parameter to display the units of a DSA signal.
The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831.
Value: -1: Unknown
0: None
1: Millimeter or degrees
2: Millimeter
3: Degrees
4: mm/min or RPM
5: Millimeter / min
6: Revolutions / min
7: m/sec^2 or V/sec^2
8: m/sec^2
9: V/sec^2
10: m/sec^3 or V/sec^3
11: m/sec^3
12: V/sec^3
13: Sec
14: 16.667 / sec
15: mm/revolution
16: ACX_UNIT_COMPENSATION_CORR
18: Newton
19: Kilogram
20: Kilogram meter ^2
21: Percent
r7835[0...15] Telegram diagnostics real / Tel diag real
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r7836[0...15] Telegram diagnostics unit / Tel diag unit
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-1 147 -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-653
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
22: Hertz
23: Volt peak-to-peak
24: Amps peak-to-peak
25: Degrees Celsius
26: Degrees
28: Millimeter or degrees
29: Meters / minute
30: Meters / second
31: Ohm
32: Millihenry
33: Newton meter
34: Newton meter / Amps
35: Volt / Amp
36: Newton meter second / rad
38: 31.25 microseconds
39: Microseconds
40: Milliseconds
42: Kilowatt
43: Micro amps peak-to-peak
44: Volt seconds
45: Microvolt seconds
46: Micro Newton meter
47: Amps / Volt seconds
48: Per mille
49: Hertz / second
53: Micrometer or millidegrees
54: Micrometer
55: Millidegrees
59: Nanometer
61: Newton/Amps
62: Volt seconds / meter
63: Newton seconds / meter
64: Micronewton
65: Liters / minute
66: Bar
67: Cubic centimeters
68: Millimeters / Volt minute
69: Newton/Volt
80: Millivolts peak-to-peak
81: Volt rms
82: Millivolts rms
83: Amps rms
84: Micro amps rms
85: Micrometers / revolution
90: Tenths of a second
91: Hundredths of a second
92: 10 microseconds
93: Pulses
94: 256 pulses
95: Tenth of a pulse
96: Revolutions
97: 100 revolutions / minute
98: 10 revolutions / minute
99: 0.1 revolutions / minute
100: Thousandth revolution / minute
101: Pulses / second
102: 100 pulses / second
103: 10 revolutions / (minute * second)
104: 10000 pulses/second^2
105: 0.1 Hertz
106: 0.01 Hertz
107: 0.1 / seconds
108: Factor 0.1
109: Factor 0.01
Parameter
List of parameters
1-654 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
110: Factor 0.001
111: Factor 0.0001
112: 0.1 Volt peak-to-peak
113: 0.1 Volt peak-to-peak
114: 0.1 amps peak-to-peak
115: Watt
116: 100 Watt
117: 10 Watt
118: 0.01 percent
119: 1 / second ^3
120: 0.01 percent/millisecond
121: Pulses / revolution
122: Microfarads
123: Milliohm
124: 0.01 Newton meter
125: Kilogram millimeter ^2
126: Rad / (seconds newton meter)
127: Henry
128: Kelvin
129: Hours
130: Kilohertz
131: Milliamperes peak-to-peak
132: Millifarads
133: Meter
135: Kilowatt hours
136: Percent
137: Amps / Volt
138: Volt
139: Millivolts
140: Microvolts
141: Amps
142: Milliamperes
143: Micro amps
144: Milliamperes rms
145: Millimeter
146: Nanometer
147: Joules
Index: [0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =
List of parameters
Parameter
1-655
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual serial number of the memory card.
The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices.
Dependency: Refer to: p9920, p9921
Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual:
Note: Example: displaying the serial number for a memory card:
r7843[0] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 1
r7843[1] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 2
r7843[2] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 3
r7843[3] = 57 dec --> ASCII characters = "9" --> serial number, character 4
r7843[4] = 50 dec --> ASCII characters = "2" --> serial number, character 5
r7843[5] = 51 dec --> ASCII characters = "3" --> serial number, character 6
r7843[6] = 69 dec --> ASCII characters = "E" --> serial number, character 7
r7843[7] = 0 dec --> ASCII characters = " " --> serial number, character 8
...
r7843[19] = 0 dec --> ASCII characters = " " --> serial number, character 20
r7843[20] = 0 dec
Serial number = 111923E
Description: Displays the version of the firmware stored on the memory card/device memory.
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
Description: Displays whether, for an activated drive object, all activated topology components are available or not (or whether
these can be addressed).
0: Drive object not ready for operation
1: Drive object ready for operation
r7843[0...20] Memory card serial number / Mem_card ser.no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r7844[0...1] Memory card/device memory firmware version / Mem_crd/dev_mem FW
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r7850[0...23] Drive object operational/not operational / DO ready for oper
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-32786 32767 -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-656 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the number of indices for r7853[0...n].
This corresponds to the number of DRIVE-CLiQ components that are in the target topology.
Dependency: Refer to: r7853
Note: The values are valid if all available Control Units adopt the "Initialization finished" state (r3988 = 800) following
power-up.
Description: Displays the component and whether this component is currently present.
High byte: Component number
Low byte: 0/1 (not available/available)
Dependency: Refer to: p7852
Note: The values are valid if all available Control Units adopt the "Initialization finished" state (r3988 = 800) following
power-up.
Description: Sets the mode for the sub-boot.
Value: 0: Sub-boot manual
1: Sub-boot automatic
Note: For p7857 = 0 (manual sub-boot) the following applies:
The parameter should be set to 1 to start the sub-boot.
p7852 Number of indices for r7853 / Qty indices r7853
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 200 1
r7853[0...n] Component available/not available / Comp present
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: p7852 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF hex -
p7857 Sub-boot mode / Sub-boot mode
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-657
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the global and unique component number in a drive system with several Control Units.
Each index of the parameter corresponds to a possible local component number on the corresponding Control Unit.
The indices are allocated to the global component numbers as follows:
p7859[0]: Not used
p7859[1]: Sets the global component number for the local component number 1
p7859[2]: Sets the global component number for the local component number 2
...
p7859[199]: Sets the global component number for the local component number 199
Notice: This parameter is preferably set via suitable commissioning software (e.g. UpdateAgent, STARTER, SCOUT).
Changing the parameter via the AOP (Advanced Operator Panel) or BOP (Basic Operator Panel) can destroy a
valid unique setting.
Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Displays status and configuration changes of all of the drive objects in the complete unit.
When changing the status or the configuration of the Control Unit or a drive object, the value of this parameter is
incremented.
Dependency: Refer to: r7868, r7869, r7870
Description: Reference to the drive objects whose configuration has changed.
Index 0:
When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is increased.
Index 1...n:
The drive object with object number in p0101[n-1] has changed its configuration.
Example:
r7868[3] was incremented since the last time it was read.
--> the configuration of the drive object with object number in p0101[2] was changed.
p7859[0...199] Component number global / Comp_nr global
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
-32786 32767 0
r7867 Status/configuration changes global / Changes global
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r7868[0...24] Configuration changes drive object reference / Config_chng DO ref
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-658 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices
[1] = Object number in p0101[0]
[2] = Object number in p0101[1]
[3] = Object number in p0101[2]
[4] = Object number in p0101[3]
[5] = Object number in p0101[4]
[6] = Object number in p0101[5]
[7] = Object number in p0101[6]
[8] = Object number in p0101[7]
[9] = Object number in p0101[8]
[10] = Object number in p0101[9]
[11] = Object number in p0101[10]
[12] = Object number in p0101[11]
[13] = Object number in p0101[12]
[14] = Object number in p0101[13]
[15] = Object number in p0101[14]
[16] = Object number in p0101[15]
[17] = Object number in p0101[16]
[18] = Object number in p0101[17]
[19] = Object number in p0101[18]
[20] = Object number in p0101[19]
[21] = Object number in p0101[20]
[22] = Object number in p0101[21]
[23] = Object number in p0101[22]
[24] = Object number in p0101[23]
Dependency: Refer to: p0101, r7867, r7871
Description: Reference to the drive objects whose status has changed.
Index 0:
When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is increased.
Index 1...n:
The drive object with object number in p0101[n-1] has changed its status.
Example:
r7868[3] was incremented since the last time it was read.
--> the status of the drive object with object number in p0101[2] was changed.
Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices
[1] = Object number in p0101[0]
[2] = Object number in p0101[1]
[3] = Object number in p0101[2]
[4] = Object number in p0101[3]
[5] = Object number in p0101[4]
[6] = Object number in p0101[5]
[7] = Object number in p0101[6]
[8] = Object number in p0101[7]
[9] = Object number in p0101[8]
[10] = Object number in p0101[9]
[11] = Object number in p0101[10]
[12] = Object number in p0101[11]
[13] = Object number in p0101[12]
[14] = Object number in p0101[13]
[15] = Object number in p0101[14]
[16] = Object number in p0101[15]
r7869[0...24] Status changes drive object reference / Status_chng DO ref
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-659
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
[17] = Object number in p0101[16]
[18] = Object number in p0101[17]
[19] = Object number in p0101[18]
[20] = Object number in p0101[19]
[21] = Object number in p0101[20]
[22] = Object number in p0101[21]
[23] = Object number in p0101[22]
[24] = Object number in p0101[23]
Dependency: Refer to: p0101, r7867, r7872
Description: Displays the configuration changes of all of the drive objects in the complete unit.
Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices
[1] = r7871[0] of a drive object
[2] = p0101 or r0102
[3] = PROFIBUS configuration (p0978)
[4] = DRIVE-CLiQ actual topology (r9900 or r9901)
[5] = DRIVE-CLiQ target topology (r9902 or r9903)
[6] = DRIVE-CLiQ ports (p0109)
[7] = OA applications
Dependency: Refer to: r7867, r7871
Note: Index 0:
When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented.
Index 1:
Drive object configuration. When changing r7871[0] on a drive object, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 2:
Drive object, configuration unit. When changing either p0101 or r0102, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 3:
PROFIBUS configuration unit. When changing p0978, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 4:
DRIVE-CLiQ actual topology. When changing either r9900 or r9901, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 5:
DRIVE-CLiQ target topology. When changing either p9902 or p9903, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 6:
DRIVE-CLiQ ports. When changing p0109, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 7:
OA applications. When changing OA applications, the value in this index is incremented.
r7870[0...7] Configuration changes global / Config_chng global
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-660 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the configuration changes on the drive object.
Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices
[1] = p0107 or p0108
[2] = Drive object name (p0199)
[3] = Structure-relevant parameters (e.g. p0180)
[4] = BICO interconnections
[5] = Activate/deactivate drive object
[6] = Data backup required
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000)
[9] = Parameter count through Drive Control Chart (DCC)
[10] = p0107 or p0108
Dependency: Refer to: r7868, r7870
Note: Index 0:
When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented.
Index 1:
Drive object commissioning: When changing either p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 2:
Drive object name. When changing p0199, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 3:
Drive object structure. When changing a parameter that is relevant for the structure (e.g. number of data sets), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 4:
Drive object BICO interconnections. When changing r3977, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 5:
Drive object activity: When changing p0105, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 6:
Drive object, data save.
0: There are no parameter changes to save.
1: There are parameter changes to save.
Index 8:
Drive object changeover of units. When changing reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000, p0304), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 9:
Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 10:
Drive object configuration. When changing either p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented.
r7871[0...10] Configuration changes drive object / Config_chng DO
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-661
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the configuration changes on the drive object.
Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices
[1] = p0010, p0107 or p0108
[2] = Drive object name (p0199)
[3] = Structure-relevant parameters (e.g. p0180)
[4] = BICO interconnections
[5] = Activate/deactivate drive object
[6] = Data backup required
[7] = Activate/deactivate component
[8] = Reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000)
[9] = Parameter count through Drive Control Chart (DCC)
[10] = p0107 or p0108
[11] = Reserved
[12] = Reserved
[13] = Reserved
[14] = Reserved
[15] = Encoder type (p0400)
Dependency: Refer to: r7868, r7870
Note: Index 0:
When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented.
Index 1:
Drive object configuration. When changing p0010, p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 2:
Drive object name. When changing p0199, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 3:
Drive object structure. When changing a parameter that is relevant for the structure (e.g. number of data sets), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 4:
Drive object BICO interconnections. When changing r3977, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 6:
Drive object, data save.
0: There are no parameter changes to save.
1: There are parameter changes to save.
Index 8:
Drive object changeover of units. When changing reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000, p0304 ...), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 9:
Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 15:
Encoder configuration. When changing p0400, the value in this index is incremented.
r7871[0...15] Configuration changes drive object / Config_chng DO
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-662 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the configuration changes on the drive object.
Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices
[1] = p0010, p0107 or p0108
[2] = Drive object name (p0199)
[3] = Structure-relevant parameters (e.g. p0180)
[4] = BICO interconnections
[5] = Activate/deactivate drive object
[6] = Data backup required
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000)
[9] = Parameter count through Drive Control Chart (DCC)
[10] = p0107 or p0108
Dependency: Refer to: r7868, r7870
Note: Index 0:
When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented.
Index 1:
Drive object commissioning: When changing p0010, p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 2:
Drive object name. When changing p0199, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 3:
Drive object structure. When changing a parameter that is relevant for the structure (e.g. number of data sets), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 4:
Drive object BICO interconnections. When changing r3977, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 5:
Drive object activity: When changing p0105, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 6:
Drive object, data save.
0: There are no parameter changes to save.
1: There are parameter changes to save.
Index 8:
Drive object changeover of units. When changing reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000, p0304), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 9:
Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 10:
Drive object configuration. When changing either p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented.
r7871[0...10] Configuration changes drive object / Config_chng DO
HUB, TB30, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-663
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the configuration changes on the drive object.
Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices
[1] = p0010, p0107 or p0108
[2] = Drive object name (p0199)
[3] = Structure-relevant parameters (e.g. p0180)
[4] = BICO interconnections
[5] = Reserved
[6] = Data backup required
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000)
[9] = Parameter count through Drive Control Chart (DCC)
[10] = p0107 or p0108
Dependency: Refer to: r7868, r7870
Note: Index 0:
When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented.
Index 1:
Drive object commissioning: When changing p0010, p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 2:
Drive object name. When changing p0199, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 3:
Drive object structure. When changing a parameter that is relevant for the structure (e.g. number of data sets), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 4:
Drive object BICO interconnections. When changing r3977, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 6:
Drive object, data save.
0: There are no parameter changes to save.
1: There are parameter changes to save.
Index 8:
Drive object changeover of units. When changing reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000, p0304), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 9:
Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 10:
Drive object configuration. When changing either p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented.
r7871[0...10] Configuration changes drive object / Config_chng DO
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-664 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the configuration changes on the drive object.
Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices
[1] = p0010, p0107 or p0108
[2] = Drive object name (p0199)
[3] = Structure-relevant parameters (e.g. p0180)
[4] = BICO interconnections
[5] = Activate/deactivate drive object
[6] = Data backup required
[7] = Activate/deactivate component
[8] = Reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000)
[9] = Parameter count through Drive Control Chart (DCC)
[10] = p0107 or p0108
[11] = Reserved
[12] = Reserved
[13] = Reserved
[14] = Reserved
[15] = SERVO or VECTOR (e.g. p0300)
Dependency: Refer to: r7868, r7870
Note: Index 0:
When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented.
Index 1:
Drive object commissioning: When changing p0010, p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 2:
Drive object name. When changing p0199, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 3:
Drive object structure. When changing a parameter that is relevant for the structure (e.g. number of data sets), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 4:
Drive object BICO interconnections. When changing r3977, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 5:
Drive object activity: When changing p0105, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 6:
Drive object, data save.
0: There are no parameter changes to save.
1: There are parameter changes to save.
Index 7:
Drive object component activity: When changing either p0125 or p0145, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 8:
Drive object changeover of units. When changing reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000, p0304), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 9:
Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 10:
Drive object configuration. When changing either p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 15:
SERVO/VECTOR configuration. When changing p0300, p0301 or p0400, the value in this index is incremented.
r7871[0...15] Configuration changes drive object / Config_chng DO
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-665
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status changes on the drive object.
Index 0:
When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented.
Index 1:
Drive object faults. When changing r0944, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 2:
Drive object alarms. When changing r2121, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 3:
Drive object safety messages. When changing r9744, the value in this index is incremented.
Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices
[1] = Faults (r0944)
[2] = Alarms (r2121)
[3] = Safety messages (r9744)
Dependency: Refer to: r7869
Description: Sets the priority for processing the existing drive objects in the system.
The parameter enables a free sequence to be set for processing the drive objects. For this purpose all the drive
object numbers existing in the system have to be written in the desired sequence into the corresponding indices of
the parameter. After re-booting this sequence will be effective without a plausibility check.
With the factory setting the following priorities regarding processing are applicable:
- The drive objects are pre-sorted according to their type as follows: CONTROL UNIT, INFEED, SERVO, VECTOR,
TM, HUB, CU-LINK
- If they are of the same type, they are sorted in ascending order according to their drive object number, i.e. the
lower the number, the higher the priority for processing.
Index: [0] = Drive object number Control Unit
[1] = Drive object number object 1
[2] = Drive object number object 2
[3] = Drive object number object 3
[4] = Drive object number object 4
[5] = Drive object number object 5
[6] = Drive object number object 6
[7] = Drive object number object 7
[8] = Drive object number object 8
[9] = Drive object number object 9
[10] = Drive object number object 10
[11] = Drive object number object 11
[12] = Drive object number object 12
[13] = Drive object number object 13
[14] = Drive object number object 14
[15] = Drive object number object 15
[16] = Drive object number object 16
r7872[0...3] Status changes drive object / Status_chng DO
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p7900[0...23] Drive objects priority / DO priority
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-666 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
[17] = Drive object number object 17
[18] = Drive object number object 18
[19] = Drive object number object 19
[20] = Drive object number object 20
[21] = Drive object number object 21
[22] = Drive object number object 22
[23] = Drive object number object 23
Notice: This parameter may only be used by qualified service personnel.
Note: If the same drive object numbers are used and if the existing drive object numbers in the system are entered incom-
pletely, the content of this parameter is ignored entirely. The behavior as with factory setting will then become effec-
tive.
Description: Displays the sampling times currently present on the drive unit.
For r7901[x] = 0, the following applies: The time slice is not active.
Description: Displays the number of hardware sampling times that can still be assigned.
These free sampling times can be used by OA applications such as DCC (Drive Control Chart) or FBLOCKS (free
function blocks).
Note: OA: Open Architecture
Description: Sets the signal source for bitwise data transfer.
These signals are available in BO: r8510.0 ... 7 for further interconnection.
Index: [0] = Send signal to BO: r8510.0
[1] = Send signal to BO: r8510.1
[2] = Send signal to BO: r8510.2
[3] = Send signal to BO: r8510.3
[4] = Send signal to BO: r8510.4
[5] = Send signal to BO: r8510.5
[6] = Send signal to BO: r8510.6
[7] = Send signal to BO: r8510.7
Dependency: Refer to: r8510
r7901[0...43] Sampling times / t_sample
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
r7903 Hardware sampling times still cannot be assigned / HW t_samp free
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p8500[0...7] BI: Data transfer 0 bitwise / Transfer 0 bit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-667
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for bitwise data transfer.
These signals are available in BO: r8511.0 ... 15 for further interconnection.
Index: [0] = Send signal to BO: r8511.0
[1] = Send signal to BO: r8511.1
[2] = Send signal to BO: r8511.2
[3] = Send signal to BO: r8511.3
[4] = Send signal to BO: r8511.4
[5] = Send signal to BO: r8511.5
[6] = Send signal to BO: r8511.6
[7] = Send signal to BO: r8511.7
[8] = Send signal to BO: r8511.8
[9] = Send signal to BO: r8511.9
[10] = Send signal to BO: r8511.10
[11] = Send signal to BO: r8511.11
[12] = Send signal to BO: r8511.12
[13] = Send signal to BO: r8511.13
[14] = Send signal to BO: r8511.14
[15] = Send signal to BO: r8511.15
[16] = Send signal to BO: r8511.16
[17] = Send signal to BO: r8511.17
[18] = Send signal to BO: r8511.18
[19] = Send signal to BO: r8511.19
[20] = Send signal to BO: r8511.20
[21] = Send signal to BO: r8511.21
Dependency: Refer to: r8511
Description: Sets the signal source for the wordwise data transfer (process signal).
This signal value is available in CO: r8512 for further interconnection.
Dependency: Refer to: r8512
Description: Sets the signal source for the wordwise data transfer (process signal).
This signal value is available in CO: r8513 for further interconnection.
Dependency: Refer to: r8513
p8501[0...21] BI: Data transfer 1 bitwise / Transfer 1 bit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p8502 CI: Data transfer 0 wordwise / Transfer 0 word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p8503 CI: Data transfer 1 wordwise / Transfer 1 word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-668 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal source for the wordwise data transfer (process signal).
This signal value is available in CO: r8514 for further interconnection.
Dependency: Refer to: r8514
Description: Sets the signal source for the wordwise data transfer (process signal).
This signal value is available in CO: r8515 for further interconnection.
Dependency: Refer to: r8515
Description: Displays the signals of the bitwise received data.
These signals were interconnected and transferred via BI: p8500[0...7].
Dependency: Refer to: p8500
Description: Displays the signals of the bitwise received data.
These signals were interconnected and transferred via BI: p8501[0...15].
p8504 CI: Data transfer 2 wordwise / Transfer 2 word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p8505 CI: Data transfer 3 wordwise / Transfer 3 word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r8510.0...7 BO: Data transfer 0 receive bitwise / Trans 0 recv bit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Receive signal from BI: p8500 On Off -
01 Receive signal from BI: p8500 On Off -
02 Receive signal from BI: p8500 On Off -
03 Receive signal from BI: p8500 On Off -
04 Receive signal from BI: p8500 On Off -
05 Receive signal from BI: p8500 On Off -
06 Receive signal from BI: p8500 On Off -
07 Receive signal from BI: p8500 On Off -
r8511.0...21 BO: Data transfer 1 receive bitwise / Trans 1 recv bit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-669
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p8501
Description: Displays the signals of the wordwise received data (process signal).
This signal value is interconnected and transferred via CI: p8502.
Dependency: Refer to: p8502
Description: Displays the signals of the wordwise received data (process signal).
This signal value is interconnected and transferred via CI: p8503.
Dependency: Refer to: p8503
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
01 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
02 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
03 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
04 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
05 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
06 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
07 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
08 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
09 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
10 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
11 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
12 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
13 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
14 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
15 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
16 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
17 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
18 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
19 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
20 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
21 Receive signal from BI: p8501 On Off -
r8512 CO: Data transfer 0 receive wordwise / Trans 0 recv word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r8513 CO: Data transfer 1 receive wordwise / Trans 1 recv word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-670 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the signals of the wordwise received data (process signal).
This signal value is interconnected and transferred via CI: p8504.
Dependency: Refer to: p8504
Description: Displays the signals of the wordwise received data (process signal).
This signal value is interconnected and transferred via CI: p8505.
Dependency: Refer to: p8505
Description: Is used to save the actual configuration of the Advanced Operator Panels (AOP).
r8514 CO: Data transfer 2 receive wordwise / Trans 2 recv word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r8515 CO: Data transfer 3 receive wordwise / Trans 3 recv word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
p8550 AOP LOCAL/REMOTE / AOP LOCAL/REMOTE
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1001 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 LOCAL save Yes No -
01 Start in LOCAL Yes No -
02 Change in oper. Yes No -
03 OFF acts like OFF1 Yes No -
04 OFF acts like OFF2 Yes No -
05 OFF acts like OFF3 Yes No -
06 Reserved Yes No -
07 CW/CCW active Yes No -
08 Jog active Yes No -
09 Save speed setpoint Yes No -
14 Inhibit operation Yes No -
15 Inhibit parameterization Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-671
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the macro file saved in the appropriate directory on the memory card/device memory.
Dependency: Refer to: p0015
Note: For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.
Description: Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory.
Dependency: Refer to: p0700
Note: For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.
Description: Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory.
Dependency: Refer to: p1000
Note: For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.
Description: Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory.
Dependency: Refer to: p1500
Note: For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.
r8570[0...39] Macro drive object / Macro DO
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150, TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8571[0...39] Macro Binector Input (BI) / Macro BI
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8572[0...39] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints / Macro CI n_set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8573[0...39] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints / Macro CI M_set
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-672 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Indicates which macro is presently being run in the drive object.
Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570, r8571, r8572, r8573
Description: Displays all of the devices connected to the CAN bus after run-up.
r8600
= 00000000 hex: No drive recognized.
= FFFF0192 hex: Several drives - drive 1 is an Active Line Module, servo drive or vector drive
= FFFF0191 hex: Several drives - 1st drive is a Terminal Module
= 02010192 hex: 1 Vector drive
= 00020192 hex: 1 Servo drive
= 01000192 hex: 1 Active Line Module
= 00080191 hex: 1 Terminal Module
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1000 hex.
For each detected drive, the device type is displayed in object 67FF hex + 800 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Description: Displays the error register for CANopen.
Bit 0: Generic error
0 signal: No error present.
1 signal: Generic error present.
Bit 1 ... 3: Not supported (always a 0 signal)
Bit 4: Communications error
0 signal: There is no message in the range 8700 ... 8799.
1 signal: There is at least one message (fault or alarm) in the range 8700 ... 8799.
Bit 5 ... 6: Not supported (always a 0 signal)
Bit 7:; Fault outside the range 8700 ... 8799
0 signal: There is no fault outside the range 8700 ... 8799.
1 signal: There is at least one fault outside the range 8700 ... 8799.
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1001 hex.
r8585 Actual macro running / Actual macro
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150, TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8600 CAN device type / Device type
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8601 CAN error register / Error register
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-673
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the SYNC object parameter for the following CANopen objects:
- 1005 hex: COB-ID
Note: SINAMICS operates as SYNC load.
COB-ID: CAN object identification
Description: Sets the COB ID of the emergency message (error telegram). It corresponds to the CANopen objects:
- 1014 hex: COB-ID
Note: If, when downloading, the preset value 0 is downloaded, then the CANopen preset value 80 hex + Node-ID is auto-
matically set.
Online, the value 0 is rejected as, according to the CANopen Standard, COB ID 0 is not permitted here.
The changeover of the node ID using the hardware switch at the CU or per software has no effect on the COB-ID
EMCY. The saved value remains effective.
Description: Sets the node guarding parameter for the following CANopen objects:
- 100C hex: Guard Time
- 100D hex: Life Time Factor
The life time is derived by multiplying guard time by the life time factor.
Index: [0] = Time interval [ms] for new node guarding telegram
[1] = Factor for failure of the node guarding telegram
Dependency: Only adjustable if heartbeat time = 0 (heartbeat is disabled).
Refer to: p8606
Note: For p8604[0] = 0 and/or p8604[1] = 0, the node guarding protocol is not used.
Either node guarding or heartbeat can be used.
p8602 CAN SYNC object / SYNC object
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0080 hex
p8603 CAN COB ID Emergency Message / COB ID EMCY Msg
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(1), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p8604[0...1] CAN node guarding / Node guarding
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-674 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the time [ms] to cyclically send heartbeat telegrams.
The smallest cycle time is 100 ms.
When a 0 is written, then heartbeat telegrams are not sent.
Dependency: Only adjustable if guard time = 0 (node guarding disabled).
Refer to: p8604
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1017 hex.
Either node guarding or heartbeat can be used.
Description: General device information display.
Index: [0] = Vendor ID
[1] = Product code
[2] = Revision number
[3] = Serial number
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1018 hex.
Re index 3:
The SINAMICS serial number comprises 60 bits. Of these bits, the following are displayed in this index:
Bits 0 ... 19: Consecutive number
Bits 20 ... 23: Production ID
- 0 hex: Development
- 1 hex: P1 unique number
- 2 hex: P2 unique number
- 3 hex: WA unique number
- 9 hex: Pattern
- F hex: All others
Bits 24 ... 27: Month of manufacture (0 means January, B means December)
Bits 28 ... 31: Year of manufacture (0 means 2002)
p8606 CAN Producer Heartbeat Time / Prod Heartb Time
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 65535 [ms] 0 [ms]
r8607[0...3] CAN Identity Object / Identity object
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-675
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: For a bus off error, the CAN bus is restarted with p8608 = 1 after the cause of the error has been removed.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Start CAN controller
Note: This parameter is automatically reset to 0 after start.
Description: Sets the behavior of the CAN node referred to the communications error or equipment fault.
Value: 0: Pre-operational
1: No change
2: Stopped
Index: [0] = Behavior for communication errors
[1] = Behavior for device faults
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1029 hex.
Description: Displays the identifier (client/server and server/client) of the SDO channel.
Index: [0] = Displays the COB ID from client to server
[1] = Displays the COB ID from server to client
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1200 hex.
SDO: Service Data Object
p8608 CAN Clear Bus Off Error / Clear bus off err
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p8609[0...1] CAN Error Behaviour / Error behavior
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 1
r8610[0...1] CAN First Server SDO / First server SDO
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-676 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the Pre-defined Error Field of the CAN node.
It includes the number of all errors that have occurred, the number of errors that have occurred for each drive and
the errors according to their history.
The first 16 bits represent the CANopen error code and the second 16 bits the SINAMICS error code.
Index 1 has the same structure - however, the drive object ID is in the second 16 bits instead of the SINAMICS error
code.
CANopen error code:
0000 hex: No error present
8110 hex: Alarm A08751 present
8120 hex: Alarm A08752 present
8130 hex: Alarm A08700(F) with alarm value = 2 present
1000 hex: Generic error 1 present (there is at least one fault outside the range 8700 ... 8799)
1001 hex: Generic error 2 present (there is at least one alarm in the range 8700 ... 8799 with the exception of
A08751, A08752, A08700)
All drive objects are acknowledged by writing the value 0 to the index 0. As soon as a fault has been acknowledged
or an alarm cleared, then it is also cleared from the fault list.
Index: [0] = Number of all faults in the drive unit
[1] = Most recent drive number / fault number
[2] = Number of faults drive 1
[3] = Fault 1/ drive 1
[4] = Fault 2/ drive 1
[5] = Fault 3/ drive 1
[6] = Fault 4/ drive 1
[7] = Fault 5/ drive 1
[8] = Fault 6/ drive 1
[9] = Fault 7/ drive 1
[10] = Fault 8/ drive 1
[11] = Number of faults drive 2
[12] = Fault 1/ drive 2
[13] = Fault 2/ drive 2
[14] = Fault 3/ drive 2
[15] = Fault 4/ drive 2
[16] = Fault 5/ drive 2
[17] = Fault 6/ drive 2
[18] = Fault 7/ drive 2
[19] = Fault 8/ drive 2
[20] = Number of faults drive 3
[21] = Fault 1/ drive 3
[22] = Fault 2/ drive 3
[23] = Fault 3/ drive 3
[24] = Fault 4/ drive 3
[25] = Fault 5/ drive 3
[26] = Fault 6/ drive 3
[27] = Fault 7/ drive 3
[28] = Fault 8/ drive 3
p8611[0...82] CAN Pre-defined Error Field / Pre_def err field
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF 1000 hex 0000 hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-677
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
[29] = Number of faults drive 4
[30] = Fault 1/ drive 4
[31] = Fault 2/ drive 4
[32] = Fault 3/ drive 4
[33] = Fault 4/ drive 4
[34] = Fault 5/ drive 4
[35] = Fault 6/ drive 4
[36] = Fault 7/ drive 4
[37] = Fault 8/ drive 4
[38] = Number of faults drive 5
[39] = Fault 1/ drive 5
[40] = Fault 2/ drive 5
[41] = Fault 3/ drive 5
[42] = Fault 4/ drive 5
[43] = Fault 5/ drive 5
[44] = Fault 6/ drive 5
[45] = Fault 7/ drive 5
[46] = Fault 8/ drive 5
[47] = Number of faults drive 6
[48] = Fault 1/ drive 6
[49] = Fault 2/ drive 6
[50] = Fault 3/ drive 6
[51] = Fault 4/ drive 6
[52] = Fault 5/ drive 6
[53] = Fault 6/ drive 6
[54] = Fault 7/ drive 6
[55] = Fault 8/ drive 6
[56] = Number of faults drive 7
[57] = Fault 1/ drive 7
[58] = Fault 2/ drive 7
[59] = Fault 3/ drive 7
[60] = Fault 4/ drive 7
[61] = Fault 5/ drive 7
[62] = Fault 6/ drive 7
[63] = Fault 7/ drive 7
[64] = Fault 8/ drive 7
[65] = Number of faults drive 8
[66] = Fault 1/ drive 8
[67] = Fault 2/ drive 8
[68] = Fault 3/ drive 8
[69] = Fault 4/ drive 8
[70] = Fault 5/ drive 8
[71] = Fault 6/ drive 8
[72] = Fault 7/ drive 8
[73] = Fault 8/ drive 8
[74] = Number of faults Control Unit
[75] = Fault 1/Control Unit
[76] = Fault 2/Control Unit
[77] = Fault 3/Control Unit
[78] = Fault 4/Control Unit
[79] = Fault 5/Control Unit
[80] = Fault 6/Control Unit
[81] = Fault 7/Control Unit
[82] = Fault 8/Control Unit
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1003 hex.
Parameter
List of parameters
1-678 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Display or setting of the CANopen Node ID.
The Node ID can be set as follows:
1) Using the address switch on the Control Unit.
--> p8620 can then only be read and displays the selected Node ID.
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
--> CANopen Node ID and PROFIBUS address are identical.
2) Using p8620
--> only if all of the DIP switches - from S1 to S7 - are either set to ON or OFF.
--> the Node ID is set as standard to 126.
--> A change only becomes effective after save and POWER ON.
Note: Every node ID change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
It is only possible to independently set CANopen node ID and the PROFIBUS address using p0918 and p8620 (pre-
requisite: For DIP switches, all of the switches from S1 to S7 are either set to ON or OFF).
Description: Setting the baud rate for the CAN bus.
The appropriate bit timings are selected that are defined in p8623 in the associated sub-index.
Example:
Baud rate = 20 kbit/s --> p8622 = 6 --> associated bit timing is in p8623[6].
Value: 0: 1 Mbit/s
1: 800 kbit/s
2: 500 kbit/s
3: 250 kbit/s
4: 125 kbit/s
5: 50 kbit/s
6: 20 kbit/s
7: 10 kbit/s
Dependency: Refer to: p8623
Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p8620 CAN Node-ID / Node ID
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 126 126
p8622 CAN baud rate / Baud rate
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 7 6
List of parameters
Parameter
1-679
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the bit timing for the C_CAN controller to the associated and selected baud rate (p8622).
Bits are distributed to the following parameters of the C_CAN controller in p8623[0...7]:
Bit 0 ... 5: BRP (Baud Rate Prescaler)
Bit 6 ... 7: SJW (Synchronization Jump Width)
Bit 8 ... 11: TSEG1 (Time Segment 1, before the sampling point)
Bit 12 ... 14: TSEG2 (Time Segment 2, after the sampling point)
Bit 15: Reserved
Bit 16 ... 19: BRPE (Baud Rate Prescaler Extension)
Bit 20 ... 31: Reserved
Example:
Baud rate = 20 kbit/s --> p8622 = 6 --> associated bit timing is in p8623[6] --> 0001 2FB6
Recommend.: Use the factory setting when setting the bit timing.
Index: [0] = 1 Mbit/s
[1] = 800 kbit/s
[2] = 500 kbit/s
[3] = 250 kbit/s
[4] = 125 kbit/s
[5] = 50 kbit/s
[6] = 20 kbit/s
[7] = 10 kbit/s
Dependency: Refer to: p8622
Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p8623[0...7] CAN Bit Timing selection / Bit timing select
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 000F 7FFF hex [0] 1405 hex
[1] 1605 hex
[2] 1C05 hex
[3] 1C0B hex
[4] 1C17 hex
[5] 1C3B hex
[6] 0002 1C15 hex
[7] 0004 1C2B hex
Parameter
List of parameters
1-680 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the drive object selection (index 0), the sub-index area (index 1) and the parameter area (index 2) when using
virtual objects.
This means that it is possible to access all SINAMICS parameters via CAN.
Index 0 (drive object selection):
0: Not possible to access virtual CANopen objects
1: Device
2 ... 65535: Drive 1 ... 8
Index 1 (sub-index area):
0: 0 ... 255
1: 256 ... 511
2: 512 ... 767
3: 768 ... 1023
Index 2 (parameter area):
0: 1 ... 9999
1: 10000 ... 19999
2: 20000 ... 29999
3: 30000 ... 39999
Index: [0] = Drive object selection
[1] = Sub-index range
[2] = Parameter range
Description: Sets the drive behavior if a CAN communication error occurs.
Value: 0: No response
1: OFF1
2: OFF2
3: OFF3
Dependency: Refer to: F08700
Description: Displays the register of the CAN controller C_CAN:
Register, Message Interface Register and Message Handler Register - referred to the CAN protocol.
p8630[0...2] CAN virtual objects / Virtual objects
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
p8641 CAN Abort Connection Option Code / Abort con opt code
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 3
r8680[0...36] CAN Diagnosis Hardware / Diagnostics HW
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-681
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = Control register
[1] = Status register
[2] = Error counter
[3] = Bit timing register
[4] = Interrupt register
[5] = Test register
[6] = Baud rate prescaler extension register
[7] = Interface 1 command request register
[8] = Interface 1 command mask register
[9] = Interface 1 mask 1 register
[10] = Interface 1 mask 2 register
[11] = Interface 1 arbitration 1 register
[12] = Interface 1 arbitration 2 register
[13] = Interface 1 message control register
[14] = Interface 1 data A1 register
[15] = Interface 1 data A2 register
[16] = Interface 1 data B1 register
[17] = Interface 1 data B2 register
[18] = Interface 2 command request register
[19] = Interface 2 command mask register
[20] = Interface 2 mask 1 register
[21] = Interface 2 mask 2 register
[22] = Interface 2 arbitration 1 register
[23] = Interface 2 arbitration 2 register
[24] = Interface 2 message control register
[25] = Interface 2 data A1 register
[26] = Interface 2 data A2 register
[27] = Interface 2 data B1 register
[28] = Interface 2 data B2 register
[29] = Transmission request 1 register
[30] = Transmission request 2 register
[31] = New data 1 register
[32] = New data 2 register
[33] = Interrupt pending 1 register
[34] = Interrupt pending 2 register
[35] = Message valid 1 register
[36] = Message valid 2 register
Note: A description of the individual registers of the C_CAN controller can be taken from "C_CAN User's Manual".
Description: Sets the CANopen NMT state that is effective after booting.
Value: 4: Stopped
5: Operational
127: Pre-operational
Dependency: Refer to: p8685
Note: Booting in the NMT state pre-operational corresponds to the CANopen standard
p8684 CAN NMT state after booting / NMT state boot
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
4 127 127
Parameter
List of parameters
1-682 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets and displays the CANopen NMT state.
Value: 0: Initializing
4: Stopped
5: Operational
127: Pre-operational
128: Reset node
129: Reset Communication
Note: The value 0 (initialization) is only displayed and cannot be set.
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 1 (RPDO 1).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1400 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 2 (RPDO 2).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1401 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
p8685 CAN NMT states / NMT states
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(1), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 129 127
p8700[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 1 / Receive PDO 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204, 9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 8000 06DF hex [0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
p8701[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 2 / Receive PDO 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204, 9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 8000 06DF hex [0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-683
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 3 (RPDO 3).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1402 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 4 (RPDO 4).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1403 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 5 (RPDO 5).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1404 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
p8702[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 3 / Receive PDO 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204, 9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 8000 06DF hex [0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
p8703[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 4 / Receive PDO 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204, 9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 8000 06DF hex [0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
p8704[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 5 / Receive PDO 5
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 8000 06DF hex [0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
Parameter
List of parameters
1-684 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 6 (RPDO 6).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1405 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 7 (RPDO 7).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1406 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 8 (RPDO 8).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1407 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
p8705[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 6 / Receive PDO 6
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 8000 06DF hex [0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
p8706[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 7 / Receive PDO 7
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 8000 06DF hex [0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
p8707[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 8 / Receive PDO 8
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 8000 06DF hex [0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-685
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 1 (RPDO 1).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1600 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid.
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 2 (RPDO 2).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1601 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid.
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 3 (RPDO 3).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1602 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid.
p8710[0...3] CAN Receive Mapping für RPDO 1 / Mapping RPDO 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204, 9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p8711[0...3] CAN Receive Mapping für RPDO 2 / Mapping RPDO 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204, 9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p8712[0...3] CAN Receive Mapping für RPDO 3 / Mapping RPDO 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204, 9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Parameter
List of parameters
1-686 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 4 (RPDO 4).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1603 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid.
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 5 (RPDO 5).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1604 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid.
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 6 (RPDO 6).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1605 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid.
p8713[0...3] CAN Receive Mapping für RPDO 4 / Mapping RPDO 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204, 9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p8714[0...3] CAN Receive Mapping für RPDO 5 / Mapping RPDO 5
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p8715[0...3] CAN Receive Mapping für RPDO 6 / Mapping RPDO 6
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-687
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 7 (RPDO 7).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1606 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid.
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 8 (RPDO 8).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1607 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid.
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 1 (TPDO 1).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time (in 100 µs)
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer (in ms)
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
p8716[0...3] CAN Receive Mapping für RPDO 7 / Mapping RPDO 7
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p8717[0...3] CAN Receive Mapping für RPDO 8 / Mapping RPDO 8
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p8720[0...4] CAN Transmit PDO 1 / Transmit PDO 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208, 9210
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex C000 06DF hex [0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
Parameter
List of parameters
1-688 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply:
A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off.
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1800 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 2 (TPDO 2).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time (in 100 µs)
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer (in ms)
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply:
A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off.
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1801 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 3 (TPDO 3).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time (in 100 µs)
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer (in ms)
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply:
A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off.
p8721[0...4] CAN Transmit PDO 2 / Transmit PDO 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208, 9210
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex C000 06DF hex [0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
p8722[0...4] CAN Transmit PDO 3 / Transmit PDO 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208, 9210
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex C000 06DF hex [0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-689
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1802 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 4 (TPDO 4).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time (in 100 µs)
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer (in ms)
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply:
A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off.
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1803 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 5 (TPDO 5).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time (in 100 µs)
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer (in ms)
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply:
A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off.
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1804 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
p8723[0...4] CAN Transmit PDO 4 / Transmit PDO 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208, 9210
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex C000 06DF hex [0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
p8724[0...4] CAN Transmit PDO 5 / Transmit PDO 5
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex C000 06DF hex [0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
Parameter
List of parameters
1-690 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 6 (TPDO 6).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time (in 100 µs)
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer (in ms)
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply:
A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off.
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1805 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 7 (TPDO 7).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time (in 100 µs)
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer (in ms)
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply:
A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off.
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1806 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
p8725[0...4] CAN Transmit PDO 6 / Transmit PDO 6
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex C000 06DF hex [0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
p8726[0...4] CAN Transmit PDO 7 / Transmit PDO 7
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex C000 06DF hex [0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-691
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 8 (TPDO 8).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time (in 100 µs)
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer (in ms)
Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Refer to: p8740, p8741
Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply:
A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off.
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1807 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 1 (TPDO 1).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A00 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid.
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 2 (TPDO 2).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
p8727[0...4] CAN Transmit PDO 8 / Transmit PDO 8
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex C000 06DF hex [0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
p8730[0...3] CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 1 / Mapping TPDO 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208, 9210
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p8731[0...3] CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 2 / Mapping TPDO 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208, 9210
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Parameter
List of parameters
1-692 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A01 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid.
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 3 (TPDO 3).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A02 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid.
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 4 (TPDO 4).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A03 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid.
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 5 (TPDO 5).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A04 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid.
p8732[0...3] CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 3 / Mapping TPDO 3
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208, 9210
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p8733[0...3] CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 4 / Mapping TPDO 4
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208, 9210
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p8734[0...3] CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 5 / Mapping TPDO 5
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-693
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 6 (TPDO 6).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A05 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid.
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 7 (TPDO 7).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A06 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid.
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 8 (TPDO 8).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A07 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid.
p8735[0...3] CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 6 / Mapping TPDO 6
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p8736[0...3] CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 7 / Mapping TPDO 7
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p8737[0...3] CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 8 / Mapping TPDO 8
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Parameter
List of parameters
1-694 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the number of channels for receive PDOs and Transmit PDOs.
To define the number of channels of a drive, there are 3 indices (3 * n indices, n = 8).
Index 0: Number of channels for receive PDOs (1st drive)
Index 1: Number of channels for transmit PDOs (1st drive)
Index 2: Reserved
Correspondingly, indices 3 to 5 are valid for the 2nd drive, etc.
Index: [0] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 1)
[1] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 1)
[2] = Reserved
[3] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 2)
[4] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 2)
[5] = Reserved
[6] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 3)
[7] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 3)
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 4)
[10] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 4)
[11] = Reserved
[12] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 5)
[13] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 5)
[14] = Reserved
[15] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 6)
[16] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 6)
[17] = Reserved
p8740[0...23] CAN channel distribution / Chann assign.
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 [0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
[20] 0
[21] 0
[22] 0
[23] 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-695
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
[18] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 7)
[19] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 7)
[20] = Reserved
[21] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 8)
[22] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 8)
[23] = Reserved
Dependency: Refer to: p8741
Note: Channel assignment not yet in effect. To acknowledge set p8741 = 1.
Description: Acknowledges the channel distribution selection made (p8740) and the setting of the predefined connection sets
(p8744).
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Acknowledge configuration
Dependency: Refer to: p8740, p8744
Description: Displays the RPDO channels that are still available.
Dependency: Refer to: p8741
Note: The display is updated after acknowledging the configuration (p8741 = 1).
The number only includes the RPDO channels in p8740 for which an axis is present in the topology!
RPDO: Receive Process Data Object
Description: Displays the drive ID associated with each drive.
Index: [0] = Drive ID for 1st drive
[1] = Drive ID for 2nd drive
[2] = Drive ID for 3rd drive
[3] = Drive ID for 4th drive
[4] = Drive ID for 5th drive
[5] = Drive ID for 6th drive
[6] = Drive ID for 7th drive
[7] = Drive ID for 8th drive
p8741 CAN PDO configuration acknowledgement / PDO config ackn
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
r8742 CAN number of free RPDO channels / Qty free RPDO
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8743[0...7] CAN assignment drive/drive ID / Drive ID
CU_G_G130 (CAN),
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-696 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selector switch for the PDO mapping.
Sets the mapping for download or in the online mode after acknowledging with p8741.
Value: 1: Predefined Connection Set
2: Free PDO Mapping
Description: Displays the mapped 16-bit receive CANopen objects in the process data buffer.
Example:
If, e.g. the control word is mapped in an RPDO, then r8750 indicates the position of the control word in the process
data buffer.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
p8744 CAN PDO mapping configuration / PDO Mapping conf.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C2, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 9204, 9206,
9208, 9210
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 2
r8750[0...15] CAN mapped 16-bit receive objects / RPDO 16 mapped
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-697
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays mapped 16-bit transmit CANopen objects in the process data buffer.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency: Refer to: r8750
Description: Displays the mapped 32-bit receive CANopen objects in the process data buffer.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
r8751[0...15] CAN mapped 16-bit transmit objects / TPDO 16 mapped
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8760[0...14] CAN mapped 32-bit receive objects / RPDO 32 mapped
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-698 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays mapped 32-bit transmit CANopen objects in the process data buffer.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
Description: Displays the CANopen status word.
r8761[0...14] CAN mapped 32-bit transmit objects / TPDO 32 mapped
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8784 CO: CAN status word / Status word
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Ready for sw on Yes No -
01 Ready Yes No -
02 Operation enabled Yes No -
03 Fault present Yes No -
04 No coasting active Yes No -
05 No Quick Stop active Yes No -
06 Switching on inhibited active Yes No -
07 Alarm present Yes No -
08 Can be freely interconnected (BI: p8785) High Low -
09 Control request Yes No -
10 Target reached Yes No -
11 Torque limit reached Yes No -
12 Velocity equal to zero Yes No -
14 Can be freely interconnected (BI: p8786) High Low -
15 Can be freely interconnected (BI: p8787) High Low -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-699
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 6041 hex + 800 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Re bit 10:
When the ramp-function generator is activated, the interconnection from CI: p2151 = r1119 can be changed, so that
to evaluate bit 10, the setpoint can be retrieved (taken) from in front of the ramp-function generator.
Re bit 10, 12:
When braking, the two bits must indicate the same state. This is the reason that the following parameters must be
set the same:
p2161 (speed threshold value 3, for r2199.0) = p2163 (speed threshold value 4, for r2197.7)
p2150 (hysteresis speed 3, for r2199.0) = p2164 (hysteresis speed 4, for r2197.7)
Description: Binector input for CANopen status word bit 8.
Dependency: Refer to: r8784
Description: Binector input for CANopen status word bit 14.
Dependency: Refer to: r8784
Description: Binector input for CANopen status word bit 15.
Dependency: Refer to: r8784
Description: Sets the automatic BICO interconnection of the CANopen control word.
Value: 0: No interconn
1: Interconnection
Dependency: Refer to: r2050, r2090, r2091, r2092, r2093, r8750, r8795, r8850, r8890, r8891, r8892, r8893
p8785 BI: CAN status word bit 8 / Status word bit 8
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p8786 BI: CAN status word bit 14 / Status word bit 14
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p8787 BI: CAN status word bit 15 / Status word bit 15
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p8790 CAN control word - auto interconnection / STW interc auto
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-700 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The following BICO interconnections are automatically established if the CANopen control word is mapped at one
of the locations x = 0 ... 3 in the receive process data buffer.
For SINAMICS S120 with CBC10, the PZD interface IF2 is used:
BI: p0840.0 = r889x.0
BI: p0844.0 = r889x.1
BI: p0848.0 = r889x.2
BI: p0852.0 = r889x.3
BI: p2103.0 = r889x.7
For SINAMICS S110, the PZD interface IF1 is used:
BI: p0840.0 = r209x.0
BI: p0844.0 = r209x.1
BI: p0848.0 = r209x.2
BI: p0852.0 = r209x.3
BI: p2103.0 = r209x.7
The write access is rejected if a CANopen control word is not mapped at one of these locations.
This also causes the project download of the commissioning software to be canceled.
Description: Access to the CANopen control word using SDO transfer.
Dependency: Refer to: p8790
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 6040 hex + 800 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Description: Access to the CANopen object target velocity using the SDO transfer.
The value is displayed in increments/second as standard.
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 60FF hex + 800 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
The displayed value is calculated as follows:
r8796 = n_set [RPM] / 60 s * p0408 * 2^p0418 * p8798[1] / p8798[0]
r8795 CAN control word / Control word
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 Do not activate coast down Yes No -
02 Do not activate a Quick Stop Yes No -
03 Operation enable Yes No -
07 Acknowledge fault Yes No -
11 Freely interconn High Low -
12 Freely interconn High Low -
13 Freely interconn High Low -
14 Freely interconn High Low -
15 Freely interconn High Low -
r8796 CAN Target Velocity / Target velocity
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-701
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Access to the CANopen object target torque using SDO transfer.
The value is displayed as per mille (1/1000) as standard.
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 6071 hex + 800 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
The displayed value is calculated as follows:
r8797 [per mille] = M_set [Nm] / p0333 [Nm] * 1000
Description: The factor converts the required velocity units into the internal velocity units (V/s).
With the factor setting, for CANopen, the velocity units are increments/second.
The parameter corresponds to the CANopen object 6094 hex.
The internal velocity is calculated as follows:
n_set_internal = object 6094.1 / object 6094.2 * 1/(p0408 * 2^p0418) * n_set_bus
Index: [0] = Counter
[1] = Denominator
Description: Selects the firmware version for the PROFINET COMM BOARD CBE20.
Value: 1: PROFINET V2.2
2: PN gate
3: SINAMICS Link
99: Customer-specific from the OEM directory
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
r8797 CAN Target Torque / Target torque
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p8798[0...1] CAN speed conversion factor / n_conv_factor
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (CAN)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 4294967295 1
p8835 CBE20 firmware selection / CBE20 FW sel
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 99 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-702 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the node address for the SINAMICS Link on the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
p8836 = 0: SINAMICS Link deactivated
p8836 = 1 ... 64: SINAMICS Link node address
Dependency: Refer to: p8835
Note: SINAMICS Link requires that the appropriate CBE20 firmware version is selected (p8835 = 3).
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Assignment of the hardware for cyclic communications via PZD interface 1 and interface 2.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Communication interface integrated in the Control Unit
2: Option module
99: Automatic
Index: [0] = IF1
[1] = IF2
Note: For value = 99 (automatic) the following applies:
- if neither a COMM BOARD nor CAN is inserted, then PROFIBUS communicates via IF1.
- if a CBE20 is inserted, then PROFINET communicates via IF1. PROFIBUS PZD are deactivated.
- CAN always communicates via IF2.
For a value not equal to 99 (automatic) the following applies:
- both indices must be set to a number not equal to 99 (automatic).
A new setting only becomes effective after POWER ON, reset or download.
Description: Sets the monitoring time to monitor the process data received via COMM BOARD.
If no process data is received within this time, an appropriate message is output.
Dependency: Refer to: F08501
Note: Value = 0: Monitoring is deactivated.
p8836 SINAMICS Link address / SINAMICS Link add
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 64 0
p8839[0...1] PZD interface hardware assignment / PZD IF HW assign
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 99
p8840 COMM BOARD monitoring time / CB t_monit
CU_G_G130 (COMM
BOARD, PROFI-
NET), CU_G_G150
(COMM BOARD,
PROFINET)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 65535000 [ms] 20 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-703
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the sampling time for the cyclic interface 2 (IF2).
Description: Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the word format.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
Dependency: Refer to: r8860, r8890, r8891, r8892, r8893
Note: IF2: Interface 2
PZD1 to PZD4 are displayed bit-serially in r8890 to r8893.
p8841[0...39] COMM BOARD send configuration data / CB s config_dat
CU_G_G130 (COMM
BOARD, PROFI-
NET), CU_G_G150
(COMM BOARD,
PROFINET)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
p8842 COMM BOARD start configuration / CB config start
CU_G_G130 (COMM
BOARD, PROFI-
NET), CU_G_G150
(COMM BOARD,
PROFINET)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p8848 IF2 PZD sampling time / IF2 PZD t_sample
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1.00 [ms] 16.00 [ms] 4.00 [ms]
r8849[0...139] COMM BOARD receive configuration data / CB r config_dat
CU_G_G130 (COMM
BOARD, PROFI-
NET), CU_G_G150
(COMM BOARD,
PROFINET)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8850[0...3] CO: IF2 PZD receive word / IF2 PZD recv word
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2485, 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-704 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the word format.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency: Refer to: r8860, r8890, r8891, r8892, r8893
Note: IF2: Interface 2
PZD1 to PZD4 are displayed bit-serially in r8890 to r8893.
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the word format.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Dependency: Refer to: p8861
Note: IF2: Interface 2
r8850[0...15] CO: IF2 PZD receive word / IF2 PZD recv word
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2485, 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p8851[0...11] CI: IF2 PZD send word / IF2 PZD send word
ENCODER Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2487, 9208
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-705
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the word format.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency: Refer to: p8861
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Description: Displays the sent PZD (actual values) sent via interface 2.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
p8851[0...15] CI: IF2 PZD send word / IF2 PZD send word
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2487, 9208
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r8853[0...11] IF2 diagnostics PZD send / IF2 diag PZD send
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2487, 9208,
9210
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-706 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p8851, p8861
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Description: Displays the sent PZD (actual values) sent via interface 2.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency: Refer to: p8851, p8861
Note: IF2: Interface 2
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
r8853[0...15] IF2 diagnostics PZD send / IF2 diag PZD send
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2487, 9208,
9210
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-707
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Status display for COMM BOARD.
Value: 0: No initialization
1: Fatal fault
2: Initialization
3: Send configuration
4: Receive configuration
5: Non-cyclic communication
6: Cyclic communications but no setpoints (stop/no clock cycle)
255: Cyclic communication
Description: Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the double word format.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
Dependency: Refer to: r8850
Note: IF2: Interface 2
r8854 COMM BOARD state / CB state
CU_G_G130 (COMM
BOARD, PROFI-
NET), CU_G_G150
(COMM BOARD,
PROFINET)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 -
r8858[0...39] COMM BOARD read diagnostics channel / CB diag_chan read
CU_G_G130 (COMM
BOARD, PROFI-
NET), CU_G_G150
(COMM BOARD,
PROFINET)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8859[0...7] COMM BOARD identification Data / CB Ident_data
CU_G_G130 (COMM
BOARD, PROFI-
NET), CU_G_G150
(COMM BOARD,
PROFINET)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8860[0...2] CO: IF2 PZD receive double word / IF2 PZD recv DW
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2485, 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-708 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the double word format.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
Dependency: Refer to: r8850
Notice: A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used.
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the double word format.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
Dependency: Refer to: p8851
Note: IF2: Interface 2
r8860[0...14] CO: IF2 PZD receive double word / IF2 PZD recv DW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2485, 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p8861[0...10] CI: IF2 PZD send double word / IF2 PZD send DW
ENCODER Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2487, 9208,
9210
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-709
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the double word format.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
Dependency: Refer to: p8851
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Description: Displays the PZD sent via interface 2 (actual values) with double word format.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
p8861[0...14] CI: IF2 PZD send double word / IF2 PZD send DW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2487, 9208,
9210
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r8863[0...10] IF2 diagnostics PZD send double word / IF2 diag send DW
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2487
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-710 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used.
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Description: Displays the PZD sent via interface 2 (actual values) with double word format.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
16 Bit 16 On Off -
17 Bit 17 On Off -
18 Bit 18 On Off -
19 Bit 19 On Off -
20 Bit 20 On Off -
21 Bit 21 On Off -
22 Bit 22 On Off -
23 Bit 23 On Off -
24 Bit 24 On Off -
25 Bit 25 On Off -
26 Bit 26 On Off -
27 Bit 27 On Off -
28 Bit 28 On Off -
29 Bit 29 On Off -
30 Bit 30 On Off -
31 Bit 31 On Off -
r8863[0...14] IF2 diagnostics PZD send double word / IF2 diag send DW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2487
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-711
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used.
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Description: Assignment of a PZD to a telegram word from a SINAMICS Link receive telegram.
PZD p2050[index] is assigned by means of p8870[index], p8872[index].
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency: Refer to: p8872
Note: Value range:
0: Not used
1 ... 16: Telegram word
A pair of values p8870[index], p8872[index] may only be used once in single a device.
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
16 Bit 16 On Off -
17 Bit 17 On Off -
18 Bit 18 On Off -
19 Bit 19 On Off -
20 Bit 20 On Off -
21 Bit 21 On Off -
22 Bit 22 On Off -
23 Bit 23 On Off -
24 Bit 24 On Off -
25 Bit 25 On Off -
26 Bit 26 On Off -
27 Bit 27 On Off -
28 Bit 28 On Off -
29 Bit 29 On Off -
30 Bit 30 On Off -
31 Bit 31 On Off -
p8870[0...15] SINAMICS Link receive telegram word PZD / Recv link word
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET),
ENCODER (PROFI-
NET), TB30 (PROFI-
NET), TM31
(PROFINET),
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (PROFINET)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 16 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-712 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Assigns a PZD to a telegram word in the SINAMICS Link send telegram.
p8871[index] assigns PZD p2051[index].
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency: Refer to: p2051, p8851
Refer to: A50002
Note: Value range:
0: Not used
1 ... 16: Send telegram word
A specific telegram word send may only be used once within a single device.
p8871[0...15] SINAMICS Link send telegram word PZD / Send link word
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET),
ENCODER (PROFI-
NET), TB30 (PROFI-
NET), TM31
(PROFINET),
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (PROFINET)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 16 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-713
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects the address of the SINAMICS Link sender from which the process data (PZD) is received.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency: Refer to: p8870
Note: Value range:
0: Not used
1 ... 64: Address
Description: Displays the bus address of sender from which the PZD is received.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Value range:
0 - 125: Bus address of the sender
255: Not assigned
p8872[0...15] SINAMICS Link address receive PZD / Link addr recv
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET),
ENCODER (PROFI-
NET), TB30 (PROFI-
NET), TM31
(PROFINET),
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (PROFINET)
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 64 0
r8874[0...3] IF2 diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF2 diag addr recv
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-714 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the bus address of sender from which the PZD is received.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Value range:
0 - 125: Bus address of the sender
255: Not assigned
Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the receive telegram.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
255: Not assigned
r8874[0...15] IF2 diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF2 diag addr recv
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8875[0...3] IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF diag offs recv
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-715
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the receive telegram.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
255: Not assigned
Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the send telegram.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
255: Not assigned
r8875[0...15] IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF diag offs recv
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8876[0...11] IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF2 diag offs send
ENCODER Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-716 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the send telegram.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
255: Not assigned
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the fieldbus master.
The individual bits are combined to form status word 1.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p8888, r8889
r8876[0...15] IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF2 diag offs send
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p8880[0...15] BI: IF2 binector-connector converter status word 1 / Bin/con ZSW1
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2489
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-717
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the fieldbus master.
The individual bits are combined to form status word 2.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p8888, r8889
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the fieldbus master.
The individual bits are combined to form free status word 3.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p8888, r8889
p8881[0...15] BI: IF2 binector-connector converter status word 2 / Bin/con ZSW2
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2489
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p8882[0...15] BI: IF2 binector-connector converter status word 3 / Bin/con ZSW3
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2489
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-718 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the fieldbus master.
The individual bits are combined to form free status word 4.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p8888, r8889
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the fieldbus master.
The individual bits are combined to form free status word 5.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p8888, r8889
p8883[0...15] BI: IF2 binector-connector converter status word 4 / Bin/con ZSW4
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2489
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p8884[0...15] BI: IF2 binector-connector converter status word 5 / Bin/con ZSW5
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2489
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-719
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector connector converter.
Index: [0] = Status word 1
[1] = Status word 2
[2] = Free status word 3
[3] = Free status word 4
[4] = Free status word 5
Dependency: Refer to: p8880, p8881, p8882, p8883, r8889
Description: Connector output to interconnect the status words to a PZD send word.
Index: [0] = Status word 1
[1] = Status word 2
[2] = Free status word 3
[3] = Free status word 4
[4] = Free status word 5
p8888[0...4] IF2 invert binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW inv
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2489
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Inverted Not inverted -
01 Bit 1 Inverted Not inverted -
02 Bit 2 Inverted Not inverted -
03 Bit 3 Inverted Not inverted -
04 Bit 4 Inverted Not inverted -
05 Bit 5 Inverted Not inverted -
06 Bit 6 Inverted Not inverted -
07 Bit 7 Inverted Not inverted -
08 Bit 8 Inverted Not inverted -
09 Bit 9 Inverted Not inverted -
10 Bit 10 Inverted Not inverted -
11 Bit 11 Inverted Not inverted -
12 Bit 12 Inverted Not inverted -
13 Bit 13 Inverted Not inverted -
14 Bit 14 Inverted Not inverted -
15 Bit 15 Inverted Not inverted -
r8889[0...4] CO: IF2 send binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW send
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-720 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p8851, p8880, p8881, p8882, p8883
Note: r8889 together with p8880 to p8883 forms four binector-connector converters.
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD1 (normally control word 1) received via interface 2.
Dependency: Refer to: r8850
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD2 received via interface 2.
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
r8890.0...15 BO: IF2 PZD1 receive bit-serial / IF2 PZD1 recv bitw
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2485, 2491,
9204, 9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
r8891.0...15 BO: IF2 PZD2 receive bit-serial / IF2 PZD2 recv bitw
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2485, 2491,
9204, 9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-721
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: r8850
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD3 received via interface 2.
Dependency: Refer to: r8850
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD4 (normally control word 2) received via interface 2.
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
r8892.0...15 BO: IF2 PZD3 receive bit-serial / IF2 PZD3 recv bitw
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2485, 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
r8893.0...15 BO: IF2 PZD4 receive bit-serial / IF2 PZD4 recv bitw
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2485, 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-722 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: r8850
Note: IF2: Interface 2
Description: Binector output for bit-serial onward interconnection of a PZD word received from the fieldbus master.
The PZD is selected via p8899[0].
Dependency: Refer to: p8899
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD word received from the fieldbus master.
The PZD is selected via p8899[1].
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
r8894.0...15 BO: IF2 connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2485, 2491
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
r8895.0...15 BO: IF2 connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2485, 2491
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 On Off -
01 Bit 1 On Off -
02 Bit 2 On Off -
03 Bit 3 On Off -
04 Bit 4 On Off -
05 Bit 5 On Off -
06 Bit 6 On Off -
07 Bit 7 On Off -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-723
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p8899
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector outputs of the connector-binector converter.
Using p8898[0], the signals of CI: p8899[0] are influenced.
Using p8898[1], the signals of CI: p8899[1] are influenced.
Dependency: Refer to: r8894, r8895, p8899
Description: Sets the signal source for the connector-binector converter.
A PZD receive word can be selected as signal source. The signals are available to be serially passed-on (intercon-
nection).
Dependency: Refer to: r8894, r8895
Note: From the signal source set via the connector input, the corresponding lower 16 bits are converted.
p8899[0...1] together with r8894.0...15 and r8895.0...15 forms two connector-binector converters:
Connector input p8899[0] to binector output in r8894.0...15
Connector input p8899[1] to binector output in r8895.0...15
08 Bit 8 On Off -
09 Bit 9 On Off -
10 Bit 10 On Off -
11 Bit 11 On Off -
12 Bit 12 On Off -
13 Bit 13 On Off -
14 Bit 14 On Off -
15 Bit 15 On Off -
p8898[0...1] IF2 invert connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp inv
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2485, 2491
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Inverted Not inverted -
01 Bit 1 Inverted Not inverted -
02 Bit 2 Inverted Not inverted -
03 Bit 3 Inverted Not inverted -
04 Bit 4 Inverted Not inverted -
05 Bit 5 Inverted Not inverted -
06 Bit 6 Inverted Not inverted -
07 Bit 7 Inverted Not inverted -
08 Bit 8 Inverted Not inverted -
09 Bit 9 Inverted Not inverted -
10 Bit 10 Inverted Not inverted -
11 Bit 11 Inverted Not inverted -
12 Bit 12 Inverted Not inverted -
13 Bit 13 Inverted Not inverted -
14 Bit 14 Inverted Not inverted -
15 Bit 15 Inverted Not inverted -
p8899[0...1] CI: IF2 connector-binector converter signal source / Con/bin S_src
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2485, 2491
P-Group: Communications Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-724 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the station name for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
The active station name is displayed in r8910.
Dependency: Refer to: p8905, r8910
Note: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual:
The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated with p8905 = 1.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
IE: Industrial Ethernet
Description: Sets the IP address for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
The active IP address is displayed in r8911.
Dependency: Refer to: p8905, r8911
Note: The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated with p8905 = 1.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Sets the default gateway for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
The active default gateway is displayed in r8912.
Dependency: Refer to: p8905, r8912
Note: The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated with p8905 = 1.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Sets the subnet mask for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
The active subnet mask is displayed in r8913.
p8900[0...239] IE Name of Station / IE Name Stat
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p8901[0...3] IE IP Address of Station / IE IP of Stat
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
p8902[0...3] IE Default Gateway of Station / IE Def Gateway
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
p8903[0...3] IE Subnet Mask of Station / IE Subnet Mask
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-725
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p8905, r8913
Note: The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated with p8905 = 1.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Setting to control the configuration of the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
p8905 is automatically set to 0 at the end of an operation.
Value: 0: No function
1: Activate configuration
2: Activate and save configuration
3: Delete configuration
Dependency: Refer to: p8900, p8901, p8902, p8903
Refer to: A08561
Note: Re p8905 = 1:
The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated.
Re p8905 = 2:
The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated and saved to non-volatile memory.
Re p8905 = 3:
The interface configuration is reset to the factory setting at all points.
The factory settings for the interface configuration are loaded on activation (p8905 = 1) or at the next POWER ON.
Description: This parameter defines the station name of the onboard Ethernet interface.
Description: Displays the active IP address for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
p8905 IE Interface configuration / IE IF config
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
r8910[0...239] IE Name of Station active / IE Name Stat act
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8911[0...3] IE IP Address of Station active / IE IP of Stat act
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-726 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the active default gateway for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
Description: Displays the active subnet mask for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
Description: Displays the MAC address for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
Description: Sets the station name for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
Note: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual:
The CBE20 configuration (p8940 and following) is activated with p8945 = 1 (becomes effective at the next POWER
ON).
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
r8912[0...3] IE Default Gateway of Station active / IE Def Gateway act
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8913[0...3] IE Subnet Mask of Station active / IE Subnet Mask act
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r8915[0...5] IE MAC Address of Station / IE MAC of Station
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p8940[0...239] CBE20 Name of Station / CBE20 Name Stat
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-727
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the IP address for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
Note: The CBE20 configuration (p8940 and following) is activated with p8945 = 1 (becomes effective at the next POWER
ON).
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Sets the default gateway for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
Note: The CBE20 configuration (p8940 and following) is activated with p8945 = 1 (becomes effective at the next POWER
ON).
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Sets the subnet mask for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
Note: The CBE20 configuration (p8940 and following) is activated with p8945 = 1 (becomes effective at the next POWER
ON).
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Description: Sets the DHCP mode for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
Note: The CBE20 configuration (p8940 and following) is activated with p8945 = 1 (becomes effective at the next POWER
ON).
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p8941[0...3] CBE20 IP Address of Station / CBE20 IP of Stat
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
p8942[0...3] CBE20 Default Gateway of Station / CBE20 Def Gateway
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
p8943[0...3] CBE20 Subnet Mask of Station / CBE20 Subnet Mask
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
p8944 CBE20 DHCP Mode / CBE20 DHCP Mode
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-728 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the configuration control for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
p8945 is automatically set to 0 at the end of an operation.
Value: 0: No function
2: Save and activate configuration
3: Delete configuration
Note: Re p8945 = 2:
The CBE20 configuration (p8940 and following) is saved and activated at the next POWER ON.
Re p8945 = 3:
The factory settings for the CBE20 configuration are loaded at the next POWER ON.
Description: Sets the monitoring clock cycle for safe motion monitoring.
Dependency: Refer to: p9500, p9511
Refer to: F01652
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: The monitoring clock cycle must be a multiple of the actual value sensing clock cycle in p9311 or of the DP clock
cycle.
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safe motion monitoring.
Dependency: Refer to: p9501
Refer to: F01682, F01683
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed
SOS: Safe Operating Stop
p8945 CBE20 interface configuration / CBE20 IF config
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
p9300 SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module) / SI Mtn clock MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
500.00 [µs] 25000.00 [µs] 12000.00 [µs]
p9301 SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module) / SI Mtn enable MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 SOS/SLS enable Enable Inhibit -
03 Actual value synchronization enable Enable Inhibit -
16 Enable NX Hys Fil Enable Inhibit -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-729
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the axis type (linear axis or rotary axis/spindle).
Value: 0: Linear axis
1: Rot axis/spindle
Dependency: Refer to: p9502
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: For the commissioning software, after changing over the axis type, the units dependent on the axis type are only
updated after a project upload.
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Description: Sets the function specification for Safety Integrated.
Value: 0: Safety with encoder
1: Safety without encoder
Dependency: Refer to: C30711
Description: Function configuration for Safe Motion Monitoring
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
p9302 SI Motion axis type (Motor Module) / SI Mtn AxisType MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p9306 SI Motion function specification (Motor Module) / SI Mtn fct_spc MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p9307 SI Motion function configuration MM / SI Mtn config MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Extended alarm acknowledgment Yes No -
01 Setpoint speed limit for stop F No Yes -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-730 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the clock cycle time of the actual value sensing for safe motion monitoring.
The slower clock cycle time reduces the maximum permissible velocity - however, it ensures a lower load of the
Control Unit for the safe actual value sensing.
The maximum permissible velocity, which when exceeded can mean that errors occur during safe actual value
sensing, is displayed in r9730.
Setting criteria if the motion monitoring functions are executed without an encoder: - The actual value sensing clock
cycle must be set to the same value as the current controller clock cycle (p115).
Dependency: Refer to: p0115, p9300, p9511
Refer to: F01652
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: The parameter is only active for drive-based motion monitoring functions (p9801.2 = 1).
The monitoring clock cycle from p9300 must be an integer multiple of this parameter.
In the case of motion monitoring functions with encoder, the clock cycle time for actual value sensing must be an
integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle and at least 4 times slower than the current controller clock
cycle. A factor of at least 8 is recommended.
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Description: Sets the encoder configuration for the redundant coarse position value.
Dependency: Refer to: r0474, p9515
Description: Sets the configuration for the encoder and position actual value.
The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in
this parameter.
p9311 SI Motion actual value sensing clock cycle (Motor Module) / SI Mtn act clk MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0000 [µs] 25000.0000 [µs] 0.0000 [µs]
p9315 SI Motion coarse position value configuration (Motor Module) / SI Mtn s config MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Incrementer Yes No -
01 Encoder CRC least significant byte first Yes No -
02 Redundant coarse position val. most signifi-
cant bit left-aligned
Yes No -
16 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder Yes No -
p9316 SI Motion encoder configuration, safety functions (Motor Module) /
SI Mtn enc_cfg MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
List of parameters
Parameter
1-731
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p0404, p0410, p9516
Description: Sets the grid division for a linear encoder.
The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in
this parameter.
Dependency: Refer to: p0407, p9316
Description: Sets the number of encoder pulses per revolution for rotary encoders.
The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in
this parameter.
Dependency: Refer to: p0408, p9316
Description: Sets the fine resolution for G1_XIST1 in bits.
The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in
this parameter.
Dependency: Refer to: p0418
Refer to: F01670, F01671
Note: For safety functions that have not been enabled (p9301 = 0), the following applies: When booting, p9319 is auto-
matically set the same as p0418.
For safety functions that are enabled (p9301 > 0), the following applies: p9319 is checked for agreement with
p0418.
G1_XIST1: Encoder 1 position actual value 1 (PROFIdrive)
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Encoder rotating/linear Linear Rotating: -
01 Position actual value, sign change Yes No -
p9317 SI Motion linear scale grid division (Motor Module) / SI Mtn grid MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [nm] 250000000.00 [nm] 10000.00 [nm]
p9318 SI Motion encoder pulses per revolution (Motor Module) / SI Mtn p/rev MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 100000 2048
p9319 SI Motion fine resolution G1_XIST1 (Motor Module) / SI Mtn G1_XIST1 MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
2 18 11
Parameter
List of parameters
1-732 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the gear ratio between the encoder and load in mm/revolution for a linear axis with rotary encoder.
The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in
this parameter.
Dependency: Refer to: p9520
Notice: The fourth decimal point can be rounded-off depending on the size of the entered number (from three places before
the decimal point).
Description: Sets the denominator for the gearbox between the encoder (or motor in the case of encoderless monitoring func-
tions) and the load.
It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox stage 0 is always active.
Index: [0] = Gearbox 1
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Dependency: Refer to: p9322
Description: Sets the numerator for the gearbox between the encoder (or motor in the case of encoderless monitoring functions)
and the load.
It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox stage 0 is always active.
Index: [0] = Gearbox 1
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Dependency: Refer to: p9321
p9320 SI Motion spindle pitch (Motor Module) / SI Mtn sp_pitch MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.1000 [mm] 8388.0000 [mm] 10.0000 [mm]
p9321[0...7] SI Motion gearbox encoder (motor)/load denom (Motor Module) / SI Mtn denom MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 2147000000 1
p9322[0...7] SI Motion gearbox encoder (motor)/load numerator (Motor Module) /
SI Mtn numer MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 2147000000 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-733
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: In the case of encoderless monitoring functions (p9506), the pole pair number must be multiplied by the numerator
of the gearbox ratio.
Example:
Gearbox ratio 1:4, pole pair number (r0313) = 2
--> p9521 = 1, p9522 = 8 (4*2)
Description: Sets the number of valid bits of the redundant coarse postion value.
The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in
this parameter.
Dependency: Refer to: r0470, p9523
Description: Sets the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value.
The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in
this parameter.
Dependency: Refer to: r0471, p9524
Description: Sets the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value.
The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in
this parameter.
Dependency: Refer to: p0414, r0472, p9525
p9323 SI Motion red. coarse position value valid bits (Motor Module) / Valid bits MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 16 9
p9324 SI Motion redundant coarse pos. value fine resolution bits (MM) / SI Mtn fine bit MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-16 16 -2
p9325 SI Motion redundant coarse pos. value relevant bits (MM) / Relevant bits MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 16 16
Parameter
List of parameters
1-734 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the number of the encoder that the Motor Module uses for safe motion monitoring functions.
Dependency: For the safe motion monitoring functions, the redundant safety position actual value sensing must be activated in
the appropriate encoder data set (p0430.19 = 1).
Refer to: p0187, p0188, p0189, p0430, p9526
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: For p9326 = 1 the following applies: Motor Module uses an encoder for closed-loop speed control, it involves a 1-
encoder system.
Description: Sets the node identifier of the Sensor Module that is used by the Motor Module for the motion monitoring functions.
Dependency: Refer to: r9881
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Description: Sets the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position.
The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in
this parameter.
Dependency: Refer to: p0415, r0475, p9529
Note: MSB: Most Significant Bit
Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Dependency: Refer to: p9530
Refer to: C01707
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SOS: Safe Operational Stop
p9326 SI Motion encoder assignment (Motor Module) / SI Mtn encoder MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 3 1
p9328[0...11] SI Motion Sensor Module Node Identifier (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SM Ident MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 00FF hex 0000 hex
p9329 SI Motion Gx_XIST1 Safe most significant bit (MM) / Gx_XIST1 MSB MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 31 14
p9330 SI Motion standstill tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SOS Tol MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [mm] 100.000 [mm] 1.000 [mm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-735
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Dependency: Refer to: p9530
Refer to: C01707
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SOS: Safe Operational Stop
Description: Sets the limit values for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1
[1] = Limit value SLS2
[2] = Limit value SLS3
[3] = Limit value SLP4
Dependency: Refer to: p9363, p9531
Refer to: C01714
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed
Description: Sets the limit values for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1
[1] = Limit value SLS2
[2] = Limit value SLS3
[3] = Limit value SLP4
Dependency: Refer to: p9363, p9531
Refer to: C01714
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed
p9330 SI Motion standstill tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SOS Tol MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [°] 100.000 [°] 1.000 [°]
p9331[0...3] SI Motion SLS limit values (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLS lim MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min] 1000000.00 [mm/min] 2000.00 [mm/min]
p9331[0...3] SI Motion SLS limit values (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLS lim MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 1000000.00 [rpm] 2000.00 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-736 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the tolerance for the cross-check of the actual position between the two monitoring channels.
For encoderless motion monitoring functions, the tolerance must be set to a higher value (12 degrees rotary and 1
mm linear).
Dependency: Refer to: p9542
Refer to: C01711
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Description: Sets the tolerance for the cross-check of the actual position between the two monitoring channels.
For encoderless motion monitoring functions, the tolerance must be set to a higher value (12 degrees rotary and 1
mm linear).
Dependency: Refer to: p9542
Refer to: C01711
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Description: Sets the filter time for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill.
Note: The filter time is effective only if the function is enabled (p9300/p9500 Bit 16 = 1).
The parameter is included in the data cross-check of the two monitoring channels.
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
p9342 SI Motion act val comparison tol (crosswise) (Motor Module) / SI Mtn act tol MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0010 [mm] 360.0000 [mm] 0.1000 [mm]
p9342 SI Motion act val comparison tol (crosswise) (Motor Module) / SI Mtn act tol MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0010 [°] 360.0000 [°] 0.1000 [°]
p9345 SI Motion SSM filter time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM filt MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-737
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" is set.
If a value of 0 is entered in p9368/p9568, the value of parameter p9346/p9546 applies
also for the safe acceleration monitor SBR.
Dependency: Refer to: p9546
Caution: The function "Safe Acceleration Monitor" (SBR) is switched out after the selected threshold value is undershot.
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SBR: Safe Acceleration Monitor
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" is set.
If a value of 0 is entered in p9368/p9568, the value of parameter p9346/p9546 applies
also for the safe acceleration monitor SBR.
Dependency: Refer to: p9546
Caution: The function "Safe Acceleration Monitor" (SBR) is switched out after the selected threshold value is undershot.
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SBR: Safe Acceleration Monitor
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
Description: Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Note: The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9300/p9500 Bit 16 = 1).
The parameter is included in the data cross-check of the two monitoring channels.
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
p9346 SI Motion SSM velocity limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM v_limMM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min] 1000000.00 [mm/min] 20.00 [mm/min]
p9346 SI Motion SSM velocity limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM v_limMM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 1000000.00 [rpm] 20.00 [rpm]
p9347 SI Motion SSM velocity hysteresis (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM Hyst MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0010 [mm/min] 500.0000 [mm/min] 10.0000 [mm/min]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-738 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Note: The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9300/p9500 Bit 16 = 1).
The parameter is included in the data cross-check of the two monitoring channels.
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance for the "Safe Acceleration Monitor".
Dependency: Refer to: p9548
Refer to: C01706
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SBR: Safe Acceleration Monitor
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance for the "Safe Acceleration Monitor".
Dependency: Refer to: p9548
Refer to: C01706
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SBR: Safe Acceleration Monitor
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance that is used for a 2-encoder system in cross-check between the Control Unit and the
Motor Module.
Dependency: Refer to: p9301, p9342, p9549
p9347 SI Motion SSM velocity hysteresis (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM Hyst MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0010 [rpm] 500.0000 [rpm] 10.0000 [rpm]
p9348 SI Motion SBR actual velocity tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SBR Tol MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min] 120000.00 [mm/min] 300.00 [mm/min]
p9348 SI Motion SBR actual velocity tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SBR Tol MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 120000.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm]
p9349 SI Motion slip velocity tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn slip MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min] 6000.00 [mm/min] 6.00 [mm/min]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-739
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: If the "actual value synchronization" is not enabled (p9301.3 = 0), then the value parameterized in p9342 is used as
tolerance in the data cross-check.
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance that is used for a 2-encoder system in cross-check between the Control Unit and the
Motor Module.
Dependency: Refer to: p9301, p9342, p9549
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: If the "actual value synchronization" is not enabled (p9301.3 = 0), then the value parameterized in p9342 is used as
tolerance in the data cross-check.
Description: Sets the delay time for the SLS changeover or for the changeover from SLS to SOS for the function "Safely-Limited
Speed" (SLS).
When transitioning from a higher to a lower safely-limited velocity/speed stage or to the safe operating stop (SOS),
within this delay time, the "old" velocity stage remains active.
Even if SLS or SOS is activated from non safety-related operation, then this delay is still applied.
Dependency: Refer to: p9551
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SLS: Safely Limited Speed
SOS: Safe Operating Stop
Description: Sets the transition time from STOP C to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Dependency: Refer to: p9552
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SOS: Safe Operational Stop
p9349 SI Motion slip velocity tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn slip MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 6000.00 [rpm] 6.00 [rpm]
p9351 SI Motion SLS changeover delay time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLS t MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2825
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 600000000.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs]
p9352 SI Motion transition time STOP C to SOS (Motor Module) / SI Mtn t C->SOS MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2825
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 600000000.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-740 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the transition time from STOP D to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Dependency: Refer to: p9553
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop
Description: Sets the transition time from STOP F to STOP B.
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Description: Sets the delay time for the safe pulse suppression after STOP B / SS1.
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions (p9506/p9306 = 1), the parameter has no effect.
Dependency: Refer to: p9360, p9556
Refer to: C01701
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SS1: Safe Stop 1
Description: Sets the time after which the pulses must have been suppressed when initiating the test stop.
Dependency: Refer to: p9557
Refer to: C01798
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
p9353 SI Motion transition time STOP D to SOS (Motor Module) / SI Mtn t D->SOS MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2825
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 600000000.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs]
p9355 SI Motion transition time STOP F to STOP B (Motor Module) / SI Mtn t F->B MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2825
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 600000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
p9356 SI Motion pulse suppression delay time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn IL t_del MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2825
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 600000000.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs]
p9357 SI Motion pulse suppression test time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn IL t MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 10000000.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-741
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the maximum time for the acceptance test mode.
If the acceptance test mode takes longer than the selected time limit, then the mode is automatically terminated.
Dependency: Refer to: p9558
Refer to: C01799
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Description: Sets the shutdown velocity for pulse suppression.
Below this velocity "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B / SS1, the pulses are suppressed (by changing to STOP
A).
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions, the parameter must be > 0 (recommended value: 10).
Dependency: Refer to: p9356, p9560
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SS1: Safe Stop 1
Description: Sets the shutdown speed for the pulse suppression.
Below this speed "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B / SS1, the pulses are suppressed (by changing to STOP
A).
Dependency: Refer to: p9356, p9560
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SS1: Safe Stop 1
p9358 SI Motion acceptance test mode time limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn acc t MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
5000000.00 [µs] 100000000.00 [µs] 40000000.00 [µs]
p9360 SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown velocity (Motor Module) / SI Mtn IL v_shutMM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min] 6000.00 [mm/min] 0.00 [mm/min]
p9360 SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown speed (Motor Module) / SI Mtn IL n_shutMM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 6000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-742 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the stop response for the function "safely reduced speed" (SLS).
These settings apply to the individual limit values for SLS.
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring (p9306 = 1), only a value of 0 or 1 is permitted.
Value: 0: STOP A
1: STOP B
2: STOP C
3: STOP D
4: STOP E
10: STOP A with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
11: STOP B with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
12: STOP C with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
13: STOP D with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
14: STOP E with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1
[1] = Limit value SLS2
[2] = Limit value SLS3
[3] = Limit value SLP4
Dependency: Refer to: p9331, p9380, p9563
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Values 10 to 14 are being prepared and are presently ineffective.
Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the "SBR" function.
SBR is deactivated once the set velocity limit has been undershot.
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SBR: Safe Acceleration Monitor
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
For p9568 = p9368 = 0, the following applies:
The value in p9546/p9346 (SSM) is applied as the velocity limit for SBR.
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the "SBR" function.
SBR is deactivated once the set velocity limit has been undershot.
p9363[0...3] SI Motion SLS stop response (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLS Stop MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 14 2
p9368 SI Motion SBR velocity limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SBR v_limMM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min] 1000.00 [mm/min] 0.00 [mm/min]
p9368 SI Motion SBR velocity limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SBR v_limMM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 1000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-743
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: SBR: Safe Acceleration Monitor
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
For p9568 = p9368 = 0, the following applies:
The value in p9546/p9346 (SSM) is applied as the velocity limit for SBR.
Description: Setting to select and deselect the acceptance test mode.
Value: 0: [00 hex] Deselect the acceptance test mode
172: [AC hex] Select the acceptance test mode
Dependency: Refer to: p9358, r9371
Refer to: C01799
Description: Displays the status of the acceptance test mode.
Value: 0: [00 hex] Acc_mode inactive
12: [0C hex] Acc_mode not possible due to POWER ON fault
13: [0D hex] Acc_mode not possible due to incorrect ID in p9370
15: [0F hex] Acc_mode not possible due to expired Acc_timer
172: [AC hex] Acc_mode active
Dependency: Refer to: p9358, p9370
Refer to: C01799
Description: Sets the delay time after which the pulses are safely suppressed after a bus failure.
Dependency: Refer to: p9363
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
The parameter is being prepared and is presently ineffective.
p9370 SI Motion acceptance test mode (Motor Module) / SI Mtn acc_mod MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 00AC hex 0000 hex
r9371 SI Motion acceptance test status (Motor Module) / SI Mtn acc_stat MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 00AC hex -
p9380 SI Motion pulse suppression delay bus failure (Motor Module) / SI Mtn t to IL MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 800000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-744 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp.
The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9581 (reference value) and p9583 (monitoring time).
Dependency: Refer to: p9382, p9383
Description: Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp.
The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9581 (reference value) and p9583 (monitoring time).
Dependency: Refer to: p9382, p9383
Description: Sets the delay time for monitoring the brake ramp.
Monitoring of the brake ramp starts once the delay time has elapsed.
Dependency: Refer to: p9381, p9383
Description: Sets the monitoring time to define the brake ramp.
The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9581 (reference value) and p9583 (monitoring time).
Dependency: Refer to: p9381, p9382
p9381 SI Motion brake ramp reference value (Motor Module) / SI Mtn ramp ref MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
600.0000 [mm/min] 24000.0000 [mm/min] 1500.0000 [mm/min]
p9381 SI Motion brake ramp reference value (Motor Module) / SI Mtn ramp ref MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
600.0000 [rpm] 24000.0000 [rpm] 1500.0000 [rpm]
p9382 SI Motion brake ramp delay time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn rp t_del MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10000.00 [µs] 99000000.00 [µs] 250000.00 [µs]
p9383 SI Motion brake ramp monitoring time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn rp t_mon MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
500.00 [ms] 1000000.00 [ms] 10000.00 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-745
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the filter time for smoothing the actual value with encoderless actual value sensing.
Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9306/p9506 = 1).
Description: Sets the minimum current for encoderless actual value sensing.
Reducing this percentage value can adversely affect actual value sensing.
- The value must be increased if C30711 has occurred with message value 1042.
- The value must be decreased if C30711 has occurred with message value 1041.
Dependency: Refer to: C30711
Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9306/p9506 = 1).
Description: Sets the voltage tolerance for suppressing acceleration peaks.
Increasing this percentage value means that voltage peaks will need to have a higher amplitude during acceleration
procedures if they are not to affect actual value sensing.
- The value must be increased if C30711 has occurred with message value 1042.
- The value must be decreased if acceleration procedures have led to an excessive safety actual velocity.
Dependency: Refer to: C30711
Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9306/p9506 = 1).
p9387 SI Motion act val sensing encoderless filter time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn EL filt MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs] 25000.00 [µs]
p9388 Minimum current actual value sensing encoderless (Motor Module) /
SI Mtn I_min EL MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
p9389 SI Motion voltage tolerance acceleration (Motor Module) / SI Mtn V tol MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-746 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version for the safety motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module.
Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release)
[1] = Safety Version (minor release)
[2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch)
[3] = Safety Version (hotfix)
Dependency: Refer to: r9590, r9770, r9870, r9890
Note: Example:
r9390[0] = 2, r9390[1] = 60, r9390[2] = 1, r9390[3] = 0 --> SI Motion version V02.60.01.00
Description: Displays the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring function (actual
checksum) on the Motor Module.
Index: [0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring
[1] = Checksum over SI parameters with hardware reference
Dependency: Refer to: p9399
Note: SI: Safety Integrated
Description: Sets the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring functions (reference
checksum) on the Motor Module.
Index: [0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring
[1] = Checksum over SI parameters with hardware reference
Dependency: Refer to: r9398
Note: SI: Safety Integrated
r9390[0...3] SI Motion version safety motion monitoring (Motor Module) / SI Mtn Version MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9398[0...1] SI Motion actual checksum SI parameters (Motor Module) / SI Mtn act CRC MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p9399[0...1] SI Motion reference checksum SI parameters (Motor Module) / SI Mtn ref CRC MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-747
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the parameters that were not able to be transferred when reading the parameter back-up files (PS files)
from the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card).
r9406[0] = 0
--> All of the parameter values were able to be transferred error-free.
r9406[0...x] > 0
--> Displays the parameter number whose value was not able to be completely transferred or for an indexed param-
eter, for at least 1 index, was not able to be transferred. The first index that is not transferred is displayed in r9407.
Dependency: Refer to: r9407, r9408
Note: All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter.
r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted
r9407[x] parameter index, parameter not accepted
r9408[x] fault code, parameter not accepted
Description: Displays the first index of the parameters that could not be transferred when the parameter backup files (PS files)
were read from the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card).
If, from an indexed parameter, at least one index was not able to be transferred, then the parameter number is dis-
played in r9406[n] and the first index that was not transferred is displayed in r9407[n].
r9406[0] = 0
--> All of the parameter values were able to be transferred error-free.
r9406[n] > 0
--> Displays r9407[n] the first index of the parameter number r9406[n] that was not transferred.
Dependency: Refer to: r9406, r9408
Note: All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter.
r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted
r9407[x] parameter index, parameter not accepted
r9408[x] fault code, parameter not accepted
Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes.
Dependency: Refer to: r9406, r9407
r9406[0...19] PS file parameter number parameter not transferred / PS parameter No.
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9407[0...19] PS file parameter index parameter not transferred / PS parameter index
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9408[0...19] PS file fault code parameter not transferred / PS fault code
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-748 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter.
r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted
r9407[x] parameter index, parameter not accepted
r9408[x] fault code, parameter not accepted
Description: Displays the number of modified parameters and those that have still not be saved for this drive object.
Dependency: Refer to: p0971, p0977
Note: The modified parameters that still need to be saved are internally listed in r9410 ... r9419.
Description: Displays the parameters for which the re-calculation was unsuccessful after an internal system reference value
change.
Dependency: Refer to: F07086
Description: Displays the parameters whose parameter would have to be changed during a units changeover.
Dependency: Refer to: F07088
Description: Displays the number of BICO interconnections (signal sinks).
The selected BICO interconnections should be entered into r9482[0...59] and r9483[0...59].
Dependency: Refer to: r9482, r9483
r9409 Number of parameters to be saved / Qty par to save
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9450[0...29] Reference value change parameter with unsuccessful calculation /
Ref_chg par n poss
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9451[0...29] Units changeover adapted parameters / Unit_chngov par
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9481 Number of BICO interconnections / BICO count
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-749
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the signal sinks (binector/connector inputs, BI/CI parameters).
The number of BICO interconnections is displayed in r9481.
Dependency: Refer to: r9481, r9483
Note: The list is sorted according to signal sources and is structured as follows:
r9842[0]: Interconnection 1 (signal sink, BICO coded), r9843[0]: Interconnection 1 (signal source, BICO coded)
r9842[1]: Interconnection 2 (signal sink, BICO coded), r9843[1]: Interconnection 2 (signal source, BICO coded)
...
Description: Displays the signal sources (binector/connector outputs, BO/CO parameters).
The number of BICO interconnections is displayed in r9481.
Dependency: Refer to: r9481, r9482
Note: The list is sorted according to signal sources and is structured as follows:
r9842[0]: Interconnection 1 (signal sink, BICO coded), r9843[0]: Interconnection 1 (signal source, BICO coded)
r9842[1]: Interconnection 2 (signal sink, BICO coded), r9843[1]: Interconnection 2 (signal source, BICO coded)
...
Description: Sets the signal source (BO/CO parameter, BICO coded) to search in the signal sinks.
The question is answered:
How often is a connection made to a signal source in the drive object and from which index are these interconnec-
tions saved (r9482[0...59], r9483[0...59])?
Dependency: Refer to: r9481, r9482, r9483, r9485, r9486
r9482[0...59] BICO interconnections BI/CI parameters / BICO BI/CI par
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9483[0...59] BICO interconnections BO/CO parameters / BICO BO/CO par
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-750 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the number of BICO interconnections to the signal sink being searched for.
The signal source to be searched is set in p9484 (BICO-coded).
The search result is contained in r9482[0...59] and r9483[0...59] and is specified by the count (r9485) and the first
index (r9486).
Dependency: Refer to: r9481, r9482, r9483, p9484, r9486
Description: Displays the first index of the signal source being searched for.
The signal source to be searched is set in p9484 (BICO-coded).
The search result is contained in r9482[0...59] and r9483[0...59] and is specified by the count (r9485) and the first
index (r9486).
Dependency: Refer to: r9481, r9482, r9483, p9484, r9485
Description: Displays the number of signal sources from this drive to other drives/drive objects (Binector Output/Connector Out-
put, BO/CO).
Dependency: Refer to: r9491, r9492, p9493
Description: Displays the signal receiver list (Binector Input/Connector Input, BI/CI) for the first interconnections between this
drive and other drives/drive objects.
Dependency: Refer to: r9490, r9492, p9493
r9485 BICO interconnections signal source search count / BICO S_src srchQty
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9486 BICO interconnections signal source search first index / BICO S_src srchIdx
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9490 Number of BICO interconnections to other drives / Qty BICO to drive
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9491[0...9] BI/CI of BICO interconnections to other drives / BI/CI to drive
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-751
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Notice: A drive cannot be deleted if this list is not empty! Otherwise, another drive would continue to attempt to read a sig-
nal from a drive that no longer existed.
Note: All indices of r9491 to p9493 designate the same interconnection.
r9491[x] contains the signal receiver and r9492[x] the matching signal source; p9493[x] can be set to modify the
interconnection.
Description: Displays the signal source list (Binector Output/Connector Output, BO/CO) for the first interconnections between
this drive and other drives/drive objects.
Dependency: Refer to: r9490, r9491, p9493
Notice: A drive cannot be deleted if this list is not empty! Otherwise, another drive would continue to attempt to read a sig-
nal from a drive that no longer existed.
Note: All indices of r9491 to p9493 designate the same interconnection.
r9491[x] contains the signal receiver and r9492[x] the matching signal source; p9493[x] can be set to modify the
interconnection.
Description: Setting to reset the BICO interconnections to other drives. Each interconnection can be individually reset.
Value: 0: Set connection to 0
1: Set connection to 1 (100 %)
2: Set connection to factory setting
15: Finished
Dependency: Refer to: r9490, r9491, r9492
Note: All indices of r9491 to p9493 designate the same interconnection.
r9491[x] contains the signal receiver and r9492[x] the matching signal source; p9493[x] can be set to modify the
interconnection.
Description: Setting for the behavior for BICO interconnections to other non-operational/deactivated drive objects.
If this drive object has BICO interconnections to other non-operational or deactivated drive objects as drain, then
using these parameters, all of the associated BI/CI parameters of this drive object can be marked and then set to
the factory setting or only marked.
Value: 0: Do not do anything
1: Mark connection
2: Mark connection and then set to the factory setting
r9492[0...9] BO/CO of BICO interconnections to other drives / BO/CO to drive
All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p9493[0...9] Reset BICO interconnections to other drives / Reset BICO to drv
All objects Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 15 15
p9495 BICO behavior to deactivated drive objects / Behav to deact obj
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-752 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p9496, p9497, p9498, p9499
Refer to: A01318, A01507
Note: The BI/CI parameters involved are listed in r9498[0...29] (drain).
The associated BO/CO parameters are listed in r9499[0...29] (source).
However, r9498 and r9499 are only then filled if p9495 is not equal to 0, otherwise they remain empty.
Description: If this drive object has BICO interconnections to other drive objects that are either not operational or have been
deactivated, then using this parameter, all of the BI/CI parameters involved with this drive object can be re-estab-
lished.
Value: 0: Do not do anything
1: Restore the connections from the list
2: Delete the connection from the list
Dependency: Refer to: p9495, p9497, p9498, p9499
Refer to: A01318, A01507
Note: The BI/CI parameters involved are listed in r9498[0...29] (drain).
The associated BO/CO parameters are listed in r9499[0...29] (source).
After setting p9496 to 1 or 2, r9498 and r9499 are reset, r9497 is set to 0 and p9496 itself is set to 0.
Description: Displays the number of signal sinks of this drive object to other drives/drive objects that are no longer opera-
tional/deactivated (Binector Input/Connector Input, BI/CI).
Dependency: Refer to: p9495, p9496, p9498, p9499
Refer to: A01318, A01507
Note: The parameter is only used for display purposes and cannot be written into.
Description: List of the BI/CI parameters that represent a connection to non-operational/deactivated drive objects.
Dependency: Refer to: p9495, p9496, p9497, p9499
Refer to: A01318, A01507
Note: All indices from r9498 to r9499 designate the same BICO interconnection.
This signal sink is in r9498[x] and the associated signal source in r9499[x].
p9496 Restore BICO to the drive objects that are now activated / Rest BICO act obj
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
p9497 BICO number of interconnections to deactivated drive objects / Qty to deact obj
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
p9498[0...29] BICO BI/CI parameters to deactivated drive objects / BI/CI to deact obj
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-753
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: List of the BO/CO parameters that represent a connection to non-operational/deactivated drive objects.
Dependency: Refer to: p9495, p9496, p9497, p9498
Refer to: A01318, A01507
Note: All indices from r9498 to r9499 designate the same BICO interconnection.
This signal sink is in r9498[x] and the associated signal source in r9499[x].
Description: Sets the monitoring clock cycle for safe motion monitoring.
Dependency: Refer to: r2064, p9511
Refer to: F01652
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
The monitoring clock cycle must be a multiple of the actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511 (dbSI) or of the DP
clock cycle (ncSI).
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safe motion monitoring.
Dependency: Refer to: F01682, F01683
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
p9499[0...29] BICO BO/CO parameters to deactivated drive objects / BO/CO to deact obj
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p9500 SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Control Unit) / SI Mtn clock CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.50 [ms] 25.00 [ms] 12.00 [ms]
p9501 SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit) / SI Mtn enable CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 SOS/SLS (SBH/SG) enable Enable Inhibit -
03 Actual value synchronization enable Enable Inhibit -
16 Enable NX Hys Fil Enable Inhibit -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-754 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the axis type (linear axis or rotary axis/spindle).
Value: 0: Linear axis
1: Rot axis/spindle
Note: For the commissioning software, after changing over the axis type, the units dependent on the axis type are only
updated after a project upload.
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Description: Setting to enable the function "Safe Cam" (SCA).
Dependency: Refer to: p9501
Refer to: F01686
p9502 SI Motion axis type (Control Unit) / SI Mtn ax type CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p9503 SI Motion SCA (SN) enable (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA enab
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 SCA1 (SN1) enable Enable Inhibit -
01 SCA2 (SN2) enable Enable Inhibit -
02 SCA3 (SN3) enable Enable Inhibit -
03 SCA4 (SN4) enab Enable Inhibit -
04 SCA5 (SN5) enab Enable Inhibit -
05 SCA6 (SN6) enable Enable Inhibit -
06 SCA7 (SN7) enable Enable Inhibit -
07 SCA8 (SN8) enable Enable Inhibit -
08 SCA9 (SN9) enable Enable Inhibit -
09 SCA10 (SN10) enable Enable Inhibit -
10 SCA11 (SN11) enable Enable Inhibit -
11 SCA12 (SN12) enable Enable Inhibit -
12 SCA13 (SN13) enable Enable Inhibit -
13 SCA14 (SN14) enable Enable Inhibit -
14 SCA15 (SN15) enable Enable Inhibit -
15 SCA16 (SN16) enable Enable Inhibit -
16 ESCA17 (SN17) enable Enable Inhibit -
17 SCA18 (SN18) enable Enable Inhibit -
18 SCA19 (SN19) enable Enable Inhibit -
19 SCA20 (SN20) enable Enable Inhibit -
20 SCA21 (SN21) enable Enable Inhibit -
21 SCA22 (SN22) enable Enable Inhibit -
22 SCA23 (SN23) enable Enable Inhibit -
23 SCA24 (SN24) enable Enable Inhibit -
24 SCA25 (SN25) enable Enable Inhibit -
25 SCA26 (SN26) enable Enable Inhibit -
26 SCA27 (SN27) enable Enable Inhibit -
27 SCA28 (SN28) enable Enable Inhibit -
28 SCA29 (SN29) enable Enable Inhibit -
29 SCA30 (SN30) enable Enable Inhibit -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-755
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The "Safe Cam" function (SCA) can either be enabled using p9501 or p9503.
SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam
Description: Sets the modulo range of the safe position actual value in degrees for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA) for rotary
axes.
Dependency: Refer to: p9536, p9537
Note: SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam
Description: Sets the function specification for Safety Integrated.
Value: 0: Safety with encoder
1: Safety without encoder
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Description: Function configuration for Safe Motion Monitoring
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
p9505 SI Motion SCA (SN) modulo value (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA modulo
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 [°] 737280 [°] 0 [°]
p9506 SI Motion function specification (Control Unit) / SI Mtn fct_spc CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p9507 SI Motion function specification (Control Unit) / SI Mtn config
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Extended alarm acknowledgment Yes No -
01 Setpoint speed limit for stop F No Yes -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-756 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Setting for the clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master.
The parameter must be set if the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive are enabled
and there is a clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master.
This is, for example, the case when using the following controls:
- clock-cycle synchronous control for the motion control (e.g. SIMOTION).
- clock-cycle synchronous PROFIsafe master (e.g. SIMATIC S7-400F).
Value: 0: No clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master
1: Clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master present
Dependency: Refer to: C01711, A01796
Notice: As of firmware V2.6, the parameter has no effect.
Description: Sets the clock cycle time of the actual value sensing for safe motion monitoring.
Setting criteria if the motion monitoring functions are executed with an encoder.
- A slower clock cycle time reduces the maximum permissible velocity - however, it ensures a lower load of the Con-
trol Unit for safe actual value sensing.
- The maximum permissible velocity which, when exceeded, can mean that errors occur during safe actual value
sensing, is displayed in r9730.
- The isochronous PROFIBUS clock cycle is used as a clock cycle time for actual value sensing with a setting of 0
ms; the setting is 1 ms if isochronous operation is not being used.
Setting criteria if the motion monitoring functions are executed without an encoder:
- The actual value sensing clock cycle must be set to the same value as the current controller clock cycle (p115).
Dependency: Refer to: p0115
Refer to: F01652
Note: The parameter is only active for drive-based motion monitoring functions (p9601.2 = 1).
The monitoring clock cycle from p9500 must be an integer multiple of this parameter.
In the case of motion monitoring functions with encoder, the clock cycle time for actual value sensing must be an
integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle and at least 4 times slower than the current controller clock
cycle. A factor of at least 8 is recommended.
The clock cycle time of the actual value sensing should not be set to more than 8 ms.
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
p9510 SI Motion clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master / SI Mtn sync master
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p9511 SI Motion actual value sensing cycle clock (Control Unit) / SI Mtn act clk CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0000 [ms] 25.0000 [ms] 0.0000 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-757
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the encoder configuration for the redundant coarse position value.
Dependency: Refer to: r0474, p9315
Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies:
- p9515 is automatically set the same as p0474 when the system boots.
For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies:
- p9515 is checked to see that it matches p0474.
Description: Sets the configuration for the motor encoder and position actual value.
Dependency: Refer to: p0404, p0410
Refer to: F01671
Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies:
- p9516.0 is automatically set when booting as for p0410.0. When booting, p9516.1 is automatically set as for
p0404.1.
For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies:
- p9516.1 is checked to identify whether it tallies with p0404.1.
Description: Sets the grid division for a linear motor encoder.
Dependency: Refer to: p0407, p9516
Refer to: F01671
p9515 SI Motion encoder coarse position value config (Control Unit) / SI Mtn s config CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Incrementer Yes No -
01 Encoder CRC least significant byte first Yes No -
02 Redundant coarse position val. most signifi-
cant bit left-aligned
Yes No -
16 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder Yes No -
p9516 SI Motion encoder configuration safety functions (Control Unit) / SI Mtn enc_cfg CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Motor encoder, rotating/linear Linear Rotating: -
01 Position actual value, sign change Yes No -
p9517 SI Motion linear scale grid division (Control Unit) / SI Mtn grid CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [nm] 250000000.00 [nm] 10000.00 [nm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-758 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: For safety functions that have not been enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: When booting p9517 is automat-
ically set the same as p0407.
For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: p9517 is checked whether it coincides with
p0407.
Description: Sets the number of encoder pulses per revolution for rotary motor encoders.
Dependency: Refer to: p0408, p9516
Refer to: F01671
Note: For safety functions that have not been enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: When booting, p9518 is auto-
matically set the same as p0408.
For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: p9518 is checked whether it coincides with
p0408.
Description: Sets the fine resolution for G1_XIST1 in bits.
Dependency: Refer to: p0418
Refer to: F01671
Note: For safety functions that have not been enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: When booting, p9519 is auto-
matically set the same as p0418.
For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: p9519 is checked whether it coincides with
p0418.
G1_XIST1: Encoder 1 position actual value 1 (PROFIdrive)
Description: Sets the gear ratio between the encoder and load in mm/revolution for a linear axis with rotary encoder.
Notice: The fourth decimal point can be rounded-off depending on the size of the entered number (from three places before
the decimal point).
p9518 SI Motion encoder pulses per revolution (Control Unit) / SI Mtn puls/rev CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 100000 2048
p9519 SI Motion fine resolution G1_XIST1 (Control Unit) / SI Mtn G1_XIST1 CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
2 18 11
p9520 SI Motion spindle pitch (Control Unit) / SI Mtn Sp_pitch CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.1000 [mm] 8388.0000 [mm] 10.0000 [mm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-759
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the denominator for the gearbox between the encoder (or motor in the case of encoderless monitoring func-
tions) and the load.
It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox stage 0 is always active.
Index: [0] = Gearbox 1
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Dependency: Refer to: p9522
Description: Sets the numerator for the gearbox between the encoder (or motor in the case of encoderless monitoring functions)
and the load.
It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox stage 0 is always active.
Index: [0] = Gearbox 1
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Dependency: Refer to: p9521
Note: In the case of encoderless monitoring functions (p9506), the pole pair number must be multiplied by the numerator
of the gearbox ratio.
Example:
Gearbox ratio 1:4, pole pair number (r0313) = 2
--> p9521 = 1, p9522 = 8 (4*2)
p9521[0...7] SI Motion gearbox enc (motor)/load denominator (Control Unit) / SI Mtn gear denom
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 2147000000 1
p9522[0...7] SI Motion gearbox encoder (motor)/load numerator (Control Unit) / SI Mtn gear numer
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 2147000000 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-760 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the number of valid bits of the redundant coarse position value.
The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this
parameter.
Dependency: Refer to: r0470, p9323
Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies:
- p9523 is automatically set the same as r0470 when the system boots.
For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies:
- p9523 is checked to see that it matches r0470.
Description: Sets the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value.
The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this
parameter.
Dependency: Refer to: r0471, p9324
Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies:
- p9524 is automatically set the same as r0471 when the system boots.
For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies:
- p9524 is checked to see that it matches r0471.
Description: Sets the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value.
Dependency: Refer to: p0414, r0472, p9325
Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies:
- p9525 is automatically set the same as r0472 when the system boots.
For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies:
- p9525 is checked to see that it matches r0472.
p9523 SI Motion redundant coarse pos. value valid bits (Control Unit) / Valid bits CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 16 9
p9524 SI Motion Redundant coarse pos. value fine resolution bits (CU) / SI Mtn fine bit CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-16 16 -2
p9525 SI Motion Redundant coarse pos. value relevant bits (CU) / Relevant bits CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 16 16
List of parameters
Parameter
1-761
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the number of the encoder that the second channel (control, Motor Module) uses for safe motion monitoring
functions.
Dependency: For the safe motion monitoring functions, the redundant safety position actual value sensing must be activated in
the appropriate encoder data set (p0430.19 = 1).
Refer to: p0187, p0188, p0189, p0430
Note: For p9526 = 1, the encoder for the closed-loop speed control is used for the second channel of the motion monitor-
ing functions (1-encoder system).
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Description: Sets the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position.
Dependency: Refer to: p0415, r0475, p9329
Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies:
- p9529 is automatically set the same as r0475 when the system boots.
For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies:
- p9529 is checked to see that it matches r0475.
MSB: Most Significant Bit
Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Dependency: Refer to: C01707
Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
p9526 SI Motion encoder assignment second channel / SI Mtn enc chan 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 3 1
p9529 SI Motion Gx_XIST1 Safe most significant bit (CU) / Gx_XIST1 MSB CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 31 14
p9530 SI Motion standstill tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn standst_tol
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [mm] 100.000 [mm] 1.000 [mm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-762 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Dependency: Refer to: C01707
Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
Description: Sets the limit values for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1
[1] = Limit value SLS2
[2] = Limit value SLS3
[3] = Limit value SLP4
Dependency: Refer to: p9532, p9561, p9563
Refer to: C01714
Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
Description: Sets the limit values for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1
[1] = Limit value SLS2
[2] = Limit value SLS3
[3] = Limit value SLP4
Dependency: Refer to: p9532, p9561, p9563
Refer to: C01714
Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
p9530 SI Motion standstill tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn standst_tol
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [°] 100.000 [°] 1.000 [°]
p9531[0...3] SI Motion SLS (SG) limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS lim CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min] 1000000.00 [mm/min] 2000.00 [mm/min]
p9531[0...3] SI Motion SLS (SG) limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS lim CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 1000000.00 [rpm] 2000.00 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-763
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the override factor for the limit value for SLS2 and SLS4 for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
Index: [0] = SLS (SG) override factor 0
[1] = SLS (SG) override factor 1
[2] = SLS (SG) override factor 2
[3] = SLS (SG) override factor 3
[4] = SLS (SG) override factor 4
[5] = SLS (SG) override factor 5
[6] = SLS (SG) override factor 6
[7] = SLS (SG) override factor 7
[8] = SLS (SG) override factor 8
[9] = SLS (SG) override factor 9
[10] = SLS (SG) override factor 10
[11] = SLS (SG) override factor 11
[12] = SLS (SG) override factor 12
[13] = SLS (SG) override factor 13
[14] = SLS (SG) override factor 14
[15] = SLS (SG) override factor 15
Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9531
Note: The actual override factor for SLS2 and SLS4 is selected using the safety-relevant inputs (SGE).
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
Description: This is an evaluation factor to define the setpoint limit from the selected actual speed limit.
The active SLS limit value is evaluated with this factor and is made available as setpoint limit in r9733:
r9733 = p9533 * p9531[0...3]
Dependency: This parameter only has to be parameterized for the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9601.2 =
1)
Refer to: p9501, p9531, p9601
Note: The active actual speed limit is selected via safety-relevant inputs (SGE).
When selecting SOS or a STOP A ... D, setpoint 0 is specified in r9733.
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed
p9532[0...15] SI Motion SLS (SG) override factor (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS over
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [%] 100.000 [%] 100.000 [%]
p9533 SI Motion SLS setpoint velocity limiting (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS set_lim
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [%] 100.000 [%] 80.000 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-764 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the upper limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP).
Index: [0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1)
[1] = Limit value SLP2 (SE2)
Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9535, p9562
Note: For the setting of these limit values, the following applies: p9534 > p9535
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches
Description: Sets the upper limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP).
Index: [0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1)
[1] = Limit value SLP2 (SE2)
Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9535, p9562
Note: For the setting of these limit values, the following applies: p9534 > p9535
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches
Description: Sets the lower limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP).
Index: [0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1)
[1] = Limit value SLP2 (SE2)
Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9534, p9562
Note: For the setting of these limit values, the following applies: p9534 > p9535
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches
p9534[0...1] SI Motion SLP (SE) upper limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP up lim
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-2147000.000 [mm] 2147000.000 [mm] 100000.000 [mm]
p9534[0...1] SI Motion SLP (SE) upper limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP up lim
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-2147000.000 [°] 2147000.000 [°] 100000.000 [°]
p9535[0...1] SI Motion SLP (SE) lower limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP low lim
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-2147000.000 [mm] 2147000.000 [mm] -100000.000 [mm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-765
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the lower limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP).
Index: [0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1)
[1] = Limit value SLP2 (SE2)
Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9534, p9562
Note: For the setting of these limit values, the following applies: p9534 > p9535
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches
Description: Sets the plus cam position for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA).
Index: [0] = Cam position SCA1 (SN1)
[1] = Cam position SCA2 (SN2)
[2] = Cam position SCA3 (SN3)
[3] = Cam position SCA4 (SN4)
[4] = Cam position SCA5 (SN5)
[5] = Cam position SCA6 (SN6)
[6] = Cam position SCA7 (SN7)
[7] = Cam position SCA8 (SN8)
[8] = Cam position SCA9 (SN9)
[9] = Cam position SCA10 (SN10)
[10] = Cam position SCA11 (SN11)
[11] = Cam position SCA12 (SN12)
[12] = Cam position SCA13 (SN13)
[13] = Cam position SCA14 (SN14)
[14] = Cam position SCA15 (SN15)
[15] = Cam position SCA16 (SN16)
[16] = Cam position SCA17 (SN17)
[17] = Cam position SCA18 (SN18)
[18] = Cam position SCA19 (SN19)
[19] = Cam position SCA20 (SN20)
[20] = Cam position SCA21 (SN21)
[21] = Cam position SCA22 (SN22)
[22] = Cam position SCA23 (SN23)
[23] = Cam position SCA24 (SN24)
[24] = Cam position SCA25 (SN25)
[25] = Cam position SCA26 (SN26)
[26] = Cam position SCA27 (SN27)
[27] = Cam position SCA28 (SN28)
[28] = Cam position SCA29 (SN29)
[29] = Cam position SCA30 (SN30)
Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9503, p9537
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam
p9535[0...1] SI Motion SLP (SE) lower limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP low lim
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-2147000.000 [°] 2147000.000 [°] -100000.000 [°]
p9536[0...29] SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA+
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-2147000.000 [mm] 2147000.000 [mm] 10.000 [mm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-766 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the plus cam position for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA).
Index: [0] = Cam position SCA1 (SN1)
[1] = Cam position SCA2 (SN2)
[2] = Cam position SCA3 (SN3)
[3] = Cam position SCA4 (SN4)
[4] = Cam position SCA5 (SN5)
[5] = Cam position SCA6 (SN6)
[6] = Cam position SCA7 (SN7)
[7] = Cam position SCA8 (SN8)
[8] = Cam position SCA9 (SN9)
[9] = Cam position SCA10 (SN10)
[10] = Cam position SCA11 (SN11)
[11] = Cam position SCA12 (SN12)
[12] = Cam position SCA13 (SN13)
[13] = Cam position SCA14 (SN14)
[14] = Cam position SCA15 (SN15)
[15] = Cam position SCA16 (SN16)
[16] = Cam position SCA17 (SN17)
[17] = Cam position SCA18 (SN18)
[18] = Cam position SCA19 (SN19)
[19] = Cam position SCA20 (SN20)
[20] = Cam position SCA21 (SN21)
[21] = Cam position SCA22 (SN22)
[22] = Cam position SCA23 (SN23)
[23] = Cam position SCA24 (SN24)
[24] = Cam position SCA25 (SN25)
[25] = Cam position SCA26 (SN26)
[26] = Cam position SCA27 (SN27)
[27] = Cam position SCA28 (SN28)
[28] = Cam position SCA29 (SN29)
[29] = Cam position SCA30 (SN30)
Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9503, p9537
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam
p9536[0...29] SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA+
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-2147000.000 [°] 2147000.000 [°] 10.000 [°]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-767
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the minus cam position for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA).
Index: [0] = Cam position SCA1 (SN1)
[1] = Cam position SCA2 (SN2)
[2] = Cam position SCA3 (SN3)
[3] = Cam position SCA4 (SN4)
[4] = Cam position SCA5 (SN5)
[5] = Cam position SCA6 (SN6)
[6] = Cam position SCA7 (SN7)
[7] = Cam position SCA8 (SN8)
[8] = Cam position SCA9 (SN9)
[9] = Cam position SCA10 (SN10)
[10] = Cam position SCA11 (SN11)
[11] = Cam position SCA12 (SN12)
[12] = Cam position SCA13 (SN13)
[13] = Cam position SCA14 (SN14)
[14] = Cam position SCA15 (SN15)
[15] = Cam position SCA16 (SN16)
[16] = Cam position SCA17 (SN17)
[17] = Cam position SCA18 (SN18)
[18] = Cam position SCA19 (SN19)
[19] = Cam position SCA20 (SN20)
[20] = Cam position SCA21 (SN21)
[21] = Cam position SCA22 (SN22)
[22] = Cam position SCA23 (SN23)
[23] = Cam position SCA24 (SN24)
[24] = Cam position SCA25 (SN25)
[25] = Cam position SCA26 (SN26)
[26] = Cam position SCA27 (SN27)
[27] = Cam position SCA28 (SN28)
[28] = Cam position SCA29 (SN29)
[29] = Cam position SCA30 (SN30)
Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9503, p9536
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam
p9537[0...29] SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA-
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-2147000.000 [mm] 2147000.000 [mm] -10.000 [mm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-768 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the minus cam position for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA).
Index: [0] = Cam position SCA1 (SN1)
[1] = Cam position SCA2 (SN2)
[2] = Cam position SCA3 (SN3)
[3] = Cam position SCA4 (SN4)
[4] = Cam position SCA5 (SN5)
[5] = Cam position SCA6 (SN6)
[6] = Cam position SCA7 (SN7)
[7] = Cam position SCA8 (SN8)
[8] = Cam position SCA9 (SN9)
[9] = Cam position SCA10 (SN10)
[10] = Cam position SCA11 (SN11)
[11] = Cam position SCA12 (SN12)
[12] = Cam position SCA13 (SN13)
[13] = Cam position SCA14 (SN14)
[14] = Cam position SCA15 (SN15)
[15] = Cam position SCA16 (SN16)
[16] = Cam position SCA17 (SN17)
[17] = Cam position SCA18 (SN18)
[18] = Cam position SCA19 (SN19)
[19] = Cam position SCA20 (SN20)
[20] = Cam position SCA21 (SN21)
[21] = Cam position SCA22 (SN22)
[22] = Cam position SCA23 (SN23)
[23] = Cam position SCA24 (SN24)
[24] = Cam position SCA25 (SN25)
[25] = Cam position SCA26 (SN26)
[26] = Cam position SCA27 (SN27)
[27] = Cam position SCA28 (SN28)
[28] = Cam position SCA29 (SN29)
[29] = Cam position SCA30 (SN30)
Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9503, p9536
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam
p9537[0...29] SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA-
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
-2147000.000 [°] 2147000.000 [°] -10.000 [°]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-769
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Assigns the individual cams to the maximum of 4 cam tracks and defines the numerical value for the SGA "cam
range".
p9538[0...29] = CBA dec
C = Assignment of the cam to the cam track.
Valid values are 1, 2, 3, 4.
BA = Numerical value for the SGA "cam range".
If the position lies in the range of this cam, the value BA is signaled to the safety-relevant logic via the SGA "cam
range" of the cam track set using C.
Valid values are 0 ... 14. Each numerical value may only be used once for each cam track.
Examples:
p9538[0] = 207
Cam 1 (index 0) is assigned cam track 2. If the position lies within the range of this cam, a value of 7 is entered in
the SGA "cam range" of the second cam track.
p9538[5] = 100
Cam 6 (index 5) is assigned cam track 1. If the position lies within the range of this cam, a value of 0 is entered in
the SGA "cam range" of the first cam track.
p9538[0...29] SI Motion SCA (SN) cam track assignment (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA assign.
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
100 414 [0] 100
[1] 101
[2] 102
[3] 103
[4] 104
[5] 105
[6] 106
[7] 107
[8] 108
[9] 109
[10] 110
[11] 111
[12] 112
[13] 113
[14] 114
[15] 200
[16] 201
[17] 202
[18] 203
[19] 204
[20] 205
[21] 206
[22] 207
[23] 208
[24] 209
[25] 210
[26] 211
[27] 212
[28] 213
[29] 214
Parameter
List of parameters
1-770 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = Track assignment SCA1
[1] = Track assignment SCA2
[2] = Track assignment SCA3
[3] = Track assignment SCA4
[4] = Track assignment SCA5
[5] = Track assignment SCA6
[6] = Track assignment SCA7
[7] = Track assignment SCA8
[8] = Track assignment SCA9
[9] = Track assignment SCA10
[10] = Track assignment SCA11
[11] = Track assignment SCA12
[12] = Track assignment SCA13
[13] = Track assignment SCA14
[14] = Track assignment SCA15
[15] = Track assignment SCA16
[16] = Track assignment SCA17
[17] = Track assignment SCA18
[18] = Track assignment SCA19
[19] = Track assignment SCA20
[20] = Track assignment SCA21
[21] = Track assignment SCA22
[22] = Track assignment SCA23
[23] = Track assignment SCA24
[24] = Track assignment SCA25
[25] = Track assignment SCA26
[26] = Track assignment SCA27
[27] = Track assignment SCA28
[28] = Track assignment SCA29
[29] = Track assignment SCA30
Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9503
Refer to: F01681
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam
Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA).
Within this tolerance, both monitoring channels may signal different signal states of the same safe cam.
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA).
Within this tolerance, both monitoring channels may signal different signal states of the same safe cam.
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
p9540 SI Motion SCA (SN) tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA tol
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0010 [mm] 10.0000 [mm] 0.1000 [mm]
p9540 SI Motion SCA (SN) tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA tol
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0010 [°] 10.0000 [°] 0.1000 [°]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-771
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the tolerance for the cross-check of the actual position between the two monitoring channels.
For encoderless motion monitoring functions, the tolerance must be set to a higher value (12 degrees rotary and 1
mm linear).
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Description: Sets the tolerance for the cross-check of the actual position between the two monitoring channels.
For encoderless motion monitoring functions, the tolerance must be set to a higher value (12 degrees rotary and 1
mm linear).
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Description: Sets the tolerance to check the actual values after referencing (incremental encoder) or when powering up (abso-
lute encoder).
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Description: Sets the tolerance to check the actual values after referencing (incremental encoder) or when powering up (abso-
lute encoder).
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
p9542 SI Motion act val comparison tol (crosswise) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn act val tol
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0010 [mm] 360.0000 [mm] 0.1000 [mm]
p9542 SI Motion act val comparison tol (crosswise) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn act val tol
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0010 [°] 360.0000 [°] 0.1000 [°]
p9544 SI Motion actual value comparison tolerance (referencing) (CU) / SI Mtn ref tol
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0000 [mm] 36.0000 [mm] 0.0100 [mm]
p9544 SI Motion actual value comparison tolerance (referencing) (CU) / SI Mtn ref tol
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0000 [°] 36.0000 [°] 0.0100 [°]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-772 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the filter time for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill.
Note: The filter time is effective only if the function is enabled (p9300/p9500 Bit 16 = 1).
The parameter is included in the data cross-check of the two monitoring channels.
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" (SGA n < n_x) is set.
If a value of 0 is entered in p9368/p9568, the value of parameter p9346/p9546 also applies
for the safe acceleration monitor SBR.
Caution: The function "Safe Acceleration Monitor" (SBR) is switched out after the selected threshold value is undershot.
Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output / SGA: Safety-related output
SBR: Safe Acceleration Monitor
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) / SGA n < nx: Safety-
related output n < nx
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" (SGA n < n_x) is set.
If a value of 0 is entered in p9368/p9568, the value of parameter p9346/p9546 also applies
for the safe acceleration monitor SBR.
Caution: The function "Safe Acceleration Monitor" (SBR) is switched out after the selected threshold value is undershot.
Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output / SGA: Safety-related output
SBR: Safe Acceleration Monitor
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) / SGA n < nx: Safety-
related output n < nx
p9545 SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) filter time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SSM filt CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
p9546 SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) velocity limit (CU) / SI Mtn SSM v_limCU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min] 1000000.00 [mm/min] 20.00 [mm/min]
p9546 SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) velocity limit (CU) / SI Mtn SSM v_limCU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 1000000.00 [rpm] 20.00 [rpm]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-773
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Note: The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9300/p9500 Bit 16 = 1).
The parameter is included in the data cross-check of the two monitoring channels.
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
Description: Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Note: The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9300/p9500 Bit 16 = 1).
The parameter is included in the data cross-check of the two monitoring channels.
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance for the "Safe Acceleration Monitor".
Dependency: Refer to: C01706
Note: SBR: Safe Acceleration Monitor
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance for the "Safe Acceleration Monitor".
Dependency: Refer to: C01706
Note: SBR: Safe Acceleration Monitor
p9547 SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) velocity hysteresis (CU) / SI Mtn SSM hyst CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0010 [mm/min] 500.0000 [mm/min] 10.0000 [mm/min]
p9547 SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) velocity hysteresis (CU) / SI Mtn SSM hyst CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.0010 [rpm] 500.0000 [rpm] 10.0000 [rpm]
p9548 SI Motion SBR actual velocity tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SBR tol
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min] 120000.00 [mm/min] 300.00 [mm/min]
p9548 SI Motion SBR actual velocity tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SBR tol
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 120000.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-774 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance that is used for a 2-encoder system in crosswise comparison between the two monitor-
ing channels.
Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9542
Note: If the "actual value synchronization" is not enabled (p9501.3 = 0), then the value parameterized in p9542 is used as
tolerance in the data cross-check.
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance that is used for a 2-encoder system in crosswise comparison between the two monitor-
ing channels.
Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9542
Note: If the "actual value synchronization" is not enabled (p9501.3 = 0), then the value parameterized in p9542 is used as
tolerance in the data cross-check.
Description: Sets the tolerance time for the changeover of the safety-related inputs (SGE).
Description: Sets the delay time for the SLS changeover or for the changeover from SLS to SOS for the function "Safely-Limited
Speed" (SLS).
When transitioning from a higher to a lower safely-limited velocity/speed stage or to the safe operating stop (SOS),
within this delay time, the "old" velocity stage remains active.
Even if SLS or SOS is activated from non safety-related operation, then this delay is still applied.
Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
p9549 SI Motion slip velocity tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn slip tol
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min] 6000.00 [mm/min] 6.00 [mm/min]
p9549 SI Motion slip velocity tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn slip tol
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 6000.00 [rpm] 6.00 [rpm]
p9550 SI Motion SGE changeover tolerance time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SGE_chg tol
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 10000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
p9551 SI Motion SLS (SG) changeover delay time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS t CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2825
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-775
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the transition time from STOP C to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
Description: Sets the transition time from STOP D to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
Description: Sets the transition time from STOP E to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
Description: Sets the transition time from STOP F to STOP B.
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
p9552 SI Motion transition time STOP C to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn t C->SOS CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2825
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
p9553 SI Motion transition time STOP D to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn t D->SOS CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2825
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
p9554 SI Motion transition time STOP E to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn time E->SOS
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
p9555 SI Motion transition time STOP F to STOP B (Control Unit) / SI Mtn t F->B CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2825
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-776 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the delay time for the safe pulse suppression after STOP B.
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions (p9506/p9306 = 1), the parameter has no effect.
Dependency: Refer to: p9560
Refer to: C01701
Description: Sets the time after which the pulses must have been suppressed when initiating the test stop.
Dependency: Refer to: C01798
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Description: Sets the maximum time for the acceptance test mode.
If the acceptance test mode takes longer than the selected time limit, then the mode is automatically terminated.
Dependency: Refer to: C01799
Description: Sets the time to carry out the forced checking procedure and test the safety motion monitoring functions integrated
in the drives.
Within the parameterized time, the safety functions must have been tested at least once (including deselection of
the "STO" function).
This monitoring time is reset each time the test is carried out.
The signal source to initiate the forced checking procedure is set in p9705.
Dependency: Refer to: p9705
Refer to: A01697, C01798
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off
p9556 SI Motion pulse suppression delay time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn IL t_del CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2825
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
p9557 SI Motion pulse suppression test time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn IL t_test
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 10000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
p9558 SI Motion acceptance test mode time limit (Control Unit) / SI Mtn acc_test t
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
5000.00 [ms] 100000.00 [ms] 40000.00 [ms]
p9559 SI Motion forced checking procedure timer (Control Unit) / SI Mtn dyn timer
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [h] 9000.00 [h] 8.00 [h]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-777
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the shutdown velocity for pulse suppression.
Below this velocity "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B / SS1, the pulses are suppressed (by changing to STOP
A).
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions, the parameter must be > 0 (recommended value: 10).
Dependency: Refer to: p9556
Description: Sets the shutdown speed for the pulse suppression.
Below this speed "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B, the pulses are suppressed by changing to STOP A).
Dependency: Refer to: p9556
Description: Sets the stop response for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
This setting applies for all SLS limit values.
An input value of less than 5 signifies personnel protection, from 10 and upwards, machine protection.
Value: 0: STOP A
1: STOP B
2: STOP C
3: STOP D
4: STOP E
5: Sets the stop response via p9563 (SLS-specific)
10: STOP A with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
11: STOP B with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
12: STOP C with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
13: STOP D with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
14: STOP E with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
Dependency: Refer to: p9531, p9563, p9580
Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
p9560 SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown velocity (Control Unit) / SI Mtn IL v_shutCU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min] 6000.00 [mm/min] 0.00 [mm/min]
p9560 SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown speed (Control Unit) / SI Mtn IL n_shutCU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 6000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
p9561 SI Motion SLS (SG) stop response (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS resp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 14 5
Parameter
List of parameters
1-778 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the stop response for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP).
Value: 2: STOP C
3: STOP D
4: STOP E
Dependency: Refer to: p9534, p9535
Note: SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches
Description: Sets the SLS-specific stop response for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
These settings apply to the individual limit values for SLS.
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring (p9306 = 1), only a value of 0 or 1 is permitted.
Value: 0: STOP A
1: STOP B
2: STOP C
3: STOP D
4: STOP E
10: STOP A with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
11: STOP B with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
12: STOP C with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
13: STOP D with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
14: STOP E with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1
[1] = Limit value SLS2
[2] = Limit value SLS3
[3] = Limit value SLP4
Dependency: Refer to: p9531, p9561, p9580
Notice: Values 10 to 14 are being prepared and are presently ineffective.
Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the "SBR" function.
SBR is deactivated once the set velocity limit has been undershot.
p9562 SI Motion SLP (SE) stop response (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP resp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
2 4 2
p9563[0...3] SI Motion SLS (SG)-specific stop response (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS stop
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 14 2
p9568 SI Motion SBR velocity limit (Control Unit) / SI MtnSBR v_lim CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min] 1000.00 [mm/min] 0.00 [mm/min]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-779
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: SBR: Safe Acceleration Monitor
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
For p9568 = p9368 = 0, the following applies:
The value in p9546/p9346 (SSM) is applied as the velocity limit for SBR.
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the "SBR" function.
SBR is deactivated once the set velocity limit has been undershot.
Note: SBR: Safe Acceleration Monitor
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
For p9568 = p9368 = 0, the following applies:
The value in p9546/p9346 (SSM) is applied as the velocity limit for SBR.
Description: Setting to select and deselect the acceptance test mode.
Value: 0: [00 hex] Deselect the acceptance test mode
172: [AC hex] Select the acceptance test mode
Dependency: Refer to: p9558, r9571, p9601
Refer to: C01799
Note: Acceptance test mode can only be selected if Safety Extended Functions are enabled (p9601/9801).
Description: Displays the status of the acceptance test mode.
Value: 0: [00 hex] Acc_mode inactive
12: [0C hex] Acc_mode not possible due to POWER ON fault
13: [0D hex] Acc_mode not possible due to incorrect ID in p9570
15: [0F hex] Acc_mode not possible due to expired Acc_timer
172: [AC hex] Acc_mode active
Dependency: Refer to: p9558, p9570
Refer to: C01799
p9568 SI Motion SBR velocity limit (Control Unit) / SI MtnSBR v_lim CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [rpm] 1000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
p9570 SI Motion acceptance test mode (Control Unit) / SI Mtn Acc_mode
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 00AC hex 0000 hex
r9571 SI Motion acceptance test status (Control Unit) / SI Mtn acc_status
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 00AC hex -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-780 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the delay time after which the pulses are safely suppressed after a bus failure.
Dependency: Refer to: p9561, p9563
Description: Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp.
The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9581 (reference value) and p9583 (monitoring time).
Dependency: Refer to: p9582, p9583
Description: Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp.
The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9581 (reference value) and p9583 (monitoring time).
Dependency: Refer to: p9582, p9583
Description: Sets the delay time for monitoring the brake ramp.
Monitoring of the brake ramp starts once the delay time has elapsed.
Dependency: Refer to: p9581, p9583
p9580 SI Motion pulse suppression delay time after bus failure (CU) / SI Mtn t to IL
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 800.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
p9581 SI Motion brake ramp reference value (Control Unit) / SI Mtn ramp ref CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
600.0000 [mm/min] 24000.0000 [mm/min] 1500.0000 [mm/min]
p9581 SI Motion brake ramp reference value (Control Unit) / SI Mtn ramp ref CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
600.0000 [rpm] 24000.0000 [rpm] 1500.0000 [rpm]
p9582 SI Motion brake ramp delay time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn rp t_del CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.00 [ms] 99000.00 [ms] 250.00 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-781
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the monitoring time to define the brake ramp.
The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9581 (reference value) and p9583 (monitoring time).
Dependency: Refer to: p9581, p9582
Description: Sets the filter time for smoothing the actual value with encoderless actual value sensing.
Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9306/p9506 = 1).
Description: Sets the minimum current for encoderless actual value sensing.
Reducing this percentage value can adversely affect actual value sensing.
- The value must be increased if C1711 has occurred with message value 1042.
- The value must be decreased if C1711 has occurred with message value 1041.
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9306/p9506 = 1).
Description: Sets the voltage tolerance for suppressing acceleration peaks.
Increasing this percentage value means that voltage peaks will need to have a higher amplitude during acceleration
procedures if they are not to affect actual value sensing.
- The value must be increased if C1711 has occurred with message value 1042.
- The value must be decreased if acceleration procedures have led to an excessive safety actual velocity.
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9306/p9506 = 1).
p9583 SI Motion brake ramp monitoring time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn rp t_mon CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.50 [s] 1000.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
p9587 SI Motion act val sensing encoderless filter time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn EL filt CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 25.00 [ms]
p9588 SI Motion min current act val sensing encoderless (Control Unit) /
SI Mtn I_min EL CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
p9589 SI Motion voltage tolerance acceleration (Control Unit) / SI Mtn V tol CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
10.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-782 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version for the safety motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit.
Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release)
[1] = Safety Version (minor release)
[2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch)
[3] = Safety Version (hotfix)
Dependency: Refer to: r9770, r9870, r9890
Note: Example:
r9590[0] = 2, r9590[1] = 60, r9590[2] = 1, r9590[3] = 0 --> SI Motion version V02.60.01.00
Description: Sets the enable signals for safety functions on the Control Unit that are integrated in the drive.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Motor Module or Power
Module being used:
- p9601 = 0: Safety functions integrated in the drive disabled.
- p9601 = 1: STO/SS1 enabled via terminals. Permissible if r9771.0 = 1.
- p9601 = 4: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F)
(SINAMICS S120) or via an integrated F-DI/F-DO (SINAMICS S110). Permissible if r9771.5 = 1.
- p9601 = 5: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) and
STO/SS1 via terminals (SINAMICS S120 only). Permissible if r9771.5 = 1.
- p9601 = 8: STO/SS1 enabled via PROFIsafe. Permissible if r9771.6 = 1.
- p9601 = 9: STO/SS1 enabled via PROFIsafe and STO/SS1 via terminals. Permissible if r9771.6 = 1.
- p9601 = 12: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via PROFIsafe. Permissible if r9771.4 = 1.
- p9601 = 13: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via PROFIsafe and STO/SS1 via termi-
nals. Permissible if r9771.4 = 1.
Dependency: Refer to: r9771, p9801
Note: CU: Control Unit.
STO: Safe Torque Off/SH: Safe standstill.
SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN 60204).
SI: Safety Integrated.
SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input.
F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output.
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
r9590[0...3] SI Motion version safety motion monitoring (Control Unit) / SI Mtn version
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p9601 SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Control Unit) / SI enable fct CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO (SH) via terminals (Control Unit)
enable
Enable Inhibit 2810
02 Motion monitoring functions integr. in the
drive (Control Unit)
Enable Inhibit -
03 PROFIsafe (Control Unit) enable Enable Inhibit -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-783
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the enable signal for the function "Safe Brake Control" (SBC) on the Control Unit.
Value: 0: Inhibit SBC
1: Enable SBC
Dependency: Refer to: p9802
Note: The "Safe Brake Control" function is not activated until at least one safety monitoring function has been enabled
(i.e. p9501 not equal to 0 and/or p9601 not equal to 0).
It does not make sense to parameterize "no motor holding brake available" and enable "Safe Brake Control" (p1215
= 0, p9602 = p9802 = 1) if there is no motor holding brake.
The parameterization "motor holding brake the same as sequence control, connection via BICO" and "Safe Brake
Control" enabled (p1215 = 3, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1) is not practical.
It is not permissible to parameterize "motor holding brake without feedback signals" and also enable "safe brake
control" (p1278 = 1, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1).
CU: Control Unit
SBC: Safe Brake Control
SI: Safety Integrated
Description: Sets the PROFIsafe address of the Control Unit.
Dependency: Refer to: p9810
Description: Sets the signal source for the following functions on the Control Unit:
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
SBC: Safe Brake Control
SS1: Safe Stop 1 (time monitored)
p9602 SI enable Safe Brake Control (Control Unit) / SI enable SBC CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2814
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p9610 SI PROFIsafe address (Control Unit) / SI PROFIsafe CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFE hex 0000 hex
p9620[0...7] BI: SI signal source for STO (SH)/SBC/SS1 (Control Unit) / SI S_srcSTO/SS1 CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2810
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - [0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-784 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p9601
Note: The following signal sources are permitted:
- fixed zero (standard setting).
- digital inputs DI 0 to DI 7 on the Control Unit 320 (CU320).
- digital inputs DI 0 to DI 3 on the Controller Extensions (CX32, NX10, NX15).
- digital inputs DI 0 to DI 3 on the Control Unit 310 (CU310).
It is not permitted to establish an interconnection to a digital input in the simulation mode.
For a parallel circuit configuration of n power units, the following applies:
p9620[0] = Signal source for power unit 1
...
p9620[n-1] = Signal source for power unit n
Description: An entry is added, specifying whether and/or via which digital CU input the SBA feedback signal (SBA_DIAG) is to
be read in; the parameter can be interconnected as a BICO drain.
0 : No SBC with SBA (default)
Bico code: To be parameterized by the user
SBA and no DQ CIM: p0722.x CU signal source for DIx where x = { 0,1,2...7 }
SBA with DQ CIM: p9872.3 Signal source is permanently interconnected to bit 3
Dependency: Refer to: p9601
Note: No difference is tolerated for a data cross-check between p9621 and p9821.
Description: The relay-specific minimum wait times (ms) for evaluating the feedback signal contacts have to be taken into
account. They differ for the activation and deactivation of one and the same relay.
Index: [0] = Relay wait time activation
[1] = Relay wait time deactivation
Dependency: Refer to: p9850
Note: For a data cross-check between p9622 and p9822, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated.
The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
The relay-specific minimum wait times (ms) for evaluating the feedback signal contacts are entered.
Index 0 : for the ON time (default 100 ms)
Index 1 : for the OFF time (default 65 ms)
p9621 BI: SI signal source for SBA (Control Unit) / SI s_src SBA CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2810
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p9622[0...1] SI SBA relay wait times (Control Unit) / SI SBA WT CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2810
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] [0] 100.00 [ms]
[1] 65.00 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-785
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the tolerance time to change over the safety-related inputs (SGE) on the Control Unit.
An SGE changeover is not effective simultaneously due to the different runtimes in the two monitoring channels.
After an SGE changeover, dynamic data is not subject to a data cross-check during this tolerance time.
Dependency: Refer to: p9850
Note: For a data cross-check between p9650 and p9850, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated.
The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
SGE: Safety-related input (e.g. STO terminals)
Description: Sets the CU DI debounce time used to control the SH terminal (see p9620).
The debounce time is accepted rounded to whole milliseconds. The debounce time indicates the maximum duration
of a fault pulse on the F-DIs, so that there are no negative effects on the SGEs.
Note: Example:
Debounce time = 1 ms: Fault pulses of 1 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 2 ms are processed.
Debounce time = 3 ms: Fault pulses of 3 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 4 ms are processed.
Description: Sets the delay time of the pulse suppression for the function "Safe Stop 1" (SS1) on the Control Unit to brake along
the OFF3 down ramp (p1135).
Dependency: Refer to: p1135, p9852
Note: For a data cross-check between p9652 and p9852, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated.
The parameterized time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204)
p9650 SI SGE changeover tolerance time (Control Unit) / SI SGE_chg tol CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2810
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 2000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
p9651 SI STO/SBC/SS1 debounce time (Control Unit) / SI STO t_debou CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
p9652 SI Safe Stop 1 delay time (Control Unit) / SI Stop 1 t_del CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 300.00 [s] 0.00 [s]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-786 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the transition period from STOP F to STOP A on the Control Unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r9795, p9858
Refer to: F01611
Note: For a data cross-check between p9658 and p9858, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated.
The parameterized time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
STOP F: Defect in a monitoring channel (error in the data cross-check)
STOP A: Pulse suppression via the safety shutdown path
Description: Sets the time to carry out the dynamic update and testing the safety shutdown paths (forced checking procedure).
Within the parameterized time, STO must have been deselected at least once. The monitoring time is reset each
time that STO is deselected.
Dependency: Refer to: A01699
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
Description: Displays the time remaining before dynamization and testing of the safety shutdown paths (forced checking proce-
dure).
Dependency: Refer to: A01699
Description: Setting to start the required copy function.
After starting, the appropriate parameters are copied from the Control Unit to the Motor Module.
Once copying is complete, the parameter is automatically reset to 0.
p9658 SI transition time STOP F to STOP A (Control Unit) / SI STOP F->A CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 30000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
p9659 SI forced checking procedure timer / SI FrcdCkProcTimer
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2810
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [h] 9000.00 [h] 8.00 [h]
r9660 SI forced checking procedure remaining time / SI frc chk remain
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [h] - [h] - [h]
p9700 SI Motion copy function / SI Mtn copy fct
TM54F_MA Can be changed: C2(95), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 0057 hex 0000 hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-787
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Value: 0: [00 hex] Copy function ended
29: [1D hex] Start copy function node identifier
87: [57 hex] Start copy function SI parameters
Note: Re value = 57 hex:
The value can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was entered.
SI: Safety Integrated
Description: Setting to start the required copy function.
After starting, the appropriate parameters are copied from the Control Unit to the Motor Module.
Once copying is complete, the parameter is automatically reset to 0.
Value: 0: [00 hex] Copy function ended
29: [1D hex] Start copy function node identifier
87: [57 hex] Start copy function SI parameters
208: [D0 hex] Start copy function SI basic parameters
Note: Re value = 57 hex and D0 hex:
The value can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was entered.
Re value = D0 hex:
The following parameters are copied after starting the copy function:
p9601/p9801, p9602/p9802, p9610/9810, p9650/p9850, p9652/p9852, p9658/p9858
Description: Setting to transfer the reference checksums from the associated actual checksums after changes (SI parameters,
hardware).
After transferring the reference checksums, parameters are automatically reset to 0.
Value: 0: [00 hex] Data unchanged
172: [AC hex] Acknowledge data change complete
236: [EC hex] Acknowledge hardware CRC
Dependency: Refer to: r9398, p9399, r9728, p9729, r9798, p9799, r9898, p9899
Note: Re value = AC hex:
These values can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was
entered.
SI: Safety Integrated
p9700 SI Motion copy function / SI Mtn copy fct
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 00D0 hex 0000 hex
p9701 Acknowledge SI Motion data / Ackn SI Mtn dat
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 00EC hex 0000 hex
Parameter
List of parameters
1-788 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Setting to transfer the reference checksums from the associated actual checksums after changes (SI parameters,
hardware).
After transferring the reference checksums, parameters are automatically reset to 0.
Value: 0: [00 hex] Data unchanged
172: [AC hex] Acknowledge data change complete
220: [DC hex] Acknowledge SI basic parameter change
236: [EC hex] Acknowledge hardware CRC
Dependency: Refer to: r9398, p9399, r9728, p9729, r9798, p9799, r9898, p9899
Note: Re value = AC and DC hex:
These values can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was
entered.
Description: Sets the signal source for the test stop of the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.
Notice: It is not permissible to use TM54F inputs to start the test stop.
Description: Displays result list 1 that, for the data cross-check between the monitoring channels, led to the fault.
Index: [0] = Result list, second channel
[1] = Result list, drive
p9701 Acknowledge SI Motion data / Ackn SI Mtn dat
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95), U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 00EC hex 0000 hex
p9705 BI: SI Motion: Test stop signal source / SI Mtn test stop
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
r9710[0...1] SI Motion diagnostics result list 1 / SI Mtn res_list 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Actual value > upper limit SOS Yes No -
01 Actual value > lower limit SOS Yes No -
02 Actual value > upper limit, SE1 Yes No -
03 Actual value > lower limit, SE1 Yes No -
04 Actual value > upper limit, SE2 Yes No -
05 Actual value > lower limit, SE2 Yes No -
06 Actual value > upper limit, SG1 Yes No -
07 Actual value > lower limit, SG1 Yes No -
08 Actual value > upper limit, SG2 Yes No -
09 Actual value > lower limit, SG2 Yes No -
10 Actual value > upper limit, SG3 Yes No -
11 Actual value > lower limit, SG3 Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-789
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Description: Displays result list 2 that, for the data cross-check between the monitoring channels, led to the fault.
Index: [0] = Result list, second channel
[1] = Result list, drive
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Description: Displays the actual motor-side position actual value for the motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit.
12 Actual value > upper limit, SG4 Yes No -
13 Actual value > lower limit, SG4 Yes No -
16 Actual value > upper limit, SBR Yes No -
17 Actual value > lower limit, SBR Yes No -
r9711[0...1] SI Motion diagnostics result list 2 / SI Mtn res_list 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Actual value > upper limit, SN1+ Yes No -
01 Actual value > lower limit, SN1+ Yes No -
02 Actual value > upper limit, SN1- Yes No -
03 Actual value > lower limit, SN1- Yes No -
04 Actual value > upper limit, SN2+ Yes No -
05 Actual value > lower limit, SN2+ Yes No -
06 Actual value > upper limit, SN2- Yes No -
07 Actual value > lower limit, SN2- Yes No -
08 Actual value > upper limit, SN3+ Yes No -
09 Actual value > lower limit, SN3+ Yes No -
10 Actual value > upper limit, SN3- Yes No -
11 Actual value > lower limit, SN3- Yes No -
12 Actual value > upper limit, SN4+ Yes No -
13 Actual value > lower limit, SN4+ Yes No -
14 Actual value > upper limit, SN4- Yes No -
15 Actual value > lower limit, SN4- Yes No -
16 Actual value > upper limit, n_x+ Yes No -
17 Actual value > lower limit, n_x+ Yes No -
18 Actual value > upper limit, n_x- Yes No -
19 Actual value > lower limit, n_x- Yes No -
20 Actual value > upper limit, modulo Yes No -
21 Actual value > lower limit, modulo Yes No -
r9712 SI Motion diagnostics position action value motor side / SI Mtn s_act mot
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-790 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual load-side actual values of both monitoring channels and their difference.
Index: [0] = Load-side actual value on the Control Unit
[1] = Load-side actual value on the second channel
[2] = Load-side actual value difference Control Unit - second channel
[3] = Load-side max. actual value difference CU - 2nd channel
Dependency: Refer to: r9724
Note: DCC: Data cross-check
Re r9713[0]:
The display of the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit is updated in the monitoring clock cycle.
Re r9713[1]:
The display of the load-side position actual value on the second channel is updated in the DCC clock cycle (r9724)
and delayed by one DCC clock cycle.
Re r9713[2]:
The difference between the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit and load-side position actual value in
the second channel is updated in the DCC clock cycle (r9724) and delayed by one DCC clock cycle.
Re r9713[3]:
The maximum difference between the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit and the load-side position
actual value on the second channel.
Description: Displays the current velocity actual values for the motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit.
Index: [0] = Load-side velocity actual value on the Control Unit
[1] = Current SBR velocity limit on the Control Unit
Note: For a linear axis, the following units apply: Micrometers per monitoring clock cycle (p9500)
For a rotary axis, the following units apply: Millidegrees per monitoring clock cycle (p9500)
Description: Control signal 1 for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.
Note: TfS: Traverse to fixed stop
r9713[0...3] SI Motion diagnostics position action value load side / SI Mtn s_act load
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9714[0...1] SI motion diagnostics velocity / SI Mtn diag v
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9718.23 CO/BO: SI Motion control signals 1 / SI Mtn ctrl_sig 1
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
23 Set offset for TfS to the actual torque Set Reset -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-791
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Control signal 2 for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.
Note: Re r9719.0 and r9719.1:
These two bits must be considered together.
- if SOS/SLS (SBH/SG) is deselected using bit 0, then assignment of bit 1 is irrelevant.
- if SOS/SLS (SBH/SG) is selected using bit 0, then a changeover is made between SOS (SBH) and SLS (SG)
using bit 1.
SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
Description: Control signals for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.
r9719.0...31 CO/BO: SI Motion control signals 2 / SI Mtn ctrl_sig 2
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Deselect SOS/SLS (SBH/SG) Yes No -
01 Deselect SOS (SBH) Yes No -
03 Select SLS (SG) bit 0 Set Not set -
04 Select SLS (SG) bit 1 Set Not set -
08 Gearbox selection, bit 0 Set Not set -
09 Gearbox selection, bit 1 Set Not set -
10 Gearbox selection, bit 2 Set Not set -
12 Select SLP (SE) SLP2 (SE2) SLP1 (SE1) -
13 Close brake from control Yes No -
15 Select test stop Yes No -
16 SGE valid Yes No -
18 Deselect external STOP A Yes No -
19 Deselect external STOP C Yes No -
20 Deselect external STOP D Yes No -
21 Deselect external STOP E Yes No -
28 SLS (SG) override bit 0 Set Not set -
29 SLS (SG) override bit 1 Set Not set -
30 SLS (SG) override bit 2 Set Not set -
31 SLS (SG) override bit 3 Set Not set -
r9720.0...10 CO/BO: SI Motion control signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ STW
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2840, 2855
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Deselect STO Yes No -
01 Deselect SS1 Yes No -
02 Deselect SS2 Yes No -
03 Deselect SOS Yes No -
04 Deselect SLS Yes No -
07 Acknowledgement Signal edge active No -
09 Select SLS bit 0 Set Not set -
10 Select SLS bit 1 Set Not set -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-792 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values in the case of Safety Integrated Extended Functions. For Safety
Integrated Basic Functions (SBC, SS1, STO), the value is equal to zero.
Description: Status signal for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.
Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values in the case of Safety Integrated Extended Functions. For Safety
Integrated Basic Functions (SBC, SS1, STO), the value is equal to zero.
Description: Status signal for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.
Notice: Re bit 07:
The signal state behaves in an opposite way to the PROFIsafe Standard.
Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values in the case of Safety Integrated Extended Functions. For Safety
Integrated Basic Functions (SBC, SS1, STO), the value is equal to zero.
Re bit 07:
An internal event is displayed if a STOP A ... F is active.
r9721.0...15 CO/BO: SI Motion status signals / SI Mtn stat_sig
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 SOS or SLS active Yes No -
01 SOS active Yes No -
02 Pulse enable Deleted Enabled -
03 Active SLS stage bit 0 Set Not set -
04 Active SLS stage bit 1 Set Not set -
05 Velocity below limit value n_x Yes No -
06 Status signals valid Yes No -
07 Safely referenced Yes No -
12 STOP A or B active Yes No -
13 STOP C active Yes No -
14 STOP D active Yes No -
15 STOP E active Yes No -
r9722.0...15 CO/BO: SI Motion status signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ stat
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2840, 2855
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO active Yes No -
01 SS1 active Yes No -
02 SS2 active Yes No -
03 SOS active Yes No -
04 SLS active Yes No -
07 Internal event No Yes -
09 Active SLS stage bit 0 Set Not set -
10 Active SLS stage bit 1 Set Not set -
11 SOS selected Yes No -
15 SSM (speed below limit value) Yes No -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-793
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the diagnostic signals for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.
Description: Displays the crosswise comparison clock cycle.
The value indicates the clock cycle time with which each individual DCC value is compared between the two moni-
toring channels.
Dependency: Refer to: p9500
Note: Crosswise comparison clock cycle = monitoring clock cycle (p9500) * number of data to be crosswise compared
DCC: Data cross-check
Description: Re r9725[0]:
Displays the message value that resulted in the STOP F on the drive.
Value = 0 means:
The Control Unit signaled a STOP F.
Value = 1 ... 999 means:
Number of the incorrect cross-checked data between the Control Unit and second channel.
Value >= 1000 means:
Additional diagnostic values of the drive.
Re r9725[1]:
Displays the value of the Control Unit that resulted in the STOP F.
Re r9725[2]:
Displays the value of the 2nd channel that resulted in the STOP F.
Index: [0] = DCC error number
[1] = Control Unit DCC act value
[2] = Components DCC act val
Dependency: Refer to: C01711
Note: The significance of the individual values is described in message C01711.
r9723.0...16 CO/BO: SI Motion diagnostic signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ diag
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Forced checking procedure required Yes No -
16 Status of the SBR function active inactive -
r9724 SI Motion crosswise comparison clock cycle / SI Mtn DCC clk cyc
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
r9725[0...2] SI Motion, diagnostics STOP F / SI Mtn Diag STOP F
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-794 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Setting to select and deselect the user agreement.
Value: 0: [00 hex] Deselect user agreement
172: [AC hex] Select user agreement
Dependency: Refer to: r9727
Description: Displays the internal state of the user agreement.
Value = 0: User agreement is not set.
Value = AC hex: User agreement is set.
Dependency: Refer to: p9726
Description: Displays the checksum over the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring functions (actual
checksum).
Index: [0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring
[1] = Checksum over SI parameters for actual values
[2] = Checksum over SI parameters for HW
Dependency: Refer to: p9729
Refer to: F01680
Description: Sets the checksum using the checksum-tested Safety Integrated parameters for motion monitoring functions (refer-
ence checksum).
Index: [0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring
[1] = Checksum over SI parameters for actual values
[2] = Checksum over SI parameters for HW
p9726 SI Motion, user agreement selection/deselection / SI Mtn UserAgr sel
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 00AC hex 0000 hex
r9727 SI Motion user agreement, inside the drive / SI Mtn UserAgr int
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9728[0...2] SI Motion actual checksum, SI parameters / SI Mtn act CRC
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p9729[0...2] SI Motion reference checksum, SI parameters / SI Mtn ref CRC
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-795
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: r9728
Refer to: F01680
Description: Displays the safe maximum velocity (on the load side) that is permissible for the safe motion monitoring functions
as a result of the actual value sensing.
If safety is not enabled, the parameter has no significance and is set to "0".
Note: If the value displayed is exceeded, message C01711 is output indicating relevant subsequent faults.
Description: Displays the safe maximum velocity (on the load side) that is permissible for the safe motion monitoring functions
as a result of the actual value sensing.
If safety is not enabled, the parameter has no significance and is set to "0".
Note: If the value displayed is exceeded, message C01711 is output indicating relevant subsequent faults.
Description: Displays the safe position accuracy (on the load side) that can be achieved as a maximum for the safe motion mon-
itoring functions as a result of the actual value sensing.
If safety is not enabled, the parameter has no significance and is set to "0".
Description: Displays the safe position accuracy (on the load side) that can be achieved as a maximum for the safe motion mon-
itoring functions as a result of the actual value sensing.
If safety is not enabled, the parameter has no significance and is set to "0".
r9730 SI Motion Safe maximum velocity / SI mtn safe v_Max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mm/min] - [mm/min] - [mm/min]
r9730 SI Motion Safe maximum velocity / SI mtn safe v_Max
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r9731 SI Motion safe position accuracy / SI Mtn pos acc
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [mm] - [mm] - [mm]
r9731 SI Motion safe position accuracy / SI Mtn pos acc
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (Safety rot)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-796 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the necessary setpoint speed limit as a result of the selected SI Motion monitoring functions.
Contrary to the parameterization of the SI limit values, this parameter specifies the motor-side limit value and not
the load-side limit value.
Index: [0] = Setpoint limiting positive
[1] = Setpoint limiting negative
Dependency: r9733[0] = p9531[x] * p9533
r9733[1] = - p9531[x] * p9533
x = SLS stage selected
Refer to: p9531, p9533
Notice: If p1051 = r9733[0] is interconnected, p1052 = r9733[1] must also be interconnected.
If only the absolute value of the setpoint speed limit is required, r9733[0] is sufficient.
Note: The unit changeover between linear and rotary axis is not implemented via the safety changeover (p9502) but by
the linear motor changeover.
If the "SLS" function is not selected, r9733[0] shows p1082 and r9733[1] shows -p1082.
The display in r9733 can be delayed by up to one Safety monitoring clock cycle as compared to the display in
r9719/r9720 and r9721/r9722.
Description: Displays the changes of the safety message buffer. This counter is incremented every time that the safety message
buffer changes.
Recommend.: This is used to check whether the safety message buffer has been read out consistently.
Dependency: Refer to: r9747, r9748, r9749, p9752, r9753, r9754, r9755, r9756
Description: Displays the component number of the safety message which has occurred.
Note: Value = 0: Assignment to a component not possible.
r9733[0...1] CO: SI Motion setpoint speed limit effective / SI Mtn setp_lim
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
r9744 SI message buffer changes, counter / SI msg_buffer chng
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9745[0...63] SI component number / SI comp_num
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-797
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the numbers of safety messages that have occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9748, r9749, p9752, r9753, r9754, r9755, r9756
Note: The messages type "safety message" (Cxxxxx) are entered in the message fault buffer.
Message buffer structure (principle):
r9747[0], r9748[0], r9749[0], r9753[0], r9754[0], r9755[0], r9756[0] --> Actual message case, safety message 1
...
r9747[7], r9748[7], r9749[7], r9753[7], r9754[7], r9755[7], r9756[7] --> Actual message case, safety message 8
r9747[8], r9748[8], r9749[8], r9753[8], r9754[8], r9755[8], r9756[8] --> 1st acknowledged message case, safety
message 1
...
r9747[15], r9748[15], r9749[15], r9753[15], r9754[15], r9755[15], r9756[15] --> 1st acknowledged message case,
safety message 8
...
r9747[56], r9748[56], r9749[56], r9753[56], r9754[56], r9755[56], r9756[56] --> 7th acknowledged message case,
safety message 1
...
r9747[63], r9748[63], r9749[63], r9753[63], r9754[63], r9755[63], r9756[63] --> 7th acknowledged message case,
safety message 8
Description: Displays the relative system runtime in milliseconds when the safety message occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9749, p9752, r9753, r9754, r9755, r9756
Description: Displays the additional information about the safety message that occurred (as integer number).
Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9748, p9752, r9753, r9754, r9755, r9756
r9747[0...63] SI message code / SI msg_code
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9748[0...63] SI message time received in milliseconds / SI t_msg recv ms
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
r9749[0...63] SI message value / SI msg_value
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-798 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the diagnostic attributes of the safety messages that have occurred.
Description: Number of safety messages that have occurred since the last reset.
Dependency: The safety message buffer is cleared by resetting the parameter to 0.
Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9748, r9749, r9753, r9754, r9755, r9756
Note: The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.
Description: Displays additional information about the safety message that has occurred for float values.
Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9748, r9749, p9752, r9754, r9755, r9756
Description: Displays the relative system runtime in days when the safety message occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9748, r9749, p9752, r9753, r9755, r9756
r9750[0...63] SI diagnostic attributes / SI diag_attr
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Hardware replacement recommended Yes No -
p9752 SI message cases, counter / SI msg_cases count
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
r9753[0...63] SI message value for float values / SI msg_val float
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9754[0...63] SI message time received in days / SI t_msg recv days
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-799
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the relative system runtime in milliseconds when the safety message was removed.
Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9748, r9749, p9752, r9753, r9754, r9756
Description: Displays the relative system runtime in days when the safety message was removed.
Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9748, r9749, p9752, r9753, r9754, r9755
Description: Enters the Safety Integrated password.
Dependency: Refer to: F01659
Note: It is not permissible to change Safety Integrated parameter settings until the Safety Integrated password has been
entered.
Description: Enters a new Safety Integrated password.
Dependency: A change made to the Safety Integrated password must be acknowledged in the following parameter:
Refer to: p9763
r9755[0...63] SI message time removed in milliseconds / SI t_msg rem ms
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
r9756[0...63] SI message time removed in days / SI t_msg rem days
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p9761 SI password input / SI password inp
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C1, T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2800
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p9762 SI password new / SI password new
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2800
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Parameter
List of parameters
1-800 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Acknowledges the new Safety Integrated password.
Dependency: Refer to: p9762
Note: The new password entered into p9762 must be re-entered in order to acknowledge.
p9762 = p9763 = 0 is automatically set after the new Safety Integrated password has been successfully acknowl-
edged.
Description: Displays the time remaining until the next dynamization and testing of the safety motion monitoring functions inte-
grated in the drives.
The signal source to initiate the forced checking procedure is parameterized in p9705.
Dependency: Refer to: p9705
Refer to: C01798
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version for the safety functions that run independently in the drive on the Control
Unit.
Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release)
[1] = Safety Version (minor release)
[2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch)
[3] = Safety Version (hotfix)
Dependency: Refer to: r9870, r9890
Note: Example:
r9770[0] = 2, r9770[1] = 60, r9770[2] = 1, r9770[3] = 0 --> Safety version V02.60.01.00
p9763 SI password acknowledgement / SI ackn password
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2800
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
r9765 SI Motion forced check procedure remaining time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn dyn remain
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [h] - [h] - [h]
r9770[0...3] SI vers. safety fcts that run indep. in the drive (Control Unit) / SI version Drv CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-801
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated monitoring functions supported on the Control Unit and Motor Module.
The Control Unit determines this display.
Dependency: Refer to: r9871
Note: CU: Control Unit
SBC: Safe Brake Control
SI: Safety Integrated
SS1: Safe Stop 1
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on the Control Unit.
r9771 SI common functions (Control Unit) / SI common fct CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2804
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804
01 SBC supported Yes No 2804
02 SI Motion supported Yes No 2804
03 SS1 supported Yes No 2804
04 PROFIsafe supported for Extended Func-
tions
Yes No -
05 Drive-based motion monitoring functions
supported
Yes No -
06 PROFIsafe supported for Basic Functions Yes No -
07 Encoderless motion monitoring supported Yes No -
08 Safe Brake Adapter supported Yes No -
09 PROFIsafe supported BasicFunctions for
parall circuit connection
Yes No -
r9772.0...23 CO/BO: SI status (Control Unit) / SI status CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2804
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO selected on Control Unit Yes No 2810
01 STO active on Control Unit Yes No 2810
02 SS1 delay time active on the Control Unit Yes No 2810
04 SBC requested Yes No 2814
05 SS1 selected on the Control Unit (Basic
Functions)
Yes No -
06 SS1 active on the Control Unit (Basic Func-
tions)
Yes No -
09 STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active Yes No 2802
10 STOP A active Yes No 2802
15 STOP F active Yes No 2802
16 STO cse: Safety comm. mode Yes No -
17 STO cause selection via terminal (Basic
Functions)
Yes No -
18 STO cause: selection via SMM Yes No -
19 STO cause actual value missing Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-802 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: r9872
Note: Re bit 00:
When STO is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 16 ... 20.
Re bit 05:
When SS1 is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 22 and 23.
Re bit 18:
When the bit is set, STO is selected via PROFIsafe or Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Re bit 19:
With SMM encoderless no actual value sensing is possible on account of OFF2.
With SMM with encoder no actual value sensing is possible on account of parking.
SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring
Re bit 22 and 23:
These bits show via which path the SS1 has been triggered, i.e. what has started the SS1 delay time.
If the SS1 delay time is not started (e.g. because an STO is triggered at the same time), neither of the two bits is
set.
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on the drive (Control Unit + Motor Module).
Note: This status is formed from the AND operation of the relevant status of the two monitoring channels.
Description: Displays the status for Safety Integrated of the group to which this drive belongs.
These signals are an AND logic operation of the individual status signals of the drives included in this group.
20 STO cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic
Functions)
Yes No -
22 SS1 cause selection terminal (Basic Func-
tions)
Yes No -
23 SS1 cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic
Functions)
Yes No -
r9773.0...31 CO/BO: SI status (Control Unit + Motor Module) / SI status CU+MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2804
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO selected in drive Yes No 2804
01 STO active in drive Yes No 2804
02 SS1 delay time active in the drive Yes No 2804
04 SBC requested Yes No 2804
05 SS1 selected in the drive (Basic Functions) Yes No -
06 SS1 active in the drive (Basic Functions) Yes No -
31 Shutdown paths must be tested Yes No 2810
r9774.0...31 CO/BO: SI status (group STO) / SI stat group STO
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2804
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-803
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p9620, r9773
Notice: If a drive belonging to a group is deactivated via p0105, then the signals in r9774 can no longer be correctly dis-
played (Remedy: Before deactivating, remove this drive from the group).
Note: A group is formed by appropriately grouping the terminals for the function "Safe Torque Off" (STO).
The status of a group of n drives is, for drives 1 to n - 1 displayed with a delay of one monitoring clock cycle; this is
a system-related effect.
Description: The parameter is used for diagnostics.
Note: Re bit 00:
The bit indicates whether a change has been made to at least one Safety parameter which will only take effect after
a POWER ON.
Description: Displays the clock cycle time for the Safety Integrated Basic Functions on the Control Unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r9880
Description: Displays the checksum for tracking changes for Safety Integrated.
These are additional checksums that are created to track changes (fingerprint for the "safety logbook" functionality)
to safety parameters (that are relevant for checksums).
Index: [0] = SI checksum to track functional changes
[1] = SI checksum to track hardware-specific changes
Dependency: Refer to: p9601, p9729, p9799
Refer to: F01690
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO selected in group Yes No 2804
01 STO active in group Yes No 2804
02 SS1 delay time active in group Yes No -
04 SBC requested in group Yes No 2804
05 SS1 selected in group (Basic Functions) Yes No -
06 SS1 active in group (Basic Functions) Yes No -
31 Shutdown paths of the group must be tested Yes No 2804
r9776 SI Motion diagnostics / SI Mtn diag
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Safety parameter changed POWER ON
required
Yes No -
r9780 SI monitoring clock cycle (Control Unit) / SI monitor_clck CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
r9781[0...1] SI checksum to check changes (Control Unit) / SI chg chksm CU
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-804 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the time stamps for the checksums for tracking changes for Safety Integrated.
The time stamps for the checksums for tracking changes (fingerprint for the "safety logbook" functionality) made to
safety parameters are saved in parameters p9781[0] and p9781[1].
Index: [0] = SI time stamp for checksum to track functional changes
[1] = SI time stamp for checksum to track hardware-specific changes
Dependency: Refer to: p9601, p9729, p9799
Refer to: F01690
Description: Displays the number of the data that are being presently compared crosswise on the Control Unit.
Example:
r9794[0] = 1 (monitoring clock cycle)
r9794[1] = 2 (enable safety functions)
r9794[2] = 3 (SGE changeover, tolerance time)
r9794[3] = 4 (transition time, STOP F to STOP A)
...
The content of the list of crosswise-compared data is dependent upon the particular application.
Dependency: Refer to: r9894
Note: A complete list of numbers for crosswise-compared data items appears in fault F01611.
Description: Displays the number of the cross-checked data which has caused STOP F on the Control Unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r9895
Refer to: F01611
Note: A complete list of numbers for crosswise-compared data items appears in fault F01611.
r9782[0...1] SI time stamps to check changes (Control Unit) / SI chg t CU
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [h] - [h] - [h]
r9794[0...19] SI crosswise comparison list (Control Unit) / SI DCC_list CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9795 SI diagnostics STOP F (Control Unit) / SI diag STOP F CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-805
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the checksum over the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the Control Unit (actual checksum).
Dependency: Refer to: p9799, r9898
Description: Sets the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the Control Unit (reference checksum).
Dependency: Refer to: r9798, p9899
Description: Sets the enable signals for safety functions on the Motor Module that are integrated in the drive.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Motor Module or Power
Module being used:
- p9801 = 0: Safety functions integrated in the drive disabled.
- p9801 = 1: STO/SS1 enabled via terminals. Permissible if r9871.0 = 1.
- p9801 = 4: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F)
(SINAMICS S120) or via an integrated F-DI/F-DO (SINAMICS S110). Permissible if r9871.5 = 1.
- p9801 = 5: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) and
STO/SS1 via terminals (SINAMICS S120 only). Permissible if r9871.5 = 1.
- p9801 = 8: STO/SS1 enabled via PROFIsafe. Permissible if r9871.6 = 1.
- p9801 = 9: STO/SS1 enabled via PROFIsafe and STO/SS1 via terminals. Permissible if r9871.6 = 1.
- p9801 = 12: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via PROFIsafe. Permissible if r9871.4 = 1.
- p9801 = 13: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via PROFIsafe and STO/SS1 via termi-
nals. Permissible if r9871.4 = 1.
Dependency: Refer to: p9601, r9871
r9798 SI actual checksum SI parameters (Control Unit) / SI act_checksum CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2800
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p9799 SI reference checksum SI parameters (Control Unit) / SI set_checksum CU
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2800
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p9801 SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Motor Module) / SI enable fct MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO (SH) via terminals (Motor Module)
enable
Enable Inhibit 2810
02 Motion monitoring functions integr. in the
drive (Motor Module)
Enable Inhibit -
03 PROFIsafe (Motor Module) enable Enable Inhibit -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-806 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: MM: Motor Module.
SI: Safety Integrated.
SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring.
STO: Safe Torque Off/SH: Safe standstill.
SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN 60204).
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input.
F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output.
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Description: Sets the enable signal for the "Safe Brake Control" function (SBC) on the Motor Module.
0: Inhibit SBC
1: Enable SBC
Dependency: Refer to: p9602
Note: The "Safe Brake Control" function is not activated until at least one safety monitoring function has been enabled
(i.e. p9501 not equal to 0 and/or p9801 not equal to 0).
It does not make sense to parameterize "no motor holding brake available" and enable "Safe Brake Control" (p1215
= 0, p9602 = p9802 = 1) if there is no motor holding brake.
The parameterization "motor holding brake the same as sequence control, connection via BICO" and "Safe Brake
Control" enabled (p1215 = 3, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1) is not practical.
It is not permissible to parameterize "motor holding brake without feedback signals" and also enable "safe brake
control" (p1278 = 1, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1).
MM: Motor Module
SBC: Safe Brake Control
SI: Safety Integrated
Description: Sets the PROFIsafe address of the Motor Module.
p9802 SI enable Safe Brake Control (Motor Module) / SI enable SBC MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2814
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
p9810 SI PROFIsafe address (Motor Module) / SI PROFIsafe MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFE hex 0000 hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-807
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: An entry is added, specifying whether and/or via which digital CU input the SBA feedback signal (SBA_DIAG) is to
be read in; the parameter can be interconnected as a BICO drain.
0 : No SBC with SBA (default)
Bico code: To be parameterized by the user
SBA and no DQ CIM: p0722.x CU signal source for DIx where x = { 0,1,2...7 }
SBA with DQ CIM: p9872.3 Signal source is permanently interconnected to bit 3
Dependency: Refer to: p9601
Note: No difference is tolerated for a data cross-check between p9621 and p9821.
Description: Sets the wait times for activating and deactivating the relay.
The relay-specific minimum wait times for evaluating the feedback signal contacts have to be set.
Index: [0] = Relay wait time activation
[1] = Relay wait time deactivation
Dependency: Refer to: p9850
Description: Sets the tolerance time to change over the safety-related inputs (SGE) on the Motor Module.
An SGE changeover is not effective simultaneously due to the different runtimes in the two monitoring channels.
After an SGE changeover, dynamic data is not subject to a data cross-check during this tolerance time.
Dependency: Refer to: p9650
Note: For a data cross-check between p9650 and p9850, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated.
The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
SGE: Safety-related input (e.g. STO terminals)
p9821 BI: SI signal source for SBA (Motor Module) / SI s_src SBA MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2810
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p9822[0...1] SI SBA relay wait times (Motor Module) / SI SBA t_wait MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] [0] 100000.00 [µs]
[1] 65000.00 [µs]
p9850 SI SGE changeover tolerance time (Motor Module) / SI SGE_chg tol MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2810
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 2000000.00 [µs] 500000.00 [µs]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-808 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the debounce time for the EP terminal of the Motor Module.
The debounce time is rounded to whole milliseconds. The debounce time indicates the maximum duration of a fault
pulse on the F-DIs, so that there are no negative effects on the SGEs.
Example:
Debounce time = 1 ms: Fault pulses of 1 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 2 ms are processed.
Debounce time = 3 ms: Fault pulses of 3 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 4 ms are processed.
Note: Example:
Debounce time = 1 ms: Fault pulses of 1 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 2 ms are processed.
Debounce time = 3 ms: Fault pulses of 3 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 4 ms are processed.
Description: Sets the delay time of the pulse suppression for the function "Safe Stop 1" (SS1) on the Motor Module to brake
along the OFF3 down ramp (p1135).
Dependency: Refer to: p1135, p9652
Note: For a data cross-check between p9652 and p9852, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated.
The parameterized time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204)
Description: Sets the transition period from STOP F to STOP A on the Motor Module.
Dependency: Refer to: p9658, r9895
Refer to: F30611
Note: For a data cross-check between p9658 and p9858, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated.
The parameterized time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
STOP F: Defect in a monitoring channel (error in the data cross-check)
STOP A: Pulse suppression via the safety shutdown path
p9851 SI STO/SBC/SS1 debounce time (Motor Module) / SI STO t_debou MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
p9852 SI Safe Stop 1 delay time (Motor Module) / SI Stop 1 t_del MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 300000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
p9858 SI transition time STOP F to STOP A (Control Unit) / SI STOP F->A MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 30000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-809
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version for the safety functions integrated in the drive on the Motor Module.
Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release)
[1] = Safety Version (minor release)
[2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch)
[3] = Safety Version (hotfix)
Dependency: Refer to: r9770, r9890
Note: Example:
r9870[0] = 2, r9870[1] = 60, r9870[2] = 1, r9870[3] = 0 --> Safety version V02.60.01.00
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated monitoring functions supported on the Control Unit and Motor Module.
The Motor Module determines this display.
Dependency: Refer to: r9771
Note: MM: Motor Module
SBC: Safe Brake Control
SI: Safety Integrated
SS1: Safe Stop 1
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
r9870[0...3] SI version safety functions integrated in drive (Motor Module) / SI version MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9871 SI common functions (Motor Module / SI general fct MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2804
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804
01 SBC supported Yes No 2804
02 SI Motion supported Yes No 2804
03 SS1 supported Yes No 2804
04 PROFIsafe supported for Extended Func-
tions
Yes No -
05 Drive-based motion monitoring functions
supported
Yes No -
06 PROFIsafe supported for Basic Functions Yes No -
07 Encoderless motion monitoring supported Yes No -
08 Safe Brake Adapter supported Yes No -
09 PROFIsafe supported BasicFunctions for
parall circuit connection
Yes No -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-810 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on the Motor Module.
Dependency: Refer to: r9772
Notice: If communication between the Control Unit and the Motor Module is interrupted (e.g. by switching off the Motor
Module), this display parameter is no longer updated. The last transferred status of the Motor Module is displayed.
Note: Re bit 00:
When STO is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 16 ... 18 and in bit 20.
Re bit 05:
When SS1 is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 22 and 23.
Re bit 18:
When the bit is set, STO is selected via PROFIsafe or Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring
Re bit 22 and 23:
These bits show via which path the SS1 has been triggered, i.e. what has started the SS1 delay time.
If the SS1 delay time is not started (e.g. because an STO is triggered at the same time), neither of the two bits is
set.
Description: Displays the clock cycle time for the Safety Integrated Basic Functions on the Motor Module.
Dependency: Refer to: r9780
r9872.0...23 CO/BO: SI status list (Motor Module) / SI status MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2804
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 STO on Motor Module selected Yes No 2810
01 STO on Motor Module active Yes No 2810
02 SS1 delay time on Motor Module active Yes No 2810
03 Safe Brake Adapter feedback signal High Low -
04 SBC requested Yes No 2814
05 SS1 selected on the Motor Module (Basic
Functions)
Yes No -
06 SS1 active on the Motor Module (Basic
Functions)
Yes No -
09 STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active Yes No 2802
10 STOP A active Yes No 2802
15 STOP F active Yes No 2802
16 STO cse: Safety comm. mode Yes No -
17 STO cause selection via terminal (Basic
Functions)
Yes No -
18 STO cause: selection via SMM Yes No -
20 STO cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic
Functions)
Yes No -
22 SS1 cause selection terminal (Basic Func-
tions)
Yes No -
23 SS1 cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic
Functions)
Yes No -
r9880 SI monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module) / SI monitor_clck MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-811
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the Node Identifier of the Sensor Module that the second channel uses for the motion monitoring func-
tions.
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version on the Sensor Module.
Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release)
[1] = Safety Version (minor release)
[2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch)
Dependency: Refer to: r9770, r9870
Note: Example:
r9890[0] = 2, r9890[1] = 3, r9890[2] = 1 --> Safety-Version V02.03.01
Description: Displays the number of the data that are being presently compared crosswise on the Motor Module.
Example:
r9894[0] = 1 (monitoring clock cycle)
r9894[1] = 2 (enable safety functions)
r9894[2] = 3 (SGE changeover, tolerance time)
r9894[3] = 4 (transition time, STOP F to STOP A)
...
The content of the list of crosswise-compared data is dependent upon the particular application.
Dependency: Refer to: r9794
Note: The complete list of numbers for data cross-check is listed in Fault F30611.
r9881[0...11] SI Motion Sensor Module Node Identifier second channel / SI Mtn SM Ident
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9890[0...2] SI version (Sensor Module) / SI version SM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9894[0...19] SI crosswise comparison list (Motor Module) / SI DCC_list MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-812 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the number of the cross-checked data which has caused STOP F on the Motor Module.
Dependency: Refer to: r9795
Refer to: F30611
Note: The complete list of numbers for data cross-check is listed in Fault F30611.
Description: Displays the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the Motor Module (actual checksum).
Dependency: Refer to: r9798, p9899
Description: Sets the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the Motor Module (reference checksum).
Dependency: Refer to: p9799, r9898
Description: Displays the number of indices of the actual topology.
Dependency: Refer to: r9901
Note: Only for internal Siemens use.
The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software.
r9895 SI diagnostics STOP F (Motor Module) / SI diag STOP F MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9898 SI actual checksum SI parameters (Motor Module) / SI act_checksum MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2800
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p9899 SI reference checksum SI parameters (Motor Module) / SI set_checksum MM
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2800
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
r9900 Actual topology number of indices / Act topo indices
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-813
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the actual topology of the drive unit.
The actual topology is sub-divided into several sections. Each of the following data is saved under an index.
General data on the topology:
- version
- attribute to compare the actual topology and target topology
- number of components
Data on a component:
- type component of the node ID of the component
- number of DRIVE-CLiQ sockets in the Node Identifier
- manufacturer and version of the Node Identifier
- serial number of the Node Identifier (4 indices)
- index of the component
- order number (8 indices)
- attribute to compare the actual topology and target topology of the component
- communications address
- number of port types
- port type
- number of ports of the port type
- communications address of the associated/linked component
- number of the associated/linked port
- communications address of the associated/linked component
- number of the associated/linked port
- etc.
Data on the next component:
- etc.
Dependency: Refer to: r9900
Note: Only for internal Siemens use.
The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software.
Description: Sets the number of target topology indices.
Dependency: Refer to: p9903
Note: Only for internal Siemens use.
The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software.
r9901[0...n] Actual topology / Act topo
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: r9900 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p9902 Target topology number of indices / TargetTopo indices
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
1 65535 1
Parameter
List of parameters
1-814 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the target topology of the drive unit.
The target topology is sub-divided into several sections. Each of the following data is saved under an index.
General data on the topology:
- version
- attribute to compare the actual topology and target topology
- number of components
Data on a component:
- type component of the Node Identifier of the component
- number of DRIVE-CLiQ sockets in the Node Identifier
- manufacturer and version of the Node Identifier
- serial number of the Node Identifier (4 indices)
- index of the component
- order number (8 indices)
- attribute to compare the actual topology and target topology of the component
- component number
- number of port types
- port type
- number of ports of the port type
- component number of the associated/linked component
- number of the associated/linked port
- component number of the associated/linked component
- number of the associated/linked port
- etc.
Data on the next component:
- etc.
Dependency: Refer to: p9902
Note: The target topology can only be modified using the commissioning software.
Only for internal Siemens use.
The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software.
Changes do not become effective until they have been accepted with p9428 = 1, or on change of status from p0009
= 101 to 0 or 111.
p9903[0...n] Target topology / Target topology
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: p9902 Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF hex 0000 hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-815
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: If, when comparing the actual topology and target topology, only error has occurred, that can be acknowledged,
then using this parameter, a new comparison can be started - acknowledging the error in the target topology.
Differences that can be acknowledged:
- topology comparison, component shifted
- topology comparison, serial number of a component has been detected to be different (byte 3 = 1)
- topology comparison shows one component that is connected differently
The following parameter values are available:
p9904 = 1 --> the procedure is started.
p9904 = 0 after starting --> the procedure has been successfully completed.
p9904 = 1 after starting --> the procedure has not been successfully completed.
The possible causes for an unsuccessful procedure are located in bytes 4, 3, 2.
Byte 2:
Number of structural differences.
Byte 3:
Number of differences that can be acknowledged (p9904).
Byte 4:
Number of differences. These differences can be resolved as follows:
- sets the topology comparison (p9906 or p9907/p9908).
- change over the actual topology.
The appropriate action should be selected corresponding to the message that is displayed/output.
Note: In order to permanently accept the acknowledgement of the fault that can be resolved, then it must be saved in a
non-volatile fashion (p0977).
Description: With p9905 = 1, the serial numbers and the hardware versions of all of the components are transferred from the
actual topology into the target topology and a new comparison is started..
For this device specialization, the components of the target topology may only differ from those of the actual topol-
ogy by the serial numbers.
With p9905 = 2, the serial numbers, the hardware versions and the order numbers of all of the components are
transferred from the actual topology into the target topology and a new comparison is started..
For this device specialization, the components of the target topology may only differ from those of the actual topol-
ogy by the serial numbers and order numbers.
Note: p9905 is automatically set to 0 at the end of the operation.
In order to permanently accept the data, it is necessary to save in a non-volatile fashion (p0977).
p9904 Topology comparison, acknowledge differences / Topo_compare ackn
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p9905 Device specialization / Specialization
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-816 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the type of comparison between the actual topology and target topology.
The comparison is started by setting the required value.
Value: 0: High: Compares the complete electronic rating plate
1: Average: Compares the component type and the Order number
2: Low: Compares the component type
3: Minimum: Compares the component class
99: Topology has different comparison stages
Note: The electronic rating plate comprises the following data:
- component type (e.g. "SMC20")
- Order No. (e.g. "6SL3055-0AA0-5BA0")
- manufacturer (e.g. SIEMENS)
- hardware version (e.g. "A")
- Serial No. (e.g. "T-P30050495")
When comparing the topology, the following data is compared in the target and actual topologies:
p9906 = 0: Component type, Order No., Hardware version, Manufacturer, Serial No.
p9906 = 1: Component type, Order No.
p9906 = 2: Component type
p9906 = 3: Component class (e.g. Sensor Module or Motor Module)
Description: Enters the number of the component where the setting of how the actual topology should be compared to the target
topology should be changed.
Dependency: Refer to: p9908
Description: Sets the type of comparison of a component in the target topology with the actual topology.
The comparison is started by setting the required value.
Value: 0: High: Compares the complete electronic rating plate
1: Average: Compares the component type and the Order number
2: Low: Compares the component type
3: Minimum: Compares the component class
99: Topology has different comparison stages
p9906 Topology comparison, comparison stage of all components / Topo_cmpr tot comp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 0
p9907 Topology comparison, comparison stage of the component number /
Topo_cmpr comp_no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0
p9908 Topology comparison, comparison stage of a component / Topo_cmpr 1 comp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-817
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Dependency: Refer to: p9907
Note: The electronic rating plate comprises the following data:
- component type (e.g. "SMC20")
- Order No. (e.g. "6SL3055-0AA0-5BA0")
- manufacturer (e.g. SIEMENS)
- hardware version (e.g. "A")
- Serial No. (e.g. "T-P30050495")
When comparing the topology, the following data is compared in the target and actual topologies:
p9908 = 0: Component type, Order No., Hardware version, Manufacturer, Serial No.
p9908 = 1: Component type, Order No.
p9908 = 2: Component type
p9908 = 3: Component class (e.g. Sensor Module or Motor Module)
Description: For p9909 = 1, the serial number and the hardware version of the new replaced component is automatically trans-
ferred from the actual topology into the target topology and then saved in a non-volatile fashion.
For the components that have been replaced, the electronic rating plate must match as far as the following data is
concerned:
- component type (e.g. "SMC20")
- Order No. (e.g. "6SL3055-0AA0-5BA0")
For p9909 = 0, serial numbers and hardware versions are not automatically transferred. In this case, the transfer
must be made using p9904.
Dependency: Refer to: p9904, p9905
Note: The modified target topology is automatically saved in a non-volatile fashion when the drive object runs-up (e.g.
after a POWER ON).
Special case for Control Unit and option slot modules:
When replacing these components, independent of p9909, the serial number and hardware version are automati-
cally transferred and saved in a non-volatile fashion.
Description: Transfer additional inserted DRIVE-CLiQ components into the target topology and add the appropriate drive objects
to the project.
Value: 0: No selection
1: Drive object type SERVO
2: Drive object type VECTOR
3: SINAMICS GM (DFEMV & VECTORMV)
4: SINAMICS SM (AFEMV & VECTORMV)
5: SINAMICS GL (VECTORGL)
6: SINAMICS SL (VECTORSL)
p9909 Topology comparison, component replacement / Topo_cmpr replace
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1
p9910 Transfer additional components into the target topology / Transfer comp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-818 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: New drive objects can be created using this parameter.
Index 0:
The values 2 ... 62 are permissible.
Index 1:
Number of the drive object type (e.g. 11 for type SERVO).
Index 2:
Function modules defined for the drive object.
Index 3:
= 0: Ready.
= 1: Reset (only indices 0 ... 3).
= 2: Reset all (indices 0 ... 3 and flagged entries).
= 3: Check and flag for insertion.
Index: [0] = Drive object number
[1] = Drive object type
[2] = Drive object function module
[3] = Reset or check and flag for insertion
Note: Only for internal Siemens use.
The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software.
Description: Drive objects can be deleted using this parameter.
Index 0:
The values 2 ... 62 are permissible.
Index 1:
= 0: Ready.
= 1: Reset (only indices 0 and 1)
= 2: Reset all (indices 0 and 1 and flagged entries).
= 3: Check and flag for deletion.
= 30: Check and flag for deletion. Keep target topology.
Index: [0] = Drive object number
[1] = Reset or check and flag for deletion
Note: Only for internal Siemens use.
The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software.
p9911[0...3] Insert drive object / Drv_obj insert
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
p9912[0...1] Delete drive object / Drv_obj delete
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 62 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-819
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Existing drive objects can be assigned new numbers using these parameters.
Index 0:
The values 2 ... 62 are permissible.
Index 1:
The values 2 ... 62 are permissible.
Index 2:
= 0: Ready.
= 1: Reset (only indices 0 ... 2).
= 2: Reset all (indices 0 ... 2 and flagged entries).
= 3: Check and flag for modification.
Index: [0] = Drive object number old
[1] = Drive object number new
[2] = Reset or check and flag for modification
Note: Only for internal Siemens use.
The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software.
Description: You can change the number of topology components using this parameter.
Index 0:
The values 2 ... 199 are permissible.
Index 1:
The values 2 ... 199 are permissible.
Index 2:
= 0: Ready.
= 1: Reset (only indices 0 ... 2).
= 2: Reset all (indices 0 ... 2 and flagged entries).
= 3: Check and flag for modification.
Index: [0] = Component number old
[1] = Component number new
[2] = Reset or check and flag for modification
Note: Only for internal Siemens use.
The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software.
p9913[0...2] Change drive object number / Change drv_obj_no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 62 0
p9914[0...2] Change component number / Change comp_no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1 Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-820 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes.
Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes.
Description: Excessive components that have not been assigned can be removed from the component target topology using this
parameter.
Index 0:
The values 2 ... 199 are permissible.
Index 1:
= 0: Ready.
= 1: Reset (only indices 0 and 1)
= 2: Reset all (indices 0 and 1 and flagged entries).
= 3: Check and flag for deletion.
Index: [0] = Component number
[1] = Reset or check and flag for deletion
Note: Only for internal Siemens use.
The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software.
p9915 DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master / DLQ fault master
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 0007 07FF hex 0007 02FF hex
p9916 DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave / DLQ fault slave
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 0007 07FF hex 0007 02FF hex
p9917[0...1] Delete component / Delete comp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(30) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-821
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Enters the license key for this drive unit.
Example of the license key:
EACZ-QBCA = 69 65 67 90 45 81 66 67 65 dec (ASCII characters)
Index 0 = license key character 1 (e.g. 69 dec)
Index 1 = license key character 2 (e.g. 65 dec)
...
Index 19 = license key character 20 (e.g. 0 dec)
With the STARTER commissioning software, ASCII characters are not entered coded, i.e. the characters of the
license key can be entered as printed in the Certificate of License. In this case, STARTER codes the characters.
Dependency: Refer to: r7843, p9921
Refer to: A13000, A13001, F13010
Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual:
Note: Onlyy the ASCII characters, contained in a license key can be entered.
When changing p9920[x] to the value 0, all of the following indices are also set to 0.
After entering the license key, the license key must be activated (p9921).
If the licensing is not adequate, then the following alarm is displayed together with LED:
- A13000 --> licensing not sufficient
- LED READY --> flashes green/red with 0.5 Hz
Description: Activates the entered license key.
The following is executed when activating the license key.
- the checksum of the entered license key is checked.
- the entered license key is saved in a non-volatile fashion on the memory card.
- re-enter the license key.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Activate start license key
Dependency: Refer to: p9920
Refer to: A13000, A13001, F13010
Note: Before activation, the license key entered using parameter p9920 is checked. If this check identifies an error, acti-
vation is rejected. In this case, writing a 1 to p9921 is rejected.
When the license key has been activated, p9921 is automatically set to 0.
p9920[0...99] Licensing, enter license key / Enter license key
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p9921 Licensing, activate license key / Act license key
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-822 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the directory and name of the file whose status as shipped from the factory was identified as impermissi-
ble.
Dependency: Refer to: r9926
Refer to: A01016
Note: The directory and name of the file is displayed in the ASCII code.
Description: Displays the status when the firmware is checked when the system is booted.
0: Firmware not yet checked.
1: Check running.
2: Check successfully completed.
3: Check indicates an error.
Dependency: Refer to: r9925
Refer to: A01016
Description: Only for service purposes.
Index: [0] = System logbook stage (0: Not active)
[1] = COM2/COM1 (0: COM2, 1: COM1)
[2] = Activate file write (0: Not active)
[3] = Display time stamp (0: Not displayed)
[4] = Reserved
[5] = Reserved
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = System logbook file size (stages, each 10 kB)
Notice: Before powering down the Control Unit, ensure that the system logbook is switched out (p9930[0] = 0).
r9925[0...99] Firmware file incorrect / FW file incorr
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9926 Firmware check status / FW check status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p9930[0...8] System logbook activation / SYSLOG activation
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-823
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Only for service purposes.
Description: Only for service purposes.
Description: After power-on, binector output r9935.0 is set with the start of the first sampling time and is again reset after approx.
100 ms.
Description: Writing the parameter to the value 1 deletes (sets to zero) the serial numbers of all components in the target topol-
ogy.
Through activation and deactivation this enables the actual topology components to be newly assigned to the target
topology components.
Note: p9941 is automatically set to 0 at the end of the operation.
A warm restart is triggered automatically after p0009 = 0.
p9931[0...99] System logbook module selection / SYSLOG mod select.
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p9932 Save system logbook EEPROM / SYSLOG EEPROM save
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
r9935.0 BO: POWER ON delay signal / POWER ON t_delay
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 POWER ON delay signal High Low -
p9941 Target topology feature delete all components / Feature delete
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 0
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-824 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the measured system utilization. The higher the value displayed, the higher the system utilization.
Index: [0] = Computing time utilization (min)
[1] = Computing time utilization (averaged)
[2] = Computing time utilization (max)
[3] = Largest total utilization (min)
[4] = Largest total utilization (averaged)
[5] = Largest total utilization (max)
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
Dependency: Refer to: r9976, r9979, r9980, r9981
Refer to: F01054, F01205
Note: Re index 3 ... 5: The total utilizations are determined using all sampling times used. The largest total utilizations are
mapped here. The sampling time with the largest total utilization is displayed in r9979. Total utilization: Computing
time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts).
Description: Displays the system utilization. If the utilization is greater than 100%, fault F01054 is output.
Index: [0] = Reserved
[1] = Computing time utilization
[2] = Reserved
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Reserved
[5] = Largest total utilization
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
Dependency: Refer to: r9979, r9980
Refer to: F01054, F01205
Note: Re index 1:
The value shows the total computing time load of the system.
Re index 5:
The total utilization is determined using all sampling times used. The largest total utilization is mapped here. The
sampling time with the largest total utilization is displayed in r9979.
Total utilization:
Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts).
r9975[0...7] System utilization measured / Sys util meas
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r9976[0...7] System utilization / Sys util
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-825
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the sampling time with the largest total utilization.
Dependency: Refer to: r7901, r9976
Refer to: F01054
Note: The largest total utilization is displayed in r9976[5].
Total utilization:
Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts).
Description: Displays the calculated utilizations for the active sampling times based on the existing target topology.
Index: [0] = Net utilization 0
[1] = Total utilization 0
[2] = Net utilization 1
[3] = Total utilization 1
[4] = Net utilization 2
[5] = Total utilization 2
[6] = Net utilization 3
[7] = Total utilization 3
[8] = Net utilization 4
[9] = Total utilization 4
[10] = Net utilization 5
[11] = Total utilization 5
[12] = Net utilization 6
[13] = Total utilization 6
[14] = Net utilization 7
[15] = Total utilization 7
[16] = Net utilization 8
[17] = Total utilization 8
[18] = Net utilization 9
[19] = Total utilization 9
[20] = Net utilization 10
[21] = Total utilization 10
[22] = Net utilization 11
[23] = Total utilization 11
[24] = Net utilization 12
[25] = Total utilization 12
[26] = Net utilization 13
[27] = Total utilization 13
[28] = Net utilization 14
[29] = Total utilization 14
[30] = Net utilization 15
[31] = Total utilization 15
[32] = Net utilization 16
[33] = Total utilization 16
r9979 Sampling time with largest total utilization / t_sampl lg total
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
r9980[0...63] Sampling times utilization calculated / t_sampl util calc
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Parameter
List of parameters
1-826 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
[34] = Net utilization 17
[35] = Total utilization 17
[36] = Net utilization 18
[37] = Total utilization 18
[38] = Net utilization 19
[39] = Total utilization 19
[40] = Net utilization 20
[41] = Total utilization 20
[42] = Net utilization 21
[43] = Total utilization 21
[44] = Net utilization 22
[45] = Total utilization 22
[46] = Net utilization 23
[47] = Total utilization 23
[48] = Net utilization 24
[49] = Total utilization 24
[50] = Net utilization 25
[51] = Total utilization 25
[52] = Net utilization 26
[53] = Total utilization 26
[54] = Net utilization 27
[55] = Total utilization 27
[56] = Net utilization 28
[57] = Total utilization 28
[58] = Net utilization 29
[59] = Total utilization 29
[60] = Net utilization 30
[61] = Total utilization 30
[62] = Net utilization 31
[63] = Total utilization 31
Dependency: Refer to: r7901, r9976, r9979
Refer to: F01054
Note: The corresponding sampling times can be read out in parameter r7901.
Net utilization:
Computing time load that is only called by the sampling time involved.
Total utilization:
Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts).
Description: Displays the utilizations measured for the active sampling times.
Index: [0] = Net utilization 0
[1] = Total utilization 0
[2] = Net utilization 1
[3] = Total utilization 1
[4] = Net utilization 2
[5] = Total utilization 2
[6] = Net utilization 3
[7] = Total utilization 3
[8] = Net utilization 4
[9] = Total utilization 4
[10] = Net utilization 5
[11] = Total utilization 5
[12] = Net utilization 6
[13] = Total utilization 6
r9981[0...63] Sampling times utilization measured / t_sampl util meas
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-827
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
[14] = Net utilization 7
[15] = Total utilization 7
[16] = Net utilization 8
[17] = Total utilization 8
[18] = Net utilization 9
[19] = Total utilization 9
[20] = Net utilization 10
[21] = Total utilization 10
[22] = Net utilization 11
[23] = Total utilization 11
[24] = Net utilization 12
[25] = Total utilization 12
[26] = Net utilization 13
[27] = Total utilization 13
[28] = Net utilization 14
[29] = Total utilization 14
[30] = Net utilization 15
[31] = Total utilization 15
[32] = Net utilization 16
[33] = Total utilization 16
[34] = Net utilization 17
[35] = Total utilization 17
[36] = Net utilization 18
[37] = Total utilization 18
[38] = Net utilization 19
[39] = Total utilization 19
[40] = Net utilization 20
[41] = Total utilization 20
[42] = Net utilization 21
[43] = Total utilization 21
[44] = Net utilization 22
[45] = Total utilization 22
[46] = Net utilization 23
[47] = Total utilization 23
[48] = Net utilization 24
[49] = Total utilization 24
[50] = Net utilization 25
[51] = Total utilization 25
[52] = Net utilization 26
[53] = Total utilization 26
[54] = Net utilization 27
[55] = Total utilization 27
[56] = Net utilization 28
[57] = Total utilization 28
[58] = Net utilization 29
[59] = Total utilization 29
[60] = Net utilization 30
[61] = Total utilization 30
[62] = Net utilization 31
[63] = Total utilization 31
Dependency: Refer to: r7901, r9975, r9980
Refer to: F01054
Note: The corresponding sampling times can be read out in parameter r7901.
Net utilization:
Computing time load that is only called by the sampling time involved.
Total utilization:
Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts).
Parameter
List of parameters
1-828 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the calculated data memory utilization rates based on the existing target topology.
Index: [0] = Fast Memory 1
[1] = Fast Memory 2
[2] = Fast Memory 3
[3] = Fast Memory 4
[4] = Heap
Dependency: Refer to: F01068
Description: Displays the measured memory utilization rates based on the existing target topology.
Index: [0] = Fast Memory 1
[1] = Fast Memory 2
[2] = Fast Memory 3
[3] = Fast Memory 4
[4] = Heap
Dependency: Refer to: F01068
Description: Displays the calculated DRIVE-CLiQ system load based on the existing target topology.
The values are not made available until the RUNUP READY (800) state is adopted (see p3988).
Indices 0..7 correspond to DRIVE-CLiQ ports X100..X107.
Dependency: Refer to: F01340
r9982[0...4] Memory utilization: Data memory /
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r9983[0...4] Memory utilization: Data memory measurement (actual load) /
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r9986[0...7] DRIVE-CLiQ system load / DQ SysLoad
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-829
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the calculated DRIVE-CLiQ bandwidth load based on the existing target topology.
The values are not made available until the RUNUP READY (800) state is adopted (see p3988).
Indices 0..7 correspond to DRIVE-CLiQ ports X100..X107.
Dependency: Refer to: F01340
Description: Displays the calculated DRIVE-CLiQ DPRAM load based on the existing target topology.
The values are not made available until the RUNUP READY (800) state is adopted (see p3988).
Indices 0..7 correspond to DRIVE-CLiQ ports X100..X107.
Dependency: Refer to: F01340
Description: The meaning of the parameter differs for reading and writing:
Read:
Returns the number of memory areas monitored.
Write:
Memory usage of a drive object: Enter the drive object ID.
Memory usage of the complete system: Enter value 65535.
Index: [0] = Fast Memory 1
[1] = Fast Memory 2
[2] = Fast Memory 3
[3] = Fast Memory 4
[4] = Heap
r9987[0...7] DRIVE-CLiQ bandwidth load / DQ BandWidthLoad
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
r9988[0...7] DRIVE-CLiQ DPRAM load / DQ DPRLoad
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
p9990 DO selection for memory usage actual value determination /
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
r9991[0...4] Memory usage actual values per DO /
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameter
List of parameters
1-830 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = Fast Memory 1
[1] = Fast Memory 2
[2] = Fast Memory 3
[3] = Fast Memory 4
[4] = Heap
Description: Diagnostics parameter to display additional information for internal software errors.
Note: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Description: Sets the sampling time for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Description: Sets the wait time for testing the digital outputs 0 ... 3 (DO 0 ... DO 3).
Within this time, for a forced checking procedure of the digital outputs, the signal must have been detected via the
corresponding digital input DI 20 ... DI 23.
Dependency: Refer to: p10003, p10007, p10041, p10046
Note: The wait time must be set to a value greater than parameter p10017.
The duration of the test stop is adapted to the debounce time set in p10017 automatically if the wait time in p10001
should be less than the debounce time.
r9992[0...4] Memory usage setpoints per DO /
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r9999[0...99] Software error internal supplementary diagnostics / SW_err int diag
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p10000 SI sampling time / SI t_sample
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1.00 [ms] 25.00 [ms] 12.00 [ms]
p10001 SI delay time for test stop at DO 0 ... DO 3 / SI t_delay DO
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
2.00 [ms] 2000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
List of parameters
Parameter
1-831
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the discrepancy for the digital inputs.
The signal states at the two associated digital inputs (F-DI) must assume the same state within this monitoring time.
Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
Description: Sets the time to carry out the forced checking procedure (test stop).
Within the parameterized time, the digital inputs/outputs must must have been subject to a forced checking proce-
dure at least once. The forced checking procedure is started with BI: p10007 = 0/1 signal.
Dependency: Refer to: p10001, p10007, p10046
Description: Displays the actual checksum of the checksum-checked parameters for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Description: Displays the reference checksum of the checksum-checked parameters for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
p10002 SI discrepancy monitoring time / SI discrep t_monit
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2850, 2851
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1.00 [ms] 2000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
p10003 SI forced checking procedure timer / SI FrcdCkProcTimer
TM54F_MA Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2848
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [h] 8760.00 [h] 8.00 [h]
r10004[0...1] SI actual checksum TM54F parameters / SI act CRC TM54F
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2847
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
p10005[0...1] SI reference checksum TM54F parameters / SI ref CRC TM54F
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2847
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Parameter
List of parameters
1-832 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Select a safety-relevant digital input for the signal "acknowledge internal event" (internal fault).
The signal is transferred to the corresponding control signal of all drives. The falling edge at this input resets the
status "internal event" in the drives.
Value: 0: Statically active
1: F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
2: F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
3: F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
4: F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
5: F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
6: F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
7: F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
8: F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
9: F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
10: F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
255: Statically inact
Description: Sets the signal source to trigger the test stop (e.g. digital input of the Control Unit or one of the other Terminal Mod-
ules).
The test stop is triggered on a 0/1 signal edge.
The TM54F must not be in commissioning mode at this point (p0010 = 0).
Dependency: Refer to: p10001, p10003, p10041, p10046
Notice: Digital inputs of the TM54F must not be used to trigger the test stop.
Description: Sets the operating mode for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Value: 0: Function interface
1: Control interface
Note: Parameter being prepared. For this firmware version, the function interface is not supported.
p10006 SI acknowledgement internal event input terminal / SI ackn int event
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
p10007 BI: SI forced checking procedure F-DO 0 ... 3 signal source / SI frc_chF-DO s_sc
TM54F_MA Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2848
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
p10008 SI operating mode TM54F / SI op_mode TM54F
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1
List of parameters
Parameter
1-833
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the drive object number for the drives that are available.
Index: [0] = Drive 1
[1] = Drive 2
[2] = Drive 3
[3] = Drive 4
[4] = Drive 5
[5] = Drive 6
Notice: If, for a drive, Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) is activated (p9601 = 5), its drive object number must be set in an
index.
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Description: Sets the drive group for the drives that are available.
A drive group is a combination of several drives with the same types of behavior.
Index: [0] = Drive 1
[1] = Drive 2
[2] = Drive 3
[3] = Drive 4
[4] = Drive 5
[5] = Drive 6
Description: Sets the current Node Identifier (word 1, bit 0 ... 31) for the Motor Modules.
Index: [0] = Drive 1
[1] = Drive 2
[2] = Drive 3
[3] = Drive 4
[4] = Drive 5
[5] = Drive 6
Dependency: Refer to: p10013, p10014
p10010[0...5] SI drive object assignment / SI drv_obj assign
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2847, 2848
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 62 0
p10011[0...5] SI drive group assignment / SI drv_gr assign
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2848
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1 4 1
p10012[0...5] SI Motor Module Node Identifier Word 1 / SI MM Node ID 1
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Parameter
List of parameters
1-834 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: The Node Identifier (96 bit) is represented in the following 3 parameters.
p10012[0] word 1 (bit 0 ... 31) for Motor Module 1
...
p10012[5] word 1 (bit 0 ... 31) for Motor Module 6
p10013[0] word 2 (bit 32 ... 63) for Motor Module 1
...
p10013[5] word 2 (bit 32 ... 63) for Motor Module 6
p10014[0] word 3 (bit 64 ... 95) for Motor Module 1
...
p10014[5] word 3 (bit 64 ... 95) for Motor Module 6
Description: Sets the current Node Identifier (word 2, bit 32 ... 63) for the Motor Modules.
Index: [0] = Drive 1
[1] = Drive 2
[2] = Drive 3
[3] = Drive 4
[4] = Drive 5
[5] = Drive 6
Dependency: Refer to: p10012, p10014
Note: The complete Node Identifier (96 bit) is represented in p10012, p10013 and p10014.
Description: Sets the current Node Identifier (word 3, bit 64 ... 95) for the Motor Modules.
Index: [0] = Drive 1
[1] = Drive 2
[2] = Drive 3
[3] = Drive 4
[4] = Drive 5
[5] = Drive 6
Dependency: Refer to: p10012, p10013
Note: The complete Node Identifier (96 bit) is represented in p10012, p10013 and p10014.
p10013[0...5] SI Motor Module Node Identifier Word 2 / SI MM Node ID 2
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p10014[0...5] SI Motor Module Node Identifier Word 3 / SI MM Node ID 3
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
List of parameters
Parameter
1-835
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Parameter setting for the debounce time of the F-DIs and single-channel DIs of the TM54F. The debounce time is
rounded to whole mS. The debounce time indicates the maximum duration of a fault pulse on the FDIs, so that
there are no negative effects on the SGEs.
Example:
Debounce time 1mS : Fault pulses of 1mS are filtered; only pulses longer than 2mS are processed.
Debounce time 3mS : Fault pulses of 3mS are filtered; only pulses longer than 4mS are processed.
Description: Sets the special operating mode for the operating mode "function interface".
0 = Inactive
1 = Safe Operating Stop with braking (SS2)
2 = Safe Operating Stop without braking (SOS)
3 = Safely reduced speed without standstill (SLS)
4 = Safely reduced speed with agreement (SS2 --> SLS)
Index: [0] = Drive group 1
[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Dependency: Refer to: p10008
Note: Parameter being prepared. For this firmware version, the function interface is not supported.
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed
SOS: Safe Operating Stop
SS2: Safe Stop 2
Description: Sets the stop response for the drive group for Emergency Stop.
The input terminal for Emergency Stop is set in p10038.
0 = Stop reaction STO
1 = Stop reaction SS1
2 = Stop reaction SS2
p10017 SI digital inputs debounce time / SI DI t_debounce
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
1.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 1.00 [ms]
p10020[0...3] SI special operating mode selection / SI spec op sel
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 1
p10021[0...3] SI Emergency Stop stop response / SI Emergency Stop
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-836 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = Drive group 1
[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Dependency: Refer to: p10008, p10038
Note: Parameter being prepared. For this firmware version, the function interface is not supported.
Description: Sets the input terminal for STO (operating mode "control interface").
Value: 0: Statically active
1: F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
2: F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
3: F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
4: F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
5: F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
6: F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
7: F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
8: F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
9: F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
10: F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
255: Statically inact
Index: [0] = Drive group 1
[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note: Re value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always active.
Re value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive.
STO: Safe Torque Off
Description: Assignment of the input terminals for input SS1 (operating mode = control interface)
Description, refer to P10022
p10022[0...3] SI STO input terminal / SI STO DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
p10023[0...3] SI SS1 input terminal / SI SS1 DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-837
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Value: 0: Statically active
1: F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
2: F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
3: F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
4: F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
5: F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
6: F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
7: F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
8: F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
9: F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
10: F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
255: Statically inact
Index: [0] = Drive group 1
[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note: SS1: Safe Stop 1
Re value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always active.
Re value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive.
Description: Assignment of the input terminals for input SS2 (operating mode = control interface).
Description, refer to p10022.
Value: 0: Statically active
1: F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
2: F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
3: F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
4: F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
5: F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
6: F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
7: F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
8: F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
9: F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
10: F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
255: Statically inact
Index: [0] = Drive group 1
[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note: SS2: Safe Stop 2
Re value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always active.
Re value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive.
p10024[0...3] SI SS2 input terminal / SI SS2 DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-838 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Assignment of the input terminals for input SOS (operating mode = control interface)
Description, refer to P10022
Value: 0: Statically active
1: F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
2: F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
3: F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
4: F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
5: F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
6: F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
7: F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
8: F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
9: F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
10: F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
255: Statically inact
Index: [0] = Drive group 1
[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop
Re value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always active.
Re value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive.
Description: Assignment of the input terminals for input SLS (operating mode = control interface)
Description, refer to P10022
Value: 0: Statically active
1: F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
2: F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
3: F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
4: F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
5: F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
6: F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
7: F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
8: F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
9: F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
10: F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
255: Statically inact
Index: [0] = Drive group 1
[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
p10025[0...3] SI SOS input terminal / SI SOS DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
p10026[0...3] SI SLS input terminal / SI SLS DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-839
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed
Re value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always active.
Re value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive.
Description: Sets the input terminal for SLS_Limit bit 0 (operating mode "control interface").
Value: 0: Statically active
1: F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
2: F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
3: F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
4: F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
5: F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
6: F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
7: F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
8: F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
9: F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
10: F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
255: Statically inact
Index: [0] = Drive group 1
[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed
Re value = 0:
No terminal assigned, selection bit remains statically at "0".
Re value = 255:
No terminal assigned, selection bit remains statically at "1".
Description: Sets the input terminal for SLS_Limit bit 1 (operating mode "control interface").
Value: 0: Statically active
1: F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
2: F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
3: F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
4: F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
5: F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
6: F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
7: F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
8: F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
9: F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
10: F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
255: Statically inact
p10027[0...3] SI SLS_Limit(1) input terminal / SI SLS_Limit(1) DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
p10028[0...3] SI SLS_Limit(2) input terminal / SI SLS_Limit(2) DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-840 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = Drive group 1
[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed
Re value = 0:
No terminal assigned, selection bit remains statically at "0".
Re value = 255:
No terminal assigned, selection bit remains statically at "1".
Description: Sets the input terminal for "special operating mode" (operating mode "function interface").
Value: 0: Statically active
1: F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
2: F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
3: F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
4: F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
5: F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
6: F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
7: F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
8: F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
9: F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
10: F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
255: Statically inact
Index: [0] = Drive group 1
[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note: Parameter being prepared. For this firmware version, the function interface is not supported.
Re value = 0:
No terminal assigned, static special operation.
Re value = 255:
No terminal assigned, static normal operation.
p10036[0...3] SI special operating mode input terminal / SI spec op DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-841
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the input terminal for "agreement" (operating mode "function interface").
Value: 0: Statically active
1: F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
2: F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
3: F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
4: F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
5: F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
6: F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
7: F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
8: F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
9: F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
10: F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
255: Statically inact
Index: [0] = Drive group 1
[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note: Parameter being prepared. For this firmware version, the function interface is not supported.
Re value = 0:
No terminal assigned, no static agreement.
Re value = 255:
No terminal assigned, static agreement.
Description: Sets the input terminal for input "Emergency Stop" (operating mode "function interface").
The behavior of this input signal is set in p10021.
Value: 0: Statically active
1: F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
2: F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
3: F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
4: F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
5: F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
6: F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
7: F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
8: F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
9: F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
10: F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
255: Statically inact
Index: [0] = Drive group 1
[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Dependency: Refer to: p10008, p10021
p10037[0...3] SI agreement input terminal / SI agreement DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
p10038[0...3] SI Emergency Stop input terminal / SI Emer Stop DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-842 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note: Parameter being prepared. For this firmware version, the function interface is not supported.
Re value = 0:
No terminal assigned, "Emergency Stop" statically active.
Re value = 255:
No terminal assigned, no "Emergency Stop" statically active.
Description: Sets the signals for the drive group specific signal "Safe State".
Bit 0 = Power_removed
Bit 1 = SS1_active
Bit 2 = SS2_active
Bit 3 = SOS_active
Bit 4 = SLS_active
Bit 5 = Reserved
Index: [0] = Drive group 1
[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note: Bit = 0 signal --> not selected
Bit = 1 signal --> selected
The selected signals (high-active) are OR'ed The result of the logic operation results in the status "Safe State".
Description: Sets the input mode for the safety-relevant input terminals of terminal series 2.
Note: Only an NC contact can be connected to terminals that are not listed in the selection.
p10039[0...3] SI Safe State signal selection / SI Safe State Sel
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2856
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0001 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Power_removed Selected Not selected -
01 SS1_active Selected Not selected -
02 SS2_active Selected Not selected -
03 SOS_active Selected Not selected -
04 SLS_active Selected Not selected -
p10040 SI F-DI input mode / SI F-DI inp_mode
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 F-DI 0, DI 1+ (X521.3) NO contact NC contact 2850
01 F-DI 1, DI 3+ (X521.5) NO contact NC contact 2850
02 F-DI 2, DI 5+ (X522.2) NO contact NC contact 2850
03 F-DI 3, DI 7+ (X522.4) NO contact NC contact 2850
04 F-DI 4, DI 9+ (X522.6) NO contact NC contact 2850
05 F-DI 5, DI 11+ (X531.3) NO contact NC contact 2851
06 F-DI 6, DI 13+ (X531.5) NO contact NC contact 2851
07 F-DI 7, DI 15+ (X532.2) NO contact NC contact 2851
08 F-DI 8, DI 17+ (X532.4) NO contact NC contact 2851
09 F-DI 9, DI 19+ (X532.6) NO contact NC contact 2851
List of parameters
Parameter
1-843
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Enable signal for the integration of F-DI in the test (forced checking procedure) of the sensor power supply.
Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
Description: Sets the signal sources for F-DO 0.
The 6 signal sources in p10042[0...5] are AND'ed and the result is output at F-DO 0.
Value: 0: No function
1: Drive group 1 STO active
2: Drive group 1 SS1 active
3: Drive group 1 SS2 active
4: Drive group 1 SOS active
5: Drive group 1 SLS active
6: Drive group 1 SSM feedback signal active
7: Drive group 1 safe state
8: Drive group 1 SOS selected
9: Drive group 1 internal event
10: Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 0
11: Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 1
257: Drive group 2 STO active
258: Drive group 2 SS1 active
259: Drive group 2 SS2 active
260: Drive group 2 SOS active
261: Drive group 2 SLS active
262: Drive group 2 SSM feedback signal active
263: Drive group 2 safe state
264: Drive group 2 SOS selected
265: Drive group 2 internal event
266: Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 0
267: Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 1
p10041 SI F-DI enable for test / SI F-DI enab test
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2848
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 F-DI 0, power supply L1+ Test active No test -
01 F-DI 1, power supply L1+ Test active No test -
02 F-DI 2, power supply L1+ Test active No test -
03 F-DI 3, power supply L1+ Test active No test -
04 F-DI 4, power supply L1+ Test active No test -
05 F-DI 5, power supply L2+ Test active No test -
06 F-DI 6, power supply L2+ Test active No test -
07 F-DI 7, power supply L2+ Test active No test -
08 F-DI 8, power supply L2+ Test active No test -
09 F-DI 9, power supply L2+ Test active No test -
p10042[0...5] SI F-DO 0 signal sources / SI F-DO 0 S_src
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2857
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 779 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-844 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
513: Drive group 3 STO active
514: Drive group 3 SS1 active
515: Drive group 3 SS2 active
516: Drive group 3 SOS active
517: Drive group 3 SLS active
518: Drive group 3 SSM feedback signal active
519: Drive group 3 safe state
520: Drive group 3 SOS selected
521: Drive group 3 internal event
522: Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 0
523: Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 1
769: Drive group 4 STO active
770: Drive group 4 SS1 active
771: Drive group 4 SS2 active
772: Drive group 4 SOS active
773: Drive group 4 SLS active
774: Drive group 4 SSM feedback signal active
775: Drive group 4 safe state
776: Drive group 4 SOS selected
777: Drive group 4 internal event
778: Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 0
779: Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 1
Index: [0] = AND logic operation input 1
[1] = AND logic operation input 2
[2] = AND logic operation input 3
[3] = AND logic operation input 4
[4] = AND logic operation input 5
[5] = AND logic operation input 6
Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output
Description: Sets the signal sources for F-DO 1.
The 6 signal sources in p10043[0...5] are AND'ed and the result is output at F-DO 1.
Value: 0: No function
1: Drive group 1 STO active
2: Drive group 1 SS1 active
3: Drive group 1 SS2 active
4: Drive group 1 SOS active
5: Drive group 1 SLS active
6: Drive group 1 SSM feedback signal active
7: Drive group 1 safe state
8: Drive group 1 SOS selected
9: Drive group 1 internal event
10: Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 0
11: Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 1
p10043[0...5] SI F-DO 1 signal sources / SI F-DO 1 S_src
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2857
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 779 0
List of parameters
Parameter
1-845
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
257: Drive group 2 STO active
258: Drive group 2 SS1 active
259: Drive group 2 SS2 active
260: Drive group 2 SOS active
261: Drive group 2 SLS active
262: Drive group 2 SSM feedback signal active
263: Drive group 2 safe state
264: Drive group 2 SOS selected
265: Drive group 2 internal event
266: Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 0
267: Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 1
513: Drive group 3 STO active
514: Drive group 3 SS1 active
515: Drive group 3 SS2 active
516: Drive group 3 SOS active
517: Drive group 3 SLS active
518: Drive group 3 SSM feedback signal active
519: Drive group 3 safe state
520: Drive group 3 SOS selected
521: Drive group 3 internal event
522: Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 0
523: Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 1
769: Drive group 4 STO active
770: Drive group 4 SS1 active
771: Drive group 4 SS2 active
772: Drive group 4 SOS active
773: Drive group 4 SLS active
774: Drive group 4 SSM feedback signal active
775: Drive group 4 safe state
776: Drive group 4 SOS selected
777: Drive group 4 internal event
778: Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 0
779: Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 1
Index: [0] = AND logic operation input 1
[1] = AND logic operation input 2
[2] = AND logic operation input 3
[3] = AND logic operation input 4
[4] = AND logic operation input 5
[5] = AND logic operation input 6
Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output
Description: Sets the signal sources for F-DO 2.
The 6 signal sources in p10044[0...5] are AND'ed and the result is output at F-DO 2.
p10044[0...5] SI F-DO 2 signal sources / SI F-DO 2 S_src
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2857
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 779 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-846 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Value: 0: No function
1: Drive group 1 STO active
2: Drive group 1 SS1 active
3: Drive group 1 SS2 active
4: Drive group 1 SOS active
5: Drive group 1 SLS active
6: Drive group 1 SSM feedback signal active
7: Drive group 1 safe state
8: Drive group 1 SOS selected
9: Drive group 1 internal event
10: Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 0
11: Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 1
257: Drive group 2 STO active
258: Drive group 2 SS1 active
259: Drive group 2 SS2 active
260: Drive group 2 SOS active
261: Drive group 2 SLS active
262: Drive group 2 SSM feedback signal active
263: Drive group 2 safe state
264: Drive group 2 SOS selected
265: Drive group 2 internal event
266: Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 0
267: Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 1
513: Drive group 3 STO active
514: Drive group 3 SS1 active
515: Drive group 3 SS2 active
516: Drive group 3 SOS active
517: Drive group 3 SLS active
518: Drive group 3 SSM feedback signal active
519: Drive group 3 safe state
520: Drive group 3 SOS selected
521: Drive group 3 internal event
522: Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 0
523: Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 1
769: Drive group 4 STO active
770: Drive group 4 SS1 active
771: Drive group 4 SS2 active
772: Drive group 4 SOS active
773: Drive group 4 SLS active
774: Drive group 4 SSM feedback signal active
775: Drive group 4 safe state
776: Drive group 4 SOS selected
777: Drive group 4 internal event
778: Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 0
779: Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 1
Index: [0] = AND logic operation input 1
[1] = AND logic operation input 2
[2] = AND logic operation input 3
[3] = AND logic operation input 4
[4] = AND logic operation input 5
[5] = AND logic operation input 6
Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output
List of parameters
Parameter
1-847
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Sets the signal sources for F-DO 3.
The 6 signal sources in p10045[0...5] are AND'ed and the result is output at F-DO 3.
Value: 0: No function
1: Drive group 1 STO active
2: Drive group 1 SS1 active
3: Drive group 1 SS2 active
4: Drive group 1 SOS active
5: Drive group 1 SLS active
6: Drive group 1 SSM feedback signal active
7: Drive group 1 safe state
8: Drive group 1 SOS selected
9: Drive group 1 internal event
10: Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 0
11: Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 1
257: Drive group 2 STO active
258: Drive group 2 SS1 active
259: Drive group 2 SS2 active
260: Drive group 2 SOS active
261: Drive group 2 SLS active
262: Drive group 2 SSM feedback signal active
263: Drive group 2 safe state
264: Drive group 2 SOS selected
265: Drive group 2 internal event
266: Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 0
267: Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 1
513: Drive group 3 STO active
514: Drive group 3 SS1 active
515: Drive group 3 SS2 active
516: Drive group 3 SOS active
517: Drive group 3 SLS active
518: Drive group 3 SSM feedback signal active
519: Drive group 3 safe state
520: Drive group 3 SOS selected
521: Drive group 3 internal event
522: Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 0
523: Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 1
769: Drive group 4 STO active
770: Drive group 4 SS1 active
771: Drive group 4 SS2 active
772: Drive group 4 SOS active
773: Drive group 4 SLS active
774: Drive group 4 SSM feedback signal active
775: Drive group 4 safe state
776: Drive group 4 SOS selected
777: Drive group 4 internal event
778: Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 0
779: Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 1
p10045[0...5] SI F-DO 3 signal sources / SI F-DO 3 S_src
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2857
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0 779 0
Parameter
List of parameters
1-848 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index: [0] = AND logic operation input 1
[1] = AND logic operation input 2
[2] = AND logic operation input 3
[3] = AND logic operation input 4
[4] = AND logic operation input 5
[5] = AND logic operation input 6
Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output
Description: Sets the test of the feedback line for forced checking procedure.
Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output
Value: 1: Test mode 1 evaluation of int. diagnostic signal (passive load)
2: Test mode 2 read back F-DO in DI (relay circuit)
3: Test mode 3 read back F-DO in DI (actuator with feedback signal)
Note: When test mode 1 is being used, too great a load resistance on the part of the load between DO+ and DO- can lead
to problems during the test stop. It is, therefore, important to make sure that the load resistance on an individual
FDO does not exceed 10 Kohm.
p10046 SI test sensor feedback signal input DI 20 ... 23 / SI test sens FS
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2848
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0000 bin
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Read back F-DO 0 in DI 20 Test active No test -
01 Read back F-DO 1 in DI 21 Test active No test -
02 Read back F-DO 2 in DI 22 Test active No test -
03 Read back F-DO 3 in DI 23 Test active No test -
p10047[0...3] SI selection of test mode for test stop / SI test mode sel.
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0001 bin 0011 bin 0010 bin
List of parameters
Parameter
1-849
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the single-channel, logical, and debounced status of the safety digital inputs F-DI 0 .. 9 at Terminal Module
54F (TM54F).
If a safety function is assigned to an input (e.g. via p10022), then the following applies:
- logical "0": Safety function is selected
- logical "1": Safety function is deselected
The interrelationship between the logical level and the external voltage level at the input depends on the parameter-
ization (refer to p10040) of the input as either NC or NO contact and is aligned to the use of a safety function:
With 24 V at the input, NC contacts have a logical "1" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "0" level.
This means that an NC/NC contact parameterization of 0 V at both inputs of the F-DI selects the safety function, for
24 V at both inputs, deselects the safety function.
With 24 V at the input, NO contacts have a logical "0" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "1" level.
This means that for an NC/NO contact parameterization, the level 0 V/24 V selects the safety function, the level 24
V/0 V deselects the safety function.
Dependency: Refer to: p10017, p10040
Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
Description: Displays the status of the digital outputs at the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output
r10051.0...9 CO/BO: SI digital inputs status / SI DI status
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2850, 2851
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 F-DI 0 Logical 1 Logical 0 2850
01 F-DI 1 Logical 1 Logical 0 2850
02 F-DI 2 Logical 1 Logical 0 2850
03 F-DI 3 Logical 1 Logical 0 2850
04 F-DI 4 Logical 1 Logical 0 2850
05 F-DI 5 Logical 1 Logical 0 2851
06 F-DI 6 Logical 1 Logical 0 2851
07 F-DI 7 Logical 1 Logical 0 2851
08 F-DI 8 Logical 1 Logical 0 2851
09 F-DI 9 Logical 1 Logical 0 2851
r10052.0...3 CO/BO: SI digital outputs status / SI DO status
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DO 0 High Low 2853
01 DO 1 High Low 2853
02 DO 2 High Low 2853
03 DO 3 High Low 2853
Parameter
List of parameters
1-850 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs at the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Description: Displays the events that lead to the transfer of failsafe signals to all drives assigned to the TM54F. If the second
channel of the TM54F transmits failsafe signals, then these are synchronized to the other channel.
Possibilities of resolving the situation:
- error during test stop: correctly perform the test stop.
- internal software error: no possibility of resolving this problem, POWER ON.
- internal synchronization problem: no possibility of resolving this problem, POWER ON.
- all other causes: remove the cause of the error and carry out a safety-relevant acknowledgement (p10006).
Description: Displays the communication status of the individual drives with the the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
For r10055 = 0, the following applies:
All drives assigned in p10010 communicate with the TM54F.
r10053.0...3 CO/BO: SI digital inputs 20 ... 23 status / SI DI 20...23 stat
TM54F_SL Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2848
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 20 High Low 2853
01 DI 21 High Low 2853
02 DI 22 High Low 2853
03 DI 23 High Low 2853
r10054 SI TM54F failsafe events active / SI failsafe act
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Commissioning mode active (p0010 = 95) Yes No 2847
01 Checksum error of the safety parameters Yes No -
02 Internal synchronization problem within
RM54F
Yes No -
03 Internal software error Yes No -
04 Overvoltage in the TM54F Yes No -
05 Undervoltage in the TM54F Yes No -
06 Error at test stop Yes No -
07 Error for data cross-check within TM54F Yes No -
08 Overvoltage in the TM54F Yes No -
31 Failsafe events active on another channel Yes No -
r10055 SI TM54F communication status drive-specific / SI comm_stat drv
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2846
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
List of parameters
Parameter
1-851
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Displays the status of the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Description: Enters the Safety Integrated password for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
This password is required to change the safety-relevant parameters.
Description: Enters the new Safety Integrated password for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Dependency: A change made to the Safety Integrated password must be acknowledged in the following parameter:
Refer to: p10063
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Communication between drive 1 and
TM54F
Not configured Configured -
01 Communication between drive 2 and
TM54F
Not configured Configured -
02 Communication between drive 3 and
TM54F
Not configured Configured -
03 Communication between drive 4 and
TM54F
Not configured Configured -
04 Communication between drive 5 and
TM54F
Not configured Configured -
05 Communication between drive 6 and
TM54F
Not configured Configured -
r10056.0 CO/BO: SI Status / SI stat
TM54F_MA Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Test stop status Active Inactive -
p10061 SI password input TM54F / SI password inp
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: T Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2847
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
p10062 SI password new TM54F / SI password new
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2847
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Parameter
List of parameters
1-852 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Description: Acknowledgement of the new Safety Integrated password for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Dependency: Refer to: p10062
Note: The new password entered into p10062 must be re-entered in order to acknowledge.
p10062 = p10063 = 0 is automatically set after the new Safety Integrated password has been successfully acknowl-
edged.
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release)
[1] = Safety Version (minor release)
[2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch)
[3] = Safety Version (hotfix)
Dependency: Refer to: r9390, r9590, r9770, r9870, r9890
Note: Example:
r10090[0] = 2, r10090[1] = 60, r10090[2] = 1, r10090[3] = 0 --> SI TM54F version V02.60.01.00
Description: Displays PROFINET Name of Station.
Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual:
Description: Displays PROFINET IP of Station.
p10063 SI password acknowledgement TM54F / SI ackn password
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: 2847
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
r10090[0...3] SI TM54F version / SI TM54F version
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r61000[0...239] PROFINET Name of Station / PN Name of Station
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
r61001[0...3] PROFINET IP of Station / PN IP of Station
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Can be changed: - Calculated: -Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: -Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -Units group: -Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -Scaling: -Expert list: 1
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Parameters for data sets
Parameter
1-853
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1.3 Parameters for data sets
1.3.1 Parameters for command data sets (CDS)
The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the command data sets.
Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng, Type: CDS
p0641[0...n] CI: Current limit, variable / Curr lim var
p0700[0...n] Macro Binector Input (BI) / Macro BI
p0820[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 0 / DDS select., bit 0
p0821[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 1 / DDS select., bit 1
p0822[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 2 / DDS select., bit 2
p0823[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 3 / DDS select., bit 3
p0824[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 4 / DDS select., bit 4
p0828[0...n] BI: Motor changeover, feedback signal / Mot_chng fdbk sig
p0840[0...n] BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1
p0844[0...n] BI: 1. OFF2 / 1. OFF2
p0845[0...n] BI: 2. OFF2 / 2. OFF2
p0848[0...n] BI: 1. OFF3 / 1. OFF3
p0849[0...n] BI: 2. OFF3 / 2. OFF3
p0852[0...n] BI: Operation enable / Operation enable
p0854[0...n] BI: Master ctrl by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC
p0855[0...n] BI: Unconditionally release holding brake / Uncond open brake
p0856[0...n] BI: Speed controller enable / n_ctrl enable
p0858[0...n] BI: Unconditionally close holding brake / Uncond close brake
p1000[0...n] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints / Macro CI n_set
p1020[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0 / n_set_fixed Bit 0
p1021[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1 / n_set_fixed Bit 1
p1022[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2 / n_set_fixed Bit 2
p1023[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3 / n_set_fixed Bit 3
p1035[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise
p1036[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower
p1039[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer inversion / Mop inversion
p1041[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto
p1042[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint
p1043[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer accept setpoint / Mop accept set val
p1044[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer setting value / Mop set val
p1051[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos
p1052[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg
p1055[0...n] BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0
p1056[0...n] BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1
p1070[0...n] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint
p1071[0...n] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal
p1075[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint / Suppl setpoint
p1076[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setp scal
p1085[0...n] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
p1088[0...n] CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
p1110[0...n] BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhib neg dir
p1111[0...n] BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhib pos dir
p1113[0...n] BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv
p1122[0...n] BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG
Parameter
Parameters for data sets
1-854 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
p1140[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator enable / RFG enable
p1141[0...n] BI: Continue ramp-function generator / Continue RFG
p1142[0...n] BI: Speed setpoint enable / n_set enable
p1143[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / Accept RFG set val
p1144[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value
p1155[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 1 / n_ctrl n_set 1
p1160[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 2 / n_ctrl n_set 2
p1201[0...n] BI: Flying restart enable signal source / Fly_res enab S_src
p1230[0...n] BI: Armature short-circuit / DC brake activation / ASC act
p1235[0...n] BI: External armature short-circuit, contactor feedback signal / ASC ext feedback
p1330[0...n] CI: V/f control independent voltage setpoint / Vf V_set independ.
p1356[0...n] CI: V/f control, angular setpoint / Vf ang setpoint
p1437[0...n] CI: Speed controller, reference model I component input / n_ctrRefMod I_comp
p1440[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed actual value / n_ctrl n_act
p1455[0...n] CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal / n_ctrl Adpt_sig Kp
p1466[0...n] CI: Speed controller P-gain scaling / n_ctrl Kp scal
p1475[0...n] CI: Speed controller torque setting value for motor holding brake / n_ctrl M_sv MHB
p1476[0...n] BI: Speed controller hold integrator / n_ctrl integ stop
p1477[0...n] BI: Speed controller set integrator value / n_ctrl integ set
p1478[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value / n_ctr integ_setVal
p1479[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value scaling / n_ctrl I_val scal
p1486[0...n] CI: Droop compensation torque / Droop M_comp
p1492[0...n] BI: Droop feedback enable / Droop enable
p1495[0...n] CI: Acceleration pre-control / a_prectrl
p1497[0...n] CI: Moment of inertia, scaling / M_mom inert scal
p1500[0...n] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints / Macro CI M_set
p1501[0...n] BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control / Changeov n/M_ctrl
p1503[0...n] CI: Torque setpoint / M_set
p1511[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 / M_suppl 1
p1512[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling / M_suppl 1 scal
p1513[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 2 / M_suppl 2
p1522[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
p1523[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower / M_max lower
p1528[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal
p1529[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal
p1540[0...n] CI: Torque limit speed controller upper scaling / M_max n-ctr upScal
p1541[0...n] CI: Torque limit. speed controller lower scaling / M_max nctr lowScal
p1545[0...n] BI: Activates travel to a fixed stop / TfS activation
p1551[0...n] BI: Torque limit variable/fixed signal source / M_lim var/fixS_src
p1552[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling without offset / M_max up w/o offs
p1554[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling without offset / M_max low w/o offs
p1555[0...n] CI: Power limit / P_max
p1569[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 3 / M_suppl 3
p1571[0...n] CI: Supplementary flux setpoint / Suppl flux setp
p1640[0...n] CI: Excitation current actual value / I_exc_act val
p2103[0...n] BI: 1. Acknowledge faults / 1. Acknowledge
p2104[0...n] BI: 2. Acknowledge faults / 2. Acknowledge
p2105[0...n] BI: 3. Acknowledge faults / 3. Acknowledge
p2106[0...n] BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1
p2107[0...n] BI: External fault 2 / External fault 2
p2108[0...n] BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3
p2112[0...n] BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1
p2116[0...n] BI: External alarm 2 / External alarm 2
Parameters for data sets
Parameter
1-855
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
p2117[0...n] BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3
p2144[0...n] BI: Motor stall monitoring enable (negated) / Mot stall enab neg
p2148[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator active / HLG active
p2151[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals / n_set for msg
p2154[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint 2 / n_set 2
p2200[0...n] BI: Technology controller enable / Tec_ctrl enable
p2220[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 0
p2221[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 1
p2222[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 2
p2223[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 3
p2235[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer raise setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop raise
p2236[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop lower
p2253[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 / Tec_ctrl setp 1
p2254[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 2 / Tec_ctrl setp 2
p2264[0...n] CI: Technology controller actual value / Tec_ctrl act val
p2286[0...n] BI: Hold technology controller integrator / Tec_ctr integ stop
p2289[0...n] CI: Technology controller pre-control signal / Tec_ctrl prectrl
p2296[0...n] CI: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal
p2297[0...n] CI: Technology controller maximum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl m_lm s_sc
p2298[0...n] CI: Technology controller minimum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl min_l s_s
p2299[0...n] CI: Technology controller limit offset / Tech_ctrl lim offs
p3111[0...n] BI: External fault 3, enable / Ext fault 3 enab
p3112[0...n] BI: External fault 3 enable negated / Ext flt 3 enab neg
p3784[0...n] BI: Sync-line-drive external increase voltage / Sync ext V incr
p3785[0...n] BI: Sync-line-drive external decrease voltage / Sync ext V decr
p3802[0...n] BI: Sync-line-drive enable / Sync enable
1.3.2 Parameters for drive data sets (DDS)
The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the drive data sets.
Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng, Type: DDS
p0186[0...n] Motor Data Sets (MDS) number / MDS number
p0187[0...n] Encoder 1 encoder data set number / Enc 1 EDS number
p0188[0...n] Encoder 2 encoder data set number / Enc 2 EDS number
p0189[0...n] Encoder 3 encoder data set number / Enc 3 EDS number
p0340[0...n] Automatic calculation, motor/control parameters / Calc auto par
p0572[0...n] Activate inhibit list / Act inhib list
p0578[0...n] Calculate parameters that are dependent on the technology/units / Calc tec par
p0640[0...n] Current limit / Current limit
p1001[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 / n_set_fixed 1
p1002[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 / n_set_fixed 2
p1003[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 / n_set_fixed 3
p1004[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 / n_set_fixed 4
p1005[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 / n_set_fixed 5
p1006[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 / n_set_fixed 6
p1007[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 / n_set_fixed 7
p1008[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 / n_set_fixed 8
p1009[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 / n_set_fixed 9
p1010[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 / n_set_fixed 10
p1011[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 / n_set_fixed 11
p1012[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 / n_set_fixed 12
Parameter
Parameters for data sets
1-856 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
p1013[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 / n_set_fixed 13
p1014[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 / n_set_fixed 14
p1015[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 / n_set_fixed 15
p1030[0...n] Motorized potentiometer configuration / Mop configuration
p1037[0...n] Motorized potentiometer maximum speed / Mop n_max
p1038[0...n] Motorized potentiometer minimum speed / Mop n_min
p1040[0...n] Motorized potentiometer starting value / Mop start value
p1047[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time
p1048[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time
p1058[0...n] Jog 1 speed setpoint / Jog 1 n_set
p1059[0...n] Jog 2 speed setpoint / Jog 2 n_set
p1063[0...n] Speed limit setpoint channel / n_limit setp
p1080[0...n] Minimum speed / Minimum speed
p1082[0...n] Maximum speed / n_Max
p1083[0...n] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
p1086[0...n] CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
p1091[0...n] Skip speed 1 / n_skip 1
p1092[0...n] Skip speed 2 / n_skip 2
p1093[0...n] Skip speed 3 / n_skip 3
p1094[0...n] Skip speed 4 / n_skip 4
p1101[0...n] Skip speed bandwidth / n_skip bandwidth
p1120[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time
p1121[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time
p1130[0...n] Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round
p1131[0...n] Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay
p1134[0...n] Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type
p1135[0...n] OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD
p1136[0...n] OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd
p1137[0...n] OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del
p1145[0...n] Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens
p1148[0...n] Ramp-function gen., tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active / RFG tol HL/RL act
p1151[0...n] Ramp-function generator configuration / RFG config
p1189[0...n] Speed setpoint configuration / n_ctrl config
p1200[0...n] FlyRest oper mode / FlyRest op_mode
p1202[0...n] FlyRest srch curr / FlyRest I_srch
p1203[0...n] Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact
p1226[0...n] Threshold for zero speed detection / n_standst n_thresh
p1240[0...n] Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration / Vdc_ctrl config
p1243[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1245[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level
p1247[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1249[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold / Vdc_max n_thresh
p1250[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1251[0...n] Vdc controller integral time / Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1252[0...n] Vdc controller rate time / Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1255[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh
p1256[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response
p1257[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh
p1262[0...n] Bypass dead time / Bypass t_dead
p1280[0...n] Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration (V/f) / Vdc_ctr config V/f
p1283[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (V/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1285[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min on_level
p1287[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
Parameters for data sets
Parameter
1-857
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
p1288[0...n] Vdc_max controller feedback coupling factor ramp-fct. gen. (V/f) / Vdc_max factor RFG
p1289[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold (V/f) / Vdc_max n_thresh
p1290[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1291[0...n] Vdc controller integral time (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1292[0...n] Vdc controller rate time (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1293[0...n] Vdc min controller output limit (V/f) / Vdc_min outp_lim
p1295[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold (V/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh
p1296[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (V/f / Vdc_min response
p1297[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold (V/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh
p1300[0...n] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode
p1302[0...n] V/f control configuration / V/f configuration
p1310[0...n] Voltage boost permanent / V_boost perm
p1311[0...n] Voltage boost at acceleration / V_boost accelerate
p1312[0...n] Voltage boost when starting / V_boost starting
p1320[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 1 / Uf char f1
p1321[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 1 / Vf char U1
p1322[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 2 / Vf char f2
p1323[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 2 / Vf char U2
p1324[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 3 / Vf char f3
p1325[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 3 / Vf char U3
p1326[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 4 / Vf char f4
p1327[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 4 / Vf char U4
p1333[0...n] V/f control FCC starting frequency / V/f FCC f_start
p1334[0...n] V/f control slip compensation starting frequency / Slip comp start
p1335[0...n] Slip compensation, scaling / Slip comp scal
p1336[0...n] Slip compensation limit value / Slip comp lim val
p1338[0...n] V/f mode resonance damping gain / Vf Res_damp gain
p1339[0...n] V/f mode resonance damping filter time constant / Vf Res_damp T
p1340[0...n] I_max frequency controller proportional gain / I_max_ctrl Kp
p1341[0...n] I_max frequency controller integral time / I_max_ctrl Tn
p1345[0...n] I_max voltage controller proportional gain / I_max_V_ctrl Kp
p1346[0...n] I_max voltage controller integral time / I_max_V_ctrl Tn
p1349[0...n] V/f mode resonance damping maximum frequency / Vf res_damp F_max
p1350[0...n] Soft starting / Soft starting
p1351[0...n] CO: Motor holding brake starting frequency / Brake f_start
p1358[0...n] Angular difference, symmetrizing, actual angle / Sym act angle
p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config
p1401[0...n] Flux control configuration / Flux ctrl config
p1402[0...n] Closed-loop current control and motor model configuration / I_ctrl config
p1416[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant / n_set_filt 1 T
p1428[0...n] Speed pre-control balancing dead time / n_prectrBal t_dead
p1429[0...n] Speed pre-control balancing time constant / n_prectr bal T
p1433[0...n] Speed controller reference model natural frequency / n_ctrl RefMod fn
p1434[0...n] Speed controller reference model damping / n_ctrl RefMod D
p1435[0...n] Speed controller reference model dead time / n_ctrRefMod t_dead
p1441[0...n] Actual speed smoothing time / n_ist T_smooth
p1442[0...n] Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time / n_ctr n_act T_smth
p1451[0...n] Motor model speed actual value smoothing time SLVC / Mot_mod n_act t_sm
p1452[0...n] Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time (SLVC) / n_C n_act T_s SLVC
p1456[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKpLow
p1457[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation upper starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKp up
p1458[0...n] Adaptation factor, lower / Adapt_factor lower
p1459[0...n] Adaptation factor, upper / Adapt_factor upper
Parameter
Parameters for data sets
1-858 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
p1460[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl Kp n lower
p1461[0...n] Speed controller Kp adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctrl Kp n upper
p1462[0...n] Speed controller integral time adaptation speed lower / n_ctrl Tn n lower
p1463[0...n] Speed controller Tn adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctrl Tn n upper
p1464[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl n lower
p1465[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl n upper
p1470[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation P-gain / n_ctrl SLVC Kp
p1472[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation integral time / n_ctrl SLVC Tn
p1487[0...n] Droop compensation torque scaling / Droop M_comp scal
p1488[0...n] Droop input source / Droop input source
p1489[0...n] Droop feedback scaling / Droop scaling
p1496[0...n] Acceleration pre-control scaling / a_before scaling
p1499[0...n] Accelerating for torque control, scaling / a for M_ctrl scal
p1514[0...n] Supplementary torque 2 scaling / M_suppl 2 scal
p1517[0...n] Accelerating torque smoothing time constant / M_accel T_smooth
p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
p1521[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower / M_max lower
p1524[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal
p1525[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal
p1530[0...n] Power limit motoring / P_max mot
p1531[0...n] Power limit regenerative / P_max gen
p1556[0...n] Power limit scaling / P_max_scale
p1570[0...n] CO: Flux setpoint / Flux setpoint
p1572[0...n] Supplementary flux setpoint / Suppl flux setp
p1573[0...n] Flux threshold value magnetizing / Flux thresh magnet
p1574[0...n] Voltage reserve dynamic / V_reserve dyn
p1576[0...n] Flux boost, adaptation speed, lower / Flux boost n lower
p1577[0...n] Flux boost adaptation speed, upper / Flux boost n upper
p1580[0...n] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt.
p1582[0...n] Flux setpoint smoothing time / Flux setp T_smth
p1584[0...n] Field weakening operation, flux setpoint smoothing time / Field weak T_smth
p1585[0...n] Flux actual value, smoothing time / Flux actVal T_smth
p1586[0...n] Field weakening characteristic, scaling / Field weak scal
p1590[0...n] Flux controller P gain / Flux controller Kp
p1592[0...n] Flux controller integral time / Flux controller Tn
p1594[0...n] Field-weakening controller, P gain / Field_ctrl Kp
p1596[0...n] Field weakening controller integral-action time / Field_ctrl Tn
p1599[0...n] Flux controller, excitation current difference / Flux ctr I_exc_dif
p1600[0...n] P flux controller, P gain / P flux ctrl Kp
p1605[0...n] Pulse technique pattern configuration / Pulse config
p1607[0...n] Pulse technique stimulus / Pulse stimu
p1609[0...n] Current setpoint for I/f operation / I_set I/f oper
p1610[0...n] Torque setpoint static (SLVC) / M_set static
p1611[0...n] Supplementary accelerating torque (SLVC) / M_suppl_accel
p1612[0...n] Current setpoint magnetizing open-loop controlled / Id_set ctrl
p1616[0...n] Current setpoint smoothing time / I_set T_smooth
p1619[0...n] Setpoint/actual value tracking threshold / SetAct track thrsh
p1620[0...n] Stator current, minimum / I_stator min
p1621[0...n] Changeover speed, inner cos phi = 1 / n_chngov cos phi=1
p1622[0...n] Field-generating current setpoint smoothing time constant / Id_setp T_smth
p1625[0...n] Excitation current setpoint calibration / I_exc_setp cal
p1628[0...n] Current model controller, dynamic factor / I_mod_ctr dyn_fact
p1629[0...n] Current model controller P gain / I_mod_ctrl Kp
Parameters for data sets
Parameter
1-859
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
p1630[0...n] Current model controller integral time / I_ctrl Tn
p1642[0...n] Minimum excitation current / Min I_exc
p1643[0...n] Gain factor, minimum excitation current closed-loop control / Min I_exc Kp
p1653[0...n] Current setpoint torque-generating smoothing time minimum / Isq_s T_smth min
p1654[0...n] Curr. setpoint torque-gen. smoothing time field weakening range / Isq_s T_smth FW
p1656[0...n] Activates current setpoint filter / I_setp_filt act
p1657[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 type / I_set_filt 1 Typ
p1658[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 1 fn_n
p1659[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 denominator damping / I_set_filt 1 D_n
p1660[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 1 fn_z
p1661[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 numerator damping / I_set_filt 1 D_z
p1662[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 type / I_set_filt 2 Typ
p1663[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 2 fn_n
p1664[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 denominator damping / I_set_filt 2 D_n
p1665[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 2 fn_z
p1666[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 numerator damping / I_set_filt 2 D_z
p1702[0...n] Isd current controller pre-control scaling / Isd_ctr_prectrScal
p1703[0...n] Isq current controller pre-control scaling / Isq_ctr_prectrScal
p1704[0...n] Isq current controller pre-control EMF scaling / Isq_ctrl EMF scal
p1705[0...n] Flux setpoint/actual value tracking threshold / Flux track thresh
p1715[0...n] Current controller P gain / I_ctrl Kp
p1717[0...n] Current controller integral-action time / I_ctrl Tn
p1726[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling, scaling / Transv_decpl scal
p1727[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling at voltage limit scaling / TrnsvDecplVmaxScal
p1740[0...n] Gain resonance damping for encoderless closed loop control / Gain res_damp
p1744[0...n] Motor model speed threshold stall detection / MotMod n_thr stall
p1745[0...n] Motor model error threshold stall detection / MotMod ThreshStall
p1748[0...n] Motor model lower changeover speed n_set -> n_act / Lower n_chngov
p1749[0...n] Motor model upper changeover speed n_set -> n_act / Upper n_chgov
p1750[0...n] Motor model configuration / MotMod config
p1752[0...n] Motor model changeover speed operation with encoder / MotMod n_chgov enc
p1753[0...n] Motor model changeover speed hysteresis operation with encoder / MotMod n_chgovHysE
p1754[0...n] Flux angle difference smoothing time / Angle diff T_smth
p1755[0...n] Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgSnsorl
p1757[0...n] Motor model w/o enc. op./cl.-loop controlled stab. controller Kp / MotMod w/o enc Kp
p1758[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time closed/open-loop control / MotMod t cl_op
p1759[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time open/closed loop control / MotMod t op_cl
p1760[0...n] Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod wE n_ada Kp
p1761[0...n] Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod wE n_ada Tn
p1764[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod woE n_adaKp
p1766[0...n] Motor model voltage model calculation enable / V_mod calc enab
p1767[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod woE n_adaTn
p1774[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation alpha / MotMod offs comp A
p1775[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation beta / MotMod offs comp B
p1780[0...n] Motor model adaptation configuration / MotMod adapt conf
p1781[0...n] Motor model Rs adaptation integral time / MotMod Rs Tn
r1782[0...n] Motor model Rs adaptation corrective value / MotMod Rs corr
p1783[0...n] Motor model Rs adaptation Kp / MotMod Rs Kp
p1785[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation Kp / MotMod Lh Kp
p1786[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation integral time / MotMod Lh Tn
r1787[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation corrective value / MotMod Lh corr
p1795[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation integral time / MotMod kT Tn
r1797[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation corrective value / MotMod kT corr
Parameter
Parameters for data sets
1-860 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
p1798[0...n] Motor model pulse technique speed adaptation Kp / MotMod pulses Kp
p1800[0...n] Pulse frequency setpoint / Pulse freq setp
p1802[0...n] Modulator mode / Modulator mode
p1803[0...n] Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max
p1804[0...n] Filter time constant smoothed modulation index / T_filt mod_idxSmth
p1806[0...n] Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr
p1811[0...n] Pulse frequency wobbulation amplitude / Puls wobb ampl
p1820[0...n] Reverse the output phase sequence / Outp_ph_seq rev
p1821[0...n] Dir of rot / Dir of rot
p1840[0...n] Actual value correction configuration / AVC config
p1845[0...n] Actual value correction evaluation factor Lsig / ActV_corr FactLsig
p1846[0...n] Actual value correction damping factor / ActV_corr D_factor
p1959[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config
p2140[0...n] Hysteresis speed 2 / n_hysteresis 2
p2141[0...n] Speed threshold 1 / n_thresh val 1
p2142[0...n] Hysteresis speed 1 / n_hysteresis 1
p2149[0...n] Monitoring configuration / Monit config
p2150[0...n] Hysteresis speed 3 / n_hysteresis 3
p2153[0...n] Speed actual value filter time constant / n_act_filt T
p2155[0...n] Speed threshold 2 / n_thresh val 2
p2156[0...n] On delay, comparison value reached / t_on cmpr val rchd
p2161[0...n] Speed threshold 3 / n_thresh val 3
p2162[0...n] Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max / Hyst n_act>n_max
p2163[0...n] Speed threshold 4 / n_thresh val 4
p2164[0...n] Hysteresis speed 4 / n_hysteresis 4
p2166[0...n] Off delay n_act = n_set / t_del_off n_i=n_so
p2167[0...n] Switch-on delay n_act = n_set / t_on n_act=n_set
p2174[0...n] Torque threshold value 1 / M_thresh val 1
p2175[0...n] Motor locked speed threshold / Mot lock n_thresh
p2177[0...n] Motor locked delay time / Mot lock t_del
p2178[0...n] Motor stalled delay time / Mot stall t_del
p2181[0...n] Load monitoring response / Load monit resp
p2182[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 1 / n_thresh 1
p2183[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 2 / n_thresh 2
p2184[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 3 / n_thresh 3
p2185[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, upper / M_thresh 1 upper
p2186[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower / M_thresh 1 lower
p2187[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, upper / M_thresh 2 upper
p2188[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, lower / M_thresh 2 lower
p2189[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, upper / M_thresh 3 upper
p2190[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, lower / M_thresh 3 lower
p2192[0...n] Load monitoring delay time / Load monit t_del
p2194[0...n] Torque threshold value 2 / M_thresh val 2
p2195[0...n] Torque utilization switch-off delay / M_util t_off
p2196[0...n] Torque utilization scaling / M_util scal
p2201[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 1 / Tec_ctrl fix val 1
p2202[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 2 / Tec_ctrl fix val 2
p2203[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 3 / Tec_ctrl fix val 3
p2204[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 4 / Tec_ctrl fix val 4
p2205[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 5 / Tec_ctrl fix val 5
p2206[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 6 / Tec_ctrl fix val 6
p2207[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 7 / Tec_ctrl fix val 7
p2208[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 8 / Tec_ctrl fix val 8
Parameters for data sets
Parameter
1-861
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
p2209[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 9 / Tec_ctrl fix val 9
p2210[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 10 / Tec_ctrl fix val10
p2211[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 11 / Tec_ctrl fix val11
p2212[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 12 / Tec_ctrl fix val12
p2213[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 13 / Tec_ctrl fix val13
p2214[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 14 / Tec_ctrl fix val14
p2215[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 15 / Tec_ctrl fix val15
p2216[0...n] Technology controller fixed value selection method / Tec_ctr FixVal sel
p2230[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration / Tec_ctr mop config
p2237[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value / Tec_ctrl mop max
p2238[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value / Tec_ctrl mop min
p2240[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value / Tec_ctrl mop start
p2247[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Tec_ctr mop t_r-up
p2248[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Tec_ctrMop t_rdown
p2720[0...n] Load gear configuration / Load gear config
p2721[0...n] Load gear, rotary absolute gearbox, revolutions, virtual / Abs rot rev
p2722[0...n] Load gear, position tracking tolerance window / Pos track tol
r2723[0...n] CO: Load gear absolute value / Load gear abs_val
r2724[0...n] CO: Load gear position difference / Load gear pos diff
p2900[0...n] CO: Fixed value 1 [%] / Fixed value 1 [%]
p2901[0...n] CO: Fixed value 2 [%] / Fixed value 2 [%]
p2930[0...n] CO: Fixed value M [Nm] / Fixed value M [Nm]
p3201[0...n] Excitation current outside the tolerance threshold value / I_exc n Tol thresh
p3202[0...n] Excitation current outside the tolerance hysteresis / I_exc n Tol hyst
p3203[0...n] Excitation current outside the tolerance delay time / I_exc n Tol t_del
p3204[0...n] Flux outside the tolerance threshold value / Flux n tol thresh
p3205[0...n] Flux outside the tolerance hysteresis / Flux n tol hyst
p3206[0...n] Flux outside tolerance delay time / Flux n tol t_del
p3207[0...n] Zero current signal threshold value / I_0_sig thresh
p3208[0...n] Zero current signal hysteresis / I_0_sig hyst
p3209[0...n] Zero current signal delay time / I_0_sig t_del
p3233[0...n] Torque actual value filter, time constant / M_act_filt T
p3236[0...n] Speed threshold 7 / n_thresh val 7
p3237[0...n] Hysteresis speed 7 / n_hysteresis 7
p3238[0...n] OFF delay n_act_motor model = n_act external / t_del n_a = n_ext
p3800[0...n] Sync-line-drive activation / Sync act
p3801[0...n] Sync-line-drive, drive object number / Sync DO_No
p3806[0...n] Sync-line-drive frequency difference threshold value / Sync f_diff thresh
p3809[0...n] Sync-line-drive phase setpoint / Sync phase setp
p3811[0...n] Sync-line-drive frequency limiting / Sync f_lim
p3813[0...n] Sync-line-drive phase synchronism threshold value / Sync Ph_sync thrsh
p3815[0...n] Sync-line-drive voltage difference threshold value / Sync V_diff thresh
p3820[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n0 / Friction n0
p3821[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n1 / Friction n1
p3822[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n2 / Friction n2
p3823[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n3 / Friction n3
p3824[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n4 / Friction n4
p3825[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n5 / Friction n5
p3826[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n6 / Friction n6
p3827[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n7 / Friction n7
p3828[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n8 / Friction n8
p3829[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n9 / Friction n9
p3830[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M0 / Friction M0
Parameter
Parameters for data sets
1-862 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
p3831[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M1 / Friction M1
p3832[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M2 / Friction M2
p3833[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M3 / Friction M3
p3834[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M4 / Friction M4
p3835[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M5 / Friction M5
p3836[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M6 / Friction M6
p3837[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M7 / Friction M7
p3838[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M8 / Friction M8
p3839[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M9 / Friction M9
p3846[0...n] Friction characteristic record ramp-up/ramp-down time / Frict rec t_RFG
p3847[0...n] Friction characteristic record warm-up time / Frict rec t_warm
r3925[0...n] Identification final display / Ident final_disp
r3927[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW
r3928[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config
r3998[0...n] First drive commissioning / First drv_comm
p7035[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control operating mode / Circ_I mode
p7036[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control proportional gain / Circ_I Kp
p7037[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control integral time / I_circ Tn
p7038[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control limit / I_circ limit
1.3.3 Parameters for encoder data sets (EDS)
The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the encoder data sets.
Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng, Type: EDS
p0141[0...n] Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number / Enc_interf comp_no
p0142[0...n] Encoder component number / Encoder comp_no
p0144[0...n] Sensor Module detection via LED / SM detection LED
p0145[0...n] Activate/deactivate encoder interface / Enc_intf act/deact
r0146[0...n] Encoder interface active/inactive / Enc_intf act/inact
r0147[0...n] Sensor Module EPROM data version / SM EEPROM version
r0148[0...n] Sensor Module firmware version / SM FW version
p0400[0...n] Encoder type selection / Enc_typ sel
p0401[0...n] Encoder type, OEM selection / Enc type OEM sel
p0402[0...n] Gearbox type selection / Gearbox type sel
p0404[0...n] Encoder configuration effective / Enc_config eff
p0405[0...n] Square-wave encoder track A/B / Sq-wave enc A/B
p0407[0...n] Linear encoder grid division / Enc grid div
p0408[0...n] Rotary encoder pulse No. / Rot enc pulse No.
p0410[0...n] Encoder inversion actual value / Enc inv act value
p0411[0...n] Measuring gear, configuration / Meas gear config
p0412[0...n] Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual / Abs rot rev
p0413[0...n] Measuring gear, position tracking tolerance window / Pos track window
p0414[0...n] Redundant coarse position value relevant bits (identified) / Relevant bits
p0415[0...n] Gx_XIST1 Coarse position safe most significant bit (identified) / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB
p0418[0...n] Fine resolution Gx_XIST1 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST1
p0419[0...n] Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST2
p0420[0...n] Encoder connection / Enc_connection
p0421[0...n] Absolute encoder rotary multiturn resolution / Enc abs multiturn
p0422[0...n] Absolute encoder linear measuring step resolution / Enc abs meas step
p0423[0...n] Absolute encoder rotary singleturn resolution / Enc abs singleturn
p0424[0...n] Encoder, linear zero mark distance / Enc lin ZM_dist
Parameters for data sets
Parameter
1-863
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
p0425[0...n] Encoder, rotary zero mark distance / Enc rot dist ZM
p0426[0...n] Encoder zero mark differential distance / Enc diff distance
p0427[0...n] Encoder SSI baud rate / Enc SSI baud rate
p0428[0...n] Encoder SSI monoflop time / Enc SSI t_monoflop
p0429[0...n] Encoder SSI configuration / Enc SSI config
p0430[0...n] Sensor Module configuration / SM config
p0431[0...n] Angular commutation offset / Ang_com offset
p0432[0...n] Gearbox factor, encoder revolutions / Grbx_fact enc_rev
p0433[0...n] Gearbox factor, motor/load revolutions / Grbx_fact mot_rev
p0434[0...n] Encoder SSI error bit / Enc SSI error bit
p0435[0...n] Encoder SSI alarm bit / Enc SSI alarm bit
p0436[0...n] Encoder SSI parity bit / Enc SSI parity bit
p0437[0...n] Sensor Module configuration extended / SM config ext
p0438[0...n] Squarewave encoder filter time / Enc t_filt
p0439[0...n] Encoder ramp-up time / Enc ramp-up time
p0440[0...n] Copy encoder serial number / Copy enc ser_no
p0441[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 1 / Enc comm ser_no 1
p0442[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 2 / Enc comm ser_no 2
p0443[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 3 / Enc comm ser_no 3
p0444[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 4 / Enc comm ser_no 4
p0445[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 5 / Enc comm ser_no 5
p0446[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits before the absolute value / Enc SSI bit before
p0447[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits absolute value / Enc SSI bit val
p0448[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits after the absolute value / Enc SSI bit after
p0449[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits, filler bits / Enc SSI fill bits
p0453[0...n] Measuring time pulse encoder evaluation zero speed / t_meas enc_eva n_0
p0493[0...n] Zero mark selection, input terminal / ZM_sel inp_term
p4600[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 1 sensor type / Temp_sens 1 type
p4601[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 2 sensor type / Temp_sens 2 type
p4602[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 3 sensor type / Temp_sens 3 type
p4603[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 4 sensor type / Temp_sens 4 type
p4670[0...n] Analog sensor configuration / Ana_sens config
p4671[0...n] Analog sensor input / Ana_sens inp
p4672[0...n] Analog sensor channel A voltage at actual value zero / Ana_sens A U at 0
p4673[0...n] Analog sensor channel A voltage per encoder period / Ana_sens A U/per
p4674[0...n] Analog sensor channel B voltage at actual value zero / Ana_sens B U at 0
p4675[0...n] Analog sensor channel B voltage per encoder period / Ana_sens B U/per
p4676[0...n] Analog sensor range limit threshold / Ana_sens lim thr
p4677[0...n] Analog sensor LVDT configuration / Ana_sens LVDT conf
p4680[0...n] Zero mark monitoring tolerance permissible / ZM_monit tol perm
p4681[0...n] Zero mark monitoring, tolerance window limit 1 positive / ZM tol lim 1 pos
p4682[0...n] Zero mark monitoring, tolerance window limit 1 negative / ZM tol lim 1 neg
p4683[0...n] Zero mark monitoring tolerance window alarm threshold positive / ZM tol A_thr pos
p4684[0...n] Zero mark monitoring tolerance window alarm threshold negative / ZM tol A_thr neg
p4685[0...n] Speed actual value mean value generation / n_act mean val
p4686[0...n] Zero mark minimum length / ZM min length
Parameter
Parameters for data sets
1-864 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1.3.4 Parameters for motor data sets (MDS)
The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the motor data sets.
Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng, Type: MDS
p0131[0...n] Motor component number / Mot comp_no
p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel
p0301[0...n] Motor code number selection / Mot code No. sel
r0302[0...n] Motor code number of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ / Motor code Mot DLQ
r0303[0...n] Motor status word of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ / Mot ZSW Mot DLQ
p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot V_rated
p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated
p0306[0...n] Number of motors connected in parallel / Motor qty
p0307[0...n] Rated motor power / Mot P_rated
p0308[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated
p0309[0...n] Rated motor efficiency / Mot eta_rated
p0310[0...n] Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated
p0311[0...n] Rated motor speed / Mot n_rated
r0313[0...n] Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) / Mot PolePairNo act
p0314[0...n] Motor pole pair number / Mot pole pair No.
p0316[0...n] Motor torque constant / Mot kT
p0318[0...n] Motor stall current / Mot I_standstill
p0320[0...n] Motor rated magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rated
p0322[0...n] Maximum motor speed / Mot n_max
p0323[0...n] Maximum motor current / Mot I_max
p0324[0...n] Winding maximum speed / Winding n_max
p0325[0...n] Motor pole position identification current, 1st phase / Mot PolID I 1st ph
p0327[0...n] Optimum motor load angle / Mot phi_load opt
p0328[0...n] Motor reluctance torque constant / Mot kT_reluctance
p0329[0...n] Motor pole position identification current / Mot PolID current
r0330[0...n] Rated motor slip / Mot slip_rated
r0331[0...n] Actual motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rtd act
r0332[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated
r0333[0...n] Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated
r0334[0...n] Actual motor-torque constant / Mot kT act
p0335[0...n] Motor cooling type / Motor cooling type
r0336[0...n] Actual rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated act
r0337[0...n] Rated motor EMF / Mot EMF_rated
r0339[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot V_rated
p0341[0...n] Motor moment of inertia / Mot M_mom of inert
p0342[0...n] Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia / Mot MomInert Ratio
r0343[0...n] Identified motor rated current / Mot I_rated ident
p0344[0...n] Motor weight (for the thermal motor model) / Mot weight th mod
r0345[0...n] Nominal motor starting time / Mot t_start_rated
p0346[0...n] Motor excitation build-up time / Mot t_excitation
p0347[0...n] Motor de-excitation time / Mot t_de-excitat.
p0350[0...n] Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold
p0352[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable cold
p0353[0...n] Motor series inductance / Mot L_series
p0354[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / damping resistance d axis / Mot R_r cold / RDd
p0355[0...n] Motor damping resistance, q axis / Mot R_damp q
p0356[0...n] Motor stator leakage inductance / Mot L_stator leak.
p0357[0...n] Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator d
Parameters for data sets
Parameter
1-865
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
p0358[0...n] Motor rotor leakage inductance / damping inductance, d axis / Mot L_r leak / LDd
p0359[0...n] Motor damping inductance, q axis / Mot L_damp q
p0360[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance/magn. inductance, d axis saturated / Mot Lh/Lh d sat
p0361[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance q axis, saturated / Mot L_magn q sat
p0362[0...n] Saturation characteristic flux 1 / Mot saturat.flux 1
p0363[0...n] Saturation characteristic flux 2 / Mot saturat.flux 2
p0364[0...n] Saturation characteristic flux 3 / Mot saturat.flux 3
p0365[0...n] Saturation characteristic flux 4 / Mot saturat.flux 4
p0366[0...n] Saturation characteristic I_mag 1 / Mot sat. I_mag 1
p0367[0...n] Saturation characteristic I_mag 2 / Mot sat. I_mag 2
p0368[0...n] Saturation characteristic I_mag 3 / Mot sat. I_mag 3
p0369[0...n] Saturation characteristic I_mag 4 / Mot sat. I_mag 4
r0370[0...n] Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold
r0372[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable
r0373[0...n] Motor rated stator resistance / Mot R_stator rated
r0374[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / damping resistance d axis / Mot R_r cold / RDd
r0375[0...n] Motor damping resistance, q axis / Mot R_damp q
r0376[0...n] Rated motor rotor resistance / Mot R_rotor rated
r0377[0...n] Motor leakage inductance, total / Mot L_leak total
r0378[0...n] Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator_d
r0380[0...n] Motor damping inductance, d axis / Mot L_damping_d
r0381[0...n] Motor damping inductance, q axis / Mot L_damping_q
r0382[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance transformed / Lh d axis saturated / Mot L_m tr/Lhd sat
r0383[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance q axis, saturated / Mot L_magn q sat
r0384[0...n] Motor rotor time constant / damping time constant d axis / Mot T_rotor/T_Dd
r0385[0...n] Motor damping time constant, q axis / Mot T_Dq
r0386[0...n] Motor stator leakage time constant / Mot T_stator leak
r0387[0...n] Motor stator leakage time constant, q axis / Mot T_Sleak /T_Sq
p0389[0...n] Excitation rated no-load current / Exc I_noload_rated
p0390[0...n] Rated excitation current / Exc I_rated
p0391[0...n] Current controller adaptation, starting point KP / I_adapt pt KP
p0392[0...n] Current controller adaptation, starting point KP adapted / I_adapt pt KP adap
p0393[0...n] Current controller adaptation P gain scaling / I_adapt Kp scal
r0395[0...n] Actual stator resistance / R_stator act
r0396[0...n] Actual rotor resistance / R_rotor act
p0398[0...n] Angle magnet. decoupling (cross saturation) coeff 1 / Magn decoupl C1
p0399[0...n] Angle magnet. decoupling (cross saturation) coeff 3 / Magn decoupl C3
p0530[0...n] Bearing type selection / Bearing type sel
p0531[0...n] Bearing code number selection / Bear. code num sel
p0532[0...n] Bearing maximum speed / Bearing n_max
p0600[0...n] Motor temperature sensor for monitoring / Mot temp_sensor
p0601[0...n] Motor temperature sensor type / Mot_temp_sens type
p0604[0...n] Motor temperature alarm threshold / Mot_temp al thr
p0605[0...n] Motor temperature fault threshold / Mot_temp flt thr
p0606[0...n] Motor temperature timer / Mot_temp timer
p0607[0...n] Temperature sensor fault timer / Sensor fault time
p0610[0...n] Motor overtemperature response / Mot temp response
p0611[0...n] I2t motor model thermal time constant / I2t mot_mod T
p0612[0...n] Thermal motor model configuration / Therm Mot_mod conf
p0615[0...n] I2t motor model fault threshold / I2t mot_mod thresh
p0616[0...n] Motor overtemperature alarm threshold 1 / Mot temp alarm 1
p0620[0...n] Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance / Mot therm_adapt R
p0621[0...n] Identification stator resistance after restart / Rst_ident Restart
Parameter
Parameters for data sets
1-866 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
p0622[0...n] Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after powering up again / t_excit Rs_id
p0624[0...n] Motor Temperature Offset PT100 / Mot T_offset PT100
p0625[0...n] Motor ambient temperature / Mot T_ambient
p0626[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator core / Mot T_over core
p0627[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator winding / Mot T_over stator
p0628[0...n] Motor overtemperature rotor winding / Mot T_over rotor
r0630[0...n] Motor temperature model ambient temperature / MotTMod T_amb.
r0631[0...n] Motor temperature model, stator core temperature / MotTMod T_core
r0632[0...n] Motor temperature model, stator winding temperature / MotTMod T_copper
r0633[0...n] Motor temperature model, rotor temperature / MotTMod T_rotor
p0634[0...n] Q flux flux constant unsaturated / PSIQ KPSI UNSAT
p0635[0...n] Q flux quadrature axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KIQ UNSAT
p0636[0...n] Q flux direct axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KID UNSAT
p0637[0...n] Q flux flux gradient saturated / PSIQ Grad SAT
p0643[0...n] Overvoltage protection for synchronous motors / Overvolt_protect
p0650[0...n] Actual motor operating hours / Mot t_oper act
p0651[0...n] Motor operating hours maintenance interval / Mot t_op maint
p0652[0...n] Motor stator resistance, scaling / Mot R_stator scal
p0653[0...n] Motor stator leakage inductance, scaling / Mot L_S_leak scal
p0655[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance, d axis saturated scaling / Mot L_m d sat scal
p0656[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance, q axis, saturated scaling / Mot L_m q sat scal
p0657[0...n] Motor damping inductance, d axis scaling / Mot L_damp d scal
p0658[0...n] Motor damping inductance, q axis scaling / Mot L_damp q scal
p0659[0...n] Motor damping resistance, d axis scaling / Mot R_damp d scal
p0660[0...n] Motor damping resistance, q axis scaling / Mot R_damp q scal
p0826[0...n] Motor changeover, motor number / Mot_chng mot No.
p0827[0...n] Motor changeover status word bit number / Mot_chg ZSW bitNo.
p1231[0...n] Armature short-circuit / DC brake configuration / ASC config
p1232[0...n] DC braking, braking current / DCBRK I_brake
p1233[0...n] DC braking time / DCBRK time
p1234[0...n] Speed at the start of DC braking / DCBRK n_start
p1236[0...n] Ext. armature short-cct., contactor feedback signal monit. time / ASC ext t_monit
p1237[0...n] External armature short-circuit, waiting time when opening / ASC ext t_wait
p1909[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW
p1980[0...n] Pole position identification technique / PolID technique
p1982[0...n] Pole position identification selection / PolID selection
p1991[0...n] Motor changeover, angular commutation correction / Ang_com corr
p1999[0...n] Ang. commutation offset calibr. and pole position ID - scaling / ComOffsCalib scal
p4610[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 1 sensor type MDS / Temp sens1 typ MDS
p4611[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 2 sensor type MDS / Temp sens2 typ MDS
p4612[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 3 sensor type MDS / Temp sens3 typ MDS
p4613[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 4 sensor type MDS / Temp sens4 typ MDS
Parameters for data sets
Parameter
1-867
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1.3.5 Parameters for power unit data sets (PDS)
The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the power unit data sets.
Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng, Type: PDS
p0121[0...n] Power unit component number / PU comp_no
p0124[0...n] Power unit detection via LED / PU detection LED
p0125[0...n] Activate/deactivate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact
r0126[0...n] Power unit components active/inactive / PU comp act/inact
r0127[0...n] Power unit version EPROM data / PU EPROM version
r0128[0...n] Power unit, firmware version / PU FW version
r0200[0...n] Power unit code number actual / PU code no. act
p0201[0...n] Power unit code number / PU code no
r0203[0...n] Actual power unit type / PU actual type
r0204[0...n] Power unit hardware properties / PU HW property
p0251[0...n] Operating hours counter power unit fan / PU fan t_oper
p0895[0...n] BI: Activate/deactivate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact
p3901[0...n] Power unit EEPROM Vdc offset calibration / PU EEPROM Vdc_offs
p7001[0...n] Par_circuit power units enable / PU enable
r7002[0...n] Par_circuit status power units / Status PU
r7020[0...n] CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase U / Phase U curr dev
r7021[0...n] CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase V / Phase V curr dev
r7022[0...n] CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase W / Phase W curr dev
r7030[0...n] CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage deviation / Vdc deviation
p7040[0...n] Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_lockout U
p7042[0...n] Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_lockout V
p7044[0...n] Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_lockout W
r7050[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current phase U / Circ_I_phase U
r7051[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current phase V / Circ_I_phase V
r7052[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current phase W / Circ_I_phase W
r7200[0...n] Par_circuit power unit overload I2T / PU overload I2T
r7201[0...n] CO: Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. inverter / PU temp max inv
r7202[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. depletion layer / PU TempMaxDepLayer
r7203[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. rectifier / PU temp max rect
r7204[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures air intake / PU temp air intake
r7205[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures electronics / PU temp electr
r7206[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 1 / PU temp inv 1
r7207[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 2 / PU temp inv 2
r7208[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 3 / PU temp inv 3
r7209[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 4 / PU temp inv 4
r7210[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 5 / PU temp inv 5
r7211[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 6 / PU temp inv 6
r7212[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 1 / PU temp rect 1
r7213[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 2 / PU temp rect 2
r7214[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 1 / PU temp DepLayer 1
r7215[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 2 / PU temp DepLayer 2
r7216[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 3 / PU temp DepLayer 3
r7217[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 4 / PU temp DepLayer 4
r7218[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 5 / PU temp DepLayer 5
r7219[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 6 / PU temp DepLayer 6
r7220[0...n] CO: Par_circuit drive output current maximum / Drv I_outp max
r7222[0...n] CO: Par_circuit absolute current actual value / I_act abs val
r7223[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase U / I_phase U act val
Parameter
Parameters for data sets
1-868 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
r7224[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase V / I_phase V act val
r7225[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase W / I_phase W act val
r7226[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase U offset / I_phase U offset
r7227[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase V offset / I_phase V offset
r7228[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase W offset / I_phase W offset
r7229[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value sum U, V, W / I_phase sum UVW
r7230[0...n] CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage actual value / Vdc_act
r7231[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase U / V_phase U act val
r7232[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase V / V_phase V act val
r7233[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase W / V_phase W act val
r7240[0...n] Par_circuit gating unit status word 1 / Gating unit ZSW1
2-869© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Function diagrams 2
Contents
2.1 Table of contents 2-870
2.2 Explanations for the function diagrams 2-876
2.3 Overviews 2-881
2.4 CU320-2 input/output terminals 2-893
2.5 PROFIdrive 2-900
2.6 Internal control/status words 2-932
2.7 Sequence control 2-945
2.8 Brake control 2-948
2.9 Safety Integrated 2-953
2.10 Setpoint channel 2-959
2.11 Encoder evaluation 2-968
2.12 Vector control 2-971
2.13 Technology functions 2-994
2.14 Technology controller 2-1000
2.15 Signals and monitoring functions 2-1006
2.16 Diagnostics 2-1014
2.17 Data sets 2-1020
2.18 Terminal Board 30 (TB30) 2-1026
2.19 Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) 2-1031
2.20 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) 2-1038
2.21 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) 2-1049
2.22 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) 2-1053
Function diagrams
Table of contents
2-870 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.1 Table of contents
2.2 Explanations for the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-876
1020 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-877
1021 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-878
1022 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-879
1030 – Handling BICO technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-880
2.3 Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-881
1510 – CU320 input/output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-882
1520 – PROFIdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-883
1530 – Internal control/status words, data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-884
1550 – Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-885
1680 – Vector control, encoder evaluations (position, speed, temperature) . . . . . . . . . 2-886
1690 – Vector control, V/f control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-887
1700 – Vector control, closed-loop speed control, and generation of torque limits . . . . 2-888
1710 – Vector control, closed-loop current control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-889
1750 – Monitoring functions, faults, alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-890
1790 – Terminal Board 30 (TB30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-891
1840 – Terminal Module 31 (TM31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-892
2.4 CU320-2 input/output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-893
2120 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3, DI 16, DI 17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-894
2121 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 4 to DI 7, DI 20, DI 21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-895
2130 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-896
2131 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 to DI/DO 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-897
2132 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 12 to DI/DO 13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-898
2133 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 14 to DI/DO 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-899
2.5 PROFIdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-900
2410 – PROFIBUS (PB)/PROFINET (PN), addresses and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-902
2420 – Standard telegrams and process data (PZD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-903
2422 – Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data (PZD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-904
2423 – Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data (PZD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-905
2425 – STW1_BM control word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . 2-906
2426 – STW2_BM control word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . 2-907
2428 – ZSW1_BM status word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . 2-908
Table of contents
Function diagrams
2-871
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2429 – ZSW2_BM status word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . 2-909
2439 – PZD receive signals interconnection profile-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-910
2440 – PZD receive signals interconnection manufacturer-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-911
2441 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-912
2442 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-913
2444 – STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-914
2449 – PZD send signals interconnection profile-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-915
2450 – PZD send signals interconnection manufacturer-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-916
2451 – ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-917
2452 – ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-918
2454 – ZSW2 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-919
2468 – IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . 2-920
2470 – IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-921
2472 – IF1 status words, free interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-922
2481 – IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . 2-923
2483 – IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-924
2485 – IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . 2-925
2487 – IF2 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-926
2489 – IF2 status words, free interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-927
2495 – CU_STW control word 1 Control Unit interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-928
2496 – CU_ZSW1 status word 1 Control Unit interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-929
2497 – A_DIGITAL interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-930
2498 – E_DIGITAL interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-931
2.6 Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-932
2501 – Control word, sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-933
2503 – Status word, sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-934
2505 – Control word, setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-935
2520 – Control word, speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-936
2522 – Status word, speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-937
2526 – Status word, closed loop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-938
2530 – Status word, closed-loop current control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-939
2534 – Status word, monitoring functions 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-940
2536 – Status word, monitoring functions 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-941
2537 – Status word, monitoring functions 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-942
Function diagrams
Table of contents
2-872 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2546 – Control word, faults/alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-943
2548 – Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-944
2.7 Sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-945
2610 – Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-946
2634 – Missing enable signals, line contactor control, logic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-947
2.8 Brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-948
2701 – Simple brake control (r0108.14 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-949
2704 – Extended brake control, zero speed detection (r0108.14 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-950
2707 – Extended brake control, open/close brake (r0108.14 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-951
2711 – Extended brake control, signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-952
2.9 Safety Integrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-953
2800 – Basic functions, parameter manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-954
2802 – Basic functions, monitoring and faults/alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-955
2804 – Basic functions, status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-956
2810 – Basic functions, STO (Safe Torque Off), SS1 (Safe Stop 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-957
2814 – Basic functions, SBC (Safe Brake Control), SBA (Safe Brake Adapter) . . . . . . 2-958
2.10 Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-959
3010 – Fixed speed setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-960
3020 – Motorized potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-961
3030 – Main/additional setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-962
3040 – Direction of rotation limiting and reversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-963
3050 – Skip frequency bands and speed limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-964
3060 – Basic ramp-function generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-965
3070 – Extended ramp-function generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-966
3080 – Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-967
2.11 Encoder evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-968
4704 – Raw signal sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-969
4715 – Actual speed value and pole pos. sens., motor enc. ASM/SM (encoder 1) . . . . 2-970
2.12 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-971
6030 – Speed setpoint, droop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-972
6031 – Pre-control balancing for reference/acceleration model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-973
6040 – Speed controller with/without encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-974
Table of contents
Function diagrams
2-873
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
6050 – Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-975
6060 – Torque setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-976
6220 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-977
6300 – V/f characteristic and voltage boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-978
6310 – Resonance damping and slip compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-979
6320 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-980
6490 – Closed-loop speed control configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-981
6491 – Flux control configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-982
6630 – Upper/lower torque limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-983
6640 – Current/power/torque limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-984
6710 – Current setpoint filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-985
6714 – Iq and Id controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-986
6721 – Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-987
6722 – Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-988
6723 – Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-989
6724 – Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-990
6730 – Interface to Motor Module (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-991
6731 – Interface to the Motor Module (PEM, p0300 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-992
6799 – Display signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-993
2.13 Technology functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-994
7010 – Friction characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-995
7014 – External armature short-circuit (EASC, p0300 = 2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-996
7016 – Internal armature short-circuit (IASC, p0300 = 2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-997
7017 – DC brake (p0300 = 1xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-998
7020 – Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-999
2.14 Technology controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1000
7950 – Fixed values, binary selection (r0108.16 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1001
7951 – Fixed values, direct selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216[D] = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1002
7954 – Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1003
7958 – Closed loop control (r0108.16 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1004
7960 – DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1005
2.15 Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1006
8010 – Speed messages 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1007
8011 – Speed messages 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1008
Function diagrams
Table of contents
2-874 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
8012 – Torque messages, motor locked/stalled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1009
8013 – Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1010
8014 – Thermal monitoring, power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1011
8016 – Thermal monitoring, motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1012
8017 – Thermal I2t motor model (PEM, p0300 = 2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1013
2.16 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1014
8060 – Fault buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1015
8065 – Alarm buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1016
8070 – Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1017
8075 – Fault/alarm configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1018
8134 – Measuring sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1019
2.17 Data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1020
8560 – Command data sets (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1021
8565 – Drive data sets (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1022
8570 – Encoder data sets (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1023
8575 – Motor data sets (MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1024
8580 – Power unit data sets (PDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1025
2.18 Terminal Board 30 (TB30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1026
9100 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1027
9102 – Digital outputs, isolated (DO 0 to DO 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1028
9104 – Analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1029
9106 – Analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1030
2.19 Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1031
9204 – Receive telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1032
9206 – Receive telegram, predefined connection set (p8744 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1033
9208 – Send telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1034
9210 – Send telegram, predefined connection set (p8744 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1035
9220 – Control word CANopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1036
9226 – Status word CANopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1037
2.20 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1038
9550 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1039
9552 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 4 to DI 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1040
9556 – Digital relay outputs, isolated (DO 0 to DO 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1041
Table of contents
Function diagrams
2-875
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
9560 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1042
9562 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 to DI/DO 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1043
9566 – Analog input 0 (AI 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1044
9568 – Analog input 1 (AI 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1045
9572 – Analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1046
9576 – Temperature evaluation KTY/PTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1047
9577 – Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1048
2.21 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1049
9880 – Analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1050
9886 – Temperature evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1051
9887 – Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1052
2.22 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1053
9912 – Control word interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1054
Function diagrams
Explanations for the function diagrams
2-876 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.2 Explanations for the function diagrams
Function diagrams
1020 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 1) 2-877
1021 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 2) 2-878
1022 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 3) 2-879
1030 – Handling BICO technology 2-880
Explanations for the function diagrams
Function diagrams
2-877
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-1 1020 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 1)
- 1020 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_1020_51_eng.vsd
DO: All objects
SINAMICS
27.10.08 V04.03.01
Explanations for the function diagrams - Explanation of the symbols (Part 1)
Data sets
Connectors/binectors
Parameter name
rxxxx
rxxxx Connector/binector output CO/BO
Symbol Meaning
Parameter belongs to the
Command Data Set (CDS).
Parameter belongs to the
Drive Data Set (DDS).
Parameter belongs to the
Encoder Data Set (EDS).
Parameter belongs to the
Motor Data Set (MDS).
Parameter belongs to the
Power unit Data Set (PDS).
Parameter name
[Unit]
rxxxx[y] or
rxxxx[y...z] or
rxxxx[y].ww or
rxxxx.ww
pxxxx[y] or
pxxxx[y...z] or
pxxxx[y].ww or
pxxxx.ww
from ... to
(xxxx[y].ww)
(Def)
(Def.w)
Information on parameters, binectors, connectors
Parameter name (up to 18 characters)
[dimension unit]
"r" = monitoring parameter. These parameters are read-only
"xxxx" stands for the parameter number
"[y]" specifies the valid index, "[y...z]" specifies the applicable index range
".ww" specifies the bit number (e.g. 0...15).
"p" = setting parameter. These parameters can be changed.
"xxxx" stands for the parameter number,
"[y]" specifies the applicable index, "[y...z]" specifies the applicable index range
".ww" specifies the bit number (e.g. 0...15).
Value range.
Parameter number (xxxx) with Index number [y] and bit number .ww.
Factory setting.
Factory setting with bit number as prefix.
Diagram references for setting parameters that occur a multiple number of times.
[Function diagram number, signal path]
Cross references between diagrams
[aaaa.b] Text = Unique signal designation
aaaa = Signal goes to target diagram aaa
b = Signal goes to signal path b
[cccc.d] Text
Text
Text = Unique signal designation
cccc = Signal comes from source diagram cccc
d = Signal comes from signal path d
MeaningSymbol
Symbol Meaning
Sampling times
Setting parameter with factory setting to
select the time slice.
Symbol Meaning
MeaningSymbol
Parameter
Monitoring parameter
(parameter may appear .
Monitoring parameter
with index.
Setting parameter
(if the parameter appears
a multiple number of times,
then diagram references
are specified).
Setting parameter with
index (if the parameter
appears a multiple number
of times, then diagram
references are specified).
Meaning
Symbol
According to presetting in p2048.
A static state is displayed here. The
sampling time data is not relevant.
There is no fixed sampling time for this
function. The processing takes place in
background. The cycle time depends on
the computational load of the control unit.
Time slice depending on the rated pulse
frequency of the motor module.
"[y]" specifies the applicable index.
Time slice depending on the pre-setting
p0112 of the drive object.
"[y]" specifies the applicable index.
Signal path The function diagrams are sub-divided into signal
paths 1...8 in order to facilitate orientation.
Cross references for control bits
Symbol
[aaaa.b]
pxxxx pxxxx= Original parameter of signal
aaaa = Signal comes from source diagram aaaa
b = Signal comes from signal path b
Meaning
[aaaa.b]
To "function diagram name" [aaaa.b] = for binectors.
Parameter name [Unit]
rxxxx [x...y]
Parameter name [Unit]
Index name
rxxxx[x]
[aaaa.b]
Parameter name
from ... to [Unit]
pxxxx[y...z] (Def)
[aaaa.b]
Parameter name
Index name
from ... to [Unit]
pxxxx[y] (Def)
pxxxx[P]
pxxxx[M]
pxxxx[E]
pxxxx[D]
pxxxx[C]
p0115[y] (Drive Object)
p0115[y] (Motor Modules)
PROFIdrive sampling time
Refer to [1020.7]
Background
Not relevant
Refer to [1020.7]
pxxxx[Y] (ZZZ.ZZ μs)
CAN bus sampling time Presetting in p8848.
name
(xxxx [y])
pxxxx[y...z]
name
(xxxx [x])
pxxxx[y]
rxxxx[y...z]
name [unit]
rxxxx[y]
name [unit]
(Def)
name
pxxxx[y...z]
(Def)
name
pxxxx[y]
name
rxxxx
name
rxxxx.y
(Def)
name
pxxxx
name
(xxxx)
pxxxx Binektor input BI with
factory setting (Def).
Connectors
Connector input CI with index
range [y...z]
Connector input CI.
Connector output CO with [dimension
unit] and index range [y...z].
Connector output CO
[dimension unit] and with index [y]
MeaningSymbol
Connector input CI with index [y]
Binector output BO with
bit y.
Binector output BO.
Binector input BI with
index [y] and factory
setting (Def).
Binector input BI with
index range [y...z] and
factory setting (Def).
Binectors
Symbol Meaning
Function diagrams
Explanations for the function diagrams
2-878 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-2 1021 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 2)
- 1021 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_1021_51_eng.vsd
DO: All objects
SINAMICS
01.07.08 V04.03.01
Explanations for the function diagrams - Explanation of the symbols (Part 2)
Symbols for logic functions
Pre-assigned binectors and connectors
Logical inversion
AND element
with logical inversion
of an input signal
Symbols for computational and closed-loop
control functions
Sign reversal
y = -x
Absolute value generator
y = |x|
Divider
y =
2
1
x
x
Comparator
Output y = a logical "1", if the analog
signal x > 0, i.e. is positive.
Threshold value switch 1/0
Outputs at y a logical "1" if x < S.
Simple changeover switch
The switch position is shown according to
the factory setting
(in this case, switch position 1 in the
default state on delivery).
Limiter
x is limited to the upper limit LU and the lower
limit LL and output at y.
The digital signals MLU and MLL have the
value "1", if the upper or lower limit is active.
1
&
R/S flip-flop
S = setting input
R = reset input
Q = non-inverted output
= inverted output
Q
xy
xy
>0
-1
xy
x
2
x
1
y
S Q
R Q
p2900[D]
Fixed value 1
p2901[D]
Fixed value 2
-10 000.00...10 000.00 [%]
p2900[D] (0.00)
-10 000.00...10 000.00 [%]
p2901[D] (0.00)
Fixed percentage values
S
y
x1
0
Threshold value switch 0/1
Outputs at y a logical "1" if x > S.
0
1
y
x
S
Symbols for computational and
closed-loop control functions
Differentiator
y =
dt
dx
Sample & Hold element
Sample and hold element.
y = x if SET = 1
(not retentively saved at POWER OFF)
1
0
pxxxx
LU
LL MLL
MLU
xy
Fixed speed values
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [1/min]
p1001[D] (0.000) p1001[D]
n_set_fixed 1
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [1/min]
p1015[D] (0.000) p1015[D]
n_set_fixed 15
Fixed torque values
-100 000.00...100 000.00 [Nm]
p2930[D] (0.00) p2930[D]
Fixed value M [Nm]
dx
dt
xy
Pre-assigned binectors and connectors
Pre-assigned binectors and connectors
Switch symbol
Threshold value 1/0 with
hysteresis
Outputs a logical "1" at y if x < S.
If x >= S + H then y returns to 0.
0
1
S
H
y
x
Threshold value 0/1 with
hysteresis
Outputs a logical "1" at y if x > S.
If x <= S - H then y returns to 0.
0
1
H
S
y
x
p2902[0...14]
[8] = Fixed value -5 %
[9] = Fixed value -10 %
[10] = Fixed value -20 %
[11] = Fixed value -50 %
[12] = Fixed value -100 %
[13] = Fixed value -150 %
[14] = Fixed value -200 %
p2902[0...14] (0.00)
SET
S & H
xy
Monitoring
Axxxxx
or
Fxxxxx
Symbol for monitoring
Monitoring
In the bottom right-hand corner of
the diagram.
Exclusiv-OR/XOR
y = 1 when x
1
x
2
is.
=1
x
1
y
x
2
Explanations for the function diagrams
Function diagrams
2-879
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-3 1022 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 3)
- 1022 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_1022_51_eng.vsd
DO: All objects
SINAMICS
19.01.09 V04.03.01
Explanations for the function diagrams - Explanation of the symbols (Part 3)
Switch-on delay
T0
xy
pxxxx
The digital signal x must have the value "1" without any interruption
during the time T before output y changes to "1".
PT1 element PT2 low pass
0T
Switch-off delay
xy
pxxxx
The digital signal x must have the value "0" without interruption during
the time T before output y changes to "0".
Delay (switch-on and switch-off)
T
1
T
2
T0
pxxxx
0T
pxxxx
xy
xy
The digital signal x must have the value "1" without interruption during
time T
1
or must have the value "0" during time T
2
before output y
changes its signal state.
xy
T
1
T
2
xy
pxxxx pxxxx
pxxxx pxxxx
x
TT TT
y
TT
x
y
x
TT
y
T
1
T
1
T
2
T
2
yx
H(s) =
s
2 fn_z 2 fn_z s+
+
s
2 fn_n
.
.
2 fn_n
D_n s
+
+
1
1
2
.
D_z 2
.
2
2
|y|
f
2nd Order Filter
fs
f_B
t
y
pxxxx
y
x
1
I
x
2
1
yx
f
|y|
fn
D
Mot U_rated p0304
U_output max r0071
Linear
p0310
Parabolic
U_output max r0071
p0310
Mot U_rated p0304
H(s) =
+
s
2 fn_n
.
2 fn_n
D_n s+1
2
.
2
Flux current control (FCC)
Dependent on the load current
Mot U_rated p0304
U_output max r0071
Mot f_rated
p0310
f_set
f_set
f_set
U_boost total r1315
U_boost total r1315
U_boost total r1315
Analog adder can be activated
The following applies to I = 1 signal: y = x
1
+ x
2
The following applies to I = 0 signal: y = x
1
Delay element, first order.
pxxxx = time constant
Natural frequency, numerator
fn_z
pxxxx
Damping, numerator
D_z
pxxxx
Natural frequency, denominator
fn_n
pxxxx
Damping, denominator
D_n
pxxxx
Used as bandstop filter
- center frequency fs: fn_z = fs
fn_n = fs
- bandwidth f_B: D_z = 0
D_n = f_B
fs2
.
Transfer function when used as general filter
Transfer function
2nd-order filter (bandstop/general filter)
Natural frequency, denominator
fn_n
pxxxx
Damping, denominator
D_n
pxxxx
Function diagrams
Explanations for the function diagrams
2-880 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-4 1030 – Handling BICO technology
- 1030 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_1030_51_eng.vsd
DO: All objects
SINAMICS
19.01.09 V04.03.01
Explanations for the function diagrams - Handling BICO technology
Handling BICO technology
r0723.15
r0723
Connector:
Binector:
Binectors are binary signals that can be freely interconnected (BO = Binector Output).
They represent a bit of a "BO:" display parameter (e.g. bit 15 from r0723).
Connectors are "analog signals" that can be freely interconnected (e.g. percentage variables, speeds or torques).
Connectors are also "CO:" display parameters (CO = Connector Output).
At the signal destination, the required binector or connector is selected using appropriate parameters:
"BI:" parameter for binectors (BI = Binector Input)
or
"CI:" parameter for connectors (CI = Connector Input)
Parameterization:
Example:
r0722.0
1
2
722.0
p1055 [C]
X122.1
r0967.8
[2120] [2501]
[3020]
Motorized potentiometer
Raise
Lower r1050
Parameterizing steps:
Main setpoint
1050
p1070[C]
[3030]
Jog setpoint 1
2
1 p1055[0] = 722.0
p1070[0] = 1050
Terminal X122.1 acts as "Jog bit 0".
The output of the motorized potentiometer acts as main setpoint for the speed controller.
Setpoint channelControl bit 8
Digital input
DI 0
Speed controller
The main setpoint for the speed controller (CI: p1070) should be received from the output of the motorized potentiometer (CO: r1050) and
the "jog" command (BI: p1055) from digital input DI 0 (BO: r0722.0, X122.1 terminal) on the CU320.
Overviews
Function diagrams
2-881
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.3 Overviews
Function diagrams
1510 – CU320 input/output terminals 2-882
1520 – PROFIdrive 2-883
1530 – Internal control/status words, data sets 2-884
1550 – Setpoint channel 2-885
1680 – Vector control, encoder evaluations (position, speed, temperature) 2-886
1690 – Vector control, V/f control 2-887
1700 – Vector control, closed-loop speed control, and generation of torque limits 2-888
1710 – Vector control, closed-loop current control 2-889
1750 – Monitoring functions, faults, alarms 2-890
1790 – Terminal Board 30 (TB30) 2-891
1840 – Terminal Module 31 (TM31) 2-892
Function diagrams
Overviews
2-882 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-5 1510 – CU320 input/output terminals
- 1510 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_1510_51_eng.vsd
DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_S, CU_SL
SINAMICS
17.07.09 V04.03.01
Overviews - CU320-2 input/output terminals
<1> For SERVO and VECTOR (except for G130/G150), the following applies:
Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735], [4740]).
<2> Jumper open, electrical isolation for DI 0 … DI 7, DI 16, DI 17, DI 20, DI 21.
4 digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional
6 digital inputs, electrically isolated
1
r0722.4 r0723.4
1
r0722.21 r0723.21
1
0
1
0
p0742
1
r0722.12 r0723.12
p0728.12
p0728.15
p0745
1
r0722.15 r0723.15
[2132]
[2133]
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
[2121]
CU320-2 Simulation for DI 0...DI 21
1
0
1 = Simulation on
p0795.0...21
Simulation signals
p0796.0...21
r0722.0...21
r0721.0...21
1
r0723.0...21
+ 24 V
M
M
=
~
+M
24 V DC to the
next device
X124
M
+
M
+
DI 4
DI 5
DI 6
DI 7
M2
M
DI/DO 12 <1>
DI/DO 13 <1>
M
DI/DO 14 <1>
DI/DO 15 <1>
M
<2>
1
2
3
4
5
6
X132
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
13
DI 20
DI 21
1
r0722.20 r0723.20
1
r0722.7 r0723.7
p0799 (4000.00 μs)
6 digital inputs, electrically isolated
4 digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional
[2120]
DI 0
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
M1
M
DI/DO 8 <1>
DI/DO 9 <1>
M
DI/DO 10 <1>
DI/DO 11 <1>
M
<2>
1
2
3
4
5
6
X122
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
13
DI 16
DI 17
1
r0722.0 r0723.0
1
r0722.17 r0723.17
... ...
1
r0722.16 r0723.16
1
r0722.3 r0723.3
1
0
1
0
p0738
1
r0722.8 r0723.8
p0728.8
p0728.11
p0741
1
r0722.11 r0723.11
[2131]
...
...
...
...
...
[2130]
Overviews
Function diagrams
2-883
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-6 1520 – PROFIdrive
- 1520 -
Function diagram
87654321
DO: All objects
S120/S150/G130/G150
03.11.09 V04.03.01
Overviews - PROFIdrive
Interconnecting the free receive telegram
. .
.
[2468] [2481]
[2470] [2472] [2483]
Interconnecting the free send telegram
Interconnecting the permanently assigned receive telegrams.
Signal Description Interconnection
[2439] ... [2447][2495][2497]
Interconnecting the permanently assigned send telegrams
Signal Description Interconnection
[2449] ... [2457][2496][2498]
Drive
n
Receive telegram
PROFIdrive
Send telegram
Drive
n
Permanently assigned telegrams
.........
... ... ...
.........
... ... ...
...
PZD 3
PZD 2
PZD 1
...
PZD 3
PZD 1
PZD 2
Free telegram
[2422] Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data (PZD)
Monitoring
Diagnostics
[2410] PROFIBUS address, diagnostics
PB address
p0918
Axxxxx
Fxxxxx
rxxxx
LED
[2420] Standard telegrams and process data (PZD)
Signal
assignment
Signal x
Telegram 1, 2 ...... 83
PD telegr_sel
p0922
PZD1
PZD32
Signal x
Telegram 102 ..... 352
PD Telegr_ausw
p0922
PZD1
PZD32
Signal assignment
Signal x
Telegram 370 ..... 392; 999
PD Telegr_sel
p0922
PZD1
PZD32
[2423] Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data
999
Signal assignment
fp_1520_54_eng.vsd
Function diagrams
Overviews
2-884 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-7 1530 – Internal control/status words, data sets
- 1530 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_1530_54_eng.vsd
DO: All objects
S120/S150/G130/G150
06.03.07 V04.03.01
Overviews - Internal control/status words, data sets
0
15
[2502]
STW3
Sequence control
0
15
[2501]
STW
sequence control
ZSW
sequence control
Setpoint Channel
0
15
[2505]
STW
setpoint channel
0
15
[2522]
Speed controller
0
15
[2520]
STW
n-controller
ZSW
n-controller
0
15
[2536]
Monitoring functions
0
15
[2534]
ZSW Monitoring
functions 1
ZSW Monitoring
functions 2
0
15
[2537]
ZSW Monitoring
functions 3
0
15
[2548]
ZSW
Faults/alarms 1
Faults/alarms
0
15
[2546]
STW
Faults/alarms
0
15
[2548]
ZSW
Faults/alarms 2
r1407
r1406
r1198
r0899
r0898
r2197
r2198
r2199
r2138
r2135
r2139
CDS - Command Data Sets
0
31
[8560]
STW
CDS selection
r0836
DDS - Drive Data Sets
0
31
[8565]
STW
DDS selection
r0837
MDS - Motor Data Sets
0
15
[8575]
STW
MDS selection
r0838[0]
EDS - Encoder Data Sets
0
2
[8570]
STW
EDS selection
r0838[1...3]
PDS - Power unit Data Sets
0
15
[8580]
STW
PDS selection
0
15
[2526]
ZSW
controller
r0056
Regelung
0
15
[2530]
ZSW
Current control
r1408
Current control
Overviews
Function diagrams
2-885
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-8 1550 – Setpoint channel
- 1550 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_1550_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV
SINAMICS
14.10.08 V04.03.01
Overviews - Setpoint channel
[3010] Fixed speed setpoints
r1050
r1024
Suppl setpoint
Main setpoint
p1075
+
+
[3030] Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling,
jogging
[3040] Direction limitation/-reversal [3050] Skip (suppression) bandwidth
and speed limiting
RFG setpoint
at the input
+ / -
Setpt after limit
n_set_5
n_set_4
[3070] Expanded ramp-function generator
[3060] Basic ramp-function
generator
Simulate ramp-function generator
n_act
Ramp-function
generator
tracking
+–
[3080] Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking
M_limit
ZSW
r1119
p1076
p1071
p1070
p1160
r1170
n_ctrl setp sum
r1114
pos
neg
(-1)
1
0
r1199
[3020] Motorized potentiometer
raise
lower
n_set_1
+
+
RFG selection
p1115
r1438
p1155
+
[3090] Dynamic Servo Control (DSC)
p1190
p1191
++
XERR
x_act
+–
Kp
p1430
n_cmd speed pre-control signal
KPC
n_set DSC
[5020.4]
[5020.1]
n_pre_control
DSC position
controller
Interpolator
Deadtime element
from
PROFIdrive
[1590.1]
[1700.1]
r1150
RFG n_set at outp
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
Jog 2
r0898.9
Jog 1
r0898.8
Jog setpoint 1
p1058
Jog setpoint 2
p1059
t
x,y xy
p0115[1]
p0115[3]
<1> Only for SERVO
<1>
<1>
Main setp scal
Suppl setp scal
Function diagrams
Overviews
2-886 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-9 1680 – Vector control, encoder evaluations (position, speed, temperature)
- 1680 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_1680_56_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
SINAMICS G130/G150
19.01.09 V04.03.01
Overviews - Vector control, encoder evaluations (position, speed, temperature)
[4704] [4715]
[8570]
Raw signal sensing Speed actual value and rotor position sensing for motor encoder (encoder 1)
Encoder Data Sets (EDS)
EDS[0]
EDS[1]
EDS[2]
3 encoder data sets
No encoder
Parameters,
encoder 1
Parameters,
encoder 2
Parameters,
encoder 3
p0400...p0425
p0187...p0189
SMx
~
x2
n
III
˽from sensor nTemperature
Faults/
alarms
F31100...A33904
r0061[0]
n_act unsmoothed
encoder 1
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed
Sensorless operation
n_act calculation
x2
n
p1441
0
1
2
99
Encoders 1
n_act_measurement
Fine resolution
Fine re-
solution
Raw position signals
(only from encoder 1)
[8016.1]
p0045
r0063[1]
n_act smoothed
<1> Only 1 encoder for G130/G150.
<1>
p0432
p0433
p0410.0 p1821
Invertierung
Overviews
Function diagrams
2-887
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-10 1690 – Vector control, V/f control
- 1690 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_1690_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
28.05.09 V04.03.01
Slip compensation
p1335
Overviews - Vector control, V/f control
-
+
+
+
+
Vdc_ctrl config
p1280
Vf Res_damp gain
p1338
+
Imax closed-loop
frequency control
p1340 ... p1341
Imax closed-loop
voltage control
p1345 ... p1346
Control mode
p1300
V_boost perm
p1310
V_boost accelerate
p1311
V_boost Anlauf
p1312
Eco mode
I_max reduction
[6310]
[6320] [6310] [6310]
[3050.8]
[8016.8]
[6730.4]
[6714.5]
[6730.4]
r0068
I_act abs.val.
[4715]
+
Mot PolePairNo act
r0313
60
[6300.8]
[6300]
f_set
100 ms
100 ms
r1119
RFG setpt at input Ramp-function
generator
[6030.1]
[3060]
I_max motor module MIN
Current limit
p0640
r0056
.
.
.
[2526]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[1] (Motor Modules)
r1359
Angle difference
Vf angle setpt
(0)
p1356
Sym act angle
p1358
–+
+
+
+
0
1
1
0
0°
180°
<1>
+
+
Current limit Var
(1)
p0641[C]
r0066
f_outp
f_outp smooth
r0024
r0094
Transformat_angle
r0025
V_outp smooth
r0072
V_output
Speed actual value
calculation
<1> Only for p1300 = 19 and p1302.1 = 1.
Soft starting
p1350
r1348
V/f Eco fac act v
I_max_ctrl V_outp
r1344
I_max_ctrl f_outp
r1343
Flying restart mode
p1200
r1170
n_ctrl setp sum
I_outp max
r0067
Function diagrams
Overviews
2-888 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-11 1700 – Vector control, closed-loop speed control, and generation of torque limits
- 1700 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_1700_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
19.01.09 V04.03.01
Overviews - Vector control, speed control and generation of the torque limits
r1170
n_ctrl setp sum
[6030] Speed setpoint filter
Droop input
p1488
Reference model
p1400.3
Symmetrizing
Forming the
torque limits
[6031] Acceleration model
[6060] Torque setpoint
[6630] Torque limit
[6640] Current-power limit
[6490] Closed-loop speed control configuration
[6491] Closed-loop flux control configuration
[2526] Status word closed-loop control
[2530] Status word closed-loop current control
p1400 p1401 r0056 r1408
p1530 p1531
p0640 r0067
I_outp max
r1538
M_max upper eff.
r1539
M_max lower eff.
p1522
p1523p1521
M-max lower/gen
p1520
M-max upper/mot
Kp
Integrator control
[6040] Speed controller
[4715] Speed actual value and pole position sensing motor encoder ASM/SM (encoder 1)
p1416
–
r0062
n_set after filter
For Kp
adaptation
p1496
p0342p0341
Kp adaptation Tn adaptation
p1460 p1470 p1462 p1472
[6050] Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation
Tn
r0063
n_act smooth
r0061[0]
n_act unsmoothed
encoder 1
p1300
(r1407.1)
n_model
p1541
p1503
r0079
M_set total
p1514
r1518
p1508
p1300
(r1407.1)
p1511
p1512
p1513
p1540
–
–
p1442 p1452 <1>
<1> Only for vector control without encoder.
<1>
p1300
(r1407.1)
n_pre-control [1710.1]
<1>
<1> <1>
p1501
r1438
n_ctrl n_set
r1515
[1710.1]
p0115[1] (Motor Modules)
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[2] (Motor Modules)
[1550.8]
[1710.1]
n_set I_comp
r1439
Overviews
Function diagrams
2-889
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-12 1710 – Vector control, closed-loop current control
f
|y|
- 1710 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_1710_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
30.01.09 V04.03.01
Overviews - Vector control, current control
p1655
Transformation
r0079
M_set total r0077
Iq_set
[6722] Field-weakening characteristic, Id setpoint
[6723] Field weakening control, flux controller for induction motors (p0300 = 1)
[6724] Field weakening controller for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2)
[6725] Flux setpoit, field weakening controller (FEM, p0300 = 5)
p1715
[6714] Current controller
Current model Motor model
(Observer)
[6730] Interface to the motor module for an induction motor (p0300 = 1)
[6731] Interface to the motor module for a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2)
p1717
p1715 p1717
Iq
M
f
|y|
r0078
Iq_act
p1611
p1570
p1580
p1610
[6710] Current setpoint filter
–
+
+
–
<1>
++
–
r0076
Id_act
iq controller
Iq
M
–
K
P
r0070
Vdc_act
r0066
f_outp
p1764 p1767
++
++
V_set
r0072
U_output
r0074
Modulation depth
<1>
+
<1> Only for vector control without encoder.
n_pre-control
n_model
[1700.5]
Field-weakening
controller
Field-weakening
characteristic
Current calculation
r0065
V_angle
V_set
[1700.1]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[0] (Motor Modules)
[1700.8]
[6722.1]
[6723.4]
[6724.4]
[6725.4]
V_phase actual value
I_phase actual value
V_output max
r0071
<2> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150.
<2>
<2>
r0075
Id_set
Function diagrams
Overviews
2-890 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-13 1750 – Monitoring functions, faults, alarms
- 1750 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_1750_51_eng.vsd
DO: All objects
SINAMICS
12.03.09 V04.03.01
Overviews - Monitoring functions, faults, alarms
System runtime
r0969
III
III
III
III
III
[8060] Fault buffer
[8065] Alarm buffer
Fxxxxx
Fyyyyy
Fzzzzz
faults
Axxxxx
Ayyyyy
Azzzzz
alarms
[0]
[15]
p2128 r2129
[8070] Fault/alarm trigger word
[8075] Fault/alarm configuration
p2100[0]
[19]
Changing the fault response
[1]
p2101
p2126[0]
[19]
[1]
p2127
Changing the acknowledge mode
p2118[0]
[19]
[1]
p2119
Changing the message type
Fault case count
r0952
Alarms counter
r2111
<2> Only for VECTOR.
[8013] load monitoring
<3> Only for p0108.17 = 1.
<1> <3>
r0080
M_act
[5730] <1>
[6714] <2>
r2169
n_act smth message
[8010]
<1> Only for SERVO.
<2>
r2109r0948r0949r0945
goingcomingValue
Code
r2125r2123r2124r2122
r3115
goingcomingValue
Code
n_max
[3080] <2>
[8010] Speed monitoring 1
<1> <2>
[8011] Speed monitoring 2
<1> <2>
Motor locked
[8012] torque monitoring
<1>
Limit value monitor
[5650] <1>
[6640] <2>
[5650] <1>
[6640] <2>
[8010]
[5610] <1>
[6060] <2>
<2>
[8012]
[8013]
r2169
n_act smth message
r1438
n_ctrl setp sum
[5210] <1>
r0063
n_act smooth
[4710] <1>
<2>
r0063
n_act unsmoothed
[4715]
r0079
M_set total
r1538
M_max upper eff
r1539
M_max lower eff
r2169
n_act smth message
r1170
n_ctrl setp sum
Overviews
Function diagrams
2-891
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-14 1790 – Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
Function diagram - 1790 -
87654321
DO: TB30
SINAMICS
19.03.09 V04.03.01
Overviews - Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
+24 V
M
X424
M
+
M
+
M
=
~
+M
+24 V DC
to the next
device
DI 0
X481
1
DI 1
DI 3
DI 2
DO 0
8
DO 1
DO 2
DO 3
4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8
r4022.0
1
r4023.0
r4022.3
1
r4023.3
p4030
p4033
V
V
AI 0+
AI 0-
AI 1-
AI 1+
AO 0+
AO 0-
AO 1+
AO 1-
X482
1
8
4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8
10 V
...
...
...
A
D
r4055[0] [%]
A
D
0
p4071[0]
A
D
r4055[1] [%]
A
D
0
p4071[1]
4 digital inputs, electrically isolated
[9100]
4 digital outputs, electrically isolated
[9102]
2 analog inputs +/-11 V
[9104]
2 analog outputs +/-11 V
[9106]
Simulation for DI 0...DI 3
1
0
1 = Simulation on p4095.0...3
Simulation signals p4096.0..3
r4022.0...3
1
r4023.0...3
...
Reference quantities for 10 V or 100 %
p200x 10 V 100 %
p205x 10 V 100 %
fp_1790_51_eng.vsd
p4099 (4000.00 μs)
X500
X501
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1
Function diagrams
Overviews
2-892 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-15 1840 – Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
Function diagram - 1840 -
87654321
DO: TM31
SINAMICS
19.03.09 V04.03.01
Overviews - Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
X520
1
2
3
4
5
6
DI 0
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
M
M 1
X530
1
2
3
4
5
6
DI4
DI5
DI 6
DI 7
M
M 2
+24 V
M
M
+24 V DC to the
next device
X524
M
+
M
+
Simulation for DI 0...DI 11
1
0
1 = Simulation on
p4095.0...11
Simulation signals
p4096.0...11
r4022.0...11
r4022.0
1
r4023.0
r4022.3
1
r4023.3
... ...
r4022.4
1
r4023.4
r4022.7
1
r4023.7
... ...
1
0
1
0
p4038
1
r4022.8 r4023.8
p4028.8
p4028.11
p4041
1
r4022.11 r4023.11
...
...
...
...
...
A
D
r4055[0] [%]
A
D
r4055[1] [%]
X521
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AI 0+
AI 0-
AI 1+
AI 1-
P 10
M
N 10
M
X522
1
AO 0V+ 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AO 0-
AO 0A+
AO 1V+
AO 1-
AO 1A+
+Temp
-Temp
A
D
0
p4071[1]
A
D
0
p4071[0]
DO 0
DO 1
X542
1
2
3
4
5
6
X541
1
2
3
4
5
6
DI/D0 8
DI/D0 9
DI/D0 10
DI/D0 11
M
+
NC 0
COM
NO 0
NC 1
COM
NO 1
p4030
p4031
[9566], [9568] 2 analog inputs
[9572] 2 analog outputs
[9556] 2 digital outputs (relay)
[9560], [9562] 4 digital inputs/outputs
[9552] 4 digital inputs, electrically isolated
[9550] 4 digital inputs, electrically isolated
r4021.0...11
r4104.1
r4104.0
Alarm:
Overtemperature
sensor TM31
Fault:
Overtemperature
sensor TM31
A
D
[9576][9577] Input for temperature sensor
A35211
F35207
r4105
Temp. KTY/PTC
1
r4023.0..11
p4048.0
1
0
1
1
0
1
p4048.1
X540
1
+24 V 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+24 V
+24 V
+24 V
+24 V
+24 V
+24 V
+24 V
Auxiliary voltage for
the digital inputs
fp_1840_51_eng.vsd
X500
X501
DRIVE-CLiQ-socket 0
DRIVE-CLiQ-socket 1
=
~
+M
p4099 (4000.00 μs)
CU320-2 input/output terminals
Function diagrams
2-893
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.4 CU320-2 input/output terminals
Function diagrams
2120 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3, DI 16, DI 17) 2-894
2121 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 4 to DI 7, DI 20, DI 21) 2-895
2130 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9) 2-896
2131 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 to DI/DO 11) 2-897
2132 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 12 to DI/DO 13) 2-898
2133 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 14 to DI/DO 15) 2-899
Function diagrams
CU320-2 input/output terminals
2-894 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-16 2120 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3, DI 16, DI 17)
- 2120 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2120_51_eng.vsd
DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_S, CU_SL
SINAMICS
24.07.09 V04.03.01
CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3, DI 16, DI 17)
<1> When using the electrical isolation, omit the
terminal jumper and connect the load power
supply shown as a dashed line.
24 V DC to the next device
<1>
<1>
X122.1 DI 0
X122.2 DI 1
X122.3 DI 2
X122.4 DI 3
X122.5 DI 16
X122.7 M1
M
X122.8
24 V
+
X122.6 DI 17
<1>
<1>
+24 V
X124.M
X124.+
MX124.M
M
X124.+
+
24 V
5 V
1 = Simulation on
p0795.0
1
0
p0796.0
p0795.1
1
0
p0796.1
p0795.2
1
0
p0796.2
p0795.3
1
0
p0796.3
p0795.16
1
0
p0796.16
p0795.17
1
0
p0796.17
r0723.0
1
r0723.1
1
r0723.2
1
r0723.3
1
r0723.16
1
r0723.17
1
0722.0
0722.1
0722.2
0722.3
0722.16
0722.17
r0723
DI 0 … DI 3, DI 16, DI 17
inverted
r0722
DI 0 … DI 3, DI 16, DI 17
r0721.0
r0721.1
r0721.2
r0721.3
r0721.16
r0721.17
p0799
CU320-2 input/output terminals
Function diagrams
2-895
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-17 2121 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 4 to DI 7, DI 20, DI 21)
- 2121 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2121_51_eng.vsd
DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_S, CU_SL
SINAMICS
24.07.09 V04.03.01
CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7, DI 20, DI 21)
<1> When using the electrical isolation, omit the
terminal jumper and connect the load power
supply shown as a dashed line.
24 V DC to the next device
<1>
<1>
X132.1 DI 4
X132.2 DI 5
X132.3 DI 6
X132.4 DI 7
X132.5 DI 20
X132.7 M2
M
X132.8
24 V
+
X132.6 DI 21
<1>
<1>
+24 V
X124.M
X124.+
MX124.M
M
X124.+
+
24 V
5 V
1 = Simulation on
p0795.4
1
0
p0796.4
p0795.5
1
0
p0796.5
p0795.6
1
0
p0796.6
p0795.7
1
0
p0796.7
p0795.20
1
0
p0796.20
p0795.21
1
0
p0796.21
r0723.4
1
r0723.5
1
r0723.6
1
r0723.7
1
r0723.20
1
r0723.21
1
0722.4
0722.5
0722.6
0722.7
0722.20
0722.21
r0721.4
r0721.5
r0721.6
r0721.7
r0721.20
r0721.21
r0723
DI 4 … DI 7, DI 20, DI 21
inverted
r0722
DI 4 … DI 7, DI 20, DI 21
p0799
Function diagrams
CU320-2 input/output terminals
2-896 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-18 2130 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9)
- 2130 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2130_51_eng.vsd
DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_S, CU_SL
SINAMICS
24.07.09 V04.03.01
CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9)
p0795.8 (0)
X122.11 M
p0796.8 (0)
p0748.8 (0)
DI
DO
p0795.9 (0)p0796.9 (0)
p0748.9 (0)
DI
DO
X122.10 DI/DO 9
p0728.9 (0)
DI/DO 8X122.9
p0728.8 (0)
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
<1> The connection shown as a dashed line applies
when used as digital output (p0728.x = 1).
DI
DI
1
1
r0723.9
r0723.8
r0721.8
r0721.9
r0722.9
r0722.8
DI 9_probe
<2> For SERVO and VECTOR (except for SINAMICS G130/G150), the following applies:
Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735], [4740]).
<3> The digital output access authority is displayed in r0729.
r0747.9
DO
DO
(0)
CU S_src DI/DO 9
p0739
(0)
CU S_src DI/DO 8
p0738
0
1
0
r0747.8
0
1
0
<2>
24 V
5 V
DI 8_probe
<2>
r0722
DI/DO 8 … 9
r0723
DI/DO 8 … 9
inverted
+24 V
X124.M
X124.+
MX124.M
M
X124.+
+
24 V DC to the next device
<1>
<3>
<1>
<3>
1
0
1
1
0
1
p0799
CU320-2 input/output terminals
Function diagrams
2-897
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-19 2131 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 to DI/DO 11)
- 2131 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2131_51_eng.vsd
DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_S, CU_SL
SINAMICS
24.07.09 V04.03.01
CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11)
p0795.10 (0)
X122.14 M
p0796.10 (0)
p0748.10 (0)
DI
DO
p0795.11 (0)p0796.11 (0)
p0748.11 (0)
DI
DO
X122.13 DI/DO 11
p0728.11 (0)
DI/DO 10X122.12
p0728.10 (0)
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
<1> The connection shown as a dashed line applies
when used as digital output (p0728.x = 1).
DI
DI
1
1
r0723.11
r0723.10
r0721.10
r0721.11
r0722.11
r0722.10
DI 11_probe
<2> For SERVO and VECTOR (except for SINAMICS G130/G150), the following applies:
Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735], [4740]).
<3> The digital output access authority is displayed in r0729.
r0747.11
DO
DO
(0)
CU S_src DI/DO 11
p0741
(0)
CU S_src DI/DO 10
p0740
0
1
0
r0747.10
0
1
0
<2>
24 V
5 V
DI 10_probe
<2>
r0722
DI/DO 10 … 11
r0723
DI/DO 10 … 11
inverted
+24 V
X124.M
X124.+
MX124.M
M
X124.+
+
24 V DC to the next device
<1>
<3>
<1>
<3>
1
0
1
1
0
1
p0799
Function diagrams
CU320-2 input/output terminals
2-898 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-20 2132 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 12 to DI/DO 13)
- 2132 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2132_51_eng.vsd
DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_S, CU_SL
SINAMICS
24.07.09 V04.03.01
CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 12 ... DI/DO 13)
p0795.12 (0)
X132.11 M
p0796.12 (0)
p0748.12 (0)
DI
DO
p0795.13 (0)p0796.13 (0)
p0748.13 (0)
DI
DO
X132.10 DI/DO 13
p0728.13 (0)
DI/DO 12X132.9
p0728.12 (0)
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
<1> The connection shown as a dashed line applies
when used as digital output (p0728.x = 1).
DI
DI
1
1
r0723.13
r0723.12
r0721.12
r0721.13
r0722.13
r0722.12
DI 13_probe
<2> For SERVO and VECTOR (except for SINAMICS G130/G150), the following applies:
Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735], [4740]).
<3> The digital output access authority is displayed in r0729.
r0747.13
DO
DO
(0)
CU S_src DI/DO 13
p0743
(0)
CU S_src DI/DO 12
p0742
0
1
0
r0747.12
0
1
0
<2>
24 V
5 V
DI 12_probe
<2>
r0722
DI/DO 12 … 13
r0723
DI/DO 12 … 13
inverted
+24 V
X124.M
X124.+
MX124.M
M
X124.+
+
24 V DC to the next device
<1>
<3>
<1>
<3>
1
0
1
1
0
1
p0799
CU320-2 input/output terminals
Function diagrams
2-899
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-21 2133 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 14 to DI/DO 15)
- 2133 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2133_51_eng.vsd
DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_S, CU_SL
SINAMICS
24.07.09 V04.03.01
CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 14 ... DI/DO 15)
p0795.14 (0)
X132.14 M
p0796.14 (0)
p0748.14 (0)
DI
DO
p0795.15 (0)p0796.15 (0)
p0748.15 (0)
DI
DO
X132.13 DI/DO 15
p0728.15 (0)
DI/DO 14X132.12
p0728.14 (0)
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
<1> The connection shown as a dashed line applies
when used as digital output (p0728.x = 1).
DI
DI
1
1
r0723.15
r0723.14
r0721.14
r0721.15
r0722.15
r0722.14
DI 15_probe
<2> For SERVO and VECTOR (except for SINAMICS G130/G150), the following applies:
Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735], [4740]).
<3> The digital output access authority is displayed in r0729.
r0747.15
DO
DO
(0)
CU S_src DI/DO 15
p0745
(0)
CU S_src DI/DO 14
p0744
0
1
0
r0747.14
0
1
0
<2>
24 V
5 V
DI 14_probe
<2>
r0722
DI/DO 14 … 15
r0723
DI/DO 14 … 15
inverted
+24 V
X124.M
X124.+
MX124.M
M
X124.+
+
24 V DC to the next device
<1>
<3>
<1>
<3>
1
0
1
1
0
1
p0799
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-900 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.5 PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2410 – PROFIBUS (PB)/PROFINET (PN), addresses and diagnostics 2-902
2420 – Standard telegrams and process data (PZD) 2-903
2422 – Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data (PZD) 2-904
2423 – Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data (PZD) 2-905
2425 – STW1_BM control word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-906
2426 – STW2_BM control word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-907
2428 – ZSW1_BM status word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-908
2429 – ZSW2_BM status word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-909
2439 – PZD receive signals interconnection profile-specific 2-910
2440 – PZD receive signals interconnection manufacturer-specific 2-911
2441 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2) 2-912
2442 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-913
2444 – STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-914
2449 – PZD send signals interconnection profile-specific 2-915
2450 – PZD send signals interconnection manufacturer-specific 2-916
2451 – ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2) 2-917
2452 – ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-918
2454 – ZSW2 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-919
2468 – IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-920
2470 – IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-921
2472 – IF1 status words, free interconnection 2-922
2481 – IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-923
2483 – IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-924
2485 – IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-925
2487 – IF2 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-926
2489 – IF2 status words, free interconnection 2-927
2495 – CU_STW control word 1 Control Unit interconnection 2-928
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-901
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2496 – CU_ZSW1 status word 1 Control Unit interconnection 2-929
2497 – A_DIGITAL interconnection 2-930
2498 – E_DIGITAL interconnection 2-931
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-902 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-22 2410 – PROFIBUS (PB)/PROFINET (PN), addresses and diagnostics
- 2410 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2410_54_eng.vsd
DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF, CU_G, CU_S, SERVO, TB30, TM31, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
17.11.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - PROFIBUS (PB) / PROFINET (PN), addresses and diagnostics
CU-specific functions
Setting the PROFIBUS address
PB address
1...126
p0918 (126)
Drive-specific functions (available once for each drive object)
POWER ON
Memory
SET
p0918
Actual
PROFIBUS
address
Monitoring functions
Sign-of-life from the
clock cycle
synchronous master
Diagnostic parameters
>
Cyclic telegrams
from the master
Detecting
missing
signs-of-life
in a series
n
PD SoL_tol
0...65535
p0925 (1)
t > t_response
No cyclic telegrams from the
master
= 65535
<2>
<1>
&
No telegrams from the master
F01910 "PROFIBUS: Setpoint timeout"
Alarms Faults
n > p0925
F01911 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation clock cycle failure"
A01921 "PROFIBUS: Receive setpoints after To"
A01930 "IF1: PB/PN current controller clock cycle clock cycle synchronous not equal"
A01931 "IF1: PB/PN speed controller clock cycle clock cycle synchronous not equal"
A01940 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronism not reached"
A01941 "IF1: PB/PN clock signal missing when establishing bus"
A01943 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle signal faulted when establishing the bus"
A01944 "IF1: PB/PN sign-of-life synchronism not reached"
A01950 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation synchronization unsuccessful"
A01900 "PROFIBUS: Configuration telegram error"
A01901 "PROFIBUS: Parameterizing telegram error"
A01902 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle
synchronous operation
parameterization not
permissible"
1...126
<5>
<3>
PB diag clock sync
r2064[0...7]
PB diag standard
r2055[0...2]
PB status
r2054
r2075 IF1 diag offs recv
r2076 IF1 diag offs send
F01912
"IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation sign-of-life failure"
A01920 "PROFIBUS: Interruption cyclic connection"
t
<5>
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIBUS sampling time
T0
PD fault delay
0...100 s
p2044 (0)
PB addr diagn
r2057
<4>
SQ
R Q
PB PZD state Setpoint failure
2043.0
PROFINET address
PN Name of Station
r61000[0...239]
PN IP of Station
r61001[0...3]
PB state t_monit
p2047
T0
PD PZD state Clock cycle synchronous operation active
r2043.1
<1> The monitoring function is only executed after at least one
"valid" cyclic telegram has been received. "Valid" means:
the master is in operation and net data are transmitted.
<2> The monitoring function is only executed after the first
sign-of- life has been received.
<3> Sign-of-life monitoring not effective for p0925 = 65535.
<4> The response monitoring time t_response is automatically
defined when configuring PROFIBUS/PROFINET
(e.g. HW Config made by SIEMENS).
<5> Only for the clock-cycle synchronous operation of the
SERVO and VECTOR drive object.
<6> p2045 is automatically interconnected when the telegram
is selected.
<7> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150.
(no clock cycle synchronous operation with G130/G150).
<8> Only for cyclic operation.
<5>
r2050[3]
<6>
<7>
PD mast-SoL S_Src
(0)
p2045
PD mast-SoL diag
r2065
<7>
<7>
<7>
<8>
'3+
'3/
Address switches
on the Control Unit
DP ADDRESS
Example: 15 hex = 21 dez
Setting the PROFIBUS address:
- Via p0918:
Set the address switches DP H and
DP L to 00 hex (= 0 dez), 7F hex
(= 127 dez), 80 hex or FF hex.
- Via the address switches
DP H and DP L:
Set the desired address as hexa-
decimal value between 01 hex
(= 1 dez) und 7E hex (= 126 dez).
Any change only becomes
effective after a POWER ON.
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-903
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-23 2420 – Standard telegrams and process data (PZD)
- 2420 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2420_54_eng.vsd
S120/S150/G130/G150
11.11.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - Standard telegrams and Process Data (PZD)
DO: ENCODER, SERVO, VECTOR
<2>
<1>
<4> The maximum number of PZD words depends on the drive object type.
<4>
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
<3> Freely interconnectable (pre-setting: MELD_NAMUR).
<2> If p0922 = 999 is changed to another value, the telegram is automatically assigned as specified in [2420] - [2423].
If p0922 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained as specified in [2420] - [2423].
= Position encoder signal
<5> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150.
Interconnec
tion is made
according to
Telegram
1 2 3 4 20765
Appl.-Class
11 1, 41, 4 134 DSC
PZD 6
PZD 8
PZD 9
PZD 10
PZD 11
PZD 13
PZD 14
PZD 15
PZD 16
PZD 12
PZD 7
PZD 5
PZD 4
PZD 1
PZD 2
PZD 3
PZD 17
PZD 18
PZD 19
PZD 24
PZD 26
PZD 27
PZD 28
PZD 29
PZD 31
PZD 32
PZD 30
PZD 25
PZD 23
PZD 22
PZD 20
PZD 21
STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1STW1 ZSW1STW1 ZSW1STW1 ZSW1STW1 ZSW1
NSOLL_A NIST_A NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B SATZANW AKTSATZ
STW2 ZSW2 ZSW2STW2 STW2 ZSW2
4 DSC
STW1 ZSW1
MIST_GLATT
PIST_GLATT
<3>
NIST_A_GLATT
IAIST_GLATT
NSOLL_A
STW2 ZSW2 STW2 ZSW2
G1_STW G1_ZSW
G2_XIST1
G2_XIST2
G1_XIST1
G2_ZSW
G1_STW G1_ZSW
G2_STW G1_XIST1
G1_XIST2 G1_XIST2
NSOLL_B NIST_B
G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_STW G1_ZSW
G1_XIST2
XERR
KPC
G1_XIST1 G2_STW
G1_XIST2
G2_ZSW
KPC
G1_XIST1
XERR
G2_XIST1
G2_XIST2
Receive telegram from
PROFIdrive
Send telegram to
PROFIdrive
9
3
STW1 ZSW1
MDI_
TARPOS XIST_A
STW2 ZSW2
MDI_
VELOCITY
SATZANW AKTSATZ
Not suitably for sensorless vector control
<5>
<5><5>
[2440] [2450] automatically
81
1
STW2_ENC ZSW2_ENC
G1_ZSW
G1_XIST1
G1_STW
G1_XIST2
<6>
82
1
STW2_ENC ZSW2_ENC
G1_ZSW
G1_XIST1
G1_STW
G1_XIST2
<6>
NIST_A
83
1
STW2_ENC ZSW2_ENC
G1_ZSW
G1_XIST1
G1_STW
G1_XIST2
<6>
NIST_B
MDI_ACC
MDI_DEC
MDI_MOD
PD Telegram select
p0922 (999)
<6> Only for ENCODER.
<1> Depending on the Drive object, only specific telegrams can be used. Not suitably for sensorless vector control.
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-904 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-24 2422 – Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data (PZD)
G3_STWG2_STW
G1_XIST1
- 2422 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2422_54_eng.vsd
S120/S150/G130/G150
25.11.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive – Manufacturer-specific/telegrams and Process Data (PZD)
<2>
PD Telegr_select
p0922 (999)
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
<1>
Interconnec-
tion is made
according to
Telegramm 102 103 105 106 116
Appl.- Class 1, 41, 4 4 DSC4 DSC 4 DSC
PZD 6
PZD 8
PZD 9
PZD 10
PZD 11
PZD 13
PZD 14
PZD 15
PZD 16
PZD 12
PZD 7
PZD 5
PZD 4
PZD 1
PZD 2
PZD 3
PZD 17
PZD 18
PZD 19
PZD 24
PZD 26
PZD 27
PZD 28
PZD 29
PZD 31
PZD 32
PZD 30
PZD 25
PZD 23
PZD 22
PZD 20
PZD 21
STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1STW1 ZSW1STW1 ZSW1STW1 ZSW1
NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B
G1_STW
MOMRED
STW2
G1_ZSW
G1_XIST2
MELDW
ZSW2
G1_ZSW
G1_XIST1
G1_XIST2
G2_ZSW
G2_XIST1
MOMRED MELDW
STW2 ZSW2
G2_XIST2
G1_STW G1_ZSW
G1_XIST1
G1_XIST2
XERR
MOMRED MELDW
STW2 ZSW2
KPC
G1_STW G1_ZSW
G1_XIST1
G2_STW
KPC
XERR
G1_XIST2
G2_ZSW
G2_XIST2
MOMRED MELDW
STW2 ZSW2
G2_XIST1
G1_STW G1_ZSW
KPC
XERR
G1_XIST2
G2_ZSW
G2_XIST1
MOMRED MELDW
STW2 ZSW2
AIST_GLATT
ITIST_GLATT
PIST_GLATT
MSOLL_GLATT
G2_STW G1_XIST1
G2_XIST2
<4>
G1_STW
<5> <5> <5> <5> <5>
[2440] [2450] automatically
118
4 DSC
STW1
NSOLL_B
G2_STW
KPC
XERR
MOMRED
STW2
<4> The maximum number of PZD words depends on the drive object type.
<3> Can be freely connected.
<1> Depending on the drive object, only specific telegrams can be used.
= Position encoder signal
<2> If p0922 = 999 is changed to another value, the telegram is automatically assigned as specified in [2420] - [2423].
If p0922 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained as specified in [2420] - [2423]!
<5> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150.
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
ZSW1
NIST_B
G2_ZSW
G2_XIST2
G3_ZSW
G3_XIST1
MELDW
ZSW2
AIST_GLATT
ITIST_GLATT
PIST_GLATT
MSOLL_GLATT
G2_XIST1
G3_XIST2
<5>
110
3
STW1 ZSW1
POS_STW POS_ZSW
SATZANW AKTSATZ
MDI_TAR
POS XIST_A
OVERRIDE MELDW
ZSW2STW2
MDI_VELO
CITY
MDI_ACC
MDI_DEC
MDI_MODE
<5>
111
3
STW1 ZSW1
POS_STW1 POS_ZSW1
MDI_TAR
POS XIST_A
OVERRIDE MELDW
ZSW2STW2
MDI_VELO
CITY
MDI_ACC
MDI_DEC
<5>
FAULT_CODE
WARN_CODE
NIST_B
POS_STW2 POS_ZSW2
<3><3>
125 126
4 DSC4 DSC
STW1 ZSW1STW1 ZSW1
NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B
G1_STW G1_ZSW
G1_XIST1
G1_XIST2
XERR
MOMRED MELDW
STW2 ZSW2
KPC
G1_STW G1_ZSW
G1_XIST1
G2_STW
KPC
XERR
G1_XIST2
G2_ZSW
G2_XIST2
MOMRED MELDW
STW2 ZSW2
G2_XIST1
<5> <5>
M_VST
Reseved Reseved
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-905
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-25 2423 – Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data (PZD)
- 2423 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2423_54_eng.vsd
S120/S150/G130/G150
25.11.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and Process Data (PZD)
<2>
DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_G, CU_S, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR
<1> <4>
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
PD Telegram select
p0922 (999)
<1> Depending on the drive object, only specific telegrams can be used.
<2> If p0922 = 999 is changed to another value, the telegram is automatically assigned as specified in [2420] - [2423].
If p0922 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained as specified in [2420] - [2423]!
<3> In order to comply with the PROFIdrive profile, PZD1 must be used as control word 1 (STW1) or status word 1 (ZSW1).
p2037 = 2 should be set if STW1 is not transferred with PZD1 as specified in the PROFIdrive profile.
<4> The maximum number of PZD words depends on the drive object type.
<5> Only for S120/S150.
<6> Freely interconn.
<7> Not for V/f Steuerung.
<8> Preassignment, not disabled.
<2><1>
Interconnection
is made
according to
Telegram
Appl.- Class
PZD 6
PZD 8
PZD 9
PZD 10
PZD 11
PZD 13
PZD 14
PZD 15
PZD 16
PZD 12
PZD 7
PZD 5
PZD 4
PZD 1
PZD 2
PZD 3
PZD 17
PZD 18
PZD 19
PZD 24
PZD 26
PZD 27
PZD 28
PZD 29
PZD 31
PZD 32
PZD 30
PZD 25
PZD 23
PZD 22
PZD 20
PZD 21
[2440] [2450] automatically
392370 390 391
-- - -
E_STW1 E_ZSW1 CU_STW1 CU_ZSW1 CU_STW1 CU_ZSW1 CU_STW1 CU_ZSW1
E_DIGITALA_DIGITAL A_DIGITAL E_DIGITAL
MT_STW MT_ZSW
MT1_ZS_F
MT1_ZS_S
MT2_ZS_F
MT2_ZS_S
A_DIGITAL E_DIGITAL
MT_STW MT_ZSW
MT1_ZS_F
MT1_ZS_S
MT2_ZS_F
MT2_ZS_S
MT3_ZS_F
MT3_ZS_S
MT4_ZS_F
MT4_ZS_S
MT5_ZS_F
MT5_ZS_S
MT6_ZS_F
MT6_ZS_S
999
-
STW1 ZSW1
Receive telegram length freely selectable via central
PROFIdrive configuration in the master
Transmit telegram length freely selectable via central
PROFIdrive configuration in the master
<4>
[2481] [2483]
<5>
371
-
E_STW1_BM E_ZSW1_BM
IAIST
WARN_CODE
FAULT_CODE
352
1
STW1 ZSW1
NSOLL_A NIST_A_GLATT
<3> IAIST_GLATT
MIST_GLATT
<3>
<3>
WARN_CODE
FAULT_CODE
<3>
220
STW1_BM ZSW1_BM
NIST_A
IAIST
MIST <6>
WARN_CODE
FAULT_CODE
ZSW2_BM
M_LIM <7>
NSOLL_B
STW2_BM
1
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
M_ADD <8>
<3> <3>
136
4 DSC
STW1
NSOLL_B NIST_B
ZSW1
STW2
MOMRED
G1_STW
G2_STW
XERR
KPC
M_VST
Reserved
ZSW2
MELDW
G1_ZSW
G1_XIST1
G1_XIST2
G2_XIST1
PIST_GLATT
G2_XIST2
AIST_GLATT
MSoll_GLATT
ITIST_GLATT
<5>
<6> <6>
<6>
<6>
<6>
<6>
<6>
<6>
G2_ZSW
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-906 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-26 2425 – STW1_BM control word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0)
- 2425 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2425_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
06.08.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - STW1_BM-control word metal industry interconnection
STW1.0
STW1.1
STW1.2
STW1.3
STW1.4
STW1.5
STW1.6
STW1.8
STW1.9
STW1.7
STW1.10
p0848[0] = r2090.2
p2816[0] = r2090.3
p1140[0] = r2090.4
p1141[0] = r2090.5
p1142[0] = r2090.6
p2103[0] = r2090.7
-
-
p0854[0] = r2090.10
p0840[0] = r2090.0
p0844[0] = r2090.1
= ON (pulses can be enabled)
0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse cancellation and ready-to-power-up)
1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible)
0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
1 = No OFF3 (enable possible)
0 = OFF3 (braking with the OFF3 ramp p1135, then pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)
0 = Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)
1 = Operating condition (the ramp-function generator can be enabled)
0 = inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero)
1 = Enable the ramp-function generator
0 = stop the ramp-function generator (freeze the ramp-function generator output)
1 = Enable setpoint
0 = inhibit setpoint (set the ramp-function generator input to zero)
= Acknowledge faults
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Control via PLC
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
[2546.1]
-
-
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
Signal targets for STW1_BM
[2610]
[2634.3]
[3060] [3070] [3080]
[3060] [3070]
[3060] [3070] [3080]
[8060]
-
-
[2501]
[2610]
[2610]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Signal Interconnection
parameters
Meaning [Function diagram]
internal control word
[Function diagram]
signal target Inverted
<2>
<1>
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
<1> Used in telegrams 220.
<2> STW1.10 must be set to ensure that the drive object accepts the process data (PZD).
<3> Interconnection is not disabled.
STW1.11 Reserved -- - -
STW1.12 Reserved -- -
STW1.13 Reserved -- -
STW1.14 Reserved -- -
STW1.15 Reserved -- -
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-907
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-27 2426 – STW2_BM control word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0)
- 2426 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2426_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
06.08.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - STW2_BM-control word metal industry interconnection
Signal targets for STW2_BM
<1> Used in telegrams 220.
<2> Interconnection is not disabled.
STW2.0
STW2.1
STW2.2
STW2.3
STW2.4
STW2.5
STW2.6
STW2.8
STW2.9
STW2.11
STW2.12
STW2.13
STW2.14
STW2.15
STW2.7
STW2.10
Drive data set selection DDS, bit 2
1 = Load compensation
1 = Droop enabled
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Bypass ramp-function generator
Drive data set selection DDS, bit 1
Drive data set selection DDS, bit 0
Command data set selection CDS, bit 1
Command data set selection CDS, bit 0
1 = Speed controller enabled
Reserved
Controller slave sign-of-life Toggle bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[8565]
[8565]
[8565]
-
-
-
-
-
-
[8560]
[8560]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Signal Meaning Interconnection
parameters
[Function diagram]
internal control word
[Function diagram]
signal target Inverted
<1>
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Torque controlled operation
0 = Speed controlled operation
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[6030]-
-
p0820[0] = r2093.2
<2>
p0821[0] = r2093.3
<2>
p0822[0] = r2093.4
<2>
p1122[0] = r2093.5
-
p1492[0] = r2093.8
p0856[0] = r2093.9
<2>
p1501[0] = r2093.11
p0810 = r2093.0
p0811 = r2093.1
p1477[0] = r2093.7
p2081[15] = r2093.15
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-908 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-28 2428 – ZSW1_BM status word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0)
- 2428 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2428_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
06.08.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - ZSW1_BM-status word metal industry interconnection
Signal sources for ZSW1_BM
<1> Used in telegram 220.
<2> The ZSW1 is generated using the binector-connector converter (BI: p2080[0...15], inversion: p2088[0].0...p2088[0].15)
<3> The drive object is ready to accept data.
<4> Not for VECTOR V/f.
<5> Only for SINAMICS S120.
<6> Interconnection is not disabled.
Signal Meaning
ZSW1.0
ZSW1.1
ZSW1.2
ZSW1.3
ZSW1.4
ZSW1.5
ZSW1.6
ZSW1.8
ZSW1.9
ZSW1.11
ZSW1.12
ZSW1.13
ZSW1.14
ZSW1.15
ZSW1.7
ZSW1.10
1 = Ready to operate
1 = Ready to power-up
1 = Operation enabled
1 = Fault present
1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive)
1 = No fast stop active (OFF3 inactive)
1 = Power-on inhibit active
1 = Alarm present
1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off
1 = Control requested
1 = f or n comparison value reached/exceeded
1 = I, M, or P limit not reached
1 = Open holding brake
Reserved
<3>
p2080[2] = r2811.0
p2080[3] = r2139.3
p2080[4] = r0899.4
p2080[5] = r0899.5
p2080[6] = r0899.6
p2080[7] = r2139.7
p2080[8] = r2197.7
p2080[9] = r0899.9
p2080[10] = r2199.1
p2080[11] = r1407.7
p2080[12] = r0899.12
p2080[0] = r0899.0
p2080[1] = r0899.1
Interconnection
parameters
[2503.7]
[2548.7]
[2503.7]
[2503.7]
[2503.7]
[2548.7]
[2534.7]
[2503.7]
[2536.7]
[2522.7]
[2503.7]
-
-
[2503.7]
[2503.7]
-
[Function diagram]
Internal status word
[2610]
[8060]
[2610]
[2610]
[2610]
[8065]
[8010]
[2503]
[8010]
[5610] [6060]
[2701]
-
-
[2610]
[2610]
-
[Function diagram]
signal source
<1>
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
<2>
Inverted
<4>
siehe [1020.7]
PROFIdrive Abtastzeit
<5>
Reserved
Reserved
-
-
<6>
<6>
<6>
<6>
<6>
<6>
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-909
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-29 2429 – ZSW2_BM status word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0)
- 2429 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2429_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
06.08.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - ZSW2_BM status word metal industry interconnection
<1> Used in telegrams 220.
<2> Not for VECTOR V/f.
<3> Interconnection is not disabled.
[Function diagram]
signal source
Interconnection
parameters
Signal Meaning
ZSW2.0
ZSW2.1
ZSW2.2
ZSW2.3
ZSW2.4
ZSW2.5
ZSW2.6
ZSW2.8
ZSW2.9
ZSW2.11
ZSW2.12
ZSW2.13
ZSW2.14
ZSW2.15
ZSW2.7
ZSW2.10
Reserved
1 = Speed setpoint controll activ
1 = Lower torque limit
SS1_ACTIVE
Controller slave sign-of-life Toggle bit
POWER-REMOVED
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Function diagram]
internal status word
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Signal sources for ZSW2_BM
<1>
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Inverted Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
-
-
- -
-1 = Alarm class bit 1
1 = Alarm class bit 0 [2548]
[2548]
1 = Upper torque limit - -
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Encoderless operation due to fault
Reserved
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
p2081[5] = r2139.11
p2081[6] = r2139.12
p2081[15] = r2093.15
p2081[12] = r1407.13
-
-
p2081[14] = r9773.1
p2081[13] = r9773.2
p2081[11] = r1407.9
p2081[10] = r1407.8
p2081[9] = r1407.11
<2>
<2>
<2>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-910 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-30 2439 – PZD receive signals interconnection profile-specific
- 2439 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2439_54_eng.vsd
DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_CX32, CU_G, CU_S, ENCODER, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
11.11.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - PZD receive signals, connection of profile-specific
Signal receivers for PZD receive signals
<2>
(bitwise)
(bitwise)
p1070 (Erw. Soll.)
p1155
p1070 (Erw. Soll.)
p1155
p1430 (DSC) <3>
p0480[0]
p0480[1]
p0480[2]
<1>
[2442][2443] <3>
[2475] <3>
[2444]
[2445]
[3030.2]
[3080.4] <3>
[3030.2]
[3080.4]
[3090.8] <3>
[4720]
[4720]
[4720]
[2497]
U16
U16
I16
I32
U16
U16
U16
U16
-
4000 hex p2000
-
4000 0000 hex p2000
-
-
-
-
<1> When selecting a standard telegram or a manufacturer-specific telegram via p0922, these interconnection parameters of the command data set CDS0 are automatically set.
<2> Data type according to to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, I32 = Integer32, U16 = Unsigned16, U32 = Unsigned32.
<3> Only for SINAMICS S120.
<4> Only for ENCODER.
SATZANW 32
Pos block selection
p1190
p1191
(bitwise)
[3090.5]
[3090.5]
[2476]
I32
I32
U16
-
-
-
(bitwise)
MDI_TARPOS
MDI_VELOCITY
MDI_ACC
MDI_MOD
MDI_DEC
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
34
MDI position
35
MDI velocity
36MDI acceleration override
37
MDI deceleration override
38
MDI mode (bitwise) [2480] U16 -
<3>
p2645 [3618] I16 4000 hex 100%
p2642 [3618] I32 1 hex 1 LU
p2643 [3618] I32 1 hex 1000 LU/min
p2644 [3618] I16 4000 hex 100%
Interconnection
parameter Function diagram Data
type Normalization
STW1
STW2
NSOLL_A
NSOLL_B
G1_STW
G2_STW
G3_STW
A_DIGITAL
1
3
5
7
9
13
17
22
XERR
KPC
25
26
Control word 1
Control word 2
Speed setpoint A (16-bit)
Speed setpoint B (32-bit)
Encoder 1 control word
Encoder 2 control word
Encoder 3 control word
Digital output (16-bit)
Position deviation
Position controller gain factor
Signal Meaning PROFIdrive
Signal No.
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
PROFIdrive
receive telegram
[2468], [2481]
r2090...r2095 bit
r2050[0...n] WORD
r2060[0...30] DWORD
Telegram assignment
according to p0922
[2420]
...
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
Drive object n
Header
Drive object 1
Drive object 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
Drive object m
Trailer
STW2_ENC 80
Status word 2 ENCODER (bitwise) [2433] U16 -
<4>
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-911
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-31 2440 – PZD receive signals interconnection manufacturer-specific
- 2440 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2440_54_eng.vsd
DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_CX32, CU_G, CU_S, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
04.11.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - PZD receive signals, connection of manufacturer-specific
<3> POS_STW1 220
Pos control word 1
POS_STW2 222
Pos control word 2
Signal receivers for PZD receive signals
Signal
<2>
MOMRED 101 [5610.2] I16 4000 hex p2003
MT_STW 130 -U16
POS_STW 203 [2462] U16
OVERRIDE 205 [3630] I16 4000 hex 100%
Meaning
Torque reduction
Measuring probe control word
Pos control word
Pos velocity override
PROFIdrive
Signal No.
Interconnection
parameter
<1>
p1542
p0682
(bitwise)
p2646
Function
diagram Data type Normalization
<1> When selecting a standard telegram or a manufacturer-specific telegram via p0922, these interconnection parameters of the command data set CDS0 are automatically set.
<2> Data type according to to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, I32 = Integer32, U16 = Unsigned16, U32 = Unsigned32.
<3> Only for SINAMICS S120.
PROFIdrive
receive telegram
[2468], [2481]
r2090...r2095 bit
r2050[0...n] WORD
r2060[0...30] DWORD
Telegram assignment
according to p0922
[2420]
...
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
Drive object n
Header
Drive object 1
Drive object 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
Drive object m
Trailer
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
E_STW1 320 (bitwise) [2447] U16
CU_STW1 500Control word 1 for Control Unit (bitwise) [2495] U16
STW1_BM 322Control word 1, variant for BM [2425] U16
STW2_BM 324Control word 2, variant for BM [2426] U16
E_STW1_BM 326Control word 1 for Active Infeed [2427] U16
Control word 1 for Active Infeed (ALM, SMART)
(bitwise)
(bitwise)
(bitwise)
(bitwise)
(bitwise)
[2463]
[2464]
U16
U16
MDI_MOD 229 [3620] U16
Pos MDI mode p2654
M_ADD 311Additional torque p1495 -U16
M_LIM 310Torque limit -U16p1503/p1552/p1554
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-912 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-32 2441 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2)
- 2441 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2441_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
14.08.08 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2)
<1> Used in telegram 20.
STW1.0
STW1.1
STW1.2
STW1.3
STW1.4
STW1.5
STW1.6
STW1.8
STW1.9
STW1.11
STW1.12
STW1.13
STW1.14
STW1.15
STW1.7
STW1.10
p0848[0] = r2090.2
p0852[0] = r2090.3
p1140[0] = r2090.4
p1141[0] = r2090.5
p1142[0] = r2090.6
p2103[0] = r2090.7
-
-
p0854[0] = r2090.10
p1113[0] = r2090.11
-
-
-
p0810[0] = 2090.15
p0840[0] = r2090.0
p0844[0] = r2090.1
= ON (pulses can be enabled)
0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse cancllation & ready-to-power-up)
1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible) <3>
0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
1 = No OFF3 (enable possible) <3>
0 = OFF3 (braking with the OFF3 ramp p1135, then pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)
0 = Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)
1 = Operating condition (the ramp-function generator can be enabled)
0 = Inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero)
1 = Enable the ramp-function generator
0 = Stop the ramp-function generator (freeze the ramp-function generator output)
1 = Enable setpoint
0 = Inhibit setpoint (set the ramp-function generator input to zero)
= Acknowledge faults
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Control via PLC
1 = Direction reversal
Reserved
Reserved
1 = CDS selection
Reserved
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
[2546.1]
-
-
[2501.3]
[2505.3]
-
-
-
-
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
Signal targets for STW1 in Interface Mode VIK-NAMUR (p2038 = 2)
[2610]
[2610]
[3060] [3070] [3080]
[3060] [3070]
[3060] [3070] [3080]
[8060]
-
-
[2501]
[3040]
-
-
-
[8560]
[2610]
[2610]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Signal Interconnection
parameters
Meaning [Function diagram]
internal control word
[Function diagram]
signal target Inverted
<2> STW1.10 must be set to ensure that the drive object accepts the process data (PZD).
<2>
<1> Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
<3> OC = Operating condition.
<4> Interconnection is not disabled.
<4>
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-913
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-33 2442 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0)
- 2442 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2442_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
27.11.08 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0)
<1> Used in telegrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 352.
STW1.0
STW1.1
STW1.2
STW1.3
STW1.4
STW1.5
STW1.6
STW1.8
STW1.9
STW1.11
STW1.12
STW1.13
STW1.14
STW1.15
STW1.7
STW1.10
p0848[0] = r2090.2
p0852[0] = r2090.3
p1140[0] = r2090.4
p1141[0] = r2090.5
p1142[0] = r2090.6
p2103[0] = r2090.7
-
-
p0854[0] = r2090.10
p1113[0] = r2090.11
-
p1035[0] = r2090.13
p1036[0] = r2090.14
-
p0840[0] = r2090.0
p0844[0] = r2090.1
= ON (pulses can be enabled)
0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse cancellation and ready-to-power-up)
1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible)
0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
1 = No OFF3 (enable possible)
0 = OFF3 (braking with the OFF3 ramp p1135, then pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)
0 = Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)
1 = Operating condition (the ramp-function generator can be enabled)
0 = inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero)
1 = Enable the ramp-function generator
0 = stop the ramp-function generator (freeze the ramp-function generator output)
1 = Enable setpoint
0 = inhibit setpoint (set the ramp-function generator input to zero)
= Acknowledge faults
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Control via PLC
1 = Direction reversal
Reserved
1 = Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, raise
Reserved
1 = Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, lower
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
[2546.1]
-
-
[2501.3]
[2505.3]
-
[2505.3]
[2505.3]
-
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
Signal targets for STW1 in Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0)
[2610]
[2610]
[3060] [3070] [3080]
[3060] [3070]
[3060] [3070] [3080]
[8060]
-
-
[2501]
[3040]
-
[3020]
[3020]
-
[2610]
[2610]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Signal Interconnection
parameters
Meaning [Function diagram]
internal control word
[Function diagram]
signal target Inverted
<2>
<1>
<3> Only for "expanded setpoint channel" and "extended ramp-function generator".
<4> OC = Operating condition.
<5> Only for SINAMICS S120.
<3>
<3>
<3>
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
<2> STW1.10 must be set to ensure that the drive object accepts the process data (PZD).
<5>
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-914 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-34 2444 – STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0)
- 2444 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2444_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
26.09.08 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0)
Signal targets for STW2 in Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0)
<1> Used in telegrams 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 110 and 111.
STW2.0
STW2.1
STW2.2
STW2.3
STW2.4
STW2.5
STW2.6
STW2.8
STW2.9
STW2.11
STW2.12
STW2.13
STW2.14
STW2.15
STW2.7
STW2.10
Drive data set selection DDS, bit 4
1 = Parking axis
1 = Traverse to fixed endstop
Reserved
Master sign-of-life, bit 0
Reserved
Reserved
Drive data set selection DDS, bit 3
Drive data set selection DDS, bit 2
Drive data set selection DDS, bit 1
Drive data set selection DDS, bit 0
Reserved
1 = Motor changeover, feedback Signal
Master sign-of-life, bit 1
Master sign-of-life, bit 2
Master sign-of-life, bit 3
-
-
-
-
-
-
[2520.2]
-
-
-
-
-
-
[8565]
[8565]
[8565]
-
-
-
[8012]
-
-
-
[2410]
[8565]
[8565]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Signal Meaning Interconnection
parameters
[Function diagram]
internal control word
[Function diagram]
signal target Inverted
<1>
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
<2> Not for telegrams 9, 110 and 111. <3> Only for SINAMICS S120.
<3>
p0822[0] = r2093.2
<4> r2092.2
p0823[0] = r2093.3
<4> r2092.3
p0824[0] = r2093.4
<4> r2092.4
-
-
p1545[0] = r2093.8
-
-
p0828 = r2093.11
<4> r2092.11
p2045 = r2050[3]
<4> r2050[2]
p0820[0] = r2093.0
<4> r2092.0
p0821[0] = r2093.1
<4> r2092.1
p0897 = r2093.7
<4> r2092.7
<4> Only for Telegram 9.
<2> <3>
<5>
<5>
<5>
<5>
<5>
<5> Not for Vector V/f.
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-915
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-35 2449 – PZD send signals interconnection profile-specific
- 2449 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2449_54_eng.vsd
DO: A_INF, B_INF, ENCODER, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
11.11.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - PZD send signals connection of profile-specific
<1> Data type according to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, I32 = Integer32, U16 = Unsigned16, U32 = Unsigned32.
<2> Only for SINAMICS S120.
<3> Only for ENCODER.
Signal sources for PZD send signals
Data type
Send words 1...16
p2051[0...15] WORD
r2053[0...15] WORD
p2061[0...14] DWORD
r2063[0...14] DWORD
PROFIdrive send
telegram
Telegram
assignment
according to p0922
[2420]
...
<1>
Drive object n
Header
Drive object 1
Drive object 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
Drive object m
Trailer
Description Interconnection
parameter
PROFIdrive
Signal No. Function diagramSignal
U16Status word 1 r2089[0]2[2452][2453][2479] <2>ZSW1
U16Status word 2 r2089[1]4[2454][2455] <2>ZSW2
Speed setpoint A (16 bit) 6NIST_A
Speed setpoint B (32 bit) 8NIST_B
U16Encoder 1 status word r0481[0]10 [4730]G1_ZSW
U32Encoder 1 actual position 1 r0482[0]11 [4704]G1_XIST1
U32Encoder 1 actual position 2 r0483[0]12 [4704]G1_XIST2
U16Encoder 2 status word r0481[1]14 [4730]G2_ZSW
U32Encoder 2 actual position 1 r0482[1]15 [4704]G2_XIST1
U32Encoder 2 actual position 2 r0483[1]16 [4704]G2_XIST2
U16Encoder 3 status word r0481[2]18 [4730]G3_ZSW
U32Encoder 3 actual position 1 r0482[2]19 [4704]G3_XIST1
U32Encoder 3 actual position 2 r0483[2]20 [4704]G3_XIST2
I16Current actual value, torque-generating r0078[1]52 [6714]ITIST_GLATT
U16VIK-NAMUR message bit bar r311358MELD_NAMUR -
I16Power factor, smoothed r0082[1]54 [6714]PIST_GLATT
I16Actual torque smoothed r0080[1]53 [6714]MIST_GLATT
I16Absolute actual current, smoothed r0068[1]51 [6714]IAIST_GLATT
I16Actual speed, smoothed r0063[1]57 [4715]NIST_A_GLATT
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
r0063 SERVO
r0063[0] VECTOR
r0061 ENCODER
[4710] <2>
[4715]
[4710]
<2>
Normalization
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
4000 hex p2002
-
4000 hex p2004
4000 hex p2003
4000 hex p2002
4000 hex p2000
U16Digital inputs r2089[2]21 [2459]E_DIGITAL -
28 I32r2521[0] [4010] 1 hex 1 LUXIST_A Position actual value A
U16Pos selected block r267033 [3650]AKTSATZ -
<2>
<2>
4000 hex p2000
4000 0000 hex p2000I32
I16
r0063 SERVO
r0063[0] VECTOR
r0061 ENCODER
[4710] <2>
[4715]
[4710]
Absolute actual current 59IAIST
4000 hex p2003I16Actual torque 60MIST [6714]r0080[0]
r0068[0] [6714] I16 4000 hex p2002
Status word 2 ENCODER 81ZSW2_ENC [2434](bitwise) -U16
<3>
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-916 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-36 2450 – PZD send signals interconnection manufacturer-specific
- 2450 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2450_54_eng.vsd
DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF, SERVO, TM41, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
26.11.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - PZD send signals, connection of manufacture-specific
<1> Data type according to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, I32 = Integer32, U16 = Unsigned16, U32 = Unsigned32
Signal sources for PZD send signals
Data type
Send words 1...16
p2051[0...15] WORD
r2053[0...15] WORD
p2061[0...14] DWORD
r2063[0...14] DWORD
PROFIdrive send
telegram
Telegram
assignment
according to p0922
[2420]
...
<1>
Drive object n
Header
Drive object 1
Drive object 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
Drive object m
Trailer
Description Interconnection
parameter
PROFIdrive
Signal No.
Function
diagram
Signal
U16Message word r2089[2]102 [2456]MELDW
U16Status word 1 for Active Infeed r2089[1]321 [2457]
FAULT_CODE
U16
Fault code r2131301 [8060]
E_ZSW1
U16
Alarm code r2132303 [8065]WARN_CODE
Measuring probe 1 measuring time, rising edge r0686[0]133MT1_ZS_S
I16Total speed setpoint smoothed r0079[1]120 [5610] <2>MSOLL_GLATT
I16Torque utilization smoothed r0081121 [8012]AIST_GLATT
Measuring probe status word r0688131 -MT_ZSW
Measuring probe 1 measuring time, falling edge r0687[0]132 -MT1_ZS_F
Measuring probe 2 measuring time, falling edge r0687[1]134 -MT2_ZS_F
Measuring probe 2 measuring time, rising edge r0686[1]135MT2_ZS_S
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16Status word 1 for Control Unit r2089[1]501 [2496] CU_ZSW1
U16Pos status word r2683204 [3645]POS_ZSW
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
<2>
<2>
<2> Only for SINAMICS S120.
Normalization
-
-
-
4000 hex p2003
4000 hex 100%
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Status word 1, variant for BMZSW1_BM
Status word 2, variant for BMZSW2_BM
-U16Status word 1 for Infeed, variant for BM (ALM, BLM, SLM) 327E_ZSW1_BM
-
[2430]
-
-
Measuring probe 2 measuring time, falling edge
Measuring probe 2 measuring time, rising edge
Measuring probe 2 measuring time, falling edge
Measuring probe 2 measuring time, rising edge
Measuring probe 2 measuring time, falling edge
Measuring probe 2 measuring time, rising edge
Measuring probe 2 measuring time, falling edge
Measuring probe 2 measuring time, rising edge
r0687[2]136 -
r0686[2]137
U16
U16- -
-
r0687[3]138 -
r0686[3]139
U16
U16- -
-
r0687[4]140 -
r0686[4]141
U16
U16- -
-
r0687[5]142 -
r0686[5]143
U16
U16- -
-
MT3_ZS_F
MT3_ZS_S
MT4_ZS_F
MT4_ZS_S
MT5_ZS_F
MT5_ZS_S
MT6_ZS_F
MT6_ZS_S
Pos status word 1
Pos status word 2
POS_ZSW1
POS_ZSW2
U16221 -
U16223 -[2467]
[2466]
U16r2089[0]323
U16r2089[1]325
[2428]
[2429] -
-
r2080
r2089[3]
r2089[4]
I16Torque pre-control value p1513- -M_VST 4000 hex p2003
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-917
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-37 2451 – ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2)
- 2451 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2451_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
14.08.08 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2)
Signal sources for ZSW1 in Interface Mode VIK-NAMUR (p2038 = 2)
<1> Used in telegram 20.
<2> The ZSW1 is generated using the binector-connector converter (BI: p2080[0...15], inversion: p2088[0].0...p2088[0].15)
<3> The drive object is ready to accept data.
<4> Interconnection is not disabled.
Signal Meaning
ZSW1.0
ZSW1.1
ZSW1.2
ZSW1.3
ZSW1.4
ZSW1.5
ZSW1.6
ZSW1.8
ZSW1.9
ZSW1.11
ZSW1.12
ZSW1.13
ZSW1.14
ZSW1.15
ZSW1.7
ZSW1.10
1 = Ready to operate (DC link loaded, pulses blocked)
1 = Ready to power-up
1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set)
1 = Fault present
1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive)
1 = No fast stop active (OFF3 inactive)
1 = Power-on inhibit active
1 = Alarm present
1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off
1 = Control requested
1 = f or n comparison value reached/exceeded
1 = I, M, or P limit not reached
Reserved
1 = No motor overtemperature alarm
1 = Display CDS
1 = Motor rotates forwards (n_act  0)
0 = Motor rotates backwards (n_act < 0)
<3>
p2080[2] = r0899.2
p2080[3] = r2139.3
p2080[4] = r0899.4
p2080[5] = r0899.5
p2080[6] = r0899.6
p2080[7] = r2139.7
p2080[8] = r2197.7
p2080[9] = r0899.9
p2080[10] = r2199.1
p2080[11] = r0056.13
-
p2080[13] = r2135.14
p2080[0] = r0899.0
p2080[1] = r0899.1
p2080[14] = r2197.3
Interconnection
parameters
[2503.7]
[2548.7]
[2503.7]
[2503.7]
[2503.7]
[2548.7]
[2534.7]
[2503.7]
[2536.7]
[2522.7]
-
[2548.7]
-
[2503.7]
[2503.7]
[2534.7]
[Function diagram]
Internal status word
[2610]
[8060]
[2610]
[2610]
[2610]
[8065]
[8010]
[2503]
[8010]
[6060]
-
[8016]
-
[2610]
[2610]
[8010]
[Function diagram]
Signal source
<1>
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
<2>
Inverted
p2080[15] = r0836.0
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
<4>
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-918 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-38 2452 – ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0)
- 2452 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2452_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
27.11.08 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0)
Signal sources for ZSW1 im Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0)
<1> Used in telegrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 352.
<2> The ZSW1 is generated using the binector-connector converter (BI: p2080[0...15], inversion: p2088[0].0...p2088[0].15)
<3> The drive object is ready to accept data.
<4> Not for VECTOR V/f.
<5> Only for SINAMICS S120.
Signal Meaning
ZSW1.0
ZSW1.1
ZSW1.2
ZSW1.3
ZSW1.4
ZSW1.5
ZSW1.6
ZSW1.8
ZSW1.9
ZSW1.11
ZSW1.12
ZSW1.13
ZSW1.14
ZSW1.15
ZSW1.7
ZSW1.10
1 = Ready to operate
1 = Ready to power-up
1 = Operation enabled
1 = Fault present
1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive)
1 = No fast stop active (OFF3 inactive)
1 = Power-on inhibit active
1 = Alarm present
1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off
1 = Control requested
1 = f or n comparison value reached/exceeded
1 = I, M, or P limit not reached
1 = Open holding brake
1 = No motor overtemperature alarm
1 = No alarm, thermal overload, power unit
1 = Motor rotates forwards (n_act 0)
0 = Motor rotates backwards (n_act < 0)
<3>
p2080[2] = r0899.2
p2080[3] = r2139.3
p2080[4] = r0899.4
p2080[5] = r0899.5
p2080[6] = r0899.6
p2080[7] = r2139.7
p2080[8] = r2197.7
p2080[9] = r0899.9
p2080[10] = r2199.1
p2080[11] = r1407.7
p2080[12] = r0899.12
p2080[13] = r2135.14
p2080[15] = r2135.15
p2080[0] = r0899.0
p2080[1] = r0899.1
p2080[14] = r2197.3
Interconnection
parameters
[2503.7]
[2548.7]
[2503.7]
[2503.7]
[2503.7]
[2548.7]
[2534.7]
[2503.7]
[2536.7]
[2522.7]
[2503.7]
[2548.7]
[2548.7]
[2503.7]
[2503.7]
[2534.7]
[Function diagram]
Internal status word
[2610]
[8060]
[2610]
[2610]
[2610]
[8065]
[8010]
[2503]
[8010]
[5610] [6060]
[2701]
[8016]
[8014]
[2610]
[2610]
[8010]
[Function diagram]
signal source
<1>
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
<2>
Inverted
<4>
siehe [1020.7]
PROFIdrive Abtastzeit
<5>
<5>
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-919
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-39 2454 – ZSW2 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0)
- 2454 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2454_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
26.09.08 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - ZSW2 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0)
<2>
<1> Used in telegrams 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 110, 111.
<2> These signals are automatically interconnected for clock-cycle synchronous operation.
[Function diagram]
signal source
Interconnection
parameters
Signal Meaning
p2081[2] = r0051.2
p2081[3] = r0051.3
p2081[4] = r0051.4
p2081[7] = r0896.0
p2081[8] = r1406.8
-
p2081[11] = r0835.0
Implicitly interconnected
p2081[0] = r0051.0
p2081[1] = r0051.1
ZSW2.0
ZSW2.1
ZSW2.2
ZSW2.3
ZSW2.4
ZSW2.5
ZSW2.6
ZSW2.8
ZSW2.9
ZSW2.11
ZSW2.12
ZSW2.13
ZSW2.14
ZSW2.15
ZSW2.7
ZSW2.10
1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 0
1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 1
1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 2
1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 3
1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 4
1 = Parking axis active
1 = Traverse to fixed endstop
Reserved
1 = Data set changeover active
Slave sign-of-life bit 0
Slave sign-of-life bit 1
Slave sign-of-life bit 3
Slave sign-of-life bit 2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Function diagram]
internal status word
[8565]
[8565]
[8565]
-
[2520]
-
-
-
[8565]
[8565]
Signal sources for ZSW2 in Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0)
<1>
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Inverted Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
<3>
<3> Only for SINAMICS S120.
<3>
-
-
- -
-1 = Alarm class bit 1
1 = Alarm class bit 0 p2081[5] = r2139.11
p2081[6] = r2139.12
[2548]
[2548]
1 = Pulses enabled p2082[13] = r0899.11 [2503.7] [2610]
<4> Not for Vector V/f.
<4>
<4>
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-920 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-40 2468 – IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
- 2468 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2468_54_eng.vsd
DO: ENCODER, SERVO, TM41, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
25.11.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
PZD receive word 1
PZD receive word 2
r2060[0] DWORD
r2060[4] DWORD
r2091.0
r2050[1] r2091.15
r2090.0
r2050[0] r2090.15
...
PZD receive word 3
PZD receive word 4
r2060[2] DWORD r2093.0
r2050[3] r2093.15
r2092.0
r2050[2] r2092.15
...
...
r2060[1] DWORD
...
r2050[4]
r2060[3] DWORD
PZD receive word 32
r2050[30]
r2060[30] DWORD
r2050[31]
(0)
p2099[0]
r2095.0
r2095.15
(0)
p2099[1]
Reference quantities for further interconnection
p200x
<3><3>
2 connector-binector converter
<2>
r2094.0
r2094.15
<1> In order to maintain the PROFIdrive profile, receive word 1 must be used as control word (STW1) (due to bit 10 "control requested").
<2> Using the connector-binector converters, the bits can be extracted from two of the PZD receive words 5 to 32 and used as binectors.
<3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 % for double words 4000 0000 hex = 100 %.
The reference variables p200x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p200x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100° C -> 100 % = 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex; 0° C -> 0 %.
<4> The number of PZD receive words depends on the drive object type.
<5> The connector-binector converter only converts the lower 16 bits irrespective of the input variable.
<6> Every PZD word can be assigned a word or a double word. Only one of the 2 interconnection parameters r2050 or r2060 can have a value 0 for a PZD word.
p2098[1].0
p2098[1].15
p2098[0].15
p2098[0].0
<1>
PROFIdrive
receive telegram
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
<2>
Drive object n
Header
Drive object 1
Drive object 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
Drive object m
Trailer
p2048
PZD receive word 5
PZD receive word 31
r2050[29]
r2060[29] DWORD
PZD receive word 30
PZD receive word 29 r2050[28]
r2060[28] DWORD
r2060[5] DWORD
r2050[5]
PZD receive word 6
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
<4>
<6>
<6>
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-921
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-41 2470 – IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
- 2470 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2470_54_eng.vsd
DO: ENCODER, SERVO, TM41, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
25.11.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
IF1 Diag send Wort 1...32
r2053[0...31]
...
PZD send word 1
PZD send word 2
DWORD p2061[0]
DWORD p2061[1]
DWORD p2061[2]
DWORD p2061[3]
DWORD p2061[4]
DWORD p2061[5]
DWORD p2061[6]
DWORD p2061[7]
PZD send word 3
PZD send word 4
PZD send word 5
PZD send word 6
PZD send word 7
PZD send word 8
<2>
(0)0
p2051[1]
(0)0
p2051[2]
(0)0
p2051[3]
(0)0
p2051[4]
(0)0
p2051[5]
(0)0
p2051[6]
(0)0
p2051[7]
(0)0
p2051[8]
(0)0
p2051[0]
<2>
Reference quantities for
further interconnection
p200x
<3>
<1>
r2063[0...30]
PROFIdrive send
telegram
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
Drive object n
Header
Drive object 1
Drive object 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
Drive object m
Trailer
<1> To comply with the PROFIdrive profile, send word 1 must be used as status word 1 (ZSW1), not as DWORD.
<2> A PZD transmit word can either be supplied via connector input p2051[x] (WORD) or via p2061[x] (DWORD).
The two corresponding connector inputs cannot be interconnected.
<3> Physical word and double word values are inserted in the telegram as referenced variables. p200x apply as reference variables (telegram contents = 4000 hex or
4000 0000 hex in the case of double words, if the input variable has the value p200x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100° C -> 100 % = 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex; 0° C -> 0%.
<4> The number of PZD send words depends on the drive object type.
<1>
PROFIdrive sampling time
<4>
(0)
p2051[28]
(0)
p2051[29]
(0)
p2051[30]
(0)
p2051[31]
PZD send word 30
PZD send word 31
PZD send word 32
DWORD p2061[27]
DWORD p2061[28]
DWORD p2061[29]
DWORD p2061[30]
PZD send word 9
PZD send word 29
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-922 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-42 2472 – IF1 status words, free interconnection
- 2472 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2472_54_eng.vsd
DO: A_INF, CU_G, CU_S, SERVO, TB30, TM31, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
11.06.08 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - IF1 status words, free interconnection
5 binector-connector converter
p2048
(0.0)
p2081[0...15]
r2089[1]
Status word 2
(0.0)
(0.0)
[0]
[1]
[11]
p2088[1].0
p2088[1].11
1
0
1
1
0
1
(0.0)
p2080[0...15]
(0.0)
(0.0)
[0]
[1]
[15]
p2088[0].15
p2088[0].0
1
0
1
1
0
1
(0.0)
p2082[0...15]
(0.0)
(0.0)
[0]
[1]
[15]
p2088[2].15
p2088[2].0
1
0
1
1
0
1
(0.0)
p2083[0...15]
(0.0)
(0.0)
[0]
[1]
[15]
p2088[3].0
p2088[3].15
1
0
1
1
0
1
<1>
<1> For clock-cycle synchronous SERVO, these signals must not be interconnected (slave sign-of-life).
(0.0)
(0.0)
[12]
[15]
r2089[0]
Status word 1
r2089[2]
Free status word 3
r2089[3]
Free status word 4
<2> Only for SINAMICS S120.
<2>
(0.0)
p2084[0...15]
(0.0)
(0.0)
[0]
[1]
[15]
p2088[4].0
p2088[4].15
1
0
1
1
0
1
r2089[4]
Free status word 4
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-923
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-43 2481 – IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
- 2481 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2481_54_eng.vsd
DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF, CU_G, CU_S, TB30, TM31
S120/S150/G130/G150
06.12.07 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
PROFIBUS
PROFINET PZD receive word 1
PZD receive word 2
PZD receive word 5
r2050[1]
r2091.15
PZD receive word 3
PZD receive word 4 r2050[3]
r2050[2]
r2050[4] (0)
p2099[0]
r2095.0
r2095.15
(0)
p2099[1]
Reference quantities for further interconnection
p200x
<3>
2 connector-binector converter
<2>
r2094.0
r2094.15
<1> To comply with the PROFIdrive profile, receive word 1 for A_INF, B_INF and S_INF must be used as control word (E_STW1) (due to bit 10 "control requested").
<2> Using the two connector-binector converters, two of the PZD receive words 3 to 5 can be converted into binectors for continued interconnection.
<3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 %.
The reference variables p200x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p200x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100 °C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0 °C -> 0 %.
p2098[1].0
p2098[1].15
p2098[0].15
p2098[0].0
<1>
PROFIdrive
receive telegram
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
<2>
Drive object n
Header
Drive object 1
Drive object 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
Drive object m
Trailer
p2048
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
r2091.0
r2090.0
r2050[0]
r2090.15
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-924 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-44 2483 – IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
- 2483 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2483_54_eng.vsd
DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_G, CU_S, S_INF, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31
S120/S150/G130/G150
06.12.07 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
<1> In order to maintain the PROFIdrive profile, send word 1 must be used as status word 1 (E_ZSW1) for A_INF, B_INF and S_INF.
<2> Using the binector/connector converters at [2472], bits of 4 send words can be interconnected with any binectors.
<3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 %.
The reference variables p200x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p200x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100 °C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0 °C -> 0 %.
<4> Valid for CU_S.
<5> Valid for A_INF, B_INF, S_INF.
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive Abtastzeit
<3>
<1>
PZD send word 7(0)
p2051[6]
<4>
PZD send word 8
PZD send word 13
PZD send word 14
PZD send word 15
<4>
<4>
<4>
<4>
<4>
<4>
(0)
p2051[7]
(0)
p2051[12]
(0)
p2051[13]
(0)
p2051[14]
<4>
<4>
<4>
<4>
<4>
<5>
<5>
<5>
<5>
<5>
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
Drive object n
Header
Drive object 1
Drive object 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
Drive object m
Trailer
IF1 Diag send word 1...7
r2053[0...6]
...
PZD send word 1
PZD send word 2
PZD send word 3
PZD send word 4
PZD send word 5
<2>
(0)
p2051[1]
(0)
p2051[2]
(0)
p2051[3]
(0)
p2051[4]
(0)
p2051[0]
PZD send word 6(0)
p2051[5]
PROFIdrive send telegram
Reference quantities for further interconnection
p200x
<4> <5>
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-925
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-45 2485 – IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
- 2485 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2485_54_eng.vsd
DO: ENCODER, SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
24.11.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
PZD receive word 1
PZD receive word 2
r8860[0] DWORD
r8860[4] DWORD
r8891.0
r8850[1] r8891.15
r8890.0
r8850[0] r8890.15
...
PZD receive word 3
PZD receive word 4
r8860[2] DWORD r8893.0
r8850[3] r8893.15
r8892.0
r8850[2] r8892.15
...
...
r8860[1] DWORD
...
r8850[4]
r8860[3] DWORD
PZD receive word 16
r8850[14]
r8860[14] DWORD
r8850[15]
(0)
p8899[0]
r8895.0
r8895.15
(0)
p8899[1]
Reference quantities for further interconnection
p880x
<3><3>
2 connector-binector converter
<2>
r8894.0
r8894.15
<1> In order to maintain the PROFIdrive profile, receive word 1 must be used as control word (STW1) (due to bit 10 "control requested").
<2> Using the connector-binector converters, the bits can be extracted from two of the PZD receive words 5 to 16 and used as binectors.
<3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 % for double words 40000 0000 hex = 100 %.
The reference variables p880x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p880x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100 °C -> 100 % = 4000 hex or 40000 0000 hex; 0 °C -> 0 %.
<4> The number of PZD receive words depends on the drive object type.
<5> The connector-binector converter only converts the lower 16 bits irrespective of the input variable.
<6> Every PZD word can be assigned a word or a double word. Only one of the 2 interconnection parameters r8850 or r8860 can have a value 0 for a PZD word.
p8898[1].0
p8898[1].15
p8898[0].15
p8898[0].0
<1>
PROFIdrive
receive telegram
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
<2>
Drive object n
Header
Drive object 1
Drive object 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
Drive object m
Trailer
p8848
PZD receive word 5
PZD receive word 15
r8850[13]
r8860[13] DWORD
PZD receive word 14
PZD receive word 13 r8850[12]
r8860[12] DWORD
r8860[5] DWORD
r8850[5]
PZD receive word 6
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
<4>
<5>
<6>
<6>
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-926 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-46 2487 – IF2 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
- 2487 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2487_54_eng.vsd
DO: ENCODER, SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
24.11.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - IF2 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
IF2 Diag send Wort 1...16
r8853[0...15]
...
PZD send word 1
PZD send word 2
DWORD p8861[0]
DWORD p8861[1]
DWORD p8861[2]
DWORD p8861[3]
DWORD p8861[4]
DWORD p8861[5]
DWORD p8861[6]
DWORD p8861[7]
PZD send word 3
PZD send word 4
PZD send word 5
PZD send word 6
PZD send word 7
PZD send word 8
<2>
(0)0
p8851[1]
(0)0
p8851[2]
(0)0
p8851[3]
(0)0
p8851[4]
(0)0
p8851[5]
(0)0
p8851[6]
(0)0
p8851[7]
(0)0
p8851[8]
(0)0
p8851[0]
<2>
Reference quantities for
further interconnection
p880x
<3>
<1>
r8863[0...14]
PROFIdrive send
telegram
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
Drive object n
Header
Drive object 1
Drive object 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
Drive object m
Trailer
<1> To comply with the PROFIdrive profile, send word 1 must be used as status word 1
(ZSW1), not as DWORD.
<2> A PZD transmit word can either be supplied via connector input p2051[x] (WORD) or
via p2061[x] (DWORD).
The two corresponding connector inputs cannot be interconnected.
<3> Physical word and double word values are inserted in the telegram as referenced
variables. p880x apply as reference variables (telegram contents = 4000 hex or 4000
0000 hex in the case of double words, if the input variable has the value p880x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100 °C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0 °C -> 0%
= 4000 0000 hex.
<4> The number of PZD send words depends on the drive object type.
<1>
PROFIdrive sampling time
<4>
(0)
p8851[12]
(0)
p8851[13]
(0)
p8851[14]
(0)
p8851[15]
PZD send word 14
PZD send word 15
PZD send word 16
DWORD p8861[11]
DWORD p8861[12]
DWORD p8861[13]
DWORD p8861[14]
PZD send word 9
PZD send word 13
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-927
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-47 2489 – IF2 status words, free interconnection
- 2489 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2489_54_eng.vsd
DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
11.06.08 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - IF2 status words, free interconnection
5 binector-connector converter
p8848
(0.0)
p8881[0...15]
r8889[1]
Status word 2
(0.0)
(0.0)
[0]
[1]
[11]
p8888[1].0
p8888[1].11
1
0
1
1
0
1
(0.0)
p8880[0...15]
(0.0)
(0.0)
[0]
[1]
[15]
p8888[0].15
p8888[0].0
1
0
1
1
0
1
(0.0)
p8882[0...15]
(0.0)
(0.0)
[0]
[1]
[15]
p8888[2].15
p8888[2].0
1
0
1
1
0
1
(0.0)
p8883[0...15]
(0.0)
(0.0)
[0]
[1]
[15]
p8888[3].0
p8888[3].15
1
0
1
1
0
1
<1>
<1> For clock-cycle synchronous SERVO, these signals must not be interconnected (slave sign-of-life).
(0.0)
(0.0)
[12]
[15]
r8889[0]
Status word 1
r8889[2]
Free status word 3
r8889[3]
Free status word 4
<2> Only for SINAMICS S120.
<2>
(0.0)
p8884[0...15]
(0.0)
(0.0)
[0]
[1]
[15]
p8888[4].0
p8888[4].15
1
0
1
r8889[4]
Free status word 5
1
0
1
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-928 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-48 2495 – CU_STW control word 1 Control Unit interconnection
- 2495 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2495_54_eng.vsd
DO: CU_G, CU_S
S120/S150/G130/G150
10.09.08 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - CU_STW1 control word 1 Control Unit interconnection
Signal targets for CU_STW1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
p2103[0] = r2090.7
p3104 = r2090.1
Reserved
Acknowledge faults
To assume control
Master sign-of-life bit 0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
RTC PING
Reserved
Reserved
Master sign-of-life bit 1
Master sign-of-life bit 2
Master sign-of-life bit 3
CU_STW1.1
CU_STW1.2
CU_STW1.3
CU_STW1.4
CU_STW1.5
CU_STW1.6
CU_STW1.8
CU_STW1.9
CU_STW1.11
CU_STW1.12
CU_STW1.13
CU_STW1.14
CU_STW1.15
CU_STW1.7
CU_STW1.10
---SynchronizationCU_STW1.0
Inverted
[Function diagram]
signal target
[Function diagram]
internal control word
Interconnection
parameters
MeaningSignal
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -
p0681[0] = r2090.0
p3116 = r2090.10
Reserved
p2045 =r2050[0]
-
<1> Used in telegrams 390, 391 and 392.
<1> Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-929
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-49 2496 – CU_ZSW1 status word 1 Control Unit interconnection
- 2496 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2496_54_eng.vsd
DO: CU_G, CU_S
S120/S150/G130/G150
30.11.09 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - CU_ZSW1 status word 1 Control Unit interconnection
Signal sources for CU_ZSW1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
p2081[7] = r2139.7
p2081[8] = r0899.8
Implicitly
interconnected
-
Reserved
1 = Alarm present
Synchronization (SYNC)
1 = No fault present
Slave sign-of-life bit 0
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Fault present
Reserved
Reserved
1 = No alarm present
1 = No safety message present
Slave sign-of-life bit 1
Slave sign-of-life bit 2
Slave sign-of-life bit 3
CU_ZSW1.1
CU_ZSW1.2
CU_ZSW1.3
CU_ZSW1.4
CU_ZSW1.5
CU_ZSW1.6
CU_ZSW1.8
CU_ZSW1.9
CU_ZSW1.11
CU_ZSW1.12
CU_ZSW1.13
CU_ZSW1.14
CU_ZSW1.15
CU_ZSW1.7
CU_ZSW1.10
---ReservedCU_ZSW1.0
Inverted
[Function diagram]
signal source
[Function diagram]
Internal status word
Interconnection
parameters
MeaningSignal
-
- -
-
p2081[3] = r2139.3
<1> Used in telegrams 390, 391 and 392.
<1>
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
-
-
-
-
-
-
p2081[11] = r3114.11
p2081[10] = r3114.10
p2081[9] = r3114.9
- -
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2-930 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-50 2497 – A_DIGITAL interconnection
- 2497 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2497_54_eng.vsd
DO: CU_G, CU_S
S120/S150/G130/G150
06.06.08 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - A_DIGITAL interconnection
Signal targets for A_DIGITAL
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
p0740[0] = r2091[2]
p0742[0] = r2091[4]
p0743[0] = r2091[5]
p0744[0] = r2091[6]
p0745[0] = r2091[7]
p0739[0] = r2091[1]
---
Inverted
[Function diagram]
signal target
[Function diagram]
internal status word
Interconnection
parameters
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -
p0738[0] = r2091[0]
-
p0741[0] = r2091[3]
A_DIGITAL.1
A_DIGITAL.2
A_DIGITAL.3
A_DIGITAL.4
A_DIGITAL.5
A_DIGITAL.6
A_DIGITAL.8
A_DIGITAL.9
A_DIGITAL.11
A_DIGITAL.12
A_DIGITAL.13
A_DIGITAL.14
A_DIGITAL.15
A_DIGITAL.7
A_DIGITAL.10
A_DIGITAL.0
Signal
Digital output 12 (DI/DO 12)
Digital output 15 (DI/DO 15)
Reserved
Reserved
Digital output 14 (DI/DO 14)
Digital output 13 (DI/DO 13)
Digital output 11 (DI/DO 11)
Digital output 10 (DI/DO 10)
Digital output 9 (DI/DO 9)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Digital output 8 (DI/DO 8)
Meaning
Reserved
-
-
-
-
<3> Pre-assignment, can be freely changed.
<3>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2> Can be set via p0728 as input (DI) or output (DO).<1> Used in telegrams 390, 391 and 392.
<1> Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2-931
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-51 2498 – E_DIGITAL interconnection
- 2498 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2498_54_eng.vsd
DO: CU_G, CU_S
S120/S150/G130/G150
06.06.08 V04.03.01
PROFIdrive - E_DIGITAL interconnection
Signal targets for E_DIGITAL
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--
Inverted
[Function diagram]
signal target
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
E_DIGITAL.1
E_DIGITAL.2
E_DIGITAL.3
E_DIGITAL.4
E_DIGITAL.5
E_DIGITAL.6
E_DIGITAL.8
E_DIGITAL.9
E_DIGITAL.11
E_DIGITAL.12
E_DIGITAL.13
E_DIGITAL.14
E_DIGITAL.15
E_DIGITAL.7
E_DIGITAL.10
E_DIGITAL.0
Signal
<3> Pre-assignment, can be freely changed.
Digital input 12 (DI/DO 12)
Digital input 15 (DI/DO 15)
Digital input 2 (DI 2)
Digital input 4 (DI 4)
Digital input 14 (DI/DO 14)
Digital input 13 (DI/DO 13)
Digital input 11 (DI/DO 11)
Digital input 10 (DI/DO 10)
Digital input 9 (DI/DO 9)
Digital input 1 (DI 1)
Digital input 3 (DI 3)
Digital input 5 (DI 5)
Digital input 6 (DI 6)
Digital input 7 (DI 7)
Digital input 8 (DI/DO 8)
Meaning
Digital input 0 (DI 0)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Function diagram]
Internal status word
-
<3>
Interconnection
parameters
p2082[0] = r0722[8]
p2082[3] = r0722[11]
p2082[5] = r0722[13]
p2082[6] = r0722[14]
p2082[7] = r0722[15]
p2082[8] = r0722[0]
p2082[2] = r0722[10]
p2082[4] = r0722[12]
p2082[1] = r0722[9]
p2082[9] = r0722[1]
p2082[11] = r0722[3]
p2082[13] = r0722[5]
p2082[14] = r0722[6]
p2082[15] = r0722[7]
p2082[10] = r0722[2]
p2082[12] = r0722[4]
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2> Can be set via p0728 as input (DI) or output (DO).<1> Used in telegrams 390, 391 and 392.
<1> Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
Function diagrams
Internal control/status words
2-932 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.6 Internal control/status words
Function diagrams
2501 – Control word, sequence control 2-933
2503 – Status word, sequence control 2-934
2505 – Control word, setpoint channel 2-935
2520 – Control word, speed controller 2-936
2522 – Status word, speed controller 2-937
2526 – Status word, closed loop control 2-938
2530 – Status word, closed-loop current control 2-939
2534 – Status word, monitoring functions 1 2-940
2536 – Status word, monitoring functions 2 2-941
2537 – Status word, monitoring functions 3 2-942
2546 – Control word, faults/alarms 2-943
2548 – Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 2-944
Internal control/status words
Function diagrams
2-933
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-52 2501 – Control word, sequence control
- 2501 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2501_54_eng.vsd
DO: ENCODER, SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
19.11.09 V04.03.01
Internal control/status words - Control word, sequence control
11
12
13
14
15
p0840[C]
(0)
p0852[C]
(1)
p1140[C]
(1)
p1141[C]
(1)
PROFIdrive bit
<1> STW1.10 must be set to ensure that the
drive object accepts the process data (PZD).
<2> Only for Telegram 220.
<3> When the master control is retrieved,
predefined by STARTER or AOP30.
<4> Only applies if the function module
"extended brake control (r0108.14 = 1)" is
active.
<5> For DO ENCODER only bit 10.
10
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit No.
<6> PROFIdrive interconnection: For PROFIdrive standard telegrams, the upper inputs are connected with PROFIdrive-STW1 [2420]. Only relevant for CDS0.
2000.00 μs
p0854[C]
(1)
r0898.0
r0898.1
r0898.2
r0898.3
r0898.4
r0898.5
r0898.6
r0898.10
r0898
STW sequence ctrl
p0855[C]
(0) r0898.7
9
8
p1055 [C]
(0)
p1056 [C]
(0)
r0898.8
r0898.9
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
To jog [3030.6]
To Ramp-function generator tracking [3080.4]
To jog [3030.6]
To Ramp-function generator tracking [3080.3]
To the brake control [2701.5]
To the expanded brake control [2707.1]
To the setpoint channel
[3060.1] [3070.1] [3080.4]
To the setpoint channel
[3060.1] [3070.1]
To the setpoint channel
[3060.6] [3070.7] [3080.5]
To the control unit [2610]
To the control unit [2610]
To the control unit [2610]
To the control unit [2610]
r0898.12
To the brake control [2701.4]
To the expanded brake control [2707.1]
To the torque setpoint [6060.4]
p0856[C]
(1)
Control word sequence control
1 = Operating condition, no coast stop (no OFF2)
0 = OFF2
1 = Operating condition, no quick stop (no OFF3)
0 = OFF3
1 = Command, open brake
1 = Control via PLC
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Command, close brake
<1>
Reserved
1 = Jog 1
1 = Jog 2
1 = Speed controller enable
= ON
0 = OFF1
1 = Unfreeze ramp-function generator
1 = Enable ramp-function generator
1 = Enable speed setpoint
1 = Enable operation
<4>
p0858[C]
(0) <3> r0898.14 To the brake control [2701.4]
To the expanded brake control [2707.1]
p0844[C]
(1)
1. OFF2 (electrical)
p0845[C]
(1)
2. OFF2 (electrical)
p0848[C]
(1)
1. OFF3 (fast stop)
p0849[C]
(1)
2. OFF3 (fast stop)
<6>
<6>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<4>
[2711.8]
(1)
Enable n_set
p1142[C]
(r0899.15)
Setpoint 2 enable
p1152
r2090.3
p2816[0]
(0)
p2816[1] r2817.0
<2>[2425]
<5>
<5>
Function diagrams
Internal control/status words
2-934 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-53 2503 – Status word, sequence control
- 2503 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2503_54_eng.vsd
DO: ENCODER, SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
11.08.09 V04.03.01
Internal control/status words - Status word, sequence control
11
12
13
14
15
<1> The drive object is ready to accept data.
<2> Only for Telegram 220.
<3> These signals are only relevant if the "extended brake control" function module is active (r0108.14 = 1).
<4> If „Safe Brake Control" (SBC) is activated and selected, the brake is no longer controlled via this signal (Only with SINAMICS S120 Booksize).
<5> Only with message frame 220 and activated function module "Extended brake control" (r0108.14 = 1), otherwise hard wiring set to 1.
PROFIdrive bit
Bit No.
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
0
1
2
From the control unit [2610]
From the control unit [2610]
From the control unit [2610]
From the control unit [2610]
From the control unit [2610]
From the control unit [2610]
From the control unit [2610.4]
2000.00 μs
r0899.0
r0899.1
r0899.4
r0899.5
r0899.11
r0899.12
r0899.2
r0899.6
r0899.9
1 = Ready to operate (DC link loaded, pulses blocked)
1 = Ready to power-up
Status word sequence control
1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set)
1 = Jog active
1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive)
1 = No fast stop active (OFF3 inactive)
1 = Power-on inhibit active
1 = Drive ready
1 = Controller enable
1 = Control requested
Reserved
1 = Pulses enabled
1 = Open holding brake (only for booksize units when the brake is
connected to the power unit)
1 = Command, close holding brake
1 = Enable setpoint from the brake control
1 = Pulse enable from the brake control
Bit 9 = 1 --> Ready to exchange process data
r0899.13
From the basic brake control (p0108.14 = 0) [2701.8]
From the expanded brake control/standstill detection (p0108.14 = 1) [2711.8]
r0899.14
r0899.15
From the expanded brake control/standstill detection (p0108.14 = 1) [2711.8]
From the expanded brake control/standstill detection (p0108.14 = 1) [2711.8]
From the control unit [2610] r0899.3
<4>
<3>
<3>
r0899.7
r0899.8From the control unit [2610]
(1)
2. OFF2
p0845[C]
(1)
2. OFF3
p0849[C]
(0)
INF operation
p0864
OFF1
OFF2
OFF3
1
Enable
internal
missing
or
fault with
this reaction
&
From the basic brake control (p0108.14 = 0) [2701.8]
From the expanded brake control/standstill detection (p0108.14 = 1) [2711.8]
[4015.1]
[4015.1]
[2701.1][2711.1]
[2701.1][2711.1]
r0899
ZSW sequence ctrl
(0)
p2810[1] r2811.0
[2428]
(0)
p2810[0]
<2>
<5>
<6> For DO ENCODER only bit 9.
<6>
<6><1>
Internal control/status words
Function diagrams
2-935
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-54 2505 – Control word, setpoint channel
- 2505 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2505_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV
SINAMICS
20.06.08 V04.03.01
Internal control/status words - Control word, setpoint channel
11
12
13
14
15
1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 0
Control word, setpoint channel
1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 1
1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 2
1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 3
Reserved
1 = Inhibit negative direction
1 = Inhibit positive direction
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Setpoint inversion
Reserved
1 = Motorized potentiometer, raise
1 = Bypass ramp-function generator
1 = Motorized potentiometer, lower
p1020[C]
(0)
Fixed setpoint selection, bit 0
p1023[C]
(0)
Fixed setpoint selection, bit 3
p1111[C]
(0)
Inhib pos dir
p1036[C]
(0)
Motorized potentiometer, lower
p1035[C]
(0)
Motorized potentiometer, raise
9
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit No.
p0115[3]
r1198.3
r1198.5
r1198.6
r1198.11
r1198.13
r1198.14
p1022[C]
(0)
Fixed setpoint selection, bit 2
p1021[C]
(0)
Fixed setpoint selection, bit 1
r1198.2
r1198.1
r1198.0
p1113[C]
(0)
Setpoint inversion
To the setpoint channel [3060.1] [3070.3]r1198.15
p1122[C]
(0)
Bypass RFG
To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2]
To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2]
To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2]
To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2]
To direction limiting and direction reversal
[3040.3]
To direction limiting and direction reversal
[3040.5]
To the motorized potentiometer [3020.1]
To the motorized potentiometer [3020.1]
To direction limiting and direction reversal
[3040.2]
p1110[C]
(0)
Inhib neg dir
r1198
STW setpoint channel
Function diagrams
Internal control/status words
2-936 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-55 2520 – Control word, speed controller
- 2520 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2520_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
27.02.08 V04.03.01
Internal control/status words - Control word, speed controller
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0
Bit No.
12
13
14
15
Vector
-
-
Servo
-
- -
Reserved
Control word, speed controller
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
1 = speed controller, hold I component
1 = speed controller, set I component
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Travel to fixed stop
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Droop enable
1 = Closed-loop torque control active
Reserved
Set speed adaptation controller I component
Reserved
r1406.11
r1406.5
r1406.8
r1406.4
r1406.12
-
To the speed controller [6040.4]
To the closed-loop speed control
[5060.1 and 6060.1]
p1492[C]
(0)
Enables droop
p1545[C]
(0)
TfS activation
p1501[C]
(0)
Changeov n/M_ctrl
-
- -
- -
- -
- -
-
-
-
-
- -
-
-
-
To the speed setpoint, droop [6030.1]
To torque signals,
Motor locked/stalled [8012.5]
To the speed controller [6040.4]
p1476[C]
(0)
n_ctrl integ stop
p1477[C]
(0)
n_ctrl integ set
<1>
1000.00 μs
<1> Only for Servo.
p0115[1] (Motor Modules)
r1406.15
<2> Only for SINAMICS S120.
<2>
<2>
<2>
r1406
STW n_ctrl
<1>
<2> <2> <2>
Internal control/status words
Function diagrams
2-937
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-56 2522 – Status word, speed controller
- 2522 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2522_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
08.10.09 V04.03.01
Internal control/status words - Status word, speed controller
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0
Bit No.
12
13
14
15
Vector
-
Servo
-
From torque limiting [5610.4]
From the torque setpoint [6060.4][6060.7]
<3> From the setpoint, n-ctrl [5030.8]
<3><1> From the speed controller [5210.3]
From the speed setpoint, droop [6030.4][6030.5]
From torque limiting [5610.4]
From the torque setpoint [6060.7]
From torque limiting [5610.4]
From the torque setpoint [6060.7]
Sensorless operation
[2520.7]
-
-
-
r1407.8
r1407.9
r1407.11
r1407.1
1 = Torque control
r1406.12
r1407.7
From the changeover, closed-loop control types [5060.5]
<3><1> From the speed controller [5210.8]
From the speed controller [5040.7][6040.7]
<3><1> From the speed controller [5210.8]
From the speed controller [5040.7][6040.7]
1 = V/f control active
Status word, speed controller
1 = Sensorless operation active
1 = Closed-loop torque control active
1 = Closed-loop speed control active
1 = Speed setpoint from DSC
1 = Speed controller, I component held
1 = Speed controller, I component set
1 = Torque limit reached
1 = Torque limiting, upper, active
1 = Torque limiting, lower, active
1 = Droop enabled
1 = Speed setpoint limited
1 = Ramp-function generator set
1 = Sensorless operation due to a fault
Reserved
1 = I/f control active
-
r1407.10
r1407.11
r1407.5
r1407.6
r1407.2
<1> Only for servo control without encoder.
From the control unit [2610.4]
From the speed setpoint, droop [6030.3]
r1407.3
r1407.12
-
r1407.4
To the speed actual value and pole position
sensing, motor encoder (encoder 1)
[4710.4]<3> [4715.4]
To speed setpoint, droop [6030.5]
To torque setpoint [6060.3]
Ramp-function generator tracking [3080.1]
“Traveling blocks“ mode [3616.1]<3>
Speed controller [5040.7]<3>[5042.5][6040.4]
Motor locked/stalled [8012.5]
<2>
r1407.13
<2> Only for SERVO.
<2>
1000.00 μs
r1407.0
p0115[1] (Motor Modules)
p1190 > 0 (interconnected)
p1191 > 0 (interconnected)
PcCtrl active
Mot-ID
OFF1
1
OFF3
STOP2
&
Motion-based
PolID
To Speed setpoint filter [5020.1]
To Reference model [5030.3]
r1407.14
<3> Only for SINAMICS S120.
<3>
r1407
ZSW n_ctrl
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
&
<3>
<2>
<3>
<3>
Function diagrams
Internal control/status words
2-938 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-57 2526 – Status word, closed loop control
- 2526 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2526_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
24.10.08 V04.03.01
Internal control/status words - Status word, closed-loop control
1
2
4
1 = Initialization completed
Meaning
1 = De-magnetization completed
1 = Pulses enabled
1 = Magnetization completed
1 = Frequency, negative
0
Bit No.
7
Status word closed-loop control
8
9
11
1 = Field weakening active
1 = Voltage limit active
1 = Frequency limit active
1 = Vdc_max controller active14
1 = Vdc_min controller active15
r0056
ZSW closed-loop control
r0056.11
r0056.14
r0056.15
r0056.0
r0056.1
r0056.2
r0056.4
r0056.7
r0056.8
r0056.9
31 = Soft starting available r0056.3
5Reserved r0056.5
61 = Acceleration voltage active r0056.6
12 1 = Current limiting controller, voltage output active r0056.12
13 1 = Current/torque limiting active r0056.13
10 1 = Slip limiting active r0056.10
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[1] (Motor Modules)
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1> Only for V/f control.
<2> Not for SERVO.
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
[6722.6][6725.6]
[6725.4][6730.5][6731.5][6732.4]
[6722.3][6725.4]
[6714.8]
[6730.5][6731.5][6732.4]
[6220.8][6320.8]
[6220.8][6320.8]
[6310.8]
[6060.7]
[6710.2]
[6031.6][6710.2]
[8012.5]
[8018.1]
[2701.1][2707.1]
<3>
<3> <3>
<3>
<3> <3>
<3> Only for SINAMICS S120.
Internal control/status words
Function diagrams
2-939
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-58 2530 – Status word, closed-loop current control
- 2530 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2530_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
24.10.08 V04.03.01
Internal control/status words - Status word, current control
r1408
ZSW closed-loop
current control
1
2
1 = Closed-loop current control active
Meaning
1 = Lim. I comp. Id-R active
Reserved
0
Bit No.
Status word closed-loop current control
[6714.5]
[6714.7] 3
4
1 = Limiting U active
5
6
7
8
9
1 = Lim. EMF/Obs-ctrl. active10
11 1 = Error EMF/Obs-N active
12 1 = Motor stalled active
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
[6730.3]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[0] (Motor Modules)
1 = Limiting Ud active
1 = Limiting Uq active
1 = Pos. limit. Iq active
1 = Neg. limit. Iq active
1 = Iq setpoint limit. active
1 = Id setpoint limit. active
<2> Only for VECTOR.
<1> Only for SERVO.
<1>
<2>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
r1408.5 [5040.7][5042.5]
[5714.5]
r1408.6
[5714.4]
r1408.7
[5714.4]r1408.8
[5722.7]r1408.9
r1408.10
r1408.11
r1408.12
r1408.4
r1408.3
r1408.1
<3> Only for SINAMICS S120.
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
<3>
Function diagrams
Internal control/status words
2-940 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-59 2534 – Status word, monitoring functions 1
- 2534 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2534_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
08.07.09 V04.03.01
Internal control/status words - Status word, monitoring functions 1
Reserved
Status word, monitoring functions 1
|n_act| <= speed threshold value 2 (p2155)
|n_act| > speed threshold value 2 (p2155)
1 = n_act >= 0
Reserved
Reserved
n_act > n_max
1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off
Reserved
Reserved9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit No. r2197
ZSW monitoring functions 1
r2197.7
r2197.6
r2197.2
r2197.1
r2197.3
<1> n
act
= smoothed speed actual value r2169 [8010.2].
<1>
<1>
p0115[3]
From speed signals 2 [8011.8]
From speed signals 1 [8010.6]
From speed signals 1 [8010.8]
From speed signals 2 [8011.8]
1
Reserved10
Reserved11
Reserved12
Reserved13
Reserved14
Reserved15
Internal control/status words
Function diagrams
2-941
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-60 2536 – Status word, monitoring functions 2
- 2536 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2536_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
04.11.09 V04.03.01
Internal control/status words - Status word, monitoring functions 2
p0115[3] (4000.00 μs)
r2198
ZSW monitoring functions 2
r2198.10
r2198.6
r2198.7
11
12
13
14
15
Reserved
Status word, monitoring functions 2
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
1 = |n_set| < p2161
1 = n_set >0
1 = Motor blocked
1 = Motor stalled
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1 (p2174)
1 = Load monitoring signals an alarm
1 = Load monitoring signals a fault
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
9
10
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit No.
r2198.5
7
From speed signals 2 [8011.8]
From speed signals 2 [8011.8]
From torque messages, motor locked/stalled [8012.8]
From torque messages, motor locked/stalled [8012.8]
From torque messages, motor locked/stalled [8012.3]
From load monitoring [8013.8]
From load monitoring [8013.8]
r2198.11
r2198.12
r2198.4
<1> Only relevant if the function module "extended signals/
monitoring functions" (r0108.17 = 1) is active.
<1>
<1>
Function diagrams
Internal control/status words
2-942 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-61 2537 – Status word, monitoring functions 3
Function diagram - 2537 -
87654321
fp_2537_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
29.06.09 V04.03.01
Internal control/status words - Status word, monitoring functions 3
11
12
13
14
15
1 = |n_act| < speed threshold value 3 (p2161)
Status word, monitoring functions 3
1 = f or n comparison value reached or exceeded (p2141)
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on
1 = Ramp-up/ramp-down completed
0 = Ramp-function generator active
1 = Current below residual current threshold
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2 (p2194)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
PROFIdrive bit
9
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit No.
P0115[4]
From torque signals [8012.5]
From speed signals 2 [8011.8]
From speed signals 1 [8010.8]
From speed signals 1 [8010.8]
r2199
ZSW monitoring functions 3
r2199.11
r2199.5
r2199.1
r2199.0
<1>
<1>n_act = smoothed speed actual value r2169 [8010.2].
[8012.1]
From speed signals 2 [8011.8] r2199.4
r2199.6
Internal control/status words
Function diagrams
2-943
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-62 2546 – Control word, faults/alarms
- 2546 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2546_51_eng.vsd
DO: All objects
SINAMICS
08.05.08 V04.03.01
Internal control/status words - Control word, faults/alarms
p2103[C]1. Acknowledge
p2102[C]Ackn all faults
p2105[C]3. Acknowledge
Pulse generator
11
12
13
14
15
Reserved
Control word, faults/alarms
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
= Acknowledge faults
Reserved
Reserved
= External alarm 1 (A07850)
= External alarm 2 (A07851)
= External alarm 3 (A07852)
= External fault 1 (F07860)
= External fault 3 (F07862)
= External fault 2 (F07861)
PROFIdrive bit
9
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit No.
To alarm buffer [8065.1]r2138.11
To fault buffer [8060.1]
r2138.13
To fault buffer [8060.1]r2138.14
r2138
STW faults/alarms
p2112[C] (1)
p2116[C] (1)
p2117[C] (1)
p2106[C] (1)
p2107[C] (1)
4000.00 μs
To fault buffer [8060.1]
r2138.15
To alarm buffer [8065.1]r2138.12
To alarm buffer [8065.1]r2138.10
To fault buffer [8060.1]
r2138.7
p2108[C] (1)
p3111[C] (1)
p3112[C] (0)
T0
p3110 [ms]
This parameter refers to the Control Unit and is
used as source to simultaneously acknowledge
all faults on all drive objects.
<2>
<1>
These parameters refer to the Command Data Sets (CDS)
depending on the individual drive object (DO).
<2>
<1>
p2104[C]2. Acknowledge
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
1
1
1
1
1
1
Function diagrams
Internal control/status words
2-944 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-63 2548 – Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2
- 2548 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2548_51_eng.vsd
DO: All objects
SINAMICS
13.02.08 V04.03.01
Internal control/status words - Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2
Source sampling time
Refer to [1020.7]
3
...
9
r2135
ZSW faults/alarms 2
0
r2139.3
r2139.7
r2135.14
r2135.15
r2135.13
r2135.12
r2139.0
r2139.6
r2135.0
r2135.1
r2135.2
From the thermal monitoring, power module [8014.8]
From the thermal monitoring, power module [8014.8]
From the thermal monitoring, motor [8016.8]
From the thermal monitoring, motor [8016.8]
r2139.8
From the alarm buffer [8065.4]
From the fault buffer [8060.6]
1 = Fault, encoder 1
Status word, faults/alarms 2
1 = Fault, encoder 2
1 = Fault, encoder 3
1 = Alarm transformer overtemperature
1 = Fault motor overtemperature
1 = Fault, thermal overload, power module
1 = Acknowledgement running
Status word, faults/alarms 1
1 = Fault present
Reserved
1 = Internal signal 2 present
1 = Alarm motor overtemperature
1 = Alarm, thermal overload, power module
1 = Internal signal 1 present
1 = Alarm present
1 = Safety signal present
2
1
Bit No.
r2139.5
4
6
7
8
12
13
14
15
0
Bit No.
5
3
r2139.11
Reserved9
Reserved10
1 = Alarm class bit 011
r2139.121 = Alarm class bit 112
Reserved
Reserved
1
2
Reserved13
Reserved14
Reserved15
11
1 = Fault transformer overtemperature10
<1> From the thermal monitoring, transformer [8016.8]
<1> From the thermal monitoring, transformer [8016.8]
r2135.11
r2135.10
Reserved
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1> Not for VECTOR and VECTORGL.
r2139
ZSW faults/alarms 1
Sequence control
Function diagrams
2-945
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.7 Sequence control
Function diagrams
2610 – Sequencer 2-946
2634 – Missing enable signals, line contactor control, logic operation 2-947
Function diagrams
Sequence control
2-946 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-64 2610 – Sequencer
S4: Operation
ZSWA.00/01/02 = 1
ZSWA.11 = 1
ZSWA.06 = 0
Pulses enabled
Controller enabled
No jog operation: Setpoints enabled
- 2610 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2610_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
03.11.09 V04.03.01
Sequence control - Sequencer
POWER ON
S1: Power-on inhibit
ZSWA.06 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0
ZSWA.00/01/02 = 0
Pulses inhibited
S2: Ready to power up
ZSWA.00 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0
Main contactor is OPEN
Wait for power-up or jog
<2>
S5a: Ramp stop
ZSWA.00/01 = 1
ZSWA.11 = 1
ZSWA.02/06 = 0
Bring the drive to n <= 0 along
the Ramp-funktion Generator,
then inhibit the pulses
S5b: Fast stop
ZSWA.00/01 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 1
ZSWA.02/06 = 0
Bring the drive to n <= 0 along the
fast stopping ramp or torque limit,
then inhibit the pulses
S3: Ready
ZSWA.00/01 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0
ZSWA.02/06 = 0
Line contactor is CLOSED
Wait for pre-charging
&
"Enable operation"
(STWA.03)
"Enable operation" (STWA.03)
&
"0 = OFF" Jog 1 Jog 1
&
&
&
Pulse enable HW[
2701.8][2711.8]
"0 = Fast stop"
(STWA.02)
"0 = Cost down" (STWA.01)
&
Pulse enable
HW [2701.8] [2711.8]
"0 = Cost down"
(STWA.01)
<1> POWER ON = 24 V electronics supply OFF --> ON or RESET button.
<2> The sequence control is implemented according to the PROFIdrive profile.
<3> Only for SINAMICS S120:
If a DO Infeed (A_INF, B_INF and S_INF) is used, it closes the line contactor
(refer to [8732][8832][8932]) and not the DO SERVO/VECTOR.
p0857... p0862
2000.00 μs
Missing enable
signals [2634]
Faults
F07300...F07802
F6000
&
Pulse enable
HW[2701.8]
Drive at standstill
Fault
with OFF1 – or
OFF3
response
Drive at standstill
1
1
Drive at
standstill
<4>
<4>
<4>
<4>
<4>
<4> These control commands can also be triggered by a fault response.
&
&
Closed-loop control operation
De-magnetization completed
(r0046.27 = 0)
&
"Commissioning completed" (p0010 = 0 & p0009 = 0)
From all states
. . .
1
1
"0 = OFF" (STWA.00)
"0 = Coast down" (STWA.01)
"0 = Fast stop" (STWA.02)
r0046.8 EP terminals, enable missing
"0 = Coast down" (STWA.01)
"0 = Fast stop" (STWA.02)
<5> STWA.xx = control word, sequence control, bit xx (r0898) [2501]; ZSWA.xx = status word, sequence control bit xx (r0899) [2503].
<5>
<5>
<5>
<5>
<5>
<5>
<5>
<1>
<5>
<5>
<5>
<5>
S5c: Jogging -
down ramp
ZSWA.00/01 = 1
ZSWA.11 = 1
ZSWA.02/06 = 0
Bring the drive to n <= 0 along
the Ramp-funktion Generator,
then inhibit the pulses
Jog 2
Jog mode
1
Jog 2
No jog operation
"0 = OFF"
Jog 1
Jog 2
OFF3 (has priority over jogging)
Drive at
standstill
OFF2 (has priority over jogging)
Closed-loop control operation
r0863.0
No LT_fault
UDC uploaded
&
Energize contactor
r0863.1
Controller enable
r0899.8
1
Infeed ready
p0864
&
"0 = OFF"
Jog 1
Jog 2
1
[2503.3]
<7>
<7>
<7>
<6> Only if „Safety Integrated“ is active.
<7> The parameters p1226, p1227 and p1228 influence this status.
<6>
<6>
<6>
T0
p0862
<3>
“0 = Coast down“ (STWA.01)
“0 = Fast stop“ (STWA.02)
<4> <5>
r0046.8 EP terminals,
enable missing
<6>
<4>
<5>
[2634]
<6>
<5>
[2634]
[2634]
r0046.8 EP terminals,
enable missing
[2634]
r0046.8 EP terminals,
enable missing
r0046.8 EP terminals,
enable missing
[2634]
Sequence control
Function diagrams
2-947
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-65 2634 – Missing enable signals, line contactor control, logic operation
- 2634 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2634_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
23.07.08 V04.03.01
Sequence control - Missing enable signals, line contactor control, logic operation
+24 V
Control unit
Line contactor control
T
p0861
Time monitoring
&
F07300
"Line contactor
feedback signal
missing"
[2120]...[2133]
DI
DO
[2130]...[2133]
r0863.1
Line contactor feedback signal
p0860
Energize line contactor
r0863.1
Missing enable signals that prevent the drive going into operation
(this situation can be detected at the ZSW sequence control, infeed r0899.2 = 1 [8926]<3>).
Missing enable signals
[8964.6]<3>
1
To the infeed
&
1
Operating monitoring
ON/OFF monitoring
0
From the line
supply
p0115[3] (2000.00 μs)
<1> Only for VECTOR.
<2> For AC/AC devices, diode infeed
<2>
<1>
1 = OFF2, enable missing1
2
3
5
6
9
1 = OFF1, enable missing
Bedeutung
1 = OFF3, enable missing
1 = Enable operation missing
1 = STOP2, enable missing
1 = STOP1, enable missing
1 = Infeed, enable missing
Bit Nr.
0
10
11
12
1 = Ramp-function generator enable missing
1 = Ramp-function generator start missing
1 = Setpoint, enable missing
16
17
18
1 = OFF1, enable, internal missing
1 = OFF2, enable, internal missing
1 = OFF3, enable, internal missing
26 1 = Drive inactive or not operational
19 1 = Pulse enable, internal missing
25 1 = Function bypass active
27 1 = Demagnetization not completed
28 1 = Open brake missing
41 = Armature short-circuit/DC brake, enable missing
81 = EP terminals, enable missing
20
21
1 = Internal armature short circuit/DC brake, enable missing
1 = STOP2, enable internal missing
22 1 = STOP1, enable internal missing
29
30
31
1 = Cooling system ready missing
1 = Jog setpoint active
1 = Speed controller inhibited
[2701.8]
[2610.4]<2>
[8732.4]<3>
[8832.4]<3>
[8932:4]
Line contactor control from sequence control
1
r0046
Missing enable sig
[3020.5]
r0046.0
r0046.1
r0046.2
r0046.3
r0046.5
r0046.6
r0046.9
r0046.10
r0046.11
r0046.12
r0046.8
r0046.16
r0046.17
r0046.18
r0046.19
r0046.20
r0046.22
r0046.25
r0046.26
r0046.27
r0046.28
r0046.29
r0046.30
r0046.31
r0046.21
r0046.4
1
Fault with
OFF3 response
[3060.2]
[3060.4]
[3070.2]
[3070.4]
1 = Internal RFG missing [3060.2]
[3070.2]
0 = Internal fast stop
<3> Only for SINAMICS S120.
(0)
p2810[1]
(0)
p2816[0]
(0)
p2816[1]
(0)
Logic operation
p2810[0]
AND operation
r2811.0
OR operation
r2817.0
Function diagrams
Brake control
2-948 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.8 Brake control
Function diagrams
2701 – Simple brake control (r0108.14 = 0) 2-949
2704 – Extended brake control, zero speed detection (r0108.14 = 1) 2-950
2707 – Extended brake control, open/close brake (r0108.14 = 1) 2-951
2711 – Extended brake control, signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1) 2-952
Brake control
Function diagrams
2-949
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-66 2701 – Simple brake control (r0108.14 = 0)
- 2701 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2701_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
07.05.08 V04.03.01
Braking control - Basic braking control (r0108.14 = 0)
n_stop n_thresh
0.0...210 000.0 [RPM]
p1226 (20.0)
r0060
n_set before filter
Pulse enable HW
OFF 1 present
OFF 3 present
<3> If p1215 = 0, 2 -> t = 0 ms.
Background
Refer to [1020.7]
<1> Motor holding brake configuration (p1215)
0 = No motor holding brake being used.
1 = Motor holding brake acc. to sequence control.
2 = Motor holding brake always released.
3 = Motor holding brake like sequence control, connection via BICO.
<4> Only if Safety Integrated is active (Double Motor Module: X22, Chassis: X41).
<5> For p1227 = 300 s, the monitoring function is deactivated.
Stop 2 enable internal missing
r0046.21 [2634.1]
<2> Priority assignment (high -> low): p1215, p0858, p0855, p0856, sequence control.
[2501.3]
p0855
1 = Unconditionally open the
holding brake
r0898.7
<6> If an external motor holding brake is used, p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be interconnected as
control signal.
<3>
<8> The internal signal includes signals that lead to OFF1 or OFF3 (e. g. BICO or fault response).
<9> If the brake is permanently applied or released (p0855, p0858 or p1215), the drive does not wait while the brake is released or applied.
[2501.3]
p0856 1 = Enable speed controller
r0898.12
[2501.3]
p0852 1 = Operation enabled
r0898.3
<7> r0046.21 = 0, as long as r0046.0 = 1 (OFF1 enable missing or power-on inhibit).
r0046.21 = 1, if p0858 = 1 or p0856 = 0.
The signal generation is shown simplified.
[2501.3]
p0858 1 = Unconditionally close the holding brake
r0898.14
0...10 000 [ms]
p1217 (100)
1
T0
0.000...300.000 [s]
p1227 (4.000)
T0
p1215 = 2
1
0
1
0
T0
1
1
1
<4>
T0
0.000...10.000 [s]
p1228 (0.000)
[2814.2]
[2503.3]
[2503.3]
[2610.5]
[2610.8]
[5042.8]
[5730.4]
&
<5>
<1>
<2>
<2>
<6>
[2503.3]
<3>
<7>
<8>
[2503.7]
Q
Q
RESET
(Q=0)
SET
(Q=1)
Q
Q
RESET
(Q=0)
SET
(Q=1)
RESET
(Q=0)
Q
Q
SET
(Q=1)
Q
Q
RESET
(Q=0)
SET
(Q=1)
Q
Q
RESET
(Q=0)
SET
(Q=1)
0...10 000 [ms]
p1216 (100)
<1>
p1215 = 0
&
&
&
1
&
1 = Command, close holding brake
r0899.13
Close "normal" brake
1 = Open the holding brake
1 = Open holding brake
r0899.12
Open brake
Close brake
r0063
n_act smooth
[4710.7]
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed
[4715.7]
1 = No coast down active
r0899.4
Pulse enable X21
[2503.7]
1 = Power-on inhibit active
r0899.6
Magnetizing completed
r0056.4
<9>
[2526.6]
Note: Braking signal diagnostic evaluation (p1278) only applies for SBC (Safe Brake Control) (controls the Safe Brake Relay).
<10> Only for SINAMICS S120.
<10>
<10>
<10>
<10>
<10>
<10>
[6030.2]
for VECTOR
<10>
r1438
n_ctrl n_set
[5030.8]
for SERVO
Function diagrams
Brake control
2-950 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-67 2704 – Extended brake control, zero speed detection (r0108.14 = 1)
- 2704 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2704_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
07.05.08 V04.03.01
Braking control - Extended braking control, zero-speed detection (r0108.14 = 1)
T0
<2>
0.000...300.000 s
p1227 (4.000)
0.000...10.000 s
p1228 (0.000)
&
T0
(0)
p1224[1]
Standstill threshold
(r0063)0
p1225
<2>
0.000...300.000 s
p1276 (300.000)
1
0
1
0
p1275.02 (0) p1275.03 (0)
Brake, threshold value
fallen below
r1229.7
Brake,
monitoring
time expired
r1229.8
(0)
p1224[2]
(0)
p1224[3]
r0063
n_act smooth
[4710.7]
n_stop n_thresh
0.0...210 000.0 RPM
p1226 (20.0)
OFF1 present
OFF3 present
Close brake from standstill detection
<2> For p1276 = 300.000 s, the timer is de-activated, i.e. the timer output is always 0. Note: When operating a
motor with a brake which must not be applied while the motor is rotating, the monitoring time of both timers
must be set to 300 s.
<1> Shutdown threshold of the standstill detection. In this case (e.g. when using a brake), another criterion than the
speed actual value can be selected to clear the pulses. Otherwise, we recommend to keep the factory setting.
<1>
1
0
1
-1
0
1
<3>
<3> For operation without brake, p1224[0...3] must be 0 (factory setting) in order to avoid undesirable interaction
with the sequence control.
[2707.1]
[2711.1]
Background
Refer to [1020.7]
T0
SET
(Q=1) Q
RESET
(Q=0) Q
1
(0)
Brk close standstill
p1224[0]
<4> The internal signal comprises signals that lead to OFF1 or OFF3, e.g. BICO or fault response.
<4>
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed
[4715.7] (r0063[0])
p1225
<5>
<5> Only for SINAMICS S120.
<5>
r0060
n_set before filter
[6030.2]
for VECTOR
r1438
n_ctrl n_set
[5030.8]
for SERVO
Brake control
Function diagrams
2-951
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-68 2707 – Extended brake control, open/close brake (r0108.14 = 1)
- 2707 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2707_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
21.11.07 V04.03.01
Braking control - Extended braking control, open/close brake (r0108.14 = 1)
<1> Motor holding brake configuration
0 = No brake or brake always applied (brake connected to the power unit)
1 = Brake control active (brake connected to the power unit)
2 = Brake always released (brake connected to the power unit)
3 = Brake control active (brake connection can be interconnected using BICO)
Note:
A motor brake cannot be connected to all power units. p1215 is set to 3 and the brake is controlled via a digital output (e.g. TM31).
<3> These blocks/modules are evaluated with the same sampling rate as the brake control and therefore may only be used to individually adapt the brake control.
<4> If the brake is permanently applied or released (p0855, p0858 or p1215), the drive does not wait until the brake is released or applied.
Brake OR
logic operation
result
1229.10
(0)
p1279[3]
Brake AND
logic operation
result
1229.11
<3>
Background
Refer to [1020.7]
<2> Priority assignment (high -> low): p1215, p0858, p0855, p0856/p1219, apply brake from standstill detection, p1218.
Magnetizing completed
r0056.4
T0
0.000...300.000 s
p1277(0.000)
Brake open threshold
(1)
p1220
(1)
Open brake
p1218[0]
0
1
Brake open threshold
0.00...200.00%
p1221(0.00)
Open brake (internal)
Brake threshold
exceeded
r1229.6
(1)
p1218[1]
[2711.1]
<2>
p1215 = 2
<1>
[2501.3]
p0855 1 = Unconditionally open the holding brake
r0898.7
[2501.3]
p0856 1 = Enable speed controller
r0898.12
(0)
p1219[2]
(r1229.9)
p1219[3]
Close brake (internal)
(0)
p1219[1]
(0)
Immediately close brake
p1219[0]
1
0
1
p1275.00 (0)
1
0
1
p1275.01 (0)
Request, pulse enable missing/n_ctrl inhibited
r1229.9
1
&
Request pulse enable
[2711.1]
[2711.8]
[2704.8] Close brake from standstill detection
<1>
p1215 = 0
<2>
(0)
OR logic operation
p1279[0]
(0)
p1279[1]
(0)
AND logic operation
p1279[2]
[2501.3]
p0858 1 = Unconditionally close the holding brake
r0898.14 <4>
[2526.6]
Function diagrams
Brake control
2-952 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-69 2711 – Extended brake control, signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1)
- 2711 -
Function diagram
87654321
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
03.11.09 V04.03.01
Braking control - Extended braking control, signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1)
1 = Command, open brake
r1229.1
Pulse enable from the brake control
r0899.14
Setpoint enable from the brake control
r0899.15
&
&
&
Brake does not close
&
&
0...10 000 ms
p1217 (100)
T0
0...10 000 ms
p1216 (100)
[2704.8]
Brake does not open
r1229.4
r1229.5
Close brake (internal)
[2707.8] Close "normal" brake
1
Open brake (internal)
[2707.8]
T0 <1>
No OFF1
No OFF3
Pulse enable from the expanded brake control
r1229.3
&
1
<2>
<2>
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
Brake is being used
p1215 > 0
Brake with
feedback signal
p1275.5
[2814.2]
A07932
A07931
[2501.1]
[2503.3]
fp_2711_54_eng.vsd
Background
Refer to [1020.7]
Pulse enable, HW
1
0
Brake is being used
p1215 > 0
1
&
[2610.5]
[2610.8]
[5730.4]
&
Coast down not active (r0899.4)
Pulse enable X21<7>, X41<8>
Enable operation (r0898.3)
Power-on inhibit (r0899.6)
[2704.8] Close brake from standstill detection
Request pulse enable
[2707.1]
Close brake
From the standstill detection
[2503.7]
[2503.7]
[2501.7]
<4>
<3>
(1)
Brake feedb open
p1223
<5>
1 = Open holding brake
r0899.12
1 = Command, close holding brake
r0899.13
<6>
<1> This pulse enable path only works for operation with brake (p1215 > 0).
<2> For brakes with one single checkback signal, the inverted signal has to be interconnected to the BICO input for the second checkback. The switching times of the brake are set in p1216 and p1217.
<3> Only if Safety Integrated is active (Double Motor Module: X22, Chassis: X41).
<4> If an external motor holding brake is used, p1215 should be set to 3 and r1229.1 should be used as control signal.
<5> The internal signal comprises signals that lead to OFF1 or OFF3, e.g. BICO or fault response.
<6> If the function module "extended brake control" is active (r0108.14 = 1), r1229.1 should be interconnected as control signal.
<7> Only for SINAMICS S120 booksize.
<8> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150 Chassis/G130/G150.
Note: Braking signal diagnostic evaluation (p1278) is only relevant for SBC (Safe Brake Control) (controls the Safe Brake Relay).
(0)
Brake feedb closed
p1222
SET
(Q=1)
RESET
(Q=0)
Q
Q
[2503.3]
[2503.3]
[2503.3]
1
1
<7>
<7>
Safety Integrated
Function diagrams
2-953
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.9 Safety Integrated
Function diagrams
2800 – Basic functions, parameter manager 2-954
2802 – Basic functions, monitoring and faults/alarms 2-955
2804 – Basic functions, status words 2-956
2810 – Basic functions, STO (Safe Torque Off), SS1 (Safe Stop 1) 2-957
2814 – Basic functions, SBC (Safe Brake Control), SBA (Safe Brake Adapter) 2-958
Function diagrams
Safety Integrated
2-954 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-70 2800 – Basic functions, parameter manager
- 2800 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2800_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150Safety Integrated - Basic Functions, Parameter manager
Change safety parameters
p9601 = 0
[2810.3]
SI password input
p9761
Reset safety parameters
Inhibit safety functions
x
r9780 CU/r9880 MM
07.08.08 V04.03.01
p9801 = 0
[2810.3]
Safety parameters
p9601 ... p9899
can be reset to the
factory settings via
p0970, p3900
Safety parameters
p9601 ... p9899
can be changed
SI password new
p9762
SI ackn password
p9763
Safety commissioning mode
[2802.1][2804.1][2804.3][2810.3]
--> select STO
Safety parameterizing enable
y
<1>
<1>
Effective password
=
Enter password
=
SET
y = x
Safety parameters
p9601 ... p9899
are valid
=
<1>
<1>
<1> Comparator, refer to [1021]
<2> Analog signal memory, refer to [1021]
<3> The target checksum must be equal to the actual checksum.
p9899
SI set_checksum MM
r9898
SI act_checksum MM
SI set_checksum CU
p9799
SI act_checksum CU
r9798
<3>
p0010 95
Exit safety
commissioning mode
=
Checksum check
for safety
parameters
&
& &
<2>
Safety Integrated commissioning
p0010 = 95
<3>
Safety Integrated
Function diagrams
2-955
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-71 2802 – Basic functions, monitoring and faults/alarms
- 2802 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2802_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
02.12.09 V04.03.01
Safety Integrated - Basic Functions, Monitoring functions and faults/alarms
[2810.3] STO terminal CU (r0722.x)
810.1] STO terminal MM (X21/22 <1>)
(X41 <2>)
Additional diagnostics
Information
[2800.3] Safety commissioning mode
[2810.6] DIAG_U
[2810.6] DIAG_L
[2814.7] BR_DIAG
CU
r9794
MM
r9894
STOP F->A CU
p9658
STOP F->A MM
p9858
CU
r9795
MM
r9895
CU
r9770
MM
r9870
CU
r9780
MM
r9880
Cross checking list Diagnostics for STOP F
Faults/alarms
CU: F/A01600 ... 01699
MM: F/A30600 ... 30699
Safety monitoring functions
Safety Integrated version Monitoring clock cycle
F01611
F30611
1 = Faults with response "NONE"
STOP F
r9772.15 (CU)
[2804.2]
r9872.15 (MM)
[2804.5]
T0
Timer for emergency retraction
1 = Faults with response "immediate pulse cancelation"
1 = STOP A
To Safe Torque Off
[2810.3]
F01600/F30600
"STOP A initiated"
r9780 CU/r9880 MM
To Safe Brake Control
[2814.1]
1
r9872.9 (MM)
[2804.5]
r9772.9 (CU)
[2804.2]
r9872.10 (MM)
[2804.5]
r9772.10 (CU)
[2804.2]
1 = Faults with response "immediate pulse cancelation"
that cannot be acknowledged
1
[2810.3] Status SS1 CU
[2810.3] Status SS1 MM
<1> Only for SINAMICS S120 Booksize.
<2> Only for SINAMICS S120 Chassis/S150/G130/G150.
Function diagrams
Safety Integrated
2-956 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-72 2804 – Basic functions, status words
- 2804 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2804_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
02.12.09 V04.03.01
Safety Integrated - Basic Functions, Status words
Reserved
Reserved
r9780 CU/r9880 MM
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
1 = SBA active3
16[2800.3]
17[2810.3]
18[2825.8]
19 1 = STO cause actual value missing[2825.8]
1 = STO cause selection via SMM
1 = STO cause selection via terminal
1 = STO cse: Safety comm. mode
Reserved
Status word Safety Integrated
Control Unit
Status word Safety Integrated
Motor Module
Status word Safety Integrated
Control Unit and Motor Module
1
1 = STO selected on Control Unit
Status (Control Unit)
1 = STO active on Control Unit
0
Bit No. r9772
[2810.3]
[2810.7] 1
1 = STO selected on Motor Module
Status (Motor Module)
1 = STO active on Motor Module
0
Bit No.
[2810.3]
1
1 = STO selected in drive
Status (Control Unit + Motor Module)
1 = STO active in drive
0
Bit No.
&
&[2810.6]
1 = SS1 active on Motor Module 1 = SS1 active in drive222 1 = SS1 active on Control Unit [2810.3][2810.3] &
r9872 r9773
4
[2814.3] [2814.3]1 = SBC requested 1 = SBC requested44 1 = SBC requested &
9
10
1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active
1 = STOP A active[2802.8]
9
10
1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active
1 = STOP A active[2802.8]
31 1 = The shutdown paths must be tested[2810.5][2802.7] [2802.7]
15 1 = STOP F active 15 1 = STOP F active
16 1 = STO cse: Safety comm. mode[2800.3]
17 1 = STO cause selection via terminal[2810.3]
18 1 = STO cause selection via SMM[2825.8]
Reserved
Functions available on the CU and MM
from the CU perspective
Functions available on the CU and MM
from the MM perspective Status word Safety Integrated
Safe Torque Off group
1
1 = STO selected in group
Status (Safe Torque Off group)
1 = STO active in group
0
Bit No. r9774
1 = SS1 active in group
&
&
r9773.0
r9773.1
Group n
Group n
2
&
r9773.2
Group n
Reserved
41 = SBC requested in group&
r9773.4
Group n
1
2
1 = STO supported through terminals
Common functions (motor module)
1 = SBC supported
1 = SI motion supported
0
Bit No. r9871
3
41 = PROFIsafe supported
51 = Drive-based motion monitoring
functions supported
1 = SS1 supported
31 1 = Shutdown paths of the group must
be tested
r9773.31
Group n &
1
2
1 = STO supported via terminals
Common functions (Control Unit)
1 = SBC supported
1 = SI motion supported
0
Bit No. r9771
31 = SS1 supported
41 = PROFIsafe supported
51 = Drive-based motion monitoring functions
supported
Safety Integrated
Function diagrams
2-957
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-73 2810 – Basic functions, STO (Safe Torque Off), SS1 (Safe Stop 1)
- 2810 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_2810_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
18.12.09 V04.03.01
Safety Integrated - Basic Functions, STO (Safe Torque Off), SS1 (Safe Stop 1)
Motor Module
1 = STO active on Control Unit
r9772.1
r9880 (Motor Modules)
<6>
Motor Module
r0722.3
r0722.4
<1>
F01611 (CU)
F30611 (MM)
<4>
1
1 = STOP A [2802.8]
&
EP M
+24 V
X21/22 EP +
M
~
U
V
W
+ Vdc
-Vdc
1
&
+5 V
+5 V
M
Shutdown path
from MM
0 = STO_MM
+24 V
<3>
[2802.1][2814.2] DIAG_L
[2802.1][2814.2] DIAG_U
<5>
<5>
1
[2802.2]
[2802.2]
T0
[2802.2]
[2804.1]
SS1: Safe Stop 1
&
p9620[3]
p9620[21]
r0722.21
r0722.0
0 = Safe Torque Off CU
p9620[0]
p9620[4]
p0120
&
<7>
Upper IGBT
bridge halve
Gating unit
Lower IGBT
bridge halve
Gating unit
0 = Request pulse cancelation MM
1 = STO on MM active
r9872.1
[2804.5]
1 = "STO active" for
sequence control
Safe pulse
cancelation
Monitoring for simultaneous occurrence
to SBC
[2814.2]
Shutdown path
from CU
0 = STO_CU
to SBC
[2814.2]
SI Stop 1 t_del MM
0.00...300000.00 [s]
p9852 (0.00)
1 = Safety commissioning mode [2800.3]
Redundant functions
r9772.2 SS1 active on Control Unit
r9872.2 SS1 active on Motor Module
0 = Request Pulse
cancelation CU
DRIVE-CLiQ
r9780 Control Unit
Timer for forced
checking procedure
Control Unit
Additional for
CU320-2,
SIMOTION,
Dxxx and
NCU7xx
CU terminals that can be used for STO.
EP: Enable Pulses
&
1 = STO release [2825.8]
1
1 = Enable SOS/SLS p9301.0
1 = Enable STO (SH) via terminals (MM) p9801.0
&
1
=1
T0
F-DI chg tol CU p9650
F-DI chg tol MM p9850
0...2000 ms (500 ms)
X41<9>
<1> One terminal can be used for several drives to form a group.
<2> Switch-on delay according to [1024], starts when the "request pulse cancelation CU" is withdrawn.
<3> Value range: p9620 = 0 or r0722.0...7 (for CU310 and CX32 only r0722.0...17).
<4> Redundant functions in the Control Unit (CU) and Motor Modules (MM).
<5> Transistors inhibited for a "0" signal.
<6> Only for Booksize.
<7> Only for VECTOR. The number of active AND inputs corresponds to the number of Motor Modules
connected in parallel (p0120).
<8> Not for G130/G150.
<9> Only for SINAMICS S120 Chassis/S150/G130/G150.
1 = STO was selected on the MM
r9872.0
1 = STO cause selection
via terminal
r9872.17
[2804.3]
[2804.5]
1
1 = STOP A
[2802.8]
&
1
[2802.2]
T0
[2802.2]
[2804.1]
1
&
1 = STO
release
[2825.8]
1 = Enable SOS/SLS (SBH/SG) p9501.0
1 = Enable STO (SH) via terminals (CU) p9601.0
1 = STO cause selection via terminal
r9772.17
[2804.1]
[2804.2]
1 = Safety commissioning mode
[2800.3]
SI Stop 1 t_del CU
0.00...300.00 [s]
p9652 (0.00)
1 = STO selected
on CU
r9772.0
T0 A01699
"Shutdown
paths must
be tested"
Timer forced checking procedure
0...9000 h
p9659(8)
<2>
1 = Shutdown paths must be tested
r9773.31
T
[2804.7]
[2804.2]
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
<8>
<8>
Function diagrams
Safety Integrated
2-958 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-74 2814 – Basic functions, SBC (Safe Brake Control), SBA (Safe Brake Adapter)
- 2814 -
Function diagram
87654321
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
29.01.10 V04.03.01
Safety Integrated - Basic Functions, SBC (Safe Brake Control), SBA (Safe Brake Adapter)
Control Unit
Motor Module
> 0
Safety enable p9801
Enable SBC p9802
Enable signals for SBC MM
Causes for "close brake"
From the STO
shutdown paths
[2810.6]
0 = STO_CU
0 = STO_MM
DIAG_U
DIAG_L
Safety fault
[2802.8] 1 = STOP A
Enable signals for SBC CU
> 0
Safety enable p9601
Enable SBC p9602
Causes for "safely close brake"
From the STO
Shutdown paths
[2810.6]
0 = STO_CU
0 = STO_MM
DIAG_U
DIAG_L
Safety fault
[2802.8] 1 = STOP A
0 = Pulses
canceled
[2810.7]
= 1
= 1
0 = Pulses
cancelled
[2810.7]
fp_2814_54_eng.vsd
r9880 MM
DRIVE-CLiQ
M
~
BR1* BR2
BR_DIAG
BR1
DRIVE-CLiQ-Controller
BR2*
+24 V
BR1
BR2
1 = Transistor conductive
Upper gating control channel
Lower gating control channel
SBA - BR+
<1>
<1>
BR1
1
&
0 = "SBC angewählt"
F30630 "Incorrect safety brake control, MM"
1 = Fault, brake control
0 = "SBC requested"
0 = "SBC requested"
1 = "SBC enabled"
1
1 = "Fault, brake control"
<1> Motor brake 24 V DC.
<2> Not if:
p9602 = p9802 = 0 and p1278 = 1
<3> Only for Booksize.
<4> Only for Chassis (CIM).
<5> Motor brake 230 V AC.
1 = "SBC enabled"
0 = "SBC selected"
Diagnostic signal
BR2*
1
1 = SBC
requested
r9872.4
[2804.5]
1
1 = SBC
requested
r9772.4
2804.2]
BR1* BR_DIAG
&
BR_DIAG
[2802.1]
M
SBA - BR-
1
0
r9780 CU
&
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
SBC: Safe Brake Control (Sichere Bremsenansteuerung)
&
&
SBA_DIAG
SBA_DIAG
SBA_Diag
SBA-DIAG
SBA_DIAG
SI SBA WT CU
p9622
p9822
SI SBA t_wait MM
S
B
A
p9621
SI S_q SBA CU
Safe Brake Adapter Rückmeldesignal
r9872.3
<3>
<4>
<3>
<4>
<3>
<4>
F07930 "Incorrect brake control"
F01630 "Incorrect safety brake control, CU"
Safety Logic CU
(Implementation and
monitoring of brake control)
Close "normal" brake from the basic brake control [2701.8]
Close "normal" brake from the expanded brake control [2711.8]
Safety Logic MM
(Implementation and
monitoring of brake control)
SBA: Safe Brake Adapter
<3>
Rapid de-exitation
Brake rectifier
<5>
Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
2-959
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.10 Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
3010 – Fixed speed setpoints 2-960
3020 – Motorized potentiometer 2-961
3030 – Main/additional setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging 2-962
3040 – Direction of rotation limiting and reversal 2-963
3050 – Skip frequency bands and speed limiting 2-964
3060 – Basic ramp-function generator 2-965
3070 – Extended ramp-function generator 2-966
3080 – Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking 2-967
Function diagrams
Setpoint channel
2-960 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-75 3010 – Fixed speed setpoints
- 3010 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_3010_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
29.06.09 V04.03.01
Setpoint channel - Fixed speed setpoints
r1024
Fixed speed setpoint, actual
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
Fixed speed setpoint 1
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1001[D] (0.000)
Fixed speed setpoint 2
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1002[D] (0.000)
Fixed speed setpoint 3
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1003[D] (0.000)
Fixed speed setpoint 4
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1004[D] (0.000)
Fixed speed setpoint 5
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1005[D] (0.000)
Fixed speed setpoint 6
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1006[D] (0.000)
Fixed speed setpoint 7
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1007[D] (0.000)
Fixed speed setpoint 8
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1008[D] (0.000)
Fixed speed setpoint 9
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1009[D] (0.000)
Fixed speed setpoint 10
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1010[D] (0.000)
Fixed speed setpoint 11
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1011[D] (0.000)
Fixed speed setpoint 12
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1012[D] (0.000)
Fixed speed setpoint 13
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1013[D] (0.000)
Fixed speed setpoint 14
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1014[D] (0.000)
Fixed speed setpoint 15
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1015[D] (0.000)
p1001[D]
p1003[D]
p1002[D]
p1004[D]
p1005[D]
p1006[D]
p1007[D]
p1008[D]
p1009[D]
p1010[D]
p1011[D]
p1012[D]
p1013[D]
p1014[D]
p1015[D]
0.000
Fixed speed setpoint number actual
0...15
r1197
<100>
Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 0
r1198.0
Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 1
r1198.1
Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 2
r1198.2
Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 3
r1198.3
From
control word
setpoint
channel
0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
1 0 0 0
[2505.3]
p1020
[2505.3]
p1021
[2505.3]
p1022
[2505.3]
p1023
<101>
<100> For SERVO, the following applies:
Only if the function module "extended setpoint
channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1).
<101> Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115,
refer to p0112.
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[3]
Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
2-961
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-76 3020 – Motorized potentiometer
-1
0
1
- 3020 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_3020_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
22.10.09 V04.03.01
Setpoint channel - Motorized potentiometer
p1042[C] (0)
Mop auto setpoint
p1039[C] (0)
Mop inversion
p1041[C] (0)
Mop manual/auto
OFF1 enable missing (r0046.0)
Mop configuration
0000...0111
p1030[D] (0110)
Data save active
Automatic mode
Ramp-function generator active
Initial rounding-off active
p1044[C]
Mop setting value
p1043[C]
Mop accept set val
Mop n_max
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1037[D] (n_max_Mot)
Mop start value
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1040[D] (0.000)
Mop ramp-up time
0.0...1 000.0 [s]
p1047[D] (10.0)
Mop ramp-down time
0.0...1 000.0 [s]
p1048[D] (10.0)
<1>
Mop n_min
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1038[D] (-n_max_Mot)
<1>
Old value is kept
1
0
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
r1198.14
r1198.13
e.g. to [3030.1]
<1> For automatic commissioning, p1037 and p1038 are set to the
maximum motor speed or to the rated motor speed, provided that
n_max_mot has not been specified.
<3> Only effective if p1030.0 = 0.
<3>
0 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p1040.
1 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a ashion after OFF and after ON set to the saved value.
0 Without ramp generator in automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0).
1 With ramp generator in automatic mode.
0 Without initial rounding.
1 With initial rounding. The ramp-up/down time set is exceeded accordingly.
-1
0
1
n_max (reference value for
ramp-function generator p1082)
<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module "extended setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1).
[2505.7]
[3050.5]
<101> To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.
<100>
<101>
xy
<2> If initial rounding-off is active (p1030.2 = 1), the selected ramp-up/down times are exceeded accordingly.
<2> <2>
(0)
Mop raise
p1035
(0)
Mop lower
p1036 [2505.7]
r1050
Mop setp after RFG
[2634.3]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[3]
Save in NVRAM active 0 Not saved in the NVRAM.
1 Save in NVRAM active.
r1045
Mop n_set bef RFG
&
p1030.1
0
1
y
p1082
-p1082
x
y = 0
Function diagrams
Setpoint channel
2-962 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-77 3030 – Main/additional setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging
- 3030 -
Function diagram
87654321
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
06.05.09 V04.03.01
Setpoint channel - Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging
r1077
r1078
Jog 1
r0898.8
Jog 2
r0898.9
fp_3030_51_eng.vsd
p1055
p1056
Suppl setp scal
(1)
p1076[C]
Main setp scal
(1)
p1071[C]
Main setpoint
(1024[0])
p1070[C]
Supplement setpoint
(0)
p1075[C]
p2901
Fixed value 2 [%]
p2900
Fixed value 1 [%]
AOP30
JOG
LOCAL
REMOTE
I
O
[3040.1]
[2501.1]
<2>
<2>
<3>
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
n_set_1
Jog setpoint 1
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1058[D] (100.000)
Jog setpoint 2
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1059[D] (100.000)
[3040.1]
Keep old setpoint
<100>
<101>
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[3]
1
0
&
Synchronization
No OFF1
No OFF2
No OFF3
–
+
f _slip
[6730.2]
[7020.8]
<1> AOP30 not at SINAMICS SM150.
<2> Only active in LOCAL mode (r0807.0 = 1) [2501.2].
<3> Jogging can only be activated in the following operating states (sequencer see [2610]):
- For SERVO and VECTOR: In the “Ready to start (S2)“ operating state.
- For VECTORGL and VECTORMV: In the “Operation (S4)“ operating strate.
<4> Only if control priority is with control panel with speed setpoint input.
<5> With simultaneous jog 1 and 2 (p1055 = p1056 = 1) the last setpoint remains effective (Freeze ramp-function generator).
<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module “extended setpoint channel“ is activated (r0108.8 = 1).
<101> To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.
<1>
r3804
Sync f_targ
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
r1073
+
+
[2501.2]
0
1
PcCtrl active
r0807.0
<4>
0
1
<4>
<3>
<5>
<5>
Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
2-963
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-78 3040 – Direction of rotation limiting and reversal
- 3040 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_3040_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
29.06.09 V04.03.01
Setpoint channel - Direction limitation and direction reversal
r1114
Setp after lim
n_set_1
[3030.8] [3050.1]
1 = Setpoint inversion
r1198.11
-1
0
1
1 = Inhibit negative direction
r1198.5
1 = Inhibit positive direction
r1198.6
[2505.3]
p1110
[2505.3]
p1111
[2505.3]
p1113
<1> AOP30 not at SINAMICS SM150.
<2> Only active in LOCAL mode (r0807.0 = 1) [2501.2]
<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module “extended setpoint channel“ is activated (r0108.8 = 1).
<101> To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.
<100>
<101>
p0115[3]
Refer to [1020.7]
0
1
0
0
1
0
AOP30
JOG
LOCAL
REMOTE
I
O
<2>
n_limit setp
p1063[D]
<1>
Function diagrams
Setpoint channel
2-964 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-79 3050 – Skip frequency bands and speed limiting
- 3050 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_3050_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
19.03.09 V04.03.01
Setpoint channel - Skip frequency bands and speed limitations
<1> A suppression speed of "0" de-activates the suppression speed bandwidth.
<2> The setting range of p1082 is limited to n_max_mot.
<3> If the drive is not stopped via the input setpoint, but via controlled intervention, the lower hysteresis branch is relevant after a subsequent run-up.
<4> Not at S150/G130/G150.
<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module "Extended setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1). For r0108.8 = 0, [3095] applies for the generation of the speed limits.
<101> To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.
w
n_skip 2
0.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1092[D] (0.000)
n_skip 3
0.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1093[D] (0.000)
n_skip 1
0.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1091[D] (0.000)
n_skip 4
0.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1094[D] (0.000)
n_skip bandwidth
0.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1101[D] (0.000)
[3020.6]
[3060.4]
[3070.4]
[3040.8]
(1083)
p1085[C]
p1083
n_limit pos
0.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1083[D] (210 000.000)
Maximum speed
0...210 000.000 RPM
p1082[D] (n_max_Mot)
(1086)
p1088[C]
p1086
n_limit neg
-210 000.000...0.000 RPM
p1086[D] (-210 000.000)
r1114
Setpt after limit
Reference value
for the ramp-
function generator
<1> <1> <1> <1>
Max
1000.00 μs
Min
<2>
<3>
<4>[5030.5]
<4>[5210.1]
[6640.5]
[7020.5]
[8010.2]
<100> <101>
0
0
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[3]
r1084
n_limit pos eff
r1087
n_limit neg eff
<4> [5030.5]
<4> [5210.1]
[6640.5]
[7020.5]
[8010.2]
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
-1 -1 -1 -1
y
x
-1
Minimum speed
0.00...19 500.00 RPM
p1080[D] (0.00)
r1112
y
(1086)
p1052[C]
(1083)
p1051[C]
p1083
p1086
-1
r1119
RFG setpt at input
[3060.1]
[3070.1]
[8020.1]
0
0
Maximum
limiting
active
[3080.4]
1
Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
2-965
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-80 3060 – Basic ramp-function generator
- 3060 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_3060_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
05.05.09 V04.03.01
Setpoint channel - Basic ramp-function generator
Ramp-down time
0.000...999 999.000 s
p1121[D] (10.000)
OFF3 ramp-down time
0.000...600.000 s
p1135[D] (0.000)
Ramp-up time
0.000...999 999.000 s
p1120[D] (10.000)
x
t
y
t
p1082
-p1082
x
p1082
-p1082
Tup Tdn
Tup Tdn
[3050.8]
y
0
0
0
0
[2634.4]
T
up
T
dn
r1119
RFG setpt at input
Threshold for
"Ramp-up/ramp-down active"
0.00...1000.00 RPM
p1148[D] (19.80)
0
1
x
y
[3050.5]
[3095.7]
n_max
p1082
From the setpoint limiting
Freeze ramp-function generator
[3080.1]
10
0 1
0
1
1
0
0
1
10
0 = Freeze ramp-function generator
r0898.5
1 = Enable speed setpoint
r0898.6
+–
[2634.4]
1 = Enable ramp-function generator
r0898.4
Ramp-function generator, status bits [3080.5]
0 = Internal fast stop
0 = Internal fast stop
Other status bits
Ramp-up active
Ramp-down active
n_set_4
[2501.3]
p1140
[2501.3]
p1141
[2501.3]
p1142
[3080.8]
Ramp flattening-off
p0115[3]
<101>
Refer to [1020.7]
1 = Internal RFG enable
[2634.4]
1 = Bypass ramp-function generator
r1198.15[2505.3]
p1122
RFG setting value
(0)
p1144[C]
(0)
Accept RFG set val
p1143[C]
0
1
0
1
<1>
<1> For SERVO and VECTOR, the following applies: Inhibited during jogging.
<2> Not at S150/G130/G150.
<3> After a 0/1 signal a ramp-up is started again.
<4> With simultaneous jog 1 and 2 (p1055 = p1056 = 1) the last setpoint
remains effective (Freeze ramp-function generator).
<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module
"Extended setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1).
<101> To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.
<100>
r1149
HLG acceleration
<2>
<3>
<4>
Function diagrams
Setpoint channel
2-966 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-81 3070 – Extended ramp-function generator
- 3070 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_3070_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
06.05.09 V04.03.01
Setpoint channel - Extended ramp-function generator
Initial rounding-off
0.000...30.000 s
p1130[D] (0.000)
OFF3
Initial rounding-off
0.000...30.000 s
p1136[D] (0.000)
Final rounding-off
0.000...30.000 s
p1131[D] (0.000)
OFF3
Final rounding-off
0.000...30.000 s
p1137[D] (0.000)
OFF3
Ramp-down time
0.000...600.000 s
p1135[D] (0.000)
Ramp-down time
0.000...999 999.000 s
p1121[D] (10.000)
Ramp-up time
0.000...999 999.000 s
p1120[D] (10.000)
Tup
FRIRFRIRFRIRFRIR
Tdn
p1082
Tup_eff <2> Tdn_eff <2>
-p1082
Expanded ramp-function
generator
IR FR
[3050.8]
RFG rounding-off type
0...1
p1134[D] (0)
Ramp-function generator setting value
(0)
p1144[C]
Ramp-function generator, status bits
[2634.4] 0 = Internal fast stop
[3080.5]
0
p1082
x
y
<3>
<4>
[3050.5]
[3095.7]
n_max
r1119
RFG setpoint at the input
x
t
y
dy/dt
y
0 1 0 1 0 1
1
0
0
1
0
1
x
y
+–
0 = Freeze ramp generator
r0898.5
1 = Ramp-function
generator enabled
r0898.4
(0)
Set ramp-function generator
p1143[C]
10 10
[3080.1]
n_set_5
[2501.3]
p1140
[2501.3]
p1141
Ramp flattening-off
[3080.8]
<1> Not at S150/G130/G150.
<2> Effective ramp-up time: Tup_eff = Tup + (IR/2 + FR/2)
Effective ramp-down time: Tdn_eff = Tdn + (IR/2 + FR/2)
<3> p1151.00 = 0: Rounding-off at zero crossover enabled.
p1151.00 = 1: Rounding-off at zero crossover disabled.
<4> p1134 = 0: Rounding-off is always active.
Overshoots can occur.
p1134 = 1: Final rounding-off is not effective
when the setpoint is suddenly
reduced during ramp-up.
0
Threshold for
"Ramp-up/ramp-down active"
0.00...1000.00 RPM
p1148[D] (19.80)
Other status bits
Ramp-up active
Ramp-down active
<101> To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.
p0115[3]
<101>
Refer to [1020.7]
1 = Enable speed setpoint
r0898.6
[2634.4] 0 = Internal fast stop
p1142
1 = Internal RFG enable
[2634.4]
1 = Bypass ramp-function generator
r1198.15[2505.3]
p1122
[2501.3]
Freeze ramp-function generator
1
0
1
0 0
<5> For SERVO and VECTOR, the following applies: Inhibited during jogging.
<6> After a 0/1 signal a ramp-up is started again.
<7> With simultaneous jog 1 and 2 (p1055 = p1056 = 1) the last setpoint remains effective (Freeze ramp-function generator).
<5>
<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module "extended setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1). For r0108.8 = 0, [3095] applies for the generation of the speed limits.
<100>
r1149
HLG acceleration
t
n
set
t
t
<1>
<6>
0
0
1
<7>
Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
2-967
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-82 3080 – Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking
- 3080 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_3080_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
02.12.09 V04.03.01
Setpoint channel - Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking
<1> For p1145 > 0, ramp-function generator tracking is activated when the
torque limiting responds. This means that the speed controller output only exceeds the torque limit by a
deviation that can be set via p1145.
<2> For OFF1/OFF3, the ramp-function generator ramp is active. The ramp-function generator is set (SERVO: to the
actual value, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL: to the setpoint (r1170)) and stops the drive
with the ramp-downtime (p1121 or p1135). STW1.4 (enable ramp-function generator) is effective while the drive
is stopped via the ramp-function generator. Depending on the p1115, the basic ramp-function generator [3060]
or the extended ramp-function generator [3070] is effective.
For SERVO is valid: When the function module "extended setpoint channel" is not active (r0108.8 = 0), for
OFF1/OFF3 the down ramp of the basic ramp-function generator is effective (refer to n_set_4 on [3060.8]).
<3> The interpolator is only effective for clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation and sign-of-life received from
the master (STW2.12 ... STW2.15).
<4> Behavior of the response ramp of the torque limiting:
p1145 = 0.0: No ramp-function generator tracking. The ramp-function generator ramp is no longer in the range
of the speed actual value.
p1145 = 1.0: The ramp-function generator ramp remains as close as possible to the speed actual value.
p1145 > 1.0: The ramp-function generator ramp is steeper than for p1145 = 1.0 (higher "speed following error").
<5> The value is displayed correctly only with r0899.2 = 1 (Operation enabled).
<6> For SERVO only.
<7> For VECTOR, VECTORMV only.
<8> For VECTORGL only.
<101> To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.
From the basic ramp-function generator
[5020.1] <6>
[6030.1]
[8011.2]
[3060.8]
[3070.8]
r1170
n_ctrl setp sum
1
0
0
1
0
Enable speed setpoint
r0898.6
Enable ramp-function generator
r0898.4
n_ctrl n_set 1
(0)
p1155[C]
<2>
n_ctrl n_set 2
(0)
p1160[C]
+
+
Interpolator
xy
+
+
Interpolator
xy
p1189.0
p1189.1
r1150
RFG n_set at outp RFG track intens
0.0...50.0
p1145[D] (1.3)
0
<2>
<101>
r1169
n_ctrl n_set 1/2
<3>
0
1
0
1
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[3] (Drive Object)
1
0
&
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[1] (Drive Object)
t
x,y x
y
t
x,y x
y
T1
T1
<5>
+
Jog 1
r0898.8 Jog 2
r0898.9
from the
STW
sequence
control
[2501.7]
1
Ramp-function generator tracking
Torque limit reached
r1407.7[2522.7]
Ramp flattening-off
Ramp-function generator tracking active
r1199.5
<4>
From the ramp-function
generator friction characteristic
[7010.6]
Ramp-function generator selection
Friction char. Record
n_set_4
n_set_5
RFG selection
p1115
[3060.1]
[3070.3]
<5>
Synchronization
No OFF1
No OFF2
No OFF3
0
r3812
Sync f_corr [Hz]
&
[7020.8]
f_set
[9816.7]
<7>
<8>
0
1
Not SERVO or
r0108.8 = 1 (Extent setp)
1
0
<4>
No OFF2
No OFF3
Ramp-function generator status word
1
Ramp-function generator status word
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Bit
[3060.8]
[3070.8] Ramp-up active
Ramp-function generator held
Ramp-function generator set
Ramp-function generator active
Ramp-down active
Ramp-function generator tracking active
Maximum limiting active
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
r1199
RFG ZSW
0
1
[3080.8]
[3050.8]
r1199.2
[3060.8]
[3070.8]
<1>
Function diagrams
Encoder evaluation
2-968 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.11 Encoder evaluation
Function diagrams
4704 – Raw signal sensing 2-969
4715 – Actual speed value and pole pos. sens., motor enc. ASM/SM (encoder 1) 2-970
Encoder evaluation
Function diagrams
2-969
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-83 4704 – Raw signal sensing
- 4704 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_4704_56_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
SINAMICS G130/G150
24.10.08 V04.03.01
Encoder evaluation - Raw signal sensing
1 signal period
A
B
1 2
Encoder Sensor Module Control Unit
<2>
<2>
Encoder Comp_No.
p0142[E]
SMC30 Raw position signals
To speed
sensing
4715.1]
Encoder
pulse number
p0408[E]
<1>
<3>
The Encoder Data Set
changeover is shown
at [8570].
Encoder type selection
0 = No encoder
p0400[E]
Enc
configuration
p0404[E]
<3>
<1> For rotary encoders = pulse number setting.
For resolvers = pole pair number setting.
<2> p0142 = p0141 for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ.
<3> These parameters are automatically set.
SM characteristics
r0458
[E]
p0979[0...25]
encoder format acc. to
PROFIdrive
F31100...A33905
encoder faults/alarms
Enc rot clearance ZM
p0425[E]
Incr
DRIVE-CLiQ
Enc
squarewave A/B
p0405[E]
Enc_interface
Comp_No. p0141[E]
See [1020.7]
p0115[0]
p0492
Raw position signals
(only from encoder 1)
Abs enc.
Multiturn
p0421[E]
Abs enc.
Singleturn
p0423[E]
<3><3>
Configuration, absolute value encoder
Abs enc.
Meas. Step
p0422[E]
<3>
For SSI encoders: Absolute position information
0
2
32
-1
Function diagrams
Encoder evaluation
2-970 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-84 4715 – Actual speed value and pole pos. sens., motor enc. ASM/SM (encoder 1)
- 4715 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_4715_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
29.07.09 V04.03.01
Encoder evaluation - Speed act. value and pole pos. sensing, motor enc. ASM/SM (encoder 1)
-1
0
1
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed
r1407.1
r0061[0]
n_act unsmoothed
encoder 1
Smoothing
[2522.6] 1 = Sensorless operation active
Raw position
signals from
encoder 1
III
up
dn
x
A,B Fine resolution
for the speed
actual value
n_act measurement
-1
0
1
dx
dt
C,D
n_act calculation
[6730.1]
<1>
1
0
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed
Zero mark
1 encoder revolution
C
D
Induction motor
-1
0
1
[6731.1]
[6732.1]
<2> [E]: The encoder data set changeover is represented on [8570].
<3> Only for operation with encoder and p0300 = 2.
<4> Only for S120/S150.
<5> Only for S120/S150 and p0300 = 2, 5
<6> Only for FEM.
<5>
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[0]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[0]
r0063[1]
n_act smoothed with p0045
To basic braking control [2701.1]
To speed controller with/without encoder
[6040.1]
Zu Kp_n-/Tn_n-Adaption [6050.1]
To current/power/torque limits [6640.1]
To Iq and Id controllers [6714.7]
To field-weakening characteristic [6724.1]
To interface to the Motor Module [6733.1] <6>
To display signals [6799.1]
To speed signals 1[8010.1]
To extended functions 1 [8020.1]
T_smth display
0.00...200.00 [ms]
p0045
r0063[1]
n_act smoothed with p0045
Encoder angel
[4710.8]
-1
0
1
Raw position sign.
from encoder 1
III
up
dn
yx
A,B Fine resolution
for the speed
actual value
dx
dt
C,D
[4710.8]
-1
0
1
n_act measurement
y
y
<5>
<5>
<4>
T_smth display
0.00...200.00 [ms]
p0045
Pole position sensing
Incl. measuring gearbox
p0432[E], p0433[E]
<2>
Enc commut_factor
r0451
Inv encoder actual value
p0410.0[E]
<5>
-1
0
1
Zero mark
1 encoder revolution
C
D
<4>
<3>
1
0
r1407.1[2522.6]
1 = Geberloser Betrieb aktiv
[6731.1]
[6733.8]
<1>
<1> = Only for vector control without encoder.
To basic braking control [2701.1]
To extended braking control [2704.1]
To speed controller with/without encoder
[6040.1]
To Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation [6050.1]
To current/power/torque limits [6640.1]
To Iq and Id controllers [6714.7]
To field-weakening characteristic [6722.1]
To interface to the Motor Module [6730.1]
To display signals [6799.1]
To speed signals 1[8010.1]
To extended functions 1 [8020.1]
r0061[0]
n_act unsmoothed encoder 1
Smoothing
n_act calculation
n_act T_smooth
0.00...1000.00 [ms]
p1441[D] (0.00)
Inv encoder actual value
p0410.0[E]
<2>
Dir of rot
p1821[D]
Gearbox enc
p0432[E]
Gearbox mot
p0433[E]
r0094
Transformat_angle
n_act T_smooth
0.00...1000.00 [ms]
p1441[D] (0.00)
Inv encoder actual value
p0410.0[E]
<2>
Dir of rot
p1821[D]
Gearbox enc
p0432[E]
Gearbox mot
p0433[E]
Synchronous motor
[6731.1]
Vector control
Function diagrams
2-971
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.12 Vector control
Function diagrams
6030 – Speed setpoint, droop 2-972
6031 – Pre-control balancing for reference/acceleration model 2-973
6040 – Speed controller with/without encoder 2-974
6050 – Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation 2-975
6060 – Torque setpoint 2-976
6220 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller 2-977
6300 – V/f characteristic and voltage boost 2-978
6310 – Resonance damping and slip compensation 2-979
6320 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller 2-980
6490 – Closed-loop speed control configuration 2-981
6491 – Flux control configuration 2-982
6630 – Upper/lower torque limit 2-983
6640 – Current/power/torque limits 2-984
6710 – Current setpoint filter 2-985
6714 – Iq and Id controller 2-986
6721 – Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2) 2-987
6722 – Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) 2-988
6723 – Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1) 2-989
6724 – Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2) 2-990
6730 – Interface to Motor Module (ASM, p0300 = 1) 2-991
6731 – Interface to the Motor Module (PEM, p0300 = 2) 2-992
6799 – Display signals 2-993
Function diagrams
Vector control
2-972 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-85 6030 – Speed setpoint, droop
- 6030 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6030_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
18.06.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Speed setpoint, droop
Droop input source
0...3
p1488 (0)
r0079
M_set total
M_set before M_suppl
r1508
+
-
r1170
n_ctr setp sum
r0079
M_set total
a at M_ctrl scal
0.0...400.0 [%]
p1499 [D] (100.0)
n_set limited
r1407.11
Droop enabled
r1407.10
Enable droop
r1406.11
n_set limited
r1407.11
n_set_filter 1 T
0.00...5000.00 [ms]
p1416 [D] (0.00)
0
1
M_ctrl active
r1407.2
Pre-control speed
0
<1>
<1> = Only for vector control without encoder.
[6060.8]
[3050.8]
[3050.8]
[3080.8]
r1482
n-ctrl I_output
[6490.7]
1 = Sensorless vector control, speed pre-control active
from speed control configuration
p1400.15
[6060.3]
r0060
n_set before filt.
[2522.3]
[2522.3]
Mot moment of inertia ratio
1.000...10000.000
p0342 [M] (1.000)
Mot M_inertia
0.00000...100000.00000 [kgm²]
p0341 [M] (0.00000)
<3> Scaling: p1489 = 0.100 - for a rated motor torque of r0333 - results in a speed setpoint reduction of 0.1 x p0311.
<4> The value is displayed correctly only with r0899.2 = 1 (Operation enabled).
[2522.3]
[6031.1]
r0062
n_set after filter
1 0
[6040.8]
[2701.1]
[2704.1]
[6799.1]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[1] (Motor Modules)
Mom of inert scal
(100)
p1497[C]
3
2
1
0
0
10
0
<1>
[6060.5]
[6060.8]
[2520.3]
p1492
<2>
N
M
n
N
150 ms
Statik M_komp
(0)
p1486[C]
+
-
Statik M_komp Skal
-2000.0 ... 2000.0 [%]
p1487 [D] (100.0)
r1490
Droop n_reduction
Droop scaling
0.000...0.500
p1489 [D] (0.050)
Droop input
r1084
n_limit pos eff
r1087
n_limit neg eff
<3>
<2> Only for p1488 > 0.
<4>
[6730.1]
[6732.1]
[6733.1]
r1431
n_prectrl motormod.
[6732.1]
Vector control
Function diagrams
2-973
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-86 6031 – Pre-control balancing for reference/acceleration model
- 6031 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6031_51_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
21.08.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Pre-control balancing, reference/acceleration model
Mot moment of inertia ratio
1.000...10000.000
p0342[M] (1.000)
Mot M_inertia
0.00000...100000.00000 [kgm²]
p0341[M] (0.00000)
a_before scaling
0.0...10 000.0 [%]
p1496[D] (0.0)
<1> p1428 only effective for p1400[D].2 = 1 or p1428 > 2,0
<2> p1429 only effective for p1400[D].2 = 1.
For p1400[D].2 = 0 the following applies: p1442[D] or p1452[D] for sensorless operation is effective [6040.2].
Acceleration calculation
[6490.7]
Acceleration pre-control, source
p1400[D].2
a_prectrl dn/1s
(0)
p1495
0
1
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[1] (Motor Modules)
r1493
Mom of inert total Mom of inert scal
(100)
p1497[C]
[6040.1]
[6030.8]
0
1
n_pre T bal
0.00...10.00 [ms]
p1429[D] (0.00)
n_pre t_dead bal n
0.0...3.0
p1428[D] (0.0) p1400[D].2 = 1
or
(p1400[D].3 = 0 and p1496[D] > 0)
Pre-control balancing
r1438
n_ctrl n_set
0 1
0
[6490.7]
Reference model
Speed setpoint
I component
p1400[D].3
r0062
n_set after filter
n_set smooth
Sampling time, closed-loop speed control (p0115[1])
n_ctrl RefMod fn
0.00...8000.00 [Hz]
p1433[D] (0.00)
n_ctrl RefMod D
0.00...5.00
p1434[D] (1.00)
n_ctrl RefMod t_dead
0.0...3.0
p1435[D] (0.0)
(y = x for the factory setting of p1433 ... p1435)
r1436
RefMod n_set
n_ctrRefMod I_comp
(r1436)
p1437 [6040.1]
Reference model
[6490.7]
Reference model, speed setpoint I component
p1400[D].3
1
0
xy
n_set I_comp
r1439
r1119
RFG setpt at input
n_ctrl n_set 1
p1155[C]
n_ctrl n_set 2
p1160[C]
+
n_ctrl n_set stat
r1444
0
1
Steady-state setpoint calculation
+
+
n_set via PC
PcCtrl active
r0807.0
r1084
n_limit pos eff
r1087
n_limit neg eff
r1084
n_limit pos eff
r1087
n_limit neg eff
[6060.1]
Calculated accelerating torque
<1> <2>
Function diagrams
Vector control
2-974 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-87 6040 – Speed controller with/without encoder
<1>
- 6040 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6040_51_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
29.06.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Speed controller with/without encoder
[6031.8]
+-
r1445
n_act smooth
r0064
n_ctrl system deviation
n_ctrl Kp n lower
0.000...999999.000
p1460 [D] (0.300)
p1470 [D] (0.300)
n_ctrl Tn n lower
0.00...100000.00 [ms]
p1462 [D] (20.00)
p1472 [D] (20.00)
+
+
M_set from the speed controller
[6030.1]
Integrator control
1 = Speed controller, hold I component
r1406.4
1 = Speed controller, set I component
r1406.5
n_ctrl integ_set val
(0)
p1478[C]
Kp
1 = Speed controller, I component held
r1407.5
1 = Speed controller, I component set
r1407.6
1 = Torque limit reached
r1407.7
1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active
p1400.5
Kp_n_basic
Tn_n_basicTn_n_adapt
1 01 0
Kp_n_adapt
[6490.7]
From Kp/Tn adaptation [6050.7]
To Kp/Tn adaptation
[6050.2]
<1><1>
Hold Set
Set
Val
[2522.7]
Enable speed controller
from sequence control S4: Operation
Speed controller
[2522.3]
[2522.3]
Kp Tn
r1482
n_ctrl I-M_output
<1>
<2>
Tn
Kp
n_ctrl Tn effective
r1469
<3>
[2520.3]
p1477
[6490.7]
n_act T_smooth
0.00...32000.00 [ms]
p1442 [D] (4.00)
p1452 [D] (10.00)
1 = Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active
p1400.0
Dynamic reduction, field weakening
<1>
-
+
Kp
[6031.8] n_set I_comp
r1468
n_ctrl Kp effective
[6640.8]
[6640.8]
[2610.4]
n_ctrl I_value scal
(1)
p1479[C]
[2522.2]
Speed control active
r1407.3
r1538
M_max upper effective
r1539
M_max lower effective
<1> = Only for vector control without encoder.
<2> For p1462/p1472 = 0.0 s or 100.0 s, the I component is
disabled (integral action time = ).
<3> Units Kp can be changed over via p0528.
[2520.3]
p1476
[6490.7]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[1] (Motor Modules)
r1438
n_ctrl n_set
r1439
r1454
n_ctrl I_sys dev
r1481
n_ctrl P-M_output
1 = Sensorless vector control, freeze I component
p1400.1
[4715.6]
n_ctrl n_act
r0063(0)
p1440[C]
[8012.6]
r1443
n_act n_ctrl Input
Vector control
Function diagrams
2-975
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-88 6050 – Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation
- 6050 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6050_51_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICSVector control - Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation
Free Kp_n adaptation
Adapt_factor upper
0.0...200 000.0 %
p1459[D] (100.0)
[6040.8]
n_ctrl n upper
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p1465[D] (0.00)
Speed-dependent Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation
Tn_n_adapt
y
x
n_ctrl Tn n upper
0.000...200 000.000 %
p1463[D] (100.000)
[6040.8]
Tn
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed
n_ctrl Kp n upper
p1461[D] (100.000)
0.000...200 000.000 %
Kp
n
Kp
n_ctrl n lower
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p1464[D] (0.00)
Kp_n_adapt
n_ctrl adapt Kp lower
0.00...400.00 %
p1456[D] (0.00)
n_ctrl adapt Kp upper
0.00...400.00 %
p1456[D] (0.00)
n_ctrl Kp scal
(1)0
p1466[C]
n_ctrl Adpt_sig Kp
(0)0
p1455[C]
Adapt_factor lower
0.0...200 000.0 %
p1458[D] (100.0)
x
n
n
29.06.09 V04.03.01
Kp_n_basic (p1460, p1470)
Tn_n_basic (p1462, p1472)
To the speed controller [6040.4]
To the speed controller [6040.4]
1
1
0
<1> If the lower transition point exceeds the upper transition point, the Kp-adaptation also changes over.
<1>
<1>
<1> <1>
Free Tn adaptation active (p1400.6)
[6490.7]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[1] (Motor Modules)
Tn
n
Function diagrams
Vector control
2-976 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-89 6060 – Torque setpoint
- 6060 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6060_51_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
24.11.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Torque setpoint
M_max upper scal
(1)
p1540[C]
r1539
M_set
M_soll
(0)
p1503[C]
M_max nctr lowScal
(1)
p1541[C]
r1538
M_max upper effective
M_set from speet controller
M_suppl 1
(0)
p1511[C]
[6640.8]
r1518[0]
M_accel unsmooth
[6640.8]
+
M_supply 2 scal
-2000.0 %...2000.0 %
p1514[D] (100.0 %)
M_suppl 1 scal
(0)
p1512[C]
M_suppl 2
(0)
p1513[C]
+
+
0
1
0
1
1 = Speed controller enable
[2501.7]
p0856 r0898.12
p1400.14 1 = Torque pre-control
[6490.7]
0...100.00 [ms]
p1517[D] (4.00)
r1518[1]
M_accel smooth
M_max u Skal oOffs
(1)
p1554[C]
M_max up w/o offs
(1)
p1552[C]
<1> The signal is only effective after magnetization has been completed (r0056.4 = 1).
<2> Acceleration control is inhibited for p1517 = 100 ms.
<1><1>
[6630.8]
[6630.8]
[6031.8]
<3> M_set is also influenced by the speed limit controller.
<4> Only for DO: VECTOR and sensorless FEM with speed controller inhibited r1776[4] = 0.
r1526
M_max up. w/o offs
r1527
M_max low w/o offs
Max
Min
+
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[1] (Motor Modules)
<1>
0
1
(1)
M_lim var/fixed S_src
p1551[C]
0
1
r1547[0]
M_max output n_ctrl upper limit
Example:
0 = Fast stop
active (OFF3)
r0899.5
0
1
r1480
n_ctrl PI-M_output
+
[6030.1] [6710.1]
[8012.1]
[2522.3]
Torque limit reached
r1407.7
Torque limiting upper active
r1407.8
r0079
M_set total
[2522.3]
Torque limiting lower active
r1407.9
[2522.3]
+
1
Current/torque limit active
r0056.13
[2526.2]
Torque limiting, upper active
r1407.8
r1508
M_set before M_suppl
[2522.3]
[2522.3]
Torque limiting lower active
r1407.9
Max
Min
Torque limiting
without Pre-control
r1407.15
[6030.1] [6722.1]
[6726.7]
<5>
r1617
M_setp sv SLVC
[6726.8]
[6040.8]
r1547[1]
M_max output n_ctrl lower limit
r1516
M_suppl+M_accel
0
r1539
M_max lower eff
r1538
1
0
Torque control active
r1407.2
[6030.5]
1
0 = Speed control
1 = Torque control
r1406.12
p1300 = M
Ctr
[2520.3]
p1501
1
Calculated accelerating torque
Vdc_max-Regler aktiv
r0056.14
0
1
[2526.6]
<2>
<3>
<5>
0
M_suppl total
r1515
<5> Not for DO. VECTORGL.
Torque limiting
Vector control
Function diagrams
2-977
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-90 6220 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller
- 6220 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6220_51_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR, VECTORMV
SINAMICS
30.06.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller
ZSW cl-loop ctrl
r0056.14
r0056
0
1
Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1250[D]
Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1251[D]
Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1252[D]
Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1243[D]
Vdc_ctrl config
p1240[D]
1,3
0,2,4,5,6
Vdc_max (ctrl)
Vdc_min (ctrl)
–
+
ZSW cl-loop ctrl
r0056.15
r0056
0
1
Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1250[D]
Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1251[D]
Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1252[D]
Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1247[D]
r0070
Vdc_act
Vdc_min on_level
r1246
–
+
0
Iq_max
r0070
Vdc_act
[6710.2]
Operating point
selection
Iq_min
[6710.2]
[6710.2]
Vdc controller active
1
2,3
0,1,4,5,6
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[0] (Motor Modules)
[2526.2]
[2526.2]
0
0
r1258
Vdc_ctrl output
Vdc_max on_level
r1242
Vdc_max SenseOnLev
p1254
Supply voltage
p0210
Vdc_min on_level
p1245
Calculate on_level
Calculate on_level
0
0
[6730.1]
[6731.1]
[6730.1]
[6731.1]
<1> As standard, the controller is designed as a P controller.
<2> The Vdc controller is switched on when reaching the threshold value. The switch-off hysteresis is 5% of the switch-on level.
<2>
<2>
<1>
<1>
Function diagrams
Vector control
2-978 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-91 6300 – V/f characteristic and voltage boost
- 6300 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6300_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
04.03.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - V/f characteristic and voltage boost
Freely programmable
V_boost total
r1315
I_outp max
r0067
0
1
0
0
V_boost accel
p1311
Ramp-up active
p1199.0
Control type
p1300
Mot I_rated
p0305
++
R_stator act
r0395
V_output max r0071
Vf characteristic V4 p1327
Vf characteristic V3 p1325
Vf characteristic V2 p1323
Vf characteristic V1 p1321
V_output max r0071
Vf charact. f1
p1320
Vf charact. f4
p1326
Vf charact. f2
p1322
Vf charact. f3
p1324
<1>
<1> For p1320 = 0, the voltage boost via p1310 is not effective.
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[1] (Motor Modules)
3
Flux current control (FCC)
Dependent on the load current
Linear
Parabolic
[1690.1]
V_output max r0071
f_set
Mot V_rated p0304
Mot f_rated
p0310
Mot f_rated
p0310
V_output max r0071
Mot V_rated p0304
Mot V_rated p0304
Mot f_rated
p0310
[1690.4]
0/5
1/6
2
3
19
Vf V_set independ.
(0)
p1330[C]
4
7
ECO-Mode
V_boost perm
p1311
U/f FCC f_Start
p1333
r1348
V/f Eco fac act v
Vector control
Function diagrams
2-979
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-92 6310 – Resonance damping and slip compensation
- 6310 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6310_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
24.10.08 V04.03.01
Vector control - Resonance damping and slip compensation
Vf T res damp
p1339
–
+
Vf gain res damp
p1338
f_res damp
r0078
Iq_act
r0066
f_outp
V/f resonance damping V/f slip compensation
Slip compensation
actual value
r1337
[1690.6]
Slip compensation
p1335
f_slip
r0065
Control ZSW1
slip limiting
r0056.10
r0056
[6730.4]
[6731.4]
[6714.4]
Slip comp limit
p1336
-1
0
1
[1690.7]
[6730.2] 250 ms
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[1] (Motor Modules)
[2526.2]
0
6 % 10 %
1
<1>
<1> If p1349 = 0: the limit is 0,95 x
f
Mot N
<= 45 Hz.
p1334 f/f
Mot N
1
p1334 + 4 %
p1349
f/f
Mot N
95 % x p1349
Function diagrams
Vector control
2-980 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-93 6320 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller
- 6320 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6320_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
03.09.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller
r0070
Vdc_act
Vdc_ctrl output_limit
p1293
0
Control ZSW 1
r0056.14
r0056
0
1
Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1290
Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1291
Vdc_ctrl t_deriv action
p1292
Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1283
Vdc_ctrl config.
p1280
0,2,4,5,6
1,3
Vdc_max (V/f)
Vdc_min (V/f)
Vdc_max on_level
r1282
–
+
0
- Vdc_ctrl output_limit
p1293
Control ZSW 1
r0056.15
r0056
0
1
Vdc_ctrl output
r1298
Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1290
Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1291
Vdc_ctrl t_deriv action
p1292
Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1287
Vdc_ctrl config
p1280
[8950.1]
[6730.1] [6731.1]
r0070
Vdc_act
Vdc_min on_level
r1286
–
+
0
0,1,4,5,6
2,3
[2526.2]
[2526.2]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[y] (Motor Modules)
0
0
Vdc_max SenseOnLev
p1294
Supply voltage
p0210
Vdc_min on_level
p1285
Calculate on_level
Calculate on_level
<1> p1280
[0] Inhib Vdc ctrl
[1] Enables Vdc_max controller
[2] Enables Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering)
[3] Enables Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller
[4] Activates Vdc_max monitoring
[5] Activates Vdc_min monitoring
[6] Activates Vdc_min monitoring and Vdc_max monitoring
<2> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150.
<3> The Vdc controller is switched on when reaching the threshold value. The switch-off hysteresis is 5% of the switch-on level.
<4> Only relevant if the function module "technology controller" (r0108.16 = 1) is active.
<1>
<1>
<2>
<2>
[8950.1]
[6730.1] [6731.1]
<3>
<3>
[1690]
<4>
1
0
r3517
I_act ctrl set
r3405.1
[7960.8]
Vector control
Function diagrams
2-981
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-94 6490 – Closed-loop speed control configuration
- 6490 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6490_51_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
29.06.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Speed control configuration
1
2
3
1 = Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active
Meaning
1 = Sensorless vector control, freeze I component
1 = Acceleration pre-control, external source (p1495)
0 = Acceleration pre-control, internal source (n_set)
1 = Reference model, speed setpoint I component ON
Reserved
0
Bit No.
4
Speed control configuration
0
0
0
1
[6040.3]
[6040.3]
n_ctrl config
p1400[D] Factory setting
[6030.5]
6
7
1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active
1 = Free Tn adaptation active
Reserved
Reserved8
1
0
5
10
11
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved12
9
13
14
Reserved
1 = Torque pre-control always active
0 = Torque pre-control for n_ctrl enabled 0
15 1 = Sensorless vector control, speed pre-control active 1
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[1] (Motor Modules)
[6031.1][6031.7]
[6031.2]
[6050.6]
[6060.4]
[6040.3]
Function diagrams
Vector control
2-982 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-95 6491 – Flux control configuration
- 6491 -
Function diagram
87654321
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
24.10.08 V04.03.01
Vector control - Flux control configuration
1
2
1 = Flux setpoint, soft starting active
Meaning
1 = Flux setpoint, differentiation active
1 = Flux build-up control active
0
Bit No.
Flux control, configuration
[6723.6]
[6722.3]
p1401[D]
p1401[D]
F_ctrl config
[6723.7]1
1
0
Factory setting
31 = Flux characteristic, load-dependent 1
41 = Flux controller (ASM with encoder) 1
1 = Flux impression with model chngov (ASM with encoder)
0 = Flux impression from 30 % n_rated (ASM with encoder) 15
6 1
7Reserved
3Reserved8
Reserved9
10 Reserved
11 Reserved
12 Reserved
1 = Quick magnetizing
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[2] (Motor Modules)
fp_6491_54_eng.vsd
[6725.2]
[6722.5]
Vector control
Function diagrams
2-983
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-96 6630 – Upper/lower torque limit
- 6630 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6630_51_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
19.08.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Upper/lower torque limit
p1520[D]
M_max upper
-1 000 000.00...20 000 000.00 [Nm]
p1520[D] (0.00)
M_max upper
(1520)
p1522[C]
Upper torque limit
p1521[D]
M_max lower
-20 000 000.00...1 000 000.00 [Nm]
p1521[D] (0.00)
M_max lower
(1521)
p1523[C]
Lower torque limit
B
M
n
43
M
n
21
A
M_max upper scal
(1524)
p1528[C]
p1524[D]
M_max up/mot scal
-2 000.0...2 000.0 [%]
p1524[D] (100.0)
M_max lower scal
(1525)
p1529[C]
p1525[D]
M_max lower scal
-2 000.0...2 000.0 [%]
p1525[D] (100.0)
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[2] (Motor Modules)
0
1
0
1
(1)
M_lim var/fixS_src
p1551[C]
Example:
0 = Fast stop active
(OFF3)
r0899.5
<1>
<1>
A
<1> Danger: or positive values at represent a minimum torque for the other torque direction and can cause the motor to accelerate uncontrollably.
B
!
Negative values at
r1526
M_max up w/o offs [Nm]
[6640.1]
r1527
M_max low w/o offs [Nm]
[6640.1]
Function diagrams
Vector control
2-984 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-97 6640 – Current/power/torque limits
- 6640 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6640_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
11.08.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Current/power/torque limits
Power limiting
P_max regen
-10 000.00...-0.01 kW
p1531 (-0.01)
Current limiting
r1538
M_max upper effective
r1539
M_max lower effective
Speed limiting
controller
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed
<1>
Iq
M
Tn from speed controller [6040.6]
Kp from speed controller [6040.5]
22
yx
r0067
I_outp max
-1
Min
Max Min
Min
Min
Max
P_max mot
0.00...10 000.00 kW
p1530 (0.00)
Mot L_leakage total
r0377[M]
+
-
Sign
+ or -
+
+
+
[4715.6]
[6722.1]
[6723.4]
[6724.4]
<4> [6725.4]
Id_set total
Id_set total
r1624
[6630.8]
[6721.8]
[6730.1]
<4> [6732.1]
[6060.1] [6040.4]
[8012.1]
[6710.1]
[3050.8]
–
Speed limiting
<1> Intervention by the Vdc controller.
<2> Intervention when the speed limit is exceeded + 2 % n
rated
.
<3> p1556 = 0 switches the evaluation of the connector input p1555 off.
<4> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150.
I_max reduction
[8016.8]
I_max Motor Module
[6730.4]
[6731.4]
<4> [6732.4]
[6723.8]
<4> [6727.8]
Iq_max total
r1533
x
y
[6060.1] [6040.4]
[8012.1]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[2] (Motor Modules)
+
+
<2>
P_max
(1)
p1555[C]
-1
U_output max
r0071
P_max_scale
p1556[D] (0.00)
Max
Min
<1>
Max
[6710.1]
<3>
[3050.8]
Isq_min
r1537
Isq_max
r1536
n
Iq
r1084
n_limit pos eff
r1087
n_limit neg eff
[6630.8]
M_max up. w/o Offs
r1526
M_max low w/o Offs
r1527
p1401.7
Current limit
p0640[D]
Current limit var
(1)
p0641[C]
r1548[0]
Upper limit
r1548[1]
Lower limit
Pre-control
Iq stall
calculation
[6722.1][6724.1]
[6726.6][6727.6]
Vector control
Function diagrams
2-985
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-98 6710 – Current setpoint filter
- 6710 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6710_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
03.07.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Current setpoint filter
Iq
M
Iq_max
Iq_min
[6640.8]
[6220.8]
[6220.8]
[2526.6]
[6640.8]
[6721.8]
[6730.1]
[6732.1]
fn_z
p1660[D]
D_z
p1661[D]
fn_n
p1658[D]
D_n
p1659[D]
fn_z
p1665[D]
D_z
p1666[D]
fn_n
p1663[D]
D_n
p1664[D]
p1656.0[D]
xy
p1656.1[D]
xy
fn_n
p1658[D]
D_n
p1659[D]
1
0
p1657[D]
fn_n
p1663[D]
D_n
p1664[D]
1
0
p1662[D]
xy
xy
<1>
<1>
<2>
f
|y|
fn
D
f
|y|
fn
D
Filter 1 Filter 2
f
2nd Order filter
|y|
f
2nd Order filter
|y|
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
<3>
[2526.6]
<4>
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[0] (Motor Modules)
Isq_min
r1537
Isq_max
r1536
[6714.1]
[6721.1]
[6725.1]
[6727.1]
r0077
Iq_set
Vdc_max controller active
r0056.14
Vdc_min controller active
r0056.15
r0079
M_set total
[6060.8]
M_suppl 3
(3841)
p1569[C]
[7010.7]
+
+
Isq_s T_smooth
p1654[D]
Interpolator and
smoothing for
voltage limits
Isq_s T_smooth_min
p1653[D]
Iq_set before filter
r1650
<2>
I_set_filt fn
(1)
p1655[1]
I_set_filt fn
(1)
p1655[0]
<3>
<1> General 2nd-order filter (detailed representation at [1024]).
<2> PT2 low pass (detailed representation at [1024]).
<3> The frequency is multiplied by this factor.
<4> With p1699 = 1, the parameter settings are transferred to the controller.
<5> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150.
<5>
Function diagrams
Vector control
2-986 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-99 6714 – Iq and Id controller
- 6714 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6714_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
03.08.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Iq and Id controllers
Kp_I Tn_I
+
–
r0078
Iq_act
r1598
Flux setpoint total
r0077
Iq_set
<1> [6730.1]
<2> [4715.6]
<3> [6732.4]
<1>
Quad_de-couple scal
p1726[D]
<1>
Quad_de-couple UmaxScal
p1727[D]
Pre-control, de-coupling and
limiting
Symmetrizing
22
yx
p1717
Kp_I Tn_I
–
Ia
Ib
VD -
r0068[0]
I_act abs. value
U_set
U_angle
U_max 1
U_set 1
2
3
[6730.1] <1>
[6731.1] <2>
[6732.1] <3>
[6730.1] <1>
[6731.1] <2>
[6732.1] <3>
[6723.1] <1>
[6724.1] <2>
[6725.1] <3>
[6723.4] <1>
[6724.4] <2>
[6725.4] <3>
<1> [6730.4]
<2> [6731.4]
<3> [6732.4]
[6710.8]
<1> [6723.1]
<2> [6724.1]
Id control, I component limiting
r1408.1
+
Isd_ctrl I_comp
r1724
+
+
Symmetrizing
Id current controller
Iq current controller
Voltage limiting
r1408.3
Voltage limit active
r0056.9
Isd_ctrl I_limit
r1725
U_dir axis_de-couple
r1728
<1> [6730.4]
<2> [6731.4]
<3> [6732.4]
<1> [6730.4]
<2> [6731.4]
<3> [6732.4]
[6310.1]
[6727.1] <3>
[6731.4] <2>
[6799.5]
<1> For induction motors.
<2> For synchronous motors.
p
K
Coordinate converter
[6799.1]
[7017.6]
[8014.1]
[8017.1]
[8018.1]
[8020.1]
Phase U
Phase V
Phase W
[2526.2]
r0094
Transformat_angle
<3> Only for SINAMIC S120/S150 and separately-excited synchronous motors.
<3> [6726.8] Flux setpoint pre-ctrl
Isd_ctrl_pre-ctrl scal
p1702[D]
<2> <3>
EMF scal Isq_ctrl
p1704[D]
<3>
Flux track thresh
p1705[D]
<3>
Isq_ctrl_pre-ctrl scal
p1703
Mot L_leakage total
r0377[M]
r0066
f_output
Isq_ctrl I_comp
r1719
<2> <3>
U_quad_de-couple
r1729 Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[0] (Motor Modules)
Kp_I adaption
Kp_I
p1717
p0392[M] p0391[M]
Kp_I
Iq
<1> [6723.5]
<2> [6721.8]
<3> [6727.8]
p0393[M]
I_ctrl Kp
p1715[D]
1
0
r0075
Id_set
p1402.2
Current
controller
adaption
active
from r1624 [6725.1] <3>
r0076
Id_act
[6731.4] <2>
[6799.5]
r1723
Isd_ctrl output
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Entkopplung
p1726
<2>
<3>
p1726
Transv_decpl scal
+
+
r1718
Isq_reg Ausg
r1732
U_dir axis_set
[6731.5]
r1732
U_quad_set
[6731.5]
Vector control
Function diagrams
2-987
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-100 6721 – Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2)
- 6721 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6721_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
01.07.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2)
M_set steady-state
p1610[D]
Mot t_excitation
p0346
1
0
r1751.0
from the model control
I_set T_smooth
p1616
[6060.6]
<1> G130/G150 only at PEM without encoder.
<1>
To current controller
[6714]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[2] (Motor Modules)
MAX
22
Iq
Iabs
Id_setp total
r1624
Mot kt
p0316[M]
Mot kt_reluctance
p0328[M]
M
Iq
[6640.5]
[6710.1]
[6714.6]
Ld
Lq
kt
rel
kt
r1762 Mot mod dev comp 1
[6731.2]
PEM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
Torque setting value, speed controller [6040]
M_suppl_accel
p1611[D]
r1515 M_suppl total
r1797 MotMod kT corr
from model control
[6731.3]
[6060.4] r1518 M_acceleration
0.9 x r0067
r1538
r1539
r0067
n-Ctrl = 1
Open-loop
controlled
operation
&
select n-ctrl
M adaptation
Iabs
pre
M
1
0
Id_set
Iabs
(r1407.2)
0 = M-ctrl
1 = n-ctrl
I
d
Id_inject
Iq
M
MotMod w/o enc
p1757[D]
Mot L_leakage total
r0377[M]
Mot L_stator_d
r0378[M]
From Id_field weakening
[6724]
r0077
Iq_set
MIN
Mot load angle opt
p0327[M]
[6710.8]
Optimal Current
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed
P1750.5
p1755 2.0 *
p1755
1
1
0
[6731]
Function diagrams
Vector control
2-988 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-101 6722 – Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1)
- 6722 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6722_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
24.10.08 V04.03.01
Vector control - Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1)
r1583
Flux setpoint, smoothed
I_set T_smooth
p1616
Flux setpoint
calculation
1
0
MotMod status (r1751)
MIN
Flux setpoint T_smooth
p1582[D]
< 0.3 s
Efficiency opt
0...100 %
p1580[D](0)
f
y
Field weakening
r0056.8
Magnetization
r1405.4
r0056.4
Mot t_excitation
p0346[D]
1 = Flux setpoint soft starting active
p1401.0
1 = Flux build-up control active
p1401.2
Id current limit
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed
Field-weakening
characteristic
<1> Only for vector control without encoder (SLVC).
Magnetization control
[6730.3]
[6723.1]
[6723.1]
Flux setpoint T_smth Fs
p1584[D]
Mot T_rotor
r0384
p1570[D]
Flux setpoint
p1570[D]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[2] (Motor Modules)
ASM: Induction motor
[6640.1]
U_output max
r0071
[4715.7]
[2526.2]
[2526.2]
Field weakening scal
80.0 ...120.0 [%]
p1586[D] (100.0)
Quick magnetizing active
[6723.8]
1 = Quick magnetizing
p1401.6
Flux thresh magnet
p1573[D]
[6723.3]
Id_set
calculation
M_suppl_accel
p1611[D]
M_set steady-state
p1610[D]
r1508
M_set before M_suppl
–
r0067
I_outp max
0,9
[6060.5] Mot I_mag_rated act
r0331[M]
+
+
[6640.3]
<1>
Vector control
Function diagrams
2-989
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-102 6723 – Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1)
- 6723 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6723_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
24.10.08 V04.03.01
Vector control - Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1)
r1583
Flux setpoint, smoothed
U_reserve dyn
0...150 [Vrms]
p1574[D] (10)
U_set 1
–
2
Field_ctrl Tn
10...10 000 [ms]
p1596[D] (50)
r1598
Flux setpoint total
-1
1
0
0
[6491]
Flux differentiation
p1401.1
[6491]
Flux build-in ctrl
p1401.2
U_max 1
Field_ctrl output
r1597
Id current limit
[6722.8]
++
+
+
Id_set total
r1624
Saturation characteristic
p0362 ... p0369
I_set_steady-state
r1623
[6714.8]
[6730.1]
[6714.8]
+
+
–
[6714.1]
0
-200 %
Drv filter type
p0230
Pulse frequency
p1800
Modulator mode
p1802
Modulation depth max
p1803
Modulat_depth max
r0073
Calculation, max. modulation depth
[6722.8]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[2] (Motor Modules)
r0070
Vdc_act
ASM: Induction motor
[6640.1]
[6722.1]
U_output max
r0071
[6714.1]
1
0
[6722.8]
Quick magnetizing active
Function diagrams
Vector control
2-990 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-103 6724 – Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2)
- 6724 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6724_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
24.10.08 V04.03.01
Vector control - Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2)
r0067
I_outp max
U_reserve dyn
0...150 [Vrms]
p1574[D] (10)
U_set 1
–
2
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed Id_field weaken. ctrl
U_max 1
Field_ctrl output
r1593
[6640.3]
++
+
[6640.1]
[6722.1]
[6714.8]
[6731.1]
[6714.8]
–
[4715.7]
0
Filter
p0230
Pulse frequency
p1800
Modulator modes
p1802
Modulation depth max
p1803
Modulat_depth max
r0073
Calculation, max. modulation depth
+-
+
Field weakening current Vst
r1589
0.9
Min
Mot I_mag_rated act
r0331
-1
-n
F
n
F
Field_ctrl Tn
10...10 000 [ms]
p1596[D] (50)
Mot U_rated
0...20 000 [Vrms]
p0304(0)
Mot I_mag_rated act
r0331
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[2] (Motor Modules)
r0070
Vdc_act
PEM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
[6721.1]
U_output max
r0071
+
+
100 %
Nom
L
d
\
Flux setpoint smooth
r1583
Flux setpoint T_smooth
p1582
r1598
Flux setpoint total
Field weakening scal
80.0 ...120.0 [%]
p1586[D] (100.0)
Vector control
Function diagrams
2-991
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-104 6730 – Interface to Motor Module (ASM, p0300 = 1)
[6220.1]
[6723.1]
[6799.1]
[8020.1]
- 6730 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6730_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
20.02.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Interface to the Motor Module (ASM, p0300 = 1)
Model control
p1750 ... p1759
Motor model
(observer)
r1762, r1763,
r1778, r1779
Control Unit
DRIVE
CLiQ
PWM
Motor Module
M
~
+
–
U
V
W
DC link voltage
+ BRP
-BRN
Brake control
P24
M
I_max Motor Module
Pulse enable
HW
p1750 p1755 p1756 p1758
Kp Tn
p1760
p1764
p1761
p1767
r0070
Vdc_act
r0074
Modulation depth
Adaptation controller
2
U_set
U_angle
Current model
I_max Motor Module
Vibration damping
p1740
r0066
f_outp
[4715.7]
p1759
[1690.1]
[6640.1]
= Only for vector ctrl. without encoder.
= Only for vector ctrl. with encoder.
<1>
Sign +
or -
Frequency, negative
r0056.7
Frequency limit active
r0056.11
R1751
MotMod status
MotMod
n_adapt Kp
r1770
MotMod
n_adapt Tn
r1771
R_stator act
r0395
[6722.7]
Stall monitoring
p1744, p1745
r1408.11
r1408.12
<2>
<2>
<1>
[6310.1]
[6799.1]
[6310.5]
[6714.1]
++
+
+
++
+
f_slip
r0065
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed
<3> Additionally for Booksize
<3> [8012.3]
[8012.3]
[1690.8]
[6714.8]
[6714.8]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[0] (Motor Modules)
[6799.1]
[6714.5]
[8020.1]
r0072
U_output
[6799.5]
I_Phase actual value
r0069[0...2]
U_Phase actual value
r0089[0...2]
Dir of rot p1821[D]
[4715.7]
[2526.2]
n_act calculation
[4715.4]
[6030.8]
<1>
Precontrol speed
+
+
<1>
r0084
Flux actual value
Iq
M
[6714.1]
[6640.5]
[6710.2]
[6714.6]
r0094
Transformat_angle
[4715.7]
r0087
Cos phi act
[6799.5]
[6714.4]
Function diagrams
Vector control
2-992 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-105 6731 – Interface to the Motor Module (PEM, p0300 = 2)
- 6731 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6731_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
29.07.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Interface to the Motor Module (PEM, p0300 = 2)
<1> Precontrol
speed [6030.8]
Control Unit
DRIVE-CLiQ
PWM
Motor Module
M
~
+
–
U
V
W
DC link voltage
+ BRP
- BRN
Brake control
P24
M
I_max Motor Module
Pulse enable
HW
p1795[D]
r0074
Modulation depth
2
U_set
U_angle
I_max Motor Module
r0066
f_outp
[4715.7]
[6640.1]
Frequency negative
r0056.7
Frequency limit active
r0056.11
[6310.1]
[6799.1]
<2> Additionally for Booksize.
<2>
[6714.8]
[6714.8]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[0] (Motor Modules)
[6799.1]
[8020.1]
r0072
U_output
[6799.5]
[6220.1]
[6724.1]
[6799.1]
[8020.1]
r0070
Vdc_act
[6714.1]
I_Phase actual value
r0069[0...2]
U_Phase actual value
r0089[0...2]
p1755 p1756
r1797
MotMod kT corr
r0094
Transformat_angle
Current model Vibration damping
p1740
++
+
[2526.2]
Sign + or -
[6714.8]
[6714.8]
= Only for vector ctrl. without encoder.
<1>
r0078
Iq_act
r0076
Id_act
r0087
Cos phi act
[6799.5]
[6714.1]
kT estimator
p0328[M]
p0316[M]
p1780.3
Motor model configuration
p1750
AC-Korrelator
p1750.5
p0398[M]
p0399[M]
r1608
Motor model
p0350[M]
p0356[M]
p0357[M]
r0334
r1763
r1762.0
r1762.1
r1751
p1760[D]
p1764[D]
p1798[D]
p1761[D]
p1767[D]
PEM: Permanent-magnet
synchronous motor
AC-Pulse generator
p1605[D] p1607[D]
[6714.6]
R_stator act
r0395
From thermal motor model
r1732
Ud_set
r1733
Uq_set [6714.6]
Kp Tn
r1771
r1770
r0061[0]
1 = Encoderless operation active
r1407.1 [2522.6]
1
0
n_act calculation
+
I_Resp_act
r1608[0...1]
Model actual
r1606
–
–
[4715.5]
Vector control
Function diagrams
2-993
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-106 6799 – Display signals
- 6799 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_6799_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
24.06.09 V04.03.01
Vector control - Display signals
100 ms
[6714.8]
[6714.8]
[6714.8]
300 ms
100 ms
100 ms
300 ms
300 ms
300 ms
<1> [6730.4]
<2> [6731.4]
<3> [6732.4]
<1> [6730.1]
<2> [6731.1]
<3> [6732.1]
<1> [6730.1]
<2> [6731.1]
<3> [6732.1]
Iq
M
[4715.7]
<1> [6730.1]
<2> [6721.8]
<3> [6732.1]
r0082[0]
P_act unsmoothed
T_smth display
p0045
[6799.1]
[7017.6]
[8014.1]
[8017.1]
[8018.1]
[8020.1]
[6799.5]
[8021.1]
3
<1> [6730.1]
<3> [6732.1] r0087
cos phi actual val
100 ms
<1> [6730.4]
<2> [6731.4]
<3> [6732.4]
[4715.6] 100 ms
r0026
Vdc smooth
r0027
I_act abs value smooth
T_smth display
p0045
r0063[1]
n_act
Smoothed with p0045
[6799.8]
[6799.8]
100 ms
100 ms r0032
P_active_actual smooth
r0082[1]
P_act Smoothed with p0045
T_smth display
p0045
<3> Only for SINAMIC S120/S150 and separately-excited synchronous motors.
100 ms
<1> [6730.4]
<2> [6731.4]
<3> [6732.4]
r0025
U_outp smooth
r0060
n_set before filter
[6030.1]
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed
r0066
f_outp
r0072
U_output
r0070
Vdc_act
r0068[0]
I_act abs. value unsmoothed
n_set smooth
r0020
f_outp smooth
r0024
Modulation depth, smooth
r0028
Id_act smooth
r0029
Iq_act smooth
r0030
M_act smooth
r0031
cos phi smooth
r0038
r0074
Modulation depth
r0078
Iq_act
r0080[0]
M_act unsmoothed
r0082[0]
P_act unsmoothed
r0076
Id_act
r0082[2]
Power drawn
r0087
Cos phi actual value
r0068[1]
I_act abs. value
smoothed with p0045
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed
r0080[0]
M_act
r0080[1]
M_act
[6799.5]
<1> For induction motors.
<2> For synchronous motors.
T_smth display
p0045
r0021
n_act smooth
Function diagrams
Technology functions
2-994 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.13 Technology functions
Function diagrams
7010 – Friction characteristic 2-995
7014 – External armature short-circuit (EASC, p0300 = 2xx) 2-996
7016 – Internal armature short-circuit (IASC, p0300 = 2xx) 2-997
7017 – DC brake (p0300 = 1xx) 2-998
7020 – Synchronization 2-999
Technology functions
Function diagrams
2-995
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-107 7010 – Friction characteristic
- 7010 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_7010_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR (n/M), VECTORMV
SINAMICS
24.11.08 V04.03.01
Technology functions - Friction characteristic
0
Friction rec act
0...3
p3845 (0)
Friction M0
p3830[D] (0)
Friction n0
p3820[D] (15)
Friction M9
p3839[D] (0)
Friction n9
p3829[D] (3000)
Friction characteristic positive direction
r3840.8
M_suppl 3
(3841)
p1569[C]
r3841
Frict outp
Friction characteristic OK
r3840.0
0
1
Frict act
p3842 (0)
Drive ON from the sequence control
Friction characteristic record active (p3845 > 0)
Frict rec t_RFG
0.000...999999.000 [s]
p3846[D] (10 s)
r0063
n_act smoot
Sign
+ or -
Friction rec t_warm
0.000...3600.000 [s]
p3847[D] (0)
A07960
"Friction characteristic incorrect"
To
setpoint channel
[3080.7]
Record friction characteristic
Play friction characteristic
<1>
<1> p3845
= 0: Friction characteristic record deactivated
= 1: Friction characteristic record activated
= 2: Friction characteristic record completed
= 3: Friction characteristic record aborted
= 8: Friction characteristic positive direction
<2> Only for SINAMICS S120 and SERVO.
n [RPM]
M [Nm]
To M_set total
e. g.
SERVO [5610.5][5650.7]
VECTOR, VECTORMV [6710.1]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[3] (Drive Object)
Friction characteristic record activated
r3840.1
Friction characteristic record completed
r3840.2
Friction characteristic record aborted
r3840.3
r3840
Friction ZSW
A07961
"Friction characteristic record activated"
F07963
"Friction characteristic record interrupted"
r1538
M_max upper eff
r1539
M_max lower eff
p1532
M_max offset
+
–
p1532
M_max offset
+
–
<2>
<2>
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed
[4715.7]
[4710.7]
Start ramp-function generator
[5650.8]
[5650.8]
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
Function diagrams
Technology functions
2-996 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-108 7014 – External armature short-circuit (EASC, p0300 = 2xx)
- 7014 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_7014_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
28.02.08 V04.03.01
Technology functions - External Armature Short-Circuit (EASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx)
Drive converter
~
M
3
Contactor feedback signal
p1236 = 200 ms
=1
T0
+24 V
0T
p1237 = 200 ms
&
&
Pulse enable via hardware
Pulse enable via hardware
1
Pulse inhibit
(r0046.19 = 1)
1
r0046.4
r0046.20
1
Drive status S1, S2, S3 [2610]
DI
p1231 = 1
r0002 = 19
2000 μs
Control Unit
DO
p1235
Contactor
closed
r1239.0
p1231 = 2
p1231 = 1
(0)
ASC act
p1230
<1> p0300 = 4xx only with S120/S150. EASC: External Armature Short-Circuit
A07904
"Contactor feedback signal "Closed" missing"
F07905
"Contactor feedback signal "Open" missing"
<1>
Technology functions
Function diagrams
2-997
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-109 7016 – Internal armature short-circuit (IASC, p0300 = 2xx)
- 7016 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_7016_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
28.02.08 V04.03.01
Technology functions - Internal Armature Short-Circuit (IASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx)
2000 μs
DRIVE-CLiQ
Control Unit Motor Module
~
M
3
Drive converter
F07907
"Motor terminals are not at zero potential after pulse cancellation"
p1231 = 4
Fault response, Internal Armature Short-Circuit
(1)
ASC act
p1230
Armature short-circuit, enable missing
r0046.4
Control of armature short-circuiting in the power unit
Armature short-circuit, internal enable missing
r0046.20
<1> p0300 = 4xx only with S120/S150. IASC: Internal Armature Short-Circuit
<1>
Function diagrams
Technology functions
2-998 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-110 7017 – DC brake (p0300 = 1xx)
- 7017 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_7017_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
27.02.08 V04.03.01
Technology functions - DC brake (p0300 = 1xx)
To pulse disable
To sequencer
<1> The DC braking current is determined during automatic calculation (p0340 = 1).
<2> The de-magnetization time is determined during automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, 3).
<3> As soon as the standstill threshold (p1226) has been reached, the DC current injection will be aborted prematurely.
<4> Signal r1239.8 is only set while the DC brake is active.
<5> Only for SINAMICS S120 and SERVO.
<6> Only for VECTOR.
<7> Only for SINAMICS S120.
MIN
–
Current actual values
[5730]
[6714]
Kp Tn
p0115
r1239.10
DC brake ready
The parameters of the I_max current controller are also used.
DCBRK I_brake
0...10000 [A]
p1232[M] (0)
DCBRK time
0...3600 [s]
p1233[M] (0)
DCBRK n_start
20...210000 [1/min]
p1234[M] (0)
<1>
ASC config
0...3
p1231[M] (0)
(0)
ASC act
p1230[C]
OFF
Mot t_de-excitat
0...20 [s]
p0347[M] (0)
<2>
0
4
DC brake fault response
DC brake active
r1239.8
<4>
I_max_U_ctrl Kp
0.000...100000.000
p1345[D] (0.000)
I_max_U_ctrl Tn
0.000...50.000 [s]
p1346D] (0.030)
From I
2
t control [8014]
|I_act|
r0068[0]
I_act abs val
To control [5730]<7>
[6730]
To V/f characteristic [6300]
r0072
U_output
I_ctrl Kp
0.000...100000.000 [V/A]
p1715[D] (0.000)
I_ctrl Tn
0.00...1000.00 [ms]
p1717[D] (2.00)
<5> <5>
<6> <6>
n_set
BICO = 1
p0347
BICO = 0
n_set
p1234
p1233
p1232
p0347
Pulse disable
<3>
Braking response
p1232
|I_set|
t
t
|I_set|
n_act
n_act
t
|I_act|
|I_act|
Pulse disable
t
<7>
Technology functions
Function diagrams
2-999
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-111 7020 – Synchronization
Phase measurement/
closed-loop control
- 7020 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_7020_51_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR, VECTORMV
SINAMICS
15.05.08 V04.03.01
Technology functions - Synchronization
Frequency measurement
1
0
Sync Ph_sync thrsh
1.00...20.00 [°]
p3813[D] (2.00)
Sync phase setp
-180.00...179.90 [°]
p3809[D] (0.00)
-p3811
KP TN
To setpoint channel
r3812
Sync f_corr
r3808
Sync phase diff
1
0
1
0
Sync U_diff thresh
0.00...10.00 [%]
p3815[D] (10.00) &
Actual voltage
sensing
(closed-loop
control gating
unit)
Synchronizing
voltage
sensing
r3814
Sync U_diff
To setpoint channel
r3804
Sync f_target
Sync f_diff thresh
0.00...1.00 [Hz]
p3806[D] (0.10)
A07941
f_target > f_max
A07941
f_target < f_min
Start closed-loop phase control
f
|U|
Sequence
control
Sync-line-drive enabled
r3819.0
Sync-line-drive frequency measurement active
r3819.5
Sync-line-drive closed-loop phase control active
r3819.6
Sync act
0...1
p3800[D] (0)
Sync DO No
1...62
p3801[D] (1)
Sync-line-drive synchronizing error
r3819.3
Sync-line-drive in synchronism
r3819.2
(measurement
via VSM10 with
PLL)
r3805
Sync f_diff
To motor control
+
–
[3030.8]
[3080.5]
+
–
–
+
+
+
Sync f_lim
0.00...1.00 [Hz]
p3811[D] (0.20)
f
set
set
|U|
set
(0)
Sync enable
p3802[C]
-1
0
1
0
1
r1084
n_limit pos eff
r1087
n_limit neg eff
Function diagrams
Technology controller
2-1000 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.14 Technology controller
Function diagrams
7950 – Fixed values, binary selection (r0108.16 = 1) 2-1001
7951 – Fixed values, direct selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216[D] = 1) 2-1002
7954 – Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1) 2-1003
7958 – Closed loop control (r0108.16 = 1) 2-1004
7960 – DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1) 2-1005
Technology controller
Function diagrams
2-1001
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-112 7950 – Fixed values, binary selection (r0108.16 = 1)
- 7950 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_7950_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORMV
SINAMICS
06.11.09 V04.03.01
Technology controller - Fixed value selection binary (r0108.16 = 1)
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
Tec_ctrl fix val 1
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2201[D] (10.00)
p2201[D]
0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
1 0 0 0
<1> For SERVO and VECTOR is valid:
Further condition: p2216[D] = 2 (factory setting).
<101> The pre-assignment of the sampling time in p0115[6] is 4000.00 μs.
Tec_ctrl fix val 2
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2202[D] (20.00)
p2203[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 3
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2203[D] (30.00)
p2204[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 4
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2204[D] (40.00)
p2205[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 5
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2205[D] (50.00)
p2206[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 6
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2206[D] (60.00)
p2207[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 7
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2207[D] (70.00)
p2208[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 8
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2208[D] (80.00)
p2209[D]
p2211[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 11
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2211[D] (110.00)
p2210[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 10
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2210[D] (100.00)
p2212[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 12
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2212[D] (120.00)
p2215[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 15
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2215[D] (150.00)
p2214[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 14
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2214[D] (140.00)
p2213[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 13
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2213[D] (130.00)
Tec_ctrl fix val 9
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2209[D] (90.00)
(0)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 0
p2220[C]
(0)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 1
p2221[C]
(0)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 3
p2223[C]
(0)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 2
p2222[C]
<101>
0.00 %
0 1 1 1
r2224
Tec_ctr FixVal eff
1 1 1 1
1 1 0 1
1 0 1 1
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
1 0 0 1
0 ... 15
2
0
2
3
p2202[D]
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[6] (Drive Object)
Tec_ctr FixVal sel
r2225.0
<1> Tec_ctrl No act
r2229
Function diagrams
Technology controller
2-1002 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-113 7951 – Fixed values, direct selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216[D] = 1)
- 7951 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_7951_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
06.11.09 V04.03.01
Technology controller - Fixed value selection direct (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216[D] = 1)
<101> The pre-assignment of the sampling time in p0115[6] is 4000.00 μs.
(0)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 0
p2220[C]
(0)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 1
p2221[C]
(0)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 3
p2223[C]
(0)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 2
p2222[C]
<101>
Refer to [1020.7]
p0115[6] (Drive Object)
Tec_ctrl fix val 1
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2201[D] (10.00)
Tec_ctrl fix val 2
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2202[D] (20.00)
Tec_ctrl fix val 3
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2203[D] (30.00)
Tec_ctrl fix val 4
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2204[D] (40.00)
r2224
Tec_ctr FixVal eff
0 0 0 1
p2201[D]
p2203[D]
p2204[D]
0 1 0 0
p2202[D]
1 0 0 0
+++
++ +
0 0 1 0
Tec_ctr FixVal sel
r2225.0
Technology controller
Function diagrams
2-1003
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-114 7954 – Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1)
- 7954 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_7954_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORMV
SINAMICS
22.10.09 V04.03.01
Technology controller - Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1)
Tec_ctr mop config
p2230[D] (0110)
<1> For p2230.0 = 0, this setpoint is entered after ON.
<2> If initial rounding-off is active (p2230.2 = 1), the selected ramp-up/down times are exceeded accordingly.
<101> The pre-assignment of the sampling time in p0115[6] is 4000.00 μs.
<1>
0 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p2240.
0 Without initial rounding.
1 With initial rounding. The ramp-up/down time set is exceeded accordingly.
1 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved after OFF and after ON is entered using r2231.
<101>
Refer to [1020.7]
r2250
Tec_ctr mop aftRFG
Tec_ctr mop t_r-up
0.0...1000.0 [s]
p2247[D] (10.0)
Tec_ctr mop t_r-dn
0.0...1000.0 [s]
p2248[D] (10.0)
<2> <2>
Tec_ctrl mop start
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2240[D] (0.00)
r2245
Tec_ctr mop befRFG
xy
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
Tec_ctrl mop min
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2238[D] (-100.00)
Tec_ctrl mop max
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2237[D] (100.00)
(0)
Tec_ctrl mop raise
p2235[C]
(0)
Tec_ctrl Mop lower
p2236[C]
Data save active
Initial rounding-off active
1 = OFF1 enable missing
r0046.0
Old value is kept
[2634.0]
Tec_ctrl mop mem
r2231
Non-volatile data save active 0 Non-volatile data save not activated.
1 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for p2230.0 = 1).
y
p2237
p2238
t
y = 0
p0115[6] (Drive Object)
Function diagrams
Technology controller
2-1004 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-115 7958 – Closed loop control (r0108.16 = 1)
- 7958 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_7958_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORMV
SINAMICS
10.12.09 V04.03.01
Technology controller - Closed-loop control (r0108.16 = 1)
+
+
+
+
<1> P, I and D components can be disabled by entering a zero.
<2> Behavior can be changed via p2252.
<3> I component stop, only when r2273 and r2294 in same direction.
<101> The pre-assignment of the sampling time in p0115[6] is 4000.00 μs.
<1>
<101>
Refer to [1020.7]
r2294
Tec_ctr outp_sig
Tec_ctrl setpoint 1
(0)
p2253[C]
Tec_ctrl Set1 scal
0.00...100.00 %
p2255 (100.00)
Tec_ctrl t_ramp-up
0.00...650.00 s
p2257 (1.00)
r2260
Tec_ctr set a. RFG
Tec_ctrl set T
0.00...60.00 s
p2261 (0.00)
r2262
Tec_ctr set aft. flt
+
Tec_ctrl setpoint 2
(0)
p2254[C]
Tec_ctrl set 2 scal
0.00...100.00 %
p2256 (100.00) r2273
Tec_ctr error
Tec_ctrl max_limit
-200.00...200.00 %
p2291 (100.00)
Tec_ctrl up/down
0.00...100.00 s
p2293 (1.00)
Tec_ctrl
Kp 0.000...1000.000
p2280 (1.000)
<1>
Tec_ctrl
Tn 0.000...60.000 s
p2285 (0.000)
+
+
Tec_ctrl pre-control
(0)
p2289[C]
Technology controller limited
r2349.1
Technology controller de-activated
r2349.0
+
(2295)0
p2296[C]
Tec_ctrl output scal
-100.00...100.00 %
p2295 (100.00) p2295
p2291
Tec_ctr max_limit
(2291)
p2297[C]
p2292
Tec_ctr min_lim
(2292)
p2298[C]
r2273
Tec_ctr error
p2263 = 1
p2263 = 0
Tec_ctrl min_limit
-200.00...200.00 %
p2292 (0.00)
p0115[6] (Drive Object)
<1>
r2266
Tec_ctr act a. flt
d
dt
10
x
y
Tec_ctr ActVal max
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%]
p2267 (100.00)
Tec_ctr ActVal min
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%]
p2268 (-100.00)
Tec_ctr ActValGain
0.00 ... 500.00
p2269 (100.00)
Tec_ctr ActVal inv
0 ...1
p2271 (0)
Tec_ctr ActVal Fct
0 ...3
p2270 (0)
F07426
-1
r2272
Tec_ctr ActValScal
(0)
Tec_ctrl enable
p2200[C]
Tec_ctrl T diff
0.000...60.000 s
p2274 (0.000)
Tec_ctrl type
0 = D component in the actual value signal
1 = D component in the fault signal
p2263(0)
Tec_ctrl act T
0.00...60.00 s
p2265 (0.00)
Tec_ctr act val
(0)
p2264[C]
Tec_ctrl t_ramp-dn
0.00...650.00 s
p2258 (1.00)
1
p2252.2
p2252.2
p2252.1
Tec_reg config
p2252.0
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
(r0056.13)
Tec_reg Integ Stop
p2286[C] <3>
-
+
Tec_ctrl lim offs
(0)
p2299[C]
-
+
Technology controller
Function diagrams
2-1005
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-116 7960 – DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1)
- 7960 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_7960_54_eng.vsd
DO: VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
16.11.09 V04.03.01
Technology controller - DC link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1)
r3517
I_act ctrl stp
p0115[0] (250.00 μs)
Vdc pre-ctrl P
(0)
p3520[0]
Prectrl P scal
p3521[0]
Power controll
Vdc pre-ctrl P
(0)
p3520[3]
p3521[3]
Prectrl P scal
+
+
I = P/U
<1> Upon pulse enable, the dc link voltage is transmitted via a ramp (p3566) from the actual current value to the setpoint value p3510.
Kp Tn
Vdc Z_set
300.00...1600.00 V
p3510 (600.00)
DC link voltage controller
–
+
+
+
C_DCL tot
p3422
Vdc_ctrl Kp
p3560
Vdc_ctrl Tn
p3562
r3554
Vdc_ctr I_comp
p3511
r5433
Vdc Z_set
r0088
Vdc setpoint
[8964.6]
r0070
Vdc_act
[8950.1]
<1>
Inhib V_ctrl mode
p3513
[7984.6]
Enabling and linearisation
1
+
+
r3533
-1
Vdc-ctrl active
r3405.1
r3533
r0063 r0074
[6320.8]
Function diagrams
Signals and monitoring functions
2-1006 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.15 Signals and monitoring functions
Function diagrams
8010 – Speed messages 1 2-1007
8011 – Speed messages 2 2-1008
8012 – Torque messages, motor locked/stalled 2-1009
8013 – Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1) 2-1010
8014 – Thermal monitoring, power unit 2-1011
8016 – Thermal monitoring, motor 2-1012
8017 – Thermal I2t motor model (PEM, p0300 = 2xx) 2-1013
Signals and monitoring functions
Function diagrams
2-1007
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-117 8010 – Speed messages 1
- 8010 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8010_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
29.06.09 V04.03.01
Signals and monitoring functions - Speed signals 1
r0063[0]
n_act unsmoothed
r2169
n_act smooth signal
0.00...60 000.00 RPM
p2162[D] (600.00)
0.00...300.00 RPM
p2140[D] (90.00)
n_Hysterrese 2
n_thresh val 2
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p2155[D] (900.00)
0...1 000 000 ms
p2153 (0)
[4715.7]
[3050.8]
<5> [3095.7]
p0115[1] (125.00 μs)
0
1
0
1
0
1
n_thresh val 1
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p2141[D] (5.00)
0.000...300.000 RPM
p2142[D] (2.00)
n_hysteresis 1
<1>
|n_act| > n_max
r2197.6
|n_act| p2155
r2197.1 [2534.3]
f or n-comparison value
reached/exceeded
r2199.1 [2537.3]
p0115[3] (4000.00 μs)
T0
0...10 000 ms
p2156[D] (0)
[2534.3]
[8021.1]
<1>
p0115[3] (<3>)p0115[1] (<2>)
r0063
n_act smooth
[4710.7] n
n
0
Smoothing
<5>
<4>
n_thresh val 3
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p2161[D] (5.00)
0
1|n_act| < p2161
r2199.0 [2537.3]
r1087
n_limit neg eff
r1084
n_limit pos eff
0.00...300.00 RPM
p2150[D] (2.00)
n_hysteresis 3
F07901 "motor overspeed"
<1> VECTOR: Calculated.
<2> VECTOR:
Depending on the drive unit (250 or 400 μs).
<3> VECTOR:
Depending on the drive unit (1000 or 1600 μs).
<4> Only for VECTOR.
<5> Only for SINAMICS S120 and SERVO.
[8011.1]
[8012.5]
[8013,1]
Function diagrams
Signals and monitoring functions
2-1008 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-118 8011 – Speed messages 2
- 8011 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8011_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
20.04.09 V04.03.01
Signals and monitoring functions - Speed signals 2
–
Ramp-up/ramp-down completed
r2199.5 [2537.3]
[8021.1]
+
SET
(Q=1)
RESET
(Q=0)
Q
Q
n_act 2
0
p2154[C]
p0115[3] (4000.00 μs)p0115[3] (<3>)
r2169
n_act smooth signal
[8010.2] 0
1
n_hysteresis 3
0.00...300.00 RPM
p2150[D] (2.00)
<2>
n_act 0
r2197.3 [2534.3]
0
n_set for msg
r1170
p2151[C]
<5>
[3080.8]
n_thresh val 4
0.00...210.000 RPM
p2163[D] (90.00)
n_hysteresis 4
0.00...200.00 RPM
p2164[D] (2.00)
<2>
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
n_hysteresis 3
0.00...300.00 RPM
p2150[D] (2.00)
<2>
n_hysteresis 3
0.00...300.00 RPM
p2150[D] (2.00)
(0)
RFG active
p2148[C]
t_on n_act=n_set
0.0...10 000.0 ms
p2167[D] (200.0)
T0
1 = RESET
Priority
1 RESET
2 SET
[2537.3]
Speed setpoint actual value deviation in tolerance t_on
r2199.4
0T
t_del_off n_i=n_se
0.0...500.0 ms
p2166[D] (200.0)
Speed setpoint actual value deviation in tolerance t_off
r2197.7 [2534.3]
1
<4>
Torque control active
r1407.2
[6060.3]
Enable alarm A07903
p2149.0[D]
A07903 "Motor speed deviation"
1
0
1
A07903 is only signaled for p2149.0 = 1 and r2197.7 = 0.
n_thresh val 3
0.00...210000.00 RPM
p2161[D] (5.00)
n_set > 0
r2198.5 [2536.3]
|n_set| p2161
r2198.4 [2536.3]
+
[5210.4]
n_set for msg
r1438
p2151[C]
<6>
<1>
<1> Applies only if the function module "extended
signals/monitoring functions" is active
(r0108.17 = 1).
<2> VECTOR: Calculated.
<3> VECTOR:
Depending on the drive unit (1000 or 1600 μs).
<4> Evaluation only for:
Pulse enable and operating enable (r0899.2)
or OFF1
or OFF3
or rotating measurements
or friction characteristic plot.
<5> Only for VECTOR.
<6> Only for SINAMICS S120 and SERVO.
<7> The value is displayed correctly only with
r0899.2 = 1 (Operation enabled).
<7>
Signals and monitoring functions
Function diagrams
2-1009
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-119 8012 – Torque messages, motor locked/stalled
- 8012 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8012_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
23.04.09 V04.03.01
Signals and monitoring functions - Torque signals, motor locked/stalled
Ramp-up completed
r2199.5
[6640.8]
[6640.8]
<1>
r0033
M_utilization smooth
[2537.7]
<1> The torque setpoint and the torque limits are determined by p1532
(M_max offset). As a rule, M_max offset = 0.
<2> Only for SINAMICS S120 with SERVO (r0107 = 11).
<3> Only for vector control with encoder.
<4> Only for VECTOR (r0107 = 12).
<5> VECTOR: Depending on the drive unit (1000 or 1600 μs).
Torque utilization < p2194
r2199.11
<2>
[2537.3]
r0081
M_utilization
<2>
r0079
M_set total
<4>
[6060.8]
r0079[0]
M_set total
<2>
r0079
M_set total
<4>
r0079[1]
M_set total, smooth
p0115[3] (4000.00 μs)
p0115[3] (<5>)
Only VECTOR Stall detection or stall monitoring
(not for V/f control and not for p0300 = 5)
T0
0.000...1.000 s
p2178 (0.010)
F07902
Motor stalled
r2198.7
[2536.3]
1
Speed adaptation, speed deviation
r1408.11
Motor stalled
r1408.12
<3>
[6730.3]
[6060.8]
[5610.5]
[6730.3]
r1539
M_max lower effective
r1539
M_max lower effective
r1538
M_max upper effective
r1538
M_max upper
effective
[5650.8]
[5650.8]
<2>
<2>
<4>
<4>
M_max Offset
p1532
[5620.7]
[5630.7]
T0
0.000...65.000 s
p2177 (1.000)
F07900
Motor locked
r2198.6
[2536.3]
Motor locked detection or motor locked monitoring function
(not for closed-loop torque control)
Control type
p1300
<20
20
0
1
0
1
0.00...99 999.00 Nm
p2174 (5.13)
0T
0.0...1 000.0 ms
p2195[D] (800.0)
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
0
1
x
1
x
2
y[%]
0.00...100.00 %
p2194 (90.00)
Requested
torque
[Nm]
x
1
> x
2
= y = 1
(positive torque requested)
0
1
1
Actual torque limit
1
2
1
x
% 100xx
2 % von p2194
[Nm]
[3080.4]
Torque setpoint < p2174
r2198.10
[2536.3]
100 ms
p0045
p0045
x
1
x
2
y
Ramp-function generator operating
[5610.5]
2 % of p2174
1
r1443
n_act n_cont. In
[6040.2] 0
1
p3237[D]
p3236[D]
p3238[D](3.0)
r2199.7
n_diff. Mod./Ext
F07937
0T
–
+
r2169
n_act smooth signal
Mot block n_thresh
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p2175 (120.00)
n_act
smooth
signal
< p2175
[8010.2]
[2522.7]
Mot stall enab neg
(0)
p2144[C]
&
Torque limit reached
r1407.7
[2520.7]
I_limit U_output act
r0056.12
[2526.6]
r1406.8
p1545
1
Travel to fixed stop
<2>
I_limit/M_limit act
r0056.13
1
&
1
Function diagrams
Signals and monitoring functions
2-1010 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-120 8013 – Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1)
- 8013 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8013_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
04.11.09 V04.03.01
Signals and monitoring functions - Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1)
<1> The response to these faults can be defined.
<2> Only for VECTOR.
<3> Only for SERVO.
[8010.2]
M [Nm]
0T
0.00...65.00 s
p2192[D] (10.00)
p0115[6] (4000.00 μs)
0
1
p2149.1
F07928 "Encoder falling off"
n_act load monitor
(0)
p3230[C]
+
0
1
2
3
p2193[D] (1)
0
1
p3231[D] (150.00)
0
A07920 ... A07922
r2198.11
F07923 ... F07925
r2198.12
[2536.3]
Load monitoring response
p2181[D](0)
Evaluation
A07920 "Torque too low"
A07921 "Torque too high"
A07922 "Torque outside tolerance"
F07923 "Torque too low"
F07924 "Torque too high"
F07925 "Torque outside tolerance"
<1>
(0)
(1)
Load monitoring disabled
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
<1>
<1>
[2536.3]
A07926 "Envelop characteristic, parameter not value"
r0080
M_act
r2169
n_act smooth signal
0
1
p2149.1
M_thresh 3 upper
0.00...20 000 000.00 Nm
p2189[D] (10 000 000.00)
M_thresh 3 lower
0.00...20 000 000.00 Nm
p2190[D] (0.00)
M_thresh 2 upper
0.00...20 000 000.00 Nm
p2187[D] (10 000 000.00)
M_thresh 2 lower
0.00...20 000 000.00 Nm
p2188[D] (0.00)
M_thresh 1 upper
0.00...20 000 000.00 Nm
p2185[D] (10 000 000.00)
M_thresh 1 lower
0.00...20 000 000.00 Nm
p2186[D] (0.00)
n_threshold 1
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p2182[D](150.00)
n_threshold 2
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p2183[D](900.00)
n_threshold 3
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p2184[D](1500.00)
Tolerance
bandwidth
n [RPM]
–
(1)
Load monitor Encoder falling off
p3232[C]
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
1
[5730.1] <3>
[6714.8] <2>
Signals and monitoring functions
Function diagrams
2-1011
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-121 8014 – Thermal monitoring, power unit
Control Unit
DRIVE-
CLiQ
Power unit
Temperature measurement
- 8014 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8014_54_eng.vsd
DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
27.02.08 V04.03.01
Signals and monitoring functions - Thermal monitoring, power unit
Tmax heatsink
Thermal monitoring for the power unit
Max
0
1
0
1
Power unit
temperatures [°C]
r0037 [0...19]
Maximum power unit temperature
5 °C
Faults "power unit overtemperature"
F30004 inverter heatsink
F30024 thermal model <3>
F30025 chip F30035 air intake
F30036 electronics module
F30037 rectifier
1 = Fault thermal overload in power unit
1 = Alarm, thermal overload, power unit
+
-
0
1
Alarms "power unit overtemperature"
A05000 inverter heatsink
A05001 chip
A05002 air intake
A05003 electronics module
A05004 rectifier
A05006 chip to heatsink <4>
F30005 "Power unit overload"
Overload response
Power unit overload response
p0290
Power unit overload
(0...100 %)
r0036
[2548.2]
0
1
A07805 "Power unit overload"
Alarm threshold
i²t overload power unit 0...100 %
p0294 (95 %)
100 %
p0115[3] (2000.00 μs)
1
1
LT I_rated
r0207
i²t model
power unit
r2135.13
r2135.15
[2548.2]
<1> Not for A_INF, B_INF and S_INF.
<2> Not for Basic Line Modules Chassis.
<3> Only for Power Unit Chassis
<4> Only for Power Unit Blocksize
<5> Only for SINAMICS S120.
r0068
I_act abs. value
[5730.4]
[8850.4]
[8950.4]
r0068[0]
I_act abs. value
[6714.5]
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
Pulse frequency
p1800
<1>
0
1
<3> A05007 “Power unit overtemperature chip to heatsink
<1>
<3>
PU Tmodel_A_thresh
r0293
<1>
<5>
Function diagrams
Signals and monitoring functions
2-1012 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-122 8016 – Thermal monitoring, motor
- 8016 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8016_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
07.10.09 V04.03.01
Signals and monitoring functions - Thermal monitoring, motor
Mot T_environment
p0625[M]
Thermal
3-mass-model
(for induction motors
only)
Rated motor temperature rise
MotTMod T_environ
r0630[M]
Calculated motor temperatures
Mot temp_sensortyp
p0601[M]
Model tracking
Mot T_on iron
p0626[M]
Mot T_on stator
p0627[M]
Mot T_on rotor
p0628[M]
MotTMod T_iron
r0631[M]
MotTMod T_copper
r0632[M]
MotTMod T_rotor
r0633[M]
Mot temp_sensor
p0600[M]
1.00 s
r0035
Mot_temp
T0
&
&
p0606[M]
A07910
"Motor overtemperature"
F07011
"Motor overtemperature"
<1>
Fault response
I_max reduction
[1690.1][6640.2]
p0610[M]
p0610 = 0: No response, only alarm, no reduction of I_max
p0610 = 1: Alarm and reduction of I_max and fault
p0610 = 2: Alarm and fault, no reduction of I_max
p0610 = 1
Suppress fault
p0610 = 0
[2548.2]
r2135.14
A07820 "Temperature sensor not connected"
A07015
"Motor temperature
sensor fault alarm"
A07016
"Motor temperature
sensor fault, fault"
-140 °C 250 °C
Mot temp_sens time
p0607[M]
<2>
0
1
Mot_temp fault thresh
p0605[M]
&
KTY sensor type
(threshold not applicable for PTC)
<4>
1
1
[2548.2]r2135.12
T0
<5>
KTY PTC
Sensor type
Mot_tempAlrmThresh
p0604[M]
0
1
<3>
M I N
Mot temp alarm 1
p0616[M]
<8>
1650
1
MAX
1
<1> For KTY and PTC, the value p0606 = 0 has a different meaning:
KTY: 0 The output of the timer is always switched out (logical 0)
PTC: 0 Delay time = 0 s
<2> As for the switch-in delay, refer to [1024]. p0607 = 0 suppresses fault F07016.
<3> For KTY and "No sensor", temperature as defined in the model.
<4> Applies only for VECTOR.
<5> P0606 does not work for alarms via p0616.
<6> p0601 = 5 can only be evaluated if r0192.15 = 1 and p0600 = 11; PT100 is calibrated via p0624.
<7> The assignment of temperature channels 1 … 4 depends on the hardware used.
<8> The relevant rated response temperature (°C) depends on the temperature sensor chosen by the motor manufacturer.
e.g. r4105 from TM31
[8017.8]
1
Mot Temperatur [°C]
(0)
p0603
only
for
KTY
[4704.8]
from Motor Modules
or CUA31
von Geber 3
[4704.8]
from encoder 1
[4704.8]
10 = Evaluation of
several
temperature
channels
SME12x)
[9576.7]
0
1
2
3
11
10
from encoder 2
2 = KTY84
4 = Bimetal NC
contact alarm
with time step
for MM only
5 = PT100 <6>
11 = Evaluation of
several
temperature
channels (BICO)
Mot temperatur [°C]
(0)
p0608[4]
Mot temperatur [°C]
(0)
p0609[4]
20
21
Mot Temp_sensortyp
20 = KTY84
Temperature channel
p4603[E]
r4620[0] r4620[1] r4620[2] r4620[3]
p4600[E] p4601[E] p4602[E]
12
34
30 = Bimetal NC contact fault
12 = PTC alarm and time step
32 = Bimetal NC contact
alarm & time step
31 = Bimetal NC contact alarm
0 = No sensor
11 = PTC alarm
Configuration
10 = PTC fault
Mot temp_sensortyp
0 = No sensor
3 = KTY84 & PTC,
for encoder only
1 = PTC alarm and
time
Mot Temp_sensortyp
Temperature channel
p4613[M]
r4620[0] r4620[1] r4620[2] r4620[3]
p4610[M] p4611[M] p4612[M]
12
34
Mot temp_sensortyp
30 = Bimetal NC contact fault
12 = PTC alarm and time step
32 = Bimetal NC contact
alarm & time step
31 = Bimetal NC contact alarm
0 = No sensor
11 = PTC alarm
Configuration
10 = PTC fault
20 = KTY84
<7>
e.g. r4105 from TM120
e.g. r4105 from TM120
Signals and monitoring functions
Function diagrams
2-1013
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-123 8017 – Thermal I2t motor model (PEM, p0300 = 2xx)
- 8017 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8017_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
15.05.08 V04.03.01
Signals and monitoring functions - Thermal I2t motor model (PEM, p0300 = 2xx)
<1> Only if there is a temperature sensor (p0600 > 0 and p0601 = 2, 3, or with p0601 = 10 and p4600 ... p4603 = 20).
MotTempFaultThresh
p0605[M]
0
1
0
1
A07012
"I2t-motor model overtemperature"
r0034
Motor utilization
Thermal
I2t motor model
(only for synchronous
machine)
r0068[0]
I_act abs val unsmoothed
[8016.5]
1.00 s
Mot I_standstill
p0318[M]
r0035
Mot temp <1>
I2t mot mod T
p0611[M]
I2t mot mod thresh
p0615[M]
MotTempFaultThresh
p0605[M]
[8016.6]
I2t motor model activate
p0612.0[M] (0)
Model
- 40°C
p0605 - 40°C
r0034 = x 100 [%]
Model
<2> Only if <1> are not met.
Mot T_ambient
p0625[M]
<2>
Function diagrams
Diagnostics
2-1014 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.16 Diagnostics
Function diagrams
8060 – Fault buffer 2-1015
8065 – Alarm buffer 2-1016
8070 – Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129) 2-1017
8075 – Fault/alarm configuration 2-1018
8134 – Measuring sockets 2-1019
Diagnostics
Function diagrams
2-1015
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-124 8060 – Fault buffer
- 8060 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8060_51_eng.vsd
DO: All objects
SINAMICS
21.08.09 V04.03.01
Diagnostics - Fault buffer
Fault responses to the sequence control [2610]
<1> This fault is overwritten when "more recent" faults occur (with the exception of "safety faults").
Fault active
r2139.3 [2548.2]
<2> Refer to the list manual, index entry "Fault buffer - save upon power OFF".
<3> The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to the status signal in r2139).
Actual
fault case
Fault 1
Fault 2
Fault 8
RESET
Fault case
comes
Fault case
count
p0952
p0952 = 0:
Fault buffer
delated
Delete fault buffer
r0945 = 0
r0948 = 0
r0949 = 0
r2109 = 0
r2130 = 0
r2133 = 0
r2136 = 0
Automatic
7. Acknow-
ledged
fault case
[oldest]
1. Acknow-
ledged
fault case Fault buffer
change
r0944
Fault buffer change [8065.6]
16 bit counter
LED "RDY" [= red for fault]
r2131
Actual fault code
0 = "No fault present"
III
RESET
III
RESET
III
32 bit counter,
free running
1 ms
System time
r0969 [ms]
16 bit counter,
free running
POWER ON
[8065.1]
Operating time
Acknowledge faults
r2138.7
External fault 1
r2138.13
External fault 2
r2138.14
External fault 3
r2138.15
1
Background
Refer to [1020.7]
p2102 ... p2105
[2546.3]
p2106
[2546.3]
p2107
[2546.1]
p2108, p3110 ... p3112
Acknowledge faults
p3981
Fault code
Fault 1
Fault 2
Fault 8 r0949[63] [I32]
r2133[63] [Float]
Fault 1
Fault 2
Fault 8
r0945[0]
r0945[1]
r0945[7]
r0945[56]
r0945[57]
r0945[63]
r0945[8]
r0945[9]
r0945[15]
Fault value
r0949[0] [I32]
r2133[0] [Float]
r0949[1] [I32]
r2133[1] [Float]
r0949[7] [I32]
r2133[7] [Float]
r0949[56] [I32]
r2133[56] [Float]
r0949[57] [I32]
r2133[57] [Float]
r0949[8] [I32]
r2133[8] [Float]
r0949[9] [I32]
r2133[9] [Float]
r0949[15] [I32]
r2133[15] [Float]
Fault time
"come"
r0948[0] [ms]
r2130[0] [d]
r0948[1] [ms]
r2130[1] [d]
r0948[7] [ms]
r2130[7] [d]
r0948[56] [ms]
r2130[56] [d]
r0948[57] [ms]
r2130[57] [d]
r0948[63] [ms]
r2130[63] [d]
r0948[8] [ms]
r2130[8] [d]
r0948[9] [ms]
r2130[9] [d]
r0948[15] [ms]
r2130[15] [d]
Fault time
"removed"
r2109[0] [ms]
r2136[0] [d]
r2109[1] [ms]
r2136[1] [d]
r2109[7] [ms]
r2136[7] [d]
r2109[56] [ms]
r2136[56] [d]
r2109[57] [ms]
r2136[57] [d]
r2109[63] [ms]
r2136[63] [d]
r2109[8] [ms]
r2136[8] [d]
r2109[9] [ms]
r2136[9] [d]
r2109[15] [ms]
r2136[15] [d]
1p2147 (CU) = 1
<2>
POWER ON
Fault times
Faults Acknowledging
<3>
Control Unit
Fault Present
r3114.10
r3115[63]
r3115[57]
r3115[56]
r3115[15]
r3115[9]
r3115[8]
r3115[7]
<1>
r3115[1]
r3115[0]
Fault Drive
Object
triggernd
r3131
Actual fault value
r3120[63]
r3120[57]
r3120[56]
r3120[15]
r3120[9]
r3120[8]
r3120[7]
<1>
r3120[1]
r3120[0]
Compo_
no fault
r3122[63]
r3122[57]
r3122[56]
r3122[15]
r3122[9]
r3122[8]
r3122[7]
<1>
r3122[1]
r3122[0]
Diag_attr
fault
Fault goes
Fault comes
Fault case
acknowl.
Function diagrams
Diagnostics
2-1016 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-125 8065 – Alarm buffer
- 8065 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8065_51_eng.vsd
DO: All objects
SINAMICS
21.08.09 V04.03.01
Diagnostics - Alarm buffer
Alarm value
Alarm time
"come"
Alarm time
"removed"
Alarm code
RESET
Alarm comes Alarms
counter
p2111
p2111 = 0:
Alarm buffer is deleted
1
Delete alarm buffer
r2122 = 0
r2123 = 0
r2124 = 0
r2125 = 0
r2134 = 0
r2145 = 0
r2146 = 0
Alarm goes
Alarm comes
1
Alarm buffer change
r2121
Counter
16 bit
III
RESET
III
RESET
Fault buffer change [8060.8] Sum, buffer changed
r2120
III
RESET
1
Fault/alarm buffer changes from
other drive objects
POWER ON
16 bit counter,
free running
16 bit counter,
free running
Alarm number
r2110
Operating time
Alarm times
Alarm buffer
change
POWER ON
r2132
Actual alarm code
0 = "No alarm present"
External alarm 1
r2138.10
External alarm 2
r2138.11
External alarm 3
r2138.12
[2548.2]
Background
Refer to [1020.7]
[2546.3]
p2112
[2546.3]
p2116
[2546.3]
p2117
r2122[0]
r2122[1]
r2122[7]
r2124[0] [I32]
r2134[0] [Float]
r2124[1] [I32]
r2134[1] [Float]
r2124[7] [I32]
r2134[7] [Float]
r2123[0] [ms]
r2145[0] [d]
r2123[1] [ms]
r2145[1] [d]
r2123[7] [ms]
r2145[7] [d]
r2125[0] [ms]
r2146[0] [d]
r2125[1] [ms]
r2146[1] [d]
r2125[7] [ms]
r2146[7] [d]
[8060.1]
Alarm 1
(oldest)
Alarm 2
Alarm 8
(most recent)
POWER ON
Alarm present
r2139.7
r2122[8]
r2122[9]
r2122[63]
r2124[8] [I32]
r2134[8] [Float]
r2124[9] [I32]
r2134[9] [Float]
r2124[63] [I32]
r2134[63] [Float]
r2123[8] [ms]
r2145[8] [d]
r2123[9] [ms]
r2145[9] [d]
r2123[63] [ms]
r2145[63] [d]
r2125[8] [ms]
r2146[8] [d]
r2125[9] [ms]
r2146[9] [d]
r2125[63] [ms]
r2146[63] [d]
Alarm 1
(most recent)
Alarm 2
Alarm 56
(oldest)
Alarm history
<1> The buffer parameters are updated cyclically in the background (see status signal in r2139).
<1>
Control Unit
Warning Present
r3114.9
r3121[63]
r3121[9]
r3121[8]
r3121[7]
r3121[1]
r3121[0]
Compo_no
alarm
r3123[63]
r3123[9]
r3123[8]
r3123[7]
r3123[1]
r3123[0]
Diag_attr
alarm
Diagnostics
Function diagrams
2-1017
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-126 8070 – Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129)
- 8070 -
Function diagram
87654321
DO: All objects
SINAMICS
18.08.08 V04.03.01
Diagnostics - Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129)
0. Fault/alarm code
1. Fault/alarm code
15. Fault/alarm code
[0]
[1]
[15]
r2129
r2129.15
r2129.1
r2129.0
Fault/alarm trigger word
(e.g. as trigger condition to record traces)
0. Message/signal present
1. Message/signal present
15. Message/signal present
SAelect fault/alarm code
for trigger
p2128
Setting, fault/alarm trigger
Background
Refer to [1020.7]
fp_8070_51_eng.vsd
Function diagrams
Diagnostics
2-1018 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-127 8075 – Fault/alarm configuration
- 8075 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8075_51_eng.vsd
DO: All objects
SINAMICS
07.09.09 V04.03.01
Diagnostics - Fault/alarm configuration
0. Fault code
1. Fault code
19. Fault code
[0]
[1]
[19]
Changing the fault response for maximum 20 faults <1>
Fault response
Fault response
Fault response
[0]
[1]
[19]
0 = NONE
1 = OFF1
2 = OFF2
3 = OFF3
0. Fault code
1. Fault code
19. Fault code
[0]
[1]
[19]
Changing the acknowledge mode for maximum 20 faults <1>
Acknowledge mode
Acknowledge mode
Acknowledge mode
[0]
[1]
[19]
1 = Acknowledgment is only possible using POWER ON
2 = Acknowledgment IMMEDIATELY after the cause has been removed.
<1> The fault response, acknowledge mode and message type for all faults and alarms are set to meaningful default values in the factory setting.
Changes that may be required are only possible in specific value ranges specified by SIEMENS.
When the message type is changed, the supplementary information is tranferred from fault value r0949 to alarm value r2124 and vice versa.
0. Fault/alarm code
1. Fault/alarm code
19. Fault/alarm code
[0]
[1]
[19]
Changing the message type - fault <==> alarm for maximum 20 faults/alarms <1>
Fault/alarm type
Fault/alarm type
Fault/alarm type
[0]
[1]
[19]
1 = Fault (F)
2 = Alarm (A)
p2100 p2101 p2118 p2119
p2126 p2127
4 = STOP1
5 = STOP2
6 = IASC/DCBRAKE
Background
Refer to [1020.7]
3 = Acknowledge only when the PULSES ARE INHIBITED.
7 = ENCODER (p0491)
3 = No message(N)
Diagnostics
Function diagrams
2-1019
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-128 8134 – Measuring sockets
- 8134 -
Function diagram
87654321
DO: CU_G, CU_CX32, CU_GM, CU_I, CU_S
SINAMICS
25.11.09 V04.03.01
Diagnostic - Measuring sockets
Offset
-4.98...4.98 V
p0783[0] (0.00)
-100 000.00...427.9E9 %
p0779[0] (100.00)
-100 000.00...100 000.00 %
p0777[0] (0.00)
0.00...4.98 V
p0780[0] (4.98)
0.00...4.98 V
p0778[0] (2.49)
p0784[0]
D
A
r0774[0]
Measuring socket
T0
M
<1>
<1>
<1>
Scaling
-100 000.00...427.9E9 %
p0779[1] (100.00)
-100 000.00...100 000.00 %
p0777[1] (0.00)
0.00...4.98 V
p0780[1] (4.98)
0.00...4.98 V
p0778[1] (2.49)
p0784[1]
D
A
r0774[1]
-100 000.00...427.9E9 %
p0779[2] (100.00)
-100 000.00...100 000.00 %
p0777[2] (0.00)
0.00...4.98 V
p0780[2] (4.98)
0.00...4.98 V
p0778[2] (2.49)
p0784[2]
D
A
r0774[2]
Limit
Offset
-4.98...4.98 V
p0783[1] (0.00)
Offset
-4.98...4.98 V
p0783[2] (0.00)
Measuring socket
T1
Measuring socket
T2
<2>
<2>
Scaling <2>
Scaling
<1> Only for measuring equipment with Ri 1 M
<2> With the factory setting, input values
from -100...100 % result in output voltages from 0...4.98 V.
<3> The input signals are determined by the reference quantities p200x (100 % corresponds to
p200x). The calculated normalization is indicated via r0786.
Limit
[V]
[V]
[V]
0
1
0
1
0
1
x
10
4.98
5
[V]
[V]
-10 -5
4.98
y
Limit
5-10 -5
4.98
4.98
y [V]
x [V]
x
x
x
x
x
x
y
y
y
y
y
y
Reference quantities
p200x
y
x
2
2
1
x
% 100xx
x
1
[%]
<3>
0
p0771[1]
0
p0771[2]
0
p0771[0]
+
+
+
+
+
+
0..0.40.98
V
0..0.40.98 V
0..0.40.98 V
[%]
r0772[0]
[%]
r0772[1]
[%]
r0772[2]
x
y
y
1
y
2
x
2
[%]
(100 %)
[V]
(4.98 V)
(2.49 V)
x
1
P
2
P
1
x
x
x
y
y
y
Dimension unit
per volt
r0786[0]
Dimension unit
per volt
r0786[1]
Dimension unit
per volt
r0786[2]
p0110[0] (125.00 μs)
x
y
y
1
y
2
x
2
[%]
(100 %)
[V]
(4.98 V)
(2.49 V)
x
1
P
2
P
1
x
y
y
1
y
2
x
2
[%]
(100 %)
[V]
(4.98 V)
(2.49 V)
x
1
P
2
P
1
x
10
4.98
5
[V]
[V]
-10 -5
4.98
y
x
10
4.98
5
[V]
[V]
-10 -5
4.98
y
5-10 -5
4.98
4.98
y [V]
x [V]
5-10 -5
4.98
4.98
y [V]
x [V]
<4> Example: If a speed signal is entered via p0071 and r0786 indicates 100.0, a speed change of 100 RPM results in an output voltage change of 1.0 V.
<4>
<4>
<4>
fp_8134_51_eng.vsd
Function diagrams
Data sets
2-1020 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.17 Data sets
Function diagrams
8560 – Command data sets (CDS) 2-1021
8565 – Drive data sets (DDS) 2-1022
8570 – Encoder data sets (EDS) 2-1023
8575 – Motor data sets (MDS) 2-1024
8580 – Power unit data sets (PDS) 2-1025
Data sets
Function diagrams
2-1021
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-129 8560 – Command data sets (CDS)
- 8560 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8560_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
20.10.08 V04.03.01
Data sets - Command Data Sets (CDS)
Not relevant
Refer to [1020.7]
Copy CDS, source
p0809[0] (0)
CDS selected
r0836.0
r0836
CDS effective
r0050.0
r0050
r0836.1
r0050.1
Copy CDS, target
p0809[1] (1)
Copy CDS, start
p0809[2] (0)
BI: p0810 = "0"
CDS0 selected
r0836.0 = 0
BI: p0810 = "1"
CDS1 selected
r0836.0 = 1
CDS0 effective
r0050.0 = 0
CDS1 effective
r0050.0 = 1
t
Example:
Change over Command Data Set
CDS0 --> CDS1
t
tDrive n
Drive 2
Drive 1
<1>
CDS count
p0170 (1, 2)
<1> For SERVO, the following applies: Min / Max / Factory setting: 1 / 2 / 2.
For VECTOR, the following applies: Min / Max / Factory setting: 2 / 4 / 2.
(0)
CDS select., bit 0
p0810
(0)
CDS select., bit 1
p0811
CDS3
CDS2
CDS1
CDS0
Function diagrams
Data sets
2-1022 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-130 8565 – Drive data sets (DDS)
- 8565 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8565_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, TM41
S120/S150/G130/G150
25.06.08 V04.03.01
Data sets - Drive Data Sets, DDS
Not relevant
Refer to [1020.7]
Drive n
(0)
Select DDS bit 0
p0820[C]
(0)
Select DDS bit 1
p0821[C]
(0)
Select DDS bit 2
p0822[C]
(0)
Select DDS bit 3
p0823[C]
Copy DDS, source
p0819[0] (0)
Drive 2
Drive 1
Copy DDS, target
p0819[1] (1)
Copy DDS, start
p0819[2] (0)
DDS31
DDS number
p0180 (1)
DDS1
DDS0
(0)
Select DDS bit 4
p0824[C]
DDS selected
r0837.0
r0837
r0837.3
DDS effective
r0051.0
r0051
r0051.4
r0837.2
r0837.1
r0051.3
r0051.2
r0051.1
A07530 "Drive data set does not exist"
r0837.4
r0049
r0049[0] Motor data set MDS effective
r0049[1] Encoder 1 encoder data set EDS effective
r0049[2] Encoder 2 encoder data set EDS effective
r0049[3] Encoder 3 encoder data set EDS effective
r0838
r0838[0] Motor data set MDS selected
r0049[1] Encoder 1 encoder data set EDS selected
r0838[2] Encoder 2 encoder data set EDS selected
r0838[3] Encoder 3 encoder data set EDS selected
MDS (Motor Data Set)
EDS (Encoder Data Set)
DDS (Drive Data Set)
p0186[0...n] (MDS number)
p0187[0...n] (enc 1 EDS number)
p0188[0...n] (enc 2 EDS number)
p0189[0...n] (enc 3 EDS number)
<1>
<1> A BICO interconnection to a parameter which is part of a drive data set always influences the currently effective data set.
<2> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150.
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
Data sets
Function diagrams
2-1023
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-131 8570 – Encoder data sets (EDS)
- 8570 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8570_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
27.10.09 V04.03.01
Data sets - Encoder Data Sets, EDS
F07502 "Encoder Data Set EDS not configured"
F07510 "Identical encoder in the drive data set"
Not relevant
Refer to [1020.7]
<1> Encoder errors always refer to the currently active Encoder Data Set.
Assigned parameters
for position sensing for encoder n
[4704]
for speed actual value sensing for
encoder n:
[4710] for SERVO
[4715] for VECTOR, VECTORGL,
VECTORMV, VECTORSL
r0049[1] Encoder 1 EDS effective
r0049[2] Encoder 2 EDS effective
r0049[3] Encoder 3 EDS effective
r0838[1] Encoder 1 EDS selected
r0838[2] Encoder 2 EDS selected
r0838[3] Encoder 3 EDS selected
(0)
p0820[C]
(0)
p0824[C]
EDS for encoder 1
p0400[E] E = p0187[D]
…
p0425[E]
EDS for encoder 2
p0400[E] E = p0188[D]
…
p0425[E]
EDS for encoder 3
p0400[E] E = p0189[D]
…
p0425[E]
DDS (Drive Data Set)
p0186[D] (MDS number)
p0187[D] (Enc 1 EDS number)
p0188[D] (Enc 2 EDS number)
p0189[D] (Enc 3 EDS number)
EDS count
p0140 (1)
EDS15 - Encoder Data Set 15
EDS1 - Encoder Data Set 1
EDS0 - Encoder Data Set 0
p0141[0] = Component number of the Sensor
Module
p0400[0]
…
p0425[0]
<1>
0
1
…
15
99
EDS0
EDS1
EDS15
Not configured
0
1
…
15
99
EDS0
EDS1
EDS15
Not configured
0
1
…
15
99
EDS0
EDS1
EDS15
Not configured
EDS15
EDS1
EDS0
...
Function diagrams
Data sets
2-1024 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-132 8575 – Motor data sets (MDS)
- 8575 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8575_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
27.10.09 V04.03.01
Data sets - Motor Data Sets, MDS
4000.00 μs
Motor selection
r0830.0
r0830
r0830.1
r0830.2
r0830.3
r0830.15
DO
DO
Feedback signal, contactor 0
p0831[0]
Feedback signal, contactor 1
p0831[1]
Feedback signal, contactor 2
p0831[2]
DI
DI
Feedback signal, contactor 3
p0831[3] DI
Feedback signal, contactor 15
p0831[15] DI
r0832.0
r0832
Mot_chng fdbk ZSW
r0832.1
r0832.2
r0832.3
r0832.15
Motor
Module
K2
K1
~
M1
3
K1
K1H
K2
~
M2
3
K2
K2H
K1
K1H K2H
0 V
Mot_chng fdbk sig
p0828[C]
p0833.0 (0)
0
1
0
1
Application
Pulse cancellation
MDS15
MDS1
MDS0
p0826[0] Motor number
p0827[0] Bit number
MDS selected
r0838[0]
MDS effective
r0049[0]
p0833.1 (0)
Drive
Application
Drive
Request
pulse enable
Application
Motor changeover
<1> The following applies for the changeover of motor data sets:
SERVO and VECTOR: The thermal motor model of motors with the same motor number is identical.
VECTORGL and VECTORMV: The thermal monitoring of motors with the same motor number is identical.
An unequal bit number means that the motor must be changed over.
<1>
DI
1
0
Copy MDS, source
p0139[0] (0)
Copy MDS, target
p0139[1] (0)
Copy MDS, start
p0139[2] (0)
MDS_chngov ZSW
r0835.0
r0835
MDS count
p0130 (1)
(0)
p0820[C]
(0)
p0824[C]
DDS (Drive Data Set)
p0186[D] (MDS number)
p0187[D] (Enc 1 EDS number)
p0188[D] (Enc 2 EDS number)
p0189[D] (Enc 3 EDS number)
Data sets
Function diagrams
2-1025
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-133 8580 – Power unit data sets (PDS)
- 8580 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_8580_54_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
28.07.09 V04.03.01
Data sets - Power unit Data Sets, PDS
Not relevant
Refer to [1020.7]
PDS7
LT_compo act/de-act
p0125 [P]
PDS1
PDS0
(1)
De-activate power unit 1 (PDS0)
pxxxx[0]
(1)
De-activate power unit 8 (PDS7)
pxxxx[7]
LT_comp act/inact
r0126[0]
LT_comp act/inact
r0126[7]
PDS0
PDS7
0 = De-activate component
1 = Activate component
Word 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Function diagrams
Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
2-1026 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.18 Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
Function diagrams
9100 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3) 2-1027
9102 – Digital outputs, isolated (DO 0 to DO 3) 2-1028
9104 – Analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 1) 2-1029
9106 – Analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1) 2-1030
Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
Function diagrams
2-1027
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-134 9100 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3)
- 9100 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9100_51_eng.vsd
DO: TB30
SINAMICS
24.11.09 V04.03.01
Terminal Board 30 (TB30) - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3)
X481.1
X481.2
X481.3
X481.4
1 = Simulation on
p4095.0
r4023.0
r4022.0
p4095.1
r4023.1
r4022.1
p4095.2
r4023.2
r4022.2
p4095.3
r4023.3
r4022.3
r4022r4023
M
<1> M electrically isolated to the internal CU reference potential M.
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
01
1
1
1
DI 3
DI 2
DI 1
DI 0
DI 0 … DI 3
inverted
DI 0 … DI 3
r4021.0
r4021.1
r4021.2
r4021.3
p4096.3
p4096.2
p4096.1
p4096.0
<1>
p4099[0] (4000.00 s)
24 V
5 V
<1>
+24 V
X424.M
X424.+
MX424.M
24 V DC to the next device
X424.+
+
M
Function diagrams
Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
2-1028 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-135 9102 – Digital outputs, isolated (DO 0 to DO 3)
- 9102 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9102_51_eng.vsd
DO: TB30
SINAMICS
24.11.09 V04.03.01
Terminal Board 30 (TB30) - Digital outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 3)
DO 3 X481.8
DO 0
DO 1
DO 2 X481.7
p4048.0
p4048.1
p4048.2
p4048.3
X481.5
X481.6
M
<1>
X424.M
X424.+
X424.M
24 V DC to the next device
X424.+
+24 V
M
M
+
p4099[0] (4000.00 μs)
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
<1> M electrically isolated to the internal CU reference potential M.
(0)
TB30 S_src DO 3
p4033
(0)
TB30 S_src DO 2
p4032
(0)
TB30 S_src DO 1
p4031
(0)
TB30 S_src DO 0
p4030
DO 0 (X481.5)
r4047.0
DO 1 (X481.6)
r4047.1
DO 2 (X481.7)
r4047.2
DO 3 (X481.8)
r4047.3
24 V
5 V
<1>
Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
Function diagrams
2-1029
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-136 9104 – Analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 1)
x
- 9104 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9104_51_eng.vsd
DO: TB30
SINAMICS
21.06.05 V04.03.01
Terminal Board 30 (TB30) - Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 1)
AI 1
Scaling
r4055[1]
p4069[1]
(1)
Enable
Hardware
smoothing 100 μs
p4066 [1]
(0)
p4067[1]
y = x if
|y - x| > p4068
otherwise y = y(old)
y
x
A
D
Offset
-20.000...20.000 V
p4063[1] (0.000)
-11.000...11.000 V
p4057[1] (0.000)
-11.000...11.000 V
p4059[1] (10.000)
[V]
r4052[1] p4097.1
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4060[1] (100.00)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4058[1] (0.00)
X482.3
X482.4
+
-
AI 0
Scaling
r4055[0]
p4069[0]
(1)
Enable
Hardware
smoothing 100 μs
p4066 [0]
(0)
p4067[0]
y = x if |y - x| > p4068
otherwise y = y(old)
y
x
A
D
Offset
-20.000...20.000 V
p4063[0] (0.000)
-11.000...11.000 V
p4057[0] (0.000)
-11.000...11.000 V
p4059[0] (10.000)
[V]
r4052[0] p4097.0
Simulation mode
-11.000...11.000 V
p4098[0] (0.000)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4060[0] (100.00)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4058[0] (0.00)
X482.1
X482.2
+
-
0 %
Smoothing
0.0...1 000.0 ms
p4053[0] (0.0)
Window to suppress noise
0.00...20.00 %
p4068[0] (0.00)
Smoothing
0.0...1 000.0 ms
p4053[0] (0.0)
Window to suppress noise
0.00...20.00 %
p4068[1] (0.00)
[%]
[%]
0 %
1
0
1
0
<1> When interconnected
further, the output
signals are referred to
the reference
quantities
p2000 ... r2004
(100 % p200x).
<1>
+
+
+
+
-11...+11 V
-11...+11 V
xy
xy
Reference quantities
p2000...r2004 y
x
2
x
1
Reference quantities
p200x y
x
2
x
1
<2>
<2>
<3>
p4099[1] (4000.00 μs)
x
1
y
2
x
2
y
1
y
x
[%]
[V]
x
1
y
2
x
2
y
1
y
x
[%]
[V]
<1>
Simulation mode
-11.000...11.000 V
p4098[1] (0.000)
-1
0
1
-1
0
1
0
1
0
1
<3> Caution: The voltage
between an input and
the grounding point
must not exceed 35V.
The voltage between
the inputs must not
exceed 35V.
1
0
1
0
<3>
x
% 100
xx
21
x
<2> Differential inputs!
For input signals
referred to ground,
terminal 2
and/or terminal 4
must be connected to
the reference
potential M.
Function diagrams
Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
2-1030 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-137 9106 – Analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1)
- 9106 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9106_51_eng.vsd
DO: TB30
SINAMICS
25.10.05 V04.03.01
Terminal Board 30 (TB30) - Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1)
AO 0
Scaling
p4082 [0]
(0)
Smoothing
Offset
-10.000...10.000 V
p4083[0] (0.000)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4079[0] (100.00 %)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4077[0] (0.00 %)
p4075 [0] (0)
-11.000...11.000
V p4080[0] (10.000 V)
-11.000...11.000 V
p4078[0] (0.000 V)
X482.5
X482.6
D
A
[V]
r4074 [0]
r4072 [0]
[%]
0.0...1000.0 ms
p4073[0] (0.0)
AO 1
Scaling
p4082 [1]
(0)
Smoothing
Offset
-10.000...10.000 V
p4083[1] (0.000)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4079[1] (100.00 %)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4077[1] (0.00 %)
p4075 [1] (0)
-11.000...11.000 V
p4080[1] (10.000 V)
-11.000...11.000 V
p4078[1] (0.000 V)
X482.7
X482.8
D
A
[V]
r4074 [1]
r4072 [1]
[%]
0.0...1000.0 ms
p4073[1] (0.0)
Reference quantities
p2000... r2004
y
x
2
x
1
[%]
<1>
<1> The input signals are referred to the reference quantities p2004 ... r2004 (100 % p200x).
y
x
xy
++
++
-11...+11 V
-11...+11 V
p4071 [1] (0)
p4071 [0] (0)
y
y
<1>
<1>
x
1
y
2
x
2
y
1
y
x
[%]
[V]
x
1
y
2
x
2
y
1
y
x
[%]
[V]
p4099[2] (4000.00 μs)
-1
0
1
-1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
1
x
% 100xx
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10)
Function diagrams
2-1031
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.19 Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10)
Function diagrams
9204 – Receive telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) 2-1032
9206 – Receive telegram, predefined connection set (p8744 = 1) 2-1033
9208 – Send telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) 2-1034
9210 – Send telegram, predefined connection set (p8744 = 1) 2-1035
9220 – Control word CANopen 2-1036
9226 – Status word CANopen 2-1037
Function diagrams
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10)
2-1032 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-138 9204 – Receive telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2)
- 9204 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9204_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
23.10.09 V04.03.01
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Receive telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2)
X451
CAN bus
X452
CAN bus
r8860[4] DWORD
Bit 0r8891.0
r8850[1] Bit 15
r8891.15
Bit 0r8890.0
r8850[0] Bit 15
r8890.15
...
r8860[2] DWORD Bit 0r8893.0
r8850[3] Bit 15
r8893.15
Bit 0r8892.0
r8850[2] Bit 15
r8892.15
...
...
r8860[1] DWORD
...
r8850[5]
r8850[4]
r8860[5] DWORD
r8850[6]
r8860[3] DWORD
r8860[6] DWORD
r8850[7]
r8860[7] DWORD
r8850[8]
r8860[8] DWORD
r8850[9]
r8860[9] DWORD
r8850[10]
r8860[10] DWORD
r8850[11]
r8860[11] DWORD
r8850[12]
r8860[12] DWORD
r8850[13]
r8860[13] DWORD
r8850[14]
r8860[14] DWORD
r8850[15]
CANopen
receive telegram
Object 4
COB-ID
Object 1
<1>
r8860[0] DWORD
PZD receive word 1
PZD receive word 2
PZD receive word 5
PZD receive word 3
PZD receive word 4
PZD receive word 6
PZD receive word 7
PZD receive word 8
PZD receive word 9
PZD receive word 10
PZD receive word 11
PZD receive word 12
PZD receive word 13
PZD receive word 14
PZD receive word 15
PZD receive word 16
Evaluation
of the COB-
ID
COB-ID for RPDO 1
p8700[0]
PDO mapping for RPDO 1
p8710[0...3]
Object 1
Object 2
Object 3
<1> To use automatic BICO interconnection (p8790 = 1), one of the receive words 1-4 must be used as control word 1 (STW1).
<2> Telegram: up to 4 words or 64 bits.
The sum of the various objects must not exceed 16 words.
<2>
Object 4
Object 1
Object 2
Object 3
Object 4
The assignment is made from
RPDO 1, RPDO 2 ... RPDO 8
and from receiver buffer word
Objects available a multiple
number of times are
marshalled to the same
position in the receive buffer.
Automatic assignment of the
RPDOs to the receive buffer Receive buffer
Object 1
Object 2
Object 3
Object 4
RPDO 1
p8701[0] p8711[0...3]
RPDO 2
p8707[0] p8717[0...3]
RPDO 8
RPDO: Receive Process Data Object
COB-ID: CAN Communication Object Identifier
Refer to [1020.7]
CAN bus sampling time
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10)
Function diagrams
2-1033
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-139 9206 – Receive telegram, predefined connection set (p8744 = 1)
- 9206 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9206_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
23.10.09 V04.03.01
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Receive telegram, Predef. Conn. Set (p8744 = 1)
X451
CAN bus
X452
CAN bus r8860[4] DWORD
Bit 0r8891.0
r8850[1] Bit 15
r8891.15
Bit 0r8890.0
r8850[0] Bit 15
r8890.15
...
r8860[2] DWORD Bit 0r8893.0
r8850[3] Bit 15
r8893.15
Bit 0r8892.0
r8850[2] Bit 15
r8892.15
...
...
r8860[1] DWORD
...
r8850[5]
r8850[4]
r8860[5] DWORD
r8850[6]
r8860[3] DWORD
r8860[6] DWORD
r8850[7]
r8860[7] DWORD
r8850[8]
r8860[8] DWORD
r8850[9]
r8860[9] DWORD
r8850[10]
r8860[10] DWORD
r8850[11]
r8860[11] DWORD
r8850[12]
r8860[12] DWORD
r8850[13]
r8860[13] DWORD
r8850[14]
r8860[14] DWORD
r8850[15]
CANopen
receive telegram
Object 4
COB-ID
Object 1
r8860[0] DWORD
PZD receive word 1
PZD receive word 2
PZD receive word 5
PZD receive word 3
PZD receive word 4
PZD receive word 6
PZD receive word 7
PZD receive word 8
PZD receive word 9
PZD receive word 10
PZD receive word 11
PZD receive word 12
PZD receive word 13
PZD receive word 14
PZD receive word 15
PZD receive word 16
Evaluation
of the
COB-ID
COB-ID for RPDO 1
p8700[0]
PDO mapping for RPDO 1
p8710[0...3]
60400010
<1> Telegram: up to 4 words or 64 bits.
The sum of the various objects must not exceed 16 words.
60400010
60FF0020
p8703[0]
60400010
60FF0020
60710010
The assignment is
made from RPDO
1, RPDO 2 ...
RPDO 4 and from
receiver word 1.
Objects available a
multiple number of
times are
marshalled to the
same position in the
receive buffer.
Automatic assignment of the
RPDOs to the receive buffer Receive buffer
p8713[0...3]
p8702[0]
60400010
60710010
p8712[0...3]
p8701[0] p8711[0...3]
RPDO 1
RPDO 2
RPDO 3
RPDO 4
<1>
RPDO: Receive Process Data Object
COB-ID: CAN Communication Object Identifier
Refer to [1020.7]
CAN bus sampling time
Function diagrams
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10)
2-1034 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-140 9208 – Send telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2)
- 9208 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9208_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
23.10.09 V04.03.01
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Send telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2)
DWORD (0)
p8861[1]
DWORD (0)
p8861[2]
DWORD (0)
p8861[3]
DWORD (0)
p8861[4]
DWORD (0)
p8861[0]
CANopen send telegram
X451
CAN bus
X452
CAN bus
DWORD (0)
p8861[5]
DWORD (0)
p8861[14]
DWORD (0)
p8861[7]
DWORD (0)
p8861[8]
DWORD (0)
p8861[9]
DWORD (0)
p8861[10]
DWORD (0)
p8861[6]
DWORD (0)
p8861[11]
DWORD (0)
p8861[12]
DWORD (0)
p8861[13]
(0)
p8851[1]
(0)
p8851[2]
(0)
p8851[3]
(0)
p8851[4]
(0)
p8851[0]
(0)
p8851[5]
(0)
p8851[14]
(0)
p8851[7]
(0)
p8851[8]
(0)
p8851[9]
(0)
p8851[10]
(0)
p8851[6]
(0)
p8851[11]
(0)
p8851[12]
(0)
p8851[13]
(0)
p8851[15]
PZD send word 1
PZD send word 2
PZD send word 3
PZD send word 4
PZD send word 5
PZD send word 6
PZD send word 7
PZD send word 8
PZD send word 9
PZD send word 10
PZD send word 11
PZD send word 12
PZD send word 13
PZD send word 14
PZD send word 15
IF2 Diag PZD send
r8853[0...15]
...
PZD send word 16
<1> Telegram: up to 4 words or 64 bits.
The sum of the various objects must not exceed 16 words.
.
.
.
Object 4
COB-ID
Object 1
Evaluation of
the COB-ID
and data
transfer type
COB-ID for TPDO 1
p8720[0]
PDO mapping for TPDO 1
p8730[0...3]
Object 1
Object 2
Object 3
<1>
Object 4
The assignment is made
from send buffer 1 and
from TPDO 1.
Objects that occur a
multiple number of times
are updated from the
same send buffer.
Send buffer
Automatic assignment of the
send buffer to the TPDOs
Object 1
Object 2
Object 3
Object 4
Object 1
Object 2
Object 3
Object 4
p8721[0] p8731[0...3]
p8727[0] p8737[0...3]
TPDO 1
TPDO 2
TPDO 8
TPDO: Transmit Process Data Object
COB-ID: CAN Communication Object Identifier
Refer to [1020.7]
CAN bus sampling time
CANopen send words 1 ... 16
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10)
Function diagrams
2-1035
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-141 9210 – Send telegram, predefined connection set (p8744 = 1)
- 9210 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9210_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV. VECTORSL
SINAMICS
23.10.09 V04.03.01
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Send telegram, Predef. Connection Set (p8744 = 1)
DWORD 63
p8861[1]
DWORD (0)
p8861[2]
DWORD (0)
p8861[3]
DWORD 492.0
p8861[4]
DWORD (0)
p8861[0]
CANopen send telegram
X451
CAN bus
X452
CAN bus
DWORD (0)
p8861[5]
DWORD (0)
p8861[14]
DWORD (0)
p8861[7]
DWORD (0)
p8861[8]
DWORD (0)
p8861[9]
DWORD (0)
p8861[10]
DWORD (0)
p8861[6]
DWORD (0)
p8861[11]
DWORD (0)
p8861[12]
DWORD (0)
p8861[13]
(0)
p8851[1]
(0)
p8851[2]
79
p8851[3]
(0)
p8851[4]
8784
p8851[0]
(0)
p8851[5]
(0)
p8851[14]
(0)
p8851[7]
(0)
p8851[8]
(0)
p8851[9]
(0)
p8851[10]
(0)
p8851[6]
(0)
p8851[11]
(0)
p8851[12]
(0)
p8851[13]
(0)
p8851[15]
PZD send word 1
PZD send word 2
PZD send word 3
PZD send word 4
PZD send word 5
PZD send word 6
PZD send word 7
PZD send word 8
PZD send word 9
PZD send word 10
PZD send word 11
PZD send word 12
PZD send word 13
PZD send word 14
PZD send word 15
IF2 Diag PZD send
r8853[0...15]
...
PZD send word 16
<1> Telegram: up to 4 words or 64 bits.
The sum of the various objects must not exceed 16 words.
Object 4
COB-ID
Object 1
Evaluation of
the COB-ID
and data
transfer type.
COB-ID for TPDO 1
p8720[0]
PDO mapping for TPDO 1
p8730[0...3]
<1>
Send buffer
Automatic assignment of
send buffer to the TPDOs
60410010
60410010
606C0020
p8723[0]
60410010
60630020
p8733[0...3]
p8722[0]
60410010
60740010
p8732[0...3]
p8721[0] p8731[0...3]
The assignment
is made from
the send buffer
1 and from
TPDO 1.
Objects that occur
a multiple number
of times are
updated from the
same send buffer.
TPDO 1
TPDO 2
TPDO 3
TPDO 4
TPDO: Transmit Process Data Object
COB-ID: CAN Communication Object Identifier
Refer to [1020.7]
CAN bus sampling time
CANopen send words 1...16
Function diagrams
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10)
2-1036 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-142 9220 – Control word CANopen
- 9220 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9220_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV,VECTORSL
SINAMICS
04.11.09 V04.03.01
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Control word, CANopen
STW1.0
STW1.1
STW1.2
STW1.3
STW1.4
STW1.5
STW1.6
STW1.8
STW1.9
STW1.11
STW1.12
STW1.13
STW1.14
STW1.15
STW1.7
STW1.10
p0848[0] = r8890.2
p0852[0] = r8890.3
-
-
-
p2103[0] = r8890.7
-
-
-
pxxxx[y] = r8890.11
pxxxx[y] = r8890.12
pxxxx[y] = r8890.13
pxxxx[y] = r8890.14
pxxxx[y] = r8890.15
p0840[0] = r8890.0
p0844[0] = r8890.1
= ON (pulses can be enabled)
0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse cancellation and ready-to-power-up)
1 = No coast-down activated (enable possible)
0 = Activate coast-down (immediate pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
1 = No fast stop activated (enable possible)
0 = Activate fast stop (braking along an OFF3 ramp p1135, then pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)
0 = Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
= Acknowledge fault
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Can be freely connected
Can be freely connected
Can be freely connected
Can be freely connected
Can be freely connected
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
-
-
-
[2546.1]
-
-
-
-
-
-
[2501.3]
[2501.3]
Signal targets for control word CANopen
[2610]
[2610]
-
-
-
[8060]
-
-
-
-
-
-
[2610]
[2610]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Signal Interconnection
parameters
Meaning [Function diagram]
internal control word
[Function diagram]
signal target Inverted
<1>
Refer to [1020.7]
CAN bus sampling time
<1> Depending on the position of the CANopen control word in p8750, the number of the binector to be connected changes.
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10)
Function diagrams
2-1037
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-143 9226 – Status word CANopen
- 9226 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9226_51_eng.vsd
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
SINAMICS
04.11.09 V04.03.01
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Status word, CANopen
11
12
13
14
15
r8784
Status word CANopen
<1> With setpoint channel: connect p2151 with r1119 [8010.5].
Bit No.
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
0
1
2
From sequence control [2610]
From sequence control [2610]
From sequence control [2610]
From sequence control [2610]
From sequence control [2610]
From sequence control [2610]
From status word speed controller [2522]
1 = Ready to operate (DC link loaded, pulses blocked)
1 = Ready to power-up
Status word CANopen
1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set)
1 = Fault present
1 = No coast down active
1 = No fast stop active
1 = Power-on inhibit active
1 = Alarm present
Freely interconnectable (BI: p8785)
1 = Control requested
1 = Target reached <1>
1 = Torque limit reached
1 = Velocity equal to zero
Reserved
Freely interconnectable (BI: p8787)
Freely interconnectable (BI: p8786)
From speed signals [8011.8] (r2197.7)
(0)
p8787
(0)
p8786
From fault buffer [8060]
From alarm buffer [8065]
(0)
p8785
From status word monitoring 3 [8010.8] (r2199.0)
Bit 9 = 1 --> Ready to exchange process data
Refer to [1020.7]
CAN bus sampling time
Function diagrams
Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
2-1038 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.20 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
Function diagrams
9550 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3) 2-1039
9552 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 4 to DI 7) 2-1040
9556 – Digital relay outputs, isolated (DO 0 to DO 1) 2-1041
9560 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9) 2-1042
9562 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 to DI/DO 11) 2-1043
9566 – Analog input 0 (AI 0) 2-1044
9568 – Analog input 1 (AI 1) 2-1045
9572 – Analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1) 2-1046
9576 – Temperature evaluation KTY/PTC 2-1047
9577 – Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC 2-1048
Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
Function diagrams
2-1039
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-144 9550 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3)
- 9550 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9550_51_eng.vsd
DO: TM31
SINAMICS
25.03.09 V04.03.01
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3)
X520.1
X520.2
X520.3
X520.4
1 = Simulation on
p4095.0
r4023.0
r4022.0
p4095.1
r4023.1
r4022.1
p4095.2
r4023.2
r4022.2
p4095.3
r4023.3
r4022.3
r4022r4023
X520.5 M1
M
<1> When using the electrical isolation, omit the
terminal jumper and connect the load power supply
shown as a dashed line.
<1>
X520.6
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
01
1
1
1
24 V
DI 3
DI 2
DI 1
DI 0
DI 0 … DI 3
inverted
DI 0 … DI 3
r4021.0
r4021.1
r4021.2
r4021.3
<1>
p4096.3
p4096.2
p4096.1
p4096.0
<1>
p4099[0] (4000.00 s)
+
24 V
5 V
<1>
+24 V
X524.M
X524.+
M
X524.M
M
24 V DC to the next device
X524.+
+
Function diagrams
Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
2-1040 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-145 9552 – Digital inputs, isolated (DI 4 to DI 7)
- 9552 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9552_51_eng.vsd
DO: TM31
SINAMICS
25.03.09 V04.03.01
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7)
X530.1
X530.2
X530.3
X530.4
1 = Simulation on
p4095.4
r4023.4
r4022.4
p4095.5
r4023.5
r4022.5
p4095.6
r4023.6
r4022.6
p4095.7
r4023.7
r4022.7
r4022r4023
X530.5 M2
M
<1> When using the electrical isolation, omit the
terminal jumper and connect the load power supply
shown as a dashed line.
<1>
X530.6
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
01
1
1
1
24 V
DI 7
DI 6
DI 5
DI 4
DI 4 … DI 7
inverted
DI 4 … DI 7
r4021.4
r4021.5
r4021.6
r4021.7
<1>
p4096.7
p4096.6
p4096.5
p4096.4
<1>
p4099[0] (4000.00 s)
+
24 V
5 V
<1>
+24 V
X524.M
X524.+
M
X524.M
M
24 V DC to the next device
X524.+
+
Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
Function diagrams
2-1041
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-146 9556 – Digital relay outputs, isolated (DO 0 to DO 1)
- 9556 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9556_51_eng.vsd
SINAMICS
30.07.07 V04.03.01
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital relay outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 1)
p4048.0
<1>
<1> NO: Normally Open contact ("open" in the quiescent state = NO contact)
NC: Normally Closed contact ("closed" in the quiescent state = NC contact)
The relay contacts have the following ratings - up to 100 V DC 240 W or 250 V AC 2000 VA.
NC 0
NO 0
COM
<1>
NC 1
NO 1
COM
X542
1
2
3
p4099[0] (4000.00 μs)
5
6
4
DO: TM31
p4048.1
1
0
1
1
0
1
WARNING
Hazardous voltage!
These terminal can have
voltages up to 250 V AC!
(0)
TM31 S_src DO 1
p4031
(0)
TM31 S_src DO 0
p4030
r4047.1
r4047.1
Function diagrams
Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
2-1042 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-147 9560 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9)
- 9560 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9560_51_eng.vsd
DO: TM31
SINAMICS
27.03.09 V04.03.01
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9)
p4095.8 (0)
X541.6 M
p4096.8 (0)
p4048.8 (0)
DI
DO
p4095.9 (0)p4096.9 (0)
p4048.9 (0)
DI
DO
X541.3 DI/DO 9
p4028.9 (0)
DI/DO 8X541.2
p4028.8 (0)
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
+24 VX541.1
<1> The connection shown as a dashed line applies
when used as digital output (p4028.x = 1).
<1>
DI
DI
1
1
r4022
r4023.9
r4023.8
r4021.8
r4021.9
r4022.9
r4022.8
p4099[0] (4000.00 μs)
<2> Limits the total output current of the terminals X541.2, X541.3, X541.4 and X541.5 to 0.1 A (p4046 = 0) or 1 A (p4046 = 1).
<3> The total (summed) output current of the 24 V auxiliary power supply on terminals X540.1 to X540.8 and X541.1 is limited to 150 mA.
Incandescent lamps must not be connected to the 24 V auxiliary power supply!
r4047.9
DO
DI/DO 8 … 9
inverted
DI/DO 8 … 9
DO
(0)
TM31 S_src DI/DO 9
p4039
(0)
TM31 S_src DI/DO 8
p4038
0
1
0
r4047.8
0
1
0
24 V
5 V
<1>
X540.1
X540.8
+24 V
+
Current
limiting
150 mA
Current
limiting
p4046 (0)
<3> <2>
[9562.4]
[9562.2]
r4023
Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
Function diagrams
2-1043
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-148 9562 – Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 to DI/DO 11)
- 9562 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9562_51_eng.vsd
DO: TM31
SINAMICS
27.03.09 V04.03.01
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11)
p4095.10 (0)
X541.6 M
p4096.10 (0)
p4048.10 (0)
DI
DO
p4095.11 (0)p4096.11 (0)
p4048.11 (0)
DI
DO
X541.5 DI/DO 11
p4028.11 (0)
DI/DO 10X541.4
p4028.10 (0)
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
<1> The connection shown in a dashed line applies
when used as digital output (p4028.x = 1).
<1>
DI
DI
1
1
r4022
r4023.11
r4023.10
r4021.10
r4021.11
r4022.11
r4022.10
p4099[0] (4000.00 μs)
r4047.11
DO
DI/DO 10 … 11
inverted
DI/DO 10 … 11
DO
(0)
TM31 S_src DI/DO 11
p4041
(0)
TM31 S_src DI/DO 10
p4040
0
1
0
r4047.10
0
1
0
24 V
5 V
<1>
r4023
[9560.4]
<2>
<2> Limits the total output current of the terminals X541.2, X541.3, X541.4 and
X541.5 to 0.1 A (p4046 = 0) or 1 A (p4046 = 1).
+24 VX541.1 [9560.6]
+24 V
X524.M
X524.+
M
X524.M
M
24 V DC zum nächsten Gerät
X524.+
+24 V
0 V
+24 V
+24 V
Function diagrams
Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
2-1044 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-149 9566 – Analog input 0 (AI 0)
- 9566 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9566_51_eng.vsd
DO: TM31
SINAMICS
21.03.06 V04.03.01
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Analog input 0 (AI 0)
3
3
20 mA T0
0...1000 ms
p4062[0] (100)
Threshold for
wire breakage detection
0.00...20.00 mA
p4061[0] (2.00)
r4055[0]
p4069 [0]
(1)
Enable
p4066[0] (0)
(0)
p4067 [0]
y = x
if |y - x| > p4068
otherwise y = y(old)
y
x
0 %
Smoothing
0.0...1000.0 ms
p4053[0] (0.0)
Window to suppress noise
0.0...20.0 %
p4068[0] (0.0)
1
0
<2> For p4056 = 2, 3, 5 the units are mA.
For p4056 = 0, 4 the units are V.
S5.0
+/-20 mA
+/-10 V
X521.1
Scaling
-20.000...20.000
p4057[0] (0.000)
-20.000...20.000
p4059[0] (10.000)
r4052[0] -1000.00...1000.00 %
p4060[0] (100.00)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4058[0] (0.00)
[%]
xy
<2>
<2> <2>
Hardware
smoothing
100 μs
A
D
+
-
AI 0
<1> Differential input!
For an input signal referred to ground, terminal X521.2 must be connected to reference potential M.
Caution:
The voltage between an input (X521.1 or X521.2) and the ground point must not exceed 35 V.
When the load resistor is switched in (S5.0 closed), the voltage between the input terminals must not exceed 15 V.
<1>
p4099[1] (4000.00 μs)
x
1
y
2
x
2
y
1
y
x
[%]
Reference quantities
p2000...r2004 y
x
2
x
1
-1
0
1
0
1
Offset
-20.000...20.000
p4063[0] (0.000)
+
<2>
+
Analog inputs, type
p4056[0] (4)
<3>
F03505
"Wire
breakage"
% 100
xx 21 x
<3> p4056
= 0: 0 V ... +10 V
= 2: 0 mA ... +20 mA
= 3: 4 mA ... +20 mA with monitoring
= 4: -10 V ... +10 V
= 5: -20 mA ... +20 mA
Voltage
V
V
Current
I S5.0
I S5.1 [9568]
X521.2
4, 5
3
0, 2
4 mA
<2>
0
p4097[0] (0)
Simulation mode
-20.000...20.000
p4098[0] (0.000)
1
0
20 mA
p4097[0] (0)
1
0
Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
Function diagrams
2-1045
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-150 9568 – Analog input 1 (AI 1)
- 9568 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9568_51_eng.vsd
DO: TM31
SINAMICS
19.06.08 V04.03.01
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Analog input 1 (AI 1)
T0
0...1000 ms
p4062[1] (100)
Threshold for
wire breakage detection
0.00...201 mA
p4061[0] (2.00)
r4055[1]
p4069 [1]
(1)
Enable
p4066[1] (0)
(0)
p4067 [1]
y = x if
|y - x| > p4068
otherwise y = y(alt)
yx
Smoothing
0.0..1000.0 ms
p4053[1] (0.0)
Window to suppress noise
0.00...20.00 %
p4068[1] (0.00)
0 %
1
0
Reference quantities
p2000...r2004 y
x
2
x
1
% 100
xx
21
x
AI 1
+/-20 mA
+/-10 V
X521.3
X521.4
Scaling
-20.000...20.000
p4057[1] (0.000)
-20.000...20.000
p4059[1] (10.000)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4060[1] (100.00)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4058[1] (0.00)
[%]
xy
<2><2>
Hardware
smoothing
100 μs
A
D
+
-
<2> For p4056 = 2, 3, 5 the units are mA.
For p4056 = 0, 4 the units are V.
<1> Differential input!
For an input signal referred to ground, terminal X521.4 must be connected to reference potential M.
Caution:
The voltage between an input (X521.3 or X521.4) and the ground point must not exceed 35 V.
When the load resistor is switched in (S5.1 closed), the voltage between the input terminals must not exceed 15 V.
<1>
p4099[1] (4000.00 μs)
x
1
y
2
x
2
y
1
y
x
[%]
Voltage
V
V
-1
0
1
0
1
S5.1
F03505
"Wire break"
Current
I S5.0 [9566]
I S5.1
<3> p4056
= 0: 0 V ... +10 V
= 2: 0 mA ... +20 mA
= 3: 4 mA ... +20 mA with monitoring
= 4: -10 V ... +10 V
= 5: -20 mA ... +20 mA
3
3
20 mA
r4052[1]
<2>
Offset
-20.000...20.000
p4063[1] (0.000)
+
<2>
+
Analog inputs, type
p4056[1] (4)
<3>
4, 5
3
0, 2
4 mA
<2>
0
p4097[1] (0)
Simulation mode
-20.000...20.000
p4098[1] (0.000)
1
0
20 mA
p4097[1] (0)
1
0
Function diagrams
Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
2-1046 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-151 9572 – Analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1)
X522.5
X522.6
X522.4
X522.2
X522.3
X522.1
- 9572 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9572_51_eng.vsd
DO: TM31
SINAMICS
17.03.09 V04.03.01
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1)
scaling
p4082 [0]
(0)
Smoothing
Offset
-20.000...20.000
p4083[0] (0.000)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4079[0] (100.00 %)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4077[0] (0.00)
p4075 [0] (0)
-20.000...20.000
p4080[0] (10.000)
-20.000...20.000
p4078[0] (0.000)
D
A
r4074[0]
r4072 [0]
[%]
0.0...1000.0 ms
p4073[0] (0.0)
scaling
p4082 [1]
(0)
Smoothing
Offset
-20.000...20.000
p4083[1] (0.000)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4079[1] (100.00 %)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4077[1] (0.00)
p4075 [1] (0)
-20.000...20.000
p4080[1] (10.000)
-20.000...20.000
p4078[1] (0.000)
D
A
r4074[1]
r4072 [1]
[%]
0.0...1000.0 ms
p4073[1] (0.0)
<1>
yx
xy
++
++
p4071 [1] (0)
p4071 [0] (0)
y
y
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
AO 0 des
AO 1 des
<1>
<3>
<4>
<4>
Voltage
output
Current output
<2>
<2>
+/-10 V
+/-20 mA
Voltage
output
Current output
<2>
<2>
+/-10 V
+/-20 mA
p4099[2] (4000.00 μs)
x
1
y
2
x
2
y
1
y
x
[%]
x
1
y
2
x
2
y
1
y
x
[%]
<1> For p4076 = 0, 2, 3 the units are mA.
For p4076 = 1, 4 the units are V.
<2> For a voltage output, the output voltage can be taken between the following terminals:
AO 0 between X522.2 (reference potential) and X522.1, AO 1 between X522.5 (reference potential) and X522.4.
For a current output, the output current can be taken from between the following terminals:
AO 0 between X522.2 and X522.3, AO 1 between X522.5 and X522.6.
<3> The input signals are referred to the reference quantities p2004 ... r2004 (100 % = p200x).
<4> p4076
= 0: 0 mA ... +20 mA
= 1: 0 V ... +10 V
= 2: 4 mA ... +20 mA
= 3: -20 mA ... +20 mA
= 4: -10 V ... +10 V
Reference quantities
p2000...r2004
y
x
2
x
1
[%]
2
1
x
% 100xx
%
0
1
0
1
-1
0
1
-1
0
1
AO 0 V+
AO 0 A+
Analog outputs type
p4076[0] (4)
AO 1 V+
AO 1 A+
Analog outputs type
p4076[1] (4)
<1>
3, 4
2
0, 1
4 mA
3, 4
2
0, 1
4 mA
0
0
Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
Function diagrams
2-1047
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-152 9576 – Temperature evaluation KTY/PTC
- 9576 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9576_51_eng.vsd
SINAMICS
13.08.09 V04.03.01
X522.7
X522.8
Sensor
resistance
r4101
Hardware
smoothing 1 s
Temp. alarm threshold
-48...251 °C
p4102[0] (100)
Software
smoothing 0.5 s
2 mA
KTY/PTC
Temperature sensor
-50 °C
0
1
PTC resistor
threshold 1650 Ohm
T
R
250 °C
KTY
PTC
188.6 °C
-140 °C
+
-
+ temp
- temp
Temp. fault threshold
-48...251 °C
p4102[1] (120)
Sensor type
p4100
<1>
<1> p4100
= 0: Evaluation disabled
= 1: PTC
= 2: KTY
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Temperature evaluation KTY/PTC
DO: TM31
<2> An alarm A35920 in
the temperature
evaluation of the
TM31 is signaled to
the next
(downstream) vector
control via the special
temperature value -
300 °C (refer to
[9577]).
Sensor resistance [9577.1]
p4099[0] (4000.00 μs)
<3> As a result of the wire
breakage monitoring
[9577.3] the
maximum
temperature that can
be measured is
limited to approx.
188.6 °C.
A
D
Resistance
calculation
<3>
<4> A value > 250 °C de-
activates the alarm or
fault.
<5> Bei KTY p4103 = 0
Output from
TempTimer (0).
Bei PTC p4103 = 0
delay time = 0s.
0
1
0
1
r4104.1
r4104.0
A35211
"Overtemperature sensor TM31"
F35207
"Overtemperature sensor TM31"
r4105
TM31 Temperature actual value
<2>
Alarm is not present
Measured temperature
Alarm is present
-300 °C
<4>
<4>
1
T0
TempTimer
p4103
<5>
Alarm A35920
temperature sensor evaluation
1
2
Sensortype
p4100
1
0
<1>
Function diagrams
Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
2-1048 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-153 9577 – Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC
- 9577 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9577_51_eng.vsd
DO: TM31
SINAMICS
25.04.07 V04.03.01
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC
<1> For KTY84-130 the threshold value of 50 Ohm corresponds to a temperature of -140 °C.
<2> For KTY84-130 the threshold value of 1630 Ohm corresponds to a temperature of +180 °C.
Sensor resistance
[9576.6]
1
0x
y
0
1
x
y
50 Ohm
<1>
<2>
1
0x
yA35920 "fault temperature sensor"
alarm value = 2
A35920 "fault temperature sensor"
alarm value = 1
xy
1630 Ohm
20 Ohm
&
&
A35920 "fault temperature sensor"
alarm value = 2
p4099[0] (4000.00 μs)
xy
xy
&
&&
p4100 = 2
sensor type KTY
[9576.8]
p4100 = 1
sensor type PTC
[9576.8]
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)
Function diagrams
2-1049
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.21 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)
Function diagrams
9880 – Analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 3) 2-1050
9886 – Temperature evaluation 2-1051
9887 – Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC 2-1052
Function diagrams
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)
2-1050 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-154 9880 – Analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 3)
- 9880 -
87654321
fp_9880_54_eng.vsd
DO: A_INF, S_INF, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
26.06.08 V04.03.01
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) - Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 3)
X520.2
X520.1
Rated line freq
p0211
X520.4
X520.3
X521.1
X521.2
A
D
Rated line freq
p0211
Limit value
comparison
INF C_filter
p0221
A06250
“Defective
capacitor(s)
in at least
one phase
of line filter“
r3671
r3673
VSM input U_scaler
p3660
x
2
x
1
y
+/-10 V
r3672
r3674
VSM CT_gain
p3670
x
2
x
1
y
A
D
X522.1
X522.2
r3662
I
1
I
2
I
3
VSM CT_gain
p3670
x
2
x
1
y
r3661
U
3
U
2
U
1
A
D
U
3
f2
3I
3
C
3
U
2
f2
3I
2
C
2
U
1
f2
3I
1
C
1
+
-
AI 2
+
-
AI 3
X521.3
X522.3
f
VSMfilt C A_thresh
r3676
C
1
C
2
C
3
100 V
690 V
r3677[0]
r3677[1]
r3677[2]
PT1 smoothing
[8850.1]
[8950.1]
p0115[3] (2000.00 μs)
p0115[1] (250.00 μs)
+/-10 V
0.5 s
A
D
0.5 s
0.5 s
Rated line freq
p0211
PT1 smoothing
0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
PT1 smoothing
PT1 smoothing
VSM input U_scaler
p3660
x
2
x
1
y
Function diagram
[8850.1]
[8950.1]
+
-
AI 0
+
-
AI 1
<1> The VECTOR drive object is assigned a dynamic index (p0150).
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)
Function diagrams
2-1051
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-155 9886 – Temperature evaluation
- 9886 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9886_54_eng.vsd
S120/S150/G130/G150
08.06.07 V04.03.01
X520.5
X520.6
Hardware
smoothing 1 s
Overtemperature alarm threshold
0...301 [°C]
p3667[0] (150)
r3664.1
r3664.0
Software smoothing 0.5 s
2 mA
KTY/PTC
Temperature sensor
-50 °C
0
11
2
Sensor type
p3665 (0)
PTC resistor
threshold 1650 Ohm
T
R
1
0
250 °C
KTY
PTC
248 °C
-140 °C
A
D
Resistance
calculation
+
-
+ temp
- temp
Overtemperature fault threshold
0...301 [°C]
p3668[1] (180)
Sensor type
p3665 (0)
<1>
<1> p3665
= 0: No sensor
= 1: PTC
= 2: KTY
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) - Temperature evaluation
DO: A_INF, S_INF, VECTOR
<1>
A34211
"Temperature alarm threshold exceeded"
F34207
"Temperature fault threshold exceeded"
r3666
Temperature KTY
<2> A fault or alarm in the temperature evaluation of the VSM is communicated to the downstream evaluation using special temperature values.
4000.00 μs
<3> As a result of the wire breakage monitoring the maximum temperature that can be measured is limited to approx. 175 °C.
0
1
0
1
Overtemperature hysteresis
p3669
Alarm A35920
temperature sensor evaluation
<2>
Alarm is not present
Alarm is present
-300 °C
<4> A value > 250 °C de-activates the alarm or fault.
<3>
<4>
<4>
Sensor resistance [9887.1]
<5> Can only be used with chassis infeeds.
<5>
<6> The VECTOR drive object is assigned a dynamic index (p0150).
<6>
<6>
<6>
<6>
<6>
Function diagrams
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)
2-1052 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-156 9887 – Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC
- 9887 -
Function diagram
87654321
DO: A_INF, S_INF, VECTOR
S120/S150/G130/G150
10.08.07 V04.03.01
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) - Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC
<1> For KTY84-130 temperature sensor, the following applies: A threshold value 50 Ohm corresponds to -140 °C.
<2> For KTY84-130 temperature sensor, the following applies: A threshold value 1630 Ohm corresponds to +180 °C.
Sensor resistance
[9886.6]
1
0x
y
0
1
x
y
50 Ohm
<1>
<2>
1
0x
y
p3665 = 2
Sensor type KTY
[9886.8]
A34920 "Temperature sensor fault"
Alarm value = 2 "Measured resistance too low"
A34920 "Temperature sensor fault"
Alarm value = 1 "Wire breakage or sensor not connected"
xy
1630 Ohm
20 Ohm
&
&
A34920 "Temperature sensor fault"
Alarm value = 2 "Measured resistance too low"
p4099[0] (4000.00 μs)
xy
xy
p3665 = 1
Sensor type PTC
[9886.8]
&
<3> Can only be used with the Chasis Active Line Modules.
<3>
fp_9887_54_eng.vsd
<4>
<4> The VECTOR drive object is assigned a dynamic index (p0150).
<4>
Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
Function diagrams
2-1053
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2.22 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
Function diagrams
9912 – Control word interconnection 2-1054
Function diagrams
Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
2-1054 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fig. 2-157 9912 – Control word interconnection
- 9912 -
Function diagram
87654321
fp_9912_54_eng.vsd
DO: CU_G, CU_S
S120/S150/G130/G150
16.01.07 V04.03.01
Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) - Control word interconnection
STW BOP.0
STW BOP.1
STW BOP.2
STW BOP.3
STW BOP.4
STW BOP.5
STW BOP.6
STW BOP.8
STW BOP.9
STW BOP.11
STW BOP.12
STW BOP.13
STW BOP.14
STW BOP.15
STW BOP.7
STW BOP.10
p0848[0] = r0019.2
-
-
-
-
p2102[0] = r0019.7
-
-
-
-
-
p1035[0] = r0019.13
p1036[0] = r0019.14
-
p0840[0] = r0019.0
p0844[0] = r0019.1
1 = On
0 = OFF (OFF1)
1 = No coast down
0 = Coast down (OFF2)
1 = No fast stop
0 = Fast stop (OFF3)
= Acknowledge fault
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Motorized potentiometer, raise
Reserved
1 = Motorized potentiometer, lower
Interconnection STW BOP (r0019)
Signal Interconnection
parameters
Meaning
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive sampling time
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
<1>
<1> The BICO interconnection represents an example that can be be changed by the user.
3-1055© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Faults and alarms 3
Contents
3.1 Overview of faults and alarms 3-1056
3.2 List of faults and alarms 3-1066
Faults and alarms
Overview of faults and alarms
3-1056 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
3.1 Overview of faults and alarms
3.1.1 General information about faults and alarms
Displaying faults and alarms
If a fault occurs, the drive indicates the fault(s) and/or alarm(s).
The following methods for displaying faults and alarms are available:
Via the fault and alarm buffer with PROFIBUS
Online via the commissioning software
Differences between faults and alarms
The differences between faults and alarms are as follows:
Table 3-1 Differences between faults and alarms
Type Description
Faults What happens when a fault occurs?
The appropriate fault reaction is triggered.
Status signal ZSW1.3 is set.
The fault is entered in the fault buffer.
How are faults eliminated?
Remove the original cause of the fault.
Acknowledge the fault.
Alarms What happens when an alarm occurs?
Status signal ZSW1.7 is set.
The alarm is entered in the alarm buffer.
How are alarms eliminated?
Alarms acknowledge themselves. If the cause of the alarm is no lon-
ger present, they automatically reset themselves.
Overview of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1057
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fault reactions
The following fault reactions are defined:
Table 3-2 Fault reactions
List PROFId-
rive
Reaction Description
NONE - None No reaction when a fault occurs
Note:
When the "Basic positioner" function module is activated
(r0108.4 = 1), the following applies:
When a fault occurs with fault reaction "NONE", an active
traversing task is interrupted and the system switches to
tracking mode until the fault has been rectified and
acknowledged.
OFF1 ON/
OFF
Brake along the
ramp-function
generator decel-
eration ramp fol-
lowed by pulse
disable
Closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21)
n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along
the ramp-function generator deceleration ramp (p1121).
When zero speed is detected, the motor holding brake (if
parameters have been assigned for it) is closed (p1215).
The pulses are suppressed when the brake closing time
(p1217) expires.
Zero speed is detected if the actual speed drops below
the threshold in p1226 or if the monitoring time (p1227)
started when speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226)
has expired.
Closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 23)
The following applies to closed-loop torque control
mode:
Reaction as for OFF2
When the system switches to closed-loop control with
p1501, the following applies:
No separate braking reaction.
If the actual speed value drops below the speed thresh-
old (p1226) or the timer stage (p1227) has expired, the
motor holding brake (if one is being used) is closed. The
pulses are suppressed when the brake closing time
(p1217) expires.
OFF2 COAST
STOP
Internal/external
pulse disable
Closed-loop speed and torque control
Instantaneous pulse suppression, the drive "coasts" to a
standstill.
The motor holding brake (if one is being used) is closed
immediately.
Switching on inhibited is activated.
Faults and alarms
Overview of faults and alarms
3-1058 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
OFF3 QUICK
STOP
Brake along the
OFF3 decelera-
tion ramp fol-
lowed by pulse
disable
Closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21)
n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along
the OFF3 deceleration ramp (p1135).
When zero speed is detected, the motor holding brake (if
parameters have been assigned for it) is closed. The
pulses are suppressed when the holding brake's closing
time (p1217) expires.
Zero speed is detected if the actual speed drops below
the threshold in p1226 or if the monitoring time (p1227)
started when speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226)
has expired.
Switching on inhibited is activated.
Closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 23)
Changeover to speed-controlled operation and other
reactions as described for speed-controlled operation.
STOP1 - - Under development
STOP2 - n_set = 0 n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along
the OFF3 deceleration ramp (p1135).
The drive remains in closed-loop speed control mode.
IASC/
DCBRAKE
-- For synchronous motors, the following applies:
If a fault occurs with this fault reaction, an internal arma-
ture short-circuit is triggered.
The conditions for p1231 = 4 must be observed.
For induction motors, the following applies:
If a fault occurs with this fault reaction, DC-injection
braking is triggered.
The DC brake must have been put into operation
(p1232, p1233, p1234).
ENCODER - Internal/external
pulse disable
(p0491)
The fault reaction ENCODER is applied as a function of
the setting in p0491.
Factory setting:
p0491 = 0 --> Encoder fault causes OFF2
Notice:
When changing p0491, it is imperative that the information
in the description of this parameter is carefully observed.
Table 3-2 Fault reactions, continued
List PROFId-
rive
Reaction Description
Overview of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1059
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Acknowledging faults
The list of faults and alarms specifies how to acknowledge each fault after the
cause has been remedied.
Table 3-3 Acknowledging faults
Acknowledg-
ment
Description
POWER ON The fault is acknowledged by a POWER ON process (switch drive unit off and on again).
Note:
If this action has not eliminated the fault cause, the fault is displayed again immediately
after power up.
IMMEDIATE Faults can be acknowledged on one drive object (Points 1 to 3) or on all drive objects
(point 4) as follows:
1 Acknowledge by setting parameter:
p3981 = 0 --> 1
2 Acknowledge via binector inputs:
p2103
p2104
p2105
BI: 1. Acknowledge faults
BI: 2. Acknowledge faults
BI: 3. Acknowledge faults
3 Acknowledge using PROFIBUS control signal:
STW1.7 = 0 --> 1 (edge)
4 Acknowledge all faults
p2102 BI: Acknowledge all faults
All of the faults on all of the drive objects of the drive system can be acknowledged
using this binector input.
Note:
These faults can also be acknowledged by a POWER ON operation.
If this action has not eliminated the fault cause, the fault will continue to be displayed
after acknowledgment.
Safety Integrated faults
The "Safe standstill" (SH) function must be deselected before these faults are
acknowledged.
PULSE INHIBIT The fault can only be acknowledged with a pulse inhibit (r0899.11 = 0).
The same options are available for acknowledging as described under acknowledgment
with IMMEDIATE.
Faults and alarms
Overview of faults and alarms
3-1060 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Saving fault buffer on POWER OFF
The contents of the fault buffer are saved to a non-volatile storage medium when
the Control Unit 320 (CU320) is switched off (i.e. the fault buffer history is still
available when the unit is switched on again).
The fault buffer of a drive object comprises the following parameters:
r0945[0 to 63], r0947[0 to 63], r0948[0 to 63], r0949[0 to 63]
r2109[0 to 63], r2130[0 to 63], r2133[0 to 63], r2136[0 to 63]
The fault buffer contents can be deleted manually as follows:
Delete fault buffer for all drive objects:
p2147 = 1 --> p2147 = 0 is automatically set after execution.
Delete fault buffer for a specific drive object:
p0952 = 0 --> The parameter belongs to the specified drive object.
The fault buffer contents are automatically deleted when the following occurs:
Restore factory setting (p0009 = 30 and p0976 = 1).
Download with modified structure (e.g. number of drive objects changed)
Power-up after other parameter values have been loaded (e.g. p0976 = 10)
Upgrade firmware to later version
Note:
Requirements:
Firmware version 2.2 or higher.
Control Unit 320 (CU320) with hardware version C or higher.
The hardware version is shown on the rating plate or can be displayed online
with the commissioning software (in Project Navigator under "Drive Unit" -->
Configuration --> Version Overview).
If these prerequisites are not fulfilled, the contents of the fault buffer are deleted
at every POWER ON operation.
Overview of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1061
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
3.1.2 Explanation of the list of faults and alarms
The data in the following example has been chosen at random. A description can
contain the information listed below. Some of the information is optional.
The list of faults and alarms (See Section 3.2) is structured as follows:
Axxxxx Alarm xxxxx
Axxxxx (F, N) Alarm xxxxx (message type can be changed to F or N)
Fxxxxx Fault xxxxx
Fxxxxx (A, N) Fault xxxxx (message type can be changed to F or N)
Nxxxxx No message
Nxxxxx (A) No message (message type can be changed to A)
Cxxxxx Safety message (separate message buffer)
A message comprises a letter followed by the relevant number.
The letters have the following meanings:
A means "Alarm".
F means "Fault".
N means "No message" or "Internal message".
C means "Safety message"
The optional brackets indicate whether the type specified for this message can be
changed and which message types can be adjusted via parameters (p2118,
p2119).
Information about reaction and acknowledgment is specified independently for a
message with an adjustable message type (e.g. reaction to F, acknowledgment
for F).
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Start of example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Axxxxx (F, N) Fault location (optional): Name
Message value: Component Number: %1, cause: %2
Drive object: List of objects.
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledg-
ment:
NONE
Cause: Description of possible causes
Fault value (r0949, interpret format): or alarm value (r2124, interpret format): (optional)
Information about fault or alarm values (optional)
Remedy: Description of possible remedies
Reaction to F: A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1, NONE)
SERVO: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
VECTOR: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge-
ment for F:
IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction to N: NONE
Acknowledge-
Faults and alarms
Overview of faults and alarms
3-1062 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fault location (optional): Name
The fault location (optional), the name of the fault or alarm, and the message
number are all used to identify the message (e.g. with the commissioning soft-
ware).
Message value:
The information provided under the message value tells you about the composi-
tion of the fault/alarm value.
Example:
Message value: Component Number: %1, cause: %2
This fault value or alarm value contains information about the Component Num-
ber and cause. The entries %1 and %2 are placeholders, which are filled in
accordingly during online operation with the commissioning software.
Drive object:
Each message (fault/alarm) specifies the drive object in which it can be found.
A message can belong to either one, several, or all drive objects.
Reaction: Default fault reaction (adjustable fault reaction)
Specifies the default reaction in the event of a fault.
The optional brackets indicate whether the default fault reactions can be changed
and which fault reactions can be adjusted via parameters (p2100, p2101).
Note:
See Section 3.1.1
Note:
You can change the default properties of a fault or alarm by means of parameter
assignment.
The list of faults and alarms (see Section 3.2) provides information in relation to
the properties of a message that have been set as standard. If the properties of a
specific message are changed, the corresponding information may have to be
modified in this list.
Overview of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1063
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Acknowledgment: Default acknowledgment (adjustable acknowledgment)
Specifies the default method of acknowledging faults after the cause has been
eliminated.
The optional brackets indicate whether the default acknowledgment can be
changed and which acknowledgment can be adjusted via parameters (p2126,
p2127).
Note:
See Section 3.1.1
Cause:
Describes the possible causes of the fault/alarm. A fault or alarm value can also
be specified (optional).
Fault value (r0949, format):
The fault value is entered in the fault buffer in r0949[0 to 63] and specifies addi-
tional, precise information about a fault.
Alarm value (r2124, format):
The alarm value specifies additional, precise information about an alarm.
The alarm value is entered in the alarm buffer in r2124[0 to 7] and specifies addi-
tional, precise information about an alarm.
Remedy:
Describes the methods available for eliminating the cause of the active fault or
alarm.
Alarm
In certain cases, the servicing and maintenance personnel are responsible for
choosing a suitable method for eliminating the cause of faults.
Faults and alarms
Overview of faults and alarms
3-1064 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
3.1.3 Number ranges of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms are organized into the following number ranges:
Note:
The following number ranges represent an overview for all faults and alarms in
SINAMICS.
The faults and alarms for the product described in this List Manual are described
in detail in Section 3.2.
Table 3-4 Number ranges of faults and alarms
From To Range
1000 3999 Control Unit
4000 4999 Reserved
5000 5999 Power unit
6000 6899 Infeed
6900 6999 Braking Module
7000 7999 Drive
8000 8999 Option Board
9000 12999 Reserved
13000 13001 Licensing
13002 19999 Reserved
20000 29999 OEM
30000 30999 DRIVE-CLiQ component power unit
31000 31999 DRIVE-CLiQ component encoder 1
32000 32999 DRIVE-CLiQ component encoder 2
Note:
Faults that occur are automatically output as an alarm if the
encoder parameters are assigned so that it acts as a direct
measuring system and if the encoder does not intervene in the
motor control.
33000 33999 DRIVE-CLiQ component encoder 3
Note:
Faults that occur are automatically output as an alarm if the
encoder parameters are assigned so that it acts as a direct
measuring system and if the encoder does not intervene in the
motor control.
34000 34999 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)
35000 35199 Terminal Module 54F (TM54F)
35200 35999 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
Overview of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1065
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
36000 36999 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module
40000 40999 Controller Extension 32 (CX32)
41000 48999 Reserved
49000 49999 SINAMICS GM/SM/GL
50000 50499 Communication Board (COMM BOARD)
50500 59999 OEM Siemens
60000 65535 SINAMICS DC MASTER (DC closed loop control)
Table 3-4 Number ranges of faults and alarms, continued
From To Range
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1066 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
3.2 List of faults and alarms
Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng,
Objects: CU_G_G130, CU_G_G150, ENCODER, HUB, TB30, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
F01000 Internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the Control Unit.
F01001 Floating point exception
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: A floating point exception has occurred.
The error can be caused by the basic system, DCC, FBLOCKS or OA_applications.
Additional debug information can be found in p9999:
Index 0: Alarm number
Index 1: Program counter at the time the exception occurred
Index 2: Cause of floating point exception:
To be treated as a hexadecimal:
0x1 - Invalid operation
0x2 - Divide by zero
0x4 - Overflow
0x8 - Underflow
0x10 - Inexact result
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- check configuration and signals of the free function blocks.
- check configuration and signals of the DCC charts.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
F01002 Internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1067
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01003 Acknowledgement delay when accessing the memory
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A memory area was accessed that does not return a "READY".
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- contact the Hotline.
N01004 (F, A) Internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - read out diagnostics parameter (r9999).
- contact the Hotline.
See also: r9999 (Software error internal supplementary diagnostics)
Reaction upon F: OFF2
Acknowl. upon F: POWER ON
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F01005 Firmware download for DRIVE-CLiQ component unsuccessful
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: It was not possible to download the firmware to a DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxxxx hex: yy = component number, xxxx = fault cause
xxxx = 000B hex = 11 dec:
DRIVE-CLiQ component has detected a checksum error.
xxxx = 000F hex = 15 dec:
The selected DRIVE-CLiQ component did not accept the contents of the firmware file.
xxxx = 0012 hex = 18 dec:
Firmware version is too old and is not accepted by the component.
xxxx = 0013 hex = 19 dec:
Firmware version is not suitable for the hardware release of the component.
xxxx = 0065 hex = 101 dec:
After several communication attempts, no response from the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
xxxx = 008B hex = 139 dec:
Initially, a new boot loader is loaded (must be repeated after POWER ON).
xxxx = 008C hex = 140 dec:
Firmware file for the DRIVE-CLiQ component not available on the memory card.
xxxx = 008D hex = 141 dec:
An inconsistent length of the firmware file was signaled. The firmware download may have been caused by a loss of
connection to the firmware file. This can occur during a project download/reset in the case of a SINAMICS Integrated
Control Unit, for example.
xxxx = 008F hex = 143 dec:
Component has not changed to the mode for firmware download. It was not possible to delete the existing firmware.
xxxx = 0090 hex = 144 dec:
When checking the firmware that was downloaded (checksum), the component detected a fault. It is possible that
the file on the memory card is defective.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1068 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
xxxx = 0091 hex = 145 dec:
Checking the loaded firmware (checksum) was not completed by the component in the appropriate time.
xxxx = 009C hex = 156 dec:
Component with the specified component number is not available (p7828).
xxxx = Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check the selected component number (p7828).
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
- save suitable firmware file for download in the directory "/siemens/sinamics/code/sac/".
- use a component with a suitable hardware version
- after POWER ON has been carried out again for the DRIVE-CLiQ component, download the firmware again.
Depending on p7826, the firmware will be automatically downloaded.
A01006 Firmware update for DRIVE-CLiQ component required
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The firmware of a DRIVE-CLiQ component must be updated as there is no suitable firmware or firmware version in
the component for operation with the Control Unit.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Remedy: Firmware update using the commissioning software:
The firmware version of all of the components on the "Version overview" page can be read in the Project Navigator
under "Configuration" of the associated drive unit and an appropriate firmware update can be carried out.
Firmware update via parameter:
- take the component number from the alarm value and enter into p7828.
- start the firmware download with p7829 = 1.
A01007 POWER ON for DRIVE-CLiQ component required
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ component must be powered up again (POWER ON) as, for example, the firmware was updated.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Note:
For a component number = 1, a POWER ON of the Control Unit is required.
Remedy: Switch off the power supply of the specified DRIVE-CLiQ component and switch it on again.
A01009 (N) CU: Control module overtemperature
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature (r0037[0]) of the control module (Control Unit) has exceeded the specified limit value.
Remedy: - check the air intake for the Control Unit.
- check the fan for the Control Unit (only for CU310).
Note:
The alarm automatically disappears after the limit value has been undershot.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1069
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01010 Drive type unknown
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An unknown drive type was found.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Drive object number (refer to p0101, p0107).
Remedy: - Replace Power Module.
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
F01011 (N) Download interrupted
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The project download was interrupted.
- the project download was prematurely ended by the user or by the commissioning software (e.g. STARTER,
SCOUT).
- the communication cable was interrupted (e.g. cable breakage, cable withdrawn).
Note:
The response to an interrupted download is the state "first commissioning".
Remedy: - check the communication cable.
- download the project again.
- boot from previously saved files (power-down/power-up or p0976).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F01012 (N) Project conversion error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When converting the project of an older firmware version, an error occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of the parameter causing the error.
For fault value = 600, the following applies:
The temperature evaluation is no longer assigned to the power unit but to the encoder evaluation.
Notice:
Monitoring of the motor temperature is no longer ensured.
Remedy: Check the parameter indicated in the fault value and correctly adjust it accordingly.
Re fault value = 600:
Parameter p0600 must be set to the values 1, 2 or 3 in accordance with the assignment of the internal encoder eval-
uation to the encoder interface.
Value 1 means: The internal encoder evaluation is assigned to the encoder interface 1 via p0187.
Value 2 means: The internal encoder evaluation is assigned to the encoder interface 2 via p0188.
Value 3 means: The internal encoder evaluation is assigned to the encoder interface 3 via p0189.
- If necessary, the internal encoder evaluation must be assigned to an encoder interface via parameters p0187,
p0188 or p0189 accordingly.
- If necessary, upgrade the firmware to a later version.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1070 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01015 Internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
A01016 (F) Firmware changed
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: At least one firmware file in the directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/ has been changed without authorization with
respect to the version shipped from the factory. No changes are permitted in this directory.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0: Checksum of one file is incorrect.
1: File missing.
2: Too many files.
3: Incorrect firmware version.
4: Incorrect checksum of the back-up file.
See also: r9925 (Firmware file incorrect)
Remedy: For the non-volatile memory for the firmware (memory card/device memory), restore the delivery condition.
Note:
The file involved can be read out using parameter r9925.
See also: r9926 (Firmware check status)
Reaction upon F: OFF2
Acknowl. upon F: POWER ON
A01017 Component lists changed
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: On the memory card, one file in the directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA or /ADDON/SINAMICS/DATA has been
illegally changed with respect to that supplied from the factory. No changes are permitted in this directory.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The problem is indicated in the first digit of the alarm value:
1. File does not exist.
2. Firmware version of the file does not match the software version.
3. The file checksum is incorrect.
The second digit of the alarm value indicates in which directory the file is located:
0: Directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA/
1. Directory /ADDON/SINAMICS/DATA/
The third digit of the alarm value indicates the file:
0: File MOTARM.ACX
1: File MOTSRM.ACX
2: File MOTSLM.ACX
3: File ENCDATA.ACX
4: File FILTDATA.ACX
5: File BRKDATA.ACX
6: File DAT_BEAR.ACX
7: File CFG_BEAR.ACX
8: File ENC_GEAR.ACX
Remedy: For the memory card file involved, restore the status originally supplied from the factory.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1071
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01023 Software timeout (internal)
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An internal software timeout has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
F01030 Sign-of-life failure for master control
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF3 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For active PC master control, no sign-of-life was received within the monitoring time.
The master control was returned to the active BICO interconnection.
Remedy: Set the monitoring time higher at the PC or, if required, completely disable the monitoring function.
For the commissioning software, the monitoring time is set as follows:
<Drive> -> Commissioning -> Control panel -> Button "Fetch master control" -> A window is displayed to set the mon-
itoring time in milliseconds.
Notice:
The monitoring time should be set as short as possible. A long monitoring time means a late response when the
communication fails!
F01031 Sign-of-life failure for OFF in REMOTE
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF3 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: With the "OFF in REMOTE" mode active, no sign-of-life was received within 3 seconds.
Remedy: - Check the data cable connection at the serial interface for the Control Unit (CU) and operator panel.
- Check the data cable between the Control Unit and operator panel.
F01033 Units changeover: Reference parameter value invalid
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When changing over the units to the referred representation type, it is not permissible for any of the required refer-
ence parameters to be equal to 0.0
Fault value (r0949, parameter):
Reference parameter whose value is 0.0.
See also: p0349 (System of units, motor equivalent circuit diagram data), p0505 (Selecting the system of units),
p0595 (Selecting technological units)
Remedy: Set the value of the reference parameter to a number different than 0.0.
See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1072 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01034 Units changeover: Calculation parameter values after reference value change unsuc-
cessful
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The change of a reference parameter meant that for an involved parameter the selected value was not able to be
recalculated in the per unit representation. The change was rejected and the original parameter value restored.
Fault value (r0949, parameter):
Parameter whose value was not able to be recalculated.
See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004
Remedy: Select the value of the reference parameter such that the parameter involved can be calculated in the per unit rep-
resentation.
See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004
A01035 (F) ACX: Boot from the back-up parameter back-up files
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When the Control Unit is booted, no complete data set was found from the parameter back-up files. The last time
that the parameterization was saved, it was not completely carried out. Instead, a back-up data set or a back-up
parameter back-up file is downloaded.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: If you have saved the project using the commissioning software, carry out a new download for your project. Save
using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0977 = 1 so that all of the parameter files are again completely writ-
ten to the non-volatile memory.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
F01036 (A) ACX: Parameter back-up file missing
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When downloading the device parameterization, a parameter back-up file associated with a drive object cannot be
found. Neither a PSxxxyyy.ACX, a PSxxxyyy.NEW nor a PSxxxyyy.BAK parameter back-up file exists in the non-
volatile memory for this drive object.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Byte 1: yyy in the file name PSxxxyyy.ACX
yyy = 000 --> consistency back-up file
yyy = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number
yyy = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file
Byte 2, 3, 4:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: If you have saved the project data using the commissioning software, carry out a new download for your project.
Save using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0977 = 1 so that all of the parameter files are again completely
written to the non-volatile memory.
If you have not saved the project data, then first commissioning of the system has to be carried out again.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1073
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01037 (A) ACX: Re-naming the parameter back-up file unsuccessful
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Re-naming after saving a parameter back-up file in the non-volatile memory was unsuccessful.
One of the parameter back-up files to be re-named had the "read only" attribute. The parameter back-up files are
saved in the directory \USER\SINAMICS\DATA.
It is possible that the non-volatile memory is defective.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Byte 1: yyy in the file names PSxxxyyy.* or CAxxxyyy.* or CCxxxyyy.*
yyy = 000 --> consistency back-up file
yyy = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file PSxxx099.*
Byte 2: xxx in the file name PSxxxyyy.*
xxx = 000 --> data save started with p0977 = 1
xxx = 010 --> data save started with p0977 = 10
xxx = 011 --> data save started with p0977 = 11
xxx = 012 --> data save started with p0977 = 12
Byte 4, 3:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check whether one of the files to be overwritten has the attribute "read only" and change this file attribute to "writ-
able". Check all of the files (PSxxxyyy.*, CCxxxyyy.*, CAxxxyyy.*) that belong to drive yyy designated in the fault
value.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F01038 (A) ACX: Loading the parameter back-up file unsuccessful
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error has occurred when downloading PSxxxyyy.ACX or PTxxxyyy.ACX files from the non-volatile memory.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Byte 1: yyy in the file name PSxxxyyy.ACX
yyy = 000 --> consistency back-up file
yyy = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number
yyy = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file
Byte 4, 3, 2:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - If you have saved the project data using the commissioning software, carry out a new download for your project.
Save using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0977 = 1 so that all of the parameter files are again completely
written to the non-volatile memory.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1074 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01039 (A) ACX: Writing to the parameter back-up file was unsuccessful
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Writing to at least one parameter back-up file PSxxxyyy.*** in the non-volatile memory was unsuccessful.
- In the directory /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/ at least one parameter back-up file PSxxxyyy.*** has the "read only" file
attribute and cannot be overwritten.
- There is not sufficient free memory space available.
- The non-volatile memory is defective and cannot be written to.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
dcba hex
a = yyy in the file names PSxxxyyy.***
a = 000 --> consistency back-up file
a = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number
a = 070 --> FEPROM.BIN
a = 080 --> DEL4BOOT.TXT
a = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file
b = xxx in the file names PSxxxyyy.***
b = 000 --> data save started with p0977 = 1
b = 010 --> data save started with p0977 = 10
b = 011 --> data save started with p0977 = 11
b = 012 --> data save started with p0977 = 12
d, c:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check the file attribute of the files (PSxxxyyy.***, CAxxxyyy.***, CCxxxyyy.***) and, if required, change from "read
only" to "writeable".
- check the free memory space in the non-volatile memory. Approx. 80 kbyte of free memory space is required for
every drive object in the system.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F01040 Save parameter settings and carry out a POWER ON
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: A parameter was changed in the drive system which means that it is necessary to save the parameters and re-boot
(e.g. p0110).
Remedy: - save the parameters (p0971/p0977).
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
F01041 Parameter save necessary
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Defective or missing files were detected on the memory card when booting.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Source file cannot be opened.
2: Source file cannot be read.
3: Target directory cannot be set up.
4. Target file cannot be set up/opened.
5. Target file cannot be written to.
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1075
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - save the parameters.
- download the project again to the drive unit.
- update the firmware
- if required, replace the Control Unit and/or memory card card.
F01042 Parameter error during project download
Message value: Parameter: %1, Index: %2, fault cause: %3
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error was detected when downloading a project using the commissioning software (e.g. incorrect parameter
value).
For the specified parameter, it was detected that dynamic limits were exceeded that may possibly depend on other
parameters.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ccbbaaaa hex
aaaa = Parameter
bb = Index
cc = fault cause
0: Parameter number illegal.
1: Parameter value cannot be changed.
2: Lower or upper value limit exceeded.
3: Sub-index incorrect.
4: No array, no sub-index.
5: Data type incorrect.
6: Setting not permitted (only resetting).
7: Descriptive element cannot be changed.
9: Descriptive data not available.
11: No master control.
15: No text array available.
17: Task cannot be executed due to operating state.
20: Illegal value.
21: Response too long.
22: Parameter address illegal.
23: Format illegal.
24: Number of values not consistent.
25: Drive object does not exist.
101: Presently deactivated.
104: Illegal value.
107: Write access not permitted when controller enabled.
108: Unit unknown.
109: Write access only in the commissioning state, encoder (p0010 = 4).
110: Write access only in the commissioning state, motor (p0010 = 3).
111: Write access only in the commissioning state, power unit (p0010 = 2).
112: Write access only in the quick commissioning mode (p0010 = 1).
113: Write access only in the ready mode (p0010 = 0).
114: Write access only in the commissioning state, parameter reset (p0010 = 30).
115: Write access only in the Safety Integrated commissioning state (p0010 = 95).
116: Write access only in the commissioning state, technological application/units (p0010 = 5).
117: Write access only in the commissioning state (p0010 not equal to 0).
118: Write access only in the commissioning state, download (p0010 = 29).
119: Parameter may not be written in download.
120: Write access only in the commissioning state, drive basis configuration (device: p0009 = 3).
121: Write access only in the commissioning state, define drive type (device: p0009 = 2).
122: Write access only in the commissioning state, data set basis configuration (device: p0009 = 4).
123: Write access only in the commissioning state, device configuration (device: p0009 = 1).
124: Write access only in the commissioning state, device download (device: p0009 = 29).
125: Write access only in the commissioning state, device parameter reset (device: p0009 = 30).
126: Write access only in the commissioning state, device ready (device: p0009 = 0).
127: Write access only in the commissioning state, device (device: p0009 not equal to 0).
129: Parameter may not be written in download.
130: Transfer of the master control is inhibited via BI: p0806.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1076 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
131: Required BICO interconnection not possible because BICO output does not supply floating value
132: Free BICO interconnection inhibited via p0922.
133: Access method not defined.
200: Below the valid values.
201: Above the valid values.
202: Cannot be accessed from the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
203: Cannot be read from the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
204: Write access not permitted.
Remedy: - enter the correct value in the specified parameter.
- identify the parameter that restricts the limits of the specified parameter.
F01043 Fatal error at project download
Message value: Fault cause: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fatal error was detected when downloading a project using the commissioning software.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Device status cannot be changed to Device Download (drive object ON?).
2: Incorrect drive object number.
3: A drive object that has already been deleted is deleted again.
4: Deleting of a drive object that has already been registered for generation.
5: Deleting a drive object that does not exist.
6: Generating an undeleted drive object that already existed.
7: Regenerating a drive object already registered for generation.
8: Maximum number of drive objects that can be generated exceeded.
9: Error while generating a device drive object.
10: Error while generating target topology parameters (p9902 and p9903).
11: Error while generating a drive object (global component).
12: Error while generating a drive object (drive component).
13: Unknown drive object type.
14: Drive status cannot be changed to "ready for operation" (p0947 and p0949).
15: Drive status cannot be changed to drive download.
16: Device status cannot be changed to "ready for operation".
17: It is not possible to download the topology. The component wiring should be checked, taking into account the
various messages/signals.
18: A new download is only possible if the factory settings are restored for the drive unit.
19: The slot for the option module has been configured several times (e.g. CAN and COMM BOARD)
20: The configuration is inconsistent (e.g. CAN for Control Unit, however no CAN configured for drive objects A_INF,
SERVO or VECTOR ).
Remedy: - use the current version of the commissioning software.
- modify the offline project and carry out a new download (e.g. compare the number of drive objects, motor, encoder,
power unit in the offline project and at the drive).
- change the drive state (is a drive rotating or is there a message/signal?).
- carefully note any other messages/signals and remove their cause.
F01044 CU: Descriptive data error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An error was detected when loading the descriptive data saved in the non-volatile memory.
Remedy: Replace the memory card or Control Unit.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1077
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01045 CU: Configuring data invalid
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the parameter files PSxxxyyy.ACX, PTxxxyyy.ACX, CAxxxyyy.ACX, or
CCxxxyyy.ACX saved in the non-volatile memory.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Restore the factory setting using (p0976 = 1) and re-load the project to the drive unit. Operation without any restric-
tions is then possible.
After downloading the project, save the parameters in STARTER using "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0977 = 1. This
overwrites the incorrect parameter files in the non-volatile memory.
A01049 CU: It is not possible to write to file
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: It is not possible to write into a write-protected file (PSxxxxxx.acx). The write request was interrupted.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Drive object number.
Remedy: Check whether the "write protected" attribute has been set for the files in the non-volatile memory under
.../USER/SINAMICS/DATA/...
When required, remove write protection and save again (e.g. set p0977 to 1).
F01050 Memory card and device incompatible
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The memory card and the device type do not match (e.g. a memory card for SINAMICS S is inserted in SINAMICS
G).
Remedy: - insert the matching memory card.
- use the matching Control Unit or power unit.
F01054 CU: System limit exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: At least one system overload has been identified.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Computing time load too high (r9976[1]).
5: Peak load too high (r9976[5]).
See also: r9976 (System utilization)
Remedy: Re fault value = 1, 5:
- check the sampling times and adjust if necessary (p0115).
- deactivate the function module.
- deactivate the drive object.
- remove the drive object from the target topology.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1078 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01064 (F) CU: Internal error (CRC)
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: CRC error in the Control Unit program memory
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
A01065 Drive: Fault on non-active encoder
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: One or several non-active encoders indicate an error.
Remedy: Remove the error for the non-active encoder.
F01068 CU: Data memory, memory overflow
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A data memory area has been overloaded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: High-speed data memory 1 overloaded
Bit 1 = 1: High-speed data memory 2 overloaded
Bit 2 = 1: High-speed data memory 3 overloaded
Bit 3 = 1: High-speed data memory 4 overloaded
Remedy: - deactivate the function module.
- deactivate the drive object.
- remove the drive object from the target topology.
A01099 Tolerance window of time synchronization exited
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The time master exited the selected tolerance window for time synchronization.
See also: p3109 (RTC real time synchronization, tolerance window)
Remedy: Select the re-synchronization interval so that the synchronization deviation between the time master and drive sys-
tem lies within the tolerance window.
See also: r3108 (RTC last synchronization deviation)
A01100 CU: Memory card withdrawn
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The memory card (non-volatile memory) was withdrawn during operation.
Notice:
It is not permissible for the memory card to be withdrawn or inserted under voltage.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1079
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - power down the drive system.
- re-insert the memory card that was withdrawn - this card must match the drive system.
- power up the drive system again.
F01105 (A) CU: Insufficient memory
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: Too many functions have been configured on this Control Unit (e.g. too many drives, function modules, data sets,
OA applications, blocks, etc).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - change the configuration on this Control Unit (e.g. fewer drives, function modules, data sets, OA applications,
blocks, etc).
- use an additional Control Unit.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F01107 CU: Data save in the non-volatile memory unsuccessful
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A data save in the non-volatile memory was not able to be successfully carried out.
- non-volatile memory is defective.
- insufficient space in the non-volatile memory.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - try to save again.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
F01110 CU: More than one SINAMICS G on one Control Unit
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: More than one SINAMICS G type power unit is being operated from the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Number of the second drive with a SINAMICS G type power unit.
Remedy: Only one SINAMICS G drive type is permitted.
F01111 CU: Mixed operation of drive units illegal
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Illegal operation of various drive units on one Control Unit:
- SINAMICS S together with SINAMICS G
- SINAMICS S together with SINAMICS S Value or Combi
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Number of the first drive object with a different power unit type.
Remedy: Only power units of one particular drive type may be operated with one Control Unit.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1080 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01112 CU: Power unit not permissible
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The connected power unit cannot be used together with this Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Power unit is not supported (e.g. PM240).
2: DC/AC power unit connected to CU310 not permissible.
Remedy: Replace the power unit that is not permissible by a component that is permissible.
F01120 (A) Terminal initialization has failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An internal software error occurred while the terminal functions were being initialized.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the Control Unit.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F01122 (A) Frequency at the measuring probe input too high
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The frequency of the pulses at the measuring probe input is too high.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.8)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.10)
4: DI/DO 11 (X122.11)
8: DI/DO 13 (X132.8)
16: DI/DO 14 (X132.10)
32: DI/DO 15 (X132.11)
64: DI/DO 8 (X122.7)
128: DI/DO 12 (X132.7)
Remedy: Reduce the frequency of the pulses at the measuring probe input.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F01150 CU: Number of instances of a drive object type exceeded
Message value: Drive object type: %1, number permitted: %2, current number: %3
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum permissible number of instances of a drive object type was exceeded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Drive object type (p0107).
Byte 2: Max. permissible number of instances for this drive object type.
Byte 3: Actual number of instances for this drive object type.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1081
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - power down the unit.
- suitably restrict the number of instances of a drive object type by reducing the number of inserted components.
- re-commission the unit.
F01151 CU: Number of drive objects of a category exceeded
Message value: Drive object category: %1, number permitted: %2, current number: %3
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum permissible number of drive objects of a category was exceeded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Drive object category.
Byte 2: Max. permissible number for this drive object category.
Byte 3: Actual number for this drive object category.
Remedy: - power down the unit.
- suitably restrict the number of drive objects of the specified category by reducing the number of inserted compo-
nents.
- re-commission the unit.
F01200 CU: Time slice management internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: A time slice management error has occurred.
It is possible that the sampling times have been inadmissibly set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
998: Too many time slices occupied by OA (e.g. DCC)
999: Too many time slices occupied by the basic system
Too many different sampling times may have been set.
Further values for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check the sampling time setting (p0112, p0115, p4099).
- contact the Hotline.
F01205 CU: Time slice overflow
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: Insufficient processing time is available for the existing topology.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - reduce the number of drives.
- increase the sampling times.
F01221 CU: Bas clk cyc too low
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The closed-loop control / monitoring cannot maintain the envisaged clock cycle.
The runtime of the closed-loop control/monitoring is too long for the particular clock cycle or the computing time
remaining in the system is not sufficient for the closed-loop control/monitoring.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Increase the basic clock cycle of DRIVE-CLiQ communication.
See also: p0112 (Sampling times presetting p0115)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1082 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01223 CU: Sampling time inconsistent
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When changing a sampling time (p0115[0], p0799 or p4099), inconsistency between the clock cycles has been iden-
tified.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Value, low minimum value.
2: Value, high maximum value.
3: Value not a multiple of 1.25 µs.
4: Value does not match clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation.
5: Value not a multiple of 125 µs.
6: Value not a multiple of 250 µs.
7: Value not a multiple of 375 µs.
8: Value not a multiple of 400 µs.
10: Special restriction of the drive object violated.
20: On a SERVO with a sampling time of 62.5 µs, more than two drive objects or one drive object of a type other
than SERVO have been detected on the same DRIVE-CLiQ line (a maximum of two SERVO type drive objects are
permitted).
21: Value can be a multiple of the current controller sampling time of a servo or vector drive in the system (e.g. for
TB30, the values of all of the indices should be taken into account).
30: Value less than 31.25 µs.
31: Value less than 62.5 µs.
32: Value less than 125 µs.
40: Nodes have been identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line whose highest common denominator of the sampling times
is less than 125 µs. Further, none of the nodes has a sampling tine of less than 125 µs.
41: A chassis unit was identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line as a node. Further, the highest common denominator of
the sampling times of all of the nodes connected to the line is less than 250 µs.
42: An Active Line Module was identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line as a node. Further, the highest common denomi-
nator of the sampling times of all of the nodes connected to the line is less than 125 µs.
43: A Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) was identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line as a node. Further, the highest common
denominator of the sampling times of all of the nodes connected to the line is not equal to the current controller sam-
pling time of the drive object of the VSM.
44: The highest common denominator of the sampling times of all of the components connected to the DRIVE-CLiQ
line is not the same for all components of this drive object (e.g. there are components on different DRIVE-CLiQ lines
on which different highest common denominators are generated).
52: Nodes have been identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line whose highest common denominator of the sampling times
is less than 31.25 µs.
54: Nodes have been identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line whose highest common denominator of the sampling times
is less than 62.5 µs.
56: Nodes have been identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line whose highest common denominator of the sampling times
is less than 125 µs.
58: Nodes have been identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line whose highest common denominator of the sampling times
is less than 250 µs.
99: Inconsistency of cross drive objects detected.
116: Recommended clock cycle in r0116[0...1].
General note:
The topology rules should be noted when connecting up DRIVE-CLiQ (refer to the appropriate product documenta-
tion).
The parameters of the sampling times can also be changed with automatic calculations.
Example for highest common denominator: 125 µs, 125 µs, 62.5 µs --> 62.5 µs
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- set a valid sampling time.
See also: p0115, p0799, p4099
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1083
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01224 CU: Pulse frequency inconsistent
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When changing the minimum pulse frequency (p0113) inconsistency between the pulse frequencies was identified.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Value, low minimum value.
2: Value, high maximum value.
3: Resulting sampling time is not a multiple of 1.25 µs.
4: Value does not match clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation.
10: Special restriction of the drive object violated.
99: Inconsistency of cross drive objects detected.
116: Recommended clock cycle in r0116[0...1].
Remedy: Set a valid pulse frequency.
See also: p0113 (Minimum pulse frequency, selection)
F01250 CU: CU-EEPROM incorrect read-only data
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE (OFF2)
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: Error when reading the read-only data of the EEPROM in the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the Control Unit.
A01251 CU: CU-EEPROM incorrect read-write data
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Error when reading the read-write data of the EEPROM in the Control Unit.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: For alarm value r2124 < 256, the following applies:
- carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the Control Unit.
For alarm value r2124 >= 256, the following applies:
- for the drive object with this alarm, clear the fault memory (p0952 = 0).
- as an alternative, clear the fault memory of all drive objects (p2147 = 1).
- replace the Control Unit.
F01255 CU: Option Board EEPROM read-only data error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE (OFF2)
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: Error when reading the read-only data of the EEPROM in the Option Board.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the Control Unit.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1084 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01256 CU: Option Board EEPROM read-write data error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Error when reading the read-write data of the EEPROM in the Option Board.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the Control Unit.
F01303 DRIVE-CLiQ component does not support the required function
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A function requested by the Control Unit is not supported by a DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The component does not support the deactivation.
101: The Motor Module does not support an internal armature short-circuit.
102: The Motor Module does not support the deactivation.
201: The Sensor Module does not support actual value inversion (p0410.0 = 1) when using a Hall sensor (p0404.6
= 1) for the commutation.
202: The Sensor Module does not support parking/unparking.
203: The Sensor Module does not support the deactivation.
204: The firmware of this Terminal Module 15 (TM15) does not support the application TM15DI/DO.
205: The Sensor Module does not support the selected temperature evaluation (r0458).
206: The firmware of this Terminal Modules TM41/TM31/TM15 refers to an old firmware version. It is urgently nec-
essary to upgrade the firmware to ensure disturbance-free operation.
207: The power unit with this hardware version does not support operation with device supply voltages of less than
380 V.
208: The Sensor Module does not support deselection of commutation with zero mark (via p0430.23).
211: The Sensor Module does not support single-track encoders (r0459.10)
Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved.
Re fault value = 205:
Check parameter p0600 and p0601 and if required, adapt interpretation.
Re fault value = 207:
Replace the power unit or if required set the device supply voltage higher (p0210).
Re fault value = 208:
Check parameter p0430.23 and reset if necessary.
A01304 (F) Firmware version of DRIVE-CLiQ component is not up-to-date
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The non-volatile memory has a more recent firmware version than the one in the connected DRIVE-CLiQ compo-
nent.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved.
Remedy: Update the firmware (p7828, p7829 and commissioning software).
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1085
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01305 Topology: Component number missing
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The component number from the topology was not parameterized (p0121 (for power unit, refer to p0107), p0131 (for
servo/vector drives, refer to p0107), p0141, p0151, p0161).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The fault value includes the particular data set number.
Note:
The fault also occurs if speed encoders have been configured (p0187 to p0189) but no component numbers exist for
them.
In this case, the fault value includes the drive data set number plus 100 * encoder number (e.g. 3xx, if a component
number was not entered in p0141 for the third encoder (p0189)).
See also: p0121, p0131, p0141, p0142, p0151, p0161, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189
Remedy: Enter the missing component number or remove the component and restart commissioning.
See also: p0121, p0131, p0141, p0142, p0151, p0161, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189
A01306 Firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ component being updated
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Firmware update is active for at least one DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Remedy: None necessary.
This alarm automatically disappears after the firmware has been updated.
A01314 Topology: Component must not be present
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Connection number: %3
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For a component, "deactivate and not present" is set but this component is still in the topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Component number
Byte 2: Component class of the component
Byte 3: Connection number
Note: Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
Remedy: - remove the corresponding component.
- change the setting "deactivate and not present".
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
See also: p0105, p0125, p0145, p0155
A01315 Drive object not ready for operation
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For the active drive object involved, at least one activated component is missing.
Note:
All other active and operational drive objects can be in the "RUN" state.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1086 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: The alarm automatically disappears again with the following actions:
- deactivate the drive object involved (p0105 = 0).
- deactivate the components involved (p0125 = 0, p0145 = 0, p0155 = 0, p0165 = 0).
- re-insert the components involved.
See also: p0105, p0125, p0145, p0155
A01316 Drive object inactive and again ready for operation
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: If, when inserting a component of the target topology, an inactive, non-operational drive object becomes operational
again. The associated parameter of the component is, in this case, set to "activate" (p0125, p0145, p0155, p0165).
Note:
This is the only message that is displayed for a deactivated drive object.
Remedy: The alarm automatically disappears again with the following actions:
- activate the drive object involved (p0105 = 1).
- again withdraw the components involved.
See also: p0105 (Activate/deactivate drive object)
A01317 (N) Deactivated component again present
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: If a component of the target topology for an active drive object is inserted and the associated parameter of the com-
ponent is set to "deactivate" (p0125, p0145, p0155, p0165).
Note:
This is the only message that is displayed for a deactivated component.
Remedy: The alarm automatically disappears again with the following actions:
- activate the components involved (p0125 = 1, p0145 = 1, p0155 = 1, p0165 = 1).
- again withdraw the components involved.
See also: p0125 (Activate/deactivate power unit components), p0145 (Activate/deactivate encoder interface), p0155
(Voltage Sensing Module, activate/deactivate)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A01318 BICO: Deactivated interconnections present
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: This alarm is used in the following cases:
- If an inactive/non-operational drive object is active again/ready for operation
- If there are items in the list of BI/CI parameters (r9498[0...29], r9499[0...29])
- If the BICO interconnections saved in the list of BI/CI parameters (r9498[0...29], r9499[0...29]) have actually been
changed
Remedy: Reset alarm:
- Set p9496 to 1 or 2
or
- deactivate the drive object again.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1087
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01319 Inserted component not initialized
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, HUB, TB30, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Initialization is required for at least one inserted component.
This is only possible if the pulses are inhibited for all the drive objects.
Remedy: Activate pulse inhibit for all drive objects.
A01320 Topology: Drive object number does not exist in configuration
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A drive object number is missing in p0978
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Index of p0101 under which the missing drive object number can be determined.
Remedy: Set p0009 to 1 and change p0978:
Rules:
- p0978 must include all of the drive object numbers (p0101).
- it is not permissible for a drive object number to be repeated.
- by entering a 0, the drive objects with PZD are separated from those without PZD.
- only 2 partial lists are permitted. After the second 0, all values must be 0.
- dummy drive object numbers (255) are only permitted in the first partial list.
A01321 Topology: Drive object number does not exist in configuration
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: p0978 contains a drive object number that does not exist.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Index of p0978 under which the drive object number can be determined.
Remedy: Set p0009 to 1 and change p0978:
Rules:
- p0978 must include all of the drive object numbers (p0101).
- it is not permissible for a drive object number to be repeated.
- by entering a 0, the drive objects with PZD are separated from those without PZD.
- only 2 partial lists are permitted. After the second 0, all values must be 0.
- dummy drive object numbers (255) are only permitted in the first partial list.
A01322 Topology: Drive object number present twice in configuration
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A drive object number is present more than once in p0978.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Index of p0978 under which the involved drive object number is located.
Remedy: Set p0009 to 1 and change p0978:
Rules:
- p0978 must include all of the drive object numbers (p0101).
- it is not permissible for a drive object number to be repeated.
- by entering a 0, the drive objects with PZD are separated from those without PZD.
- only 2 partial lists are permitted. After the second 0, all values must be 0.
- dummy drive object numbers (255) are only permitted in the first partial list.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1088 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01323 Topology: More than two partial lists created
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Partial lists are available more than twice in p0978. After the second 0, all must be 0.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Index of p0978 under which the illegal value is located.
Remedy: Set p0009 to 1 and change p0978:
Rules:
- p0978 must include all of the drive object numbers (p0101).
- it is not permissible for a drive object number to be repeated.
- by entering a 0, the drive objects with PZD are separated from those without PZD.
- only 2 partial lists are permitted. After the second 0, all values must be 0.
- dummy drive object numbers (255) are only permitted in the first partial list.
A01324 Topology: Dummy drive object number incorrectly created
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In p0978, dummy drive object numbers (255) are only permitted in the first partial list.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Index of p0978 under which the illegal value is located.
Remedy: Set p0009 to 1 and change p0978:
Rules:
- p0978 must include all of the drive object numbers (p0101).
- it is not permissible for a drive object number to be repeated.
- by entering a 0, the drive objects with PZD are separated from those without PZD.
- only 2 partial lists are permitted. After the second 0, all values must be 0.
- dummy drive object numbers (255) are only permitted in the first partial list.
F01325 Topology: Component Number not present in target topology
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The component configured in a parameter (e.g. p0121, p0131, etc.) is not present in the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Configured Component Number that is not present in target topology.
Remedy: Establish topology and DO configuration consistency.
A01330 Topology: Quick commissioning not possible
Message value: Fault cause: %1, supplementary information: %2, preliminary component number: %3
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Unable to carry out a quick commissioning. The existing actual topology does not fulfill the requirements.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ccccbbaa hex: cccc = preliminary component number, bb = supplementary information, aa = fault cause
aa = 01 hex = 1 dec:
On one component illegal connections were detected.
- bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: For a Motor Module, more than one motor with DRIVE-CLiQ was detected.
- bb = 02 hex = 2 dec: For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, the DRIVE-CLiQ cable is not connected to a Motor Module.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1089
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
aa = 02 hex = 2 dec:
The topology contains too many components of a particular type.
- bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: There is more than one master Control Unit.
- bb = 02 hex = 2 dec: There is more than 1 infeed (8 for a parallel circuit configuration).
- bb = 03 hex = 3 dec: There are more than 10 Motor Modules (8 for a parallel circuit configuration).
- bb = 04 hex = 4 dec: There are more than 9 encoders.
- bb = 05 hex = 5 dec: There are more than 8 Terminal Modules.
- bb = 07 hex = 7 dec: Unknown component type
- bb = 08 hex = 8 dec: There are more than 6 drive slaves.
- bb = 09 hex = 9 dec: Connection of a drive slave not permitted.
- bb = 0a hex = 10 dec: There is no drive master.
- bb = 0b hex = 11 dec: There is more than one motor with DRIVE-CLiQ for a parallel circuit.
- cccc: Not used.
aa = 03 hex = 3 dec:
More than 16 components are connected at a DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the Control Unit.
- bb = 0, 1, 2, 3 means e.g. detected at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100, X101, X102, X103.
- cccc: Not used.
aa = 04 hex = 4 dec:
The number of components connected one after the other is greater than 125.
- bb: Not used.
- cccc = preliminary component number of the first component and component that resulted in the fault.
aa = 05 hex = 5 dec:
The component is not permissible for SERVO.
- bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: SINAMICS G available.
- bb = 02 hex = 2 dec: Chassis available.
- cccc = preliminary component number of the first component and component that resulted in the fault.
aa = 06 hex = 6 dec:
On one component illegal EEPROM data was detected. These must be corrected before the system continues to
boot.
- bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: The Order No. [MLFB] of the power unit that was replaced includes a space retainer. The
space retainer (*) must be replaced by a correct character.
- cccc = preliminary component number of the component with illegal EEPROM data.
aa = 07 hex = 7 dec:
The actual topology contains an illegal combination of components.
- bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: Active Line Module (ALM) and Basic Line Module (BLM).
- bb = 02 hex = 2 dec: Active Line Module (ALM) and Smart Line Module (SLM).
- bb = 03 hex = 3 dec: SIMOTION control (e.g. SIMOTION D445) and SINUMERIK component (e.g. NX15).
- bb = 04 hex = 4 dec: SINUMERIK control (e.g. SINUMERIK 730.net) and SIMOTION component (e.g. CX32).
- cccc: Not used.
Note:
Connection type and connection number are described in F01375.
See also: p0097 (Select drive object type), r0098 (Actual device topology), p0099 (Device target topology)
Remedy: - adapt the output topology to the permissible requirements.
- carry out commissioning using the commissioning software.
- for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ, connect the power and DRIVE-CLiQ cable to the same Motor Module (Single Motor
Module: DRIVE-CLiQ at X202, Double Motor Module: DRIVE-CLiQ from motor 1 (X1) to X202, from motor 2 (X2) to
X203).
Re aa = 06 hex = 6 dec and bb = 01 hex = 1 dec:
Correct the order number when commissioning using the commissioning software.
See also: p0097 (Select drive object type), r0098 (Actual device topology), p0099 (Device target topology)
A01331 Topology: At least one component not assigned to a drive object
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: At least one component is not assigned to a drive object.
- when commissioning, a component was not able to be automatically assigned to a drive object.
- the parameters for the data sets are not correctly set.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the unassigned component.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1090 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: This component is assigned to a drive object.
Check the parameters for the data sets.
Examples:
- power unit (p0121).
- motor (p0131, p0186).
- encoder interface (p0140, p0141, p0187 ... p0189).
- encoder (p0140, p0142, p0187 ... p0189).
- Terminal Module (p0151).
- option board (p0161).
F01340 Topology: Too many components on one line
Message value: Component number or connection number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For the selected communications clock cycle, too many DRIVE-CLiQ components are connected to one line of the
Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
xyy hex: x = fault cause, yy = component number or connection number.
1yy:
The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection on the CU is not sufficient for all read transfers.
2yy:
The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection on the CU is not sufficient for all write transfers.
3yy:
Cyclic communication is fully utilized.
4yy:
The DRIVE-CLiQ cycle starts before the earliest end of the application. An additional dead time must be added to
the control. Sign-of-life errors can be expected.
5yy:
Internal buffer overflow for net data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
6yy:
Internal buffer overflow for receive data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
7yy:
Internal buffer overflow for send data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
Remedy: Check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection:
Reduce the number of components on the DRIVE-CLiQ line involved and distribute these to other DRIVE-CLiQ con-
nections of the Control Unit. This means that communication is uniformly distributed over several communication
lines.
Re fault value = 1yy - 4yy in addition:
- increase the sampling times (p0112, p0115).
F01354 Topology: Actual topology indicates an illegal component
Message value: Fault cause: %1, component number: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The actual topology indicates at least one illegal component.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = cause.
xx = 1: Component at this Control Unit not permissible.
xx = 2: Component in combination with another component not permissible.
Note:
Pulse enable is prevented.
Remedy: Remove the illegal components and restart the system.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1091
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01355 Topology: Actual topology changed
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The device target topology (p0099) does not correspond to the device actual topology (r0098).
The fault only occurs if the topology was commissioned using the automatic internal device mechanism and not using
the commissioning software.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
See also: r0098 (Actual device topology), p0099 (Device target topology)
Remedy: One of the following counter-measures can be selected if no faults have occurred in the topology detection itself:
If commissioning was still not completed:
- carry out a self-commissioning routine (starting from p0009 = 1).
General: Set p0099 to r0098, set p0009 to 0; for existing Motor Modules, this results in servo drives being automat-
ically generated (p0107).
Generating servo drives: Set p0097 to 1, set p0009 to 0.
Generating vector drives: Set p0097 to 2, set p0009 to 0.
Generating vector drives with parallel circuit: Set p0097 to 12, set p0009 to 0.
In order to set configurations in p0108, before setting p0009 to 0, it is possible to first set p0009 to 2 and modify
p0108. The index corresponds to the drive object (p0107).
If commissioning was already completed:
- re-establish the original connections and re-connect power to the Control Unit.
- restore the factory setting for the complete equipment (all of the drives) and allow automatic self-commissioning
again.
- change the device parameterization to match the connections (this is only possible using the commissioning soft-
ware).
Notice:
Topology changes that result in this fault being generated cannot be accepted by the automatic function in the
device, but must be transferred using the commissioning software and parameter download. The automatic function
in the device only allows constant topology to be used. Otherwise, when the topology is changed, all of the previous
parameter settings are lost and replaced by the factory setting.
See also: r0098 (Actual device topology)
F01356 Topology: Defective components in actual topology
Message value: Fault cause: %1, Component number: %2, Connection number: %3
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The actual topology indicates at least one defective DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
zzyyxx hex:
zz = connection number of component before the defective component
yy = component number of component before the defective component
xx = fault cause
xx = 1: Component at this Control Unit not permissible.
Note:
Pulse enable is withdrawn and prevented.
Remedy: Remove the defective components and restart the system.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1092 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01360 Topology: Actual topology not permissible
Message value: Fault cause: %1, preliminary component number: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The detected actual topology is not permissible.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ccccbbaa hex: cccc = preliminary component number, aa = fault cause
aa = 01 hex = 1 dec:
Too many components were detected at the Control Unit. The maximum permissible number of components is 199.
aa = 02 hex = 2 dec:
The component type of a component is not known.
aa = 03 hex = 3 dec:
It is illegal to combine ALM and BLM.
aa = 04 hex = 4 dec:
It is illegal to combine ALM and SLM.
aa = 05 hex = 5 dec:
It is illegal to combine BLM and SLM.
aa = 06 hex = 6 dec:
A CX32 was not directly connected to a permitted Control Unit.
aa = 07 hex = 7 dec:
An NX10 or NX15 was not directly connected to a permitted Control Unit.
aa = 08 hex = 8 dec:
A component was connected to a Control Unit that is not permitted for this purpose.
aa = 0A hex = 10 dec:
Too many components of a particular type detected.
aa = 0B hex = 11 dec:
Too many components of a particular type detected on a single line.
Note:
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Re fault cause = 1:
Change the configuration. Connect less than 199 components to the Control Unit.
Re fault cause = 2:
Remove the component with unknown component type.
Re fault cause = 3, 4, 5:
Establish a valid combination.
Re fault cause = 6, 7:
Connect the expansion module directly to a permitted Control Unit.
Re fault cause = 8:
Remove component or use a permissible component.
Re fault cause = 10, 11:
Reduce the number of components.
A01361 Topology: Actual topology contains SINUMERIK and SIMOTION components
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The detected actual topology contains SINUMERIK and SIMOTION components.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex: cc = fault cause, bb = component class of the actual topology, aa = component number of the com-
ponent
cc = 01 hex = 1 dec:
An NX10 or NX15 was connected to a SIMOTION control.
cc = 02 hex = 2 dec:
A CX32 was connected to a SINUMERIK control.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1093
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Re alarm value = 1:
Replace all NX10 or NX15 by a CX32.
Re alarm value = 2:
Replace all CX32 by an NX10 or NX15.
A01362 Topology: Topology rule(s) broken
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: At least one topology rule for the SINAMICS S120 Combi has been broken.
In the event of a fault, the ramping up of the drive system is aborted and closed-loop drive control is not enabled.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The fault value indicates which rule has been broken.
1: The S120 Combi may only be wired via DRIVE-CLiQ socket X200 to X1 on the NCU.
2: Only one Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) may be connected to DRIVE-CLiQ socket X2 on the NCU. If a TM54 is
being used, it may only be wired via X500 to X2 on the NCU.
3: Only one DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module (hub) may be connected to DRIVE-CLiQ socket X3 on the NCU. If a hub is
being used, it may only be wired via X500 to X3 on the NCU.
4: Only Sensor Modules may be connected to DRIVE-CLiQ sockets X201 through X203 (3-axis) or X204 (4-axis) on
the S120 Combi.
5: Only one Single Motor Module or one Double Motor Module may be connected to DRIVE-CLiQ socket X205 (X204
is not available for 3-axis). The module must be wired to the S120 Combi via X200.
6: Only certain Motor Modules may be used for expansion axes.
7: If a Single Motor Module is being used as the first expansion axis, only one more Single Motor Module may be
connected (via X200 to X201 on the first Single Motor Module).
8: Only Sensor Modules may be connected to the corresponding DRIVE-CLiQ socket X202 on any Single Motor
Modules which may be present.
9. On the second Single Motor Module there must be nothing connected to X201.
10: If a Double Motor Module is used as an expansion axis, only Sensor Modules may be connected to X202 and
X203.
11: On the Double Motor Module there must be nothing connected to X201.
12: On the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) there must be nothing connected to X501.
13: On the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module, only Sensor Modules Cabinet (SMC) and Sensor Modules External (SME) may
be connected to X501 through X505.
Remedy: Evaluate the fault value and ensure compliance with the corresponding topology rule(s).
F01375 Topology: Actual topology, duplicate connection between two components
Message value: Preliminary component number: %1, component class: %2, connection number: %3
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When detecting the actual topology, a ring-type connection was detected.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ccbbaaaa hex:
cc = connection number
bb = component class
aaaa = preliminary component number of a component included in the ring
Component class:
1: Control Unit.
2: Motor Module.
3: Line Module.
4: Sensor Module (SM).
5: Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
6: Terminal Module (TM).
7: DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
8: Controller Extension 32 (CX32, NX10, NX15).
49: DRIVE-CLiQ components (non-listed components).
50: Option Slot (e.g. Terminal Board 30).
60: Encoder (e.g. EnDat).
70: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1094 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Component type:
Precise designation within a component class (e.g. "SMC20").
Connection number:
Consecutive numbers, starting from zero, of the appropriate connection or slot (e.g. DRIVE-CLiQ connection X100
on the Control Unit has the connection number 0).
Remedy: Output the fault value and remove the specified connection.
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
F01380 Topology: Actual topology, defective EEPROM
Message value: Preliminary component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: When detecting the actual topology, a component with a defective EEPROM was detected.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
bbbbaaaa hex:
aaaa = preliminary component number of the defective components
Remedy: Output the fault value and remove the defected component.
A01381 Topology: Comparison power unit shifted
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Component (target): %3, Connection number: %4
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a power unit in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to the
target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number
cc = component number
bb = component class
aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology
Note:
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb.
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
A01382 Topology: Comparison Sensor Module shifted
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Component (target): %3, Connection number: %4
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1095
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a Sensor Module in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to
the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number
cc = component number
bb = component class
aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology
Note:
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb.
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
A01383 Topology: Comparison Terminal Module shifted
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Component (target): %3, Connection number: %4
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a Terminal Module in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect
to the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number
cc = component number
bb = component class
aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology
Note:
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb.
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1096 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01384 Topology: Comparison DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module shifted
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Component (target): %3, Connection number: %4
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in the actual topology that has been shifted with
respect to the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number
cc = component number
bb = component class
aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology
Note:
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb.
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
A01385 Topology: Comparison CX32 shifted
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Component (target): %3, Connection number: %4
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a controller extension 32 (CX32) in the actual topology that has been shifted
with respect to the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number
cc = component number
bb = component class
aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology
Note:
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb.
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1097
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01386 Topology: Comparison DRIVE-CLiQ component shifted
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Component (target): %3, Connection number: %4
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a DRIVE-CLiQ component in the actual topology that has been shifted with
respect to the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number
cc = component number
bb = component class
aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology
Note:
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb.
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
A01387 Topology: Comparison option slot component shifted
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Component (target): %3, Connection number: %4
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a option slot component in the actual topology that has been shifted with
respect to the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number
cc = component number
bb = component class
aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology
Note:
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb.
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1098 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01388 Topology: Comparison EnDat encoder shifted
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Component (target): %3, Connection number: %4
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected an EnDat encoder in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect
to the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number
cc = component number
bb = component class
aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology
Note:
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb.
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
A01389 Topology: Comparison motor with DRIVE-CLiQ shifted
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Component (target): %3, Connection number: %4
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ in the actual topology that has been shifted with
respect to the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number
cc = component number
bb = component class
aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology
Note:
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb.
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1099
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01416 Topology: Comparison additional component in actual topology
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Connection number: %3
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has found a component in the actual topology which is not specified in the target topology.
The alarm value includes the component number and connection number of the component with which the additional
component is connected.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
cc = connection number
bb = component class of the additional component
aa = component number
Note:
- component class and connection number are described in F01375.
- components that are connected to this additional component are not operational.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- remove the additional component in the actual topology.
- download the target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software).
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
A01420 Topology: Comparison a component is different
Message value: Component number: %1, component class target: %2, component class actual: %3, fault cause: %4
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in relation to one component.
There are differences in the electronic rating plate.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex: aa = component number of the component, bb = component class of the target topology, cc = com-
ponent class of the actual topology, dd = fault cause
dd = 01 hex = 1 dec:
Different component type.
dd = 02 hex = 2 dec:
Different Order No.
dd = 03 hex = 3 dec:
Different manufacturer.
dd = 04 hex = 4 dec:
Connection changed over for a multi-component slave (e.g. Double Motor Module), defective EEPROM data in the
electronic rating plate, or only part of a multi-component slave set to "deactivate and not present".
dd = 05 hex = 5 dec:
A CX32 was replaced by an NX10 or NX15.
dd = 06 hex = 6 dec:
An NX10 or NX15 was replaced by a CX32.
Note:
Component class and component type are described in F01375.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- check the component soft-wired connections against the hardware configuration of the drive unit in the commis-
sioning software and correct differences.
- parameterize the topology comparison of all components (p9906).
- parameterize the topology comparison of one components (p9907, p9908).
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1100 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01421 Topology: Comparison different components
Message value: Component number: %1, component class target: %2, component class actual: %3, fault cause: %4
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in relation to one component.
The component class, the component type or the number of connections differ.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex: aa = component number of the component, bb = component class of the target topology, cc = com-
ponent class of the actual topology, dd = fault cause
dd = 01 hex = 1 dec:
Different component class.
dd = 02 hex = 2 dec:
Different component type.
dd = 03 hex = 3 dec:
Different Order No.
dd = 04 hex = 4 dec:
Different number of connections.
Note:
Component class, component type and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Check the component soft-wired connections against the hardware configuration of the drive unit in the commission-
ing software and correct differences.
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
A01425 Topology: Comparison serial number of a component is different
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Differences: %3
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in relation to one component.
The serial number is different.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
cc = number of differences
bb = component class
aa = component number of the component
Note:
The component class is described in F01375.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- change over the actual topology to match the target topology.
- download the target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software).
Re byte cc:
cc = 1 --> can be acknowledged using p9904 or p9905.
cc > 1 --> can be acknowledged using p9905 and can be deactivated using p9906 or p9907/p9908.
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
See also: p9904 (Topology comparison, acknowledge differences), p9905 (Device specialization), p9906 (Topology
comparison, comparison stage of all components), p9907 (Topology comparison, comparison stage of the compo-
nent number), p9908 (Topology comparison, comparison stage of a component)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1101
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01428 Topo: Comparison connection of a component is different
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Connection number1: %3, Connection number2: %4
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in relation to one component.
A component was connected to another connection.
The different connections of a component are described in the alarm value:
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number of the target topology
cc = connection number of the actual topology
bb = component class
aa = component number
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- change over the actual topology to match the target topology.
- download the target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software).
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
See also: p9904 (Topology comparison, acknowledge differences)
A01429 Topology: Comparison connection is different for more than one component
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Connection number1: %3, Connection number2: %4
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A topology comparison has found differences between the actual and target topology for several components. A
component was connected to another connection.
The different connections of a component are described in the alarm value:
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number of the target topology
cc = connection number of the actual topology
bb = component class
aa = component number
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- change over the actual topology to match the target topology.
- download the target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software).
Note:
In the software, a Double Motor Module behaves just like two separate DRIVE-CLiQ nodes. If a Double Motor Module
is re-inserted, this can result in several differences in the actual topology.
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1102 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01451 Topology: Target topology is invalid
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error was detected in the target topology.
The target topology is invalid.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ccccbbaa hex: cccc = index error, bb = component number, aa = fault cause
aa = 1B hex = 27 dec: Error not specified.
aa = 1C hex = 28 dec: Value illegal.
aa = 1D hex = 29 dec: Incorrect ID.
aa = 1E hex = 30 dec: Incorrect ID length.
aa = 1F hex = 31 dec: Too few indices left.
aa = 20 hex = 32 dec: component not connected to Control Unit.
Remedy: Reload the target topology using the commissioning software.
F01470 Topology:Target topology ring-type connection detected
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Connection number: %3
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A ring-type connection was detected when writing to the target topology.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
cc = connection number
bb = component class
aa = component number of a component included in the ring
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
Remedy: Read out the fault value and remove one of the specified connections.
Then download the target topology again using the commissioning software.
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
F01475 Topology: Target topology duplicate connection between two components
Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Connection number1: %3, Connection number2: %4
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When writing the target topology, a duplicate connection between two components was detected.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number 2 of the duplicate connection
cc = connection number 1 of the duplicate connection
bb = component class
aa = component number of one of the components connected twice
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
Remedy: Read out the fault value and remove one of the two specified connections.
Then download the target topology again using the commissioning software.
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1103
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01481 Topology: Comparison power unit missing in the actual topology
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a power unit in the target topology that is not available in the actual topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Remedy: - delete the drive belonging to the power unit in the commissioning software project and download the new configu-
ration to the drive unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.
- check the 24 V supply voltage.
- check that the power unit is working properly.
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
A01482 Topology: Comparison Sensor Module missing in the actual topology
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a Sensor Module in the target topology that is not available in the actual topol-
ogy.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Remedy: - re-configure the drive belonging to the Sensor Module in the commissioning software project (encoder configura-
tion) and download the new configuration to the drive unit.
- delete the drive belonging to the Sensor Module in the commissioning software project and download the new con-
figuration to the drive unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.
- check the 24 V supply voltage.
- check that the Sensor Module is working properly.
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
A01483 Topology: Comparison Terminal Module missing in the actual topology
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a Terminal Module in the target topology that is not available in the actual
topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Remedy: - delete the Terminal Module in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive
unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.
- check the 24 V supply voltage.
- check that the Terminal Module is working properly.
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1104 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01484 Topology: Comparison DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module missing in the actual topology
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in the target topology that does not exist in the
actual topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Remedy: - delete the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to
the drive unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.
- check the 24 V supply voltage.
- test the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module to ensure that it functions properly.
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
A01485 Topology: Comparison CX32 missing in the actual topology
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a controller extension 32 (CX32) in the target topology that is not available
in the actual topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Remedy: - delete the CX32 / NX in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.
- check the 24 V supply voltage.
- check that CX32/NX functions correctly.
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
A01486 Topology: Comparison DRIVE-CLiQ components missing in the actual topology
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a DRIVE-CLiQ component in the target topology that is not available in the
actual topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Remedy: - delete the drive belonging to this component in the commissioning software project and download the new config-
uration to the drive unit.
- re-configure the drive belonging to this component in the commissioning software project and download the new
configuration to the drive unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.
- check the 24 V supply voltage.
- check that the component is working properly.
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1105
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01487 Topology: Comparison option slot components missing in the actual topology
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected an option slot module in the target topology that is not available in the actual
topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Remedy: - delete the option board in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit.
- re-configure the drive unit in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive
unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check that the option board is functioning correctly
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
A01488 Topology: Comparison EnDat encoder missing in the actual topology
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected an EnDat encoder in the target topology that is not available in the actual
topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Remedy: - re-configure the drive belonging to the encoder in the commissioning software project (encoder configuration) and
download the new configuration to the drive unit.
- delete the drive belonging to the encoder in the commissioning software project and download the new configura-
tion to the drive unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
A01489 Topology: Comparison motor with DRIVE-CLiQ missing in the actual topology
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ in the target topology that is not available in the
actual topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Remedy: - re-configure the drive belonging to this motor in the commissioning software project and download the new config-
uration to the drive unit.
- re-configure the drive belonging to this motor in the commissioning software project and download the new config-
uration to the drive unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.
- check that the motor is working properly.
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. set-
point/actual value comparison).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1106 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01505 (A) BICO: Interconnection cannot be established
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A PROFIdrive telegram has been set (p0922).
An interconnection contained in the telegram was not able to be established.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter receiver that should be changed.
Remedy: Establish another interconnection.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F01506 (A) BICO: No standard telegram
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The standard telegram in p0922 is not maintained and therefore p0922 is set to 999.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
BICO parameter for which the write attempt was unsuccessful.
Remedy: Again set the required standard telegram (p0922).
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A01507 (F, N) BICO: Interconnections to inactive objects present
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: There are BICO interconnections as signal sink from a drive object that is either inactive/not operational.
The BI/CI parameters involved are listed in r9498.
The associated BO/CO parameters are listed in r9499.
The list of the BICO interconnections to other drive objects is displayed in r9491 and r9492 of the deactivated drive
object.
Note:
r9498 and r9499 are only written to, if p9495 is not set to 0.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of BICO interconnections found to inactive drive objects.
Remedy: - set all open BICO interconnections centrally to the factory setting with p9495 = 2.
- make the non-operational drive object active/operational again (re-insert or activate components).
Reaction upon F: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A01508 BICO: Interconnections to inactive objects exceeded
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The maximum number of BICO interconnections (signal sinks) when deactivating a drive object was exceeded.
When deactivating a drive object, all BICO interconnections (signal sinks) are listed in the following parameters:
- r9498[0...29]: List of the BI/CI parameters involved.
- r9499[0...29]: List of the associated BO/CO parameters.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1107
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: The alarm automatically disappears as soon as no BICO interconnection (value = 0) is entered in r9498[29] and
r9499[29].
Notice:
When reactivating the drive object, all BICO interconnections should be checked and if required, re-established.
F01510 BICO: Signal source is not float type
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The requested connector output does not have the correct data type. This interconnection is not established.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number to which an interconnection should be made (connector output).
Remedy: Interconnect this connector input with a connector output having a float data type.
F01511 (A) BICO: Interconnection between different scalings
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The requested interconnection was established. However, a conversion is made between the BICO output and BICO
input using the reference values.
- the BICO output has different normalized units than the BICO input.
- message only for interconnections within a drive object.
Example:
The BICO output has, as normalized unit, voltage and the BICO input has current.
This means that the factor p2002 (contains the reference value for current) / p2001 (contains the reference value for
voltage) is calculated between the BICO output and BICO input.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of the BICO input (signal sink).
Remedy: No correction needed.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F01512 BICO: No scaling available
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An attempt was made to determine a conversion factor for a scaling that does not exist.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Unit (e.g. corresponding to SPEED) for which an attempt was made to determine a factor.
Remedy: Apply scaling or check the transfer value.
F01513 (A) BICO: Spanning DO between different scalings
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The requested interconnection was established. However, a conversion is made between the BICO output and BICO
input using the reference values.
An interconnection is made between different drive objects and the BICO output has different normalized units than
the BICO input or the normalized units are the same but the reference values are different.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1108 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Example:
The BICO output has, as standard unit, voltage and the BICO input has current; both lie in different drive objects.
This means that the factor p2002 (contains the reference value for current) / p2001 (contains the reference value for
voltage) is calculated between the BICO output and BICO input.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of the BICO input (signal sink).
Remedy: None necessary.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A01514 (F) BICO: Error when writing during a reconnect
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: During a reconnect operation (e.g. while booting or downloading - but can also occur in normal operation) a param-
eter was not able to be written to.
Example:
When writing to a double word BICO input in the second index, the memory areas overlap (e.g. p8861). The param-
eter is then reset to the factory setting.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of the BICO input (signal sink).
Remedy: None necessary.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
F01515 (A) BICO: Writing to parameter not permitted as the master control is active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: While changing the number of CDS or when copying from CDS, the master control was active.
Remedy: None necessary.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A01590 (F) Drive: Motor maintenance interval expired
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, HUB, TB30, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected service/maintenance interval for this motor was reached.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Motor data set number.
See also: p0650 (Actual motor operating hours), p0651 (Motor operating hours maintenance interval)
Remedy: carry out service/maintenance and reset the service/maintenance interval (p0651).
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1109
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01600 SI CU: STOP A initiated
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function in the Control Unit (CU) has detected a fault and initiated a STOP A
(pulse suppression via the safety shutdown path of the Control Unit).
- forced checking procedure of the safety shutdown path of the Control Unit unsuccessful.
- subsequent response to fault F01611 (defect in a monitoring channel).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: Stop request from the Motor Module.
1005: Pulses suppressed although STO not selected and there is no internal STOP A present.
1010: Pulses enabled although STO is selected or an internal STOP A is present.
1015: Feedback of the safe pulse suppression for Motor Modules connected in parallel are different.
9999: Subsequent response to fault F01611.
Remedy: - select Safe Torque Off and deselect again.
- replace the Motor Module involved.
Re fault value = 9999:
- carry out diagnostics for fault F01611.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
F01611 SI CU: Defect in a monitoring channel
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function in the Control Unit (CU) has detected a fault in the data cross-check
between the CU and Motor Module (MM) and initiated a STOP F.
As a result of this fault, after the parameterized transition has expired (p9658), fault F01600 (SI CU: STOP A initiated)
is output.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: Stop request from the Motor Module.
1 ... 999:
Number of the cross-checked data that resulted in this fault. This number is also displayed in r9795.
1: SI monitoring clock cycle (r9780, r9880).
2: SI enable safety functions (p9601, p9801). Crosswise data comparison is only carried out for the supported bits.
3: SI SGE changeover tolerance time (p9650, p9850).
4: SI transition period STOP F to STOP A (p9658, p9858).
5: SI enable Safe Brake Control (p9602, p9802).
6: SI Motion enable, safety-relevant functions (p9501, internal value).
7: SI pulse suppression delay time for Safe Stop 1 (p9652, p9852).
8: SI PROFIsafe address (p9610, p9810).
9: SI debounce time for STO/SBC/SS1 (MM) (p9651, p9851).
11: SI Safe Brake Adapter mode, BICO interconnection (p9621, p9821).
12: SI Safe Brake Adapter relay ON time (p9622[0], p9822[0]).
13: SI Safe Brake Adapter relay OFF time (p9622[1], p9822[1]).
1000: Watchdog timer has expired. Within the time of approx. 5 * p9650 too many switching operations have
occurred at terminal EP of the Motor Module, or STO (also as subsequent response) was initiated too frequently via
PROFIsafe/TM54F.
1001, 1002: Initialization error, change timer / check timer.
2000: Status of the STO selection on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different.
2001: Feedback signal for safe pulse suppression on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different.
2002: Status of the delay timer SS1 on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different.
2004: Status of the STO selection for modules connected in parallel are different.
2005: Feedback signal of the safe pulse suppression on the Control Unit and Motor Modules connected in parallel
are different.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1110 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
6000 ... 6999:
Error in the PROFIsafe control. The significance of the individual message values is described in safety message
C01711 of the Control Unit.
Remedy: Re fault value = 1 ... 5 and 7 ... 999:
- check the cross-checked data that resulted in a STOP F.
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
Re fault value = 6:
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
Re fault value = 1000:
- check the EP terminal at the Motor Module (contact problems).
- PROFIsafe: Remove contact problems/faults at the PROFIBUS master/PROFINET controller.
- check the wiring of the fail-safe inputs at the TM54F (contact problems).
Re fault value = 1001, 1002:
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
Re fault value = 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005:
- check the tolerance time SGE changeover and if required, increase the value (p9650/p9850, p9652/p9852).
- check the wiring of the safety-relevant inputs (SGE) (contact problems).
- check the causes of the STO selection in r9772. When the SMM functions are active (p9501 = 1), STO can also be
selected using these functions.
- replace the Motor Module involved.
Re fault value = 6000 ... 6999:
Refer to the description of the message values in safety message C01711.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
EP: Enable Pulses (pulse enable)
MM: Motor Module
SGE: Safety-relevant input
SI: Safety Integrated
SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring
SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204)
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
F01612 SI CU: STO inputs for power units connected in parallel different
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function on the Control Unit (CU) has identified different states of the AND'ed
STO inputs for power units connected in parallel and has initiated a STOP F.
As a result of this fault, after the parameterized transition has expired (p9658), fault F01600 (SI CU: STOP A initiated)
is output.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Binary image of the digital inputs of the Control Unit that are used as signal source for the function "Safe Torque Off".
Remedy: - check the tolerance time SGE changeover and if required, increase the value (p9650).
- check the wiring of the safety-relevant inputs (SGE) (contact problems).
Note:
CU: Control Unit
SGE: Safety-relevant input
SI: Safety Integrated
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1111
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
N01620 (F, A) SI CU: Safe Torque Off active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The "Safe Torque Off" (STO) function has been selected on the Control Unit (CU) using the input terminal and is
active.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
Remedy: None necessary.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
SI: Safety Integrated
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
Reaction upon F: OFF2
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
N01621 (F, A) SI CU: Safe Stop 1 active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The "Safe Stop 1" (SS1) function has been selected on the Control Unit (CU) and is active.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
Remedy: None necessary.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
SI: Safety Integrated
SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204)
Reaction upon F: OFF3
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F01625 SI CU: Sign-of-life error in safety data
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function in the Control Unit (CU) has detected an error in the sign-of-life of the
safety data between the CU and Motor Module (MM) and initiated a STOP A.
- there is either a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error or communication has failed.
- a time slice overflow of the safety software has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1112 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - select Safe Torque Off and deselect again.
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
- deselect all drive functions that are not absolutely necessary.
- reduce the number of drives.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
F01630 SI CU: Brake control error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function in the Control Unit (CU) has detected a brake control error and initiated
a STOP A.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
10, 11:
Fault in "open holding brake" operation.
- Parameter p1278 incorrectly set.
- No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1 and p9602/p9802 = 0 (SBC
deactivated)).
- Ground fault in brake cable.
20:
Fault in "brake open" state.
- Short-circuit in brake winding.
30, 31:
Fault in "close holding brake" operation.
- No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1 and p9602/p9802 = 0 (SBC
deactivated)).
- Short-circuit in brake winding.
40:
Fault in "brake closed" state.
50:
Fault in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit or communication fault between the Control Unit and Motor Mod-
ule (brake control).
80:
SafeBrakeAdapter: Fault in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit or communication fault between Control Unit
and Motor Module (brake control diagnostics).
Note:
The following causes may apply to fault values:
- motor cable is not shielded correctly.
- defect in control circuit of the Motor Module.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1113
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check parameter p1278 (for SBC, only p1278 = 0 is permissible).
- select Safe Torque Off and deselect again.
- check the motor holding brake connection.
- check the function of the motor holding brake.
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
- check that the electrical cabinet design and cable routing are in compliance with EMC regulations (e.g. shield of the
motor cable and brake conductors are connected with the shield connecting plate and the motor connectors are
tightly screwed to the housing).
- replace the Motor Module involved.
Operation with Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter:
- check the Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter connection.
- replace the Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
SBC: Safe Brake Control
SI: Safety Integrated
F01649 SI CU: Internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An internal error in the Safety Integrated software on the Control Unit has occurred.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- re-commission the "Safety Integrated" function and carry out a POWER ON.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the Control Unit.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
F01650 SI CU: Acceptance test required
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function in the Control Unit requires an acceptance test.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
130: Safety parameters for the Motor Module not available.
1000: Reference and actual checksum on the Control Unit are not identical (booting).
- at least one checksum-checked piece of data is defective.
2000: Reference and actual checksum on the Control Unit are not identical (commissioning mode).
- reference checksum incorrectly entered into the Control Unit (p9799 not equal to r9798).
- when deactivating the safety functions, p9501 or p9503 are not deleted.
2001: Reference and actual checksum on the Motor Module are not identical (commissioning mode).
- reference checksum incorrectly entered into the Motor Module (p9899 not equal to r9898).
- when deactivating the safety functions, p9501 or p9503 are not deleted.
2002: Enable of safety-related functions between the Control Unit and Motor Module differ (p9601 not equal to
p9801).
2003: Acceptance test is required as a safety parameter has been changed.
2004: An acceptance test is required because a project with enabled safety-functions has been downloaded.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1114 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2005: The Safety LogBook has identified that a functional safety checksum has changed. An acceptance test is
required.
2010: Safe Brake Control is enabled differently between the Control Unit and Motor Module (p9602 not equal to
p9802).
2020: Error when saving the safety parameters for the Motor Module.
3003: Acceptance test is required as a hardware-related safety parameter has been changed.
3005: The Safety LogBook has identified that a hardware-related safety checksum has changed. An acceptance test
is required.
9999: Subsequent response of another safety-related fault that occurred when booting that requires an acceptance
test.
Remedy: Re fault value = 130:
- carry out safety commissioning routine.
Re fault value = 1000:
- again carry out safety commissioning routine.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
Re fault value = 2000:
- check the safety parameters in the Control Unit and adapt the reference checksum (p9799).
Re fault value = 2001:
- check the safety parameters in the Motor Module and adapt the reference checksum (p9899).
Re fault value = 2002:
- enable the safety-related functions in the Control Unit and check in the Motor Module (p9601 = p9801).
Re fault value = 2003, 2004, 2005:
- Carry out an acceptance test and generate an acceptance report.
The procedure when carrying out an acceptance test as well as an example of the acceptance report are provided
in the documentation for SINAMICS Safety Integrated.
The fault with fault value 3005 can only be acknowledged when the "STO" function is deselected.
Re fault value = 2010:
- check enable of the safety-related brake control in the Control Unit and Motor Module (p9602 = p9802).
Re fault value = 2020:
- again carry out safety commissioning routine.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
Re fault value = 3003:
- carry out the function checks for the modified hardware and generate an acceptance report.
The procedure when carrying out an acceptance test as well as an example of the acceptance report are provided
in the following literature:
SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Safety Integrated
Re fault value = 3005:
- carry out the function checks for the modified hardware and generate an acceptance report.
The fault with fault value 3005 can only be acknowledged when the "STO" function is deselected.
Re fault value = 9999:
- carry out diagnostics for the other safety-related fault that is present.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
STO: Safe Torque Off
See also: p9799 (SI reference checksum SI parameters (Control Unit)), p9899 (SI reference checksum SI parame-
ters (Motor Module))
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1115
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01651 SI CU: Synchronization safety time slices unsuccessful
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The "Safety Integrated" function requires a synchronization of the safety time slices between the Control Unit (CU)
and Motor Module (MM) and between the Control Unit and the higher-level control. This synchronization routine was
unsuccessful.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
150: Fault in the synchronization to the PROFIBUS master.
All other values: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
See also: p9510 (SI Motion clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master)
Remedy: Re fault value = 150:
- check the setting of p9510 (SI Motion clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master) and if required, correct.
General:
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
- upgrade the software of the higher-level control.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
F01652 SI CU: Illegal monitoring clock cycle
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: One of the Safety Integrated monitoring clock cycles is not permissible:
- the drive-based monitoring clock cycle cannot be maintained due to the communication conditions required in the
system.
- the monitoring clock cycle for safe motion monitoring functions with the higher-level control is not permissible
(p9500).
- The sampling time for the current controller (p0112, p0115) cannot be supported.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
- for enabled drive-based SI monitoring (p9601/p9801 > 0):
Minimum setting for the monitoring clock cycle (in µs).
- with the motion monitoring function enabled (p9501 > 0):
100: No matching monitoring clock cycle was able to be found.
101: The monitoring clock cycle is not an integer multiple of the actual value sensing clock cycle.
102: An error has occurred when transferring the DP clock cycle to the Motor Module (MM).
103: An error has occurred when transferring the DP clock cycle to the Sensor Module.
104,105:
- four times the current controller sampling time is greater than 1 ms when operating with a non-isochronous PRO-
FIBUS.
- four times the current controller sampling time is greater than the DP clock cycle when operating with an isochro-
nous PROFIBUS.
- The DP clock cycle is not an integer multiple of the sampling time of the current controller.
106: The monitoring clock cycle does not match the monitoring clock cycle of the TM54F.
107: Four times the current controller sampling time is greater than the actual value sensing clock cycle (p9511) or
the actual value sensing clock cycle is not an integer multiple of the current controller sampling time.
108: The parameterized actual value sensing clock cycle cannot be set on this component.
109: If the motion monitoring functions have been parameterized as encoderless (p9506), the actual value sensing
clock cycle (p9511) and the current controller clock cycle must be identical.
110: The actual value sensing clock cycle (p9511) for safety with encoder (p9506 = 0) is less than 2 ms for this Con-
trol Unit (e.g. CU305).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1116 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: For enabled drive-based SI monitoring (p9601/p9801 > 0):
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
For enabled motion monitoring function (p9501 > 0):
- correct the monitoring clock cycle (p9500) and carry out POWER ON.
Re fault value = 101:
- actual value sensing clock cycle corresponds to position control clock cycle/DP clock cycle (factory setting).
- for the drive-based motion monitoring functions (p9601/p9801bit 2 = 1) the actual value sensing clock cycle can be
directly parameterized in P9511/p9311.
Re fault value = 104, 105:
- set a separate actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511.
- restrict operation to a maximum of two vector drives. For the standard setting in p0112, p0115, the current controller
sampling time is automatically reduced to 250 µs. If the standard values were changed, then the current controller
sampling time (p0112, p0115) should be appropriately set.
- increase the DP clock cycle for operation with a clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS so that there is a multiple
clock cycle ratio of at least 4:1 between the DP clock cycle and the current controller sampling time. A clock cycle
ratio of at least 8:1 is recommended.
- With firmware version 2.5, please ensure that parameter p9510 is set to 1 in the drive (clock cycle synchronous
operation).
Re fault value = 106:
- set the parameters for the monitoring clock cycles the same (p10000 and p9500 / p9300).
Re fault value = 107:
- set an actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511 that matches the current controller clock cycle. A clock cycle ratio
of at least 8:1 is recommended.
Re fault value = 108:
- set a suitable actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511.
- if the DP clock cycle is used as the actual value sensing clock cycle for operation with isochronous PROFIBUS
(p9511 = 0), then a suitable DP clock cycle must be configured.
A suitable multiple of the DP clock cycle (e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10) must be parameterized on the D410. Otherwise,
the clock cycle must be set to less than 8 ms.
Re fault value = 109:
- set the actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511 to the same value as the current controller clock cycle (p115).
Re fault value = 110:
- set the actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511 to 2 ms or higher.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
F01653 SI CU: PROFIBUS configuration error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: There is a PROFIBUS configuration error for using Safety Integrated monitoring functions with a higher-level control
(SINUMERIK or F-PLC).
Note:
For safety functions that have been enabled, this fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
200: A safety slot for receive data from the control has not been configured.
210, 220: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the control has an unknown format.
230: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
231: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
240: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the SINUMERIK has the incorrect length.
250: A PROFIsafe slot is configured in the higher-level F control, however PROFIsafe is not enabled in the drive.
300: A safety slot for the send data to the control has not been configured.
310, 320: The configured safety slot for the send data to the control has an unknown format.
330: The configured safety slot for the send data to the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
331: The configured safety slot for the send data to the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
340: The configured safety slot for the send data to the SINUMERIK has the incorrect length.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1117
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: The following generally applies:
- check and, if necessary, correct the PROFIBUS configuration of the safety slot on the master side.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
Re fault value = 250:
- remove the PROFIsafe configuring in the higher-level F control or enable PROFIsafe in the drive.
Re fault value = 231, 331:
- configure the PROFIsafe telegram matching the parameterization in the F-PLC.
The following applies for p9501.30 = 1 (FDI via PROFIsafe is enabled): PROFIsafe telegram 900 must be configured.
The following applies for p9501.30 = 0 (FDI via PROFIsafe not enabled): PROFIsafe telegram 30 must be config-
ured.
F01655 SI CU: Align monitoring functions
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An error has occurred when aligning the Safety Integrated monitoring functions on the Control Unit (CU) and Motor
Module (MM). Control Unit and Motor Module were not able to determine a common set of supported SI monitoring
functions.
- there is either a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error or communication has failed.
- Safety Integrated software releases on the Control Unit and Motor Module are not compatible with one another.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
F01656 SI CU: Motor Module parameter error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: When accessing the Safety Integrated parameters for the Motor Module (MM) in the non-volatile memory, an error
has occurred.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
129: Safety parameters for the Motor Module corrupted.
131: Internal Motor Module software error.
132: Communication errors when uploading or downloading the safety parameters for the Motor Module.
255: Internal software error on the Control Unit.
Remedy: - re-commission the safety functions.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
Re fault value = 132:
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1118 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01659 SI CU: Write request for parameter rejected
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The write request for one or several Safety Integrated parameters on the Control Unit (CU) was rejected.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The Safety Integrated password is not set.
2: A reset of the drive parameters was selected. However, the Safety Integrated parameters were not reset, as Safety
Integrated is presently enabled.
3: The interconnected STO input is in the simulation mode.
10: An attempt was made to enable the STO function although this cannot be supported.
11: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function although this cannot be supported.
12: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function although this cannot be supported for a parallel circuit config-
uration.
13: An attempt was made to enable the SS1 function although this cannot be supported.
14: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe communication - although this cannot be supported or the version
of the PROFIsafe driver used on the CU and MM is different.
15: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive although these cannot be
supported.
16: An attempt was made to enable the STO function although this cannot be supported when the internal voltage
protection (p1231) is enabled.
17: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe function although this cannot be supported for a parallel circuit
configuration.
18: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe function for Basic Functions although this cannot be supported.
19: An attempt was made to enable the SBA (Safe Brake Adapter), although this cannot be supported.
See also: p0970, p3900, r9771, r9871
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
- set the Safety Integrated password (p9761).
Re fault value = 2:
- Inhibit Safety Integrated (p9501, p9601) or reset safety parameters (p0970 = 5), then reset the drive parameters
again.
Re fault value = 3:
- end the simulation mode for the digital input (p0795).
Re fault value = 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19:
- check whether there are faults in the safety function alignment between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved (F01655, F30655) and if required, carry out diagnostics for the faults involved.
- use a Motor Module that supports the required function ("Safe Torque Off", "Safe Brake Control",
"PROFIsafe/PROFIsafe V2", "motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive").
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
Re fault value = 16:
- inhibit the internal voltage protection (p1231).
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SBC: Safe Brake Control
SI: Safety Integrated
SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204)
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
SBA: Safe Brake Adapter
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9601 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive
(Control Unit)), p9620 (SI signal source for STO (SH)/SBC/SS1 (Control Unit)), p9761 (SI password input), p9801
(SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Motor Module))
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1119
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01660 SI CU: Safety-related functions not supported
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The Motor Module (MM) does not support the safety-related functions (e.g. the Motor Module version is not the cor-
rect one). Safety Integrated cannot be commissioned.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Remedy: - use a Motor Module that supports the safety-related functions.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
F01663 SI CU: Copying the SI parameters rejected
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: One of the following values is saved in p9700 or was entered offline: 87 or 208.
This is the reason that when booting, an attempt is made to copy SI parameters from the Control Unit to the Motor
Module. However, no safety-relevant function has been selected on the Control Unit (p9501 = 0, p9601 = 0). This is
the reason that copying is not possible.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
See also: p9700 (SI Motion copy function)
Remedy: - Set p9700 to 0.
- Check p9501 and p9601 and if required, correct.
- Restart the copying function by entering the corresponding value into p9700.
F01664 SI CU: No automatic firmware update
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: During booting, the system detected that the "Firmware update automatic" function (p7826 = 1) was not activated.
This function must be activated for automatic firmware updates/downgrades to prevent impermissible version com-
binations when safety functions are enabled.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
See also: p7826 (Firmware update automatic)
Remedy: For enabled drive-based SI monitoring:
1. Activate the "Firmware update automatic" function (p7826 = 1).
2. Save the parameters (p0977 = 1) and carry out a POWER ON.
When deactivating drive-based SI monitoring (p9601 = 0), the fault can be acknowledged after exiting the safety
commissioning mode.
F01665 SI CU: System is defective
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Before the drive booted the last time, it detected a defect in the system and carried out an emergency stop.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1120 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on).
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
F01670 SI Motion: Invalid parameterization Sensor Module
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The parameterization of a Sensor Module used for Safety Integrated is not permissible.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: No encoder was parameterized for Safety Integrated.
2: An encoder was parameterized for Safety Integrated that does not have an A/B track (sine/cosine).
3: The encoder data set selected for Safety Integrated is still not valid.
4: A communication error with the encoder has occurred.
10: For an encoder used for Safety Integrated, not all of the Drive Data Sets (DDS) are assigned to the same Encoder
Data Set (EDS) (p0187 ... p0189).
Remedy: Re fault value = 1, 2:
- use and parameterize an encoder that Safety Integrated supports (encoder with track A/B sine-wave, p0404.4 = 1).
Re fault value = 3:
- check whether the drive or drive commissioning function is active and if required, exit this (p0009 = p00010 = 0),
save the parameters (p0971 = 1) and carry out a POWER ON
Re fault value = 4:
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Sensor Module
involved and if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
Re fault value = 10:
- align the EDS assignment of all of the encoders used for Safety Integrated (p0187 ... p0189).
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
F01671 SI Motion: Parameterization encoder error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The parameterization of the encoder used by Safety Integrated is different to the parameterization of the standard
encoder.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of the non-corresponding safety parameter.
Remedy: Align the encoder parameterization between the safety encoder and the standard encoder.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1121
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01672 SI CU: Motor Module software/hardware incompatible
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The existing Motor Module software does not support safe motion monitoring or is not compatible to the software on
the Control Unit or there is a communications error between the Control Unit and Motor Module.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The existing Motor Module software does not support the safe motion monitoring function.
2, 3, 6, 8: There is a communications error between the Control Unit and Motor Module.
4, 5, 7: The existing Motor Module software is not compatible to the software on the Control Unit.
9: The current Motor Module software does not support safe encoderless motion monitoring.
Remedy: - check whether there are faults in the safety function alignment between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved
(F01655, F30655) and if required, carry out the appropriate diagnostics routine for the particular faults.
Re fault value = 1:
- use a Motor Module that supports safe motion monitoring
Re fault value = 2, 3, 6, 8:
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
Re fault value = 4, 5, 7:
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
Re fault value = 9:
- upgrade the Motor Module firmware.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
F01673 SI Motion: Sensor Module software/hardware incompatible
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The existing Sensor Module software and/or hardware does not support the safe motion monitoring function with the
higher-level control.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - upgrade the Sensor Module software.
- use a Sensor Module that supports the safe motion monitoring function.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
F01680 SI Motion CU: Checksum error safety monitoring functions
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The actual checksum calculated by the drive and entered in r9728 via the safety-relevant parameters does not match
the reference checksum saved in p9729 at the last machine acceptance.
Safety-relevant parameters have been changed or a fault is present.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: Checksum error for SI parameters for motion monitoring.
1: Checksum error for SI parameters for actual values.
2: Checksum error for SI parameters for component assignment.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1122 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check the safety-relevant parameters and if required, correct.
- perform a POWER ON if safety parameters requiring a POWER ON have been modified.
- carry out an acceptance test.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
F01681 SI Motion CU: Incorrect parameter value
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The parameter cannot be parameterized with this value.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number with the incorrect value.
The gearbox stage has been set to an excessively high value for the parameter 9522 fault value.
Remedy: Correct the parameter value.
With hysteresis/filtering enabled (p9501.16=1), the following applies:
Set parameters p9546/9346 and p9547/9347 acc. to the following rule: p9546 >= 2 * p9547; 9346 >= 2 * p9347.
The following rule must also be adhered to when actual value synchronization (p9501.3 = 1) is enabled: p9549 <=
p9547; p9349 <= p9347.
Correct the parameter 9522 fault value.
Also check p9516.0 for fault value 9517.
F01682 SI Motion CU: Monitoring function not supported
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The monitoring function enabled in p9501, p9601 or p9801 is not supported in this firmware version.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Monitoring function SLP not supported (p9501.1).
2: Monitoring function SCA not supported (p9501.7 and p9501.8 ... 15 and p9503).
3: Monitoring function SLS override not supported (p9501.5).
4: Monitoring function external ESR activation not supported (p9501.4).
5: Monitoring function FDI in PROFIsafe not supported (p9501.30).
6: Enable actual value synchronization not supported (p9501.3).
9: Monitoring function not supported, enable bit reserved (p9501.2, p9501.17 ... 29, p9501.31, if required p9501.6).
10: Monitoring functions only supported for a SERVO drive object.
11: Only drive-based encoderless monitoring functions are supported.
12: Monitoring functions for ncSI are not supported on a CU305.
20: Drive-based motion monitoring functions are only supported in conjunction with PROFIsafe (p9501 and p9601.1
... 2 and p9801.1 ... 2).
21: PROFIsafe only supported in conjunction with motion monitoring functions in the drive (p9501 and p9601.1 ... 2
and p9801.1 ... 2).
Remedy: Deselect the monitoring function involved (p9501, p9503, p9506, p9601, p9801).
Note:
SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam
SI: Safety Integrated
SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9503 (SI Motion SCA (SN) enable (Control Unit))
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1123
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01683 SI Motion CU: SOS/SLS enable missing
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The safety-relevant basic function "SOS/SLS" is not enabled in p9501 although other safety-relevant monitoring
functions are enabled.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Remedy: Enable the function "SOS/SLS" (p9501.0) and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit))
F01684 SI Motion: Safely limited position limit values interchanged
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: For the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SE), a lower value is in p9534 than in p9535.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Limit values SLP1 interchanged.
2: Limit values SLP2 interchanged.
Remedy: Correct the limit values in p9534 and p9535 and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches
F01685 SI Motion CU: Safely-limited speed limit value too high
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The limit value for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS) is greater than the speed that corresponds to an
encoder limit frequency of 500 kHz.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Maximum permissible speed.
Remedy: Correct the limit values for SLS and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
See also: p9531 (SI Motion SLS (SG) limit values (Control Unit))
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1124 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01686 SI Motion: Illegal parameterization cam position
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: At least one enabled "Safety Cam" (SCA) is parameterized in p9536 or p9537 too close to the tolerance range around
the modulo position.
The following conditions must be complied with to assign cams to a cam track:
- the cam length of cam x = p9536[x]-p9537[x] must be greater or equal to the cam tolerance + the position tolerance
(= p9540 + p9542). This also means that for cams on a cam track, the minus position value must be less than the
plus position value.
- the distance between 2 cams x and y (minus position value[y] - plus position value[x] = p9537[y] - p9536[x]) on a
cam track must be greater than or equal to the cam tolerance + position tolerance (= p9540 + p9542).
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Number of the "Safe Cam" with an illegal position.
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit))
Remedy: Correct the cam position and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9536 (SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit)), p9537 (SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam posi-
tion (Control Unit))
F01687 SI Motion: Illegal parameterization modulo value SCA (SN)
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The parameterized modulo value for the "Safe Cam" (SCA) function is not a multiple of 360 000 mDegrees.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Remedy: Correct the modulo value for SCA and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9505 (SI Motion SCA (SN) modulo value (Control Unit))
F01688 SI Motion CU: Actual value synchronization not permissible
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: - It is not permissible to enable actual value synchronization for a 1-encoder system.
- It is not permissible to simultaneously enable actual value synchronization and a monitoring function with absolute
reference (SCA/SLP).
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Remedy: - Either select the "actual value synchronization" function or parameterize a 2-encoder system.
- Either deselect the function "actual value synchronization" or the monitoring functions with absolute reference
(SCA/SLP) and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam
SI: Safety Integrated
SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9526 (SI Motion encoder assignment second
channel)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1125
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
C01689 SI Motion: Axis re-configured
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: The axis configuration was changed (e.g. changeover between linear axis and rotary axis).
Parameter p0108.13 is internally set to the correct value.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of parameter that initiated the change.
See also: p9502 (SI Motion axis type (Control Unit))
Remedy: The following should be carried out after the changeover:
- exit the safety commissioning mode (p0010).
- save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM").
- carry out a POWER ON.
Once the Control Unit has been switched on, safety message F01680 or F30680 indicates that the checksums in
r9398[0] and r9728[0] have changed in the drive. The following must, therefore, be carried out:
- activate safety commissioning mode again.
- complete safety commissioning of the drive.
- exit the safety commissioning mode (p0010).
- save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM").
- carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
For the commissioning software, the units are only consistently displayed after a project upload.
F01690 SI Motion: Data save problem for the NVRAM
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: There is not sufficient memory space in the NVRAM on the drive to save parameters r9781 and r9782 (safety log-
book).
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: There is no physical NVRAM available in the drive.
1: There is no longer any free memory space in the NVRAM.
Remedy: Re fault value = 0:
- use a Control Unit NVRAM.
Re fault value = 1:
- deselect functions that are not required and that take up memory space in the NVRAM.
- contact the Hotline.
A01691 (F) SI Motion: Ti and To unsuitable for DP cycle
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The configured times for PROFIBUS communication are not permitted and the DP cycle is used as the actual value
acquisition cycle for the safe movement monitoring functions:
Isochronous PROFIBUS: the total of Ti and To is too high for the set DP cycle. The DP cycle should be at least 1
current controller cycle greater than the sum of Ti and To.
Non-isochronous PROFIBUS: the DP cycle must be at least 4 x current controller cycle.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1126 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Configure Ti and To low so that they are suitable for the DP cycle or increase the DP cycle time.
Alternative when drive-based SI monitoring is enabled (p9601/p9801 > 0):
Use the actual value acquisition cycle p9511/p9311 and, in turn, set independently from DP cycle. The actual value
sensing clock cycle must be at least four times the current controller clock cycle. A clock cycle ratio of at least 8:1 is
recommended.
See also: p9511 (SI Motion actual value sensing cycle clock (Control Unit))
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
F01692 SI Motion CU: Parameter value not permitted for encoderless
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The parameter cannot be set to this value if encoderless motion monitoring functions have been selected in p9506.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number with the incorrect value.
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit))
Remedy: - Correct the parameter specified in the fault value.
- If necessary, deselect encoderless motion monitoring functions (p9506).
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit))
A01693 (F) SI Motion CU: Safety parameter setting changed, wam restart/POWER ON required
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Safety parameters have been changed; these will only take effect following a warm restart or POWER ON.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of the safety parameter which has changed, necessitating a warm restart or POWER ON.
Remedy: - carry out a warm restart (p0971 = 3)
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: POWER ON
A01696 (F) SI Motion: Testing of the motion monitoring functions selected when booting
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The test of the motion monitoring functions was already illegally active when booting.
This is the reason that the test is only carried out again after selecting the forced checking procedure parameterized
in p9705.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
See also: p9705 (SI Motion: Test stop signal source)
Remedy: Deselect the forced checking procedure of the safety motion monitoring functions and then select again.
The signal source for initiation is parameterized in binector input p9705.
Notice:
It is not permissible to use TM54F inputs to start the test stop.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9705 (SI Motion: Test stop signal source)
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1127
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01697 (F) SI Motion: Motion monitoring functions must be tested
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The time set in p9559 for the forced checking procedure of the safety motion monitoring functions has been
exceeded. A new test is required.
After next selecting the forced checking procedure parameterized in p9705, the message is withdrawn and the mon-
itoring time is reset.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
As the shutdown paths are not automatically checked during booting, an alarm is always issued once booting is com-
plete.
See also: p9559 (SI Motion forced checking procedure timer (Control Unit)), p9705 (SI Motion: Test stop signal
source)
Remedy: Carry out the forced checking procedure of the safety motion monitoring functions.
The signal source for initiation is parameterized in binector input p9705.
Notice:
It is not permissible to use TM54F inputs to start the test stop.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9705 (SI Motion: Test stop signal source)
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
A01698 (F) SI CU: Commissioning mode active
Message value: -
Drive object: TM54F_MA, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The commissioning of the "Safety Integrated" function is selected.
This message is withdrawn after the safety functions have been commissioned.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
See also: p0010
Remedy: None necessary.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
SI: Safety Integrated
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
A01699 (F) SI CU: Shutdown path must be tested
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The time set in p9659 for the forced checking procedure of the safety shutdown paths has been exceeded. The
safety shutdown paths must be re-tested.
After the next time the "STO" function is deselected, the message is withdrawn and the monitoring time is reset.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
See also: p9659 (SI forced checking procedure timer)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1128 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Select STO and then deselect again.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
SI: Safety Integrated
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
C01700 SI Motion CU: STOP A initiated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP A (pulses are suppressed via the safety shutdown path of the Control Unit).
Possible causes:
- stop request from the second monitoring channel
- pulses not suppressed after a parameterized time (p9557) after test stop selection.
- subsequent response to the message C01706 "SI Motion CU: Safe Acceleration Monitoring limit exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C01714 "SI Motion CU: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C01701 "SI Motion CU: STOP B initiated".
Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault on the second monitoring channel
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01706.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01714.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01701.
- check the value in p9557 (where available), increase the value if necessary, and carry out a POWER ON
- check the shutdown path of the Control Unit (check DRIVE-CLiQ communication if it has been implemented)
- replace the Motor Module/Power Module
- replace Control Unit.
This message can be acknowledged without a POWER ON as follows:
- motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe
- motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: via the machine control panel in acceptance test mode only
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
C01701 SI Motion CU: STOP B initiated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF3
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP B (braking along the OFF3 deceleration ramp).
As a result of this fault, after the time parameterized in p9556 has expired, or the speed threshold parameterized in
p9560 has been undershot, message C01700 "STOP A initiated" is output.
Possible causes:
- stop request from the second monitoring channel
- subsequent response to the message C01714 "SI Motion: Safely reduced speed exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C01711 "SI Motion: Defect in a monitoring channel".
Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault on the second monitoring channel
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01714.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01711.
This message can be acknowledged without a POWER ON as follows:
- motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe
- motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: via the machine control panel in acceptance test mode only
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1129
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
C01706 SI Motion CU: SBR limit undershot
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Motion monitoring functions with encoder: SBR - Safe Acceleration Monitoring. After initiating STOP B (SS1) or
STOP C (SS2), the speed has exceeded the selected tolerance.
Encoderless motion monitoring function: SBR - Safe Brake Ramp Monitoring. After initiating STOP B (SS1) or SLS
changeover to the lower speed stage, the speed has exceeded the selected tolerance.
The drive is shut down by the message C01700 "SI Motion: STOP A initiated".
Remedy: Check the braking behavior and, if necessary, adapt the tolerance for the "Safe Acceleration Monitor" or modify the
parameter settings for the "safe brake ramp".
This message can be acknowledged without a POWER ON as follows:
- motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe
- motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: via the machine control panel in acceptance test mode only
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9548 (SI Motion SBR actual velocity tolerance (Control Unit)), p9581 (SI Motion brake ramp reference
value (Control Unit)), p9582 (SI Motion brake ramp delay time (Control Unit)), p9583 (SI Motion brake ramp moni-
toring time (Control Unit))
C01707 SI Motion CU: Tolerance for safe operating stop exceeded
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The actual position has distanced itself further from the target position than the standstill tolerance.
The drive is shut down by the message C01701 "SI Motion: STOP B initiated".
Remedy: - check whether safety faults are present and if required carry out the appropriate diagnostic routines for the partic-
ular faults.
- check whether the standstill tolerance matches the accuracy and control dynamic performance of the axis.
- carry out a POWER ON.
This message can be acknowledged without a POWER ON as follows:
- motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe
- motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: via the machine control panel in acceptance test mode only
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
See also: p9530 (SI Motion standstill tolerance (Control Unit))
C01708 SI Motion CU: STOP C initiated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: STOP2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP C (braking along the OFF3 deceleration ramp).
"Safe Operating Stop" (SOS) is activated after the parameterized timer has expired.
Possible causes:
- stop request from the higher-level control.
- subsequent response to the message C01714 "SI Motion: Safely reduced speed exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C01715 "SI Motion: Safe end stop exceeded".
See also: p9552 (SI Motion transition time STOP C to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit))
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1130 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault at the control.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01714.
This message can be acknowledged as follows:
- motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe
- motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
C01709 SI Motion CU: STOP D initiated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP D (braking along the path).
"Safe Operating Stop" (SOS) is activated after the parameterized timer has expired.
Possible causes:
- stop request from the higher-level control.
- subsequent response to the message C01714 "SI Motion: Safely reduced speed exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C01715 "SI Motion: Safe end stop exceeded".
See also: p9553 (SI Motion transition time STOP D to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit))
Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault at the control.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01714.
This message can be acknowledged as follows:
- motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe
- motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
C01710 SI Motion CU: STOP E initiated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP E (retraction motion).
"Safe Operating Stop" (SOS) is activated after the parameterized timer has expired.
Possible causes:
- stop request from the higher-level control.
- subsequent response to the message C01714 "SI Motion: Safely reduced speed exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C01715 "SI Motion: Safe end stop exceeded".
See also: p9554 (SI Motion transition time STOP E to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit))
Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault at the control.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01714.
This message can be acknowledged as follows:
- motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe
- motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1131
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
C01711 SI Motion CU: Defect in a monitoring channel
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: When cross-checking and comparing the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between the input
data or results of the monitoring functions and initiated a STOP F. One of the monitoring functions no longer reliably
functions - i.e. safe operation is no longer possible.
If at least one monitoring function is active, then after the parameterized timer has expired, the message C01701 "SI
Motion: STOP B initiated" is output.
The message value that resulted in a STOP F is displayed in r9725. The described message values involve the data
cross-check between the Control Unit and Motor Module. If the drive is operated together with a SINUMERIK, the
message values are described in message 27001 of SINUMERIK.
The following message values may also occur in the following cases if the cause that is explicitly mentioned does
not apply:
- cycle times not set uniformly (p9500/p9300 and p9511/p9311)
- differently parameterized axis types (p9502/p9302).
- excessively fast cycle times (p9500/p9300, p9511/p9311).
- for message values 3, 44 ... 57, 232, and encoder systems, differently parameterized encoder values
(p9516/p9316, p9517/p9317, p9518/p9318, p9520/p9320, p9521/p9321, p9522/p9322, p9526/p9326).
- incorrect synchronization.
Message value (r9749, interpret decimal):
0 to 999: Number of the cross-checked data that resulted in this fault.
Message values that are not subsequently listed are only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
0: Stop request from the other monitoring channel.
1: Status image of monitoring functions SOS, SLS or SLP (result list 1) (r9710[0], r9710[1]).
2: Status image of monitoring function SCA or n < nx (result list 2) (r9711[0], r9711[1]).
3: The position actual value differential (r9713) between the two monitoring channels is greater than the tolerance in
p9542/p9342. When actual value synchronization is enabled (p9501.3/p9301.3), the velocity differential (based on
the position actual value) is greater than the tolerance in p9549/p9349.
4: Error when synchronizing the crosswise data comparison between the two channels.
5: Function enable signals (p9501/p9301)
6: Limit value for SLS1 (p9531[0]/p9331[0])
7: Limit value for SLS2 (p9531[1]/p9331[1])
8: Limit value for SLS3 (p9531[2]/p9331[2])
9: Limit value for SLS4 (p9531[3]/p9331[3])
10: Standstill tol. (p9530/p9330)
31: Position tolerance (p9542/p9342) or (p9549/p9349) when actual value synchronization is enabled
(p9501.3/p9301.3)
33: Time, velocity changeover (p9551/p9351)
35: Delay time, pulse canc. (p9556/p9356)
36: Checking time, pulse canc. (p9557/p9357)
37: Trans. time, STOP C to SOS (p9552/p9352)
38: Trans. time STOP D to SOS (p9553/p9353)
40: Stop response for SLS (p9561/p9361)
42: Shutdown speed, pulse canc. (p9560/p9360)
43: Memory test, stop response (STOP A).
44 ... 57: General
Possible cause 1 (during commissioning or parameter modification)
The tolerance value for the monitoring function is not the same on the two monitoring
channels.
Possible cause 2 (during active operation)
The limit values are based on the current actual value (r9713). If the safe actual values on the two monitoring chan-
nels do not match, the limit values, which have been set at a defined interval, will also be different (i.e. corresponding
to fault value 3). This can be ascertained by checking the safe actual positions.
44: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value for SLS1 (p9531[0]/p9331[0])
45: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value for SLS1 (p9531[0]/p9331[0])
46: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value for SLS2 (p9531[1]/p9331[1])
47: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value for SLS2 (p9531[1]/p9331[1])
48: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value for SLS3 (p9531[2]/p9331[2])
49: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value for SLS3 (p9531[2]/p9331[2])
50: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value for SLS4 (p9531[3]/p9331[3])
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1132 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
51: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value for SLS4 (p9531[3]/p9331[3])
52: Standstill position + tolerance (p9530/9330)
53: Standstill position - tolerance (p9530/9330)
54: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value nx (p9546/p9346) + tolerance (p9542/p9342)
55: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value nx (p9546/p9346)
56: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value nx (p9546/p9346)
57: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value nx (p9546/p9346) - tolerance (p9542/p9342)
58: Actual stop request.
75: Velocity limit nx (p9546, p9346).
76: Stop response for SLS1 (p9563[0]/p9363[0])
77: Stop response for SLS2 (p9563[1]/p9363[1])
78: Stop response for SLS3 (p9563[2]/p9363[2])
79: Stop response for SLS4 (p9563[3]/p9363[3])
81: Velocity tolerance for SBR (p9548/p9348)
82: SGEs for SLS correction factor.
83: Acceptance test timer (p9558/p9358)
84: Trans. time STOP F (p9555/p9355)
85: Trans. time bus failure (p9580/p9380)
86: ID 1-encoder system (p9526/p9326).
87: Encoder assignment, 2nd channel (p9526/p9326)
89: Encoder limit freq.
230: Filter time constant for n < nx.
231: Hysteresis tolerance for n < nx.
232: Smoothed velocity actual value.
233: Smoothed velocity actual value + limit value nx / safety monitoring clock cycle + hysteresis tolerance.
234: Smoothed velocity actual value + limit value nx / safety monitoring clock cycle.
235: Smoothed velocity actual value - limit value nx / safety monitoring clock cycle.
236: Smoothed velocity actual value - limit value nx / safety monitoring clock cycle - hysteresis tolerance.
237: SGA n < nx.
238: Speed limit value for SBR (p9568/p9368).
239: Acceleration for SBR (p9581/p9381 and p9583/p9383).
240: Inverse value of acceleration for SBR (p9581/p9381 and p9583/p9383).
241: Deceleration time for SBR (p9582/p9382).
242: Encoderless safety (p9506/p9306).
243: Extended alarm acknowledgment (p9507/p9307).
244: Encoderless actual value sensing filter time (p9587/p9387).
245: Encoderless actual value sensing minimum current (p9588/p9388).
246: Voltage tolerance acceleration (p9589/p9389).
1000: Watchdog timer has expired. Too many signal changes have occurred at safety-relevant inputs.
1001: Initialization error of watchdog timer.
1005: Pulses already suppressed for test stop selection.
1011: Acceptance test status between the monitoring channels differ.
1012: Plausibility violation of the actual value from the encoder.
1020: Cyc. communication failure between the monit. cycles.
1021: Cyc. communication failure between the monit. channel and Sensor Module.
1022: Sign-of-life error for DRIVE-CLiQ encoder CU
1023: Error in the effectiveness test in the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
1032: Sign-of-life error for DRIVE-CLiQ encoder MM
1033: Error checking offset between POS1 and POS2 for DRIVE-CLiQ encoder CU
1034: Error checking offset between POS1 and POS2 for DRIVE-CLiQ encoder MM
1041: Current absolute value too low (encoderless)
1042: Current/voltage plausibility error
1043: Too many acceleration phases
1044: Actual current values plausibility error.
5000 ... 5140: PROFIsafe message values.
5000, 5014, 5023, 5024, 5030 ... 5032, 5042, 5043, 5052, 5053, 5068, 5072, 5073, 5082 ... 5087, 5090, 5091, 5122
... 5125, 5132 ... 5135, 5140: An internal software error has occurred (only for internal Siemens troubleshooting).
5012: Error when initializing the PROFIsafe driver.
5013: The result of the initialization is different for the two controllers.
5022: Error when evaluating the F parameters. The values of the transferred F parameters do not match the
expected values in the PROFIsafe driver.
5025: The result of the F parameterization is different for the two controllers.
5026: CRC error for the F parameters. The transferred CRC value of the F parameters does not match the value
calculated in the PST.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1133
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
5065: A communications error was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram.
5066: A time monitoring error (timeout) was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram.
6000 ... 6166: PROFIsafe message values (PROFIsafe driver for PROFIBUS DP V1/V2 and PROFINET).
6000: An internal software error has occurred (only for internal Siemens troubleshooting).
6064 ... 6071: Error when evaluating the F parameters. The values of the transferred F parameters do not match the
expected values in the PROFIsafe driver.
6064: Destination address and PROFIsafe address are different (F_Dest_Add).
6065: Destination address not valid (F_Dest_Add).
6066: Source address not valid (F_Source_Add).
6067: Watchdog time not valid (F_WD_Time).
6068: Incorrect SIL level (F_SIL).
6069: Incorrect F-CRC length (F_CRC_Length).
6070: Incorrect F parameter version (F_Par_Version).
6071: CRC error for the F parameters (CRC1). The transferred CRC value of the F parameters does not match the
value calculated in the PROFIsafe driver.
6072: F parameterization is inconsistent.
6165: A communications error was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram.
6166: A time monitoring error (timeout) was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram.
See also: p9555 (SI Motion transition time STOP F to STOP B (Control Unit)), r9725 (SI Motion, diagnostics STOP F)
Remedy: The following generally applies:
The monitoring clock cycles in both channels and the axis types should be checked for equality and the same setting
applied if necessary. If the error continues to be identified, increasing the monitoring clock cycles may resolve it.
Re fault value = 0:
- no error was identified in this monitoring channel. Note the error message of the other monitoring channel (for MM:
C30711).
Re fault value = 3:
Commissioning phase:
Encoder evaluation for own or second channel has been set incorrectly --> Correct the encoder evaluation.
In operation:
Check the mechanical design and the encoder signals.
Re fault value = 4:
The monitoring clock cycles in both channels should be checked for equality and if required, set the same. In com-
bination with fault value 5 from the other monitoring channel (with MM: C30711), the monitoring clock cycle settings
must be increased.
Re fault value = 1 ... 999:
- if the fault value is listed under cause: Check the crosswise-compared parameters to which the fault value refers.
- copy the safety parameters.
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
- correction of the encoder evaluation. The actual values differ as a result of mechanical faults (V belts, travel to a
mechanical endstop, wear and window setting that is too narrow, encoder fault, ...).
Re fault value = 1000:
- investigate the signal associated with the safety-relevant input (contact problems).
Re fault value = 1001:
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
Re fault value = 1005:
- check the conditions for pulse enable.
Re fault value = 1011:
- for diagnostics, refer to parameter (r9571).
Re fault value = 1012:
- upgrade the Sensor Module software.
- check the encoder parameters in the encoder systems for equality (p9515/p9315, p9519/p9319, p9523/p9323,
p9524/p9324, p9525/p9325, p9529/p9329).
Re fault value = 1020, 1021:
- check the communication link.
- increase the monitoring cycle clock settings (p9500, p9511).
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- replace the hardware.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1134 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Re fault value = 5000, 5014, 5023, 5024, 5030, 5031, 5032, 5042, 5043, 5052, 5053, 5068, 5072, 5073, 5082 ...
5087, 5090, 5091, 5122 ... 5125, 5132 ... 5135, 5140:
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the Control Unit.
Re fault value = 5012:
- check the setting of the PROFIsafe address of the Control Unit (p9610) and that of the Motor Module (p9810). It is
not permissible for the PROFIsafe address to be 0 or FFFF!
Re fault value = 5013, 5025:
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- check the setting of the PROFIsafe address of the Control Unit (p9610) and that of the Motor Module (p9810).
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
Re fault value = 5022:
- check the setting of the values of the F parameters at the PROFIsafe slave (F_SIL, F_CRC_Length,
F_Par_Version, F_Source_Add, F_Dest_add, F_WD_Time).
Re fault value = 5026:
- check the settings of the values of the F parameters and the F parameter CRC (CRC1) calculated from these at
the PROFIsafe slave and update.
Re fault value = 5065:
- check the configuration and communication at the PROFIsafe slave (cons. No. / CRC).
- check the setting of the value for F parameter F_WD_Time on the PROFIsafe slave and increase if necessary.
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
Re fault value = 5066:
- check the setting of the value for F parameter F_WD_Time on the PROFIsafe slave and increase if necessary.
- evaluate diagnostic information in the F host.
- check PROFIsafe connection.
Re fault value = 6000:
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
- increase the monitoring cycle clock settings (p9500, p9511).
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the Control Unit.
Re fault value = 6064:
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Dest_Add at the PROFIsafe slave.
- check the setting of the PROFIsafe address of the Control Unit (p9610) and that of the Motor Module (p9810).
Re fault value = 6065:
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Dest_Add at the PROFIsafe slave. It is not permissible for the
destination address to be either 0 or FFFF!
Re fault value = 6066:
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Source_Add at the PROFIsafe slave. It is not permissible for
the source address to be either 0 or FFFF!
Re fault value = 6067:
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_WD_Time at the PROFIsafe slave. It is not permissible for the
watch time to be 0!
Re fault value = 6068:
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_SIL at the PROFIsafe slave. The SIL level must correspond to
SIL2!
Re fault value = 6069:
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_CRC_Length at the PROFIsafe slave. The setting of the CRC2
length is 2-byte CRC in the V1 mode and 3-byte CRC in the V2 mode!
Re fault value = 6070:
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Par_Version at the PROFIsafe slave. The value for the F param-
eter version is 0 in the V1 mode and 1 in the V2 mode!
Re fault value = 6071:
- check the settings of the values of the F parameters and the F parameter CRC (CRC1) calculated from these at
the PROFIsafe slave and, if required, update.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1135
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Re fault value = 6072:
- check the settings of the values for the F parameters and, if required, correct.
The following combinations are permissible for F parameters F_CRC_Length and F_Par_Version:
F_CRC_Length = 2-byte CRC and F_Par_Version = 0
F_CRC_Length = 3-byte CRC and F_Par_Version = 1
Re fault value = 6165:
- check the configuration and communication at the PROFIsafe slave.
- check the setting of the value for F parameter F_WD_Time on the PROFIsafe slave and increase if necessary.
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
Re fault value = 6166:
- check the configuration and communication at the PROFIsafe slave.
- check the setting of the value for F parameter F_WD_Time on the PROFIsafe slave and increase if necessary.
- evaluate diagnostic information in the F host.
- check PROFIsafe connection.
This message can be acknowledged as follows:
- motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe
- motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel
See also: p9300 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module)), p9500 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Control
Unit))
C01712 SI Motion CU: Defect in F-IO processing
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: When cross checking and comparing the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between param-
eters or results of the F-IO processing and initiated a STOP F. One of the monitoring functions no longer reliably
functions - i.e. safe operation is no longer possible.
The safety message C01711 with message value 0 is also displayed due to initiation of STOP F.
If at least one monitoring function is active, the safety message C01701 "SI Motion: STOP B initiated" is output after
the parameterized timer has expired.
Message value (r9749, interpret decimal):
Number of the cross-checked data that resulted in this message.
1: SI discrepancy monitoring time inputs (p10002, p10102).
2: SI acknowledgement internal event input terminal (p10006, p10106).
3: SI STO input terminal (p10022, p10122).
4: SI SS1 input terminal (p10023, p10123).
5: SI SS2 input terminal (p10024, p10124).
6: SI SOS input terminal (p10025, p10125).
7: SI SLS input terminal (p10026, p10126).
8: SI SLS_Limit(1) input terminal (p10027, p10127).
9: SI SLS_Limit(2) input terminal (p10028, p10128).
10: SI Safe State signal selection (p10039, p10139).
11 SI F-DI input mode (p10040, p10140).
12: SI F-DO 0 signal sources (p10042, p10142).
13: Different states for static inactive signal sources (p10006, p10022 ... p10028).
14: SI discrepancy monitoring time outputs (p10002, p10102).
15: SI acknowledgment internal event (p10006, p10106).
16: SI test sensor feedback signal test mode selected for test stop (p10046, p10146, p10047, p10147).
17: SI wait time for test stop at DOs (p10001).
18 ... 25: SI test sensor feedback signal (p10046, p10146, p10047, p10147). Expected state of internal readback
signal, generated from the selected test stop mode.
26 ... 33: SI test sensor feedback signal (p10046, p10146, p10047, p10147). Expected state of external readback
signal, generated from the selected test stop mode.
34 ... 41: SI test sensor feedback signal (p10046, p10146, p10047, p10147). Expected state of second internal read-
back signal, generated from the selected test stop mode.
42: Internal data for processing the second internal readback signal, generated from the selected test stop mode
(p10047, p10147).
43: Internal data for processing the internal readback signal, generated from the selected test stop mode (p10047,
p10147).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1136 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
44: Internal data for processing the external readback signal, generated from the selected test stop mode (p10047,
p10147).
45: Internal data for initialization state of test stop mode, dependent upon test stop parameters.
46: SI digital inputs debounce time (p10017, p10117)
47: Selection F-DI for PROFIsafe (p10050, p10150)
48: Selection F-DI for PROFIsafe (p10050, p10150)
Remedy: - check parameterization in the parameters involved and correct if required.
- ensure equality by copying the SI data to the second channel and then carry out an acceptance test.
- check monitoring clock cycle in p9500 and p9300 for equality.
Note:
This message can be acknowledged via F-DI or PROFIsafe.
See also: p9300 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module)), p9500 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Control
Unit))
C01714 SI Motion CU: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive has moved faster than that specified by the velocity limit value (p9531). The drive is stopped as a result of
the configured stop response (p9563).
Message value (r9749, interpret decimal):
100: SLS1 exceeded.
200: SLS2 exceeded.
300: SLS3 exceeded.
400: SLS4 exceeded.
1000: Encoder limit frequency exceeded.
Remedy: - check the traversing/motion program in the control.
- check the limits for "Safely-Limited Speed (SLS) and if required, adapt (p9531).
This message can be acknowledged as follows:
- motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe
- motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
See also: p9531 (SI Motion SLS (SG) limit values (Control Unit)), p9563 (SI Motion SLS (SG)-specific stop response
(Control Unit))
C01745 SI Motion CU: Checking braking torque for the brake test
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: POWER ON (IMMEDIATELY)
Cause: The scaling of the brake torque for the brake test can be changed using parameter p2003.
An acceptance test must be carried out again for the braking test. This determines whether the braking test is still
carried out with the correct braking torque.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- repeat the acceptance test for the safe brake test if the brake test is used.
See also: p2003 (Reference torque)
C01750 SI Motion CU: Hardware fault safety-relevant encoder
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The encoder that is used for the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions signals a hardware fault.
Message value (r9749, interpret decimal):
Encoder status word 1, encoder status word 2 that resulted in the message.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1137
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check the encoder connection.
- replace the encoder.
This message can be acknowledged as follows:
- motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe
- motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel.
C01751 SI Motion CU: Effectivity test error safety-relevant encoder
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder for safe motion monitoring signals an error for the effectivity tests.
Message value (r9749, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check the encoder connection.
- replace the encoder.
This message can be acknowledged as follows:
- motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe
- motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel
A01796 (F, N) SI Motion CU: Wait for communication
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The drive waits for communication to be established with SINUMERIK or TM54F to execute the safety-relevant
motion monitoring functions.
Note:
In this state, the pulses are safely suppressed.
Remedy: If, after a longer period of time, the message is not automatically withdrawn, the following checks have to be made
as appropriate:
For communication with SINUMERIK, the following applies:
- check any other PROFIBUS messages/signals present and remove their cause.
- check that assignment of the axes on the higher-level control to the drives in the drive unit is correct.
- check enable signal of the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions for the corresponding axis on the higher-
level control and if required, set it.
For communication with TM54F, the following applies:
- check any other messages/signals present for DRIVE-CLiQ communication with the TM54F and remove their
cause.
- check the setting of p10010. All the drive objects controlled by the TM54F must be listed.
See also: p9601 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Control Unit)), p9801 (SI enable, functions integrated
in the drive (Motor Module)), p10010 (SI drive object assignment)
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
C01798 SI Motion CU: Test stop running
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The test stop is active.
Remedy: None necessary.
The message is withdrawn when the test stop is finished.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1138 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
C01799 SI Motion CU: Acceptance test mode active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The acceptance test mode is active. The POWER ON signals of the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions can
be acknowledged during the acceptance test using the RESET button of the higher-level control.
Remedy: None necessary.
The message is withdrawn when exiting the acceptance test mode.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
F01800 DRIVE-CLiQ: Hardware/configuration error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ connection fault has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
100 ... 107:
Communication via DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100 ... X107 has not been switched to cyclic operation. The cause may be
an incorrect structure or a configuration that results in an impossible bus timing.
10:
Loss of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. The cause may be, for example, that the DRIVE-CLiQ cable was withdrawn
from the Control Unit or as a result of a short-circuit for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ. This fault can only be acknowl-
edged in cyclic communication.
11:
Repeated faults when detecting the connection. This fault can only be acknowledged in cyclic communication.
12:
A connection was detected but the node ID exchange mechanism does not function. The reason is probably that the
component is defective. This fault can only be acknowledged in cyclic communication.
Remedy: Re fault value = 100 ... 107:
- ensure that the DRIVE-CLiQ components have the same firmware releases.
- avoid longer topologies for short current controller clock cycles.
Re fault value = 10:
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ cables at the Control Unit.
- remove any short-circuit for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ.
- carry out a POWER ON.
Re fault value = 11:
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Re fault value = 12:
- replace the component involved.
A01840 SMI: Component found without motor data
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An SMI/DQI without motor data has been found (e.g. SMI installed as replacement part).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number from target topology.
Remedy: 1. Download the SMI/DQI data (motor/encoder data) from the backup again (p4690, p4691).
2. Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for this component.
Note:
DQI: DRIVE-CLiQ Sensor Integrated
SMI: SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated
See also: p4690 (SMI spare part component number), p4691 (Save/download SMI spare part data)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1139
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01900 (F) PROFIBUS: Configuration telegram error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A PROFIBUS master attempts to establish a connection using an incorrect configuring telegram.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
50: Syntax error.
51: Connection established to more drive objects than configured in the device. The drive objects for process data
exchange and their sequence are defined in p0978.
52: Too many PZD data words for output or input to a drive object. The number of possible PZD items in a drive
object is determined by the number of indices in r2050/p2051 for PZD IF1, and in r8850/p8851 for PZD IF2.
53: Uneven number of bytes for input or output.
54: Cyclic operation not active.
55: Invalid operating state.
Remedy: Check the bus configuration on the master and slave sides.
Re alarm value = 51:
Check the list of the drive objects with process data exchange (p0978). With p0978[x] = 0, all of the following drive
objects in the list are excluded from the process data exchange.
Re alarm value = 52:
Check the number of data words for output and input to a drive object.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A01901 (F) PROFIBUS: Parameterizing telegram error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A PROFIBUS master attempts to establish a connection using an incorrect parameterizing telegram.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Incorrect parameterizing bits.
10: Illegal length of an optional parameterizing block.
11: Illegal ID of an optional parameterizing block.
20: Double parameterizing block for clock synchronization.
21: Incorrect parameterizing block for clock synchronization. For more information, see A01902.
22: Incorrect parameterizing bits for clock synchronization.
23: Illegal clock synchronization for PZD interface 2.
30: Double parameterizing block for peer-to-peer data transfer.
31: Incorrect parameterizing block for peer-to-peer data transfer.
Remedy: Check the bus configuration:
- bus addresses
- slave configuring
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A01902 IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation parameterization not permissible
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0: Bus cycle time Tdp < 0.5 ms.
1: Bus cycle time Tdp > 32 ms.
2: Bus cycle time Tdp is not an integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle.
3: Instant of the actual value sensing Ti > Bus cycle time Tdp or Ti = 0.
4: Instant of the actual value sensing Ti is not an integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle.
5: Instant of the setpoint acceptance To >= Bus cycle time Tdp or To = 0.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1140 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
6: Instant of the setpoint acceptance To is not an integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle.
7: Master application cycle time Tmapc is not an integer multiple of the speed controller clock cycle.
8: Bus reserve bus cycle time Tdp - data exchange time Tdx less than two current controller clock cycles.
10: Instant of the setpoint acceptance not To <= data exchange time Tdx + To_min.
11: Master application cycle time Tmapc > 14 or Tmapc = 0.
12: PLL tolerance window Tpll_w > Tpll_w_max.
13: Bus cycle time Tdp is not a multiple of all basic clock cycles p0110[x].
14: For COMM BOARD with the setting To - 1 = Tdp - Ti, the instant of the setpoint acceptance is not To <= Data
exchange time Tdx + 2 * To_min.
15: This configuration is not permitted for Tdp < 1 ms.
16: Instant of the actual value sensing Ti is less than the permitted value (COMM BOARD: Ti >= 2).
17: The setting (To + Ti = Tdp + 2) is not permitted for COMM BOARD.
Remedy: - adapt the parameterizing telegram.
- adapt the current and speed controller clock cycle.
Re alarm value = 15:
- check the number of specific drive object types in the configuration.
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
F01910 (N, A) PROFIBUS: Setpoint timeout
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF3 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The receipt of setpoints from the PROFIBUS interface is interrupted because the bus connection is interrupted or the
PROFIBUS master is switched off or was set to the STOP state.
See also: p2047 (PROFIBUS additional monitoring time)
Remedy: Restore the bus connection and set the PROFIBUS master to RUN.
Slave redundancy: For operation on a Y link, it must be ensured that "DP alarm mode = DPV1" is set in the slave
parameterization.
See also: p2047 (PROFIBUS additional monitoring time)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F01911 IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation clock cycle failure
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The global control telegram to synchronize the clock cycles has failed - in cyclic operation - for several DP clock
cycles or has violated the time grid specified in the parameterizing telegram over several consecutive DP clock
cycles (refer to the bus cycle time, Tdp and Tpllw).
Remedy: - check the PROFIBUS cables and connectors.
- check whether communication was briefly or permanently interrupted.
- check the bus and master for utilization level (e.g. bus cycle time Tdp was set too short).
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1141
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01912 IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation sign-of-life failure
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum permissible number of errors in the master sign-of-life (clock synchronous operation) has been
exceeded in cyclic operation.
Remedy: - check the physical bus configuration (terminating resistor, shielding, etc.).
- correct the interconnection of the master sign-of-life (p2045).
- check whether the master correctly sends the sign-of-life (e.g. create a trace with STW2.12 ... STW2.15 and trigger
signal ZSW1.3).
- check the permissible telegram failure rate (p0925).
- check the bus and master for utilization level (e.g. bus cycle time Tdp was set too short).
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
F01915 IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation sign-of-life failure drive object 1
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Group display for problems with the sign-of-life of the master (clock-cycle synchronous operation) on the drive object
1 (Control Unit).
For central measurements, synchronism with the central master is lost.
Remedy: Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
A01920 (F) PROFIBUS: Interruption cyclic connection
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The cyclic connection to the PROFIBUS master is interrupted.
Remedy: Establish the PROFIBUS connection and activate the PROFIBUS master in the cyclic mode.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A01921 (F) PROFIBUS: Receive setpoints after To
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Output data of PROFIBUS master (setpoints) received at the incorrect instant in time within the PROFIBUS clock
cycle.
Remedy: - check bus configuration.
- check parameters for clock cycle synchronization (ensure To > Tdx).
Note:
To: Time of setpoint acceptance
Tdx: Data exchange time
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1142 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01930 IF1: PB/PN current controller clock cycle clock cycle synchronous not equal
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The current controller clock cycle of all drives must be set the same for the clock cycle synchronous operation.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the drive object with different current controller clock cycle.
Remedy: Set current controller clock cycles to identical values (p0115[0]).
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
See also: p0115
A01931 IF1: PB/PN speed controller clock cycle clock cycle synchronous not equal
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The speed controller clock cycle of all drives must be set the same for the clock cycle synchronous operation.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the drive object with the different speed controller clock cycle.
Remedy: Set the speed controller clock cycles the same (p0115[1]).
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
See also: p0115
A01932 IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronization missing for DSC
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: There is no clock cycle synchronization and DSC is selected.
Note:
DSC: Dynamic Servo Control
Remedy: Set the clock cycle synchronization when configuring the bus.
A01940 IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronism not reached
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The bus is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameterizing
telegram. It was not possible to synchronize to the clock cycle specified by the master.
- the master does not send a clock synchronous global control telegram although clock synchronous operation was
selected when configuring the bus.
- the master is using another clock synchronous DP clock cycle than was transferred to the slave in the parameter-
izing telegram.
- at least one drive object has a pulse enable (not controlled from PROFIBUS/PROFINET either).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1143
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check the master application and bus configuration.
- check the consistency between the clock cycle input when configuring the slave and clock cycle setting at the mas-
ter.
- check that no drive object has a pulse enable. Only enable the pulses after synchronizing the PROFIBUS/PROFI-
NET drives.
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
A01941 IF1: PB/PN clock cycle signal missing when establishing bus communication
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The bus is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameterizing
telegram. The global control telegram for synchronization is not being received.
Remedy: Check the master application and bus configuration.
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
A01943 IF1: PB/PN clock cycle signal error when establishing bus communication
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The bus is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameterizing
telegram. The global control telegram for synchronization is being irregularly received.
-.the master is sending an irregular global control telegram.
- the master is using another clock synchronous DP clock cycle than was transferred to the slave in the parameter-
izing telegram.
Remedy: - check the master application and bus configuration.
- check the consistency between the clock cycle input when configuring the slave and clock cycle setting at the mas-
ter.
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
A01944 IF1: PB/PN sign-of-life synchronism not reached
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The bus is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameterizing
telegram. Synchronization with the master sign-of-life (STW2.12 ... STW2.15) could not be completed because the
sign-of-life is changing differently to how it was configured in the Tmapc time grid.
Remedy: - ensure that the master correctly increments the sign-of-life in the master application clock cycle Tmapc.
- correct the interconnection of the master sign-of-life (p2045).
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1144 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01945 PROFIBUS: Connection to the Publisher failed
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For PROFIBUS peer-to-peer data transfer, the connection to at least one Publisher has failed.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[0], connection failed.
...
Bit 15 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[15], connection failed.
Remedy: - check the PROFIBUS cables.
- carry out a first commissioning of the Publisher that has the failed connection.
See also: r2077 (PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses)
F01946 (A) PROFIBUS: Connection to the Publisher aborted
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: At this drive object, the connection to at least one Publisher for PROFIBUS peer-to-peer data transfer in cyclic oper-
ation has been aborted.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[0], connection aborted.
...
Bit 15 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[15], connection aborted.
Remedy: - check the PROFIBUS cables.
- check the state of the Publisher that has the aborted connection.
See also: r2077 (PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses)
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F01950 (N, A) IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation synchronization unsuccessful
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Synchronization of the internal clock cycle to the global control telegram has failed. The internal clock cycle exhibits
an unexpected shift.
Remedy: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1145
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F01951 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization application clock cycle missing
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: If DRIVE-CLiQ components with different application clock cycle are operated on a DRIVE-CLiQ port, this requires
synchronization with the Control Unit.
This synchronization routine was unsuccessful.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the software of the DRIVE-CLiQ components.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
F01952 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization of component not supported
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The existing system configuration requires that the connected DRIVE-CLiQ components support the synchronization
between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle and the application clock cycle.
However, not all DRIVE-CLiQ components have this functionality.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Component number of the first faulty DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component specified in the fault value.
Note:
If required, also upgrade additional components in the DRIVE-CLiQ line.
A01953 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization not completed
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: After the drive system is powered up, the synchronization between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle
and application clock cycle was started but was not completed within the selected time tolerance.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
If the error occurs after the drive sampling times were adjusted, and if a Terminal Module 31 (TM31) is being used,
the sampling times (p0115, p4099) should be set as integer multiples to the drive clock cycles (p0115).
F01954 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization unsuccessful
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: After the drive system is powered up, the synchronization between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle
and application clock cycle was started and was not able to be successfully completed.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: 1. Ensure perfect functioning of the DRIVE-CLiQ.
2. Initiate a new synchronization, e.g. as follows:
- remove the PROFIBUS master and re-insert again.
- restart the PROFIBUS master.
- power down the Control Unit and power it up again.
- press the Control Unit reset button.
- reset the parameter and download the saved parameters (p0009 = 30, p0976 = 2).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1146 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A01955 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization DO not completed
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: After the drive system is powered up, the synchronization between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle
and application clock cycle was started but was not completed within the selected time tolerance.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components of the DO.
A01990 (F) USS: PZD configuration error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The configuration of the process data (PZD) for the USS protocol is incorrect.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
2: PZD amount (p2022) too great for the first drive object (p978[0]).
The number of possible PZD items in a drive object is determined by the number of indices in r2050/p2051 for PZD
IF1, and in r8850/p8851 for PZD IF2.
Remedy: Re alarm value = 2:
Check the amount of USS PZD (p2022) and the maximum PZD amount (r2050/p2051) for the first drive object
(p0978[0]).
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A02000 Function generator: Start not possible
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The function generator has already been started.
Remedy: Stop the function generator and restart again if necessary.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
See also: p4800 (Function generator control)
A02005 Function generator: Drive does not exist
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The drive object specified for connection does not exist.
See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number)
Remedy: Use the existing drive object with the corresponding number.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1147
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A02006 Function generator: No drive specified for connection
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: No drive specified for connection in p4815.
See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number)
Remedy: At least one drive to be connected must be specified in p4815.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number)
A02007 Function generator: Drive not SERVO / VECTOR
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The drive object specified for connection is not a SERVO / VECTOR.
See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number)
Remedy: Use a SERVO / VECTOR drive object with the corresponding number.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
A02008 Function generator: Drive specified a multiple number of times
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The drive object specified for connection is already specified.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Drive object number of the drive object that is specified a multiple number of times.
Remedy: Specify a different drive object.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
A02009 Function generator: Illegal mode
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The set operating mode (p1300) of the drive object is not permissible when using the function generator.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the drive object involved.
Remedy: Change the operating mode for this drive object to p1300 = 20 (encoderless speed control) or p1300 = 21 (speed
control with encoder).
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1148 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A02010 Function generator: Speed setpoint from the drive is not zero
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The speed setpoint of a drive selected for connection is greater than the value for the standstill detection set using
p1226.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the drive object involved.
Remedy: For all of the drives specified for connection, set the speed setpoints to 0.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
A02011 Function generator: The actual drive speed is not zero
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The speed actual value of a drive selected for connection is greater than the value for the standstill detection set
using p1226.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the drive object involved.
Remedy: Set the relevant drives to zero speed before starting the function generator.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
A02015 Function generator: Drive enable signals missing
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The master control and/or enable signals are missing to connect to the specified drive.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the drive object involved.
See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number)
Remedy: Fetch the master control to the specified drive object and set all enable signals.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
A02016 Function generator: Magnetizing running
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Magnetizing has not yet been completed on a drive object specified for connection.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the drive object involved.
See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1149
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Wait for magnetizing of the motor (r0056.4).
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- restart the function generator.
See also: r0056 (Status word, closed-loop control)
A02020 Function generator: Parameter cannot be changed
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: This parameter setting cannot be changed when the function generator is active (p4800 = 1).
See also: p4810, p4812, p4813, p4815, p4820, p4821, p4822, p4823, p4824, p4825, p4826, p4827, p4828, p4829
Remedy: - stop the function generator before parameterizing (p4800 = 0).
- if required, start the function generator (p4800 = 1).
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
See also: p4800 (Function generator control)
A02025 Function generator: Period too short
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The value for the period is too short.
See also: p4821 (Function generator period)
Remedy: Check and adapt the value for the period.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
See also: p4821 (Function generator period)
A02026 Function generator: Pulse width too high
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected pulse width is too high.
The pulse width must be less than the period duration.
See also: p4822 (Function generator pulse width)
Remedy: Reduce pulse width.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
See also: p4821 (Function generator period), p4822 (Function generator pulse width)
A02030 Function generator: Physical address equals zero
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The specified physical address is zero.
See also: p4812 (Function generator physical address)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1150 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Set a physical address with a value other than zero.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
See also: p4812 (Function generator physical address)
A02040 Function generator: Illegal value for offset
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The value for the offset is higher than the value for the upper limit or lower than the value for the lower limit.
See also: p4826 (Function generator offset)
Remedy: Adjust the offset value accordingly.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
See also: p4826 (Function generator offset), p4828 (Function generator lower limit), p4829 (Function generator
upper limit)
A02041 Function generator: Illegal value for bandwidth
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The bandwidth referred to the time slice clock cycle of the function generator has either been set too low or too high.
Depending on the time slice clock cycle, the bandwidth is defined as follows:
Bandwidth_max = 1 / (2 * time slice clock cycle)
Bandwidth_min = Bandwidth_max / 100000
Example:
Assumption: p4830 = 125 µs
--> Bandwidth_max = 1 / (2 * 125 µs) = 4000 Hz
--> Bandwidth_min = 4000 Hz / 100000 = 0.04 Hz
Note:
p4823: Function generator bandwidth
p4830: Function generator time slice clock cycle
See also: p4823 (Function generator bandwidth), p4830 (Function generator time slice cycle)
Remedy: Check the value for the bandwidth and adapt accordingly.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
A02047 Function generator: Time slice clock cycle invalid
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The time slice clock cycle selected does not match any of the existing time slices.
See also: p4830 (Function generator time slice cycle)
Remedy: Enter an existing time slice clock cycle. The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
See also: r7901 (Sampling times)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1151
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A02050 Trace: Start not possible
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The trace has already been started.
See also: p4700 (Trace control)
Remedy: Stop the trace and, if necessary, start again.
A02055 Trace: Recording time too short
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The trace duration is too short.
The minimum is twice the value of the trace clock cycle.
See also: p4721 (Trace recording time)
Remedy: Check the selected recording time and, if necessary, adjust.
A02056 Trace: Recording cycle too short
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected recording cycle is shorter than the selected basic clock cycle 0 (p0110[0]).
See also: p4720 (Trace recording cycle)
Remedy: Increase the value for the trace cycle.
A02057 Trace: Time slice clock cycle invalid
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The time slice clock cycle selected does not match any of the existing time slices.
See also: p4723 (Time slice cycle for trace)
Remedy: Enter an existing time slice clock cycle. The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.
See also: r7901 (Sampling times)
A02058 Trace: Time slice clock cycle for endless trace not valid
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected time slice clock cycle cannot be used for the endless trace
See also: p4723 (Time slice cycle for trace)
Remedy: Enter the clock cycle of an existing time slice with a cycle time >= 2 ms for up to 4 recording channels or >= 4 ms
from 5 recording channels per trace.
The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.
See also: r7901 (Sampling times)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1152 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A02059 Trace: Time slice clock cycle for 2 x 8 recording channels not valid
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected time slice clock cycle cannot be used for more than 4 recording channels.
See also: p4723 (Time slice cycle for trace)
Remedy: Enter the clock cycle of an existing time slice with a cycle time >= 4 ms or reduce the number of recording channels
to 4 per trace.
The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.
See also: r7901 (Sampling times)
A02060 Trace: Signal to be traced missing
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - a signal to be traced was not specified.
- the specified signals are not valid.
See also: p4730 (Trace record signal 0), p4731 (Trace record signal 1), p4732 (Trace record signal 2), p4733 (Trace
record signal 3)
Remedy: - specify the signal to be traced.
- check whether the relevant signal can be traced.
A02061 Trace: Invalid signal
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - the specified signal does not exist.
- the specified signal can no longer be traced (recorded).
See also: p4730 (Trace record signal 0), p4731 (Trace record signal 1), p4732 (Trace record signal 2), p4733 (Trace
record signal 3)
Remedy: - specify the signal to be traced.
- check whether the relevant signal can be traced.
A02062 Trace: Invalid trigger signal
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - a trigger signal was not specified.
- the specified signal does not exist.
- the specified signal is not a fixed-point signal.
- the specified signal cannot be used as a trigger signal for the trace.
See also: p4711 (Trace trigger signal)
Remedy: Specify a valid trigger signal.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1153
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A02063 Trace: Invalid data type
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The specified data type to select a signal using a physical address is invalid.
See also: p4711 (Trace trigger signal), p4730 (Trace record signal 0), p4731 (Trace record signal 1), p4732 (Trace
record signal 2), p4733 (Trace record signal 3)
Remedy: Use a valid data type.
A02070 Trace: Parameter cannot be changed
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The trace parameter settings cannot be changed when the trace is active.
See also: p4700, p4710, p4711, p4712, p4713, p4714, p4715, p4716, p4720, p4721, p4722, p4730, p4731, p4732,
p4733, p4780, p4781, p4782, p4783, p4789, p4795
Remedy: - stop the trace before parameterization.
- if required, start the trace.
A02075 Trace: Pretrigger time too long
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected pretrigger time must be shorter than the trace time.
See also: p4721 (Trace recording time), p4722 (Trace trigger delay)
Remedy: Check the pretrigger time setting and change if necessary.
F02080 Trace: Parameterization deleted due to unit changeover
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The trace parameterization in the drive unit was deleted due to a unit changeover or a change in the reference
parameters.
Remedy: Restart trace.
A02099 Trace: Insufficient Control Unit memory
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The memory space still available on the Control Unit is no longer sufficient for the trace function.
Remedy: Reduce the memory required, e.g. as follows:
- reduce the trace time.
- increase the trace clock cycle.
- reduce the number of signals to be traced.
See also: r4708 (Trace memory space required), r4799 (Trace memory location free)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1154 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A02100 CU: Computing dead time current controller too short
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The value in p0118 produces a dead time of one clock cycle because it is prior to setpoint availability. A possible
cause could be, for example, that the system characteristics no longer match those parameterized after a component
has been replaced.
Alarm value (r2134, floating point):
The minimum value for p0118 where a dead time no longer occurs.
Remedy: - set p0118 to a value greater than or equal to the alarm value.
- set p0117 to an automatic setting.
- check the firmware releases of the components involved.
See also: p0117 (Current controller computing dead time mode), p0118 (Current controller computing dead time)
A02150 OA: Application cannot be loaded
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The system was not able to load an OA application.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
Note:
OA: Open Architecture
See also: r4950, r4955, p4956, r4957
F02151 (A) OA: Internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An internal software error has occurred within an OA application.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the Control Unit.
Note:
OA: Open Architecture
See also: r4950, r4955, p4956, r4957
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F02152 (A) OA: Insufficient memory
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Too many functions have been configured on this Control Unit (e.g. too many drives, function modules, data sets,
OA applications, blocks, etc).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1155
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - change the configuration on this Control Unit (e.g. fewer drives, function modules, data sets, OA applications,
blocks, etc).
- use an additional Control Unit.
Note:
OA: Open Architecture
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F03000 NVRAM fault on action
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault occurred during execution of action p7770 = 1, 2 for the NVRAM data.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex
yy: Fault cause
yy = 1:
The action p7770 = 1 is not supported by this version if Drive Control Chart (DCC) is activated for the drive object
concerned.
yy = 2:
The data length of the specified application is not the same in the NVRAM and the backup.
yy = 3:
The data checksum in p7774 is not correct.
yy = 4:
No data available to load.
xx: Application ID
See also: p7770 (NVRAM action)
Remedy:
F03001 NVRAM checksum incorrect
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A checksum error occurred when evaluating the non-volatile data (NVRAM) on the Control Unit.
The NVRAM data affected was deleted.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
F03500 (A) TM: Initialization
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: When initializing the Terminal Modules, the terminals of the Control Unit or the Terminal Board 30, an internal soft-
ware error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The thousands digit = 1 ... 3:
The component number (p0151) of the module involved is specified at the units, tens and hundreds digit.
Remedy: - power down the power supply for the Control Unit and power it up again.
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
- if required, replace the Terminal Module.
The Terminal Module should be directly connected to a DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the Control Unit.
If the fault occurs again, replace the Terminal Module.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1156 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A03501 TM: Sampling time change
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The sampling times of the inputs/outputs were changed.
This change only becomes valid after the next boot.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
F03505 (N, A) TM: Analog input wire breakage
Message value: %1
Drive object: CU_G_G130, CU_G_G150, ENCODER, HUB, TB30, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The input current of the Terminal Module analog input has exceeded the threshold value parameterized in p4061[x].
This fault can only occur if p4056[x] = 3 (4 ... 20 mA with monitoring) is set.
Index x = 0: Analog input 0 (X522.1 to .3)
Index x = 1: Analog input 1 (X522.4 to .5)
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The component number (p0151) of the module involved is specified at the units, tens and hundreds digit.
The thousands digit specifies the analog input involved: 0: Analog input 0 (AI 0), 1: Analog input 1 (AI 1). The leading
zero of analog input 0 (AI 0) is masked out of the fault value.
Remedy: Check the connection to the signal source for interruptions.
Check the magnitude of the injected current - it is possible that the infed signal is too low.
Please note that the input has a load resistance of 250 Ohm.
The input current measured by the Terminal Module can be read out from r4052[x].
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F03505 (N, A) CU: Analog input wire breakage
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The input current of the Terminal Module analog input has exceeded the threshold value parameterized in p4061[x].
This fault can only occur if p4056[x] = 3 (4 ... 20 mA with monitoring) is set.
Index x = 0: Analog input 0 (X522.1 to .3)
Index x = 1: Analog input 1 (X522.4 to .5)
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The component number (p0151) of the module involved is specified at the units, tens and hundreds digit.
The thousands digit specifies the analog input involved: 0: Analog input 0 (AI 0), 1: Analog input 1 (AI 1). The leading
zero of analog input 0 (AI 0) is masked out of the fault value.
Remedy: Check the connection to the signal source for interruptions.
Check the magnitude of the injected current - it is possible that the infed signal is too low.
Please note that the input has a load resistance of 250 Ohm.
The input current measured by the Terminal Module can be read out from r4052[x].
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1157
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A03506 (F, N) 24 V power supply missing
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The 24 V power supply for the digital outputs (X124) is missing.
Remedy: Check the terminals for the power supply voltage (X124, L1+, M).
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A03550 TM: Speed setpoint filter natural frequency > Shannon frequency
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The natural filter frequency of the speed setpoint filter (p1417) is greater than the Shannon frequency.
The Shannon frequency is calculated according to the following formula: 0.5 / p0115[0]
Remedy: Reduce the natural frequency of the speed setpoint filter (PT2 low pass) (p1417).
F03590 (N, A) TM: Module not ready
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The Terminal Module involved does not send a ready signal and no valid cyclic data.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Drive object number of the Terminal Module involved.
Remedy: - check the 24 V power supply.
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
- check whether the sampling time of the drive object involved is not equal to zero (p4099[0]).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A05000 (N) Power unit: Overtemperature heat sink AC inverter
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The alarm threshold for overtemperature at the inverter heat sink has been reached. The response is set using
p0290.
If the temperature of the heat sink increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30004 is initiated.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- has the cooling failed?
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1158 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A05001 (N) Power unit: Chip overtemperature
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Alarm threshold for overtemperature of the power semiconductor in the AC converter has been reached. The
response is set using p0290.
If the chip temperature increases by an additional 15 K, then fault F30025 is triggered.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- has the cooling failed?
- pulse frequency too high?
See also: r0037, p0290 (Power unit overload response)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A05002 (N) Power unit: Air intake overtemperature
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The alarm threshold for the air intake overtemperature has been reached. For air-cooled power units, the threshold
is 42 °C (hysteresis 2 K). The response is set using p0290.
If the air intake temperature increases by an additional 13 K, then fault F30035 is output.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A05003 (N) Power unit: Internal overtemperature
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The alarm threshold for internal overtemperature has been reached.
If the temperature inside the power unit increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30036 is triggered.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A05004 (N) Power unit: Rectifier overtemperature
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The alarm threshold for the overtemperature of the rectifier has been reached. The response is set using p0290.
If the temperature of the rectifier increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30037 is triggered.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1159
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation.
- has a phase of the line supply failed?
- is an arm of the supply (incoming) rectifier defective?
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A05005 Cooling system: Cooling medium flow rate too low
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Cooling system: Alarm - flow rate has fallen below the alarm value
Remedy:
A05006 (N) Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature difference between the chip and heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value (blocksize
power units only).
Depending on p0290, an appropriate overload response is initiated.
See also: r0037
Remedy: None necessary.
The alarm disappears automatically once the limit value is undershot.
Note:
If the alarm does not disappear automatically and the temperature continues to rise, this can result in fault F30024.
See also: p0290 (Power unit overload response)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
N05007 (A) Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model (chassis PU)
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature difference between the chip and heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value (r0293) (chassis
power units only).
Depending on p0290, an appropriate overload response is initiated.
See also: r0037, r0293 (Power unit alarm threshold model temperature)
Remedy: None necessary.
The alarm disappears automatically once the limit value is undershot.
See also: p0290 (Power unit overload response)
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1160 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F05050 Parallel circuit: Pulse enable in spite of pulse inhibit
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A power unit signals that the pulses are enabled although the pulses are inhibited.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Number of the power unit involved.
Remedy: The power unit is defective and must be replaced.
F05051 Parallel circuit: Power unit pulse enable missing
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For one or several power units, the pulses were not able to be enabled.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Number of the power unit involved.
Remedy: - acknowledge power unit faults that are still present.
- inhibit the pulses of the power unit involved (p7001).
A05052 (F) Parallel circuit: Illegal current dissymmetry
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The deviation of the individual currents of the power units exceeds the alarm threshold specified in p7010.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Phase U.
2: Phase V.
3: Phase W.
Remedy: - inhibit the pulses of the faulted power unit (p7001).
- check the connecting cables. Loose contacts can cause current spikes.
- the motor reactors are non-symmetrical or faulty and must be replaced.
- the CTs must be calibrated or replaced.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A05053 (F) Parallel circuit: Inadmissible DC link voltage dissymmetry
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The deviation of the DC link voltage measured values exceeds the alarm threshold specified in p7011.
Remedy: - inhibit the pulses of the faulted power unit (p7001).
- check the DC link connecting cables.
- the DC link voltage measurement is incorrect and must be calibrated or renewed.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1161
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A05054 Parallel circuit: Power unit deactivated
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For the drive object involved, fewer power unit components connected in parallel are active than exist in the target
topology. Operation is only possible at reduced power (power derating).
Remedy: Reactivate the deactivated power unit components.
See also: p0125 (Activate/deactivate power unit components), p0895 (Activate/deactivate power unit components),
p0897 (Parking axis selection)
F05055 Power circuit: Power units with different code numbers
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The code numbers of the power units do not match.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter in which the first different power unit code number was detected.
Remedy: For parallel circuit configurations, only power units with identical power unit data may be used.
F05056 Parallel circuit: Power unit EPROM versions differ
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The EEPROM versions of the power units do not match.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter in which the first different version number was detected.
Remedy: For parallel circuit configurations, only power units with identical EEPROM versions may be used.
F05057 Parallel circuit: Power unit firmware versions differ
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The firmware versions of the power units connected in parallel do not match.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter in which the first different version number was detected.
Remedy: For parallel circuit configurations, only power units with identical firmware versions may be used.
F05058 Parallel circuit: VSM EEPROM versions differ
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The EEPROM versions of the Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM) do not match.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter in which the first different version number was detected.
Remedy: For parallel circuit configurations, only Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM) with identical EEPROM versions may be
used.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1162 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F05059 Parallel circuit: VSM firmware versions differ
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The firmware versions of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) do not match.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter in which the first different version number was detected.
Remedy: For parallel circuit configurations, only Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM) with identical firmware versions may be
used.
F05060 Parallel circuit: Power unit firmware version does not match
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Firmware from version V02.30.01.00 is required when connecting the power units in parallel.
Remedy: Update the firmware of the power units (at least V02.30.01.00).
F05061 Infeed, number of VSM
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The number of active Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM) for the drive object infeed with chassis power units is not cor-
rect.
For A_Infeed, each active power unit must be assigned an active VSM also for a parallel circuit configuration.
For S_Infeed, the active drive object, must be assigned at least one active VSM.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Number of VSMs that are currently assigned to the drive object.
Remedy: Adapts the number of active Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM).
F06310 (A) Supply voltage (p0210) incorrectly parameterized
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: For AC/AC drive units, the measured DC voltage lies outside the tolerance range after pre-charging has been com-
pleted: 1.16 * p0210 < r0070 < 1.6 * p0210.
The fault can only be acknowledged when the drive is powered down.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)
Remedy: - check the parameterized supply voltage and if required change (p0210).
- check the line supply voltage.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1163
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07011 Drive: Motor overtemperature
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: KTY or no sensor:
The measured motor temperature or model temperature has exceeded the fault threshold (p0605) or the timer
(p0606) has elapsed following the alarm threshold (p0604) being exceeded.
The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active.
PTC or bimetallic NC contact:
The response threshold of 1650 Ohm was exceeded or the NC contact opened and the timer (p0606) has expired.
The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active.
Possible causes:
- motor is overloaded.
- motor ambient temperature too high.
- wire breakage or sensor not connected.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
With SME (p0601 = 10), TM120 (p0601 = 11) selected, the number of the sensor channel leading to the message.
When the I2t motor model is activated (p0612 bit[0] = yes, p0611 > 0), fault value= 200 refers to the fact that the fault
has been triggered by the I2t motor model.
See also: p0604 (Motor temperature alarm threshold), p0605 (Motor temperature fault threshold), p0606 (Motor tem-
perature timer), p0610 (Motor overtemperature response)
Remedy: - reduce the motor load.
- check the ambient temperature.
- check the wiring and sensor connector.
See also: p0604 (Motor temperature alarm threshold), p0605 (Motor temperature fault threshold), p0606 (Motor tem-
perature timer)
A07012 (N) Drive: I2t motor model overtemperature
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The thermal I2t motor model (for synchronous motors) identified that the temperature alarm threshold was exceeded.
See also: r0034 (Motor utilization), p0605 (Motor temperature fault threshold), p0611 (I2t motor model thermal time
constant)
Remedy: - check the motor load and if required, reduce.
- check the motor ambient temperature.
- check the thermal time constant p0611.
- check the overtemperature fault threshold p0605 (= alarm threshold for the I2t motor model, see p0612)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A07015 Drive: Motor temperature sensor alarm
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0600 and p0601.
With the fault, the time in p0607 is started. If the fault is still present after this time has expired, then fault F07016 is
output; however, at the earliest, 0.2 s after alarm A07015.
Possible causes:
- wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm).
- measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
With SME (p0601 = 10), TM120 (p0601 = 11) selected, the number of the sensor channel leading to the message.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1164 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
- check the parameterization (p0600, p0601).
See also: r0035 (Motor temperature), p0600 (Motor temperature sensor for monitoring), p0601 (Motor temperature
sensor type), p0607 (Temperature sensor fault timer)
F07016 Drive: Motor temperature sensor fault
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0600 and p0601.
Possible causes:
- wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm).
- measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm).
Note:
If alarm A07015 is present, the time in p0607 is started. If the fault is still present after this time has expired, then
fault F07016 is output; however, at the earliest, 0.2 s after alarm A07015.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
With SME (p0601 = 10), TM120 (p0601 = 11) selected, the number of the sensor channel leading to the message.
See also: p0607 (Temperature sensor fault timer)
Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
- check the parameterization (p0600, p0601).
- induction motors: Deactivate temperature sensor fault (p0607 = 0).
See also: r0035 (Motor temperature), p0600 (Motor temperature sensor for monitoring), p0601 (Motor temperature
sensor type), p0607 (Temperature sensor fault timer)
F07080 Drive: Incorrect control parameter
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The closed-loop control parameters have been parameterized incorrectly (e.g. p0356 = L_spread = 0).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The fault value includes the parameter number involved.
The following parameter numbers only occur as fault values for vector drives:
p0310, for synchronous motors: p0341, p0344, p0350, p0357
The following parameter numbers do not occur as fault values for synchronous motors:
p0354, p0358, p0360
See also: p0310, p0311, p0341, p0344, p0350, p0354, p0356, p0357, p0358, p0360, p0400, p0404, p0408, p0640,
p1082, p1300
Remedy: Modify the parameter indicated in the fault value (r0949) (e.g. p0640 = current limit > 0).
See also: p0311, p0341, p0344, p0350, p0354, p0356, p0358, p0360, p0400, p0404, p0408, p0640, p1082
F07082 Macro: Execution not possible
Message value: Fault cause: %1, supplementary information: %2, preliminary parameter number: %3
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The macro cannot be executed.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ccccbbaa hex:
cccc = preliminary parameter number, bb = supplementary information, aa = fault cause
Fault causes for the trigger parameter itself:
-19: Called file is not valid for the trigger parameter.
-20: Called file is not valid for parameter 15.
-21: Called file is not valid for parameter 700.
-22: Called file is not valid for parameter 1000.
-23: Called file is not valid for parameter 1500.
-24: Data type of a TAG is incorrect (e.g.: Index, number or bit is not U16).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1165
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fault causes for the parameters to be set:
-25: Error level has an undefined value.
-26: Mode has an undefined value.
-27: A value was entered as string in the tag value that is not "DEFAULT".
-31: Entered drive object type unknown.
-32: A device was not able to be found for the determined drive object number.
-34: A trigger parameter was recursively called.
-35: It is not permissible to write to the parameter via macro.
-36: Check, writing to a parameter unsuccessful, parameter can only be read, not available, incorrect data type, value
range or assignment incorrect.
-37: Source parameter for a BICO interconnection was not able to be determined.
-38: An index was set for a non-indexed (or CDS-dependent) parameter.
-39: No index was set for an indexed parameter.
-41: A bit operation is only permissible for parameters with the parameter format DISPLAY_BIN.
-42: A value not equal to 0 or 1 was set for a BitOperation.
-43: Reading the parameter to be changed by the BitOperation was unsuccessful.
-51: Factory setting for DEVICE may only be executed on the DEVICE.
-61: The setting of a value was unsuccessful.
Remedy: - check the parameter involved.
- check the macro file and BICO interconnection.
See also: p0015, p0700 (Macro Binector Input (BI)), p1000 (Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints), p1500
(Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints)
F07083 Macro: ACX file not found
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The ACX file (macro) to be executed was not able to be found in the appropriate directory.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number with which the execution was started.
See also: p0015, p0700 (Macro Binector Input (BI)), p1000 (Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints), p1500
(Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints)
Remedy: - check whether the file is saved in the appropriate directory on the memory card.
Example:
If p0015 is set to 1501, then the selected ACX file must be located in the following directory:
... /PMACROS/DEVICE/P15/PM001501.ACX
F07084 Macro: Condition for WaitUntil not fulfilled
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The WaitUntil condition set in the macro was not fulfilled in a certain number of attempts.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number for which the condition was set.
Remedy: Check and correct the conditions for the WaitUntil loop.
F07085 Drive: Open-loop/closed-loop control parameters changed
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Open-loop/closed-loop control parameters have had to be changed because:
1) They have exceeded dynamic limits because of other parameters, or
2) They cannot be used due to the hardware detected not having certain properties.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1166 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The fault value includes the modified parameter number.
340: The motor and control parameters were automatically calculated (p0340 = 1), because the vector control was
subsequently activated as configuration (r0108.2).
See also: p0640 (Current limit), p1082 (Maximum speed), p1300 (Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode),
p1800 (Pulse frequency setpoint)
Remedy: It is not necessary to change the parameters as they have already been correctly limited.
F07086 Units changeover: Parameter limit violation due to reference value change
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A reference parameter was changed in the system. This resulted in the fact that for the parameters involved, the
selected value was not able to be written in the per unit representation (cause: e.g. the steady-state minimum/max-
imum limit or that defined in the application was violated). The values of the parameters were set to the correspond-
ing violated minimum/maximum limit or to the factory setting.
Fault value (r0949, parameter):
Diagnostics parameter r9450 to display the parameters that were not able to be recalculated.
See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004
Remedy: Check the adapted parameter value and if required correct.
See also: r9450 (Reference value change parameter with unsuccessful calculation)
F07088 Units changeover: Parameter limit violation due to units changeover
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A changeover of units was initiated.
Possible causes for the violation of a parameter limit are:
- when rounding off a parameter corresponding to its decimal places, the steady-state minimum or maximum limit
was violated.
- inaccuracies for the data type "Floating Point".
In these cases, when the minimum limit is violated then the parameter value is rounded up and when the maximum
limited is violated the parameter value is rounded down.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Diagnostics parameter r9451 to display all parameters whose value had to be adapted.
See also: p0100 (IEC/NEMA mot stds), p0349 (System of units, motor equivalent circuit diagram data), p0505
(Selecting the system of units), p0595 (Selecting technological units)
Remedy: Check the adapted parameter values and if required correct.
See also: r9451 (Units changeover adapted parameters)
A07089 Changing over units: Function module activation is blocked because the units have
been changed over
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An attempt was made to activate a function module. This is not permissible if the units have already been changed
over.
See also: p0100 (IEC/NEMA mot stds), p0349 (System of units, motor equivalent circuit diagram data), p0505
(Selecting the system of units)
Remedy: Restore units that have been changed over to the factory setting.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1167
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07100 Drive: Sampling times cannot be reset
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When resetting drive parameter (p0976) sampling times cannot be reset using p0111, p0112, p0115.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter whose setting prevents the sampling times being reset.
See also: r0110 (Basic sampling times)
Remedy: - continue to work with the set sampling times.
- before resetting the drive parameters, set the basic clock cycle p0110[0] to the original value.
See also: r0110 (Basic sampling times)
F07110 Drive: Sampling times and basic clock cycle do not match
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The parameterized sampling times do not match the basic clock cycle.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The fault value specifies the parameter involved.
See also: r0110, r0111, p0115
Remedy: Enter the current controller sampling times so that they are identical to the basic clock cycle, e.g. by selecting p0112.
Note which basic clock cycle is selected in p0111.
The sampling times in p0115 can only be changed manually in the sampling times presetting "Expert" (p0112).
See also: r0110, r0111, p0112, p0115
A07200 Drive: Master control ON/OFF1 command present
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The ON/OFF1 command is not 0, either via binector input p0840 (current CDS) or in control word bit 0 via the master
control.
Remedy: Both the signal at binector input p0840 (current CDS) and bit 0 via the master control must be 0.
F07220 (N, A) Drive: Master control by PLC missing
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The "master control by PLC" signal was missing in operation.
- interconnection of the binector input for "master control by PLC" is incorrect (p0854).
- the higher-level control has withdrawn the "master control by PLC" signal.
- data transfer via the fieldbus (master/drive) was interrupted.
Remedy: - check the interconnection of the binector input for "master control by PLC" (p0854).
- check the "master control by PLC" signal and, if required, switch in.
- check the data transfer via the fieldbus (master/drive).
Note:
If the drive should continue to operate after withdrawing "master control by PLC" then fault response must be param-
eterized to NONE or the message type should be parameterized as alarm.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1168 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07300 (A) Drive: Line contactor feedback signal missing
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: - the line contactor was not able to be closed within the time in p0861.
- the line contactor was not able to be opened within the time in p0861.
- the line contactor dropped out during operation
- the line contactor has closed although the drive converter is powered down.
Remedy: - check the setting of p0860.
- check the feedback circuit from the line contactor.
- increase the monitoring time in p0861.
See also: p0860 (Line cont. fdbk sig), p0861 (Line contactor monitoring time)
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07311 Bypass motor switch
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault value: Bit field BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERROR_STATE
Bit 1
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_FBK_ON_MISSING
Switch "Closed" feedback signal missing
Bit 2
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_FBK_OFF_MISSING
Switch "Open" feedback signal missing
Bit 3
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_TOO_SLOW
Switch feedback signal too slow:
After switching, the system waits for the positive feedback signal. If the feedback signal is received later than the
specified time, then a fault trip (shutdown) is issued.
Bit 6
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_BYPASS_INCONSISTENCY
Drive switch feedback signal is not consistent with the bypass state:
When powering up or for STAGING, the drive switch is closed.
See also: p1260 (Bypass configuration), r1261 (Bypass control/status word), p1266 (Bypass, control command),
p1267 (Bypass changeover source configuration), p1269 (Bypass switch feedback signal), p1274 (Bypass switch
monitoring time)
Remedy: - check the transfer of the feedback signals.
- check the switch.
F07312 Bypass LSS:
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault value: Bit field BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERROR_STATE
Bit 1
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_FBK_ON_MISSING
Switch "Closed" feedback signal missing
Bit 2
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_FBK_OFF_MISSING
Switch "Open" feedback signal missing
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1169
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Bit 3
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_TOO_SLOW
Switch feedback signal too slow:
After switching, the system waits for the positive feedback signal. If the feedback signal is received later than the
specified time, then a fault trip (shutdown) is issued.
Bit 6
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_BYPASS_INCONSISTENCY
Line Side Switch feedback signal is not consistent with the bypass state:
When powering up or for STAGING, the Line Side Switch is closed without this having been requested from the
bypass.
See also: p1260 (Bypass configuration), r1261 (Bypass control/status word), p1266 (Bypass, control command),
p1267 (Bypass changeover source configuration), p1269 (Bypass switch feedback signal), p1274 (Bypass switch
monitoring time)
Remedy: - check the transfer of the feedback signals.
- check the switch.
F07320 Drive: Automatic restart interrupted
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: - The specified number of restart attempts (p1211) has been completely used up because within the monitoring time
(p1213) the faults were not able to be acknowledged. The number of restart attempts (p1211) is decremented at each
new start attempt.
- there is no active ON command.
- the monitoring time for the power unit has expired (p0857).
- when exiting commissioning or at the end of the motor identification routine or the speed controller optimization, the
drive unit is not automatically powered up again.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - increase the number of restart attempts (p1211). The actual number of starting attempts is displayed in r1214.
- increase the delay time in p1212 and/or the monitoring time in p1213.
- issue an ON command (p0840).
- either increase or disable the monitoring time of the power unit (p0857).
- Reduce the waiting time for resetting the fault counter p1213[1] so that fewer faults are registered in the time inter-
val.
A07321 Drive: Automatic restart active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The automatic restart (AR) is active. When the line supply returns and/or the causes of the existing faults are
removed the drive is automatically restarted. The pulses are enabled and the motor starts to rotate.
Remedy: - the automatic restart (AR) should, if required, be inhibited (p1210 = 0).
- an automatic restart can be directly interrupted by withdrawing the power-on command (BI: p0840).
F07330 Flying restart: Measured search current too low
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: During a flying restart, it was identified that the search current reached is too low.
It is possible that the motor is not connected.
Remedy: Check the motor feeder cables.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1170 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07331 FlyRestart: Not supported
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: It is not possible to power up with the motor rotating (no flying restart). In the following cases, the "flying restart" func-
tion is not supported:
Permanent-magnet and separately-excited synchronous motors (PEM, FEM): Operation with V/f characteristic.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PEM): Encoderless operation without a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)
being connected.
Remedy: - deactivate the "flying restart" function (p1200 = 0).
- change the open-loop/closed-loop control mode (p1300).
- connect a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) (voltage measurement).
A07350 (F) Drive: Measuring probe parameterized to a digital output
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The measuring probe is connected to a bi-directional digital input/output and the terminal is set as output.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
8: DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X132.1)
9: DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X132.2)
10: DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X132.3)
11: DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X132.4)
12: DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
13: DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
14: DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
15: DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
To the terminal designation:
The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU305.
Remedy: - set the terminal as input (p0728).
- deselect the measuring probe (p0488, p0489, p0580).
Reaction upon F: OFF1
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07400 (N) Drive: DC link voltage maximum controller active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DC link voltage controller has been activated because the upper switch-in threshold has been exceeded (r1242,
r1282).
The ramp-down times are automatically increased in order to maintain the DC link voltage (r0070) within the permis-
sible limits. There is a system deviation between the setpoint and actual speeds.
When the DC link voltage controller is switched out (disabled), this is the reason that the ramp-function generator
output is set to the speed actual value.
See also: p1240 (Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration), p1280 (Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configu-
ration (V/f))
Remedy: If the controller is not to intervene:
- increase the ramp-down times.
- shut down the Vdc_max controller (p1280 = 0).
If the ramp-down times are not to be changed:
- use a chopper or regenerative feedback unit.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1171
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07401 (N) Drive: DC link voltage maximum controller deactivated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The Vdc_max controller can no longer maintain the DC link voltage (r0070) below the limit value (r1242, r1282) and
was therefore switched out (disabled).
- the line supply voltage is permanently higher than specified for the power unit.
- the motor is permanently in the regenerative mode as a result of a load that is driving the motor.
Remedy: - check whether the input voltage is within the permissible range.
- check whether the load duty cycle and load limits are within the permissible limits.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A07402 (N) Drive: DC link voltage minimum controller active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DC link voltage controller has been activated as the lower switch-in threshold has been undershot (r1246,
r1286).
The kinetic energy of the motor is used to buffer the DC link. The drive is therefore braked.
See also: r0056 (Status word, closed-loop control), p1240 (Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration), p1280
(Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration (V/f))
Remedy: The alarm disappears when power supply returns.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F07403 (N, A) Drive: Lower DC link voltage threshold reached
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The DC link voltage monitoring is active (p1240 , p1280 = 5, 6) and the lower DC link voltage threshold (r1246, r1286)
was reached in the "Operation" state.
Remedy: - check the line supply voltage.
- check the infeed module
- adapt the device supply voltage (p0210) or the switch-on level (p1245, p1285).
- disable the DC link voltage monitoring (p1240, p1280 = 0).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07404 Drive: Upper DC link voltage threshold reached
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The DC link voltage monitoring is active (p1240 , p1280 = 4, 6) and the upper DC link voltage threshold (r1242,
r1282) was reached in the "Operation" state.
Remedy: - check the line supply voltage.
- check the infeed module
- adapt the device supply voltage (p0210).
- disable the DC link voltage monitoring (p1240, p1280 = 0).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1172 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07405 (N, A) Drive: Kinetic buffering minimum speed not reached
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: During kinetic buffering the speed fell below minimum speed (p1257 or p1297 for vector drives with V/f control) and
the line supply did not return.
Remedy: Check the speed threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) (p1257, p1297).
See also: p1257 (Vdc_min controller speed threshold)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07406 (N, A) Drive: Kinetic buffering maximum time exceeded
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF3 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum buffer time (p1255 and p1295 for vector drives with V/f control) has been exceeded without the line
supply having returned.
Remedy: Check the time threshold for Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering) (p1255, p1295).
See also: p1255 (Vdc_min controller time threshold)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A07409 Drive: V/f control, current limiting controller active
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The current limiting controller of the V/f control was activated because the current limit was exceeded.
Remedy: The alarm is automatically withdrawn when increasing the current limit (p0640), reducing the load or using a slower
up ramp for the setpoint (reference) speed.
F07410 Drive: Current controller output limited
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The condition "I_act = 0 and Uq_set_1 longer than 16 ms at its limit" is present and can be caused by the following:
- motor not connected or motor contactor open.
- motor data and motor configuration (star-delta) do not match.
- no DC link voltage present.
- power unit defective.
- the "flying restart" function is not activated.
Remedy: - connect the motor or check the motor contactor.
- check the motor parameterization and the connection configuration (star-delta).
- check the DC link voltage (r0070).
- check the power unit.
- activate the "flying restart" function (p1200).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1173
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07411 Drive: Flux setpoint not reached when building up excitation
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When quick magnetizing is configured (p1401.6 = 1) the specified flux setpoint is not reached although 90% of the
maximum current is specified.
- incorrect motor data.
- motor data and motor configuration (star-delta) do not match.
- the current limit has been set too low for the motor.
- induction motor (encoderless, open-loop controlled) in I2t limiting.
- the Motor Module is too small.
- the magnetizing time p0346 is too short.
Remedy: - correct the motor data. Perform motor data identification and rotating measurement.
- check the motor configuration.
- correct the current limits (p0640).
- reduce the induction motor load.
- if required, use a larger Motor Module.
- check motor supply cable.
- check power unit.
- increase p0346.
F07412 Drive: Commutation angle incorrect (motor model)
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An incorrect commutation angle was detected that can result in a positive coupling in the speed controller.
Possible causes:
- the motor encoder is incorrectly adjusted with respect to the magnet position.
- the motor encoder is damaged.
- the angular commutation offset is incorrectly set (p0431).
- data to calculate the motor model has been incorrectly set (p0356 (motor-stator leakage inductance) and/or p0350
(motor-stator resistance) and/or p0352 (cable resistance).
- the changeover speed for the motor model is too low (p1752). The monitoring function only becomes effective
above the changeover speed.
- pole position identification might have calculated an incorrect value when activated (p1982 = 1).
- the motor encoder speed signal is faulted.
- the control loop is instable due to incorrect parameterization.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
SERVO:
0: The comparison of the pole position angle from the encoder and the motor model resulted in an excessively high
value (> 80 ° electrical).
1: -
VECTOR:
0: The comparison of the pole position angle from the encoder and the motor model resulted in an excessively high
value (> 45 ° electrical).
1: The change in the speed signal from the motor encoder has changed by > p0492 within a current controller clock
cycle.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1174 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - if the encoder mounting was changed - re-adjust the encoder.
- replace the defective motor encoder.
- correctly set the angular commutation offset (p0431).
- correctly set the motor stator resistance, cable resistance and motor-stator leakage inductance (p0350, p0352,
p0356).
- increase the changeover speed for the motor model (p1752). The monitoring is completely deactivated for p1752
> p1082 (maximum speed).
- with pole position identification activated (p1982 = 1) check the procedure for pole position identification (p1980)
and force a new pole position identification procedure by means of deselection followed by selection (p1982 = 0 -> 1).
Note:
For High Dynamic Motors (1FK7xxx-7xxx), for applications with a higher current, if necessary, the monitoring should
be disabled.
F07413 Drive: Commutation angle incorrect (pole position identification)
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An incorrect commutation angle was detected that can result in a positive coupling in the speed controller.
- within the pole position identification routine (p1982 = 2):
A difference of > 45° electrical to the encoder angle was determined.
- for VECTOR, within the encoder adjustment (p1990 = 2):
A difference of > 6 ° electrical to the encoder angle was determined.
Remedy: - correctly set the angular commutation offset (p0431).
- re-adjust the motor encoder after the encoder has been replaced.
- replace the defective motor encoder.
- check the pole position identification routine. If the pole position identification routine is not suitable for this motor
type, then disable the plausibility check (p1982 = 0).
A07416 Drive: Flux controller configuration
Message value: Parameter: %1, Index: %2, fault cause: %3
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The configuration of the flux control (p1401) is contradictory.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ccbbaaaa hex
aaaa = Parameter
bb = Index
cc = fault cause
cc = 01 hex = 1 dec:
Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) for soft start (p1401.0).
cc = 02 hex = 2 dec:
Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) for flux build-up control (p1401.2).
cc = 03 hex = 3 dec:
Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) for Rs identification after restart (p0621 = 2).
Remedy: Re fault cause = 1:
- Shut down soft start (p1401.0 = 0).
- Shut down quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 0).
Re fault cause = 2:
- De-energize flux build-up control (p1401.2 = 0).
- Shut down quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 0).
Re fault cause = 3:
- Re-parameterize Rs identification (p0621 = 0, 1)
- Shut down quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 0).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1175
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07417 Drive: Pulse technique not plausible (motor model)
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The evaluation of the test pulse response found incorrect values.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Fault value 0: An impermissible pulse technique configuration was detected during ramp-up.
Possible causes:
- The pulse technique was initially selected during system ramp-up (p1750.5=1) but the
power unit component does not support the current oversampling required (see r192.23).
As a consequence, p1750.0 was deselected automatically.
Fault value 10: The pulse response is repeatedly implausible.
Possible causes:
- Incorrect configuration of the power unit component
- The power unit component is faulty.
Fault value 20: At the preset pulse amplitude the measured pulse response is much higher than the expected value.
Possible causes:
- The orientation loop has been affected by major vibration phenomena.
- The motor is short-circuited for high frequencies (output filter).
- The motor is damaged.
Remedy: Re fault value 0:
Once the pulse technique has been deselected automatically (p1750.5=0), there are two possible options:
- acknowledge the fault and save parameter p1750.5=0 => field-oriented control mode to standstill is forfeited and
replaced by transition to open-loop control at low speeds.
- replace the power unit firmware (at least V4.30) => field-oriented control mode to standstill is available.
Re fault value 10:
With active selection of the pulse technique (p1750.5)
- power both the CU and the power unit component down and then back up again, or
- perform a manual warm restart (see P0009, P0976).
If this does not solve the problem: Replace the power unit component.
Re fault value 20:
- control parameters might have been adjusted (factory setting, commissioning).
- filters must not be connected between motor and converter/inverter.
- check the motor.
F07422 Drive: Reference model natural frequency > Shannon frequency
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The natural filter frequency of the PT2 element for the reference model (p1433) is greater than the Shannon fre-
quency.
The Shannon frequency is calculated according to the following formula: 0.5 / p0115[1]
Remedy: - reduce the natural frequency of PT2 element for reference model (p1433).
- reduce the speed controller sampling time (p0115[1]).
F07426 (A) Technology controller actual value limited
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The actual signal of the technology controller has reached its limit.
- Fault value = 1: upper limit reached
- Fault value = 2: lower limit reached
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1176 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - Adapt the limits in P2267, P2268 to the signal level.
- Check scaling of the actual signal.
See also: p2264 (Technology controller actual value), p2267 (Technology controller upper limit actual value), p2268
(Technology controller lower limit actual value)
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07434 Drive: It is not possible to change the direction of rotation with the pulses enabled
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A drive data set was selected - with the pulses enabled - which has a different parameterized direction of rotation
(p1821).
It is only possible to change the motor direction of rotation using p1821 when the pulses are inhibited.
Remedy: - change over the drive data set with the pulses inhibited.
- ensure that the changeover to a drive data set does not result in the motor direction of rotation being changed (i.e.
for these drive data sets, the same value must be in p1821).
See also: p1821 (Dir of rot)
F07435 (N) Drive: Setting the ramp-function generator for encoderless vector control
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: During operation with encoderless vector control (r1407.1) the ramp-function generator was stopped (p1141) or
bypassed (p1122). An internal setting command of the ramp-function generator output caused the set setpoint speed
to be frozen or was not able to be realized.
Remedy: - deactivate the holding command for the ramp-function generator (p1141).
- do not bypass the ramp-function generator (p1122).
- suppress the fault (p2101, p2119). This is necessary if the ramp-function generator is held using jogging and the
speed setpoint is simultaneously inhibited (r0898.6).
Note:
For encoderless vector control it is not practical to read-in the main setpoint of the speed control via p1155 or p1160
(p0922). In this case, the main setpoint should be injected before the ramp-function generator (p1070). The reason
for this is that the ramp-function generator output is automatically set when transitioning from closed-loop speed con-
trolled into open-loop speed controlled operation.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A07440 EPOS: Jerk time is limited
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The calculation of the jerk time Tr = MAX(p2572, p2573) / p2574 resulted in an excessively high value so that the
jerk time is internally limited to 1000 ms.
Note:
The alarm is also output if jerk limiting is not active.
Remedy: - increase the jerk limiting (p2574).
- reduce maximum acceleration or maximum deceleration (p2572, p2573).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1177
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07441 LR: Save the position offset of the absolute encoder adjustment
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The status of the absolute encoder adjustment has changed.
In order to permanently save the determined position offset (p2525) it must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971,
p0977).
Remedy: None necessary.
This alarm automatically disappears after the offset has been saved.
F07442 (A) LR: Multiturn does not match the modulo range
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The ratio between the multiturn resolution and the modulo range (p2576) is not an integer number.
This results in the adjustment being set back, as the position actual value cannot be reproduced after power-
off/power-on.
Remedy: Make the ration between the multiturn resolution and the modulo range an integer number.
The ratio v is calculated as follows:
1. Motor encoder without position tracking:
v = (p0421 * p2506 * p0433 * p2505) / (p0432 * p2504 * p2576)
2. Motor encoder with position tracking for the measuring gear:
v = (p0412 * p2506 * p2505) / (p2504 * p2576)
3. Motor encoder with position tracking for the load gear:
v = (p2721 * p2506 * p0433) / (p0432 * p2576)
4. Motor encoder with position tracking for the load and measuring gear:
v = (p2721 * p2506) / p2576
5. Direct encoder without position tracking:
v = (p0421 * p2506 * p0433) / (p0432 * p2576)
6. Direct encoder with position tracking for the measuring gear:
v = (p0412 * p2506) / p2576
Note:
With position tracking, it is recommended that p0412 and p2721 are changed
See also: p0412 (Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual), p0432 (Gearbox factor, encoder
revolutions), p0433 (Gearbox factor, motor/load revolutions), p2721 (Load gear, rotary absolute gearbox, revolu-
tions, virtual)
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07443 (A) LR: Reference point coordinate not in the permissible range
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The reference point coordinate received when adjusting the encoder via connector input p2599 lies outside the half
of the encoder range and cannot be set as actual axis position.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Maximum permissible value for the reference point coordinate.
Remedy: Set the reference point coordinate to a lower value than specified in the fault value.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1178 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07446 (A) Load gear: Position tracking cannot be reset
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The position tracking cannot be reset.
Remedy: Reset the position tracking as follows:
- select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4).
- reset position tracking, position (p2720.2 = 1).
- deselect encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0).
The fault should then be acknowledged and, if necessary, the absolute encoder adjusted (p2507).
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07447 Load gear: Position tracking, maximum actual value exceeded
Message value: Component number: %1, encoder data set: %2, drive data set: %3
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When the position tracking of the load gear is configured, the drive/encoder (motor encoder) identifies a maximum
possible absolute position actual value (r2723) that can no longer be represented within 32 bits.
Maximum value: p0408 * p2721 * 2^p0419
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ccbbaa hex
aa = encoder data set
bb = component number
cc = drive data set
See also: p0408 (Rotary encoder pulse No.), p0419 (Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits)), p2721 (Load
gear, rotary absolute gearbox, revolutions, virtual)
Remedy: - reduce the fine resolution (p0419).
- reduce the multiturn resolution (p2721).
See also: p0419 (Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits)), p2721 (Load gear, rotary absolute gearbox,
revolutions, virtual)
F07448 (A) Load gear: Position tracking, linear axis has exceeded the maximum range
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For a configured linear axis/no modulo axis, the currently effective motor encoder (encoder 1) has exceeded the
maximum possible traversing range.
For the configured linear axis, the maximum traversing range is defined to be 64x (+/- 32x) of p0421. It should be
read in p2721 and interpreted as the number of load revolutions.
Note:
Only the motor encoder in the currently effective drive data set is monitored here. The actual effective drive data set
is displayed in x = r0051 and the corresponding motor encoder is specified in in p0187[x].
Remedy: The fault should be resolved as follows:
- select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4).
- reset position tracking, position (p2720.2 = 1).
- deselect encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0).
The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1179
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07449 (A) Load gear: Position tracking, actual position outside tolerance window
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When powered down, the currently effective motor encoder was moved through a distance greater than was param-
eterized in the tolerance window. It is possible that there is no longer any reference between the mechanical system
and encoder.
Note:
Only the motor encoder in the currently effective drive data set is monitored here. The actual effective drive data set
is displayed in x = r0051 and the corresponding motor encoder is specified in in p0187[x].
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Deviation (difference) to the last encoder position in increments of the absolute value after the measuring gear - if
one is being used. The sign designates the traversing direction.
Note:
The deviation (difference) found is also displayed in r2724.
See also: p2722 (Load gear, position tracking tolerance window), r2724 (Load gear position difference)
Remedy: Reset the position tracking as follows:
- select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4).
- reset position tracking, position (p2720.2 = 1).
- deselect encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0).
The fault should then be acknowledged and, if necessary, the absolute encoder adjusted (p2507).
See also: p0010
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07450 (A) LR: Standstill monitoring has responded
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: After the standstill monitoring time (p2543) expired, the drive left the standstill window (p2542).
- position actual value inversion incorrectly set (p0410).
- standstill window set too small (p2542).
- standstill monitoring time set too low (p2543).
- position loop gain too low (p2538).
- position loop gain too high (instability/oscillation, p2538).
- mechanical overload.
- check the connecting cable, motor/drive converter (phase missing, interchange).
- when selecting motor identification, select tracking mode (BI: p2655[0] = 1 signal).
- when selecting function generator, select tracking mode (BI: p2655[0] = 1 signal) and deactivate position control
(BI:p2550 = 0 signal).
Remedy: Check the causes and resolve.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07451 (A) LR: Position monitoring has responded
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When the position monitoring time (p2545) expired, the drive had still not reached the positioning window (p2544).
- positioning window parameterized too small (p2544).
- position monitoring time parameterized too short (p2545).
- position loop gain too low (p2538).
- position loop gain too high (instability/oscillation, p2538).
- drive mechanically locked.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1180 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Check the causes and resolve.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07452 (A) LR: Following error too high
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The difference between the position setpoint position actual value (following error dynamic model, r2563) is greater
than the tolerance (p2546).
- the drive torque or accelerating capacity exceeded.
- position measuring system fault.
- position control sense incorrect.
- mechanical system locked.
- excessively high traversing velocity or excessively high position reference value (setpoint) differences
Remedy: Check the causes and resolve.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07453 LR: Position actual value preprocessing error
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing.
Remedy: Check the encoder for the position actual value preprocessing.
A07454 LR: Position actual value preprocessing does not have a valid encoder
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: One of the following problems has occurred with the position actual value preprocessing:
- an encoder is not assigned for the position actual value preprocessing (p2502 = 0).
- an encoder is assigned, but no encoder data set (p0187 = 99 or p0188 = 99 or p0189 = 99).
- an encoder an an encoder data set have been assigned, however, the encoder data set does not contain any
encoder data (p0400 = 0) or invalid data (e.g. p0408 = 0).
Remedy: Check the drive data sets, encoder data sets and encoder assignment.
See also: p0187 (Encoder 1 encoder data set number), p0188 (Encoder 2 encoder data set number), p0189
(Encoder 3 encoder data set number), p0400 (Encoder type selection)
A07455 EPOS: Maximum velocity limited
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The maximum velocity (p2571) is too high to correctly calculate the modulo correction.
Within the sampling time for positioning (p0115[5]), with the maximum velocity, a maximum of the half modulo length
must be moved through. p2571 was limited to this value.
Remedy: - reduce the maximum velocity (p2571).
- increase the sampling time for positioning (p0115[5]).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1181
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07456 EPOS: Setpoint velocity limited
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The actual setpoint velocity is greater than the parameterized maximum velocity (p2571) and is therefore limited.
Remedy: - check the entered setpoint velocity.
- reduce the velocity override (CI: p2646).
- increase the maximum velocity (p2571).
- check the signal source for the externally limited velocity (CI: p2594).
A07457 EPOS: Combination of input signals illegal
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An illegal combination of input signals that are simultaneously set was identified.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0: Jog 1 and jog 2 (p2589, p2590).
1: Jog 1 or jog 2 and direct setpoint input/MDI (p2589, p2590, p2647).
2: Jog 1 or jog 2 and start referencing (p2589, p2590, p2595).
3: Jog 1 or jog 2 and activate traversing task (p2589, p2590, p2631).
4: Direct setpoint input/MDI and starting referencing (p2647, p2595).
5: Direct setpoint input/MDI and activate traversing task (p2647, p2631).
6: Start referencing and activate traversing task (p2595, p2631).
Remedy: Check the appropriate input signals and correct.
F07458 EPOS: Reference cam not found
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: After starting the search for reference, the axis moved through the maximum permissible distance to search for the
reference cam without actually finding the reference cam.
Remedy: - check the "reference cam" binector input (BI: p2612).
- check the maximum permissible distance to the reference cam (p2606).
- if axis does not have any reference cam, then set p2607 to 0.
F07459 EPOS: No zero mark
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: After leaving the reference cam, the axis has traversed the maximum permissible distance between the reference
cam and zero mark without finding the zero mark.
Remedy: - check the encoder regarding the zero mark
- check the maximum permissible distance between the reference cam and zero mark (p2609).
- use an external encoder zero mark (equivalent zero mark) (p0495).
See also: p0495 (Equivalent zero mark, input terminal)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1182 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07460 EPOS: End of reference cam not found
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: During the search for reference, when the axis reached the zero mark it also reached the end of the traversing range
without detecting an edge at the binector input "reference cam" (BI: p2612).
Maximum traversing range: -2147483648 [LU] ... -2147483647 [LU]
Remedy: - check the "reference cam" binector input (BI: p2612).
- repeat the search for reference.
A07461 EPOS: Reference point not set
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When starting a traversing block/direct setpoint input, a reference point is not set (r2684.11 = 0).
Remedy: Reference the system (search for reference, flying referencing, set reference point).
A07462 EPOS: Selected traversing block number does not exist
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A traversing block selected via BI: p2625 to BI: p2630 was started via BI: p2631 = 0/1 edge "Activate traversing task".
- the number of the started traversing block is not contained in p2616[0...n].
- the started traversing block is suppressed.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the selected traversing block that is also not available.
Remedy: - correct the traversing program.
- select an available traversing block number.
A07463 (F) EPOS: External block change not requested in the traversing block
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For a traversing block with the block change enable CONTINUE_EXTERNAL_ALARM, the external block change
was not requested.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the traversing block.
Remedy: Resolve the reason as to why the edge is missing at binector input (BI: p2632).
Reaction upon F: OFF1
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
F07464 EPOS: Traversing block is inconsistent
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The traversing block does not contain valid information.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the traversing block with invalid information.
Remedy: Check the traversing block and where relevant, take into consideration alarms that are present.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1183
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07465 EPOS: Traversing block does not have a subsequent block
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: There is no subsequent block in the traversing block.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the traversing block with the missing subsequent block.
Remedy: - parameterize this traversing block with the block change enable END.
- parameterize additional traversing blocks with a higher block number and for the last block, using the block change
enable END.
A07466 EPOS: Traversing block number assigned a multiple number of times
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The same traversing block number was assigned a multiple number of times.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the traversing block that was assigned a multiple number of times.
Remedy: Correct the traversing blocks.
A07467 EPOS: Traversing block has illegal task parameters
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The task parameter in the traversing block contains an illegal value.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the traversing block with an illegal task parameter.
Remedy: Correct the task parameter in the traversing block.
A07468 EPOS: Traversing block jump destination does not exist
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In a traversing block, a jump was programmed to a non-existent block.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the traversing block with a jump destination that does not exist.
Remedy: - correct the traversing block.
- add the missing traversing block.
A07469 EPOS: Traversing block < target position < software limit switch minus
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the traversing block the specified absolute target position lies outside the range limited by the software limit switch
minus.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the traversing block with illegal target position.
Remedy: - correct the traversing block.
- change software limit switch minus (CI: p2578, p2580).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1184 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07470 EPOS: Traversing block> target position > software limit switch plus
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the traversing block the specified absolute target position lies outside the range limited by the software limit switch
plus.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the traversing block with illegal target position.
Remedy: - correct the traversing block.
- change software limit switch plus (CI: p2579, p2581).
A07471 EPOS: Traversing block target position outside the modulo range
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the traversing block the target position lies outside the modulo range.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the traversing block with illegal target position.
Remedy: - in the traversing block, correct the target position.
- change the modulo range (p2576).
A07472 EPOS: Traversing block ABS_POS/ABS_NEG not possible
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the traversing block the positioning mode ABS_POS or ABS_NEG were parameterized with the modulo correction
not activated.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the traversing block with the illegal positioning mode.
Remedy: Correct the traversing block.
A07473 (F) EPOS: Beginning of traversing range reached
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When traversing, the axis has moved to the traversing range limit.
Remedy: Move away in the positive direction.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07474 (F) EPOS: End of traversing range reached
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When traversing, the axis has moved to the traversing range limit.
Remedy: Move away in the negative direction.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1185
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07475 (A) EPOS: Target position < start of traversing range
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The target position for relative traversing lies outside the traversing range.
Remedy: Correct the target position.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07476 (A) EPOS: Target position > end of the traversing range
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The target position for relative traversing lies outside the traversing range.
Remedy: Correct the target position.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A07477 (F) EPOS: Target position < software limit switch minus
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the actual traversing operation, the target position is less than the software limit switch minus.
Remedy: - correct the target position.
- change software limit switch minus (CI: p2578, p2580).
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07478 (F) EPOS: Target position > software limit switch plus
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the actual traversing operation, the target position is greater than the software limit switch plus.
Remedy: - correct the target position.
- change software limit switch plus (CI: p2579, p2581).
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07479 EPOS: Software limit switch minus reached
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The axis is at the position of the software limit switch minus. An active traversing block was interrupted.
Remedy: - correct the target position.
- change software limit switch minus (CI: p2578, p2580).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1186 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07480 EPOS: Software limit switch plus reached
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The axis is at the position of the software limit switch plus. An active traversing block was interrupted.
Remedy: - correct the target position.
- change software limit switch plus (CI: p2579, p2581).
F07481 (A) EPOS: Axis position < software limit switch minus
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The actual position of the axis is less than the position of the software limit switch minus.
Remedy: - correct the target position.
- change software limit switch minus (CI: p2578, p2580).
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07482 (A) EPOS: Axis position > software limit switch plus
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The actual position of the axis is greater than the position of the software limit switch plus.
Remedy: - correct the target position.
- change software limit switch plus (CI: p2579, p2581).
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A07483 EPOS: Travel to fixed stop clamping torque not reached
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The fixed stop in the traversing block was reached without the clamping torque/clamping force having been achieved.
Remedy: - Check the maximum torque-generating current (r1533).
- check the torque limits (p1520, p1521).
- check the power limits (p1530, p1531).
- check the BICO interconnections of the torque limits (p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529).
F07484 EPOS: Fixed stop outside the monitoring window
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF3 (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: In the "fixed stop reached" state, the axis has moved outside the defined monitoring window (p2635).
Remedy: - check the monitoring window (p2635).
- check the mechanical system.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1187
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07485 (A) EPOS: Fixed stop not reached
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: In a traversing block with the task FIXED STOP, the end position was reached without detecting a fixed stop.
Remedy: - check the traversing block and locate the target position further into the workpiece.
- check the "fixed stop reached" control signal (p2637).
- if required, reduce the maximum following error window to detect the fixed stop (p2634).
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A07486 EPOS: Intermediate stop missing
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the modes "traversing blocks" or "direct setpoint input/MDI" at the start of motion, the binector input "no interme-
diate stop/intermediate stop" (BI: p2640) did not have a 1 signal.
Remedy: Connect a 1 signal to the binector input "no intermediate stop/intermediate stop" (BI: p2640) and re-start motion.
A07487 EPOS: Reject traversing task missing
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the modes "traversing blocks" or "direct setpoint input/MDI" at the start of motion, the binector input "do not reject
traversing task/reject traversing task" (BI: p2641) does not have a 1 signal.
Remedy: Connect a 1 signal to the binector input "do not reject traversing task/reject traversing task" (BI: p2641) and restart
motion.
F07488 EPOS: Relative positioning not possible
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: In the mode "direct setpoint input/MDI", for continuous transfer (p2649 = 1) relative positioning was selected (BI:
p2648 = 0 signal).
Remedy: Check the control.
A07489 EPOS: Reference point correction outside the window
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For the function "flying referencing" the difference between the measured position at the measuring probe and the
reference point coordinate lies outside the parameterized window.
Remedy: - check the mechanical system.
- check the parameterization of the window (p2602).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1188 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07490 EPOS: Enable signal withdrawn while traversing
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: - for a standard assignment, another fault may have occurred as a result of withdrawing the enable signals.
- the drive is in the "switching on inhibited" state (for a standard assignment).
Remedy: - set the enable signals or check the cause of the fault that first occurred and then result (for a standard assignment).
- check the assignment to enable the basic positioning function.
F07491 (A) EPOS: STOP cam minus reached
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF3
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A zero signal was detected at binector input BI: p2569, i.e. the STOP cam minus was reached.
For a positive traversing direction, the STOP cam minus was reached - i.e. the wiring of the STOP cam is incorrect.
Remedy: - leave the STOP cam minus in the positive traversing direction and return the axis to the valid traversing range.
- check the wiring of the STOP cam.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07492 (A) EPOS: STOP cam plus reached
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF3
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A zero signal was detected at binector input BI: p2570, i.e. the STOP cam plus was reached.
For a negative traversing direction, the STOP cam plus was reached - i.e. the wiring of the STOP cam is incorrect.
Remedy: - leave the STOP cam plus in the negative traversing direction and return the axis to the valid traversing range.
- check the wiring of the STOP cam.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07493 LR: Overflow of the value range for position actual value
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for the position actual value representation was exceeded.
When the overflow occurs, the "referenced" or "adjustment absolute measuring system" status is reset.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The position actual value (r2521) has exceeded the value range.
2: The encoder position actual value Gn_XIST2 (r0483) or the absolute value after the load gear (r2723) has
exceeded the value range.
3: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from incre-
ments to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range for displaying the position actual value.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1189
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: If required, reduce the traversing range or position resolution (p2506).
Increase the fine resolution of absolute position actual value (p0419).
Reference to fault value = 3:
If the value for the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is greater than 4294967296, then it is not possible to
make an adjustment due to an overflow.
For rotary encoders, the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is calculated as follows:
1. Motor encoder without position tracking
p2506 * p0433 * p2505 / (p0432 * p2504)
p2506 * p0433 * p2505 * p0421 / (p0432 * p2504) for multiturn encoders
2. Motor encoder with position tracking for measuring gear:
p2506 * p0412 * p2505 / p2504
3. Motor encoder with position tracking for load gear
p2506 * p2721 * p0433 / p0432
4. Motor encoder with position tracking for load and measuring gear
p2506 * p2721
5. Direct encoder without position tracking
p2506 * p0433 / p0432
p2506 * p0433 * p0421 / p0432 for multiturn encoders
6. Direct encoder with position tracking for measuring gear
p2506 * p0412
F07494 LR: Drive Data Set changeover in operation
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A drive data set changeover (DDS changeover) when the mechanical relationships change (p2503 .. 2506), the
direction of rotation (p1821) or the encoder assignment (p2502) were requested during operation.
Remedy: To changeover the drive data set, initially, exit the "operation" mode.
A07495 (F) LR: Reference function interrupted
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was interrupted.
- an encoder fault has occurred (Gn_ZSW.15 = 1).
- position actual value was set during an activated reference function.
- simultaneously activate reference mark search and measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 1 sig-
nal).
- activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was deactivated (BI: p2508
and BI: p2509 = 0 signal).
Remedy: - check the causes and resolve.
- reset the control (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 0 signal) and activate the requested function.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07496 EPOS: Enable not possible
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: It is not possible to enable the basic positioner because at least one signal is missing.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: EPOS enable missing (BI: p2656).
2: Position actual value, valid feedback signal missing (BI: p2658).
Remedy: Check the appropriate binector inputs and signals.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1190 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07497 LR: Position setting value activated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The position actual value is set to the value received via CI: p2515while BI: p2514 = 1 signal. A possible system
deviation cannot be corrected.
Remedy: None necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears with BI: p2514 = 0 signal.
A07498 (F) LR: Measuring probe evaluation not possible
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When evaluating the measuring probe, an error occurred.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
6: The input terminal for the measuring probe is not set.
4098: Error when initializing the measuring probe.
4100: The measuring pulse frequency is too high.
> 50000: The measuring clock cycle is not a multiple integer of the position controller clock cycle.
Remedy: Deactivate the measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2509 = 0 signal).
Re alarm value = 6:
Set the input terminal for the measuring probe (p0488, p0489 or p2517, p2518).
Re alarm value = 4098:
Check the Control Unit hardware.
Re alarm value = 4100:
Reduce the frequency of the measuring pulses at the measuring probe.
Re alarm value > 50000:
Set the clock cycle ratio of the measuring clock cycle to the position controller clock cycle to an integer multiple.
To do this, the currently effective measuring clock cycle can be determined from the alarm value as follows:
Tmeas [125 µs] = alarm value - 50000
With PROFIBUS, the measuring clock cycle corresponds to the PROFIBUS clock cycle (r2064[1]).
Without PROFIBUS, the measuring clock cycle is an internal cycle time that cannot be influenced.
Reaction upon F: OFF1
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
F07499 (A) EPOS: Reversing cam approached with the incorrect traversing direction
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF3
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The reversing cam MINUS was approached in the positive traversing direction or the reversing cam PLUS was
approached in the negative traversing direction.
Remedy: - check the wiring of the reversing cam (BI: p2613, BI: p2614).
- check the traversing direction to approach the reversing cam.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1191
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07500 Drive: Power unit data set PDS not configured
Message value: Drive data set: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Only for controlled line supply infeed/regenerative feedback units:
The power unit data set was not configured - this means that a data set number was not entered into the drive data
set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Drive data set number of p0185.
Remedy: The index of the power unit data set associated with the drive data set should be entered into p0185.
F07501 Drive: Motor Data Set MDS not configured
Message value: Drive data set: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Only for power units:
The motor data set was not configured - this means that a data set number was not entered into the associated drive
data set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The fault value includes the drive data set number of p0186.
Remedy: The index of the motor data set associated with the drive data set should be entered into p0186.
See also: p0186 (Motor Data Sets (MDS) number)
F07502 Drive: Encoder Data Set EDS not configured
Message value: Drive data set: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Only for power units:
The encoder data set was not configured - this means that a data set number was not entered into the associated
drive data set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The fault value includes the drive data set number of p0187, p0188 and p0189.
The fault value is increased by 100 * encoder number (e.g. for p0189: Fault value 3xx with xx = data set number).
Remedy: The index of the encoder data set associated with the drive data set should be entered into p0187 (1st encoder),
p0188 (2nd encoder) and p0189 (3rd encoder).
A07504 Drive: Motor data set is not assigned to a drive data set
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A motor data set is not assigned to a drive object.
All of the existing motor data sets in the drive data sets must be assigned using the MDS number (p0186[0...n]).
There must be at least as many drive data sets as motor data sets.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the motor data set that has not been assigned.
Remedy: In the drive data sets, assign the non-assigned motor data set using the MDS number (p0186[0...n]).
- check whether all of the motor data sets are assigned to drive data sets.
- if required, delete superfluous motor data sets.
- if required, set up new drive data sets and assign to the corresponding motor data sets.
See also: p0186 (Motor Data Sets (MDS) number)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1192 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07509 Drive: Component number missing
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A Drive Data Set (DDS) is assigned to a Motor Data Set (MDS) or Encoder Data Set (EDS) that does not have a
component number.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
nnmmmxxyyy
nn: Number of the MDS/EDS.
mmm: Parameter number of the missing component number.
xx: Number of the DDS that is assigned to the MDS/EDS.
yyy: Parameter number that references the MDS/EDS.
Example:
p0186[7] = 5: DDS 7 is assigned MDS 5.
p0131[5] = 0: There is no component number set in MDS 5.
Alarm value = 0513107186
Remedy: In the drive data sets, no longer assign MDS/EDS using p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189 or set a valid component num-
ber.
See also: p0131, p0141, p0142, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189
F07510 Drive: Identical encoder in the drive data set
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: More than one encoder with identical component number is assigned to a single drive data set. In one drive data set,
it is not permissible that identical encoders are operated together.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1000 * first identical encoder + 100 * second identical encoder + drive data set.
Example:
Fault value = 1203 means:
In drive data set 3, the first (p0187[3]) and second encoder (p0188[3]) are identical.
Remedy: Assign the drive data set to different encoders.
See also: p0141 (Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number), p0187 (Encoder 1 encoder data set num-
ber), p0188 (Encoder 2 encoder data set number), p0189 (Encoder 3 encoder data set number)
F07511 Drive: Encoder used a multiple number of times
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Each encoder may only be assigned to one drive and within a drive must - in each drive data set - either always be
encoder 1, always encoder 2 or always encoder 3. This unique assignment has been violated.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The two parameters in coded form, that refer to the same component number.
First parameter:
Index: First and second decimal place (99 for EDS, not assigned DDS)
Parameter number: Third decimal place (1 for p0187, 2 for p0188, 3 for p0189, 4 for EDS not assigned DDS)
Drive number: Fourth and fifth decimal place
Second parameter:
Index: Sixth and seventh decimal place (99 for EDS, not assigned DDS)
Parameter number: Eighth decimal place (1 for p0187, 2 for p0188, 3 for p0189, 4 for EDS, not assigned DDS)
Drive number: Ninth and tenth decimal place
See also: p0141 (Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number)
Remedy: Correct the double use of a component number using the two parameters coded in the fault value.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1193
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07512 Drive: Encoder data set changeover cannot be parameterized
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Using p0141, a changeover of the encoder data set is prepared that is illegal. In this firmware release, an encoder
data set changeover is only permitted for the components in the actual topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Incorrect EDS data set number.
See also: p0187 (Encoder 1 encoder data set number), p0188 (Encoder 2 encoder data set number), p0189
(Encoder 3 encoder data set number)
Remedy: Every encoder data set must be assigned its own dedicated DRIVE-CLiQ socket. The component numbers of the
encoder interfaces (p0141) must have different values within a drive object.
The following must apply:
p0141[0] not equal to p0141[1] not equal to ... not equal to p0141[n]
A07514 (N) Drive: Data structure does not correspond to the interface module
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The interface mode "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" was set (p2038 = 1) and the data structure does not correspond to
this mode.
For the data structure, the following rule must be complied with.
Within the group of 8 drive data sets, the assignment to the motor data set must be set the same:
p0186[0] = p0186[1] = ... = p0186[7]
p0186[8] = p0186[9] = ... = p0186[15]
p0186[16] = p0186[17] = ... = p0186[23]
p0186[24] = p0186[25] = ... = p0186[31]
See also: p0180 (Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS)), p0186 (Motor Data Sets (MDS) number), p2038 (PROFIdrive
STW/ZSW interface mode)
Remedy: - structure the data according to the rules of the "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" interface mode.
- check the interface mode (p2038).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F07515 Drive: Power unit and motor incorrectly connected
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A power unit (via PDS) was assigned to a motor (via MDS) in a drive data set that is not connected in the target
topology.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the incorrectly parameterized drive data set.
Remedy: - assign the drive data set to a combination of motor and power unit permitted by the target topology.
- adapt the target topology.
See also: p0121 (Power unit component number), p0131 (Motor component number), p0186 (Motor Data Sets
(MDS) number)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1194 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07516 Drive: Re-commission the data set
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The assignment between the drive data set and motor data set (p0186) or between the drive data set and the
encoder data set was modified (p0187). This is the reason that the drive data set must re-commissioned.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Drive data set to be re-commissioned.
Remedy: Commission the drive data set specified in the fault value (r0949).
F07517 Drive: Encoder data set changeover incorrectly parameterized
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An MDS cannot have different motor encoders in two different DDS.
The following parameterization therefore results results in an error:
p0186[0] = 0, p0187[0] = 0
p0186[0] = 0, p0187[0] = 1
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The lower 16 bits indicate the first DDS and the upper 16 bits indicate the second DDS.
Remedy: If you wish to operate a motor once with one motor encoder and then another time with the other motor encoder,
then you must set up two different MDSs, in which the motor data are the same.
Example:
p0186[0] = 0, p0187[0] = 0
p0186[0] = 1, p0187[0] = 1
F07518 Drive: Motor data set changeover incorrectly parameterized
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The system has identified that two motor data sets were incorrectly parameterized.
Parameter r0313 (calculated from p0314, p0310, p0311), r0315 and p1982 may only have different values if the
motor data sets are assigned different motors. p0827 is used to assign the motors and/contactors.
It is not possible to toggle between motor data sets.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
xxxxyyyy:
xxxx: First DDS with assigned MDS, yyyy: Second DDS with assigned MDS
Remedy: Correct the parameterization of the motor data sets.
A07519 Drive: Motor changeover incorrectly parameterized
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: With the setting p0833.0 = 1, a motor changeover via the application is selected. This is the reason that p0827 must
have different values in the appropriate motor data set.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
xxxxyyyy:
xxxx: First MDS, yyyy: Second MDS
Remedy: - parameterize the appropriate motor data sets differently (p0827).
- select the setting p0833.0 = 0 (motor changeover via the drive).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1195
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07520 Drive: Motor cannot be changed over
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The motor cannot be changed over.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1:
The contactor for the motor that is presently active cannot be opened, because for a synchronous motor, the speed
(r0063) is greater than the speed at the start of field weakening (p3048). As long as r0063 > p0348, the current in
the motor does not decay in spite of the pulses being suppressed.
2:
The "contactor opened" feedback signal was not detected within 1 s.
3:
The "contactor closed" feedback signal was not detected within 1 s.
Remedy: Re alarm value = 1:
Set the speed lower than the speed at the start of field weakening (r0063 < p0348).
Re alarm value = 2, 3:
Check the feedback signals of the contactor involved.
A07530 Drive: Drive Data Set DDS not present
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected drive data set is not available (p0837 > p0180). The drive data set was not changed over.
See also: p0180, p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824, r0837
Remedy: - select the existing drive data set.
- set up additional drive data sets.
A07541 Drive: Data set changeover not possible
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected drive data set changeover and the assigned motor changeover are not possible and are not carried out.
For synchronous motors, the motor contactor may only be switched for actual speeds less than the speed at the start
of field weakening (r0063 < p0348).
See also: r0063 (Actual speed value)
Remedy: Reduce the speed below the speed at the start of field weakening.
A07550 (F, N) Drive: Not possible to reset encoder parameters
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When carrying out a factory setting (e.g. using p0970 = 1), it was not possible to reset the encoder parameters. The
encoder parameters are directly read out of the encoder via DRIVE-CLiQ.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the encoder involved.
Remedy: - repeat the operation.
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1196 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07551 Drive encoder: No commutation angle information
Message value: Fault cause: %1, drive data set: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The commutation angle information is missing. This means that synchronous motors cannot be controlled (closed-
loop control)
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = fault cause, xxxx = drive data set
yyyy = 1 dec:
The motor encoder used does not supply an absolute commutation angle.
yyyy = 2 dec:
The selected ratio of the measuring gear does not match the motor pole pair number.
Remedy: Re fault cause = 1:
- check the encoder parameterization (p0404).
- use an encoder with track C/D, EnDat interface of Hall sensors.
- use an encoder with sinusoidal A/B track for which the motor pole pair number (r0313) is an integer multiple of the
encoder pulse number (p0408).
- activate the pole position identification routine (p1982 = 1).
Re fault cause = 2:
- the quotient of the pole pair number divided by the ratio of the measuring gear must be an integer number: (p0314
* p0433) / p0432.
Note:
For operation with track C/D, this quotient must be less than 8.
See also: p0402 (Gearbox type selection), p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), p0432 (Gearbox factor, encoder
revolutions), p0433 (Gearbox factor, motor/load revolutions)
F07552 (A) Drive encoder: Encoder configuration not supported
Message value: Fault cause: %1, component number: %2, encoder data set: %3
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The requested encoder configuration is not supported. Only bits may be requested in p0404 that are signaled as
being supported by the encoder evaluation in r0456.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Low word low byte: Encoder data set number
Low word high byte: Component number
High word:
The encoder evaluation does not support a function selected in p0404.
1: sin/cos encoder with absolute track (this is supported by SME25).
3: Squarewave encoder (this is supported by SMC30).
4: sin/cos encoder (this is supported by SMC20, SMI20, SME20, SME25).
12: sin/cos encoder with reference mark (this is supported by SME20).
15: Commutation with zero mark for separately-excited synchronous motors with VECTORMV.
23: Resolver (this is supported by SMC10, SMI10).
65535: Other function (compare r0456 and p0404).
See also: p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), r0456 (Encoder configuration supported)
Remedy: - check the encoder parameterization (p0400, p0404).
- use the matching encoder evaluation (r0456).
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1197
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07553 (A) Drive encoder: Sensor Module configuration not supported
Message value: Encoder data set: %1, first incorrect bit: %2, incorrect parameter: %3
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The Sensor Module does not support the requested configuration.
For incorrect p0430 (cc = 0), the following applies:
- In p0430 (requested functions), at least 1 bit was set that is not set in r0458 (supported functions) (exception: Bit
19, 28, 29, 30, 31).
- p1982 > 0 (pole position identification requested), but r0458.16 = 0 (pole position identification not supported).
For incorrect p0437 (cc = 1), the following applies:
- In p0437 (requested functions), at least 1 bit was set that is not set in r0459 (supported functions).
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex
aa: encoder data set number
bb: first incorrect bit
cc: incorrect parameter
cc = 0: incorrect parameter is p0430
cc = 1: incorrect parameter is p0437
cc = 2: incorrect parameter is r0459
dd: reserved (always 0)
Remedy: - check the encoder parameterization (p0430, p0437).
- check the pole position identification routine (p1982).
- use the matching encoder evaluation (r0458, r0459).
See also: p0430, p0437, r0458, r0459, p1982
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07555 (A) Drive encoder: Configuration position tracking
Message value: Component number: %1, encoder data set: %2, drive data set: %3, fault cause: %4
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The configuration of the position tracking is not supported.
Position tracking can only be activated for absolute encoders.
For linear axes, it is not possible to simultaneously activate the position tracking for load and measuring gears.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex
aa = encoder data set
bb = component number
cc = drive data set
dd = fault cause
dd = 00 hex = 0 dez
An absolute encoder is not being used.
dd = 01 hex = 1 dez
Position tracking cannot be activated because the memory of the internal NVRAM is not sufficient or a Control Unit
does not have an NVRAM.
dd = 02 hex = 2 dez
For a linear axis, the position tracking was activated for the load and measuring gear.
dd = 03 hex = 3 dez
Position tracking cannot be activated because position tracking with another gear ratio, axis type or tolerance window
has already been detected for this encoder data set.
dd = 04 hex = 4 dez
A linear encoder is being used.
See also: p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), p0411 (Measuring gear, configuration)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1198 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - use an absolute encoder.
- if necessary, deselect the position tracking (p0411 for the measuring gear, p2720 for the load gear).
- use a Control Unit with sufficient NVRAM.
- Only activate position tracking of the load gear in the same encoder data set if the gear ratio (p2504, p2505), axis
type (p2720.1) and tolerance window (p2722) are also the same.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07556 Measuring gear: Position tracking, maximum actual value exceeded
Message value: Component number: %1, encoder data set: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When the position tracking of the measuring gear is configured, the drive/encoder identifies a maximum possible
absolute position actual value (r0483) that cannot be represented within 32 bits.
Maximum value: p0408 * p0412 * 2^p0419
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Low word low byte: Encoder data set number
Low word high byte: Component number
See also: p0408 (Rotary encoder pulse No.), p0412 (Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual),
p0419 (Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits))
Remedy: - reduce the fine resolution (p0419).
- reduce the multiturn resolution (p0412).
See also: p0412 (Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual), p0419 (Fine resolution absolute
value Gx_XIST2 (in bits))
A07557 (F) Encoder 1: Reference point coordinate not in the permissible range
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The reference point coordinate received when adjusting the encoder via connector input CI:p2599 lies outside the
half of the encoder range and cannot be set as actual axis position. The maximum permissible value is displayed in
the supplementary information.
Remedy: Set the reference point coordinate less than the value from the supplementary information.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07558 (F) Encoder 2: Reference point coordinate not in the permissible range
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The reference point coordinate received when adjusting the encoder via connector input CI:p2599 lies outside the
half of the encoder range and cannot be set as actual axis position. The maximum permissible value is displayed in
the supplementary information.
Remedy: Set the reference point coordinate less than the value from the supplementary information.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1199
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07559 (F) Encoder 3: Reference point coordinate not in the permissible range
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The reference point coordinate received when adjusting the encoder via connector input CI:p2599 lies outside the
half of the encoder range and cannot be set as actual axis position. The maximum permissible value is displayed in
the supplementary information.
Remedy: Set the reference point coordinate less than the value from the supplementary information.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
F07560 Drive encoder: Number of pulses is not to the power of two
Message value: Encoder data set: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: For rotary absolute encoders, the pulse number in p0408 must be to the power of two.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The fault value includes the encoder data set number involved.
Remedy: - check the parameterization (p0408, p0404.1, r0458.5).
- upgrade the Sensor Module firmware if necessary
F07561 Drive encoder: Number of multiturn pulses is not to the power of two
Message value: Encoder data set: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The multiturn resolution in p0421 must be to the power of two.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The fault value includes the encoder data set number involved.
Remedy: - check the parameterization (p0421, p0404.1, r0458.5).
- upgrade the Sensor Module firmware if necessary
F07562 (A) Drive, encoder: Position tracking, incremental encoder not possible
Message value: Fault cause: %1, component number: %2, encoder data set: %3
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The requested position tracking for incremental encoders is not supported.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ccccbbaa hex
aa = encoder Data Set number
bb = component number
cccc = fault cause
cccc = 00 hex = 0 dec
The encoder type does not support the "Position tracking incremental encoder" function.
cccc = 01 hex = 1 dec
Position tracking cannot be activated because the memory of the internal NVRAM is not sufficient or a Control Unit
does not have an NVRAM.
cccc = 04 hex = 4 dec
A linear encoder is used that does not support the position tracking function.
See also: p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), p0411 (Measuring gear, configuration), r0456 (Encoder configu-
ration supported)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1200 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check the encoder parameterization (p0400, p0404).
- use a Control Unit with sufficient NVRAM.
- if required, deselect position tracking for the incremental encoder (p0411.3 = 0).
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A07565 (F, N) Drive: Encoder error in PROFIdrive encoder interface 1
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An encoder error was signaled for encoder 1 via the PROFIdrive encoder interface (G1_ZSW.15).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Error code from G1_XIST2, refer to the description regarding r0483.
Note:
This alarm is only output if p0480[0] is not equal to zero.
Remedy: Acknowledge the encoder error using the encoder control word (G1_STW.15 = 1).
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A07566 (F, N) Drive: Encoder error in PROFIdrive encoder interface 2
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An encoder error was signaled for encoder 2 via the PROFIdrive encoder interface (G2_ZSW.15).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Error code from G2_XIST2, refer to the description regarding r0483.
Note:
This alarm is only output if p0480[1] is not equal to zero.
Remedy: Acknowledge the encoder error using the encoder control word (G2_STW.15 = 1).
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A07567 (F, N) Drive: Encoder error in PROFIdrive encoder interface 3
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An encoder error was signaled for encoder 3 via the PROFIdrive encoder interface (G3_ZSW.15).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Error code from G3_XIST2, refer to the description regarding r0483.
Note:
This alarm is only output if p0480[2] is not equal to zero.
Remedy: Acknowledge the encoder error using the encoder control word (G3_STW.15 = 1).
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1201
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07569 (F) Encoder could not be identified
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: During encoder identification (waiting) with p0400 = 10100, the encoder could not be identified.
Either the wrong encoder has been installed or no encoder has been installed, the wrong encoder cable has been
connected or no encoder cable has been connected to the Sensor Module, or the DRIVE-CLiQ component has not
been connected to DRIVE-CLiQ.
Note:
Encoder identification must be supported by the encoder and is possible in the following cases:
Encoder with EnDat interface, motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
Remedy: - check and, if necessary, connect the encoder and/or encoder cable.
- check and, if necessary, establish the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
- in the case of encoders that cannot be identified (e.g. encoders without EnDat interface), the correct encoder type
must be entered in p0400.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
F07575 Drive: Motor encoder not ready
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (ENCODER)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The motor encoder signals that it is not ready.
- initialization of encoder 1 (motor encoder) was unsuccessful.
- the function "parking encoder" is active (encoder control word G1_STW.14 = 1).
- the encoder interface (Sensor Module) is deactivated (p0145).
- the Sensor Module is defective.
Remedy: Evaluate other queued faults via encoder 1.
A07576 Drive: Encoderless operation due to a fault active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Encoderless operation is active due to a fault (r1407.13).
The required response when an encoder fault occurs is parameterized in p0491.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy:
A07577 (F) Encoder 1: Measuring probe evaluation not possible
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When evaluating the measuring probe, an error occurred.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
6: The input terminal for the measuring probe is not set.
4098: Error when initializing the measuring probe.
4100: The measuring pulse frequency is too high.
4200: The PROFIBUS clock cycle is not a multiple of integer of the position controller clock cycle.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1202 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Deactivate the measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2509 = 0 signal).
Re alarm value = 6:
Set the input terminal for the measuring probe (p0488, p0489 or p2517, p2518).
Re alarm value = 4098:
Check the Control Unit hardware.
Re alarm value = 4100:
Reduce the frequency of the measuring pulses at the measuring probe.
Re alarm value = 4200:
Set the clock cycle ratio between the PROFIBUS clock cycle and the position controller clock cycle to an integer mul-
tiple.
Reaction upon F: OFF1
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07578 (F) Encoder 2: Measuring probe evaluation not possible
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When evaluating the measuring probe, an error occurred.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
6: The input terminal for the measuring probe is not set.
4098: Error when initializing the measuring probe.
4100: The measuring pulse frequency is too high.
4200: The PROFIBUS clock cycle is not a multiple of integer of the position controller clock cycle.
Remedy: Deactivate the measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2509 = 0 signal).
Re alarm value = 6:
Set the input terminal for the measuring probe (p0488, p0489 or p2517, p2518).
Re alarm value = 4098:
Check the Control Unit hardware.
Re alarm value = 4100:
Reduce the frequency of the measuring pulses at the measuring probe.
Re alarm value = 4200:
Set the clock cycle ratio between the PROFIBUS clock cycle and the position controller clock cycle to an integer mul-
tiple.
Reaction upon F: OFF1
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07579 (F) Encoder 3: Measuring probe evaluation not possible
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When evaluating the measuring probe, an error occurred.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
6: The input terminal for the measuring probe is not set.
4098: Error when initializing the measuring probe.
4100: The measuring pulse frequency is too high.
4200: The PROFIBUS clock cycle is not a multiple of integer of the position controller clock cycle.
Remedy: Deactivate the measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2509 = 0 signal).
Re alarm value = 6:
Set the input terminal for the measuring probe (p0488, p0489 or p2517, p2518).
Re alarm value = 4098:
Check the Control Unit hardware.
Re alarm value = 4100:
Reduce the frequency of the measuring pulses at the measuring probe.
Re alarm value = 4200:
Set the clock cycle ratio between the PROFIBUS clock cycle and the position controller clock cycle to an integer mul-
tiple.
Reaction upon F: OFF1
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1203
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07580 (F, N) Drive: No Sensor Module with matching component number
Message value: Encoder data set: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A Sensor Module with the component number specified in p0141 was not found.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Encoder data set involved (index of p0141).
Remedy: Correct parameter p0141.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A07581 (F) Encoder 1: Position actual value preprocessing error
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing.
Remedy: Check the encoder for the position actual value preprocessing.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07582 (F) Encoder 2: Position actual value preprocessing error
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing.
Remedy: Check the encoder for the position actual value preprocessing.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07583 (F) Encoder 3: Position actual value preprocessing error
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing.
Remedy: Check the encoder for the position actual value preprocessing.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07584 Encoder 1: Position setting value activated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The position actual value is set to the value received via CI: p2515while BI: p2514 = 1 signal. A possible system
deviation cannot be corrected.
Remedy: None necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears with BI: p2514 = 0 signal.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1204 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07585 Encoder 2: Position setting value activated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The position actual value is set to the value received via CI: p2515while BI: p2514 = 1 signal. A possible system
deviation cannot be corrected.
Remedy: None necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears with BI: p2514 = 0 signal.
A07586 Encoder 3: Position setting value activated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The position actual value is set to the value received via CI: p2515while BI: p2514 = 1 signal. A possible system
deviation cannot be corrected.
Remedy: None necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears with BI: p2514 = 0 signal.
A07587 Encoder 1: Position actual value preprocessing does not have a valid encoder
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The following problem has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing.
- an encoder data set has been assigned, however, the encoder data set does not contain any encoder data (p0400
= 0) or invalid data (e.g. p0408 = 0).
Remedy: Check the drive data sets, encoder data sets.
See also: p0187 (Encoder 1 encoder data set number), p0188 (Encoder 2 encoder data set number), p0189
(Encoder 3 encoder data set number), p0400 (Encoder type selection)
A07588 Encoder 2: Position actual value preprocessing does not have a valid encoder
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The following problem has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing.
- an encoder data set has been assigned, however, the encoder data set does not contain any encoder data (p0400
= 0) or invalid data (e.g. p0408 = 0).
Remedy: Check the drive data sets, encoder data sets.
See also: p0187 (Encoder 1 encoder data set number), p0188 (Encoder 2 encoder data set number), p0189
(Encoder 3 encoder data set number), p0400 (Encoder type selection)
A07589 Encoder 3: Position actual value preprocessing does not have a valid encoder
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The following problem has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing.
- an encoder data set has been assigned, however, the encoder data set does not contain any encoder data (p0400
= 0) or invalid data (e.g. p0408 = 0).
Remedy: Check the drive data sets, encoder data sets.
See also: p0187 (Encoder 1 encoder data set number), p0188 (Encoder 2 encoder data set number), p0189
(Encoder 3 encoder data set number), p0400 (Encoder type selection)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1205
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07590 (F) Encoder 1: Drive Data Set changeover in operation
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A Drive Data Set changeover (DDS) with a change of the mechanical relationships and the encoder assignment
(p2502) was requested in operation.
Remedy: To changeover the drive data set, initially, exit the "operation" mode.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07591 (F) Encoder 2: Drive Data Set changeover in operation
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A Drive Data Set changeover (DDS) with a change of the mechanical relationships and the encoder assignment
(p2502) was requested in operation.
Remedy: To changeover the drive data set, initially, exit the "operation" mode.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07592 (F) Encoder 3: Drive Data Set changeover in operation
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A Drive Data Set changeover (DDS) with a change of the mechanical relationships and the encoder assignment
(p2502) was requested in operation.
Remedy: To changeover the drive data set, initially, exit the "operation" mode.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07593 (F) Encoder 1: Value range for position actual value exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for the position actual value representation was exceeded.
When the overflow occurs, the "referenced" or "adjustment absolute measuring system" status is reset.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The position actual value (r2521) has exceeded the value range.
2: The encoder position actual value Gn_XIST2 (r0483) or the absolute value after the load gear (r2723) has
exceeded the value range.
3: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from incre-
ments to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range for displaying the position actual value.
Remedy: If required, reduce the traversing range or position resolution.
Re alarm value = 3:
Reducing the position resolution and conversion factor:
- reduce the length unit (LU) per load revolution for rotary encoders (p2506).
- increase the fine resolution of absolute position actual values (p0419).
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1206 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07594 (F) Encoder 2: Value range for position actual value exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for the position actual value representation was exceeded.
When the overflow occurs, the "referenced" or "adjustment absolute measuring system" status is reset.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The position actual value (r2521) has exceeded the value range.
2: The encoder position actual value Gn_XIST2 (r0483) or the absolute value after the load gear (r2723) has
exceeded the value range.
3: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from incre-
ments to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range for displaying the position actual value.
Remedy: If required, reduce the traversing range or position resolution.
Re alarm value = 3:
Reducing the position resolution and conversion factor:
- reduce the length unit (LU) per load revolution for rotary encoders (p2506).
- increase the fine resolution of absolute position actual values (p0419).
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07595 (F) Encoder 3: Value range for position actual value exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for the position actual value representation was exceeded.
When the overflow occurs, the "referenced" or "adjustment absolute measuring system" status is reset.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The position actual value (r2521) has exceeded the value range.
2: The encoder position actual value Gn_XIST2 (r0483) or the absolute value after the load gear (r2723) has
exceeded the value range.
3: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from incre-
ments to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range for displaying the position actual value.
Remedy: If required, reduce the traversing range or position resolution.
Re alarm value = 3:
Reducing the position resolution and conversion factor:
- reduce the length unit (LU) per load revolution for rotary encoders (p2506).
- increase the fine resolution of absolute position actual values (p0419).
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1207
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07596 (F) Encoder 1: Reference function interrupted
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was interrupted.
- an encoder fault has occurred (Gn_ZSW.15 = 1).
- position actual value was set during an activated reference function.
- simultaneously activate reference mark search and measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 1 sig-
nal).
- activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was deactivated (BI: p2508
and BI: p2509 = 0 signal).
Remedy: - check the causes and resolve.
- reset the control (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 0 signal) and activate the requested function.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07597 (F) Encoder 2: Reference function interrupted
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was interrupted.
- an encoder fault has occurred (Gn_ZSW.15 = 1).
- position actual value was set during an activated reference function.
- simultaneously activate reference mark search and measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 1 sig-
nal).
- activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was deactivated (BI: p2508
and BI: p2509 = 0 signal).
Remedy: - check the causes and resolve.
- reset the control (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 0 signal) and activate the requested function.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A07598 (F) Encoder 3: Reference function interrupted
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was interrupted.
- an encoder fault has occurred (Gn_ZSW.15 = 1).
- position actual value was set during an activated reference function.
- simultaneously activate reference mark search and measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 1 sig-
nal).
- activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was deactivated (BI: p2508
and BI: p2509 = 0 signal).
Remedy: - check the causes and resolve.
- reset the control (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 0 signal) and activate the requested function.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1208 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07599 (A) Encoder 1: Adjustment not possible
Message value: Drive data set: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from increments
to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for displaying the position actual
value.
Remedy: If the value for the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is greater than 4294967296, then it is not possible to
make an adjustment due to an overflow.
For rotary encoders, the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is calculated as follows:
1. Motor encoder without position tracking:
p2506 * p0433 * p2505 / (p0432 * p2504)
p2506 * p0433 * p2505 * p0421 / (p0432 * p2504) for multiturn encoders
2. Motor encoder with position tracking for measuring gear:
p2506 * p0412 * p2505 / p2504
3. Motor encoder with position tracking for load gear:
p2506 * p2721 * p0433 / p0432
4. Motor encoder with position tracking for load and measuring gear:
p2506 * p2721
5. Direct encoder without position tracking:
p2506 * p0433 / p0432
p2506 * p0433 * p0421 / p0432 for multiturn encoders
6. Direct encoder with position tracking for measuring gear:
p2506 * p0412
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07600 (A) Encoder 2: Adjustment not possible
Message value: Drive data set: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from increments
to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for displaying the position actual
value.
Remedy: If the value for the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is greater than 4294967296, then it is not possible to
make an adjustment due to an overflow.
For rotary encoders, the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is calculated as follows:
1. Motor encoder without position tracking:
p2506 * p0433 * p2505 / (p0432 * p2504)
p2506 * p0433 * p2505 * p0421 / (p0432 * p2504) for multiturn encoders
2. Motor encoder with position tracking for measuring gear:
p2506 * p0412 * p2505 / p2504
3. Motor encoder with position tracking for load gear:
p2506 * p2721 * p0433 / p0432
4. Motor encoder with position tracking for load and measuring gear:
p2506 * p2721
5. Direct encoder without position tracking:
p2506 * p0433 / p0432
p2506 * p0433 * p0421 / p0432 for multiturn encoders
6. Direct encoder with position tracking for measuring gear:
p2506 * p0412
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1209
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07601 (A) Encoder 3: Adjustment not possible
Message value: Drive data set: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from increments
to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for displaying the position actual
value.
Remedy: If the value for the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is greater than 4294967296, then it is not possible to
make an adjustment due to an overflow.
For rotary encoders, the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is calculated as follows:
1. Motor encoder without position tracking:
p2506 * p0433 * p2505 / (p0432 * p2504)
p2506 * p0433 * p2505 * p0421 / (p0432 * p2504) for multiturn encoders
2. Motor encoder with position tracking for measuring gear:
p2506 * p0412 * p2505 / p2504
3. Motor encoder with position tracking for load gear:
p2506 * p2721 * p0433 / p0432
4. Motor encoder with position tracking for load and measuring gear:
p2506 * p2721
5. Direct encoder without position tracking:
p2506 * p0433 / p0432
p2506 * p0433 * p0421 / p0432 for multiturn encoders
6. Direct encoder with position tracking for measuring gear:
p2506 * p0412
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07800 Drive: No power unit present
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit parameters cannot be read or no parameters are stored in the power unit.
Connection between the Control Unit and the Motor Module was interrupted or is defective.
Note:
This fault also occurs if an incorrect topology was selected in the commissioning software and this parameterization
is then downloaded to the Control Unit.
See also: r0200 (Power unit code number actual)
Remedy: - connect the data line to power unit and restart the Control Unit (POWER ON).
- check or replace the Control Unit.
- check the cable between the Control Unit and Motor Module.
- after correcting the topology, the parameters must be again downloaded using the commissioning software.
F07801 Drive: Motor overcurrent
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The permissible motor limit current was exceeded.
- effective current limit set too low.
- current controller not correctly set.
- V/f operation: Up ramp was set too short or the load is too high.
- V/f operation: Short-circuit in the motor cable or ground fault.
- V/f operation: Motor current does not match current of power unit.
- Switch to rotating motor without flying restart function (p1200).
Note:
Limit current = 2 * Minimum( p0640, 4 * p0305) >= 2 * p0305
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1210 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check the current limits (p0640).
- vector control: Check the current controller (p1715, p1717).
- V/f control: Check the current limiting controller (p1340 ... p1346).
- increase the up ramp (p1120) or reduce the load.
- check the motor and motor cables for short-circuit and ground fault.
- check the motor for the star-delta configuration and rating plate parameterization.
- check the power unit and motor combination.
- Choose "flying restart" function (p1200) if switched to rotating motor.
F07802 Drive: Infeed or power unit not ready
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: After an internal power-on command, the infeed or drive does not signal ready.
- monitoring time is too short.
- DC link voltage is not present.
- associated infeed or drive of the signaling component is defective.
- supply voltage incorrectly set.
Remedy: - increase the monitoring time (p0857).
- ensure that there is a DC link voltage. Check the DC link busbar. Enable the infeed.
- replace the associated infeed or drive of the signaling component.
- check the line supply voltage setting (p0210).
See also: p0857 (Power unit monitoring time)
A07805 (N) Drive: Power unit overload I2t
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Alarm threshold for I2t overload (p0294) of the power unit exceeded.
The response parameterized in p0290 becomes active.
See also: p0290 (Power unit overload response)
Remedy: - reduce the continuous load.
- adapt the load duty cycle.
- check the assignment of the rated currents of the motor and Motor Module.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F07810 Drive: Power unit EEPROM without rated data
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: No rated data are stored in the power unit EEPROM.
See also: p0205 (Power unit application), r0206 (Rated power unit power), r0207 (Rated power unit current), r0208
(Rated power unit line supply voltage), r0209 (Power unit, maximum current)
Remedy: Replace the power unit or inform Siemens Customer Service.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1211
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07815 Drive: Power unit has been changed
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The code number of the actual power unit does not match the saved number. The fault only occurs if the comparator
in p9906 or p9908 is not at f 2 (low) or 3 (minimum).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Number of the incorrect parameter.
See also: r0200 (Power unit code number actual), p0201 (Power unit code number)
Remedy: Connect the original power unit and power up the Control Unit again (POWER ON) or set p0201 to r0200 and exit
commissioning with p0010 = 0.
If the new power unit is accepted, then if required, the current limit p0640 can be reduced by a lower maximum cur-
rent of the power unit (r0209) (torque limits stay the same).
If not only the power unit is changed, but also the motor, then the motor must be re-commissioned (e.g. using p0010
= 1). This is also necessary if motor data is still to be downloaded via DRIVE-CLiQ.
If the comparison stage in p9906 is set to 2, 3, then commissioning can be exited (p0010 = 0) and the fault acknowl-
edged.
See also: r0200 (Power unit code number actual)
A07820 Drive: Temperature sensor not connected
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature sensor for motor temperature monitoring, specified in p0600, is not available.
- 10 (SME) is set in p0601, but a value other than 1, 2, or 3 is set in p0600
- 11 (SME) is set in p0601, but a value other than 20 or 21 is set in p0600
- 11 (BICO) is set in p0601, and a sensor is set in p4610 - p4613, but the associated BICO input (p0608, p0609) is
not interconnected
- module with sensor evaluation not present or has been removed in the meantime.
- temperature sensor via Motor Module, not for CU310.
Remedy: - connect the module with temperature sensor.
- set the available temperature sensor (p0600, p0601).
- set p4610 - p4613 to no sensor (0), or interconnect p0608 and p0609 with an external sensor value (only if BICO
(11) is set in p0601)
See also: p0600 (Motor temperature sensor for monitoring), p0601 (Motor temperature sensor type)
A07825 (N) Drive: Simulation mode activated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The simulation mode is activated.
The drive can only be powered up if the DC link voltage is less than 40 V.
Remedy: The alarm automatically disappears if simulation mode is deactivated with p1272 = 0.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F07826 Drive: Simulation mode with DC link voltage too high
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The simulation mode is activated and the DC link voltage is greater than the permissible value of 40 V.
Remedy: - switch out (disable) simulation mode (p1272 = 0) and acknowledge the fault.
- reduce the input voltage in order to reach a DC link voltage below 40 V.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1212 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07840 Drive: Infeed operation missing
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The signal "infeed operation" is not present although the enable signals for the drive have been present for longer
than the parameterized monitoring time (p0857).
- infeed not operational.
- interconnection of the binector input for the ready signal is either incorrect or missing (p0864).
- infeed is presently carrying out a line supply identification routine.
Remedy: - bring the infeed into an operational state.
- check the interconnection of the binector input for the signal "infeed operation" (p0864).
- increase the monitoring time (p0857).
- wait until the infeed has completed the line supply identification routine.
See also: p0857 (Power unit monitoring time), p0864 (Infeed operation)
F07841 (A) Drive: Infeed operation withdrawn
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The signal "infeed operation" was withdrawn in operation.
- interconnection of the binector input for the signal "infeed operation" is either incorrect or missing (p0864).
- the enable signals of the infeed were disabled.
- due to a fault, the infeed withdraws the signal "infeed operation".
Remedy: - check the interconnection of the binector input for the "infeed operation" signal (p0864).
- check the enable signals of the infeed and if required, enable.
- remove and acknowledge an infeed fault.
Note:
If this drive is intended to back up the DC link regeneratively, then the fault response must be parameterized for
NONE, OFF1 or OFF3. so that the drive can continue to operate even after the infeed fails.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A07850 (F) External alarm 1
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The BICO signal for "external alarm 1" was triggered.
The condition for this external alarm is fulfilled.
See also: p2112 (External alarm 1)
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
A07851 (F) External alarm 2
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The BICO signal for "external alarm 2" was triggered.
The condition for this external alarm is fulfilled.
See also: p2116 (External alarm 2)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1213
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
A07852 (F) External alarm 3
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The BICO signal for "external alarm 3" was triggered.
The condition for this external alarm is fulfilled.
See also: p2117 (External alarm 3)
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
F07860 (A) External fault 1
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The BICO signal "external fault 1" was triggered.
See also: p2106 (External fault 1)
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this fault.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07861 (A) External fault 2
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The BICO signal "external fault 2" was triggered.
See also: p2107 (External fault 2)
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this fault.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07862 (A) External fault 3
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The BICO signal "external fault 3" was triggered.
See also: p2108, p3111, p3112
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this fault.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1214 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07890 Internal voltage protection/internal armature short-circuit with Safe Torque Off active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The internal armature short-circuit (p1231 = 4) is not possible as Safe Torque Off (STO) is enabled. The pulses can-
not be enabled.
Remedy: Switch out the internal armature short-circuit (p1231=0) or deactivate Safe Torque Off (p9501 = p9561 = 0).
Note:
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
F07900 (N, A) Drive: Motor blocked
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Motor has been operating at the torque limit longer than the time specified in p2177 and below the speed threshold
set in p2175.
This signal can also be initiated if the speed actual value is oscillating and the speed controller output repeatedly
goes to its limit.
If the simulation mode is enabled (p1272 = 1) and the closed-loop control with speed encoder activated (p1300 =
21), then the inhibit signal is generated if the encoder signal is not received from a motor that is driven with the torque
setpoint of the closed-loop control.
See also: p2175 (Motor locked speed threshold), p2177 (Motor locked delay time)
Remedy: - check that the motor can rotate freely.
- check the torque limit: For a positive direction of rotation r1538, for a negative direction of rotation r1539.
- check the parameter, message "Motor locked" and if required, correct (p2175, p2177).
- check the inversion of the actual value (p0410).
- check the motor encoder connection.
- check the encoder pulse number (p0408).
- for SERVO with encoderless operation and motors with low power ratings (< 300 W), increase the pulse frequency
(p1800).
- after deselecting the "Basic positioner" (EPOS) function mode, check the motoring (p1528) and regenerative
(p1529) torque limit and modify again.
- in the simulation mode and operation with speed encoder, the power unit to which the motor is connected must be
powered up and must be supplied with the torque setpoint of the simulated closed-loop control. Otherwise, change
over to encoderless control (see p1300).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07901 Drive: Motor overspeed
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum permissible speed was either positively or negatively exceeded.
The maximum permissible positive speed is formed as follows: Minimum (p1082, CI: p1085) + p2162
The maximum permissible negative speed is formed as follows: Maximum (-p1082, CI: 1088) - p2162
Remedy: The following applies for a positive direction of rotation:
- check r1084 and if required, correct p1082, CI:p1085 and p2162.
The following applies for a negative direction of rotation:
- check r1087 and if required, correct p1082, CI:p1088 and p2162.
Activate pre-control of the speed limiting controller (p1401 bit 7 = 1).
Increase the hysteresis for the overspeed signal p2162. This upper limit is dependent upon the maximum motor
speed p0322 and the maximum speed p1082 of the setpoint channel.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1215
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07902 (N, A) Drive: Motor stalled
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For a vector drive the system has identified that the motor has stall for a time longer than is set in p2178.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Stall detection using r1408.11 (p1744 or p0492).
2: Stall detection using r1408.12 (p1745).
3: Stall detection using r0056.11 (only for separately excited synchronous motors).
See also: p1744 (Motor model speed threshold stall detection), p2178 (Motor stalled delay time)
Remedy: It should always be carefully ensured that the motor data identification (p1910) as well as the rotating measurement
(p1960) were carried out (also refer to r3925). For synchronous motors with encoder, the encoder must have been
adjusted (p1990).
For closed-loop speed and torque control with speed encoder, the following applies:
- check the speed signal (interrupted cable, polarity, pulse number, broken encoder shaft).
- check the speed encoder, if another speed encoder was selected using the data set changeover. This must be con-
nected to the same motor that is controlled for the data set changeover.
If there is no fault, then the fault tolerance (p1744 and p0492) can be increased.
If the stalled motor should take place in the range of the monitor model and for speeds of less than 30 % of the rated
motor speed, then a change can be made directly from the current model into the flux impression (p1401.5 = 1). We
therefore recommend that the time-controlled model change is switched in (p1750.4 = 1) or the model changeover
limits are significantly increased (p1752 > 0.35 * p0311; p1753 = 5 %).
For closed-loop speed and torque control without speed encoder, the following applies:
- Check whether the drive stalls solely due to the load in controlled mode (r1750.0) or when the speed setpoint is still
zero. If so, increase the current setpoint via p1610 or set p1750 bit 2 = 1 (encoderless vector control to standstill for
passive loads).
- If the motor excitation time (p0346) was significantly reduced and the drive stalls when it is switched on and run
immediately, p0346 should be increased again or quick magnetizing selected (p1401).
- Check the current limits (p0640, r0067, r0289). If the current limits are too low, then the drive cannot be magnetized.
- check the current controller (p1715, p1717) and the speed adaptation controller (p1764, p1767). If the dynamic
response was significantly reduced, then this should be increased again.
- check the speed encoder, if another speed encoder was selected using the data set changeover. This must be con-
nected to the motor that is controlled for the data set changeover.
If there is no fault, then the fault tolerance (p1745) or the delay time (p2178) can be increased.
The following generally apply for closed-loop and torque control:
- Check whether the motor cables are disconnected.
- If the fault occurs with fault value 2 when the motor accelerates very quickly to the field weakening range, the devi-
ation between the flux setpoint and actual value can be reduced and, in turn, the fault message prevented, by reduc-
ing p1596.
For separately-excited synchronous motors (closed-loop control with speed encoder), the following applies:
- check the speed signal (interrupted cable, polarity, pulse number).
- ensure the correct motor parameterization (rating plate and equivalent circuit diagram parameters).
- check the excitation equipment and the interface to the closed-loop control.
- encoder the highest possible dynamic response of the closed-loop excitation current control.
- check the speed control for any tendency to oscillate and if resonance effects occur, use a bandstop filter.
- do not exceed the maximum speed (p2162).
If there is no fault, then the delay time can be increased (p2178).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1216 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07903 Drive: Motor speed deviation
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The absolute value of the speed difference from the two setpoints (p2151, p2154) and the speed actual value (r2169)
exceeds the tolerance threshold (p2163) longer than tolerated (p2164, p2166).
The alarm is only enabled for p2149.0 = 1.
Possible causes could be:
- the load torque is greater than the torque setpoint.
- when accelerating, the torque/current/power limit is reached. If the limits are not sufficient, then it is possible that
the drive has been dimensioned too small.
- for closed-loop torque control, the speed setpoint does not track the speed actual value.
- for active Vdc controller.
For V/f control, the overload condition is detected as the Imax controller is active.
See also: p2149 (Monitoring configuration)
Remedy: - increase p2163 and/or p2166.
- increase the torque/current/power limits.
- for closed-loop torque control: The speed setpoint should track the speed actual value.
- deactivate alarm with p2149.0 = 0.
A07904 (N) External armature short-circuit: Contactor feedback signal "Closed" missing
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When closing, the contactor feedback signal (p1235) did not issue the signal "Closed" (r1239.1 = 1) within the mon-
itoring time (p1236).
Remedy: - check that the contactor feedback signal is correctly connected (p1235).
- check the logic of the contactor feedback signal (r1239.1 = 1: "Closed", r1239.1 = 0: "Open").
- increase the monitoring time (p1236).
- if required, set the external armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal (p1231=2).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F07905 (N, A) External armature short-circuit: Contactor feedback signal "Open" missing
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When opening, the contactor feedback signal (p1235) did not issue the signal "Open" (r1239.1 = 0) within the mon-
itoring time (p1236).
Remedy: - check that the contactor feedback signal is correctly connected (p1235).
- check the logic of the contactor feedback signal (r1239.1 = 1: "Closed", r1239.1 = 0: "Open").
- increase the monitoring time (p1236).
- if required, set the external armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal (p1231=2).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1217
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07906 Armature short-circuit / internal voltage protection: Parameterization error
Message value: Fault cause: %1, motor data set: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The armature short-circuit is incorrectly parameterized.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Low word: Motor data set number
High word: Cause:
1: A permanent-magnet synchronous motor has not been selected.
2: No induction motor selected.
101: External armature short-circuit: Output (r1239.0) not connected up.
102: External armature short-circuit with contactor feedback signal: No feedback signal connected (BI:p1235).
103: External armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal: Delay time when opening (p1237) is 0.
201: Internal voltage protection: The maximum output current of the Motor Module (r0209) is less than 1.8 * motor
short-circuit current (r0331).
202: Internal voltage protection: A Motor Module in booksize or chassis format is not being used.
203: Internal voltage protection: The motor short-circuit current (p0320) is greater than the maximum motor current
(p0323).
204: Internal voltage protection: The activation (p1231 = 4) is not given for all motor data sets with synchronous
motors (p0300 = 2xx, 4xx).
Remedy: Re cause 1:
- an armature short-circuit / voltage protection is only permissible for permanent-magnetic synchronous motors. The
highest position of the motor type in p0300 must either be 2 or 4.
Re cause 101:
- the contactor for the external armature short-circuit configuration should be controlled using output signal r1239.0.
The signal can, e.g. be connected to an output terminal BI: p0738. Before this fault can be acknowledged, p1231
must be set again.
Re cause 102:
- if the external armature short-circuit with contactor feedback signal (p1231 = 1) is selected, this feedback signal
must be connected to an input terminal (e.g. r722.x) and then connected to BI: p1235.
- alternatively, the external armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal (p1231 = 2) can be selected.
Re cause 103:
- if the external armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal (p1231 = 2) is selected, then a delay time
must be parameterized in p1237. This time must always be greater than the actual contactor opening time, as oth-
erwise the Motor Module would be short-circuited!
Re cause 201:
- a Motor Module with a higher maximum current or a motor with a lower short-circuit current must be used. The max-
imum Motor Module current must be higher than 1.8 * short-circuit current of the motor.
Re cause 202:
- for internal voltage protection, use a Motor Module in booksize or chassis format.
Re cause 203:
- for internal voltage protection, only use short-circuit proof motors.
Re cause 204:
- The internal voltage protection must either be activated for all motor data sets with synchronous motors (p0300 =
2xx, 4xx) (p1231 = 3) or it must be deactivated for all motor data sets (p1231 not equal to 3). This therefore ensures
that the protection cannot be accidentally withdrawn as a result of a data set changeover. The fault can only be
acknowledged if this condition is fulfilled.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1218 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07907 Internal armature short-circuit: Motor terminals are not at zero potential after pulse
suppression
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The function "Internal voltage protection" (p1231 = 3) was activated. The following must be observed:
- when the internal voltage protection is active, after pulse suppression, all of the motor terminals are at half of the
DC link voltage (without an internal voltage protection, the motor terminals are at zero potential)!
- it is only permissible to use motors that are short-circuit proof (p0320 < p0323).
- the Motor Module must be able to continually conduct 180% short-circuit current (r0331) of the motor (r0289).
- the internal voltage protection cannot be interrupted due to a fault response. If an overcurrent condition occurs dur-
ing the active, internal voltage protection, then this can destroy the Motor Module and/or the motor.
- if the Motor Module does not support the autonomous, internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0), in order to ensure
safe, reliable functioning when the line supply fails, an external 24 V power supply (UPS) must be used for the com-
ponents.
- if the Motor Module does support the autonomous, internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1), in order to ensure
safe, reliable functioning when the line supply fails, the 24 V power supply for the components must be provided
through a Control Supply Module.
- if the internal voltage protection is active, it is not permissible that the motor is driven by the load for a longer period
of time (e.g. as a result of loads that move the motor or another coupled motor).
Remedy: None necessary.
This a note for the user.
A07908 Internal armature short-circuit active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The Motor Module signals that the motor is short-circuited through the power semiconductors (r1239.5 = 1). The
pulses cannot be enabled. The internal armature short-circuit is selected (p1231 = 4):
Remedy: For synchronous motors, the armature short-circuit braking is activated if a 1 signal is present via binector input
p1230.
See also: p1230 (Armature short-circuit / DC brake activation), p1231 (Armature short-circuit / DC brake configura-
tion)
F07909 Internal voltage protection: Deactivation only effective after POWER ON
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: The deactivation of the internal voltage protection (p1231 not equal to 3) only becomes effective after POWER ON.
The status signal r1239.6 = 1 indicates that the internal voltage protection is ready.
Remedy: None necessary.
This a note for the user.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1219
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07910 (N) Drive: Motor overtemperature
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: KTY or no sensor:
The measured motor temperature or temperature of the thermal model has exceeded the alarm threshold (p0604 or
p0616). The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active.
PTC or bimetallic NC contact:
The response threshold of 1650 Ohm was exceeded or the NC contact opened.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
SME not selected in p0601:
1: No output current reduction.
2: Output current reduction active.
SME or TM120 selected in p0601 (p0601 = 10, 11):
The number specifies the sensor channel that resulted in the alarm being output.
See also: p0604 (Motor temperature alarm threshold), p0610 (Motor overtemperature response)
Remedy: - check the motor load.
- check the motor ambient temperature.
- check KTY84.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F07913 Excitation current outside the tolerance range
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The difference between the excitation current actual value and setpoint has exceeded the tolerance:
abs(r1641 - r1626) > p3201 + p3202
The cause of this fault is again reset for abs(r1641 - r1626) < p3201.
Remedy: - check the parameterization (p1640, p3201, p3202).
- check the interfaces to the excitation equipment (r1626, p1640).
- check the excitation equipment.
F07914 Flux out of tolerance
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The difference between the flux actual value and setpoint has exceeded the tolerance:
abs(r0084 - r1598) > p3204 + p3205
The cause of this fault is again reset for abs(r0084 - r1598) < p3204.
The fault is only issued after the delay time in p3206 has expired.
Remedy: - check the parameterization (p3204, p3205).
- check the interfaces to the excitation equipment (r1626, p1640).
- check the excitation equipment.
- check the flux control (p1592, p1592, p1597).
- check the control for oscillation and take the appropriate counter measures (e.g. optimize the speed control loop,
parameterize a bandstop filter).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1220 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07918 (N) Three-phase setpoint generator operation selected/active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Only for separately excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5):
The actual open-loop/closed-loop control mode is I/f control (open-loop) with a fixed current (p1300 = 18).
The speed is entered via the setpoint channel and the current setpoint is given by the minimum current (p1620).
It must be ensured that in this mode, the control dynamic performance is very limited. This is the reason that longer
ramp-up times should be set for the setpoint speed than for normal operation.
See also: p1620 (Stator current, minimum)
Remedy: Select another open-loop/closed-loop control mode
See also: p1300 (Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A07920 Drive: Torque/speed too low
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too low).
See also: p2181 (Load monitoring response)
Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.
A07921 Drive: Torque/speed too high
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too high).
Remedy: Check the connection between the motor and load.
Adapt the parameterization according to the load.
A07922 Drive: Torque/speed out of tolerance
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic.
Remedy: Check the connection between the motor and load.
Adapt the parameterization according to the load.
F07923 Drive: Torque/speed too low
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too low).
Remedy: Check the connection between the motor and load.
Adapt the parameterization according to the load.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1221
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07924 Drive: Torque/speed too high
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too high).
Remedy: Check the connection between the motor and load.
Adapt the parameterization according to the load.
F07925 Drive: Torque/speed out of tolerance
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic.
Remedy: Check the connection between the motor and load.
Adapt the parameterization according to the load.
A07926 Drive: Envelope curve, parameter invalid
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Invalid parameter values were entered for the envelope characteristic of the load monitoring.
The following rules apply for the speed thresholds:
p2182 < p2183 < p2184
The following rules apply for the torque thresholds:
p2185 > p2186
p2187 > p2188
p2189 > p2190
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the parameter with the invalid value.
Remedy: Set the parameters for the load monitoring according to the applicable rules or deactivate load monitoring (p2181 =
0; p2193 = 0).
A07927 DC brake active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The motor is braked with a DC current, the DC current brake is active.
1)
An alarm with response DCBRAKE is active. The motor is braked with the braking current set in p1232 for the dura-
tion set in in p1233. If the standstill threshold p1226 is undershot, then braking is prematurely canceled.
2)
DC braking has been activated at binector input p1230 with the DC brake set (p1230 = 4). Braking current p1232 is
injected until this binector input becomes inactive.
Remedy: None necessary.
F07928 Internal voltage protection initiated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The Motor Module signals that the motor is short-circuited through the power semiconductors (r1239.5 = 1). The
pulses cannot be enabled. The internal voltage protection is selected (p1231 = 3).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1222 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: If the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1), then the Motor Module auto-
matically decides - using the DC link voltage - as to whether the armature short-circuit should be activated.
The armature short-circuit is activated and response OFF2 is initiated if the DC link voltage exceeds 800 V. If the DC
link voltage falls below 450 V, then the armature short-circuit is withdrawn.
If the motor is still in a critical speed range, the armature short-circuit is reactivated once the DC link voltage exceeds
the threshold of 800 V.
If the autonomous (independent) internal voltage protection is active (r1239.5 = 1) and the line supply returns (450
V < DC link voltage < 800 V), the armature short-circuit is withdrawn after 3 minute.
F07930 Drive: Brake control error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The Control Unit has detected a brake control error.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
10, 11:
Fault in "open holding brake" operation.
- No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1).
- Ground fault in brake cable.
20:
Fault in "brake open" state.
- Short-circuit in brake winding.
30, 31:
Fault in "close holding brake" operation.
- No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1).
- Short-circuit in brake winding.
40:
Fault in "brake closed" state.
50:
Fault in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit or communication fault between the Control Unit and Motor Mod-
ule (brake control).
Note:
The following causes may apply to fault values:
- motor cable is not shielded correctly.
- defect in control circuit of the Motor Module.
See also: p1278 (Brake control, diagnostics evaluation)
Remedy: - check the motor holding brake connection.
- check the function of the motor holding brake.
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
- check that the electrical cabinet design and cable routing are in compliance with EMC regulations (e.g. shield of the
motor cable and brake conductors are connected with the shield connecting plate and the motor connectors are
tightly screwed to the housing).
- replace the Motor Module involved.
Operation with Safe Brake Module:
- check the Safe Brake Modules connection.
- replace the Safe Brake Module.
See also: p1215 (Motor holding brake configuration), p1278 (Brake control, diagnostics evaluation)
A07931 (F, N) Brake does not open
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: This alarm is output for r1229.4 = 1.
See also: p1216 (Motor holding brake, opening time), r1229 (Motor holding brake status word)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1223
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check the functionality of the motor holding brake.
- check the feedback signal (p1223).
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A07932 Brake does not close
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: This alarm is output for r1229.5 = 1.
For r1229.5 = 1, OFF/OFF3 are suppressed to prevent the drive accelerating by a load that drives the motor -
whereby OFF2 remains effective.
See also: p1217 (Motor holding brake closing time), r1229 (Motor holding brake status word)
Remedy: - check the functionality of the motor holding brake.
- check the feedback signal (p1222).
F07934 (N) Drive: S120 Combi motor holding brake configuration
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: A connected motor holding brake has been detected with an S120 Combi unit. However, this motor holding brake
has not been assigned to just one Combi feed drive and, therefore, brake control is not configured (correctly).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: No motor holding brake assigned (p1215 = 0 or 3 on all S120 Combi feed drives)
1: Multiple holding brakes assigned (p1215 = 1 or 2 on more than one S120 Combi feed drive)
MHB: Motor holding brake.
Remedy: Check whether the motor holding brake has been assigned to one S120 Combi feed drive exclusively (p1215 = 1 or
2).
The fault will only be withdrawn once the motor holding brake has been assigned to just one of the S120 Combi feed
drives (p1215 = 1 or 2 for this one drive). From this point, the motor holding brake will be controlled by this drive.
See also: p1215 (Motor holding brake configuration)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F07935 (N) Drv: Motor holding brake detected
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A motor holding brake was detected where the brake control has not been configured (p1215 = 0). The brake control
configuration was then set to "motor holding brake the same as sequence control" (p1215 = 1).
Remedy: None necessary.
See also: p1215 (Motor holding brake configuration)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1224 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07937 (N) Drive: Speed deviation between motor model and external speed
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The absolute value of the speed difference from the two actual values (r2169, r1443) exceeds the tolerance threshold
(p3236) for longer than the time set in p3238.
Possible causes could be:
- External encoder signal wired incorrectly (p1440)
- Speed encoder for external encoder signal faulty
- Encoder signal's polarity or gain incorrect
- Smoothing time constant for model speed for monitoring p2157 too high
- Smoothing time constant or threshold values for monitoring too low (p3236, p3238)
See also: p2149 (Monitoring configuration)
Remedy: - Check that the external speed (see p1440, r1443) matches the motor speed.
- Check the polarity of the external speed (r1443).
- Check connector connection p1440.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F07940 Sync-line-drive: Synchronization error
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: After synchronization has been completed, the phase difference (r3808) is greater than the threshold value, phase
synchronism (p3813).
OFF1 or OFF3 response, while the closed-loop phase control is active (r3819.6 = 1) or synchronism reached
(r3819.2 = 1).
Enable signal withdrawn (p3802 = 0), while the closed-loop phase control was active (r3819.6 = 1).
Remedy: If required increase the threshold value phase synchronism (p3813) for synchronizing the line supply to the drive.
Before OFF1 or OFF3, complete synchronizing (r03819.0 = 0).
Before withdrawing the enable signal (p3802 = 0), reach synchronism (r3819.2 = 1).
See also: p3813 (Sync-line-drive phase synchronism threshold value)
A07941 Sync-line-drive: Target frequency not permissible
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The target frequency is outside the permissible value range.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1084: Target frequency greater than the positive speed limit, f_sync > f_max (r1084).
1087: Target frequency less than the negative speed limit, f_sync < f_min (r1087).
Remedy: Fulfill the conditions for the target frequency for line-drive synchronization.
See also: r1084 (Speed limit positive effective), r1087 (Speed limit negative effective)
A07942 Sync-line-drive: Setpoint frequency is completely different than the target frequency
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: There is a considerable difference between the setpoint frequency and the target frequency (f_set <> f_target). The
deviation that can be tolerated is set in p3806.
Remedy: The alarm automatically disappears after the difference that can be tolerated between the setpoint and target fre-
quencies (p3806) is reached.
See also: p3806 (Sync-line-drive frequency difference threshold value)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1225
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07943 Sync-line-drive: Synchronization not permitted
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Synchronization is not permitted.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1300: The control mode (p1300) has not been set to encoderless closed-loop speed control or V/f characteristic.
1910: Motor data identification activated.
1960: Speed controller optimization activated.
1990: Encoder adjustment activated.
3801: Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) not found.
3845: Friction characteristic record activated.
Remedy: Fulfill the conditions for the line-drive synchronization.
Re alarm value = 1300:
Set the control mode (p1300) to encoderless closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20) or V/f characteristic (p1300 =
0 ... 19).
Re alarm value = 1910:
Exit the motor data identification routine (p1910).
Re alarm value = 1960:
Exist the speed controller optimization routine (p1960).
Re alarm value = 1990:
Exit the encoder adjustment (p1990).
Re alarm value = 3801:
Connect-up a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) and when connecting to an adjacent drive object ensure that the drive
objects have the same basis clock cycle.
Re alarm value = 3845:
Exit the friction characteristic record (p3845).
F07950 (A) Drive: Incorrect motor parameter
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: - the motor parameters were incorrectly entered while commissioning (e.g. p0300 = 0, no motor)
- The braking resistor (p6811) has still not been parameterized - commissioning cannot be completed.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The parameter number involved.
See also: p0300, p0301, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0316, p0320, p0322, p0323
Remedy: Compare the motor data with the rating plate data and if required, correct.
See also: p0300, p0301, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0316, p0320, p0322, p0323
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F07955 Drive: Motor has been changed
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The code number of the actual motor with DRIVE-CLiQ does not match the saved number.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Number of the incorrect parameter.
See also: p0301 (Motor code number selection), r0302 (Motor code number of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ)
Remedy: Connect the original motor, power up the Control Unit again (POWER ON) and exit the quick commissioning by set-
ting p0010 to 0.
Or set p0300 = 10000 (load the motor parameter with DRIVE-CLiQ) and re-commission.
Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) is automatically exited with p3900 > 0.
If quick commissioning was exited by setting p0010 to 0, then an automatic controller calculation (p0340 = 1) is not
carried out.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1226 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07956 (A) Drive: Motor code does not match the list (catalog) motor
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The motor code of the connected motor with DRIVE-CLiQ does not match the possible list motor types (see selection
in p0300).
The connected motor with DRIVE-CLiQ might not be supported by this firmware version.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Motor code of the connected motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
Note:
The first three digits of the motor code generally correspond to the list motor type.
Remedy: Use a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ and the matching motor code.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A07960 Drive: Incorrect friction characteristic
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The friction characteristic is incorrect.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1538:
The friction torque is greater than the maximum from the upper effective torque limit (p1538) and zero. This is the
reason that the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is limited to this value.
1539:
The friction torque is less than the minimum from the lower effective torque limit (p1539) and zero. This is the reason
that the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is limited to this value.
3820 ... 3829:
Incorrect parameter number. The speeds entered in the parameters for the friction characteristic do not correspond
to the following condition:
0.0 < p3820 < p3821 < ... < p3829 <= p0322 or p1082, if p0322 = 0
Therefore the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is set to zero.
3830 ... 3839:
Incorrect parameter number. The torques entered in the parameters for the friction characteristic do not correspond
to the following condition:
0 <= p3830, p3831 ... p3839 <= p0333
Therefore the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is set to zero.
See also: r3840 (Friction characteristic, status word)
Remedy: Fulfill the conditions for the friction characteristic.
Re alarm value = 1538:
Check the upper effective torque limit (e.g. in the field weakening range).
Re alarm value = 1539:
Check the lower effective torque limit (e.g. in the field weakening range).
Re alarm value = 3820 ... 3839:
Fulfill the conditions to set the parameters of the friction characteristic.
If the motor data (e.g. the maximum speed p0322) are changed during commissioning (p0010 = 1, 3), then the tech-
nological limits and threshold values, dependent on this, must be recalculated by selecting p0340= 5).
A07961 Drive: Friction characteristic record activated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The automatic friction characteristic record is activated.
The friction characteristic is recorded at the next power-on command.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1227
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: None necessary.
The alarm disappears automatically after the friction characteristic record has been successfully completed or the
record is deactivated (p3845 = 0).
F07963 Drive: Friction characteristic record interrupted
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The conditions to record the friction characteristic are not fulfilled.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0046: Missing enable signals (r0046).
1082: The highest speed value to be approached (p3829) is greater than the maximum speed (p1082).
1084: The highest speed value to be approached (p3829) is greater than the maximum speed (r1084, p1083, p1085).
1087: The highest speed value to be approached (p3829) is greater than the maximum speed (r1087, p1086, p1088).
1110: Friction characteristic record, negative direction selected (p3845) and negative direction inhibited (p1110).
1111: Friction characteristic record, positive direction selected (p3845) and positive direction inhibited (p1111).
1198: Friction characteristic record selected (p3845 > 0) and negative (p1110) and positive directions (p1111) inhib-
ited (r1198).
1300: The control mode (p1300) has not been set to closed-loop speed control.
1755: For encoderless closed-loop control (p1300 = 20), the lowest speed value to be approached (p3820) is less
than or equal to the changeover speed, open-loop controlled operation (p1755).
1910: Motor data identification activated.
1960: Speed controller optimization activated.
3820 ... 3829: Speed (p382x) cannot be approached.
3840: Friction characteristic incorrect.
3845: Friction characteristic record deselected.
Remedy: Fulfill the conditions to record the friction characteristic.
Re fault value = 0046:
Establish missing enable signals.
Re fault value = 1082, 1084, 1087:
Select the highest speed value to be approached (p3829) less than or equal to the maximum speed (p1082, r1084,
r1087).
Recalculate the speed points along the friction characteristic (p0340 = 5).
Re fault value = 1110:
Select the friction characteristic record, positive direction (p3845).
Re fault value = 1111:
Select the friction characteristic record, negative direction (p3845).
Re fault value = 1198:
Enable the permitted direction (p1110, p1111, r1198).
Re fault value = 1300:
Set the control mode (p1300) on the closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21).
Re fault value = 1755:
For encoderless closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20) select the lowest speed value to be approached (p3820)
greater than the changeover speed of open-loop controlled operation (p1755).
Recalculate the speed points along the friction characteristic (p0340 = 5).
Re fault value = 1910:
Exit the motor data identification routine (p1910).
Re fault value = 1960:
Exist the speed controller optimization routine (p1960).
Re fault value 3820 ... 3829:
- check the load at speed p382x.
- check the speed signal (r0063) for oscillation at speed p382x. Check the settings of the speed controller if applica-
ble.
Re fault value = 3840:
Make the friction characteristic error-free (p3820 to p3829, p3830 to p3839, p3840).
Re fault value = 3845:
Activate the friction characteristic record (p3845).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1228 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07967 Drive: Automatic encoder adjustment incorrect
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the automatic encoder adjustment or the pole position identification.
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
F07968 Drive: Lq-Ld measurement incorrect
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the Lq-Ld measurement.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
10: Stage 1: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low.
12: Stage 1: The maximum current was exceeded.
15: Second harmonic too low.
16: Drive converter too small for the measuring technique.
17: Abort due to pulse inhibit.
Remedy: Re fault value = 10:
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Replace the power unit involved.
Deactivate technique (p1909).
Re fault value = 12:
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
Deactivate technique (p1909).
Re fault value = 16:
Deactivate technique (p1909).
Re fault value = 17:
Repeat technique.
F07969 Drive: Incorrect pole position identification
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the pole position identification routine.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Current controller limited
2: Motor shaft locked.
4: Encoder speed signal not plausible.
10: Stage 1: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low.
11: Stage 2: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low.
12: Stage 1: The maximum current was exceeded.
13: Stage 2: The maximum current was exceeded.
14: Current difference to determine the +d axis too low.
15: Second harmonic too low.
16: Drive converter too small for the measuring technique.
17: Abort due to pulse inhibit.
18: First harmonic too low.
20: Pole position identification requested with the motor shaft rotating and activated flying restart function.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1229
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
Replace the Motor Module involved.
Re fault value = 2:
Open the motor holding brake (p1215 = 2) and bring the motor into a no-load condition.
Re fault value = 4:
Check whether the encoder pulse number (p0408) and gearbox factor (p0432, p0433) are correct.
Check whether the motor pole pair number is correct (p0314).
Re fault value = 10:
When selecting p1980 = 4: Increase the value for p0325.
When selecting p1980 = 1: Increase the value for p0329.
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Replace the Motor Module involved.
Re fault value = 11:
Increase the value for p0329.
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Replace the Motor Module involved.
Re fault value = 12:
When selecting p1980 = 4: Reduce the value for p0325.
When selecting p1980 = 1: Reduce the value for p0329.
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
Re fault value = 13:
Reduce the value for p0329.
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
Re fault value = 14:
Increase the value for p0329.
Re fault value = 15:
Increase the value for p0325.
Motor not sufficiently anisotropic, change the technique (p1980 = 1 or 10).
Re fault value = 16:
Deactivate technique (p1982).
Re fault value = 17:
Repeat technique.
Re fault value = 18:
Increase the value for p0329.
Saturation not sufficient, change the technique (p1980 = 10).
Re fault value = 20:
Before carrying out a pole position identification routine ensure that the motor shaft is absolutely stationary (zero
speed).
F07970 Drive: Automatic encoder adjustment incorrect
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the automatic encoder adjustment.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
1: Current controller limited
2: Motor shaft locked.
4: Encoder speed signal not plausible.
10: Stage 1: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low.
11: Stage 2: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low.
12: Stage 1: The maximum current was exceeded.
13: Stage 2: The maximum current was exceeded.
14: Current difference to determine the +d axis too low.
15: Second harmonic too low.
16: Drive converter too small for the measuring technique.
17: Abort due to pulse inhibit.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1230 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
Replace the power unit involved.
Re fault value = 2:
Open the motor holding brake (p1215 = 2) and bring the motor into a no-load condition.
Re fault value = 4:
Check whether the speed actual value inversion is correct (p0410.0).
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Check whether the encoder pulse number (p0408) and gearbox factor (p0432, p0433) are correct.
Check whether the motor pole pair number is correct (p0314).
Re fault value = 10:
Increase the value for p0325.
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Replace the power unit involved.
Re fault value = 11:
Increase the value for p0329.
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Replace the power unit involved.
Re fault value = 12:
Reduce the value for p0325.
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
Re fault value = 13:
Reduce the value for p0329.
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
Re fault value = 14:
Increase the value for p0329.
Re fault value = 15:
Increase the value for p0325.
Re fault value = 16:
Deactivate technique (p1982).
Re fault value = 17:
Repeat technique.
A07971 (N) Drive: Angular commutation offset determination activated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The automatic determination of the angular commutation offset (encoder adjustment) is activated (p1990 = 1).
The automatic determination is carried out at the next power-on command.
For SERVO and fault F07414 present, the following applies:
The determination of the angular commutation offset is automatically activated (p1990 = 1), if a pole position identi-
fication technique is set in p1980.
See also: p1990 (Encoder adjustment, determine angular commutation offset)
Remedy: None necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears after determination or for the setting p1990 = 0.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A07980 Drive: Rotating measurement activated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The rotating measurement (automatic speed controller optimization) is activated.
The rotating measurement is carried out at the next power-on command.
See also: p1960 (Rotating measurement selection)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1231
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: None necessary.
The alarm disappears automatically after the speed controller optimization has been successfully completed or for
the setting p1900 = 0.
A07981 Drive: Enable signals for the rotating measurement missing
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The rotating measurement cannot be started due to missing enable signals.
Remedy: - acknowledge faults that are present.
- establish missing enable signals.
See also: r0002, r0046
F07982 Drive: Rotating measurement encoder test
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the encoder test.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
3: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
4: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
5: The encoder does not supply a signal.
6: Incorrect polarity.
7: Incorrect pulse number.
8: Noise in the encoder signal or speed controller unstable.
9: Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) incorrectly connected.
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
- check the motor parameters.
- carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %).
Re fault value = 2:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or adapt the minimum limit (p1080).
Re fault value = 3:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
Re fault value = 4:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
Re fault value = 5:
- check the encoder connection. If required, replace the encoder.
Re fault value = 6:
- check the connection assignment of the encoder cable. Adapt the polarity (p0410).
Re fault value = 7:
- adapt the pulse number (p0408).
Re fault value = 8:
- check the encoder connection and encoder cable. It is possible that there is a problem associated with the ground
connection.
- reduce the dynamic response of the speed controller (p1460, p1462 and p1470, p1472).
Re fault value = 9:
- check the connections of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Note:
The encoder test can be switched out (disabled) using p1959.0.
See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1232 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07983 Drive: Rotating measurement saturation characteristic
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred while determining the saturation characteristic.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The rotor flux did not reach a steady-state condition.
3: The adaptation circuit did not reach a steady-state condition.
4: The adaptation circuit was not enabled.
5: Field weakening active.
6: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
7: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
8: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
9: Several values of the determined saturation characteristic are not plausible.
10: Saturation characteristic could not be sensibly determined because load torque too high.
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
- the total drive moment of inertia is far higher than that of the motor (p0341, p0342).
Deselect rotating measurement (p1960), enter the moment of inertia p0342, recalculate the speed controller p0340
= 4 and repeat the measurement.
Re fault value = 1 ... 2:
- increase the measuring speed (p1961) and repeat the measurement.
Re fault value = 1 ... 4:
- check the motor parameters (rating plate data). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %).
Re fault value = 5:
- the speed setpoint (p1961) is too high. Reduce the speed.
Re fault value = 6:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or minimum limiting (p1080).
Re fault value = 7:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
Re fault value = 8:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
Re fault value = 9, 10:
- the measurement was carried out at an operating point where the load torque is too high. Select a more suitable
operating point, either by changing the speed setpoint (p1961) or by reducing the load torque. The load torque may
not be varied while making measurements.
Note:
The saturation characteristic identification routine can be disabled using p1959.1.
See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration)
F07984 Drive: Speed controller optimization, moment of inertia
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred while identifying the moment of inertia.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
3. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
4. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
5: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the minimum limiting is active.
6: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
7: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the maximum limiting is active.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1233
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
8: The torque difference after the speed setpoint step is too low in order to be able to still reliably identify the moment
of inertia.
9: Too few data to be able to reliably identify the moment of inertia.
10: After the setpoint step, the speed either changed too little or in the incorrect direction.
11: The identified moment of inertia is not plausible.
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
- check the motor parameters (rating plate data). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %).
Re fault value = 2, 5:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or adapt the minimum limit (p1080).
Re fault value = 3, 6:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
Re fault value = 4, 7:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
Re fault value = 8:
- the total drive moment of inertia is far higher than that of the motor (refer to p0341, p0342). Deselect rotating mea-
surement (p1960), enter the moment of inertia p0342, recalculate the speed controller p0340 = 4 and repeat the mea-
surement.
Re fault value = 9:
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change, recalculate (p0340 = 3 or 4).
Re fault value = 10:
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
Note:
The moment of inertia identification routine can be disabled using p1959.2.
See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration)
F07985 Drive: Speed controller optimization (oscillation test)
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the vibration test.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
3: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
4: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
5: Torque limits too low for a torque step.
6: No suitable speed controller setting was found.
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
- check the motor parameters (rating plate data). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %).
Re fault value = 2:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or adapt the minimum limit (p1080).
Re fault value = 3:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
Re fault value = 4:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
Re fault value = 5:
- increase the torque limits (e.g. p1520, p1521).
Re fault value = 6:
- reduce the dynamic factor (p1967).
- disable the vibration test (p1959.4 = 0) and repeat the rotating measurement.
See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1234 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F07986 Drive: Rotating measurement ramp-function generator
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: During the rotating measurements, problems with the ramp-function generator occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The positive and negative directions are inhibited.
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
Enable the direction (p1110 or p1111).
A07987 Drive: Rotating measurement, no encoder available
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: No encoder available. The rotating measurement was carried out without encoder.
Remedy: Connect encoder or select p1960 = 1, 3.
F07988 Drive: Rotating measurement, no configuration selected
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When configuring the rotating measurement (p1959), no function was selected.
Remedy: Select at least one function for automatic optimization of the speed controller (p1959).
See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration)
F07989 Drive: Rotating measurement leakage inductance (q-axis)
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error has occurred while measuring the dynamic leakage inductance.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
3: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
4: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
5: The 100% flux setpoint was not reached.
6: No Lq measurement possible because field weakening is active.
7: Speed actual value exceeds the maximum speed p1082 or 75% of the rated motor speed.
8: Speed actual value is below 2 % of the rated motor speed.
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
- check the motor parameters.
- carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %).
Re fault value = 2:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or adapt the minimum limit (p1080).
Re fault value = 3:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
Re fault value = 4:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
Re fault value = 5:
- flux setpoint p1570 = 100 % and current setpoint p1610 = 0 % kept during the Lq measurement.
Re fault value = 6:
- reduce the regenerative load so that the drive does not reach field weakening when accelerating.
- reduce p1965 so that the q leakage inductance is recorded at lower speeds.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1235
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Re fault value = 7:
- increase p1082 if this is technically permissible.
- reduce p1965 so that the q leakage inductance is recorded at lower speeds.
Re fault value = 8:
- reduce the load when motoring so that the drive is not braked.
- increase p1965 so that the measurement may be taken at higher speeds.
Note:
The measurement of the q leakage inductance can be disabled using p1959.5. If only p1959.5 is set, then only this
measurement is carried out if p1960 is set to 1, 2 and the drive is powered up.
See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration)
F07990 Drive: Incorrect motor data identification
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the identification routine.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Current limit value reached.
2: Identified stator resistance lies outside the expected range 0.1 ... 100% of Zn.
3: Identified rotor resistance lies outside the expected range 0.1 ... 100% of Zn.
Separately excited synchronous motors: damping resistance outside 1.0 ...15 % of Zn.
4: Identified stator reactance lies outside the expected range 50 ... 900 % of Zn.
Separately excited synchronous motors: stator reactance outside 20 ...500 % of Zn.
5: Identified magnetizing reactance lies outside the expected range 50 ... 900 % of Zn.
Separately excited synchronous motors: magnetizing reactance outside 20 ...500 % of Zn.
6: Identified rotor time constant lies outside the expected range 10 ms ... 5 s.
Separately excited synchronous motors: damping time constant outside 5 ms ... 1 s.
7: Identified total leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 4 ... 100 % of Zn.
8: Identified stator leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 2 ... 50% of Zn.
Separately excited synchronous motors: stator leakage reactance outside 2 ...40 % of Zn.
9: Identified rotor leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 2 ... 50% of Zn.
Separately excited synchronous motors: damping leakage reactance outside 1.5 ...20 % of Zn.
10: Motor has been incorrectly connected.
11: Motor shaft rotates.
20: Identified threshold voltage of the semiconductor devices lies outside the expected range 0 ... 10 V.
30: Current controller in voltage limiting.
40: At least one identification contains errors. The identified parameters are not saved to prevent inconsistencies.
Note:
Percentage values are referred to the rated motor impedance:
Zn = Vmot.nom / sqrt(3) / Imot,nom
Remedy: Re fault value = 0:
- check whether the motor is correctly connected. Observe configuration (star-delta).
Re fault value = 1 ... 40:
- check whether motor data have been correctly entered in p0300, p0304 ... p0311.
- is there an appropriate relationship between the motor power rating and that of the Motor Module? The ratio of the
Motor Module to the rated motor current should not be less than 0.5 and not be greater than 4.
- check configuration (star-delta).
Also for fault value = 11:
- deactivate vibration monitoring (p1909 bit 7 = 1).
Re fault value = 2:
- for parallel circuits, check the motor winding system in p7003. If, for power units connected in parallel, a motor is
specified with a single-winding system (p7003 = 0), although a multi-winding system is being used, then a large pro-
portion of the stator resistance is interpreted as feeder cable resistance and entered in p0352.
Re fault value = 4, 7:
- check whether inductances are correctly entered in p0233 and p0353.
- check whether motor has been correctly connected (star-delta).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1236 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A07991 (N) Drive: Motor data identification activated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The motor data ident. routine is activated.
The motor data identification routine is carried out at the next power-on command.
If rotating measurement is selected (see p1900, p1960), it will not be possible to save the parameter assignment.
Once motor data identification has been completed or deactivated, the option to save the parameter assignment will
be made available again.
See also: p1910 (Motor data identification selection)
Remedy: None necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears after the motor data identification routine has been successfully completed or
for the setting p1900 = 0.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A07994 (N) Drive: motor data identification not performed
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Motor data identification has not yet been performed with the actual data set.
The alarm is only triggered if the selection of the data set changes (see r0051) and vector control is parameterized
(p1300 >= 20) in the new data set selected and motor data identification has not yet been performed (see r3925).
Remedy: - Perform motor data identification (see p1900).
- Return data set.
- Parameterize V/f control (p1300 < 20).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F08000 (N, A) TB: +/-15 V power supply faulted
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Terminal Board 30 detects an incorrect internal power supply voltage.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: Error when testing the monitoring circuit.
1: Fault in normal operation.
Remedy: - replace Terminal Board 30.
- replace Control Unit.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F08010 (N, A) TB: Analog-digital converter
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The analog/digital converter on Terminal Board 30 has not supplied any converted data.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1237
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check the power supply.
- replace Terminal Board 30.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F08500 (A) COMM BOARD: Monitoring time configuration expired
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The monitoring time for the configuration has expired.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: The transfer time of the send configuration data has been exceeded.
1: The transfer time of the receive configuration data has been exceeded.
Remedy: Check communication line.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F08501 (N, A) COMM BOARD: Monitoring time process data expired
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF3 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The set monitoring time expired while transferring process data via COMM BOARD.
See also: p8840 (COMM BOARD monitoring time)
Remedy: - check communications link.
- check the set monitoring time if the error persists.
See also: p8840 (COMM BOARD monitoring time)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F08502 (A) COMM BOARD: Monitoring time sign-of-life expired
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The monitoring time for the sign-of-life counter has expired.
The connection to the COMM BOARD was interrupted.
Remedy: - check communications link.
- check COMM BOARD.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A08504 (F) COMM BOARD: Internal cyclic data transfer error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The cyclic actual and/or setpoint values were not transferred within the specified times.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1238 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Check the parameterizing telegram (Ti, To, Tdp, etc.).
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
F08510 (A) COMM BOARD: Send configuration data invalid
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: COMM BOARD did not accept the send-configuration data.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Return value of the send-configuration data check.
Remedy: Check the send configuration data.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A08511 (F) COMM BOARD: Receive configuration data invalid
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The drive unit did not accept the receive configuration data.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Return value of the receive configuration data check.
0: Configuration accepted.
1: Connection established to more drive objects than configured in the device. The drive objects for process data
exchange and their sequence are defined in p0978.
2: Too many PZD data words for output or input to a drive object. The number of possible PZD items in a drive object
is determined by the number of indices in r2050/p2051 for PZD IF1, and in r8850/p8851 for PZD IF2.
3: Uneven number of bytes for input or output.
4: Setting data for synchronization not accepted. For more information, see A01902.
5: Cyclic operation not active.
6: Buffer system not accepted.
7: Cyclic channel length too short for this setting.
8: Cyclic channel address not initialized.
9: 3-buffer system not permitted.
23: Illegal clock synchronization for PZD interface 2.
Remedy: Check the receive configuration data.
Re alarm value = 1:
Check the list of the drive objects with process data exchange (p0978). With p0978[x] = 0, all of the following drive
objects in the list are excluded from the process data exchange.
Re alarm value = 2:
Check the number of data words for output and input to a drive object.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A08520 (F) COMM BOARD: Non-cyclic channel error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The memory or the buffer status of the non-cyclic channel has an error.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0: Error in the buffer status.
1: Error in the memory.
Remedy: Check communication line.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1239
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A08526 (F) COMM BOARD: No cyclic connection
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: There is no cyclic connection to the control.
Remedy: Establish the cyclic connection and activate the control with cyclic operation.
For PROFINET, check the parameters "Name of Station" and "IP of Station" (r61000, r61001).
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A08530 (F) COMM BOARD: Message channel error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The memory or the buffer status of the message channel has an error.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0: Error in the buffer status.
1: Error in the memory.
Remedy: Check communication line.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A08550 PZD Interface Hardware assignment error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The assignment of the hardware to the PZD interface has been incorrectly parameterized.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only one of the two indices is not equal to 99 (automatic).
2: Both PZD interfaces are assigned to the same hardware.
3: Assigned COMM BOARD missing.
4: CBC10 is assigned to interface 1.
See also: p8839 (PZD interface hardware assignment)
Remedy: Correct the parameterization (p8839).
A08560 IE: Syntax error in configuration file
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A syntax error has been detected in the ASCII configuration file for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127). The
saved configuration file has not been loaded.
Note:
IE: Industrial Ethernet
Remedy: - Check the interface configuration (p8900 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8905 = 1).
- Save the parameters for interface configuration (e.g. p8905 = 2)
or
- Reconfigure the station via the "Edit Ethernet node" screen form (e.g. with STARTER commissioning software).
See also: p8905 (IE Interface configuration)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1240 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A08561 IE: Consistency error affecting adjustable parameters
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A consistency error was detected when activating the configuration (p8905 = 1) for the Industrial Ethernet interface
(X127). The currently set configuration has not been activated.
Possible causes:
- IP address, subnet mask or default gateway is not correct
- IP address or station name used twice in the network
- station name contains invalid characters, etc.
Note:
IE: Industrial Ethernet
See also: p8900 (IE Name of Station), p8901 (IE IP Address of Station), p8902 (IE Default Gateway of Station),
p8903 (IE Subnet Mask of Station)
Remedy: - Check the required interface configuration (p8900 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8905 = 1).
or
- Reconfigure the station via the "Edit Ethernet node" screen form (e.g. with STARTER commissioning software).
See also: p8905 (IE Interface configuration)
A08564 CBE20: Syntax error in configuration file
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A syntax error has been detected in the ASCII configuration file for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
The saved configuration file has not been loaded.
Remedy: - Check the CBE20 configuration (p8940 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8945 = 1).
Note:
The configuration is not applied until the next POWER ON!
- reconfigure the CBE20 (e.g. using the STARTER commissioning software)
See also: p8945 (CBE20 interface configuration)
A08565 CBE20: Consistency error affecting adjustable parameters
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A consistency error was detected when activating the configuration (p8945 = 1) for the Communication Board Ether-
net 20 (CBE20).
The currently set configuration has not been activated.
Possible causes:
- IP address, subnet mask or default gateway is not correct
- IP address or station name used twice in the network
- station name contains invalid characters, etc.
See also: p8940 (CBE20 Name of Station), p8941 (CBE20 IP Address of Station), p8942 (CBE20 Default Gateway
of Station), p8943 (CBE20 Subnet Mask of Station), p8944 (CBE20 DHCP Mode)
Remedy: Check the required interface configuration (p8940 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8945 = 1).
See also: p8945 (CBE20 interface configuration)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1241
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F08700 (A) CAN: Communications error
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF3 (NONE, OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A CAN communications error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The error counter for the send telegrams has exceeded the BUS OFF value 255. The bus disables the CAN con-
troller.
- bus cable short circuit.
- incorrect baud rate.
- incorrect bit timing.
2: The master no longer interrogated the CAN node status longer than for its "life time". The "life time" is obtained
from the "guard time" (p8604[0]) multiplied by the "life time factor" (p8604[1]).
- bus cable interrupted.
- bus cable not connected.
- incorrect baud rate.
- incorrect bit timing.
- master fault.
Note:
The fault response can be set as required using p8641.
See also: p8604 (CAN node guarding), p8641 (CAN Abort Connection Option Code)
Remedy: - check the bus cable
- check the baud rate (p8622).
- check the bit timing (p8623).
- check the master.
The CAN controller must be manually restarted with p8608 = 1 after the cause of the fault has been resolved!
See also: p8608 (CAN Clear Bus Off Error), p8622 (CAN baud rate), p8623 (CAN Bit Timing selection)
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F08701 CAN: NMT state change
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF3
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A CANopen NMT state transition from "operational" to "pre-operational" or after "stopped".
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: CANopen NMT state transition from "operational" to "pre-operational".
2: CANopen NMT state transition from "operational" to "stopped".
Note:
In the NMT state "pre-operational", process data cannot be transferred and in the NMT state "stopped", no process
data and no service data can be transferred.
Remedy: None necessary.
Acknowledge the fault and continue operation.
A08751 CAN: Telegram loss
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The CAN controller has lost a receive message (telegram).
Remedy: Reduce the cycle times of the receive messages.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1242 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A08752 CAN: Error counter for error passive exceeded
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The error counter for the send or receive telegrams has exceeded the value 127.
Remedy: - check the bus cable
- set a higher baud rate (p8622).
- check the bit timing and if required optimize (p8623).
See also: p8622 (CAN baud rate), p8623 (CAN Bit Timing selection)
A08753 CAN: Message buffer overflow
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A message buffer overflow.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Non-cyclic send buffer (SDO response buffer) overflow.
2: Non-cyclic receive buffer (SDO receive buffer) overflow.
3: Cyclic send buffer (PDO send buffer) overflow.
Remedy: Check the bus cable.
Set a higher baud rate (p8622).
Check the bit timing and if required optimize (p8623).
Alarm value = 2:
- reduce the cycle times of the SDO receive messages.
- SDO request from master only after SDO feedback for previous SDO request.
See also: p8622 (CAN baud rate), p8623 (CAN Bit Timing selection)
A08754 CAN: Incorrect communications mode
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the "operational" mode, an attempt was made to change parameters p8700 ... p8737.
Remedy: Change to the "pre-operational" or "stopped" mode.
A08755 CAN: Object cannot be mapped
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The CANopen object is not provided for the Process Data Object (PDO) Mapping.
Remedy: Use a CANopen object intended for the PDO mapping or enter 0.
The following objects can be mapped in the Receive Process Data Object (RPDO) or Transmit Process Data Object
(TPDO):
- RPDO: 6040 hex, 6060 hex, 60FF hex, 6071 hex; 5800 hex - 580F hex; 5820 hex - 5827 hex
- TPDO: 6041 hex, 6061 hex, 6063 hex, 6069 hex, 606B hex, 606C hex, 6074 hex; 5810 hex - 581F hex; 5830 hex
- 5837 hex
Only sub-index 0 of the specified objects can be mapped.
Note:
As long as A08755 is present, the COB-ID cannot be set to valid.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1243
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A08756 CAN: Number of mapped bytes exceeded
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The number of bytes of the mapped objects exceeds the telegram size for net data. A max. of 8 bytes is permissible.
Remedy: Map fewer objects or objects with a smaller data type.
See also: p8710, p8711, p8712, p8713, p8714, p8715, p8716, p8717, p8730, p8731, p8732, p8733, p8734, p8735,
p8736, p8737
A08757 CAN: Set COB-ID invalid
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For online operation, the appropriate COB-ID must be set invalid before mapping.
Example:
Mapping for RPDO 1 should be changed (p8710[0]).
--> set p8700[0] = C00006E0 hex (invalid COB-ID)
--> set p8710[0] as required.
--> p8700[0] enter a valid COB-ID
Remedy: Set the COB-ID to invalid.
A08758 CAN: Number of PDO channels too low
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The number of PDO channels in p8740 has either been set to 0 or too low.
See also: p8740 (CAN channel distribution)
Remedy: The number of channels set in p8740 must be greater than or equal to the number of PDOs.
There are 2 possibilities:
Increase the number of channels in p8740 and confirm the selection using p8741.
Reduce the number of PDOs by setting the COB-ID to invalid.
See also: p8740 (CAN channel distribution), p8741 (CAN PDO configuration acknowledgement)
A08759 CAN: PDO COB-ID already available
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An existing PDO COB-ID was allocated.
Remedy: Select another PDO COB-ID.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1244 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A13000 License not adequate
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - for the drive unit, the options that require a license are being used but the licenses are not sufficient.
- an error occurred when checking the existing licenses.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0:
The existing license is not sufficient.
1:
An adequate license was not able to be determined as the memory card with the required licensing data was with-
drawn in operation.
2:
An adequate license was not able to be determined, as an error occurred when reading-out the required licensing
data from the memory card.
3:
An adequate license was not able to be determined as there is a checksum error in the license key.
4:
An internal error occurred when checking the license.
Remedy: Re alarm value = 0:
Additional licenses are required and these must be activated (p9920, p9921).
Re alarm value = 1:
With the system powered down, re-insert the memory card that matches the system.
Re alarm value = 2:
Enter and activate the license key (p9920, p9921).
Re alarm value = 3:
Compare the license key (p9920) entered with the license key on the certificate of license.
Re-enter the license key and activate (p9920, p9921).
Re alarm value = 4:
- carry out a POWER ON.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
A13001 Error in license checksum
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When checking the checksum of the license key, an error was detected.
Remedy: Compare the license key (p9920) entered with the license key on the certificate of license.
Re-enter the license key and activate (p9920, p9921).
F13009 Licensing OA application not licensed
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: At least one OA application which is under license does not have a license.
Code for unlicensed OA applications corresponds to p4956 or p4955.
Remedy: - Enter and activate the license key which licenses OA applications under license (p9920, p9921).
- Deactivate unlicensed OA applications (p4956).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1245
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F13010 Licensing function module not licensed
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: At least one function module which is under license does not have a license.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Unlicensed function modules are coded bit by bit. The code corresponds to that used in r0108.
Remedy: - Deactivate unlicensed function modules (p108).
- Enter and activate the license key which licenses function modules under license (p9920, p9921).
F30001 Power unit: Overcurrent
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit has detected an overcurrent condition.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- motor has a short-circuit or fault to ground (frame).
- V/f operation: Up ramp set too low.
- V/f operation: Rated motor current is significantly greater than that of the Motor Module.
- infeed: High discharge and post-charging current for voltage dip.
- infeed: High post-charging currents for overload when motoring and DC link voltage dip.
- infeed: Short-circuit currents at power-up due to the missing line reactor.
- power cables are not correctly connected.
- power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- power unit defective.
- line phase interrupted.
Additional causes for a parallel switching device (r0108.15 = 1):
- a power unit has tripped (powered down) due to a ground fault.
- the closed-loop circulating current control is either too slow or has been set too fast.
Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary):
Bit 0: Phase U.
Bit 1: Phase V.
Bit 2: Phase W.
Bit 3: Overcurrent in the DC link.
Note:
Fault value = 0 means that the phase with overcurrent is not recognized (e.g. for blocksize device).
Remedy: - check the motor data - if required, carry out commissioning.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta)
- V/f operation: Increase up ramp.
- V/f operation: Check the assignment of the rated currents of the motor and Motor Module.
- infeed: Check the line supply quality.
- infeed: Reduce the motor load.
- infeed: Correct connection of the line reactor.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
- replace power unit.
- check the line supply phases.
For a parallel switching device (r0108.15 = 1) the following additionally applies:
- check the ground fault monitoring thresholds (p0287).
- check the setting of the closed-loop circulating current control (p7036, p7037).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1246 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30002 Power unit: DC link voltage, overvoltage
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit has detected overvoltage in the DC link.
- motor regenerates too much energy.
- device connection voltage too high.
- when operating with a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM), the phase assignment L1, L2, L3 at the VSM differs from
the phase assignment at the power unit.
- line phase interrupted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
DC link voltage [1 bit = 100 mV].
For SINAMICS GM/SM, the following applies:
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
32: Overvoltage in the negative partial DC link (VdcN).
64: Overvoltage in the positive partial DC link (VdcP).
96: Overvoltage in both partial DC links.
Remedy: - increase the ramp-down time
- activate the DC link voltage controller
- use a brake resistor or Active Line Module
- increase the current limit of the infeed or use a larger module (for the Active Line Module)
- check the device supply voltage
- check and correct the phase assignment at the VSM and at the power unit
- check the line supply phases.
- set the rounding times (p1130, p1136). This is particularly recommended in V/f operation to relieve the DC link volt-
age controller with rapid ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage), p1240 (Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration)
F30003 Power unit: DC link voltage, undervoltage
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit has detected an undervoltage condition in the DC link.
- line supply failure
- line supply voltage below the permissible value.
- line supply infeed failed or interrupted.
- line phase interrupted.
Note:
The monitoring threshold for the DC link undervoltage is the minimum of the following values:
- for a calculation, refer to p0210.
Remedy: - check the line supply voltage
- check the line supply infeed and observe the fault messages relating to it (if there are any)
- check the line supply phases.
Note:
The ready signal for the infeed (r0863) must be connected to the associated drive inputs (p0864).
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1247
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30004 Power unit: Overtemperature heat sink AC inverter
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The temperature of the power unit heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload.
- ambient temperature too high.
- pulse frequency too high.
Fault value (r0949):
Temperature [1 bit = 0.01 °C].
Remedy: - check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- check the motor load.
- reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after this alarm threshold for alarm A05000 has been undershot.
See also: p1800 (Pulse frequency setpoint)
F30005 Power unit: Overload I2t
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit was overloaded (r0036 = 100 %).
- the permissible rated power unit current was exceeded for an inadmissibly long time.
- the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
I2t [100 % = 16384].
Remedy: - reduce the continuous load.
- adapt the load duty cycle.
- check the motor and power unit rated currents.
- increase p0294
See also: r0036 (Power unit overload I2t), r0206 (Rated power unit power), p0307 (Rated motor power)
F30006 Power unit: Thyristor Control Board
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The Thyristor Control Board (TCB) of the Basic Line Module signals a fault.
- there is no line supply voltage.
- the line contactor is not closed.
- the line supply voltage is too low.
- line supply frequency outside the permissible range (45 ... 66 Hz).
- there is a DC link short-circuit.
- there is a DC link short-circuit (during the pre-charging phase).
- voltage supply for the Thyristor Control Board outside the nominal range (5 ... 18 V) and line voltage >30 V.
- there is an internal fault in the Thyristor Control Board.
Remedy: The faults must be saved in the Thyristor Control Board and must be acknowledged. To do this, the supply voltage
of the Thyristor Control Board must be switched out for at least 10 s!
- check the line supply voltage
- check or energize the line contactor.
- check the monitoring time and, if required, increase (p0857).
- if required, observe additional power unit messages/signals.
- check the DC link regarding short-circuit or ground fault.
- evaluate diagnostic LEDs for the Thyristor Control Board.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1248 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30008 Power unit: Sign-of-life error cyclic data
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit has detected that the cyclic setpoint telegrams of the Control Unit have not been updated on time.
The number of consecutive sign-of-life errors has exceeded the fault threshold (p7789).
Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- for projects with the VECTOR drive object, check whether p0117 = 6 has been set on the Control Unit.
- increase the fault threshold (p7789).
See also: p0117 (Current controller computing dead time mode)
A30010 (F) Power unit: Sign-of-life error cyclic data
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred between the Control Unit and the power unit involved.
The cyclic setpoint telegrams of the Control Unit were not received on time by the power unit for at least one clock
cycle.
Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
F30011 Power unit: Line phase failure in main circuit
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A line phase failure was detected at the power unit.
- the fuse of a phase of a main circuit has ruptured.
- the DC link voltage ripple has exceeded the permissible limit value.
Note:
The cause may also be a phase failure in the motor feeder cable.
Remedy: - check the main circuit fuses.
- check the motor feeder cables.
F30012 Power unit: Temperature sensor heat sink wire breakage
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The connection to one of the heat sink temperature sensors in the power unit is interrupted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Bit 0: Module slot (electronics slot)
Bit 1: Air intake
Bit 2: Inverter 1
Bit 3: Inverter 2
Bit 4: Inverter 3
Bit 5: Inverter 4
Bit 6: Inverter 5
Bit 7: Inverter 6
Bit 8: Rectifier 1
Bit 9: Rectifier 2
Remedy: Contact the manufacturer.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1249
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30013 Power unit: Temperature sensor heat sink short-circuit
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The heat sink temperature sensor in the power unit is short-circuited.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Bit 0: Module slot (electronics slot)
Bit 1: Air intake
Bit 2: Inverter 1
Bit 3: Inverter 2
Bit 4: Inverter 3
Bit 5: Inverter 4
Bit 6: Inverter 5
Bit 7: Inverter 6
Bit 8: Rectifier 1
Bit 9: Rectifier 2
Remedy: Contact the manufacturer.
F30015 Power unit: Phase failure motor feeder cable
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A phase failure was detected at the power unit output (motor feeder cable). Chassis power units do not feature phase
failure monitoring.
Note:
The fault can also be signaled if the drive stalled in V/f control. In this particular case, a phase failure does not nec-
essarily have to be present, but a current of 0 was measured in one phase due to current dissymmetry.
Remedy: 1. Check the motor feeder cables.
2. If the drive has stalled in V/f control, the acceleration or deceleration time (p1120) should be increased.
A30016 (N) Power unit: Load supply switched out
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DC link voltage is too low.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
DC link voltage in [V].
Remedy: - switch on load supply.
- check the line supply if necessary.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1250 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30017 Power unit: Hardware current limit has responded too often
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The hardware current limitation in the relevant phase (see A30031, A30032, A30033) has responded too often. The
number of times the limit has been exceeded depends on the design and type of power unit.
For infeed units, the following applies:
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- load on the infeed is too high.
- Voltage Sensing Module incorrectly connected.
- line reactor missing or the incorrect type.
- power unit defective.
The following applies to Motor Modules:
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- motor load too high
- power unit defective.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Phase U
Bit 1: Phase V
Bit 2: Phase W
Remedy: For infeed units, the following applies:
- check the controller settings and reset and identify the controller if necessary (p0340 = 2, p3410 = 5)
- reduce the load and increase the DC-link capacitance or use a higher-rating infeed if necessary
- check the connection of the optional Voltage Sensing Module
- check the connection and technical data of the line reactor
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- replace power unit.
The following applies to Motor Modules:
- check the motor data.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta).
- check the motor load.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
- replace power unit.
F30020 Power unit: Configuration not supported
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A configuration is requested that is not supported by the power unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
0:
Autonomous operation is requested but is not supported.
Remedy: Re fault value = 0:
If internal voltage protection is active (p1231 = 3), deactivate it if necessary.
See also: p1231 (Armature short-circuit / DC brake configuration)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1251
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30021 Power unit: Ground fault
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Power unit has detected a ground fault.
- ground fault in the power cables.
- winding fault or ground fault at the motor.
- CT defective.
Additional cause for CU310/CUA31:
- when the brake is applied, this causes the hardware DC current monitoring to respond.
Additional cause for parallel switching devices (r0108.15 = 1):
- the closed-loop circulating current control is either too slow or has been set too fast.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Absolute value, total current amplitude [20479 = r0209 * 1.4142].
Remedy: - check the power cable connections.
- check the motor.
- check the CT.
The following applies additionally for CU310/CUA31:
- check the cables and contacts of the brake connection (a wire is possibly broken).
For parallel switching devices (r0108.15 = 1) the following additionally applies:
- check the ground fault monitoring thresholds (p0287).
- check the setting of the closed-loop circulating current control (p7036, p7037).
See also: p0287 (Ground fault monitoring thresholds)
F30022 Power unit: Monitoring V_ce
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: In the power unit, the monitoring of the collector-emitter voltage (V_ce) of the semiconductor has responded.
Possible causes:
- fiber-optic cable interrupted.
- power supply of the IGBT gating module missing.
- short-circuit at the power unit output.
- defective semiconductor in the power unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Short-circuit in phase U
Bit 1: Short circuit in phase V
Bit 2: Short-circuit in phase W
Bit 3: Light transmitter enable defective
Bit 4: V_ce group fault signal interrupted
See also: r0949 (Fault value)
Remedy: - check the fiber-optic cable and if required, replace.
- check the power supply of the IGBT gating module (24 V).
- check the power cable connections.
- select the defective semiconductor and replace.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1252 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A30023 Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model alarm
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature difference between the heat sink and chip has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload.
- ambient temperature too high.
- pulse frequency too high.
See also: r0037
Remedy: - adapt the load duty cycle.
- check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- check the motor load.
- reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency.
- if DC brake is active: reduce braking current (see p1232).
F30024 Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The temperature difference between the heat sink and chip has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload.
- ambient temperature too high.
- pulse frequency too high.
See also: r0037
Remedy: - adapt the load duty cycle.
- check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- check the motor load.
- reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency.
- if DC brake is active: reduce braking current (see p1232).
F30025 Power unit: Chip overtemperature
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Chip temperature of the semiconductor has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload.
- ambient temperature too high.
- pulse frequency too high.
Fault value (r0949):
Temperature difference between the heat sink and chip [1 Bit = 0.01 °C].
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1253
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - adapt the load duty cycle.
- check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- check the motor load.
- reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after this alarm threshold for alarm A05001 has been undershot.
See also: r0037
F30027 Power unit: Precharging DC link time monitoring
Message value: Enable signals: %1, Status: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit DC link was not able to be pre-charged within the expected time.
1) There is no line supply voltage connected.
2) The line contactor/line side switch has not been closed.
3) The line supply voltage is too low.
4) Line supply voltage incorrectly set (p0210).
5) The pre-charging resistors are overheated as there were too many pre-charging operations per time unit.
6) The pre-charging resistors are overheated as the DC link capacitance is too high.
7) The pre-charging resistors are overheated because when there is no "ready for operation" (r0863.0) of the infeed
unit, power is taken from the DC link.
8) The pre-charging resistors are overheated as the line contactor was closed during the DC link fast discharge
through the Braking Module.
9) The DC link has either a ground fault or a short-circuit.
10) The pre-charging circuit is possibly defective (only for chassis units).
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Missing internal enable signals, power unit (lower 16 bit):
(Inverted bit-coded representation FFFF hex -> all internal enable signals available)
Bit 0: Power supply of the IGBT gating shut down
Bit 1: Reserved
Bit 2: Reserved
Bit 3: Ground fault detected
Bit 4: Peak current intervention
Bit 5: I2t exceeded
Bit 6. Thermal model overtemperature calculated
Bit 7: (heat sink, gating module, power unit) overtemperature measured
Bit 8: Reserved
Bit 9: Overvoltage detected
Bit 10: Power unit has completed pre-charging, ready for pulse enable
Bit 11: STO terminal missing
Bit 12: Overcurrent detected
Bit 13: Armature short-circuit active
Bit 14: DRIVE-CLiQ fault active
Bit 15: Uce fault detected, transistor de-saturated due to overcurrent/short-circuit
Status, power unit (upper 16 bit, hexadecimal number):
0: Fault status (wait for OFF and fault acknowledgement)
1: Restart inhibit (wait for OFF)
2: Overvoltage condition detected -> change into the fault state
3: Undervoltage condition detected -> change into the fault state
4: Wait for bypass contactor to open -> change into the fault state
5: Wait for bypass contactor to open -> change into restart inhibit
6: Commissioning
7: Ready for pre-charging
8: Pre-charging started, DC link voltage lower than the minimum switch-on voltage
9: Pre-charging, DC link voltage end of pre-charging still not detected
10: Wait for the end of the de-bounce time of the main contactor after pre-charging has been completed
11: Pre-charging completed, ready for pulse enable
12: It was detected that the STO terminal was energized at the power unit
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1254 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: In general:
- check the line supply voltage at the input terminals.
- check the line supply voltage setting (p0210).
- the following applies to booksize units: Wait (approx. 8 min.) until the pre-charging resistors have cooled down. For
this purpose, preferably disconnect the infeed unit from the line supply.
Re 5):
- carefully observe the permissible pre-charging frequency (refer to the appropriate Equipment Manual).
Re 6):
- check the total capacitance of the DC link and reduce in accordance with the maximum permissible DC-link capac-
itance if necessary (refer to the appropriate Equipment Manual)
Re 7):
- interconnect the ready-for-operation signal from the infeed unit (r0863.0) in the enable logic of the drives connected
to this DC link
Re 8):
- check the connections of the external line contactor. The line contactor must be open during DC-link fast discharge.
Re 9):
- check the DC link for ground faults or short circuits.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)
A30031 Power unit: Hardware current limiting, phase U
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Hardware current limit for phase U responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- motor load too high
- power unit defective.
Note:
Alarm A30031 is always output if, for a Power Module, the hardware current limiting of phase U, V or W responds.
Remedy: - check the motor data.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta)
- check the motor load.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
A30032 Power unit: Hardware current limiting, phase V
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Hardware current limit for phase V responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- motor load too high
- power unit defective.
Note:
Alarm A30031 is always output if, for a Power Module, the hardware current limiting of phase U, V or W responds.
Remedy: - check the motor data.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta)
- check the motor load.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1255
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A30033 Power unit: Hardware current limiting, phase W
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Hardware current limit for phase W responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- motor load too high
- power unit defective.
Note:
Alarm A30031 is always output if, for a Power Module, the hardware current limiting of phase U, V or W responds.
Remedy: - check the motor data.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta)
- check the motor load.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
A30034 Power unit: Internal overtemperature
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The alarm threshold for internal overtemperature has been reached.
If the temperature inside the unit continues to increase, fault F30036 may be triggered.
- ambient temperature might be too high.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Control electronics range.
Bit 1 = 1: Power electronics range.
Remedy: - check the ambient temperature.
- check the fan for the inside of the unit.
F30035 Power unit: Air intake overtemperature
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The air intake in the power unit has exceeded the permissible temperature limit.
For air-cooled power units, the temperature limit is at 55 °C.
- ambient temperature too high.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Temperature [1 bit = 0.01 °C].
Remedy: - check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after this alarm threshold for alarm A05002 has been undershot.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1256 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30036 Power unit: Internal overtemperature
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For chassis power units, the following applies:
The temperature inside the drive converter has exceeded the permissible temperature limit.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload.
- ambient temperature too high.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Control electronics range.
Bit 1 = 1: Power electronics range.
Remedy: - check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged once the permissible temperature limit minus 5 K has been undershot.
F30037 Power unit: Rectifier overtemperature
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The temperature in the rectifier of the power unit has exceeded the permissible temperature limit.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload.
- ambient temperature too high.
- line supply phase failure.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Temperature [1 bit = 0.01 °C].
Remedy: - check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- check the motor load.
- check the line supply phases.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after this alarm threshold for alarm A05004 has been undershot.
F30040 Power unit: Undervolt 24 V
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Failure of the 24 V power supply for the power unit.
- The undervoltage threshold was undershot for longer than 3 ms.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
24 V voltage [1 bit = 0.1 V].
Remedy: - check the 24 V DC voltage supply to power unit.
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for the component.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1257
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A30041 (F) Power unit: Undervoltage 24 V alarm
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: 24 V power supply fault for the power unit.
- the 16 V threshold was undershot..
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
24 V voltage [1 bit = 0.1 V].
Remedy: - check the 24 V DC voltage supply to power unit.
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for the component.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
A30042 Power unit: Fan operating time reached or exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The maximum operating time of the fan in the power unit is set in p0252.
This message indicates the following:
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: The maximum fan operating time is 500 hours.
1: The maximum fan operating time has been exceeded.
Remedy: Replace the fan in the power unit and reset the operating hours counter to 0 (p0251 = 0).
See also: p0251 (Operating hours counter power unit fan), p0252 (Maximum operating time power unit fan)
F30043 Power unit: Overvolt 24 V
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: The following applies for CU31x:
Overvoltage of the 24 V power supply for the power unit.
- the 31.5 V threshold was exceeded for more than 3 ms.
Fault value (r0949):
24 V voltage [1 bit = 0.1 V].
Remedy: Check the 24 V DC voltage supply to the power unit.
A30044 (F) Power unit: Overvoltage 24 V alarm
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The following applies for CU31x:
24 V power supply fault for the power unit.
- the 32.0 V threshold was exceeded.
Fault value (r0949):
24 V voltage [1 bit = 0.1 V].
Remedy: Check the 24 V DC voltage supply to the power unit.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1258 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30045 Power unit: Supply undervoltage
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Power supply fault in the power unit.
- The voltage monitor signals an undervoltage fault on the module.
The following applies for CU31x:
- the voltage monitoring on the DAC board signals an undervoltage fault on the module.
Remedy: - check the 24 V DC voltage supply to power unit.
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for the component.
- replace the module if necessary.
A30046 (F) Power unit: Undervoltage, alarm
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Before the last restart, a problem occurred at the power unit power supply.
- the voltage monitor in the internal FPGA of the PSA signals an undervoltage fault on the module.
Fault value (r0949):
Register value of the voltage fault register.
Remedy: - check the 24 V DC voltage supply to power unit.
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for the component.
- replace the module if necessary.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
F30047 Cooling system: Cooling medium flow rate too low
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Cooling system: Fault - flow rate has fallen below the fault value
Remedy:
A30048 Power unit: External fan faulty
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The feedback signal from the external fan indicates a fault.
- fan faulty, blocked.
- feedback signal inaccurate.
Remedy: - check the external fan and replace if necessary.
- if you are using an external fan with feedback, check its wiring (X12.2 or X13.2).
Note:
If you are using an external fan without feedback, check that the feedback terminal wiring on the power unit is con-
nected to ground and make this connection if necessary (X12.1/2 or X13.1/2).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1259
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A30049 Power unit: Internal fan faulty
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The internal fan has failed.
Remedy: Check the internal fan and replace if necessary.
F30050 Power unit: 24 V supply overvoltage
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: The voltage monitor signals an overvoltage fault on the module.
Remedy: - check the 24 V power supply.
- replace the module if necessary.
F30052 EEPROM data error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: EEPROM data error of the power unit module.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
0: The EEPROM data read in from the power unit module is inconsistent.
1: EEPROM data is not compatible to the firmware of the power unit application.
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Re fault value = 0:
Replace the power unit module or update the EEPROM data.
Re fault value = 1:
The following applies for CU31x and CUA31:
Update the firmware \SIEMENS\SINAMICS\CODE\SAC\cu31xi.ufw (cua31.ufw)
F30053 FPGA data faulty
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: Power unit module FPGA data error.
Remedy: Replace the power unit module or update the FPGA data.
A30054 (F) Power unit: 24 V braking undervoltage
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: If the brake needs to be released during brake control, the P24 voltage must be at least 21.6 V (24 V - 10%) so that
the brake is sure to release. If the voltage undershoots the 21.6 V threshold when the brake is released, the alarm
is triggered; it goes away again as soon as the voltage rises above a threshold value of 22 V.
When the alarm is triggered, the voltage value is shown in the fault value in increments of 0.1 V (e.g. 21.2 V = 212).
Remedy: Make sure that the 24 V voltage is stable and does not fluctuate downwards by more than 10%.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1260 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30060 (A) Pre-charge contactor monitoring
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: At the end of the monitoring time (p0255[0]), the actual state of the pre-charge contactor does not match the desired
state.
Bit 0: Monitoring time exceeded.
Bit 1: Contactor opened during operation.
Bit 2: Contactor closed in OFF state.
Remedy: - check the monitoring time setting p0255[0].
- check the contactor wiring and activation.
- replace the contactor.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F30061 (A) Bridging contactor monitoring
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: At the end of the monitoring time (p0255[1]), the actual state of the bridging contactor does not match the desired
state.
Bit 0: Monitoring time exceeded.
Bit 1: Contactor opened during operation.
Bit 2: Contactor closed in OFF state.
Remedy: - check the monitoring time setting p0255[1].
- check the contactor wiring and activation.
- replace the contactor.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F30062 (N, A) Bypass contactor has been opened under current
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The bypass contactor for the infeed has been damaged due to (multiple) opening under current.
Possible causes:
- Scheduled opening under load can be necessary to protect the converter line-up in the event of a ground fault in
high-frequency spindles.
- Operating the contactor under load can result from incorrect operation of the infeed; for example, if motoring power
is drawn from the DC link although no operating enable is present for the infeed.
Remedy: Damaged infeeds must be replaced, to prevent serious damage to the entire converter line-up.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1261
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30070 Cycle requested by the power unit module not supported
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A cycle is requested that is not supported by the power unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
0: The current control cycle is not supported.
1: The DRIVE-CLiQ cycle is not supported.
2: Internal timing problem (clearance between RX and TX instants too low).
3: Internal timing problem (TX instant too early).
Remedy: The power unit only supports the following cycles:
62.5 µs, 125 µs, 250 µs and 500 µs
Re fault value = 0:
Set a permitted current control cycle.
Re fault value = 1:
Set a permitted DRIVE-CLiQ cycle.
Re fault value = 2, 3:
Contact the manufacturer (you may have an incompatible firmware version).
F30071 No new actual values received from the power unit module
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The number of actual value telegrams from the power unit module that have failed has exceeded the permissible
number.
Remedy: Check the interface (adjustment and locking) to the power unit module.
F30072 Setpoints are no longer being transferred to the power unit
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The following applies for CU31x and CUA31:
More than one setpoint telegram was not able to be transferred to the power unit module.
Remedy: The following applies for CU31x and CUA31:
Check the interface (adjustment and locking) to the power unit module.
A30073 (N) Actual value/setpoint preprocessing no longer synchronous
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Communication with the power unit module is no longer in synchronism with the current control cycle.
Remedy: Wait until synchronization is re-established.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F30074 Communications error to the power unit module
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Communication is not possible with the power unit module via the plug connection.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1262 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: The following applies for CU31x and CUA31:
Either replace the Control Unit or the power unit.
You must check which of the two components needs to be replaced by replacing one component and then the other
(ensuring that the component which is not being tested in each case is fully functioning). If these are not available,
then both components must be returned.
F30080 Power unit: Current increasing too quickly
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit has detected an excessive rate of rise in the overvoltage range.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- motor has a short-circuit or fault to ground (frame).
- V/f operation: Up ramp set too low.
- V/f operation: Rated motor current is significantly greater than that of the Motor Module.
- infeed: High discharge and post-charging current for voltage dip.
- infeed: High post-charging currents for overload when motoring and DC link voltage dip.
- infeed: Short-circuit currents at power-up due to the missing line reactor.
- power cables are not correctly connected.
- power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- power unit defective.
Additional causes for a parallel switching device (r0108.15 = 1):
- a power unit has tripped (powered down) due to a ground fault.
- the closed-loop circulating current control is either too slow or has been set too fast.
Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary):
Bit 0: Phase U.
Bit 1: Phase V.
Bit 2: Phase W.
Remedy: - check the motor data - if required, carry out commissioning.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta)
- V/f operation: Increase up ramp.
- V/f operation: Check the assignment of the rated currents of the motor and Motor Module.
- infeed: Check the line supply quality.
- infeed: Reduce the motor load.
- infeed: Correct connection of the line reactor.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
- replace power unit.
For a parallel switching device (r0108.15 = 1) the following additionally applies:
- check the ground fault monitoring thresholds (p0287).
- check the setting of the closed-loop circulating current control (p7036, p7037).
F30081 Power unit: Switching operations too frequent
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit has executed too many switching operations for current limitation.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- motor has a short-circuit or fault to ground (frame).
- V/f operation: Up ramp set too low.
- V/f operation: Rated motor current is significantly greater than that of the Motor Module.
- infeed: High discharge and post-charging current for voltage dip.
- infeed: High post-charging currents for overload when motoring and DC link voltage dip.
- infeed: Short-circuit currents at power-up due to the missing line reactor.
- power cables are not correctly connected.
- power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- power unit defective.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1263
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Additional causes for a parallel switching device (r0108.15 = 1):
- a power unit has tripped (powered down) due to a ground fault.
- the closed-loop circulating current control is either too slow or has been set too fast.
Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary):
Bit 0: Phase U.
Bit 1: Phase V.
Bit 2: Phase W.
Remedy: - check the motor data - if required, carry out commissioning.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta)
- V/f operation: Increase up ramp.
- V/f operation: Check the assignment of the rated currents of the motor and Motor Module.
- infeed: Check the line supply quality.
- infeed: Reduce the motor load.
- infeed: Correct connection of the line reactor.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
- replace power unit.
For a parallel switching device (r0108.15 = 1) the following additionally applies:
- check the ground fault monitoring thresholds (p0287).
- check the setting of the closed-loop circulating current control (p7036, p7037).
F30105 PU: Actual value sensing fault
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: At least one incorrect actual value channel was detected on the Power Stack Adapter (PSA).
The incorrect actual value channels are displayed in the following diagnostic parameters.
Remedy: Evaluate the diagnostic parameters.
If the actual value channel is incorrect, check the components and if required, replace.
A30502 Power unit: DC link voltage, overvoltage
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The power unit has detected overvoltage in the DC link on a pulse inhibit.
- device connection voltage too high.
- line reactor incorrectly dimensioned.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
DC link voltage [1 bit = 100 mV].
See also: r0070 (Actual DC link voltage)
Remedy: - check the device supply voltage (p0210).
- check the dimensioning of the line reactor.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)
F30600 SI MM: STOP A initiated
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function in the Motor Module (MM) has detected a fault and initiated STOP A
(pulse suppression via the safety shutdown path of the Motor Module).
- forced checking procedure of the safety shutdown path of the Motor Module unsuccessful.
- subsequent response to fault F30611 (defect in a monitoring channel).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1264 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: Stop request from the Control Unit.
1005: Pulses suppressed although STO not selected and there is no internal STOP A present.
1010: Pulses enabled although STO is selected or an internal STOP A is present.
1020: Internal software error in the "Internal voltage protection" function. The "internal voltage protection" function is
withdrawn. A STOP A that cannot be acknowledged is initiated.
9999: Subsequent response to fault F30611.
Remedy: - select Safe Torque Off and deselect again.
- replace the Motor Module involved.
Re fault value = 1020:
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- replace the Motor Module.
Re fault value = 9999:
- carry out diagnostics for fault F30611.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
F30611 SI MM: Defect in a monitoring channel
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function in the Motor Module (MM) has detected a fault in the data cross-check
between the Control Unit (CU) and MM and initiated a STOP F.
As a result of this fault, after the parameterized transition has expired (p9858), fault F30600 is output (SI MM: STOP
A initiated).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: Stop request from the Control Unit.
1 ... 999:
Number of the cross-checked data that resulted in this fault. This number is also displayed in r9895.
1: SI monitoring clock cycle (r9780, r9880).
2: SI enable safety functions (p9601, p9801). Crosswise data comparison is only carried out for the supported bits.
3: SI SGE changeover tolerance time (p9650, p9850).
4: SI transition period STOP F to STOP A (p9658, p9858).
5: SI enable Safe Brake Control (p9602, p9802).
6: SI Motion enable, safety-relevant functions (p9501, internal value).
7: SI pulse suppression delay time for Safe Stop 1 (p9652, p9852).
8: SI PROFIsafe address (p9610, p9810).
9: SI debounce time for STO/SBC/SS1 (MM) (p9651, p9851).
11: SI Safe Brake Adapter mode, BICO interconnection (p9621, p9821).
12: SI Safe Brake Adapter relay ON time (p9622[0], p9822[0]).
13: SI Safe Brake Adapter relay OFF time (p9622[1], p9822[1]).
1000: Watchdog timer has expired. Within the time of approx. 5 * p9850 too many switching operations have
occurred at the safety-related inputs of the Control Unit, or STO (also as subsequent response) was initiated too fre-
quently via PROFIsafe/TM54F.
1001, 1002: Initialization error, change timer / check timer.
2000: Status of the STO selection on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different.
2001: Feedback signal for safe pulse suppression on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different.
2002: Status of the delay timer SS1 on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different.
6000 ... 6999:
Error in the PROFIsafe control. The significance of the individual message values is described in safety message
C01711 of the Control Unit.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1265
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Re fault value = 1 ... 5 and 7 ... 999:
- check the cross-checked data that resulted in a STOP F.
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
Re fault value = 6:
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
Re fault value = 1000:
- check the wiring of the safety-relevant inputs (SGE) on the Control Unit (contact problems).
- PROFIsafe: Remove contact problems/faults at the PROFIBUS master/PROFINET controller. - check the wiring of
the fail-safe inputs at the TM54F (contact problems).
Re fault value = 1001, 1002:
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
Re fault value = 2000, 2001, 2002:
- check the tolerance time SGE changeover and if required, increase the value (p9650/p9850, p9652/p9852).
- check the wiring of the safety-relevant inputs (SGE) (contact problems).
- check the cause of the STO selection in r9772. When the SMM functions are active (p9501 = 1), STO can also be
selected using these functions.
- replace the Motor Module involved.
Re fault value = 6000 ... 6999:
Refer to the description of the message values in safety message C01711.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SGE: Safety-relevant input
SI: Safety Integrated
SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring
SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204)
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
N30620 (F, A) SI MM: Safe Torque Off active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The "Safe Torque Off" function was selected on the Motor Module (MM) via the input terminal and is active.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
Remedy: None necessary.
Note:
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
Reaction upon F: OFF2
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
N30621 (F, A) SI MM: Safe Stop 1 active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The "Safe Stop 1" function (SS1) was selected on the Motor Module (MM) and is active.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1266 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: None necessary.
Note:
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204)
Reaction upon F: OFF3
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F30625 SI MM: Sign-of-life error in safety data
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function on the Motor Module (MM) has detected an error in the sign-of-life of
the safety data between the Control Unit (CU) and MM and initiated a STOP A.
- there is either a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error or communication has failed.
- a time slice overflow of the safety software has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - select Safe Torque Off and deselect again.
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
- deselect all drive functions that are not absolutely necessary.
- reduce the number of drives.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
F30630 SI MM: Brake control error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function on the Motor Module (MM) has detected a brake control error and ini-
tiated a STOP A.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
10:
Fault in "open holding brake" operation.
- Parameter p1278 incorrectly set.
- No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1 and p9602/p9802 = 0 (SBC
deactivated)).
- Ground fault in brake cable.
30:
Fault in "close holding brake" operation.
- No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1 and p9602/p9802 = 0 (SBC
deactivated)).
- Short-circuit in brake winding.
40:
Fault in "brake closed" state.
60, 70:
Fault in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit or communication fault between the Control Unit and Motor Mod-
ule (brake control).
81: SafeBrakeAdapter: Fault in "brake closed" state.
82: SafeBrakeAdapter: Fault in "open brake" state.
83: SafeBrakeAdapter: Fault in "close brake" state.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1267
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
84,85:
SafeBrakeAdapter: Fault in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit or communication fault between Control Unit
and Motor Module (brake control).
Note:
The following causes may apply to fault values:
- motor cable is not shielded correctly.
- defect in control circuit of the Motor Module.
Remedy: - check parameter p1278 (for SBC, only p1278 = 0 is permissible).
- select Safe Torque Off and deselect again.
- check the motor holding brake connection.
- check the function of the motor holding brake.
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
- check that the electrical cabinet design and cable routing are in compliance with EMC regulations (e.g. shield of the
motor cable and brake conductors are connected with the shield connecting plate and the motor connectors are
tightly screwed to the housing).
- replace the Motor Module involved.
Operation with Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter:
- check the Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter connection.
- Replace the Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter.
Note:
MM: Motor Module
SBC: Safe Brake Control
SI: Safety Integrated
F30640 SI MM: Fault in the shutdown path of the second channel
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The Motor Module has detected a communications error with the higher-level control or the TM54F to transfer the
safety-relevant information.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: For the higher-level control, the following applies:
- check the PROFIsafe address in the higher-level control and Motor Modules and if required, align.
- save all parameters (p0977 = 1).
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
For TM54F, carry out the following steps:
- start the copy function for the node identifier (p9700 = 1D hex).
- acknowledge hardware CRC (p9701 = EC hex).
- save all parameters (p0977 = 1).
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
The following generally applies:
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
Note:
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9810 (SI PROFIsafe address (Motor Module))
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1268 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30649 SI MM: Internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An internal error in the Safety Integrated software on the Motor Module has occurred.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- re-commission the Safety Integrated function and carry out a POWER ON.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the Motor Module.
Note:
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
F30650 SI MM: Acceptance test required
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The "Safety Integrated" function on the Motor Module requires an acceptance test.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
130: Safety parameters for the Motor Module not available.
1000: Reference and actual checksum in the Motor Module are not identical (booting).
- at least one checksum-checked piece of data is defective.
2000: Reference and actual checksum on the Motor Module are not identical (commissioning mode).
- reference checksum incorrectly entered into the Motor Module (p9899 not equal to r9898).
2003: Acceptance test is required as a safety parameter has been changed.
2005: The safety logbook has identified that the safety checksums have changed. An acceptance test is required.
3003: Acceptance test is required as a hardware-related safety parameter has been changed.
9999: Subsequent response of another safety-related fault that occurred when booting that requires an acceptance
test.
Remedy: Re fault value = 130:
- carry out safety commissioning routine.
Re fault value = 1000:
- again carry out safety commissioning routine.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
Re fault value = 2000:
- check the safety parameters in the Motor Module and adapt the reference checksum (p9899).
Re fault value = 2003, 2005:
- Carry out an acceptance test and generate an acceptance report.
The procedure when carrying out an acceptance test as well as an example of the acceptance report are provided
in the following literature:
SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Safety Integrated
Re fault value = 3003:
- carry out the function checks for the modified hardware and generate an acceptance report.
The procedure when carrying out an acceptance test as well as an example of the acceptance report are provided
in the following literature:
SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Safety Integrated
Re fault value = 9999:
- carry out diagnostics for the other safety-related fault that is present.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1269
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note:
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9799 (SI reference checksum SI parameters (Control Unit)), p9899 (SI reference checksum SI parame-
ters (Motor Module))
F30651 SI MM: Synchronization with Control Unit unsuccessful
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function is requesting synchronization of the safety time slices on the Control
Unit and Motor Module. This synchronization routine was unsuccessful.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
Note:
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
F30652 SI MM: Illegal monitoring clock cycle
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The Safety Integrated monitoring clock cycle cannot be maintained due to the communication conditions requested
in the system.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Upgrade the Motor Module software.
Note:
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
F30655 SI MM: Align monitoring functions
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An error has occurred when aligning the Safety Integrated monitoring functions on the Control Unit (CU) and Motor
Module (MM). Control Unit and Motor Module were not able to determine a common set of supported SI monitoring
functions.
- there is either a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error or communication has failed.
- Safety Integrated software releases on the Control Unit and Motor Module are not compatible with one another.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1270 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
F30656 SI MM: Motor Module parameter error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: When accessing the Safety Integrated parameters for the Motor Module (MM) in the non-volatile memory, an error
has occurred.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
129: Safety parameters for the Motor Module corrupted.
131: Internal software error on the Control Unit.
255: Internal Motor Module software error.
Remedy: - re-commission the safety functions.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
Note:
MM: Motor Module
SI: Safety Integrated
F30659 SI MM: Write request for parameter rejected
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The write request for one or several Safety Integrated parameters on the Motor Module (MM) was rejected.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
10: An attempt was made to enable the STO function although this cannot be supported.
11: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function although this cannot be supported.
13: An attempt was made to enable the SS1 function although this cannot be supported.
14: An attempt was made to enable the safe motion monitoring function with the higher-level control, although this
cannot be supported.
15: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive although these cannot be
supported.
16: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe communication - although this cannot be supported or the version
of the PROFIsafe driver used on the CU and MM is different.
18: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe function for Basic Functions although this cannot be supported.
See also: r9771 (SI common functions (Control Unit)), r9871 (SI common functions (Motor Module)
Remedy: Re fault value = 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18:
- check whether there are faults in the safety function alignment between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved (F01655, F30655) and if required, carry out diagnostics for the faults involved.
- use a Motor Module that supports the required function ("Safe Torque Off", "Safe Brake Control",
"PROFIsafe/PROFIsafe V2", "motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive").
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1271
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SBC: Safe Brake Control
SI: Safety Integrated
SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204)
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
F30662 Error in internal communications
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, HUB, TB30, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: A module-internal communication error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on).
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
F30664 Error while booting
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, HUB, TB30, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An error has occurred during booting.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on).
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
F30665 SI MM: System is defective
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The drive has detected a defect in the system and performed an emergency shutdown.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on).
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
F30672 SI CU: Control Unit software incompatible
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The existing Control Unit software does not support the safe drive-based motion monitoring function.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1272 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check whether there are faults in the safety function alignment between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved (F01655, F30655) and if required, carry out diagnostics for the faults involved.
- use a Control Unit that supports the safe motion monitoring function.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
F30680 SI Motion MM: Checksum error safety monitoring functions
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The actual checksum calculated by the Motor Module and entered in r9398 over the safety-relevant parameters does
not match the reference checksum saved in p9399 at the last machine acceptance.
Safety-relevant parameters have been changed or a fault is present.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: Checksum error for SI parameters for motion monitoring.
1: Checksum error for SI parameters for component assignment.
Remedy: - check the safety-relevant parameters and if required, correct.
- set the reference checksum to the actual checksum.
- perform a POWER ON if safety parameters requiring a POWER ON have been modified.
- carry out an acceptance test.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
F30681 SI Motion MM: Incorrect parameter value
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The parameter value cannot be parameterized with this value.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number with the incorrect value.
Remedy: Correct the parameter value.
If the encoder parameters (p9526/p9326) have different values, start the copy function for SI parameters on the drive
(p9700 = 57 hex).
Also check p9316.0 for fault value 9317.
F30682 SI Motion MM: Monitoring function not supported
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The monitoring function enabled in p9301, p9501, p9601 or p9801 is not supported in this firmware version.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Monitoring function SLP not supported (p9301.1).
2: Monitoring function SCA not supported (p9301.7 and p9301.8 ... 15).
3: Monitoring function SLS override not supported (p9301.5).
4: Monitoring function external ESR activation not supported (p9301.4).
5: Monitoring function FDI in PROFIsafe not supported (p9301.30).
6: Enable actual value synchronization not supported (p9301.3).
9: Monitoring function not supported, enable bit reserved (p9301.2, p9301.17 ... 29, p9301.31, if required p9301.6).
30: The firmware version of the Motor Module is older than the version of the Control Unit.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1273
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - deselect the monitoring function involved (p9301, p9301, p9303, p9601, p9801).
- Upgrade the Motor Module firmware.
See also: p9301 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module)), p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Con-
trol Unit)), p9503 (SI Motion SCA (SN) enable (Control Unit)), p9601 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive
(Control Unit)), p9801 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Motor Module))
F30683 SI Motion MM: SOS/SLS enable missing
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The safety-relevant basic function "SOS/SLS" is not enabled in p9301 although other safety-relevant monitoring
functions are enabled.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
Remedy: Enable the function "SOS/SLS" (p9301.0).
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
See also: p9301 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module))
F30685 SI Motion MM: Safely-Limited Speed limit value too high
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The limit value for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS) is greater than the speed that corresponds to an
encoder limit frequency of 500 kHz.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Maximum permissible speed.
Remedy: Correct the limit values for SLS and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
See also: p9331 (SI Motion SLS limit values (Motor Module))
F30688 SI Motion MM: Actual value synchronization not permissible
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: - It is not permissible to enable actual value synchronization for a 1-encoder system.
- It is not permissible to simultaneously enable actual value synchronization and a monitoring function with absolute
reference (SCA/SLP).
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Remedy: - Either select the "actual value synchronization" function or parameterize a 2-encoder system.
- Either deselect the function "actual value synchronization" or the monitoring functions with absolute reference
(SCA/SLP) and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam
SI: Safety Integrated
SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9526 (SI Motion encoder assignment second
channel)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1274 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30692 SI Motion MM: Incorrect parameter value encoderless
Message value: Parameter: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The parameter cannot be set to this value if encoderless motion monitoring functions have been parameterized in
p9306.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number with the incorrect value.
See also: p9301 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module))
Remedy: Correct the parameter value or deselect encoderless motion monitoring functions.
See also: p9301 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module)), p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Con-
trol Unit))
A30693 (F) SI MM: Safety parameter settings changed, warm restart/POWER ON required
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Safety parameters have been changed; these will only take effect following a warm restart or POWER ON.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of the safety parameter which has changed, necessitating a warm restart or POWER ON.
Remedy: - carry out a warm restart (p0971 = 3)
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: POWER ON
C30700 SI Motion MM: STOP A initiated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP A (pulses are suppressed via the safety shutdown path of the Control Unit).
Possible causes:
- stop request from the Control Unit.
- pulses not suppressed after a parameterized time (p9357) after test stop selection.
- subsequent response to the message C30706 "SI Motion MM: Safe Acceleration Monitoring, limit exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C30714 "SI Motion MM: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C30701 "SI Motion MM: STOP B initiated".
Remedy: - remove the cause to the fault on the Control Unit.
- check the value in p9357, if required, increase the value.
- check the shutdown path of the Control Unit (check DRIVE-CLiQ communication).
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30706.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30714.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30701.
- replace the Motor Module/Power Module
- replace Control Unit.
This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1275
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
C30701 SI Motion MM: STOP B initiated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF3
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP B (braking along the OFF3 ramp).
As a result of this fault, after the time parameterized in p9356 has expired, or the speed threshold parameterized in
p9360 has been undershot, message C30700 "SI Motion MM: STOP A initiated" is output.
Possible causes:
- stop request from the Control Unit.
- subsequent response to the message C30714 "SI Motion MM: Safely limited speed exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C30711 "SI Motion MM: Defect in a monitoring channel".
Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault on the Control Unit
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01714.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01711.
This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
C30706 SI Motion MM: SBR limit exceeded
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Motion monitoring functions with encoder: SBR - Safe Acceleration Monitoring. After initiating STOP B (SS1) or
STOP C (SS2), the speed has exceeded the selected tolerance.
Encoderless motion monitoring function: SBR - Safe Brake Ramp Monitoring. After initiating STOP B (SS1) or SLS
changeover to the lower speed stage, the speed has exceeded the selected tolerance.
The drive is shut down by the message C30700 "SI Motion MM: STOP A initiated".
Remedy: Check the braking behavior and, if necessary, adapt the tolerance for the "Safe Acceleration Monitor" or modify the
parameter settings for the "safe brake ramp".
This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9548 (SI Motion SBR actual velocity tolerance (Control Unit))
C30707 SI Motion MM: Tolerance for safe operating stop exceeded
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The actual position has distanced itself further from the target position than the standstill tolerance.
The drive is shut down by the message C30701 "SI Motion MM: STOP B initiated".
Remedy: - check whether safety faults are present and if required carry out the appropriate diagnostic routines for the partic-
ular faults.
- check whether the standstill tolerance matches the accuracy and control dynamic performance of the axis.
This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
See also: p9530 (SI Motion standstill tolerance (Control Unit))
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1276 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
C30708 SI Motion MM: STOP C initiated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: STOP2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP C (braking along the OFF3 ramp).
"Safe Operating Stop" (SOS) is activated after the parameterized timer has expired.
Possible causes:
- stop request from the higher-level control.
- subsequent response to the message C30714 "SI Motion MM: Safely limited speed exceeded".
See also: p9552 (SI Motion transition time STOP C to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit))
Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault at the control.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30714.
This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
C30709 SI Motion MM: STOP D initiated
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP D (braking along the path).
"Safe Operating Stop" (SOS) is activated after the parameterized timer has expired.
Possible causes:
- stop request from the Control Unit.
- subsequent response to the message C30714 "SI Motion: Safely limited speed exceeded".
See also: p9353 (SI Motion transition time STOP D to SOS (Motor Module)), p9553 (SI Motion transition time STOP
D to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit))
Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault at the control.
- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30714.
This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop
C30711 SI MM MM: Defect in a monitoring channel
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: When cross-checking and comparing the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between the input
data or results of the monitoring functions and initiated a STOP F. One of the monitoring functions no longer reliably
functions - i.e. safe operation is no longer possible.
If at least one monitoring function is active, then after the parameterized timer has expired, the message C30701 "SI
Motion: STOP B initiated" is output. The message is output with message value 1031 when the Sensor Module hard-
ware is replaced.
The following message values may also occur in the following cases if the cause that is explicitly mentioned does
not apply:
- differently parameterized cycle times (p9500/p9300, p9511/p9311).
- differently parameterized axis types (p9502/p9302).
- excessively fast cycle times (p9500/p9300, p9511/p9311).
- incorrect synchronization.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1277
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Message value (r9749, interpret decimal):
0 ... 999: Number of the cross-checked data that resulted in this message. Refer to safety message C01711for a
description of the individual data.
The significance of the individual message values is described in safety message C01711 of the Control Unit.
1000: Watchdog timer has expired. Too many signal changes have occurred at safety-relevant inputs.
1001: Initialization error of watchdog timer.
1005: Pulses already suppressed for test stop selection.
1011: Acceptance test status between the monitoring channels differ.
1012: Plausibility violation of the actual value from the encoder.
1020: Cyc. communication failure between the monit. cycles.
1021: Cyc. communication failure between the monit. channel and Sensor Module.
1023: Error in the effectiveness test in the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
1030: Encoder fault detected from another monitoring channel.
1031: Data transfer error between the monitoring channel and the Sensor Module (p9526/p9326).
1040: Pulses suppressed with active encoderless monitoring functions.
1041: Current absolute value too low (encoderless)
1042: Current/voltage plausibility error
1043: Too many acceleration phases
1044: Actual current values plausibility error.
5000 ... 5140: PROFIsafe message values.
The significance of the individual message values is described in safety message C01711 of the Control Unit.
6000 ... 6166: PROFIsafe message values (PROFIsafe driver for PROFIBUS DP V1/V2 and PROFINET).
The significance of the individual message values is described in safety message C01711 of the Control Unit.
See also: p9555 (SI Motion transition time STOP F to STOP B (Control Unit)), r9725 (SI Motion, diagnostics STOP F)
Remedy: Re message value = 1030:
- check the encoder connection.
- if required, replace the encoder.
Re message value = 1031:
When replacing a Sensor Module, carry out the following steps:
- start the copy function for the node identifier on the drive (p9700 = 1D hex).
- acknowledge the hardware CRC on the drive (p9701 = EC hex).
- save all parameters (p0977 = 1).
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
The following always applies:
- check the encoder connection.
- if required, replace the encoder.
Re message value = 1040:
- deselect encoderless monitoring functions, select and deselect STO.
- if monitoring function is active, issue SLS pulse enable within 5 s of deselecting STO.
Re other message values:
- The significance of the individual message values is described in safety message C01711 of the Control Unit.
Note:
This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe.
See also: p9300 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module)), p9500 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Control
Unit))
C30712 SI Motion MM: Defect in F-IO processing
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: When cross checking and comparing the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between param-
eters or results of the F-IO processing and initiated a STOP F. One of the monitoring functions no longer reliably
functions - i.e. safe operation is no longer possible.
The safety message C30711 with message value 0 is also displayed due to initiation of STOP F.
If at least one monitoring function is active, the safety message C30701 "SI Motion: STOP B initiated" is output after
the parameterized timer has expired.
Message value (r9749, interpret decimal):
Number of the cross-checked data that resulted in this message.
Refer to the description of the message values in safety message C01712.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1278 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check parameterization in the parameters involved and correct if required.
- ensure equality by copying the SI data to the second channel and then carry out an acceptance test.
- check monitoring clock cycle in p9500 and p9300 for equality.
Note:
This message can be acknowledged via F-DI or PROFIsafe.
See also: p9300 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module)), p9500 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Control
Unit))
C30714 SI Motion MM: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The drive had moved faster than that specified by the velocity limit value (p9331). The drive is stopped as a result of
the configured stop response (p9363).
Message value (r9749, interpret decimal):
100: SLS1 exceeded.
200: SLS2 exceeded.
300: SLS3 exceeded.
400: SLS4 exceeded.
1000: Encoder limit frequency exceeded.
Remedy: - check the traversing/motion program in the control.
- check the limits for "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS) and if required, adapt (p9331).
This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
See also: p9331 (SI Motion SLS limit values (Motor Module)), p9363 (SI Motion SLS stop response (Motor Module))
C30798 SI Motion MM: Test stop running
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The test stop is active.
Remedy: None necessary.
The message is withdrawn when the test stop is finished.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
C30799 SI Motion MM: Acceptance test mode active
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The acceptance test mode is active. The POWER ON signals of the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions can
be acknowledged during the acceptance test using the acknowledgement functions of the higher-level control.
Remedy: None necessary.
The message is withdrawn when exiting the acceptance test mode.
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
N30800 (F) Power unit: Group signal
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The power unit has detected at least one fault.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1279
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Evaluates other actual messages.
Reaction upon F: OFF2
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
F30801 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the power unit concerned.
The computing time load might be too high.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- remove DRIVE-CLiQ components that are not required.
- deselect functions that are not required.
- if required, increase the sampling times (p0112, p0115).
- replace the component involved.
F30802 Power unit: Time slice overflow
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Time slide overflow.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
A30804 (F) Power unit: CRC
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: CRC error actuator
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
Reaction upon F: OFF2 (OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
F30805 Power unit: EPROM checksum error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
01: EEPROM access error.
02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM.
Remedy: Replace the module.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1280 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30809 Power unit: Switching information not valid
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For 3P gating unit:
The last switching status word in the setpoint telegram is identified by the end ID. Such an end ID was not found.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
A30810 (F) Power unit: Watchdog timer
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When booting it was detected that the cause of the previous reset was an SAC watchdog timer overflow.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
F30820 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the power unit concerned.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 02 hex:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 03 hex:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 04 hex:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 05 hex:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 06 hex:
The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 07 hex:
A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram.
xx = 08 hex:
No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one.
xx = 09 hex:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1281
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30835 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the power unit concerned. The nodes do
not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 21 hex:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
xx = 40 hex:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
F30836 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the power unit concerned. Data were not
able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
F30837 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1282 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30845 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the power unit concerned.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
F30850 Power unit: Internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An internal software error has occurred in the power unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - replace power unit.
- if required, upgrade the firmware in the power unit.
- contact the Hotline.
F30851 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the power unit to the Control Unit involved.
The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex = 10 dec:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved.
A30853 Power unit: Sign-of-life error cyclic data
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The power unit has detected that the cyclic setpoint telegrams of the Control Unit have not been updated on time. At
least two sign-of-life errors have occurred within the window set in p7788.
Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- reduce the size of the window (p7788) for monitoring.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1283
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30860 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the power unit to the Control Unit involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 11 hex = 17 dec:
CRC error and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 01 hex = 01 dec:
Checksum error (CRC error).
xx = 12 hex = 18 dec:
The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 02 hex = 02 dec:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 13 hex = 19 dec:
The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 03 hex = 03 dec:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 14 hex = 20 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 04 hex = 04 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 15 hex = 21 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 05 hex = 05 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 16 hex = 22 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too
early.
xx = 06 hex = 06 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 19 hex = 25 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 09 hex = 09 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
F30885 CU DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the power unit to the Control Unit involved.
The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 1A hex = 26 dec:
Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1284 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
xx = 62 hex = 98 dec:
Error at the transition to cyclic operation.
Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved.
- carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
F30886 PU DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the power unit to the Control Unit involved.
Data were not able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
F30887 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component (power unit) involved. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 60 hex:
Response received too late during runtime measurement.
xx = 61 hex:
Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
F30895 PU DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the power unit to the Control Unit involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1285
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30896 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (power unit), specified by the fault value, have changed in an incom-
patible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable or
DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Component number.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be
used.
- when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the orig-
inal cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length).
F30897 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU) power unit: no communication with component
Message value: Preliminary component number: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Communication with the DRIVE-CLiQ component (power unit) specified by the fault value is not possible.
One cause may, for example, be that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable has been withdrawn.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Component ID.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connections.
- carry out a POWER ON.
F30899 (N, A) Power unit: Unknown fault
Message value: New message: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: A fault occurred on the power unit that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Fault number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the power unit by an older firmware version (r0128).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1286 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F30903 Power unit: I2C bus error occurred
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Communications error with an EEPROM or A/D converter.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
80000000 hex:
- internal software error.
00000001 hex ... 0000FFFF hex:
- module fault.
Remedy: Re fault value = 80000000 hex:
- upgrade firmware to later version.
Re fault value = 00000001 hex ... 0000FFFF hex:
- replace the module.
A30920 (F) Power unit: Temperature sensor fault
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm, PT100: R > 375 Ohm).
2: Measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm, PT100: R < 30 Ohm).
Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
- replace the sensor.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A30999 (F, N) Power unit: Unknown alarm
Message value: New message: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An alarm occurred on the power unit that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Alarm number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the power unit by an older firmware version (r0128).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1287
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31100 (N, A) Encoder 1: Zero mark distance error
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance.
For distance-coded encoders, the zero mark distance is determined from zero marks detected pairs. This means that
if a zero mark is missing, depending on the pair generation, this cannot result in a fault and also has no effect in the
system.
The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Last measured zero mark distance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse).
The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425).
- if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31101 (N, A) Encoder 1: Zero marked failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark distance was exceeded.
The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Number of increments after POWER ON or since the last zero mark that was detected (4 increments = 1 encoder
pulse).
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425).
- if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438).
- when p0437.1 is active, check p4686.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1288 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31103 (N, A) Encoder 1: Amplitude error, track R
Message value: R track: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The amplitude of the reference track signal (track R) does not lie within the tolerance bandwidth for encoder 1.
The fault can be initiated when the unipolar voltage level is exceeded (RP/RN) or if the differential amplitude is under-
shot.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
xxxx hex:
xxxx = Signal level, track R (16 bits with sign).
The response thresholds of the unipolar signal levels of the encoder are between < 1400 mV and > 3500 mV.
The response threshold for the differential signal level of the encoder is < -1600 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note:
The analog value of the amplitude error is not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sen-
sor Module.
The fault value can only be represented between -32767dec and 32767dec (-770 mV ... 770 mV).
The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied:
- Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1).
- Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1).
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check the speed range; frequency characteristic (amplitude characteristic) of the measuring equipment might not
be sufficient for the speed range
- check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable.
- check whether the zero mark is connected and the signal cables RP and RN have been connected correctly
- replace the encoder cable.
- if the coding disk is soiled or the lighting aged, replace the encoder.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31110 (N, A) Encoder 1: Serial communications error
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol.
Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line.
Bit 2: Encoder does not respond (does not supply a start bit within 50 ms).
Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data.
Bit 4: Encoder acknowledgement error: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute it.
Bit 5: Internal error in the serial driver: An illegal mode command was requested.
Bit 6: Timeout when cyclically reading.
Bit 8: Protocol is too long (e.g. > 64 bits).
Bit 9: Receive buffer overflow.
Bit 10: Frame error when reading twice.
Bit 11: Parity error.
Bit 12: Data line signal level error during the monoflop time.
Bit 13: Data line incorrect.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1289
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1:
- Enc defect F31111 may provide additional details.
Re fault value, bit 1 = 1:
- Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Re fault value, bit 2 = 1:
- Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Re fault value, bit 3 = 1:
- EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Re fault value, bit 4 = 1:
- EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module.
Re fault value, bit 5 = 1:
- EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module.
Re fault value, bit 6 = 1:
- Update Sensor Module firmware.
Re fault value, bit 8 = 1:
- Check parameterization (p0429.2).
Re fault value, bit 9 = 1:
- EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module.
Re fault value, bit 10 = 1:
- Check parameterization (p0429.2, p0449).
Re fault value, bit 11 = 1:
- Check parameterization (p0436).
Re fault value, bit 12 = 1:
- Check parameterization (p0429.6).
Re fault value, bit 13 = 1:
- Check data line.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31111 (N, A) Encoder 1: Absolute encoder EnDat, internal fault/error
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The EnDat encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Lighting system failed.
Bit 1: Signal amplitude too low.
Bit 2: Position value incorrect.
Bit 3: Encoder power supply overvoltage condition.
Bit 4: Encoder power supply undervoltage condition.
Bit 5: Encoder power supply overcurrent condition.
Bit 6: The battery must be changed.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 1 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 2 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 3 = 1:
5 V power supply voltage fault.
When using an SMC: Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC.
When a motor encoder with a direct DRIVE-CLiQ connection is used: Replace the motor.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1290 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Re fault value, bit 4 = 1:
5 V power supply voltage fault.
When using an SMC: Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC.
When using a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ: Replace the motor.
Re fault value, bit 5 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 6 = 1:
The battery must be changed (only for encoders with battery back-up).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31112 (N, A) Encoder 1: Error bit set in the serial protocol
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The encoder sends a set error bit via the serial protocol.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Fault bit in the position protocol.
Remedy: For fault value, bit 0 = 1:
In the case of an EnDat encoder, F31111 may provide further details.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31115 (N, A) Encoder 1: Amplitude error track A or B (A^2 + B^2)
Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2) for encoder 1 exceeds the permissible tolerance.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign).
xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign).
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response thresholds are < 230 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 750 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10):
The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response thresholds are < 1070 mV and > 3582 mV.
A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 6666 hex = 26214 dec.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1291
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts).
The following applies to measuring systems without their own bearing system:
- adjust the scanning head and check the bearing system of the measuring wheel.
The following applies for measuring systems with their own bearing system:
- ensure that the encoder housing is not subject to any axial force.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31116 (N, A) Encoder 1: Amplitude error monitoring track A + B
Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The amplitude of the rectified encoder signals A and B and the amplitude from the roots of A^2 + B^2 for encoder 1
are not within the tolerance bandwidth.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign).
xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign).
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response thresholds are < 176 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 955 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31117 (N, A) Encoder 1: Inversion error signals A and B and R
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For a square-wave encoder (bipolar, double ended) the A* and B* and R* signals are not inverted with respect to
signals A and B and R.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bits 0 - 15: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Bit 16: Error track A.
Bit 17: Error track B.
Bit 18: Error track R.
Note:
For SMC30 (order no.. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 and 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 only), CUA32, and CU310, the following
applies:
A square-wave encoder without track R is used and track monitoring (p0405.2 = 1) is activated.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1292 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Check the encoder/cable: Does the encoder provide signals and the associated inverted signals?
Note:
For SMC30 (order no. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 and 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 only), the following applies:
- check the setting of p0405 (p0405.2 = 1 is only possible if the encoder is connected at X520).
For a square-wave encoder without track R, the following jumpers must be set for the connection at X520 (SMC30)
or X23 (CUA32, CU310):
- pin 10 (reference signal R) <--> pin 7 (encoder power supply, ground)
- pin 11 (reference signal R inverted) <--> pin 4 (encoder power supply)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31118 (N, A) Encoder 1: Speed difference outside the tolerance range
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: For an HTL/TTL encoder, the speed difference has exceeded the value in p0492 over several sampling cycles.
The change to the averaged speed actual value - if applicable - is monitored in the current controller sampling time.
Encoder 1 is used as motor encoder and can be effective has fault response to change over to encoderless opera-
tion.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER), p0492
Remedy: - check the tachometer feeder cable for interruptions.
- check the grounding of the tachometer shielding.
- if required, increase the maximum speed difference per sampling cycle (p0492).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31120 (N, A) Encoder 1: Power supply voltage fault
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: Encoder 1 power supply voltage fault.
Note:
If the encoder cables 6FX2002-2EQ00-.... and 6FX2002-2CH00-.... are interchanged, this can result in the encoder
being destroyed because the pins of the operating voltage are reversed.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Undervoltage condition on the sense line.
Bit 1: Overcurrent condition for the encoder power supply.
Bit 2: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation negative.
Bit 3: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation positive.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1293
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: For fault value, bit 0 = 1:
- correct encoder cable connected?
- check the plug connections of the encoder cable.
- SMC30: Check the parameterization (p0404.22).
For fault value, bit 1 = 1:
- correct encoder cable connected?
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
For fault value, bit 2 = 1:
- correct encoder cable connected?
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
For fault value, bit 3 = 1:
- correct encoder cable connected?
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31121 (N, A) Encoder 1: Coarse position error
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: For the actual value sensing, an error was detected on the module. As a result of this error, it must be assumed that
the actual value sensing supplies an incorrect coarse position.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: Replace the motor with DRIVE-CLiQ or the appropriate Sensor Module.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31122 Encoder 1: Internal power supply voltage faulty
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault in internal reference voltage of ASICs for encoder 1.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Reference voltage error.
2: Internal undervoltage.
3: Internal overvoltage.
Remedy: Replace the motor with DRIVE-CLiQ or the appropriate Sensor Module.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1294 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31123 (N, A) Encoder 1: Signal level A/B unipolar outside tolerance
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The unipolar level (AP/AN or BP/BN) for encoder 1 is outside the permissible tolerance.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Either AP or AN outside the tolerance.
Bit 16 = 1: Either BP or BN outside the tolerance.
The unipolar nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 2500 mV +/- 500 mV.
The response thresholds are < 1700 mV and > 3300 mV.
Note:
The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied:
- Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1).
- Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1).
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - make sure that the encoder cables and shielding are installed in an EMC-compliant manner.
- check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable.
- check the short-circuit of a signal cable with mass or the operating voltage.
- replace the encoder cable.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31125 (N, A) Encoder 1: Amplitude error track A or B overcontrolled
Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The amplitude of track A or B for encoder 1 exceeds the permissble tolerance band.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign).
xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign).
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response threshold is > 750 mV. This fault also occurs if the A/D converter is overcontrolled.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10):
The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response threshold is > 3582 mV.
A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 6666 hex = 26214 dec.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1295
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31126 (N, A) Encoder 1: Amplitude AB too high
Message value: Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2 or |A| + |B|) for encoder 1 exceeds the permissible tolerance.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Angle
xxxx = Amplitude, i.e. root from A^2 + B^2 (16 bits without sign)
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response threshold for (|A| + |B|) is > 1120 mV or the root of (A^2 + B^2) > 955 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value of 299A hex = 10650 dec.
The angle 0 ... FFFF hex corresponds to 0 ... 360 degrees of the fine position. Zero degrees is at the negative zero
crossover of track B.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31129 (N, A) Encoder 1: Position difference, hall sensor/track C/D and A/B too large
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The error for track C/D is greater than +/-15 ° mechanical or +/-60 ° electrical or the error for the Hall signals is greater
than +/-60 ° electrical.
One period of track C/D corresponds to 360 ° mechanical.
One period of the Hall signal corresponds to 360 ° electrical.
The monitoring responds if, for example, Hall sensors are connected as equivalent for the C/D tracks with the incor-
rect rotational sense or supply values that are not accurate enough.
After the fine synchronization using one reference mark or 2 reference marks for distance-coded encoders, this fault
is no longer initiated, but instead, Alarm A31429.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
For track C/D, the following applies:
Measured deviation as mechanical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 °).
For Hall signals, the following applies:
Measured deviation as electrical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 °).
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - track C or D not connected.
- correct the direction of rotation of the Hall sensor possibly connected as equivalent for track C/D.
- check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the adjustment of the Hall sensor.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1296 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31130 (N, A) Encoder 1: Zero mark and position error from the coarse synchronization
Message value: Angular deviation, electrical: %1, angle, mechanical: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: After initializing the pole position using track C/D, Hall signals or pole position identification routine, the zero mark
was detected outside the permissible range. For distance-coded encoders, the test is carried out after passing 2 zero
marks. Fine synchronization was not carried out.
When initializing via track C/D (p0404) then it is checked whether the zero mark occurs in an angular range of +/-18
° mechanical.
When initializing via Hall sensors (p0404) or pole position identification (p1982) it is checked whether the zero mark
occurs in an angular range of +/-60 ° electrical.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex
yyyy: Determined mechanical zero mark position (can only be used for track C/D).
xxxx: Deviation of the zero mark from the expected position as electrical angle.
Scaling: 32768 dec = 180 °
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - Check p0431 and, if necessary, correct (trigger via p1990 = 1 if necessary).
- check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- if the Hall sensor is used as an equivalent for track C/D, check the connection.
- Check the connection of track C or D.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31131 (N, A) Encoder 1: Deviation, position incremental/absolute too large
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: Absolute encoder:
When cyclically reading the absolute position, an excessively high difference to the incremental position was
detected. The absolute position that was read is rejected.
Limit value for the deviation:
- EnDat encoder: Is supplied from the encoder and is a minimum of 2 quadrants (e.g. EQI 1325 > 2 quadrants, EQN
1325 > 50 quadrants).
- other encoders: 15 pulses = 60 quadrants.
Incremental encoder:
When the zero pulse is passed, a deviation in the incremental position was detected.
For equidistant zero marks, the following applies:
- The first zero mark passed supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero marks must have
n times the distance referred to the first zero mark.
For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies:
- the first zero mark pair supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero mark pairs must have
the expected distance to the first zero mark pair.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quadrants).
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1297
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check whether the coding disk is dirty or there are strong ambient magnetic fields.
- adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425).
- if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31135 Encoder 1: Fault when determining the position
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder supplies status information via bits in an internal status/fault word.
Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed
in the fault value.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: F1 (safety status display)
Bit 1: F2 (safety status display)
Bit 2: Lighting (reserved)
Bit 3: Signal amplitude (reserved)
Bit 4: Position value (reserved)
Bit 5: Overvoltage (reserved)
Bit 6: Undervoltage (reserved)
Bit 7: Overcurrent (reserved)
Bit 8: Battery (reserved)
Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display)
Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 25: Singleturm power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 26: Multiturn position 1 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 27: Multiturn position 2 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved)
Remedy: Replace DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1298 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31136 Encoder 1: Error when determining multiturn information
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder supplies status information via bits in an internal status/fault word.
Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed
in the fault value.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: F1 (safety status display)
Bit 1: F2 (safety status display)
Bit 2: Lighting (reserved)
Bit 3: Signal amplitude (reserved)
Bit 4: Position value (reserved)
Bit 5: Overvoltage (reserved)
Bit 6: Undervoltage (reserved)
Bit 7: Overcurrent (reserved)
Bit 8: Battery (reserved)
Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display)
Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 25: Singleturm power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 26: Multiturn position 1 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 27: Multiturn position 2 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved)
Remedy: Replace DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
F31137 Encoder 1: Internal error when determining the position
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Only for internal SIEMENS use.
Remedy: Replace encoder
F31138 Encoder 1: Internal error when determining multiturn information
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Only for internal SIEMENS use.
Remedy: Replace encoder
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1299
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31150 (N, A) Encoder 1: Initialization error
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: Encoder functionality selected in p0404 is not operating correctly.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
The fault value is a bit field. Every set bit indicates functionality that is faulted.
The bit assignment corresponds to that of p0404 (e.g. bit 5 set: Error track C/D).
See also: p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - Check that p0404 is correctly set.
- check the encoder type used (incremental/absolute value) and for SMCxx, the encoder cable.
- if relevant, note additional fault messages that describe the fault in detail.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31151 (N, A) Encoder 1: Encoder speed for initialization AB too high
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The encoder speed is too high during while initializing the sensor.
Remedy: Reduce the speed of the encoder accordingly during initialization.
If necessary, deactivate monitoring (p0437.29).
See also: p0437 (Sensor Module configuration extended)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31160 (N, A) Encoder 1: Analog sensor channel A failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range.
2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4673.
3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676).
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
- check the output voltage of the analog sensor.
Re fault value = 2:
- check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4673).
Re fault value = 3:
- check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1300 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31161 (N, A) Encoder 1: Analog sensor channel B failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range.
2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4675.
3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676).
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
- check the output voltage of the analog sensor.
Re fault value = 2:
- check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4675).
Re fault value = 3:
- check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A31400 (F, N) Encoder 1: Alarm threshold zero mark distance error
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance.
For distance-coded encoders, the zero mark distance is determined from zero marks detected pairs. This means that
if a zero mark is missing, depending on the pair generation, this cannot result in a fault and also has no effect in the
system.
The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Last measured zero mark distance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse).
The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31401 (F, N) Encoder 1: Alarm threshold zero marked failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark distance was exceeded.
The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of increments after POWER ON or since the last zero mark that was detected (4 increments = 1 encoder
pulse).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1301
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F31405 (N, A) Encoder 1: Temperature in the encoder evaluation inadmissible
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The encoder evaluation for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ has detected an inadmissible temperature.
The fault threshold is 125 ° C.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Measured board/module temperature in 0.1 °C.
Remedy: Reduce the ambient temperature for the DRIVE-CLiQ connection of the motor.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A31407 (F, N) Encoder 1: Function limit reached
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The encoder has reached one of its function limits. A service is recommended.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1 : Incremental signals
3 : Absolute track
4 : Code connection
Remedy: Perform service. Replace the encoder if necessary.
Note:
The current functional reserve of an encoder can be displayed via r4651.
See also: p4650 (Encoder functional reserve component number), r4651 (Encoder functional reserve)
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1302 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A31410 (F, N) Encoder 1: Serial communications
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol.
Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line.
Bit 2: Encoder does not respond (does not supply a start bit within 50 ms).
Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data.
Bit 4: Encoder acknowledgement error: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute it.
Bit 5: Internal error in the serial driver: An illegal mode command was requested.
Bit 6: Timeout when cyclically reading.
Bit 8: Protocol is too long (e.g. > 64 bits).
Bit 9: Receive buffer overflow.
Bit 10: Frame error when reading twice.
Bit 11: Parity error.
Bit 12: Data line signal level error during the monoflop time.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31411 (F, N) Encoder 1: EnDat encoder signals alarms
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The error word of the EnDat encoder has alarm bits that have been set.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Frequency exceeded (speed too high).
Bit 1: Temperature exceeded.
Bit 2: Control reserve, lighting system exceeded.
Bit 3: Battery discharged.
Bit 4: Reference point passed.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: Replace encoder.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31412 (F, N) Encoder 1: Error bit set in the serial protocol
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The encoder sends a set error bit via the serial protocol.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Fault bit in the position protocol.
Bit 1: Alarm bit in the position protocol.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1303
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31414 (F, N) Encoder 1: Amplitude error track C or D (C^2 + D^2)
Message value: C track: %1, D track: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The amplitude (C^2 + D^2) of track C or D of the encoder or from the Hall signals, is not within the tolerance band-
width.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Signal level, track D (16 bits with sign).
xxxx = Signal level, track C (16 bits with sign).
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response thresholds are < 230 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 750 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note:
If the amplitude is not within the tolerance bandwidth, then it cannot be used to initialize the start position.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts).
- check the Hall sensor box
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
N31415 (F, A) Encoder 1: Amplitude alarm track A or B (A^2 + B^2)
Message value: Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2) for encoder 1 exceeds the permissible tolerance.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Angle
xxxx = Amplitude, i.e. root from A^2 + B^2 (16 bits without sign)
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response threshold is < 300 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder).
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 299A hex = 10650 dec.
The angle 0 ... FFFF hex corresponds to 0 ... 360 degrees of the fine position. Zero degrees is at the negative zero
crossover of track B.
Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10):
The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response threshold is < 1414 mV (1.0 Vrms).
A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 3333 hex = 13107 dec.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1304 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check the speed range, frequency characteristic (amplitude characteristic) of the measuring equipment is not suf-
ficient for the speed range.
- check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts).
- if the coding disk is soiled or the lighting aged, replace the encoder.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A31418 (F, N) Encoder 1: Speed difference per sampling rate exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For an HTL/TTL encoder, the speed difference between two sampling cycles has exceeded the value in p0492.
The change to the averaged speed actual value - if applicable - is monitored in the current controller sampling time.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
See also: p0492
Remedy: - check the tachometer feeder cable for interruptions.
- check the grounding of the tachometer shielding.
- if required, increase the setting of p0492.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31419 (F, N) Encoder 1: Track A or B outside the tolerance range
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The amplitude, phase or offset correction for track A or B is at the limit.
Amplitude error correction: Amplitude B / Amplitude A = 0.78 ... 1.27
Phase: <84 degrees or >96 degrees
SMC20: Offset correction: +/-140 mV
SMC10: Offset correction: +/-650 mV
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
xxxx1: Minimum of the offset correction, track B
xxxx2: Maximum of the offset correction, track B
xxx1x: Minimum of the offset correction, track A
xxx2x: Maximum of the offset correction, track A
xx1xx: Minimum of the amplitude correction, track B/A
xx2xx: Maximum of the amplitude correction, track B/A
x1xxx: Minimum of the phase error correction
x2xxx: Maximum of the phase error correction
1xxxx: Minimum of the cubic correction
2xxxx: Maximum of the cubic correction
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1305
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check mechanical mounting tolerances for encoders without their own bearings (e.g. toothed-wheel encoders).
- check the plug connections (also the transition resistance).
- check the encoder signals.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31421 (F, N) Encoder 1: Coarse position error
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For the actual value sensing, an error was detected. As a result of this error, it must be assumed that the actual value
sensing supplies an incorrect coarse position.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
3: The absolute position of the serial protocol and track A/B differ by half an encoder pulse. The absolute position
must have its zero position in the quadrants in which both tracks are negative. In the case of a fault, the position can
be incorrect by one encoder pulse.
Remedy: Re alarm value = 3:
- for a standard encoder with cable, if required, contact the manufacturer.
- correct the assignment of the tracks to the position value that is serially transferred. To do this, the two tracks must
be connected, inverted, at the Sensor Module (interchange A with A* and B with B*) or, for a programmable encoder,
check the zero offset of the position.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31422 (F, N) Encoder 1: Pulses per revolution square-wave encoder outside tolerance bandwidth
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance.
This alarm is triggered with active square-wave encoder PPR correction and re-parameterized fault 31131 if the
accumulator contains larger values than p4683 or p4684.
The zero mark distance for zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
accumulated differential pulses in encoder pulses.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1306 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A31429 (F, N) Encoder 1: Position difference, hall sensor/track C/D and A/B too large
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The error for track C/D is greater than +/-15 ° mechanical or +/-60 ° electrical or the error for the Hall signals is greater
than +/-60 ° electrical.
One period of track C/D corresponds to 360 ° mechanical.
One period of the Hall signal corresponds to 360 ° electrical.
The monitoring responds if, for example, Hall sensors are connected as equivalent for the C/D tracks with the incor-
rect rotational sense or supply values that are not accurate enough.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
For track C/D, the following applies:
Measured deviation as mechanical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 °).
For Hall signals, the following applies:
Measured deviation as electrical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 °).
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - track C or D not connected.
- correct the direction of rotation of the Hall sensor possibly connected as equivalent for track C/D.
- check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the adjustment of the Hall sensor.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31431 (F, N) Encoder 1: Deviation, position incremental/absolute too large
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When the zero pulse is passed, a deviation in the incremental position was detected.
For equidistant zero marks, the following applies:
- The first zero mark passed supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero marks must have
n times the distance referred to the first zero mark.
For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies:
- the first zero mark pair supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero mark pairs must have
the expected distance to the first zero mark pair.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quadrants).
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- Clean coding disk or remove strong magnetic fields.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31432 (F, N) Encoder 1: Rotor position adaptation corrects deviation
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For track A/B, pulses have been lost or too many have been counted. These pulses are presently being corrected.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Last measured deviation of the zero mark distance in increments (4 incre-
ments = 1 encoder pulse). The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1307
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check encoder limit frequency.
- adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425).
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31442 (F, N) Encoder 1: Battery voltage pre-alarm
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - replace battery.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31443 (F, N) Encoder 1: Unipolar CD signal level outside specification
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The unipolar level (CP/CN or DP/DN) for encoder 1 is outside the permissible tolerance.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Either CP or CN outside the tolerance.
Bit 16 = 1: Either DP or DN outside the tolerance.
The unipolar nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 2500 mV +/- 500 mV.
The response thresholds are < 1700 mV and > 3300 mV.
Note:
The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied:
- Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1).
- Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1).
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable.
- are the C/D tracks connected correctly (have the signal lines CP and CN or DP and DN been interchanged)?
- replace the encoder cable.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31460 (N) Encoder 1: Analog sensor channel A failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range.
2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4673.
3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1308 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Re alarm value = 1:
- check the output voltage of the analog sensor.
Re alarm value = 2:
- check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4673).
Re alarm value = 3:
- check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31461 (N) Encoder 1: Analog sensor channel B failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range.
2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4675.
3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676).
Remedy: Re alarm value = 1:
- check the output voltage of the analog sensor.
Re alarm value = 2:
- check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4675).
Re alarm value = 3:
- check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31462 (N) Encoder 1: Analog sensor, no channel active
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Channel A and B are not activated for the analog sensor.
Remedy: - activate channel A and/or channel B (p4670).
- check the encoder configuration (p0404.17).
See also: p4670 (Analog sensor configuration)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31470 (F, N) Encoder 1: Soiling detected
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the case of the alternative encoder system interface on the Sensor Module Cabinet 30 (SMC30), encoder soiling
is signaled via a 0 signal at terminal X521.7.
Remedy: - check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1309
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31500 (N, A) Encoder 1: Position tracking traversing range exceeded
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For a configured linear axis without modulo correction, the drive/encoder has exceeded the maximum possible tra-
versing range. The value should be read in p0412 and interpreted as the number of motor revolutions.
For p0411.0 = 1, the maximum traversing range for the configured linear axis is defined to be 64x (+/- 32x) of p0421.
For p0411.3 = 1, the maximum traversing range for the configured linear axis is preset (default value) to the highest
possible value and is +/-p0412/2 (rounded off to complete revolutions). The highest possible value depends on the
pulse number (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419).
Remedy: The fault should be resolved as follows:
- select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4).
- reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1).
- deselect encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0).
The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31501 (N, A) Encoder 1: Position tracking encoder position outside tolerance window
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When powered down, the drive/encoder was moved through a distance greater than was parameterized in the tol-
erance window. It is possible that there is no longer any reference between the mechanical system and encoder.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Deviation (difference) to the last encoder position in increments of the absolute value.
The sign designates the traversing direction.
Note:
The deviation (difference) found is also displayed in r0477.
See also: p0413 (Measuring gear, position tracking tolerance window), r0477 (Measuring gear, position difference)
Remedy: Reset the position tracking as follows:
- select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4).
- reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1).
- deselect encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0).
The fault should then be acknowledged and, if necessary, the absolute encoder adjusted (p2507).
See also: p0010
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31502 (N, A) Encoder 1: Encoder with measuring gear, without valid signals
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The encoder with measuring gear no longer provides any valid signals.
Remedy: It must be ensured that all of the encoders, with mounted measuring gear, provide valid actual values in operation.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1310 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31503 (N, A) Encoder 1: Position tracking cannot be reset
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The position tracking for the measuring gear cannot be reset.
Remedy: The fault should be resolved as follows:
- select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4).
- reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1).
- deselect encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0).
The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A31700 Encoder 1: Effectivity test does not supply the expected value
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit x = 1: Effectivity test x unsuccessful.
Remedy:
N31800 (F) Encoder 1: Group signal
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The motor encoder has detected at least one fault.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: Evaluates other actual messages.
Reaction upon F: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
F31801 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1311
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31802 (N, A) Encoder 1: Time slice overflow
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Time slice overflow, encoder 1.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
9: Time slice overflow of the fast (current controller clock cycle) time slice.
10: Time slice overflow of the average time slice.
12: Time slice overflow of the slow time slice.
999: Timeout when waiting for SYNO, e.g. unexpected return to non-cyclic operation.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: Reduce the current controller frequency.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31804 (N, A) Encoder 1: Checksum error
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A checksum error has occurred when reading-out the program memory on the Sensor Module.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex
yyyy: Memory area involved.
xxxx: Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained.
- replace the Sensor Module.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31805 (N, A) Encoder 1: EPROM checksum error
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
01: EEPROM access error.
02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: Replace the module.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1312 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31806 (N, A) Encoder 1: Initialization error
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The encoder was not successfully initialized.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Bit 0,1: Encoder initialization with the motor rotating has failed (deviation involving coarse and fine position in encoder
pulse/4)
Bit 2: Mid-voltage matching for track A unsuccessful.
Bit 3: Mid-voltage matching for track B unsuccessful.
Bit 4: Mid-voltage matching for acceleration input (under development) unsuccessful.
Bit 5: Mid-voltage matching for track safety A unsuccessful.
Bit 6: Mid-voltage matching for track safety B unsuccessful.
Bit 7: Mid-voltage matching for track C unsuccessful.
Bit 8: Mid-voltage matching for track D unsuccessful.
Bit 9: Mid-voltage matching for track R unsuccessful.
Bit 10: The difference in mid-voltages between A and B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 11: The difference in mid-voltages between C and D is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 12: The difference in mid-voltages between safety A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 13: The difference in mid-voltages between A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 14: The difference in mid-voltages between B and safety A is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 15: The standard deviation of the calculated mid-voltages is too great (> 0.3 V)
Bit 16: Internal fault - fault reading a register (CAFE)
Bit 17: Internal fault - fault writing a register (CAFE)
Bit 18: Internal fault: No mid-voltage matching available
Bit 19: Internal error - ADC access error.
Bit 20: Internal error - no zero crossover found.
Bit 0,1 : Up to 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A0
Bits 2..20 : 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A1 and higher
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: Acknowledge the fault.
If the fault cannot be acknowledged:
Bits 2 - 9: Check encoder power supply,
Bits 2 -14: Check the corresponding cable,
Bit 15 with no other bits: Check track R, check settings in p404.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A31811 (F, N) Encoder 1: Encoder serial number changed
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The serial number of the motor encoder of a synchronous motor has changed. The change was only checked for
encoders with serial number (e.g. EnDat encoders) and build-in motors (e.g. p0300 = 401) or third-party motors
(p0300 = 2).
Cause 1:
The encoder was replaced.
Cause 2:
A third-party, build-in or linear motor was re-commissioned.
Cause 3:
The motor with integrated and adjusted encoder was replaced.
Cause 4:
The firmware was updated to a version that checks the encoder serial number.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1313
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Note:
With closed-loop position control, the serial number is accepted when starting the adjustment (p2507 = 2).
When the encoder is adjusted (p2507 = 3), the serial number is checked for changes and if required, the adjustment
is reset (p2507 = 1).
Proceed as follows to hide serial number monitoring:
- set the following serial numbers for the corresponding Encoder Data Set: p0441= FF, p0442 = 0, p0442 = 0, p0444
= 0, p0445 = 0.
- parameterize F07414 as message type N (p2100, p2101).
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: Re causes 1, 2:
Carry out an automatic adjustment using the pole position identification routine. Acknowledge the fault. Initiate the
pole position identification routine with p1990 = 1. Then check that the pole position identification routine is correctly
executed.
SERVO:
If a pole position identification technique is selected in p1980, and if p0301 does not contain a motor type with an
encoder adjusted in the factory, then p1990 is automatically activated.
or
Set the adjustment via p0431. In this case, the new serial number is automatically accepted.
or
Mechanically adjust the encoder. Accept the new serial number with p0440 = 1.
Re causes 3, 4:
Accept the new serial number with p0440 = 1.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, OFF2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F31812 (N, A) Encoder 1: Requested cycle or RX-/TX timing not supported
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A cycle requested from the Control Unit or RX/TX timing is not supported.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0: Application cycle is not supported.
1: DQ cycle is not supported.
2: Distance between RX and TX instants in time too low.
3: TX instant in time too early.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31813 Encoder 1: Hardware logic unit failed
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: ALU watchdog has responded.
Bit 1: ALU has detected a sign-of-life error.
Remedy: Replace encoder
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1314 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31820 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 02 hex:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 03 hex:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 04 hex:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 05 hex:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 06 hex:
The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 07 hex:
A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram.
xx = 08 hex:
No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one.
xx = 09 hex:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex:
The receive telegram is too early.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31835 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. The nodes do not
send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 21 hex:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
xx = 40 hex:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1315
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31836 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. Data were not able
to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31837 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1316 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31845 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31850 (N, A) Encoder 1: Encoder evaluation, internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An internal software error has occurred in the Sensor Module of encoder 1.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Background time slice is blocked.
2: Checksum over the code memory is not OK.
10000: OEM memory of the EnDat encoder contains data that cannot be interpreted.
11000 ... 11499: Descriptive data from EEPROM incorrect.
11500 ... 11899: Calibration data from EEPROM incorrect.
11900 ... 11999: Configuration data from EEPROM incorrect.
16000: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization application error.
16001: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization ALU error.
16002: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder HISI / SISI initialization error.
16003: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder safety initialization error.
16004: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder internal system error.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module.
- if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module.
- contact the Hotline.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31851 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 1) involved to the Control Unit.
The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex = 10 dec:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1317
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31860 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 1) involved to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 11 hex = 17 dec:
CRC error and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 01 hex = 01 dec:
Checksum error (CRC error).
xx = 12 hex = 18 dec:
The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 02 hex = 02 dec:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 13 hex = 19 dec:
The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 03 hex = 03 dec:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 14 hex = 20 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 04 hex = 04 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 15 hex = 21 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 05 hex = 05 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 16 hex = 22 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too
early.
xx = 06 hex = 06 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 19 hex = 25 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 09 hex = 09 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1318 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31885 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 1) involved to the Control Unit.
The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 1A hex = 26 dec:
Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
xx = 62 hex = 98 dec:
Error at the transition to cyclic operation.
Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved.
- carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31886 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 1) involved to the Control Unit.
Data were not able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check whether the firmware version of the encoder (r0148) matches the firmware version of Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1319
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F31887 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved (Sensor Module for encoder 1). Faulty hardware cannot be
excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 60 hex:
Response received too late during runtime measurement.
xx = 61 hex:
Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31895 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 1) involved to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31896 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Sensor Module for encoder 1), specified by the fault value, have
changed in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a
DRIVE-CLiQ cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Component number.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1320 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be
used.
- when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the orig-
inal cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31899 (N, A) Encoder 1: Unknown fault
Message value: New message: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: A fault occurred on the Sensor Module for encoder 1 that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Fault number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Sensor Module by an older firmware version (r0148).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A31902 (F, N) Encoder 1: SPI-BUS error occurred
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Error when operating the internal SPI bus.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module.
- if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module.
- contact the Hotline.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31903 (F, N) Encoder 1: I2C-BUS error occurred
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Error when operating the internal I2C bus.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1321
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module.
- if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module.
- contact the Hotline.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F31905 (N, A) Encoder 1: Parameterization error
Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A parameter of encoder 1 was detected as being incorrect.
It is possible that the parameterized encoder type does not match the connected encoder.
The parameter involved can be determined as follows:
- determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949).
- determine the parameter index (p0187).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = parameter
Supplementary information = 0:
No information available.
Supplementary information = 1:
The component does not support HTL level (p0405.1 = 0) combined with track monitoring A/B <> -A/B (p0405.2 = 1).
Supplementary information = 2:
A code number for an identified encoder has been entered into p0400, however, no identification was carried out.
Please start a new encoder identification.
Supplementary information = 3:
A code number for an identified encoder has been entered into p0400, however, no identification was carried out.
Please select a listed encoder in p0400 with a code number < 10000.
Supplementary information = 4:
This component does not support SSI encoders (p0404.9 = 1) without track A/B.
Supplementary information = 5:
For SQW encoder, value in p4686 greater than in p0425.
Supplementary information = 6:
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder cannot be used with this firmware version.
Supplementary information = 7:
For the SQW encoder, the Xact1 correction (p0437.2) is only permitted with equidistant zero marks.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized.
- correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187.
- re parameter number 314: Check the pole pair number and measuring gear ratio. The quotient of the "pole pair
number" divided by the "measuring gear ratio" must be less than or equal to 1000 ((r0313 * p0433) / p0432 <= 1000).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A31915 (F, N) Encoder 1: Configuration error
Message value: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The configuration for encoder 1 is incorrect.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Re-parameterization between fault/alarm is not permissible.
419: When the fine resolution Gx_ACT2 is configured, the encoder identifies a maximum possible absolute position
actual value (r0483) that can no longer be represented within 32 bits.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1322 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: 1: No re-parameterization between fault/alarm.
419: Reduce the fine resolution (p0419).
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F31916 (N, A) Encoder 1: Parameterization fault
Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2
Drive object: ENCODER
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A parameter of encoder 1 was detected as being incorrect.
In the case of the ENCODER drive object, the selected encoder type (rotary/linear) might not match the function
module setting (r0108.12).
The parameter involved can be determined as follows:
- determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949).
- determine the parameter index (p0187).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized.
- correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187.
- if a linear encoder has been selected in parameter p0400/p0404, the "linear encoder" function module has to be
activated (r0108.12 = 1)
- if a rotary encoder has been selected in parameter p0400/p0404, the "linear encoder" function module should not
be activated (r0108.12 = 0)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F31916 (N, A) Encoder 1: Parameterization fault
Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A parameter of encoder 1 was detected as being incorrect.
It is possible that the parameterized encoder type does not match the connected encoder.
The parameter involved can be determined as follows:
- determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949).
- determine the parameter index (p0187).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number.
Note:
This fault is only output for encoders where r0404.10 = 1 or r0404.11 = 1. It corresponds to A31905 with encoders
where r0404.10 = 0 and r0404.11 = 0.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized.
- correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1323
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A31920 (F, N) Encoder 1: Temperature sensor fault
Message value: Fault cause: %1, channel number: %2
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Low word low byte: Cause:
1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm).
2: Measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm).
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Low word high byte: Channel number.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - check that the encoder cable is the correct type and is correctly connected.
- check the temperature sensor selection in p0600 to p0603.
- replace the Sensor Module (hardware defect or incorrect calibration data).
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A31999 (F, N) Encoder 1: Unknown alarm
Message value: New message: %1
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A alarm has occurred on the Sensor Module for encoder 1 that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Alarm number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Sensor Module by an older firmware version (r0148).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1324 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32100 (N, A) Encoder 2: Zero mark distance error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance.
For distance-coded encoders, the zero mark distance is determined from zero marks detected pairs. This means that
if a zero mark is missing, depending on the pair generation, this cannot result in a fault and also has no effect in the
system.
The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Last measured zero mark distance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse).
The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425).
- if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32101 (N, A) Encoder 2: Zero marked failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark distance was exceeded.
The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Number of increments after POWER ON or since the last zero mark that was detected (4 increments = 1 encoder
pulse).
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425).
- if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438).
- when p0437.1 is active, check p4686.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1325
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32103 (N, A) Encoder 2: Amplitude error, track R
Message value: R track: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The amplitude of the reference track signal (track R) does not lie within the tolerance bandwidth for encoder 2.
The fault can be initiated when the unipolar voltage level is exceeded (RP/RN) or if the differential amplitude is under-
shot.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
xxxx hex:
xxxx = Signal level, track R (16 bits with sign).
The response thresholds of the unipolar signal levels of the encoder are between < 1400 mV and > 3500 mV.
The response threshold for the differential signal level of the encoder is < -1600 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note:
The analog value of the amplitude error is not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sen-
sor Module.
The fault value can only be represented between -32767dec and 32767dec (-770 mV ... 770 mV).
The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied:
- Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1).
- Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1).
Remedy: - check the speed range; frequency characteristic (amplitude characteristic) of the measuring equipment might not
be sufficient for the speed range
- check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable.
- check whether the zero mark is connected and the signal cables RP and RN have been connected correctly
- replace the encoder cable.
- if the coding disk is soiled or the lighting aged, replace the encoder.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32110 (N, A) Encoder 2: Serial communications error
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol.
Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line.
Bit 2: Encoder does not respond (does not supply a start bit within 50 ms).
Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data.
Bit 4: Encoder acknowledgement error: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute it.
Bit 5: Internal error in the serial driver: An illegal mode command was requested.
Bit 6: Timeout when cyclically reading.
Bit 8: Protocol is too long (e.g. > 64 bits).
Bit 9: Receive buffer overflow.
Bit 10: Frame error when reading twice.
Bit 11: Parity error.
Bit 12: Data line signal level error during the monoflop time.
Bit 13: Data line incorrect.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1326 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1:
- Enc defect F31111 may provide additional details.
Re fault value, bit 1 = 1:
- Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Re fault value, bit 2 = 1:
- Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Re fault value, bit 3 = 1:
- EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Re fault value, bit 4 = 1:
- EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module.
Re fault value, bit 5 = 1:
- EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module.
Re fault value, bit 6 = 1:
- Update Sensor Module firmware.
Re fault value, bit 8 = 1:
- Check parameterization (p0429.2).
Re fault value, bit 9 = 1:
- EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module.
Re fault value, bit 10 = 1:
- Check parameterization (p0429.2, p0449).
Re fault value, bit 11 = 1:
- Check parameterization (p0436).
Re fault value, bit 12 = 1:
- Check parameterization (p0429.6).
Re fault value, bit 13 = 1:
- Check data line.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32111 (N, A) Encoder 2: Absolute encoder EnDat, internal fault/error
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The EnDat encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Lighting system failed.
Bit 1: Signal amplitude too low.
Bit 2: Position value incorrect.
Bit 3: Encoder power supply overvoltage condition.
Bit 4: Encoder power supply undervoltage condition.
Bit 5: Encoder power supply overcurrent condition.
Bit 6: The battery must be changed.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1327
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 1 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 2 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 3 = 1:
5 V power supply voltage fault.
When using an SMC: Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC.
When a motor encoder with a direct DRIVE-CLiQ connection is used: Replace the motor.
Re fault value, bit 4 = 1:
5 V power supply voltage fault.
When using an SMC: Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC.
When using a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ: Replace the motor.
Re fault value, bit 5 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 6 = 1:
The battery must be changed (only for encoders with battery back-up).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32115 (N, A) Encoder 2: Amplitude error track A or B (A^2 + B^2)
Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2) for encoder 2 exceeds the permissible tolerance.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign).
xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign).
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response thresholds are < 230 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 750 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10):
The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response thresholds are < 1070 mV and > 3582 mV.
A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 6666 hex = 26214 dec.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts).
The following applies to measuring systems without their own bearing system:
- adjust the scanning head and check the bearing system of the measuring wheel.
The following applies for measuring systems with their own bearing system:
- ensure that the encoder housing is not subject to any axial force.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1328 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32116 (N, A) Encoder 2: Amplitude error monitoring track A + B
Message value: Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The amplitude of the rectified encoder signals A and B and the amplitude from the roots of A^2 + B^2 for encoder 2
are not within the tolerance bandwidth.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign).
xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign).
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response thresholds are < 176 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 955 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32117 (N, A) Encoder 2: Inversion error signals A and B and R
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For a square-wave encoder (bipolar, double ended) the A* and B* and R* signals are not inverted with respect to
signals A and B and R.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bits 0 - 15: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Bit 16: Error track A.
Bit 17: Error track B.
Bit 18: Error track R.
Note:
For SMC30 (order no.. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 and 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 only), CUA32, and CU310, the following
applies:
A square-wave encoder without track R is used and track monitoring (p0405.2 = 1) is activated.
Remedy: Check the encoder/cable: Does the encoder provide signals and the associated inverted signals?
Note:
For SMC30 (order no. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 and 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 only), the following applies:
- check the setting of p0405 (p0405.2 = 1 is only possible if the encoder is connected at X520).
For a square-wave encoder without track R, the following jumpers must be set for the connection at X520 (SMC30)
or X23 (CUA32, CU310):
- pin 10 (reference signal R) <--> pin 7 (encoder power supply, ground)
- pin 11 (reference signal R inverted) <--> pin 4 (encoder power supply)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1329
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32118 (N, A) Encoder 2: Speed difference outside the tolerance range
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: For an HTL/TTL encoder, the speed difference has exceeded the value in p0492 over several sampling cycles.
The change to the averaged speed actual value - if applicable - is monitored in the current controller sampling time.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
See also: p0492
Remedy: - check the tachometer feeder cable for interruptions.
- check the grounding of the tachometer shielding.
- if required, increase the maximum speed difference per sampling cycle (p0492).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32120 (N, A) Encoder 2: Power supply voltage fault
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: Encoder 2 power supply voltage fault.
Note:
If the encoder cables 6FX2002-2EQ00-.... and 6FX2002-2CH00-.... are interchanged, this can result in the encoder
being destroyed because the pins of the operating voltage are reversed.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Undervoltage condition on the sense line.
Bit 1: Overcurrent condition for the encoder power supply.
Bit 2: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation negative.
Bit 3: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation positive.
Remedy: For fault value, bit 0 = 1:
- correct encoder cable connected?
- check the plug connections of the encoder cable.
- SMC30: Check the parameterization (p0404.22).
For fault value, bit 1 = 1:
- correct encoder cable connected?
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
For fault value, bit 2 = 1:
- correct encoder cable connected?
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
For fault value, bit 3 = 1:
- correct encoder cable connected?
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32121 (N, A) Encoder 2: Coarse position error
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: For the actual value sensing, an error was detected on the module. As a result of this error, it must be assumed that
the actual value sensing supplies an incorrect coarse position.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1330 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Replace the motor with DRIVE-CLiQ or the appropriate Sensor Module.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32122 Encoder 2: Internal power supply voltage faulty
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault in internal reference voltage of ASICs for encoder 2.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Reference voltage error.
2: Internal undervoltage.
3: Internal overvoltage.
Remedy: Replace the motor with DRIVE-CLiQ or the appropriate Sensor Module.
F32123 (N, A) Encoder 2: Signal level A/B unipolar outside tolerance
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The unipolar level (AP/AN or BP/BN) for encoder 2 is outside the permissible tolerance.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Either AP or AN outside the tolerance.
Bit 16 = 1: Either BP or BN outside the tolerance.
The unipolar nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 2500 mV +/- 500 mV.
The response thresholds are < 1700 mV and > 3300 mV.
Note:
The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied:
- Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1).
- Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1).
Remedy: - make sure that the encoder cables and shielding are installed in an EMC-compliant manner.
- check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable.
- check the short-circuit of a signal cable with mass or the operating voltage.
- replace the encoder cable.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1331
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32125 (N, A) Encoder 2: Amplitude error track A or B overcontrolled
Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The amplitude of track A or B for encoder 2 exceeds the permissble tolerance band.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign).
xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign).
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response threshold is > 750 mV. This fault also occurs if the A/D converter is overcontrolled.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10):
The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response threshold is > 3582 mV.
A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 6666 hex = 26214 dec.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32126 (N, A) Encoder 2: Amplitude AB too high
Message value: Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2 or |A| + |B|) for encoder 2 exceeds the permissible tolerance.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Angle
xxxx = Amplitude, i.e. root from A^2 + B^2 (16 bits without sign)
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response threshold for (|A| + |B|) is > 1120 mV or the root of (A^2 + B^2) > 955 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value of 299A hex = 10650 dec.
The angle 0 ... FFFF hex corresponds to 0 ... 360 degrees of the fine position. Zero degrees is at the negative zero
crossover of track B.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1332 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32129 (N, A) Encoder 2: Position difference, hall sensor/track C/D and A/B too large
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The error for track C/D is greater than +/-15 ° mechanical or +/-60 ° electrical or the error for the Hall signals is greater
than +/-60 ° electrical.
One period of track C/D corresponds to 360 ° mechanical.
One period of the Hall signal corresponds to 360 ° electrical.
The monitoring responds if, for example, Hall sensors are connected as equivalent for the C/D tracks with the incor-
rect rotational sense or supply values that are not accurate enough.
After the fine synchronization using one reference mark or 2 reference marks for distance-coded encoders, this fault
is no longer initiated, but instead, Alarm A32429.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
For track C/D, the following applies:
Measured deviation as mechanical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 °).
For Hall signals, the following applies:
Measured deviation as electrical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 °).
Remedy: - track C or D not connected.
- correct the direction of rotation of the Hall sensor possibly connected as equivalent for track C/D.
- check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the adjustment of the Hall sensor.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32130 (N, A) Encoder 2: Zero mark and position error from the coarse synchronization
Message value: Angular deviation, electrical: %1, angle, mechanical: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: After initializing the pole position using track C/D, Hall signals or pole position identification routine, the zero mark
was detected outside the permissible range. For distance-coded encoders, the test is carried out after passing 2 zero
marks. Fine synchronization was not carried out.
When initializing via track C/D (p0404) then it is checked whether the zero mark occurs in an angular range of +/-18
° mechanical.
When initializing via Hall sensors (p0404) or pole position identification (p1982) it is checked whether the zero mark
occurs in an angular range of +/-60 ° electrical.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex
yyyy: Determined mechanical zero mark position (can only be used for track C/D).
xxxx: Deviation of the zero mark from the expected position as electrical angle.
Scaling: 32768 dec = 180 °
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- if the Hall sensor is used as an equivalent for track C/D, check the connection.
- Check the connection of track C or D.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1333
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32131 (N, A) Encoder 2: Deviation, position incremental/absolute too large
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: Absolute encoder:
When cyclically reading the absolute position, an excessively high difference to the incremental position was
detected. The absolute position that was read is rejected.
Limit value for the deviation:
- EnDat encoder: Is supplied from the encoder and is a minimum of 2 quadrants (e.g. EQI 1325 > 2 quadrants, EQN
1325 > 50 quadrants).
- other encoders: 15 pulses = 60 quadrants.
Incremental encoder:
When the zero pulse is passed, a deviation in the incremental position was detected.
For equidistant zero marks, the following applies:
- The first zero mark passed supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero marks must have
n times the distance referred to the first zero mark.
For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies:
- the first zero mark pair supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero mark pairs must have
the expected distance to the first zero mark pair.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quadrants).
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check whether the coding disk is dirty or there are strong ambient magnetic fields.
- adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425).
- if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32135 Encoder 2: Fault when determining the position
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder supplies status information via bits in an internal status/fault word.
Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed
in the fault value.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: F1 (safety status display)
Bit 1: F2 (safety status display)
Bit 2: Lighting (reserved)
Bit 3: Signal amplitude (reserved)
Bit 4: Position value (reserved)
Bit 5: Overvoltage (reserved)
Bit 6: Undervoltage (reserved)
Bit 7: Overcurrent (reserved)
Bit 8: Battery (reserved)
Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display)
Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1334 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Bit 25: Singleturm power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 26: Multiturn position 1 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 27: Multiturn position 2 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved)
Remedy: Replace DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
F32136 Encoder 2: Error when determining multiturn information
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder supplies status information via bits in an internal status/fault word.
Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed
in the fault value.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: F1 (safety status display)
Bit 1: F2 (safety status display)
Bit 2: Lighting (reserved)
Bit 3: Signal amplitude (reserved)
Bit 4: Position value (reserved)
Bit 5: Overvoltage (reserved)
Bit 6: Undervoltage (reserved)
Bit 7: Overcurrent (reserved)
Bit 8: Battery (reserved)
Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display)
Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 25: Singleturm power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 26: Multiturn position 1 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 27: Multiturn position 2 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved)
Remedy: Replace DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
F32137 Encoder 2: Internal error when determining the position
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Only for internal SIEMENS use.
Remedy: Replace encoder
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1335
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32138 Encoder 2: Internal error when determining multiturn information
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Only for internal SIEMENS use.
Remedy: Replace encoder
F32150 (N, A) Encoder 2: Initialization error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: Encoder functionality selected in p0404 is not operating correctly.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
The fault value is a bit field. Every set bit indicates functionality that is faulted.
The bit assignment corresponds to that of p0404 (e.g. bit 5 set: Error track C/D).
Remedy: - Check that p0404 is correctly set.
- check the encoder type used (incremental/absolute value) and for SMCxx, the encoder cable.
- if relevant, note additional fault messages that describe the fault in detail.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32151 (N, A) Encoder 2: Encoder speed for initialization AB too high
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The encoder speed is too high during while initializing the sensor.
Remedy: Reduce the speed of the encoder accordingly during initialization.
If necessary, deactivate monitoring (p0437.29).
See also: p0437 (Sensor Module configuration extended)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32160 (N, A) Encoder 2: Analog sensor channel A failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range.
2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4673.
3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1336 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
- check the output voltage of the analog sensor.
Re fault value = 2:
- check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4673).
Re fault value = 3:
- check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32161 (N, A) Encoder 2: Analog sensor channel B failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range.
2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4675.
3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676).
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
- check the output voltage of the analog sensor.
Re fault value = 2:
- check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4675).
Re fault value = 3:
- check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A32400 (F, N) Encoder 2: Alarm threshold zero mark distance error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance.
For distance-coded encoders, the zero mark distance is determined from zero marks detected pairs. This means that
if a zero mark is missing, depending on the pair generation, this cannot result in a fault and also has no effect in the
system.
The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Last measured zero mark distance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse).
The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1337
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A32401 (F, N) Encoder 2: Alarm threshold zero marked failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark distance was exceeded.
The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of increments after POWER ON or since the last zero mark that was detected (4 increments = 1 encoder
pulse).
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F32405 (N, A) Encoder 2: Temperature in the encoder evaluation inadmissible
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The encoder evaluation for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ has detected an inadmissible temperature.
The fault threshold is 125 ° C.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Measured board/module temperature in 0.1 °C.
Remedy: Reduce the ambient temperature for the DRIVE-CLiQ connection of the motor.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A32407 (F, N) Encoder 2: Function limit reached
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The encoder has reached one of its function limits. A service is recommended.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1 : Incremental signals
3 : Absolute track
4 : Code connection
Remedy: Perform service. Replace the encoder if necessary.
Note:
The current functional reserve of an encoder can be displayed via r4651.
See also: p4650 (Encoder functional reserve component number), r4651 (Encoder functional reserve)
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1338 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A32410 (F, N) Encoder 2: Serial communications
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol.
Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line.
Bit 2: Encoder does not respond (does not supply a start bit within 50 ms).
Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data.
Bit 4: Encoder acknowledgement error: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute it.
Bit 5: Internal error in the serial driver: An illegal mode command was requested.
Bit 6: Timeout when cyclically reading.
Bit 8: Protocol is too long (e.g. > 64 bits).
Bit 9: Receive buffer overflow.
Bit 10: Frame error when reading twice.
Bit 11: Parity error.
Bit 12: Data line signal level error during the monoflop time.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32411 (F, N) Encoder 2: EnDat encoder signals alarms
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The error word of the EnDat encoder has alarm bits that have been set.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Frequency exceeded (speed too high).
Bit 1: Temperature exceeded.
Bit 2: Control reserve, lighting system exceeded.
Bit 3: Battery discharged.
Bit 4: Reference point passed.
Remedy: Replace encoder.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32412 (F, N) Encoder 2: Error bit set in the serial protocol
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The encoder sends a set error bit via the serial protocol.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Fault bit in the position protocol.
Bit 1: Alarm bit in the position protocol.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1339
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32414 (F, N) Encoder 2: Amplitude error track C or D (C^2 + D^2)
Message value: C track: %1, D track: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The amplitude (C^2 + D^2) of track C or D of the encoder or from the Hall signals, is not within the tolerance band-
width.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Signal level, track D (16 bits with sign).
xxxx = Signal level, track C (16 bits with sign).
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response thresholds are < 230 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 750 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note:
If the amplitude is not within the tolerance bandwidth, then it cannot be used to initialize the start position.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts).
- check the Hall sensor box
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
N32415 (F, A) Encoder 2: Amplitude alarm track A or B (A^2 + B^2)
Message value: Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2) for encoder 2 exceeds the permissible tolerance.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Angle
xxxx = Amplitude, i.e. root from A^2 + B^2 (16 bits without sign)
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response threshold is < 300 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder).
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 299A hex = 10650 dec.
The angle 0 ... FFFF hex corresponds to 0 ... 360 degrees of the fine position. Zero degrees is at the negative zero
crossover of track B.
Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10):
The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response threshold is < 1414 mV (1.0 Vrms).
A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 3333 hex = 13107 dec.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1340 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check the speed range, frequency characteristic (amplitude characteristic) of the measuring equipment is not suf-
ficient for the speed range.
- check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts).
- if the coding disk is soiled or the lighting aged, replace the encoder.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A32418 (F, N) Encoder 2: Speed difference per sampling rate exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For an HTL/TTL encoder, the speed difference between two sampling cycles has exceeded the value in p0492.
The change to the averaged speed actual value - if applicable - is monitored in the current controller sampling time.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
See also: p0492
Remedy: - check the tachometer feeder cable for interruptions.
- check the grounding of the tachometer shielding.
- if required, increase the setting of p0492.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32419 (F, N) Encoder 2: Track A or B outside the tolerance range
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The amplitude, phase or offset correction for track A or B is at the limit.
Amplitude error correction: Amplitude B / Amplitude A = 0.78 ... 1.27
Phase: <84 degrees or >96 degrees
SMC20: Offset correction: +/-140 mV
SMC10: Offset correction: +/-650 mV
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
xxxx1: Minimum of the offset correction, track B
xxxx2: Maximum of the offset correction, track B
xxx1x: Minimum of the offset correction, track A
xxx2x: Maximum of the offset correction, track A
xx1xx: Minimum of the amplitude correction, track B/A
xx2xx: Maximum of the amplitude correction, track B/A
x1xxx: Minimum of the phase error correction
x2xxx: Maximum of the phase error correction
1xxxx: Minimum of the cubic correction
2xxxx: Maximum of the cubic correction
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1341
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check mechanical mounting tolerances for encoders without their own bearings (e.g. toothed-wheel encoders).
- check the plug connections (also the transition resistance).
- check the encoder signals.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32421 (F, N) Encoder 2: Coarse position error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For the actual value sensing, an error was detected. As a result of this error, it must be assumed that the actual value
sensing supplies an incorrect coarse position.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
3: The absolute position of the serial protocol and track A/B differ by half an encoder pulse. The absolute position
must have its zero position in the quadrants in which both tracks are negative. In the case of a fault, the position can
be incorrect by one encoder pulse.
Remedy: Re alarm value = 3:
- for a standard encoder with cable, if required, contact the manufacturer.
- correct the assignment of the tracks to the position value that is serially transferred. To do this, the two tracks must
be connected, inverted, at the Sensor Module (interchange A with A* and B with B*) or, for a programmable encoder,
check the zero offset of the position.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32422 (F, N) Encoder 2: Pulses per revolution square-wave encoder outside tolerance bandwidth
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance.
This alarm is triggered with active square-wave encoder PPR correction and re-parameterized fault 31131 if the
accumulator contains larger values than p4683 or p4684.
The zero mark distance for zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
accumulated differential pulses in encoder pulses.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1342 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A32429 (F, N) Encoder 2: Position difference, hall sensor/track C/D and A/B too large
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The error for track C/D is greater than +/-15 ° mechanical or +/-60 ° electrical or the error for the Hall signals is greater
than +/-60 ° electrical.
One period of track C/D corresponds to 360 ° mechanical.
One period of the Hall signal corresponds to 360 ° electrical.
The monitoring responds if, for example, Hall sensors are connected as equivalent for the C/D tracks with the incor-
rect rotational sense or supply values that are not accurate enough.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
For track C/D, the following applies:
Measured deviation as mechanical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 °).
For Hall signals, the following applies:
Measured deviation as electrical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 °).
Remedy: - track C or D not connected.
- correct the direction of rotation of the Hall sensor possibly connected as equivalent for track C/D.
- check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the adjustment of the Hall sensor.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32431 (F, N) Encoder 2: Deviation, position incremental/absolute too large
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When the zero pulse is passed, a deviation in the incremental position was detected.
For equidistant zero marks, the following applies:
- The first zero mark passed supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero marks must have
n times the distance referred to the first zero mark.
For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies:
- the first zero mark pair supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero mark pairs must have
the expected distance to the first zero mark pair.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quadrants).
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- Clean coding disk or remove strong magnetic fields.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32432 (F, N) Encoder 2: Rotor position adaptation corrects deviation
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For track A/B, pulses have been lost or too many have been counted. These pulses are presently being corrected.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Last measured deviation of the zero mark distance in increments (4 incre-
ments = 1 encoder pulse). The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1343
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check encoder limit frequency.
- adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425).
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32442 (F, N) Encoder 2: Battery voltage pre-alarm
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - replace battery.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32443 (F, N) Encoder 2: Unipolar CD signal level outside specification
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The unipolar level (CP/CN or DP/DN) for encoder 2 is outside the permissible tolerance.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Either CP or CN outside the tolerance.
Bit 16 = 1: Either DP or DN outside the tolerance.
The unipolar nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 2500 mV +/- 500 mV.
The response thresholds are < 1700 mV and > 3300 mV.
Note:
The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied:
- Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1).
- Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1).
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable.
- are the C/D tracks connected correctly (have the signal lines CP and CN or DP and DN been interchanged)?
- replace the encoder cable.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32460 (N) Encoder 2: Analog sensor channel A failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range.
2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4673.
3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1344 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Re alarm value = 1:
- check the output voltage of the analog sensor.
Re alarm value = 2:
- check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4673).
Re alarm value = 3:
- check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32461 (N) Encoder 2: Analog sensor channel B failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range.
2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4675.
3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676).
Remedy: Re alarm value = 1:
- check the output voltage of the analog sensor.
Re alarm value = 2:
- check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4675).
Re alarm value = 3:
- check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32462 (N) Encoder 2: Analog sensor, no channel active
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Channel A and B are not activated for the analog sensor.
Remedy: - activate channel A and/or channel B (p4670).
- check the encoder configuration (p0404.17).
See also: p4670 (Analog sensor configuration)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32470 (F, N) Encoder 2: Soiling detected
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the case of the alternative encoder system interface on the Sensor Module Cabinet 30 (SMC30), encoder soiling
is signaled via a 0 signal at terminal X521.7.
Remedy: - check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1345
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32500 (N, A) Encoder 2: Position tracking traversing range exceeded
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For a configured linear axis without modulo correction, the drive/encoder has exceeded the maximum possible tra-
versing range. The value should be read in p0412 and interpreted as the number of motor revolutions.
For p0411.0 = 1, the maximum traversing range for the configured linear axis is defined to be 64x (+/- 32x) of p0421.
For p0411.3 = 1, the maximum traversing range for the configured linear axis is preset (default value) to the highest
possible value and is +/-p0412/2 (rounded off to complete revolutions). The highest possible value depends on the
pulse number (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419).
Remedy: The fault should be resolved as follows:
- select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4).
- reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1).
- deselect encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0).
The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32501 (N, A) Encoder 2: Position tracking encoder position outside tolerance window
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When powered down, the drive/encoder was moved through a distance greater than was parameterized in the tol-
erance window. It is possible that there is no longer any reference between the mechanical system and encoder.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Deviation (difference) to the last encoder position in increments of the absolute value.
The sign designates the traversing direction.
Note:
The deviation (difference) found is also displayed in r0477.
See also: p0413 (Measuring gear, position tracking tolerance window), r0477 (Measuring gear, position difference)
Remedy: Reset the position tracking as follows:
- select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4).
- reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1).
- deselect encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0).
The fault should then be acknowledged and, if necessary, the absolute encoder adjusted (p2507).
See also: p0010
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32502 (N, A) Encoder 2: Encoder with measuring gear, without valid signals
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The encoder with measuring gear no longer provides any valid signals.
Remedy: It must be ensured that all of the encoders, with mounted measuring gear, provide valid actual values in operation.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1346 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32503 (N, A) Encoder 2: Position tracking cannot be reset
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The position tracking for the measuring gear cannot be reset.
Remedy: The fault should be resolved as follows:
- select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4).
- reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1).
- deselect encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0).
The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A32700 Encoder 2: Effectivity test does not supply the expected value
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit x = 1: Effectivity test x unsuccessful.
Remedy:
N32800 (F) Encoder 2: Group signal
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The motor encoder has detected at least one fault.
Remedy: Evaluates other actual messages.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
F32801 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1347
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32802 (N, A) Encoder 2: Time slice overflow
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Time slice overflow, encoder 2.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
9: Time slice overflow of the fast (current controller clock cycle) time slice.
10: Time slice overflow of the average time slice.
12: Time slice overflow of the slow time slice.
999: Timeout when waiting for SYNO, e.g. unexpected return to non-cyclic operation.
Remedy: Reduce the current controller frequency.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32804 (N, A) Encoder 2: Checksum error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A checksum error has occurred when reading-out the program memory on the Sensor Module.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex
yyyy: Memory area involved.
xxxx: Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum.
Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained.
- replace the Sensor Module.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32805 (N, A) Encoder 2: EPROM checksum error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
01: EEPROM access error.
02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM.
Remedy: Replace the module.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1348 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32806 (N, A) Encoder 2: Initialization error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The encoder was not successfully initialized.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Bit 0,1: Encoder initialization with the motor rotating has failed (deviation involving coarse and fine position in encoder
pulse/4)
Bit 2: Mid-voltage matching for track A unsuccessful.
Bit 3: Mid-voltage matching for track B unsuccessful.
Bit 4: Mid-voltage matching for acceleration input (under development) unsuccessful.
Bit 5: Mid-voltage matching for track safety A unsuccessful.
Bit 6: Mid-voltage matching for track safety B unsuccessful.
Bit 7: Mid-voltage matching for track C unsuccessful.
Bit 8: Mid-voltage matching for track D unsuccessful.
Bit 9: Mid-voltage matching for track R unsuccessful.
Bit 10: The difference in mid-voltages between A and B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 11: The difference in mid-voltages between C and D is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 12: The difference in mid-voltages between safety A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 13: The difference in mid-voltages between A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 14: The difference in mid-voltages between B and safety A is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 15: The standard deviation of the calculated mid-voltages is too great (> 0.3 V)
Bit 16: Internal fault - fault reading a register (CAFE)
Bit 17: Internal fault - fault writing a register (CAFE)
Bit 18: Internal fault: No mid-voltage matching available
Bit 19: Internal error - ADC access error.
Bit 20: Internal error - no zero crossover found.
Bit 0,1 : Up to 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A0
Bits 2..20 : 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A1 and higher
Remedy: Acknowledge the fault.
If the fault cannot be acknowledged:
Bits 2 - 9: Check encoder power supply,
Bits 2 -14: Check the corresponding cable,
Bit 15 with no other bits: Check track R, check settings in p404.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32811 (N, A) Encoder 2: Encoder serial number changed
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The encoder serial number has changed. The change is only checked for encoders with serial number (e.g. EnDat
encoders).
Cause:
The encoder was replaced.
Note:
With closed-loop position control, the serial number is accepted when starting the adjustment (p2507 = 2).
When the encoder is adjusted (p2507 = 3), the serial number is checked for changes and if required, the adjustment
is reset (p2507 = 1).
Proceed as follows to hide serial number monitoring:
- set the following serial numbers for the corresponding Encoder Data Set: p0441= FF, p0442 = 0, p0442 = 0, p0444
= 0, p0445 = 0.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1349
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Mechanically adjust the encoder. Accept the new serial number with p0440 = 1.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32812 (N, A) Encoder 2: Requested cycle or RX-/TX timing not supported
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A cycle requested from the Control Unit or RX/TX timing is not supported.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0: Application cycle is not supported.
1: DQ cycle is not supported.
2: Distance between RX and TX instants in time too low.
3: TX instant in time too early.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32813 Encoder 2: Hardware logic unit failed
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: ALU watchdog has responded.
Bit 1: ALU has detected a sign-of-life error.
Remedy: Replace encoder
F32820 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 02 hex:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 03 hex:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 04 hex:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 05 hex:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 06 hex:
The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 07 hex:
A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram.
xx = 08 hex:
No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1350 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
xx = 09 hex:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32835 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. The nodes do not
send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 21 hex:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
xx = 40 hex:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32836 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. Data were not able
to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1351
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32837 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32845 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1352 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32850 (N, A) Encoder 2: Encoder evaluation, internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An internal software error has occurred in the Sensor Module of encoder 2.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Background time slice is blocked.
2: Checksum over the code memory is not OK.
10000: OEM memory of the EnDat encoder contains data that cannot be interpreted.
11000 ... 11499: Descriptive data from EEPROM incorrect.
11500 ... 11899: Calibration data from EEPROM incorrect.
11900 ... 11999: Configuration data from EEPROM incorrect.
16000: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization application error.
16001: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization ALU error.
16002: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder HISI / SISI initialization error.
16003: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder safety initialization error.
16004: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder internal system error.
Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module.
- if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module.
- contact the Hotline.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32851 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 2) involved to the Control Unit.
The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex = 10 dec:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1353
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32860 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 2) involved to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 11 hex = 17 dec:
CRC error and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 01 hex = 01 dec:
Checksum error (CRC error).
xx = 12 hex = 18 dec:
The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 02 hex = 02 dec:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 13 hex = 19 dec:
The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 03 hex = 03 dec:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 14 hex = 20 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 04 hex = 04 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 15 hex = 21 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 05 hex = 05 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 16 hex = 22 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too
early.
xx = 06 hex = 06 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 19 hex = 25 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 09 hex = 09 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1354 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32885 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 2) involved to the Control Unit.
The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 1A hex = 26 dec:
Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
xx = 62 hex = 98 dec:
Error at the transition to cyclic operation.
Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved.
- carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32886 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 2) involved to the Control Unit.
Data were not able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32887 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved (Sensor Module for encoder 2). Faulty hardware cannot be
excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1355
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 60 hex:
Response received too late during runtime measurement.
xx = 61 hex:
Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32895 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 2) involved to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F32896 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Sensor Module for encoder 2), specified by the fault value, have
changed in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a
DRIVE-CLiQ cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Component number.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be
used.
- when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the orig-
inal cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1356 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F32899 (N, A) Encoder 2: Unknown fault
Message value: New message: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: A fault occurred on the Sensor Module for encoder 2 that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Fault number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Sensor Module by an older firmware version (r0148).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A32902 (F, N) Encoder 2: SPI-BUS error occurred
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Error when operating the internal SPI bus.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module.
- if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module.
- contact the Hotline.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F32905 (N, A) Encoder 2: Parameterization error
Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A parameter of encoder 2 was detected as being incorrect.
It is possible that the parameterized encoder type does not match the connected encoder.
The parameter involved can be determined as follows:
- determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949).
- determine the parameter index (p0187).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = parameter
Supplementary information = 0:
No information available.
Supplementary information = 1:
The component does not support HTL level (p0405.1 = 0) combined with track monitoring A/B <> -A/B (p0405.2 = 1).
Supplementary information = 2:
A code number for an identified encoder has been entered into p0400, however, no identification was carried out.
Please start a new encoder identification.
Supplementary information = 3:
A code number for an identified encoder has been entered into p0400, however, no identification was carried out.
Please select a listed encoder in p0400 with a code number < 10000.
Supplementary information = 4:
This component does not support SSI encoders (p0404.9 = 1) without track A/B.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1357
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Supplementary information = 5:
For SQW encoder, value in p4686 greater than in p0425.
Supplementary information = 6:
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder cannot be used with this firmware version.
Supplementary information = 7:
For the SQW encoder, the Xact1 correction (p0437.2) is only permitted with equidistant zero marks.
Remedy: - check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized.
- correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187.
- re parameter number 314: Check the pole pair number and measuring gear ratio. The quotient of the "pole pair
number" divided by the "measuring gear ratio" must be less than or equal to 1000 ((r0313 * p0433) / p0432 <= 1000).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A32915 (F, N) Encoder 2: Configuration error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The configuration for encoder 2 is incorrect.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Re-parameterization between fault/alarm is not permissible.
419: When the fine resolution Gx_ACT2 is configured, the encoder identifies a maximum possible absolute position
actual value (r0483) that can no longer be represented within 32 bits.
Remedy: 1: No re-parameterization between fault/alarm.
419: Reduce the fine resolution (p0419).
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F32916 (N, A) Encoder 2: Parameterization fault
Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A parameter of encoder 2 was detected as being incorrect.
It is possible that the parameterized encoder type does not match the connected encoder.
The parameter involved can be determined as follows:
- determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949).
- determine the parameter index (p0187).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number.
Note:
This fault is only output for encoders where r0404.10 = 1 or r0404.11 = 1. It corresponds to A32905 with encoders
where r0404.10 = 0 and r0404.11 = 0.
Remedy: - check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized.
- correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1358 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A32920 (F, N) Encoder 2: Temperature sensor fault
Message value: Fault cause: %1, channel number: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Low word low byte: Cause:
1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm).
2: Measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm).
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Low word high byte: Channel number.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cable is the correct type and is correctly connected.
- check the temperature sensor selection in p0600 to p0603.
- replace the Sensor Module (hardware defect or incorrect calibration data).
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A32999 (F, N) Encoder 2: Unknown alarm
Message value: New message: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A alarm has occurred on the Sensor Module for encoder 2 that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Alarm number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Sensor Module by an older firmware version (r0148).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F33100 (N, A) Encoder 3: Zero mark distance error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance.
For distance-coded encoders, the zero mark distance is determined from zero marks detected pairs. This means that
if a zero mark is missing, depending on the pair generation, this cannot result in a fault and also has no effect in the
system.
The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Last measured zero mark distance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse).
The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1359
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425).
- if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33101 (N, A) Encoder 3: Zero marked failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark distance was exceeded.
The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Number of increments after POWER ON or since the last zero mark that was detected (4 increments = 1 encoder
pulse).
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425).
- if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438).
- when p0437.1 is active, check p4686.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33103 (N, A) Encoder 3: Amplitude error, track R
Message value: R track: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The amplitude of the reference track signal (track R) does not lie within the tolerance bandwidth for encoder 3.
The fault can be initiated when the unipolar voltage level is exceeded (RP/RN) or if the differential amplitude is under-
shot.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
xxxx hex:
xxxx = Signal level, track R (16 bits with sign).
The response thresholds of the unipolar signal levels of the encoder are between < 1400 mV and > 3500 mV.
The response threshold for the differential signal level of the encoder is < -1600 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note:
The analog value of the amplitude error is not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sen-
sor Module.
The fault value can only be represented between -32767dec and 32767dec (-770 mV ... 770 mV).
The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied:
- Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1).
- Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1).
Remedy: - check the speed range; frequency characteristic (amplitude characteristic) of the measuring equipment might not
be sufficient for the speed range
- check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1360 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
- check whether the zero mark is connected and the signal cables RP and RN have been connected correctly
- replace the encoder cable.
- if the coding disk is soiled or the lighting aged, replace the encoder.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33110 (N, A) Encoder 3: Serial communications error
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol.
Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line.
Bit 2: Encoder does not respond (does not supply a start bit within 50 ms).
Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data.
Bit 4: Encoder acknowledgement error: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute it.
Bit 5: Internal error in the serial driver: An illegal mode command was requested.
Bit 6: Timeout when cyclically reading.
Bit 8: Protocol is too long (e.g. > 64 bits).
Bit 9: Receive buffer overflow.
Bit 10: Frame error when reading twice.
Bit 11: Parity error.
Bit 12: Data line signal level error during the monoflop time.
Bit 13: Data line incorrect.
Remedy: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1:
- Enc defect F31111 may provide additional details.
Re fault value, bit 1 = 1:
- Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Re fault value, bit 2 = 1:
- Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Re fault value, bit 3 = 1:
- EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Re fault value, bit 4 = 1:
- EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module.
Re fault value, bit 5 = 1:
- EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module.
Re fault value, bit 6 = 1:
- Update Sensor Module firmware.
Re fault value, bit 8 = 1:
- Check parameterization (p0429.2).
Re fault value, bit 9 = 1:
- EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module.
Re fault value, bit 10 = 1:
- Check parameterization (p0429.2, p0449).
Re fault value, bit 11 = 1:
- Check parameterization (p0436).
Re fault value, bit 12 = 1:
- Check parameterization (p0429.6).
Re fault value, bit 13 = 1:
- Check data line.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1361
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F33111 (N, A) Encoder 3: Absolute encoder EnDat, internal fault/error
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The EnDat encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Lighting system failed.
Bit 1: Signal amplitude too low.
Bit 2: Position value incorrect.
Bit 3: Encoder power supply overvoltage condition.
Bit 4: Encoder power supply undervoltage condition.
Bit 5: Encoder power supply overcurrent condition.
Bit 6: The battery must be changed.
Remedy: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 1 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 2 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 3 = 1:
5 V power supply voltage fault.
When using an SMC: Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC.
When a motor encoder with a direct DRIVE-CLiQ connection is used: Replace the motor.
Re fault value, bit 4 = 1:
5 V power supply voltage fault.
When using an SMC: Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC.
When using a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ: Replace the motor.
Re fault value, bit 5 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 6 = 1:
The battery must be changed (only for encoders with battery back-up).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33112 (N, A) Encoder 3: Error bit set in the serial protocol
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The encoder sends a set error bit via the serial protocol.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Fault bit in the position protocol.
Remedy: For fault value, bit 0 = 1:
In the case of an EnDat encoder, F31111 may provide further details.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1362 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F33115 (N, A) Encoder 3: Amplitude error track A or B (A^2 + B^2)
Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2) for encoder 3 exceeds the permissible tolerance.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign).
xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign).
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response thresholds are < 230 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 750 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10):
The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response thresholds are < 1070 mV and > 3582 mV.
A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 6666 hex = 26214 dec.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts).
The following applies to measuring systems without their own bearing system:
- adjust the scanning head and check the bearing system of the measuring wheel.
The following applies for measuring systems with their own bearing system:
- ensure that the encoder housing is not subject to any axial force.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33116 (N, A) Encoder 3: Amplitude error monitoring track A + B
Message value: Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The amplitude of the rectified encoder signals A and B and the amplitude from the roots of A^2 + B^2 for encoder 3
are not within the tolerance bandwidth.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign).
xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign).
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response thresholds are < 176 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 955 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1363
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F33117 (N, A) Encoder 3: Inversion error signals A and B and R
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For a square-wave encoder (bipolar, double ended) the A* and B* and R* signals are not inverted with respect to
signals A and B and R.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bits 0 - 15: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Bit 16: Error track A.
Bit 17: Error track B.
Bit 18: Error track R.
Note:
For SMC30 (order no.. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 and 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 only), CUA32, and CU310, the following
applies:
A square-wave encoder without track R is used and track monitoring (p0405.2 = 1) is activated.
Remedy: Check the encoder/cable: Does the encoder provide signals and the associated inverted signals?
Note:
For SMC30 (order no. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 and 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 only), the following applies:
- check the setting of p0405 (p0405.2 = 1 is only possible if the encoder is connected at X520).
For a square-wave encoder without track R, the following jumpers must be set for the connection at X520 (SMC30)
or X23 (CUA32, CU310):
- pin 10 (reference signal R) <--> pin 7 (encoder power supply, ground)
- pin 11 (reference signal R inverted) <--> pin 4 (encoder power supply)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33118 (N, A) Encoder 3: Speed difference outside the tolerance range
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: For an HTL/TTL encoder, the speed difference has exceeded the value in p0492 over several sampling cycles.
The change to the averaged speed actual value - if applicable - is monitored in the current controller sampling time.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
See also: p0492
Remedy: - check the tachometer feeder cable for interruptions.
- check the grounding of the tachometer shielding.
- if required, increase the maximum speed difference per sampling cycle (p0492).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1364 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F33120 (N, A) Encoder 3: Power supply voltage fault
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: Encoder 3 power supply voltage fault.
Note:
If the encoder cables 6FX2002-2EQ00-.... and 6FX2002-2CH00-.... are interchanged, this can result in the encoder
being destroyed because the pins of the operating voltage are reversed.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Undervoltage condition on the sense line.
Bit 1: Overcurrent condition for the encoder power supply.
Bit 2: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation negative.
Bit 3: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation positive.
Remedy: For fault value, bit 0 = 1:
- correct encoder cable connected?
- check the plug connections of the encoder cable.
- SMC30: Check the parameterization (p0404.22).
For fault value, bit 1 = 1:
- correct encoder cable connected?
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
For fault value, bit 2 = 1:
- correct encoder cable connected?
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
For fault value, bit 3 = 1:
- correct encoder cable connected?
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33121 (N, A) Encoder 3: Coarse position error
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: For the actual value sensing, an error was detected on the module. As a result of this error, it must be assumed that
the actual value sensing supplies an incorrect coarse position.
Remedy: Replace the motor with DRIVE-CLiQ or the appropriate Sensor Module.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33122 Encoder 3: Internal power supply voltage faulty
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault in internal reference voltage of ASICs for encoder 3.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Reference voltage error.
2: Internal undervoltage.
3: Internal overvoltage.
Remedy: Replace the motor with DRIVE-CLiQ or the appropriate Sensor Module.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1365
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F33123 (N, A) Encoder 3: Signal level A/B unipolar outside tolerance
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The unipolar level (AP/AN or BP/BN) for encoder 3 is outside the permissible tolerance.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Either AP or AN outside the tolerance.
Bit 16 = 1: Either BP or BN outside the tolerance.
The unipolar nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 2500 mV +/- 500 mV.
The response thresholds are < 1700 mV and > 3300 mV.
Note:
The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied:
- Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1).
- Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1).
Remedy: - make sure that the encoder cables and shielding are installed in an EMC-compliant manner.
- check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable.
- check the short-circuit of a signal cable with mass or the operating voltage.
- replace the encoder cable.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33125 (N, A) Encoder 3: Amplitude error track A or B overcontrolled
Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The amplitude of track A or B for encoder 3 exceeds the permissble tolerance band.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign).
xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign).
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response threshold is > 750 mV. This fault also occurs if the A/D converter is overcontrolled.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10):
The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response threshold is > 3582 mV.
A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 6666 hex = 26214 dec.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1366 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F33126 (N, A) Encoder 3: Amplitude AB too high
Message value: Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2 or |A| + |B|) for encoder 3 exceeds the permissible tolerance.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Angle
xxxx = Amplitude, i.e. root from A^2 + B^2 (16 bits without sign)
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response threshold for (|A| + |B|) is > 1120 mV or the root of (A^2 + B^2) > 955 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value of 299A hex = 10650 dec.
The angle 0 ... FFFF hex corresponds to 0 ... 360 degrees of the fine position. Zero degrees is at the negative zero
crossover of track B.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33129 (N, A) Encoder 3: Position difference, hall sensor/track C/D and A/B too large
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The error for track C/D is greater than +/-15 ° mechanical or +/-60 ° electrical or the error for the Hall signals is greater
than +/-60 ° electrical.
One period of track C/D corresponds to 360 ° mechanical.
One period of the Hall signal corresponds to 360 ° electrical.
The monitoring responds if, for example, Hall sensors are connected as equivalent for the C/D tracks with the incor-
rect rotational sense or supply values that are not accurate enough.
After the fine synchronization using one reference mark or 2 reference marks for distance-coded encoders, this fault
is no longer initiated, but instead, Alarm A33429.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
For track C/D, the following applies:
Measured deviation as mechanical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 °).
For Hall signals, the following applies:
Measured deviation as electrical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 °).
Remedy: - track C or D not connected.
- correct the direction of rotation of the Hall sensor possibly connected as equivalent for track C/D.
- check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the adjustment of the Hall sensor.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1367
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F33130 (N, A) Encoder 3: Zero mark and position error from the coarse synchronization
Message value: Angular deviation, electrical: %1, angle, mechanical: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: After initializing the pole position using track C/D, Hall signals or pole position identification routine, the zero mark
was detected outside the permissible range. For distance-coded encoders, the test is carried out after passing 2 zero
marks. Fine synchronization was not carried out.
When initializing via track C/D (p0404) then it is checked whether the zero mark occurs in an angular range of +/-18
° mechanical.
When initializing via Hall sensors (p0404) or pole position identification (p1982) it is checked whether the zero mark
occurs in an angular range of +/-60 ° electrical.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex
yyyy: Determined mechanical zero mark position (can only be used for track C/D).
xxxx: Deviation of the zero mark from the expected position as electrical angle.
Scaling: 32768 dec = 180 °
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- if the Hall sensor is used as an equivalent for track C/D, check the connection.
- Check the connection of track C or D.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33131 (N, A) Encoder 3: Deviation, position incremental/absolute too large
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: Absolute encoder:
When cyclically reading the absolute position, an excessively high difference to the incremental position was
detected. The absolute position that was read is rejected.
Limit value for the deviation:
- EnDat encoder: Is supplied from the encoder and is a minimum of 2 quadrants (e.g. EQI 1325 > 2 quadrants, EQN
1325 > 50 quadrants).
- other encoders: 15 pulses = 60 quadrants.
Incremental encoder:
When the zero pulse is passed, a deviation in the incremental position was detected.
For equidistant zero marks, the following applies:
- The first zero mark passed supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero marks must have
n times the distance referred to the first zero mark.
For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies:
- the first zero mark pair supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero mark pairs must have
the expected distance to the first zero mark pair.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quadrants).
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check whether the coding disk is dirty or there are strong ambient magnetic fields.
- adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425).
- if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1368 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F33135 Encoder 3: Fault when determining the position
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder supplies status information via bits in an internal status/fault word.
Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed
in the fault value.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: F1 (safety status display)
Bit 1: F2 (safety status display)
Bit 2: Lighting (reserved)
Bit 3: Signal amplitude (reserved)
Bit 4: Position value (reserved)
Bit 5: Overvoltage (reserved)
Bit 6: Undervoltage (reserved)
Bit 7: Overcurrent (reserved)
Bit 8: Battery (reserved)
Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display)
Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 25: Singleturm power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 26: Multiturn position 1 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 27: Multiturn position 2 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved)
Remedy: Replace DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
F33136 Encoder 3: Error when determining multiturn information
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder supplies status information via bits in an internal status/fault word.
Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed
in the fault value.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: F1 (safety status display)
Bit 1: F2 (safety status display)
Bit 2: Lighting (reserved)
Bit 3: Signal amplitude (reserved)
Bit 4: Position value (reserved)
Bit 5: Overvoltage (reserved)
Bit 6: Undervoltage (reserved)
Bit 7: Overcurrent (reserved)
Bit 8: Battery (reserved)
Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1369
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display)
Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 25: Singleturm power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 26: Multiturn position 1 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 27: Multiturn position 2 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved)
Remedy: Replace DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
F33137 Encoder 3: Internal error when determining the position
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Only for internal SIEMENS use.
Remedy: Replace encoder
F33138 Encoder 3: Internal error when determining multiturn information
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Only for internal SIEMENS use.
Remedy: Replace encoder
F33150 (N, A) Encoder 3: Initialization error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: Encoder functionality selected in p0404 is not operating correctly.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
The fault value is a bit field. Every set bit indicates functionality that is faulted.
The bit assignment corresponds to that of p0404 (e.g. bit 5 set: Error track C/D).
Remedy: - Check that p0404 is correctly set.
- check the encoder type used (incremental/absolute value) and for SMCxx, the encoder cable.
- if relevant, note additional fault messages that describe the fault in detail.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33151 (N, A) Encoder 3: Encoder speed for initialization AB too high
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The encoder speed is too high during while initializing the sensor.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1370 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Reduce the speed of the encoder accordingly during initialization.
If necessary, deactivate monitoring (p0437.29).
See also: p0437 (Sensor Module configuration extended)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33160 (N, A) Encoder 3: Analog sensor channel A failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range.
2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4673.
3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676).
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
- check the output voltage of the analog sensor.
Re fault value = 2:
- check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4673).
Re fault value = 3:
- check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33161 (N, A) Encoder 3: Analog sensor channel B failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range.
2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4675.
3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676).
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
- check the output voltage of the analog sensor.
Re fault value = 2:
- check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4675).
Re fault value = 3:
- check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1371
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A33400 (F, N) Encoder 3: Alarm threshold zero mark distance error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance.
For distance-coded encoders, the zero mark distance is determined from zero marks detected pairs. This means that
if a zero mark is missing, depending on the pair generation, this cannot result in a fault and also has no effect in the
system.
The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Last measured zero mark distance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse).
The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A33401 (F, N) Encoder 3: Alarm threshold zero marked failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark distance was exceeded.
The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of increments after POWER ON or since the last zero mark that was detected (4 increments = 1 encoder
pulse).
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F33405 (N, A) Encoder 3: Temperature in the encoder evaluation inadmissible
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The encoder evaluation for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ has detected an inadmissible temperature.
The fault threshold is 125 ° C.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Measured board/module temperature in 0.1 °C.
Remedy: Reduce the ambient temperature for the DRIVE-CLiQ connection of the motor.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1372 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A33407 (F, N) Encoder 3: Function limit reached
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The encoder has reached one of its function limits. A service is recommended.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1 : Incremental signals
3 : Absolute track
4 : Code connection
Remedy: Perform service. Replace the encoder if necessary.
Note:
The current functional reserve of an encoder can be displayed via r4651.
See also: p4650 (Encoder functional reserve component number), r4651 (Encoder functional reserve)
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A33410 (F, N) Encoder 3: Serial communications
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol.
Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line.
Bit 2: Encoder does not respond (does not supply a start bit within 50 ms).
Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data.
Bit 4: Encoder acknowledgement error: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute it.
Bit 5: Internal error in the serial driver: An illegal mode command was requested.
Bit 6: Timeout when cyclically reading.
Bit 8: Protocol is too long (e.g. > 64 bits).
Bit 9: Receive buffer overflow.
Bit 10: Frame error when reading twice.
Bit 11: Parity error.
Bit 12: Data line signal level error during the monoflop time.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A33411 (F, N) Encoder 3: EnDat encoder signals alarms
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The error word of the EnDat encoder has alarm bits that have been set.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Frequency exceeded (speed too high).
Bit 1: Temperature exceeded.
Bit 2: Control reserve, lighting system exceeded.
Bit 3: Battery discharged.
Bit 4: Reference point passed.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1373
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Replace encoder.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A33412 (F, N) Encoder 3: Error bit set in the serial protocol
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The encoder sends a set error bit via the serial protocol.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Fault bit in the position protocol.
Bit 1: Alarm bit in the position protocol.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A33414 (F, N) Encoder 3: Amplitude error track C or D (C^2 + D^2)
Message value: C track: %1, D track: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The amplitude (C^2 + D^2) of track C or D of the encoder or from the Hall signals, is not within the tolerance band-
width.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Signal level, track D (16 bits with sign).
xxxx = Signal level, track C (16 bits with sign).
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response thresholds are < 230 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 750 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note:
If the amplitude is not within the tolerance bandwidth, then it cannot be used to initialize the start position.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts).
- check the Hall sensor box
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1374 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
N33415 (F, A) Encoder 3: Amplitude alarm track A or B (A^2 + B^2)
Message value: Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2) for encoder 3 exceeds the permissible tolerance.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Angle
xxxx = Amplitude, i.e. root from A^2 + B^2 (16 bits without sign)
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response threshold is < 300 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder).
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 299A hex = 10650 dec.
The angle 0 ... FFFF hex corresponds to 0 ... 360 degrees of the fine position. Zero degrees is at the negative zero
crossover of track B.
Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10):
The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response threshold is < 1414 mV (1.0 Vrms).
A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 3333 hex = 13107 dec.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
Remedy: - check the speed range, frequency characteristic (amplitude characteristic) of the measuring equipment is not suf-
ficient for the speed range.
- check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts).
- if the coding disk is soiled or the lighting aged, replace the encoder.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A33418 (F, N) Encoder 3: Speed difference per sampling rate exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For an HTL/TTL encoder, the speed difference between two sampling cycles has exceeded the value in p0492.
The change to the averaged speed actual value - if applicable - is monitored in the current controller sampling time.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
See also: p0492
Remedy: - check the tachometer feeder cable for interruptions.
- check the grounding of the tachometer shielding.
- if required, increase the setting of p0492.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1375
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A33419 (F, N) Encoder 3: Track A or B outside the tolerance range
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The amplitude, phase or offset correction for track A or B is at the limit.
Amplitude error correction: Amplitude B / Amplitude A = 0.78 ... 1.27
Phase: <84 degrees or >96 degrees
SMC20: Offset correction: +/-140 mV
SMC10: Offset correction: +/-650 mV
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
xxxx1: Minimum of the offset correction, track B
xxxx2: Maximum of the offset correction, track B
xxx1x: Minimum of the offset correction, track A
xxx2x: Maximum of the offset correction, track A
xx1xx: Minimum of the amplitude correction, track B/A
xx2xx: Maximum of the amplitude correction, track B/A
x1xxx: Minimum of the phase error correction
x2xxx: Maximum of the phase error correction
1xxxx: Minimum of the cubic correction
2xxxx: Maximum of the cubic correction
Remedy: - check mechanical mounting tolerances for encoders without their own bearings (e.g. toothed-wheel encoders).
- check the plug connections (also the transition resistance).
- check the encoder signals.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A33421 (F, N) Encoder 3: Coarse position error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For the actual value sensing, an error was detected. As a result of this error, it must be assumed that the actual value
sensing supplies an incorrect coarse position.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
3: The absolute position of the serial protocol and track A/B differ by half an encoder pulse. The absolute position
must have its zero position in the quadrants in which both tracks are negative. In the case of a fault, the position can
be incorrect by one encoder pulse.
Remedy: Re alarm value = 3:
- for a standard encoder with cable, if required, contact the manufacturer.
- correct the assignment of the tracks to the position value that is serially transferred. To do this, the two tracks must
be connected, inverted, at the Sensor Module (interchange A with A* and B with B*) or, for a programmable encoder,
check the zero offset of the position.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1376 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A33422 (F, N) Encoder 3: Pulses per revolution square-wave encoder outside tolerance bandwidth
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance.
This alarm is triggered with active square-wave encoder PPR correction and re-parameterized fault 31131 if the
accumulator contains larger values than p4683 or p4684.
The zero mark distance for zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
accumulated differential pulses in encoder pulses.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A33429 (F, N) Encoder 3: Position difference, hall sensor/track C/D and A/B too large
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The error for track C/D is greater than +/-15 ° mechanical or +/-60 ° electrical or the error for the Hall signals is greater
than +/-60 ° electrical.
One period of track C/D corresponds to 360 ° mechanical.
One period of the Hall signal corresponds to 360 ° electrical.
The monitoring responds if, for example, Hall sensors are connected as equivalent for the C/D tracks with the incor-
rect rotational sense or supply values that are not accurate enough.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
For track C/D, the following applies:
Measured deviation as mechanical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 °).
For Hall signals, the following applies:
Measured deviation as electrical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 °).
Remedy: - track C or D not connected.
- correct the direction of rotation of the Hall sensor possibly connected as equivalent for track C/D.
- check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the adjustment of the Hall sensor.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1377
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A33431 (F, N) Encoder 3: Deviation, position incremental/absolute too large
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When the zero pulse is passed, a deviation in the incremental position was detected.
For equidistant zero marks, the following applies:
- The first zero mark passed supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero marks must have
n times the distance referred to the first zero mark.
For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies:
- the first zero mark pair supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero mark pairs must have
the expected distance to the first zero mark pair.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quadrants).
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- Clean coding disk or remove strong magnetic fields.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A33432 (F, N) Encoder 3: Rotor position adaptation corrects deviation
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For track A/B, pulses have been lost or too many have been counted. These pulses are presently being corrected.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Last measured deviation of the zero mark distance in increments (4 incre-
ments = 1 encoder pulse). The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
- check encoder limit frequency.
- adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425).
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A33442 (F, N) Encoder 3: Battery voltage pre-alarm
Message value: -
Drive object: ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy: - replace battery.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1378 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A33443 (F, N) Encoder 3: Unipolar CD signal level outside specification
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The unipolar level (CP/CN or DP/DN) for encoder 3 is outside the permissible tolerance.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Either CP or CN outside the tolerance.
Bit 16 = 1: Either DP or DN outside the tolerance.
The unipolar nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 2500 mV +/- 500 mV.
The response thresholds are < 1700 mV and > 3300 mV.
Note:
The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied:
- Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1).
- Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1).
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable.
- are the C/D tracks connected correctly (have the signal lines CP and CN or DP and DN been interchanged)?
- replace the encoder cable.
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A33460 (N) Encoder 3: Analog sensor channel A failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range.
2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4673.
3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676).
Remedy: Re alarm value = 1:
- check the output voltage of the analog sensor.
Re alarm value = 2:
- check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4673).
Re alarm value = 3:
- check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A33461 (N) Encoder 3: Analog sensor channel B failed
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range.
2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4675.
3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1379
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Re alarm value = 1:
- check the output voltage of the analog sensor.
Re alarm value = 2:
- check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4675).
Re alarm value = 3:
- check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A33462 (N) Encoder 3: Analog sensor, no channel active
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Channel A and B are not activated for the analog sensor.
Remedy: - activate channel A and/or channel B (p4670).
- check the encoder configuration (p0404.17).
See also: p4670 (Analog sensor configuration)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A33470 (F, N) Encoder 3: Soiling detected
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the case of the alternative encoder system interface on the Sensor Module Cabinet 30 (SMC30), encoder soiling
is signaled via a 0 signal at terminal X521.7.
Remedy: - check the plug connections
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F33500 (N, A) Encoder 3: Position tracking traversing range exceeded
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For a configured linear axis without modulo correction, the drive/encoder has exceeded the maximum possible tra-
versing range. The value should be read in p0412 and interpreted as the number of motor revolutions.
For p0411.0 = 1, the maximum traversing range for the configured linear axis is defined to be 64x (+/- 32x) of p0421.
For p0411.3 = 1, the maximum traversing range for the configured linear axis is preset (default value) to the highest
possible value and is +/-p0412/2 (rounded off to complete revolutions). The highest possible value depends on the
pulse number (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419).
Remedy: The fault should be resolved as follows:
- select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4).
- reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1).
- deselect encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0).
The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1380 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F33501 (N, A) Encoder 3: Position tracking encoder position outside tolerance window
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When powered down, the drive/encoder was moved through a distance greater than was parameterized in the tol-
erance window. It is possible that there is no longer any reference between the mechanical system and encoder.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Deviation (difference) to the last encoder position in increments of the absolute value.
The sign designates the traversing direction.
Note:
The deviation (difference) found is also displayed in r0477.
See also: p0413 (Measuring gear, position tracking tolerance window), r0477 (Measuring gear, position difference)
Remedy: Reset the position tracking as follows:
- select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4).
- reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1).
- deselect encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0).
The fault should then be acknowledged and, if necessary, the absolute encoder adjusted (p2507).
See also: p0010
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33502 (N, A) Encoder 3: Encoder with measuring gear, without valid signals
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The encoder with measuring gear no longer provides any valid signals.
Remedy: It must be ensured that all of the encoders, with mounted measuring gear, provide valid actual values in operation.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33503 (N, A) Encoder 3: Position tracking cannot be reset
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The position tracking for the measuring gear cannot be reset.
Remedy: The fault should be resolved as follows:
- select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4).
- reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1).
- deselect encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0).
The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1381
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A33700 Encoder 3: Effectivity test does not supply the expected value
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit x = 1: Effectivity test x unsuccessful.
Remedy:
N33800 (F) Encoder 3: Group signal
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The motor encoder has detected at least one fault.
Remedy: Evaluates other actual messages.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
F33801 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33802 (N, A) Encoder 3: Time slice overflow
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Time slice overflow, encoder 3.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
9: Time slice overflow of the fast (current controller clock cycle) time slice.
10: Time slice overflow of the average time slice.
12: Time slice overflow of the slow time slice.
999: Timeout when waiting for SYNO, e.g. unexpected return to non-cyclic operation.
Remedy: Reduce the current controller frequency.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1382 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F33804 (N, A) Encoder 3: Checksum error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A checksum error has occurred when reading-out the program memory on the Sensor Module.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex
yyyy: Memory area involved.
xxxx: Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum.
Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained.
- replace the Sensor Module.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33805 (N, A) Encoder 3: EPROM checksum error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
01: EEPROM access error.
02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM.
Remedy: Replace the module.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33806 (N, A) Encoder 3: Initialization error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The encoder was not successfully initialized.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Bit 0,1: Encoder initialization with the motor rotating has failed (deviation involving coarse and fine position in encoder
pulse/4)
Bit 2: Mid-voltage matching for track A unsuccessful.
Bit 3: Mid-voltage matching for track B unsuccessful.
Bit 4: Mid-voltage matching for acceleration input (under development) unsuccessful.
Bit 5: Mid-voltage matching for track safety A unsuccessful.
Bit 6: Mid-voltage matching for track safety B unsuccessful.
Bit 7: Mid-voltage matching for track C unsuccessful.
Bit 8: Mid-voltage matching for track D unsuccessful.
Bit 9: Mid-voltage matching for track R unsuccessful.
Bit 10: The difference in mid-voltages between A and B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 11: The difference in mid-voltages between C and D is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 12: The difference in mid-voltages between safety A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 13: The difference in mid-voltages between A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 14: The difference in mid-voltages between B and safety A is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 15: The standard deviation of the calculated mid-voltages is too great (> 0.3 V)
Bit 16: Internal fault - fault reading a register (CAFE)
Bit 17: Internal fault - fault writing a register (CAFE)
Bit 18: Internal fault: No mid-voltage matching available
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1383
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Bit 19: Internal error - ADC access error.
Bit 20: Internal error - no zero crossover found.
Bit 0,1 : Up to 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A0
Bits 2..20 : 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A1 and higher
Remedy: Acknowledge the fault.
If the fault cannot be acknowledged:
Bits 2 - 9: Check encoder power supply,
Bits 2 -14: Check the corresponding cable,
Bit 15 with no other bits: Check track R, check settings in p404.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33811 (N, A) Encoder 3: Encoder serial number changed
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The encoder serial number has changed. The change is only checked for encoders with serial number (e.g. EnDat
encoders).
Cause:
The encoder was replaced.
Note:
With closed-loop position control, the serial number is accepted when starting the adjustment (p2507 = 2).
When the encoder is adjusted (p2507 = 3), the serial number is checked for changes and if required, the adjustment
is reset (p2507 = 1).
Proceed as follows to hide serial number monitoring:
- set the following serial numbers for the corresponding Encoder Data Set: p0441= FF, p0442 = 0, p0442 = 0, p0444
= 0, p0445 = 0.
Remedy: Mechanically adjust the encoder. Accept the new serial number with p0440 = 1.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33812 (N, A) Encoder 3: Requested cycle or RX-/TX timing not supported
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A cycle requested from the Control Unit or RX/TX timing is not supported.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0: Application cycle is not supported.
1: DQ cycle is not supported.
2: Distance between RX and TX instants in time too low.
3: TX instant in time too early.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1384 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F33813 Encoder 3: Hardware logic unit failed
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: ALU watchdog has responded.
Bit 1: ALU has detected a sign-of-life error.
Remedy: Replace encoder
F33820 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 02 hex:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 03 hex:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 04 hex:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 05 hex:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 06 hex:
The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 07 hex:
A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram.
xx = 08 hex:
No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one.
xx = 09 hex:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1385
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F33835 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. The nodes do not
send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 21 hex:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
xx = 40 hex:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33836 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. Data were not able
to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33837 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1386 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33845 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33850 (N, A) Encoder 3: Encoder evaluation, internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An internal software error has occurred in the Sensor Module of encoder 3.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Background time slice is blocked.
2: Checksum over the code memory is not OK.
10000: OEM memory of the EnDat encoder contains data that cannot be interpreted.
11000 ... 11499: Descriptive data from EEPROM incorrect.
11500 ... 11899: Calibration data from EEPROM incorrect.
11900 ... 11999: Configuration data from EEPROM incorrect.
16000: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization application error.
16001: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization ALU error.
16002: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder HISI / SISI initialization error.
16003: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder safety initialization error.
16004: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder internal system error.
Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module.
- if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module.
- contact the Hotline.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1387
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F33851 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 3) involved to the Control Unit.
The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex = 10 dec:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33860 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 3) involved to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 11 hex = 17 dec:
CRC error and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 01 hex = 01 dec:
Checksum error (CRC error).
xx = 12 hex = 18 dec:
The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 02 hex = 02 dec:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 13 hex = 19 dec:
The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 03 hex = 03 dec:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 14 hex = 20 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 04 hex = 04 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 15 hex = 21 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 05 hex = 05 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 16 hex = 22 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too
early.
xx = 06 hex = 06 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 19 hex = 25 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 09 hex = 09 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
The receive telegram is too early.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1388 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33885 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 3) involved to the Control Unit.
The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 1A hex = 26 dec:
Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
xx = 62 hex = 98 dec:
Error at the transition to cyclic operation.
Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved.
- carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33886 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 3) involved to the Control Unit.
Data were not able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1389
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F33887 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved (Sensor Module for encoder 3). Faulty hardware cannot be
excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 60 hex:
Response received too late during runtime measurement.
xx = 61 hex:
Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33895 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 3) involved to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33896 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Sensor Module for encoder 3), specified by the fault value, have
changed in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a
DRIVE-CLiQ cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Component number.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1390 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be
used.
- when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the orig-
inal cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F33899 (N, A) Encoder 3: Unknown fault
Message value: New message: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: A fault occurred on the Sensor Module for encoder 3 that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Fault number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Sensor Module by an older firmware version (r0148).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A33902 (F, N) Encoder 3: SPI-BUS error occurred
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Error when operating the internal SPI bus.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module.
- if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module.
- contact the Hotline.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A33903 (F, N) Encoder 3: I2C-BUS error occurred
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Error when operating the internal I2C bus.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1391
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module.
- if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module.
- contact the Hotline.
Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F33905 (N, A) Encoder 3: Parameterization error
Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A parameter of encoder 3 was detected as being incorrect.
It is possible that the parameterized encoder type does not match the connected encoder.
The parameter involved can be determined as follows:
- determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949).
- determine the parameter index (p0187).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = parameter
Supplementary information = 0:
No information available.
Supplementary information = 1:
The component does not support HTL level (p0405.1 = 0) combined with track monitoring A/B <> -A/B (p0405.2 = 1).
Supplementary information = 2:
A code number for an identified encoder has been entered into p0400, however, no identification was carried out.
Please start a new encoder identification.
Supplementary information = 3:
A code number for an identified encoder has been entered into p0400, however, no identification was carried out.
Please select a listed encoder in p0400 with a code number < 10000.
Supplementary information = 4:
This component does not support SSI encoders (p0404.9 = 1) without track A/B.
Supplementary information = 5:
For SQW encoder, value in p4686 greater than in p0425.
Supplementary information = 6:
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder cannot be used with this firmware version.
Supplementary information = 7:
For the SQW encoder, the Xact1 correction (p0437.2) is only permitted with equidistant zero marks.
Remedy: - check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized.
- correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187.
- re parameter number 314: Check the pole pair number and measuring gear ratio. The quotient of the "pole pair
number" divided by the "measuring gear ratio" must be less than or equal to 1000 ((r0313 * p0433) / p0432 <= 1000).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A33915 (F, N) Encoder 3: Configuration error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The configuration for encoder 3 is incorrect.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Re-parameterization between fault/alarm is not permissible.
419: When the fine resolution Gx_ACT2 is configured, the encoder identifies a maximum possible absolute position
actual value (r0483) that can no longer be represented within 32 bits.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1392 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: 1: No re-parameterization between fault/alarm.
419: Reduce the fine resolution (p0419).
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F33916 (N, A) Encoder 3: Parameterization fault
Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A parameter of encoder 3 was detected as being incorrect.
It is possible that the parameterized encoder type does not match the connected encoder.
The parameter involved can be determined as follows:
- determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949).
- determine the parameter index (p0187).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number.
Note:
This fault is only output for encoders where r0404.10 = 1 or r0404.11 = 1. It corresponds to A33905 with encoders
where r0404.10 = 0 and r0404.11 = 0.
Remedy: - check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized.
- correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A33920 (F, N) Encoder 3: Temperature sensor fault
Message value: Fault cause: %1, channel number: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Low word low byte: Cause:
1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm).
2: Measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm).
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Low word high byte: Channel number.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cable is the correct type and is correctly connected.
- check the temperature sensor selection in p0600 to p0603.
- replace the Sensor Module (hardware defect or incorrect calibration data).
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1393
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A33999 (F, N) Encoder 3: Unknown alarm
Message value: New message: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A alarm has occurred on the Sensor Module for encoder 3 that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Alarm number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Sensor Module by an older firmware version (r0148).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F34207 (N, A) VSM: Temperature fault threshold exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The temperature (r3666) measured using the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) has exceeded the threshold value
(p3668).
Note:
This fault can only be initiated if the temperature evaluation was activated (p3665 = 2 for a KTY sensor or p3665 =
1 for a PTC sensor).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
yyxxxx dec:
yy: Component number of the component which detected the fault.
Remedy: - check the fan.
- reduce the power.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A34211 (F, N) VSM: Temperature alarm threshold exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature (r3666) measured using the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) has exceeded the threshold value
(p3667).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The hundred-thousands and ten-thousands position specifies the component number of the VSM which detected the
fault.
Remedy: - check the fan.
- reduce the power.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1394 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
N34800 (F) VSM: Group signal
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) has detected at least one fault.
Remedy: Evaluates other actual messages.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
F34801 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
- replace the Terminal Module.
F34802 VSM: Time slice overflow
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Time slice overflow on the Voltage Sensing Module.
Remedy: Replace the Voltage Sensing Module.
F34803 VSM: Memory test
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error has occurred during the memory test on the Voltage Sensing Module.
Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the Voltage Sensing Module is being maintained.
- replace the Voltage Sensing Module.
F34804 VSM: CRC
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A checksum error has occurred when reading-out the program memory on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained.
- replace the Voltage Sensing Module.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1395
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F34805 VSM: EPROM checksum error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
01: EEPROM access error.
02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM.
Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained.
- replace the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
F34806 VSM: Initialization
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM), a fault has occurred while initializing.
Remedy: Replace the Voltage Sensing Module.
A34807 (F, N) VSM: Sequence control time monitoring
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Error, timeout in the sequence control on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Remedy: Replace the Voltage Sensing Module.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F34820 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 02 hex:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 03 hex:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 04 hex:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 05 hex:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 06 hex:
The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 07 hex:
A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram.
xx = 08 hex:
No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1396 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
xx = 09 hex:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
F34835 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module. The nodes
do not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 21 hex:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
xx = 40 hex:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
F34836 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module. Data were
not able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
F34837 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1397
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
F34845 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
F34850 VSM: Internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An internal software error in the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Background time slice is blocked.
2: Checksum over the code memory is not OK.
Remedy: - replace the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
- if required, upgrade the firmware in the Voltage Sensing Module.
- contact the Hotline.
F34851 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) to the Control Unit.
The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex = 10 dec:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved.
F34860 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 11 hex = 17 dec:
CRC error and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 01 hex = 01 dec:
Checksum error (CRC error).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1398 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
xx = 12 hex = 18 dec:
The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 02 hex = 02 dec:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 13 hex = 19 dec:
The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 03 hex = 03 dec:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 14 hex = 20 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 04 hex = 04 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 15 hex = 21 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 05 hex = 05 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 16 hex = 22 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too
early.
xx = 06 hex = 06 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 19 hex = 25 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 09 hex = 09 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
F34885 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) to the Control Unit.
The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 1A hex = 26 dec:
Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
xx = 62 hex = 98 dec:
Error at the transition to cyclic operation.
Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved.
- carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1399
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F34886 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) to the Control Unit.
Data were not able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
F34887 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Voltage Sensing Module) involved. Faulty hardware cannot be
excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 60 hex:
Response received too late during runtime measurement.
xx = 61 hex:
Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
F34895 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1400 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F34896 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Voltage Sensing Module), specified by the fault value, have changed
in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ
cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Component number.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be
used.
- when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the orig-
inal cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length).
F34897 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): no communication with component
Message value: Preliminary component number: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Communication with the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Voltage Sensing Module) specified by the fault value is not pos-
sible.
One cause may, for example, be that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable has been withdrawn.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Component ID.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connections.
- carry out a POWER ON.
F34899 (N, A) VSM: Unknown fault
Message value: New message: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: A fault occurred on the Voltage Sensing Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Fault number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Voltage Sensing Module by an older firmware version (r0158).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A34903 (F, N) VSM: I2C bus error occurred
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error has occurred when accessing the module-internal I2C bus.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1401
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: Replace the Terminal Module.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A34904 (F, N) VSM: EEPROM
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error has occurred accessing the non-volatile memory on the Terminal Module.
Remedy: Replace Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A34905 (F, N) VSM: Parameter access
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The Control Unit attempted to write an illegal parameter value to the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Remedy: - check whether the firmware version of the VSM (r0158) matches the firmware version of Control Unit (r0018).
- if required, replace the Voltage Sensing Module.
Note:
The firmware versions that match each other are in the readme.txt file on the memory card.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A34920 (F, N) VSM: Temperature sensor fault
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm).
2: Measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm).
Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
- replace the sensor.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1402 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A34999 (F, N) VSM: Unknown alarm
Message value: New message: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A fault occurred on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) an alarm has occurred that cannot be interpreted by the Con-
trol Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Alarm number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Voltage Sensing Module by an older firmware version (r0148).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F35000 TM54F: Sampling time invalid
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: The set sampling time is invalid.
- not a multiple integer of the DP clock cycle.
Fault value (r0949, floating point):
Recommended valid sampling time.
Remedy: Adapt the sampling time (e.g. set the recommended valid sampling time).
See also: p10000 (SI sampling time)
F35001 TM54F: Parameter value invalid
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The entered value is invalid.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number with the invalid value.
Remedy: Correct the parameter value.
F35002 TM54F: Commissioning not possible
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The commissioning mode setting was rejected because for at least one drive belonging to the TM54F, the pulses
had not been suppressed.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Drive object number of the first drive found without pulse suppression.
Remedy: Cancel the pulses for the drive specified in the fault value.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1403
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F35003 TM54F: Acknowledgement on the Control Unit is required
Message value: -
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault on the Terminal Module 54F (TM54) was acknowledged using the safe acknowledgement (P10006).
An additional acknowledgement is also required at the Control Unit.
Remedy: Acknowledge the fault at the Control Unit.
F35011 TM54F: Drive object number assignment illegal
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: A drive object number was assigned twice. Each drive object number can be assigned only once.
Remedy: Correct the assignment of the drive object numbers.
See also: p10010 (SI drive object assignment)
A35012 TM54F: Test stop active
Message value: -
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The test stop for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) is presently being executed.
F35013 is output when a error occurs during the test stop.
Remedy: The alarm disappears automatically after successfully ending or canceling (when a fault condition occurs) the test
stop.
F35013 TM54F: Test stop error
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An error was detected when carrying out the test stop on the TM54F. As fault response fail-safe input terminal signals
are transferred to the motion monitoring functions.
Fault value 0xaaaabbcc hex (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
aaaa: Specifies the DOs or F-DIs (dependent on test step cc) for which the expected state was not assumed. The
number is bit-coded (bit 0 = F-DI 0 or F-DO 0; bit 3 = F-DI 3 or F-DO 3).
bb: Describes the cause of the fault
0x01 = Internal error (error state on the opposite side).
0x02 = Fault during comparison of switching signals: FDIs or DIs
0x03 = Internal error (delay time in the new state has still not expired).
0x04 = Fault during comparison of switching signals: DiagDOs
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1404 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
cc: Describes the test step of the test stop in which the fault occurred
The information below is displayed in the following format:
Test stop step slave : (test actions)(test actions) | Step Master : (test actions)(test actions)
| Description
List of test stop steps:
0x00:(L1+OFF)(L2+ON) | 0x0A:(=)(=) | Synchronization / Switching step
0x0A:(L1+OFF)(L2+ON) | 0x15:(=)(=) | Wait step
0x15:(L1+OFF)(L2+OFF) | 0x20:(=) (=) | FDIs 0..4 Test for 0 V / Switching step
0x20:(L1+OFF)(L2+OFF) | 0x2B(=) (=) | Wait step
0x2B:(L1+ON)(L2+ON) | 0x36:(=) (=) | FDIs 5..9 Test for 0 V / Switching step
0x36:(DO OFF)() | 0x41:(DO OFF)() | Wait step / Switching step
0x41:(DO OFF)() | 0x4C:(DO OFF)() | Wait step
0x4C:(DO ON)() | 0x57:(DO ON)() | Test DiagDOs or DiagDI / Switching step
0x57:(DO ON)() | 0x62:(DO ON)() | Wait step
0x62:(DO OFF)() | 0x6D:(DO ON)() | Test DiagDOs or DiagDI / Switching step
0x6D:(DO OFF)() | 0x78:(DO ON)() | Wait step
0x78:(DO ON)() | 0x83:(DO OFF)() | Test DiagDOs or DiagDI / Switching step
0x83:(DO ON)() | 0x8E:(DO OFF)() | Wait step
0x8E:(DO OFF)() | 0x99:(DO OFF)() | Test DiagDOs or DiagDI / Switching step
0x99:(DO OFF)() | 0xA4:(DO OFF)() | Wait step
0xA4:(DO OFF)() | 0xAF:(DO OFF)() | Test DiagDOs or DiagDI
0xAF:(DO original state)() | 0xC5:(DO original state)() | Switching step
0xC5: End of test
The following expected states are tested in the test steps when testing the FDOs:
The information below is displayed in the following format:
Test step (SL MA): Expected DiagDO mode 1 | Expected DI20..23 mode 2 | Expected DI20..23 mode 3
(0x4C 0x57): DiagDO=0V | DI=24V | DI=24V
(0x62 0x6D): DiagDO=0V | DI=0V | DI=0V
(0x78 0x83): DiagDO=0V | DI=0V | DI=24V
(0x8E 0x99): DiagDO=24V | DI=0V | DI=24V
(0xA4 0xAF): DiagDO=0V | DI=24V | DI=24V
Example:
If an error with fault causes (bb) 0x02 or 0x04 occurs in a test stop step, the test action for the fault took place in the
previous test stop step. The expected states are tested in the next step.
Master signals fault value 0001_04AF and slave signals fault value 0001_04A4.
aaaa = 1 i.e. FDO 0 affected
bb = 04h i.e. testing of DiagFDO has failed
cc = The expected states were tested in test stop step AF on the master and A4 on the slave. Expected state
DiagDO=0V is being tested in the table; in other words, the Diag DO was at 0 V instead of the expected 24 V. The
associated test action took place in the previous step (0x99 DO OFF 0xA4 DO OFF). Both DOs were switched to
OFF.
Remedy: Check the wiring of the F-DIs and F-DOs and restart the test stop. The fault is withdrawn if the test stop is success-
fully completed.
Fault values 0xCCCCCCCC / 0xDDDDDDDD / 0xEEEEEEEE : These fault values are triggered together with alarm
35152. If they appear, you should check all test stop parameters. You should also check whether the firmware ver-
sion of the TM54F matches the Control Unit's software version.
You also need to check P10001, P10017, P10046, and P10047.
A35014 TM54F: Test stop required
Message value: -
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - after powering up the drive, a test stop has still not been carried out.
- a new test stop is required after commissioning.
- the time to carry out the forced checking procedure (test stop) has expired (p10003).
Remedy: Initiate test stop (BI: p10007).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1405
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A35015 TM54F: Communication with drive not established
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Cyclic communication of one or several drives with the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) is not active.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: No communication with drive 1.
...
Bit 5 = 1: No communication with drive 6.
For fault value = 0, the following applies:
The number of drive objects specified in p10010 is not equal to the number of drives that have drive-based motion
monitoring functions that have been enabled.
The drive object number for drive n is set in p10010[n-1].
When this fault is present, none of the drives that have drive-based motion monitoring functions operating with
TM54F, are enabled.
Remedy: For all drive objects specified in p10010, check whether the drive-based motion monitoring functions with TM54F are
enabled (p9601).
A35016 TM54F: Net data communication with drive not established
Message value: -
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The cyclic net data communication within the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) is still not active.
This message is output after the TM54F master and TM54F slave have booted and is automatically withdrawn as
soon as communications have been established.
If a drive does not communicate with the TM54F, then none of the drives parameterized in p10010 are enabled.
Remedy: When replacing a Motor Module, carry out the following steps:
- start the copy function for the node identifier on the TM54F (p9700 = 1D hex).
- acknowledge the hardware CRC on the TM54F (p9701 = EC hex).
- save all parameters (p0977 = 1).
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
The following always applies:
- for all drive objects specified in p10010, check whether the drive-based motion monitoring functions with TM54F
are enabled (p9601).
- check whether fault F35150 is present and if required, remove the cause of the fault.
See also: r10055 (SI TM54F communication status drive-specific)
F35040 TM54F: 24 V undervoltage
Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For the 24 V power supply for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) an undervoltage condition was detected.
As fault response fail-safe input terminal signals are transferred to the motion monitoring functions.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Power supply undervoltage at connection X524.
Bit 1 = 1: Power supply undervoltage at connection X514.
Remedy: - check the 24 V DC power supply for the TM54F.
- carry out safe acknowledgement (p10006).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1406 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F35043 TM54F: 24 V overvoltage
Message value: -
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For the 24 V power supply for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) an overvoltage condition was detected.
As fault response fail-safe input terminal signals are transferred to the motion monitoring functions.
Remedy: - check the 24 V DC power supply for the TM54F.
- carry out safe acknowledgement (p10006).
F35051 TM54F: Defect in a monitoring channel
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) has identified an error in the data cross check between the two control channels.
As fault response fail-safe input terminal signals are transferred to the motion monitoring functions.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
aaaabbcc hex
aaaa: A value greater than zero indicates an internal software error.
bb: Data to be cross-checked that resulted in the error.
bb = 00 hex: p10000
bb = 01 hex: p10001
bb = 02 hex: p10002
bb = 03 hex: p10006
bb = 04 hex: p10008
bb = 05 hex: p10010
bb = 06 hex: p10011
bb = 07 hex: p10020
bb = 08 hex: p10021
bb = 09 hex: p10022
bb = 0A hex: p10023
bb = 0B hex: p10024
bb = 0C hex: p10025
bb = 0D hex: p10026
bb = 0E hex: p10027
bb = 0F hex: p10028
bb = 10 hex: p10036
bb = 11 hex: p10037
bb = 12 hex: p10038
bb = 13 hex: p10039
bb = 14 hex: p10040
bb = 15 hex: p10041
bb = 16 hex: p10042
bb = 17 hex: p10043
bb = 18 hex: p10044
bb = 19 hex: p10045
bb = 1A hex: p10046
bb = 1B hex: Test stop internal p10041
bb = 1C hex: Test stop internal p10046
bb = 1D hex: - 1F hex test stop internal p10017, p10002, p10000
bb = 20 hex: - 2A hex test stop internal p10040
bb = 2B hex: Test stop initialization
bb = 2C hex: Input/output calculation initialization
bb = 2D hex: - 45 hex internal data for output calculation, P10042 - P10045
bb = 46 hex - 63 hex data for SGE calculation of drive group 1
bb = 64 hex - 81 hex data for SGE calculation of drive group 2
bb = 82 hex - 9F hex data for SGE calculation of drive group 3
bb = A0 hex - BD hex data for SGE calculation of drive group 4
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1407
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
bb = BE hex debounce time of FDI inputs, P10017
bb = BF hex debounce time of DI inputs, P10017
bb = C0 hex debounce time of diag inputs, P10017
cc: Index of the data to be cross-checked that resulted in the error.
Remedy: Carry out the following steps on the TM54F:
- activate the safety commissioning mode (p0010 = 95).
- start the copy function for SI parameters (p9700 = 57 hex).
- acknowledge complete data change (p9701 = AC hex).
- exit the safety commissioning mode (p0010 = 0).
- save all parameters (p0977 = 1).
- carry out safe acknowledgement (p10006).
For an internal software error (aaaa greater than zero):
- upgrade the software on the TM54F.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the TM54F.
F35052 (A) TM54F: Internal hardware error
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An internal software/hardware error has been detected on the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- upgrade TM54F firmware to more recent version.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the TM54F.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F35053 TM54F: Temperature fault threshold exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The temperature measured using the temperature sensing on the TM54F has exceeded the threshold value to initi-
ate this fault.
As fault response fail-safe input terminal signals are transferred to the motion monitoring functions.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - allow the TM54F to cool down.
- carry out safe acknowledgement (p10006).
A35054 TM54F: Temperature alarm threshold exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature measured using the temperature sensing on the TM54F has exceeded the threshold value to initi-
ate this alarm.
Remedy: - allow the TM54F to cool down.
- carry out safe acknowledgement (p10006).
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1408 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A35075 (F) TM54F: Error during internal communication
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An internal communications error has occurred in the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
This alarm can also occur if the TM54F exists and no safety function has yet been parameterized.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens diagnostics.
Remedy: For internal communication errors:
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- upgrade the software on the TM54F.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the TM54F.
If TM54F exists and no safety function has yet been parameterized:
- None necessary. The alarm disappears automatically after a safety function has been parameterized.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
A35080 (F) TM54F: Checksum error safety parameters
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The calculated checksum entered in r10004 over the safety-relevant parameters does not match the reference
checksum saved in p10005 at the last machine acceptance.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Checksum error for functional SI parameters.
2: Checksum error for SI parameters for component assignment.
Remedy: - check the safety-relevant parameters and if required, correct.
- set the reference checksum to the actual checksum.
- acknowledge that hardware was replaced
- carry out a POWER ON.
- carry out an acceptance test.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
A35081 (F) TM54F: Static (steady state) 1 signal at the F-DI for safety-relevant acknowledgement
Message value: -
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A logical 1 signal is present at the F-DI configured in p10006 for more than 10 seconds. A logical 0 signal must be
present statically (steady-state) at the F-DI. This avoids unintentional safety-relevant acknowledgement (or the
"Internal Event Acknowledge" signal) if a wire breaks or one of the two digital inputs bounces.
Remedy: Set F-DI (see p10006) to logical 0 signal.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1409
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F35150 TM54F: Communication error
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: A communication error between the TM54F master and Control Unit or between the TM54F slave and the Motor
Module was detected.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: When replacing a Motor Module, carry out the following steps:
- start the copy function for the node identifier on the TM54F (p9700 = 1D hex).
- acknowledge the hardware CRC on the TM54F (p9701 = EC hex).
- save all parameters (p0977 = 1).
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
The following always applies:
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- upgrade the software on the TM54F.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the TM54F.
F35151 TM54F: Discrepancy error
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The safety input terminals or output terminals show a different state longer than that parameterized in p10002.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex
xxxx:
The safety-relevant input terminals F-DI indicate a discrepancy.
Bit 0: Discrepancy for F-DI 0
...
Bit 9: Discrepancy for F-DI 9
yyyy:
The safety-relevant output terminals F-DO indicate a discrepancy.
Bit 0: Discrepancy for F-DO 0
...
Bit 3: Discrepancy for F-DO 3
Note:
If several discrepancy errors occur consecutively, then this fault is only signaled for the first error that occurs.
The following possibilities exist of diagnosing all of the discrepancy errors:
- in the commissioning software, evaluate the input states and output states of the TM54F. All discrepancy errors are
displayed here.
- compare parameters p10051 and p10052 from the TM54F master and TM54F slave for discrepancy.
Remedy: Check the wiring of the F-DI and F-DO (contact problems).
Note:
A discrepancy of the F-DO also occurs (in this special case, in conjunction with fault F35150 for the TM54F slave),
if, after replacing a Motor Module, it was forgotten to acknowledge this.
When replacing a Motor Module, carry out the following steps:
- start the copy function for the node identifier on the TM54F (p9700 = 1D hex).
- acknowledge the hardware CRC on the TM54F (p9701 = EC hex).
- save all parameters (p0977 = 1).
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
Discrepancy errors in the F-DIs can only be completely acknowledged if, after the cause of the error was resolved,
safe acknowledgement was carried out (see p10006). As long as safety acknowledgement was not carried out, the
corresponding F-DI stays in the safe state.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1410 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Where switching operations recur cyclically on the FDIs, the discrepancy time must be parameterized as follows:
td = possible actual discrepancy time (in ms) that can occur with a switching operation. This must correspond to at
least 1 SI sampling cycle (see p10000).
tp = period for a switching operation in ms.
The following rules must be adhered to:
p10002 < (tp/2) - td (discrepancy time must be less than half the period minus the actual discrepancy time)
p10002 > = p10000 (discrepancy time must be no less than P10000)
p10002 > td (discrepancy time must be greater than the switch discrepancy time which may actually apply)
Example: If SI sampling cycle is 12 ms and switching frequency is 110 ms, the maximum discrepancy time which
can be set is as follows:
p10002 < = 110ms/2 - 12ms = 43mS; this rounds off to P10002 <= 36 ms.
(Since the sampling time can only be accepted as a whole SI sampling cycle, the value will need to be rounded up
or down to a whole SI sampling time value if it is not an exact multiple of an SI sampling cycle.)
F35152 TM54F: Internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An internal software error has occurred in the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
The fail-safe digital inputs and digital outputs (F-DI, F-DO) on the TM54F have been set to the safe state.
Note:
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output
Remedy: Check that the firmware version of the TM54F matches the Control Unit's firmware version.
The automatic firmware update must be activated in the project.
Note:
This signal will also appear, for example, in conjunction with signal 35013. In this case you should check all the
parameters for the test stop on the TM54F (p10001, p10003, p10007, p10041, p10046, p10047).
A35200 (F, N) TM: Calibration data
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error was detected in the calibration data of the Terminal Module.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The hundred-thousands and ten-thousands position specifies the component ID of the Terminal Module which
detected the fault.
The thousands location specifies whether the analog input 0 (=0) or analog output 1 (= 1) is involved.
The hundreds location specifies the fault type:
No calibration data available.
1: Offset too high (> 100 mV).
The tens and ones location specifies the number of the input involved.
Remedy: Power down the unit and power up again.
If the fault is still present, replace the module/board.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1411
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F35207 (N, A) TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 1 exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: For the temperature evaluation via the Terminal Module (TM), at least one of the following conditions to initiate this
fault is fulfilled:
- alarm threshold has been exceeded longer than that set in the timer stage (p4102[0], p4103).
or
- fault threshold exceeded (p4102[1]).
Note:
For PTC, the following applies:
- if r4101 > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105 = 250 °C
- if r4101 <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105 = -50 °C
The measured temperature is displayed in r4105.
This fault can only be initiated if temperature evaluation was activated (p4100 = 2 for KTY sensor or p4100 = 1 for
PTC sensor or p4100 = 4 for bimetal).
Notice:
This fault only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and the
Terminal Module.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
yyxxxx dec:
yy: Component number of the component which detected the fault.
xxxx: Temperature value multiplied by 10 at the point of initiation
Remedy: - reduce ambient temperature of temperature sensor to below p4102[1] hysteresis.
- if required, set the fault response to NONE (p2100, p2101).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A35211 (F, N) TM: Temperature alarm threshold channel 1 exceeded
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature measured using the temperature sensing of the Terminal Module (TM) (r4105) has exceeded the
threshold value to initiate this alarm (p4102[0]).
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The hundred-thousands and ten-thousands position specifies the component number of the component which
detected the fault.
For PTC, the following applies:
- if r4101 > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105 = 250 °C
- if r4101 <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105 = -50 °C
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
yyxxxx dec:
yy: Component number of the component where the fault occurred.
xxxx: Temperature value multiplied by 10 at the point of initiation
Remedy: Cool temperature sensor to below p4102[0] hysteresis.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1412 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F35220 (N, A) TM: Frequency limit reached for signal output
Message value: -
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The signals output from the Terminal Module 41 (TM41) for tracks A/B have reached the limit frequency. The output
signals are no longer in synchronism with the specified setpoint.
Note:
If with SIMOTION the TM41 has been configured as the technology project, this fault is also output in response to
short-circuited A/B signals in X520.
Remedy: SIMOTION (p4400 = 0) operating mode:
- enter a lower speed setpoint (p1155).
- reduce the encoder pulse number (p0408).
- check track A/B for short-circuits.
SINAMICS (p4400 = 1) operating mode:
- the fine resolution of TM41 in p0418 does not match that of the connector input that was interconnected at P4420
- the encoder position actual value r0479 interconnected at connector input p4420 has an excessively high actual
speed
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F35221 (N, A) TM: Setpoint - actual value deviation, outside the tolerance range
Message value: -
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The deviation between the setpoint and the output signals (track A/B) exceeds the tolerance of +/-3 %. The deviation
between the internal and external measured value is too high.
Remedy: - reduce the basic clock cycle (p0110, p0111).
- replace the module.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A35222 (F, N) TM: Encoder pulse number not permissible
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The encoder pulse number entered does not match the permissible pulse number from a hardware perspective.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Encoder pulse number is too high.
2: Encoder pulse number is too low.
4: Encoder pulse number is less than the zero mark offset (p4426).
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1413
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - enter the encoder pulse number in the permissible range (p0408).
- if necessary, replace TM41 SAC with TM41 DAC.
Note:
TM41 SAC: order no. = 6SL3055-0AA00-3PA0
TM41 DAC: order no. = 6SL3055-0AA00-3PA1
The following applies for TM41 SAC:
- minimum/maximum value for p0408: 1000/8192
The following applies for TM41 DAC:
- minimum/maximum value for p0408: 1000/16384
See also: p0408 (Rotary encoder pulse No.)
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A35223 (F, N) TM: Zero mark offset not permissible
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The entered zero mark offset is not permissible.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Zero mark offset is too high.
Remedy: Enter the zero mark offset in the permissible range (p4426).
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F35230 HW problem with the TM module
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: The terminal module used has signaled an internal error. Signals of this module may not be evaluated and are poten-
tially incorrect.
Remedy: The module must be replaced if no other alarms that refer to a communications error are present in the system.
F35233 DRIVE-CLiQ component does not support function
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A function requested by the Control Unit is not supported by a DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Terminal Module 31 does not support the function "Timer for temperature evaluation" (X522.7/8, p4103 > 0.000).
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
- Deactivate timer for temperature evaluation (X522.7/8) (p4103 = 0.000).
- Use Terminal Module 31 and the relevant firmware version to enable the "Timer for temperature evaluation" func-
tion (Order No. 6SL3055-0AA00-3AA1, firmware version 2.6 and higher).
See also: p4103 (TM31 temperature evaluation timer)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1414 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
N35800 (F) TM: Group signal
Message value: -
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The Terminal Module has detected at least one fault.
Remedy: Evaluates other actual messages.
Reaction upon F: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A35801 (F, N) TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module to the encoder involved.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A35802 (F, N) TM: Time slice overflow
Message value: -
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Time slice overflow on Terminal Module.
Remedy: Replace the Terminal Module.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A35803 (F, N) TM: Memory test
Message value: -
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error has occurred during the memory test on the Terminal Module.
Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the Terminal Module is being maintained.
- replace the Terminal Module.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1415
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A35804 (F, N) TM: CRC
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A checksum error has occurred when reading-out the program memory on the Terminal Module.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum.
Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained.
- replace the Terminal Module.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A35805 (F, N) TM: EPROM checksum error
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
01: EEPROM access error.
02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM.
Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained.
- replace the Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A35807 (F, N) TM: Sequence control time monitoring
Message value: -
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Error, timeout, sequence control on the Terminal Module.
Remedy: Replace the Terminal Module.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1416 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F35820 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module to the encoder involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 02 hex:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 03 hex:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 04 hex:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 05 hex:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 06 hex:
The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 07 hex:
A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram.
xx = 08 hex:
No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one.
xx = 09 hex:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
F35835 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module to the encoder involved. The nodes do
not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 21 hex:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
xx = 40 hex:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1417
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F35836 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module to the encoder involved. Data were not
able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
F35837 PTM DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
F35845 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module (TM) to the encoder involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
F35850 TM: Internal software error
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An internal software error in the Terminal Module (TM) has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Background time slice is blocked.
2: Checksum over the code memory is not OK.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1418 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - replace the Terminal Module (TM).
- if required, upgrade the firmware in the Terminal Module.
- contact the Hotline.
F35851 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module (TM) to the Control Unit involved.
The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex = 10 dec:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved.
F35860 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module (TM) to the Control Unit involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 11 hex = 17 dec:
CRC error and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 01 hex = 01 dec:
Checksum error (CRC error).
xx = 12 hex = 18 dec:
The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 02 hex = 02 dec:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 13 hex = 19 dec:
The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 03 hex = 03 dec:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 14 hex = 20 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 04 hex = 04 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 15 hex = 21 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 05 hex = 05 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 16 hex = 22 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too
early.
xx = 06 hex = 06 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 19 hex = 25 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 09 hex = 09 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1419
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F35885 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module (TM) to the Control Unit involved.
The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 1A hex = 26 dec:
Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
xx = 62 hex = 98 dec:
Error at the transition to cyclic operation.
Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved.
- carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
F35886 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module (TM) to the Control Unit involved.
Data were not able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
F35887 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Terminal Module) involved. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 60 hex:
Response received too late during runtime measurement.
xx = 61 hex:
Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1420 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
F35895 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module (TM) to the Control Unit involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
F35896 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Terminal Module), specified by the fault value, have changed in an
incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable
or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Component number.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be
used.
- when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the orig-
inal cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length).
F35897 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): no communication with component
Message value: Preliminary component number: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Communications with the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Terminal Module) specified by the fault value is not possible.
One cause may, for example, be that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable has been withdrawn.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Component ID.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connections.
- carry out a POWER ON.
F35899 (N, A) TM: Unknown fault
Message value: New message: %1
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: A fault has occurred on the Terminal Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Fault number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1421
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Terminal Module by an older firmware version (r0158).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A35903 (F, N) TM: I2C bus error occurred
Message value: -
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error has occurred while accessing the internal I2C bus of the Terminal Module.
Remedy: Replace the Terminal Module.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A35904 (F, N) TM: EEPROM
Message value: -
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error has occurred accessing the non-volatile memory on the Terminal Module.
Remedy: Replace the Terminal Module.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A35905 (F, N) TM: Parameter access
Message value: -
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The Control Unit attempted to write an illegal parameter value to the Terminal Module.
Remedy: - check whether the firmware version of the Terminal Module (r0158) matches the firmware version of Control Unit
(r0018).
- if required, replace the Terminal Module.
Note:
The firmware versions that match each other are in the readme.txt file on the memory card.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1422 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A35906 (F, N) TM: 24 V power supply missing
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The 24 V power supply for the digital outputs is missing.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
01: TM17 24 V power supply for DI/DO 0 ... 7 missing.
02: TM17 24 V power supply for DI/DO 8 ... 15 missing.
04: TM15 24 V power supply for DI/DO 0 ... 7 (X520) missing.
08: TM15 24 V power supply for DI/DO 8 ... 15 (X521) missing.
10: TM15 24 V power supply for DI/DO 16 ... 23 (X522) missing.
20: TM41 24 V power supply for DI/DO 0 ... 3 missing.
Remedy: Check the terminals for the power supply voltage (L1+, L2+, L3+, M).
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A35907 (F, N) TM: Hardware initialization error
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The Terminal Module was not successfully initialized.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
01: TM17 or TM41 - incorrect configuration request.
02: TM17 or TM41 - programming not successful.
04: TM17 or TM41 - invalid time stamp
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A35910 (F, N) TM: Module overtemperature
Message value: -
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature in the module has exceeded the highest permissible limit.
Remedy: - reduce the ambient temperature.
- replace the Terminal Module.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1423
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A35911 (F, N) TM: Clock synchronous operation sign-of-life missing
Message value: -
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The maximum permissible number of errors in the master sign-of-life (clock synchronous operation) has been
exceeded in cyclic operation.
When the alarm is output, the module outputs are reset up to the next synchronization.
Remedy: - check the physical bus configuration (terminating resistor, shielding, etc.).
- check the interconnection of the master sign-of-life (r4201 via p0915).
- check whether the master correctly sends the sign-of-life (e.g. set up a trace with r4201.12 ... r4201.15 and trigger
signal r4301.9).
- check the bus and master for utilization level (e.g. bus cycle time Tdp was set too short).
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A35920 (F, N) TM: Error temperature sensor channel 1
Message value: %1
Drive object: TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm).
2: Measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm).
Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
- replace the sensor.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A35999 (F, N) TM: Unknown alarm
Message value: New message: %1
Drive object: TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An alarm has occurred on the Terminal Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Alarm number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Terminal Module by an older firmware version (r0158).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1424 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F36207 (N, A) Hub: Overtemperature component
Message value: %1
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The temperature on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has exceeded the fault threshold.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Actual temperature in 0.1 °C resolution.
Remedy: - Check ambient temperature at component installation location.
- replace the component involved.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A36211 (F, N) Hub: Overtemperature alarm component
Message value: %1
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has exceeded the alarm threshold.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Actual temperature in 0.1 °C resolution.
Remedy: - Check ambient temperature at component installation location.
- replace the component involved.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F36214 (N, A) Hub: overvoltage fault 24 V supply
Message value: %1
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The 24 V power supply on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has exceeded the fault threshold.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Actual operating voltage in 0.1 °C resolution
Remedy: - check the supply voltage of the component involved.
- replace the component involved.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F36216 (N, A) Hub: undervoltage fault 24 V supply
Message value: %1
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The 24 V power supply on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has undershot the fault threshold.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Actual operating voltage in 0.1 °C resolution
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1425
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check the supply voltage of the component involved.
- replace the component involved.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A36217 (N) Hub: undervoltage alarm 24 V supply
Message value: %1
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The 24 V power supply on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has undershot the alarm threshold.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Actual operating voltage in 0.1 °C resolution
Remedy: - check the supply voltage of the component involved.
- replace the component involved.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
N36800 (F) Hub: Group signal
Message value: -
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has detected at least one fault.
Remedy: Evaluates other actual messages.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A36801 (F, N) Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module involved.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex = 10 dec:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F36802 (N, A) Hub: Time slice overflow
Message value: %1
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: A time slice overflow has occurred on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
xx: Time slice number xx
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1426 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - reduce the current controller frequency.
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A36804 (F, N) Hub: Checksum error
Message value: %1
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A checksum error has occurred when reading out the program memory on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum.
Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained.
- replace the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
A36805 (F, N) Hub: EEPROM checksum incorrect
Message value: %1
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The internal parameter data on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module is incorrect.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
01: EEPROM access error.
02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM.
Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained.
- replace the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
F36820 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 01 hex = 1 dec:
Checksum error (CRC error).
xx = 02 hex = 2 dec:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 03 hex = 3 dec:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 04 hex = 4 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1427
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
xx = 05 hex = 5 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 06 hex = 6 dec:
The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 07 hex = 7 dec:
A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram.
xx = 08 hex = 8 dec:
No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one.
xx = 09 hex = 9 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
F36835 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module involved.
The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
F36836 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module involved.
Data were not able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex = 65 dec:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1428 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F36837 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex = 32 dec:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex = 35 dec:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex = 66 dec:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex = 67 dec:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
F36845 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex = 11 dec:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
F36851 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: HUB, TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication error from DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in question to Control Unit.
The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex = 10 dec:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1429
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F36860 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: HUB, TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication error from DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in question to Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 11 hex = 17 dec:
Checksum error (CRC error) and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 01 hex = 01 dec:
Checksum error (CRC error).
xx = 12 hex = 18 dec:
The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 02 hex = 2 dec:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 13 hex = 19 dec:
The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 03 hex = 3 dec:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 14 hex = 20 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 04 hex = 4 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 15 hex = 21 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 05 hex = 5 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 16 hex = 22 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too
early.
xx = 06 hex = 6 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 19 hex = 25 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 09 hex = 9 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
F36885 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: HUB, TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication error from DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in question to Control Unit.
The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 1A hex = 26 dec:
Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1430 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
xx = 62 hex = 98 dec:
Error at the transition to cyclic operation.
Remedy: - check the supply voltage of the component involved.
- carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
F36886 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: HUB, TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication error from DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in question to Control Unit.
Data were not able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex = 65 dec:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
F36887 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: HUB, TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component (DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module) involved. Faulty hardware cannot be
excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex = 32 dec:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex = 35 dec:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex = 66 dec:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex = 67 dec:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 60 hex = 96 dec:
Response received too late during runtime measurement.
xx = 61 hex = 97 dec:
Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
F36895 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: HUB, TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication error from DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in question to Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex = 11 dec:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1431
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F36896 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties
Message value: Component number: %1
Drive object: HUB, TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module), specified by the fault value, have
changed in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a
DRIVE-CLiQ cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Component number.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be
used.
- when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the orig-
inal cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length).
F36899 (N, A) Hub: Unknown fault
Message value: New message: %1
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: A fault occurred on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Fault number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module with older firmware (r0158).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
A36999 (F, N) Hub: Unknown alarm
Message value: New message: %1
Drive object: HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An alarm occurred on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Alarm number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module with older firmware (r0158).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowl. upon N: NONE
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1432 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F40000 Fault at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
First fault that has occurred for this drive object.
Remedy: Evaluate the fault buffer of the specified object.
F40001 Fault at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
First fault that has occurred for this drive object.
Remedy: Evaluate the fault buffer of the specified object.
F40002 Fault at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
First fault that has occurred for this drive object.
Remedy: Evaluate the fault buffer of the specified object.
F40003 Fault at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
First fault that has occurred for this drive object.
Remedy: Evaluate the fault buffer of the specified object.
F40004 Fault at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
First fault that has occurred for this drive object.
Remedy: Evaluate the fault buffer of the specified object.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1433
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F40005 Fault at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
First fault that has occurred for this drive object.
Remedy: Evaluate the fault buffer of the specified object.
A40100 Alarm at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An alarm has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
First alarm that has occurred for this drive object.
Remedy: Evaluate the alarm buffer of the specified object.
A40101 Alarm at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An alarm has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
First alarm that has occurred for this drive object.
Remedy: Evaluate the alarm buffer of the specified object.
A40102 Alarm at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An alarm has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
First alarm that has occurred for this drive object.
Remedy: Evaluate the alarm buffer of the specified object.
A40103 Alarm at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An alarm has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
First alarm that has occurred for this drive object.
Remedy: Evaluate the alarm buffer of the specified object.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1434 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A40104 Alarm at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An alarm has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
First alarm that has occurred for this drive object.
Remedy: Evaluate the alarm buffer of the specified object.
A40105 Alarm at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An alarm has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
First alarm that has occurred for this drive object.
Remedy: Evaluate the alarm buffer of the specified object.
F40799 CX32: Configured transfer end time exceeded
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The configured transfer end time when transferring the cyclic actual values was exceeded.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- contact the Hotline.
F40801 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the controller extension involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
F40820 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the controller extension involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 02 hex:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1435
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
xx = 03 hex:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 04 hex:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 05 hex:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 06 hex:
The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 07 hex:
A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram.
xx = 08 hex:
No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one.
xx = 09 hex:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
F40835 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the controller extension involved. The
nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 21 hex:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
xx = 40 hex:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
F40836 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the controller extension involved. Data
were not able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1436 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F40837 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
F40845 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the controller extension involved.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
F40851 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the controller extension involved to the Control Unit.
The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1437
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F40860 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the controller extension involved to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 11 hex:
CRC error and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 12 hex:
The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 02 hex:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 13 hex:
The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 03 hex:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 14 hex:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 04 hex:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 15 hex:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 05 hex:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 16 hex:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too
early.
xx = 06 hex:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 19 hex:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 09 hex:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
F40885 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the controller extension involved to the Control Unit.
The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 1A hex:
Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 21 hex:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1438 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
xx = 40 hex:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
xx = 62 hex:
Error at the transition to cyclic operation.
Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved.
- carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
F40886 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the controller extension involved to the Control Unit.
Data were not able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
F40887 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 60 hex:
Response received too late during runtime measurement.
xx = 61 hex:
Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.
F40895 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the controller extension involved to the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1439
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
F49150 Cooling system: Fault occurred
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The cooling system signals a general fault.
Remedy: - check the wiring between the cooling system and the input terminal (Terminal Module).
- check the external control device for the cooling system.
See also: p0266 (Cooling system, feedback signals, signal source)
F49151 Cooling system: Conductivity has exceeded the fault threshold
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The conductivity of the cooling liquid has exceeded the selected fault threshold (p0269[2]).
See also: p0261 (Cooling system, starting time 2), p0262 (Cooling system, fault conductivity delay time), p0266
(Cooling system, feedback signals, signal source)
Remedy: Check the device to de-ionize the cooling liquid.
F49152 Cooling system: ON command feedback signal missing
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The feedback signal of the ON command of the cooling system is missing.
- after the ON command, the feedback signal has not been received within the selected starting time (p0260).
- the feedback signal has failed in operation.
See also: p0260 (Cooling system, starting time 1), r0267 (Cooling system status word)
Remedy: - check the wiring between the cooling system and the input terminal (Terminal Module).
- check the external control device for the cooling system.
F49153 Cooling system: Liquid flow too low
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The drive converter cooling system signals that the cooling liquid flow is too low.
- after the ON command, the feedback signal has not been received within the selected starting time (p0260).
- in operation, the feedback signal has failed for longer than the permitted failure time (p0263).
See also: p0260 (Cooling system, starting time 1), p0263 (Cooling system fault liquid flow, delay time), r0267 (Cool-
ing system status word)
Remedy: - check the wiring between the cooling system and the input terminal (Terminal Module).
- check the external control device for the cooling system.
F49154 (A) Cooling system: Liquid leak is present
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The liquid leakage monitoring function has responded.
Caution:
If this fault is re-parameterized as an alarm then using other monitoring functions it must be ensured that when cool-
ing water is lost, the drive is powered down!
See also: r0267 (Cooling system status word)
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1440 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Remedy: - check the cooling system for leaks in the cooling circuit.
- check the wiring of the input terminal (Terminal Module) used to monitor leaking fluid.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowl. upon A: NONE
F49155 Cooling system: Power Stack Adapter, firmware version too old
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: The firmware version in the Power Stack Adapter (PSA) is too old and does not support the liquid cooling.
Remedy: Upgrade the firmware. Check EEPROM data.
F49156 Cooling system: Cooling liquid temperature has exceeded the fault threshold
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The cooling liquid intake temperature has exceeded the permanently set fault threshold.
Remedy: Check the cooling system and the ambient conditions.
A49170 Cooling system: Alarm has occurred
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The cooling system signals a general alarm.
Remedy: - check the wiring between the cooling system and the input terminal (Terminal Module).
- check the external control device for the cooling system.
A49171 Cooling system: Conductivity has exceeded the alarm threshold
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Conductivity monitoring is set for the cooling liquid (r0267.7, from p0266[7]).
See also: p0261 (Cooling system, starting time 2), p0262 (Cooling system, fault conductivity delay time), p0266
(Cooling system, feedback signals, signal source), r0267 (Cooling system status word)
Remedy: Check the device to de-ionize the cooling liquid.
A49172 Cooling system: Conductivity actual value is not valid
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When monitoring the conductivity of the cooling liquid, there is a fault in the wiring or in the sensor.
Remedy: - check the wiring between the cooling system and the Power Stack Adapter (PSA).
- check the function of the sensor to measure the conductivity.
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1441
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A49173 Cooling system: Cooling liquid temperature has exceeded the alarm threshold
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The cooling liquid intake temperature has exceeded the specified alarm threshold.
Remedy: Check the cooling system and the ambient conditions.
F49200 Excitation group signal fault
Message value: %1
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The excitation sequence control signals a fault.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Bit 0:
When powered down or when powering down the excitation, the signal "excitation ready to power up feedback sig-
nal" was not received within the monitoring time.
Bit 1:
After an ON command, the signal "excitation ready feedback signal" was not received within the monitoring time.
Bit 2:
After the pulses were enabled, the signal "excitation operational feedback signal" was not received within the moni-
toring time.
Bit 3:
The "excitation group signal fault" signal is present.
Remedy: - check the excitation.
- check commands, feedback signals and BICO interconnections.
A49201 (F) Excitation group signal alarm
Message value: -
Drive object: VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The "excitation group signal alarm" signal is present.
Remedy: Check the excitation equipment.
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A50002 (F) COMM BOARD: Alarm 2
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link:
A specific telegram word (send) is being used twice.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Telegram word used twice
See also: p8871 (SINAMICS Link send telegram word PZD)
Remedy: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link:
Correct the parameter assignment.
See also: p8871 (SINAMICS Link send telegram word PZD)
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1442 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A50003 (F) COMM BOARD: Alarm 3
Message value: Info. 1: %1, info. 2: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link:
A specific telegram word (receive) is being used twice.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = info. 1, xxxx = info. 2
Info. 1 (interpret decimal) = Address of sender
Info. 2 (interpret decimal) = Receive telegram word
See also: p8870 (SINAMICS Link receive telegram word PZD), p8872 (SINAMICS Link address receive PZD)
Remedy: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link:
Correct the parameter assignment.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A50004 (F) COMM BOARD: Alarm 4
Message value: Info. 1: %1, info. 2: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link:
Telegram word (receive) and address of sender inconsistent. Both values have to be either equal to zero or not equal
to zero.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = info. 1, xxxx = info. 2
Info. 1 (interpret decimal) = Drive object number from p8870, p8872
Info. 2 (interpret decimal) = Index from p8870, p8872
See also: p8870 (SINAMICS Link receive telegram word PZD), p8872 (SINAMICS Link address receive PZD)
Remedy: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link:
Correct the parameter assignment.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
A50005 (F) COMM BOARD: Alarm 5
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link:
Sender not found on SINAMICS Link.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Address of sender that cannot be located
See also: p8872 (SINAMICS Link address receive PZD)
Remedy: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link:
Check the connection to the sender.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms
3-1443
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A50006 (F) COMM BOARD: Alarm 6
Message value: Info. 1: %1, info. 2: %2
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link:
The parameter assignment indicates that the sender and the receiver are one and the same. This is not permitted.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = info. 1, xxxx = info. 2
Info. 1 (interpret decimal) = Drive object number from p8872
Info. 2 (interpret decimal) = Index from p8872
See also: p8836 (SINAMICS Link address), p8872 (SINAMICS Link address receive PZD)
Remedy: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link:
Correct the parameter assignment. All p8872[index] must be set to a value not equal to p8836.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY
Faults and alarms
List of faults and alarms
3-1444 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A-1445© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Appendix A
Contents
A.1 ASCII table (excerpt) A-1446
A.2 List for motor code/encoder code A-1447
Appendix
ASCII table (excerpt)
A-1446 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A.1 ASCII table (excerpt)
The following table includes the decimal and hexadecimal notation of selected
ASCII characters.
Table A-1 ASCII table (excerpt)
Character Decimal Hexadecimal Character Decimal Hexadecimal
Space 32 20 H 72 48
- 45 2D I 73 49
0 48 30 J 74 4A
1 49 31 K 75 4B
25032L764C
3 51 33 M 77 4D
4 52 34 N 78 4E
5 53 35 O 79 4F
6 54 36 P 80 50
7 55 37 Q 81 51
8 56 38 R 82 52
9 57 39 S 83 53
A 65 41 T 84 54
B 66 42 U 85 55
C 67 43 V 86 56
D 68 44 W 87 57
E 69 45 X 88 58
F 70 46 Y 89 59
G 71 47 Z 90 5A
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1447
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A.2 List for motor code/encoder code
A.2.1 Motor code
Induction motors (Version: 4301700)
Table A-2 Motor code for induction motors
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
1PH2092-4WG4x-xxxx 102 10201
1PH2093-6WF4x-xxxx 102 10202
1PH2095-6WF4x-xxxx 102 10203
1PH2096-4WG4x-xxxx 102 10204
1PH2113-6WF4x-xxxx 102 10205
1PH2115-6WF4x-xxxx 102 10206
1PH2117-6WF4x-xxxx 102 10207
1PH2118-6WF4x-xxxx 102 10208
1PH2123-4WF4x-xxxx 102 10209
1PH2127-4WF4x-xxxx 102 10210
1PH2128-4WF4x-xxxx 102 10211
1PH2143-4WF4x-xxxx 102 10212
1PH2147-4WF4x-xxxx 102 10213
1PH2182-6WC4x-xxxx 102 10214
1PH2184-6WP4x-xxxx 102 10215
1PH2186-6WB4x-xxxx 102 10216
1PH2188-6WB4x-xxxx 102 10217
1PH2254-6WB4x-xxxx 102 10218
1PH2256-6WB4x-xxxx 102 10219
1PH4103-4NF2x-xxxx 104 10401
1PH4103-4xF5x-xxxx 104 10421
1PH4105-4NF2x-xxxx 104 10403
1PH4105-4xF5x-xxxx 104 10422
1PH4107-4NF2x-xxxx 104 10405
1PH4107-4xF5x-xxxx 104 10423
1PH4133-4NF2x-xxxx 104 10407
1PH4133-4xF5x-xxxx 104 10424
1PH4135-4NF2x-xxxx 104 10409
1PH4135-4xF5x-xxxx 104 10425
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1448 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1PH4137-4NF2x-xxxx 104 10411
1PH4137-4xF5x-xxxx 104 10426
1PH4138-4NF2x-xxxx 104 10413
1PH4163-4NF2x-xxxx 104 10416
1PH4163-4xF5x-xxxx 104 10427
1PH4163-xxF2x(L37) 104 10431
1PH4167-4NF2x-xxxx 104 10418
1PH4167-4xF5x-xxxx 104 10428
1PH4168-4NF2x-xxxx 104 10420
1PH4168-4xF5x-xxxx 104 10429
1PH7101-xxFxx-xLxx 107 12701
1PH7101-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10701
1PH7103-xxDxx-xLxx 107 12702
1PH7103-xxDxx-xxxx 107 10702
1PH7103-xxFxx-xLxx 107 12703
1PH7103-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10703
1PH7103-xxGxx-xLxx 107 12704
1PH7103-xxGxx-xxxx 107 10704
1PH7105-xxFxx-xLxx 107 12705
1PH7105-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10705
1PH7107-xxDxx-xLxx 107 12706
1PH7107-xxDxx-xxxx 107 10706
1PH7107-xxFxx-xLxx 107 12707
1PH7107-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10707
1PH7107-xxGxx-xLxx 107 12708
1PH7107-xxGxx-xxxx 107 10708
1PH7131-xxFxx-xLxx 107 12709
1PH7131-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10709
1PH7133-xxDxx-xLxx 107 12710
1PH7133-xxDxx-xxxx 107 10710
1PH7133-xxFxx-xLxx 107 12711
1PH7133-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10711
1PH7133-xxGxx-xLxx 107 12712
1PH7133-xxGxx-xxxx 107 10712
1PH7135-xxFxx-xLxx 107 12713
Table A-2 Motor code for induction motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1449
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1PH7135-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10713
1PH7137-xxBxx-xxxx 107 10766
1PH7137-xxDxx-xLxx 107 12714
1PH7137-xxDxx-xxxx 107 10714
1PH7137-xxFxx-xLxx 107 12715
1PH7137-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10715
1PH7137-xxGxx-xLxx 107 12716
1PH7137-xxGxx-xxxx 107 10716
1PH7163-xxBxx-xLxx 107 12717
1PH7163-xxBxx-xxxx 107 10717
1PH7163-xxDxx-xLxx 107 12718
1PH7163-xxDxx-xxxx 107 10718
1PH7163-xxFxx-xLxx 107 12719
1PH7163-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10719
1PH7163-xxGxx-xLxx 107 12720
1PH7163-xxGxx-xxxx 107 10720
1PH7167-xxBxx-xLxx 107 12721
1PH7167-xxBxx-xxxx 107 10721
1PH7167-xxDxx-xLxx 107 12722
1PH7167-xxDxx-xxxx 107 10722
1PH7167-xxFxx-xLxx 107 12723
1PH7167-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10723
1PH7167-xxGxx-xLxx 107 12724
1PH7167-xxGxx-xxxx 107 10724
1PH7184-xxBxx-xxxx 107 10725
1PH7184-xxDxx-xxxx 107 10735
1PH7184-xxExx-xxxx 107 10727
1PH7184-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10736
1PH7184-xxLxx-xxxx 107 10737
1PH7184-xxTxx-xxxx 107 10726
1PH7186-xxBxx-xxxx 107 10770
1PH7186-xxDxx-xxxx 107 10734
1PH7186-xxExx-xxxx 107 10730
1PH7186-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10768
1PH7186-xxLxx-xxxx 107 10769
Table A-2 Motor code for induction motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1450 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1PH7186-xxTxx-xxxx 107 10729
1PH7224-xxBxx-xxxx 107 10743
1PH7224-xxCxx-xxxx 107 10731
1PH7224-xxDxx-xxxx 107 10738
1PH7224-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10732
1PH7224-xxLxx-xxxx 107 10744
1PH7224-xxUxx-xxxx 107 10745
1PH7226-xxBxx-xxxx 107 10746
1PH7226-xxDxx-xxxx 107 10747
1PH7226-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10739
1PH7226-xxLxx-xxxx 107 10748
1PH7228-xxBxx-xxxx 107 10749
1PH7228-xxDxx-xxxx 107 10750
1PH7228-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10741
1PH7228-xxLxx-xxxx 107 10751
1PH7284-xxBxx-xxxx 107 10752
1PH7284-xxCxx-xxxx 107 10753
1PH7284-xxDxx-xxxx 107 10754
1PH7284-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10755
1PH7286-xxBxx-xxxx 107 10756
1PH7286-xxCxx-xxxx 107 10757
1PH7286-xxDxx-xxxx 107 10758
1PH7286-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10759
1PH7288-xxBxx-xxxx 107 10760
1PH7288-xxCxx-xxxx 107 10761
1PH7288-xxDxx-xxxx 107 10762
1PH7288-xxFxx-xxxx 107 10763
1PH8083-1xF0x-xxxx 108 10801
1PH8083-1xF1x-xxxx 108 10864
1PH8083-1xF2x-xxxx 108 10865
1PH8083-1xG0x-xxxx 108 10866
1PH8083-1xG1x-xxxx 108 10867
1PH8083-1xG2x-xxxx 108 10868
1PH8083-1xM0x-xxxx 108 10869
1PH8083-1xM1x-xxxx 108 10870
Table A-2 Motor code for induction motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1451
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1PH8083-1xN0x-xxxx 108 10879
1PH8083-1xN1x-xxxx 108 10880
1PH8083-1xN2x-xxxx 108 10881
1PH8087-1xF0x-xxxx 108 10871
1PH8087-1xF1x-xxxx 108 10872
1PH8087-1xF2x-xxxx 108 10873
1PH8087-1xG0x-xxxx 108 10874
1PH8087-1xG1x-xxxx 108 10875
1PH8087-1xG2x-xxxx 108 10876
1PH8087-1xM0x-xxxx 108 10877
1PH8087-1xM1x-xxxx 108 10878
1PH8087-1xN0x-xxxx 108 10882
1PH8087-1xN1x-xxxx 108 10883
1PH8087-1xN2x-xxxx 108 10884
1PH8101-1xF0x-xxxx 108 10885
1PH8101-1xF1x-xxxx 108 10886
1PH8101-1xF2x-xxxx 108 10887
1PH8101-1xG2x-xxxx 108 10888
1PH8101-1xS0x-xxxx 108 10889
1PH8101-1xS0x-xxxx 108 10890
1PH8101-1xS1x-xxxx 108 10891
1PH8101-1xS1x-xxxx 108 10892
1PH8103-1xD0x-xxxx 108 10893
1PH8103-1xD1x-xxxx 108 10894
1PH8103-1xF0x-xxxx 108 10895
1PH8103-1xF1x-xxxx 108 10896
1PH8103-1xF2x-xxxx 108 10897
1PH8103-1xG0x-xxxx 108 10898
1PH8103-1xG1x-xxxx 108 10899
1PH8103-1xG2x-xxxx 108 11800
1PH8103-1xM0x-xxxx 108 11820
1PH8103-1xM1x-xxxx 108 11821
1PH8103-1xM2x-xxxx 108 11822
1PH8105-1xF0x-xxxx 108 11801
1PH8105-1xF1x-xxxx 108 11802
Table A-2 Motor code for induction motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1452 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1PH8105-1xF2x-xxxx 108 11803
1PH8105-1xG2x-xxxx 108 11804
1PH8105-1xM2x-xxxx 108 11823
1PH8105-1xS0x-xxxx 108 11805
1PH8105-1xS0x-xxxx 108 11806
1PH8105-1xS1x-xxxx 108 11807
1PH8105-1xS1x-xxxx 108 11808
1PH8107-1xD0x-xxxx 108 11809
1PH8107-1xD1x-xxxx 108 11810
1PH8107-1xF0x-xxxx 108 11811
1PH8107-1xF1x-xxxx 108 11812
1PH8107-1xF2x-xxxx 108 11813
1PH8107-1xG0x-xxxx 108 11814
1PH8107-1xG1x-xxxx 108 11815
1PH8107-1xM0x-xxxx 108 11824
1PH8107-1xM1x-xxxx 108 11825
1PH8107-1xM2x-xxxx 108 11826
1PH8107-1xS0x-xxxx 108 11816
1PH8107-1xS0x-xxxx 108 11817
1PH8107-1xS1x-xxxx 108 11818
1PH8107-1xS1x-xxxx 108 11819
1PH8131-1xF0x-xxxx 108 10803
1PH8131-1xF1x-xxxx 108 10804
1PH8131-1xF2x-xxxx 108 10805
1PH8131-1xG2x-xxxx 108 10806
1PH8131-1xS0x-xxxx 108 10807
1PH8131-1xS0x-xxxx 108 10808
1PH8131-1xS1x-xxxx 108 10809
1PH8131-1xS1x-xxxx 108 10810
1PH8133-1xD0x-xxxx 108 10811
1PH8133-1xD1x-xxxx 108 10812
1PH8133-1xF0x-xxxx 108 10813
1PH8133-1xF1x-xxxx 108 10814
1PH8133-1xF2x-xxxx 108 10815
1PH8133-1xG0x-xxxx 108 10816
Table A-2 Motor code for induction motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1453
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1PH8133-1xG1x-xxxx 108 10817
1PH8133-1xG2x-xxxx 108 10818
1PH8135-1xF0x-xxxx 108 10819
1PH8135-1xF1x-xxxx 108 10820
1PH8135-1xF2x-xxxx 108 10821
1PH8135-1xG2x-xxxx 108 10822
1PH8135-1xS0x-xxxx 108 10823
1PH8135-1xS0x-xxxx 108 10824
1PH8135-1xS1x-xxxx 108 10825
1PH8135-1xS1x-xxxx 108 10826
1PH8137-1xD0x-xxxx 108 10827
1PH8137-1xD1x-xxxx 108 10828
1PH8137-1xS0x-xxxx 108 10834
1PH8137-1xS0x-xxxx 108 10835
1PH8137-1xS1x-xxxx 108 10836
1PH8137-1xS1x-xxxx 108 10837
1PH8184-1xB2x-xxxx 108 10839
1PH8184-1xC2x-xxxx 108 10840
1PH8184-1xD2x-xxxx 108 10841
1PH8184-1xF2x-xxxx 108 10842
1PH8184-1xL2x-xxxx 108 10843
1PH8186-1xB2x-xxxx 108 10844
1PH8186-1xC2x-xxxx 108 10845
1PH8186-1xD2x-xxxx 108 10846
1PH8186-1xF2x-xxxx 108 10847
1PH8186-1xL2x-xxxx 108 10848
1PH8224-1xB2x-xxxx 108 10849
1PH8224-1xC2x-xxxx 108 10850
1PH8224-1xD2x-xxxx 108 10851
1PH8224-1xF2x-xxxx 108 10852
1PH8224-1xL2x-xxxx 108 10853
1PH8226-1xB2x-xxxx 108 10854
1PH8226-1xC2x-xxxx 108 10855
1PH8226-1xD2x-xxxx 108 10856
1PH8226-1xF2x-xxxx 108 10857
Table A-2 Motor code for induction motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1454 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1PH8226-1xL2x-xxxx 108 10858
1PH8228-1xB2x-xxxx 108 10859
1PH8228-1xC2x-xxxx 108 10860
1PH8228-1xD2x-xxxx 108 10861
1PH8228-1xF2x-xxxx 108 10862
1PH8228-1xL2x-xxxx 108 10863
1PH8284-1xB2x-xxxx 108 11827
1PH8284-1xC2x-xxxx 108 11828
1PH8284-1xD2x-xxxx 108 11829
1PH8284-1xF2x-xxxx 108 11830
1PH8284-1xH2x-xxxx 108 11831
1PH8286-1xB2x-xxxx 108 11835
1PH8286-1xC2x-xxxx 108 11836
1PH8286-1xD2x-xxxx 108 11837
1PH8286-1xF2x-xxxx 108 11838
1PH8288-1xB2x-xxxx 108 11843
1PH8288-1xC2x-xxxx 108 11844
1PH8288-1xD2x-xxxx 108 11845
1PH8288-1xF2x-xxxx 108 11846
1PL6184-xxBxx-xxxx 166 16600
1PL6184-xxCxx-xxxx 166 16631
1PL6184-xxDxx-xxxx 166 16601
1PL6184-xxFxx-xxxx 166 16602
1PL6184-xxLxx-xxxx 166 16603
1PL6186-xxBxx-xxxx 166 16604
1PL6186-xxDxx-xxxx 166 16605
1PL6186-xxFxx-xxxx 166 16606
1PL6186-xxLxx-xxxx 166 16630
1PL6224-xxBxx-xxxx 166 16608
1PL6224-xxDxx-xxxx 166 16609
1PL6224-xxFxx-xxxx 166 16610
1PL6224-xxLxx-xxxx 166 16611
1PL6226-xxBxx-xxxx 166 16612
1PL6226-xxDxx-xxxx 166 16614
1PL6226-xxFxx-xxxx 166 16615
Table A-2 Motor code for induction motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1455
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1PL6226-xxLxx-xxxx 166 16616
1PL6228-xxBxx-xxxx 166 16617
1PL6228-xxDxx-xxxx 166 16618
1PL6228-xxFxx-xxxx 166 16619
1PL6228-xxLxx-xxxx 166 16620
1PL6284-xxCxx-xxxx 166 16621
1PL6284-xxDxx-xxxx 166 16622
1PL6284-xxFxx-xxxx 166 16623
1PL6286-xxCxx-xxxx 166 16624
1PL6286-xxDxx-xxxx 166 16626
1PL6286-xxFxx-xxxx 166 16625
1PL6288-xxCxx-xxxx 166 16627
1PL6288-xxDxx-xxxx 166 16628
1PL6288-xxFxx-xxxx 166 16629
1PM4101-xxF8x(L37) 134 14409
1PM4101-xxF8x(L37) 134 14410
1PM4101-xxF8x-xxxx 134 14401
1PM4101-xxF8x-xxxx 134 14402
1PM4101-xxW2x(L37) 134 13409
1PM4101-xxW2x-xxxx 134 13401
1PM4105-xxF8x(L37) 134 14411
1PM4105-xxF8x(L37) 134 14412
1PM4105-xxF8x-xxxx 134 14403
1PM4105-xxF8x-xxxx 134 14404
1PM4105-xxW2x(L37) 134 13411
1PM4105-xxW2x-xxxx 134 13403
1PM4133-xxF8x(L37) 134 14414
1PM4133-xxF8x(L37) 134 14413
1PM4133-xxF8x-xxxx 134 14405
1PM4133-xxF8x-xxxx 134 14406
1PM4133-xxW2x(L37) 134 13413
1PM4133-xxW2x-xxxx 134 13405
1PM4137-xxF8x(L37) 134 14415
1PM4137-xxF8x(L37) 134 14416
1PM4137-xxF8x-xxxx 134 14407
Table A-2 Motor code for induction motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1456 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1PM4137-xxF8x-xxxx 134 14408
1PM4137-xxW2x(L37) 134 13415
1PM4137-xxW2x-xxxx 134 13407
1PM6101-xxF8x(L37) 136 14615
1PM6101-xxF8x(L37) 136 14616
1PM6101-xxF8x-xxxx 136 14601
1PM6101-xxF8x-xxxx 136 14602
1PM6105-xxF8x(L37) 136 14617
1PM6105-xxF8x(L37) 136 14618
1PM6105-xxF8x-xxxx 136 14603
1PM6105-xxF8x-xxxx 136 14604
1PM6107-xxF8x-xxxx 136 14619
1PM6107-xxF8x-xxxx 136 14620
1PM6133-xxF8x(L37) 136 14621
1PM6133-xxF8x(L37) 136 14622
1PM6133-xxF8x-xxxx 136 14605
1PM6133-xxF8x-xxxx 136 14606
1PM6137-xxF8x(L37) 136 14623
1PM6137-xxF8x(L37) 136 14624
1PM6137-xxF8x-xxxx 136 14607
1PM6137-xxF8x-xxxx 136 14608
1PM6138-xxF8x(L37) 136 14626
1PM6138-xxF8x(L37) 136 14625
1PM6138-xxF8x-xxxx 136 14609
1PM6138-xxF8x-xxxx 136 14610
2SP1253-8xAxx-0xxx 191 19102
2SP1253-8xAxx-0xxx 191 19101
2SP1255-8xAxx-0xxx 191 19103
2SP1255-8xAxx-0xxx 191 19104
Table A-2 Motor code for induction motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1457
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Synchronous motors (Version: 4301700)
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
1FE1051-4WL11-xxxx 261 26103
1FE1051-4WL51-xxxx 261 26104
1FE1051-4WN11-xxxx 261 26105
1FE1051-6WK10-xxxx 261 26106
1FE1051-6WN00-xxxx 261 26107
1FE1051-6WN10-xxxx 261 26108
1FE1051-6WN20-xxxx 261 26109
1FE1051-6WN30-xxxx 261 26110
1FE1052-4WK11-xxxx 261 26111
1FE1052-4WN11-xxxx 261 26112
1FE1052-4WN51-xxxx 261 26113
1FE1052-6LK00-xxxx 261 26114
1FE1052-6WK10-xxxx 261 26115
1FE1052-6WN00-xxxx 261 26116
1FE1052-6WN10-xxxx 261 26117
1FE1052-6WY10-xxxx 261 26118
1FE1053-4WN11-xxxx 261 26119
1FE1054-6LR00-xxxx 261 26120
1FE1054-6WQ10-xxxx 261 26122
1FE1054-6WR10-xxxx 261 26287
1FE1055-6LU00-xxxx 261 26123
1FE1055-6LX00-xxxx 261 26124
1FE1061-6LW00-xxxx 261 26125
1FE1061-6WV10-xxxx 261 26284
1FE1061-6WY10-xxxx 261 26126
1FE1064-6LQ00-xxxx 261 26127
1FE1064-6WN11-xxxx 261 26128
1FE1072-4WH11-xxxx 261 26129
1FE1072-4WL11-xxxx 261 26130
1FE1072-4WN01-xxxx 261 26131
1FE1072-4WN11-xxxx 261 26132
1FE1072-4WN31-xxxx 261 26133
1FE1073-4WL11-xxxx 261 26289
1FE1073-4WN01-xxxx 261 26134
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1458 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FE1073-4WN11-xxxx 261 26135
1FE1073-4WR01-xxxx 261 26136
1FE1073-4WT11-xxxx 261 26137
1FE1073-4WT31-xxxx 261 26138
1FE1074-4WM11-xxxx 261 26139
1FE1074-4WN11-xxxx 261 26140
1FE1074-4WN51-xxxx 261 26141
1FE1082-4WN01-xxxx 261 26142
1FE1082-4WN11-xxxx 261 26143
1FE1082-4WN51-xxxx 261 26144
1FE1082-4WP11-xxxx 261 26145
1FE1082-4WR11-xxxx 261 26146
1FE1082-4WR31-xxxx 261 26147
1FE1082-6WE11-xxxx 261 26285
1FE1082-6WP10-xxxx 261 26148
1FE1082-6WQ11-xxxx 261 26149
1FE1082-6WS10-xxxx 261 26150
1FE1082-6WS30-xxxx 261 26151
1FE1082-6WW11-xxxx 261 26152
1FE1083-4WN01-xxxx 261 26153
1FE1083-4WN11-xxxx 261 26154
1FE1084-4WN11-xxxx 261 26155
1FE1084-4WN31-xxxx 261 26156
1FE1084-4WP11-xxxx 261 26157
1FE1084-4WQ11-xxxx 261 26158
1FE1084-4WQ51-xxxx 261 26159
1FE1084-4WT11-xxxx 261 26160
1FE1084-4WT51-xxxx 261 26161
1FE1084-6LN00-xxxx 261 26162
1FE1084-6WN11-xxxx 261 26163
1FE1084-6WR11-xxxx 261 26164
1FE1084-6WX11-xxxx 261 26165
1FE1085-4WN11-xxxx 261 26166
1FE1085-4WQ11-xxxx 261 26167
1FE1085-4WT11-xxxx 261 26168
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1459
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FE1091-6WN10-xxxx 261 26169
1FE1091-6WN30-xxxx 261 26170
1FE1091-6WS10-xxxx 261 26171
1FE1092-4WV11-xxxx 261 26172
1FE1092-6WN00-xxxx 261 26173
1FE1092-6WN10-xxxx 261 26174
1FE1092-6WN30-xxxx 261 26175
1FE1092-6WR11-xxxx 261 26176
1FE1093-4WF01-xxxx 261 26177
1FE1093-4WH11-xxxx 261 26178
1FE1093-4WK01-xxxx 261 26179
1FE1093-4WM11-xxxx 261 26180
1FE1093-4WN01-xxxx 261 26181
1FE1093-4WN10-xxxx 261 26182
1FE1093-4WN11-xxxx 261 26183
1FE1093-6WN10-xxxx 261 26184
1FE1093-6WS10-xxxx 261 26185
1FE1093-6WS30-xxxx 261 26186
1FE1093-6WV01-xxxx 261 26286
1FE1093-6WV11-xxxx 261 26187
1FE1093-6WV31-xxxx 261 26188
1FE1093-7LN00-xxxx 261 26189
1FE1094-4LW01-xxxx 261 26190
1FE1094-4WK11-xxxx 261 26191
1FE1094-4WL11-xxxx 261 26192
1FE1094-4WS11-xxxx 261 26193
1FE1094-4WU11-xxxx 261 26243
1FE1095-4WN11-xxxx 261 26194
1FE1095-6LT01-xxxx 261 26195
1FE1095-6WU11-xxxx 261 26290
1FE1096-4WK10-xxxx 261 26196
1FE1096-4WN11-xxxx 261 26197
1FE1103-4WN01-xxxx 261 26245
1FE1103-4WN11-xxxx 261 26198
1FE1103-4WN31-xxxx 261 26199
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1460 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FE1103-4WQ01-xxxx 261 26200
1FE1103-4WQ11-xxxx 261 26201
1FE1103-4WT01-xxxx 261 26202
1FE1103-4WT11-xxxx 261 26203
1FE1103-4WU01-xxxx 261 26204
1FE1104-4WN11-xxxx 261 26205
1FE1105-4WN01-xxxx 261 26206
1FE1105-4WN11-xxxx 261 26207
1FE1105-4WQ01-xxxx 261 26208
1FE1105-4WQ11-xxxx 261 26209
1FE1106-4WN11-xxxx 261 26210
1FE1106-4WS11-xxxx 261 26211
1FE1106-4WY11-xxxx 261 26212
1FE1112-6LW01-xxxx 261 26213
1FE1113-6LU01-xxxx 261 26214
1FE1114-6LU11-xxxx 261 26215
1FE1114-6WR11-xxxx 261 26216
1FE1114-6WR31-xxxx 261 26217
1FE1114-6WT10-xxxx 261 26218
1FE1114-6WT11-xxxx 261 26219
1FE1114-6WT31-xxxx 261 26220
1FE1114-6WT51-xxxx 261 26221
1FE1114-6WW11-xxxx 261 26222
1FE1114-6WW31-xxxx 261 26223
1FE1116-6LS01-xxxx 261 26224
1FE1116-6LT01-xxxx 261 26225
1FE1116-6WR11-xxxx 261 26226
1FE1116-6WT11-xxxx 261 26227
1FE1116-6WW11-xxxx 261 26242
1FE1116-6WY11-xxxx 261 26228
1FE1124-4WN11-xxxx 261 26229
1FE1125-4WN11-xxxx 261 26230
1FE1125-4WP11-xxxx 261 26231
1FE1126-4WN11-xxxx 261 26232
1FE1126-4WP11-xxxx 261 26233
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1461
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FE1126-4WQ11-xxxx 261 26234
1FE1144-8WT10-xxxx 261 26244
1FE1145-8WN11-xxxx 261 26235
1FE1145-8WS11-xxxx 261 26237
1FE1147-8WN11-xxxx 261 26238
1FE1147-8WQ11-xxxx 261 26239
1FE1147-8WQ31-xxxx 261 26240
1FE1147-8WS11-xxxx 261 26241
1FK6032-6AK7x-xxxx 236 23601
1FK6033-7AK7x-xxxx 236 23602
1FK6040-6AK7x-xxxx 236 23603
1FK6042-6AF7x-xxxx 236 23604
1FK6043-7AH7x-xxxx 236 23605
1FK6043-7AK7x-xxxx 236 23606
1FK6044-7AF7x-xxxx 236 23607
1FK6044-7AH7x-xxxx 236 23608
1FK6060-6AF7x-xxxx 236 23609
1FK6061-7AF7x-xxxx 236 23610
1FK6061-7AH7x-xxxx 236 23611
1FK6063-6AF7x-xxxx 236 23612
1FK6064-7AF7x-xxxx 236 23613
1FK6064-7AH7x-xxxx 236 23614
1FK6080-6AF7x-xxxx 236 23615
1FK6082-7AF7x-xxxx 236 23616
1FK6083-6AF7x-xxxx 236 23617
1FK6085-7AF7x-xxxx 236 23618
1FK6100-8AF7x-xxxx 236 23619
1FK6101-8AF7x-xxxx 236 23620
1FK6103-8AF7x-xxxx 236 23621
1FK7011-xAK2x-xxxx 237 23738
1FK7011-xAK7x-xxxx 237 23747
1FK7015-xAK2x-xxxx 237 23739
1FK7015-xAK7x-xxxx 237 23748
1FK7022-xAK2x-xxxx 237 23733
1FK7022-xAK7x-xxxx 237 23726
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1462 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FK7024-xAK7x-xxxx 237 23753
1FK7032-xAF2x-xxxx 237 23742
1FK7032-xAK7x-xxxx 237 23727
1FK7033-xAF2x-xxxx 237 23741
1FK7033-xAK7x-xxxx 237 23701
1FK7034-xAF2x-xxxx 237 23740
1FK7034-xAK7x-xxxx 237 23732
1FK7040-xAK7x-xxxx 237 23702
1FK7042-xAC7x-xxxx 237 23749
1FK7042-xAF2x-xxxx 237 23735
1FK7042-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23703
1FK7042-xAK7x-xxxx 237 23704
1FK7042-xBK7x-xxxx 237 23765
1FK7043-xAF2x-xxxx 237 23743
1FK7043-xAH7x-xxxx 237 23705
1FK7043-xAK7x-xxxx 237 23706
1FK7044-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23707
1FK7044-xAH7x-xxxx 237 23708
1FK7060-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23709
1FK7060-xAH7x-xxxx 237 23710
1FK7060-xBF7x-xxxx 237 23766
1FK7061-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23711
1FK7061-xAH7x-xxxx 237 23712
1FK7062-xBF7x-xxxx 237 23750
1FK7063-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23713
1FK7063-xAH7x-xxxx 237 23714
1FK7064-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23715
1FK7064-xAH7x-xxxx 237 23716
1FK7080-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23717
1FK7080-xAH7x-xxxx 237 23718
1FK7081-xBF7x-xxxx 237 23751
1FK7082-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23719
1FK7083-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23720
1FK7083-xAH7x-xxxx 237 23721
1FK7084-xBC7x-xxxx 237 23752
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1463
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FK7084-xBF7x-xxxx 237 23772
1FK7085-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23722
1FK7086-xAA7x-xxxx 237 23737
1FK7086-xAC7x-xxxx 237 23744
1FK7086-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23731
1FK7086-xSF7x-xxxx 237 23730
1FK7100-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23723
1FK7101-xAC7x-xxxx 237 23745
1FK7101-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23724
1FK7103-xAC7x-xxxx 237 23746
1FK7103-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23725
1FK7105-xAC7x-xxxx 237 23728
1FK7105-xAF7x-xxxx 237 23729
1FS6074-xAC7x-xxxx 276 27601
1FS6074-xAF7x-xxxx 276 27602
1FS6074-xAH7x-xxxx 276 27603
1FS6074-xAK7x-xxxx 276 27604
1FS6096-xAC7x-xxxx 276 27605
1FS6096-xAF7x-xxxx 276 27606
1FS6096-xAH7x-xxxx 276 27607
1FS6115-xAB7x-xxxx 276 27608
1FS6115-xAC7x-xxxx 276 27609
1FS6115-xAF7x-xxxx 276 27610
1FS6134-xAB7x-xxxx 276 27611
1FS6134-xAC7x-xxxx 276 27612
1FS6134-xAF7x-xxxx 276 27613
1FT6021-6AK7x-xxxx 206 20601
1FT6024-6AK7x-xxxx 206 20602
1FT6031-xAK7x-xxxx 206 20603
1FT6034-xAK7x-xxxx 206 20604
1FT6041-xAF7x-xxxx 206 20605
1FT6041-xAK7x-xxxx 206 20606
1FT6044-xAF7x-xxxx 206 20607
1FT6044-xAK7x-xxxx 206 20608
1FT6061-xAC7x-xxxx 206 20609
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1464 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FT6061-xAF7x-xxxx 206 20610
1FT6061-xAH7x-xxxx 206 20611
1FT6061-xAK7x-xxxx 206 20612
1FT6062-xAC7x-xxxx 206 20613
1FT6062-xAF7x-xxxx 206 20614
1FT6062-xAH7x-xxxx 206 20615
1FT6062-xAK7x-xxxx 206 20616
1FT6062-xWF7x-xxxx 206 22601
1FT6062-xWH7x-xxxx 206 22602
1FT6062-xWK7x-xxxx 206 22603
1FT6064-xAC7x-xxxx 206 20617
1FT6064-xAF7x-xxxx 206 20618
1FT6064-xAH7x-xxxx 206 20619
1FT6064-xAK7x-xxxx 206 20620
1FT6064-xWF7x-xxxx 206 22604
1FT6064-xWH7x-xxxx 206 22605
1FT6064-xWK7x-xxxx 206 22606
1FT6081-xAC7x-xxxx 206 20621
1FT6081-xAF7x-xxxx 206 20622
1FT6081-xAH7x-xxxx 206 20623
1FT6081-xAK7x-xxxx 206 20624
1FT6082-xAC7x-xxxx 206 20625
1FT6082-xAF7x-xxxx 206 20626
1FT6082-xAH7x-xxxx 206 20627
1FT6082-xAK7x-xxxx 206 20628
1FT6082-xWH7x-xxxx 206 22630
1FT6084-xAC7x-xxxx 206 20629
1FT6084-xAF7x-xxxx 206 20630
1FT6084-xAH7x-xxxx 206 20631
1FT6084-xAK7x-xxxx 206 20632
1FT6084-xSF7x-xxxx 206 21601
1FT6084-xSH7x-xxxx 206 21602
1FT6084-xSK7x-xxxx 206 21603
1FT6084-xWF7x-xxxx 206 22607
1FT6084-xWH7x-xxxx 206 22608
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1465
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FT6084-xWK7x-xxxx 206 22609
1FT6086-xAC7x-xxxx 206 20633
1FT6086-xAF7x-xxxx 206 20634
1FT6086-xAH7x-xxxx 206 20635
1FT6086-xSF7x-xxxx 206 21604
1FT6086-xSG7x-xxxx 206 21626
1FT6086-xSH7x-xxxx 206 21605
1FT6086-xSK7x-xxxx 206 21606
1FT6086-xWF7x-xxxx 206 22610
1FT6086-xWH7x-xxxx 206 22611
1FT6086-xWK7x-xxxx 206 22612
1FT6102-xAB7x-xxxx 206 20636
1FT6102-xAC7x-xxxx 206 20637
1FT6102-xAF7x-xxxx 206 20638
1FT6102-xAH7x-xxxx 206 20639
1FT6105-xAB7x-xxxx 206 20640
1FT6105-xAC7x-xxxx 206 20641
1FT6105-xAF7x-xxxx 206 20642
1FT6105-xSB7x-xxxx 206 21607
1FT6105-xSC7x-xxxx 206 21608
1FT6105-xSF7x-xxxx 206 21609
1FT6105-xSH7x-xxxx 206 21610
1FT6105-xWC7x-xxxx 206 22613
1FT6105-xWF7x-xxxx 206 22614
1FT6108-xAB7x-xxxx 206 20643
1FT6108-xAC7x-xxxx 206 20644
1FT6108-xAF7x-xxxx 206 20645
1FT6108-xSB7x-xxxx 206 21611
1FT6108-xSC7x-xxxx 206 21612
1FT6108-xSF7x-xxxx 206 21613
1FT6108-xWB7x-xxxx 206 22615
1FT6108-xWC7x-xxxx 206 22616
1FT6108-xWF7x-xxxx 206 22617
1FT6132-xAB7x-xxxx 206 20646
1FT6132-xAC7x-xxxx 206 20647
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1466 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FT6132-xAF7x-xxxx 206 20648
1FT6132-xSB7x-xxxx 206 21614
1FT6132-xSC7x-xxxx 206 21615
1FT6132-xSF7x-xxxx 206 21616
1FT6132-xWB7x-xxxx 206 22618
1FT6132-xWD7x-xxxx 206 22619
1FT6134-xAB7x-xxxx 206 20649
1FT6134-xAC7x-xxxx 206 20650
1FT6134-xSB7x-xxxx 206 21617
1FT6134-xSC7x-xxxx 206 21618
1FT6134-xSF7x-xxxx 206 21619
1FT6134-xWB7x-xxxx 206 22620
1FT6134-xWD7x-xxxx 206 22621
1FT6136-xAB7x-xxxx 206 20651
1FT6136-xAC7x-xxxx 206 20652
1FT6136-xSB7x-xxxx 206 21620
1FT6136-xSC7x-xxxx 206 21621
1FT6136-xSF7x-xxxx 206 21622
1FT6136-xWB7x-xxxx 206 22622
1FT6136-xWD7x-xxxx 206 22623
1FT6138-xWB7x-xxxx 206 22624
1FT6138-xWD7x-xxxx 206 22625
1FT6163-xSB7x-xxxx 206 21623
1FT6163-xSD7x-xxxx 206 21624
1FT6163-xWB7x-xxxx 206 22626
1FT6163-xWD7x-xxxx 206 22627
1FT6168-xSB7x-xxxx 206 21625
1FT6168-xWB7x-xxxx 206 22628
1FT7034-xAK7x-xxxx 207 20740
1FT7036-xAK7x-xxxx 207 20741
1FT7042-xAF7x-xxxx 207 20701
1FT7042-xAK7x-xxxx 207 20702
1FT7044-xAF7x-xxxx 207 20703
1FT7044-xAK7x-xxxx 207 20704
1FT7046-xAF7x-xxxx 207 20705
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1467
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FT7046-xAH7x-xxxx 207 20732
1FT7046-xAK7x-xxxx 207 20706
1FT7062-xAF7x-xxxx 207 20716
1FT7062-xAK7x-xxxx 207 20717
1FT7062-xWF7x-xxxx 207 20745
1FT7062-xWK7x-xxxx 207 20746
1FT7064-xAF7x-xxxx 207 20720
1FT7064-xAK7x-xxxx 207 20721
1FT7064-xWF7x-xxxx 207 20747
1FT7064-xWK7x-xxxx 207 20748
1FT7065-xSF7x-xxxx 207 20781
1FT7065-xSH7x-xxxx 207 20782
1FT7065-xWF7x-xxxx 207 20770
1FT7065-xWH7x-xxxx 207 20771
1FT7066-xAF7x-xxxx 207 20722
1FT7066-xAH7x-xxxx 207 20733
1FT7066-xWF7x-xxxx 207 20749
1FT7066-xWH7x-xxxx 207 20750
1FT7067-xSF7x-xxxx 207 20783
1FT7067-xSH7x-xxxx 207 20784
1FT7067-xWF7x-xxxx 207 20772
1FT7067-xWH7x-xxxx 207 20773
1FT7068-xAF7x-xxxx 207 20725
1FT7068-xWF7x-xxxx 207 20751
1FT7082-xAC7x-xxxx 207 20734
1FT7082-xAF7x-xxxx 207 20709
1FT7082-xAH7x-xxxx 207 20707
1FT7082-xWC7x-xxxx 207 20752
1FT7082-xWF7x-xxxx 207 20753
1FT7082-xWH7x-xxxx 207 20754
1FT7084-xAC7x-xxxx 207 20735
1FT7084-xAF7x-xxxx 207 20711
1FT7084-xAH7x-xxxx 207 20712
1FT7084-xSC7x-xxxx 207 20789
1FT7084-xSF7x-xxxx 207 20790
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1468 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FT7084-xSH7x-xxxx 207 20791
1FT7084-xWC7x-xxxx 207 20755
1FT7084-xWF7x-xxxx 207 20756
1FT7084-xWH7x-xxxx 207 20757
1FT7085-xSF7x-xxxx 207 20774
1FT7085-xSH7x-xxxx 207 20775
1FT7085-xWF7x-xxxx 207 20776
1FT7085-xWH7x-xxxx 207 20777
1FT7086-xAC7x-xxxx 207 20736
1FT7086-xAF7x-xxxx 207 20714
1FT7086-xAH7x-xxxx 207 20715
1FT7086-xSC7x-xxxx 207 20792
1FT7086-xSF7x-xxxx 207 20793
1FT7086-xSH7x-xxxx 207 20794
1FT7086-xWC7x-xxxx 207 20758
1FT7086-xWF7x-xxxx 207 20759
1FT7086-xWH7x-xxxx 207 20760
1FT7087-xSF7x-xxxx 207 20778
1FT7087-xSH7x-xxxx 207 20779
1FT7087-xWF7x-xxxx 207 20769
1FT7087-xWH7x-xxxx 207 20780
1FT7102-xAB7x-xxxx 207 20726
1FT7102-xAC7x-xxxx 207 20737
1FT7102-xAF7x-xxxx 207 20727
1FT7102-xWB7x-xxxx 207 20761
1FT7102-xWC7x-xxxx 207 20762
1FT7102-xWF7x-xxxx 207 20763
1FT7105-xAB7x-xxxx 207 20728
1FT7105-xAC7x-xxxx 207 20738
1FT7105-xAF7x-xxxx 207 20729
1FT7105-xSC7x-xxxx 207 20785
1FT7105-xSF7x-xxxx 207 20786
1FT7105-xWB7x-xxxx 207 20744
1FT7105-xWC7x-xxxx 207 20764
1FT7105-xWF7x-xxxx 207 20765
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1469
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FT7108-xAB7x-xxxx 207 20730
1FT7108-xAC7x-xxxx 207 20739
1FT7108-xAF7x-xxxx 207 20731
1FT7108-xSC7x-xxxx 207 20787
1FT7108-xSF7x-xxxx 207 20788
1FT7108-xWB7x-xxxx 207 20742
1FT7108-xWC7x-xxxx 207 20766
1FT7108-xWF7x-xxxx 207 20767
1FW3150-1xH7x-xxxx 283 28301
1FW3150-1xL7x-xxxx 283 28302
1FW3150-1xP7x-xxxx 283 28303
1FW3152-1xH7x-xxxx 283 28304
1FW3152-1xL7x-xxxx 283 28305
1FW3152-1xP7x-xxxx 283 28306
1FW3154-1xH7x-xxxx 283 28307
1FW3154-1xL7x-xxxx 283 28308
1FW3154-1xP7x-xxxx 283 28309
1FW3155-1xH7x-xxxx 283 28310
1FW3155-1xL7x-xxxx 283 28311
1FW3155-1xP7x-xxxx 283 28312
1FW3156-1xH7x-xxxx 283 28313
1FW3156-1xL7x-xxxx 283 28314
1FW3156-1xP7x-xxxx 283 28315
1FW3201-1xE7x-xxxx 283 28316
1FW3201-1xH7x-xxxx 283 28317
1FW3201-1xL7x-xxxx 283 28318
1FW3202-1xE7x-xxxx 283 28319
1FW3202-1xH7x-xxxx 283 28320
1FW3202-1xL7x-xxxx 283 28321
1FW3203-1xE7x-xxxx 283 28322
1FW3203-1xH7x-xxxx 283 28323
1FW3203-1xL7x-xxxx 283 28324
1FW3204-1xE7x-xxxx 283 28325
1FW3204-1xH7x-xxxx 283 28326
1FW3204-1xL7x-xxxx 283 28327
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1470 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FW3206-1xE7x-xxxx 283 28328
1FW3206-1xH7x-xxxx 283 28329
1FW3206-1xL7x-xxxx 283 28330
1FW3208-1xE7x-xxxx 283 28331
1FW3208-1xH7x-xxxx 283 28332
1FW3208-1xL7x-xxxx 283 28333
1FW3281-1xE7x-xxxx 283 28334
1FW3281-1xG7x-xxxx 283 28335
1FW3281-2xE7x-xxxx 283 29301
1FW3281-2xG7x-xxxx 283 29302
1FW3281-3xJ7x-xxxx 283 29303
1FW3281-3xM7x-xxxx 283 29304
1FW3283-1xE7x-xxxx 283 28336
1FW3283-1xG7x-xxxx 283 28337
1FW3283-2xE7x-xxxx 283 29305
1FW3283-2xG7x-xxxx 283 29306
1FW3283-3xJ7x-xxxx 283 29307
1FW3283-3xM7x-xxxx 283 29308
1FW3285-1xE7x-xxxx 283 28338
1FW3285-1xG7x-xxxx 283 28339
1FW3285-2xE7x-xxxx 283 29309
1FW3285-2xG7x-xxxx 283 29310
1FW3285-3xJ7x-xxxx 283 29311
1FW3285-3xM7x-xxxx 283 29312
1FW3287-2xE7x-xxxx 283 29313
1FW3287-2xG7x-xxxx 283 29314
1FW3287-3xJ7x-xxxx 283 29315
1FW3287-3xM7x-xxxx 283 29316
1FW3288-1xE7x-xxxx 283 28340
1FW3288-1xG7x-xxxx 283 28341
1FW6090-0xx05-0Fxx 286 28601
1FW6090-0xx05-0Kxx 286 28602
1FW6090-0xx07-0Kxx 286 28603
1FW6090-0xx07-1Jxx 286 28604
1FW6090-0xx10-0Kxx 286 28605
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1471
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FW6090-0xx10-1Jxx 286 28606
1FW6090-0xx15-1Jxx 286 28607
1FW6090-0xx15-2Jxx 286 28608
1FW6130-0xx05-0Kxx 286 28620
1FW6130-0xx05-1Jxx 286 28621
1FW6130-0xx07-0Kxx 286 28622
1FW6130-0xx07-1Jxx 286 28623
1FW6130-0xx10-1Jxx 286 28624
1FW6130-0xx10-2Jxx 286 28625
1FW6130-0xx15-1Jxx 286 28626
1FW6130-0xx15-2Jxx 286 28627
1FW6150-0xx05-1Jxx 286 28642
1FW6150-0xx05-4Fxx 286 28643
1FW6150-0xx07-2Jxx 286 28644
1FW6150-0xx07-4Fxx 286 28645
1FW6150-0xx10-2Jxx 286 28646
1FW6150-0xx10-4Fxx 286 28647
1FW6150-0xx15-2Jxx 286 28648
1FW6150-0xx15-4Fxx 286 28649
1FW6160-0xx05-1Jxx 286 28628
1FW6160-0xx05-2Jxx 286 28629
1FW6160-0xx07-1Jxx 286 28630
1FW6160-0xx07-2Jxx 286 28631
1FW6160-0xx10-1Jxx 286 28632
1FW6160-0xx10-2Jxx 286 28633
1FW6160-0xx15-2Jxx 286 28634
1FW6160-0xx15-5Gxx 286 28635
1FW6160-xxx05-5Gxx 286 28658
1FW6160-xxx07-5Gxx 286 28659
1FW6160-xxx07-8Fxx 286 28660
1FW6160-xxx10-2Pxx 286 28661
1FW6160-xxx10-5Gxx 286 28662
1FW6160-xxx10-8Fxx 286 28663
1FW6160-xxx15-0Wxx 286 28664
1FW6160-xxx15-2Pxx 286 28665
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1472 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FW6160-xxx15-8Fxx 286 28666
1FW6160-xxx20-0Wxx 286 28667
1FW6160-xxx20-2Pxx 286 28668
1FW6160-xxx20-5Gxx 286 28669
1FW6160-xxx20-8Fxx 286 28670
1FW6190-0xx05-1Jxx 286 28636
1FW6190-0xx05-2Jxx 286 28637
1FW6190-0xx07-1Jxx 286 28638
1FW6190-0xx07-2Jxx 286 28639
1FW6190-0xx10-1Jxx 286 28640
1FW6190-0xx10-2Jxx 286 28641
1FW6190-0xx15-2Jxx 286 28609
1FW6190-0xx15-5Gxx 286 28610
1FW6190-xxx05-5Gxx 286 28671
1FW6190-xxx07-5Gxx 286 28672
1FW6190-xxx07-8Fxx 286 28673
1FW6190-xxx10-2Pxx 286 28674
1FW6190-xxx10-5Gxx 286 28675
1FW6190-xxx10-8Fxx 286 28676
1FW6190-xxx15-0Wxx 286 28677
1FW6190-xxx15-2Pxx 286 28678
1FW6190-xxx15-8Fxx 286 28679
1FW6190-xxx20-0Wxx 286 28680
1FW6190-xxx20-2Pxx 286 28681
1FW6190-xxx20-5Gxx 286 28682
1FW6190-xxx20-8Fxx 286 28683
1FW6230-0xx05-1Jxx 286 28611
1FW6230-0xx05-2Jxx 286 28612
1FW6230-0xx07-1Jxxx 286 28613
1FW6230-0xx07-2Jxx 286 28614
1FW6230-0xx10-2Jxx 286 28615
1FW6230-0xx10-5Gxx 286 28616
1FW6230-0xx15-4Cxx 286 28617
1FW6230-0xx15-5Gxx 286 28618
1FW6230-xxx05-5Gxx 286 28684
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1473
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FW6230-xxx07-5Gxx 286 28685
1FW6230-xxx07-8Fxx 286 28686
1FW6230-xxx10-2Pxx 286 28687
1FW6230-xxx10-8Fxx 286 28688
1FW6230-xxx15-0Wxx 286 28689
1FW6230-xxx15-2Pxx 286 28690
1FW6230-xxx15-8Fxx 286 28691
1FW6230-xxx20-0Wxx 286 28692
1FW6230-xxx20-2Pxx 286 28693
1FW6230-xxx20-5Gxx 286 28694
1FW6230-xxx20-8Fxx 286 28695
1FW6290-0xx15-7Axx 286 28619
1FW6290-xxx07-0Lxx 286 28696
1FW6290-xxx07-2Pxx 286 28697
1FW6290-xxx07-5Gxx 286 28698
1FW6290-xxx11-0Lxx 286 28699
1FW6290-xxx11-2Pxx 286 29600
1FW6290-xxx11-7Axx 286 29601
1FW6290-xxx15-0Lxx 286 29602
1FW6290-xxx15-2Pxx 286 29603
1FW6290-xxx20-0Lxx 286 29604
1FW6290-xxx20-2Pxx 286 29605
1LE400x-1ABxx-xxxx 204 20401
1LE400x-1BBxx-xxxx 204 20402
1PH8131-2xF0x-xxxx 200 20001
1PH8131-2xF1x-xxxx 200 20002
1PH8131-2xF2x-xxxx 200 20003
1PH8131-2xL0x-xxxx 200 20004
1PH8131-2xL1x-xxxx 200 20005
1PH8131-2xL2x-xxxx 200 20006
1PH8133-2xF0x-xxxx 200 20007
1PH8133-2xF1x-xxxx 200 20008
1PH8133-2xF2x-xxxx 200 20009
1PH8133-2xG2x-xxxx 200 20010
1PH8133-2xL0x-xxxx 200 20011
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1474 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1PH8133-2xL1x-xxxx 200 20012
1PH8135-2xF0x-xxxx 200 20013
1PH8135-2xF1x-xxxx 200 20014
1PH8135-2xF2x-xxxx 200 20015
1PH8135-2xG0x-xxxx 200 20016
1PH8135-2xG1x-xxxx 200 20017
1PH8135-2xG2x-xxxx 200 20018
1PH8137-2xF0x-xxxx 200 20019
1PH8137-2xF1x-xxxx 200 20020
1PH8137-2xF2x-xxxx 200 20021
1PH8137-2xG2x-xxxx 200 20022
1PH8137-2xL0x-xxxx 200 20023
1PH8137-2xL1x-xxxx 200 20024
1PH8137-2xM0x-xxxx 200 20025
1PH8137-2xM1x-xxxx 200 20026
1PH8138-2xF2x-xxxx 200 20027
1PH8138-2xG2x-xxxx 200 20028
1PH8184-2xC2x-xxxx 200 20029
1PH8184-2xD2x-xxxx 200 20030
1PH8184-2xF2x-xxxx 200 20031
1PH8184-2xL2x-xxxx 200 20032
1PH8186-2xC2x-xxxx 200 20033
1PH8186-2xD2x-xxxx 200 20034
1PH8186-2xF2x-xxxx 200 20035
1PH8186-2xL2x-xxxx 200 20036
2SP1202-1HAxx-xxxx 291 29101
2SP1202-1HBxx-xxxx 291 29102
2SP1204-1HAxx-xxxx 291 29103
2SP1204-1HBxx-xxxx 291 29104
2SP1253-1xAxx-xxxx 291 29105
2SP1253-1xBxx-xxxx 291 29106
2SP1255-1xAxx-xxxx 291 29107
2SP1255-1xBxx-xxxx 291 29108
Table A-3 Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1475
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Linear motors (Version: 4301700)
Table A-4 Motor code for linear motors
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
1FN1072-3xF7x-xxxx 401 40131
1FN1076-3xF7x-xxxx 401 40132
1FN1122-5xC7x-xxxx 401 40103
1FN1122-5xF7x-xxxx 401 40121
1FN1124-5xC7x-xxxx 401 40101
1FN1124-5xF7x-xxxx 401 40123
1FN1126-5xC7x-xxxx 401 40104
1FN1126-5xF7x-xxxx 401 40122
1FN1184-5xC7x-xxxx 401 40102
1FN1184-5xF7x-xxxx 401 40124
1FN1186-5xC7x-xxxx 401 40105
1FN1186-5xF7x-xxxx 401 40125
1FN1244-5xC7x-xxxx 401 40106
1FN1244-5xF7x-xxxx 401 40126
1FN1246-5xC7x-xxxx 401 40107
1FN1246-5xF7x-xxxx 401 40127
1FN3050-1KD0x-xxxx 403 41329
1FN3050-1ND0x-xxxx 403 41301
1FN3050-2KC4x-xxxx 403 41328
1FN3050-2NB8x-xxxx 403 41302
1FN3050-2WC0x-xxxx 403 40349
1FN3100-1KC5x-xxxx 403 41331
1FN3100-1NC0x-xxxx 403 41303
1FN3100-1WC0x-xxxx 403 40341
1FN3100-2KC5x-xxxx 403 41325
1FN3100-2NC8x-xxxx 403 41304
1FN3100-2WC0x-xxxx 403 40302
1FN3100-2WE0x-xxxx 403 40303
1FN3100-3KC5x-xxxx 403 41326
1FN3100-3NC0x-xxxx 403 41305
1FN3100-3WC0x-xxxx 403 40342
1FN3100-3WE0x-xxxx 403 40304
1FN3100-4NC8x-xxxx 403 41306
1FN3100-4WC0x-xxxx 403 40305
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1476 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FN3100-4WE0x-xxxx 403 40306
1FN3100-5WC0x-xxxx 403 40307
1FN3150-1KC7x-xxxx 403 41324
1FN3150-1NC2x-xxxx 403 41307
1FN3150-1WC0x-xxxx 403 40308
1FN3150-1WE0x-xxxx 403 40309
1FN3150-2KC7x-xxxx 403 41327
1FN3150-2NB8x-xxxx 403 41308
1FN3150-2WC0x-xxxx 403 40310
1FN3150-3KC7x-xxxx 403 41330
1FN3150-3NC7x-xxxx 403 41309
1FN3150-3WC0x-xxxx 403 40311
1FN3150-4NB8x-xxxx 403 41310
1FN3150-4WC0x-xxxx 403 40312
1FN3150-5WC0x-xxxx 403 40313
1FN3300-1NC1x-xxxx 403 41311
1FN3300-1WC0x-xxxx 403 40343
1FN3300-2NC1x-xxxx 403 41312
1FN3300-2WB0x-xxxx 403 40314
1FN3300-2WC0x-xxxx 403 40315
1FN3300-2WG0x-xxxx 403 40316
1FN3300-3NC4x-xxxx 403 41313
1FN3300-3WC0x-xxxx 403 40317
1FN3300-3WG0x-xxxx 403 40318
1FN3300-4NB8x-xxxx 403 41314
1FN3300-4WB0x-xxxx 403 40319
1FN3300-4WC0x-xxxx 403 40320
1FN3450-2NC5x-xxxx 403 41315
1FN3450-2WA5x-xxxx 403 40344
1FN3450-2WC0x-xxxx 403 40321
1FN3450-2WE0x-xxxx 403 40322
1FN3450-3NC5x-xxxx 403 41316
1FN3450-3WA5x-xxxx 403 40345
1FN3450-3WB0x-xxxx 403 40323
1FN3450-3WB5x-xxxx 403 40324
Table A-4 Motor code for linear motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1477
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FN3450-3WC0x-xxxx 403 40325
1FN3450-3WE0x-xxxx 403 40326
1FN3450-4NB8x-xxxx 403 41317
1FN3450-4WB0x-xxxx 403 40327
1FN3450-4WB5x-xxxx 403 40328
1FN3450-4WC0x-xxxx 403 40329
1FN3450-4WE0x-xxxx 403 40330
1FN3600-2NB8x-xxxx 403 41318
1FN3600-2WA5x-xxxx 403 40346
1FN3600-3NB8x-xxxx 403 41319
1FN3600-3WB0x-xxxx 403 40331
1FN3600-3WC0x-xxxx 403 40332
1FN3600-4NB8x-xxxx 403 41320
1FN3600-4WA3x-xxxx 403 40347
1FN3600-4WB0x-xxxx 403 40333
1FN3600-4WB5x-xxxx 403 40334
1FN3600-4WC0x-xxxx 403 40335
1FN3900-2NB2x-xxxx 403 41321
1FN3900-2WB0x-xxxx 403 40336
1FN3900-2WC0x-xxxx 403 40337
1FN3900-3NB2x-xxxx 403 41322
1FN3900-3WB0x-xxxx 403 40348
1FN3900-4NB2x-xxxx 403 41323
1FN3900-4WB0x-xxxx 403 40338
1FN3900-4WB5x-xxxx 403 40339
1FN3900-4WC0x-xxxx 403 40340
1FN6003-xLC57-xxxx 406 40601
1FN6003-xLC84-xxxx 406 40602
1FN6003-xLE38-xxxx 406 40603
1FN6003-xLE88-xxxx 406 40604
1FN6003-xLG24-xxxx 406 40605
1FN6003-xLG61-xxxx 406 40606
1FN6003-xLJ17-xxxx 406 40607
1FN6003-xLJ44-xxxx 406 40608
1FN6003-xLL12-xxxx 406 40609
Table A-4 Motor code for linear motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1478 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FN6003-xLL35-xxxx 406 40610
1FN6003-xLN10-xxxx 406 40611
1FN6003-xLN28-xxxx 406 40612
1FN6003-xWC57-xxxx 406 40615
1FN6003-xWC84-xxxx 406 40616
1FN6003-xWE38-xxxx 406 40617
1FN6003-xWE88-xxxx 406 40618
1FN6003-xWG24-xxxx 406 40619
1FN6003-xWG61-xxxx 406 40620
1FN6003-xWJ17-xxxx 406 40621
1FN6003-xWJ44-xxxx 406 40622
1FN6003-xWL12-xxxx 406 40623
1FN6003-xWL35-xxxx 406 40624
1FN6003-xWN10-xxxx 406 40625
1FN6003-xWN28-xxxx 406 40626
1FN6007-xLC31-xxxx 406 40629
1FN6007-xLC46-xxxx 406 40630
1FN6007-xLE20-xxxx 406 40631
1FN6007-xLE53-xxxx 406 40632
1FN6007-xLG12-xxxx 406 40633
1FN6007-xLG33-xxxx 406 40634
1FN6007-xLJ08-xxxx 406 40635
1FN6007-xLJ24-xxxx 406 40636
1FN6007-xLL05-xxxx 406 40637
1FN6007-xLL18-xxxx 406 40638
1FN6007-xLN15-xxxx 406 40639
1FN6007-xLN32-xxxx 406 40640
1FN6007-xWC31-xxxx 406 40643
1FN6007-xWC46-xxxx 406 40644
1FN6007-xWE20-xxxx 406 40645
1FN6007-xWE53-xxxx 406 40646
1FN6007-xWG12-xxxx 406 40647
1FN6007-xWG33-xxxx 406 40648
1FN6007-xWJ08-xxxx 406 40649
1FN6007-xWJ24-xxxx 406 40650
Table A-4 Motor code for linear motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1479
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FN6007-xWL05-xxxx 406 40651
1FN6007-xWL18-xxxx 406 40652
1FN6007-xWN15-xxxx 406 40653
1FN6007-xWN32-xxxx 406 40654
1FN6008-xLC17-xxxx 406 40657
1FN6008-xLC37-xxxx 406 40658
1FN6008-xLE16-xxxx 406 40659
1FN6008-xLE34-xxxx 406 40660
1FN6008-xLG16-xxxx 406 40661
1FN6008-xLG33-xxxx 406 40662
1FN6016-xLC18-xxxx 406 40663
1FN6016-xLC30-xxxx 406 40664
1FN6016-xLE17-xxxx 406 40665
1FN6016-xLE27-xxxx 406 40666
1FN6016-xLG16-xxxx 406 40667
1FN6016-xLG26-xxxx 406 40668
1FN6024-xLC12-xxxx 406 40669
1FN6024-xLC20-xxxx 406 40670
1FN6024-xLE11-xxxx 406 40671
1FN6024-xLE18-xxxx 406 40672
1FN6024-xLG10-xxxx 406 40673
1FN6024-xLG17-xxxx 406 40674
Table A-4 Motor code for linear motors, continued
Order number Motor type (p0300) Motor code (p0301)
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1480 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
A.2.2 Encoder code
1FK6 encoders
1FK7 encoders
Table A-5 Encoder code for 1FK6 encoders
Order number Encoder code (p0400) Remark
1FK6xxx-xxxxx-xAxx 2001 -
1FK6xxx-xxxxx-xExx 2051 -
1FK6xxx-xxxxx-xGxx 2052 -
1FK6xxx-xxxxx-xHxx 2053 -
1FK6xxx-xxxxx-xJxx 2054 -
1FK6xxx-xxxxx-xSxx 1002
1003
1004
4p (2-speed)
6p (3-speed)
8p (4-speed)
The pole number of the resolver cor-
responds to the pole number of the
motor (see catalog).
1FK6xxx-xxxxx-xTxx 1001 -
Table A-6 Encoder code for 1FK7 encoders
Order number Encoder code (p0400) Remark
1FK7xxx-xxxxx-xAxx 2001 -
1FK7xxx-xxxxx-xExx 2051 -
1FK7xxx-xxxxx-xGxx 2052 -
1FK7xxx-xxxxx-xHxx 2053 -
1FK7xxx-xxxxx-xJxx 2054 -
1FK7xxx-xxxxx-xSxx 1002
1003
1004
4p (2-speed)
6p (3-speed)
8p (4-speed)
The pole number of the resolver cor-
responds to the pole number of the
motor (see catalog).
1FK7xxx-xxxxx-xTxx 1001 -
List for motor code/encoder code
Appendix
A-1481
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1FS6 encoders
1FT6 encoders
1FW3 encoders
1PH4 encoders
Table A-7 Encoder code for 1FS6 encoders
Order number Encoder code (p0400) Remark
1FS6xxx-xxxxx-xAxx 2001 -
1FS6xxx-xxxxx-xExx 2051 -
Table A-8 Encoder code for 1FT6 encoders
Order number Encoder code (p0400) Remark
1FT6xxx-xxxxx-xAxx 2001 -
1FT6xxx-xxxxx-xExx 2051 -
1FT6xxx-xxxxx-xHxx 2053 -
1FT6xxx-4xxxx-xSxx 1002 4p (2-speed)
1FT6xxx-6xxxx-xSxx 1003 6p (3-speed)
1FT6xxx-8xxxx-xSxx 1004 8p (4-speed)
1FT6xxx-xxxxx-xTxx 1001 -
Table A-9 Encoder code for 1FW3 encoders
Order number Encoder code (p0400) Remark
1FW3xxx-xAxxx-xxxx 2001 -
1FW3xxx-xExxx-xxxx 2051 -
1FW3xxx-xGxxx-xxxx 2052 -
1FW3xxx-xSxxx-xxxx 1003 -
Table A-10 Encoder code for 1PH4 encoders
Order number Encoder code (p0400) Remark
1PH4xxx-xNxxx-xxxx 2002 -
Appendix
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1482 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1PH7 encoders
1PM4 encoders
1PM6 encoders
2SP1 encoders
Table A-11 Encoder code for 1PH7 encoders
Order number Encoder code (p0400) Remark
1PH7xxx-xExxx-xxxx 2051 -
1PH7xxx-xHxxx-xxxx 3002 -
1PH7xxx-xJxxx-xxxx 3003 -
1PH7xxx-xMxxx-xxxx 2001 -
1PH7xxx-xNxxx-xxxx 2002 -
1PH7xxx-xRxxx-xxxx 1001 -
Table A-12 Encoder code for 1PM4 encoders
Order number Encoder code (p0400) Remark
1PM4xxx-xGxxx-xxxx 2002 -
1PM4xxx-xLxxx-xxxx 2003 -
Table A-13 Encoder code for 1PM6 encoders
Order number Encoder code (p0400) Remark
1PM6xxx-xGxxx-xxxx 2002 -
1PM6xxx-xLxxx-xxxx 2003 -
Table A-14 Encoder code for 2SP1 encoders
Order number Encoder code (p0400) Remark
2SP1xxx-xHxxx-xxxx 2003 -
B-1483© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
List of abbreviations B
Note:
The following list of abbreviations includes all abbreviations and their meanings
used in the entire SINAMICS user documentation.
Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning
A
A... Alarm Alarm
AC Alternating Current Alternating current
ADC Analog Digital Converter Analog digital converter
AI Analog Input Analog input
AIM Active Interface Module Active Interface Module
ALM Active Line Module Active Line Module
AO Analog Output Analog output
AOP Advanced Operator Panel Advanced operator panel
APC Advanced Positioning Control Advanced Positioning Control
AR Automatic Restart Automatic restart
ASC Armature Short-Circuit Armature short-circuit
ASCII American Standard Code for Information
Interchange
American Standard Code for Information
Interchange
IM Induction motor Induction motor
B
BB Betriebsbedingung Operating condition
BERO - Contact-free proximity switch
BI Binector Input Binector input
BIA Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut für Arbe-
itssicherheit
Germany's Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health
BICO Binector Connector Technology Binector connector technology
BLM Basic Line Module Basic Line Module
BO Binector Output Binector output
BOP Basic Operator Panel Basic Operator Panel
C
C Capacitance Capacitance
C... - Safety message
CAN Controller Area Network Serial bus system
List of abbreviations
B-1484 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
CBC Communication Board CAN Communication Board CAN
CD Compact Disc Compact disc
CDS Command Data Set Command data set
CF Card CompactFlash Card CompactFlash memory card
CI Connector Input Connector input
CLC Clearance Control Clearance control
CNC Computerized Numerical Control Computerized numerical control
CO Connector Output Connector output
CO/BO Connector Output/Binector Output Connector output/binector output
COB ID CAN Object Identification CAN object identification
COM Common contact of a change-over relay Center contact on a changeover contact
COMM Commissioning Commissioning
CP Communications Processor Communications processor
CPU Central Processing Unit Central processing unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check Cyclic redundancy check
CSM Control Supply Module Control Supply Module
CU Control Unit Control Unit
CUA Control Unit Adapter Control Unit Adapter
CUD Control Unit DC MASTER Control Unit DC MASTER
D
DAC Digital Analog Converter Digital analog converter
DC Direct Current Direct current
DCB Drive Control Block Drive Control Block
DCC Drive Control Chart Drive Control Chart
DCC Data Cross Check Crosswise data comparison
DCN Direct Current Negative Direct current negative
DCP Direct Current Positive Direct current positive
DDS Drive Data Set Drive data set
DI Digital Input Digital input
DI/DO Digital Input/Digital Output Digital input/digital output, bidirectional
DMC DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module Cabinet DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module Cabinet
DME DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External
DO Digital Output Digital output
DO Drive Object Drive object
DP Decentralized Peripherals Distributed I/O
DPRAM Dual-Port Random Access Memory Memory with dual access
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory Dynamic memory
DRIVE-CLiQ Drive Component Link with IQ Drive Component Link with IQ
DSC Dynamic Servo Control Dynamic Servo Control
E
EASC External Armature Short-Circuit External armature short-circuit
Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning
List of abbreviations
B-1485
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
EDS Encoder Data Set Encoder data set
EGB Elektrostatisch gefährdete Baugruppen Electrostatic sensitive devices
ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker Residual current operated circuit breaker
ELP Earth Leakage Protection Ground-fault monitoring
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromagnetic Force Electromagnetic force
EMK Elektromagnetische Kraft Electromagnetic force
EMV Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit Electromagnetic compatibility
EN Europäische Norm European standard
EnDat Encoder Data Interface Encoder interface
EP Enable Pulses Pulse enable
EPOS Einfachpositionierer Basic positioner
ES Engineering System Engineering System
ESB Ersatzschaltbild Equivalent circuit diagram
ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Devices Electrostatic sensitive devices
ESR Extended Stop and Retract Extended stop and retraction
F
F... Fault Fault
FAQ Frequently Asked Questions Frequently asked questions
FBL Free Blocks Free function blocks
FCC Function Control Chart Function Control Chart
FCC Flux Current Control Flux current control
FD Function Diagram Function diagram
F-DI Failsafe Digital Input Failsafe digital input
F-DO Failsafe Digital Output Failsafe digital output
FEM Fremderregter Synchronmotor Separately excited synchronous motor
FEPROM Flash EPROM Non-volatile read/write memory
FG Function Generator Function generator
FI - Fault current
FOC Fiber-Optic Cable Fiber-optic cable
FP Funktionsplan Function diagram
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array Field programmable gate array
FW Firmware Firmware
G
GB Gigabyte Gigabyte
GC Global Control Global Control Telegram (broadcast tele-
gram)
GND Ground Reference potential for all signal and operat-
ing voltages, usually defined as 0 V (also
referred to as G)
GSD Gerätestammdatei Device master data: Describes the charac-
teristics of a PROFIBUS slave
Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning
List of abbreviations
B-1486 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
GSV Gate Supply Voltage Gate Supply Voltage
GUID Globally Unique Identifier Globally unique identifier
H
HF High Frequency High frequency
HFD Hochfrequenzdrossel High-frequency reactor
HLG Hochlaufgeber Ramp-function generator
HMI Human Machine Interface Human Machine Interface
HTL High-Threshold Logic Logic with a high fault threshold
HW Hardware Hardware
I
i. V. In Vorbereitung Under development: This feature is not cur-
rently available.
I/O Input/Output Input/Output
I2C Inter-Integrated Circuit Internal serial data bus
IASC Internal Armature Short-Circuit Internal armature short-circuit
IBN Inbetriebnahme Commissioning
ID Identifier Identification
IE Industrial Ethernet Industrial Ethernet
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission International Electrotechnical Commission
IF Interface Interface
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor Insulated gate bipolar transistor
IGCT Integrated Gate-Controlled Thyristor Semiconductor circuit breaker with inte-
grated control electrode
IL Impulslöschung Pulse cancelation
IP Internet Protocol Internet Protocol
IPO Interpolator Interpolator
IT Isolé Terré Insulated three-phase supply network
IVP Internal Voltage Protection Internal voltage protection
J
JOG Jogging Jog
K
CDC Crosswise Data Comparison Crosswise data comparison
KIP Kinetische Pufferung Kinetic buffering
Kp - Proportional gain
KTY - Special temperature sensor
L
L - Formula symbol for inductance
LED Light-Emitting Diode Light-emitting diode
LIN Linear motor Linear motor
LR Lageregler Position controller
LSB Least Significant Bit Least Significant Bit
LSC Line-Side Converter Line-side converter
Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning
List of abbreviations
B-1487
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
LSS Line Side Switch Line side switch
LU Length Unit Length unit
LWL Lichtwellenleiter Fiber-optic cable
M
M - Formula symbol for torque
M Masse Reference potential for all signal and operat-
ing voltages, usually defined as 0 V (also
referred to as GND)
MB Megabyte Megabyte
MCC Motion Control Chart Motion Control Chart
MDS Motor Data Set Motor data set
MLFB Maschinenlesbare Fabrikatebezeichnung Machine-Readable Product Code
MMC Man-Machine Communication Man-machine communication
MMC Micro Memory Card Micro memory card
MSB Most Significant Bit Most significant bit
MSC Motor-Side Converter Motor-side converter
MSCY_C1 Master Slave Cycle Class 1 Cyclic communication between master
(Class 1) and slave
MSR Motorstromrichter Motor-side converter
MT Messtaster Probe
N
N. C. Not Connected Not connected
N... No Report No message or internal message
NAMUR Normenarbeitsgemeinschaft für Mess- und
Regeltechnik in der chemischen Industrie
Standardization association for measure-
ment and control in chemical industries
NC Normally Closed (contact) NC contact
NC Numerical Control Numerical control
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Associa-
tion
Standardization body in the USA (United
States of America)
NM Nullmarke Zero mark
NO Normally Open (contact) NO contact
NSR Netzstromrichter Line-side converter
NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory Non-volatile read/write memory
O
OA Open Architecture Open Architecture
OC Operating Condition Operating condition
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer Original equipment manufacturer
OLP Optical Link Plug Fiber-optic bus connector
OMI Option Module Interface Option module interface
P
p... - Adjustable parameters
PB PROFIBUS PROFIBUS
Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning
List of abbreviations
B-1488 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
PcCtrl PC Control Control for master
PD PROFIdrive PROFIdrive
PDS Power Unit Data Set Power unit data set
PE Protective Earth Protective earth
PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage Protective extra low voltage
PEM Permanent-magnet synchronous motor Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
PG Programmiergerät Programming device
PI Proportional Integral Proportional integral
PID Proportional Integral Differential Proportional integral differential
PLC Programmable Logic Controller Programmable logic controller
PLL Phase-Locked Loop Phase-locked loop
PN PROFINET PROFINET
PNO PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation PROFIBUS user organization
PPI Point-to-Point Interface Point-to-point interface
PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Signal White noise
PROFIBUS Process Field Bus Serial data bus
PS Power Supply Power supply
PSA Power Stack Adapter Power Stack Adapter
PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient Positive temperature coefficient
PTP Point-To-Point Point-to-Point
PWM Pulse Width Modulation Pulse width modulation
PZD Prozessdaten Process data
R
r... - Display parameters (read-only)
RAM Random Access Memory Read/write memory
RCCB Residual Current Circuit Breaker Residual current operated circuit breaker
RCD Residual Current Device Residual current operated circuit breaker
RCM Residual Current Monitor Residual current monitor
RFG Ramp-Function Generator Ramp-function generator
RJ45 Registered Jack 45 Term for an 8-pin socket system for data
transmission with shielded or non-shielded
multi-wire copper cables
RKA Rückkühlanlage Cooling unit
RO Read Only Read only
RPDO Receive Process Data Object Receive process data object
Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning
List of abbreviations
B-1489
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
RS232 Recommended Standard 232 Interface standard for cable-connected serial
data transmission between a sender and
receiver
(also known as EIA232)
RS485 Recommended Standard 485 Interface standard for a cable-connected
differential, parallel, and/or serial bus system
(data transmission between a number of
senders and receivers, also known as
EIA485)
RTC Real Time Clock Real time clock
RZA Raumzeigerapproximation Space vector approximation
S
S1 - Uninterrupted duty
S3 - Intermittent duty
SBC Safe Brake Control Safe brake control
SBH Sicherer Betriebshalt Safe operating stop
SBR - Safe acceleration monitoring
SCA Safe Cam Safe cam
SD Card Secure Digital Card Secure digital memory card
SE Sicherer Software-Endschalter Safe software limit switch
SG Sicher reduzierte Geschwindigkeit Safely-Limited Speed
SGA Sicherheitsgerichteter Ausgang Safety-related output
SGE Sicherheitsgerichteter Eingang Safety-related input
SH Sicherer Halt Safe standstill
SI Safety Integrated Safety Integrated
SIL Safety Integrity Level Safety Integrity Level
SLM Smart Line Module Smart Line Module
SLP Safely-Limited Position Safely-Limited Position
SLS Safely-Limited Speed Safely limited speed
SLVC Sensorless Vector Control Vector control without encoder
SM Sensor Module Sensor Module
SMC Sensor Module Cabinet Sensor Module Cabinet
SME Sensor Module External Sensor Module External
SN Sicherer Software-Nocken Safe software cam
SOS Safe Operating Stop Safe operating stop
SP Service Pack Service pack
SPC Setpoint Channel Setpoint channel
SPI Serial Peripheral Interface Serial interface for connecting peripherals
SPS Speicherprogrammierbare Steuerung Programmable logic controller
SS1 Safe Stop 1 Safe stop 1
(monitored for time and ramping up)
SS2 Safe Stop 2 Safe stop 2
SSI Synchronous Serial Interface Synchronous serial interface
Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning
List of abbreviations
B-1490 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
SSM Safe Speed Monitor Safe feedback for speed monitoring (n < nx)
SSP SINAMICS Support Package SINAMICS support package
STO Safe Torque Off Safe torque off
STW Steuerwort Control word
T
TB Terminal Board Terminal Board
TIA Totally Integrated Automation Totally Integrated Automation
TM Terminal Module Terminal Module
TN Terre Neutre Grounded three-phase supply network
Tn - Integral time
TPDO Transmit Process Data Object Transmit process data object
TT Terre Terre Grounded three-phase supply network
TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic Transistor-transistor logic
Tv - Rate time
U
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply Uninterruptible power supply
USV Unterbrechungsfreie Stromversorgung Uninterruptible power supply
UTC Universal Time Coordinated Universal Time Coordinated
V
VC Vector Control Vector control
Vdc - DC link voltage
VdcN - Partial DC link voltage negative
VdcP - Partial DC link voltage positive
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker Association of German Electrical Engineers
VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure Association of German Engineers
VPM Voltage Protection Module Voltage Protection Module
Vpp Volt peak to peak Volt peak to peak
VSM Voltage Sensing Module Voltage Sensing Module
W
WEA Wiedereinschaltautomatik Automatic restart
MT Machine Tool Machine tool
X
XML Extensible Markup Language Standard language for Web publishing and
document management
Z
ZK Zwischenkreis DC link
ZM Zero Mark Zero mark
ZSW Zustandswort Status word
Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning
C-1491© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Bibliography C
SINAMICS documentation
Catalogs
/D11.1/ SINAMICS G110/SINAMICS G120 Standard Inverters
SINAMICS G120D Distributed Inverters
Order number: E86060-K5511-A111-A6 Edition: 05/2009
/D11/ SINAMICS G130 Drive Converter Chassis Units
SINAMICS G150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units
Order number: E86060-K5511-A101-A4 Edition: 2008
/PM21/ SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and Motors for Production Machines
Order number: E86060-K4921-A101-A1 Edition: 2008
/PM22/ SINAMICS S110 The Basic Positioning Drive
Order number: E86060-K4922-A101-A1 Edition: 2009
/D21.3/ SINAMICS S120 Chassis Format Units and Cabinet Modules
SINAMICS S150 Converter Cabinet Units
Order number: E86060-K5521-A131-A2 Edition: 2009
Related catalogs
/ST70/ SIMATIC Products for Totally Integrated Automation
Ordering information
Order number: E86060-K4670-A101-B2 Edition: 2009
/NC61/ SINUMERIK & SINAMICS,
Equipment for Machine Tools
Ordering information
Order number: E86060-K4461-A101-A3 Edition: 2010
Bibliography
C-1492 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Interactive catalogs
/CA01/ Products for Automation and Drives
DVD
Order number: E86060-D4001-A500-C8 Edition: 10/2009
/Mall/ Industry Mall,
Catalog and ordering system for Siemens' automation and drive solutions
www.siemens.com/industrymall.
Electronic documentation
/CD2/ SINAMICS DOCONCD
The SINAMICS System
Order number: 6SL3097-4CA00-0YG0 Edition: 11/2009
User documentation
/BA1/ SINAMICS G150
Operating Instructions
Order number: On request Edition: 11/2009
/BA2/ SINAMICS G130
Operating Instructions
Order number: On request Edition: 11/2009
/BA3/ SINAMICS S150
Operating Instructions
Order number: On request Edition: 11/2009
/GH1/ SINAMICS S120
Equipment Manual for Control Units and Additional System Components
Order number: 6SL3097-4AH00-0?P0 Edition: 11/2009
/GH2/ SINAMICS S120
Equipment Manual for Booksize Power Units
Order number: 6SL3097-4AC00-0?P2 Edition: 11/2009
/GH3/ SINAMICS S120
Equipment Manual for Chassis Power Units
Order number: 6SL3097-4AE00-0?P0 Edition: 11/2009
/GH5/ SINAMICS S120
Equipment Manual Cabinet Modules
Order number: On request Edition: 11/2009
Bibliography
C-1493
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
/GH6/ SINAMICS S120
Equipment Manual AC Drive
Order number: 6SL3097-4AL00-0?P0 Edition: 11/2009
/GH7/ SINAMICS S120
Equipment Manual for Chassis Liquid Cooled Power Units
Order number: 6SL3097-4AM00-0?P0 Edition: 11/2009
/GS1/ SINAMICS S120
Getting Started
Order number: 6SL3097-2AG00-0?P2 Edition: 03/2006
/IH1/ SINAMICS S120
Commissioning Manual
Order number: 6SL3097-4AF00-0?P0 Edition: 11/2009
/IH2/ SINAMICS S120
Commissioning Manual for CANopen
Order number: 6SL3097-4AA00-0?P0 Edition: 11/2009
/FH1/ SINAMICS S120
Function Manual Drive Functions
Order number: 6SL3097-4AB00-0?P0 Edition: 11/2009
/FHS/ SINAMICS S120
Function Manual, Safety Integrated
Order number: 6SL3097-4AR00-0?P0 Edition: 11/2009
/FH4/ SINAMICS/SIMOTION
Function Manual DCC Standard Blocks
Order number: 6SL3097-4AQ00-0?P0 Edition: 11/2009
/PB1/ SINAMICS/SIMOTION
Programming and Operating Manual DCC Editor Description
Order number: 6SL3097-4AN00-0?P0 Edition: 11/2009
/LH1/ SINAMICS S120/S150
List Manual
Order number: 6SL3097-4AP00-0?P0 Edition: 11/2009
/MA1/ SINAMICS/SINUMERIK
Machine Configuration Guidelines
Order number: 6FC5397-6CP10-0?A2 Edition: 10/2009
Bibliography
C-1494 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
/SH1/ SINAMICS S120 and SIMODRIVE 611
Control Cabinet Integration Guidelines
Order number: 6SL3097-0AT00-0?P1 Edition: 10/2009
/PFK7S/ SINAMICS 1FK7 Synchronous Motors
Configuration Manual
Order number: 6SN1197-0AD16-0?P1 Edition: 12/2006
/PFT6S/ SINAMICS 1FT6 Synchronous Motors
Configuration Manual
Order number: 6SN1197-0AD12-0?P0 Edition: 12/2004
/PFT7S/ SINAMICS Synchronous Motors 1FT7
Configuration Manual
Order number: 6SN1197-0AD13-0?P3 Edition: 10/2009
/APH4S/ SINAMICS Induction Motors 1PH4
Configuration Manual
Order number: 6SN1197-0AD64-0?P1 Edition: 08/2008
/APH7P/ SINAMICS Induction Motors 1PH7 (PM)
Production Machines Configuration Manual
Order number: 6SN1197-0AC71-0?P0 Edition: 05/2007
/APH7P/ SINAMICS Induction Motors 1PH7 (MT)
Machine Tools Configuration Manual
Order number: 6SN1197-0AD72-0?P0 Edition: 04/2009
/PPMS/ SINAMICS Hollow-Shaft Motors 1PM4/1PM6
Configuration Manual
Order number: 6SN1197-0AD23-0?P0 Edition: 04/2008
/PKTS/ SINAMICS Complete Torque Motors 1FW3
Configuration Manual
Order number: 6SN1197-0AD70-0?P4 Edition: 08/2009
/PMH2/ SINAMICS Hollow-Shaft Measuring System SIMAG H2
Configuration Manual
Order number: 6SN1197-0AB31-0?P7 Edition: 02/2008
/PH8S/ SINAMICS Synchronous/Induction Motors 1PH8
Configuration Manual
Order number: 6SN1197-0AD74-0?P0 Edition: 10/2009
Bibliography
C-1495
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
PROFIBUS documentation
/P1/ PROFIBUS-DP/DPV1 IEC 61158
Basics, tips, and tricks for users
Hüthig; Manfred Popp, 2nd edition
ISBN 3-7785-2781-9
/P2/ PROFIBUS-DP, Getting Started
PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V.; Manfred Popp
Order number: 4.071
/P3/ Distributed Layouts using PROFIBUS-DP
Architecture and Fundamentals, Configuration and Use of PROFIBUS-DP with
SIMATIC S7
SIEMENS; Publicis MCD Verlag; Josef Weigmann, Gerhard Kilian
Order number: A19100-L531-B714
ISBN 3-89578-074-X
/P4/ Manual for PROFIBUS Networks, SIEMENS
Order number: 6GK1970-5CA20-0BA0
/P5/ PROFIBUS and PROFINET, PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology
PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e. V.
Haid-und-Neu-Straße 7, D-76131 Karlsruhe, Germany
http://www.profibus.com
Order number: 3.172 Version 4.0 August 2005
/IKPI/ Industrial Communication for Automation and Drives
Catalog
Order number: E86060-K6710-A101-B4 Edition: 2005
/PDP/ PROFIBUS Installation Guidelines
Installation Guideline for PROFIBUS-FMS/DP
Installation and wiring recommendation for RS 485 Transmission
Order number 2.111 (German)
2.112 (English) Version 1.0
Bibliography
C-1496 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Documentation for Safety Equipment
/LV1/ Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution SIRIUS-SENTRON-SIVACON
Catalog
Order number: E86060-K1002-A101-A5 Edition: 2006
/MRL/ Directive 2006/42/EG of the European Parliament and Council
Machinery Directive
Bundesanzeiger-Verlags GmbH Edition: 2006
/SISH/ Safety Integrated
System Manual
Order number: 6ZB5000-0AA01-0BA1 5th edition
System Manual supplement to 5th edition
Order number: 6ZB5000-0AB01-0BA0
/SICD/ Safety Integrated
CD-ROM
Order number: E20001-F500-P210 Edition: 04/2008
Note
For more information about technical documentation for Safety Integrated, visit
the following address:
http://www.siemens.de/safety
The following list contains some of the safety-related documentation available.
D-1497© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Index D
Numbers
1020
Explanation of the symbols (Part 1), 2-877
1021
Explanation of the symbols (Part 2), 2-878
1022
Explanation of the symbols (Part 3), 2-879
1030
Handling BICO technology, 2-880
1510
CU320 input/output terminals, 2-882
1520
PROFIdrive, 2-883
1530
Internal control/status words, data sets,
2-884
1550
Setpoint channel, 2-885
1680
Vector control, encoder evaluations
(position, speed, temperature), 2-886
1690
Vector control, V/f control, 2-887
1700
Vector control, closed-loop speed control,
and generation of torque limits, 2-888
1710
Vector control, closed-loop current
control, 2-889
1750
Monitoring functions, faults, alarms, 2-890
1790
Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-891
1840
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-892
2120
CU320-2 digital inputs, isolated
(DI 0 to DI 3, DI 16, DI 17), 2-894
2121
CU320-2 digital inputs, isolated
(DI 4 to DI 7, DI 20, DI 21), 2-895
2130
CU320-2 digital inputs/outputs,
bidirectional (DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9),
2-896
2131
CU320-2 digital inputs/outputs,
bidirectional (DI/DO 10 to DI/DO 11),
2-897
2132
CU320-2 digital inputs/outputs,
bidirectional (DI/DO 12 to DI/DO 13),
2-898
2133
CU320-2 digital inputs/outputs,
bidirectional (DI/DO 14 to DI/DO 15),
2-899
2410
PROFIBUS (PB)/PROFINET (PN),
addresses and diagnostics, 2-902
2420
Standard telegrams and process data
(PZD), 2-903
2422
Manufacturer-specific telegrams and
process data (PZD), 2-904
2423
Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and
process data (PZD), 2-905
2425
STW1_BM control word metals sector
interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-906
2426
STW2_BM control word metals sector
interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-907
2428
ZSW1_BM status word metals sector
interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-908
2429
ZSW2_BM status word metals sector
interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-909
2439
PZD receive signals interconnection
profile-specific, 2-910
Index
D-1498 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2440
PZD receive signals interconnection
manufacturer-specific, 2-911
2441
STW1 control word interconnection
(p2038 = 2), 2-912
2442
STW1 control word interconnection
(p2038 = 0), 2-913
2444
STW2 control word interconnection
(p2038 = 0), 2-914
2449
PZD send signals interconnection profile-
specific, 2-915
2450
PZD send signals interconnection
manufacturer-specific, 2-916
2451
ZSW1 status word interconnection
(p2038 = 2), 2-917
2452
ZSW1 status word interconnection
(p2038 = 0), 2-918
2454
ZSW2 status word interconnection
(p2038 = 0), 2-919
2468
IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-920
2470
IF1 send telegram, free interconnection
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-921
2472
IF1 status words, free interconnection,
2-922
2481
IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-923
2483
IF1 send telegram, free interconnection
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-924
2485
IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-925
2487
IF2 send telegram, free interconnection
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-926
2489
IF2 status words, free interconnection,
2-927
2495
CU_STW1 control word 1 Control Unit
interconnection, 2-928
2496
CU_ZSW1 status word 1 Control Unit
interconnection, 2-929
2497
A_DIGITAL interconnection, 2-930
2498
E_DIGITAL interconnection, 2-931
2501
Control word, sequence control, 2-933
2503
Status word, sequence control, 2-934
2505
Control word, setpoint channel, 2-935
2520
Control word, speed controller, 2-936
2522
Status word, speed controller, 2-937
2526
Status word, closed loop control, 2-938
2530
Status word, closed-loop current control,
2-939
2534
Status word, monitoring functions 1,
2-940
2536
Status word, monitoring functions 2,
2-941
2537
Status word, monitoring functions 3,
2-942
2546
Control word, faults/alarms, 2-943
2548
Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2, 2-944
2610
Sequencer, 2-946
2634
Missing enable signals, line contactor
control, logic operation, 2-947
2701
Simple brake control (r0108.14 = 0),
2-949
2704
Extended brake control, zero speed
detection (r0108.14 = 1), 2-950
2707
Extended brake control, open/close brake
(r0108.14 = 1), 2-951
Index
D-1499
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
2711
Extended brake control, signal outputs
(r0108.14 = 1), 2-952
2800
Basic functions, parameter manager,
2-954
2802
Basic functions, monitoring and
faults/alarms, 2-955
2804
Basic functions, status words, 2-956
2810
Basic functions, STO (Safe Stop Off),
SS1(SafeStop1), 2-957
2814
Basic functions,
SBC (Safe Brake Control),
SBA (Safe Brake Adapter), 2-958
3010
Fixed speed setpoints, 2-960
3020
Motorized potentiometer, 2-961
3030
Main/additional setpoint, setpoint scaling,
jogging, 2-962
3040
Direction limiting and direction reversal,
2-963
3050
Skip frequency bands and speed limiting,
2-964
3060
Basic ramp-function generator, 2-965
3070
Extended ramp-function generator, 2-966
3080
Ramp-function generator selection, status
word, tracking--, 2-967
4704
Raw signal sensing, 2-969
4715
Actual speed value and pole pos. sens.,
motor enc. ASM/SM (encoder 1),
2-970
6030
Speed setpoint, droop, 2-972
6031
Pre-control balancing
reference/acceleration model
, 2-973
6040
Speed controller with/without encoder,
2-974
6050
Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation, 2-975
6060
Torque setpoint, 2-976
6220
Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min
controller, 2-977
6300
V/f characteristic and voltage boost, 2-978
6310
Resonance damping and slip
compensation, 2-979
6320
Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min
controller, 2-980
6490
Closed-loop speed control configuration,
2-981
6491
Flux control configuration, 2-982
6630
Upper/lower torque limit, 2-983
6640
Current/power/torque limits
, 2-984
6710
Current setpoint filter, 2-985
6714
Iq and Id controller, 2-986
6721
Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2), 2-987
6722
Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint
(ASM, p0300 = 1), 2-988
6723
Field weakening controller, flux controller
(ASM, p0300 = 1), 2-989
6724
Field weakening controller (PEM,
p0300 = 2), 2-990
6730
Interface to Motor Module (ASM,
p0300 = 1), 2-991
6731
Interface to the Motor Module (PEM,
p0300 = 2), 2-992
6799
Display signals, 2-993
7010
Friction characteristic, 2-995
7014
External armature short-circuit (EASC,
p0300 = 2xx), 2-996
Index
D-1500 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
7016
Internal armature short-circuit (IASC,
p0300 = 2xx), 2-997
7017
DC brake (p0300 = 1xx), 2-998
7020
Synchronization, 2-999
7950
Fixed values, binary selection
(r0108.16 = 1), 2-1001
7951
Fixed values, direct selection
(r0108.16 = 1 and p2216[D] = 1),
2-1002
7954
Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1),
2-1003
7958
Closed loop control (r0108.16 = 1),
2-1004
7960
DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1),
2-1005
8010
Speed messages 1, 2-1007
8011
Speed messages 2, 2-1008
8012
Torque messages, motor locked/stalled,
2-1009
8013
Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1), 2-1010
8014
Thermal monitoring, power unit, 2-1011
8016
Thermal monitoring, motor, 2-1012
8017
Thermal I2t motor model
(PEM, p0300 = 2xx), 2-1013
8060
Fault buffer, 2-1015
8065
Alarm buffer, 2-1016
8070
Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129), 2-1017
8075
Fault/alarm configuration, 2-1018
8134
Measuring sockets, 2-1019
8560
Command data sets (CDS), 2-1021
8565
Drive data sets (DDS), 2-1022
8570
Encoder data sets (EDS), 2-1023
8575
Motor data sets (MDS), 2-1024
8580
Power unit data sets (PDS), 2-1025
9100
TB30 digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3),
2-1027
9102
TB30 digital outputs, isolated
(DO 0 to DO 3), 2-1028
9104
TB30 analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 1), 2-1029
9106
TB30 analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1),
2-1030
9204
Receive telegram, free PDO mapping
(p8744 = 2), 2-1032
9206
Receive telegram, predefined connection
set (p8744 = 1), 2-1033
9208
Send telegram, free PDO mapping
(p8744 = 2), 2-1034
9210
Send telegram, predefined connection set
(p8744 = 1), 2-1035
9220
Control word CANopen, 2-1036
9226
Status word CANopen, 2-1037
9550
TM31 digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3),
2-1039
9552
TM31 digital inputs, isolated (DI 4 to DI 7),
2-1040
9556
TM31 digital relay outputs, isolated
(DO 0 to DO 1), 2-1041
9560
TM31 digital inputs/outputs,
bidirectional (DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9),
2-1042
9562
TM31 digital inputs/outputs,
bidirectional (DI/DO 10 to DI/DO 11),
2-1043
9566
TM31 analog input 0 (AI 0), 2-1044
Index
D-1501
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
9568
TM31 analog input 1 (AI 1), 2-1045
9572
TB31 analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1),
2-1046
9576
TM31 temperature evaluation KTY/PTC,
2-1047
9577
TM31 sensor monitoring KTY/PTC,
2-1048
9880
VSM analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 3), 2-1050
9886
VSM temperature evaluation, 2-1051
9887
VSM sensor evaluation KTY/PTC, 2-1052
9912
BOP20 control word interconnection,
2-1054
A
Access level (parameter), 1-18
Acknowledgment
Adjustable, 3-1063
Default, 3-1063
IMMEDIATE, 3-1059
POWER ON, 3-1059
PULSE INHIBIT, 3-1059
Active (parameter, C1(x), C2(x), U, T), 1-17
Address
PROFIBUS, 2-902
PROFINET, 2-902
Technical support, Preface-8
Adjustable parameter, 1-13
Alarm
Cause, 3-1063
Display, 3-1056
Drive object, 3-1062
Explanation of list, 3-1061
Fault location, 3-1062
General information, 3-1056
How to distinguish an alarm from a fault,
3-1056
List of all alarms, 3-1066
Message value, 3-1062
Name, 3-1062
Number, 3-1061
Number range, 3-1066
Remedy, 3-1063
Alarm buffer, 2-1014
Alarm value, 3-1063
Analog inputs
Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1026
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1038
Analog outputs
Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1026
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1038
ASCII table, A-1446
Axxxx, 3-1061
B
Basic Operator Panel (BOP), 2-1053
BI, Binector Input, 1-14
Bibliography, C-1491
BICO technology, 2-880
Binector
Input (BI), 1-14
Output (BO), 1-14
Bit array (parameter), 1-25
BO, Binector Output, 1-14
Brake control
Extended, 2-948
Simple, 2-948
C
C1(x) - Status commissioning device, 1-17
C2(x) - Status commissioning drive, 1-17
Calculated (parameter), 1-18
Catalogs, C-1491
CDS (Command Data Set), 1-20, 2-1020,
2-1021
Changeable (parameter, C1(x), C2(x), U, T),
1-17
CI, Connector Input, 1-14
Closed loop control
Technology controller, 2-1004
Vector, 2-971
Closed-loop speed control
Vector, 2-971
CO, Connector Output, 1-14
CO/BO, Connector/Binector Output, 1-14
Command data sets, 2-1020
Communication
CANopen, 2-1031
Communication Board CAN 10 (CBC10),
2-1031
Configuring messages, 2-1014
Connector
Input (CI), 1-14
Output (CO), 1-14
Content
Table of contents, Content-9
Index
D-1502 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2)
Digital inputs, 2-893
Digital inputs/outputs, 2-893
Control words, 2-900
Internal, 2-932
Standard telegrams, 2-900
Converter
Binector/Connector, 2-922, 2-927
Connector/Binector, 2-920, 2-923, 2-925
Cxxxxx, 3-1061
D
Data record, 1-20
Data set, 1-20
Command data set, CDS, 1-20
Drive data set, DDS, 1-20
Encoder data set, EDS, 1-20
Motor data set, MDS, 1-20
Power unit data set, PDS, 1-20
Data sets, 2-1020
Command data set, 1-20
Drive data set, 1-20
Encoder data set, 1-20
Motor data set, 1-20
Power unit data set, 1-20
Data type (parameter, signal source), 1-19
DCBRAKE, 3-1058
DDS (Drive Data Set), 1-20, 2-1020, 2-1022
Dependency (parameter), 1-26
Description (parameter), 1-25
Digital inputs
Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-893
Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1026
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1038
Digital inputs/outputs
Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-893
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1038
Digital outputs
Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-893
Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1026
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1038
Direction of rotation limiting, 2-959
Direction reversal, 2-959
Directory
ASCII table, A-1446
Bibliography, C-1491
Encoder code, A-1480
List of abbreviations, B-1483
Motor code, A-1447
Table of contents, function diagrams,
2-870
Display
Alarms, 3-1056
Faults, 3-1056
Display parameter, 1-13
DO, Drive Object, 1-15
Drive data sets, 2-1020
Drive object, 1-15
DSC (Dynamic Servo Control), 2-959
E
EDS (Encoder Data Set), 1-20, 2-1020,
2-1023
ENCODER, 3-1058
Encoder code, A-1480
Encoder data sets, 2-1020
Encoder evaluation, 2-968
Expert list, 1-24
Explanations
about function diagrams, 2-876
F
Factory setting, 1-24
Fault
Acknowledgment, 3-1059, 3-1063
Cause, 3-1063
Display, 3-1056
Drive object, 3-1062
Explanation of list, 3-1061
Fault location, 3-1062
Fault reaction, 3-1057, 3-1062
General information, 3-1056
How to distinguish a fault from an alarm,
3-1056
List of all faults, 3-1066
Message value, 3-1062
Name, 3-1062
Number, 3-1061
Number range, 3-1066
Remedy, 3-1063
Saving on POWER OFF, 3-1060
Fault buffer, 2-1014
Saving on POWER OFF, 3-1060
Structure, 2-1015
Fault value, 3-1063
Fixed speed setpoints, 2-959
Fixed values, 2-878, 2-1001, 2-1002
Free interconnection via BICO, 2-900
Free interconnection, status words, 2-922,
2-927
Friction characteristic, 2-995
Function (parameter), 1-25
Index
D-1503
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Function diagrams Basic Operator Panel 20
(BOP20)
Control word BOP20 interconnection,
2-1054
Function diagrams CU320-2 input/output
terminals
Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3, DI 16,
DI 17), 2-894
Digital inputs, isolated (DI 4 to DI 7, DI 20,
DI\21), 2-895
Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional
(DI/DO 10 to DI/DO 11), 2-897
Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional
(DI/DO 12 to DI/DO 13), 2-898
Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional
(DI/DO 14 to DI/DO 15), 2-899
Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional
(DI/DO8toDI/DO9), 2-896
Function diagrams, brake control
Extended brake control, open/close brake
(r0108.14 = 1), 2-951
Extended brake control, signal outputs
(r0108.14 = 1), 2-952
Extended brake control, zero speed
detection (r0108.14 = 1), 2-950
Simple brake control (r0108.14 = 0),
2-949
Function diagrams, Communication Board
CAN
Control word CANopen, 2-1036
Receive telegram, free PDO mapping
(p8744 = 2), 2-1032
Receive telegram, predefined connection
set (p8744 = 1), 2-1033
Send telegram, free PDO mapping
(p8744 = 2), 2-1034
Send telegram, predefined connection set
(p8744 = 1), 2-1035
Status word CANopen, 2-1037
Function diagrams, data sets
Command data sets (CDS), 2-1021
Drive data sets (DDS), 2-1022
Encoder data sets (EDS), 2-1023
Motor data sets (MDS), 2-1024
Power unit data sets (PDS), 2-1025
Function diagrams, diagnostics
Alarm buffer, 2-1016
Fault buffer, 2-1015
Fault/alarm configuration, 2-1018
Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129), 2-1017
Measuring sockets, 2-1019
Function diagrams, encoder evaluation
Actual speed value and pole pos. sens.,
motor enc. ASM/SM (encoder 1),
2-970
Raw signal sensing, 2-969
Function diagrams, explanations
Explanation of the symbols (Part 1), 2-877
Explanation of the symbols (Part 2), 2-878
Explanation of the symbols (Part 3), 2-879
Handling BICO technology, 2-880
Function diagrams, internal control/status
words
Control word, faults/alarms, 2-943
Control word, sequence control, 2-933
Control word, setpoint channel, 2-935
Control word, speed controller, 2-936
Status word, closed loop control, 2-938
Status word, closed-loop current control,
2-939
Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2, 2-944
Status word, monitoring functions 1,
2-940
Status word, monitoring functions 2,
2-941
Status word, monitoring functions 3,
2-942
Status word, sequence control, 2-934
Status word, speed controller, 2-937
Function diagrams, overviews
CU320 input/output terminals, 2-882
Internal control/status words, data sets,
2-884
Monitoring functions, faults, alarms, 2-890
PROFIdrive, 2-883
Setpoint channel, 2-885
Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-891
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-892
Vector control, closed-loop current
control, 2-889
Vector control, closed-loop speed control,
and generation of torque limits, 2-888
Vector control, encoder evaluations
(position, speed, temperature), 2-886
Vector control, V/f control, 2-887
Index
D-1504 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Function diagrams, PROFIdrive
A_DIGITAL interconnection, 2-930
CU_STW1 control word 1 Control Unit
interconnection, 2-928
CU_ZSW1 status word 1 Control Unit
interconnection, 2-929
E_DIGITAL interconnection, 2-931
IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-920, 2-923
IF1 send telegram, free interconnection
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-921, 2-924
IF1 status words, free interconnection,
2-922
IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-925
IF2 send telegram, free interconnection
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-926
IF2 status words, free interconnection,
2-927
Manufacturer-specific telegrams and
process data (PZD), 2-904
Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and
process data (PZD), 2-905
PROFIBUS (PB)/PROFINET (PN),
addresses and diagnostics, 2-902
PZD receive signals interconnection
manufacturer-specific, 2-911
PZD receive signals interconnection
profile-specific, 2-910
PZD send signals interconnection
manufacturer-specific, 2-916
PZD send signals interconnection profile-
specific, 2-915
Standard telegrams and process data
(PZD), 2-903
STW1 control word interconnection
(p2038 = 0), 2-913
STW1 control word interconnection
(p2038 = 2), 2-912
STW1_BM control word metals sector
interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-906
STW2 control word interconnection
(p2038 = 0), 2-914
STW2_BM control word metals sector
interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-907
ZSW1 status word interconnection
(p2038 = 0), 2-918
ZSW1 status word interconnection
(p2038 = 2), 2-917
ZSW1_BM status word metals sector
interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-908
ZSW2 status word interconnection
(p2038 = 0), 2-919
ZSW2_BM status word metals sector
interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-909
Function diagrams, Safety Integrated
Basic functions, monitoring and
faults/alarms, 2-955
Basic functions, parameter manager,
2-954
Basic functions,
SBC (Safe Brake Control),,
SBA (Safe Brake Adapter), 2-958
Basic functions, status words, 2-956
Basic functions, STO (Safe Stop Off),
SS1(SafeStop1), 2-957
Function diagrams, sequence control
Missing enable signals, line contactor
control, logic operation, 2-947
Sequencer, 2-946
Function diagrams, setpoint channel
Direction limiting and direction reversal,
2-963
Fixed speed setpoints, 2-960
Main/additional setpoint, setpoint scaling,
jogging, 2-962
Motorized potentiometer, 2-961
Ramp-function generator (basic), 2-965
Ramp-function generator (extended),
2-966
Ramp-function generator selection, status
word, tracking--, 2-967
Skip frequency bands and speed limiting,
2-964
Function diagrams, signals and monitoring
functions
Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1), 2-1010
Speed messages 1, 2-1007
Speed messages 2, 2-1008
Thermal I2t motor model
(PEM, p0300 = 2xx), 2-1013
Thermal monitoring, motor, 2-1012
Thermal monitoring, power unit, 2-1011
Torque messages, motor locked/stalled,
2-1009
Index
D-1505
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Function diagrams, technology controller
Closed loop control (r0108.16 = 1),
2-1004
DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1),
2-1005
Fixed values, binary selection
(r0108.16 = 1), 2-1001
Fixed values, direct selection
(r0108.16 = 1 and p2216[D] = 1),
2-1002
Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1),
2-1003
Function diagrams, technology functions
DC brake (p0300 = 1xx), 2-998
External armature short-circuit (EASC,
p0300 = 2xx), 2-996
Friction characteristic, 2-995
Internal armature short-circuit (IASC,
p0300 = 2xx), 2-997
Synchronization, 2-999
Function diagrams, Terminal Board 30
(TB30)
Analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 1), 2-1029
Analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1), 2-1030
Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3),
2-1027
Digital outputs, isolated (DO 0 to DO 3),
2-1028
Function diagrams, Terminal Module 31
(TM31)
Analog input 0 (AI 0), 2-1044
Analog input 1 (AI 1), 2-1045
Analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1), 2-1046
Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3),
2-1039
Digital inputs, isolated (DI 4 to DI 7),
2-1040
Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional
(DI/DO 10 to DI/DO 11), 2-1043
Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional
(DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9), 2-1042
Digital relay outputs, isolated
(DO 0 to DO 1), 2-1041
Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC, 2-1048
Temperature evaluation KTY/PTC,
2-1047
Function diagrams, vector control
Closed-loop speed control configuration,
2-981
Current setpoint filter, 2-985
Current/power/torque limits
, 2-984
Display signals, 2-993
Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint
(ASM, p0300 = 1), 2-988
Field weakening controller (PEM,
p0300 = 2), 2-990
Field weakening controller, flux controller
(ASM, p0300 = 1), 2-989
Flux control configuration, 2-982
Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2), 2-987
Interface to Motor Module (ASM,
p0300 = 1), 2-991
Interface to the Motor Module (PEM,
p0300 = 2), 2-992
Iq and Id controller, 2-986
Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation, 2-975
Pre-control balancing
reference/acceleration model
, 2-973
Resonance damping and
slip compensation, 2-979
Speed controller with/without encoder,
2-974
Speed setpoint, droop, 2-972
Torque setpoint, 2-976
Upper/lower torque limit, 2-983
V/f characteristic and voltage boost, 2-978
Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min
controller, 2-977, 2-980
Function diagrams, Voltage Sensing Module
(VSM)
Analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 3), 2-1050
Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC, 2-1052
Temperature evaluation, 2-1051
Function module, 1-15
Fxxxx, 3-1061
Index
D-1506 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
G
General information
about faults and alarms, 3-1056
about function diagrams, 2-876
About parameters, 1-12
H
Holding brake, 2-948
Hotline, Preface-8
I
IASC, 3-1058
Index
Factory setting, 1-25
Parameter, 1-13, 1-25
Input terminals
Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-893
Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1026
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1038
Internal control/status words, 2-932
J
Jog, 2-959, 2-962
L
Line contactor control, 2-947
Linked parameter, 1-13
List
Abbreviations, B-1483
ASCII table, A-1446
Encoder code, A-1480
Faults and alarms, 3-1066
Message ranges, 3-1066
Motor code, A-1447
Parameter ranges, 1-27
Parameters for command data sets, 1-853
Parameters for drive data sets, 1-855
Parameters for encoder data sets, 1-862
Parameters for motor data sets, 1-864
Parameters for power unit data sets,
1-867
Parameters, all, 1-29
References, C-1491
List of abbreviations, B-1483
Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1), 2-1006
M
Main/supplementary setpoint, 2-959
Manufacturer-specific telegrams, 2-900
MDS (Motor Data Set), 1-20, 2-1020, 2-1024
Measuring sockets, 2-1014
Message buffer, 2-1014
Message value, 3-1062
Messages, 2-1006
Missing enables
Actuator, 2-947
Monitoring functions, 2-1006
Motor code, A-1447
Motor data sets, 2-1020
Motor holding brake, 2-948
Motorized potentiometer, 2-959, 2-1003
N
Name
Alarm, 3-1062
Fault, 3-1062
Parameter, 1-14
Normalizing, 1-24
Not for motor type, 1-24
Notes
Hotline, Preface-8
Technical support, Preface-8
Number
Alarm, 3-1061
Fault, 3-1061
Parameter, 1-13
Number range
Alarms, 3-1066
Faults, 3-1066
Parameter, 1-27
O
Object, 1-15
OFF1, 3-1057
OFF2, 3-1057
OFF3, 3-1058
Output terminals
Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-893
Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1026
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1038
Index
D-1507
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
P
P group (parameter), 1-21
Parameter
Access level, 1-18
Calculated, 1-18
Changeable in, 1-17
Data type, 1-19
Description, 1-25
Dynamic index, 1-20
Expert list, 1-24
Full name, 1-14
Function, 1-25
Index, 1-13, 1-25
Linked parameter, 1-13
List of all parameters, 1-29
List of parameters for
command data sets, 1-853
List of parameters for
drive data sets, 1-855
List of parameters for
encoder data sets, 1-862
List of parameters for
motor data sets, 1-864
List of parameters for
power unit data sets, 1-867
Name, 1-14
Normalizing, 1-24
Not for motor type, 1-24
Number, 1-13
Number range, 1-27
P group, 1-21
Safety notices, 1-26
Short name, 1-14
Unit, 1-21
Unit group, 1-21
Unit selection, 1-21
Values, 1-25
Password for access level 4, 1-18
PDS (Power Unit Data Set), 1-20, 2-1020,
2-1025
PID controller (p0108.16 = 1), 2-1000
Power unit data sets, 2-1020
Process data, 2-900
PROFIdrive, 2-900
pxxxx, 1-13
R
Ramp-function generator, 2-959
Reaction to faults, 3-1057
Relay outputs, 2-1038
Resetting faults, 3-1063
rxxxx, 1-13
S
Safety Integrated
Basic functions, 2-953
Extended functions, 2-953
Safety notices (parameter), 1-26
Search tools for manual, Preface-7
Sequence control, 2-945
Servo control
Encoder evaluation, 2-968
Setpoint channel, 2-959
Signal path in function diagrams, 2-877
Signals, 2-1006
Simple/extended braking control, 2-948
Skip frequency bands, 2-959
Speed messages, 2-1006
Status words
Internal, 2-932
Standard telegrams, 2-900
STOP1, 3-1058
STOP2, 3-1058
Support, Preface-8
Support Request, Preface-8
Synchronization, 2-999
T
T - Ready state, 1-17
Target group, Preface-6
Technical support, Preface-8
Technology controller (p0108.16 = 1), 2-1000
Technology functions, 2-994
Telegrams, 2-900
Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
Analog inputs/outputs, 2-1026
Digital inputs/outputs, 2-1026
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1038
Analog inputs/outputs, 2-1038
Digital inputs/outputs, 2-1038
Relay outputs, 2-1038
Terminals
Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-893
Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1026
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1038
Thermal monitoring, 2-1006
Torque messages, 2-1006
Triggering on messages (r2129), 2-1014
Index
D-1508 © Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
U
U - Run state, 1-17
Unit (parameter), 1-21
Usage phases, Preface-6
V
V/f control
Vector, 2-978
Values (parameter), 1-25
Vector control
Closed-loop speed control configuration,
2-981
Current setpoint filter, 2-985
Droop, 2-972
Encoder evaluation, 2-968
Field weakening characteristic, Id
setpoint, 2-988
Flux control, 2-982
Iq and Id controller, 2-986
Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation, 2-975
Resonance damping and slip
compensation, 2-979
Speed controller with/without encoder,
2-974
Table of contents, 2-971
Torque setpoint, 2-976
V/f characteristic, 2-978
Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min
controller, 2-980
Version
List of all parameters, 1-29
List of faults and alarms, 3-1066
List of parameters for
command data sets, 1-853
List of parameters for
drive data sets, 1-855
List of parameters for
encoder data sets, 1-862
List of parameters for
motor data sets, 1-864
List of parameters for
power unit data sets, 1-867
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)
Analog inputs, 2-1049
Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC, 2-1049
Temperature evaluation, 2-1049
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Drive Technologies
Large Drives
Postfach 4743
90025 NUREMBERG
GERMANY
Subject to change without prior notice
© Siemens AG 2009
www.siemens.com/automation